JP2023126515A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a first condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means can at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is a winning result, depending on the content of the variable performance that is executed. be.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-345901

In gaming machines such as those described above, it is desired to further improve the interest of gaming.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a first ball entering means into which a game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means; and an acquisition means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means a storage means, and a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is means capable of generating a specific gaming state based on a specific determination result; and a game ball that can enter the game ball fired by the ejecting means, which is different from the first ball entering means. a second ball entry means; a first position that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means; and a game ball that enters the second ball entry means from the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means to the second position; and a displacement control means capable of at least executing Executing the first displacement control based on the satisfaction of a condition, and based on the establishment of a second condition that can be satisfied in a situation where the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control. The gaming machine is configured to execute the second displacement control using the first ball entering means, and the gaming machine is configured to provide a predetermined value to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means. a first aspect based on the execution of the determination by the determining means, a second aspect based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a predetermined entry into the second ball entering means. The third mode based on a sphere is configured such that at least a third mode based on a sphere can occur.

According to the game machine of the present invention, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a first ball entering means into which a game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and the first ball entering means an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball; and a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means; a determining means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is met, and the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result. a means capable of generating a specific game state based on the occurrence of a specific game state; and a second ball entering means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter, and which is different from the first ball entering means. a first position where it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means; and a first position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means than the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; and a displacement means located at the first position. a second displacement control for displacing the player to the second position; and a displacement control means capable of executing at least The first displacement control is executed based on the first displacement control, and the second displacement control is performed based on a second condition that can be satisfied in a situation where the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control. The gaming machine is configured to execute control, and the gaming machine is configured to award a predetermined value to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entry means. , a first mode based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means. The configuration is configured such that at least the following aspects can occur.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the flow of effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during probability change in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol does not fluctuate after the first special symbol starts fluctuating in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol hits a small hit during RUSH in the mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating after the first special symbol starts fluctuating in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol stops fluctuating while the first special symbol is fluctuating. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state where the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (a) is a diagram showing a forgetting card reminder screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the forgetting card reminder screen in the first embodiment. be. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win type selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general figure fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the back surface E. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing a small winning operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the win-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing small hit related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 12 is a flowchart showing a remaining number of times updating process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing temporary stop related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation restart process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing various counter updating processes executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 3 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing rush entry command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when jackpot C is won in a variable probability state in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability change state is set in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating when the winning symbol of the first special symbol is stopped in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol stops while the winning symbol of the first special symbol in the form stops. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the loss type selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of two tables for time saving and certainty variation. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol determination period setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing during fixed time performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol movement stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol determination period setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the remaining number of times update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing temporary stop related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing restart processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing symbol confirmation related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing various counter updating processes 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability change state is set in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first change after the jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third fluctuation after the jackpot when the third fluctuation after the jackpot is a jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third fluctuation after the jackpot. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the second fluctuation after the jackpot when winning the special drawing 1 small hit. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number 3 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win type selection 3 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable pattern selection 3 table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation A table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable C table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable D table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of three tables for potential confirmation. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation effect selection table. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for variable probability performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a special drawing jackpot is won during the variable probability state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow when the time is shortened during the variable probability state. This is a timing chart shown in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of RUSH entering due to the number of time reductions reached in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing that the RUSH is in the midst of fluctuations in special chart 1 jackpot in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display contents to be notified. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when winning a falling lottery during a probability state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when winning a falling lottery during a probability state in the fourth embodiment. 2 is a diagram showing the display screen when winning the jackpot in 2. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of display contents during super RUSH in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a notification selection table. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing game state update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing state command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a potential mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the falling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed small hit related processing 4 executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall notification process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small winnings. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable prize winning device for small winnings. It is an operation diagram of the small winning variable winning device seen from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case where the special symbol 1 jackpot is won during the probability variable state in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the time is shortened during the probability variable state in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content when a small win is won in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content during a small win game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small winning game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small winning game. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the vehicle does not pass. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the small winning ends, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the potential state (invincible mode). FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows fall gate passing processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing state command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the composition of ROM of a main control device in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot state flag, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win state flag. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation condition determination process performed by MPU in a main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot interruption process performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded the flow path unit in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state). ) is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow when (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state). ) is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow when (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second symbol hits during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the second symbol hits during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters the ball. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a loss during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when a ball is flowing down a delay path during special figure 2 fluctuation in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the ball is flowing down the normal path during the special figure 2 variation during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when V passes during a small winning game in the form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when V is not passed during a small winning game in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when time saving state A is set. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern 7 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario 7 table. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when passing the small winning V in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a delay path state flag. It is a flowchart which shows timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process performed by MPU in a main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit start processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time-saving production related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process at the time of the end of a common map performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing a case where the opening/closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a plan view schematically showing a case where an opening/closing door 365Of is in a closed state. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the flow of a ball to a 2nd attacker. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the flow of the ball to the 2nd ball entry port. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters a second ball entrance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the special figure 2 game screen. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when a special figure 2 small hit is won in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when a special figure 2 small hit is won in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when winning. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the special figure 2 game during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the end of the final special figure variation during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of time. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 8 table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st winning type selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario 8 table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario type in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number 8 table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection 8 table in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of eight tables for normal/potential definite use in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of eight tables for time saving/probable variable use in the eighth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in an eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the number-of-pending ball related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process at the time of a decrease performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving termination process performed by MPU in a main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing game state update processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the stop screen of the jackpot symbol in the 10th embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content during the symbol confirmation period in the jackpot C in the 10th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a tenth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table of 10; It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a specific winning motion pattern table. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific ball entry processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the content of a performance in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a high probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a low probability second winning random number table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage process 11 performed by MPU in a main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a special drawing 2 small hit is won during a probability state in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the special drawing 2 is won during the probability state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot content suggestion production in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance result of a jackpot content suggestion production in a modification of the fourth embodiment. This is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a sound lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the sound lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a suggestion mode selection table in a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a suggestion effect selection table in a modification of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit related processing 11 executed by MPU in a sound ramp control device in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the ending performance executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability change state and time saving state before the river breakthrough effect is executed in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough performance in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough performance in the eleventh embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the river is successfully broken through and the continuation of the chance zone is notified. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river is successfully breached in the river breakthrough performance and the transition to the potential state (RUSH) is notified. (b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river breakthrough effect fails and the transition to the normal state is notified. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the gaming state and the transition of performance mode in the case where the chance zone is set after the end of the jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the small winning effect of the second special symbol is being executed, which suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a jackpot. It is a figure showing an example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability change table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning effect selection table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning sound selection table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing gaming state update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit related processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 12 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 12th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the number of probability changes in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it transitions to a normal state by making it pass. (a) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the preparation state after transitioning to the consecutive game mode and before becoming able to actually acquire prize balls in the twelfth embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing a game ball entering the second ball entrance in the preparation state in the twelfth embodiment and winning a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a 3-symbol display device 81. FIG. (a) In the twelfth embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is released at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode, and the second special symbol is drawn twice in a row during the preparation mode. It is a diagram showing the change over time in the performance mode when the second special symbol is a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol. It is a diagram showing a change over time in the performance mode when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition to is the lottery result corresponding to "Jackpot D12". (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variable probability/probability start table in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving start table in the twelfth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal start table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RUSH table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 12th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 13 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variable probability/probability start table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a modification of the 13th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a falling path of a game ball in a state where the electric accessory is closed in a modification of the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a downstream path of the game ball in a modified example of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the falling path of the game ball in the state where the object is opened. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 14th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation A table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation B table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 15th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the falling path of the game ball in the time saving state in the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the falling path of the game ball in the potential state in the 15th embodiment. It is a diagram. In the 15th embodiment, it is a diagram showing the gaming state and the transition of the performance mode when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability variable state. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of variation per special symbol in a probability variable state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the number of time reductions has passed during the jackpot fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table in 15th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table in the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability change table in the 15th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the river breakthrough effect is started in a modification of the eleventh embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a 16th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and performance mode of a series of performances in the 16th embodiment. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the performance mode of the final variation performance in the 16th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode of a general figure fluctuation performance. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a production mode in which a normal symbol fluctuation production is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a production mode in which a normal pattern fluctuation production is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the common symbol winning screen displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time of Toku 2 winning during Toku 1 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time of Toku 2 winning in the Toku 1 fluctuation. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode of a special 2 fluctuation performance (challenge game) displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode when a small hit is won with the special 2 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a presentation mode when a jackpot is won during a small win displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment at the time of special 2 winning while special 1 is not changing; It is a figure showing an example of the performance mode when a small hit is won with the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time point when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the game per common symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the production mode in the 16th embodiment It is a figure showing an example of the effect mode when a ball does not enter a second winning hole during a normal symbol winning game displayed on a third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment at the time when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning game, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the effect mode when a ball does not enter a V winning hole during a small winning game displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during a time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the effect mode of the time saving final change displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a production mode of the first half production of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode of the first half production of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance mode of the second half of the time saving final variation displayed on the display device. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance mode showing the performance result of the second half of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment; It is a diagram showing an example of the result display mode of the time saving final variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the presentation mode at the time of special 2 winning after the end of the time reduction displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when the special 2 hit is displayed on the third symbol display device in the 16th embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a result display mode of the time-saving final variation effect displayed on the 3-symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the presentation aspect which shows the end of a time-saving state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 16th embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first random number 16 table in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol one random number 16 table in the sixteenth embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special pattern 2 random number 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number 16 table per normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 1st winning type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 16 table for special drawing 1 jackpot type selection in the 16th embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special drawing 2 jackpot type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 16 table for selecting types per ordinary figure in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the release of electric accessories based on the type per ordinary figure and the game state. It is a diagram showing the contents of the operation. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 16 small winning type selection tables in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 16 special drawing 1 small winning type selection tables in the 16th embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 small winning type selection 16 table in the 16th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general pattern variation pattern selection table in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 16 variation pattern tables in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 16 normal variation pattern tables in the 16th embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the variation pattern 16 table for time saving which is a part of variation pattern selection table in 16th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 16 variation pattern selection tables in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 16 variation pattern selection tables for final time saving in the 16th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 16 performed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 16 performed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 16 performed by MPU in a main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general pattern pre-reading process performed by MPU in the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passing processing 16 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passing processing 16 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning situation determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command process 16 executed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process 16 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 16th embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing small win related command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small win related command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal small hit processing to be executed. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning process for a series of effects performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing stop command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 16 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for ordinary figures performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning variation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 16 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the series of effect update processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the update process during the game per normal figure executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the update process in the game in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing update processing during a small winning game executed by the MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the production mode during the time saving final variation in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of a ROM of a main control device in a seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the 17 table for selecting the type per normal figure in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the electric role based on the type per normal figure and the gaming state in the 17th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an object opening operation. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 17 table in the seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a general pattern fluctuation pattern table in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a general pattern fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the regular figure fluctuation pattern for time saving B in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 17 for common figures performed by MPU in the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in an 18th embodiment. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarging the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 18th embodiment. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarging the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 18th embodiment. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of performance of a pachinko machine in the 18th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the 18th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 18 tables of variation patterns in the 18th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing 18 tables of normal variation patterns in the 18th embodiment. be. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general pattern variation pattern selection 18 table in the 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing stop command processing 18 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 18 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the set effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general map set production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 18 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 18th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the setting method of a series of effects in an 18th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a common map scenario table in the nineteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 2 per common figure is set as a series of performance scenarios in a 19th embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 4 per common figure is set as a series of performance scenarios in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows prize information command processing 19 executed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 19th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the series performance discrimination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process 19 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure related command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process 19 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process during constant monitoring performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process 19 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the series performance prediction setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 19th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final variation effect table in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final winning table in the 20th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final table for disassembly in the 20th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the final performance variable setting table in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the winning setting table in the 20th embodiment. . FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a setting table for deviation in the twentieth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 20 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 20 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final prize winning process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process 20 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows final variation effect update processing 20 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 20th embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a 21st embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a right-hit notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the right-hitting notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 21st embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the right hit notification screen in the 2nd notification mode displayed on a symbol display device. It is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a 22nd embodiment. It is a figure showing typically the flow of performance of the Pachinko machine in a 22nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 23rd embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the back mode in which the expectation level of the probability change state is low among the back modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with a high expectation degree of probability change state among the back modes displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in 23rd Embodiment. Among the back modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, an example of the display mode of the back mode in which the continuation of the variable probability state is determined at least until all the reserved balls at the start of fluctuation are exhausted is shown. It is a diagram. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of the start of probability change continuation suggestion performance displayed on a 3rd pattern display device in a 23rd embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation level in the probability change continuation suggestion performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment; It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a highly anticipated attack pattern in the probability change continuation suggestion performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the probability variable jackpot in the 23rd embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the press stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution of the third symbol in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when a player performs a first operation (press) on a PUSH button during execution of a press stop effect displayed on a display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge inciting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge inciting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment. In the symbol display device, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge performance that is executed after the chance charge symbol is stopped. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed, which is displayed on the display device. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode during execution of the variable display performance in which the press stop performance is set in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating an example of a display mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the output mode of audio while the PUSH button is being repeatedly pressed during execution of the interrupt repeated press effect in the 23rd embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the execution timing of the repeated hit operation and the subtracted number of monsters during execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect in the mode. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the performance mode of a variable display performance in which an interrupt continuous hit performance is set in the twenty-third embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the pending batch change effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 23rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the pending batch change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 23rd embodiment. be. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in a twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the twenty-third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal winning random number 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the falling lottery table in the twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the special figure 1 jackpot 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation content of the 23 table for special drawing 2 jackpot in the 23rd embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern selection 23 table in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a regular table. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a probability variation/time saving table that constitutes a variation pattern selection 23 table in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment. be. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a back mode lottery table in a twenty-third embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the pending change lottery table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the change point calculation table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the batch change lottery table in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the chance charge lottery table in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a figure showing typically the stipulation contents of the continuation suggestion production selection table in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of an interrupt consecutive hit lottery table in a twenty-third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the audio output device in a 23rd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 23 performed by MPU in the main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 23 performed by MPU in a main control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the winning process 23 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows abnormality processing 23 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 23 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the press stop production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption repeated hit production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the batch change production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows charge consumption processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a continuous hit operation detection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a change operation detection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 23 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning information command processing 23 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation notice lottery process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the win related command process 23 executed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 23 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process 23 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation suggestion production setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode selection processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 23rd embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing commands executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous sound command process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-third embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the long-press performance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 24th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode when a long press is performed continuously during the long press effect in the 24th embodiment, and (b) FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode when the press is interrupted in the middle of the long press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the correspondence between the transition of the gauge number and the elapsed time during the long press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion production in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the sound mode and the display mode during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion production in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between an audio mode and a display mode when the number of holds is 0 during execution of a continuation suggestion performance. In the 24th embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the audio mode and the display mode in the case of winning a jackpot during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion performance. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 23 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the set suggestion effect table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a playback speed selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 24th embodiment. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 24th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 24 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long-press effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long press execution process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the long-press start process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing pseudo fluctuation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation effect setting process 24 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process during suggestion performance performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in 24th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode when the hold count becomes 0 during execution of the continuation suggestion performance in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth embodiment during the continuous hit standby period, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during a continuous hit period. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the internal value displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth embodiment reaches the upper limit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the internal value displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth embodiment is FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the difference between a display value displayed on a display device and an internal value is 3 or more. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display device in a 25th embodiment after the continuous hit period has passed. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of consecutive hit effects in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a performance pattern when one scenario is set during continuous hit performance in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing another performance pattern when setting one scenario during continuous hit performance in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing another performance pattern when setting two scenarios during continuous hit performance in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM of the audio lamp control device in a 25th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an internal scenario table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the internal scenario table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a press lottery table set in the ROM. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the upper limit selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the upper limit selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a difference upper limit value selection table set in a ROM of the device. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound ramp control device in a 25th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a continuous hit effect setting flag set in the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 25 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd consecutive hit production process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd continuous hit production process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process 25 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous hit operation detection process 25 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows production mode selection processing 25 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 25th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the basic performance mode selection process 25 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 25th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the first operation validity period is set as the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment; b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second operation valid period is set, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the first operation validity period is set as the jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th embodiment; b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second operation valid period is set, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing a performance pattern when one scenario is set during continuous hit performance in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM of the audio lamp control device in a 26th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the transition timer start timing table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the transition timer start timing table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a performance number selection table set in the ROM of the control device. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 26 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit production process 26 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd consecutive hit production process 26 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous hit operation detection process 26 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related command process 26 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect end setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 26th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a variable invalidation period in a continuous hit performance displayed on a third symbol display device. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the contents of various performances executed in response to operations on the operating means during a continuous hit performance in which an operation validity period is set in the twenty-seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 27th embodiment, and (b) is a button display mode selection set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 27th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a table. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 27th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 27 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer process during a performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a continuous hit operation detection process 27 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal operation process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation process during a performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 28th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode during the potential state special pattern 1 small hit fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 28th embodiment, It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the invincible mode and during the special chart 2 disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation in the 28th embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after the number of special symbol fluctuations in the potential state displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-eighth embodiment exceeds 50 times. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a first random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th embodiment. FIG. 12(c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the small hit random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a jackpot type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing typically the regulation contents of the small hit type selection 28 table set in ROM of the main control device in a 28th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 28 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern selection 28 table in the 28th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the 1st latent probability table which constitutes, (c) is a figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the 2nd potential probability table which constitutes the variation pattern selection 28 table in 28th Embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound ramp control device in a 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 off fluctuation|variation process 28 performed by MPU in the main control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off stop processing 28 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the small winning process 28 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 28th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 28 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 28 for special figure 1 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 28 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 potential-probability process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process 28 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 28th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing various counter updating processes 28 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit related processing 28 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 28th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 29th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 29 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern selection 29 table in the 29th embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation content of the 1st potential confirmation 29 table which comprises. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 29th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 29 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 29 for special figure 1 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 29th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning a prize opening discrimination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 29th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode during the time saving final fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 30th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode during the final time saving variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 30th embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all stock is consumed during the time saving final variation displayed on the symbol display device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the stock is not used during the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 30th embodiment, and (b) , is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when special stock is consumed during the time saving final fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 30th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode in the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 30th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode in the latter half of the time saving final fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 30th embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a resurrection jackpot in the latter half of the time saving final variation displayed on a symbol display device. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the special figure 2 final variation during the time saving state in the 30th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 30th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the 30th embodiment. be. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a character selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 30th embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the character selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 30th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the audio lamp control device in the 30th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a display icon selection table set in a ROM. It is a flowchart which shows final variation effect update processing 30 performed by MPU in a sound ramp control device in a 30th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st period effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd period effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd period effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing 30 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 30th embodiment. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the flow of the effect performed in the time saving final variation in the 31st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM of the audio lamp control device in a 31st embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a notification period selection 31 table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 31st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final variation effect update process 31 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 31st Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is configured by assembling the opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the out opening 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is connected to the inner frame 12 ( (see Figure 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region where prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2), a first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. be exposed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2); It is configured so that it can be used depending on whether the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 or not. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as triggers for lottery of the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance hole 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance hole 64b2 are indicated, the term ``first ball entrance hole 64'' will be simply used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state, a time saving state, or a normal state, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable state by a lighting state. It also indicates whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a definite variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a missed symbol, or a small winning symbol by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state. , a 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during jackpots and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R time saving jackpot, and 2R time saving jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, "15R variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds and then shifts to (sets) a high probability state of special symbols and a variable probability state which is a high probability state of normal symbols. ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is (sets) a transition to a probability variable state where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. In addition, "15R time-saving jackpot" is a time-saving state that is a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) is a jackpot that is set, and a "2R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. .

In addition, the "high probability state of special symbols" is a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is increased, in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. The "high probability state of normal symbols" is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbols (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game where it is easy to release the electric accessory 64a.

In addition, in the game state (variable probability state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set, not only the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first ball entrance 64b2 As the time when the electric accessories 64a associated with are released, a longer time is set compared to the gaming state (potential state, normal state) in which the "low probability state of normal symbols" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). This will make it easier to win prizes. Therefore, during the probability change state or the time saving state, the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 64a is released due to a hit than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change state or time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric accessory is determined by one hit. At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is released in one hit are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to the normal state.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 is configured to display information on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when a ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 includes a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable display of a third symbol (decorative symbol) in synchronization with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided, which is comprised of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) using passage as a trigger.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period can be unified ( For example, even if the processing load on the main control device 110 is reduced by using a blinking display mode that repeatedly turns on and off in 0.1 second units, the movement of the third symbol set in the audio lamp control device 113 For example, by variably setting the display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode (the first symbol) that can suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. (a presentation mode using three symbols) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 It is configured to be in an activated state (operated to an open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) than in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, potential state) as the gaming state. It is set so that As a result, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that more winning lots can be drawn than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the variable probability state and during the time saving state, it is possible to set the game state as a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in this embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differ depending on whether the variable probability state is set as the gaming state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the current gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the current gaming situation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which high probability states of normal symbols are set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. The display mode is configured to be set. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily understanding the current gaming state based on the operating status of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 64a per hit, etc. If the state is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry opening 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set to be shorter during the variable probability state or time saving state than during the normal state, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state. Furthermore, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly explained. In the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols and high probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (special symbol state), There are four game states: low probability state for symbols and high probability state for normal symbols) and potential state (high probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols). The system is configured such that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In other words, when the probability state is set, the variable time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By specifying the time period to be shorter than when the time period is set, it is possible to most efficiently carry out a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

In the first embodiment, in order to make the lottery with the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery with the first special symbol, in the lottery with the second special symbol, the first variable The first specific winning hole 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period of time (1.5 seconds x 1 time, 0.2 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if you do not win the jackpot, you are given many opportunities to enter the ball into the first special winning hole 65a and win the prize ball, so the lottery for the first special symbol This is more advantageous than a lottery. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the winning lottery result in which the first specific winning hole 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win."

In the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific prize opening 65a is opened not only when there is a jackpot but also when there is a small prize. can continue to increase. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of a potential state. In a general gaming machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous ). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is in progress, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating due to a stop symbol of a jackpot or small win, the other fluctuation display will show the remaining fluctuation time and lottery. Regardless of the result, a missed stop symbol will be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which the other variable display is confirmed to be a win or a small win while a jackpot or a small win is being executed, and the jackpot or small win is started overlappingly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area and the flow of balls fired toward the game area in the first embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of this embodiment is configured so that the game area is divided into a left side area and a right side area by a variable display unit 80 disposed in the center of the game area. .

In this embodiment, the fired ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (state not rotated by the player). The ball is fired with a certain firing strength. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows backward through the firing channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 and becomes a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backwards passes through the starting position of the firing channel (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2), and the foul ball opening (see FIG. 1) that communicates with the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 1). (not shown) flows down and is refluxed into the upper tray 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball occurs when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire the ball at a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and the game is not played. It is possible to prevent interference with the

Next, when the amount of operation (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (state where the player is not rotating it), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that is such that it flows down the left side area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operating handle 51), the ball is fired with such a firing intensity that it flows down the above-mentioned right side area.

In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that the area in which the ball falls can be varied based on the amount of operation of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left side area. Instead of a game played by adjusting the ball (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game is played by adjusting the operation amount of the operating handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, while a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the player only has to keep the operation handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be explained with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the gaming states are a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state), a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability (time saving) ) state), probability variable state (special symbol high probability (probability variable) state: normal symbol high probability (time saving) state), potential state (special symbol high probability (probability variable) state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) is configured to be set. In addition, a jackpot game state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result wins a jackpot, and a small win game state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result wins a small win are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state are set as the game state, the variable display unit 80 is set so as to play a left-handed game in which the ball flows down the left side area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which the game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided, and the ball is caused to flow down to the left side area of the game board 13 when a potential state is set. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the gaming method so that the player can play the game. Furthermore, during the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the system is configured to guide the player's gaming method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game status before winning.

In addition, as a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, the game method suitable for the current game state can be always displayed, or the game method can be configured so that the game method that is suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or when the game method is changed only after switching. It may also be configured to display the gaming method. In addition, between left-handed games and right-handed games, a gaming method that is likely to be set for a long period of time (left-handed games in this embodiment) is set as a normal game, and when a gaming method other than the normal game (right-handed games) is played. It may be configured such that the game method is constantly displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guidance is not displayed when the player is forced to play a left-handed game.

As in this embodiment, when there are two types of gaming methods for the player to select, by not displaying the display mode that guides one gaming method, it is possible to guide the other gaming method. In other words, it is possible to guide a plurality of gaming methods depending on whether or not to display one display mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used in order to guide the player about the gaming method, but the display mode is not limited to this. As described above, a configuration may be used in which the player is notified of the gaming method by not displaying a specific display mode, or a configuration may be used in which the player is notified using audio or lamps.

In the left side area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general prize opening 63 are arranged. Further, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side region can enter therein. A lower first ball entrance hole 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance hole 64b1. This electric accessory 64a allows the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is won after the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b to an open state (second state) in which it is easy (possible) for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in a state where the lottery can be executed (the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is not executed, and a jackpot game or a small prize game is executed). When a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 in the state in which the lottery is not performed, the special drawing 1 lottery is executed. That is, the ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is an opportunity to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 has already been executed, or a jackpot game or a small prize game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, a storage means is provided for storing the right of the ball to enter up to a predetermined number (four). ing.

Therefore, even while the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being executed, the player can continue to play the game, so that the performance of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter and the first special symbol.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area due to left-handed games pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the fired balls (8 out of 100 balls) enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by structures such as multiple nails and windmills. In addition, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first ball entrance port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance hole 64b2. The ball flow path is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the electric accessory 64a is open), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the electric accessory 64a is closed) in that order. It is configured so that

As described above, the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are configured to provide the player with the privilege of paying out prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured so that four prize balls are paid out to the player every time one ball enters the ball. In addition, in this embodiment, the same number (4) of prize balls are awarded both when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each ball.

On the other hand, in the right side area of the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second ball entry port 640 is configured so that a second special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters, and a plurality of slots are arranged so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right side area enter the second ball entry port 640. A ball channel is formed by the nail. Here, the balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side area.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variable time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed until the lottery result is displayed is long. The configuration is such that a short variation time (1 second) is set in a state where a variable time of time (10 minutes) is set and a potential state is set.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, rather than playing a left-handed game and entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, play a right-handed game. It is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640 in order to draw the second special symbol, but since a long variable time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is reduced. It becomes very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays a left-handed game and executes the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, if a right-handed game is performed with the normal state set, the ball fired in the right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the number of balls will not increase.

Further, when a time saving state or a variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the state becomes a high probability state with normal symbols, and the electric accessory 64a becomes easy to open. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols to open the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left area, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 makes it easier for balls to enter than in the normal state. The player is configured to play a left-handed game in order to cause the ball to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in a state where the probability state is set as the game state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to release, and as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the variable time (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to play the right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small win (winning probability approximately 1/2). If you win a small win, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small winning game, and you win 10 points for each ball that enters the first variable winning device 65. The configuration is such that a number of prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the probability state is set as the game state, by having the player continue to play the right-handed game, a second special symbol lottery with the aim of winning a small win, and a small win game, can be executed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is provided at the bottom of the gaming area. The second variable winning device 650 operates to open the rotating door 650f when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol so that the rotating door 650f is moved toward the front and the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state where a ball can be won. It is something that will be done. This second variable winning device 650 is configured so that both balls flowing down the left side area due to a left-handed game and balls flowing down the right side area due to a right-handed game can enter the ball equally. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened, the gaming method used before the jackpot game may be continued, and the player is informed of the gaming method. It is possible to suppress complicated changes.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2) described above, a first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. ) is turned on, and as a result of the first ball entry switch being turned on, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. It will be done.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is a winning port from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entry port 640 is a prize entry port from which one ball is paid out when a ball enters. This is one of the winning slots where the ball is paid out as a prize ball. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64. are set to be the same (both are 4 balls), and are made to be different from the number of prize balls paid out (1 ball) when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, but when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls for the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is set to 4, the number of prize balls for the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which it is difficult for balls to enter is set. In the case where the ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1, the benefit for the ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 is increased, and when a specific game state (variable probability state, time saving state) is set, the lower ball becomes easier to enter the ball. Even if balls frequently enter the first ball entry port 64b2, the player may not receive an excessive amount of prize balls. The number of prize balls in the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (variable probability state, time saving state) is set, a large benefit may be given to the player.

In addition, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 (for example, both are 5 It may also be configured as

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. There is. On the other hand, if the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol lottery) that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 64a is in an open state (allowed state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

As mentioned above, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter, so the variable display of the second symbol is , the symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowed state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 more easily than during the normal state.

As described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the ball entrance to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, can be in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter depending on the set game state (first state); A state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball (second state) can be set. In other words, from the perspective of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is an unfavorable gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery ), the probability of a jackpot is the same, and if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery will be executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) of a jackpot. When a high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery is executed in which a jackpot is achieved with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than in a low probability state. However, the type of jackpot that is selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the player to choose how to shoot the ball (playing method) as "left-handed (left-handed game)" or "right-handed game," depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to ``Uchi (right-handed game)''. Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. A ball that flows down the gaming area and does not land in any of the winning holes (ball entrances) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a passes through the out hole 66 as shown in the figure. You will be guided to the ball ejection path where the ball will not be discharged. The out port 66 is arranged below the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Although the first embodiment has a configuration in which the game area has one outlet 66, other configurations may be used, and two or more outlet ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for ultimately concentrating the balls fired into the game area in one location (the location where the out ports 66 are provided). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the various devices constituting the gaming area can be increased. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an outlet exclusively for balls that have flown down the left side area and an outlet exclusively for balls that have flown down the right side area. Further, when a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is the out port. This prevents a situation in which a ball enters the entrance (actually, an exit) provided in the gaming area but is not awarded any benefits, causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 4(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol (a decorative symbol dynamically displayed in response to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a rear pattern imitating various animals with numbers ``1'' to ``9'' attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is assigned to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is assigned to the rear design imitating a lion. In this way, by displaying the third symbol in a manner that combines the rear symbol and the numbers, the player can see the display manner of the rear symbol ( The type of the third symbol can be roughly determined by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol can be identified to ensure the type of the third symbol. can be made to understand.

In addition, in the present first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not varied, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a game that never gets boring. In addition, by setting the combination pattern of the backward symbol and numbers as the third symbol to be changed regularly according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, for example, the combination pattern of the backward symbol and the number as the third symbol can be The accuracy of predicting the game content based on the display mode (combination of backward symbols and numbers) that is stopped and displayed can be improved, and the fun of making predictions can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main controller 110 is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display ends. It is structured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol lottery result is configured to win a small hit, and when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). It will stop and be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on the lottery results of the special symbols, so that the lottery results are easier to understand for the player, but this is not limited to this. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small win.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with approximately 3/4 of the upper portion being the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the rest being the main display area Dm. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from left to right (usually from right to left) for variable display. will be held. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, middle vertical line, and right vertical line of this main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line going down to the right and a diagonal line going up to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, a third symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the active lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stopped display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (more than 1 second), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbol corresponds to a jackpot (if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is one). Furthermore, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display (confirmed display), a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will be displayed. is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, if there is no held ball and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second (confirmed display), the third symbol will continue to be displayed in a stopped state. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a new ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. .

It is rare for a player to continuously shoot a ball for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) without a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, then A variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a laterally elongated manner below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64. In this embodiment, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is displaying a variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of pending symbols displayed in this sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of pending balls whose variable display is currently pending. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, in the display screen shown using FIG. 4(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and a third symbol is dynamically displayed (fluctuating display) in the main display area Dm. 4 (a) in all game states. It is not necessary to form each area shown in .For example, when making the player pay attention to an effect that suggests whether or not the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be used. It may be configured to perform an impressive performance by reducing (erasing) and expanding the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when executing an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols or a game guide explaining future game content by emphasizing it in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub The display area Ds may be enlarged to provide effects that are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, depending on the set gaming state and the performance mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of pending symbols or an area for executing a preview performance may be formed in the main display area Dm, or a sub-display area may be formed. An area for performing variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, three main symbols and three sub-symbols are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, a variable display of three third symbols in a simple manner consisting only of numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, the jackpot starts when three third symbols composed of the same numbers are stopped and displayed. In addition, the reason why the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is that it is basic in the normal state and the variable probability state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the same time, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed.

Therefore, by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol to be mainly executed to be displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In addition, in the following explanation, the variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state and variable probability state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds to this) will be referred to as the main variation, and the A variable display of a special symbol that is rarely executed when playing a regular game method (in a normal state or a probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds to this) is referred to as a sub-variation.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state in which the probability change state is set, a long period of time (up to 10 minutes) The system is configured such that the fluctuating display (dynamic display) is executed and the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the potential state at the timing when the variable display is started. During the period in which the probability state is set (the period from when the fluctuating display that results in a jackpot is executed until the fluctuating display ends and the jackpot game starts), the lottery of the second special symbol will not be performed. The game is configured so that a game aiming at a small win is executed. Therefore, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the sub variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating bird faces as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol are displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols are shown to enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a preview effect is sometimes performed such as a reserved symbol making a special movement or another character appearing.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four times, and may be held up to three times. It may be set to less than or equal to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be configured such that entry of the ball into the second ball entry port 640 can be suspended. In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a mode that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the variable display performance that is executed in response to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the changing situation of each special symbol. Here, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly explained. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Then, in a state where variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) are set, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state for normal symbols occurs. is configured to shift to a low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from a variable probability state to a probability state. While this potential state is set, the fluctuating display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery results of the second special symbol is set short, so it is not possible to perform many lottery draws of the second special symbol. This is the period when it is possible (special map 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, so during the period when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) that is advantageous to a player who frequently executes a small winning game that is executed when a player wins a prize and can win a large number of prize balls.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the period in which the probability state is set (special symbol 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that won the jackpot in the probability variable state. (Special figure 1 jackpot is changing), so when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are set consecutively, it is possible to continuously provide various benefits to the player. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol (special symbol 2) and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period When the small winning game ends, the suspended measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small winning game, so regardless of the number of small winning games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 fluctuating advantageous period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special symbol 1), the other special symbol (special symbol 2) which is changing is displayed in a stop display mode indicating a loss. It is configured to force a stop. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the content of control over the fluctuation of the other special symbol is varied depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is used to indicate that the lottery result is a loss. If the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the provision of the second benefit ends (until the small winning game ends), and restarted after the provision of the second benefit ends. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a loss, the variation of the other special symbol is configured to be executed as is.

With this configuration, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents (the lottery result and the period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be varied, and the player's It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay features.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can provide a benefit to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is changed depending on the content of the benefit. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that grants the player the most advantageous benefit (jackpot game), the lottery result that corresponds to the change in the other special symbol during execution may not be the lottery result that grants the benefit. Even if there is a lottery result, we will forcibly stop the fluctuations so that the lottery results are out of order, and suppress excessive benefits from being given to players. In this case, in order to prevent the award of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol that is being executed, the variable display is displayed. It becomes possible to interrupt only period measurement.

Therefore, in a state where multiple special symbols (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the least advantageous benefit for the player is awarded, and the most advantageous benefit that will be awarded later is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are no longer played, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are uncomfortable from occurring.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, a short period (0.5 seconds) of variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), The game is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the probability state as the gaming state is the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability variable state is set, and the condition for the probability state to end is set as the first special symbol. is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, so the jackpot game is executed after the first advantageous period that is advantageous to players who frequently execute small winning games. A second gaming period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set consecutively, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the contents of the jackpot game, such as the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. The round number display mode to show the number of rounds, the acquisition amount display mode to show the number of balls acquired, the type to suggest the type of the jackpot game being executed (number of rounds, game state set after the jackpot game ends) The number of jackpots won during a period in which a non-normal state (variable probability state, potential state, time saving state) is continuously set without the normal state being set as the suggestion display mode or gaming state (so-called number of consecutive chances) ) etc. are displayed in a jackpot game display mode.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5(a)), if the current jackpot type is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets a variable probability state as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the As shown in 6(a), a performance mode (chance zone mode) is displayed that aims to set a potential state advantageous to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Entering the chance zone!!" indicating that a variable probability state will be set after the jackpot game is finished is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during a period in which the variable probability state or the probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so that it does not appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is A gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state is created.

With this configuration, the player can understand the outline of the currently set game state by knowing whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. can be provided.

In addition, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for the potential state to be set. Further, in the guide display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters "left-handed hit" are displayed as a guide display mode for making the player play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that when a variable probability state is set, the player will play a left side game aiming at the left side area. In addition, in this embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, is able to control both the ball fired in the left-handed game (the ball that flowed down the left area) and the ball fired in the right-handed game. , are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream positions of the gaming area (see FIG. 2)), and the characters ("left hit", "right hit") displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, i.e. The gaming method guided during the jackpot game is configured to be varied according to the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the gaming state is one in which a left-handed game is guided (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state), a guidance display during the jackpot is displayed. If it is determined that the player is in a gaming state (probable state) in which a right-handed game is guided, "left-handed game" is displayed, and "right-handed game" is displayed as a guidance display during a jackpot. Thereby, when a jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the effort of having the player change the playing method.

In addition, the main display area Dm includes a special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display area for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6(a), "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (ending screen being displayed). Displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

In this embodiment, if the special symbol has not been displayed in a variable manner even once after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned non-variable display mode is configured to be displayed. By displaying this non-fluctuation display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the above-mentioned non-fluctuation display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) that indicates a deviation. Alternatively, if it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display was executed has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The display may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner such as an initial display mode or a non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In a state where the variable probability state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5(b)), the game state is such that it is easy to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by playing the left-handed game. In other words, the variable probability state is a state where the electric accessory 64a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easy to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this probability change state will be explained with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the comment "In the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a variable state is displayed in the sub-display area Ds in a manner that scrolls horizontally (from right to left). Ru.

In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "Left hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and a fluctuating display indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Furthermore, at this point, the second special symbol has not been newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6(a) (because the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 due to the right-handed game). , the non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a plurality of movement display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the lottery results (results of judgment) of the first special symbol in the variable probability state are The motion display pattern of the character 811 is configured to be set differently accordingly. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot during the probability change state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6(b) is displayed, when a variable display is executed to indicate that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot, the display shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed. The screen will be displayed. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the fluctuating display of winning the jackpot is started in the probability variable state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the probability state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won a jackpot is started during the variable probability state. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (potential state) at the timing when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the first special symbol fluctuates in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect pattern 813 (display mode of "333") to indicate to the player that the gaming state has shifted is displayed as a stop display. be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the variable probability state to the probability state due to the stopped display of the performance symbols 813. In addition, in this embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third symbol is used as the production symbol display mode, the production symbol display mode that is stopped and displayed is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be made to look like a mode.

This embodiment is configured so that a large number of small winning games can be executed by frequently displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner during the period in which the probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the probability state is set, "Right hit" to indicate the right hit game to the player is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH enters!! Hit right!" to indicate that the potential state is set as the gaming state is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol winning the jackpot starts to fluctuate, the performance pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the performance mode of the special pattern 1 display area Dm1. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has changed in accordance with the lottery result of the performance symbols.

Then, during the potential state in which the right-handed game is continuously being executed (while the first special symbol is fluctuating the jackpot), if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 7(b). As expected, a performance mode is displayed to indicate that the player has won a small prize. Here, the display contents when the potential state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 7(b). FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the potential state.

According to FIG. 7(b), in the state where the potential state is set (during RUSH), when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. A fluctuating display mode is displayed to suggest that is fluctuating (big winning fluctuating), and a display mode "341" indicating that a small win has been won is displayed in the special drawing 2 display area Dm2. .

Then, a treasure box 812 displayed as a presentation mode during RUSH is opened, and a "V" for indicating a small win is displayed as a presentation pattern 813 for indicating a game result from inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the player will win a small win with the second special symbol during the rush state and that the small win game will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which rotates when a small win is won, is provided in the right side area, and the game can be played in the same gaming method (right-handed hitting) as in the potential state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if small winning games are frequently executed during the probability state, the player only has to continue playing the right-handed game, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts during the probability change state, the probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the probability state In the state where is set, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be drawn efficiently.

Therefore, the system was configured to notify the player of the period during which the probable state will be set (based on the fact that the probable state has been set) at the same time as the probable state is set (Fig. 7 (a). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since it is possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in a state where the probability change state is set, the first special symbol also changes to the second special symbol. Both special designs may also vary.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the potential state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the potential state is set (see FIG. 7(a)), the second Until the special symbols stop changing, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the potential state, and a problem arises in which the small winning game is not executed for any length of time even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of fluctuation, The structure is configured such that the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the second special symbol ( The content of the effect when the special figure 2) is changing will be explained. As shown in Figure 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability variation state is set (see (c) in Figure 5), the probability variation state is set. Rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state, a "super chance zone" is displayed that increases the expectation that the RUSH state will be set.

Here, the display contents of the display screen during the "super chance zone" will be explained with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing a case where a variation in which a jackpot is won with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in a variable probability state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which a potential state is set as a gaming state, but the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the potential state is set is This is a display mode that indicates a state that has not been completed.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the "super chance zone" is displayed is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a manner that it is moving at a higher speed than in FIG.

Then, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "variation display mode" is displayed to show that the first special symbol is changing, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a potential state is set. The "fluctuation display mode" that has been fluctuating since the point before is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8(a) is displayed until the timing when the special drawing 2 variation, which is executed across the timing of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variation state to the probability state, ends. When the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 5(d)), a "RUSH" entering screen is displayed to inform the player that the "RUSH" has entered (see FIG. 8(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8(b), the contents of the screen when entering the "RUSH" via the "Super Chance Zone" will be explained. FIG. 8(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the screen when entering the "RUSH" via the "Super Chance Zone". As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the main display area Dm, a presentation pattern 813 is displayed from inside the treasure box 812, and a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the game has entered the "RUSH" state. Then, "Right hit" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode to suggest that the first special symbol is changing (changing the jackpot), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows a loss. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During a rush game (RUSH), that is, while the first special symbol is fluctuating to a jackpot, a game in which a right-handed game is performed to frequently draw a lottery for a second special symbol in which a fluctuating pattern with a short fluctuating time is set. is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won with one special symbol (including during jackpot fluctuations), it is possible to win a jackpot with the lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured so that it does not exist. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery during the rush game, the lottery result will be either a small hit or a loss. The second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small win with a high probability (approximately 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the player wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and the game of winning a prize ball through the small win game continues until the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if you frequently draw the second special symbol during a rush game, you will not win a jackpot by drawing the second special symbol, so you can make full use of the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol. Rush games can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5(f)), a screen corresponding to the type of jackpot won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9(a) and (b)). Here, with reference to FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b), the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation is stopped) will be explained.

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot (jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. 9(b) 16 is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when the player wins a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a))) which is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), at the timing when the third symbol ("777") to indicate winning the jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a)) is displayed in the special drawing 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating a miss is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a production pattern 813 (``Super V'') indicating that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment of ``Congratulations'' is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the words "right-handed play", which is the same gaming method as in the potential state, are displayed in the guide display area Dm3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(b), at the timing when the third symbol ("666") to indicate winning the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating a miss is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a production pattern 813 ("End?") is displayed from the treasure box 812 indicating that the player has won a disadvantageous jackpot, and a comment "Please return to left-handed hitting" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the words "left-handed hit", which is the same game method as in the normal state, are displayed in the guide display area Dm3.

Although FIG. 9(b) shows the display screen when jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, if jackpot C (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, that is, jackpot D A similar jackpot game is executed, but if the player wins a jackpot in which the game state set after the jackpot ends is more advantageous to the player than jackpot D, the same display screen will be displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, the game will be revived. It is configured to execute a performance that causes a right-handed game to be played as a performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a description will be given of the card forgetting warning screen displayed to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valued medium) into a card unit installed in association with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow balls used in the game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins a large number of prize balls through a game, a situation occurs in which the player forgets that he has inserted a card into the card unit and forgets to take the card out at the end of the game. I had something to do.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take out the card. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot game in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball and a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and furthermore, it is possible to set a game state in which small winning games can be executed frequently in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card-forgetting warning screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10(a), the display contents of the card forgetting reminder screen will be explained. FIG. 10(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting reminder screen. In this way, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is used to display the operation when taking out a card from the card unit, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" is displayed. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10(b) to 10(d), the display timing of the card forgetting reminder screen will be explained. FIG. 10(b) shows the case where the first jackpot is "Jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))", that is, the player wins a jackpot that can award many prize balls in one jackpot game. FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d) are timing charts showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting warning display), and FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d) show that the first jackpot is "Jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))" In other words, this is a timing chart showing the display timing of a card display (a card forgetting warning display) in the case of winning a jackpot that can award a large number of prize balls to a player in one jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), if the first jackpot (a jackpot won when the normal gaming state is set) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls can be won during the jackpot. Since the card will be awarded, the card display will be executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and (d), if the first jackpot is jackpot C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be awarded during the jackpot, and the player Since there is a possibility that a ball may be borrowed by using a card subsequently, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first jackpot (jackpot C).

In such a state, in this embodiment, the period from the first jackpot until the normal state is set again is set as the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the cumulative result is The card display is executed when a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached as a card display execution condition.

In other words, if a small winning game occurs continuously after the jackpot C ends and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuous period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small winning game. (See FIG. 10(c)), If the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuous period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of jackpot C, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See Figure 10(d)).

<About transition of gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of transitioning from one gaming state to another of the four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

First, a method of changing the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be explained. As described above, in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with the left hand. This is because when the ball is hit to the left, the ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 more easily. As mentioned above, in the lottery of the first special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small hit is not drawn, so unless a jackpot is achieved, the number of balls held is endless. It becomes a disadvantageous condition that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a jackpot is achieved. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 16(a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, when jackpots A and C are determined at a total rate of 65%, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. The state shifts to the variable probability state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when a jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the process shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11. . On the other hand, when a jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

Note that in a normal state, the game is normally played by hitting left-handed and aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1, but if the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Or, some of the balls hit left may enter the second ball entrance 640, resulting in a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (jackpot E to G) that are set when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol. When jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65%, the state shifts to variable state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when jackpot G is determined at a ratio of 35%, the gaming state is the normal state after the jackpot ends. is set again (loop through normal state).

In this way, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (jackpot D). If a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in the normal state, so that it is possible to suppress irregular games. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set, so if the gaming efficiency is a left-handed game. Since it is significantly lower than , it is possible to further increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in the normal state.

Next, a method of changing the gaming state when the player is staying in the variable probability state will be explained. As mentioned above, in the variable probability state, playing the game with the left hand tends to result in a higher lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand as in the normal state, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with the left hand. becomes. In addition, in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol increases compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but it is disadvantageous compared to the probability state. When the probability variable state ST2 is set, the state shifts to the probability state SP1 upon winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (the special symbol 1 jackpot variation starts).

In addition, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, the player plays the game by hitting the ball left to the left and aiming at the upper first ball entry port 64b1, while aiming at the lower first ball entry port 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entry port 64b1. I will do it. In other words, during the probability variable state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes such that it is easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

In the variable probability state configured in this way, normally a left-handed game is played and the first special symbol is drawn, but when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second special symbol is drawn. There is also the possibility of winning the lottery. In this case, when jackpots E and F are determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends, and the probability is determined at a rate of 35%. When the jackpot G is reached, a time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In other words, if the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in a variable probability state, it is possible to shift to the probability state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the possibility of transitioning to the potential state becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in a variable probability state, so that it is possible to suppress irregular games.

Next, a method of changing the gaming state when the player is staying in the potential state will be explained. As mentioned above, in the probability state, unlike the normal state and the variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so by playing the game with the right hand, it is possible to efficiently draw the second special symbol. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed.

In this embodiment, when winning the jackpot of the first special symbol with variable probability state set (first transition condition), and when winning jackpot C with variable probability state and time saving state set It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, a potential state is established before the jackpot game starts, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the second transition condition is established and the second transition condition is established, the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

With this configuration, the most advantageous gaming state (potential state) for the player can be set before or after the jackpot game, allowing the player to play a variety of games. can provide sex.

Furthermore, if the first transition condition is met, the period in which the potential state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the potential state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be performed during the potential state in advance (when the potential state is set) in accordance with the period in which the potential state is set.

In addition, if a jackpot C is won by drawing the first special symbol in a state where a variable probability state is set, a probability state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so the player It is possible to provide unexpected gameplay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected as a shaft, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via the input/output port 205. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. First, details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained.

The main control device 110 performs the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device, etc. used.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, select the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol). A first win type counter C2 used for the selection of the variation pattern, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Further, a small winning type counter C5 is used to select the small winning type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 52). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which counter values are stored for balls entering the first ball entry port 64, and counter values for balls entering the second ball entry port 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which values are stored is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 during a period when a special symbol can be drawn, such as when a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is When the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner. various settings and control processes for displaying the image (display) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which the first special symbol cannot be drawn during a variable display of the first special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. Furthermore, if the number of balls reserved for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (four in this embodiment), each counter value etc. is not acquired and the prize balls (four in this embodiment) are reserved. (a prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player. In addition, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during a period in which the second special symbol cannot be drawn during a fluctuating display of the second special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, each counter value etc. is not acquired and only the prize balls (in this embodiment, two prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for the first ball entrance 64, but it is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, three), There may be more than four (for example, eight). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which no upper limit is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration was such that the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (fluctuating display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but similarly to the first ball entry port 64, it is possible to store the ball into the second ball entry port 640. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 13. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 479). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the appropriate timing. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 15(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and is specified in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 15(a)). If the value matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Moreover, the value of the random number that becomes the small win of the special symbol is defined in the small win random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the game state is a low probability state of special symbols (normal state, time saving state), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is either "7 or 8", and if it is either "7 or 8", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state) of a special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the total number of 480 random number counters, two values are defined as values for determining a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of hitting the jackpot at that time is 1/240. On the other hand, when the special symbol is in a high probability state, the jackpot probability is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number value that results in a small win is not specified. That is, the first special symbol lottery does not result in a small win. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432", regardless of the gaming state, and If it is within the range, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the The display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As mentioned above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "7, 8" are the first winning random number counter C1 as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 2 among the total number of random numbers that are 480, the probability that the special symbol will become a jackpot is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 5" are as described above in the first winning random number table. 202a. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 480, and the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 6, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "1/80".

Furthermore, as mentioned above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that are small wins in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random values "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 480, and the total number of random numbers that result in a small win is 221, so the probability of a small win with the special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). becomes. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16(a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win type (small win A to C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 16(b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table 202f. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In this variable pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variable pattern selection tables are set according to the gaming state, and a variable pattern selection table is set for each of the success/failure determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of execution and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is defined in the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the random number value defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. The details of this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(c).

FIG. 15(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers for winning normal symbols in the low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols as the gaming state, and the range is "0 to 10". ”. The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, and the total number of random numbers that become a win is 11, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state), there are 232 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, and the total number of random numbers that become a win is 232, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "232/233". In this way, in this embodiment, the random number value for winning a normal symbol is configured to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in the case of a hit with the normal symbol are also different from the low probability state of the normal symbol. The configuration is such that the probability state is more advantageous (the ball is easier to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and a variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a win, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Afterwards, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) by lighting up, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "twice for one second". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a win, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) by lighting up, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "twice for one second". In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the normal electric accessories, and the number of openings may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the gameplay.

The common figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) is used to select a normal symbol fluctuation pattern based on the value of the regular symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 when a ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. ) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of this common pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 includes, in addition to the above-mentioned first random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a fluctuation pattern selection table. At least a table 202f and a regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(a). The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first winning The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "jackpot A" is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24". It is stipulated that This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that will be "Jackpot A", so if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot A" will be determined. The proportion of these cases is 25% (25/100).

If "Jackpot A" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g is set to on), and the number of time savings of 10,000 times is set. is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after "Jackpot A" ends, a variable probability state will be set until the next jackpot is won.

“Jackpot A” is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state becomes a game state in which more advantageous games can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the potential state than in the variable probability state, and among the plurality of gaming states, the next one after the potential state is It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "25 to 49", and "Jackpot B" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "jackpot A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and a jackpot that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). The game is set. After the end of "Jackpot B", the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to be set to a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if you win "Jackpot B" while the normal state is set, the normal state will be set after the jackpot ends, whereas if you win "Jackpot B" during the time saving state, , a time saving state (100 times) is set after the jackpot ends. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that become "Jackpot B", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 25% (25/100).

"Jackpot B" is one of the jackpot types that has the most rounds like "Jackpot A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot ends. , it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 89", and "Jackpot C" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot C" has two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. The game is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between winning the "big win C" and winning the "small win."

With this configuration, when a winning game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is difficult for the player to understand whether a big winning game or a small winning game has been executed. As mentioned above, this embodiment is configured so that during the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the player is in a potential state (RUSH state) in which small winning games can be executed frequently. The player plays the game while expecting that the winning game in which one attacker is released will be a small winning game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not desire a situation in which the jackpot game that the player most desires would normally be executed, it is possible to provide novel gameplay.

After the end of "Jackpot C", the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value set depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, a value of "10000" is set in the time-saving counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the value of "10000" is set in the time-saving counter 203f. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win "Jackpot C" while the normal state is set, the variable probability state will be set after the jackpot ends, whereas if you win "Jackpot C" during the variable probability state or the time saving state. In this case, a potential state is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, by configuring the gaming state when a jackpot is won so that the gaming state that is set after the jackpot is different even if the jackpot is of the same type, the player can simply aim to win a jackpot. Not only this, but also the set game state can be watched, which can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the probability state is set as the gaming state, the game state is the most advantageous to the player. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition where the special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when is set, and the second setting condition where jackpot C is won when the probability change state and time saving state are set. are doing. In other words, the expectation level (probability) at which the potential state is set is configured to vary depending on the gaming state when winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the level of expectation for the player that a gaming state advantageous to the player will be set as the game progresses (according to the gaming state that is set). This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that will be "jackpot C", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "jackpot C" will be determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). "Jackpot C" is one of the jackpot types with fewer rounds and a shorter opening period than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, this is the only jackpot type that can set the most advantageous potential state for the player as the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends, so it is set after the jackpot is won. In terms of gaming status, this type of jackpot is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99", and "Jackpot D" is defined in association with it. This "Jackpot D" has two rounds, and a jackpot game (same as "Jackpot C") that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of "Jackpot D", the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0". In other words, if the "Jackpot C" is won, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Since this "Jackpot D" has the same jackpot game content as the above-mentioned "Jackpot C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small win game. ing.

After the end of "Jackpot D", the normal state is set as described above, so the fluctuation display of winning "Jackpot D" (jackpot fluctuation) in the state where the variable probability state is set is When executed, after small winning games are frequently played during jackpot fluctuations, the jackpot game is executed, and then a normal state is set.

In other words, in the potential state (RUSH state) when "Jackpot D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state occurs after "Jackpot D" in which the same opening action as the small winning game is completed. Since this is set, it is possible to make the player think that the potential state in which the jackpot game will be executed has ended.

Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become "Jackpot D", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). "Jackpot D" is one of the jackpot types that has fewer rounds and a shorter opening period than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. becomes. Regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state that is set after the jackpot. In other words, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable prize winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, is the opening target, In the other two jackpot types (“Jackpot C” and “Jackpot D”), a jackpot game is executed in which the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small win game is opened.

That is, in the first embodiment, the main jackpot games ("jackpot A", "jackpot B") whose purpose is to make the player win a prize ball as a special symbol jackpot, and the game state are varied. A secondary jackpot game (“Jackpot C”, "Jackpot D") is configured to be executable.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the gameplay allows the player to obtain prize balls through a small winning game rather than a jackpot game, it is set to make it difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during a jackpot game. (Even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be won depending on the type of jackpot is executed), a jackpot game whose purpose is to vary the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player. Can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol, "jackpot E" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "Jackpot E", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, "Jackpot E" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100).

If "Jackpot E" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g is set to on), and the 10,000 time saving number is set. is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after "Jackpot E" ends, a variable probability state will be set until the next jackpot is won.

"Jackpot E" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state becomes a game state in which more advantageous games can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the potential state than in the variable probability state, and among the plurality of gaming states, the next one after the potential state is It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "5 to 64", and "Jackpot F" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot F" has two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become "Jackpot F", so when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, "Jackpot F" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

If "Jackpot F" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g is set to on), and the 10,000 time saving number is set. is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after "Jackpot F" ends, a variable probability state will be set until the next jackpot is won.

“Jackpot F” is one of the jackpot types with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state becomes a game state in which more advantageous games can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the potential state than in the variable probability state, and among the plurality of gaming states, the next one after the potential state is It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

“Jackpot G” is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99”. This "Jackpot G" has two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that become "Jackpot G", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot G" is determined. The proportion of people with disabilities is 35% (35/100).

If "Jackpot G" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state will be set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g will be set to off), and the number of time savings will be 0. is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

“Jackpot G” is one of the jackpot types with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends is the normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state that is set after the jackpot. In other words, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, there is a case where a jackpot is won in the lottery using the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and a case where a jackpot is won in the lottery using the second special symbol (special symbol 2). It is the same that the percentage of setting the variable probability flag 203g on after the jackpot ends is 65% (65/100), but the percentage of setting 15 rounds as a jackpot game (50% for special map 1) , 5% for Special Figure 2), percentage of the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) being selected as the opening target (50% for Special Figure 1, 5% for Special Figure 2), gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot The rate at which a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when is in a time saving state and a variable probability state (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) (25% for special pattern 1, 65% for special pattern 2) are configured differently.

In this way, by varying the contents of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of special symbol that won the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide players with various gameplay features, and improve the game. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to differ depending on the type of special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be configured such that only a part of the above-mentioned contents differs. In addition to the above-mentioned contents, for example, the number of rounds to be set can be changed by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game to a number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can only be set for the jackpot type corresponding to special drawing 1. , the rate at which the probability change flag 203g is set to on may be changed.

Also, on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (for example, an area through which the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to be turned on after the jackpot ends. In a gaming machine configured as follows, the probability of a ball passing through a specific area may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each gaming state set after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in this embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be configured to vary depending on the type of jackpot won (or the type of special symbol that won the jackpot).

Next, details of the small winning type selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(b). This small winning type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small winning when a small winning occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). In this small win type selection table 202e, a corresponding small win type is defined for each value range of the small win type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), "small win A" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 93". This "small win A" is a small win type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small win game.

Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 94 random numbers that result in a "small win A", so when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is a "small win A". The rate at which this is determined is 94% (94/100).

In addition, "small win B" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "94 to 98". This "small win B" is a small win type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 random numbers that will be "small win B", so if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, it will be "small win B". The rate at which this is determined is 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small win type counter C5 is defined in association with "small win C". This "small win C" is a small win type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during the small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small win type counter C5 can take, there is only one random number that will be a "small win C", so if a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, it will be a "small win C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. As described above, in this variation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display is defined from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, and a time saving/probable variable table for determining a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state and a definite variable state. It includes at least a table 202f2 and a potential table 202f3 for determining a fluctuation pattern in a potential state. The specific contents of these tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Note that in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following explanation, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be explained with reference to FIG. This normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 includes a random value (variation type (counter value of counter CS1) is defined.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and is associated with normal reach (20 seconds), Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range "51-100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range "101-150", and super reach is associated with the range "151-198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) The correspondence relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies depending on the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to a value in the range of "0 to 70". A variation pattern of a miss (12 seconds) is associated, and a range of "71 to 150" is associated with a miss normal reach (20 seconds). Additionally, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "151 to 170", and super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "171 to 198". It is being

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is 2 or 3, a variation pattern of short (8 seconds) corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 70". As the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a variation pattern with a long reach (12 seconds) is associated with a range of "71 to 130", and a variation pattern with a deviation from a long reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of "131 to 170". ing. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "171 to 185", and super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "186 to 198". It is being

Note that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 in FIG. 35) is faster than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 33). is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is never referred to when there are four reserved balls.

In this way, when the number of balls on hold is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of balls on hold is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time to store the reserved balls and make it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when there are many balls on hold, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate balls, so when the number of balls on hold reaches the upper limit (4 balls), balls are sent to the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he has lost money.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long winning variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, a small win long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the player plays right-handed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variable time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is much worse than when the game is played left-handed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player normally plays right-handed.

Next, details of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19(a). This time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state of normal symbols (that is, a time saving state or a probability variable state) is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), this time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is used to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type of special symbol (properness/failure determination result). A random value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. Note that, unlike the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is configured so that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. are doing.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is played aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while playing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that a period may occur in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changing). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that in the normal state, a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the player becomes bored with the game.

On the other hand, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 shown in FIG. This is the referenced data table. During this time saving state and variable probability state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently released, so that the game state is such that the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, when a game state is set in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily accumulated, the change occurs when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, similar to the normal table 202f1 described above. If a configuration is added that makes it easier for long-time variation patterns to be selected, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation, which is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol decreases after a break in the game, is added. The fluctuation time becomes long, making it difficult to play games efficiently during the time-saving state or the probability-variable state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table (time saving, variable probability state) that is referred to in the gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily accumulated, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol. The probability variation table 202f2) is changed so that the variation pattern selected does not differ depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small). ) is configured. Thereby, it is possible to efficiently execute games in a time-saving state and a variable probability state.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a state where a variable probability state is set, the variable probability state changes to a potential state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to move to Specifically, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn in a state where the probability variable state is set and the lottery result (win/fail determination result) is a jackpot, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 is used. When the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes a potential state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the winning special variation ends, special figure 1 The special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination showing that the lottery result is a jackpot, and the jackpot game is started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to perform lottery and variable display at the same time, while the potential state is set (the winning special symbol of special symbol 1 (while the second special symbol is being executed), the second special symbol can be drawn. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display period (fluctuating time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a short period (1 second) only in the potential state, and only in the second special symbol. It is configured so that you can win a small prize. With this configuration, while the potential state is set (while the winning special variation of special symbol 1 is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently held, and the player can win many prize balls.

As described above in FIG. 19(a), in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won on the special drawing 1 with the variable probability state set, the time will vary from 60 seconds to 600 seconds depending on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. The configuration is such that a fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the potential state. Therefore, as a special symbol lottery result, it is possible to draw the attention of the player not only to the result of whether or not he won the jackpot (judgment result) but also to the selected variation pattern (variation time). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long winning variation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and 2. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the second If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a long loss fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, if you play right-handed in the time saving state or variable probability state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, a variable time of 60 seconds will be set each time, so the gaming efficiency will be much more efficient than playing left-handed. Getting worse. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a time-saving state or a probability-variable state.

Next, details of the potential confirmation table 202f3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19(b). This potential probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), this potential confirmation table 202f3 is used to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type (appropriateness determination result) of the special symbol. A numerical value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. In addition, the potential probability table 202f3 is configured so that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similar to the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above.

This potential probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of special symbol 1 is being executed during the probability variation state, or when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the time saving state or during the probability variation state. When you win a jackpot that is the jackpot type of "jackpot C" and select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and second special symbol (special symbol 2) that will be executed after the jackpot game ends. Referenced.

This potential probability table 202f3 is selected when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol with respect to the contents stipulated in the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is different, and the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different, Other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is normal fluctuation (60 seconds), the range "40 to 119" is associated with a super variation (180 seconds), and the range "120 to 198" is associated with a special variation (600 seconds).

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery and this potential confirmation table 202f3 is referenced, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) ) and the out-middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed and the probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the short hit fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and 2. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the loss short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to perform a large number of drawings (variations) of the second special symbol during the potential state.

Next, details of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 20. As described above, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to in order to select a normal symbol fluctuation pattern when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g includes the value range of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the lottery of ordinary symbols is executed. are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probability state, that is, the low probability state of normal symbols, the full range of possible values of the common symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short time state or a variable probability state, that is, a high probability state with normal symbols, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is within the range of "0 to 198" and the variation time is a 3 second variation. Patterns are associated.

Note that in the first embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation pattern variations are provided only in the case of the potential state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the variable probability state, variations may be made in the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and when the normal symbol lottery is executed in the probability state, the variation time is 1 second or 3 seconds. The configuration may be such that one of the types is set, and the number of variation times is not limited to two types, and more variation times may be selectable. The more variation there is in the variation time, the more difficult it becomes for the player to predict the variation time, so it is possible to have the player perform consecutive right-handed hits more reliably during the probability state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of drawings of the special symbol, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of drawings of the special symbol, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set by a method that combines the various configurations described above. Specifically, from the time the gaming state shifts to the potential state until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), 1 second is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time, and after that (for example, , 51 to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by measuring the number of special symbol variations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, and configuring the variation time corresponding to the measurement result to be selected and executed. , During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of expectation so that more advantageous fluctuation times (for example, short fluctuation times) are executed more frequently. can.

In addition, while the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the gaming state shifts to the potential state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that You can make him hit right-handed consecutively. In addition, in this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be longer when the special symbol lottery is not being executed (longer than when the special symbol lottery is being executed), or the variation time of the special symbol may be longer. It is preferable to configure the system so that the smaller the number of stored drawings, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbols becomes.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol, it is preferable to configure such that the larger the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol, the easier it is to select a long fluctuation time. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to make it difficult to accumulate the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to make it easier to accumulate the number of reserved balls for normal symbols, It is possible to equalize the number of normal symbol drawings.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability variable flag 203g, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small winning flag 203k, special figure 1 variable time counter 203m, special figure 2 variable It has at least a time counter 203n, a medium jackpot flag 203o, a medium small hit flag 203p, a special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, a medium pattern short fluctuation flag 203t, a winning counter 203u, a special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The areas respectively store values of a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a small winning type counter C5, and a fluctuation type counter CS1.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (first holding area to Among the vacant areas of the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing the special symbol lottery, similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first pending area of the normal symbol pending ball storage area 203c is set in the execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of winning of the normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is stored in other holding areas. Shift processing is performed to shift the winning data to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, S304 in FIG. 47). (See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol held ball counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol pending ball counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the pitch count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to four times. This is a counter that counts up to The value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls in the variable display in the normal symbol) is initially set to zero, and as the ball passes through the through gate 67, the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: No reference).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. After the jackpot ends, the time saving counter 203f is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type. Then, the time saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the game state update process that is executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When drawing a normal symbol, if the value of this time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state, and the validity of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability times. . On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state is a normal symbol, and the validity determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability times.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when set to on, indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state. In other words, when the variable probability flag 203g is set to on, the gaming state is a variable probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a potential state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal symbol: Low probability state) is set.

This probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the won jackpot type is a jackpot that sets a probability variable state or a probability state after the jackpot ends (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes). 54, S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability ending condition for ending the special symbol's high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability change flag 203g may be set to OFF. In this case, in order to determine the timing for setting the probability change flag 203g to OFF, a storage means is provided that stores in advance the number of special pattern fluctuations as the special pattern high accuracy end condition, and a A measuring means for measuring the number of special pattern fluctuations, and an end determination for determining whether the number of special pattern fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special pattern fluctuations (special pattern high accuracy termination condition) stored in the storage means. All you have to do is provide the means.

Furthermore, multiple special pattern high-accuracy ending conditions are prepared, such as the special pattern 1 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special pattern high-accuracy state, and the variation of the second special symbol. There are various types of lottery ending conditions, such as the special pattern 2 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and the lottery ending condition that can be established when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small win). It may be configured such that the special figure high accuracy end condition is made easy and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF when any of the special figure high accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 matches the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. (See S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

When the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends while the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on, a process for forcibly stopping the second special symbol at a missed symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is executing a big hit.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends while the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is on, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol at a missed symbol (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is executing a big hit.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in this winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203g is on), the variable probability state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203j. "01H" is stored as information. Furthermore, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the probability state is stored in this winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information indicating.

The information stored in this winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol's fluctuation display ends while this small hit flag 203k is on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). 46) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol while a small prize of the second special symbol is being executed, and the jackpot starts during the minor prize. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the timing results of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m and the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not it is a jackpot. If this jackpot flag 203o is on, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting a jackpot, and if it is off, it shows that it is not hitting a jackpot. This jackpot flag 203o is set to ON when the start of a jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF during the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not there is a small win. If this small winning flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is making a small winning, and if it is off, it indicates that the small winning is not occurring. This flag 203p during small winning is set to ON when the start of small winning is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small win (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins the small hit, and when the small win is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on), the second special symbol wins the small hit. 1. It is configured to interrupt the fluctuating display of special symbols. In other words, out of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a small hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (second special symbol), and the medium small win flag 203p is set to on. In this state, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) never ends, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. Further, during a small winning game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the jackpot game starting.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the period is from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol until the jackpot starts. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on, even if a new ball enters the second ball entrance 640, execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a missed symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and avoids the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol. If so, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag to indicate that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds). This indicates that a short variation of the pattern) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing to set the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time saving state (during time saving) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes). ), is set to ON when a 3 second fluctuation time (short fluctuation) is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a win (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, if it is determined that the regular map/short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is in a time saving state (time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), if it is determined that the game is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (see FIG. 48). 48 S1822). In addition, the normal symbol short variation flag 203t is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, the gaming state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to fluctuate (when the fluctuating time is set) and when the electric accessory 64a opening operation is set after the fluctuating time of the regular symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the configuration is configured such that the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and are in the time saving state, It is possible to reliably prevent the electric accessory 64a from opening long by changing the normal symbols (lottery) that is executed across the long opening state (and the time saving state). It is possible to prevent players from being provided with an excessive number of openings.

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (balls entered) into the first specific winning hole 65a in a round of the small winning game. When the value of this winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit value of 10, it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied and the round ends (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of the jackpot, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round ends if the round period set for the round is reached. This winning counter 203u has a value incremented by 1 every time a ball entering the first specific winning hole 65a is detected during the validity period of a small winning round. The value is also reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is used not only for small winning games but also for counting the number of balls that have won into the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during a jackpot game. It is also used for

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the period for opening the first specific prize opening 65a as the game content of the small winning game is set to be 1.5 seconds, and the round ending condition established by the number of prizes is set to 10. are doing. In other words, the validity period (1.5 seconds) of the round game has elapsed by the time 10 balls enter the first specific prize opening 65a during the small winning game (before the round end condition for the number of prizes is satisfied). It turns out. Therefore, since the period of the small winning game can be kept constant, the performance that spans the small winning game (the period from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the end of the fluctuation of other special symbols via the small winning game) It is possible to predetermine the presentation period for a series of presentations (a series of presentations to be performed). Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbol and the performance execution timing can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1, and when set to on, stops the update (subtraction) of the variable time, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small win (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation processing (figure 32) (S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to on, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same way as during fluctuation is executed (S203 in FIG. 32). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device 37 is in a state where the variation display continues to be executed. becomes. Thereby, by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 37) that it is set to ON (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that only the second special symbol lottery can win the small hit, the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on winning the small win is the first special symbol. However, if the first special symbol lottery is configured so that a small hit can be won, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, it is determined based on the fact that one of the special symbols stops in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of a jackpot game). ), a process that forcibly stops the fluctuating display of the other special symbol when it misses, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win, one special symbol stops with a combination that indicates a small win. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, the structure is such that, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various ways. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a jackpot), and while the fluctuating display to show the game result is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol on the other side is It is possible to prevent the special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) from being displayed in a stopped state and the large win from being erased by the small win.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, etc. provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 222 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19(a), if you win a jackpot with the first special symbol when the probability variable state is set, the variation time is 60 seconds, the winning normal variation, the variation. The main controller 110 outputs a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a winning super fluctuation with a time of 180 seconds or a winning special fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds, and the audio lamp control device 113 outputs the received fluctuation pattern command (variation time This means setting a variable effect corresponding to the information (information indicating the

Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first stage effect (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage effect is executed for the period from 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable performance is set in which the stage performance (for example, a performance that defeats the second enemy) is executed, and the third stage performance (such as a performance that defeats the third enemy) is executed for a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. As a variable production corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first stage production mode (for example, a production that defeats the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage production mode is executed for the period from 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, the effect of being defeated by the second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds are the first stage effect (for example, the effect of being defeated by the first enemy). A variable effect is set to execute the effect of being defeated.

In this way, by setting the performance mode so as to put a break in the variable performance to be executed in accordance with the stage of the variable time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the currently set variable pattern for the player can be set. It is possible to enjoy the fluctuating performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type it is, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when executing the above-mentioned variable performance, the remaining time display mode (for example, the timing at which the performance mode can shift to the next stage) allows the player to grasp the remaining time for the performance period set as each stage. It may also be configured to display a display mode in which the remaining time is displayed in a countdown manner. As a result, it is possible for the player to at least know in advance the period during which the variable effect will be continuously executed (the period during which the potential state will continue to be set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, we have set up multiple types of enemies that appear during the fluctuating performance, and depending on the type of enemy that appears, we have set the expectation level for the fluctuating performance to move to the next stage (the rate at which a performance mode that defeats the enemy is selected). It is preferable to make it possible to suggest the contents of the jackpot game to be executed after the end of the current variable display and the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this case, for example, if enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is super winning fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If the variation pattern is a winning special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a jackpot type other than the most advantageous jackpot type for the player has been selected. With this configuration, the performance mode (type of enemy) of the variable performance can be determined by combining multiple factors that determine whether or not to give advantageous benefits to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

The stop display mode selection table 222b indicates that a potential state is set as the gaming state, and a period (hereinafter referred to as rush period) in which small winning games can be executed frequently by drawing the second special symbol is set. This is a data table that is referred to when selecting a stop display mode of performance symbols (see FIGS. 7(a) and 8(b)) to notify the user. This stop display mode selection table 222b is configured so that different stop display modes are selected depending on the jackpot type won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds, the gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect design is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "Jackpot A", which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period) is won. If the information stored in the area (area for storing information shown) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , the stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". .

Also, if you win "Jackpot A" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. ~300 seconds, the value of the obtained performance counter 223h is defined as a stop display mode "111" in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". ” is defined, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "301 seconds onwards", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "777" is defined, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", A stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and a stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "Jackpot B", which is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (stores information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information stored in the area (area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode is "222" is defined, a stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and a stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Also, if you win "Jackpot B" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. ~300 seconds, the value of the acquired performance counter 223h is defined as "444" in the range of "0 to 39", and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined as "666" in the range of "40 to 79". " is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “301 seconds onwards”, that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “111” is defined, and the stop display mode is “40 to 79”. A stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and a stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), you win "Jackpot C" which is the second most advantageous jackpot type, or "Jackpot D" which is the most disadvantageous jackpot type, and the remaining If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the value is in the range of "80 to 99". A stop display mode "444" is defined.

Also, if you win "Jackpot C" or "Jackpot D", the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", i.e. , when the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the value in the range of "40 to 79" is defined. The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information being displayed is "301 seconds~", that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , a stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the rush period and the period after the end of the rush period are determined by the stop display mode of the effect symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The game is configured to suggest to the player the contents of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type). This allows the player to predict future game content by understanding how the performance symbols are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is specified that the stop display mode of the production symbols has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the production symbols is "even number symbols", "odd number symbols", It is stipulated that more benefits will be given to the player in the order of "777" and "VVV" (the rush period will be longer, and the type of jackpot will be more advantageous). In this way, by giving a predetermined regularity to the stop display mode of the performance symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the stop display mode of the performance symbol is selected by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode of the performance symbol “111” is the most advantageous for the player. Only when the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, it is specified that it will be selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, so if "111" is displayed, the player An innovative game feature where the player wants the rush period to end in 60 seconds, in other words, a game feature where the user would normally want a longer rush period, but the combination of the type of jackpot and the length of the rush period. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a gaming experience in which a game result (a short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the performance symbol, it indicates that the jackpot type and the length of the rush period have been selected that are most advantageous to the player. This allows players to play games with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the production symbols (the timing for stopping display of the production symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is determined by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the gaming state. It is configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the probability state is set (at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts when the probability variable state is set), whether or not the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the second special symbol is not changing, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the probability state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is determined. The production pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed based on the start.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is changing at the time when the probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts when the probability variable state is set), That is, unless the fluctuating display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed with the probability state set, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol currently being executed The display is configured to stop displaying the production symbols based on the timing at which the display is completed.

With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed with the probability state set immediately after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the rush period starts, so that the player does not feel any discomfort. It is possible to have the player play a game in a potential state without giving any money.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at the time when the probability state is set (when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts when the probability variable state is set), the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol being executed ends is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the production symbol is stopped and displayed. (The effect indicating that the rush period has started) is configured not to be executed. As a result, even though the production symbols are stopped and displayed to notify that the rush period has started (the rush game has started), if the small winning game is executed, the rush period will end. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed using a production pattern similar to the third pattern, it is as if the third pattern corresponding to the special pattern is displayed. It is possible to make it seem as if a rush game is being executed based on the symbols being stopped and displayed. Moreover, even if the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the performance symbols are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a large sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the timing for stopping and displaying the performance symbols is the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, or the timing when the second special symbol is being executed at the timing when the probability state is set. Although the timing at which the fluctuating display of the symbols stops is used, the production symbols may be configured to be stopped and displayed at other timings, for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored. If the winning information command indicating winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that a jackpot variation will be executed in the next variation, immediately before the jackpot variation is executed (in the variation before the jackpot variation, the 3rd symbol The production pattern may be configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery can be executed immediately after the potential state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed before the jackpot fluctuation is executed to notify that the rush game has started, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. When playing a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right-handed game), it is preferable to configure the system so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next jackpot variation is started. As a result, as a result of playing a right-handed game based on the stopped display of the performance symbols, the second game occurs before the probability state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation starts), that is, during the probability variation state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a special symbol lottery is executed and the period during which a rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional performance selection table 222c is used when selecting the performance mode (additional performance mode) when restarting the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped due to winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a referenced data table, and is configured such that a different additional performance mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7(b))) is selected depending on the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after restart. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(b).

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23(b), the additional performance selection table 222c selects different additional performance types based on the period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the additional performance counter 223i. The data content is defined as follows, and by executing the additional performance mode corresponding to the selected additional performance type, the player can predict the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining period of the rush period). It is configured to obtain.

Specifically, when the residual variation time (period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o) is period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". ”, the additional effect type “None” is defined, and in the range “100 to 198”, “Additional effect A” is defined. Furthermore, if the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional performance type "additional performance A" is defined in the range of , and the "additional performance B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". If the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". , an additional performance type “additional performance B” is defined, and an “additional performance C” is defined in a range of “100 to 198”.

Here, if "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. By understanding the tattered display mode, the player can predict that there is only a short time left in the rush period. In addition, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed in the normal display mode, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 is displayed in the normal display mode. A luxurious display mode is also set. Furthermore, if "none" is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

In addition, in the additional performance selection table 222c (FIG. 23(b)) shown in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional performance type are completely correlated, but this is not limited to this. For example, if it is period B, "additional effect C" is set, or if it is period C, "additional effect A" or "none" is set, with a small probability. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to perform a surprising performance for the player.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the composite game information that combines the rush period and the jackpot type is displayed in the stop display mode of the performance symbols that are displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the potential state. The game information is provided to the player, and game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period is provided to the player by additional performance during the rush period. This enables the player to predict more detailed game content by comprehensively determining the stop display mode of performance symbols executed as composite game information and the performance mode of additional performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c, a special symbol 1 variation start flag 223d, a special symbol 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special symbol 1 stop flag. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, additional production counter 223i, status setting area 223j, remaining time short number area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 variable time counter 223n, remaining variable time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display flag 223t, prize ball number counter 223u, power supply At least a shutdown flag 223y and other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is read out by the command determination process. , the command is analyzed, and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning for the first ball entrance 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, which are acquired according to the starting winning, From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable presentation (variable display) of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and third symbol display device 81), and is reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the first special symbol being played up to a maximum of four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c calculates the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. They are managed by type.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved number counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the pitch number counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball count pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are set respectively when the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 59). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are set when the first special symbol stop type command and the second special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is selected based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This performance counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and for example, the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Updated.

The status setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a status command output from the main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, a 2-bit storage area is allocated to the state setting area 223j, and in order from the most significant bit, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state of a special symbol, and whether it is a high probability state of a normal symbol. A value indicating whether the For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is in a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols), and if it is "10B", it means that it is a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols). It means that it is in a certain state (high probability state for special symbols and low probability state for normal symbols). On the other hand, "00H" means the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols).

By updating the status setting area 223j according to status commands output from the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113 can accurately grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining time short number area 223k is a storage area that stores the remaining number of times of the high probability state of the normal symbol. This remaining time reduction number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining time reduction number command output every time the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time saving number area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time saving counter 203f of the main control device 110, so the remaining time saving number grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 can be This can be made to match the actual number of time savings updated by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding variation time when each variation display is set (executed) in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is subtracted by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). Note that the period from receiving the special map 1 temporary stop command from the main controller 110 until receiving the special map 1 restart command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the configuration is such that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not subtracted by 1.

Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) that a temporary stop related command has been received, when calculating the remaining variation time, (See S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting an additional effect when restarting the variable display of symbols.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag to indicate whether or not the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10(a)) has been displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting alert screen is displayed. Set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not it is possible to display (notify) the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10(a)), and it is possible to display the card forgetting alert screen. It is set to on when the following conditions are met.

The rush display completed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not a rush game has been started in a state where the potential state is set, and is a flag for indicating whether or not a rush game has been started, and is a flag for indicating that a rush game has been started (see FIG. 7). (a), see FIG. 8(b)) is displayed, it is set to on.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously counting the number of prize balls after the start of the jackpot game, and is a counter for continuously counting the number of prize balls during a period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is continuously set. It is configured so that the numbers are cumulative. Specifically, in the winning related process (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that a prize ball command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), a value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a large amount of prize balls can be won not only in the jackpot game but also in the small win game. It is configured so that a card forgetting warning display can be executed after the end of a winning game or after the end of a jackpot game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power outage flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power outage. This power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), if the power off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power off flag 223y is set to on and then the power off flag 223y is set to on. This is the case when the audio lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power outage. In this case, all of the information in the RAM 223 has not been deleted, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only a portion of the information has been deleted) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). This prevents processes from being executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each process of the audio lamp control device 113 can operate normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol winning a jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided in order to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store the control program and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from the work RAM 233, which is constituted by a DRAM with a high read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until the third symbol display device 81 displays any image.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the ball entrance 64b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 25(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 25(b). As shown in FIG. 25(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 25(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 25 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is detected. 25B, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c) are drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the images on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 26(b) shows back surfaces B to D corresponding to "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage," respectively, with respect to back surface A corresponding to "city stage." . Further, FIG. 27 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 26, the back images corresponding to the back faces A to D are all images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then when the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, the third symbol display device 81 displays a smooth image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , First, a position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can display the images from position a to position c while being scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the back image on the back surface E changes to the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... in FIG. 27 over time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in fixed positions. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 27(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 27(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is returned to, and the back images shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Town Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Town Stage" that is frequently displayed is By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are a partial area of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 26(b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, the image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27(a) and corresponds to the back surface images between FIGS. During the start-up process, the image data is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and becomes resident.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or color tone can be changed as time passes. It can be displayed while Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, for rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 27(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27(b) to 27(c) and 27(c) to 27(a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. ) to (b) are set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 27(a) to (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 27(b) to (c) and 27(c) to (a) can be Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) can be displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27(b) to 27(c) to 27(c) to 27(a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time using the image data corresponding to the back image be able to.

Note that on the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. Duplicate image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened.The round performance will start from now on. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. be done.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is the back side A to E that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display any one of the images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 29) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address "02F0H" where the "End" information is written is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. The contents of the drawing are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 29 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated that describes instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated that describes drawing instruction contents. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 30), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as pattern 1), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of that sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending ball number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol 1).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 75(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the specified drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit is associated with each back surface type. If any bit of this back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the turned on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In this rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a) ), see S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to OFF. This back image discrimination flag 233x allows the currently set back type to be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , see S6905 in FIG. 79). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern (determined display). If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), 79, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control processing of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, 479, 99, 232, and 99), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed in conjunction with winning a winning ball into the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After executing the starting winning process (S105), a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the normal symbol variation process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S201), and if it is determined that the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the subtraction of the fluctuating time of the other special symbol is interrupted because one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S202: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S203), that is, a process is executed to continue the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special symbol whose variable time subtraction has been interrupted, and this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (i.e., the special figure 1 fluctuates). (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and then the process moves to S209 where variation processing regarding the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. This first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is to execute the process during special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed explanation thereof will be given later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the first special symbol variation execution processing (S205) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), and the end timing of the variation time is determined (S206). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process moves to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process moves to S209.

In the process of S209 to S213, the same process as S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is determined. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), a second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of this second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is to execute the process during special symbol 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

When the second special symbol fluctuation execution process (S211) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (whether the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the end timing of the fluctuation time is determined (S212). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S208).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S301). ) is a value greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is determined. 1 is subtracted (S303), and a held ball number command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the held ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (S304). .

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is completed, next, the data in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S306 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307) is based on the validity determination result of the first special symbol and the fluctuation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S308). This game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. This is the process for updating. When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is a process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during a period in which a variable display (jackpot variation) in which a jackpot has been won in one of the special symbols is being executed, whether or not a jackpot has been won in the other special symbol lottery is displayed. It is configured so that no discrimination is performed.

In other words, in a state where it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the elapse of a variable time) by one special symbol lottery, a jackpot game will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and the game will be played multiple times in a short period of time. The system is configured to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same way as a normal special symbol lottery, skipping the judgment based on the various counter values acquired in that process, and setting the missing symbols, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the special symbol is in a probability variation state) (S402: Yes), a random value that results in a jackpot as defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first winning random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the prescribed random number value for a jackpot matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 202i is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a jackpot (S406), and if the lottery result is a jackpot ( S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and a value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. 203j (S410), sets 1 to the time saving counter 203f (S411), and ends this process.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34) is performed in the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33). In the game state update process (S308) which is executed at a later stage, the high probability state of the normal symbols can be transferred to the low probability state. Thereby, when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, it is possible to set the low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in a state where the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state can be transferred to the probability state.

In addition, by performing the process of setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on the condition that the jackpot has been won, and the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, and the special symbol Both the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on the condition that the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times can be executed using the game state update process (S308). This can prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated even if a plurality of conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or if it is determined that the lottery result is a loss in the process of S406 (S406: No), a missed symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot or not. 1. It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above.

In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot that was acquired in the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) Based on the value of the 1-win type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) (S502), and the process moves to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process moves to S505. Note that the gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern ( S506).

When the process of S506 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), and then a fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the process of S505 is set. A value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m (S509), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time-saving counter 203f, only the value of the time-saving counter 203f is updated when the special symbol starts changing. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), the system is configured to execute a process to update the value of the time saving counter 203f.

Although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g that is set to on is set to off when the jackpot variation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

In other words, among the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f) that are referenced when setting the gaming state, one conditional element is updated when the special symbol starts changing, and the other conditional elements are By making it possible to update when the special symbols stop changing, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state that is set by combining two conditional elements. In addition, it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, potential state) only during the period from the start to the end of the special symbol fluctuation, so it is possible to set an advantageous state for the player only during the predetermined period. It becomes possible to set the gaming state.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604), and when it is determined that it is 0 (S604: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S605). ). Here, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), the probability variable state is not given the time-saving game (that is, the probability state), so the probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S605, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), the status is normal, so a status command indicating the normal status is set (S607), and this process end.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is directly ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously until the next special symbol wins the jackpot (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot). However, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted every time a variation of a special symbol is executed, so that the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to a low probability state.

When using such a configuration, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. By providing a game state update process when special symbol variation stops that updates the value of the probability variation counter, it is possible to determine whether or not to end the high probability state of special symbols and whether to end the high probability state of normal symbols. It is possible to perform the process of determining whether the

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, regarding the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S205). In this first special symbol variation execution process (S205), a process for restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 1 when it has been interrupted, and a process for subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S701). Here, a case where this process is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on will be briefly described. As mentioned above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a win (small win) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special drawing 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on, the jackpot flag 203o is set to on in the process, so a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the special symbol variation process (Fig. 32) is executed next time (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on), the jackpot has been hit in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small win game) ends and it is determined in the process of S201 that there is no jackpot (or small win), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. It turns out. With this configuration, the state where the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed while the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is the state where the jackpot (or small win) game is It is configured such that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation which has ended and the subtraction of the variation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S701: Yes), then a special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes). The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process moves to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 Shift to processing.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S704), the display on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S802), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S802). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S804).

After completing the process of S804, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h, probability change flag 203g, and time saving counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process moves to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S808.

In the process of S808, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S808). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S809), and this process ends.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S207), the processing (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

In addition, in the present first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed as a winning symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to create a more natural performance compared to the case where a forced stop is made due to a miss. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may also do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In this second special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for starting variation of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the subject of variation is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. A detailed explanation of the elements will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this process is ended. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, while stopping and displaying the second special symbol at the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. . That is, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that a jackpot is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on in the process of S901, the present process is ended without executing the processes of S902 to S907 for setting the start of fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is any acquired data (S904). That is, if it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, if it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), a second special symbol jackpot determination process is performed to execute a jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Execute (S905). Details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the process of S905 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). . Details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is executed, so the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. We will mainly explain the differences between the two.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the process of S1002 to S1004 is executed to obtain a lottery result as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203g. Each of these processes differs only in that the counter value used for lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b, and is otherwise the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Control is executed.

When the process of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1005). If it is determined that the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to on (S1005: No), it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot. (S1006: Yes), the process of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a jackpot is executed, and this process ends. In each process of S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, if the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), a special symbol 2 missing variation process is executed to set a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a small hit of the second special symbol (S1011), and this process is ended. The details of this special figure 2 off variation process (S1011) will be explained with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 off variation processing (S1011).

In the special figure 2 out-of-print variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), If it is determined that it is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set on (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S1103). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), a loser symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then, This process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. I will explain about it. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above.

In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the jackpot is selected from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). The type is determined (S1204).

When the process of S1204 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process moves to step S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special symbol 2 out-of-balance variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, set the start of variation of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and set the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S1205 in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, this special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be explained. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 out-of-flight variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to on (S1301). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, based on the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 and the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)), the small winning type is selected (S1303).

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S1304), and the small winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. is selected (S1305). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1306), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small win (that is, a loss) (S1301: No), the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (Fig. 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and selects an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation variation pattern (S1309), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation execution process (S211), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the content. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S211). In this second special symbol variation execution process (S211), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 2 when it has been interrupted, and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is updated (S1402), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) is to execute the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501), and the special pattern 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on. When it is determined that (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 variation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 variation is set (S1503). Next, when the process of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special map 2 jackpot flag 203i, probability change flag 203g, and time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process moves to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S1509). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S1510), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 out-of-win stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special symbol 2 off-stopping process (S1508), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S213 in FIG. 45), will be explained. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 losing stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a jackpot (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. This is a process to be executed when the special figure 2 lottery result is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 variation being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 missing stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to on (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set on (S1601: Yes), the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set on (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

After completing the process of S1603, a small win scenario based on the selected small win type is set (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S1606).

When the process of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped variably at the small winning symbol (S1608), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special map 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to do so (S1609). Thereafter, the second special symbol being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped at the symbol (S1610), and this process is ended.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously. It can be displayed. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed on either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the starting winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting prize winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first ball entrance (first starting opening) 64 (winning), and if the ball has entered (winning), the game ball is put on hold. This is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (maximum 4 in the first ball entrance 64). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved balls is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, , a process of predicting the validity determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entry opening 64 (starting winning) which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of a first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (there is a starting prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702 ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of balls held for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of balls held is not stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A command for the number of held balls to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1705). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer. (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the result of the judgment of the first special symbol, the determined winning type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted success/failure determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole (first ball entry hole) 64 and is newly held and stored, the judgment result is determined based on the held and stored information. is determined before the start of the fluctuation and is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. This allows you to change the display mode of the held ball (for example, change the color of the held ball to a different color than usual) based on the stored validity judgment results, or display the held ball in a different color than normal. It is possible to display a preview symbol or the like to perform an effect that suggests the result of the judgment to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and is performed during the fluctuation display of the second symbol and the fluctuation time performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 64a accompanying this.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S1801). When a normal symbol (second symbol) hits, there is a time when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win, and when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is performed. This includes while the work is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S1801: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing). (S1802), and when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol fluctuation) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current normal symbol is a hit, the normal symbol is changing. If it is determined that there is no state among them, that is, a state in which it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), data (second winning random number It is determined whether or not the data (value of counter C4) is stored (S1804), and if the data is not stored (S1804: No), it is not possible to execute the normal symbol lottery, so this process is immediately terminated. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, if it is determined that data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1807). Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, a lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As mentioned above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and the normal symbol is won. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "232", It is determined that the pattern is outside the normal pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S1808 is a normal symbol win (S1809), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S1809: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol is a win or not. The display mode is set (S1810), and the process moves to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S1809: No), the display mode when the pattern is out is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S1811.

When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the process of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. state) (S1811: Yes), sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device to 3 seconds (S1813), and then sets the short fluctuation flag 203t on. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that it is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (it is in the low probability state of normal symbols) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process ends.

In addition, the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. This is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a can be varied depending on which game state the normal symbol variation (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In this embodiment, the gaming state at the start (execution) timing of normal symbol variation (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may also be used. For example, when it is determined that the drawing result of a normal symbol is a win, the gaming state at the time when the drawing of the normal symbol was executed is stored in the gaming state storage means that can always store the currently set gaming state. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means is provided to always remember the period in which the normal state is set, and the period stored in that means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the drawing of the normal symbol is carried out. By doing so, it may be configured such that the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is performed can be determined. In other words, it is sufficient to have a configuration that includes a storage device that can store the currently set gaming state and a storage device that can store at least the gaming state that was set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S1813, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. In addition, the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit. (confirmed display). Thereby, the player can easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or S1812.

When the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106) It is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S1818). If it is determined that the current lottery result is an outlier of the normal symbols (S1818: No), the present process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether the short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

In the process of S1819, if it is determined that the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current regular symbol lottery (fluctuation) was started is If it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of openings is set to 1 (S1824), and the process moves to S1823. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1819, if it is determined that the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to on, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the current regular symbol lottery (variation) is started is the time short state. If so (S1819: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (time saving) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) was started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened is set to 0.2 seconds. It is set to once (S1824), and the process moves to S1823.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a time-saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the current normal symbol lottery (variation) was started and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Since the timing for setting the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened is set to two times ( 64a) (S1822), and the process moves to S1823.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player, so for example, if the normal symbol lottery ( Even if the time-saving state is set before the normal symbol's variation time (10 seconds) ends after the variation) is executed and the winning occurs, the long open is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. Nothing happens. Similarly, if a player wins in a normal symbol variation (lottery) executed while the time saving state is set, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol variation stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is never set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous benefit (long opening of the electric accessory 64a) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the electric accessory 64a from being opened long when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to draw a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to a time saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state is determined at the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, and the gaming state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a based on this, other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing at which the drawing (variation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are both in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48 It may be configured such that the opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48 is set (opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) is set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) is set in other states. With this configuration, a benefit (long release) advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations executed before and after the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, compared to the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is very short from "10 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore. , since the open period of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 becomes extremely long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Become. In addition, in this embodiment, since the time saving state is configured to end when a jackpot game is executed, a normal state is entered during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the time saving state is configured to be set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the small winning game is executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, there is a period in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is long open, and a plurality of winning holes (first specific winning hole 65a, lower first ball opening) are opened. 64b2) becomes a specific period in which it is easy to hit the ball.

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. , It is preferable to configure the ball so that it enters two winning holes (specific winning hole 65a, lower first ball entrance hole 64b2) during the small winning game, thereby increasing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small winning game. This makes it possible to provide more advantageous benefits to players.

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1820, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening/closing of the electric accessory 64a is set. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 if there is a winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

When the process of S1904 is finished, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is stored in the empty holding area (holding first The data is stored in the first area (from area to fourth reserved area) (S1905), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2, which is provided when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win, is a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state. .

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal pattern, the player can play the game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a preliminary determination result of a general figure, not only is the effect based on the result of the judgment of the correctness of the ordinary figure, but also the electric accessory 64a is released when the general figure is determined to be a hit. It is a good idea to create a performance that suggests the timing. By doing this, in a normal game state, a game is played aiming at the left side game area of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (the ball entry port to which the electric accessory 64a is attached) is located on the game board 13. Even if the electric accessory 64a is placed on the right side of the game board 13, it is possible to switch to a game in which the player aims at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed play) before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation. Even if the ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2, the possibility of the ball entering the lower first ball entry port 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process moves to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored ( S2105: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S2110 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S2110 in such a case. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2111, S2112).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S2111, S2112) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (Fig. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment values (checksum value, etc.) are normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit execution of various effects (S2113). Thereafter, the state of the variable probability flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read out (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 ends, interrupts are permitted (S2116), and the process moves to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) (S2201).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). Jackpot control processing is executed (S2204). Regarding this jackpot control process (S2204), details will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process for setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, electric accessory opening/closing processing is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S2206), opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 64a is executed. After that, display update processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, a process of updating the display of the second symbol (for example, a "○" or "x" symbol) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained on the second symbol display device. A variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. Then, a second symbol (normal symbol) is drawn based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) becomes a winning state, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2210: Yes), the process moves to S2201, and each process from S2201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main process (S2210: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211, S2212).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S2201 to S2208 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S2209, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S2214). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It can start from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S2101). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of the first specific prize. This is a process for opening or closing the opening (large opening opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario has been set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is set to the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to .

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (start of jackpot) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening/closing operation of the specific prize opening 650a during the jackpot ( S2306), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2307). Here, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) win in total while the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a is opened, or when the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a is opened, When the opening period of the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open is set to be closed in the process of S2308, This process ends. Note that the above-described determination processing from S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is If it is the start timing (S2309: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S2310), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. In the process of S2311, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), a jackpot end process is executed to set the gaming state after the jackpot ends (S2312), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot ending process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2312).

In the jackpot end process (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state at the time of winning storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is made based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability-variable flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability-variable jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. As a result, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot.

Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning and the jackpot type read in the process of S2401 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "Jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to "10000" in order to continue the high probability state of normal symbols until the next jackpot, and "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type. ” is set, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to “100” in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100.

When the process of S2404 is finished, next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF, and the winning status storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). Thereafter, a status command corresponding to the set gaming status is set (S2406), and the present process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements are used to set the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probability change flag 203g, time saving counter 203f). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the jackpot type of the won jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small win control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether a small win scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-game stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed, and it is determined whether a small winning scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if a small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if a small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small win scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small win scenario (S2503: Yes), a small win opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the process of S2505, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S2505: Yes), the small win operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small winning operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) win in total while the specific winning hole 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition has been met.

In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and the main process is continued. end. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command for a small win is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

In the process of S2511, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (S2511: Yes), the small win medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small win (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513) and the present process ends. Details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small winning operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small winning control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506).

In the small winning operation setting process (S2506), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning hole 65a is set based on the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small win control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning hole 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2701, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected (S2703), and the process goes to the specific winning hole 65a. If no winning has been detected (S2703: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) ( S2705: No), this process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is the upper limit (5 in this embodiment) or more (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the accompanying opening/closing plate 65f1) is set to close (S2706). Next, the small win scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S4117 (see Figure 59). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, upon receiving power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the audio lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in S4117. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S4117 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the reason why the process in S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a major power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area 223j is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S4008 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the process has reached the above process, or when only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and the process is started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is a process of clearing the work area of RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S4010, and the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S4010).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the working area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main processing was started or since the processing in S4101 was previously executed (S4101), and 1 millisecond If the above period has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is the process of S4102 to S4111 related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4112 and the variable display setting process in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S4113 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device. 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production processing, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is then executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S4110). After this, the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process moves to S4112. Details of this various counter updating processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Thereafter, command determination processing (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process moves to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process for setting for transmission to the destination, is executed (S4113). Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202) and this process is ended. Details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 is determined. (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this status command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process of setting the status) in the status setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special map 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206), and the command is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and this processing is ended. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol) used in cases where

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209), and the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) used in cases where

In the process of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (i.e., the first The value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display of the special symbol). S4212), this process ends. In addition, since this embodiment does not have a configuration to hold and store the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), in the process of S4212, the value of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is Only update processing is executed.

Here, the held ball count command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so it is sent by the process of S4212 every time there is a starting winning. , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, the start When the number of reserved balls command is notified based on winning a prize, the value of the first special symbol reserved number of balls counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the value of the first special symbol reserved number of balls of the main controller 110 is changed. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the number of reserved pitches command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (the success or failure of the special symbol lottery, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern) is converted into the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received from the main control device (S4215). In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4215: Yes), the win-related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. Details of the win-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the special symbol lottery, it is a production corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a short remaining time command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the short remaining time count command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining count update process (S4218) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be explained with reference to FIG. 66, but based on the remaining time shortening number command output from the main controller 110, Processing for setting the content of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number of times command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. Details of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the process determines the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. When the special figure 1 variation restart command or the special figure 2 variation restart command is received, a process is executed to set the production (additional production) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S4221), and this process ends. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

As explained above, the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment includes the process to determine whether a status command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60). , is configured before the process of determining whether a variation pattern command for each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, during the first special symbol fluctuation start process of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) that is executed thereafter, the game Even if a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the currently set gaming state on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, in the case where a jackpot of special drawing 1 is won in a state where a variable probability state is set, and a probability state is set during the jackpot variation, the audio lamp control device 113 side will not be able to determine whether the probability state has been set. It is possible to easily set a variation performance (see FIG. 7(a)) corresponding to a variation pattern command that results in a jackpot variation in the determined state.

Note that, unlike the configuration of this embodiment, if the configuration is configured to execute processing according to the fluctuation pattern command before the state command determination processing, from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot fluctuation, the probability fluctuation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery during the state is received first, and a variable display is set according to the received contents. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute a variable display indicating that the probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. As the variable display indicating that the potential state has been set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player that he/she will be allowed to play the right-handed game is delayed, causing discomfort to the player. The problem arises.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main controller 110 side performs a process of varying the gaming state after determining whether or not the jackpot has occurred (see S306 in FIG. 33) and setting a variation pattern (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update processing (S308 in FIG. 33)), the audio lamp control device 113 side first executes a process to determine the current gaming state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then It is configured to set a fluctuation display corresponding to a fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even though a potential state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent a variable display corresponding to a previous gaming state from being set and executed.

In addition, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to specify the order in which various commands are output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. This makes it possible to reduce the Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed during the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop type command is set to ON. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special chart 1 stop type command or special chart 2 stop type command (S4302), and the main Finish the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Each is stored in a way that allows identification of the stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (Special symbol 2) start varying at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop type respectively, and to execute appropriate variation display. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the status command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed during the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the status command processing (S4204) will be explained below.

In this status command processing (S4204), a process is executed to set the current gaming status in the status setting area 223j based on the status command output from the main controller 110, and when the gaming status shifts to the probable status, , a process for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6(b))) to notify the player that the potential state has been set, and a process for setting the effect when the gaming state has transitioned to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is a definite state (S4402). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the probable state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the probable state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to a potential state (S4403: Yes), a potential notification effect is set to notify entry into a potential state (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process moves to S4406.

On the other hand, in the process of 4402, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the status command is a definite state (S4402: Yes), each process of S4403 and S4404 is skipped, and the process of S4405 is executed, The process moves to S4406. Further, in the process of S4403, if the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the probable state (S4403: No), the process of S4404 and S4405 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating a transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the process of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the process of S4411 described later is executed, and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to on (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), and the card notification completed flag 223q and card notification possible flag are set. 223s, the rush display flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the process of S4408 and S4409 is skipped, the process of S4410 and S4411 is executed, and the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related process (S4216). In this win-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. When a jackpot or small jackpot is won, processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command to indicate the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small winning game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and Based on the result, a process for displaying a forget card reminder screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

In the winning related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) is a jackpot related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4502), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the win related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). The jackpot-related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, the main controller Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start command is received in the win related command received in the win related process (S4216) (S4601). When a jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this process is ended. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4603). If the number of rounds command is received (S4603: Yes), a number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S4604), and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 transmits information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands. The configuration may be such that the number is calculated and a display round number command is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. It is determined whether it is (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), the processes of S4610 to S4611 described above are executed, and the main Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S4612, if it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), game information (opening, In addition to the process of setting display contents (ending, number of rounds), the configuration is configured to execute a process of determining whether to display a forgetting card warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)).

This card forgetting warning screen is displayed when a player obtains a predetermined amount (for example, 250 balls) of prize balls in a winning game (big win game, small win game). This is a notification mode to remind people not to forget the valuable media used in the event. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the number of prize balls obtained during the period (continuous advantageous period) after winning a jackpot from the normal state and shifting to the normal state again satisfies the predetermined amount. It is configured to display a reminder screen for forgetting.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot (jackpot A, If you win jackpot B), a card notification will be executed to display a screen reminding you to forget your card at the end of the jackpot game, and if you win any other jackpot (jackpot C, jackpot D), a card notification will be executed. It is configured so that it does not.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a warning screen for forgetting a card is displayed for a player who has not acquired a predetermined amount of prize balls, and to continue playing the game while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable while playing the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to jackpot games, a gaming state (potential state) in which it is easy to frequently execute small winning games can be set, so that by repeating small winning games, the player can A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the cumulative result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is executed at that point. The system is configured so that a warning screen for forgetting a card is displayed on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or small win game. Thereby, it is possible to display a warning screen for forgetting a card to the player at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the card forgetting warning screen from being frequently displayed and causing discomfort to the player. Note that the method of displaying the card forgetting reminder screen is not limited to the content of this embodiment, and for example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous duration is provided, and the elapsed period since the last card forgetting reminder screen was displayed. If the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting reminder screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting alert screen has been displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting alert screen have already been met), during the special symbol fluctuation period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) If a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds or more is selected), it is preferable to display a card forgetting warning screen.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current gaming situation by utilizing the player's fixed concept that the forget card warning screen is displayed after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, as a method to achieve the same effect, a screen may be displayed for reminding the player to forget the card during the opening period of the jackpot game and the small win game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command is a small win related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small win related command (S4503: Yes), small win related processing (S4504) is executed and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small win related process (S4504) which is one process in the win related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). The small hit related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small win game that is executed when the small win is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small winning related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the winning related command received in the winning related process (S4216) is a small winning start command (S4701). When the small winning start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small winning start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S4703: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4703: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to on (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( S4709), the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, even in a small winning game where the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen are not satisfied in one game, after winning the jackpot in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the gaming period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display conditions (for example, the number of prize balls acquired reaches 250 shots), a small win will be awarded. The system is configured so that a warning screen for forgetting a card is displayed even after the game is over. Thereby, it is possible to display a warning screen for forgetting a card to the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notification flag 223q is set to on (S4507). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to on (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). If it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and the prize ball number command for display is set. (S4510), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or if the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250 in the process of S4508. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is determined through the status command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal status is set, and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The prize ball number counter 223u is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls commands received during the period (advantageous continuation period). The system is configured to display a card forgetting warning screen according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u at the end of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) (at the ending screen display timing).

As a result, for example, if the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game) In this case, a card forgetting warning screen can be displayed when the player wins a small winning game during the advantageous period, or when the player wins the jackpot C again.

Next, the remaining number of times updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of this remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is Based on the reception of this, a process is executed to update the contents set in the remaining time shortening number area 223k, the remaining variable time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether a short remaining time number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining time shortening number of times command has not been received (S4801: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display time reduction number command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be explained. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received, the third symbol display device Processing for setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed in step 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4901: No), the fluctuation restart process is executed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual fluctuation time is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating a short time is set (S4905), and the process moves to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and is less than 15 seconds. If it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), period B indicating that it is a normal residual fluctuation time is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. is set (S4907), and the process moves to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4906, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeds 15 seconds) (S4906: No), the residual fluctuation time is indicated in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period C is set (S4908), and the process moves to S4902. In this way, the variation time (remaining variation period) that will be executed when the special pattern variation is restarted is calculated at the timing when the special pattern variation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special pattern variation time is interrupted), and the corresponding period is calculated. By setting the information to do so, it is possible to perform a performance (additional performance) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is restarted is different. For example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select period C. The ratio may be configured to vary depending on the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided into predetermined intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional performance executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is to execute a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether the special map 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No), this process is ended. . On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the residual fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S5002 ), the additional performance type is determined from the additional performance selection table 222c based on the read remaining variation time information and the additional performance counter 223i (S5003). Next, an additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this processing is ended.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the special figure variation is interrupted, the special figure variation is resumed after the normal effect (the effect display that is executed when the special figure variation is started) ends. A shaking effect is performed in which the third symbol is displayed in a oscillating manner until the special figure change is restarted, and an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after restarting is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, a performance period determining means for determining a normal performance period during which a normal performance is performed is provided, and when the performance period determination means determines that the normal performance period has ended, an additional performance may be executed. Good too. By configuring in this way, the normal performance and the additional performance can be executed continuously, so that it is possible to provide a more suitable performance display to the player. In addition, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional production period during which the additional production is executed and the special symbol fluctuation period after restarting, but the additional production will continue to be executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swinging effect may be performed in which the third symbol is displayed swinging. Furthermore, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an additional effect is performed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is based on the first or special pattern 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (Jackpot A to Jackpot G), a process is executed to set a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S5107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5103: Yes), a variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). In this special symbol 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is a potential state, the first special symbol display setting is performed based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A process of setting a probability fluctuation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the special figure 1 variation display setting process (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read in the process of S5201 is set as the sub-special figure 1. The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is a value greater than 0 (S5203). If it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a display rush entry command is set (S5204), and a rush display flag 223t is set on (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 mentioned above is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a potential variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5103: No), in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the command extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command The variation pattern in the variation display performance of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a variable pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variable pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper two bits of the upper byte of the 2-byte display variation pattern command are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it is compatible with .

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then executed in the command output process (see FIG. 59) of the main process (see FIG. 59). S4102) is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the first special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the first special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the fluctuating display performance is started so that the fluctuating display of symbols is performed.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command are consumed (i.e., the variation corresponding to the reserved balls of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the display setting (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109).

In the special figure 2 variation display setting process (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5301), and the read variation A value corresponding to the time is set in the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (S5303). If it is determined that it is in the potential state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read out (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), a rush entry command for display is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a potential variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5303: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display flag 223t is set to on. (S5304: Yes), the above-described processes of S5305 to S5308 are skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in a state where the potential state is set in the state setting area 223j, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation period, the potential state is set. When setting a fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is fluctuating, and when it is determined that special symbol 2 is not fluctuating, is configured so that a rush entry command is set as the effect mode of the variable display. In other words, the configuration is such that a screen (see FIG. 7(a)) that notifies the player that a rush has entered is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 variation is executed. are doing.

On the other hand, when setting a fluctuating display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is likely to occur during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is fluctuating, and the special symbol 2 is determined to be in a variable state, the display mode is to display a screen indicating that the state is in a potential state (see FIG. 6(b)) without setting a rush entry command for display. configured to display.

As a result, if the display rush entry command is set and a right-handed game is performed at the time when the screen notifying the player that the rush has entered is displayed (see Figure 7 (a)), the The lottery of the second special symbol can be executed during the probability state, and a game that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player can be provided.

In addition, when setting a fluctuating display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is in a potential state during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is fluctuating, and the special symbol 2 If it is determined that is in the process of changing, the special figure 2 variation in progress may be forcibly terminated, and a new special figure 2 variation may be executed.

In addition, the setting timing of the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the potential state during the special figure 2 fluctuation is not limited to the contents of this embodiment, and it is necessary to provide a game that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. It would be good if it had a configuration that can do this. For example, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation that is fluctuating has ended at the timing when the potential state is set, a display rush entry command may be set, or the fluctuating at the timing when the potential state is set. It may be configured such that the remaining time until the middle special figure 2 fluctuation ends is determined, and when the determination result is a predetermined time (1 second), a display rush entry command is set. In this case, the predetermined time to be set is the time required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 and starts a right-handed game until the ball launched in the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. It is sufficient if the time is shorter than the period, and may be set as appropriate depending on the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this second special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), if the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on, sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to OFF, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to OFF (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is ended. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, a display special figure 2 stop type command is set for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type. . In addition, the special map 1 or special map 2 stop type command notified from the main controller 110 is for notifying the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and will be notified even if the judgment result is a loss. be done. If the determination result is a loss, the stop type is not referred to and a loss symbol is set.

Next, various counter updating processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this various counter updating processing (S4111). This various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is a process that executes updates.

In the various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped, and the process of S5403 Shift to processing. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, read out the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m and the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n (S5405), and read out the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m from the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are subtracted by 1 (S5408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-mentioned S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 is executed, and this processing ends.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM 234d can operate at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further points the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program, which is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released, is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image in a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), a simple Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable production is issued. If a display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation is displayed. Can perform. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 29, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The corresponding stop type table and stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to G, small hit A to C, out of reach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to on (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display If there is a rush entry command (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rush entry command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flowchart showing rush entry command processing. This rush entry command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the rush entry command processing, first, a rush entry display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush entry effect indicated by the display rush entry command is determined, and the determined rush entry display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the rush entry command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no rush entry command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect is executed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), additional effect command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the additional effect command processing (S6417) will be explained with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the additional effect command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the additional performance command processing, first, an additional performance display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional performance indicated by the additional performance command for display is determined, and the determined additional performance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, based on the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type ( (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) that is executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is ". As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), the pointer 233f is updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. It means something.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S7210), and then writes Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag 233z, which indicates that a confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state, to ON (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. After the elapse of time, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that a demonstration is being produced in the on state, is set to on (S7221), this process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect has ended, so continue with the display setting process. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process moves to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. do. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

In addition, in this 1st Embodiment, although the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be performed simultaneously in parallel, it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being executed, other variable displays may not be executed. When there are held balls, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display is performed in order from the held balls with the oldest starting winnings in terms of time. With this configuration, control can be simplified and processing load can be reduced.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and the normal state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of normal symbols) There are four game states: short-time state (low probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols), and potential state (high probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols). There is. The system is configured such that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In other words, when the probability state is set, the variable time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By specifying the time period to be shorter than when the time period is set, it is possible to most efficiently carry out a lottery that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the player is made to expect the potential state to be set.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific prize opening 65a is opened not only in the case of a jackpot but also in the case of a small win, thereby increasing the probability that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. In this state, the number of prize balls can continue to increase. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of a potential state. In a general gaming machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous ). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is in progress, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating due to a stop symbol of a jackpot or small win, the other fluctuation display will show the remaining fluctuation time and lottery. Regardless of the result, a missed stop symbol will be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which the other variable display is confirmed to be a win or a small win while a jackpot or a small win is being executed, and the jackpot or small win is started overlappingly.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, , the high probability state of the normal symbols shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the probability state. While this potential state is set, the fluctuating display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery results of the second special symbol is set short, so it is not possible to perform many lottery draws of the second special symbol. This is the period when it is possible (special map 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, so during the period when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) that is advantageous to a player who frequently executes a small winning game that is executed when a player wins a prize and can win a large number of prize balls.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the period in which the probability state is set (special symbol 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that won the jackpot in the probability variable state. (Special figure 1 jackpot is changing), so when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are set consecutively, it is possible to continuously provide various benefits to the player. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol (special symbol 2) and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period When the small winning game ends, the suspended measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small winning game, so regardless of the number of small winning games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 fluctuating advantageous period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special symbol 1), the other special symbol (special symbol 2) which is changing is displayed in a stop display mode indicating a loss. It is configured to force a stop. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the content of control over the fluctuation of the other special symbol is varied depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is used to indicate that the lottery result is a loss. If the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the provision of the second benefit ends (until the small winning game ends), and restarted after the provision of the second benefit ends. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a loss, the variation of the other special symbol is configured to be executed as is.

With this configuration, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents (the lottery result and the period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be varied, and the player's It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay features.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can provide a benefit to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is changed depending on the content of the benefit. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that grants the player the most advantageous benefit (jackpot game), the lottery result that corresponds to the change in the other special symbol during execution may not be the lottery result that grants the benefit. Even if there is a lottery result, we will forcibly stop the fluctuations so that the lottery results are out of order, and suppress excessive benefits from being given to players. In this case, in order to prevent the award of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol that is being executed, the variable display is displayed. It becomes possible to interrupt only period measurement.

Therefore, in a state where multiple special symbols (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the least advantageous benefit for the player is awarded, and the most advantageous benefit that will be awarded later is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are no longer played, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are uncomfortable from occurring.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, a short period (0.5 seconds) of variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), The game is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the probability state as the gaming state is the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability variable state is set, and the condition for the probability state to end is set as the first special symbol. is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, so the jackpot game is executed after the first advantageous period that is advantageous to players who frequently execute small winning games. A second gaming period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set consecutively, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts during the probability change state, the probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the probability state In the state where is set, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be drawn efficiently.

Therefore, the system was configured to notify the player of the period during which the probable state will be set (based on the fact that the probable state has been set) at the same time as the probable state is set (Fig. 7 (a). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since it is possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in a state where the probability change state is set, the first special symbol also changes to the second special symbol. Both special designs may also vary.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the potential state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the potential state is set (see FIG. 7(a)), the second Until the special symbols stop changing, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the potential state, and a problem arises in which the small winning game is not executed for any length of time even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of fluctuation, The structure is configured such that the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the determination result.

Specifically, when the conditions for transition to the potential state are met, it will be notified that the RUSH state has been set if it is determined that the change of the new second special symbol is in an executable state. It consists of Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new change in the second special symbol is not started and a small winning game is not executed despite the notification that the RUSH state has been set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the potential state are satisfied, the period from when a new second special symbol change becomes executable until the end of the potential state is determined. If the determined period is less than a predetermined period, it is configured not to notify that the RUSH state has been set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being started without the small win game being executed even though it has been reported that the RUSH state has been set.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts, and the game state is changed to a low probability state. It is configured to set a probability state, and if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. , is configured so that the probability change state continues even during the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different gaming properties depending on the type of special symbol.

Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in a variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol changes to a low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured such that a potential state is set as the gaming state by transitioning to the game state, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among multiple jackpot types, the normal state is set at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured such that a probability state is set as a gaming state by shifting a symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. The configuration may be such that a potential state is set as the gaming state.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, a probability state is set for a period from the time when the jackpot variation starts until the jackpot variation ends. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on predicting that a jackpot will be won in the starting winning process (see FIG. 47), the period until the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information ends ( (multiple fluctuation periods) may be configured to set a potential state.

In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the potential state is set, a constant variation pattern table is always set regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the setting of the potential state. (See FIG. 19(b)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the potential state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it has occurred, and to change the data table for selecting a variation pattern based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is When the number of times has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average variation time is about 1 second. Thereby, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as a jackpot variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small winning games can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation in the probability variation state, but in addition to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific miss or a small win. It may be configured such that a probability state is set during the variable display of the case, or when the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is a certain miss or a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times during the variable probability state. The configuration may also be such that the potential state is set when this occurs.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are set. In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is made into a potential state, and the small winning game is more likely to be executed when the potential state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol confirmation period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) during which the lottery results of special symbols are displayed. It is configured to allow In other words, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot) is configured to set the potential state as the gaming state at the timing when the is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol confirmation period is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period in which a potential state advantageous to the player is set depending on the length of the symbol confirmation period that is set. In addition, compared to the configuration in which the potential state is set corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol (the period in which the special symbol is being varied) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (the period in which the special symbol is being varied) is Since a configuration is used in which the potential state is set in accordance with the period during which the symbol is stopped, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the potential state is set can be simplified. , control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, but in the second embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot is set, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won. Even if you have not won, the variable probability state will end when a predetermined ending condition (the number of special symbol variations after the variable probability state is set reaches a predetermined number (50 times)) is met. They differ in that they are structured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in order to shift to the probable state during the period in which the variable probability state is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a specific jackpot (jackpot C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the variable probability state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88(c)). The potential state is set during the period until execution (design confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the probability state is set, a game for drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, similarly to the first embodiment described above. In addition, if a small hit of special pattern 2 is won during the pattern confirmation period of special pattern 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the pattern confirmation period of special pattern 1 is interrupted during the period when the small winning game is being executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery result is a loss or a small hit, different symbol confirmation periods are set depending on the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol confirmation period for the lottery result of special drawing 1 (the lottery result that won the jackpot) corresponding to the period in which the probability state is set, In the state where the probability state is set, it is desired that a short period be set as the pattern confirmation period in order to execute more lottery of the special figure 2.

In other words, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period varies depending on the lottery result, there are cases where a long symbol confirmation period is desired and cases where a short symbol confirmation period is desired depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. and can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from predicting the symbol confirmation period in advance based on the fluctuation display contents of the special symbol, and which symbol confirmation period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol is displayed until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to adjust the variation effect (effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) executed in response to one variation time (variation pattern). Since it is configured to set multiple types of symbol confirmation periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after a special symbol is drawn, the next special symbol can be drawn) Even if the time period until the end of the event) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variation effects.

The example explained with reference to FIG. 88 shows the flow of the game in the case where the probability variable state is set, that is, when the remaining time shortening number is 47, and the jackpot of special drawing 1 is won. The system is configured such that the probability state is set from the moment the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, if you win the jackpot of special chart 1 at the timing when the variable probability state ends (the value of the variable probability counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special drawing lottery after the variable probability state is set) The probability state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

By configuring in this way, advantageous periods of different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 in a state where the probability variable state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while hoping to win the jackpot at the timing when a long advantageous period is set, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed when the variable probability state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the content of the special figure 1 game and the awarded points after the variable probability state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the gaming state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in a state where the probability variable state is set, and the number of drawings (the number of special symbol fluctuations). It is configured to do so. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the variable probability state is set continuously until the number of drawings (variable number) of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning a jackpot. If you win a jackpot between 1 and 49 times when the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is 1 to 49, the symbol will be in a state of probability change and the special symbol indicating the jackpot will be stopped and displayed during the fluctuation of the jackpot. During the definite period, a potential state is set. As a result, the player is given a bonus game (RUSH game) during the pattern determination period and a jackpot game after the finalization period ends.

Next, when a jackpot is won for the 50th time when the special symbol lottery number (variation frequency) is won, a potential state is set during the jackpot variation and during the symbol confirmation period. As a result, the player is given a bonus of a potential state game (RUSH game) from jackpot fluctuation to the end of the symbol confirmation period, and a jackpot game after the potential state ends. In other words, in the second embodiment, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the condition for transition to the probability state (jackpot winning) is established when a specific condition (specific number of drawings (50th)) is satisfied. If the specific condition is satisfied, the player is provided with a more advantageous benefit than if the condition for transition to the probable state was satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied.

When the number of times the special symbol is drawn exceeds 50 times, the predetermined number of probability variations is reached and the normal state is set as the gaming state. If a jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of draws (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is a loss from the 1st to 49th time after the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state will remain unchanged during the variation of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. If it continues and it is a miss on the 50th time, the probability state will be set during the special symbol fluctuation and the symbol confirmation period, so the probability state will be from the special symbol variation to the end of the symbol confirmation period. The game (RUSH game) becomes executable.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation time of the special symbol in the variable probability state and the symbol confirmation period, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is determined that the lottery result other than the jackpot (missing) is a jackpot. For example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot, the variable time is set to 60 seconds to 180 seconds. ” is selected, and a symbol confirmation period of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the symbol confirmation period, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a jackpot (for example, a loss), the The configuration is such that a variable time of "0.5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the variable time, and a symbol confirmation period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period.

By configuring in this way, the potential state game (RUSH game) can be played for up to 330 seconds (if you win the jackpot on the 50th special symbol variation number) and at the minimum depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lottery numbers. It is possible to provide the player with a range of 5 seconds (if the jackpot is won on the 1st to 49th number of special symbol fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how long the current potential state will continue.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, if the special symbol lottery number (variation number) after the probability change state is set is the 50th, during the variation of the special symbol, , Since the configuration is such that the potential state is set during the pattern confirmation period, even if the player does not win the jackpot during the pattern confirmation period, the player is not allowed to play the potential state game (RUSH game). can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the potential state game (RUSH game), compared to the configuration of the first embodiment in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is provided only when a jackpot is won. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to experience the rush game (RUSH game) and becomes bored with the game despite having played the game for a long time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a longer potential state is set when the potential state is set based on winning a jackpot during a variable probability state than when a potential state is set without winning a jackpot. It is designed to be easy. As a result, the longer the period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed, the more likely it is that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the potential state game (RUSH game). Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a potential state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting that a jackpot game will be executed.

Note that, unlike the configuration of this embodiment described above, in some cases where the potential state is set without winning the jackpot, it is equivalent to the case where the potential state is set based on winning the jackpot. , or set a fluctuation time or symbol confirmation period corresponding to the special symbol lottery result other than a jackpot (missing, small win) so that a potential state game (RUSH game) with a longer length is executed. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a situation in which it would be advantageous not to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a game with surprises.

In this embodiment, as described above, if a jackpot is won during a variable probability state, a long probability state is likely to be set. It may be configured such that when a state is set, a long potential state is set. In this case, for example, if the number of probability variations (the number of drawings (number of variations) of special symbols in which the probability variation state is continuously set) is 50, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol, is 1/20. It is preferable to configure the system so that a long potential state is set when the special symbol lottery result is a loss 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, display contents that are different from those in the first embodiment described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, since the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period, the special symbol 1 for the production content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in a potential state. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the second embodiment, the potential state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), so the potential state is set. The production mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the second special symbol is fluctuating over the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8(a)) in that it is executed during a period in which the second symbol for display is stopped and displayed (determined display). Since other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), the display mode of the third symbol ("777") to indicate that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has won the jackpot is displayed in a stopped state, and this time This indicates that the probability state is set based on the winning of the jackpot with the first special symbol during the probability variable state. In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is formed in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that is visible to the player, the player cannot see the special figure 1 display area Dm1. By understanding the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the performance mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicating that the potential state has been set, it is possible to determine the future flow of the game. It is possible to play a game in a state in which information (information as to whether a jackpot game will be executed after the completion of a potential state game) is obtained in advance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when a potential state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, when a special symbol lottery is performed during the potential state, a falling lottery (special symbol The system is configured so that a lottery (for transitioning from a high probability state to a low probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to understand whether the current potential state is an advantageous potential state that is advantageous for the player. You can play games with peace of mind.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol. In order to make it difficult for players to identify, the display area may be reduced or a display screen other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a display other than the third symbol display device 81) may be used. A configuration may also be used in which display is performed using a liquid crystal display device (such as a liquid crystal display device). By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand why the potential state was set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the end of the potential state game (RUSH game). The game can be played while predicting whether or not the game will be held, or whether or not a falling lottery will be executed during the potential state game (RUSH game).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from the time when the third symbol is stopped displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the final display period (symbol confirmation period) elapses. Although it is configured to completely stop without changing it, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used, for example, as long as it notifies the player that the special symbol is currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period). Although the variable display of the third symbol is stopped during the fixed display period, the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be changed to such an extent that the player cannot identify it. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, players may be asked whether they are currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period) or because they have not yet acquired the right to a new special symbol drawing (fluctuation). ) may be configured to set a display mode for the player to identify whether or not it is in a state where it is not being executed. ” command, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between “confirmed display” and “standby”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition that a new lottery will not be started during the final display period, despite the state having a pending memory.

Next, using FIG. 90(b), the display contents when entering the potential state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when entering the potential state game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90(b), in this embodiment, the potential state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so the potential state game (RUSH game) The performance mode indicating the entry is executed during the period when the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8(b)). Since other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. They differ in that they are Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, there is a jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and instead of the small hit type selection table 202e, a small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is used. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a variable pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided in place of the variable pattern selection table 202f, and a deviation type selection table 202ad is further provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa differs from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment in that the type of jackpot type has been changed, and various counters (time saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa) that are set after the jackpot ends. , confirmed time counters 203ad, 203ae) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is different. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa specifies the same jackpot operation contents as the jackpot types specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa, special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad, and special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae are defined for each jackpot type.

Specifically, for jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is selected, The time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "100" when the gaming state (when the game is played) is a normal state or a probability state, and a value of "50" when it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Therefore, it is specified that the probability change counter 203aa is set to a value of "50".

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "5 seconds" is set for jackpot A1, "60 seconds" for jackpot A2, and "150 seconds" for jackpot A3, and the first winning type obtained Jackpot A1 is defined in the range of "0 to 19" for the value of counter C2 (0 to 99), jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and jackpot A3 is defined in "24". In other words, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 80% of them (20/ 25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

In other words, in this embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed, a short pattern confirmation period is used as the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, in the lottery of special symbols, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not there is a big hit, but also to the length of the symbol confirmation period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol confirmation period is defined in association with the jackpot type, but the invention is not limited to this, and the lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol confirmation periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming experience that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similar to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, for the jackpot types (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is selected, The time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0" when the gaming state (when the game is played) is a normal state or a probability state, and a value of "100" when it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Therefore, it is specified that the probability change counter 203aa is set to a value of "0". Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, "5 seconds" is set for jackpot B1, "60 seconds" is set for jackpot B2, and "150 seconds" is set for jackpot B3.

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 93(a). FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the winnings A to small winnings C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Specifically, as the small win type in which the small win operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small win A of the first embodiment is executed, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9". , "Small win A1" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "Small win A2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is in the range of "90 to 93". ``Small win A3'' with a symbol confirmation time of ``1.5 seconds'' is defined in the range of ``.''.

Then, as the small winning type in which the small winning operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small winning B of the first embodiment is executed, the symbol is confirmed when the value of the small winning type counter C5 is in the range of "94 to 95". "Small win B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96-97", "Small win B2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is a symbol with a value of "98" "Small win B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Furthermore, as a small winning type in which the small winning operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small winning C of the first embodiment is executed, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is "99" and the symbol confirmation time is "1". A small winning operation (opening operation) of 5 seconds is specified.

Next, the contents of the deviation type selection table 202ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 93(b). This loss type selection table 202ad is referred to in order to select the loss type when the lottery result of a special symbol is a loss. A fixed time is specified.

In this embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5 ) to select the type. Thereby, the number of counters that main control device 110 has can be reduced. Note that the configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which different counters are used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss.

FIG. 93(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93(b), the symbol type (missing type) with a symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponds to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is defined in correspondence with the value of the type counter C5.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set lottery results of jackpot, small win, and loss as special symbol lottery results, and it is also possible to set different symbol confirmation times for each lottery result. It is composed of Thereby, even if the special symbol lottery results are the same, different symbol determination times can be set.

Here, for example, if the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot and the probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, the longer the time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol confirmation time, the longer the symbol confirmation period will be. , it is possible to lengthen the period during which the potential state is set, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the longer the symbol determination time is selected, the fewer the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery numbers) becomes, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) when the potential state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. During a potential state game (RUSH game) in which a lottery is executed, if the lottery result of special drawing 2 is a small hit or a loss, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and a predetermined potential state is selected. This is disadvantageous to the player because the number of special drawing 2 drawings that can be executed during the period (design determination period of special drawing 1) is reduced.

In this way, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the set symbol confirmation period depending on the special symbol lottery result, so it is possible to provide the player with novel gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, by varying the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the period during which a potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set is varied, and the period during which the potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set is varied, and the period during which the potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set is changed. Although the configuration is such that the degree of advantage provided to the player is varied by varying the number of special symbol drawings, other configurations may also be used. Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating winning is longer than a predetermined period, the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying a desirable image, or the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying the music played during the jackpot game. The selection operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol confirmation period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving/probability variable table 202ac2 will be explained. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variable 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time saving/probability variation table 202ac2 is different from the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(a)) in that the variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 is They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

In other words, in this embodiment, the probability state is set during the special symbol stop display period (design confirmation period) when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) during the probability variable state. Therefore, the variable display period of the special figure 1 during the variable probability state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a probability change counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability change flag 203g, and a special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab and a special figure 2 The difference is that a symbol confirmed flag 203ac, a special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

The variable probability counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of special symbol drawings performed in a high probability state (potential state, variable probability state) of the special symbol, and is a counter for a period in which the special symbol drawing is executed with high probability. This is to show that.

This probability change counter 203aa is set to a value defined corresponding to the won jackpot type (see figure 54) at the timing when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end process (see S2312 in Fig. 54) of the first embodiment described above. 92) is set, and its value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and a jackpot lottery is drawn according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). Similarly, it is also referred to when executing the second special symbol lottery (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is subtracted by 1 when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbols (Special symbol 1, Special symbol 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol that won the jackpot has passed. .

The special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when set to on, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. This indicates that it is during the period (during the design confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation period has passed (S853 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to OFF.

The special figure 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when set to on, the flag 203ac indicates that the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. This indicates that it is during the period (during the design confirmation period). This special pattern 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac changes the type of target special symbol from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol The only difference is the change to 2), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 1 confirmation time counter 203ad and the special symbol 2 confirmation time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2). , the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol confirmation period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time that is periodically executed (see S860 in FIG. 101), the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae become 0. In this case, a process is executed to end the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol.

The second embodiment is configured such that different symbol confirmation periods are set depending on the type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). And, it is configured so that the potential state is set as the gaming state during this symbol determination period.

Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment includes a special symbol 1 confirmation counter 223aa, a special symbol 2 confirmation counter 223ab, and a remaining confirmation time information storage area. 223ac and 223ad are different in that a confirmed flag 223ad is added.

The special pattern 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the period during which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period), and is a counter for measuring the period in which the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is stopped and displayed. When a confirmation command including information to indicate is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special drawing 1 is set.

The value set in this special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, since the potential state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (first special symbol), this special symbol By managing the value of the 1-determined counter 223aa, it is possible to set remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the potential state continues to be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 (during potential state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small win game. The configuration is such that the subtraction process is interrupted. Therefore, since the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol 1 is not subtracted while the small winning game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol confirmation period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process may be provided to accumulate the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is suspended. Specifically, a small winning game counter is provided to measure the period during which the small winning game is being executed, and the small winning game counter is used to determine the period during the small winning game during the continuously set probability state. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of It may be configured to use a medium counter to calculate the cumulative period during a small winning game in a probability state that is continuously set.

In this way, the result of the current potential state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player by calculating the cumulative interruption information that is the cumulative period during which the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period of special drawing 1 is interrupted. I can do it. Furthermore, as detailed game results of the potential state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the potential state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small wins won, and the above-mentioned interruption cumulative number. Based on the information, the game results that indicate whether or not there are more benefits earned than the design value (or than the past history), and whether or not the number of balls acquired is greater than the number of small wins won. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result indicating whether or not the cumulative interruption information is longer than the number of small wins won. Alternatively, the system may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of pitches acquired, the cumulative number of small hits, or the cumulative interruption information.

The special pattern 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the period during which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period), and is a counter for measuring the period in which the second special symbol (special pattern 2) is stopped and displayed. When a confirmation command including information to indicate is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The specific content is the same as the above-mentioned special pattern 1 confirmed counter 223aa except that the measurement target is changed to the special pattern 2 pattern confirmation period instead of the special pattern 1 pattern confirmation period, and the details are as follows. The explanation will be omitted.

The remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac stores the remaining time of the symbol confirmed period (remaining confirmed time) at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol confirmed period of the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special pattern 1). This is a data area for storing remaining confirmed time information. In the second embodiment, the performance mode when restarting the symbol confirmation period subtraction process is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. This makes it possible to predict the period until the end of the probability state by understanding the performance mode to be executed when the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period is restarted after the small winning game ends.

This remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac is stored when it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) (S4219 in FIG. 106: Yes). The remaining confirmed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related process 2 to be executed (see S4253 in FIG. 108) is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), read when setting the performance mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period. (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109), and is referred to when determining the additional performance type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the system is configured so that information indicating the remaining period of the potential state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied, the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period, that is, the potential state game is Information indicating the remaining period of time that can be executed can be obtained by understanding the production mode of various productions to be executed during the potential state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period, that is, the remaining period during which the potential state game can be executed, is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is transmitted to the player. By configuring the system to notify the player of the current period, the system allows the player to roughly understand the remaining period of the potential game and provides the player with the pleasure of predicting the specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, it may be configured to notify the player of the specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmed flag 223ad is a flag to indicate that the special symbol is in the stop display period (design confirmation period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (design confirmation period). Ru. This confirmed flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if any of the special symbols, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2), is during the symbol definite period. There is.

The flag 223ad during confirmation is a symbol confirmation that is executed when it is determined that a symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106) in the command determination process 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). It is set to on in the related process (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of special pattern 1 is within the symbol confirmation period. 108 (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special map 1 restart command has been received in the restart process (S4952 in Figure 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in Figure 108) (S5001 in Figure 109: Yes) , is referred to in order to determine whether the fluctuation state of special figure 1 is in the symbol confirmation period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small winning game is won by drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (when the small winning game is executed), or at the time when the small winning game is finished. It is determined whether the fluctuating state of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in the fluctuating display period or in the symbol confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped (fluctuating display period, It is configured to set the processing when subtracting the symbol confirmation period) and the performance mode when restarting the special drawing 1 (resuming the subtraction of the variable display period and symbol confirmation period).

By configuring in this way, the process is executed appropriately no matter what fluctuation state the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in at the timing when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). can do.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, except for the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32). (See FIG. 97), 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), and 1st special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) In place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (See Fig. 45) 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (See Fig. 103) Execute special symbol 2 off stop processing 2 (See Fig. 105) Instead of special symbol 2 off stop processing (See Fig. 46) The difference is that a first special symbol fixed period setting process (see FIG. 100) and a second special symbol fixed period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the content of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, points that are significantly different from the above-described first embodiment will be briefly explained. In the first embodiment described above, the potential state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one special symbol (special symbol 1). More specifically, in a state where a variable probability state is set, a potential state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol that won the jackpot, and a potential state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. The jackpot game is executed immediately after the variable display period ends. As a result, it is possible to have the player perform two different bonus games (a game that frequently generates small wins during a potential state, and a jackpot game) in succession, and the player can receive a large number of bonus games in a short period of time. It was possible to grant the following benefits.

Furthermore, since the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed in a state before the jackpot game is executed, the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, the jackpot game, which generally provides a larger benefit to the player than the small win game, is set in the latter half of two consecutive bonus games, even if the game results in the first half are not good. , it was possible to motivate players to acquire benefits in games (jackpot games) executed in the latter half of the game.

In addition, since the potential state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of jackpot fluctuations, it is possible to set in advance the period during which the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and excessive benefits are given to the player.

Furthermore, the period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies depending on the variation pattern selected when a jackpot is won. In other words, since the configuration is such that whether or not a jackpot game will be executed and the length of the game period of a potential state game (RUSH game) are determined by one lottery of special symbols. The processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case where a dedicated selection table is used to preset the length of the game period for the RUSH game.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the potential state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the potential state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods for the (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in advance, which may overwhelm the data area for storing the variation patterns.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed (design confirmation period) is also a period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is configured to vary depending on the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the game period of the potential state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding up (combining) the special symbol fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation period. A plurality of patterns can be set for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the potential state game (RUSH game), different symbol confirmation periods are set depending on the lottery result, so Depending on the symbol confirmation period, the number of times the special drawing 2 is drawn during a predetermined potential state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special drawing 1) can be varied.

In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the potential state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol confirmation period is set, and the potential state game (RUSH game) In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during the drawing, it is a novelty that a shorter symbol confirmation period is desired to be set, and different lottery results are desired depending on the type of special symbol to be drawn. It is possible to provide players with a certain level of gameplay.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the process for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (subtraction process of the time saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is The process for transitioning to a low probability state (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) is configured to be executed at the end of the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol will be transferred to the low probability state, and the special symbol will be activated when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured such that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state when the number of fluctuations of the symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (50 times).

In other words, in a state where the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, when the number of variations (number of drawings) of the special symbol reaches 50, that variation (the 50th variation) ) starts, the gaming state shifts to a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the timing at which the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (symbol determination period ends) It is configured such that the gaming state can shift to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) at the time of the game.

With this configuration, even if you have not won a jackpot, you can set the potential state only for a predetermined specific period (50th fluctuation period (including symbol confirmation period)) , it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the potential state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). Special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) adds the processing of S251 and S252 to the special symbol variation processing (S104) in the first embodiment described above, and replaces the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207). The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol variation stop process (S213).

In special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it has been set (S251). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process moves to S209. Details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed. Move to processing.

If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S206 mentioned above (S206: No), or if the process of S208 and S257 is executed, then the special It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is set to on. (S252).

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252: No), that is, the current second special pattern (special pattern 2) is determined by the processes of S209 and S252. If it is determined that the symbol is not in the fluctuation display or in the symbol confirmation period, a second special symbol fluctuation start process is executed to newly start the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the main Finish the process. In addition, since the processing contents of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210) are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is set to on (S252: Yes), that is, the current period is the symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special pattern 2). If it is determined that this is the case, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) is performed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, in place of the process in S402, in which the value of the probability variable counter 203aa is greater than 0. The difference is that a process (S451) for determining whether

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the special symbol wins the jackpot, so the current state of the special symbol is The variable probability flag 203g was used to indicate the high probability state, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot winning (first ending condition) is used as the condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, there is a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of lottery draws) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol during a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability change counter 203aa is for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of drawings) until the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol drawing. is configured to be

Note that any configuration other than this embodiment may be used as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the second termination condition described above is met. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second A configuration using the probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation number counter that always measures the number of variations of the special symbol (number of drawings) regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g, The number of changes of the special symbol during the probability change state may be determined based on the number of updates of the number of changes counter.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of variations of the special symbol, that is, the total number of variations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) Although the end condition (second end condition) is set to end the probability change state, the present invention is not limited to this. Figure 1 A variation counter and a special pattern 2 variation counter that only measures the number of variations (number of drawings) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are provided, and the number of variations (number of drawings) of each special symbol is It may be configured such that a termination condition (termination condition for terminating the variable probability state) is set for each of the two.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as an end condition for ending the high probability state (for example, variable probability state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first end condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol Although the second ending condition is set based on the number of drawings, other ending conditions may be set. For example, if the drawing result of a special symbol is a specific drawing result other than a jackpot (for example, a small win). A third end condition may be provided that is satisfied when the number of times that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, this third end condition may be set for the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, respectively.

In addition, a timing counter is provided to measure the time during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a fourth ending condition that is satisfied when the counter clocks a predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth end condition may be provided that can be satisfied based on the lottery result of the normal symbol executed in the state where the lottery is performed or the number of lottery lots.

In addition, when any of the plurality of ending conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state may be set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. For example, immediately before the special symbol lottery starts, immediately after the special symbol lottery is executed, the timing to start changing the special symbol, or a predetermined time after the special symbol fluctuation starts (for example, 5 seconds) have elapsed, the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the period when the special symbol has stopped displaying (the symbol has been confirmed). The configuration may be such that the transition occurs at any timing of the end of the period).

In this way, by providing a plurality of ending conditions for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and timing for ending the high probability state of the special symbol when the ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to provide the player with a special It is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high probability state of the symbols will last and when it will end (when the special symbol starts changing, when the fluctuation stops, when the symbol confirmation period ends), making the player nervous. It is possible to have the player play the game while giving the player a sense of feeling.

The other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is a process executed during the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (S851 to S858), in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above. , S860) is added, and the contents of the reset process when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed are different. Other processes are the same as the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be explained. This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) includes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process for setting a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol, and a process for setting the set symbol confirmation. It is configured so that a period measuring process and various execution processes corresponding to the special symbol lottery results after the symbol determination period has elapsed are executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 in FIG. 97, that is, the process of determining whether it is the timing to end the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the timing to stop the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is determined. (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the process of S251, that is, the current is the first special symbol (special figure 1) In the process of determining whether the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed in a stopped state, it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed in a halted manner (the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to on). (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes).

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. In the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on (S851). Here, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display the special symbol 1, that is, in the processing of S206 in FIG. 97, When executing the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) because the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is determined to be 0, the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on. Therefore, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off) (S851: No), and the first special symbol confirmation period setting process is executed. (S852).

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be explained. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). The first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852) includes a process of setting a confirmation time (symbol confirmation period), a process of setting a command to be sent to the first symbol display device 37, and a process of setting the first special symbol (special symbol) of this time. When the lottery result of 1) is a jackpot, a process for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the conditions for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (time saving end condition) are the case where the special symbol wins the jackpot (first time saving end condition), and the condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (time saving end condition). When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) in a state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time-saving end condition), there are two time-saving end conditions. If the above-mentioned first time saving end condition is met, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the 2-time shortening end condition is met, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol starts (the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed). .

In this way, we provide multiple conditions (time-saving end conditions) that trigger the transition from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state, and change the timing of transition to the low-probability state depending on the established time-saving end condition. By configuring this, at what timing the low probability state of the normal symbol is set for a player who is playing a game in a gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is made difficult to predict whether the game will shift to a game state (normal state, potential state), it is possible to keep the user's attention on the game content at all times, and it is possible to provide a game that never gets boring.

In the second embodiment, the state of the normal symbol is changed according to the above-mentioned content, but other configurations may also be used. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing at which the special symbol fluctuations are started, the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the special symbol fluctuations have started, the timing at which the special symbol fluctuations have stopped, or the timing when the special symbol fluctuations have stopped. , the transition is made either at the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, or at the end of the special symbol's stop display period (design confirmation period). It's okay.

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special symbol 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time is determined according to each type selected in the various tables used in the special symbol lottery (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, loss type selection table 202ad). Since the (symbol confirmation period) is defined, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type that is stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot, and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is jackpot A3, the confirmation Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S2803). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) is set this time is a jackpot. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Thereby, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol wins a jackpot (first time-saving end condition), and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of drawings) is the predetermined number of times ( For example, if the two time-saving ending conditions (50 times) are reached (second time-saving ending condition) and are established based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time-saving ending condition is satisfied. Because the configuration is configured to give priority to execution of the process of determining whether the second time-saving end condition is met, rather than the process of determining whether the second time-saving end condition is satisfied, when setting the symbol confirmation period for the special symbol, it is possible to win the jackpot of the special symbol. Even in this case, the process of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, in the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating a probability state is set (S2806), and the process moves to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a status command indicating the normal state is set (S2807), and the process moves to S2808. After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the special pattern 1 symbol is confirmed flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, the current period is the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special pattern 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process moves to S853. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to ON (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined in the process of S851 that the special symbol 1 symbol is being determined flag 203ab is set to ON.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether the current timing has passed the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (it is 1 or more), that is, it is determined that the current period is in the pattern confirmation period of the first special pattern (special pattern 1). If so (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and this process ends. This confirmation time processing (S860) executes processing to update the elapsed time of the symbol confirmation period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol confirmation period that has been temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small winning game. It executes processing for restarting processing, and its detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period), , the special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to OFF (S854). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a status command is set according to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in this embodiment, after the special symbol stop display period has elapsed (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203aa is executed, and the subtraction is performed. It is configured such that when the value of the subsequent probability change counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. As a result, the probability change end condition (condition for transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) is established when the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol will be set after the special symbol's stop display period has passed, so the special symbol's high probability will be set during the fluctuating display period of the target special symbol and the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned variable probability end condition is satisfied due to the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol will not be maintained during the variable display period of the first special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It is possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol in a state where is set.

To specifically explain the contents of the state command set in the process of S857 described above, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability change counter When the value of 203aa is greater than 0, a state command is set that indicates that the gaming state is a variable probability state, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is a time saving state. A state command is set. In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of normal symbols is set), if the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0, it means that the gaming state is a probability state. A state command indicating that the probability change counter 203aa is 0 is set, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, if the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), a remaining probability variation number command is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, information indicating the remaining probability variation number. The state command and the remaining probability variation count command set in the process of S857 are output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes processing corresponding to the received command in command determination processing 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to appropriately determine the current gaming situation.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time-saving end condition (a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the stop display timing of the special symbol. state, and if the second time-saving end condition (a condition that is satisfied depending on the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is reduced at the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. When the probability variable ending condition is satisfied (the first probability variable ending condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won, the second probability variable ending condition that is satisfied depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of drawings)) at the same time as the transition to the probability state. The special symbol is configured to shift from a high probability state to a low probability state at the end timing of the special symbol stop display period (design confirmation period).

By configuring in this way, the period during which a potential gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set can be varied depending on the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied, so that it is possible for the player to This not only makes the player expect a jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery, but also makes the player expect that the length of the period in which an advantageous gaming state is set will be longer.

Next, a special figure 1 confirmation period end command is set (S858), and the same process as the process of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above is executed. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and probability change counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the fixed time processing ( S860) will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fixed time processing (S860).

In the process during the confirmed time (S860), first, it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). And, during the period when the small winning game is being executed, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97). In other words, in the processing of S2901 of the confirmation time processing (see S860 in FIG. 101), it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small winning game ends. This occurs only when variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), a special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. 203v is set to off (S2903), and the process moves to S2904. In other words, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small winning game is finished, so the small winning game is executed. The processes of S2902 and S2903 are executed in order to restart the symbol confirmation period update process which has been temporarily stopped due to this.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the process of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 Shift to processing.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that a process (S1051) for determining whether the value is greater than 0 is executed. The other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), so detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98), so the detailed The explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) is one of the processes in the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is the addition of the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506 The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of , and the processes of S1509 and S1510 are deleted. The other processes are the same as the second special symbol variation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), so detailed explanation will be omitted.

This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) is similar to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), in which the symbol confirmation period elapses after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. The difference is that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol 2). Note that among the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply A detailed explanation of the process that only differs in the symbol type will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is set to on (S1551). If it is determined that the flag 203ac during special drawing 2 symbol determination is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol confirmation period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol is one of the processes in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be explained. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). This second special symbol confirmation period setting process (S1552) sets the target symbol type to the first special symbol for the process executed in the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100). to the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to the second special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the detailed explanation of this process will be omitted with reference to the content of the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above.

Returning to FIG. 103, the explanation will be continued. After executing the process of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is not 0 (i.e., (greater than 0) (S1553: No), the value of the special symbol 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), this process ends.

The process of S1563 is to update the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the special symbol by lighting it up to show that the symbol is stopped (including a display that blinks at a high speed enough for the player to recognize that the symbol is lit). Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting up the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the special symbol is simply lit continuously during the symbol confirmation period as in this embodiment, for example, the second special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104) In the process of S3009, the configuration is configured to output an instruction to stop changing the second special symbol (stop display), and also output information indicating a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the second special symbol is to be stopped and displayed. period), the second special symbol may be configured to be lit and displayed in advance. With this configuration, there is no need to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so the processing load on the main controller 110 is reduced. can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1555), and if it is determined that the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off (S1555: No), the probability change counter 203aa It is determined whether the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, in the process of S1555, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 in the process of S1556 (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1558.

In the process of S1558, a status command is set according to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa (S1558), and then a special map 2 confirmation period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above The same processes as in S1501 to S1505 are executed. Here, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), special figure 2 missing stop processing 2 (S1561 ) and end this process.

Moreover, when the process of S1505 is finished, next, the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the process of S1507, which is the same as the first embodiment described above, is executed. Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, special symbol 2 off stop processing 2 ( S1561) will be explained. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 missing stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 missing stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the command determination process 2 in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) in contrast to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), the difference is that various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the various counter update processing (see FIG. 72), and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, the processes executed when various commands outputted by changing the control content executed by the main controller 110 from the first embodiment are received, and the various processes added from the second embodiment. A process to update the counter value has been added.

First, with reference to FIG. 106, command determination processing 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4162). Command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether a remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as a command related to the remaining number of times, a short remaining time number command (set by the process of S603 in FIG. 36 command) and a remaining probability variable number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set (the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol). If it is determined that a command related to the remaining number of times has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) differs from the remaining number of times update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that processing for transmitting a command for displaying the number of remaining probability variations to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number of times update processing 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether a remaining time shortening number of times command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the short remaining time count command has been received (S4801: Yes), a short remaining time count command for display corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number of times command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4851. Next, it is determined whether the remaining probability variable number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has been received (S4851: Yes), a display remaining probability variation number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this process is immediately ended.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4251, if it is determined that the remaining number-related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop related command includes a special figure 1 temporary stop command that is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to on (see S1603 in FIG. 46). and a special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) that is set when restarting the variable display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or the stopped display. If it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining confirmed time is added.

In this temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), when the elapsed time of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol or the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporarily stopped), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is Processing is performed for the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed and this process ends. Details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is displayed in a fluctuating manner with the execution of the small winning game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether the finalizing flag 223ad is set to on (S4953). Here, if it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to on (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so the set symbol confirmation time The remaining time (design confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process moves to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time is calculated by reading the value of the special symbol 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining confirmed time is short is set in the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, if it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (it is 2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. It is determined whether it is (S4957). In the process of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), a normal confirmed remaining time is stored in the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac. A period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (it is 60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining confirmed time is long. A period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, if it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the current period is the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the process in S4952 Move to. Note that the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the restart process (S4952), which is one process in the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed while the first special symbol is stopped (during the symbol confirmation period). Because of the configuration, when a small winning game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. Furthermore, the system is configured to restart the stop display of the first special symbol (restart the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period) at the timing when the small winning game ends. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol when restarting the variable display or the stopped display of the first special symbol is determined, and based on the determination result, the performance mode after restart is set. It is configured to do so.

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special map 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmed flag 223ad is set to on (S5051). If it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to on (S5051: Yes), that is, if the timing at which the special symbol 1 restart command is received is while the first special symbol is being displayed in a stopped state, the remainder is confirmed. Reads the remaining confirmed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052), and determines the additional effect type from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa based on the read remaining confirmed time information and the additional effect counter 223i ( S5053), an additional effect command for display corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and information set in the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the determining flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5056), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special symbol 1 restart command is received is during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If there is, the same processing as S5002 to S5005 as the variation restart processing (S4902 in FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the present processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4219, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether a symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation related process (S4255) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol confirmation related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol confirmation related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), a display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa (S5073), and the process moves to S5074. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). If it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is set as the special figure. 2 is set in the confirmed counter 223ab (S5076), the confirmed flag 223ad is set on (S5077), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special map 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process ends. do.

Next, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processing 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is greater than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453). If it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is Then, the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa read in the process of S5455, and the remaining time is calculated (S5456). Next, the processing in S5407 and S5408 is executed, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , this process ends.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. The second embodiment described above, like the first embodiment described above, is configured such that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) change simultaneously (so-called , Simultaneous fluctuation type), by executing the special drawing 2 lottery (fluctuation) during the period when the potential state is set as the gaming state, it will be possible to perform many small winning games (RUSH games) It was composed of

Furthermore, as a condition for the probability state to be set (a condition for which the RUSH game can be executed), the first probability variation end that is established when the probability variation state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1. conditions and a second probability variation ending condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), and if the first probability variation ending condition is met, you win the jackpot. The period in which the special symbol (special symbol 1) indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed becomes a potential state (design confirmation period), and if the second probability variation end condition is met, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be in a potential state during the period (fluctuating display period) and the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is configured to differ depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the pattern confirmation period is set longer if you win a jackpot than if you do not win a jackpot. It was configured like this.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for one special symbol (special symbol 1), an invalid lottery will be executed in which the jackpot will not be won in the lottery for the other symbol (special symbol 2). The system was configured such that the invalid lottery does not update the values related to the conditions for changing the gaming state. Specifically, during the period when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period), the lottery of special symbol 2 is executed. Even if this happens, the configuration is such that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1 in a state in which a variable probability state is set, a period during which a jackpot game is executed for that jackpot win (variable display Until the end of the period, symbol confirmation period), no matter how many times you execute the variation (lottery) of the special drawing 2, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa will not be updated (subtracted), so you can feel safe playing the special drawing 2. It was possible to carry out variations in

In contrast, in the third embodiment, the number of types of variable termination conditions is increased compared to the second embodiment described above, and the period during which the potential state is set is longer than in the second embodiment described above. are doing. Specifically, the variable probability ending condition is configured such that the variable probability ending condition (third variable ending condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in special drawing 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set. When the variable probability termination condition is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the potential state at the time when the small winning game is started.

Furthermore, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the probability change counter 203aa) and the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the value of the time saving counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4 ''), if a jackpot is not won when a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the gaming state will shift from variable probability state to normal state. It is composed of

In other words, in the third embodiment, while the variable probability state (both special symbols and normal symbols are high probability states), a small win is won in the lottery of special symbol 1, and the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state. By making the transition, the period from the start timing of the small winning game until the low probability state of the special symbol is set can be made into a potential state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period during which a potential state that is an advantageous gaming state for the player is continuously set, depending on the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery of special drawing 1. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a game machine that the player will never get tired of.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the final variation at which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected. As a result, even if the final variation of the variable probability state is reached without winning a small hit, it is possible to set a probability state for a long time, allowing the player to maintain expectations until the end of the game. can be set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits provided based on the game content of the special drawing 1 during the variable probability state in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game contents of the special figure 1 game and the granted benefits after the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, the variable probability state is set during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 variations of the special symbol), and the number of variations during the variable probability state (after the jackpot) is set. The contents of the benefits given to the player are made to differ depending on the number of variations in the number of special drawings) and the lottery results of the special drawings.

Specifically, in the first and second special pattern 1 fluctuations (special pattern 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (special pattern 1 lottery result) is a jackpot, there will be many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which you can win prize balls, there is also a period during which the special pattern 1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that it is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period). ) is set. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit game will be executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as a period in which a potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is stipulated that a period (symbol confirmation period) is set from when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot reaches four.

In other words, if you win a small hit in the first special drawing 1 lottery after the jackpot ends, the timing when the small winning game starts (the timing when the first special symbol fluctuation stops and the small winning game is executed) ), a potential state game (RUSH game) is set during the period until the end of the fourth special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the longest period in which the RUSH state is set is the "very long" period. In addition, if the lottery result (special diagram 1 lottery result) is a failure in the first or second special diagram 1 variation (special diagram 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no benefits will be given to the player. is not given.

In the third special chart 1 variation (special chart 1 lottery) after the probability variable state is set, the probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability variable state is set, as described above. It consists of Here, if you win a small hit, in addition to the period during the small win game, the period until the end of the fourth special symbol change is set as a potential state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. Compared to the case where a small hit is won in the first and second special pattern 1 variations (special pattern 1 lottery), the period in which the probability state is set is shorter.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 variations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability variable state is set during the probability variable state increases, the variation having a longer variation time when winning a jackpot The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, compared to the case where a jackpot is won in the first or second special chart 1 variation (special chart 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability variable state is set, it is easier to lengthen the period in which the probability state is set. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special pattern variation (special pattern lottery) after the probability variation state is set, that is, in the final variation in the probability variation state, the special pattern variation is started regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. The period from to the end (until after the pattern confirmation period has elapsed) is set as the potential state. In addition, in the present third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the final variation of the special pattern in the variable probability state (the fourth special pattern variation after the variable probability state is set), the configuration is such that it is easy to set a long variation time. Therefore, the length of the period during which the potential state is set is "long".

If the jackpot is not won in the final variation of the special symbol in the variable probability state, the normal state is set after the symbol confirmation period has passed, and the fifth and subsequent special symbol drawings are executed.

<About the effect display contents in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period during which the potential state, which is the gaming state advantageous to the player, is set varies depending on the transition condition (probability variable end condition) that is satisfied. The system is configured so that, during a probability change state, a suggestion effect (a bingo game) is executed to suggest to the player the possibility that a probability state will be set and the timing at which a probability state will be set. It consists of

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be explained. In addition, among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as in each embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the variable probability state is set will be explained. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113(a), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm includes a special figure 1 display area Dm1 and a special figure 2 display area which are the same as in the second embodiment described above. Dm2, a guidance display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 that shows the number of reserved balls of special figure 1, and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 that shows the number of reserved balls of special figure 2. , is formed.

FIG. 113(a) shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 jackpot, and the special drawing 1 display area Dm1 shows that the lottery result of the special drawing 1 is a jackpot. The stop display mode "777" of the third symbol is displayed, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guide display area Dm3, characters "left-handed hit" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was played as a left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that In other words, the state shown in FIG. 113(a) is a jackpot won during a left-handed game.

Further, in the center of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 is displayed that is used in a variable probability state that is set after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be explained. In the third embodiment, bingo is used as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player whether or not the probability state will be set during the period when the probability variable state is set, or whether or not he will win the jackpot. Configuring the game to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see Fig. 113(a)) with arbitrary numbers arranged in nine squares (3 vertically x 3 horizontally) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , numbers are announced based on the lottery of special drawing 1 that is executed in a state where the variable probability state is set, and the numbers are announced to the player based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of numbers written on the bingo card 820. An effect suggesting the game result (lottery result of special drawing 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113(b) to 115, the display contents (performance contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be explained. When the bingo game starts (when the special symbol 1 variation in the probability variation state starts), the display shown in FIG. 113(b) is executed. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special symbol 1 variation (first time) is executed after the end of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. . Then, "3" is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area Dm4, indicating that it has been subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. 113(a) due to the change in special drawing 1. It shows.

In addition, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special drawing 1 variation (1st time)), and the lower right area , a remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number of bingo games "last 3" is displayed. Here, for example, an example of the production in the case where the special symbol 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variation state is a jackpot will be explained with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the bingo game during the variation of the special symbol 1 variation (third time) in the case where the special symbol 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variable state is a jackpot. , FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the variation of the special figure 1 variation (4th time). In this embodiment, as explained with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probability variable state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), the potential probability state is set at the timing when the variation display of special figure 1 starts. During the potential state, a potential state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed by a right-handed game is executed.

Therefore, in order to make the player immediately perform a right-handed game immediately after the final variation of the probability variation state is executed (after the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol 1 variation (3rd time) has elapsed), the probability state is changed. The performance result (bingo double row display) to inform you that the potential state is set is before the special chart 1 variation (4th time) where the potential state is set (during the special chart 1 variation (3rd time)). configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to set the probable state with the player fully understanding that the probable state will be set.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the third embodiment, if a jackpot or small win is not won in the lottery of special drawing 1 in the final change of the probability variable state (if it is a loss), a short The system is configured so that the performance result (bingo double row display) to notify that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected and the potential state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . This eliminates the need to inform the player that the potential state is actually set for a short period of time, and it is possible to perform a bingo game failure effect. Furthermore, when a short-term potential state is set, since the guide display area Dm3 does not display that the player is required to play a right-handed game, it is possible to suppress the annoyance of the game.

Returning to FIG. 114(a), the explanation will be continued. In Figure 114(a), the variation display of the special pattern 1 variation (3rd time) is performed, and the lottery result of the special pattern 1 variation (1st time) is "1", and the lottery result of the special pattern 2 variation (2nd time) is displayed. “8” is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. Then, on the bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in the current bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two lines are formed and displayed. .

Further, "Double Bingo" is displayed as a status display mode 824 indicating the current situation, and a comment "Super Lucky" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that he succeeded in the bingo game during the fluctuation before the special drawing 1 fluctuation (4th time) that actually leads to winning the jackpot, we can improve the performance for the player. It is possible to provide a period for enjoying the satisfaction of success, and to notify in advance that it is necessary to play a right-handed game from the next swing.

In addition, in this embodiment, a comment informing that a right-handed game will be played from the next fluctuation (a comment informing that a right-handed game condition has been established (a condition for setting a potential state has been established)) Although the sub-display area Ds displays "It's almost a right-handed game," the player is informed in advance of the timing at which the probability state will be set, that is, the timing at which the player will be forced to play the right-handed game. For example, calculate the remaining period until the special pattern 1 variation (3rd time) ends (remaining period that is the sum of the remaining variation display period and symbol confirmation period of the special pattern 1 variation (3rd time)). A calculation unit may be provided and information based on the calculation result of the calculation unit (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol 1 fluctuation (third time)) may be configured to be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state (when the starting condition of the special figure 2 is satisfied), The structure is such that a short variation pattern (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if you play a right-handed game and execute the fluctuation (lottery) of special drawing 2 in a state where the variable probability state is set, the period in which the variable probability state can be set will be changed to the period during which the variable probability state is set. Since it is extremely short compared to the case where a left-handed game is performed in a certain state and a variation (lottery) is executed on special drawing 2, a right-handed game in a certain variable state can be treated as a disadvantageous game that is disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, during the variable probability state in which "left-handed play" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally playing an irregular game that differs from the displayed content.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state (when the starting condition of special map 2 is satisfied) ) is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result, but this is not limited to special drawing 2 fluctuation during a probability fluctuation state. The time may be configured to be an extremely longer variation time (for example, 120 seconds) than the special figure 1 variation time.

With this configuration, for example, if a right-handed game is performed in a state where a variable probability state is set, ignoring the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81. Because the special pattern 2 variation is executed for a long time (for example, 120 seconds), even if a probability state is set after that (for example, the variation of the special pattern 1 variation (4th time) that won a jackpot) Even if the display has started), since the special figure 2 variation is being executed, a new potential state game (a game that executes the special figure 2 variation with the potential state set) It can be made difficult to execute.

In this embodiment, since the potential state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special symbol 1) and the symbol confirmation period, the potential state is The longer the period from when is set (the start of a predetermined special figure 1 variation) to the end of the running special figure 2 variation, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 variation in the potential state can be executed (the potential (state game period) becomes shorter. In addition, in order to reliably prevent the special figure 2 variation from being executed in a state where the probability variation state is set, the time when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the probability variation state is set. If a right-handed game is started from , the potential state game period will be similarly shortened, so the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player in order to grasp the timing to execute the right-handed game. It is possible to make the user pay close attention to the content displayed on the screen.

Then, when a right-handed game is performed during the potential state and the special symbol 2 variation is executed, the performance display during the RUSH game (potential state game) shown in FIG. 114(b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. displayed on the display screen. FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot (after setting the probability variation state) is a jackpot. In this embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, when the potential state is set, a potential state game (RUSH game) is performed in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game. In other words, during the potential state, a right-handed game becomes an advantageous game, and a left-handed game becomes a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114(b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "right hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and special figure 1 variation (4) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in progress is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in progress is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display area Dm4. "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from left to right and opens a treasure chest 812 discovered on the way (same performance as in the first embodiment). is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub-display area Ds, characters ``RUSH in progress'' indicating that a potential state game (RUSH game) is in progress are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current game is in a potential state game (RUSH game).

In FIGS. 113 and 114 described above, when the second probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of variations of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability variation ending condition for ending the probability variation state, that is, the final variation (4) of the probability variation state is satisfied. An example of the display screen when the potential state is set in the special figure change) has been explained. In the third embodiment, the first variable-probability ending condition (condition for transferring the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state) for ending the variable-probability state (transferring the variable probability state to the potential state) is Probable variable ending condition (probable variable ending condition that is established based on a jackpot win), 2nd variable variable ending condition (probable variable ending condition that is established based on the number of changes in the special symbol), 3rd variable variable ending condition (probable variable ending condition that is established based on a small hit win) The game is configured such that when any of the ending conditions is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the probable state to the probable state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(a), a display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first variable probability ending condition is satisfied before the second variable ending condition described above is satisfied. Explain the content. FIG. 115(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display content executed during the third special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot (after setting the probability variable state) when the third special symbol fluctuation is a jackpot. It is a diagram.

In the third embodiment, when the first variable ending condition (winning the special symbol jackpot) is met, the special symbol to indicate that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and then It is configured such that the potential state is set during a period (symbol confirmation period) until the stop display ends. Therefore, during the variable display period of the special figure 1 (during the special figure fluctuation), the variable probability state is continuously set, so in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115(a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and "left-handed hitting" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that one line has been established.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the third embodiment, if the above-mentioned first probability change end condition is satisfied and the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the target It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and information indicating the final result of the current bingo game is informed to the player in stages. It is configured to do so.

In other words, the example shown in FIG. 115(a) shows a state in which one line is established while special drawing 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. For example, if the type of jackpot won this time is a long symbol If it is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) for which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, a different number will be displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of special drawing 1 ends. (for example, "5") is newly displayed, and an effect is executed in which the final result of the bingo game is "two lines established."

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is configured to vary multiple times during the variable display of the special symbols. This allows the player to grasp the details of the benefits (RUSH game, jackpot game) that will be given at the end of the current special symbol fluctuation as the special symbol fluctuation display period progresses. The user can continuously watch the performance content displayed on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device 81.

In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) will not change. The configuration may be such that a number (for example, "3") is displayed and the result of the bingo game is "one line established."

By configuring in this way, the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, while the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to associate the content of the benefit (the amount of the benefit) that will be given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, it is possible to make the players pay close attention to the contents and results of the bingo game, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game is Although we have shown effects that make players excited as to whether the number of established lines will increase or not, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include, for example, the content (amount of benefits) of the benefits that will be given after the fluctuating display of special symbols. , and the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823). Thereby, the more numbers displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, the more advantageous benefits can be given to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third variable probability ending condition is satisfied will be explained. FIG. 115(b) schematically shows an example of the display contents executed during the second special pattern fluctuation after the jackpot (after setting the probability variable state) when the second special pattern fluctuation is a small win. It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the potential state is set differs depending on the type of probability variable ending condition that has been satisfied. Specifically, if the first probability ending condition is met, the period from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol starts until the stop display ends (until the jackpot game starts) (the target symbol If the symbol confirmation period) is set as a potential state and the second probability variation end condition is met, the period from the time when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts until the stop display of the corresponding special symbol ends. The period (variable display period and pattern confirmation period of the target symbol) is set as a potential state. That is, even if either of the above-mentioned first probability variation ending condition and second probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the potential state is set within the period of special symbol 1 variation.

On the other hand, if the third variable probability ending condition is met, if a small hit is won in any of the multiple (4) special symbol 1 variations that can be executed within the period in which the variable probability state is set. In this case, a probability state is set for a period from the time when the special symbol stop display indicating that the lottery result is a small win starts until the special symbol stop display, which is the final change of the probability change state, ends. . In other words, if a small hit is won in the special drawing (first special drawing) that is executed immediately after the variable probability state is set, the special symbol indicating the result of the first special drawing (small win) will stop. The period from when it is displayed until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the 4th special symbol lottery ends after passing through the 2nd to 4th special symbol lottery period (fluctuating display period and symbol confirmation period) (multiple times) Special figure fluctuation period), the probability state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), if the third variable ending condition is met, "ALL" is displayed in the lottery result 821, which applies to all numbers, indicating that 8 lines (all lines) have been met. The bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode showing. Then, "341" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 to indicate that the small hit has been won, and "341" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 to indicate that the potential state game (RUSH game) has started. "Uchi" is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first variable probability ending condition or the second variable probability ending condition is satisfied is determined based on the special pattern variation (special drawing lottery) in which each variable probability ending condition is satisfied. ) is configured to determine whether or not it holds true (pre-determination) before it is executed, whereas the third variable probability ending condition is configured so that no prior determination is performed.

By configuring in this way, the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) that is displayed across multiple changes of special symbols executed during the period in which the probability variation state is set can be changed to the end of the first probability variation state. Since it can be set in accordance with whether the condition or the second variable ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform a suggestive performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and when the third ending condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115(b) is executed, a surprising effect can be provided.

Note that the third embodiment is configured to determine in advance whether the first variable probability termination condition and the second variable probability termination condition are satisfied, but does not determine in advance whether or not the third variable termination condition is satisfied. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that only the second probability variation ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special symbol is determined in advance.

In addition, as the above-mentioned preliminary determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), a preliminary determination is performed on the special drawing 1 that is held and stored, and a jackpot is won among the special drawings 1 that are held and stored. It is configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to vary the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

By configuring it in this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations executed before winning the jackpot and the amount of benefits given to the player by winning the jackpot can be adjusted to create a suggestive effect (bingo) that does not feel strange. games) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to understand the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting future game results in advance.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 116 to 124. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the second embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. They differ in that they are Other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first winning random number table 202ba is replaced with the first winning random number table 202a, the small winning random number table 202bb is replaced with the small winning random number table 202b, and the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with the small winning random number table 202bb. The above-mentioned feature is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced by the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd instead of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the variable pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided instead of the variable pattern selection 2 table 202ac. This is different from the second embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is different from the first random number table 202a of the second embodiment described above (same as the first embodiment, see FIG. 15(a)) to win a jackpot in a low probability state of special symbols. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117(a), the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be explained. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the game state is a special symbol low probability state (normal state, time saving state), the first special symbol obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 is one of "0 to 9", and if it is one of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state) of a special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of a total of 480 random number counters, 10 values are defined as values for determining a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability when the special symbol is in a high probability state is 1/4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is different from the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (same as the first embodiment, see FIG. 15(b)) for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The difference is that the lottery has also been changed so that small wins can be won. Here, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents specified in the small winning random number 3 table 202bb will be explained. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is one of "10 to 14", If the number is between "10 and 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) are prescribed, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small win can be won even in the first special symbol lottery. In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the normal It is configured to execute a process of shifting a symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from a variable probability state to a probability state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the probable state during the variable probability state, so that the players who are playing games in the variable probability state are motivated to play the game. can be made to do so.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117(a))) is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol. , the probability of winning the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see Figure 117 (b))) is higher.As a result, the probability of winning the small hit of the special symbol 1 during the probability change state is higher. Since the probability state will be set based on a small win with a higher probability than when the probability state is set based on winning, players who are playing games in a variable probability state On the other hand, there is a game in which both a potential state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but the game aims to win a jackpot, which is difficult to win, and a game in which only a potential state game (RUSH game) is executed, and it is better than winning a jackpot. It is possible to have the player play both a game aiming at winning a small win that is easy to win.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special symbol 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbol 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. It may be configured so that it is lower than the probability of winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 in a high probability state, for example, the probability of winning a small winning of special drawing 1 may be set to a low probability such as 1/480. good. By configuring in this way, in a state where a variable probability state is set, a potential state game (RUSH game) in which a jackpot game is not executed if a small win is won before a jackpot is won. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc differs from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type has been changed, and various counters (time saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa, confirmed time counters 203ad, 203ae) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is different. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc contains jackpot operation details for each jackpot type specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The contents of the jackpot operation are defined in which only the number of rounds executed is different for each jackpot type, and for each jackpot type, a time saving counter 203f, a probability change counter 203aa, a special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad, a special figure 2 confirmation time The value of counter 203ae is defined.

Specifically, jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". The content of the jackpot operation is that a round game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), and the value of "4" is set in the time saving counter 203f. It is specified that a value of "4" is set in the probability change counter 203aa, and a value indicating "5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

For jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "50 to 96". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. 4'' is specified so that a value indicating ``100 seconds'' is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is defined by the value of the obtained first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) being in the range of "97 to 99". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. The value of ``4'' indicates that the value indicating ``300 seconds'' is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

In addition, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "0 to 64". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. It is specified that a value of "4" is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad, and a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined by the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) being in the range of "65 to 99". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. The value of ``4'' indicates that the value indicating ``1 second'' is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than in the second embodiment described above, making it easier to win a jackpot, and the bonus ( The system is configured so that the number of prize balls (prize balls) is reduced. With this configuration, the amount of benefits given to the player (prize ball Since the number of players can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide players with novel gameplay.

The small winning type selection 3 table 202bd contains the contents of the small winning type that is set when the special drawing 1 is won, in contrast to the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above. They are different in that they are additionally stipulated. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be explained with reference to FIG. 118(b).

FIG. 118(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above when the symbol type ``special figure 1 It is different from the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) in that small winning type D is added as the small winning type corresponding to ``. 16(b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

The small winning type selection 3 table 202bd selects the first attacker (first variable winning prize) regardless of the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5 when winning a small winning with the first special symbol (special symbol 1). A small winning game is defined in which an opening operation of opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is performed once. That is, when a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a small win game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball in the small win game is executed.

In other words, in the third embodiment, the small winning of the special drawing 1 is not used for the purpose of giving benefits (prize balls) to the player through the small winning game, but is used as an opportunity to set the potential state as the gaming state. It is an object. As a result, if you win the small hit of special figure 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set, the right-handed game will be executed immediately after the performance that notifies you of this (see Fig. 115(b)) is executed. Even if it is, the small winning game has already ended (because the period required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the right area is longer than the small winning game period), so the potential state will smoothly change. A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

In addition, when a small winning of the special drawing 1 is won in the normal state, the small winning game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable prize winning device 65 due to the small winning game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, if the small winning of special drawing 1 is won in the normal state, the winning Even if the game method is changed from a left-handed game to a right-handed game at the moment when the special symbol indicating a small winning win is stopped and displayed, the ball is moved to the first variable winning device 65 during the small winning game. Therefore, if you win a small hit on special drawing 1 in the normal state, there will be an effect or guidance that emphasizes that you have won a small hit on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display area Dm3 is configured so that the display of "right-handed game" that guides the right-handed game is not executed.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from performing troublesome game operations. In addition, a notification means may be provided to notify that the small winning of special drawing 1 has been won in the normal state, and the right hit display may also be provided when a small winning game is in progress based on the winning of the special drawing 1 small winning in the normal state. It may be configured to execute.

The variable pattern selection 3 table 202be is a variable pattern selection table 202be1 for the variable pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above, in place of the time saving/probable variable table 202f2 that is referred to when the variable variable state is set. The difference is that a potential 3 table 202be2 is provided instead of the potential probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the potential state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119(a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the variable probability state is If set, the 3 table for probability variation 202be1 is referred to, and if the probability state is set, the 3 table for probability variation 202be2 is specified to be referenced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the value of the time saving counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so the probability variation counter Since a gaming state (that is, a time-saving state) in which the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is larger than 0 is never set, the fluctuation that is referenced when the time-saving state is set. It does not have a pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 119(b). FIG. 119(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118(a), the third embodiment is configured such that when a jackpot is won, the probability variation state is always set by four variations of the special symbol. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (variation pattern variable time) is selected.

With this configuration, the potential state can be set as the gaming state depending on the timing (number of special pattern fluctuations) when the condition (big hit winning or small winning of special drawing 1) is established. It becomes possible to vary the period during which the is set (special figure fluctuation time). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of changes in the special symbol, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a "jackpot", if the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 2 times", then , the "probable variable A table 202bea (probable variable A)" is referred to, in the case of "3 times", the "probable variable B table 202beb (probable variable B)" is referred to, and in the case of "4 times", the "probable variable C table 202bec (probability variation C)" is specified to be referred to. In addition, if the lottery result is "small hit or miss", and if the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 3 times", the "probable variable A table 202bea (probable variable A)" is referred to. In the case of "four times", the "probability variation C table 202bec (probability variation C)" is specified to be referred to.

Furthermore, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 2, the "probable variable D table 202bed (probable variable D)" will be referenced regardless of the lottery result or the number of changes in the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is stipulated in

Next, the contents stipulated in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202bea to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119(c) to 120. . FIG. 119(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variable A table 202bea, and FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the probability variable B table 202beb. FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variable probability C table 202bec, and FIG. 120(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the variable probability D table 202bed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents.

As shown in FIG. 119(c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes a jackpot in the lottery. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "~99", jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100~197", and jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value of "198". ) are associated. In addition, if you win a small hit or a loss in the special drawing 1 lottery, the small win fluctuation 1 (1 second) or the loss fluctuation 1 (1 second) will be associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is being

As shown in FIG. 120(a), in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as a variation pattern determined when the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) results in a jackpot. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "100 to 149", jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "150 to 198", and jackpot variation 3 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "150 to 198". 300 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 120(b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes a jackpot in the lottery. ” is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), the value of “1” is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and the range of “2 to 198” is jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). are associated. In addition, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, small win variation 2 (240 seconds) is associated with it regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and if you win a loss, the variation type counter Outlier variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, the variation pattern determined when the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) results in a jackpot is determined regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if a small win is won, small win variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of variation type counter CS1, and in the case of a loss, small win variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated. , is associated with outlier variation 4 (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the third potential confirmation table 202be2 will be explained. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third table for potential confirmation 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, when the lottery of special drawing 1 is executed in a state where the probability state is set, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is selected. It is configured so that

Here, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in a state where the variable probability state is set, the probability state is set, so the probability state is set. In order for the variable pattern to be selected with reference to the 3 table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit in the lottery of the special drawing 1 during the variable probability state.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, a variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to a different table depending on the number of special symbol variations in a state where a probability variation state is set. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of fluctuations after the probability change state is set) resulting in the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb added to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in some respects. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag to indicate that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and by being set to on, the special figure 1 lottery This indicates that you have won a small prize. This special figure 1 small winning flag 203ba is set to be ON for a period from winning the small winning in the special drawing 1 lottery until the small winning game is executed.

The special figure 1 small winning medium flag 203bb is a flag to indicate that a small winning game will be executed based on the small winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when set to on, , indicates that a small winning game based on the small winning of special drawing 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, when a small winning game based on the small winning of special symbol 1 is started in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. The configuration is configured to execute the process of transitioning to .

This special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on in the special figure 1 off stop processing (see S871 in Fig. 128) (S3201 in Fig. 128). :Yes), is set to on (S3207 in FIG. 128), and in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129), when it is determined that it is the timing to start the small win (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, in the process of S2551 in FIG. 129, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2551 in FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the current small winning game has won a small winning in the special drawing 1 lottery. When it is determined that it is a small win executed based on this, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined in the small win control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small win (S2511 in FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 123(a). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of No. 113. As shown in FIG. 123(a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a variable performance selection table 222ba instead of the additional performance selection table 222c, with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above. The difference is that The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be explained with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This variable probability performance selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggestion performance (bingo game) explained with reference to FIGS. The final form is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot) and the type of jackpot that can be won.

Specifically, if the number of jackpot winning variations is "2", that is, if you win the jackpot again with the second special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, the jackpot type to be won is "jackpot A", "jackpot B". ”, a performance mode is set in which one row (line) is established in bingo, and a performance mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set in case of “Jackpot C”.

If the number of jackpot winning variations is "3", that is, if you win the jackpot on the third special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, if the winning jackpot type is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", then , a performance mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if it is a "jackpot C", a performance mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Finally, if the number of jackpot winning variations is "4", that is, if you win a jackpot on the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot (the final variation in which a probability change state is set), the jackpot type to be won. If it is "Jackpot A", a performance mode is set in which 2 rows (lines) are established in Bingo, and if it is "Jackpot B", a performance mode is set in which 3 rows (lines) are established in Bingo, and "Jackpot C" is set. If so, it is stipulated that a production mode in which all rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the third embodiment, if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (ordinarily, the bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113)) is configured so that a special display screen is displayed to inform that a probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot.

In this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "Right hit" for guiding the right hit game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to perform a game (right-handed game) that is suitable for the gaming state (potential state) after the jackpot game ends, so the period in which the potential state is set can be played to the full. By utilizing this, it is possible to execute a lottery game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the jackpot is configured to display a special display screen when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing during the jackpot game, the timing when the jackpot game is started, or the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b corresponds to the special symbol change to be executed next before the round game of the jackpot game starts. A preliminary determination means is provided to determine in advance whether the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) that indicates winning a jackpot is included, and the preliminary determination means performs preliminary determination. As a result, if information indicating that the jackpot will be won is included, "Right-handed game" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 in order to make the jackpot game be performed as a right-handed game, and the system also performs the right-handed game. The main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the performance mode for winning the jackpot, and if the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 displays "Left It would be better to configure it so that it displays "Uchi".

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in the normal state (a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played), the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the playing method during the jackpot game allows the player to win the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the content of the game after the game ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used, when a jackpot game that opens the second variable winning device 650 is executed, a left-handed game is performed. The configuration is such that the rate at which balls win in the second variable winning device 650 does not change between when the player plays the right-handed game and when playing the right-handed game. Therefore, even if a configuration is used that changes the playing method (right-handed, left-handed) during a jackpot game based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the player may be disadvantaged during the jackpot game. There is no situation that can be provided.

In this embodiment, the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that is executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605 in FIG. 132: Yes) During the jackpot game, it is determined whether there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information (winning information of special drawing 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133). Winning information that has newly occurred is also subject to discrimination, and the configuration is configured so that more winning information can be determined. Timing other than this embodiment may be set as the timing for determining whether there is winning information for winning a jackpot, such as the timing when a jackpot game starts, or a specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds). The timing at which the determination is made may be the timing at which the round game is reached or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) ends.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 123(b). 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of No. 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with a residual probability variation number area 223ba, a look-ahead hit flag 223bb, and a residual variation number counter 223bc compared to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in some respects. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the number of variations for which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. This residual probability variation number area 223ba is set with a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the process at the end of jackpot (see S4651 in FIG. 133) (S5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referenced (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and if the set value is greater than 0, that is, during the probability change state, When the winning information corresponding to the executable special symbol variation is newly receivable (S5504 in FIG. 131; Yes), a pre-reading process is performed as the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state. 131 (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then subtracts 1 from the set value (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, the probability variation state is set by using the remaining probability variation number area 223ba to determine whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. It becomes possible to determine whether the winning information newly received in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability change state. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced because the probability variation performance executed during the probability variation state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state.

The pre-read winning flag 223bb is a flag to indicate that there is winning information that has won a special symbol jackpot, and when set to on, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. This indicates that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included.

This look-ahead winning flag 223bb determines in the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that there is winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. If so (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to on (S5606 in FIG. 133). In addition, in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the winning information received this time corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (S5504 in FIG. 131: Yes), and It is also set to ON when it is determined that there is winning information indicating winning a jackpot in the winning information (S5505 in FIG. 131: Yes) (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability change variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to on (S5702: No in FIG. 135), and when it is set to on ( Processing is executed so that different presentation modes can be set in S5702: Yes in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of residual symbol fluctuations until winning the jackpot, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot completion process (see S4651 in FIG. 133). If the winning information includes winning information for winning a jackpot (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), a value corresponding to the number of times the special symbol changes until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning a jackpot changes. is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the variable display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the variable display in the variable probability state is to be set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the variable display setting process for variable probability (S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. (see), when it is determined that the special symbol for which the current variation display is set is the previous variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot (the next time will be the jackpot variation) (S5703 in Figure 135: Yes ), the performance mode using the probability-variable performance selection table 222ba is set.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) in place of the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that a small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. In addition, in the second embodiment described above, since the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed, detailed explanations are omitted, and the parts will be explained with reference to the figures used in the explanation of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, parts where the same processing as in the second embodiment described above is executed are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is similar to the first special symbol jackpot in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is not a jackpot is different from symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) described above is executed, and in the process of S406, the current fluctuation is a jackpot. If it is determined that this is not the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 off variation process (S471) is executed, and this process ends. This special drawing 1 winning variation process (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special drawing 1 is other than a jackpot. It executes processing corresponding to the results.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, special symbol 1 off fluctuation processing (S471 ) will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off variation process (S471). This special figure 1 loss variation process (S471) is to execute a process for displaying a small winning symbol and a losing symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special symbol 2). The difference is that the target special symbol is changed from special symbol 2 to special symbol 1 with respect to the processing content of the executed special symbol 2 deviation variation process (S1011 in FIG. 41).

In the special figure 1 off variation process (S471), first, it is determined whether the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). If it is determined that the execution data is a small win (S3101: Yes), the special symbol 1 small win flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small win (S3103). ). Next, the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (a miss) (S3101: No), a miss symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process ends immediately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (S277). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the difference is that the special figure 1 off stop process (S871) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 128, the process is executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special symbol 1 off-stopping process (S871), which is one process in the first special symbol variation stopping process 3 (S277), will be explained. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 losing stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small win, a process for starting a small win game is executed.

In the special figure 1 missing stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small winning flag 203ba is set to on (S3201). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small winning flag 203ba is set to on (S3201: Yes), in order to forcibly stop and display the special figure 2 variation that is in progress with the lottery result indicating a loss, The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 variation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a removed symbol (S3204). Next, set a small hit scenario based on the selected small win type (S3205), set the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba to off (S3206), and turn on the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb. settings (S3207), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to on (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss), the book will be booked as is (S3201: No). Finish the process.

By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), it is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 which is in progress, so that the small prize game can be stopped. It is possible to easily execute a new special figure 2 variation during the potential state set at the start timing. In addition, in the third embodiment, a process is used in which, when a small winning of special drawing 1 is won, the running special drawing 2 variation is forcibly stopped in a display mode that shows that the lottery result is a loss. Without being limited to this, for example, the measurement of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is being executed is configured to be interrupted so that the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is being executed does not progress during the period when the small winning game is being executed. You may do so.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, the process is executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be explained. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit control processing 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small win control process 3 (S2255), in the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the small win (S2503: Yes), that is, the small win scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small win. If the content indicates , an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set on (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552) and this process is ended.

The third embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won with both the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2). The configuration is such that the value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the winning number is won.

In other words, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the time-saving counter 203f is greater than 0), the small winning of special drawing 1 is required (the start of the small winning game based on the small winning of special drawing 1). is set. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to end the high probability state of the normal symbol under conditions other than when changing the special symbol a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a state where a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, a potential state (that is, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) at any timing (any special symbol lottery) is set. Since it is possible to make the transition to a high probability state with special symbols and a low probability state with normal symbols, the player can always be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (four times). Therefore, the shorter the period from when the variable probability state is set until winning a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, the greater the number of special symbol drawings that can be executed during the probability state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not end. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery is set higher than the probability of winning a small winning in the special drawing 1 drawing, the special drawing 2 It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is played in order to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), this process is directly ended.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, if a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. is configured so that it is set for a predetermined period (four special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (potential state transition state) to transition from a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state during that state of probability change. By establishing the following, a potential state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set.

In the third embodiment, the potential state transition conditions include a first potential transition condition that is established when a jackpot is won during the variable probability state, and a predetermined period during which the variable probability state is set (special symbol variation 4 The second potential transition condition that is satisfied when the final variation of (times) is executed, and the condition when a small hit is won in the lottery of a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1)) during the probability variation state. and a third potential transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the potential state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide players with a never-ending gaming experience.

Furthermore, the plurality of potential transition conditions described above are configured such that the period during which the potential state is set after being established is different, and when the first potential transition condition is satisfied, a jackpot is indicated. If the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second potential transition condition is met, the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite state is set and the third potential transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is changed from the timing when the target small winning game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 opens as a small winning game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol corresponding to the final variation of is ended.

By configuring this way, in order to play a game to set a potential state during a variable probability state, instead of simply aiming for a potential state, the game is also played in response to an opportunity for a potential state to be set. Since the player can be made to look at the player, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol is configured to vary depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the special symbol lottery result is configured to vary depending on the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, if the first potential transition condition is satisfied, in the case of a special symbol lottery result, that is, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol confirmation period will be from 5 seconds to 300 seconds, depending on the lottery result. It is configured so that it is set within the range of . With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first potential transition condition has been met (even if the special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol confirmation period that is set thereafter Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of , it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the potential state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second potential transition condition is satisfied, the potential state is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probability variable state) corresponding to the establishment of the second potential transition condition. For example, in the final change in the probability variable state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the length of the period set as the probability state is It is configured so that the variation time is less than (including the same as) the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during the potential state. With this configuration, if the final variation of the probability variation state is off, the probability state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 variation is executed during the probability state, and a small It is possible to set a disadvantageous potential state that is disadvantageous to a player that makes it impossible (difficult) to win a winning game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned unfavorable potential state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed so as not to execute the performance mode that informs that the potential state game (RUSH game) will be executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the potential state is set.

In this embodiment, as described above, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the final change of the probability variable state, an unfavorable potential state is set. In some cases where the lottery result is a miss, a long symbol confirmation period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot) is set, or when the lottery result of a special symbol is a miss. The variation pattern (variation time) selected may be set to 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the player does not win a jackpot or a small win during a variable probability state, it is possible to set a probability state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can maintain expectations until the end of the variable probability state. You can play games while playing the game. In addition, by making the set symbol confirmation period and fluctuation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when winning a jackpot, it creates expectations that a jackpot game will be executed after the potential state ends. be able to.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, if the length of the symbol confirmation period is set to the same length as when winning the jackpot to perform a potential state game (RUSH game), the lottery result of the special symbol is It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. Thereby, the lottery result of the current special symbol is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the desire to play during the potential state game from decreasing.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the length of the period during which the potential state is set is configured to vary depending on the timing at which the first potential transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured such that the longer the probability state is set, the more the number of special symbol variations in the probability variation state increases. As a result, the more the number of special symbol variations in the variable probability state increases, that is, the fewer the number of special symbol variations that can be executed during the variable probability state, the easier it becomes to set a potential state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to satisfy the first potential transition condition), or to win the jackpot just before the end of the variable probability state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be done. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the final change of the probability change state, that is, if the first potential transition condition and the second potential transition condition are both satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the probability state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, it is possible to provide the probability state for a longer period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the longer the establishment of the first potential transition condition is delayed, the more likely the potential state is to be set for a long period of time. It may be configured such that the longest potential state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when a jackpot is won in the 3rd time, or the sooner the first potential transition condition is satisfied, the faster it is. It may be configured such that the longer the potential state is set, the more likely it is that the potential state will be set for a long period of time.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is a command determination process in place of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 106) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above. 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64), and variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of variable display setting processing (see FIG. 69). The difference is that the winning information related process (see Figure 131), jackpot end process (see Figure 133), and probability variation display process (see Figure 135) are added, but otherwise the process is the same. executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 130, command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4172). Command determination process 3 (S4172) differs from command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. The other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the winning information related process (S4271), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the content of winning information related processing (S4271).

In the winning information related process (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming status stored in the status setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether the read gaming state (ie, the current gaming state) is changing in probability (S5502). If it is determined that the read gaming state is in the process of probability variation (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the read value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether there is winning information in the winning information received this time (S5505). If it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the pre-read winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the read gaming state is not in a probability variation state (S5502: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5504 that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is 0, (S5504: No), sets a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information (S5509), executes the process of S5508 described above, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 3 (S4552). Jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executes the jackpot end processing (S4651) after executing the processing of S4608 or S4611 described above for the jackpot related processing (S4502) in the first embodiment described above. They differ in some respects. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end process (S4651), which is one process in the jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4651).

In the jackpot end process (S4651), first, all information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n=4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether there is any hit information in the read information (S5605). If it is determined that there is winning information in the read information (S5605: Yes), check whether winning information is included in the winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the end of the jackpot game). (S5606). In the process of S5606, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the probability state will be set immediately after the jackpot ends. A special presentation mode is set for the purpose (S5607), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that winning information corresponding to the next change does not include winning information (S5606: No), the pre-read winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including winning information changes. The number of special symbol fluctuations until then is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), an ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of S5605, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation setting number (n=4) is set in the remaining variation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-mentioned S5611 Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). Fluctuation display setting processing 3 (S4173) is different from the fluctuation display setting processing (S4113) in the first embodiment described above, when it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the current gaming state is not a definite state (S5103). :No), the difference is that the probability change variation display setting process (S5151) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, regarding the variable display setting process for probability variation (S5151) which is one process in the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation display setting process (S5151). In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. , and executes the process of transmitting it to the display control device 114.

In the probability change variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether the current variation is a small hit or not (S5701). If it is determined that the current variation is a small win (S5701: Yes), a performance mode that will result in all bingo, that is, a performance mode as shown in FIG. 114(b) is set (S5709), and in S5710 Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current variation is not a small win (S5701: No), it is determined whether the pre-read hit flag 223bb is set on (S5702). If it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to on (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the remaining fluctuation number is 2 ( S5703). If it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of fluctuations, the performance mode is set from the variable probability performance selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the remaining probability variation number area 223ba and the remaining variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process moves to S5710. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to on (S5702: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5703 that the value of the residual variation counter 223bc is not 2 (S5703: No), a production mode in which bingo cannot be achieved is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is subtracted by 1 (S5711), and the process moves to S5710.

Next, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the extracted variation pattern command and the presentation mode set in any one of S5705, S5708, and S5709 is set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. Each of the above-mentioned embodiments is configured so that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) fluctuate simultaneously (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type), and the potential is determined as a game state. A large number of small winning games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the special drawing 2 lottery (variation) during the period when the state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. It was configured to be possible.

The probability state once set is based on the first probability ending condition that is established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. The process is configured to end when any of the second probable end conditions that are satisfied based on the above are satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first potential end condition is satisfied, the potential game state ( RUSH game) is executed until just before the jackpot game, which is the second advantageous game, starts, so it is possible to have the player perform a plurality of different advantageous games in succession, and the player It was something that could give them a sense of satisfaction.

However, in each of the embodiments described above, after the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Although multiple types of variable ending conditions for transitioning to a certain state can be set, only the two mentioned above are used for ending conditions for ending a certain state. There is a problem in that it is easy to predict the period during which a certain state will continue.

To solve this problem, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed to shift (fall) from a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state every time a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed. (hereinafter referred to as a falling lottery) is executed, and when this falling lottery is won, a low probability state of the special symbol is set.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem of the player easily predicting the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol will continue to be set, and it is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that the potential state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, during a period in which a variable display (special pattern variation display) for displaying that one special symbol has won a jackpot is being executed (special symbol variation display period), the other special symbol is Even if a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is configured to be invalid.

As a result, if a potential state is set because the first variable ending condition (a variable ending condition that is established based on a jackpot win) is established, a potential state game (RUSH In the game), since the falling lottery can be invalidated, a potential game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous potential game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if a potential state is set due to the second probability variation ending condition (a probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) being satisfied, a falling lottery will be executed during that probability state. Therefore, there is a risk that the potential state will end early based on winning the falling lottery, so the period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed will be longer than the above-mentioned advantageous potential state. It can be a normal potential state game that is likely to be shorter than a state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the variable probability state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of transitioning between four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game state transition method in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment, the content of the game state transition in the case of winning the falling lottery is added, and each transition The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied are changed, and the transition ratio that changes when winning a jackpot is changed, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, a falling lottery is executed to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state, and the falling lottery is executed during the probability variable state. If the player wins, the state shifts to the time saving state, and if the player wins the falling lottery while in the potential state, the player shifts to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set a potential state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. In the state, the condition for moving from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (for example, reducing the number of times shortened) is higher than the condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (winning the falling lottery). It needs to be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the potential state is set is determined depending on the timing of the establishment of the transition condition for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so the player can be made to pay close attention to the game content, and the game can improve the interest of Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method executed is the same (left-handed game) in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the performance content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are configured in the same way. Therefore, even if the player wins the falling lottery before the transition condition for the normal symbol (the condition for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied, it will be difficult for the player to understand that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow of setting the potential state and the flow of the game during the potential state in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where the special lottery jackpot is won during the probability variable state (when the first probability variable end condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137(b) is , is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the variable probability state (when the second variable probability termination condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137(a), in the fourth embodiment, when the high probability state (variable probability state or potential state) of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured so that the lottery (falling lottery) for transitioning to the above state is carried out every time a special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, and if a jackpot is won during the probability variation state (the first probability variation ending condition) It is configured such that the period during which the potential state is set in the case where the falling lottery is not executed is set as the falling lottery invalid period in which the falling lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, if the potential state is set based on the fulfillment of the second probability variable ending condition, the falling lottery is valid even during the potential state game (RUSH game), as shown in FIG. 137(b). Since this is executed, the potential state is shifted to the normal state based on the winning of the falling lottery before the special drawing 1 fluctuation ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first variable probability ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a potential state game (RUSH game) that is more advantageous than when the second variable probability ending condition is satisfied.

<About the effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the performance contents executed in the first embodiment described above as the performance contents executed during the variable probability state, an opportunity for setting the probability state is suggested (notified) to the player. The difference is that an effect for suggesting (notifying) that a person has won a falling lottery during a potential state game (RUSH game) is added.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effects added to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a performance to suggest that a potential state game (RUSH game) is set when the second probability variable ending condition (time reduction number reached) is established. , and FIG. 138(b) schematically shows the production content to suggest that a potential state game (RUSH game) is set due to the establishment of the first variable ending condition (jackpot winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138(a) and 138(b), in this embodiment, the opportunity for setting the potential state is determined by the display mode of the effect pattern 813 that is displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. It is configured to notify (suggest) that when the display mode of "444" is displayed as the production pattern 813, it is notified that the second probability variable end condition (time reduction number reached) is satisfied, and " When the display mode of ``SUPER RUSH'' is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first variable ending condition (jackpot winning) has been satisfied.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the player is informed of the opportunity to set the probability state by the display mode of the production pattern 813 displayed as the production result during the probability change state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a plurality of display modes may be provided in which selection ratios are varied depending on the type of probability variable ending condition established as the display mode of the effect pattern 813 to be displayed. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which probability variable ending condition has been met.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139(a), a description will be given of the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the potential state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the potential state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) is satisfied, and the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery start condition is satisfied. The falling lottery is configured to be executed during the period from when the jackpot lottery is executed until the jackpot lottery is executed, that is, before the jackpot lottery is executed.

Therefore, if you win the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139(a), you can play the potential state game (RUSH game) while the special symbol (special symbol 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is displayed in a fluctuating manner. A notification is given to indicate that the lottery has ended, and a new special symbol 2 variation is suppressed from being executed after the winning of the falling lottery (after the game state shifts from the potential state to the normal state). In addition, by variably displaying the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 from "right-handed hit" to "left-handed hit" while the special symbol (special symbol 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is being displayed in a variable manner, After winning the falling lottery (after the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state), a new special symbol 2 variation is suppressed from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139(b), the content of the effect executed when a jackpot is won during the potential state game (RUSH game) will be explained. FIG. 139(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance contents executed when a jackpot is won during the potential state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, description will be given of performance contents during an advantageous potential state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player among the potential state games (RUSH game). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when a potential state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability variation ending condition, a fall lottery is set to invalidate the fall lottery during the setting period of the potential state. It is configured such that a lottery invalidation period is set, and the treasure box 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the game is in an advantageous potential state game (super RUSH game). The number of displays is increased, and a comment "Super RUSH in progress" indicating that an advantageous potential state game is in progress is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a fall lottery counter C6 is added, which is used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery.

The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", and is updated at, for example, 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and Some of the counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of this fall lottery counter C6 is referred to in the fall lottery that is executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability change flag 203g is set to on), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is a determination value predefined in the falling lottery table 202cb, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to a low probability state (falls).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, and a falling lottery The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) is such that the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is always opened. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is set. Further, it is different from the first embodiment described above in that the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won is at least 5 rounds or more. are different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the special symbol has won a jackpot or a small win, the operation details performed during the small win game are A jackpot game is defined in which the same action content (a concept that includes differences that are difficult for the player to distinguish) from the action scenario is executed, and a potential state is set, which is a gaming state in which the player has an advantage. In contrast, the fourth embodiment makes it difficult to understand the timing and end timing of a jackpot game, but the fourth embodiment makes it easy for the player to determine whether he or she has won a jackpot or a small win. By making the operation contents different from the operation contents of the small winning game, the player can easily distinguish between the operation contents and the small winning game operation contents.

In this way, by allowing the player to easily determine whether a jackpot game or a small win game has been executed, it is possible to easily determine the number of small win games executed during a potential state game (RUSH game). can be made to understand.

Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the fall lottery table 202cb. The fall lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C6 mentioned above is stored. The value of the falling lottery counter C6 acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is one of those specified in the falling lottery table 202cb. When it matches the judgment value of , it is set so that it moves to a low probability state of a special symbol (falls down).

More specifically, four determination values "43, 107, 195, and 222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the high probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Among the 240 values that the falling lottery counter C6 can take, there are 4 judgment values that are determined as falling, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the variable probability state of the special symbol. becomes 1/60 (4/240).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 6/480 (see FIG. 15(a)), and winning the small jack in the lottery of special symbol 2. The probability is set to 221/480 (see FIG. 15(b)). In other words, the configuration is such that the probability of winning the lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when the probability state is set, it is configured so that winnings are more likely to be won in the order of small win, fall, and jackpot.

Note that the winning rates for jackpot, small hit, and fall in the high probability state of special symbols are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and the ease of winning may be varied. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning a fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and the configuration is configured so that the player can repeatedly enjoy jackpot games and small win games while in a potential state until falling and winning. Alternatively, you can set the small win probability and fall probability to be almost the same (for example, small win probability 1/3, fall probability 1/4), and draw a special symbol during the probability state. The gameplay may be such that the player is excited every time the game is played. Alternatively, the fall probability may be set high (for example, 1/2), and the special symbol lottery may be executed with the probability state set only if the person does not fall in the first fall lottery. good.

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202cb in this embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not a fall occurs in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

In the fourth embodiment, this falling lottery table 202cb is compared with a regularly updated falling lottery counter C6, and the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol (the falling lottery table 202cb is ) is determined. In other words, the timing of transition from the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) can be made random. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the potential state ends during the potential state game (RUSH game) that is performed during the period in which the potential state is set.

In this embodiment, it is determined by lottery (determination) whether or not to transition (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is determined by lottery (determination) whether to transition to another state. ) may be done. For example, whether or not to transition from a high probability state of normal symbols to a low probability state of normal symbols may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed every time a special symbol changes. As a result, how long the high probability state of the normal symbol lasts can be made random, so the variable state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) can be changed to the potential state (the high probability state of the special symbol). , low probability state of normal symbols) can be made difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, during the period when the variable probability state is set, the player can always play the game while expecting that the probability state will be set. Further, for example, it may be configured such that it can be determined by lottery whether or not to transition from a low probability state of special symbols to a high probability state of special symbols.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag to indicate that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for transitioning the gaming state is restricted, and when set to on, various parameters are restricted. This indicates that updating of parameters is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the status update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca is set when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). :Yes), or if it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S1006 in FIG. 150: Yes) ) is set to on (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Furthermore, it is referenced in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (time saving number) corresponding to the condition for transitioning the gaming state is skipped. Then, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148), if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 148: Yes), it is set to OFF. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), when it is determined that the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501 in FIG. 151: Yes), it is also turned off. is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won with any of the plurality of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol that won the jackpot is set to ON. During the period in which the variable display is being executed, the gaming state is configured not to change.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 145(a). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of an MPU 221 of No. 113. As shown in FIG. 145(a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that a potential mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The probability mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting the production mode (probability mode) of the production (probability production) for notifying the player that the probability state has been set. . This probability mode selection table 222ca includes a plurality of production modes ( A performance mode) is defined, and an opportunity to set a potential state can be suggested to the player depending on the performance mode of the selected potential performance.

Next, detailed contents defined in the probable mode selection table 222ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probable mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146(b), if the information included in the status command received from the main controller 110 indicates that the current potential state is a jackpot probability state, the value of the acquired mode setting production counter 223ca "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

Then, if the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current potential state is a time-saving potential state, the value of the acquired mode setting performance counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range "50-89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range "90-99".

The fall notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that he or she has won the fall lottery, and is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that he or she has won the fall lottery. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining time shortening number area 223k indicating the remaining period set by the user and the value of the fall notification performance counter 223cf.

In the fourth embodiment, the game method (left-handed game) and the method executed by the third symbol display device 81 are explained in the case where the variable probability state is set as the game state and the case where the time saving state is set as the game state. The various display modes are configured to be the same. This configuration prevents the player from easily determining whether the current state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the falling lottery is executed, the time is saved at random timing in the state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is configured so that states (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) are set.

Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the variable probability state is set, the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the potential state, which gives the player an advantageous potential. While a RUSH game is executed, when the time saving state is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state changes from the time saving state to the normal state. transition to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 146(c). FIG. 146(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146(c), this fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the remaining number of time reductions at the time of winning the fall (information in the remaining time reduction number area 223k) and the value of the fall notification performance counter 223cf. The notification format is defined.

Specifically, if the falling winning timing is when the remaining time shortening number is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining time shortening number area 223k indicates the remaining time shortening number is 0), that is, the high probability of a normal symbol. If the fall lottery is won due to a change in which the state ends, "confirmed notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification performance counter 223cf. Then, when the falling winning timing is such that the remaining time shortening count is 1 to 49, that is, when more than half of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed, the obtained falling notification performance counter 223cf. "Suggestion notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmation notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". Then, if the remaining time shortening count is 50 to 98, that is, if more than half of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains, the value of the acquired fall notification performance counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "Suggestive notification" is defined in the range of , and "determined notification" is defined in the range of "90 to 99."

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the notification mode is such that the player can easily understand that the player has won the fall lottery, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A notification mode is set in which a display indicating the fact (for example, a display of "Unfortunate") or a sound or a luminous color of a decorative member to notify that the user has won the fall lottery.

In addition, when "suggestive notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") is set to notify the player that he may have won the falling lottery. . Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, this "suggestive notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even if the player has not won the falling lottery. With this configuration, the "suggestion notification" is executed both when the player actually wins the fall lottery and when the player does not actually win the fall lottery.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the mode of notification (suggestion) of whether or not you have won the falling lottery is changed to the remaining period (remaining time short) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously. The configuration is such that the setting is based on the period), and the longer the remaining time period is, the more difficult it is to set the "confirmed notification". Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player realizes that he has won a lottery with a long remaining time and his desire to play during the short remaining time decreases.

In addition, the setting frequency of the "suggestion notification" that is set when a person has not won the fall lottery may be configured to be variable based on the length of the short period of remaining time.For example, the longer the short period of remaining time, the more likely the person will fall. It is preferable to configure the system so that "suggestion notification" is easily set even when the player has not won the lottery. This makes it possible to vary the possibility of actually winning the falling lottery when the "suggestive notification" is executed, based on the length of the short period remaining, so the "suggestive notification" is executed. It is possible to make the player play the game during the short remaining time while predicting whether or not he or she will win the falling lottery by distinguishing the frequency (number of times) of winnings and the number of times the remaining time is short, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 145(b). 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of No. 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145(b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has a mode setting performance counter 223ca, a probability mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits, in contrast to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a short-time notification flag 223ce, and a fall notification performance counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting production counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting a probability mode using the probability mode selection table 222ca. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The potential mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set potential mode, and the potential mode determined in the potential mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 1 variation display setting process 4 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and a display variation pattern command is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and a display variable pattern command is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (potential mode information) stored (set) in this probability mode storage area 223cb is stored when it is determined in the state command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small winning number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small winnings won during the probability state, and is a counter for counting the number of small winnings won during the probability state. When received, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small wins won during the probability state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In this embodiment, a small hit number display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit number counter 223cc, and a small hit is made during the period in which the probability state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time in the probability state is displayed.

The fall flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the player has won the fall lottery during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the player has won the fall lottery.

The time-saving notification flag 223ce indicates that someone wins the falling lottery during a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and enters a time-saving state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). A flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (a effect executed when the confirmed notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) for notifying the player that the transition has been made has been executed, When set to on, a fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification performance counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), which is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. Special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 148) in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38), and game state update processing (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process. The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, in which the special symbol shifts from a variable probability state to a special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to cause a person to fall is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, so this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability is changing (S482). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off, that is, the probability variation is not in progress (S482: No), the process moves to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, if it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the fall lottery table 202cb. (S483). Then, it is determined whether the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any judgment value (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202cb (that is, it is a value corresponding to a fall) (S484 ), if it is determined that the value does not correspond to a fall (S484: No), the process moves to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, if it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any judgment value (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202cb (a value corresponding to a fall), ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, the special symbol probability variation state is transitioned (falls) to the special symbol low probability state (S485). Then, a fall command is set for the audio lamp control device 113 to notify that the special symbol has transitioned from the variable probability state to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall) (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. In addition, in this embodiment, in the process of S406, if it is determined that the data in the current execution area is a jackpot (S406: Yes), after executing the processes of S407 to S411, the status update restriction flag 203ca is set to on (S487), and this process ends.

By executing the special symbol variation start process 4 (S386), it is possible to easily perform a lottery to determine whether the special symbol should be shifted to a low probability state (fall) and a lottery to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. be able to. In addition, in this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probability variable state of the special symbol, a lottery is first performed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall lottery), and then a jackpot lottery of the special symbol is performed. Although the configuration is such that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the result will be the case, the processing order is not limited to this. The jackpot lottery may be performed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287) executes the processing of S801 to S805 in contrast to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that processing for setting off (S871) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, gaming state update processing 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of gaming state update processing 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is different from the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above in that it adds a process (S651) for determining whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on. differ. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S651, if it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process moves to S601.

After executing the processes of S601 to S604, in the process of S605, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, whether probability is changing) (S605). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652: Yes), a status command indicating a jackpot probability state is set (S653), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S652, if it is determined that the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a status command indicating a time-saving potential state is set (S654), and this process ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) is different from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above, in which the special symbol shifts from a variable probability state to a special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to cause a person to fall is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, with reference to FIG. 147, for the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) described above, a process is performed in which the target of variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed explanation will be omitted since it is only executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executes S1501, S1503 to S1506 in contrast to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that processing for setting off (S1571) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) in contrast to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 152), the difference is that variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and otherwise the same process is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 152, command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4182). Command determination processing 4 (S4182) is different from command determination processing (S4112) in the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that a status command has been received from the main controller 110 in the processing of S4203 (S4203: No), the difference is that status command processing 4 (S4281) is executed instead of status command processing (S4204). Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, state command processing 4 (S4281), which is one process in command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 4 (S4281). Status command processing 4 (S4281) includes a probability mode setting process (S4451) added to the status command processing (S4204) in the first embodiment described above, and determines whether a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Other processing is the same as the status command processing (S4204) in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

In state command processing 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating transition to the probable state (S4403: Yes), probable mode setting processing (S4451) is executed. Details of the probable mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process moves to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 this time is not a status command indicating transition to the potential state (S4403: No), the main controller 110 issues a fall command. It is determined whether the message has been received (S4452). If it is determined that a falling command has been received (S4452: Yes), a falling effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the falling effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the probability mode storage area 223cb, the small hit number counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the short-time notification flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the probable mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the status command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probable mode setting process (S4451).

In the definite mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of status command received from the main controller 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting performance counter 223ca, a probable mode is determined using the probable mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146(b)) (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, a display potential mode command corresponding to the determined potential mode is set (S5803), and the determined potential mode is set in the potential mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a potential notification effect is set to notify the entry of a potential state (S5805), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the falling effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling effect setting process (S4453).

In the falling effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (S5901). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5901: Yes), a potential notification effect is set to notify the end of the potential state (S5902), and the status command received from the main controller 110 is The value corresponding to the gaming state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5901: No), then check whether the remaining time reduction number is 99 or more, that is, the remaining time reduction number area 223k It is determined whether the value stored in is 99 or more (S5904). If it is determined that the remaining time reduction count is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), a time reduction notification effect is set to notify the entry of the time reduction state (S5905), and the time reduction notification completed flag 223ce is set to ON (S5906). . On the other hand, in the process of S5904, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction count is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processes of S5905 and S5906 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing is ended. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small win related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small win related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small win related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the small win related process 4 (S4574), first, if it is determined that the small win start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the potential state. (S4751). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small win counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small winning number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small win start command is set (S4702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the game is not in a potential state (S4751: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4753 that the value of the small win counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 ( S4753: No), executes the process of S4702, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is a variable display setting process for special figure 1 in place of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) in contrast to the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above. 4 (S5171), the difference is that a variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) is executed instead of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), and that a fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5103: Yes), the special symbol 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in the winning information storage area 223b. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). Details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the falling flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), fall notification processing (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106 described above. Next, the process executed for special figure 1 in S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the fall notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether the time-saving notification completed flag 223ce is on (S8001). If it is determined that the short-time notification flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a potential variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this process end. On the other hand, if it is determined that the short-time notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information in the remaining short-time count area 223k is read out (S8002). Next, a fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the number of remaining time reductions read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification performance counter 223cf (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is a confirmed notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the mode is the confirmed notification mode (S8004: Yes), the short-time notification flag 223ce is set to OFF (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to OFF (S8006). Next, a time-saving notification effect is set to notify that the time-saving state has entered (S8007), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8004, if it is determined that the determined notification mode is not a confirmed notification mode (S8004: No), a fall notification command for display corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment S5171) will be explained. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171) executes the processes of S5201 to S5205 in contrast to the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) in the first embodiment described above, and then proceeds to the process of S5206. Instead, the probability mode stored in the probability mode storage area 223cb is read out (S5251), and based on the extracted variation pattern and probability mode, the probability variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is executed. The difference is that a process for setting (S5252) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is one process. S5175) will be explained. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175). Variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 in contrast to the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) in the first embodiment described above, and then proceeds to the process of S5309. Instead, readout of the probability mode stored in the probability mode storage area 223cb is executed (S5351), and based on the extracted variation pattern and probability mode, the probability variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is executed. The difference is that a process for setting (S5352) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, in contrast to each of the first embodiments described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a fall lottery is performed in which the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, when the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, at what timing is the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) This can make it difficult for the player to predict whether the transition will occur.

In addition, if you win the falling lottery during the variable probability state and move to the time saving state, you will enter the probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Because it is difficult to transition (more difficult to transition than the variable probability state), once the variable probability state is set, it is more difficult to transition than the probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). It is possible to make the player play the game with excitement so as not to win the lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the same gaming method (left-handed game) is performed when the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set, so the current It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, if the falling lottery is won immediately after the variable probability state is set (for example, the first special symbol variation), the player is notified that the variable probability state has been set. Since it is configured to execute a production mode (time saving notification production) that makes it appear as if the time saving state has been set from the beginning (after the end of the jackpot), there is a possibility that the potential state will be set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the probability change state, which is higher than the gaming state, ends in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, there is an effect (suggestive notification) that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the falling lottery during the probability change state, and an effect (confirmation notification) that notifies the player that he has won the falling lottery. ), and the selection ratio of the suggestion notification and the confirmation notification is configured to be different based on the number of remaining changes of the special symbol that can be set by continuing the probability change state. Specifically, the configuration is such that the larger the number of remaining fluctuations in the probability variable state, the more difficult it is to execute the final notification. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to recognizing that the state has shifted from the variable probability state to the time saving state with a large number of remaining fluctuations remaining. Furthermore, the effect of giving a suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the player has not won the falling lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that can only be selected during a variable probability state, or a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that can only be selected during a time saving state. It may be configured so that the player can predict the current gaming state based on the variation pattern of the special symbols provided and executed. In this case, the variation pattern exclusively for the variable probability state and the variation pattern exclusively for the time-saving state should not be greatly different in content, but may be provided with an error of about 1 second in variation time, for example. As a result, the current game state can be informed to the player by an error in the variable display time that causes a slight sense of discomfort, so that the player can be made to pay close attention to the variable display of the special symbols to be executed. Furthermore, in this case, the error of 1 second may be used, for example, as the period until the third symbol starts to fluctuate on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the third symbol to start fluctuating. It is possible to notify the player of the current gaming state by giving a slight sense of discomfort that the game is slower or faster than usual, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, during a period when a jackpot variation is being executed in one special symbol, the lottery result of the falling lottery accompanying the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated. . As a result, for example, because the first potential transfer condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of special drawing 1 is satisfied, during the period when the potential state is set, you will not be able to win the falling lottery and will be transferred to the second special. It becomes possible to continue receiving the lottery of the design (special pattern 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a potential state that is more advantageous (easier to continue for a long time) than a potential state set by satisfying other potential transition conditions.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed, the falling lottery is also executed. In other words, the falling lottery is configured to be executed when the execution conditions for the special symbol variation (lottery) are satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a specific ball entrance (for example, the first entrance The ball enters the ball opening 64, the second ball entry opening 640, the general prize winning opening 63), the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the execution conditions for normal symbol variation (lottery) are met. , the timing when the special symbol or the normal symbol stops displaying, or the timing when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed may be used as the trigger for executing the falling lottery, or the falling lottery may be executed when the execution conditions for the special symbol variation (lottery) are met. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute the lottery and the fall lottery is executed based on the determination result. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the falling lottery will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the falling lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability each time a fall lottery is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to provide a high probability state (easy to win) and a low probability state in which it is difficult to fall (hard to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variable state and a low probability variable state are set as probability variable states that are set after the jackpot ends, and in the high probability variable state, a low probability state of the falling lottery is set, and a low probability variable state is set. The state may be configured such that a state with a high probability of falling lottery is set. Furthermore, the state of the falling lottery (high probability state, low probability state) may be configured to be varied based on the number of special symbol variations (lotteries) performed after the probability variation state is set. The predetermined number of times of fluctuation (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured such that a high probability state of the falling lottery in which it is easy to win the falling lottery is set, and then a low probability state of the falling lottery is set. It's okay.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to fall from a variable probability state and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a varied gaming experience. In addition, in this embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, but in addition to this, for example, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed. Processing for transitioning a high probability state to a low probability state may also be executed. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, the high probability state of the special symbol is transferred to the low probability state. It may be configured so that the probability state is lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and it may be configured such that the probability state is not shifted to the medium probability state unless the winning lottery is won.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed in order to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (to cause the special symbol to fall). With this configuration, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be varied depending on the lottery result of the falling lottery, so it is possible for the player to know that the high probability state of the special symbol will remain for a long period of time. It was possible to make the player play the game while making them expect the player to continue playing the game.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the falling lottery is configured to be executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player can decide whether or not to execute the falling lottery with his own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, which could lead to a decrease in the desire to play. Therefore, in the present fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning prize for small winning A device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a ball has passed through an area (channel) through which a winning ball can pass, the small winning variable winning device 2650 changes the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state. The configuration is such that a fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is provided to allow the transition.

By configuring in this way, similar to each of the above-described embodiments, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) in which small winning games are frequently executed based on the special symbol 2 lottery. It is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol will cause the special symbol to fall depending on whether or not the player fires during the small winning game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small winning game to be executed is configured to differ depending on the type of small winning (small winning type). The rate at which the balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game pass through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to vary depending on the opening operation pattern.

With this configuration, the content of the small winning game to be executed can be predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to play a game that aims to win benefits (prize balls) through the small winning game. The player can select a game while playing the game.

In addition, similar to the fourth embodiment described above, in the probability state that is set during the period when one special symbol is performing a jackpot variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) may win a small hit. Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the potential state is set is divided into an advantageous potential state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult), and a high probability state of the special symbol that is more likely to fall than that advantageous potential state. An unfavorable potential state can be set.

<About the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), and the first variable prize winning device 65 is replaced with the first variable winning device 65. A variable winning device 2650 for small winnings is provided, and a winning device (variable winning device 2650 for small winnings) which is opened during the small winning game is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640. There is a difference.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 161. A variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings is provided in the right side area of the game board 13. This variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings has a plurality of channels through which winning balls flow (channels for changing the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state, and the channel for changing the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state. It is configured so that winning balls flow down different channels depending on the timing at which the ball enters the small winning variable winning device 2650.

The internal structure of this small winning variable winning device 2650 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of this small winning variable winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small winning variable winning device 2650 is assembled with an opening forming member 2650b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b to generate a small winning. A base member 2650c for fixing the variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13 with screws, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c to light up the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. an LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged for winning, a back cover body 2650e that holds the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small winning opening (small winning opening) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. An opening/closing unit 2650f having an opening/closing door 2650f1 for opening/closing the winning opening) 2650a, a channel cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a channel, and a channel cover body 2650e and the channel. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked with the switching member 2650h, and a link member 2650i that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g. a flow path solenoid 2650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j and operates the link member 2650i; It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the small winning variable winning device 2650. FIG. 163(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings, and FIG. 163(b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings. As shown in FIG. 163(b), the small winning variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a is a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163(b). A bottom surface is formed that slopes downward to the left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged. The game balls that have passed through this detection port 2650a1 are guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the opening of the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a allows balls to enter through an opening/closing door 2650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be taken out and removed from the game board 13 side. It is variable between an open state where the ball can enter the ball and a closed state where the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball is configured to be able to roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is configured to be evacuated inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) and thereby evacuated from the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a. ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the top surface of the opening/closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the second ball enters. The ball is configured to be guided toward the opening 640 side, and it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 while playing the right-handed game during a right-handed game (during a potential state). This makes it possible to reduce the effort required to change the game method to a left-handed game during a potential state where small winning games are frequently executed. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings, so that more game balls can be efficiently inserted into the winning opening for small winnings (small winning opening). You can win a prize in the winning prize opening) 2650a. Therefore, during the small winning game, the ball can be reliably won in the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163(a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 163(b). As shown in FIG. 163(a), a magnetic sensor 2650c1 having a detection port 2650a1 is fixed to a base member 2650c such that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration in which balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 2650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 164(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is activated so that the balls are distributed to the special drainage channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 that guides the ball, and the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 that guides the ball. It is pivotably supported from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 2650g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2. . The special discharge channel 2650e2 has a fall route through which the incoming ball passes through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and a second normal discharge channel 2650e5 branched from the special discharge channel 2650e2. 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a falling switch 2650e3 that can detect the passage of the ball that has entered the special discharge channel 2650e2, or a second normal switch 2650e6. The ball is detected and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the above-described falling switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a small winning game, that is, when the ball passes through the falling route, the special symbol The high-probability state of is configured to transition (fall) to a low-probability state. That is, the falling gate (falling switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h serves as a flow path for the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during a small hit, as a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, or as a flow path for the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 This is to set one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficult) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by turning on the flow path solenoid 2650k. The variable winning device 2650 for small winnings is configured to switch the flow path so that the winning ball flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164(a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in this embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF during normal gaming, and the winning ball of the small winning variable winning device 2650 enters the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow downward. Therefore, even though a small winning game is not in progress, if a fraudulent state is detected in which the opening/closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is opened and a ball is won, the illegally winning ball will fall into the switch. 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF is a state that is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, and the flow path configuration that is disadvantageous to the player (variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings) By creating a channel configuration in which winning balls can pass through the falling switch 2650e3, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and a penalty can be imposed on illegal games.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends depending on the falling route of the winning ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, so the game can be played even during the small winning game. It can improve people's interest. In addition, when passing through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guiding piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650, The required time is at least 1 second.

Furthermore, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1. Thereby, it can be determined whether all winning balls have been ejected into the small winning variable winning device 2650 based on the total number of balls detected by the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of winning balls in the small winning variable winning device 2650) and the various switches provided in the three discharge areas (normal switch 2650e4, second fall switch 2650e6, fall switch 2650e3) detected by each of the balls (the number of balls ejected from the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings), it is determined whether or not there are balls remaining in the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings. can do.

In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (the ending condition of the small winning game (when there is a predetermined number of wins (10) in the small winning variable winning device 2650, or the opening scenario of the small winning variable winning device 2650 If all the game balls that entered the small winning variable winning device 2650 have not been ejected at the timing when the small winning ending period that is executed after the completion of the small winning winning device 2650 is completed, the small winning variable It is preferable to configure the system so that it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the winning device 2650, and the abnormality is notified to the outside or the game is stopped so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in a part of the pachinko machine 10, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the winning ball of the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (winner) is given to the player as a bonus. In the embodiment, 10 winning balls (10 winning balls) are paid out for each winning ball, and the detected ball (passing the ball winning switch 2650c1) is used to determine whether the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3. By making it possible to allocate whether or not to play, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small winning game. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated area for shifting the special symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state separately from the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Next, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, referring to FIG. 165, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) wins a jackpot in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special drawing 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set as in the fourth embodiment described above, the probability is The configuration is such that the state is set (see FIG. 165(a)). Then, by performing a right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the period in which the probability state is set (while the special symbol 1 jackpot is fluctuating), the small winning game can be achieved. It is configured so that a frequently executed latent state game (RUSH game) is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result). period) is configured so that there is no possibility of winning a jackpot in the lottery using the other special symbol (for example, special symbol 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1), a jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special symbol 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the period during which the potential state is set from becoming shorter. In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the potential state game (RUSH game ) can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery) , the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the falling switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings, the high probability state of the special symbol changes to the low probability state. The configuration is such that there is a period in which no transition occurs (fall invalid period).

Therefore, if a potential state is set during the special pattern 1 variation where a jackpot has been won, the special pattern 1 variation period will become the falling invalid period, so the high probability state of the special symbol will end. It is possible to execute a potential state game (RUSH game) without worrying about this. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the potential state is set based on the jackpot winning of special drawing 1 (the potential state is set based on the establishment of the first potential transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincibility effect (see FIG. 169) that informs the player that the player has been defeated (see FIG. 169).

By configuring to execute this invincibility effect (see Figure 169), it is possible to easily make the player understand that a fall invalidation period is set for the currently set potential state. This allows the user to play a potential state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, even in a potential state where a fall invalidation period is set, the above-mentioned invincibility effect is not executed in some cases. With this configuration, in a potential state game in which the invincibility effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, a falling invalid period may actually be set, so it is possible to make the ball smaller during a small winning game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 wins a prize, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 jackpot variation has elapsed (see FIG. 165(b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small winning game is not being executed at this timing, the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, if a small winning game is being executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation has elapsed, the start of the jackpot game is postponed until the small winning game ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand due to the jackpot game being started during the execution of the small win game.

During the interruption period from the elapse of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 until the start of the jackpot game, the same gaming state (normal state) as during the jackpot game is set. In addition, in the present fifth embodiment, if a small winning game is being executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation has passed, the start of the jackpot game is suspended (postponed) until the small winning game ends. ), but it is only necessary to control the small winning game and the jackpot game so that they are not executed at the same time.For example, the small winning game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation has elapsed. In such a case, the small winning game in progress may be forcibly terminated.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted from illustration, in this embodiment as well as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a small hit is won with one special symbol (special symbol 2), and a small winning game is executed. During this period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is suspended.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the potential state (advantageous potential state) set based on the jackpot winning of special symbol 1 is set as the falling invalid period, so the special symbol is not displayed to the player. It is possible to enjoy a potential state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the high probability state ending. Furthermore, a small winning game started during a potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the preset time saving number is used up in a state where the variable probability state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time saving times are used up during the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, the number of time-savings is subtracted at the start of the change of the special symbol, so the value of the counter (time-saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the time-saving state is When it becomes 0, a potential state is set from the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed (see FIG. 166(a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the potential state that is set by completing the predetermined number of time reductions is configured such that a fall lottery during the potential state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small winning game executed during the potential state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will end due to the winning ball in the variable winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650). This results in a certain unfavorable potential state.

<About the content of the performance executed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic presentation contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the effects that are executed during the variable probability state to indicate whether or not a probability state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, will be set are the same as those described in each of the above embodiments. Since this is the same as the embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167(a), the contents of the effect displayed when a small win is won in a state where the probability state is set will be explained. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small win is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167(a), a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1, and in the special symbol 2 display area Dm2. , a display mode ("341") indicating that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has won a small hit is displayed. In the guidance display area Dm3, "Right hit" is displayed to guide the gaming method in the potential state.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode to notify that the player has won a small prize, and the characters "GET" are also displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small winning game begins" indicating that the small winning game is to be started is displayed.

When the small winning game is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 167(b) is displayed. FIG. 167(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during a small winning game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167(b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has the same display mode as in FIG. 167(a) described above, that is, a display indicating that the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner. Although the mode is displayed, in reality, during the small winning game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167(b), there are two states in which special drawing 1 is being displayed in a proper fluctuating manner (a state in which the fluctuation time is being subtracted) and a state in which the fluctuating display of special drawing 1 is interrupted. The display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 may be configured to be different between the state in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is performed (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted) and the state in which the variation time is not subtracted.

In the main display area Dm, a performance mode in which the character 811 runs from left to right and a treasure box 812 appears from the direction of movement is displayed. In this embodiment, an effect of opening a treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during a small winning game is executed, and depending on the display mode of the effect pattern 813 that appears from inside the treasure box 812, the current small winning It is configured to notify the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), display contents for showing the game results of the small winning game in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 168(a) shows the display contents when the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball and the high probability state of the special symbol ends as a result of winning a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a small winning game. FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 168(b) is a display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect a ball as a result of winning a ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winning during a small winning game. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

In FIG. 168(a), a production pattern 813 indicating a "cross mark" is displayed from inside the treasure box 812, and the character 811 indicates that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state during the small winning game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown below. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the potential state game (RUSH game) has ended and the gaming method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. In other words, by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in which the RUSH game is played, the game state becomes probable. In order to transition from the state to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

On the other hand, FIG. 168(b) shows a display mode in which a performance symbol 813 indicating "V" is displayed from inside the treasure box 812 to notify the player that the RUSH game will continue to be played (i.e., the left The character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 runs from the top to the right.

As explained above, in this embodiment, since the performance corresponding to the game result during the small winning game executed during the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily understand the progress of the potential state game (RUSH game) simply by understanding the content of the performance executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the type of the small winning game executed during the potential state game (RUSH game), the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game is activated by the probability changing switch 2650e3. The rate (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with is made different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen when a small win is won as shown in FIG. It is configured to display comments (for example, ``If you win a small hit and are unlucky, the RUSH ends'', ``If you are unsure, please stop launching''), and also a character that is displayed when you win a small hit. It is preferable to configure the display mode of 811 to be changed depending on whether the type of small win won this time is a small win that makes it easy to end the potential state game (RUSH game).

With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the variable winning device 2650 win a ball during the small winning game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment in which the potential state is set only for a predetermined period (special symbol 1 variation time), the number of small winning games that can be executed during the potential state is also limited, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to make the player play the game while thinking about whether to win a bonus (prize ball) or avoid the end of the potential state game (RUSH game) during the small winning game, which is a novel game. can provide sex.

Further, the type of the small winning game being executed may be notified to the player by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small winning game shown using FIG. 167(b). For example, it is better to configure the system so that the type of small win being executed is such that it is easy to end the potential state game (RUSH game), so that the old and tattered treasure box 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display comments according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Furthermore, the display format displayed during a small win game is more specific than the content that indicates to the player the type of small win (RUSH game continuation expectation) when winning a small win. It is preferable to configure the system so that the player is informed of the content (with high reliability).

With this configuration, a player who has selected whether or not to award a ball to the variable prize winning device 2650 for a small winning in the current small winning game based on the display screen displayed when winning a small winning Since it is possible to show a more specific RUSH continuation expectation level, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game content selected by the player is correct.

In this case, especially for the players who have chosen not to enter the ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650, it is emphasized that the RUSH game is of a small winning type that is difficult to end even if the ball is entered into the prize. It is best to configure the system so that it can be notified. Specifically, there is a small winning type determining means for determining the type of the current small winning game, and whether or not a ball has won a prize in the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 during a predetermined period after the small winning game is started. (or a means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after winning a small win), and the determination result by the small win type determining means is a small win type that makes it difficult for the RUSH game to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings within a predetermined period after the start of the small winning game, it is better to fire the ball in the current small winning game to receive a benefit. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying an inciting comment (for example, "You should have fired the ball" or "You weakling") indicating that you have obtained the ball.

As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he/she has lost money by not placing a ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings, so that the player can actively receive small winnings during the small winning game. It is possible to prompt the variable winning device 2650 to win a ball. In other words, if the RUSH game ends due to winning a ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings, the game results indicate that the current selection was a failure, even if the RUSH game is not stimulated by the production. However, a player who chooses not to enter a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the current selection result was advantageous, so the display means does not display the selection result. By displaying the evaluation, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the current selection was successful or not.

Furthermore, a display mode is provided to notify the player who has chosen not to enter a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650 that the current small winning type is a small winning type that makes it easy to finish the RUSH game. (For example, "Stop firing and get it right" or "You have a good hunch"), or even if the current small win type is a small win type that makes it easy for the RUSH game to end, In this small winning game, an inciting comment (for example, ``You should have fired the ball'' or ``You weakling'') indicating that you would have been able to obtain a bonus by firing the ball may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, a description will be given of the display contents of an effect that notifies the user of a potential state (advantageous potential state) in which a falling invalid period is set. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of a small win in an advantageous potential state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set potential state is an advantageous potential state in which a falling invalid period is set, the same potential mode setting process as in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 154) When the invincible mode is set as the current potential mode (refer to S4451), an effect mode ("invincible mode") indicating that the current potential state set for the player is an advantageous potential state is set. ) is displayed.

When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode exclusively for the invincible mode (a display mode surrounded by an aura). Then, the number of balls that passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode is displayed in the cumulative display mode 819 as "lucky points x 0". This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the falling switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (if a falling invalid period is not set, a command indicating the number of falls). A number will be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked advantageously for the player.

Although not shown in the diagram of FIG. 169, the small hit count display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment described above may be displayed. and the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, a non-game count measuring means for measuring the number of small winning games in which the player did not win a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650, and a display means displaying the number of times measured by the non-game counting means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small winning games executed during the potential game (RUSH game), the number of small winning games played by the player and the number of small winning games played by the player are displayed. Since the number of small winning games that were not executed can be easily grasped, this can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<About the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a small winning type selection table 5 table 202da is provided in place of the small winning type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection 5 table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 5 table 202da. This fifth embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol (special symbol 2) wins the small hit, and when the small prize is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the small winning type selection 5 table The small winning type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small win type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small win type is defined for each value range of the small win type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171(a), the value of the small win type counter C5 is In the range of "0 to 14", "small win A" is defined in association. This "small win A" is a small win type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set in the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. Note that after the 1.5 second open state has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but this ending period is the same for all small winning types, so in Fig. 171 (a) Omitted.

Furthermore, "small win B" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "15 to 59". This "small win B" is made after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. This is a small winning type that sets an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Note that after the second opening is set, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small winning types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

A "small win C" is defined in association with a range in which the value of the small win type counter C5 is "60 to 79". This "small win C" is generated after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. This is a small winning type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Note that after the second opening is set, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small winning types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

“Small win D” is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of “80 to 99”. This "small win D" is achieved after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. This is a small winning type that sets an open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. Note that after the second opening is set, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small winning types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which an operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during a small winning game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of small win to be executed. One operational scenario is set to run.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 171(b). FIG. 171(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171(b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario that is set in accordance with the start timing of the small winning game.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF until 1.4 seconds have passed from the start timing of the small hit, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to be on during the period of . The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which a loop counter is incremented by 1 every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the winning ball flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings is determined based on the selected small winning type and the flow path solenoid. It is configured to be set variably depending on the operation scenario of 2650h. Furthermore, the internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 branches the balls flowing down the special discharge channel 2650e2 into balls that pass through the falling gate 2650e3 and balls that do not pass through the fall gate 2650e3 (second normal switch 2650e6). It is composed of

Specifically, in a small win game where "small win A" is set as the small win type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF (1 minute from the start of the small win). .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and a small winning game is executed which is most advantageous to the player for whom the opening period is set long.

In a small winning game in which "small winning B" to "small winning D" are set as the small winning type, the first open period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the falling route. Furthermore, "Small win C" and "Small win D" have a short opening period of 0.1 seconds (shorter than "Small win B"). Since the first release period is as long as 0.5 seconds (longer than "small win B"), it becomes a small win game in which the ball easily passes through the fall route.

In addition, "Small win C" has the shortest period of 0.6 seconds during which the first attacker (first variable prize winning device) 65 is released in one opening operation, so it is the most disadvantageous small win for the player. It becomes a winning game. In addition, in the present fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball fired in the right-handed game to enter the small winning variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution channel where it is distributed by the channel solenoid 2650h. The system is configured such that the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small win is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167(a)), the small win game is started. At this point, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game wins a prize in the small winning variable prize winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a small hit winning counter 203da, a fall passing counter 203db, and a passing flag 203dc are added. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game. If it is determined that the timing at which the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period of the small winning prize opening 2650a (S3302 in FIG. 174: Yes), the value is added by 1, and after the addition A winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small win control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (see S2271 in FIG. 176). S2571).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, the potential state continues on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the number of winnings command set corresponding to the value of the small winning winning counter 203da. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the set period. Thereby, the number of winning balls in one potential state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player has a game feature in which he or she selects whether or not to place a ball into the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings during a small winning game. Depending on the player's selections, even if the number of small winning games is the same, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 may vary greatly. Therefore, detailed game results can be provided by displaying the number of winning balls on the small winning variable winning device 2650 instead of the number of times the small winning game has been executed.

It should be noted that both the number of winning balls and the number of times the small winning game has been executed are displayed on the variable winning device 2650 for small winning mentioned above on the third symbol display device 81, or the number of balls won during one small winning game is displayed. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small winning type of the small winning game executed.

The falling pass counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the small winning game, and the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175). If so (S3402: Yes in FIG. 175), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the number of passes command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

In this embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when an advantageous potential state is set, the number of balls that have passed through the fall route is always counted. . As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the probability mode, if the probability state of the special symbol is not in an advantageous probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol will pass through the route (fall route) that will transition to the low probability state. The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The passage flag 203dc is used to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball when the detection of the ball by the fall switch 2650e3 is effectively processed (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

This passing flag 203dc is set when it is determined in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). :No), it is set to on (see S3408 in FIG. 175). When the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether a new ball has passed through the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall is executed multiple times during one small winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passage number counter 223db, in contrast to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that , and are added, and the rest are the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and is used by the main control device 110 in the ball passing related process (see S4582 in FIG. 179). When it is determined that the number of winnings command has been received from (S8101 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is added by 1, and the winning number for display is displayed in order to display the information corresponding to the value after the addition on the third symbol display device 81. Set a number command (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, once a potential state is set, the number of winnings counter 223da is calculated based on the number of balls that have won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small winning games that are executed until the potential state ends. It is configured so that the number can be measured cumulatively.

The passing number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3, and determines that a passing number command has been received from the main controller 110 in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is added by 1 if the current potential state is an advantageous potential state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<About the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is replaced with the small win control process (see FIG. 55) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. 176), the small winning entrance passing process (see FIG. 174), and the falling gate passing process (see FIG. 175). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small winning entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the details of the small winning entrance passage process (S171).

In the small winning entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small winning opening is in the open period (S3302). If it is determined that the small winning opening is open during the opening period (S3302: Yes), a small winning entrance passage command is set (S3303). The small winning entrance passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Sent. 1 is added to the value of the small winning prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the processing of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small winning winning counter 203da after addition (S3305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the opening period for the small winning opening is not in progress (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to OFF (S3307). , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passage process (S172), first, it is determined whether the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the pass flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passing flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate is passed (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a pass through the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall pass counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passes is calculated based on the value of the fall pass counter 203db after the addition. A command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the falling gate passing period is valid (S3406). If it is determined that the falling gate passage is valid (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S3407), and the passing flag 203dc is set to ON (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the fall gate passage is not valid (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410) and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, small hit control processing 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit control processing 5 (S2271). Small hit control processing 5 (S2271) is different from the small winning control processing (S2205) in the first embodiment described above, when it is determined in the processing of S2511 that it is the timing to end the small winning (S2511: No ) The difference is that processing is added to clear the values of the small winning prize counter 203da and the fall passage counter 203db (S2571) and set the passage flag 203dc to OFF (S2572). Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command processing instead of the state command processing (see FIG. 62) in contrast to the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. 5 (see Fig. 177), the difference is that hit-related processing 5 (see Fig. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related processing (see Fig. 63), and ball passage-related processing (see Fig. 179), but otherwise the same processing. is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 177, state command processing 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 5 (S4291). In the status command processing 5 (S4291), after executing the process of S4411 in contrast to the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, in place of the process of S4454, the probable mode storage area 223cb, small The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing the number of wins counter 223cc, the number of winnings counter 223da, the number of passes counter 223db, the fall flag 223cd, and the short-time notification flag 223ce is added. Other processes are the same as the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, hit-related processing 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related processing 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit-related process (S4216) in the fourth embodiment described above in that a process related to ball passage is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the winning related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined in the process of S4505 that a prize ball command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether a ball passing related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that a ball passage-related command has been received (S4581: Yes), a ball passage-related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage-related command has not been received (S4581: No), the process is immediately terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a description will be given of the ball passage related process (S4582) which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage related process (S4582).

In the ball passing related process (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the probability mode stored in the probability mode storage area 223cb is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the potential mode read in the process of S8103 is an invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestive effect indicating the end of the potential state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8104, if it is determined that the read potential mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). If it is determined that the number of passes command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the status setting area 223j is read out (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether the read value is a value indicating the probability of time saving omission (S8109). If it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time-saving omission probability (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, if it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time-saving omission probability (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8111.

Next, reading of the probable mode stored in the probable mode storage area 223cb is executed (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the potential mode read in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). If it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestive effect suggesting the end of the potential state is set (S8113), a passing number command for display is set (S8114), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read potential mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation contents (opening operation pattern) of the small winning game to be executed are configured to differ depending on the type of small winning (small winning type). The rate at which the balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game pass through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to vary depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed.

With this configuration, the content of the small winning game to be executed can be predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to play a game that aims to win benefits (prize balls) through the small winning game. The player can select a game while playing the game.

In addition, similar to the fourth embodiment described above, in the probability state that is set during the period when one special symbol is performing a jackpot variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) may win a small hit. Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the potential state is set is divided into an advantageous potential state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult), and a high probability state of the special symbol that is more likely to fall than that advantageous potential state. An unfavorable potential state can be set.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time saving times) is performed at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), the first special symbol variation (lottery) and the second special symbol variation (lottery) can be executed at the same time for a predetermined number of times in a gaming machine. , it is configured to execute a time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set), but for example, when setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 100 (when setting the number of time saving times to 100 times). ), there was a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation was in a non-time saving state (normal symbol low probability state).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is a period in which it is possible to execute a lottery (variation) that is advantageous to the player even in the lottery (variation) of the regular symbol that is different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation until the start of the 101st special symbol variation, that is, the period until the special symbol variation is executed for the number of times that exceeds the predetermined time saving number. There was a problem in that the setting of a non-time-saving state caused discomfort to the player.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (processing of subtracting the number of time saving times) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends (timing when the symbol confirmation period ends), In a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute a first special symbol variation (lottery) and a second special symbol variation (lottery), a time-saving state is set to cause the special symbol variation (lottery) to occur more than a predetermined time-saving number of times. There was a problem that it could be executed in a state where the

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a time-saving end condition is set for the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time-saving) that is executed when the value of the time-saving counter 203f becomes 0. (first time-saving end condition), set a time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for the other special symbol (for example, second special symbol), and set the time-saving end condition for the two set time-saving end conditions. Of these, the time saving state may be terminated based on the time saving termination condition that is satisfied first.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time saving) is set as the period in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol variation corresponding to the final change of the time saving state (for example, 100th time saving) ends. A first time-saving ending condition that is satisfied by this, and a second time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when a condition for starting a new special symbol variation (for example, the 101st special symbol variation) after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the first time saving end condition is established first, that is, the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol confirmation period) ends before the 101st special symbol variation starts. If so, the time saving state is ended at that point.

On the other hand, if the second time-saving end condition is satisfied before the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol fluctuation period (or symbol confirmation period) ends (the special During symbol variation), if the start condition for the 101st special symbol variation is satisfied, the time saving state may be configured to end before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, while preventing special symbol fluctuations (lotteries) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times, the maximum period of time can be maximized. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, a state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (variation).

In addition, each of the above embodiments includes a probability change counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a time saving counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. However, in each of the above embodiments, instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the variable probability counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement), a time saving counter is used. It is also possible to apply the process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f, or to perform the opposite process.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. In the second embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 is of a so-called simultaneous variation type that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and further includes: The gaming state is configured to be varied during a symbol confirmation period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) during which the special symbol lottery results are displayed. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot) The gaming state is configured to shift from a variable probability state to a potential state at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, during the symbol confirmation period of special symbol 1 (the period from when the first symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed), the second special symbol in the potential state is (Special figure 2) It was possible to execute the game and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game and the special symbol lottery game are played at the same time and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game, the jackpot game While the game is being executed (from the time when the opening period of the jackpot game is set until the end of the ending period of the jackpot game), the special symbol variation (lottery) is configured not to be executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the special symbol lottery (variation) is not executed during the jackpot game, so that the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. However, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not performed during all periods during the jackpot game, the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed is limited and the gaming efficiency (number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) decreases. There was a problem with this.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game until the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), special symbol fluctuations on the side that has not won the jackpot are configured to run. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during that opening period. The lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed at the same time.

In other words, even during a jackpot game, a round game in which a ball can enter due to a jackpot game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state where it is easy to enter a ball) During periods other than the game (for example, opening period, interval period, and ending period), the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to be executed. With this configuration, players can be made to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game, and pay attention to special symbol fluctuations during other periods, so that it is possible to provide the player with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured so that there is no chance of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from being provided with excessive jackpot games. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (other than a jackpot), the player can win a small win that can give a small amount of privilege (prize ball) to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage can be made different between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that an open scenario table 202ea is added, and other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which game contents during a jackpot game or a small win game (hereinafter referred to as a win game) are stored, and the scenario of the win game to be executed is determined according to the win type. remembered. Specifically, the length of the period from the start of the winning game until the start of the first round game (opening period), the length of the round game period, and the variable winnings that are open in the round game. The type of device, the number of times a round game is executed, the length of an inter-round game (interval period), and the length of an ending period set after all round games are completed are stored.

Note that the information (winning game content) that is read out in order to execute the winning game corresponding to the winning jackpot or small winning only needs to be predetermined, and can be read using the open scenario table 202ea as in this embodiment. The information may be stored, or the techniques used in each of the embodiments described above may be employed.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the main controller 110 RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment has a jackpot state flag 203ea, a small win state flag 203eb, a special symbol variable flag 203ec, and a jackpot interruption flag 203ed, in contrast to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. , is different in that a special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

The jackpot status flag 203ea is for indicating the status during the jackpot game, and includes the type of special symbol winning the jackpot and the current jackpot play status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). This is a flag that is referenced when determining which one of the following. Here, the contents of the jackpot status flag 203ea will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot status flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the jackpot status flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming status can be specified by the status of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (Fig. 182 (a) ), the lower 4 bits are "0010" (written as "02" in Figure 182(a)), and during the round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are The 4 bits are "0011" (written as "03" in Figure 182(a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower 4 bits are "0100" (written as "04" in Figure 182(a)). Become.

The special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0101" (in Fig. 182(a), " During the round game (round), the lower 4 bits are "0110" (written as "06" in Figure 182(a)), and during the round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are "0111" (described as "07" in FIG. 182(a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower 4 bits become "1000" (described as "08" in FIG. 182(a)).

Further, when a jackpot game is not being executed (when the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF), the lower 4 bits are "0000" as an initial state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is configured so that its value is updated according to the jackpot scenario that is updated in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to the state at the time of winning. The jackpot status flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of special symbol winning the jackpot and the contents (jackpot game state) indicated by the updated jackpot scenario.

As described above, since the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, there is a means for storing the updated content of the jackpot status flag 203ea and the stored content. A configuration may also be used in which a means for determining (past history) is provided and the presence or absence of an abnormality with respect to the jackpot game is determined based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot status flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the values that can be set if a jackpot is won by the lottery of special drawing 1 (values from "01" to "04" shown in FIG. 182(a)), if a jackpot is won by the drawing of special drawing 2. If it is determined that the value has been updated to the value that can be set when the player wins (values from "05" to "08" shown in FIG. 182(a)), it is determined that the jackpot game is in an abnormal state, and It is preferable to configure it so that an abnormality notification is performed. This makes it possible to accurately determine whether the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is configured to be varied depending on the execution content of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but it is possible to determine the current jackpot gaming situation. For example, a means for determining whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring, a means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), may be provided, and the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea may be set based on the determination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. It may be configured such that a means is provided to determine the current jackpot game situation based on the determination result of the means.

When the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is updated, a status command to indicate this is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the current jackpot gaming situation by receiving a status command indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, and performs various performance modes according to the jackpot gaming situation. is set.

In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type winning the jackpot is also determined as the jackpot game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may be configured not to be discriminated. With this configuration, the number of types for classifying jackpot game situations can be reduced.

The small win status flag 203eb is used to indicate the status of the small win game, and indicates the current small win game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). This is a flag that is referenced when determining. Here, the contents of the small hit status flag 203eb will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182(b), the small win status flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming status can be specified by the status of the lower two bits.

Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of a small winning game, the lower two bits are "01" (described as "01" in FIG. 182(b)), and during the round game (round), the lower two bits are becomes "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182(b)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower two bits become "11" (described as "03" in FIG. 182(b)). Then, when a small winning game is not being executed (when the medium winning flag 203p is set to OFF), the lower two bits are "00" (described as "00" in FIG. 182(b)). .

In this embodiment, since the round game is configured to be executed only once as a small winning game, the value indicating the interval period is deleted from the above-mentioned jackpot status flag 203ea, and the round game is executed only once as a small winning game. Since the configuration is such that there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of one special symbol, the value for determining the type of special symbol winning a small win is also deleted. The value of this small win status flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the update contents of the small win scenario that is updated in the small win control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193). When the value of 203eb is updated, a status command is set to indicate the value of the updated small hit status flag 203eb, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 grasps the current small winning game situation by receiving the status command that includes information indicating the value of the small winning status flag 203eb, and determines the performance mode according to the current situation. Set.

The special symbol variation possible flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is a state in which a new special symbol variation can be executed, and is turned on when a new special symbol variation can be executed. It is set.

The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the update of the jackpot scenario is interrupted. This jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol executed during the opening period of a jackpot game becomes a small win and the small win game is executed.

In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in a part of the state during the jackpot game (state where the round game is not being executed), and the special symbol lottery When winning a small win, the small win game is executed. During this small winning game, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON, and the jackpot scenario is configured not to be updated.

With this configuration, even if a small win is won during the opening period of the jackpot game, for example, the small win game can be reliably executed without starting the jackpot round game. In addition, even if a small win is won within a predetermined period such as the opening period of a jackpot, the opening period of the jackpot is not subtracted (updating the jackpot scenario), so many small winning games are executed. The player can be made to play the game with great enthusiasm.

In addition, in the present sixth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed during a jackpot game, updating of the jackpot scenario is interrupted to ensure that the small winning game is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, you can forcibly end the small winning game based on the timing when the jackpot round game is executed, or the small winning game can be stopped until the jackpot round game ends. It may be configured to temporarily interrupt the process.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON based on the timing when the small win game is executed, so the jackpot scenario is updated during the fluctuation time of the special symbol winning the small win. be done. As a result, in addition to winning a small win during a jackpot game, it is possible for the player to play the game with the expectation that a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set as short as possible will be set. On the other hand, the content of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be made to pay close attention.

In this case, it is preferable that the variation time suggestion notification indicating the set variation time is executed at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation executed this time. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not a short variable time has been set, thereby increasing the performance effect. Further, even if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the next special symbol lottery can be executed immediately by setting a short variable time. In other words, the variable time suggestion notification does not indicate whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit or miss (win/fail determination result), but is a notification that indicates whether or not the lottery result is advantageous to the player.

In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed may be set on, for example, based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that wins the small jackpot is executed. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem that a jackpot round game is executed while a special symbol variation winning a small win is being executed, and a game that is difficult to understand for the player is provided.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, we have provided a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the variation time of the special symbol, so that this special symbol lottery (variation) will be performed during the opening period. If it is determined that the special symbol lottery will end within the opening period, the performance mode will be set based on the lottery results (results of judgment) of the special symbol lottery, and if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery (variation) will not end within the opening period. , it may be configured to set a performance mode corresponding to a case where the lottery result (accuracy determination result) of the special symbol lottery is a failure. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of a special symbol variation that is forcibly terminated due to the execution of a jackpot round game is a small win, the special symbol variation can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be stopped.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. The control process of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is a special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) in place of the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. Process 6 (see Fig. 183), first special symbol variation start processing (see Fig. 33) is replaced by first special symbol variation start processing 6 (see Fig. 185), second special symbol variation start processing (see Fig. 39). In place of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see Figure 186), in place of the jackpot control process (see Figure 53), jackpot control process 6 (see Figure 188), and in place of the jackpot end process (see Figure 54), the jackpot ends Process 6 (see FIG. 192), execution of small hit control process 6 (see FIG. 193) instead of small hit control process (see FIG. 55), variation condition determination process (see FIG. 184), round execution process (see FIG. 189) and the addition of a small winning end process (see FIG. 194). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), a variation condition determination process (S291) is added to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, and the first special symbol variation start process First special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 185) instead of (see FIG. 33), and second special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 186) instead of second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 39) They differ in that they execute. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), first, a variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. Details of the variation condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184. Next, it is determined whether the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). If it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process moves to S202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292: Yes), the process moves to S204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation condition determination process (S291), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291).

In the variation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure variation possible flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process moves to S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203o is on (S3502). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether the information of the read jackpot status flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period for a jackpot (S3504). If it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05" (S3504: Yes), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process moves to S3507. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, if it is determined that the read information is not "01" or "05" (S3504: No), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3506), and the process of S3507 to move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the medium jackpot flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether the medium small win flag 203p is on (S3507). When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set on (S3512), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hit state flag 203eb is read out (S3508). Next, it is determined whether the information of the small hit status flag 203eb read in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is "01" (S3509: Yes), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3511), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment in that information on the jackpot status flag 203ea is read out. . Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), first, reading of the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is executed (S391). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the second special symbol jackpot or outside the jackpot execution period (S392). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process moves to S301. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is neither "00" nor "05" (S392: No), this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the jackpot status flag 203ea, and the jackpot of the first special symbol Add processing to determine whether it is the opening period or the round period. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), first, reading of the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is executed (S971). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the first special symbol jackpot or outside the jackpot execution period (S972). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process moves to S901. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the process of S902 is executed and the process ends.

Next, electric accessory opening/closing processing 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271).

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether there is an opening setting (S3601). If it is determined that there is an opening setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S3601, if it is determined that there is no open setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether there is a closed setting (S3603). If it is determined that there is a closing setting (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to OFF (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, if it is determined that there is no closure setting (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the closure scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the closure scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the closure scenario (S3605: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, jackpot control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 6 (S2272).

In jackpot control processing 6 (S2272), first, in the processing of S2301, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351) . If it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

Next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a jackpot (S2302). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a jackpot (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), round execution processing (S2353) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the round execution process (S2353) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), a jackpot interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process moves to S3703. Details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. On the other hand, in the process of S3701, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S3703), and a process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the jackpot interruption process (S3702), which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

In the jackpot interruption process (S3702), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203p is on (S3801). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set on (S3802), the jackpot interruption command is set (S3803), and the process moves to S3805. . On the other hand, in the process of S3801, if it is determined that the small win flag 203p is not on (S3801: No), an opening command indicating the start of a small win is set (S3804), and the process moves to S3805.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol is being varied (S3805). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (S3806), the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), and the book is displayed. Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the specific winning hole is set to be closed (S2308), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the special electric power operation (S2354). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the special electric power (S2354: Yes), an ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the ending execution process (S2355) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2354, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the operation of the special electric power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the operation of the role-linked operating device (S2356). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the role-linked operating device (S2356: Yes), jackpot end processing 6 (S2357) is executed and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the operation of the role-linked operating device (S2356: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, jackpot end processing 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the status command (S2406) for the jackpot end process (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above, "00" is set in the jackpot status flag 203ea. The difference is that processing (S2451) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, small hit control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit control processing 6 (S2272). In the small win control process 6 (S2272), a process for setting a value corresponding to the small win status flag 203eb is added to the small win control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above, The difference is that a small winning end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), in the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the small hit (S2503: Yes), an opening command is set (S2504), and it corresponds to the small hit status flag 203eb. A value to be used is set (S2581), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is not the small winning start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the starting timing of the small winning round (S2505). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning round (S2505: Yes), a small winning operation setting process (S2506) is executed, a value corresponding to the small winning state flag 203eb is set (S2582), and the main processing end.

In this embodiment, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), an ending command is set (S2510) and a value corresponding to the small hit status flag 203eb is set ( S2583), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S2511). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the small win (S2511: Yes), a small win end process (S2584) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194, the small hit end process (S2584) which is one process in the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the details of the small winning ending process (S2584).

In the small winning ending process (S2584), first, it is determined whether the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to OFF (S2592), and the special symbol variation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S2593). Next, the updated value of the jackpot scenario is subtracted by 1 (S2594), the small win medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2595), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2591, if it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the process of S2592 to S2594 is skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and this process is ended.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game until the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), special symbol fluctuations on the side that has not won the jackpot is configured to run. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during that opening period. The lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed at the same time.

In other words, even during a jackpot game, a round game in which a ball can enter due to a jackpot game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state where it is easy to enter a ball) During periods other than the game (for example, opening period, interval period, and ending period), the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to be executed. With this configuration, players can be made to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game, and pay attention to special symbol fluctuations during other periods, so that it is possible to provide the player with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured so that there is no chance of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from being provided with excessive jackpot games. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (other than a jackpot), the player can win a small win that can give a small amount of privilege (prize ball) to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage can be made different between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 233. In each of the embodiments described above, the jackpot game is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game. The configuration is such that a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) game is executed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, a first flow path that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through a specific area 650V is provided. It is configured to provide a passage ta (see FIG. 196) and a second passage tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball can easily pass through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays close attention to which channel the ball is flowing down during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls are distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or second flow path tb by the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in the game. Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second channel tb that easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 is configured to vary depending on the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbols to be set is configured to vary depending on the set gaming state and the type of small winning won. With this configuration, when winning a small win corresponding to a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, a game state (advantageous time-saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and a jackpot end It is possible to set a gaming state (disadvantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when a small win corresponding to a jackpot to which a time saving state is later given is won.

In this embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a jackpot is won (first hit), at least three jackpots are executed including the first hit. It is configured so that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. By making it possible to set a gaming state in which it is guaranteed that a plurality of jackpot games will be executed in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, although the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 3640, which is the trigger for executing the lottery. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640. The ball is distributed into the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb depending on the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball is flowing down.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a are distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is such that when the ball is launched, the ball easily flows into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to cause the balls to flow into the second channel tb while the second special symbol lottery is being executed, it is necessary to continuously fire the balls toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of trying to obtain an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, a channel unit 660 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13, a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the channel unit 660, and a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the channel unit 660. In the winning device (V winning device) 650, a specific area 650v that can provide a jackpot game based on the passage of a ball is provided, and the second variable winning device is provided at the lower center of the game board 13. 650, the second ball entry port 640, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached are removed. The other configurations are the same as the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 660, and FIG. 197(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state). FIG. 197(b) is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state). FIG. 198(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 198(b) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow in an open state (protruding state).

In addition, to explain the terminology indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment, the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a refers to the flow path for letting the ball enter the second ball entry port 3640. This is a term used to indicate a state in which (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. In some cases, the term "restriction state" (a state in which entry of the ball into the second ball entry port 3640 is restricted) is sometimes used.

In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a means a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 is open, that is, the electric This is a term used to indicate the state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term is called a permissible state (a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the second ball entrance 3640). may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 196, the flow path unit 660 forms a first flow path 660a forming a first flow path ta and a second flow path tb as ball paths through which the balls flow down toward the V winning device 650. A second passage 660b, and a first inlet 661 into which the balls that have flowed down approximately in the center of the right side area flow, and a first inlet 661 through which the balls that have flowed down from the first inlet 661 flow down toward the electric accessory 3640a. a first guiding path 661a (see FIG. 197(b)), a second inlet 662 into which the balls flowing down the left side of the right side region flow; A third passage 660c that allows the balls to flow down toward the lower area of the game board 13, a third inlet 663 into which the balls that have flown down the right side of the right side area flow, and a third inlet 663 that allows the balls that flowed from the third inlet 663 to flow down the game board 13. It is composed of an outlet 66 for discharging to the outside.

The balls flowing down the right side area are moved through the flow path unit while changing the flow path by a plurality of nails (for example, nails 660k (see FIG. 195) that are flow path variable members) disposed above the flow path unit 660. 660, about 55% of the balls flowing down the right side area flow into the first inlet 661, about 40% flow into the second inlet 662, and about 5% flow into the third inlet. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. Note that the above-mentioned distribution ratio shows the average value when a right-handed game is played. In this case, the proportion of balls flowing into the second inlet 662 increases. In this way, by allowing the player to control the firing intensity in the right-handed game, the inflow rate to each inflow port provided in the flow path unit 660 can be varied, thereby giving the player the ability to It is possible to provide the fun of varying the firing intensity so that an advantageous game can be executed.

In addition, the balls flowing down the second inlet 662 are configured to be distributed into two channels formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls distributed to the channel on the near side (approximately 90 %) flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (approximately 10%) distributed to the back passage (not shown) flow into the out port 66 and are sent to the pachinko machine 10. It is configured so that it is discharged to the outside. In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the position close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (the position that is formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state) An out port 66 is provided (a partition wall is provided to separate the space from the out port 66) at a position close to each of the upstream end and downstream end of the spherical flow path.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the movable range of the electric accessory 3640a that is operated when a winning game with normal symbols is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation.

In the schematic diagram shown using FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the outlet 66 and the movable area of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a, but in reality , so that a gap of less than half a sphere is created. Thereby, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed multiple times, it is possible to suppress damage to the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall due to friction. Furthermore, since the size of the gap is less than the size of half a ball, it is possible to prevent the balls from spilling downward through the gap.

Next, the ball flow in a right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing in from the first inlet 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a, but when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state), the ball flows over the electric accessory 3640a. The liquid flows down to the first passage 660a provided below the first guide passage 661a (see FIG. 197(b)) without flowing down. This first passage 660a is a passage in which a first flow passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass is approximately 0.5 seconds, and the ball can be placed in the V prize in a shorter time than the ball flowing down the second flow path tb, which will be described later. Device 650 can be reached.

In addition, most of the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 (approximately 90%) pass through the through gate 67 without being concerned with the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and are closer to the front side than the second passage 660b, which will be described later. It flows down the third passage 660c formed on the front side from the player's viewpoint when viewing the pachinko machine 10 from the front, and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13. Further, a portion (approximately 10%) of the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 pass through a fourth passage (not shown) provided on the back side of the third passage 660c and flow into the out port 66.

In this way, by configuring a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to form a flow path through which the balls flow three-dimensionally. It is possible to configure more ball paths within this limited range, and to provide a gaming machine that can realize a ball flow that will keep players entertained.

Similar to the second inlet 662 described above, the ball that enters the third inlet also passes through the outlet 66 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without being concerned with the state of the electric accessory 3640a. . Here, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197(a), the structure of the upper surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured to form a downward slope from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a The ball is configured so that it flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) due to its own weight.

A delay member is provided on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a to delay the speed at which the ball flows down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a first delay member 3641 and a second delay member 3642 are provided, and the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is caused by the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642, The ball enters the second ball entry port 640 provided on the downstream end side of the electric accessory 3640a while contacting the second delay member 3642. In addition, in this embodiment, the installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the speed of the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

This installation member 3643 is not attached to the electric accessory 3640a but directly attached to the flow path unit 660. Therefore, it is always arranged at a fixed position without being involved in the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. In this way, a delay member for slowing down the speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is attached to the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642, and the flow path unit 660 attached to the electric accessory 3640a. By constructing the attached installation member 3643, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) (see FIG. 198(a)), the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a can be meandering. When the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) (see FIG. 197(a)), it is impossible for the ball to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. (difficult) to function as a means for suppressing flow down.

Here, to specifically explain the above-mentioned flow-down suppressing means, when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 197(a)), that is, in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry port. As shown in FIG. 197(a), since the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the back side of the game board 13, the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the back side of the game board 13. It will be located in As a result, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 becomes narrower (approximately 5 mm) such that a ball cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643. Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3643 is such a distance (approximately 7 mm) that the ball cannot pass through.

As a result, even if a ball is illegally placed on the electric accessory 3640a while the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball will still enter the second ball entrance 3640. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the electric accessory 3640a is placed in the open state (protruding state), it is no longer necessary to bury each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the game board 13. The opening of the game board 13 provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering the inside of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening of the game board 13.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely buried in the game board 13, but only a portion (the first delay member 3641, the first delay member 3641, the The electric accessory 3640a is configured to be in a closed state when the second delay member 3642) is exposed. Thereby, even if the electric accessory 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily understand where the electric accessory 3640a is placed. In addition, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (projected state), how does the ball flow down on the electric accessory 3640a? It is possible to make the player understand whether or not the game will be played.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is changed from the movement of the ball that can be performed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. Since the player can be made aware of this in advance, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is actually in the open state and the ball is flowing down over the electric accessory 3640a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), as shown in FIG. reach. Then, it flows down toward the second ball entrance 3640 while meandering along the top surface of the electric accessory 3640a and along the shape of each delay member.

Here, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), the spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a will be explained with reference to FIG. 198(a). A meandering ball flow path is formed in which the ball discharged from the first guide path 661a reaches the second ball entry port 3640. It takes about 2 seconds for the ball to pass through this meandering ball flow path, and the ball passes through the flow path from the outlet of the first guiding path 661a to the back side of the first delay member 3641 (upstream part ZA on the flow path). The time required for the ball to pass through the flow path from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second ball entry port 3640 (flow path downstream part ZB) is approximately 1.2 seconds. It is configured to be seconds.

In this embodiment, the operation termination conditions for the electric accessory 3640a include a first general power termination condition that is satisfied when 3 seconds elapse after the electric accessory 3640a operates to the open state (protrusion state), and a second A second normal power termination condition that is satisfied when one ball enters the ball entrance 3640 is set, and when any of the normal power termination conditions are satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. (buried state).

The ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is a first passage 660a that is visible below the electric accessory 3640a, Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when the electric accessory 3640a moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is at least the length of one ball (11 mm). In this embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is 15 mm, which is larger than one ball (11 mm) and smaller than two balls (22 mm).

With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball located on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls can be Since the balls do not continue to fall in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

The spheres staying in the upstream part ZA of the meandering ball channel (see FIG. 198(a)) stay in the first passage 660a and in the downstream part ZB of the channel (see FIG. 198(a)). The ball is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the ball flowing down over the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) at a speed such that it falls directly below. It is configured as follows.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (protruding state) and the ball is located between the second delay member 3642 and the second ball entry opening 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (buried state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 that moves toward the second ball entry port 3640, and the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640. It consists of In this way, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second ball entrance. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to fire 100 balls per minute, and if you fire 100 balls per minute in a right-handed game, one out of every two balls will be fired. A ball flows into the first inlet 661 . In other words, since one out of every two balls fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds flows into the first inlet 661, the interval at which the balls flow into the first inlet 661 is approximately 1.2 seconds on average. seconds.

As described above, since the downstream part ZB of the flow path is configured such that it takes 1.2 seconds for the ball to pass, if the above-mentioned second normal power termination condition is satisfied, that is, the second ball entry port In the case where the electric accessory 3640a moves to the closed state (buried state) due to the ball entering the ball into the second ball entry port 3640, if the ball is continuously fired into the right-handed hitting area, the second ball entry port 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a operates to the closed state with the ball that entered the first inlet 661 next to the ball that entered the flow path downstream part ZB, the ball enters the second path 660b. It can make it easier to fall.

On the other hand, if a game is played by intentionally timing the ball to be launched, it is difficult for other balls to fall into the second path 660b while the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to cause the balls to enter the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the balls continuously.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, 3 seconds is set as the first normal power end condition for the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but when the gaming state is the normal state, In this case, the first normal power termination condition is configured to be set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required for the flow to flow down the upstream part of the meandering ball channel formed on the electric accessory 3640a. Even if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, the ball will not be allowed to enter the second ball entry port 3640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent advantageous benefits from being given to a player who plays an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down into the second passage 660b, so by letting the ball flow down into the second passage 660b while the V winning device 650 is opened by some method, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down into the specific area 650V. It is possible to suppress illegal acts of passing the ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b, which is advantageous to the player, for a player who is not playing a right-handed game during the normal state or who has not played the right-handed game continuously during the time-saving state. Although the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult for the electric accessory 3640a to be moved, the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a. In addition, there may be three or more passages for receiving balls that have fallen from above the electric accessory 3640a, or a plurality of receiving ports for receiving balls that have fallen from above the electric accessory 3640a may be provided, and each receiving port can be used to receive the balls that have fallen from the top of the electric accessory 3640a. The configuration may be such that the probability of passing through the specific region 650V is varied. Furthermore, a plurality of paths are provided through which the ball falling from the top of the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V, and the time required for each path to reach the specific area 650V (time required for the ball to win in the V winning device 650) It may be configured to have different values.

Returning to FIG. 195, the explanation will be continued. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the channel unit 660. This first variable winning device 65 is opened when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, 90% of the balls fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (balls that flowed into the first inlet 661 (50%) and balls that flowed into the second inlet 662 (40%)) are Since both of them are configured to win in the first variable winning device 65, even if the channel unit 660 is provided upstream (above) the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be executed smoothly. I can do it. In addition, since the balls that have flowed into the first inlet 661 and the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable prize winning device 65, a plurality of balls can be simultaneously 1 It is possible to make it easier to win a prize with the variable winning device 65.

<About the production content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, before explaining the characteristic effects executed in the seventh embodiment, the gameplay of the seventh embodiment will be briefly explained. In the seventh embodiment, when a player wins a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, or wins a small hit by drawing a special symbol, the ball passes through a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small winning game. In this case, a jackpot game is executed (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type).

In addition, it is configured such that a small win is not won in the lottery using the first special symbol, and a small win is won only in the lottery using the second special symbol. The second ball entrance 3640, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery, is configured so that a ball can be entered only when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. When a jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to be opened in the small winning game, and the ball is passed through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. To have a first channel (first channel 660a) that is difficult to pass through and a second channel (second channel 660b) that is easy to pass through, and to vary which channel the ball flows down depending on the game content. It is configured so that it can be done.

Furthermore, the present seventh embodiment has an advantageous small win in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game that is set correspondingly, and a disadvantageous small win in which a time-saving state is not set, and the type of the small win is The configuration is such that the variable time set is varied accordingly. In addition, there is an advantageous time-saving state in which it becomes easier to enter the ball into a specific area 650V if you win an advantageous small win as a time-saving state, and a disadvantageous state in which it becomes easier to enter the ball into a specific area 650V if you win an unfavorable small win. It is configured to be able to set the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the second flow path (second passage 660b) that allows the ball to flow down toward the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of variation of the second special symbol. It is configured to set a state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to vary the variation time of a special symbol set at the time of winning a small hit between an advantageous time-saving state and a disadvantageous time-saving state. In the state where the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path enters the V winning device 650 when winning the advantageous small hit, and the ball flowing down the second flow path when winning the disadvantageous small hit. The variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small winning type is configured so that the ball that flows down does not win a prize in the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball will not pass through the specific area 650V even if an unfavorable small win is won, so the time saving state is set across the jackpot game. be able to. That is, if a jackpot (first win) in which an advantageous time-saving state is set after the jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing, at least two more jackpot games (three if the first win is included) are executed. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199(a), a description will be given of the effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the time saving state. FIG. 199(a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 199(a), while the time saving state is set, the words "Right-handed" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to prompt the player to play the right-handed game. A symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the variable area Dm5.

The symbols displayed in this ordinary symbol fluctuation area Dm5 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) that is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). It is stopped and displayed in a display mode to show the current lottery result in synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) stops. FIG. 199(a) shows a display mode "display mode imitating two circles" indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win. In addition, in the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a loss, the "display mode imitating two cross marks" is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol variation area Dm5, and the normal symbol (second symbol) ), a "display mode in which circles and crosses are alternately and variably displayed" is displayed in the general figure variation area Dm5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 199(a), if a winning result is won in the general drawing lottery, an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses a bridge 851 and heads toward a race venue 852. This effect causes the ball to flow down onto the electric accessory 3640a that is operated to the closed state (protruding state) based on winning the lottery, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. This shows a game, and the operation status of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed using the construction state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. The display contents are set so that whether or not the ball will be pitched is expressed by whether or not the character 811 reaches the race venue 852.

In this way, by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to perform performances that are reminiscent of actual gameplay, it is possible to notify the player of complex gameplay in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 199(a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and neither the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 nor the special symbol 2 display area Dm2 has started to change. A display mode indicating that no special symbol variation is being performed is displayed. The words "Race Preparation" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, indicating the content of the future performance.

Here, to briefly explain the flow of the performance contents executed during the time saving state in this embodiment, the performance is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 while the time saving state is set. If you win in the normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 199(a), the ball flows down onto the electric accessory 3640a that is in the open state (projecting state) and enters the second ball entrance 3640. A performance corresponding to a game in which the ball enters the ball (direction to the race venue) is executed.

Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 and the second special symbol starts to change, the character 811 reaches the race venue and the race effect shown in FIG. 199(b), which will be described later, is executed. Ru. The content of this race performance depends on the lottery results of the second special symbol being executed (results of judgment, variable time), and the state of the ball flowing into the second passage 660b, which makes it easier for the ball to enter the specific area 650V. is set.

Thereafter, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small winning game, an effect is executed in which the character 811 comes in first place as a race result (see FIG. 201(b)). In this way, each game executed during the time saving state, that is, a game in which a normal symbol wins a winning game, a game in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640, a game in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640, and a small winning in a second special symbol lottery. It becomes possible to notify the player of the game results of the game to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game and the game to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, using a series of performances. Therefore, the player can understand the game result by looking at the performance (race performance) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

Here, we will return to FIG. 199(b) to continue the description of the display screen during race performance. In the state where the display shown in FIG. 199(a) is executed, that is, in the time saving state, the normal symbol (second symbol) is won and the electric accessory 3640a is variably operated to the open state (allowed state). In this state, when the ball flows down over the electric accessory 3640a and enters the second ball entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199(b) is displayed.

The race start screen displays a display mode in which a character 811 modeled after a rabbit runs a race against a rival 860 modeled after a turtle. The state shown in FIG. 199(b) is a state in which the second special symbol variation is executed for the first time after the time saving state is set, and the second special symbol (special symbol) is in the special symbol 2 variation area Dm2. A display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that Fig. 2) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and the words "9 race entries remaining" are displayed as the remaining number of time reductions in the remaining time reduction number notification area Dm6. . Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Finish in first place" are displayed to guide the performance result of the race performance corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

Next, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed during the time saving state and the lottery result is a loss, the screen shown in FIG. 200(a) is displayed. In FIG. 200(a), a stop display mode of "3, 4, 6" indicating that the lottery result of special chart 2 is a loss is displayed in the special chart 2 fluctuation area Dm2, and at the same time, in the main display area Dm , a presentation mode indicating that the race presentation has ended (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot finish) is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Look forward to next time" are displayed to indicate that the current special figure 2 fluctuation was not an advantageous gaming result for the player and to indicate that the time-saving state will continue. .

On the other hand, if the lottery of special drawing 2 is a win, the screen shown in FIG. 200(b) or FIG. 201(a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in this embodiment, the ball passage is configured so that two channels are formed for the ball to flow down toward the V winning device 650, which is opened when a small hit is won. The time required for the ball to reach the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small winning game, is changed depending on which channel the ball passes through. Furthermore, the ease with which the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is configured to vary depending on the channel through which the ball passes.

Therefore, during the special symbol fluctuation when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is won in the lottery, the channel in which the ball is flowing down toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result is The presentation mode is configured to differ based on the following. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second path (delay path) 660b that is advantageous to the player during the small winning variation of special drawing 2, the production mode shown in FIG. 200(b) is displayed, and the special In the case where the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small win fluctuation in FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b), the situation is shown in FIG. 201(a). The performance mode is displayed.

In FIG. 200(b), in order to show that the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V in the small winning game that is executed after the special figure 2 variation in execution is stopped and displayed, the main display is used as a race effect. An effect in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 is executed in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from normal (display mode wrapped in an aura), and the player is informed that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will come in first place in the current race performance. To do this, the words "Speed UP" will be displayed. Further, the words "Great Chance" are also displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a comment to indicate that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will come in first place in the current race performance.

On the other hand, in FIG. 201(a), as a race performance, a performance mode in which a character 811 and a rival 860 aim for the goal while engaging in a dead heat is displayed. In this way, even if the lottery results of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are of the same small winning type, the result of the lottery will be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in the channel through which the ball flows down. By differentiating the presentation mode, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player. It is possible to make players interested in the contents of a series of performances (race performances).

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after the small winning game ends, the performance mode shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed. be done.

On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, the performance mode shown in FIG. The presentation mode will be displayed.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, there is a first time saving state (time saving state A) which is advantageous to the player as a time saving state, and a second time saving state which is disadvantageous to the player than the first time saving state. state (time saving state B) can be set, and when time saving state A (first time saving state) is set, a small win of the small winning type corresponding to the jackpot game to which the time saving state is given. It is configured such that the ball passes through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the player wins.

In other words, in a state where time-saving state A is set, when a jackpot game is executed based on a small winning win, the configuration is such that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is reliably set after the jackpot game ends. are doing.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the player that the time saving state A has been set, the performance mode shown in FIG. 202(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. configured to be displayed. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the time saving state A is set, an effect mode is set in which an undersea race is executed in which a background showing the seabed is set. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the time-saving state will be set again after the end of the jackpot game is displayed: ``If you win the race, you will get a gorgeous prize!?''. By suggesting that the time-saving state A is set by varying the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set a performance mode that is easy for players to understand, and also to Since effects can be shared, the amount of image data used to set effects can be reduced.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, in addition to the normal background and the underwater background described above, multiple background images can be set as the background for the performance during the race. For example, a desert You can set a background that imitates a forest, a sea of trees, a city, etc. Each background is set at a different rate depending on the currently set time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which time-saving state is currently set based on the background type set as the background of the performance during the race.

Furthermore, a measuring means is provided to measure the number of times that the time-saving state A is set in succession, and a special function that can be set only when the number of times that the time-saving state A is continuously set reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times) is provided. A background may also be provided. This provides a sense of security that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player has been set, and also provides a sense of superiority by letting other players know that the game results are special. .

Although the characteristic presentation mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described above, the content described above is merely an example, and other presentation modes may be displayed. For example, in the performance examples explained with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, performance examples are shown in which a performance mode corresponding to the game result is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance mode is likely to be set depending on the game result. It may be configured to have different values.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a state in which the production mode shown in FIG. 199(b) is displayed, that is, in a state in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 during the time saving state (the special figure 2 variation has started). , the display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the current special drawing 2 drawing. Rival 860 is displayed in the case of winning, the case of winning an unfavorable small win (small win C) which is disadvantageous to the player rather than the advantageous small win, and the case of not winning the small win (winning in the losing case). The configuration may be such that the types of characters set as modes are different.

By configuring this way, when the special chart 2 variation starts, the player is provided with information that allows him to predict the future game content, that is, the lottery result of the special chart 2 lottery, and the type of small winning won. can be provided.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variation is started, if a production mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the current special figure 2 variation is displayed (set), the contents of the displayed production mode can be grasped. However, a problem arises in that the game is continued only when the lottery result is advantageous to the player. However, in this embodiment, when entering the ball into the second ball entrance 3640, The ball is configured so that it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during a small winning game unless the ball is shot.

As a result, even if you display (set) a performance mode (display mode) that suggests the lottery result of the current special figure 2 variation when the special figure 2 variation starts, after confirming the display mode, Since it is possible to prevent the player from deciding whether or not to enter the ball into the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199(b) can be started from the timing when the special figure 2 variation is started, the period during which the race is executed (the production execution period during the race) can be lengthened. The performance effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the period of fluctuation of the special symbol can be included in the performance execution period during the race, for example, it will be longer if the special symbol is won (big hit, small win) by lottery than if it is a miss. By configuring the variable period so that it is easier to set, the longer the performance execution period during the race is, the more it is possible to make the player think that he has won, and the longer the period during which the performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance suggesting that the player has won a prize (win suggesting performance).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the determination by the determining means (special figure 2) is performed during the period from the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation until the end of the small winning game, and the determination result is the predetermined determination result. The system is configured to execute an effect in which the character 811 runs a race (see FIGS. 199(b) to 202(a)) using a specific game (small winning game) that is executed when there is a small winning (small winning). , the value (information) for indicating the remaining time shortening number (remaining number excluding the currently running special chart fluctuation) displayed in the remaining time shortening number notification area Dm6 at the start of the race (see FIG. 199(b)). It is configured to continue to be displayed until the end (FIG. 202(a)), that is, until the small winning game executed after the end of the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) ends.

In this way, even if the special figure fluctuation ends and the small winning game is executed, the display mode of the remaining time short number notification area Dm6 is configured not to be changed, so that the player can understand the performance during the race. It can be easily notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, a race is performed using one special figure fluctuation (lottery) and the period until the end of the small winning game when a small winning is won in that special drawing lottery. Since the system is configured to perform a mid-race performance, there is a problem in that the period during which the mid-race performance is executed varies greatly based on the special drawing lottery result. In other words, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the small winning game will not be executed, so the period in which the small winning game is executed cannot be included in the in-race performance execution period, and the in-race performance will be executed. The problem was that the period was shortened.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as elements for branching the performance mode of the in-race performance, there are at least the lottery results of special symbols and the game results of the small hit game, so unless the small win is won, the in-race performance 200(b) and 201(a)), which is set at the final stage of the game (for example, see FIGS. 200(b) and 201(a)), players may become bored with the game before they can enjoy the various effects. There was a risk that the problem would occur.

In order to solve this problem, for example, in some cases where the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation time is longer than when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, specifically, , A loss fluctuation pattern (fake production fluctuation pattern) in which a fluctuation time similar (same) to the sum of the fluctuation time set when winning a small hit and the small win playing time is set. When this false effect variation pattern is set, it is possible to set it as an in-race effect, as if a small hit was won with a special symbol variation, and the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the small win game. It is preferable to set a presentation mode (see FIG. 202(a)) that indicates the situation. Thereby, even if the player does not win a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the player can experience the performance mode set at the final stage of the performance during the race.

In addition, if you win a jackpot in the special lottery, we will set the same variable time as the one that would be set if you won a small win, and the first round of the jackpot game and the small win It is good to set the opening operation of the jackpot game so that the game and the opening operation mode are the same. As a result, even if you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, the in-race performance can be executed, providing the player with a performance mode in which the performance result of the in-race performance is advantageous to the player. It can be made easier.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the in-race performance is executed using a period set based on one special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation period, small winning execution period). The present invention is not limited to this, and the race performance may be performed using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol drawings. By configuring in this way, for example, when the lottery results of special symbols are consecutively unsuccessful, it becomes possible to perform an in-race performance using the continuous special symbol fluctuation period.

Therefore, even if the variable time set when the special symbol lottery result is a loss is configured to be shorter than when the special symbol lottery result is a win, it will be set at the final stage of the performance during the race. A presentation mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one performance mode using a plurality of winning fluctuations, the performance mode for indicating to the player that the special symbol lottery was a miss is made to correspond to each special symbol lottery. Compared to the case where this is set, it is possible to reduce the number of times that the performance that notifies the player that the special drawing lottery is a loss is executed.

Above, we have explained the content of the performance when the time saving state is set, but in addition to that, for example, if you win a jackpot type where the time saving state A is set after the jackpot game ends by drawing the first special symbol. For example, instead of the display mode of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed, the third symbol may be displayed in a special display mode of "VVV". The three symbols may be displayed in a stopped state. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify the player that a gaming state advantageous to the player will be set, and therefore the player can play the game with peace of mind for a long period of time.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment includes a first random number 7 table 202fa, a first winning type selection 7 table 202fb, a second winning random number 7 table 202fc, a fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, It has a small winning type selection 7 table 202fe and an opening scenario 7 table 202ff. Note that the configuration (table) with the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (the same name except for "7" added to make it possible to identify that it is used in the seventh embodiment) ) is the same as in each of the embodiments described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each embodiment described above, and is such that the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types: a special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. The number of random numbers is the same, but only the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol has a random number value set for a small hit (see FIG. 204). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in small wins (setting only one), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can provide benefits to the player (big or small wins). ) Expectations for granting can be varied.

Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be explained with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204(b) is the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. This first random number 7 table 202fa is set with a random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot and a random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, among the values of the first winning random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpot. (In other words, it is defined as a judgment value for deviance). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is one of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

When executing the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as jackpot determination values, and "5 to 504" are small win determination values. It is defined as a hit determination value, and "505 to 999" is defined as a determination value for other than that (that is, a miss). Then, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot, and if the value is any one of "5 to 504", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In some cases, it is determined as a small hit.

The first winning type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d used in each embodiment described above. is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won by referring to the first winning type selection 7 table 202fb. Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 7 table 202fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 205.

FIG. 205(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205(a), in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 that is used when determining the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 when drawing the second special symbol (special pattern 2). . As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery is made different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, or each of multiple types of jackpot is selected. Since the ratio of the special symbols used can be made different, the game using the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2) provide different gameplay to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be explained with reference to FIG. 205(b). FIG. 205(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205(b), in the first winning type counter C2, when the random value is any one of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and any of "10 to 49" is the jackpot type. If the number is between 50 and 99, the jackpot type will be ``Jackpot B,'' and if the number is between 50 and 99, the jackpot type will be ``Jackpot C.''

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 15 (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (substantially the number of time saving times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. This "Jackpot A" has a large number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to "Time Saving A" which is even more advantageous among the time saving states that are advantageous for the player, so "Jackpot A" is , is the most advantageous jackpot type for players. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random values for which "Jackpot A" is selected, so it is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In this case, the rate at which "Jackpot A" is selected is 10%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is triggered. The ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 3640, and in the time saving state, the number of drawings (variable number of times) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 1) are changed. 2) If the total number of drawings (number of fluctuations) and the number of drawings (total number of times) reaches 100, or the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special pattern 2) reaches 10. The configuration is such that the time saving state ends when this occurs.

With this configuration, even if the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery for the special symbol 2 will be held the specified number of times ( 10 times), the player can play the game with peace of mind. As a result, for example, if the time saving state is configured to end when the total number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 during the time saving state reaches the specified number of times (10 times). In order to prevent special drawing 1 variation (lottery) from being executed when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, games that do not ensure the holding of special drawing 1 (games that do not shoot balls continuously) (so-called stop-hitting game)) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (time saving number of times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set. This "Jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds of the jackpot game than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", but since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. However, "time saving B" is set which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state "time saving A" which is set when "jackpot A" is won.

In other words, jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of time-saving state that is set after the jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned "jackpot A". be disadvantageous to the person. That is, "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is less favorable than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A". Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random values for which "Jackpot B" is selected, so it is possible to win the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1). 40% of the time, "Jackpot B" is selected.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random values for which "Jackpot C" is selected, so the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a lottery. In this case, the rate at which "Jackpot C" is selected is 50%.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a 15 round (R) jackpot game (jackpot After the end, time saving A) is selected, and at a rate of 40%, a 5 round (R) jackpot game (time saving B after the jackpot ends) is selected. That is, a jackpot is selected in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time saving state (time saving A) which is advantageous after the jackpot ends. ) is set as "Jackpot A", then the number of rounds executed during the jackpot (5 rounds (R)) as a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, and the type of time saving state that is set after the jackpot ends. There is a jackpot type "Jackpot B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" in both cases, and a jackpot type "Jackpot C" which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends. However, other jackpot types may be configured to be settable. For example, if the jackpot game has the highest number of rounds (15 rounds (R)), "Time-saving B" is set as the time-saving type. Although the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of jackpot games are small (5 rounds (R)), the jackpot type where "time saving A" is set as the time saving type and the number of rounds of jackpot games are the largest (15 rounds (R)). )), it may be possible to set a jackpot type for which the time saving state is not set.

In addition, the concept of whether or not the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player is based on the overall number of rounds of the jackpot game and the gaming state set after the jackpot ends, as in this embodiment. The concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based on the concept of advantage and disadvantage, or the concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of the jackpot game, or the concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based only on the gaming state set after the jackpot ends. A concept may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205(c), the special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special pattern 2) will be explained. FIG. 205(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205(c), in the first winning type counter C2, when the random number is one of "0 to 89", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", and the random number is "90 to 99". ”, the jackpot type is defined as “Jackpot E”.

“Jackpot D” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (substantially the number of time saving times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. That is, this "jackpot D" is a jackpot type having the same contents as the above-mentioned "jackpot A", and is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 90 random values for which "Jackpot D" is selected. 90% of the time, "Jackpot D" is selected.

"Jackpot E" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 15 (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (substantially the number of time saving times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than "time saving A" is set. That is, this "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned "jackpot D". Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random values for which "Jackpot E" is selected, so it is possible to win the jackpot by drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2). In this case, the percentage of "Jackpot E" being selected is 10%.

That is, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and furthermore, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot ends. ing. As a result, winning the jackpot in the special pattern 2 drawing will provide a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot in the special pattern 1 drawing, so 2. The lottery with special symbols is more advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, there are five types of jackpots, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be four or less, or six or more types may be provided. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, it is possible to make winning in the high-probability gaming state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the player play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first win type counter C2 is set to correspond to each jackpot type. It may be configured such that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 with the aim of a specific counter value from being carried out using both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second winning random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a data table that is used for the same purpose as the second winning random number table 202fc, which is the value of the second winning random number counter C4. Using this, it is determined whether there is a winning result or not by referring to the second winning random number 7 table 202fc.

In this embodiment, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, there are two periods when the probability of a normal symbol is low (the period in which the normal symbol is in its normal state) and a time when the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than when the probability is low (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state). The number of values corresponding to a win is set differently depending on the time period of the symbol. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the electric accessory 3640a that are executed when the normal symbol (second symbol) is won can be set. As a result, the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a is opened can be varied based on the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol), so the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a is released (the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640) can be changed. It is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is fired at a timing when the ball can be fired.

Here, the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be explained with reference to FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206(a), the second random number 7 table 202fc is configured such that “normal pattern winning A”, “normal pattern winning B”, and “missing” can be set as the second winning type. The second winning type is defined based on the gaming state (normal symbol high probability state or low probability state) and the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined as "0", "A per normal symbol", and "1". "B" is defined as "ordinary hit", and "missing" is defined in the range of "2 to 99". When the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as "A per normal symbol" in the range of "0 to 79", and "80 A "normal hit B" is defined in the range of "-98", and a "miss" is defined in the range "99".

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) is 2% (2/100). The configuration is such that when a winning ticket is won, ``Price A'' and ``B'' are selected at a rate of 50%.

When the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) is 99% (99/100), and winning is the winning state. In this case, the configuration is configured such that "A per normal map" is selected approximately 80% (80/99) of the time, and "B per common map" is selected approximately 20% (20/99) of the time. are doing.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of winning is higher in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and at the time of winning the "normal symbol" It is configured so that "win A" is more likely to be selected. In this way, by varying the winning probability and winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol) depending on the gaming state, the player can play the game in the hope that a more advantageous gaming state will be set. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is different depending on the gaming state and the winning type, and the second symbol is selected in the low probability state of the normal symbol. A movement pattern in which it is more advantageous for the player to win the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol than to win the second symbol, that is, enter the ball into the second ball entrance 3640. The configuration is such that an easy-to-use motion pattern is set. As a result, winning during the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as a condition for granting benefits advantageous to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206(a), the contents of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol will be explained. The seventh embodiment is configured so that different operation patterns are set depending on the type of winning won, and when a "normal pattern win A" is set during a high probability state, the opening period is 0. An operation pattern of 1 second (S), opening period of 2 seconds (S), and ending period of 3.5 seconds (S) is executed, and when "B" is set, the opening period is 0.1 seconds (S). An operation pattern is executed in which the opening period is 2.5 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3 seconds (S).

No matter which operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 while the electric accessory 3640a is in the opening operation (during the opening period setting), the closing condition is met. Established, the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the conditions for ending the open state of the electric accessory 3640a are a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined opening period is reached, and a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of objects is reached at the second ball entry port. Conditions that are satisfied when the ball enters 3640 are set. As a result, when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won in the lottery, a large number of balls will enter the second ball entrance 3640, and the player will be given an excessive amount of benefits (prize balls). It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Further, no matter which operation pattern is executed, the ending period is set to be longer than the period (3 seconds) during which the ball flows down the second path (delay path) 660b. Therefore, even if you have won a regular winning number consecutively, if you win a small winning in the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed based on the previous regular winning, the next one will be won during that small winning game. It is possible to reliably prevent a ball flowing down the second path 660b based on a winning pattern from winning a prize in the V winning device 650.

In addition, in this embodiment, by using the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the specific area 650V during a small winning game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (general lottery results). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a ball is won in a row in a row, a ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small winning game. It may be configured so that it is easy to do so. In this case, for example, as the winning type of the second winning (normal pattern), the opening period (0.1 seconds), the opening period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set. C) can be set, and if the player wins again in the next normal pattern change after winning the normal pattern C, the amount of money flowing into the second passage 660b during the winning game corresponding to the next normal pattern change. The ball may be configured to pass through the specific area 650V during a small winning game in which the player wins in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning C of the regular drawing.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, when adopting this kind of gameplay, a performance during the race (Fig. 200 (b)) is executed in response to the normal pattern winning C, and then a performance in which the race is lost (Fig. 202 (a)) is performed. After executing (see), if the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 detects that the ball has entered the second passage 660b based on the next normal hit, the revival effect after losing the race is executed. It is best to configure it like this. Thereby, it is possible to perform a surprising performance corresponding to a surprising game for the player.

Further, a preliminary determination means for determining the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as a preliminary determination result corresponding to the reserved winning information, If it is determined that the information on the winning number C for winning the winning number per winning number and the winning information for winning the winning number on the winning number for winning the number of winning numbers per the number of winning numbers are consecutively held and stored, it is possible to correspond to the winning number of consecutive number of winning numbers for the number of winning numbers of the number of winning numbers. It may be configured to perform a performance (continuous performance). In this way, by executing the pre-reading process of the winning information on the Fuzu drawing, it is possible to set the performance with the lottery result of the Fuzu drawing (second symbol lottery) determined in advance, so it is possible to set the production with a high production effect. can be executed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as a winning game executed when a winning symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a is kept open for a period during which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 3640. Although the configuration is such that only a winning game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to allow a ball to flow into the second passage 660b although the ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 3640. The electric accessory 3640a may be configured to be open for a period of time (for example, 1 second) during which the electric accessory 3640a can be opened.

The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the embodiments described above. A variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined in correspondence with the lottery result and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. FIG. 208(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second time saving variable pattern table 202fd3 specified by the variable pattern 7 table 202fd. It is a diagram.

Next, the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 208(a). This first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (time-saving When the player wins a small win (for example, small win C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when state B (time saving B) is set, the The variation time is defined so that it is easy to set a variation time that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific region 650V.

Here, to specifically explain the contents stipulated in the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2, if the type of special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of the fluctuation pattern, if the lottery result is a jackpot, "very short loss" (fluctuation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. "Ultra short hit" (fluctuation time 0.5 seconds) is defined. In other words, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in a state where it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery, the time saving period of 0.5 seconds is guaranteed. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern is set.

If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern is "super short loss" (variation time 0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. ) is stipulated, and if the lottery result is small win A or small win B, "long and small win" (variation time 3 seconds) is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern, and in case of small win C, "short and small win" is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern. (variation time 0.5 seconds)" is specified. In addition, when the lottery result is a jackpot, if the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short jackpot (variation time 1 second)" is defined as the variation pattern, When the number is in the range of "150 to 198", "medium jackpot (variation time 30 seconds)" is defined as the variation pattern.

With this configuration, when the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, in a state where time saving A is set as the gaming state, the small time saving variation pattern in which the variation time is 3 seconds is set. The ball is configured to easily pass through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 when winning A or small winning B. On the other hand, if you win a small win C in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640. Since the small winning game is executed immediately after the ball is released from the second flow path tb, the opening operation of the V winning device 650 ends before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. can be made difficult to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the jackpot game that is executed based on the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small win game corresponding to the small win C, the game state is displayed to the player. It is configured so that a normal state that is disadvantageous is set, and after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning other small wins (small win A, small win B), the game state is set. The configuration is such that a time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, when time saving A is set as the gaming state, a variable pattern is set with reference to the first time saving variable pattern table 202fd2, and a small win that is advantageous to the player is created by the set variable pattern. When winning a type, it becomes easier to execute a jackpot game via a small win game, so that an advantageous gaming state is likely to be set continuously even after the next jackpot game ends, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. I can do it.

Next, the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 208(b). FIG. 208(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3. This second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when time saving B is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 208(b), this second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is set when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery with respect to the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 described above. The difference is that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is different; other elements are the same.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a small win A, a "long and small win" (variation time 3 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is a small win B, a "short and small win" (variation time) is specified as a fluctuation pattern. 0.5 seconds), and in the case of a small win C, if the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 169", a "long/small win" (variation time 3 seconds) is specified as the variation pattern. ) is defined, and when it is in the range of "170 to 198", "short and small win" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

In other words, when the second time-saving variable pattern table 202fd3 is referenced, that is, when time-saving B is set as the gaming state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, but the small winning If C is won, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set, so it is a gaming state in which the normal state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the next jackpot game ends than the state where the time saving A described above is set. Become.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state for the lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot game is more likely to be executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol. It is possible to set a time-saving state that is easier to execute than the next time-saving state, and furthermore, as a time-saving state, a gaming state (time-saving A) in which a gaming state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set again after the next jackpot ends, and a gaming state (time-saving A) that is easier to execute after the next jackpot ends. A gaming state (time saving state) which will later be advantageous to the player is configured to be settable, and a gaming state (time saving B) which is more difficult to set than time saving A.

With this configuration, when the most advantageous gaming state for the player (time saving A) is set, the gaming state will shift to the normal state after just one jackpot game is executed. Since this can be suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, even if Time Saving B is set which is more disadvantageous to the player than Time Saving A, the probability that Time Saving A will be set after the jackpot game is set is higher than when the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the aim of setting the time saving A voluntarily.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208(b), in the seventh embodiment, even if the ball wins the small win C in which the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, the ball does not reach the V winning device 655. Since it is configured so that it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to pass through a specific area of 650V (a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds), it is possible to select not only the winning result of a small hit but also the flow of the ball. can also make players interested. In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the small win C has been won, and then perform an effect to encourage whether or not the ball will pass through the specific area 650V. With this configuration, even though the player wins a disadvantageous small win, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V, so a disadvantageous gaming state is set for the player. It is possible to make the player aware that he/she was able to avoid the problem, and to provide a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, a means is provided to measure the number of times the player wins a small win that is disadvantageous to the player (the number of times the player wins the small win C), and the number of times the player avoids executing a jackpot game based on the small win C (the small win C). It may be configured to display the number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game. This makes it possible for the player to understand more specifically that the situation where a disadvantageous gaming state was set for the player has been avoided, as well as whether the currently set gaming state is Time Saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether it is time saving B or not.

In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b) and described above, the data table (variation pattern By changing the tables), when winning a small hit that is advantageous to the player, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time saving A) and a game state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V (time saving B) are created. It is configured to be configurable. In other words, when a player wins a small win that is disadvantageous to the player, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (Time Saving B) and a gaming state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V (Time Saving A) can be set. ing.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, depending on the type of the set time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), there is a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit, and a game state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V. The state is configured to be configurable. To explain specifically, when time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. When selecting a special symbol variation pattern with reference to this first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% of the variation pattern when winning the small hit (100% when winning the small winning A and 100% when winning the small winning B) %), the variable time during which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V is set.

On the other hand, when time saving B is set as the gaming state, the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. When selecting a special symbol variation pattern with reference to this second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3, approximately 28.5% of the variation pattern when winning the small hit (100% when winning the small winning A, and 100% when winning the small winning C) The configuration is such that a variable time period during which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V at approximately 85% of the time is set.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) that is set when winning a small hit is configured to be different depending on the type of time saving state that is set, and The area 650V is configured so that the rate at which the variation patterns that allow the ball to pass through are selected is varied. Therefore, depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, the probability of executing a jackpot game based on a small winning win during the time-saving state can be varied.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the transition condition (time saving end condition) for transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is that the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 10 times. When time saving B is set than when time saving A is set as the type of state, the transition condition can be more easily satisfied since it is difficult to execute a jackpot game when a small winning is won.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit, which is advantageous to the player, and to save time by making it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit. Time saving A, which is a state, and Time saving B, which is a time saving state that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area 650V when winning a small hit, which is disadvantageous to the player, and makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit. , is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the small winning type may be set to one, and a fluctuation pattern that allows a ball to pass through a specific area of 650 V when winning a small winning is simply set. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be configured to be different depending on the type of time saving state that is set so that only the ratio is different.

Furthermore, depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, transition conditions (time-saving end conditions) for transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state may be set differently.For example, a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player may be set. (For example, time saving A) is set, the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the time saving state which is disadvantageous to the player (e.g. time saving B). may be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set to vary greatly depending on the type of time-saving state that is set. Even if this is set, the player can be motivated to play the game aiming for a jackpot game.

Furthermore, the game content expected during the time period can be changed depending on the type of time saving state that is set, so specifically, the time saving end condition is likely to be met, and the specific area 650V when winning a small hit. If a time-saving state is set in which it is easy for the ball to pass through, it will make people expect to win a small hit during the time-saving state, and it will be difficult for the time-saving end condition to be met, and if the ball hits a specific area of 650V when winning a small hit, If a time-saving state is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through, players can be made to expect that the ball will pass through a specific area of 650V in a small win won during the time-saving state, so that the player may get tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

The small winning type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and when a small winning is won, This is referred to when selecting the type of small win, and the configuration is such that a different small win type is selected depending on the value of the obtained small win type counter C5.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table 202fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 206(b). FIG. 206(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the small win type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small win A to small win C are selected as the small win type of the second special symbol according to the value of the small win type counter C5. It is stipulated as follows. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is one of "0 to 19", the small win type is "Small win A (10R real time saving 10 times jackpot when passing V)" Therefore, if the number is between "20 and 89", the small hit type will be "Small win B (10R real time saving 10 times jackpot when passing V)", and if it is between "90 and 99" The small win type is "Small win C (10R time saving jackpot when passing V)".

When the jackpot based on the winning of "Small win A" ends, "Time saving A" is set as the gaming state, and when the jackpot based on the winning of "Small win B" ends, "Time saving B" is set as the gaming state. When the jackpot based on the winning of "small win C" ends, the "normal state" is set as the gaming state.

Here, each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) is executed after the small winning game ends when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "Small win A", a 10-time jackpot with a 10R real time reduction is set, and after the execution of the small win A, a jackpot is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state for 10 rounds (R), After that, 10 time-saving games are set as a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes a total of 100 times or the second special symbol changes 10 times).

In addition, in the case of "Small win B", 10 rounds (R) are set to be 10 time-saving jackpots, and after the small win B is executed, the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. A jackpot is executed, and then 10 time-saving games are set as a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes a total of 100 times or the second special symbol changes 10 times). It is composed of In the case of "Small win C", a 10R time saving no jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win C, a jackpot is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small winning type, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed after the small winning game ends and the game state set after the jackpot game can be varied.

Specifically, "Small win A" is because the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is large (10R), and the time saving state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game ends. , is set as the most advantageous small win for the player, and small win B has a large number of rounds executed in the jackpot game (10R), and is set the same as the small win A mentioned above. Since the time saving state that is set later is "time saving B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, the small win is set as a small win which is more disadvantageous than the small win A. "Small win C" is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player, since the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of small winning won, the jackpot game executed when the ball passes through a specific area 650V during the small winning game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R). By this, the player can easily understand the type of small win that was won this time by understanding the number of round games (number of rounds) executed as the jackpot game during a jackpot game that is executed due to a small win opportunity. Although this is suppressed, the present invention is not limited to this, and jackpot games with different numbers of rounds may be set for each small win type. As a result, the degree of advantage for each small win type can be greatly different, so that the player can play the game while expecting to win the most advantageous small win type.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an end condition for the time saving state, the number of changes of the second special symbol is 10 times (first end condition), or the number of times of change of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is 10 times (first end condition). A total of 100 times (second termination condition) is set. By configuring this way, if a jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special symbol 1 ) even if the change is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. special symbols) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

Next, the types of winnings won during the time saving state (during the high probability state of normal symbols) and the ball flow to the second ball entrance 3640 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, when the regular symbol is won and the electric accessory 3640a changes to the protruding state (see FIG. 198), the ball moves on the electric accessory 3640a. By flowing down, a state is established in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 3640.

Then, when the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a executes the closing operation, and the ball that was flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at that time is moved to the ball installed directly below the electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the ball flowing down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow period of 0.5 seconds, and the ball flowing down the second flow path tb reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660. reaches the V winning prize device 650 after a 3 second flow period.

Next, a case where a ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 will be described as a condition for closing the electric accessory 3640a. When the closing condition for the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 3640, the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed and a second special symbol lottery is executed. . Then, a variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player (time saving A) and a disadvantageous time saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time saving state (time saving B), and the set time saving state It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are set depending on the state.

The opening scenario 7 table 202ff shows that the game content (opening scenario) of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) that is executed when a winning (big hit, small winning) is won in the special symbol lottery is the type of winning that was won. The data table is defined in correspondence with the winning type, and when a winning is won, an opening scenario corresponding to the set winning type is read out and a winning game is executed.

Here, the contents of the open scenario 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario 7 table 202ff. This opening scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) that allows a ball to enter in a bonus game (big win game, small win game) that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or small win. 65, operation data (opening scenario) for varying the opening operation of the V prize winning device 650 depending on the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) is defined.

In this way, the winning devices (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and opening operation contents (opening scenario ), it is possible to set multiple levels of advantageousness of bonus games, so even after winning a jackpot or small win, it is possible to let the player enjoy what type of win he won. can.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game until the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) ), the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (the number of rounds) The period during which the winning device set for the game is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games until the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change) period)) are stipulated respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to "Jackpot A, D, E", "2 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and "variable winning device 65" is set to "15 rounds" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. '', the opening operation mode in which the game is opened continuously for 29 seconds as one round game is defined as ``1 second'' as the interval period between rounds, and ``4 seconds'' as the end interval period. Therefore, when a jackpot of jackpot type A, D, or E is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. It becomes a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is the most advantageous for the player because it is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends. It will be a jackpot with special benefits.

Next, the winning type corresponds to jackpot B and C, the start interval period is "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65", "5 rounds", and one round game. In the opening operation mode in which the opening is continued for 29 seconds, an inter-round interval period of 1 second and an end interval period of 4 seconds are specified. Therefore, if the jackpot type is jackpot B or C, a jackpot game will be executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds, and the player will receive jackpots A, D, or E. This becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls of the corresponding jackpot game are paid out.

Next, corresponding to the winning types A to C, "0.1 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. , If the ball passes through a specific area of 650V (V passing) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball handling time after the opening operation is completed), the "Variable The prize winning device 65 is opened in the 2nd to 11th rounds, and in the 1st round, it is opened continuously for 1.5 seconds, and in the 2nd to 11th rounds, it is opened continuously for 29 seconds. Regarding the opening operation mode, the inter-round interval period is defined as "5 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a ball passes through the specific area 650V during a small winning game, 10 rounds of the jackpot game are subsequently executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) may be provided in which an opening scenario similar to wins A to C is set. With this configuration, when a jackpot Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as a small jackpot in the first round, so that the player is not informed of this special prize. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won a jackpot or a small jackpot based on the design.

In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is being opened in the first round of jackpot Z. , the second round and subsequent round games will be executed. Therefore, when a jackpot game in which the opening operation mode similar to the small win game is set is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the result of the current game is that the jackpot game was executed because the ball passed through the specific area 650V during the small win game.

In addition, since the effect shown in FIG. 201(b) can be executed when the specific area 650V is actually passed during the small winning game and when the jackpot Z is won, the effect of the effect during the race can be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which performance results that are advantageous to the player (see FIG. 201(b)) are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the performance during the race.

In addition, the third symbol display device 81 will display the following information depending on whether you win a jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the opening operation mode similar to the small jackpot game is set, or when you win a variety of small jackpots. In order to ensure that the same performance mode is executed as a variable display (variable performance), and to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 that shows the lottery result of the special symbol, The stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol may be synchronized. In order to make the display of the third symbol more difficult for the player to identify than during the stop display timing or the period before and after it, the display mode and display area may be varied, and at the stop display timing of the special symbol, It is preferable to switch the design for performance displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 from the third symbol to a normal symbol for performance that corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol. Thereby, it is possible to suppress whether the current lottery result is a small win or a big win from being easily understood by the static display mode of the third symbol.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 203(b). FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a time saving total counter 203fa, a jackpot start flag 203fb, It has a medium jackpot flag 203o, a small winning start flag 203fc, a medium small winning flag 203p, a V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and other memory areas 203z. . It should be noted that the configuration (flag , counter, and area), their uses are the same as in each of the above-described embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The time saving total counter 203fa is a counter for adding up the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time saving state and counting up to 100 times. This time saving medium total counter 203fa is set to an initial value of 0 when winning a jackpot (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, each time the variation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of this time-saving medium summation counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been decremented to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). :Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 (first end condition), or when the second special symbol during the time saving state The time saving state is configured to end when one of the conditions that the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 10 (second end condition) is met, and whether or not the first end condition is met. In order to determine this, the time saving medium total counter 203fa is used. Note that the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number of times command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction/interval summation counter 203fa is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 calculates the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, according to the remaining time shortening number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is changed. can be obtained. As a result, the remaining time reduction number managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual remaining time variation number counted by the time reduction totaling counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if this occurs, the deviation can be corrected by the next received short remaining time count command.

Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction total counter 203fa, that is, the first time reduction state The display control device 114 is configured not to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is met to the display control device 114. This is because when playing a normal game, the time saving state is configured to transition to the normal state when the second ending condition for the time saving state is met, and the first ending condition is This suppresses a situation in which the second end condition is satisfied and the time-saving state ends with the third symbol display device 81 displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the condition is satisfied.

The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is identified that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). In addition, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off in the initial state, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power outage is maintained.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to OFF (S10617 in FIG. 222). This jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when RAM is cleared, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like. It is configured to The jackpot flag 203o has the same function as the jackpot flag 203o used in the first embodiment described above.

The small winning start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). When it is determined that the small winning start flag 203fc is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF (S10703 in FIG. 223). This small hit start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. is configured to be

The small winning medium flag 203p is a flag indicating that a small winning game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (when it is determined that the game for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (see S10717 in FIG. 223). This small hit medium flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd when a winning ball passes through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 when a small winning game is being executed (a detection switch ( This is a storage area in which data for determining the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot (not shown) is detected is stored. The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores data values corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type that has been determined when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small win stops (Fig. 218 (See S10302). When a ball flows down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the detection switch, a V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is set. is configured to be set to on. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is configured to be cleared. This V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is backed up. It is configured to be held by

When a ball flows down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe indicates a jackpot type corresponding to the type of small winning game being executed. The corresponding flag is set to on. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is turned on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (opening scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clearing, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. It is configured as follows.

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. This time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is set to an initial value of 0 when winning a jackpot (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 when the jackpot ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of this time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (see FIG. 217). S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 (first end condition), or when the second special symbol during the time saving state The time saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions such as the number of variations of the symbol reaches 10 (second end condition) is met, and whether or not the second end condition is met is determined. In order to determine this, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is used. Note that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number of times command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction number of times command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff, that is, the number of remaining time reduction times in the time reduction state. The display controller 114 is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the second termination condition is met to the display control device 114. This is because when playing a normal game, the time saving state is configured to transition to the normal state when the second end condition for the time saving state is satisfied, and the player This is to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81.

The V passing flag 203fg is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203fe is set to on during a small winning game, and is set to on when the V flag 203fe is set to on. be done. In this embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passed through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221: Yes). ), the process of S10502 to S10508 of the V passing process (see FIG. 221) is skipped. As a result, if multiple balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small winning game (if a detection switch (not shown) that can detect balls passing through the specific area 650V detects multiple balls) ), only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, the process executed during the small winning game can be simplified, and the V passage command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 multiple times, making V passage management on the voice lamp control device 113 side complicated. can be prevented from becoming.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of subsequent gaming states based on the lottery results of special symbols, and FIG. 211 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of operations of various devices executed during a small winning game. FIG.

In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game is performed in which a ball is fired aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) and a lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed, and a game board A time-saving state in which a right-handed game in which a ball is fired aiming at the right side area of 13 and a lottery of a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed can be set, and the game is configured so that a time saving state in which a lottery of a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed is set, and the lottery of a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is performed. 2. The special symbol lottery is configured to make it easier to execute a jackpot game.

Further, as the time saving state, either a time saving state A (time saving A) which is advantageous to the player or a time saving state B (time saving B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state A is configured to be set. ing. Here, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not (hardly) set after the jackpot game ends. There is. With this configuration, once the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set, the normal state will not be set as the gaming state unless at least two jackpot games are executed, so the time-saving state that is advantageous for the player can be set. Can be built.

As shown in FIG. 210, when the normal state is set, the game is executed by drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot is If the time-saving jackpot is "Jackpot A" (10% of the jackpot), the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and it is "Jackpot B" (40% of the jackpot). In this case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of "jackpot C" (50% of the jackpot), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. Ru.

In addition, if the special drawing 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and a jackpot is won, or a jackpot game is executed based on a small win win, the normal state will be set after the jackpot game ends. It consists of Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the normal state.

In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special drawing 2 lottery, as explained with reference to FIG. 205(c), if you win a jackpot, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game, so the time saving state A (time saving A) If you win a jackpot during the game, the normal state will not be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, even if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern specified in the first time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 that is referred to during the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set. When winning the small win type "Small win C" in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the ball will not pass through the specific area 650V in the V prize winning device 650. Therefore, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, a plurality of jackpot games can be executed before the gaming state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the advantageous gaming state ends immediately even though an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, and it is possible to allow the player to play games with peace of mind. can.

In addition, in the state where this time-saving state A is set, if the time-saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set. However, in the time saving state, there is a probability of winning a small win with a probability of about 1/2, and a small winning game in which the ball can pass through a specific area of 650V is executed in 80% of the cases, so it is difficult to continue. As long as the user plays a normal game in which he or she plays a right-handed game, the jackpot game can be executed before the time-saving termination condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in order to make the ball pass through the specific area 650V when winning a specific small winning type, if you play a game that does not continue to be a right-handed game, the number of changes in special figure 2 will be 10 times. Once reached, the state can be returned to normal. Thereby, a penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

If you win a small win A (20%) while time saving state A (time saving A) is set, after the jackpot game based on the small winning winning is executed, time saving state A (time saving A) is set again. is set and if a small win B (70%) is won, a time saving state B (time saving B) is set after a jackpot game based on the small win is executed. In addition, if you win small win C (10%), as shown in Fig. 208(a), a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set, so you cannot apply a specific area of 650V during the small win game. The ball never passes through.

In addition, if you win a jackpot while time saving state B (time saving B) is set, jackpot D (90%) and jackpot E (10%) will be awarded in the same way as time saving state A (time saving A) described above. is set. In addition, when winning a small hit, the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208(b)) is referred to, and the ball is configured so that it passes through the specific area 650V in the small win A or the small win C. ing.

Therefore, if you win small win A (20%), time saving state A (time saver A) is set after the jackpot game based on the small win win is executed, and if you win small win C, After a jackpot game based on a small win is executed, a normal state is set. Also, similar to time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is met (when special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. It consists of

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of operations of various devices during a small winning game will be explained. FIGS. 211(a) to 211(f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIGS. 211(a) to 211(f), when the control process of the main control device 110 executes the special symbol fluctuation display of winning a small hit, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the A race effect (see FIG. 199(b) to FIG. 202(a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the small winning game, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

The ball flowing down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected for 4 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. When the switch detects the ball, the jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game, the first round game starts and the specific winning hole is opened. 65a is opened.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, time saving state A, and time saving state B can be set as the gaming state, and when the time saving state A is set, the time saving state B is set. The data table to be referred to when setting the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the case where the variation pattern of the special symbol is set.

When the time saving state A is set, when a small win (small win C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball will not pass through the specific area 650V during the small win game. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn during the time saving state, the flow path (second flow) that can pass through the specific area 650V is The variable time (0.5 seconds) set when the small win C is won is longer than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path tb). ) and the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small winning game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 is configured to be shorter.

In addition, when time saving state B is set, when a small win (small win C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball changes so that it can pass through a specific area 650V during the small win game. It is configured so that a pattern is set. With this configuration, even if the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed by simply changing the data table that is referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern. can be set.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, a production counter 223h, and a SW valid time. It has a storage area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay path state flag 223ff, a long fluctuation flag 223fg, a second ball entry flag 223fh, a medium hit flag 223fi, and other memory areas 223z. Note that configurations with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (flags, counters, areas) have their uses the same as in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted. .

The variation start flag 223fa is a flag to indicate that information (variation pattern command) indicating that the variation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to on when the variation of the special symbol is started. It is something that This fluctuation start flag 223fa determines whether the current special symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113. (Special Figure 2) is configured to be able to determine whether it is a fluctuation.

Specifically, the variation start flag 223fa includes the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1, which is set to ON when a variation pattern command indicating a special figure 1 variation is received, and the variation pattern command indicating a special figure 2 variation. It is formed from a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2 that is set to on when

Then, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S12001: Yes in FIG. 226), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to on. (See S12002 in FIG. 226), and is set to off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (See S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the variation start flags 223fa is set to ON, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the current special symbol variation has been received from the main controller 110. It is set on when a stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). . When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The gaming state storage area 223fe is an area for storing a gaming state corresponding to a state command when a state command regarding the gaming state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (gaming status) stored in this gaming status storage area 223fe, the current gaming status can be identified on the audio lamp control device 113 side. In this embodiment, data in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the data is stored in the game state storage area 223fe. Information indicating the current gaming status will also be deleted. However, in this embodiment, since the status command is set in the start-up process of the main control device (see FIG. 51) executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the game status storage area 223fe is immediately set after the power is restored. Information indicating the gaming state that was set before the power was shut off will be stored in the . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the audio lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

Note that the status command output from the main control device 110 is judged whether or not it has been received in the command judgment process 7 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4182 in FIG. 226). Although the configuration is such that a process is executed in which the gaming status included in the status command is stored in the gaming status storage area 223fe, in FIG. (Reference)), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The delay passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the ball flowing down the second passage (delay passage) tb in the passage unit 660. The contents of the delay path state flag 223ff will now be explained with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay passage state flag 223ff is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the ball flow state of the delay passage according to the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the delay passage entry switch 660e1, which detects the ball that has flowed into the second passage (delay passage) 660b, is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge switch, which detects the ball that has flowed out from the second passage (delay passage) 660b, is set to OFF. When the switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, when the ball does not pass through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (written as "00" in FIG. 213), When the delay path entry ball switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path exit switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, when the ball is passing through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits becomes "0010" (indicated as "01" in FIG. 213), the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, the second passage (delay passage ) 660b, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (written as "02" in FIG. 213).

Here, the delay path entry ball switch 660e1 and the delay path exit switch 660e2 are both configured with proximity sensors that can detect the ball flowing down the second flow path tb formed in the second path 660b. It is configured to be turned on when an object is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time. The device is configured to be turned off when the object is not detected for a predetermined period of time.

Here, if the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delay path status flag 223ff is "0001", "0010", or "0011" as described above, the ball normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660b. Since this is a state that can be set to , it is determined that the ball is in a normal falling state.

On the other hand, there is a state in which the delay passage ball entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and a delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, a state in which the ball flows into the second passage (delay passage) 660b, and a state in which the ball is discharged. In the state where the state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay path entry switch 660e1 becomes in an abnormal state (described as "-" in FIG. 213). , when the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, when the sensor that detects the falling ball state in the second passage (delay passage) 660b is malfunctioning, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (Fig. 213 is written as "04"), and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal downward flow state.

<About the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example, instead of the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31).

Of the timer interrupt processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 214), each processing in S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 is different from the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31). The same processes as those in S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 are executed.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), when the process of S103 is completed, next is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and a third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A special symbol variation process 7 is executed to set a variation pattern, etc. (S191), and then the process moves to S105. The details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

After executing the process of S105, the normal symbol variation process 7, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S192), and then the process moves to S107. The details of the normal symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 219. After executing the process of S107, the V entrance passage process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). Thereafter, the V passing process that is executed when the winning ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is executed (S194), and then the process moves to S110. Note that details of the V entrance passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a ball passes through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game, the process (2) for executing the jackpot game after the small winning game ends. The V entrance passing process (S193 in FIG. 214) and the V passing process (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided as per-seed execution processing), the process related to the fluctuation of the first symbol (special symbol), and the second symbol ( This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the detailed contents of the processing regarding the fluctuation of the normal symbols are different.

Next, special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 7 (S191). This special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and is performed to perform variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and , is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see S191 in FIG. 215), there are also places where the same process as the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment described above (see S104 in FIG. 32) is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different codes are given to processes with the same content in the explanation. It should be noted that, of course, each modification described in each of the above-described embodiments can be applied to elements having the same processing content.

In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S10001). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S10001: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S10001: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If it is determined that it is not (S10002: No), it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entry port 3640 (S10003).

If it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 3640 (S10003: Yes), a second ball entry command is set (S10004), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and stop. The values of the type selection counter C3 and the small winning type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S10005). Next, special symbol variation start processing 7 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10011). The special symbol variation start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

On the other hand, in the process of S10003, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entry port 3640 (S10003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10007). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (not greater than 0) (S10007: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is determined to be larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes). ) is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set number of reserved balls command is configured to include information indicating that it is a command for indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and is The held pitch count command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 52) is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 side can grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command through the process of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). After that, the process of S10011 is executed.

In addition, in the process of S10002, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S10012). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If it is determined that the period has not elapsed (S10012: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10012, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stopped symbols is set in advance by special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. When this special symbol variation start process 7 is executed, a special symbol is drawn based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or a miss according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a jackpot, the first win type counter The jackpot type (jackpot A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. Further, if it is a small win, a red LED is turned on, and if it is a loss, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S10013 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 7 is displayed. , it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S10014). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10014: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning hole is set based on the jackpot type (S10015), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S10016). Next, the jackpot start flag 203fb and jackpot flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), and the value of the time saving medium total counter 203fa and the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018), and in S10019. Move to processing. In the process of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10014, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S10014: No), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed and it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win or not. (S10021). Note that details of this time saving number update process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG. 217.

In the process of S10021, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S10021: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10021: No), the small win start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. do.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot, the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed, and then the current lottery result is Although the configuration is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022), the time saving number update process (S10020) is configured to be executed. You may do so. Furthermore, for example, when the time saving number update process is executed and it is determined that the time saving number ends due to the current special symbol variation process, if the lottery result of the current special symbol is a loss, the execution timing of the time saving number updating process (The time saving state is ended at the symbol stop timing of the special symbol), and if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit, the time saving state may be configured to end at the timing when the small winning game ends. . Thereby, the time saving state can be set until just before the next special symbol variation starts. Further, even if a small win is won in the final variation of the time saving state, the small winning game can be executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Next, special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is performed in the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot," "special symbol small win," or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure), and the first symbol This is a process executed when setting information required when determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011), first, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, which are stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, And each value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S10102). Specifically, if the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204(b)) It is determined whether it is a jackpot by comparing the random numbers stored in A big hit or a small hit is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first win type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. , it is determined what type of jackpot is among the five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to E) (see FIG. 205(b) or (c)).

Note that in the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the bias of jackpots.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number of jackpot random values is not limited to that, and the number of jackpot random values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be determined may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher jackpot probability, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and jackpot type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37A) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to E) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Thereafter, a jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process moves to S10113. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the type of special symbol obtained, the lottery result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the current game among each fluctuation pattern table included in the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by comparing the values defined in the data table corresponding to the state (see FIG. 207).

In the process of S10113, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S10106 (S10113). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S10105 (S10114). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are used in the external output processing (S2201) executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). Therein, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, it is possible to set the variable display mode (performance mode) of the third symbol in correspondence with the variation pattern (variation time) and stop type of the special symbol on the audio lamp control device 113 side. When the process of S10114 is finished, the process returns to special symbol variation process 7 (S191).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a jackpot (S10103: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S10107). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S10107: Yes), the small win type is acquired based on the small win type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random value specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small win (small win) of the three types of special symbols is compared. Among the wins A to C), it is determined what type of small win is (see FIG. 206(b)).

In addition, in this seventh embodiment, since it is configured so that there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbol, Since it is confirmed that the current special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery, the process to determine the type of the special symbol that won the small hit is not executed, but for example, the first special symbol, If the configuration is such that a small hit can be won with any of the second special symbols, after determining that a small hit has been won, a process is performed to determine the type of special symbol corresponding to the current lottery, and the determination is made. It is preferable to perform a process of selecting a small winning type depending on the result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different types of small winnings depending on the case where a small winning is won with the first special symbol and the case where a small winning is won with the second special symbol, which improves the gameplay. can have a wide range. In addition, the selection ratio of each small winning type may be configured to be different without changing the type of small winning that can be set when a small winning is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

Next, a display mode at the time of a small win corresponding to the small win type is set (S10109), and a small win fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the small winning symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Note that the process executed in S10110 is different from the process in S10106 described above in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is a small win instead of a jackpot, but the set variation Since the subsequent processing performed on the pattern (for example, the processing of outputting to the audio lamp control device 113) is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small win in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), a display mode at the time of a win corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). Thereafter, a variation pattern when missing is determined based on the number of reserved pitches (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the special symbol lottery results are configured to be determined in the order of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that "missing" is prioritized in the determination. Such a configuration is an effective configuration for reducing the number of determinations that are repeatedly executed in various processes of the main controller 110, since the lottery result that is most likely to appear as a lottery result for a special symbol is a "lost" lottery result. becomes.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set within the same process. The pattern command and the stop type command may be configured to be set at different timings. In addition, even if the settings are made within the same process, the stop type command is configured to be output after a predetermined period of time after the fluctuation pattern command is output so that the timing of output to the audio lamp control device 113 is not the same. You may do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time saving number update process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S10020). This time saving number update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the time saving number, and sets the gaming state to the normal state. This is a process for

In the time saving number update process (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). If it is determined that the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is not larger than 0 (0) (S10201: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of time savings is updated. Since it is not necessary, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of time saving times is updated (subtracted). The process for executing the process (S10202 to S10209) is executed.

In the process of S10202, the value of the time-saving total counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S10203). If it is determined that the current variation is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and the process moves to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, if it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (it is the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10205.

In the process of S10205, a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving medium counter (time saving medium total counter 203fa and time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff) that has been changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The remaining time shortening number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then It is determined whether the value of the summation counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). In the process of S10207, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving total counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10206 that the value of the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time-saving medium total counter 203fa is 0 in the process of S10207. In the case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), the values of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff and the time saving medium total counter 203fa are both set to 0 (S10209), and this processing is ended. .

As explained above, in this embodiment, a plurality of time saving termination conditions are set for terminating the time saving state, and when any of the time saving termination conditions is met, the process of terminating the time saving state (normal state The configuration is configured to execute the process for setting the Specifically, when the number of special symbol variations (total number of variations), which is the sum of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol during the time saving state, reaches a predetermined number, that is, the time is reduced. A time saving end condition that is satisfied when the value (for example, 100) set in the time saving medium total counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time a special symbol variation is executed and the value becomes 0. When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, that is, the value (for example, 10) set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff when the time saving state is set becomes the second special symbol. 2 Special symbols (special 2) are subtracted every time a variation is executed, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the value becomes 0, and the time-saving state ends when any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied. It is configured to do so.

With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) can be executed reliably. In addition, although this embodiment has a configuration having the above-mentioned two time-saving termination conditions, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more time-saving termination conditions can be set. Further, in the jackpot winning of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for the time saving end condition to be satisfied may be varied depending on the type of the won jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when any one of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, three time saving ending conditions End conditions may be set in advance, and the time saving state may be ended when two of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for ending the time-saving state in a complicated manner in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state (advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) will continue. The game can be played with a sense of tension.

In addition, as described above, when setting multiple time-saving end conditions, the value corresponding to the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is set as an effect to notify the player of the period until the end of the time-saving state. All you have to do is execute the performance that will notify you. In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the drawing of the second special symbol (variation) is executed by the right-handed game, so the number of remaining time saving times to be executed during the time saving state is notified. is configured to notify the value until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, which is established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), among the plurality of time-saving end conditions (Fig. 199(b) (See the remaining time short number notification area Dm6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small hit start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S10022). This small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and it ), this is a process for setting the start of the small winning game (the game content (operation scenario) of the small winning game to be executed this time).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when a small winning game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the winning ball in the V winning device 650 is By passing through the specific area 650V, the jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends.

That is, the gaming state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and a jackpot game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a higher possibility.

In the small win start setting process (S10022), first, an opening scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small win type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set based on the small win type set with reference to the small win type selection 7 table 202fe when winning the small win, and with reference to the open scenario 7 table 202ff.

Thereafter, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, based on the small winning type and the small winning type selection 7 table 202fe, the jackpot type (big winning D to E) when passing V is determined. As described above with reference to FIG. 206(b), if the small win type is small win A, it is determined that the jackpot type when passing V is "10 round time saving 10 time jackpot, time saving A", and the small win If the type of small win is B, it is determined that it is a "10 round time saving 10 time jackpot, time saving B", and if the small win type is C, it is determined that it is a "10 round time saving no jackpot" (Figure 206 (see (b)).

Next, the start of a small hit is set based on the small win type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit medium flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), and is performed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device and the second symbol fluctuation process associated with the second ball entrance 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 3640a.

In addition, in the present seventh embodiment, a plurality of winning types can be set as the winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a is set according to the set winning type. are configured to differ. As a result, when a normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed in multiple operation patterns, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the electric accessory 3640a is operating. be able to.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 when the electric accessory 3640a is operating (it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 than when the electric accessory 3640a is not operating). ) state, and at the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 3640a ends, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a is placed in a different flow path (first flow path ta, second flow path ta) depending on its flowing position. tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

The ball flowing down the second flow path tb is configured to more easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game than the ball flowing down the first flow path ta. . As described above, in this embodiment, by varying the opening operation details of the electric accessory 3640a, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 (second ball entry port 3640). A first open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the opening 3640, and a second open state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 than in the easy ball entry state), and a The ease with which the ball passes can be varied (a first guidance state in which it is easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V, and a second guidance state in which it is more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V than in the first guidance state). ).

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of winning types can be set as the winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a is determined according to the set winning type. By making the variables different, it is possible to vary the ease with which each condition is satisfied for each of the multiple conditions for the player to receive benefits. It is possible to make the player more interested in the operation details of the electric accessory 3640a).

Note that as a configuration for varying the ease with which a plurality of game conditions are established in this way, a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. For example, the variable means for setting a plurality of operation patterns may be Instead of the accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, variable winning device 65) may be used in which an operation pattern is set when winning a jackpot.

In this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being performed. This includes the middle of the day. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S801: Yes), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is changed. If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), then it is determined whether data (value of the second winning random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

In the process of S803, if it is determined that no data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area, that is, the conditions for newly starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not satisfied (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, if it is determined that the conditions for newly starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) are satisfied (S803 :Yes), then the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, a lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As mentioned above, if the current gaming state is the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79", you will receive an A per normal symbol. If it is in the range of "80 to 98", it is determined that the score is B, and if the value is "99", it is determined that it is a miss. In addition, when the current gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the winning is A, If the value is "1", it is determined that the score is B, and if it is "2 to 99", it is determined that it is a miss (see FIG. 206(a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S805 is a normal symbol hit (ordinary symbol hit A or common symbol hit B) (S806), and it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S807), and the process moves to S809. In the process of S807, after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol so that the winning type can be identified. Set it as follows.

On the other hand, in the process of S806, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S806: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S809.

When the process of S807 or S808 is completed, in the process of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. If the time saving state) (S809: Yes), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S809: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this process is performed. finish.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second symbol than when the time saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. As a result, the number of drawings of the second symbol per unit time can be increased in the time-saving state more than in the normal state, so that the time-saving game can be executed efficiently.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is made higher than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased. By shortening the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a and making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640, it is easier to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2) than in the normal state. However, it is only necessary that the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed more easily in the time-saving state than in the normal state; for example, in the time-saving state than in the normal state. It is better to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the other things may be the same, or the short time state has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) than the normal state, and the other things are the same. They may be the same, or the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a may be set to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 in the time-saving state than in the normal state, and the rest may be the same.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S812, if the variable time has not elapsed (S812: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed, the second symbol display is set. The variable display in the device is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or the process of S808.

Next, when the ongoing variable display is started on the second symbol display device, it is determined whether the current lottery result for the normal symbol (current lottery result) is a hit for the regular symbol (S814). If the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S814: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a hit with a normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) with a normal symbol (S815).

In the process of S815, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is set to 0.2 seconds. , and the number of openings is set to 1 (S816), and the process moves to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) with normal symbols (S815: Yes), it sets a normal symbol winning command (S851), and sets the winning type set this time and the current gaming state. The operation pattern of the corresponding electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process moves to S818.

In the process of S818, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a is set by the process of S818, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S2206) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52) is executed, the electric accessory The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S816 or S817 are completed.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V entrance passage process (S193). This V entrance passage process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S193) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214).

In the V entrance passage process (S193), it is first determined whether a ball passage sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has won a prize in the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This ball passing sensor is a detection means that turns on when a ball passes. Specifically, it is composed of a proximity sensor arranged close to the ball flow path so that the period required for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). The proximity sensor is configured to turn on (output an on signal) when it continuously detects an object for 30 milliseconds. As a result, for example, even if a state in which a ball is detected at an interval of less than 30 milliseconds occurs due to noise generated within the pachinko machine 10, a problem in which that state is determined to be a state in which a ball has passed can be suppressed. can do.

In the process of S10401, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S10401: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V prize winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402).

In the process of S10402, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and this process ends. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V-entrance passing. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during a small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the open period (S10402: No), this is a case where a ball enters the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (S10404), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passing process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S194). This V passing process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether the V passing flag 203fg is on (S10501). In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203fg is on (S10501: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not V passing is present (S10502). That is, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that V does not pass (S10502: No), this process is directly ended.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that there is a V passage (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether the V passage is valid (S10503). If it is determined that the V passing valid period is in effect (S10503: Yes), the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is obtained (S10504), and the obtained V passing jackpot is executed. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set on (S10505). Then, a V passing command is set (S10506).

Next, the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and then the time-saving medium total counter 203fa and the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10503, if it is determined that the V passing valid period is not in effect (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and this process ends. If the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when it is not within the V validity period, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error is output and fraudulent activity can be discovered.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222, jackpot control processing 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it responds to the jackpot. This is a process for executing various performances and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S10601). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10601, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S10603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10601, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S10601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S10604). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S10604, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S10604: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). In the process of S10605, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S10607). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Therein, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted in the voice lamp control device 113. Become. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in continuous jackpots will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, thereby increasing the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650), or , when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) have been won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S10608, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning hole is closed. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) are not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect starts. It is determined whether the timing is right (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), which is the time for ball removal, has elapsed. It is determined as

In the process of S10610, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: Yes), an ending command is set (S10611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S10610, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612). In the process of S10612, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending performance (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether the special game being executed was jackpot C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is determined that it is not jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot) (S10613: No), set 100 to the time saving medium total counter 203fa and 10 to the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10614), The process moves to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, if it is determined that it was a jackpot C (5R time saving jackpot) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S10615.

In the process of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF (S10617), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process 7 (S2283). This small win control process 7 (S2283) is executed in place of the small win control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special symbol. In this case, it is possible to perform various effects according to the small win, or to open or close the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650). It is processing.

In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when a small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), an opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to OFF (S10703), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S10701, if the small winning of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the small winning of the special symbol is in progress (S10704). During a small hit with a special symbol, a small win with a special symbol is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a small win game with a special symbol); This includes during the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol winning game. In the process of S10704, if the special symbol is not hit (S10704: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S10704, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a small hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether it is V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the process of S10705, if it is determined that it is the V winning hole opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10705, if it is not the V winning hole opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707) . Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small winning game ends, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls in total) enter the V winning device 650. It is determined that

In the process of S10707, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The port 650a) is closed (S10708), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709). In the process of S10709, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: Yes), an ending command is set (S10710), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the S10709 process, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711). In the process of S10711, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), this process ends.

In the process of S10711, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to on (S10712), and if the V flag 203fe is not set to on. If it is determined that (S10712: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to on (S10712: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), and the jackpot start flag 203fb and the jackpot are set. The medium flag 203o is set to ON (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to OFF (S10715), the V passing flag 203fg is set to OFF (S10716), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S10717). , this process ends.

Next, electric accessory opening/closing processing 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281). This electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in place of the electric accessory opening/closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). If it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: Yes), the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is set. It is determined whether there is one (S10802). If it is determined that it is time to open the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is opened (S10803), An accessory release command is set (S10804), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, if it is determined that it is not the timing to release the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: No), next, the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is opened. It is determined whether it is time to close the object 3640a (S10805). If it is determined that it is time to close the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is closed (S10806), The accessory closing command is set (S10807), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to close the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is performed. It is determined whether it is the end timing of (S10809). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), a common pattern hit end command is set (S10810), and then this process ends. do. Further, in the process of S10809, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10809: No), this process is ended.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233. First, the main processing in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. This main process is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment). This is a process for performing the same process as (see No. 59).

Of the main processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 225), each processing in S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 is different from the main processing in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment) (see FIG. 59). The same processes as S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, after the process of S4111 is executed, the effect update process is executed (S4181). This effect update process (S4181) is for performing processing for changing the content of the currently executed effect (already set variable display) during execution of the effect.

After executing the effect update process (S4181), command determination process 7 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4182). Details of this command determination process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 226.

Next, the process moves to S4183. In the process of S4183, variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. . As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

After executing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S4184). Details of this ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233.

Also, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S4101 was executed (S4101), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S4101: No). ), the process proceeds to S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111 and S4181.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, command determination processing 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do. In addition, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, a decision is also made to start a continuous preview performance by the third symbol display device 81.

In command determination processing 7 (S4182), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command received from the main controller 110 is changed. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S12001). When a variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is set from the received variation pattern command. (S12003) and returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12001: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12004). If the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether the held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12007). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 ( The number N1) of holding the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 (S12008). In addition, in the process of S12008, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. After completing the process in S12008, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Therefore, each time a starting prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the main controller 110 by the process of S12008. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise etc., the starting prize will not be activated. At the time of detection or special symbol lottery, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110. can. Incidentally, when the process of S12008 is executed, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 223d is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12007, if the number of reserved pitches command has not been received (S12007: No), then it is determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12009). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12009, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12009: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S12011), and the winning-related command is received. If it is determined that the game has done so (S12011: Yes), the winning related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process ends. This win-related process 7 (S12012) causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. When a jackpot or small jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

Here, the contents of the winning related process 7 (S12012) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related processing 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this win-related process (S12012) is executed, first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S12101). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S12102), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ) is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S12103). In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (S12103: Yes), the number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S12104), and this process ends. Note that in the seventh embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data sent from the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 sends information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the audio ramp control device 113 side The current number of rounds may be calculated and a display round number command may be set.

In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (S12105). In the process of S12105, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S12105: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S12106), and this process is ended.

In the process of S12105, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether the small win start command has been received (S12107).

In the process of S12107, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process is executed (S12108) and this process ends. Further, details of this small winning start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228.

Here, the contents of the small winning start process (S12108) will be explained with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the details of the small hit start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small winning start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on. If so (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). In the process of S12203, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small win start command for display indicating a small win with high V expectation is set (S12204). , and then returns to the win-related process 7.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12201 that the long variation flag 223fg is not on (S12201: No), the process moves to S12205. Also, in the process of S12203, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

In the process of S12205, a display small win start command indicating a normal small win is set (S12205), and then the process returns to win related processing 7.

Returning to FIG. 227, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S12107, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S12109). In the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small winning end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a small winning ending command for display is set in order to execute a production suggesting the end of the small winning game (S12110), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111). In the process of S12111, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111: Yes), a V entrance passage command for display is set (S12112), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S12111, if it is determined that the V entrance passing command has not been received (S12111: No), it is then determined whether the V passing command has been received (S12113).

In the process of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command is set to indicate the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 ( S12114), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S12113: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 226, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S12011, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S12011: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S12013). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the third symbol is set to stop display (S12014), and then it is determined whether the length variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to OFF (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. In the process of S12015, if it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not executed and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12013 that the stop command has not been received (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not a time-saving production related command has been received (S12017). If it is determined that the time-saving performance-related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time-saving performance-related process is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main process. Details of this time-saving effect related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12017 that the time-saving effect-related command has not been received (S12017: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

Next, the contents of the time-saving effect related processing (S12018) will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving effect related processing (S12018). The time saving effect related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the time-saving effect related process (S12018) is executed, first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read out (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state (S12302). ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state (S12302: No), this process is ended and the process returns to command determination process 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

On the other hand, in the process of S12302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state for normal symbols (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a command for winning a common symbol has been received (S12303), If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S12303: Yes), the current winning type is analyzed based on the received winning command (S12304), and a time-saving effect corresponding to the winning type is executed. A time-saving effect start command for display is set (S12305), a normal figure hit medium flag 223fi is set on (S12306), and then the process returns to command determination processing 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12303, if it is determined that the command to hit the normal pattern has not been received (S12303: No), then it is determined whether or not the second ball entry command has been received (S12307). If it is determined that the second ball entering command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entering flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and a display effect command that updates the time saving effect is set (S12309); Thereafter, the process returns to command determination processing 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12307, if it is determined that the second ball entry command has not been received (S12307: No), then it is determined whether or not a normal pattern hit end command has been received (S12310). If it is determined that the command to end the winning of a normal figure has been received (S12310: Yes), the processing at the time of ending a winning of a normal figure is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7. If it is determined in the process of S12310 that the normal pattern winning end command has not been received (S12310: No), the process directly returns to the command determination process 7. Further, details of the process at the end of winning a common symbol (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Next, the contents of the process at the end of winning a normal figure (S12311) will be explained with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process (S12311) at the end of winning a normal figure. The ordinary figure winning end process (S12311) is a process executed in the time saving effect related process (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the process at the end of hitting a common symbol (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second ball entering flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second ball entering flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second ball entering flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display performance command for ending the time-saving performance is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

In the process of S12404, the medium hit flag 223fi is set to OFF (S12404), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the time-saving production related process (S12018 in FIG. 229).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 7 (S4183). This variable display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to produce a variable display. In order to execute this, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5101: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so step S5107 Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the A display variation pattern command is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started. When the process of S5181 is finished, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process moves to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so S5111 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (S5183). Details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. When the process of S5183 is finished, data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process moves to S5111.

In the process of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, off) (S5111: No), a variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since this is not the case, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is set to off. (S5112), and then sets the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183). This special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. be.

In the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183), first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is set to the time-saving state with normal symbols. It is determined whether or not (S12502). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S12502: No), a corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12502, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols (S12502: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot is set (S12504), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S12503, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S12503: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S12505). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S12505: No), a variable pattern command indicating the end of the time-saving effect is set (S12506), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S12505, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the small win is a long fluctuation (S12507). If it is determined that the small winning variation pattern is a long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process moves to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, if it is determined that the small winning variation pattern is not a long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12509.

In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the small win is set (S12509), and then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 233, a description will be given of the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is performed to display a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether a delay passage ball entry switch (not shown) is on (S12601). If it is determined that the delay path entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the medium hit flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the medium hit flag 223fi is not on (that is, off) (S12602: No), the process moves to S12611.

In the process of S12602, if it is determined that the medium hit flag 223fi is on (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to " 00'' (S12604). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12604, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12610.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, if it is determined that the delay passage entry switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then whether or not the delay passage discharge switch (not shown) is on is determined. (S12606). If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, off) (S12606: No), the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the delay path discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then, whether the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" or not is determined. (S12608). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12608, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process moves to S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay path state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball moves within the specific area 650V during the small winning game. The configuration is such that a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) game is executed by passing the gate.

In addition, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, a first flow path ta (see FIG. 196 ) and a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball can easily pass through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays close attention to which channel the ball is flowing down during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls are distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or second flow path tb by the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in the game. Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second channel tb that easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 is configured to vary depending on the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbols to be set is configured to vary depending on the set gaming state and the type of small winning won. With this configuration, when winning a small win corresponding to a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, a game state (advantageous time-saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and a jackpot end It is possible to set a gaming state (disadvantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when a small win corresponding to a jackpot to which a time saving state is later given is won.

In this embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a jackpot is won (first hit), at least three jackpots are executed including the first hit. It is configured so that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. By making it possible to set a gaming state in which it is guaranteed that a plurality of jackpot games will be executed in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is drawn to win a small win, and when the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640, which is the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so as to make it easier to let the ball enter the ball. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640. The ball is distributed into the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb depending on the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball is flowing down.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a are distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is such that when a ball is launched, the ball easily flows into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to cause the balls to flow into the second channel tb while the second special symbol lottery is being executed, it is necessary to continuously fire the balls toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of trying to obtain an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

In the seventh embodiment, the balls that have flowed down the second flow path tb, that is, the balls that have been sorted into the flow path that is advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, are directed toward the V winning device 650. Although the configuration is such that the ball flows downward, it may be configured such that the ball that flows down the channel that is advantageous to the player can enter the general ball entry port 63. As a result, a large number of prize balls can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, a valve member is provided in the V winning device 650 that can be changed between a first state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and a second state in which it is difficult to pass through, and when the valve member is in the first state, the V winning prize is won. The variable time for winning a prize in the device 650 and the variable time for winning in the V winning device 650 in the second state may be configured to be varied according to the set time saving state.

In addition, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during a jackpot game is provided, and when a ball passes through a specific area within the V attacker, a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) is provided. The invention may also be applied to a pachinko machine 10.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and as a gaming state. When a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is made easier to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. The system was configured so that small winning games occur frequently.

In this way, when the probability state is set as the game state, that is, in order to make small winning games occur frequently in the second special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the normal symbol, similarly, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It was necessary to use a configuration that can easily perform the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state in which the second special symbol is set (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). In addition, in order to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn frequently in the normal state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the normal state should have a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a fluctuation pattern.

In this way, if the second special symbol that is easily drawn is configured to have a long variable time, if the player accidentally draws the second special symbol, , until the variation pattern ends, the next special symbol lottery will not be executed, which will hinder the game, so in the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the 2. It was configured so that the lottery (variation) of special symbols can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during a jackpot game or during a small win game executed in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols, the execution trigger of the second special symbol is The structure is such that a ball can (easily) enter the second ball entry opening 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed unless a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, so as in the first embodiment described above, the drawing of the first special symbol (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), a small winning game based on the second special symbol lottery only during the potential state. can occur frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, it is configured so that it is possible to set a winning type in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640 and a winning type in which it is difficult to enter the ball, depending on the type of winning (big win, small win). , When winning a win (big win, small win), it is not just the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not this is the case.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the case where the first special symbol is won in the lottery and in the case where the second special symbol is won in the lottery. The configuration is such that the percentage of easy winning types to be set is varied. Specifically, the winning type that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set more easily when the second special symbol wins than when the first special symbol wins. It consists of

By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is transitioned to an executable state, it is possible to continue and facilitate the lottery of the special symbol 2, Even though an advantageous game mode that is advantageous to the player (a mode in which the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode ends immediately, causing discomfort to the player. can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery with the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big win, small win) than the lottery with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, there is no small win, only a jackpot (1/400 at low probability), whereas in the second special symbol lottery, there is no small win. The probability of (1/400 when the probability is low) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set so that a small win can also be won (300/400). In this way, in the eighth embodiment, by setting the second special symbol lottery to have a higher probability of winning a small win than the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery It is configured so that it is easier to win (big hit, small hit) in the second special symbol lottery.

As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, it is possible to win a winning (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. A winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is configured such that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with a higher probability when winning a small winning than when winning a jackpot. are doing. Thereby, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily cause the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed again after the end of the winning game.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation) is configured to be able to store (reserve memory) a plurality of pieces (4 pieces), depending on the winning type won. The opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of items that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to secure more reserved memory through one winning game. Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the second opening/closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in the open state (the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path through which a part of the balls that have fallen from above the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entry port 640 when the state is changed to the closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning port 3650a). is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 which is released during the winning game to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. The player can be made to watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second ball entry opening 640.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area of the game board 13, and a second attacker 3650 is provided approximately in the center of the right side area. A guiding passage 3660 is provided at a position below the second attacker 3650, and a second ball entry opening 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided at a position facing the outlet of the guiding passage 3660. , are very different. The other configurations are the same as the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a brief explanation will be given of the ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In normal times (other than during a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball fired toward the right side area of the game board 13 in a right-handed game hits the opening/closing door 3650f which is in the closed state (buried state). The ball passes through the game area on the right side of the guide path 3660 and flows down to enter the general ball entrance 63.

In addition, this general ball entrance 63 (general ball entrance 63 located on the right side of the second ball entrance 640) is set with one prize ball as a privilege given when a ball enters the ball. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls will not increase.

On the other hand, during a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the opening/closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, a state in which the ball can flow down on the opening/closing door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. In this case, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening/closing door 3650f and enters the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (the elapse of a predetermined opening period, or the number of balls won into the second specific winning opening 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit number of winnings) is satisfied, and the opening/closing door 3650f is closed. It is configured such that when the ball changes to the closed state (buried state), the balls flowing down the downstream side of the opening/closing door 365Of flow into the guide passage 3660.

In other words, in the eighth embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed in normal times (other than the winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball flow path allows the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640. The ball is configured to prevent the ball from flowing down inside the guide passage 3660 where the ball is formed. With this configuration, unless the second attacker 3650 is opened in a winning game, the ball that has flown down the guide path 3660 will not enter the second ball entry port 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol will not occur. It is possible to limit the period during which the

Further, a through gate 67 is disposed between the opening/closing door 365Of and the inlet of the guiding passage 3660, so that the balls flowing into the guiding passage 3660 pass through the through gate 67 before flowing into the guiding passage 3660. It is composed of The guide passage 3660 is configured such that the period required for the ball to flow down the guide channel is approximately 2.5 seconds. In this way, the configuration is such that the ball flowing down the channel that can enter the second ball entry port 640 always passes through the through gate 67, and reaches the second ball entry port 640 from the through gate 67. By configuring the system so that the time until the end is constant (approximately 2.5 seconds), it is possible to determine whether the ball passing through the guide path 3660 will enter the second ball entry port 640 depending on the set variation time of the normal symbol. This can be easily changed.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the variation time of the set normal symbols is varied depending on the set gaming state. Specifically, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds in the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state, potential state), and the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds in the high probability state of normal symbols (time saving state, variable probability state). is configured so that it is set. As a result, when a ball passes through the guidance path 3660 when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. If the ball is set and passes through the guide path 3660, it can be made difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the configuration of the opening/closing door 365Of of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing door 3650f in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 235(b) is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing door 3650f in the closed state (buried state). It is a top view which schematically showed door 365Of. As shown in FIG. 235(a), the opening/closing door 365Of of this embodiment is arranged so that the opening/closing door 3650f passes from the right upper surface 3650y1 of the opening/closing door 3650f to the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f along the slope of the opening/closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234). It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning opening 3650a.

A first delay member 3650fa, a second delay member 3650fb, and a third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the door 3650f, and the period during which the ball flows down the door 3650f is 1. .2 seconds. This falling period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) during which the second attacker 3650 maintains the open state when the opening operation is performed by the winning games (big win B, jackpot C, small win). It is configured to be. With this configuration, in a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, a ball can be won into the second specific winning opening 3650a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, a scenario of the opening action is set so that the ball can enter the second specific winning hole 3650a in all winning games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as an opening operation scenario set during a winning game, there is an opening operation scenario in which the ball easily enters the second specific winning opening 3650a, and an opening operation scenario in which the ball easily enters the guidance passage 3660. The configuration may be such that an easy opening operation scenario is set.

In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f flows down to a position facing the guide passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f1) (for example, 0. It is preferable to define the opening operation scenario so that 5 seconds) is the period during which the opening/closing door 365Of is maintained in the open state when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario stipulated in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specific prize opening 3650a during the winning game, and the ball that has flown down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f flows into the guide path 3660. It becomes easier to do.

As a result, for example, when the upper limit number of balls that enter the second specific winning hole 3650a and the upper limit opening period of the opening/closing door 3650f are set as the end conditions for the winning game, the second specific winning hole 3650a Since the opening operation in which it is difficult for the ball to win is executed, the winning game can be continued for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of balls flowing into the guide path 3660 during one winning game, and it is possible to acquire more special figure 2 pending memories.

Next, when the closing condition for the opening/closing door 365Of is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235(a) changes to the closed state (embedded state) shown in FIG. 235(b). In this state, the ball located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the ball located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the right side area of the guide passage 3660.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper sphere of the opening/closing door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (0.5 seconds at the upstream position ZC and 0.7 seconds at the downstream position ZD). The opening/closing door 3650f is configured to open for 1.5 seconds in one small winning game. Thereby, when the ball that has flown down first enters the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, it becomes possible to position the next ball at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed, the ball can be reliably passed through the guide path 3660.

Note that the following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of this embodiment. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z that detects the winning ball of the second attacker 3650 is located on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example in FIG. 235), and the position from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z is It is preferable to configure the distance ZE so that it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance between the opening/closing door 365Of is shortened, the next ball flowing down can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

Furthermore, by preparing a plurality of opening patterns of the opening/closing door 3650f that are effective in the small winning game, it is possible to execute the small winning game in which the second attacker 3650 does not win but an opening period is set during which the ball can pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured as follows. In other words, by using the small winning game, it is possible to execute a game for making the second attacker 3650 win a ball and a game for making the second attacker 3650 acquire the reserved memory of the special drawing 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the flow of balls in the right area of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the closed state (buried state). It is a schematic diagram showing a flow.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), all the balls fired in the right-handed game are received by the opening/closing door 3650f (right side area of the game board 13). An opening/closing door 3650f is provided so as to shield the With this configuration, when a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, it is possible to easily win a ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a by simply playing a right-handed game.

Furthermore, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), the inlet of the guiding passage 3660 is blocked by the opening/closing door 3650f, making it impossible (difficult) for balls to flow into the guiding passage 3660. It is composed of In other words, in the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing door 3650f that is opened by the winning game has a function of making it easier to win a ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a, and regulating the flow of the ball into the guide path 3660. It is used as a means to have the function of

Next, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball fired into the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the right area of the guide path 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). . Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that has flown down the right-handed area due to the right-handed game executed when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state) is prevented from flowing into the guide path 3660 (difficult). ).

Specifically, in the right side area of the game board 13, the nail K1 planted above the opening/closing door 365Of is planted below the opening/closing door 365Of, and is planted so as to form the inlet of the guide passage 3660. The nail K2 is located on the right side (right side as viewed in FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (approximately 10 mm) from the nail K2. The distance between the nails K1 and K2 in the height direction is one ball (approximately 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball flowing down the right side of the nail K1 due to the right-handed game from flowing into the inlet of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

Furthermore, regarding the arrangement position of the second specific winning opening 3650a where the ball that has flown down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 3650f can win, the distance between it and the nail K1 in the height direction is set to be shorter than the distance in the width direction. Since the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 3650a. In this embodiment, the opening operation of the door 3650f is configured to change between a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 3650a and a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a. For example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position to open the opening of the second specific winning opening 3650a and a closed position to close it may be used to connect the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening/closing door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the opening/closing door 365Of.

In this case, for example, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), that is, when the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is variable so that it is located in the closed position. When the opening/closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, in a state that allows a ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable part is positioned at the open position. It is better to have variable control. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which a ball enters the second specific winning hole 3650a at an unintended timing.

Furthermore, when using the configuration of the example described above, it is preferable to configure the variable member and the opening/closing door 365Of to be driven using one drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.). Thereby, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, it is preferable that the variable member is configured to change the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 3650f by delaying the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 3650f by a grace period that takes into account the falling time of the ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball that has flowed further down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 365Of becomes unable to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, we will explain the ball flow when the door 3650f changes to the closed state (buried state) while the ball is flowing down the top surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235(a)) of the door 3650f. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is planted below the opening/closing door 3650f and near the downstream 1/3 position of the opening/closing door 3650f, and the right and left sides of the nail K2 have different flow rates. A road is formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down the upstream two-thirds of the opening/closing door 365Of flows down the right side area of the guide passage 3660 when the opening/closing door 365Of changes to the closed state (buried state). On the other hand, when the door 3650f changes to the closed state (buried state), the ball flowing down the downstream 1/3 of the door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 and enters the guide passage 3660. flows into.

The guiding passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to reach the second ball entry port 640 (flowing time). The configuration is such that the time required for the ball to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is about 2.5 seconds.

Then, if the electric accessory 640a is open when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and flowed down the flow path ty reaches the second ball entrance 640, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the electric If the accessory 640a is closed, the ball will not enter the second ball entry port 640 and will flow down toward the out port 66.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area, but it is not limited to this, and may be provided below the guide path 3660. Thereby, the balls flowing down the plurality of channels can be caused to enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

Further, a delay member may be provided on the lower surface of the ball flow of the guide passage 3660 used in this embodiment to delay the speed of the ball flowing down.

<About the production content in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241, characteristic effects performed in the eighth embodiment will be explained. The eighth embodiment is configured so that it is easy to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 pending memory) during the period in which a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is being executed. The second special symbol lottery is configured so that it is easier to win a small win than the first special symbol lottery. In other words, when the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a left-handed game, a jackpot is won, and when the jackpot game starts, a right-handed game is executed, and in that jackpot game, the lottery is executed and the first special symbol is drawn. A game in which the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 pending memory) is acquired while winning the prize ball (privilege) by making the activated attacker (first attacker 650a, second attacker 3650) win a prize. will be held.

If you acquire special pattern 2 pending memory during a winning game, a lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) will be executed after the winning game ends, and the lottery result for special pattern 2 will be a jackpot or a small win. If so, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, once the special symbol 2 lottery is executed, the special symbol 2 lottery is repeatedly executed. It becomes a gaming state where it is easy to play.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect is performed to suggest to the player whether or not the lottery for special drawing 2 will be executed (or not) (whether or not the lottery for special drawing 2 has been moved to an executable state). It is configured so that Thereby, the player can play the game while checking the content of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in this embodiment, by executing a winning game (a winning operation in which the second attacker 3650 is released), the special figure 2 pending memory can be acquired. As shown in (a), during the execution of the winning game (the winning action in which the second attacker 3650 is released), an effect is performed that urges the player to acquire the special figure 2 pending memory. FIG. 238(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 wins jackpot C, which is a jackpot in which the second attacker 3650 is released.

As shown in FIG. 238(a), when the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C is started, in order to guide the player to perform a right-handed game during the jackpot game, a message is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. "Right hit" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect is performed in which the character 811 collects the keys 871. This key 871 has a performance mode set so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is collected, and as the character 811 collects many keys 871, the special This is to suggest (notify) the player that the number of pending memories in FIG. 2 is large.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Collect the treasure keys" for explaining the game nature of the performance is displayed. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the jackpot game (collecting the key 871), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 to be executed after the jackpot game is acquired using the collected key. 871 is used to open a treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239), and an effect is executed in which the player is informed of the contents of the treasure box 873.

Further, below the main display area Dm, there are formed an acquisition display area Dm12a where a value related to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added and displayed, and a round number display area Dm12b which shows the current number of round games. . In the example shown in FIG. 238(a), since the jackpot game has just started, "00000" is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, indicating that no prize balls have been won during the jackpot game. It shows. "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

Further, in the production during the jackpot game, acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the performance executed in this embodiment, one key 871 is collected each time one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired, so the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d have a maximum of 1 key 871. It is configured so that four keys 871 are displayed. Note that the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2.

Furthermore, a comment "Continue hitting right" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate the game content to the player, and a second guide display area formed below the guide display area Dm3 A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second ball entry port 640 is displayed on Dm11. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, since the structure is such that it is easier to acquire the reserved memory of special figure 2 by continuously firing the ball, other effects are not provided so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. A comment for indicating the game content is displayed in a display mode that is more emphasized than the display mode used for (display mode with larger font size). In this way, by using the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds to explain in detail the game content aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, after the display in FIG. 238(a) is executed, if the jackpot game is executed and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is acquired, the production content shown in FIG. 238(b) is is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238(b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the performance content displayed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during a jackpot game, the main display area Dm displays a message indicating that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 (specially). As an effect to notify the player that the key 871 has been acquired (as shown in FIG. 2), an effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed, and a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed.

Furthermore, a key 871 is displayed in the acquired display area Dm10a to indicate that one key 871 has been acquired. Further, in the second guidance display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second ball entry opening 640 in order to visually notify the player that a ball has entered the ball. In the acquisition display area Dm12a, "00085" is displayed as the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and in the round number display area Dm12b, "2" is displayed to indicate that the current is the second round. There is.

When the jackpot game ends, the screen shown in FIG. 239(a) is displayed. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, the notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total number of reserved memories of special drawings 2 acquired during this jackpot game is the main display. In addition to being displayed in the area Dm, a comment "Continue right-handed game" to indicate that the right-handed game is to be continued even after the end of the jackpot game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Furthermore, in order to allow the player to continue playing the right-handed game even after the jackpot game ends, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game (FIG. 238 (a) )) is set to a more emphasized display mode. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he or she must continue playing the right-handed game even after the end of the jackpot game.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used as shown in FIG. 239(b). An effect that causes the treasure box 873 to be opened is executed. FIG. 239(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed when the special figure 2 variation is executed after the end of the jackpot game.

In FIG. 239(b), since the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 display area Dm2 displays a variation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being displayed in a variable manner. The aspect is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (special figure 2 pending) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the jackpot to one.

In addition, while the performance continued from the jackpot game is being executed, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the second attacker 3650 can win the ball. Information regarding the number of prize balls awarded is also displayed in addition. Thereby, the number of balls acquired during the executable period (advantageous period) for drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the round number display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed in the same way as the above-mentioned acquisition display area Dm12a, and the words "Round Extra" are displayed while the game based on the special figure 2 variation is being played. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous state is extended even after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the characters "Round Extra" are displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special figure 2 variation can be executed. A summing means is provided to add up the number of prize balls acquired during the executable game period, and the number of prize balls added up by the summing means is the prize ball that can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number of rounds has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot game may be incremented by 1, or the number of small winnings won during the playing period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. A small win count measuring means for counting the number of small wins is provided, and when the number of small wins measured by the small win count measurement means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that 1 is added.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being executed for an extended period of time. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system to perform an effect of opening the treasure box 873 using the key 871 (see FIG. 239(b)) even while the jackpot game is being executed. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played based on the performance being executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the next game.

If a small win is won while the effect shown in FIG. 239(b) is being executed, the effect in which the treasure box 873 opens and the contents of the treasure box 873 are exposed is executed as shown in FIG. 240. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance content displayed when a small win is won when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

In this embodiment, when a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state, potential state) is set as a gaming state, rather than a case where a high probability state of a normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) is set. This is configured so that it is easier to acquire the special figure 2 pending memory during the small winning game. In the example shown in FIG. 240(a), since the small win is won in the state where the normal state is set, the small win game in which the special figure 2 pending memory can be obtained is executed. “V” is displayed as the display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

In addition, there are multiple display modes other than "V" to indicate the contents of the treasure box 873. For example, if the lottery result of special map 2 is a loss, "x" is displayed, and if the lottery result of special map 2 is a reservation result of special map 2, If it is a small win that is difficult to remember, a display format that resembles a "?" is set. In addition, a pre-determination process is executed to determine in advance the winning information of the second special symbol that is stored on hold. If the determination result indicates that there is a small win that is advantageous to Using the display mode showing the lottery result of special drawing 2, a display mode is set that suggests that a jackpot or a small win that is advantageous to the player is included in the pending information stored in the pending memory. It may be configured.

Here, as a result of the special figure 2 variation, if the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, a jackpot in which a high probability state (for example, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), a display mode imitating a "skull" is set as a display mode for indicating the contents of the treasure box 873.

Furthermore, the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 may be configured to be changed based on the lottery result of the special drawing 2 currently being executed or the preliminary determination result for the pending information that has been stored. For example, as shown in FIG. 241(a), it may be configured to display a display mode (a rusty key and a tattered treasure box) that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the current special symbol before opening the treasure box 873, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

After repeatedly executing each of the effects shown in FIGS. 238(a) to 241(a), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends when the key 871 runs out (when the reserved memory of special drawing 2 runs out). Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241(b) is displayed. This ending screen displays a value (value displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a) indicating the number of prize balls acquired during this advantageous period (a period that combines the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 variable period) and the small hit. The number of times you won and the number of times you won will be displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the playing method to left-handed playing is variably displayed as "left-handed playing", and the sub-display area Ds displays "Please return to left-handed playing". ” Show comments.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 is changed so that the gaming method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game not at the transition timing of the gaming state but at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is exhausted. ing. In other words, in a state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if there is a special figure 2 hold, a right-handed game is guided, and if there is no special figure 2 pending, a left-handed game is guided. ing. This allows the player to play an appropriate game without having to play a disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the flow of transition between each gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five jackpot types (jackpot A to E) that are set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the second There are three jackpot types (jackpot F to H) that are set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

The game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to make complex transitions between each game state in the game played on the pachinko machine 10, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, by providing a gaming state (semi-advantageous gaming state) in which it is easy to transition to an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player, and a gaming state in which it is difficult to transition, a semi-advantageous gaming state is set. In this case, the player can be allowed to continue playing the game, thereby increasing the performance of the game.

As shown in FIG. 242, when a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, a game is executed in which a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn by lottery with the normal state set as the gaming state. Then, if you win the jackpot on special map 1, a variable probability state will be set with a 65% probability (jackpot A, B winning), a time saving state will be set with a 25% probability (jackpot E winning), and a 10% probability. A normal state is set (jackpots C and D won).

Among them, if you win jackpot C (5%), the second attacker 3650 will open during a part of the jackpot game, so it will be possible to acquire the reserved memory of special drawing 2 during that jackpot game. .

Therefore, in the case of winning a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, for jackpot D (5%), a game in which special drawing 1 is drawn again is executed, and for jackpot C (5%), A game in which a special drawing 2 is drawn is executed. Special figure 2 will win a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and in a small winning game that is executed in a low probability state (normal state) with normal symbols, the reserved memory of special figure 2 will be held during that small winning game. Since it is configured to be obtainable, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, as long as the reserved memory of the special drawing 2 does not disappear, there is a gaming period in which the special drawing 2 game can be played continuously. Become.

If the normal state is set as the gaming state and you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable probability state will be set with a 30% probability (Jackpot F win) and a 35% probability. A probability state is set (Jackpot G winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 35% (Jackpot H winning).

Next, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the reserved memory of the special drawing 2. Also, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to acquire a new reserved memory of special symbol 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the variable probability state is a more advantageous gaming state than the time saving state because the special symbol has a higher probability of winning a jackpot, but in the state with the reserved memory of special symbol 2, Even if the player wins a small win in the lottery shown in FIG. 2, he or she cannot acquire a new reserved memory of the special symbol 2, resulting in a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery while the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state will be set again with a 35% probability (Jackpot A win), and the probability state will be set with a 30% probability ( A normal state is set with a probability of 10% (winning jackpot B), a normal state is set with a probability of 25% (winning jackpot E). Then, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable probability state will be set again with a 30% probability (Jackpot F winning), a potential state will be set with a 35% probability (Jackpot G winning), and a 35% probability will be set again. A time-saving state is set based on the probability (Jackpot H win).

Next, if the probability state is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win a small hit in the lottery of special pattern 2, which is executed based on the reserved memory of special pattern 2. In this case, the system is configured so that a new reserved special figure 2 can be acquired during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the potential state is a state in which the special symbol has a high probability of winning the jackpot, and has the reserved memory of the special symbol 2, and when a small win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery. , it is possible to obtain a new reserved memory of the special figure 2, resulting in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery when the potential state is set, there is a 65% probability that the potential state will be set again (jackpot A, B winning), and there is a 10% probability that the normal state will be set. is set (jackpot C, D winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jackpot E winning). Then, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable probability state will be set with a 65% probability (jackpot F, G winning), a potential state will be set with a 35% probability (jackpot G winning), 35% A time saving state is set with a probability of (Jackpot H winning).

Finally, when the time saving state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the reserved memory of the special drawing 2. Also, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to acquire a new reserved memory of special symbol 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot for the special symbol is low, and in the state with the reserved memory of the special symbol 2, even if you win the small prize in the special symbol 2 lottery, you will not be able to win a new jackpot. Since it is not possible to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the player is in the most disadvantageous gaming state.

When the time-saving state is set, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the variable probability state will be set with a 65% probability (jackpot A, B winning), and the normal state will be set with a 10% probability ( Jackpots C and D are won), and the time-saving state is set again with a 25% probability (Jackpot E is won). Then, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable state will be set with a 30% probability (jackpot F win), a potential state will be set with a 35% probability (jackpot G win), and a 35% probability. The time saving state is set again (Jackpot H win).

As explained above, in this embodiment, a ball is not allowed to newly enter the second ball entry port 640 regardless of the gaming state when there is no pending memory of the special figure 2. ing. Furthermore, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured so that it does not change between the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in a state where there is no pending memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbols changes, the advantage to the player does not change.

In other words, in the state where the variation (lottery) of special symbol 1 is being executed, the low probability state of the special symbol (normal state, time saving state) has the same advantageous degree, and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state, latent state) The probability state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the low probability state of the special symbol because the probability of jackpot of the special symbol is higher.

In addition, in the state where there is a reserved memory for special symbol 2, it is not possible to acquire a new reserved memory for special symbol 2 in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the high probability state of the regular symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) A low probability state (normal state, potential state) with a normal symbol is a more advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is the potential state, and the most disadvantageous gaming state is the time saving state.

Furthermore, to explain the rate of transition to the most advantageous potential state when winning a jackpot, the rate at which the potential state is set based on the lottery of special drawing 1 is that the probability variable state is the most High (30%). Therefore, the variable probability state becomes a semi-advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the most advantageous advantageous gaming state (potential state).

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes 8 first random number tables 202ga, 8 first random number selection tables 202gb, 8 second random number tables 202gc, and 8 variation pattern selection tables 202gd. , and has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. Note that the configuration (table) with the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (the same name except for "8" added to make it possible to identify that it is used in the eighth embodiment) ) is the same as in each of the embodiments described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes 8 first random number tables 202ga, 8 first random number selection tables 202gb, 8 second random number tables 202gc, and 8 variation pattern selection tables 202gd. , and has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. Note that the configuration (table) with the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (the same name except for "8" added to make it possible to identify that it is used in the eighth embodiment) ) is the same as in each of the embodiments described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the embodiments described above, in which the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

In addition, the first random number 8 table 202ga stipulates that the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the random number that results in a small win only in the lottery for the second special symbol. (See FIG. 243(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a small win (setting only for one special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol provide benefits to the player ( Expectations for the award (big win or small win) can be varied.

Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 243(b). FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. The first random number 8 table 202ga defines the random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot and the random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This data table is referred to when acquiring the lottery result in special symbol variation start processing 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

The first winning random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243(b)), and the first special symbol is determined to be a miss. "2 to 399" is defined as the range of the determination value (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243(b)).

In addition, "2 to 99" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202ga2 in Fig. 243(b)), and the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. “100 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, "0 to 19" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202ga4 in Figure 243(b)), and the first special symbol is a miss. “20 to 399” is defined as the range of the judgment value to be judged (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, "20 to 99" is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)), and "100 to 99" is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. ~399'' (see 202ga6 in FIG. 243(b)).

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting prize matches any of the judgment values corresponding to a jackpot specified in the first winning random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)). First, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, and if it matches any of the determination values corresponding to a small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the first winning type selection 8 table 202gb will be explained. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are five jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot E) that are set when a jackpot is won in the lottery using the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol (special symbol 2). There are three jackpot types (jackpot F to jackpot H) that are set when a jackpot is won in the lottery. , the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is different.

Specifically, if the symbol type that won the jackpot is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the acquired judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". is set. This "Jackpot A" is a 10-round probability-variable jackpot, and Action A is set as the opening action scenario (action scenario). Note that the specific contents stipulated in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge shown in FIG. 245.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is stipulated to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is normal (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or time saving state (low probability state for special symbols) state, high probability state of normal symbols), a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and even if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) For example, it is stipulated that the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "jackpot A" is executed (a jackpot game with a 10-round probability variable jackpot and in which motion A is set as the opening motion scenario (motion scenario)), The game states set after the end of the jackpot game are different.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot B", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols). state, high probability state of normal symbols), a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or If it is in a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), it is specified that the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, by providing jackpot types in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the gaming state that is set after the jackpot game is different, the player who is playing the jackpot game can receive a jackpot. It is possible to prevent the game state that is set after the game ends from being grasped in advance (before the jackpot game ends). In addition, by making it difficult to predict the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game ends depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, during a jackpot game, a suggestion effect to suggest the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game is finished to the player. It is preferable to provide a means for executing suggestion effects. With this configuration, the player watches the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, so the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this case, a suggestion performance setting is provided for setting the performance mode of the suggestion performance executed during the jackpot game based on the game state set after the jackpot game and the game content of the jackpot game. It is best to configure it as follows. Specifically, the game contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game are ranked in the order that is advantageous to the player, and the ranks corresponding to the jackpot type won this time are combined ( It is preferable that one presentation mode is set from among a plurality of presentation modes based on the value (information) of the summation. As a result, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clearer), it becomes easier to predict the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends based on the performance mode of the suggested performance to be executed. A player can be made to watch a suggestive performance for a long period of time during a jackpot game, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "Jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type. This "Jackpot C" is a 10-round jackpot game similar to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", but the content of the set operation scenario is different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker This is a jackpot in which the scenario of action B is defined, in which the game content is to open both of the 3650 and 3650. Then, it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot C", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, High probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, winning the jackpot Regardless of the current gaming state, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70 to 74", "Jackpot D" is set. In this "Jackpot D", the operation scenario of the action A is set so that the game content of the jackpot game is the same as the above-mentioned "Jackpot A". And, like the above-mentioned "Jackpot C", this is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot D", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, High probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, winning the jackpot Regardless of the current gaming state, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "jackpot E" is set. This "jackpot E" is a jackpot game in which the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "jackpot D" is executed (a jackpot game in which there are 10 rounds of normal jackpots and operation A is set as the opening operation scenario (operation scenario)), Only the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different from "Jackpot D".

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot E", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, High probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, winning the jackpot It is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the current gaming state.

On the other hand, if the symbol type that won the jackpot is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the acquired judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 29", "Jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type. Ru. This "Jackpot F" is a jackpot game with the same game content as the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", that is, a 10 round probability variable jackpot, and Action A is set as the opening action scenario (action scenario). The gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), time saving state (special symbol high probability state). (low probability state for normal symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), that is, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability changes after the end of the jackpot game. It specifies that the state is set.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "Jackpot G" is set. This "jackpot G" is a 2-round probability-variable jackpot in which a 2-round jackpot game is executed, and an operation scenario of operation C is set in which the game content of opening the second attacker 3650 is defined. If you win "Jackpot G", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). (high probability state) or time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. If the game state is set and the game state at the time of winning a jackpot is a probability state, a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Finally, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "Jackpot H" is set. This "jackpot H" is a 10-round normal jackpot in which the operation scenario of action A is set so that a jackpot game with the same game content as the above-mentioned "jackpot D" is executed. If you win "Jackpot H", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot will be the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). High probability state), time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), that is, the game when winning the jackpot Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Here, in this embodiment, in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 is secured), a low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, potential state) It is configured such that a more advantageous game can be provided to the player when the symbol is set than when a high probability state (variable probability state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the system is configured such that there is a probability of about 75% to win a small hit, and when a small win is won, the second attacker 3650 (opening/closing door 3650f ) is configured to be operated in an open manner. Then, by opening the second attacker 3650 due to the small winning game, a state is provided in which the ball easily passes through the through gate 67 and flows into the guide path 3660 (see FIG. 243). When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the normal symbol is set, which is suitable for the time it takes for the ball to reach the second ball entry port 640 after passing through the through gate 67. Therefore, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to easily enter the second ball entry port 640.

On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (0.1 second), in detail, a game per normal figure (electric accessory 640a The variable time is set so short that the opening operation (opening operation) is completed. Therefore, the configuration is such that it becomes difficult for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to enter the second ball entry port 640.

By configuring in this way, the number of second special symbols acquired in the reserved memory during the small winning game can be varied depending on the gaming state set when the small winning is won. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the low probability state of the normal symbol will be set during the jackpot game, so regardless of the gaming state set when you win the jackpot, the second special It is possible to easily acquire the reserved memory of the symbol.

The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a jackpot or a small win. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines, for each scenario type, the operation contents and whether or not it is possible to obtain the special map 2 reservation during the operation.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(a). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds when the scenario type is A in the jackpot. Therefore, when scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not released, so it is impossible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. Next, in the case of a jackpot and the scenario type is B, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is released for 1 to 2 rounds and the first attacker 650 is released for 3 to 10 rounds. There is. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is operated to open, so that it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game.

Next, when the scenario type is C for a jackpot, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is allowed to play for 1 to 2 rounds. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is released, so that it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is released for one round. Therefore, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small winning game.

Here, the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(b). FIG. 245(b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245(b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is played for 30 seconds as one round game, or The prize will remain open until the number of winning balls reaches 10. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period passes, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or This is set until the number of winning balls reaches 3 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the interval period after the second round game has elapsed, the first attacker 650 is released for 30 seconds or until the winning number reaches 10 balls as a third round game. When the 10th round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times. Alternatively, it is set until the number of winning balls reaches 3 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the second round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period passes, the jackpot game ends.

In the scenario set during the small winning game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small winning game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds once. It is set until it is executed or the number of winning balls reaches one. When one round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period passes, the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, the eighth embodiment is configured so that a part of the jackpot game (jackpot B, jackpot C) and a winning game that opens the second attacker 3650 in the small win game are executed. There is. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during a winning game, and the ball can be entered into the second ball entry port 640. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 245(b), when opening the second attacker 3650 in a jackpot game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is greater than when opening the second attacker 3650 in a small winning game. Since the number of balls is set to increase, in a single winning game, more balls can enter the second ball entry opening 640 in a jackpot game than in a small winning game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of the normal symbol is set, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the guidance path 3660 It is configured so that the ball that has flown down cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 (it becomes difficult), and when a jackpot game is executed, a low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and a small win game is When executed, the small win game is configured to be executed in the gaming state at the time of winning the small win. Therefore, the jackpot game is a winning game in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 than the small winning game.

The second random number 8 table 202gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the embodiments described above, and is the value of the second random number counter C4. Using this, it is determined whether there is a winning result or not by referring to the second winning random number 8 table 202gc.

Here, the contents of the second winning random number 8 table 202gc will be explained with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc. The second winning random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which winning determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0 to 237" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202gc1 in FIG. 246). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "0 to 238" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the second winning random number 8 table 202gc are referred to. Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "238, 239" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be out of place (see 202gc2 in FIG. 246). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "239" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be out of place (see 202gc4 in FIG. 246).

The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and includes the type of special symbol for which the lottery was executed, A variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined in correspondence with the lottery result and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be explained with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and FIG. FIG. 248(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the 8 table 202gd2 for time saving/probability change specified by the 8 table 202gd for variable pattern selection. FIG.

Here, the contents of the normal/potential 8 table 202gd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(a). This normal/potential 8 table 202gd1 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state/potential state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving/probability variation 8 table 202gd2 (time saving state), which will be described later. , or the variation pattern table that is referred to when the probability variation state is set), it is easier to set a variation time that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the second ball entry port 640 or the second attacker 3650. The fluctuation time is defined as follows.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the normal/potential 8 table 202gd1, if the type of special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, if a "missing fluctuation" (fluctuation time of 30 to 120 seconds) is specified as a fluctuation pattern and the lottery result is a jackpot, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". , "Win normal variation" (variation time 30 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. On the other hand, for the range of ``100 to 179,'' a ``super hit variation'' (variation time of 60 seconds) is specified, and for the range of ``180 to 198,'' a ``special winning variation'' (variation time of 60 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern. 120 seconds) is specified.

If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the lottery result is a loss, a "miss fluctuation" (variation time of 5 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a small win, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, "small win fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is a win, the acquisition Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a "winning variation" (variation time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal/potential state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248(b), the contents defined in the time saving/probability variable 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically explained. If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern will be "missing middle fluctuation" (fluctuation time 30 to 60 milliseconds), regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a jackpot, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 39", "win normal variation" (variation time 30 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern. . In the case of "40 to 119", a "super hit fluctuation" (fluctuation time of 60 milliseconds) is specified. In the case of "120 to 198", "win special variation" (variation time 120 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern will be "missing short fluctuation" (fluctuation time 1 millisecond) regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. is specified, and if the lottery result is a small win, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, "small win short fluctuation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and the lottery result is a small win. In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "win short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the variable time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 249. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, fixed variable flag 203g, variable time counter 203gc, medium jackpot flag 203o, medium small hit flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory areas It has 203z. Note that configurations with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (flags, counters, areas) have their uses the same as in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted. .

The other memory area 203z of this embodiment has a data area in which the currently set gaming state can be stored, such as a high probability state of special symbols, a low probability state, or a high probability state of normal symbols. It is possible to store states and low probability states, and to update the conditions until each state ends (transfers to another state) and the current situation with respect to the conditions. Since the specific contents are the same as the control processing for the probability variation flag, probability variation counter, and time saving counter in each of the embodiments described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area 640). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is changed to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winnings in the second ball entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation time counter 203gc is a counter for counting fluctuation time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set in the variation time counter 203gc (see S11011 in FIG. 252). In addition, this fluctuation time counter 203gc is subtracted by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation processing 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and the fluctuation time is determined based on the value of this fluctuation time counter 203gc. is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(a), the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a variable time counter 223fd, a gaming state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and other memory areas 223z. Note that configurations with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (flags, counters, areas) have their uses the same as in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted. .

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winnings in the second ball entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The jackpot performance extension flag 223gb is a flag to indicate that the performance during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238(a)) will continue to be executed even after the jackpot game ends. This is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot effect is to be executed (to extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main controller 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command is activated when the number of reserved balls increases. If it is determined that the command is 0, it is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot performance extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension performance is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239(a)).

<About the control processing of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and is used to display the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37, and to display the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 8, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting a jackpot or a small jackpot (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether either the medium jackpot flag 203o or the medium small win flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot or hitting the small jackpot (S10901: Yes), the process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S10901, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902), When it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (number of times N2 of the variable display pending based on the lottery of the second special symbol) (S10903). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is greater than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is subtracted by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A held ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203gb is set (S10906). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203gb from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. Stored in 223ga.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. The data is shifted and the process moves to S10913.

On the other hand, in the process of S10904, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of reservations N1) of the variable display based on the lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10909).

In the process of S10909, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), a new variation is started for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Since this is not possible, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S10910), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process goes to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10913 executed after the process of S10907 or S10912, a special symbol variation start process 8 for starting variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10913), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start processing 8 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the updated fluctuation time counter is updated. Based on the value of 203gc, it is determined whether the variable time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stopped symbols is set in advance by special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 252. When this special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A to H is determined.

After the process of S10916 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is , it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S10918). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S10919), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S10920), and the process moves to S10921. do. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S10919, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S10918, if the current lottery result is outside the special symbol (S10918: No), the processes of S10919 and S10920 are skipped and the process moves to S10921.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, the technical idea for stopping and displaying the special symbol for a predetermined period and the control content are explained as in the second embodiment described above. It may be configured to be added. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the specific symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is performed in the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure). This is a process for determining the production pattern (variation pattern) of the variation production performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 8, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga are Each value of C2 and stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the variable probability flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not in a variable probability state). In the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state (S11002: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 and the first Based on the winning random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S11003). After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S11005.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a variable probability state (it is in a low probability state of special symbols) (S11002: No), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S11001 is , and the first random number 8 table for low probability times (see FIG. 243(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S11004). After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S11005.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S11003 or S11004 is a special symbol jackpot (S11005), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is a special symbol jackpot (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, a display mode at the time of a jackpot is set (S11006).

In the process of S11006, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to H). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to H) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S11007). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. time).

On the other hand, in the process of S11005, if it is determined that the special symbol is a miss (including a small hit) (S11005: No), a display mode at the time of a miss (small win) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missed (small hit) symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missed (small hit) symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missed (small hit) symbol. The stop type to be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 is set as whether it is a reach that is out of front and back, a reach other than out of front and back, a complete miss, or a small hit.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S11001 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach is set other than front and back out, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability times. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach is set other than front and back off, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a miss (small win) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed (small hit) symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (variation time).

When the process of S11007 or S11009 is finished, next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S11007 or S11009 (S11010). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S11006 or S11008 (S11012). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the process of S11012 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 8.

In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S11005: Yes in FIG. 252) and when it is not a jackpot (missing or Although the configuration is such that the processing content to be executed differs depending on the case (small hit) (S11005: No in FIG. 252), as used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is determined that it is not a big hit. In this case, the control process is executed for a loss, and in the process, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a loss or a small win, and when it is a loss or a small win. The configuration may be such that the processing content to be executed differs between the two. Note that the detailed contents of the control process executed in this case are the same as those in any of the embodiments described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the starting winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process 8 (S9002). This starting winning process 8 (S9002) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. However, when there is a starting prize, this is a process for suspending the values indicated by various counters.

When the starting winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S11101). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired ( S11102). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11103).

Then, whether or not the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d remains unchanged. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process moves to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S11104). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S11105).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S11105, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) are set. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process moves to S11107. . In addition, in the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11107, it is determined whether the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107). In this process as well, similarly to the process in S11101, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired ( S11108), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11109).

Then, whether there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: No) or even if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is If it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S11109: No), the process moves to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (S11110). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb that has been changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203gb from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. Stored in 223ga.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S11111, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set. , is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 (S11112), and proceeds to the process of S11113. In addition, in the process of S11112, similarly to the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11113, a pre-read process is executed to pre-read the win/fail from various counter values acquired based on the starting winnings (S11113), and this process ends. The details of this prefetching process will be explained with reference to FIG. 254.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S11113). In this pre-reading process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 was detected in the current starting winning process 8 (see FIG. 253). (S11201), and if no new ball has been detected (S11201: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11201, if it is determined that a new entering ball has been detected (S11201: Yes), next, check whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected entering ball is the upper limit (i.e., 4). If it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S11202: Yes), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S11202, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), it is determined whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entered ball is in the probability change state of the special symbol. (S11203). In the process of S11203, it is determined whether or not the probability is variable depending on the current gaming state and the pre-read result of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held balls do not include a jackpot, the current gaming state will match the timing at which the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry starts, so the current gaming state will be in a variable state. It is determined that Further, if a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, the game state may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probability variable jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into account, it is determined whether the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is in a variable probability state.

In the process of S11203, if it is determined that the start of the fluctuation based on the currently detected ball entry is in the special symbol probability change state (S11203: Yes), the type of ball entry opening where the ball entry was detected and the high probability state. The lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained based on the first winning random number 8 table 202ga (S11204), and the process moves to S11206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of fluctuation is a special symbol low probability state (S11203: No), the type of ball entrance where the ball was detected and the first random number 8 table 202ga for low probability. Based on this, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S11205), and the process moves to S11206.

In the process of S11206 that is executed after the process of S11204 or S11205, a winning information command is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the current ball was detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it stores the type of ball entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is used to display the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entering ball. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640.

In this normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S11301). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S11301: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S11305).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

Next, it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a high probability state based on the information held in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

In the process of S11308, if it is determined that the state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S11307 and the second random number 8 for high probability are used. Based on the table 202gc (see FIG. 246), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "239", it is a normal symbol miss. (See FIG. 246).

In the process of S11308, if it is determined that the state is not a high probability state of normal symbols (S11308: No), the process moves to S11310. In the process of S11310, since the pachinko machine 10 is playing a special symbol jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the second winning random number counter acquired in the process of S11307 is Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 237", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of "238, 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss. (See FIG. 246).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S11309 or S11310 is a normal symbol win (S11311), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S11311: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), a variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds (S11315), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this process is performed. finish.

In addition, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S11317). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S11315 or the process of S11316 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S11317, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S11317, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S11312, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or S11318.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S11319). If the current lottery result is a hit for the normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a time saving state (high probability state) (S11320), and it is in a time saving state (high probability state). Otherwise (S11320: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are set to "0.9 seconds x 1 time" (S11321), and the process is performed in S11323. transition to. On the other hand, in the process of S11320, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving mode (high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time and opening of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are determined. The number of times is set to "1 second x 1 time" (S11322), and the process moves to S11323.

In the process of S11323, the opening time determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 and the opening/closing control start of the number of openings are set (S11323), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S11321 or S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped and this process is ended.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment differs from the control process of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the command determination process is changed. Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Note that for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals may be given to the same processes as in each embodiment described above, but processes with the same name are used for the same purpose.

First, with reference to FIG. 256, command determination processing 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is the process to do so.

In the command determination process 8, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received fluctuation pattern command. is extracted (S12703), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S12701, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12704). If the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706), and the main Finish the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referenced when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S12704, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12707). . If it is determined that the held pitch count command has been received (S12707: Yes), the held pitch count related process is executed (S12708), and this process ends. Details of the pending pitch number related process (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Here, the number of reserved balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Therefore, each time a starting prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c and the second special symbol of the audio lamp control device 113 are activated by the process of S12708. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga of the audio lamp control device 113 may be lower than the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

In addition, when the process of S12708 is executed, a display holding ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is displayed. Several commands are set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S12707: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12709). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223fe is updated in accordance with the received command (S12710). Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily understand the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S12709, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S12709: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S12711). In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this process ends.

In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then commands related to wins (big wins, small wins) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each win) ) is received (S12713). If it is determined that a command related to a win has been received (S12713: Yes), a win related process 8 for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a win is executed (S12714), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12713, if it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S12715), and this process ends. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the pending pitch number related process (S12708), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this pending pitch count related processing (S12708).

In the reserved ball number related processing (S12708), first, it is determined whether a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been received (S12801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 (S12802). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read out (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the read information in the game state storage area 223fe indicates a big win or a small win (S12804). If it is determined that the game is hitting a jackpot or a small winning (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805). If it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to on in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot (S12806), A jackpot extension performance is set (S12807), and the process moves to S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, if it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805: Yes), there is no need to set the effect of jackpot extension, so the processes of S12806 to S12807 are skipped and the process of S12808 is Move to processing.

By configuring in this way, if the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired while a winning game is being played, the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) will be executed after the end of the jackpot game. You can set up a jackpot extended performance. In other words, since the performance executed after the winning game ends is not based on the game state set after the winning game ends, but is based on the presence or absence of the reserved memory of the special figure 2, as in the eighth embodiment, a specific Since it is possible to easily set the performance mode corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special drawing 2 that can be executed only under certain conditions, it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In S12808, a key display mode (display mode of acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process moves to S12811. On the other hand, in the process of S12804, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a jackpot or a small win (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809) and the process moves to S12810. .

On the other hand, in the process of S12802, if it is determined that the special map 2-related command received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), a decrease process is executed (S12813), and the process moves to S12811. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 258, the process at the time of decrease (S12813), which is one process in the process related to the number of reserved pitches (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this process at the time of decrease (S12813).

In the process at the time of decrease (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing to end the jackpot. A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handed hitting is set (S12904). Next, the right hit command is set to OFF (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12906), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S12902, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), a key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907), This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 257, the explanation will be continued. When any one of S12801, S12810, or S12813 is completed, the process moves to S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). If it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this process is ended. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has not been received (S12811: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of win-related processing 8 (S12714) will be explained. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of win-related processing 8 (S12714). This win-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a win-related command (a command related to a big win or a small win) is received.

When win-related processing 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a jackpot-related command (S12151), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot-related command (S12151: Yes). , sets the corresponding display command (S12152), and ends this process. In addition, the various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process executed when a jackpot related command is received in the command determination process executed in each embodiment described above. , and its detailed explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S12151, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a jackpot-related command (S12151: No), then it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a small hit start command. (S12107) If it is determined that it is a small hit start command (S12107: Yes), small hit start processing 8 is executed (S12158) and this process is ended.

This small hit start process 8 (S12158) changes the contents of the display command set to the process executed in the small hit start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above to the height of the normal symbol. The difference is that the display commands that are executed when the probability state is set and the display commands that are executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are determined and set. Since the other parts are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the process of S12107, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a small hit start command (S12107: No), then it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S12109), and the small hit ends. If it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hit flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol reserved ball is It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is stored on hold at the timing when the small winning game ends.

In the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation is executed after the small winning game ends, so the main process is continued. end. On the other hand, in the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (0) (S12154: No), then the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. (S12155), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12156), and this process ends.

As a result, if the special figure 2 variation is not executed after the small winning game ends, that is, if the reserved memory of the special drawing 2 cannot be acquired during the small winning game, the jackpot extension effect will be executed after the small winning game ends. You can prevent this from happening. Although a detailed explanation has been omitted, in the hit related process 8, when the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), if the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), the system is configured so that the end screen of the extended jackpot performance (see FIG. 241(b)) is displayed when the small winning game ends. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the extended jackpot performance has ended.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during a jackpot game or during a small win game that is executed in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols. It is configured so that the ball can (easily) enter the second ball entry opening 640 which is the trigger. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed unless a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, so as in the first embodiment described above, the drawing of the first special symbol (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), a small winning game based on the second special symbol lottery only during the potential state. can occur frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, it is configured so that it is possible to set a winning type in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640 and a winning type in which it is difficult to enter the ball, depending on the type of winning (big win, small win). , When winning a win (big win, small win), it is not just the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not this is the case.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the case where the first special symbol is won in the lottery and in the case where the second special symbol is won in the lottery. The configuration is such that the percentage of easy winning types to be set is varied. Specifically, the winning type that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set more easily when the second special symbol wins than when the first special symbol wins. It consists of

By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is transitioned to an executable state, it is possible to continue and facilitate the lottery of the special symbol 2, Even though an advantageous game mode that is advantageous to the player (a mode in which the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode ends immediately, causing discomfort to the player. can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery with the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big win, small win) than the lottery with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, there is no small win, only a jackpot (1/400 at low probability), whereas in the second special symbol lottery, there is no small win. The probability of (1/400 when the probability is low) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set so that a small win can also be won (300/400). In this way, in the eighth embodiment, by setting the second special symbol lottery to have a higher probability of winning a small win than the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery It is configured so that it is easier to win (big hit, small hit) in the second special symbol lottery.

As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, it is possible to win a winning (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. A winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is configured such that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with a higher probability when winning a small winning than when winning a jackpot. are doing. Thereby, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily cause the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed again after the end of the winning game.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation) is configured to be able to store (reserve memory) a plurality of pieces (4 pieces), depending on the winning type won. The opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of items that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to secure more reserved memory through one winning game. Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the second opening/closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in the open state (the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path through which a part of the balls that have fallen from above the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entry port 640 when the state is changed to the closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning port 3650a). is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 which is released during the winning game to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. The player can be made to watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second ball entry opening 640.

In addition, as in the seventh embodiment described above, there is an inflow detection means for detecting that a ball has flown into a channel (guiding passage 3660) in which a ball can flow down when a specific condition is satisfied, and a ball flowing from the channel A discharge detection means for detecting that the liquid is discharged is provided, and a production mode setting means for setting the production mode based on the detection result of each detection means may be provided. It is also possible to provide operation restriction means for restricting gaming operations.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are configured to be dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous display). variation type). Furthermore, in order to efficiently perform the discrimination of special symbols, it is possible to set a gaming state (high probability state of normal symbols) in which the electric accessory 64a is easy to release, and a high probability state of the normal symbols (for example, time saving state). is configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times (time saving number) of special symbol discrimination (variation) reaches 100 after the end of the jackpot).

In the first embodiment described above, since the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 are configured to be able to be discriminated (varied) at the same time (in parallel), the high probability state of the normal pattern is determined by the predetermined state described above. In order to prevent the period from being set longer than the predetermined period, it is used as a reference when determining the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol will continue, at the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to fluctuate. The time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) is updated (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the first embodiment, the time saving information is updated at the timing when each special symbol starts to fluctuate, so in a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, the number of times the special symbol is determined (varied) is Even if the number of times of time saving is set based on this, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being set beyond the predetermined number of time saving times.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, depending on the timing of discrimination (fluctuation) of each special symbol, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes shorter, giving the player a feeling of discomfort. There was a problem.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the time saving number) is executed as the discrimination (variation) of the first special symbol, the discrimination (variation) of the second special symbol, i.e. , When the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th rotation special figure variation is executed (just before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed). , it does not cause discomfort to the player, but if the special pattern variation of the 101st rotation is not executed while the special pattern variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of time reductions) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the 101st rotation special figure variation starts after the 101st rotation special figure variation ends, the time saving state ends at the timing when the 100th rotation special figure variation is executed. There is a problem in that the state of the normal symbols during the special symbol fluctuations gives the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-saving end condition is satisfied. The end timing of the special figure variation (for example, the special figure variation of the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure variation that is executed first after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the special figure variation of the 101st rotation) It is configured such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing that is executed first among the timings.

With this configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbols can be set for a longer period of time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives the player a feeling of discomfort.

In addition, in the present ninth embodiment, the timing at which the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed is configured to be able to determine the timing at which the conditions for executing the 101st rotation special figure variation are satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, between the end timing of the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is satisfied first. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing, the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving state is terminated based only on the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation for which the time saving termination condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, if there is an empty period after the 100th rotation special figure variation ends and before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, that is, the 100th rotation special figure variation is completed. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, the time-saving state can continue during the idle period, making the gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbols) more It can be set for a long time.

In this case, when a game is played in which the ball passes through the through gate 67 to start the variation of the normal symbol, the ball fired by that game enters the ball to start the variation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a game in which only the variation of the normal symbols is started without starting the variation of the special symbols.

Furthermore, when a winning result is won by determining the normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released and the ball is configured to easily enter the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game in which only normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is performed from continuing for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened and the ball enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy to enter (see Fig. 2), it is used as a ball entrance that makes it easier for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a, not as a ball entrance that starts the fluctuation of the special symbol. , a predetermined number of prize balls may be awarded based on the ball entering the ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 260. The ninth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have been changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a time saving end standby flag 203ha is added.

The time-saving end standby flag 203ha is a flag for indicating that the time-saving state is in a standby state to end, and is set to ON when the time-saving state is in a standby state to end. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time-saving end timings) for ending the time-saving state are set based on the number of changes of the special symbol (number of special symbol fluctuations), and which one of the plurality of time-saving end timings is set. The time saving state is configured to end when one of the timings occurs.

Then, when a state is reached (standby state) in which a plurality of time-saving end timings can be established, the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the main control device 110, the gaming state update process (S308 ) is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604: Yes) in the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263) that is executed in place of (S604: Yes) (see S691). ).

Next, when the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or when a new When performing special symbol determination (first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 in FIG. 265)), it is referred to and waits for the time-saving end. When the flag 203ha is set to ON, a time saving end process for ending the time saving state (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

With this configuration, when the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time-saving end timing arrives, it is possible to reliably can perform time-saving termination processing. Furthermore, when the time-saving end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF, thereby reliably preventing the time-saving end process from being executed redundantly at multiple timings. can do.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266. The control process of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), which is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), the game state update process 9 (see FIG. 263) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see Fig. 264), 2nd special symbol jackpot judgment processing (see Fig. 40), 2nd special symbol jackpot judgment processing 9 (see Fig. 265), 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see Fig. 40) The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 45), and the time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment in that processes of S491 and S492 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S401), check whether the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on or not. It is determined whether the start of the fluctuation is the timing of the end of the time saving (S491). If it is determined that it is time to end the time saving (S491: Yes), the time saving end processing is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to S402. Details of the time saving termination process (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. 262. On the other hand, in the process of S491, if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is not on, that is, the current fluctuation start is not the timing of the time-saving end (S491: No), the process moves to S402.

As described above, in this embodiment, before acquiring the special symbol lottery result, it is determined whether it is time to end the time saving. By configuring this before acquiring the lottery results, it is possible to set time saving as the gaming state until the end of the variation, which is the time saving end timing.

Next, the time saving termination process (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing details of the time saving termination process (S492). In the time saving end process (S492), a process for setting the gaming state after the time saving ends is executed.

In the time saving end process (S492), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating a probability state is set (S11402), and the process moves to S11404. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a status command indicating the normal state is set (S11403), and the process moves to S11404. In the process of S11404, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the game state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing details of gaming state update processing 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, in the game state update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36), after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203f (S602), it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0. The difference is that a process (S691) for setting the time-saving end standby flag 203ha to ON is added if (S604: Yes).

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) in the first embodiment in that processing in S891 and S892 is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297), after stopping the variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S809), whether the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on, that is, the current variation It is determined whether the timing of stopping is the timing of ending the time saving (S891). In the process of S891, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is off (S891: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S891, if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is on, a time-saving end process for ending the time-saving state is executed (S892), and this process ends. In addition, this time-saving end process (S892) is the same process as the time-saving end process (S492, see FIG. 262) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) described above. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), respectively. 1. Made the same changes as the changes made to the special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see Figure 264) (addition of a control process that executes the time saving end process (see Figure 262) when the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on). Since there are only a few, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-saving end condition The end timing of the special figure variation that holds true (for example, the special figure variation of the 100th rotation) and the first special figure variation that is executed after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the special figure variation of the 101st rotation). It is configured such that it is possible to determine the start timing and the time saving state is ended based on the timing that is executed first among the timings.

With this configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbols can be set for a longer period of time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives the player a feeling of discomfort.

In addition, in the present ninth embodiment, the timing at which the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed is configured to be able to determine the timing at which the conditions for executing the 101st rotation special figure variation are satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, between the end timing of the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is satisfied first. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing, the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving state is terminated based only on the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation for which the time saving termination condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, if there is an empty period after the 100th rotation special figure variation ends and before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, that is, the 100th rotation special figure variation is completed. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, the time-saving state can continue during the idle period, making the gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbols) more It can be set for a long time.

In this case, when a game is played in which the ball passes through the through gate 67 to start the variation of the normal symbol, the ball fired by that game enters the ball to start the variation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a game in which only the variation of the normal symbols is started without starting the variation of the special symbols.

Furthermore, when a winning result is won by determining the normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released and the ball is configured to easily enter the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game in which only normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is performed from continuing for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened and the ball enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy to enter (see Fig. 2), it is used as a ball entrance that makes it easier for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a, not as a ball entrance that starts the fluctuation of the special symbol. , a predetermined number of prize balls may be awarded based on the ball entering the ball.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. Each of the embodiments described above has two types of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small win), It was configured to execute a bonus game (big win game, small win game) that operates a variable winning device (for example, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650).

In this way, when performing a bonus game in response to a special symbol lottery, the bonus game is executed when the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result, so the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give players a sense of satisfaction, even if the special symbol lottery was executed multiple times, there was a risk that the lottery result would not be a specific lottery result, and the special symbol lottery It was not possible to provide any benefits to players who executed the above.

In contrast, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered the ball, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is activated. A ball means (specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable prize winning device to operate only when a ball enters the specific ball entering means, benefits are directly awarded to the player's game content (ball launch results). This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 267. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, with a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 65, , the electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are deleted, a ball entrance 464 is provided in place of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and a new ball entrance 4640 and its specific ball entrance The difference is that a specific accessory 4640a accompanying 4640 and a small attacker 4650 are provided. The other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, of the game area formed on the game board 13, the left side area (the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view), and the left side area Devices related to the game are concentrated in the lower region (lower region in the front view of the variable display unit 80) where the ball shot down flows down, and the player is forced to shoot the ball in the left region. The configuration is such that a left-handed game is played.

Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left region, and a ball entry port 464, a specific ball entry port 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in the lower region in order from the top. It is being Here, the flow of the game when playing a left-handed game using the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

Most of the balls fired in the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol is determined (lottery) based on the fact that the ball passes through the through gate 67 (detected by a detection switch not shown). In this embodiment, when a normal symbol is won, a winning game is executed in which a specific accessory 4640a, which will be described later, is released.

The ball entry port 464 is arranged so that one out of every 20 balls that reaches the lower region enters the ball entry port 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the ball entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch not shown), a special symbol (first special symbol) is drawn by lottery based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for each ball entered. The balls that do not enter the ball entrance 464 flow down toward the specific ball entrance 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the ball entrance 464.

Here, the specific ball entry opening 4640 has a specific accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. 4640a is attached, and the ease with which the ball enters the ball is configured to vary depending on the variable situation of the specific accessory 4640a. This specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by a variable control means (normal symbol variation process executed by the main controller 110 (see S106 in FIG. 48)) so that the state changes according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The specific ball entrance 4640 is designed to be in an open state where it is easy for the ball to enter the special ball entry opening 4640 when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Variably controlled.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the game state is a state in which the specific accessory 4640a is more likely to be in an open state (high probability state of a normal symbol), and a state in which the specific accessory 4640a is more likely to be in an open state than the high probability state of the normal symbol. Although it is configured to be able to set a difficult state (low probability state of normal symbols), even if the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the ball will not enter the specific ball entrance 4640. It is configured to obtain.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. If the specific accessory 4640a is in the open state at the timing when the ball that did not enter the ball entry port 464 reaches the specific ball entry port 4640, the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 and the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640. When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, it passes over the specific accessory 4640a in the closed state and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

When a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, a special symbol (first special symbol) lottery is executed, and one prize ball is awarded for each winning ball. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights to be executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 can be reserved.

In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13, so that the balls flowing down the game area are guided by the plurality of nails to the positions where various devices are arranged in the lower area. flows down to. Further, in the lower region, a device (for example, the second variable prize winning device 650 ) is constructed so that the number of balls guided toward

Specifically, among the balls fired in a left-handed game, about one out of every four balls is guided to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry port 464 (a position above the ball entry port 464); The player is configured so that approximately one ball per 20 balls (that is, approximately one out of every 20 balls fired in a left-handed game) enters the ball entrance 464.

The configuration is such that about one out of every two balls fired in a left-handed game is guided to the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650. In this specific ball entrance 4640, even though the ball is guided to a position where it can enter the ball entrance 464 (a position above the entrance 464), the ball does not enter the entrance 464 and flows down. This includes the ball and the ball that could not be guided to the ball entrance 464 while flowing down the left side area. Finally, it is configured such that substantially all of the balls fired in the left-handed game are guided to the second variable winning device 650.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to play a right-handed game, and the ball fired in a right-handed game is larger than the ball fired in a left-handed game. , the ball entrance 464, the specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650, and are configured to be guided to the second variable winning device 650 at the same rate.

In this way, by varying the ease with which the ball enters each ball opening depending on the position at which the player shoots the ball, it is possible to have the players play the game while competing with each other in terms of their skill. This can prevent you from getting bored with it early.

Note that, without being limited to the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment, for example, it is possible to make it easier for the small attacker 4650 to guide the ball when playing a right-handed game than when playing a left-handed game. It may be configured as follows. This allows the player to play a game in which the playing method (hitting left, hitting right) is varied depending on the game result (whether or not the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640). can be made to play games with enthusiasm.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. The small attacker 4650 is equipped with a small opening/closing door 4650a that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult for a ball to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter the door. The ease with which the ball enters the ball is configured to vary depending on the variable state of the small opening/closing door 4650a. This small opening/closing door 4650a is controlled by specific variable control means (specific ball entry process executed by the main controller 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278 )). Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, the value of a counter (first winning type counter C2) that is randomly updated and the set game The opening pattern of the small opening/closing door 4650a is configured to differ based on the state.

Specifically, the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is configured to be different. As a result, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which the period (opening standby time) from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is set to be long, the unit time A game state in which the number of balls that hit the small attacker 4650 in a win can be suppressed, and the period from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is easily set to be short (for example, In the potential state), the number of balls hitting the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

In the tenth embodiment, when a ball enters the small attacker 4650, ten prize balls are awarded for one winning ball. It is configured so that more prize balls are awarded than the ball mouth 4640. Therefore, by varying the number of balls that land on the small attacker 4650 per unit time depending on the gaming state, for example, the number of balls that land on the small attacker 4650 may be greater than the number of balls fired at the player. It becomes possible to award the number of balls as prize balls.

With this configuration, in addition to the game based on the lottery of special symbols, it is possible for the player to play the game based on the entry of the ball into the specific ball entry means (the specific ball entry port 4640). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Finally, the balls that did not win even in the small attacker 4650 flow down toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. This second variable winning device 650 is a variable means that operates when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (operates during a jackpot game), as in the first embodiment described above. Note that since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Balls that do not win in this second variable winning device 650 flow into an out port 66 formed at the lowermost position of the gaming area of the gaming board 13 and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball can be fired to the right side area of the game area (right-handed game is possible), but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game in which the ball is fired to the right handle area of the game area is possible. The right side area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) cannot be executed. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, all games (from the games in the normal state) are configured to be executable only by left-handed games, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the through gate 67 or the specific ball entrance 4640 may be provided in the right side area, and the game content may be changed depending on the game state.

<About the production content in the 10th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the characteristic effects executed in the tenth embodiment will be explained. In the tenth embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, the period (determined period) from when the special symbol to indicate winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed is the jackpot type. are prescribed differently depending on the

The tenth embodiment is configured such that a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to be released during the definite period is set. In other words, a game in which the small attacker 4650 is opened continuously (so-called small win RUSH) can be executed using the fixed period of the special symbol to indicate that the player has won the jackpot.

With this configuration, the small win RUSH can be executed before the jackpot game is executed. The technical idea of executing the small win RUSH before the jackpot game is executed is the same as the second embodiment described above, so please refer to the detailed explanation and possible derivations based on this technical idea. The plan and the alternative plan are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and their explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, the same special symbol confirmation period as in the second embodiment described above is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH, but it is not limited to this, and in each of the above embodiments, the small winning RUSH is executed. The period used for frequently executing winning games may be used. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period) may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. It may be configured such that a potential state (a high probability state for special symbols, a low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, and a small hit RUSH is executed during the potential state.

Returning to FIG. 268, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 268(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), if the special symbol jackpot is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and "left hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. is displayed. In this embodiment, since the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in all game states, "left-handed game" is always displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Note that if the configuration is such that the same gaming method (left-handed play) is always executed as in this embodiment, the guide display area Dm3 is not displayed because the player does not need to change the gaming method. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 is displayed, and a comment "Aim for RUSH" is displayed to indicate to the player that a game period in which the small attacker 4650 is frequently released is starting. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "entering the chance zone" indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, when a special symbol jackpot is won in a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the special symbol that wins the jackpot It is configured such that a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set during the symbol determination period. When the game state is set to the potential state, an operation pattern is set in which the period (opening standby time) from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the first attacker 650 is released is short. Since the game is configured to be easy to play, the game (RUSH game) that allows the player to increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time ends when the special symbol confirmation period ends. is executed until

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the period for determining the special symbol is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot type in which the special symbol is decided for a long time, the period during which the RUSH game can be executed can be extended, resulting in a jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

Here, in each of the embodiments described above, the stop display mode of the third symbol to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is changed depending on whether the game content during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player or not. It is configured to be set depending on the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the jackpot game and whether or not the gaming state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player. For example, if the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same odd number (for example, "777"), and it is not advantageous to the player (disadvantageous). ) When a jackpot is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same even number (for example, "222").

On the other hand, in the present tenth embodiment, as a stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the game content during the jackpot game described above is advantageous to the player (which can be given to the player during the jackpot game) is determined. In addition to whether the size of the bonus (number of prize balls) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, it also depends on whether the length of the symbol confirmation period is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be set accordingly.

With this configuration, by understanding the stop display mode of the third symbol, you can control the RUSH game executed before the jackpot game, the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game, and the three game contents. You can play the game while making predictions. In this case, for example, if the period during which the RUSH game is executed (symbol confirmation period), the game content of the jackpot game, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game are all contents that are advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a stop display mode (for example, "VVV") of the third symbol that is set only for the third symbol. This allows the player to play the game while giving him or her a sense of satisfaction.

Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be changed at every predetermined timing. For example, when the special symbol stops changing, it indicates that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, "222") that indicates a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and then "777" is set during the symbol confirmation period (during a RUSH game), and a "777" is set during a jackpot game. The stop display mode of the third symbol may be changed so as to gradually show "VVV" that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to watch the performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol will change. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set by combining the sizes of multiple benefits given to the player based on the jackpot winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each benefit is The sizes may be displayed in different ways.

For example, the type of the stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the size of the third symbol is varied and set according to the game content during the jackpot game. However, the color of the third symbol may be changed and set depending on the length of the symbol determination period. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the details of the game to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the potential state is set as the gaming state during the symbol confirmation period, an efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol confirmation period. In other words, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state and a jackpot is won, an inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode of the third symbol based on the length of the symbol confirmation period, the stop display mode of the third symbol that is set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is variable. It is best to configure the configuration so that Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the contents of the game to be executed in the future in a more understandable manner.

After the display shown in FIG. 268(a) is displayed, when the symbol determination period begins, the display screen shown in FIG. 268(b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268(b), during the period when the RUSH game is being executed, "in the chance zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode is displayed to show the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period. ``30 seconds remaining'' is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured such that the number of seconds displayed is updated according to the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (symbol confirmation period). Further, a comment "Aim for the small attacker" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate the game content during the chance zone (during the symbol confirmation period).

The number of seconds displayed in this remaining period display mode may be set to indicate the entire remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (in seconds) shorter than the set pattern confirmation period. It is also possible to set the new number of seconds to be added to the number of seconds displayed in the remaining period display mode as time passes. In addition, it is set to indicate a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol confirmation period, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to "? seconds", and the remaining period is displayed to the player. It is okay to make it so that the person does not know.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set to show the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period in seconds, but it is difficult to make the player understand that the remaining period is decreasing. Any form is acceptable as long as it is possible; for example, the remaining period may be indicated using an animation until the character 811 is captured by the enemy, or the period until a container containing liquid is emptied may be used. It may be configured to indicate the remaining period. In this way, by using an animation that shows the course of the story rather than the number of seconds, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. The tenth embodiment is different from the second embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different. The other electrical configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, small win type selection 2 table 202ab, and loss type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the second embodiment described above. , a second winning random number table 202ia is provided in place of the second winning random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is provided in place of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and a new specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic is added. There is a difference.

The second winning random number 10 table 202ia is a second winning random number table 202ia that is determined as a winning in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set for the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)). The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the second winning random number 10 table 202ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in this second winning random number 10 table 202ia, there are 231 random numbers that result in a win for the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state, potential state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state. , the range is "0 to 230". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that become a win is 231, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "231/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state), there are 232 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, and the total number of random numbers that become a win is 232, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "232/233". In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the random number value for winning the normal symbol is configured to have a high probability (231/233) even for the low probability state of the normal symbol.

By configuring in this way, even if the game state is set to a low probability state of normal symbols (normal state, potential state), the game state is set to a high probability state of normal symbols (variable probability state, time saving state). state), it is possible to make it easier to win in a normal symbol lottery. In addition, since it is configured so that the probability of winning is slightly higher in the high probability state of normal symbols than in the low probability state of normal symbols, the high probability of normal symbols is higher than the low probability state of normal symbols. It is structured so that the situation is more advantageous. Furthermore, the release pattern of the specific accessory 4640a that is executed in the winning game that is executed when a winning is won is in a high probability state of a normal symbol than when it is won in a low probability state of a normal symbol. Since an opening pattern is set in which the ball is more likely to enter the specific ball entrance 4640 if the player wins, the high probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the opening pattern of the specific ball opening 4640 that is executed in a winning game with a normal symbol is not the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) when winning in a lottery with a normal symbol, but in a winning game. It may be configured to be set according to the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) at the time of execution.

The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is similar to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the one-win type counter C2.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. In addition, the same elements as those defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment described above (for example, time saving counter 203f, special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad) are given the same reference numerals. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2, and for each jackpot type, a time saving counter 203f is set. The value set in the fixed time counter 203ad, the setting status of the probability change flag 203g, and the value set in the fixed time counter 203ad are defined.

Specifically, for the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) of jackpot A in which a round game of 15 rounds is executed, the time saving counter 203f is set regardless of the gaming state when it is selected (when the jackpot is won). It is specified that a value of "10000" is set, and it is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to on. In other words, when jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the next jackpot is won. stipulated. In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next jackpot is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to "10000", but this is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a flag that is set on until the next jackpot is won may be used.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "5 seconds" is set for jackpot A1, "60 seconds" for jackpot A2, and "150 seconds" for jackpot A3, and the first winning type obtained Jackpot A1 is defined in the range of "0 to 19" for the value of counter C2 (0 to 99), jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and jackpot A3 is defined in "24". In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 80% of them (20/ 25) is defined as jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) as jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) as jackpot A3.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game (15 rounds of jackpot game) is executed, the period (symbol If a short symbol determination period is selected as the determination period), the period during which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, in the lottery of special symbols, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not there is a big hit, but also to the length of the symbol confirmation period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Although the tenth embodiment uses a configuration in which the symbol confirmation period is defined in association with the jackpot type, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type) is used. The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol confirmation periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming experience that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similar to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, for jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the game content of the jackpot game (5 round game) is set that is more disadvantageous to the player than jackpot A, when selected (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3), The time saving counter 203f is set to a value of ``10000'' when the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state with normal symbols), and a value of ``10'' is set when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. It is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to on.

In other words, if jackpot B is won, a jackpot game that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A will be executed, but if the time saving state or variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the player will not be able to play after the jackpot game ends. It is stipulated to be able to provide a state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a high probability state of special symbols until the next jackpot, and a gaming state where the high probability state of normal symbols ends after 10 special symbol fluctuations). There is. Therefore, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots in which jackpot A is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot game content, but jackpot B may be more advantageous as a game state set after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "30 seconds" is set for jackpot B1, "90 seconds" for jackpot B2, and "120 seconds" for jackpot B3, and the acquired first winning type Jackpot B1 is defined in the range of "25 to 29" for the value of counter C2 (0 to 99), jackpot B2 is defined in the range of "30 to 44", and jackpot B3 is defined in the range of "45 to 49". There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot B (jackpot B1 to B3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and in 20% of them (5/ 25) is the jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is the jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is the jackpot B3. Here, to explain the symbol confirmation period that can be set in the case of jackpot A and the symbol confirmation period that can be set in the case of jackpot B, the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period is longer for jackpot A than for jackpot B. However, it is specified that the average value of the symbol confirmation period set for jackpot B is longer than that for jackpot A.

In this way, there is a jackpot type (high risk high return) where the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is large but the average value is small, and a jackpot type where the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is small but the average value is large. (low-risk low return), and by configuring the symbol confirmation period to be set based on the selected jackpot type, the pattern confirmation period that is set is better than setting the symbol confirmation period completely randomly. This can make the player think that there is some kind of rule. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the tendency of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is different depending on the major type of jackpot (Jackpot A to Jackpot C), but it is not limited to this, and The jackpot A to jackpot C) may be configured to include a high risk high return symbol fixed period selection group and a low risk low return symbol fixed period selection group. In addition, even though the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is the same, from among a plurality of symbol determination period selection groups in which the maximum value and minimum value of the symbol determination period that can be set are different, The player may be configured to be able to select a desired symbol confirmation period selection group, and the symbol confirmation period selection group selected by the player may be used to set the symbol confirmation period.

Returning to FIG. 271, the explanation will be continued. As described above, in this embodiment, the percentage of jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot B3) in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game, the so-called probability variation jackpot, is selected is 50% (50/100) of the total. For the remaining 50%, a jackpot type in which the probability variable flag 203g is set to OFF after the jackpot game ends, a so-called normal jackpot, is selected.

Specifically, for the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the same jackpot game game content (15 round game) as the jackpot A described above is set, when selected (when the jackpot is won) It is specified that the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "50" regardless of the gaming state, and the probability change flag 203g is specified to be set to OFF.

In other words, if jackpot C is won, a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed like jackpot A, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving state is set 50 times. is stipulated to be set. Therefore, jackpot C is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than jackpot B described above, but the game state set after the jackpot ends is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A and jackpot B described above. It is a type.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "5 seconds" is set for jackpot C1, "60 seconds" for jackpot C2, and "150 seconds" for jackpot C3, and the acquired first winning type A jackpot C1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "50 to 54", a jackpot C2 is defined in the range of "55 to 64", and a jackpot C3 is defined in the range of "65 to 74". There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot C (jackpot C1 to C3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 20% of them (5/ 25) is the jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C3. Here, jackpot C is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot A in the types of symbol confirmation periods that can be set (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds), but the selection ratio is specified to be different, and the above-mentioned jackpot C is It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is higher than that for jackpot A. As a result, jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A in terms of the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends, but jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A in terms of the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. This is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

Finally, for the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) where the same jackpot game game content (5 round game) as the jackpot B described above is set, the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won) It is specified that the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of ``50'' regardless of the value, and the probability change flag 203g is specified to be set to OFF.

In other words, if jackpot D is won, a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player is executed like jackpot B, and after the jackpot game ends, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set like jackpot C. has been done. Therefore, jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above-mentioned jackpot types.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "30 seconds" is set for jackpot D1, "90 seconds" for jackpot D2, and "120 seconds" for jackpot D3, and the first winning type obtained A jackpot D1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "75 to 84", a jackpot D2 is defined in the range of "85 to 94", and a jackpot D3 is defined in the range of "95 to 99". There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot D (jackpot D1 to D3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 40% of them (10/ 25) is defined as a jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) as a jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) as a jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot B in the type of symbol confirmation period that can be set (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds), but the selection ratio is specified to be different, and the above-mentioned jackpot D is the same as the jackpot B described above. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is lower than that for jackpot B.

In this way, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the symbol confirmation time in which the RUSH game is executed.

The specific ball entering motion pattern table 202ic is a data table that defines the contents of the opening motion of the small attacker 4650 that is executed when a ball enters the specific ball entering opening 4640, The time until the ball enters the ball (release waiting time) and the content of the release operation of the small attacker 4650 are defined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time the ball enters the ball.

Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents defined in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic will be explained. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the same operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined regardless of the gaming state, and it depends on the gaming state and the value of the first winning type counter C2. The opening waiting time is specified to be different depending on the situation.

Specifically, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is set to an opening operation in which the opening/closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once, and the opening operation is performed until the opening time reaches 1.5 seconds or This continues until the number of winning balls reaches 10. The ending period in which the opening operation ends and the opening/closing door 4650a is in the closed state is set to 0.5 seconds.

Next, the gaming state is the normal state, the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", "normal 1" with an open waiting time of 20 seconds is defined, and the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 98". , "Normal 2" with an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined, and "Normal 3" with an open standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a value of "99". In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, and the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", "time saving 1" with an open waiting time of 10 seconds is defined, and "40 to 89" is defined. "Time saving 2" with an open standby time of 5 seconds is defined in the range "90 to 99", and "Time saving 3" with an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined in the range "90 to 99". Further, when the gaming state is a potential state and the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", "potential 1" with an opening waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined, and "90 to 97" is defined. ``Potential 2'' with an opening waiting time of 0.2 seconds is defined in the range ``Potential 2'' with an opening waiting time of 0.2 seconds, and ``Potential 3'' with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is defined in the value of ``98 to 99''.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the release waiting time is configured to vary greatly depending on the gaming state, and when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the ball hits the small attacker 4650. Even if a ball enters the ball, the number of balls held by the player will not increase. On the other hand, if the game state is set to the potential state, the small attacker 4650 will frequently release the ball, so the number of balls held by the player will not increase. You can increase the number of balls.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment has a second special symbol execution area 203b, a special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i, a small hit Flag 203k, special pattern 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, regular pattern short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special pattern 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac, special pattern 2 confirmed time counter 203ae The difference is that a variable probability flag 203g, a specific ball entering flag 203ia, and a specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib are added. Note that other elements are the same as the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Moreover, since the probability change flag 203g has the same contents as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The specific ball entering flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that a ball has entered the specific ball entry port 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that a ball has entered the specific ball entry port 4640. It is something. This specific ball entering flag 203ia indicates that a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 in the specific ball entering process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 274). If it is determined that this has been done (S11501 in FIG. 278: Yes), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether it is set to ON (see S496 in FIG. 276), and if it is determined that it is ON (see S496 in FIG. 276). S496: Yes), a process is executed in which the lottery result of the first special symbol to be executed this time is forcibly set as a loss (see S412 in FIG. 276). Next, it is set to OFF when the specific ball entering motion is completed.

In this way, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the small attacker 4650 is opened when a ball enters the specific ball entry opening 4640, and the specific entering ball is used to open the small attacker 4650. When the operation scenario is set, a process is executed in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is forced to be a loss so that it does not become a jackpot. This eliminates the possibility of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol during the period when the small attacker 4650 is released, so it is possible to prevent the operation of releasing the small attacker 4650 from being executed redundantly. . Furthermore, in order to bring the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning device 650), which is normally in a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter (closed state), into a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter (open state). It is possible to prevent these controls from being executed simultaneously (overlappingly).

The specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific ball entering invalid period) in which the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when a ball enters the specific ball entering opening 4640. This is set to ON when a specific pitch invalidation period is set.

This specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 277: Yes). ), is set to on (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entering process (S196 in FIG. 278), the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278), and if it is determined that the specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib is set to on (S11502 in FIG. 278: (Yes), the process for setting the specific ball entering motion scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 based on a ball entering the specific ball entry opening 4640 during the period when the jackpot game is being executed.

<About control processing in the tenth embodiment>
Here, the control processing in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific ball entrance 4640 is added to the second embodiment described above, so that the content of the control process to be executed also changes. , is different in that the control process related to the lottery (discrimination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and the control process executed when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 is added. Further, the control processing is different due to the difference in the control processing described above.

Specifically, instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above, timer interrupt processing 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97). Special symbol fluctuation processing 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) is performed instead of S154), and first special symbol jackpot determination processing 10 (S395 in FIG. 276) is performed instead of first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). ), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), and the specific ball entry process (see S296 in FIG. 278) The difference is that S196) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the above-mentioned content, the specific content of the control process (for example, the process content regarding the second special symbol variation) may be changed in accordance with the configuration of the tenth embodiment, but the above-mentioned content may be changed. With respect to the parts other than those mentioned above, the difference is simply that the corresponding process has been deleted, and a person skilled in the art can easily figure it out, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of timer interrupt processing 10 executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing details of the timer interrupt processing 10. In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is executed in place of special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) in response to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. The difference is that the subroutine of the specific ball entering process (S196) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, similar to the timer interrupt process described above, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. This special symbol variation process 10 (S195) differs from the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) in that the variation process regarding the second special symbol is deleted, and a new special symbol variation can be executed. The difference is that the processing content for determining whether or not it is possible has been changed. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG. 275.

Returning to FIG. 274, the explanation will be continued. When the special symbol fluctuation processing 10 (S195) is finished in the timer interrupt processing 10, the same processing of S105 to S108 as the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed, and then the specific incoming ball After executing the process (S196), other processes (S109) are executed, and this process ends.

Here, the specific ball entry process (S196) is a process that is executed when a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267). Based on this, it is determined whether or not to release the small attacker 4650, or whether or not the current incoming ball is to be treated effectively, and processing is performed to perform settings based on the determination result. Specifically, details of the specific ball entering process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG. 278.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 275 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When this special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot or a specific ball hitting (S295). In the process of S295, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is set to on, it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress, and if it is determined that the specific ball hitting flag 203ia is set to on, It is determined that the current ball is being entered by a specific ball.

In the process of S295, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a jackpot or a specific ball being hit (S295: Yes), the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation process 2 of the second embodiment (see S154 in FIG. 97) The same processes as S202 and S203 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S295, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a jackpot or a specific ball hitting (S295: No), the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation process 2 of the second embodiment (S154 in FIG. 97) The same processes as S204, S205, S206, and S251 are executed.

Then, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off), the first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is executed. , this process ends. This first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). Since the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is otherwise the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the process of S251, the special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to ON. If it is determined that it is (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, and this processing is ended.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be explained with reference to FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 The difference is that a specific incoming ball flag 203ia is referred to instead of the jackpot flag 203i. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are omitted for the same elements, and detailed explanations thereof will be given later.

When this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same process as S401 is performed as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S495). If it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is set to on, the current lottery result is determined based on the first random number table 202a for high probability winnings because the current state is a high probability state of special symbols. (S403).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is not set to on, the current state is a low probability state of special symbols, so the current winning probability is determined based on the first random number table 202a for low probability times. The lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the process of S403 or S404 described above is finished, it is determined whether the specific ball entering flag 203ia is set to on (S496), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S496: Yes), That is, if it is determined that a ball enters the specific ball entry opening 4640 and a specific ball entry action is being executed, the process (S407 to S410) based on the judgment of the special symbol being executed (jackpot judgment) is skipped. However, after executing the process of S412, which is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S496, if it is determined that the specific ball entering flag 203ia is not set to on (set to off) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above The same processes of S406 to S410 as the jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) will be explained. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 of the second embodiment (see S257 in FIG. 99) by deleting the update processing regarding the probability change counter 203aa, Addition of control to set a status command according to the settings of the time saving counter 203f and probability change flag 203g, and some changes to the contents of the process executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to on. They differ in that they did so.

Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, first, S851, which is the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above, is executed. - Execute the processing of S854. Also, in the process of S853, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation of the second embodiment described above is stopped. The same fixed time processing (S860) as processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed.

When the process of S854 is finished, next, a status command is set according to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the setting status of the probability change flag 203g (S891), and then it is indicated that the confirmation period of the first special symbol has ended. A special figure 1 fixed period end command is set for the purpose (S858). After that, it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on (S801), and if it is determined that it is set on (S801: Yes), the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set on. (S892), and sets a specific ball entry invalidation command to indicate that the specific ball entry invalidation flag 203ib is set to on (S893). The commands set here are sent to the audio lamp control device by external output processing (S2201) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 52), similar to commands set in other control processing of the main control device 110. 113. By receiving the specific ball entry invalidation command, the audio lamp control device 113 determines a period in which the specific ball entry operation is not executed even if a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640, and based on the determination result, the third ball entry operation is not performed. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

When the process of S893 is finished, the process of S805 and S807, which is the same as the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above, is then executed, and this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, a process (S894) is provided between the process of S805 and the process of S807 to set the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variable flag 203g to OFF, but the process of S894 is , Since the target of the process executed on the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is simply changed to the probability variation flag 203g, the details thereof Further explanations will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the specific ball entering process (S196) will be explained. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific ball entering process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed by the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) which is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110, and is performed in the specific ball entry port 4640. Various processes are executed when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball.

Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, first, it is determined whether a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, determination is performed with reference to the detection result of a detection switch (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the specific ball entry opening 4640. In the process of S11501, if it is determined that there is no ball hitting the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S11501, if it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to on. (S11502), if it is determined that it is set to on (S11502: No), that is, the current period is a period in which the specific ball entering operation based on the ball hitting the specific ball entering opening 4640 is not executed. If there is, this process ends. In the process of S11502, if it is determined that the specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S11502: No), then based on the specific ball entering movement pattern table 202ic, , determines the current specific ball entering pattern (S11503).

Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific ball entering motion pattern table 202ic includes a plurality of specific ball entering patterns (specific entering ball patterns) corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 and the current gaming state. In the process of S11503, the current gaming state is read from the gaming state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set. By acquiring this, the current specific ball entry pattern is determined.

After completing the process of S11503, next, a specific ball entering motion scenario corresponding to the determined specific ball entering pattern is set (S11504), and the specific ball entering flag 203ia is set on (S11505). Then, a specific ball entering command is set to indicate that it is a period in which a specific ball entering motion scenario is set (S11506), and the process ends.

As explained above, in the tenth embodiment, since the specific ball entry opening 4640 is provided that opens the small attacker 4650 when a ball enters the ball, the This makes it easier to keep an eye on the flow of water.

In addition, the period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is released is set to the game state set at the time the ball entered the specific ball entry port 4640. Since it is configured to vary depending on the gaming state, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to open the small attacker 4650 and a state in which it is difficult to open it. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed (design confirmation period), the game It is configured such that an advantageous gaming state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set, and when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 while this advantageous gaming state is set, other The opening operation is configured such that the period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is shorter than when the game state is set. There is.

As a result, the period from when the special symbol jackpot is won and the symbol (special symbol, third symbol) to show the lottery result is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game starts, that is, the player receives the jackpot. A special game in which the small attacker 4650 can be opened frequently can be executed during the period from when the winning is announced until the jackpot game actually starts.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed (design confirmation period), the small attacker 4650 is in a gaming state where it is easy to release (potential probability). Although the configuration is such that a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to release may be set at a timing other than this, for example, the above-mentioned As in the first embodiment, the setting may be made while the special symbol is being displayed while changing to indicate that the jackpot has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment, the round game may be set after the jackpot game has started. It may be set in the period until it is executed (the opening period of the jackpot game). Furthermore, it may be set to only any one of the above-mentioned periods, or may be set to a combination of a plurality of periods.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, a special game that can frequently release the small attacker 4650 may be executed before notifying the player that the current lottery result is a jackpot. good. With this configuration, since the special game is executed, it is possible for the player to predict that a jackpot game will be executed after the special game ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved. .

In addition, when the special game and the jackpot game are configured to be executed consecutively as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is preferable to configure a series of performances that straddle special games and jackpot games. In this case, for example, information regarding the period during which the special game can be executed, that is, the length of the symbol confirmation period set this time, information regarding the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and the game to be set after the jackpot game ends. It is preferable to set the presentation mode of the above-mentioned series of presentations based on the information regarding the state. As a result, future execution will be based on the game content (game content of special games, game content of jackpot games) to be executed while the series of performances is being displayed, and the performance content of the series of performances currently being displayed. It becomes possible for the player to predict the content of the game.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the jackpot game is executed continuously after the special game ends as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the jackpot game are notified to the player as one jackpot game. You may also set a presentation mode. By configuring in this way, the content of the jackpot game in the performance can be a combination of the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, so the game content of one jackpot game can be set in a variety of ways.

In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the jackpot game is executed when the fixed display period of the special symbol indicating a jackpot winning ends (passes); however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the special symbol is The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area after the fixed display period has passed, and the period from when the fixed display period of the special symbol has passed until the ball passes through the specific area is configured so that the jackpot game is executed. It may be configured to set a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to open during the period.

<About the modification of the tenth embodiment>
Here, a modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 279. In this modification, in contrast to the tenth embodiment described above, a starting gate 670 is provided at a position through which a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 (the left side area of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front) can pass. The difference is that the positions of the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are varied. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol wins the jackpot, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period set as a variable display period, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed in a specified period set as a symbol confirmation period. It was configured so that the jackpot game was executed after a period of stoppage was displayed. On the other hand, in this modification, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as a symbol confirmation period, and then a jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing through the starting gate 670. It is composed of

Then, during the period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed, that is, the period that is the sum of the symbol confirmation period and the starting period until the ball passes through the starting gate 670 after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed. , an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

According to this modified example configured in this way, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period other than a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous gaming state will continue for a longer period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the ball fired in order to execute a special game in which the small hit attacker 4650 wins a ball, that is, the ball fired in a left-handed game, can pass through the position. A starting gate 670 is provided at. This makes it possible to prevent the special game from being played without the ball passing through the starting gate 670 during the starting period described above.

Furthermore, in this modification, the time from when the ball passes through the starting gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 becomes open due to the jackpot game is longer than the time from when the ball passes through the starting gate 670 to when the second variable winning device 650 becomes open. The configuration is such that the time required to reach . As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, it is possible to open the second variable winning device 650, so that jackpot games can be played efficiently. can.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the downward direction of the ball is changed by a plurality of nails installed in the game board 13, and the downward direction of the ball passes through the starting gate 670. Since the ball is configured so that it passes through the starting gate 670 when the ball is varied in the direction, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the starting period will last, and the playing area of the game board 13 is This was able to make players interested in the flow of individual balls flowing down, but since the direction of the ball's flow varied irregularly due to the multiple nails, the starting period continued for a long time. In some cases, it ended immediately.

Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, in an area where the balls can flow down toward the starting gate 670, the ball can be distributed in a regular manner so that the down direction of the balls can be distributed into the first direction and the second direction. A dividing means is provided, and the balls that flow down the other flow path (flow path in the second direction) are directed toward the starting gate 670 than the one flow path (flow path in the first direction) that is distributed by the distribution means. It may be configured so that it flows down easily.

With this configuration, it is possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so that the balls immediately pass through the starting gate 670 during the starting period. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

<About the modification of the seventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284. In the seventh embodiment described above, a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 by one winning game of the second symbol (normal symbol), and the V winning device 650 is opened during the small winning game. It is configured such that whether or not the ball passes through a specific area 650V within can be set.

On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 and the small The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not a ball passes through a specific area 650V in a V winning device 650 that is opened during a winning game. Further, the configuration is such that a maximum of four values of the second winning random number counter C4 that can be obtained by passing through the through gate 67 can be stored in abeyance. Note that the detailed configuration and control contents for suspending and storing the second winning random number counter C4 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, the content of the performance unique to this modified example that is executed by using the configuration of this modified example will be explained. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of a revival effect that is executed when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won consecutively and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280, when the revival effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the in-race effect described above using FIG. 202(a), and a winning effect is executed. During this revival performance, a performance is performed in the main display area Dm in which the character 811 runs at a high speed, flying away the rival character 860 and the goal of the race performance. Here, the conditions for performing the revival effect will be briefly explained. In this modified example, a predetermined winning game is executed while the time saving state is set, and immediately after that (in the next general drawing lottery executed without any pause), the normal state is set. When a specific winning game is executed, a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 by the winning game executed earlier, and a small prize is won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the entering ball. During a small winning game, the ball that flows into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) due to the next winning game is configured to pass through the specific area 650V, and such a situation does not occur. In other words, the result of the consecutive Fuzu drawing lots (the result of determining the Fuzu winning information included in the Fuzu lottery) is a specific winning result, and each winning result is If the game state when a winning game based on the above is executed satisfies a predetermined condition, and furthermore, a ball flows into the second passage 660b in at least the next (second) winning game among consecutive winning games, the above-mentioned A revival performance will be performed.

In this way, by providing a game result advantageous to the player (a state in which a ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small winning game) based on a plurality of lottery drawings, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player. It is possible to provide a game with a lot of content, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game. Further, by making it possible to perform a surprising performance (resurrection performance) in correspondence with the above-mentioned unexpected game, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of this modification will be described. Note that this modification is a modification of the seventh embodiment described above, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the seventh embodiment described above will be explained, and other explanations will be omitted. FIG. 281(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 11 table for high probability 202ja, and FIG. 281(b) is the second random number 11 table for low probability. 202jb is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the standard.

As shown in FIG. 281(a), the high probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja is referred to when determining the validity of the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In the normal symbol variation process 7 (see S192 in FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, in the process for acquiring the lottery result (see S805 in FIG. 219), the currently set gaming state is the high probability state of the normal symbol. Referenced in certain cases.

This high probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that the second winning type (normal pattern winning type) is increased. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to be within the range of "80 to 98". It should be noted that regarding the second winning type of normal pattern per A and normal pattern per B, the only difference is the corresponding range of the value of the second random number counter C4, and the rest is the same as in the seventh embodiment described above. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, the selected second winning type (normal pattern winning type) is set so that the content of the winning movement to be executed differs depending on the gaming state set at the timing when the winning movement is performed. .

The winning operations of A per ordinary symbol and B per ordinary symbol, which are executed in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, are the same as those in the seventh embodiment described above, so they will be omitted, but they will be omitted. The winning action is as follows: the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, and the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 during the opening period. A winning action is performed in which the opening period ends.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, by setting the ending period to be longer than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 due to one regular symbol, While the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b based on other normal winnings during the executed small winning game does not pass through the specific area 650V, the normal winning of this modification example In the winning game (winning action) corresponding to C, the ending period is set (0.1 seconds) shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (3 seconds), and the normal game that is executed immediately after. The ball flowing into the second passage 660b based on the result of the drawing lottery is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game.

Specifically, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed by the winning operation based on the winning of C per common drawing, the next general drawing drawing becomes possible 0.1 seconds after the start of the special drawing 2 drawing, and the next If you win A in the normal drawing lottery, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 in the shortest time (1.3 seconds) during that normal drawing A, you will win the previously executed normal drawing C. The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the start of the special drawing 2 lottery based on .

In such a case, if the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed by the winning operation based on the winning of the C winning on the regular symbol is a small win, and the small winning game is executed, during the small winning game, the It is possible to create a state in which the ball that flows into the second passage 660b based on the winning A can pass through the specific area 650V.

As explained above, in this modification, by winning a predetermined winning type (A, B per general pattern) immediately after winning a specific winning type (C per general pattern), multiple winnings can be made. It is possible to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player (ball passage to the specific area 650V during the small winning game) by the special drawing 2 lottery executed across the 2nd lottery and the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b. .

The second random number 11 table for low probability 202jb is referred to when determining the validity of the second symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and is used in the normal symbol variation processing 7 of the seventh embodiment described above. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 in FIG. 219) (see S192 in FIG. 219), this is referred to when the currently set gaming state is a low probability state of normal symbols.

This low probability second winning random number 11 table 202jb is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that different common power operation patterns are defined according to the second winning type (normal pattern per type). There is. Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set in the range of "0 to 19". If you win A on this common map and the game state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, you will win a winning game with an opening period of 0.1 seconds, an opening period of 1 second, and an ending period of 0.1 seconds. is specified to be executed.

Moreover, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined as "20", which is the average winning number B. If you win this common pattern B and the game state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, a winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds will be executed. The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined as "21", and the average winning number C is defined as "21". If you win this common pattern C and the game state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, a winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds will be executed. It is specified that A "miss" is defined for the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the range of "22 to 99".

Here, if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the normal symbol is won, the winning game will cause the electric power to run only for a period of time during which the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 3640. Although the accessory 3640a is configured not to be released, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only in the winning game based on A per common figure. When this one-second opening period is set, the ball flows down over the electric accessory 3640a and flows down to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

Then, when the open period has elapsed for one second, the electric accessory 3640a enters the closed state, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b and flows down toward the outlet 66 as it is. In addition, in the normal state, since a ball does not enter the second ball entry port 3640, the V winning prize device 650 is never opened.

In this way, in a winning game executed in a low probability state of normal symbols, the operation pattern (normal electric operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is varied according to the second winning type (normal symbol winning type) that is set. By varying the paths through which the balls flow down, for example, it becomes possible for the first variable winning device 65, which is opened during a jackpot game, to win a prize with balls that have passed through a plurality of flow paths. , it becomes possible to win multiple balls at once.

Furthermore, in this modification, a winning game based on C per ordinary symbol is executed in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and immediately after that, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the winning game is set to A per ordinary symbol. When the corresponding winning game is executed, the ball that flows down the second passage 660b due to the winning game corresponding to the winning game A in the low probability state is based on the winning game C executed during the high probability state. It is configured such that the player can pass through a specific area 650V during a small winning game executed.

As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on a small win game even though the state has once shifted to the low probability state of normal symbols, so it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the players to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the details of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage process 11. This through gate passing process 11 is performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, in contrast to the through gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that processing is executed to determine (predict) the game result in advance based on the values of various counters.

When through-gate passage processing 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through-gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above are executed, and then, Based on the counter value stored in the process of S1905, the success or failure of the normal symbol lottery and the type of winning of the normal symbol are predicted (S1951). Then, a winning information command for ordinary winnings including information indicating whether the prediction is correct or not and the type of winning for ordinary winnings is set (S1952), and the present process is ended.

In addition, the detailed content of the processing executed in S1951 and S1952 is that the target of processing in S1707 and S1708 of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) executed for special symbols is replaced with normal symbols. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the content of the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11. This command determination process 11 is performed in contrast to the command determination process 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above, in which a command ( The difference is that a process for determining that the Fuzutsu winning information command) has been received (see S12051) and a process to be executed when the Fuzuzu winning information command is received (see S12052) are added, and other than that. are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283, if it is determined that the winning information related command (winning information command, general drawing winning information command) has been received (S12051: Yes), based on the received winning information command (normal drawing winning information command) The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, the winning information storage area used in this modification is configured such that the received winning information can be stored in the reserved ball storage area of the normal symbol as well as the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol. Then, when the process of S12010 is finished, a general drawing effect setting process (S12052) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the ordinary drawing effect setting process (S12052) will be explained. The normal symbol performance setting process (S12052) determines each piece of information stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received common symbol winning information command, and determines whether a specific condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, processing for specifying that the special effect can be performed is executed.

When the Fuzu presentation setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning-related information received this time is the Fuzu winning information command (S13001), and if it is the Fuzu winning information command, the command is It is determined whether information indicating a high-accuracy/normal map hit C is included (S13002). In the process of S13002, if it is determined that the information indicating a high-certain common map winning C is included (S13002: Yes), the common map C winning flag is set on (S13003), and this process ends.

This popular map C winning flag is set to ON when information (command) indicating a high-accuracy popular map winning C is received, and is set to OFF when the next popular map winning information command is received. It is something that Thereby, it is possible to determine the common symbol winning information command received next to the common symbol winning indicating a high sure common symbol winning C.

On the other hand, in the process of S13002, if it is determined that information indicating C for a high probability common map is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether information indicating A for a low probability common map is included ( S13004), and if it is determined that it is not included (S13004: No), the common map C winning flag is set to OFF (S13007), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S13004 that information indicating a low-probability common map win A is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the common map C winning flag is set to on (S13005), and the flag is turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), special performance enable information is set in the corresponding general figure winning information (S13006), the general figure C winning flag is set to OFF, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S13005 that it is not set to on (S13005: No), this process is directly ended. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that a low-probability common map hit A will be executed next to a high-probability regular map hit C, and a special effect can be set according to the prediction result.

In addition, as in this modification, when providing benefits that are advantageous to the player by spanning the high probability state and low probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of small wins (small winnings) It is preferable that the high probability state of the normal symbols is terminated based on the number of times the game is executed. As a result, the first general drawing lottery is executed with high probability, and the second special drawing drawing is executed by the winning game, and a small winning is won. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the timing when the small winning game is executed.

Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next common symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the variable time has elapsed when winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 drawing, the winning game based on the next general drawing will be executed after the start timing of the small winning game to be executed. Set the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation in the probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute a winning game based on the next general drawing lottery using an operation pattern with a low probability state.

<Modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296. Among the above-mentioned embodiments, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, in the state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the first When a jackpot is won in the special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to be a potential state, and when the potential state is set, the second special symbol ( By making it easier to execute the special drawing 2) lottery, it was configured to make it easier to execute the small winning game.

In the embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game in which a small winning game frequently occurs (so-called RUSH game) using the period during which the jackpot is fluctuating in the special drawing 1. Since it is possible to continuously provide players with a plurality of different bonus games (RUSH games, jackpot games), it is possible to make players more motivated to aim for jackpot winnings, and the game can improve the interest of

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, in order to prevent the jackpot winnings of the special symbols from being duplicated and excessive benefits being given to the player, The special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the jackpot is configured so that no jackpot is won. As a result, even if the special drawing 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 jackpot, the jackpot of the special drawing 2 will not be won. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot variation of special figure 1 until the start of the jackpot game (the jackpot variation period of special figure 1) can be set as the RUSH game period.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, it is specified that there is a range in the length of the variable time (60 seconds at the shortest and 600 seconds at the longest) that can be set when winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 ( (See FIG. 19(b)), in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, if the jackpot of special drawing 1 is won, that is, if the RUSH game is executed, FIG. 7(a) As mentioned above, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop displaying the performance symbol 813 for indicating the current jackpot fluctuation period. Then, the effect pattern 813 that is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the jackpot variation of the special pattern 1 starts according to the variation time of the special pattern 1 set this time and the type of the won jackpot is displayed. It was configured so that the aspect could be varied.

In this way, by having the third symbol display device 81 stop displaying the production symbol 813 and configuring it to suggest the length of the set special symbol fluctuation time instead of determining the validity of the special symbol lottery, the player On the other hand, the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 could make the player more interested, and the presentation effect could be enhanced.

However, in the performance of the first embodiment described above, at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 1 starts (when the RUSH game starts), the length of the current RUSH game period and the time to be executed after the RUSH game ends are determined. Since the content of the jackpot game that will be played is suggested to the player, there is a risk that the player's desire to play during the RUSH game may be reduced depending on the content of the suggestion. Specifically, for example, a jackpot in which a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special figure 1 fluctuation period), and the winning jackpot type is more disadvantageous to the player than other jackpot types. If it is a type (for example, jackpot D), by understanding the display mode of the stopped display pattern 813, it can be determined that the current jackpot winning of special drawing 1 is a lottery result that is not very advantageous to the player. As a result, there is a problem in that the game becomes less interesting during the RUSH period.

Here, if the display mode of the production symbol 813 is configured so that there is no correlation between the length of the RUSH game period and the content of the jackpot game executed after the RUSH game ends, the above-mentioned problem will not occur. However, it is not an effective countermeasure because the fun of predicting the future game development (RUSH game period and jackpot game content) based on the display mode of the performance symbols 813 is lost.

On the other hand, in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, based on the special pattern 2 lottery executed during the variation period of the special pattern 1, the lottery results of the special pattern 1 (variation time, jackpot game content) , a game state set after the end of a jackpot game) is configured to execute a suggestion performance that suggests a game state. The presentation mode of the suggestion presentation is configured to be varied depending on the result (whether or not there is a hit) of the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the variation period of the special drawing 1 and the number of times.

By configuring in this way, the more the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the easier it is to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is fluctuating. Players can be motivated to execute the special drawing 2 lottery during the period.

Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a RUSH game is executed by the special drawing 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special drawing 1 in which the potential state is set. Because of this configuration, it is possible to execute the special drawing 2 lottery more enthusiastically during the fluctuation period of the special drawing 1.

Note that the modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment in that a part of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed, and the execution The difference is that the mode of presentation is changed, and other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the production content in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, a characteristic effect executed in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be explained. In a modification of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation period in which the potential state is set), the current special drawing 1 jackpot lottery is based on the lottery of special drawing 2. The configuration is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a suggestion effect for suggesting a result is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion performance, a performance that suggests to the player the jackpot game content corresponding to the won jackpot type and the gaming state to be set after the jackpot game ends is configured to be executed. ing. Then, in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81 and the combination of numbers can be changed, and the combination of numbers can be changed. The system is configured to perform a suggestive performance by varying the performance mode of a RUSH performance (a performance in which a performance pattern 813 is displayed from a treasure box 812) indicating the result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

Next, an example of actual production content will be explained. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot variation time of special drawing 1, 15 rounds of round games are executed as a jackpot game, and after the jackpot ends, a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player is set. An example of winning the 15R (probable change)) will be explained. FIG. 285(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning is won during the RUSH period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 285(a), in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH game period is displayed on the display screen of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 7(b)). They are different in that they are configured to display a remaining time display 851 to show the number of small wins to be won during the current RUSH game period, and a small win count display 825 to show the number of times small wins have been won during the current RUSH game period. . The same elements (display contents) are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285(a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 10 seconds after the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the remaining time display 851 shows "100 seconds". The value obtained by subtracting the 10 seconds that have already passed from the variable time of 110 seconds is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of small wins won during the RUSH gaming period is 1 is displayed in the small win number display 825. There is. In addition, since the value of the small win count display 825 is configured to be updated (added by 1) at the timing when the small win game starts, the state shown in FIG. 285(a) is already 1 This shows a state in which the second small win is won (stopped and displayed) while the second small win game is being executed.

Next, the presentation contents regarding the suggestive presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 286(b). FIG. 286(b) shows a display screen when the lottery result of special drawing 2 is a loss. In this symbol 286(b), "95 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display 851. In addition, in this modification, as in the first embodiment described above, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is not subtracted during the period in which the small winning game is being executed, so that the variation time shown in FIG. 286 ( The state shown in b) is a state in which 5 seconds have elapsed since the small winning game ended from the state shown in FIG. 286(a) described above. Therefore, the value of the small win count display 825 is increased by 1 and is displayed as "2" compared to FIG. 286(a).

As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the display mode (the display mode of the third symbol or the production symbol 813) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is used. The system is configured to suggest to the player the result of the special drawing 1 lottery that is currently being displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285(b), as a suggestion display mode, the stop display mode of the third symbol (kanji character 285(b)) or the effect pattern 813 displayed from inside the treasure box 812. A gorgeous display mode is displayed.

In this way, by configuring the display format to indicate the lottery result of special map 1 using the display mode to indicate the lottery result of special map 2, the lottery result of special map 2 and the lottery result of special map 1 can be , can be determined based on the display mode of one symbol, so it is possible to make the player more interested in the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the system is configured such that as the remaining period of the RUSH game period decreases, a presentation mode that makes it easy to distinguish the lottery result of special drawing 1 becomes more likely to be set as a suggestion mode. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH game period, by executing the special symbol 2 lottery, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol 1 in advance.

Next, the presentation contents of the jackpot content suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 286. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the symbol (third symbol or production symbol 813) for indicating the result of the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is The display mode is configured to display a suggestion display mode that is changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition to this, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the lottery result of special drawing 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, the number of small winnings has reached 10) case), the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of special drawing 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

As a result, the player will enthusiastically execute the special drawing 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion performance will be executed during the RUSH game period, so that the performance of the game can be improved.

Here, we will explain the specific content of the performance. FIG. 286(a) is a diagram showing an example of display content displayed during the jackpot content suggestion production, and FIG. 286(b) is an example of display content in which the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production is displayed. FIG. In FIG. 286(a), “10” is displayed as the small win count display 825. Then, in order to notify the player that the number of small wins reaching 10 is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the display format of the small win number display 825 is changed to the normal display format ( A highlighting mode different from that shown in FIG. 285(b)) is displayed.

Furthermore, when the jackpot content suggestion production is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed at the lower left of the main display area Dm as a notification mode for notifying the game of the summary of the production currently being executed, and the main display area Dm , three treasure boxes (treasure box 812, treasure box 860, and treasure box 870) are displayed. Of these three treasure boxes, the treasure box 812 is used to display the effect pattern 813 for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2, as described above with reference to FIG. 285.

Then, the treasure box 860 indicates to the player whether or not the gaming state after the end of the next jackpot (after the end of the jackpot based on the special figure 1 that is currently being fluctuated and displayed) is advantageous to the player. It is used for the purpose of notification), and is displayed in a display format with the character ``certain'' added to indicate this. In addition, the treasure box 870 is used to suggest (inform) the player about the contents (number of rounds, etc.) of the jackpot game to be executed next time, and is marked with the letter "R" to indicate this. It is displayed in the display mode shown below. As a result, even if multiple treasure chests are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily understand which treasure chest suggests (informs) what, providing an easy-to-understand performance. can do.

In the sub-display area Ds, the message "RUSH in progress" is displayed to indicate that the current RUSH game period is in progress, and the comment "Open the box with the power of V" is displayed to guide the jackpot content suggestion performance. be done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 286(a), this jackpot content suggestion performance is performed independently of the performance for indicating the lottery result of special drawing 2 (the performance using the treasure box 812). During the period when this jackpot content suggestion production is being executed, the jackpot content suggestion production is displayed with priority (emphasized) over the production to show the lottery result of special drawing 2. There is. Specifically, the treasure boxes (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the presentation suggesting the jackpot content are displayed in a larger display format than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the presentation for showing the lottery result of special drawing 2. It is configured so that With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player pay close attention to the jackpot content suggestion performance.

Then, when the timing to show the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance is reached, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure box 860 and the treasure box 870 are opened, and a display mode showing the content of the next jackpot is displayed from inside. In the example shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure box 860 opens and the word "Lucky" is displayed as the game state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 opens and the word "odd number" is displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. Ru.

Further, the performance results of the jackpot content suggestion performance executed during one RUSH game period are displayed as a history in the suggestion history display 880. In this modified example, the execution condition for the jackpot content suggestion performance can be satisfied multiple times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion performance increases. It is configured so that the lottery results are higher (so that players can easily understand the actual lottery results).

In this modified example configured in this way, by using the suggestion history display 880 to display the performance results of the jackpot content suggestion performance as a history, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. In addition, this suggestion history display 880 has multiple stages of display modes (“cross mark”, “triangle mark”, “circle mark”) based on the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance and the actual special drawing 1 lottery result. Since the structure is configured to display the following effects, even if the display format for showing the performance results of the jackpot content suggestion performance is varied in order to prevent players from getting tired of the performance early, the performance is easy to understand as a history. Results can be announced.

In addition, in this modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is configured to be variable in accordance with the performance result of one jackpot content suggestion production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to have a specific display mode only when a plurality of jackpot content suggestion performances are executed during the RUSH game period and each performance result is a specific combination. With this configuration, even if the first jackpot content suggestion performance is a performance result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a performance result that suggests a jackpot with a small number of rounds played), the next time's The player can be made to play the game enthusiastically so that the jackpot content suggestion performance is executed.

Details will be described later, but the display content (display format) showing the performance result of this jackpot content suggestion performance includes a strong suggestion display that is easy for the player to predict, a weak suggestion display that is harder to predict than the strong suggestion display, is configured to be set based on the lottery result of special drawing 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production that has already been executed), and the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion production. The configuration is such that the selection ratios for strongly suggestive displays and weakly suggestive displays are different. Further, only when a specific condition is met, the system is configured to execute a performance that confirms the content of the next jackpot or a special performance that is different from the suggestion of the content of the jackpot.

With this configuration, even for players who have almost determined the next jackpot content based on the jackpot content suggestion performance that has already been executed, the player is motivated to continue fulfilling the conditions for establishing the jackpot content suggestion performance. You can play games.

In addition, in this modification, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the presentation to show the lottery result of special drawing 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the presentation suggesting the jackpot content are configured to be separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be configured such that a single treasure box is used to perform the performance for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 and the performance suggesting the content of the jackpot. In this case, it is preferable to configure the performance mode of the jackpot content suggestion performance to be variable so that the timing of displaying the performance symbol 813 and the timing of displaying the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance are different. Thereby, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player, and it is also possible to make the player think that the special drawing 2 lottery is being executed more often than actually.

In addition, in this modification, multiple elements (the number of round games and the game status after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are individually displayed as the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production. The present invention is not limited to this, and only one of them may be displayed as the performance result of one jackpot content suggestion performance. In this case, the player may be configured to be able to select for which element the jackpot content suggestion effect is to be executed.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the performance results for multiple elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are displayed simultaneously as the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be displayed at different timings. In this case, an arrangement may be made in which elements that result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player and elements that result in a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player are discriminated, and the elements to be displayed first are determined based on the determination results. good. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that elements that give a lottery result advantageous to the player are displayed later. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game so that many jackpot content suggesting effects are executed.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, the jackpot is determined based on the number of small wins won and the number of times the special drawing 2 lottery was executed. The content is configured so that the execution conditions for the content suggestion effect are satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, the jackpot content suggestion is made to indicate that the number of times the number of winnings in the special drawing 2 lottery has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). It may also be set as a performance execution condition. Thereby, even if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (missing), it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing. Further, the conditions for executing the jackpot content suggestion performance may be set not only based on the result of the special drawing 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, but also over a plurality of RUSH game periods. With this configuration, even after it becomes clear that the content of the next jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player, the player is motivated so that the jackpot content suggestion performance will be easily executed during the next RUSH game period. It is possible to make the player play the game.

In addition, in a modification of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are suggested as the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a presentation result that combines a plurality of the above-mentioned elements may be suggested. In addition, it is configured so that the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, and as a result of the jackpot content suggestion presentation, the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of special drawing 1 is suggested. It may be configured.

<About the electrical configuration in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289. The modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(a), this embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a suggestion mode selection table 222ja and a suggestion effect selection table 222jb are provided.

The suggestion mode selection table 222ja selects the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the RUSH game that is executed when the potential state is set as the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is referred to when setting a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery contents (jackpot game contents, game state set after the end of the jackpot game) of special drawing 1 during jackpot fluctuation using the production mode to indicate the lottery result. This is a data table.

Here, the contents defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be explained with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the value of the acquired special figure 2 variation counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc. Accordingly, a plurality of suggested modes are specified to be selected.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the types of suggestion modes specified in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja are "normal" in which no suggestion mode is set, and "normal" in which the suggestion mode is weak, that is, when the player selects the special drawing 1 lottery. ``Weak suggestion'', in which it is difficult to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content), and ``strong suggestion'', in which it is easier for players to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than in ``weak suggestion''. If "Normal" is selected as the suggestion mode, the normal presentation mode (see FIG. 285(a)) is displayed as the presentation mode for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, if "weak suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, it is not possible for the player to specifically determine the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery, but whether the lottery result is advantageous for the player? A presentation mode (see FIG. 285(b)) indicating whether or not the item is selected is displayed. Furthermore, if "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode is such that the player can specifically distinguish the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery (for example, it indicates the lottery result of the special drawing 2 The number of rounds to be executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode with identification information to indicate the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game are displayed in the presentation mode for the game. . In this way, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since one type is selected from a plurality of suggestion mode types having different degrees of suggestion using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, the RUSH game period The player can be motivated to play the game by displaying the suggested mode multiple times.

To specifically explain the provisions for the plurality of suggestion mode types mentioned above, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "1 to 5" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is If it is "within 10 seconds", "normal" is defined regardless of the value range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc, and if the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the acquired "Normal" is defined when the value of the suggestive effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". If the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "6 to 39" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter ``Normal'' is defined as the value of 223jc in the range of ``0 to 59'', ``Strong suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 89'', and ``Weak suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``90 to 99''. ing. In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "normal" is in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" is in the range of "90 to 99" for the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value. ” is stipulated. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined as the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value in the range of "0 to 59" or in the range of "90 to 99", and "60 to 99" is defined as "normal". ``Weak suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``89 to 89''.

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter "Normal" is defined as a value of 223jc in the range of "0 to 59", and "strongly suggestive" is defined as in the range of "60 to 99". In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "weak suggestion" is in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" is in the range of "90 to 99" for the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value. "Strong" is specified. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "strong suggestion" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, according to the specified contents of the above-mentioned suggestion mode selection table 222ja, the larger the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223jb, the more the lottery of the special symbol 1 during jackpot variation. Since the contents can be made easier for the player to understand, the player can be made to perform the special drawing 2 lottery as many times as possible.

Furthermore, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "1 to 5" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p indicates that the remaining time is within 10 seconds, the suggestion mode is configured so that it is not selected. In other words, when the RUSH game is being executed, if the number of special drawing 2 drawings is small and the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not being actively played, so the jackpot will be executed later. In order to prevent the content of the game from being easily suggested to the player, the suggestion mode is configured to be difficult to select. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enthusiastically execute the special drawing 2 lottery in order to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special drawing 1 which is currently changing.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the more the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb during the RUSH game period increases, the easier it is for the player to identify the suggestion mode to be selected. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the suggestion mode is selected may be changed according to the lottery result of the special drawing 1 which is changing. ), the suggestion mode may be configured to be more likely to be selected than when winning a jackpot type (for example, jackpot D) that is more disadvantageous to the player than jackpot A. In addition, in this case, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 39), the proportion of suggestion modes selected is the same (including similar concepts with some errors), It is preferable to configure the ratio at which the suggestion mode is selected when the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 39) to be different. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

Furthermore, in this modification, the suggestion form is displayed to suggest the content of the next jackpot game to the player based on the displayed content, but the suggestion is not limited to this. The frequency at which the mode is displayed is varied depending on the winning type of jackpot (jackpot game to be executed), and the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player depending on how many times the suggestion mode is displayed. It may be configured.

This suggestion mode selection table 222ja is used for the suggestion mode setting process (Fig. 295 When the suggestion mode is selected, the display mode corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see S5392 in FIG. 295). (See S14204). As a result, when the fluctuation pattern of the corresponding special figure 2 is a loss, the display mode of the symbol (third symbol, production pattern 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a loss is changed to the selected suggestion. Since the display can be varied and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the mode, it is possible to provide the player with notification of the lottery result of special drawing 2 and a suggestion of the lottery result of special drawing 1 at the same time. can.

Returning to FIG. 287(a), the explanation will be continued. The suggestion production selection table 222jb is configured to select the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the RUSH game that is executed when the potential state is set as the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). When the lottery result satisfies predetermined conditions, it is referred to when setting a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery contents (jackpot game contents, game state set after the jackpot game ends) of special drawing 1 during jackpot fluctuation. It is a data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb will be explained. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggestion effect selection table 222jb is based on the value of the obtained small win counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the winning result in the special drawing 1 lottery. It is specified that a plurality of suggestion effects are selected in correspondence with the information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the types of suggestion effects specified in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb include "failure" in which the suggestion effect is not executed, and "failure" in which the suggestion effect is weak, that is, when the player selects the special drawing 1 lottery. ``Weak suggestion'', in which it is difficult to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content), and ``Strong suggestion'', in which it is easier for players to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than in ``weak suggestion''. In contrast, there is a "confirmation" that notifies the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 drawing, and a "bonus effect" that is executed when the lottery result of the special drawing 1 drawing has already been notified to the player. It stipulates that there is a ``pounding performance,'' which is an inciting performance that does not include any content.

This suggestion effect selection table 222jb is used when it is determined in the small win related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) that the execution condition for the suggestion effect (the number of small win wins is a multiple of 10) is satisfied (see S14574 in FIG. 292). S4753: Yes) In the suggested effect setting process to be executed (see S14001 in FIG. 293), if it is determined that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more (S14102: Yes in FIG. 293), the suggestive effect is executed. (S14106 in FIG. 293).

If "failure" is selected as the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286(a) is displayed), but this is a failed effect in which the effect ends without opening the treasure chests 860, 870. is executed. In other words, an effect is performed that does not suggest the lottery result of the special drawing 1 to the player. When "weak suggestion" or "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure boxes 860 and 870 are opened as a result of the suggestion effect and the lottery result of special drawing 1 is drawn from inside. Comments (gaming status suggestion display 861, number of rounds suggestion display 871) that suggest (jackpot content) appear. The content of this comment is variably set in accordance with the type of suggestion performance selected as the suggestion performance.

In addition, when "confirm" is selected as the suggestion effect, an effect in which a comment notifying the lottery result of the special drawing 1 appears from the treasure boxes 860, 870 is executed as a result of the suggestion effect. Note that this modification is configured such that "confirm" is selected as the suggestion effect only when the lottery result is most advantageous to the player.

Further, when a "bonus effect" is set as a suggestive effect, an effect that is difficult to see otherwise (for example, an effect in which a character wears a special costume and congratulates the player) is executed. Thereby, even players who have already figured out the contents of the next jackpot during the RUSH game period can be made to continue playing the game with the intention of continuing to perform the suggestive performance.

In addition, when the "pounding effect" is set as the suggestive effect, similar to the failure effect described above, the result of the effect suggesting the jackpot to the player is not displayed, but the treasure boxes 860, 870 (see FIG. 286(b) ) is executed until the opening. In this way, as a production in which the production result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed (false production), the same production mode as the production in which the production result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is displayed is performed. By making it possible to set different false effects, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the content of the suggested effect until the end.

In a modification of the fourth embodiment, a memory is provided in which a plurality of presentation modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) are stored corresponding to the type of suggestion presentation mode selected using the suggestion presentation selection table 222jb. It has means (not shown), and one performance mode is set from among a plurality of performance modes stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of suggestion performances than the number of suggestion production types defined in the suggestion production selection table 222jb. Further, the suggestion performance history displayed in the suggestion history display 880 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type of suggestion production mode selected using the suggestion production selection table 222jb. It is configured so that Thereby, even if a wide variety of suggestion performances are executed, the suggestion performance history can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestion performance is executed.

To specifically explain the regulations for the plurality of suggestion production types mentioned above, if the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10", that is, if the execution condition of the suggestion production is satisfied for the first time during the RUSH game period, , No suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“-”), and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of “0 to 59” regardless of the jackpot type of special drawing 1. "Failure" is defined, and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99".

When the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "20", if no suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "10". ”, if “failure” is selected in the executed suggestion effect, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc falls within the range of “0 to 59” regardless of the jackpot type of special drawing 1. ” is defined, “strong suggestion” is defined in the range of “60 to 89”, and “failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("present"), that is, when the value of the small win counter 223cc is "10", the "suggested" If "weak" is selected, the jackpot type of special drawing 1 is "A", "failure" is defined as the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 59", and "60 to 89" is selected. "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of , and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99." In addition, the jackpot type of special drawing 1 is "B to D", "failure" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" for the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc, and "suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". "Strong" is specified.

When the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "30", if no suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "10". ” and “20”, if “failure” is selected in the executed suggestion effect, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is “A” and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is “0~ ``Strong suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``59,'' and ``weak suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 99.'' In addition, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B to D", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc from "0 to 99".

On the other hand, if "weak suggestion" (yes, weak) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0" regardless of the jackpot type of special drawing 1. ``Strong suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 99,'' and ``failure'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 99.'' In addition, if "strong suggestion" (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type of special drawing 1 is "A, B", and the suggestion effect counter 223jc "Failure" is defined as a value in the range of "0 to 59," "confirmed" is defined in the range of "60 to 89," and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99." Moreover, when the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "C, D", "failure" is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

Then, if the value of the small winning number counter 223cc is "40" or more and is a multiple of 10, "confirmation" is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the special When the jackpot type in Figure 1 is "A, B", a "bonus effect" is defined in the range of suggestion effects "0 to 99", and in all other cases, an "exciting effect" is defined. has been done.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the condition for executing the suggestion effect is that the value of the small win counter 223cc reaches a predetermined value (a multiple of 10), but other conditions may be used as the condition for executing the suggestion effect. You can also set it. In addition, this modification is configured so that the suggestion performance can be executed multiple times during one RUSH game period, and is configured so that the suggestion performance whose degree of suggestion is lower than the suggestion performance executed in the past is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained with the suggestive performance until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 287(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(b), the fourth implementation described above is provided with a suggested information storage area 223ja, a special figure 2 variation counter 223jb, a suggestion production counter 223jc, and a suggestion production in progress flag 223jd. It is different from the form.

The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the contents of the executed suggestion effects (see FIG. 286), and is a data area for temporarily storing the contents of the suggestion effects executed during one RUSH game period. It is possible to store history. This suggested information storage area 223ja stores information indicating the suggestion effect mode selected in the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) (S14108 in FIG. 293), and is used when selecting the next suggestion effect mode. The information stored in is read out (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Further, a suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

The special figure 2 variation number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the number of variations (number of drawings) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period, and is a counter for measuring the number of variations (lottery number) for the special figure 2. In process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), if it is determined that the potential state is set (S5303 in FIG. 294: Yes), the value of the counter is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode to indicate the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is changing using the presentation mode to indicate the lottery result of the special figure 2 (Fig. 295 (See S14201). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter that is referred to when selecting the above-mentioned suggestion mode or suggestion effect, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The detailed configuration is the same as the above-described production counter 223h, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The suggestion performance flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestion performance is being executed, and is set on while the suggestion performance is being executed. This suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, if it is determined that the suggestive effect is being performed (S5391 in FIG. 294: Yes), a special display variation pattern command is set to perform the variable effect of special figure 2 in parallel with the suggestive effect (Fig. 294, S5394). When this display variation pattern command is set, a variation effect (a presentation with a lower effect than the suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 286 is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is the timing to end the suggestion presentation (S14302: Yes), it is set to off (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

<About the control process in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 296. In a modification of the fourth embodiment, command determination processing 11 (see S4182 in FIG. 290) is replaced with command determination processing 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) for the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. (see S14182), jackpot related processing (see S4502 in Figure 64), jackpot related processing 11 (see S4592 in Figure 291), small hit related processing 4 (see S4574 in Figure 156), small hit related processing 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160), and the variable display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) for special figure 2 is executed to execute the liquid crystal display. In place of the management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed, the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293), and the suggestion mode setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 295). The difference is that the following is added (see S5392). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, command determination processing 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 11 (S14182). Command determination processing 11 (S14182) is different from command determination processing 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) in the fourth embodiment described above, in that it is determined that a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 in the processing of S4215. The difference is that if (S4215: Yes), the win related process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the win related process (S4216). Other processes are the same as command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In addition, the winning-related processing 11 executed in S14574 is a jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) that is executed when a jackpot-related command is received, in place of the above-mentioned winning-related processing (S4216). The difference is that the small win related process 11 (S14574 in FIG. 292) is executed instead of the small win related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156), and the other elements are Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, hit-related processing is one of the processes in the command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) executed in step 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 11 (S4592). Jackpot-related processing 11 (S4592) differs from the jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the content of the process executed when a jackpot start command is received has been changed. , otherwise the same processing is executed. Detailed explanations of elements having the same processing content will be omitted.

When jackpot related processing 11 (S4592) is executed, first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), a display jackpot starts. The command is set (S4602), and then the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (of the suggested effects performed during the RUSH game period) is cleared. history information) is cleared (S4692), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), the processes of S4603 to S4613, which are the same as the jackpot related process described above (S4502 in FIG. 64), are executed and the main game is completed. Finish the process.

That is, in the jackpot related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process is executed to initialize each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the start of the jackpot. Thereby, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably prevent the performance mode during the RUSH game from being set based on information regarding past RUSH games.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is configured to be executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special drawing 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game are at the same timing. Although the initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is used as the start timing of the jackpot game, the timing is not limited to this, and a determining means for determining that the RUSH game has ended is provided, and the determining means is provided. If it is determined that the RUSH game has ended, the initialization process for each parameter may be executed. Furthermore, since the condition under which the RUSH game can be executed is when a potential state is set as the gaming state, the determination result of the gaming state determining means for determining the current gaming state is determined to be not a potential state. In this case, the configuration may be such that initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is executed.

Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the initialization process for each parameter is executed every time one RUSH game ends, but the RUSH game is restarted within a predetermined period after the jackpot game. When executed, the configuration may be such that the information (value) of each parameter can be continuously updated. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game with a desire to continue playing the RUSH game multiple times. In this case, an elapsed period determining means is provided for determining whether a predetermined period of time (for example, a period until the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game, and the elapsed period determining means The configuration may be such that the initialization process for each parameter is executed when it is determined that a predetermined period of time has passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, hit-related processing is one of the processes in the command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. 11 (see S14574), the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit related processing 11 (S14574). Small win related process 11 (S14574) is a process that is executed when a small win start command is received, which is different from small win related process 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the fourth embodiment described above. The process is the same except for the following points. Detailed explanations of elements having the same processing content will be omitted.

When the small win related process 11 (S14574) is executed, it is first determined whether a small win start command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S4701: Yes), the above-mentioned The same processes as S4741 to S4753 are executed as the small win related process 4 of the fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156), and in the process of S4753, it is determined that the value of the small win counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If so (S4753: Yes), a suggestion effect setting process is executed (S14001). Thereafter, a small winning start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S4701: No), S4703 is the same as the small win related process 4 of the above-mentioned fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156). The process from S4710 to S4710 is executed and the process ends.

The suggestion effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect. In other words, the process of S4753 described above serves as a determining means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for executing the suggestive effect are satisfied. In this modified example, the value of the small win counter 223cc is set to a predetermined value (a value that is a multiple of 10) as an execution condition for executing the suggestion effect, but other elements are set as the execution condition. For example, it may be set as an execution condition that the number of special drawing 2 drawings executed while the potential state is set is a predetermined value (for example, a value that is a multiple of 20). good. In this case, it may be configured to read the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb and make the determination.

In addition, in this modification, since the suggestion effect is configured to be set based on the number of small wins won during the potential state (during the RUSH game period), the small win related process 11 (S14574) is configured to set the suggestion effect. Although the present invention is configured to include a process (S14001), if the execution conditions of the suggestion effect are different, the corresponding process may be configured to include a suggestion effect setting process. Furthermore, when setting multiple conditions for executing a suggestive effect, if one condition for executing a suggestive effect is met, the other condition for executing a suggestive effect is set within a predetermined period (for example, the number of drawings for special drawing 2 is 5 times). It is preferable to provide a restriction means to restrict the establishment of the condition within the period until the condition is reached (or within 30 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a plurality of different suggestive performance execution conditions from being satisfied in a short period of time and to prevent suggestive performances from occurring frequently. In addition, when the above-mentioned restriction means is provided, it is preferable to vary the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation based on the order in which a plurality of suggestion presentation execution conditions are met. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the execution of the suggestion effect, but also in which conditions for executing the suggestion effect have been established, thereby further enhancing the effect of the effect. .

In addition, as an execution condition for the suggestion performance to be executed during the RUSH game period, the cumulative value of the number of drawings of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of small winnings, and the number of winnings that are out of stock reach a predetermined value. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be satisfied when the winning number is reached, a consecutive winning condition that can be held when the number of consecutive winnings that have been missed reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Furthermore, an operation condition may be provided that is satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. This allows the player to actively operate the operating means during the RUSH game period, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game. In addition, it may be configured such that the execution condition for the suggestive effect is satisfied based on the game results other than the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period, for example, the number of balls that entered the ball entrance is The number of balls that enter the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (so-called over-winning balls) reaches a predetermined number. It may be configured such that the conditions for executing the suggestive effect are satisfied when the suggested effect is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be explained. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestion effect setting process, a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

When the suggested effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH game period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether the time is longer than (S14102). Here, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the end timing of the suggestion performance, so a new suggestion performance is not executed. It is configured as follows.

In addition, in this modification, the time of the suggestion effect is fixed to 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure may be such that the suggestion effect is executed for a plurality of durations. In this case, first determine the presentation time of the suggestion presentation to be executed, then determine whether the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined presentation time, and execute the suggestion presentation based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of. Alternatively, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggested performance may be set from among the performance times that can be executed within the remaining period.

In the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), this process ends because there is no period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then the value of the small win counter 223cc is read (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ( (S14104), and then displays the lottery results of the currently running special drawing 1 lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b. Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

Next, based on each piece of information acquired (read) in the processing of S14103 to S14105, the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation to be executed this time is selected using the suggestion presentation selection table 222jb (S14106), and the selected suggestion presentation mode is selected. A corresponding display suggestion effect command is set (S14107). Here, in this modification, a plurality of presentation modes are set for the suggestion presentation mode selected in the process of S14106, and in the process of S14107, a plurality of presentation modes are set for the suggestion presentation mode selected in the process of S14106. A display suggestion production command corresponding to one production mode from among the plurality of production modes is set (S14107).

When the process of S14107 is finished, information indicating the currently selected suggestive presentation mode is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggestive presentation flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) will be explained. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195). This variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (S5195) is a process for setting a variable effect corresponding to the variation pattern of special figure 2, and is the variable display setting for special figure 2 of the fourth embodiment described above. In addition to the process of process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160), a process of setting a display variation pattern command when a suggestion effect is being executed, and a process of setting a suggestion mode during the RUSH game period are added. are different, and otherwise are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is executed, first, S5301 to S5351, which are the same as the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above, are executed. Execute processing. Then, when the process of S5351 is finished, it is determined whether the suggestive presentation flag 223jd is set on (S5391). In the process of S5391, if it is determined that the flag 223jd is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, if it is determined that the suggestive performance is not being executed (S5391: No), The process of S5352, which is the same as the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above, is executed, and the process proceeds to S5392.

On the other hand, in the process of S5391, if it is determined that the flag 223jd during suggestive production is set to ON (S5391: Yes), the second special symbol (special symbol) is displayed based on the extracted variation pattern and probability mode. 2) is set as the potential variation pattern command during the display suggestion effect (S5394), and the process proceeds to S5393. In other words, during the potential state, the variable performance of the special figure 2 is configured to be set differently depending on whether the suggestive performance is being executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is not executed, the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 285(a)). On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is being executed, in order to emphasize the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed using most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining part is used to emphasize the suggestion effect. The variation effect shown in FIG. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286(a)).

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the most noteworthy performance in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that, as described above, in this modification, the display commands set in the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to differ based on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, , the same display command is set, and the area in which the variable effect of the special figure 2 is displayed is varied based on the display command received by the display control device 114 and whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. Also good. This reduces the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 when only the display position (size of the display mode) is to be varied without changing the content of the variable effect of the special figure 2 depending on the presence or absence of the suggestive effect. It can be easily reduced.

When the process of S5352 is finished, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, and then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is incremented by 1 (S5393), and this process is ended. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery that is being executed (changing) using the current special figure 2 variation effect is executed.

In this modification, as described above, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is configured not to be executed when the suggestion presentation flag 223jd is set to on. In other words, during the period when the effect suggesting the lottery result (jackpot content) of special figure 1 is being executed by the suggestion effect, the fluctuating effect of special figure 2 is used to suggest the lottery result (jackpot content) of special figure 1. It is configured so that the performance is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from occurring at the same time and providing effects that are difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be explained with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1) is read out (S14201). (S14202), and selects the current performance mode using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja based on the counter value read out in the process of S14201 and the stored information read out in the process of S14202 (S14203 ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected presentation mode is set (S14204), and the present process ends.

By configuring in this way, when setting the variable effect of the special figure 2, it is possible to set a suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 using the variable effect of the special figure 2, It becomes possible to notify (suggest) multiple pieces of information (lottery results for special drawing 2, lottery results for special drawing 1) to the player in one fluctuating performance, and it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the fluctuating performance. can. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as a suggestion mode using the variable production of the special figure 2, there is a suggestion mode in which the display mode of the production pattern 813 is varied (see FIG. 285(b)), and a suggestion mode using the variation production of the special figure 2. A stop display mode is used to show the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, such as a suggestion mode that changes the display mode (see FIG. 285(b)), but the present invention is not limited to this, and suggestions can be made using a variable display mode. You may also set the mode. For example, when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the lottery result of special symbol 1 can be suggested by changing the color of the background, or the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the production symbol 813 is stored can be varied. By doing so, the lottery result of the special drawing 1 may be suggested. In addition, the lottery result of special symbol 1 can be suggested using not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the audio output device 226 and lamp display device 227 provided in the pachinko machine 10. You may do so. Specifically, the sound that is output during the period when the variable display of special figure 2 is being executed is changed, and the lighting mode of the lamp is changed during the period when the variable display of special figure 2 is being executed. By doing so, the lottery result of the special drawing 1 may be suggested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 296, the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 (S4160) will be explained. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 (S4160). In this liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 (S4160), the suggested performance is The difference is that a process for determining whether or not the execution period is currently being added is added, but other than that, they are the same.

To briefly explain the above-mentioned liquid crystal performance execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), it is a process for constantly determining the performance period of each performance set in the audio lamp control device 113 and the update period of the performance currently being executed. Processing is performed. Specifically, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 constantly manages the timing means (timer) and the set performance scenario (current performance scenario), and ends the current performance. Processing for managing the timing and the timing of switching the presentation mode is executed.

When the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the suggestive presentation flag 223jd is set to on (S14301), and if it is determined that it is set to off (S14301: No), the process moves to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14301, if it is determined that the flag 223jd during suggestive performance is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether the present timing is the end timing of the suggestive performance (S14302). If it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is the timing to end the suggestive effect (S14302: Yes), the suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to OFF (S14303), and the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14302, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the suggestion effect (S14302: No), the process of S14303 is skipped and the process moves to S14304. In the process of S14304, other liquid crystal presentation execution management is executed (S14304), and this process ends.

To explain the process of S14302, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds, and the audio lamp control device calculates the elapsed time from the timing when the suggestion effect is executed. The time measurement means of the MPU 221 of No. 113 is used to measure the time, and the determination is performed based on the measurement result. Note that processes other than those described above may be used as long as they can determine the end timing of the suggestive effect. For example, when the suggestive effect is executed, a value corresponding to 5 seconds may be set to a counting means that can count the effect time. may be set, and the end timing of the suggestion performance may be determined when the value of the counting means reaches a value indicating the passage of 5 seconds.

As explained above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is executed while the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is varying, Since it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the player the lottery result of the special drawing 1, it becomes possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special drawing 1 in advance. . Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since it is configured to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect using a variable effect to show the lottery result of special figure 2, the lottery result of special figure 2 and the lottery result of special figure 1 are combined into one effect. Since the game can be suggested (notified) to the player, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the system is configured to execute the suggestion effect when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can be motivated to execute the special figure 2 lottery. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the more the special drawing 2 lottery is executed, the more likely the suggestion effect is to be executed, so that the player's desire to play can be further increased.

In other words, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is executed while the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is changing suggests the lottery result of the special symbol 1. The system is configured to have both the role of establishing the conditions for executing the suggestive performance and the role of executing the suggestive performance. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in whether a suggestion effect using the variable display of the special figure 2 will be executed or whether a suggestion effect different from the variable display of the special figure 2 will be executed.

Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation, there is a suggestion presentation (strong suggestion) in which the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special symbol 1, and a lottery result of the special symbol 1 that is better than the suggestion presentation. Since it is configured such that at least a suggestive effect whose result is difficult to predict (weak suggestion) can be set, attention can be paid to the mode of the suggestive effect. In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed multiple times during one special figure fluctuation period, and the more the number of executions of the suggestion effect increases, the more the special figure 1 lottery The configuration is such that it is easy to set a suggestion effect (strong suggestion) that makes it easy to predict the result. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game so that more suggestive effects are executed.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery during the special drawing 1 variation, but multiple drawings that can be executed at the same time are used. For example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed based on the drawing of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the special symbol 1 variation, or the special symbol (second symbol) may be drawn during the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol). 1 symbol) may be used to suggest the lottery result of the normal symbol. Further, it may be configured to perform a suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 based on the normal symbol lottery while the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are changing at the same time.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the content of the jackpot won is suggested based on the special drawing 2 drawing during the jackpot fluctuation where the drawing of the special drawing 1 has won a jackpot. In addition to this, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 may also be suggested. In addition, in a modification of the fourth embodiment, when one of the plurality of special symbols wins a jackpot (including during fluctuations in the jackpot winning), the lottery of the other special symbol The system is designed to prevent you from winning the jackpot. Therefore, since the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 jackpot will not win a jackpot, even if the drawing result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 is suggested, a jackpot game that is different from the suggested content It is possible to suppress the situation in which (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special drawing 2 lottery) is executed.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the variation of the special drawing 1 winning the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variation of the special figure 1 which has not won a jackpot. Thereby, by executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player think that the changing special figure 1 has won a jackpot.

In addition, in a modification of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above, if a jackpot is won with a variable probability state set, a probability state is set during the jackpot variation, and a special winning state is set. The system is configured so that the second lottery is easily executed. As a result, it is possible to execute more special drawing 2 drawings during fluctuations in the special drawing 1 jackpot, and therefore it is possible to easily provide suggestive effects to the player. In addition, in a state where the probability state is set, it becomes easier to win a small win different from a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, so it is possible to make it easier to execute the special drawing 2 drawing more actively.

In a modification of the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot game is configured to provide a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1. Although it is configured to be executed before the start of the game, the suggestion effect may be executed during a period other than this. For example, by applying the technique of this modification to the above-mentioned sixth embodiment, the special figure 1 It may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 (the jackpot game contents and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery only during the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to perform the suggestion effect based on the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed during the fluctuation of the deviation. Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible for the player to enjoy whether or not the changing special drawing 1 lottery is a jackpot.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment described above, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern 1 based on the special pattern 2 lottery executed during the variation of the special pattern 1 is added to the fourth embodiment. Although an example has been shown, the suggestion effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be added to the other embodiments described above. For example, the suggestion effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be added to the third embodiment. It may be configured as follows.

In the third embodiment, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot, and in the state where the variable probability state is set, a predetermined transition condition (jackpot winning, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. If a small hit win, 4th drawing of a special symbol) is established, the potential state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set to a predetermined end condition (4th lottery result of special symbol). The configuration is such that the period is set until the ``is stopped and displayed'' is established.

When executing the above-mentioned suggestion effect in the third embodiment configured in this way, the special figure 1 is selected based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variation of the special figure 1 in which the probability state is set. It is preferable to perform not only the lottery result but also a suggestion effect that suggests the opportunity (transition condition) for setting the potential state.

That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions for setting the potential state are defined, and the period for setting the potential state is configured to differ depending on the transition condition that is satisfied. Since the specific contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 112, the explanation thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, until the special symbol 1 variation for which the conditions for transition to the potential state are met is stopped and displayed, the player is not informed of the transition to the current potential state. It was not possible to tell what the trigger was.

Therefore, by adding the suggestion effect explained using the modified example of the fourth embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, during the special figure 1 variation when the transition condition to the potential state is satisfied. It becomes possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is changing based on the executed special figure 2 lottery. With this configuration, the player can predict the timing of the current transition to the potential state by looking at the suggested performance that is executed.

In other words, it is possible to set a first gaming state (for example, a potential state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state, and a second gaming state (for example, a variable probability state) that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. The special figure 2 variation is configured to be able to transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the transition condition is satisfied, and is executed during the special figure 1 variation when the first gaming state is set. (Lottery) It is preferable to configure the system to be able to execute a suggestion performance for suggesting to the player what the transition condition was that led to the current first gaming state being set.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, by executing the lottery of special figure 2 during the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 1 (during the RUSH game period), the small winning game (RUSH game) is frequently executed. , in a configuration in which prize balls can be given to players without executing a jackpot game, the lottery result of special drawing 1 (jacket game content, game state after jackpot game, special drawing) is determined based on the drawing of special drawing 2. Since the system is configured to be able to execute a suggestion performance that suggests the remaining variation time of 1 variation, it is possible to give multiple meanings to the special drawing 2 lottery during the RUSH game period. Specifically, the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period will make the player expect a small hit to obtain a prize ball, while the drawing result of the fluctuating special drawing 1 will be advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the user expect that a suggestive effect that suggests that is to be carried out.

When configured in this way, for example, if one of the multiple meanings of the special drawing 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, the other may be controlled to be advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery, a small win with a long fluctuation time (for example, small win A) and a small win with a shorter fluctuation time than that small win A (small win B) can be set. do. In this case, in order to execute many small winning games within the limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select many lottery results with a short fluctuation time as the lottery results of the special drawing 2. In other words, if the small win A mentioned above is won, the lottery result will be more disadvantageous to the player than if the small win B is won.

In such a case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the suggestion effect is more likely to be executed if the small win A is won than if the small win B is won. As a result, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it becomes easier to provide another added value (suggestion effect), which significantly reduces the player's desire to play. This can be suppressed.

In addition to the above-mentioned examples, for example, the first small winning game that is advantageous to the player as a game mode of the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won, and the first small winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the first small winning game. To make it possible to set a second small winning game in which a small winning game disadvantageous to a player is executed, and to facilitate providing another added value (suggestion effect) when a small winning game disadvantageous to a player is won. It may be configured so that

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 316. In the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are set. In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is made into a potential state, and the small winning game is more likely to be executed when the potential state is set.

On the other hand, in the 11th embodiment, when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends first in the probability variable state (when the time saving number ends), and in some cases when the jackpot is won, the advantageous probability state The structure is such that it transitions to In addition, in gaming states other than the potential state, even if a jackpot is achieved, the probability that the potential state will be set is extremely low (for example, 5%), so other games When transitioning from a state to a potential state, most of the time is when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the probability change state.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the settings are set after the jackpot ends if the jackpot is won again in a relatively advantageous time-saving state or in a variable probability state than in the case where the probability variable jackpot is won in a disadvantageous normal state. It is configured so that the condition for ending the time saving state is more likely to be met in the probability variable state (it becomes easier to set a smaller number of time saving times). As a result, even if you win a probability-variable jackpot without being able to end the time-saving state of the normal symbol (that is, without being able to transition to the potential state), it will shift to the potential state. Since there is a higher possibility that it will become easier, it is possible to further improve the player's expectations regarding the probability state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above is that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed; The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly explained. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, four types of game states are provided in the eleventh embodiment. That is, there is a normal state that is most disadvantageous for the player, a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state, a variable state that is more advantageous than the time saving state, and a potential state that is the most advantageous for the player. ing.

In the time-saving state (the probability-changing state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is easily opened, and the lower first Since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance 64b2, by playing the left-handed game, it becomes possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol more efficiently than in the normal state. In other words, since the number of game balls to be fired and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 etc. are approximately the same, the number of game balls to be fired is approximately the same, so the number of game balls to be fired is approximately the same, and the number of game balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the lower first ball entry port 64b2 etc. is approximately the same. An advantageous state is formed in which the lottery can be executed. In addition, the probability variable state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) is better than the time-saving state because in addition to becoming a time-saving state of normal symbols, the probability of getting a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols is higher. It will be even more advantageous. In addition, in the potential state (probability change state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is significantly shorter than in other game states (10 minutes). →1 second), when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a high probability (59/60) of a small win (a type of loss, and the first specific prize opening 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 is The lottery results will be open for a period of time and you will be given an opportunity to win a prize ball), so just by playing a right-handed game aiming at the second ball entrance 640, the game ball will be sent to the first specific winning hole 65a. This creates an extremely advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to continue winning prize balls by frequently hitting balls.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 301, a characteristic interesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the most advantageous potential state when the time saving state ends in a relatively advantageous probability variable state. Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is more likely to shift to the probability state by losing in the special symbol lottery for a set number of time-savings than by winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes players expect more strongly. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the variable probability state, a display effect is performed to suggest the remaining number of drawings until the state shifts to the probability state. As a result, when the state shifts to the variable probability state, by simply checking the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to check the approximate number of drawings remaining until the state shifts to the probability state. Convenience can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 297(a), in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot will be explained. As shown in FIG. 297(a), when the ending effect according to the eleventh embodiment is executed, a A display area HR1 is formed in which the words "RUSH is guaranteed if you break through up to three rivers!?" are displayed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the transition to RUSH (potential state) is confirmed when the character 811 breaks through three rivers at most. Note that the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6(a)), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, there are also jackpot types (jackpot A11, jackpot H11) that directly shift to the potential state (RUSH) after the jackpot ends. Although not shown in the drawing, if the jackpot type is reached, entry into a potential state (RUSH) will be announced during the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297(b) to 299, a display effect executed during the time-saving state of the normal symbol (that is, during the probability variable state or the time-saving state) in the eleventh embodiment will be explained. . The details will be described later, but while the normal symbol time saving state is set, the normal symbol time saving state will end every time a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (25 or 15 times). The player determines whether the time-saving state of the normal symbol will end and the time-saving state of the normal symbol will be changed to the most advantageous potential state, or whether the time-saving state of the normal symbol will continue (maintained). A production that suggests (informs) is executed. That is, depending on whether or not the character 811 crosses the river, a river crossing effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) that can suggest (notify) the game state after the end of the variation is executed. Note that the cycle at which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of fluctuations that may cause the time saving state to end. That is, when a jackpot occurs in the normal state and a variable probability state or a time saving state with normal symbols is set, the number of time saving times of 25, 50, or 75 is set. In addition, when a jackpot occurs in the variable probability state or the time saving state and the variable probability state is set, the number of time saving times of 10, 25, or 40 is set. By executing the river breakthrough effect every time the number of fluctuations that may result in the end of the time saving state, the game expects that the transition to the potential state will be notified each time the river breakthrough effect is executed. can be made to do so. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 297(b), the effect mode (display mode) before the river breakthrough effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297(b), until the river breakthrough effect is executed, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the character 811 runs toward the right in front view. Further, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR2 is formed to the right of the character 811 when viewed from the front. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (suggesting) the number of remaining special symbols to be drawn until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. Note that FIG. 297(b) illustrates a state in which the words "20 steps remaining until the first river" are displayed. With this display content, the player can easily understand that if the special symbols are drawn 20 times in a row and the special symbols are drawn consecutively, it is a chance to move to an advantageous potential state. Can be done. Note that the other display contents are the same as the chance zone mode in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6(b)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Here, the "chance zone" in the eleventh embodiment indicates the state while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298(a), the display contents at the start of the river breakthrough effect will be described. FIG. 298(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298(a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 discovers a river image KG imitating a river is executed. In addition, the words "Reach the first river!! Jump over the river!!" are displayed in the display area HR1 formed (displayed) at the top of the display screen. These display contents make it easy to understand that there is a possibility that the time saving state of the normal symbol will end (that is, the number of time saving times will elapse) in this variation. That is, the player can be made to understand that there is a possibility of transitioning to an advantageous potential state and a possibility of transitioning to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the river breakthrough effect.

FIG. 298(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough performance when the river is successfully breached and the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is announced. As shown in FIG. 298(b), when success in the river breakthrough effect is announced, an effect in which the character 811 jumps and lands on the opposite bank of the river image KG is executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 298(b), a signboard image 815 imitating a signboard is displayed beyond the river (on the opposite bank). This signboard image 815 is displayed to suggest (notify) a benefit due to the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. In FIG. 298(b), a case is illustrated in which the characters "Continue" are displayed, indicating that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues (the number of time saving times remains) after the next variable display. In addition, at the same time that the signboard image 815 is displayed, the words "First river breakthrough!! Opportunity zone continues!!" are displayed in the display area HR1 formed at the upper center of the screen. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time-saving state of the normal symbols continues even when the next variable display transitions. Therefore, by continuing to lose until the next river breakthrough performance, it is possible to make the player play the game while giving them a sense of purpose to get a chance to move to the potential state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be done. In addition, if the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the lottery result of the special symbol will be a loss. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, a third symbol of a combination indicating a loss (for example, a combination of "8", "1", and "5") is displayed.

Note that there is a time lag (for example, one seconds). As a result, the player can expect to be notified of the transition to the potential state (RUSH) as a bonus for jumping over the river image 811 during this one second period. Therefore, each time the river breakthrough performance is successful, the player can have a strong expectation that the potential state will be reported for at least one second, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 299(a) shows the display in the river breakthrough performance when the river is successfully breached and the transition to the potential state (RUSH) (the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the state of probability change) is announced. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. As shown in FIG. 299(a), even when the transition to the potential state is announced, the character 811 An effect is executed in which the person jumps over the river image KG and lands on the opposite bank. On the other hand, when the transition to the potential state is notified, the word "RUSH" is displayed on the signboard image 815, and the text "First River Breakthrough!! RUSH" is displayed on the display area HR1. Invasion!!” is displayed. Furthermore, the characters displayed in the small area Dm3 are switched to "Right-handed hit", and the display content in the sub-display area Ds is switched to "RUSH in! Hit right-handed!!". These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to the most advantageous potential state (RUSH) and that it is sufficient to play a right-handed game.

Figure 299(b) shows an example of the display mode in the river breakthrough performance when the river breakthrough fails and the transition to the normal state (the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the time saving state) is announced. FIG. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the transition to the normal state is notified, the character 811 jumps toward the opposite bank of the river image KG, but is unable to jump over the river image KG. An effect is performed in which the person falls towards the target. In addition, the text "Breakthrough failure...Chance Zone End..." is displayed in the display area HR1, and the text "Chance Zone End!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Ru. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, the game in the case where the chance zone is set after the end of the jackpot (that is, the probability variable state or the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot) The state and changes in presentation mode will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 300(a), the transition of the gaming state and performance mode when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state will be explained. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303, jackpot C11 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state, the number of times saved is set to 50 times, and the number of variable probability is set to 100 times. It is a type. In other words, if you lose in the special symbol lottery 50 times in a row after the jackpot ends, unless you win the jackpot after that, you will be in an advantageous potential state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. This is a type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), if you win the jackpot C11 in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol will continue until the 50th special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special symbol will be drawn. At the timing when the symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, the probability change state of the special symbol continues even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more (continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at maximum). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300(a), the performance mode is a river breakthrough performance (Fig. 298 (See Figure 299 (a) ) is executed. Thereafter, a RUSH effect indicating that the player is in a potential state is executed in the same display manner as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7(b)). In addition, when the time saving number is set to 25 times and it becomes a definite variable jackpot (jackpot D11), the transition to the potential definite state is notified by the first river breakthrough performance. On the other hand, in the case of a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot B11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol will be announced in the first and second river breakthrough performances, and 3 In the river breakthrough performance (river breakthrough performance performed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery), the transition to the potential state is notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300(b), the transition of the gaming state and performance mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be explained. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time saving state, and the number of time saving times is set to 50. In other words, this is a type of jackpot in which if the special symbol is drawn 50 times in a row after the jackpot ends, the lottery results in a disadvantageous normal state.

As shown in Figure 300(b), if you win the jackpot F11 in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol will continue until the 50th special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special symbol will be drawn. At the timing when the symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Further, the state of the special symbol is maintained at a low probability state from the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed for the 50th time after the end of the jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300(b), as a production mode, the continuation is announced during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery (Fig. 298 (b)) was executed and the 49th special symbol lottery was executed. During the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect (see Fig. 299(b)) in which the river breakthrough fails is displayed. is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified. From then on, the normal performance for the normal state is executed. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot G11) in which the time saving number is set to 25, the shift to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough performance. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot E11) where the number of time reductions is set to 75, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol will be announced in the first and second river breakthrough performances, and 3 In the river breakthrough performance (river breakthrough performance performed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery), the transition to the normal state is notified.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state or the time saving state, the river is By executing the breakthrough performance, will the time saving state of the normal symbol continue, or will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the potential state, or will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the normal state. The structure is such that it periodically (every 25th or 15th special symbol lottery) is announced. By configuring this way, while the chance zone (time saving state with normal symbols) is set, it is possible for the player to play the game with one of the pleasures being that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player wishes to continuously lose in the special symbol lottery at least until the next river breakthrough performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by creating a configuration in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal state if the river breakthrough performance fails, the continuation of the time-saving state is announced during the river breakthrough performance (even though the river has been breached, the state may change to the potential state). Even if the situation was not reported, it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the potential state is not reported, it is possible to prevent players from being disappointed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, a small winning effect that can be executed in a potential state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the present 11th embodiment, a plurality of performances with different modes are provided as the small winning performance, and when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol that is fluctuating. Executed to suggest results. In addition, in the probability state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the probability variation state where the reserved balls of the first special symbol are easy to accumulate, and the first special symbol is This is a case where the player shifts to a potential state while holding a ball with a design on it. In this case, the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 while the fluctuating display based on the suspended ball of the first special symbol is being performed, so that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and The variable display of the second special symbol is executed in duplicate. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested by the small win effect when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a small win.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a small winning effect (a small winning effect for high expectations) that suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a jackpot. When the small hit effect for high expectations is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, the effect pattern 816 is displayed in a flashier manner than the effect pattern 813 in the normal small hit effect (see FIG. 7(b)). is displayed. As shown in FIG. 301, in this production pattern 816, the font color of "V" to indicate a small win is set to a different font color (yellow) from the font color (black) in the production pattern 813, and " The effect around the letter V gives it a flashy appearance. These display modes make it easy for the player to understand that a small win effect that is different from the normal small win effect (see FIG. 7(b)) has been executed, resulting in a jackpot. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation regarding the event.

Although not shown in the drawings, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the normal small winning effect (small winning effect for low expectation level) and the small winning effect for high expectation level, a small winning effect for medium expectation level is used. There is also a small winning effect (a small winning effect for medium expectations). With this configuration, during a period in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be executed in duplicate, such as immediately after transition to the potential state, the second special symbol It is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is predicted depending on the type of small winning performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been widely known that each time a special symbol lottery result is executed, a variable display effect of symbols is performed to indicate the lottery result. In such conventional gaming machines, the player's interest is increased by executing various interesting effects that suggest the lottery results of special symbols during the execution of the variable display effect of symbols. However, in gaming machines with specifications that allow multiple fluctuating displays to be executed at the same time, there is a problem that while paying attention to the performance mode associated with one fluctuating display, the performance mode of the other fluctuating display performance may be overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in gaming machines that display one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variable display effect becomes difficult to confirm. There is a problem in that if a jackpot is started when the player is not paying attention to the game, the player may be confused.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the potential state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being executed at the same time as the first special symbol is displayed (in an easy-to-understand manner), the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery by the small winning performance of the second special symbol (the performance mode accompanying the fluctuating display). The structure is designed to suggest the results. With this configuration, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol by simply paying attention to the production mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a jackpot. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot. good. With this configuration, by simply checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see, thereby realizing an easier-to-understand effect. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

<Electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. The ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)) in that it has the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the specified contents of the small winning random number table 202b, The difference is that the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed. The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)), so detailed description thereof will be given later.

First, with reference to FIG. 302(a), details of the first winning random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 302(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this first winning random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This is a data table in which random numbers (judgment values) that are determined to be a win in each gaming state are set.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 302(a)) in the eleventh embodiment includes random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of special symbols. ), two numbers "7, 8" are specified, while eight random numbers (counter value) from "0 to 7" are defined as a jackpot in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol. A random value is specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state of the special symbol is 1/60 (1/480).

Next, the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 302(b). FIG. 302(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the small hit random number table 202b in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(b)), this small win random number table 202b is set with a random value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win in the special symbol lottery. This is the table that was created. As shown in FIG. 302(b), in the small win random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment, a random number value that becomes a small win is not defined for the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, there is no chance of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, for the second special symbol lottery, 472 random numbers (counter values) from "8 to 479" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a probability of a small win of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the potential state, it becomes a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the potential state can be further increased.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16(a)), the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment has a judgment value for determining the jackpot type for each type of special symbol. This is a data table stored in .

As shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment includes seven jackpot types from "jackpot A11" to "jackpot G11" as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). is stipulated. On the other hand, three jackpot types, "Jackpot H11" to "Jackpot J11", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A11" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot A11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is variable. More specifically, when the "jackpot A11" is won in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, if the "jackpot A11" is won in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state. At this time, the probability variation count is set to 100 (100 is set to the probability variation counter 203j), so the maximum number of times is from the end of "Jackpot A11" until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. During this period, an advantageous potential state continues. On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot A11" in the probability state, the number of time-savings is set to 50 (50 is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203f), so after the jackpot ends, you can draw a special symbol at most. Until this is executed 50 times, a relatively advantageous variable probability state is maintained. Therefore, "Jackpot A11" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when it is won in a gaming state other than the potential state. On the other hand, if you win in the probability state, it will be a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state (it is disadvantageous than the jackpot type in which the probability state is set, but it is more advantageous than the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set). Become).

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot A11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot A11" being determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type "Jackpot B11" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14". This "Jackpot B11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot B11" in the normal state, the number of time savings will be set to 75 times, but if you win "Jackpot B11" in the time savings state and variable probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 40 times. be done. That is, if the "jackpot B11" is won in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state. On the other hand, if the jackpot B11 is won in the potential state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous potential state. Therefore, "Jackpot B11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when it is won in a gaming state other than the potential state. On the other hand, if you win in the probability state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot B11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot B11" being determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, a jackpot type "Jackpot C11" is defined in association with a value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 69". This "jackpot C11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot C11" in the normal state, the number of time savings will be set to 50 times, while if you win "Jackpot C11" in the time savings state and variable probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 25 times. be done. In other words, since the number of time-savings is set smaller than when winning "Jackpot B11" in the above three gaming states, it is easier to shift to the probability state (unless you continue winning until the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends). ). Therefore, in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the "jackpot C11" is a more advantageous jackpot type than the "jackpot B11". On the other hand, if the jackpot B11 is won in the potential state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous potential state. Therefore, "Jackpot C11" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when it is won in the probability state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot C11" are 55, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the ratio of "jackpot C11" being determined is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70 to 79", and the jackpot type "Jackpot D11" is defined in association with the value "70 to 79". This "jackpot D11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot D11" in the normal state, the number of time savings will be set to 25 times, but if you win "Jackpot D11" in the time savings state and variable probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 10 times. be done. In other words, in the above three gaming states, the number of time-savings is set smaller than when winning "Jackpot B11" or "Jackpot C11", so it becomes easier to shift to the potential state (the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends). ) Therefore, in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, "jackpot D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot B11" and "jackpot C11". On the other hand, if the jackpot D11 is won in the potential state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous potential state. Therefore, "Jackpot D11" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of gaming state when it is won in the probability state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot D11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot D11" being determined is 10% (2/100).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80, 81", and "jackpot E11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with it. This "jackpot E11" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot E11" in the normal state, the number of time savers will be set to 75, but if you win "Jackpot E11" in the time saver state, variable probability state, and probability state, the number of time savers will be set to 75. Set to 100 times. The time saving state is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player because even if the number of time saving times has elapsed, the game only shifts to the normal state (it does not shift to the advantageous potential state).

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot E11" being determined is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "82 to 98", and the jackpot type "Jackpot F11" is defined in correspondence. This "jackpot F11" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot F11" in the normal state, the number of time savers will be set to 50, but if you win "Jackpot F11" in the time saver state, variable probability state, and probability state, the number of time savers will be set to 50. Set to 100 times. Therefore, "jackpot F11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot E11" in the normal state, and is a jackpot with the same advantageous degree as "jackpot E11" in the time saving state, variable probability state, and probability state. .

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot F11" are 17, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot F11" being determined is 17% (17/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "99", and the jackpot type "Jackpot G11" is defined in association with it. This "Jackpot G11" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot G11" in the normal state, the number of time savers will be set to 25, but if you win "Jackpot G11" in the time saver, variable probability state, and probability state, the number of time savers will be set to 25. Set to 100 times. Therefore, "Jackpot G11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot E11" and "Jackpot F11" in the normal state, and is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot E11" and "Jackpot F11" in the time saving state, variable probability state, and potential state. ” is a jackpot with the same advantage.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, only one random number (counter value) is associated with "Jackpot G11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "Jackpot G11" being determined is 1% (1/100).

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, when winning in the normal state, the probability variable jackpot ("jackpot B11" ~ "Jackpot D11") and normal jackpots ("Jackpot E11" to "Jackpot G11") in which the number of time saving times is set to 75, 50, and 25 are provided. That is, the timing at which the time saving state of the normal symbol ends is set in three patterns: 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, after the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to shift to the potential state every time the 25th, 50th, and 75th special symbol lottery is executed. can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the proportion of jackpots in which the number of time reductions is set to 25 is extremely low (1%) in the normal jackpot distribution. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (the number of time savings is small and there is no possibility of shifting to a potential state), so it is possible to prevent the player from being too disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing. Moreover, the ratio of normal jackpots (jackpot E11) in which the number of time saving times is set to 75 is also configured to be relatively low (2%). As a result, when the number of time reductions exceeds 50 (that is, when the continuation is announced in the second river breakthrough performance), it is possible to improve the sense of expectation regarding the variable probability state. Therefore, even if the transition to the potential state is not reported in the second river breakthrough performance (i.e., even if the continuation is reported), expectations for the next (i.e., third) river breakthrough performance will be increased. can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, when winning a variable probability jackpot in a time saving state or a variable probability state (i.e., winning consecutive games), the number of winnings is smaller than when winning a jackpot in a normal state (i.e., in the case of a so-called first win). The configuration is such that the number of time reductions is set. In other words, the configuration is such that it is easier to satisfy the end condition of the time-saving state of the normal symbol when winning the probability-variable jackpot in the time-saving state or the probability-variable state, rather than winning the probability-variable jackpot in the normal state. In other words, the configuration is such that if you win the probability variable jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol, there is a higher possibility of transitioning to the potential state. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is getting closer to the potential state of winning the jackpot in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. .

It should be noted that when a normal jackpot is won in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the number of time saving times is set to 100, regardless of the type of jackpot. This increases the degree of advantage in the case of a normal jackpot that is disadvantageous in the time saving state or variable probability state (that is, the state does not shift to the potential state even if the end condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol is satisfied). Therefore, both in the case of a definite jackpot and in the case of a regular jackpot, the degree of advantage can be increased when so-called consecutive hits occur than when the so-called first hit occurs, so consecutive hits occur. It is possible to further improve a player's sense of expectation in such a case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the jackpot type is "jackpot H11". ” are defined in association with each other. This "Jackpot H11" is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot H11" in a state other than the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 100 times, but if you win "Jackpot H11" in the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 0 times. Set. In other words, if you win "jackpot H11" in a gaming state other than the probability state, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot will be set to a probability variable state, while if you win "jackpot H11" in the probability state, after the end of the jackpot The gaming state of is set to the probable state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot H11" are 75, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot H11" being determined is 75% (75/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "75 to 79", and the jackpot type "Jackpot I11" is defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot I11" is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot I11" in a state other than the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 100, but if you win "Jackpot I11" in the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 50. Set. That is, when the "jackpot I11" is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot I11", so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot H11" being determined is 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type "Jackpot J11" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "Jackpot J11" has 16 rounds of jackpots, and is a type of jackpot (16 rounds normal jackpot) in which a special symbol low probability state is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot J11" in a state other than the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 0, but if you win "Jackpot J11" in the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 100 times. Set. That is, if you win "jackpot J11" in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal state, while if you win "jackpot J11" in the probability state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state. Set to short time mode.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot J11", so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot J11" being determined is 20% (20/100).

In this way, the eleventh embodiment is configured so that if a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery in a gaming state other than the potential state, the gaming state after the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous. . This is intended to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right-handed game is performed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed even though the player is not in a potential state. In other words, if the configuration is such that the same gaming state as the potential state is set in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in a gaming state other than the potential state, the second special symbol will be intentionally drawn by right-handed hitting. Depending on the gaming method executed by the player, the player will end up shifting to the most advantageous potential state at a high rate of 75%, which will be excessively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game is to be performed and a jackpot is achieved, the probability variable state where there is no possibility of transitioning to the probable state (i.e., the number of time reductions is Either the probability-variable state ends at the same time as the probability-variable state (variable probability state) is set, or the most disadvantageous normal state is set, so it is disadvantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 304. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first embodiment (see FIG. 17), this variation pattern selection table 202f determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. This is a data table for In the eleventh embodiment, in the variation pattern selection table 202f, the specified contents of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 and the potential probability variation table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304(a), the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is more efficient than the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(a)). It is configured so that the fluctuation time when the first special symbol hits is short (10 seconds to 20 seconds). In addition, as variation patterns when the first special symbol misses, there are a short variation with a variation time of 1 second, a middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and a super variation with a variation time of 15 seconds. There is. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the time-saving state and the variable probability state, and to diversify the fluctuation patterns when losing. Furthermore, since the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbols is set. Note that, as with the first embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is configured to be set for 60 seconds regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if a right-handed game is played in a time-saving or variable-probability state in which a left-handed game should be played, the gaming efficiency can be deteriorated, so an irregular game in which a right-handed game is played in a gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played can be It is possible to control the gaming method.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 304(b), in the potential probability table 202f3j in the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, regarding the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a one-second variation pattern is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the player enters the potential state and plays a right-handed game, small winning games are executed at relatively short intervals (approximately 1 second intervals), so the first specific prize opening 65a is opened frequently. , you can win prize balls frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of advantage of the player in the potential state.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the game enters the potential state, the jackpot probability becomes high, and the first specific prize opening 65a is opened at one second intervals, resulting in an extremely advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with one goal being to transition to the probable state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) by adding a probability variation counter 203ja instead of the probability variation flag 203g. They differ in some respects.

The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for counting the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the probability variation state of the special symbols ends. If the value of this probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in a probability variation state, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. The initial value of this variable probability counter 203ja is set to 0, and the value is set to 0 when a jackpot is won. If the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, 100 is set as the value at the end of the probability variable jackpot. Further, while the value of the probability change counter 203ja is 1 or more, the value is updated by subtracting 1 each time a new special symbol lottery is executed (see S623 in FIG. 310). When a special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability variable state is in the variable probability state. (or the first random number table for low probability times) is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment has four game states that can be roughly divided. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, the variable probability state shown in the center left of FIG. 306, the time saving state shown in the center right of FIG. It is provided.

As mentioned above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, in which the probability of a jackpot is low and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to release (the game ball is in the lower position). It is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry opening 64b2), resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the variable probability state indicates the variable probability state of special symbols and the time saving state of normal symbols, and the jackpot probability is high and by playing a left-handed game, the lower first ball entrance Since the game ball frequently enters the ball 64 (the electric accessory 64a is frequently released), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the jackpot probability is low, by playing a left-handed game, the lower first Since game balls frequently enter the ball entrance 640, a game state is created that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the potential state refers to the variable probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. Since the set variable time is significantly shorter than in the other three game states (from 60 seconds to 1 second), by playing a right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. Can be done. As mentioned above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability (59/60) of winning a small hit and opening the first specific prize opening 64a. Game balls frequently enter the second ball entry hole 640 and the first specific winning hole 64a to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be won without going through a jackpot. Therefore, the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A11, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the hidden after the jackpot ends. Transition to a certain state. Therefore, when the jackpot A11 is reached, the player directly shifts to the most advantageous potential state, so in the normal state, the jackpot A11 is the most pleasing type of jackpot for the player. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B11 to D11, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the state will be changed to a relatively advantageous probability state. Transition. Furthermore, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a time saving state after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the fixed variable state and time saving state are set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, it is configured so that it is difficult to recognize which gaming state has been set (which gaming state However, the configuration is such that the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect.

Furthermore, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the variable probability state to another gaming state not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, if a jackpot occurs in the variable probability state and jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the game shifts to an advantageous probability state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the jackpot E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state. On the other hand, if the jackpot type of the first special symbol becomes one of the jackpots B11 to D11, which are determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state again ( (loop through variable states). In other words, in a variable probability state, even if you win a jackpot, the probability will only shift to an advantageous probability state with a low probability (5% rate). It is possible to make the user feel that it is easy to transition to a new state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the player expects to continue winning over a set number of time reductions. As mentioned above, the transition is based on winning a definite variable jackpot in the variable probability state or time saving state, rather than the variable state (the state transitioning to a variable state after the first win) based on winning a variable jackpot in the normal state. It is configured such that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the variable probability state (the variable probability state shifted after the occurrence of consecutive games). That is, while the average number of time reductions set at the time of a first win is 50, the average number of time reductions set at the time of successive hits is 25. Therefore, it is easier to pass the time saving number when a consecutive game occurs, so even if you win the jackpot before the time saving number elapses in the variable probability state and end up looping in the variable probability state, Since there is a high possibility that a number of time reductions (a small number of time reductions) that will easily lead to a transition to a certain state is set, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

Furthermore, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the time saving state to another gaming state not only in the case of a jackpot, but also when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, if a jackpot occurs in the time saving state and jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the game shifts to an advantageous potential state after the jackpot ends. Further, when jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot type of the first special symbol becomes one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state again ( Loop the time saving state). In other words, in the time saving state, even if the number of time saving times for the normal symbol has passed, the state shifts to a disadvantageous normal state, so it is more advantageous to win the jackpot. In addition, as mentioned above, the time saving state is set because it is difficult to distinguish from the content of the production whether the normal symbol time saving state or the variable probability state is set. It is possible to expect the state to be variable even during the period. In other words, it is possible to make the user expect that the time saving number of normal symbols will elapse. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the potential state to another gaming state not only when a jackpot is achieved, but also when the probability variation number of times has elapsed. Specifically, in the probability state, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol and the jackpot I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the variable probability count ends before winning the jackpot, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot H11, which is determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probable state again ( (loop through the latent state). In other words, in the probability state, by winning the jackpot before the number of probability changes has elapsed, the probability state that is advantageous at a high rate (75% rate) is looped, so after shifting to the probability state allows the player to play the game while expecting a jackpot.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes you expect a series of misses in a variable probability state, and a gameplay that makes you expect a jackpot in a probability state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22(a)) in that the small winning effect selection table 222ja and the winning The difference is that a sound selection table 222jb is added.

The small winning effect selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to in order to select the type of small winning effect during execution of the small winning game when a small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As mentioned above, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed overlappingly (simultaneously), such as immediately after transitioning to the potential state, this small hit effect The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested depending on the type. Details of this small winning performance selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG. 308(a).

The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select a winning sound to be output when a winning to the specific winning hole 65a is detected during execution of the small winning game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) also by the winning sound output during the small winning game. This allows the player to play the game paying attention not only to the small win effect but also to the winning sound, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Details of this winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 308(a), details of the above-mentioned small winning effect selection table 222ja will be explained. FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this small winning effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308(a), the small winning effect selection table 222ja includes the type of winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b). The range of the counter value of the performance counter (performance lottery counter) 223h and the performance mode of the small winning performance are defined in association with each other (type of performance).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(a), when data indicating a jackpot is stored in the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (i.e., the fluctuation of the first special symbol during execution When the display is a jackpot), the normal performance mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of "0 to 69", and the value of the performance counter 223h is in the range of "70 to 89". For the range of ``90 to 99'', a presentation mode for medium expectations is defined in association with a presentation mode for high expectations (see Figure 301). There is. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the percentages of normal production mode, medium expectation production mode, and high expectation production mode being selected are 70% (70/100) and 20%, respectively. (20/100), and 10% (10/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(a), if data indicating a jackpot is stored in an area other than the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol) ), and when the execution area stores data indicating a super fluctuation (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is a super fluctuation), the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 84". A normal presentation mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in association with the range of , and a presentation mode for medium expectation level is defined in association with the range of "85 to 97". A presentation mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range "98, 99". Therefore, when the reserved balls of the first special symbol include a jackpot, or when the first special symbol is missing and a super fluctuation is being executed, the normal production mode, the production mode for medium expectations, and the high The proportions at which the presentation mode for the expectation level is selected are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, the configuration is such that the selection ratio of the high-expectation and medium-expectation performance modes is lower and the selection ratio of the normal performance mode is higher than when the first special symbol is fluctuating into a jackpot. has been done. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time when the production mode for high expectations or the production mode for medium expectations is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a jackpot. This makes it more likely that it will be a fluctuating display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the small winning effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(a), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed or the losing super variation is being executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved balls of the first special symbol. , the normal performance mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in association with the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of "0 to 94", and the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of "95 to 98", A presentation mode for a medium level of expectation is defined in correspondence, and a mode of presentation for a high expectation level (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with "99". Therefore, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed nor the super miss variation is being executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved balls of the first special symbol, the normal performance mode and medium expectation level The proportions at which the production mode for 2018 and the production mode for high expectation level are selected are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. In other words, the selection ratio of performance modes for high expectations and medium expectations is higher than when the jackpot variation or super miss variation of the first special symbol is in progress, or when a jackpot is included in the hold. is configured such that as the selection rate of the normal performance mode decreases, the selection ratio of the normal presentation mode increases. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time when the production mode for high expectations or the production mode for medium expectations is executed, and if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, , the game can be played with the expectation that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot, or that the pending jackpot will be included. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is predicted from the performance mode of the small win effect every time a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be improved.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been widely known that each time a special symbol lottery result is executed, a variable display effect of symbols is performed to indicate the lottery result. In such conventional gaming machines, the player's interest is increased by executing various interesting effects that suggest the lottery results of special symbols during the execution of the variable display effect of symbols. However, in gaming machines with specifications that allow multiple fluctuating displays to be executed at the same time, there is a problem that while paying attention to the performance mode associated with one fluctuating display, the performance mode of the other fluctuating display performance may be overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in gaming machines that display one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variable display effect becomes difficult to confirm. There is a problem in that if a jackpot is started when the player is not paying attention to the game, the player may be confused.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the potential state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being executed at the same time as the first special symbol is displayed (in an easy-to-understand manner), the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery by the small winning performance of the second special symbol (the performance mode accompanying the fluctuating display). The structure is designed to suggest the results. With this configuration, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol by simply paying attention to the production mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a jackpot. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot. good. With this configuration, by simply checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see, thereby realizing an easier-to-understand effect. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

Next, details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be explained with reference to FIG. 308(b). As described above, this winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select the winning sound to be output when a winning to the specific winning hole 65a is detected during execution of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 308(b), the winning sound selection table 222jb includes production counters for each type of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (variation type of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed). (Performance lottery counter) The range of the counter value of 223h and the type of winning sound (any of three types: normal sound, chance sound, and confirmed sound) are defined in association with each other. Normal sounds consist of relatively short and plain sounds (e.g., "clink"), and chance sounds are long and flashy sounds (e.g., "jakin") compared to normal sounds. The confirmed sound is composed of the most flashy sound among the three types (for example, the sound "Dokkan"). Although details will be described later, the confirmation sound is a special sound that is output only when a game ball enters (wins) the first specific winning hole 65a during jackpot fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed, the normal sound is played as the winning sound for the value of the production lottery counter 223h in the range of "0 to 79". For the range "80 to 98", a chance sound is defined as a winning sound, and for "99", a confirmed sound is defined as a winning sound. Therefore, when a win is detected in the first specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the proportions at which the normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound are output are 80%, 19%, and 19%, respectively. and 1%. As mentioned above, the confirmed sound is a special sound that is selected only during execution of the jackpot variation. Therefore, when the confirmation sound is output, it is possible to give great pleasure to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when the first special symbol loses super fluctuation is being executed, the winning sound is used for the value of the production lottery counter 223h in the range of "0 to 89". Normal sounds are defined in association with each other, and chance sounds are defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" as winning sounds. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the confirmed sound. Therefore, when a win is detected in the first specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the first special symbol missing super variation, the proportions at which the normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound are output are 90% and 10%, respectively. , and 0%. That is, compared to the case where the jackpot is fluctuating, the ratio of chance sounds being output is reduced (about half), and the ratio of normal sounds being output is increased. Then, there is no possibility that a definite sound will be output.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed nor the losing super variation is being executed, the value of the production lottery counter 223h is within the range of "0 to 94". A normal sound is defined in association with the winning sound, and a chance sound is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" as a winning sound. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the confirmed sound. Therefore, when a win is detected in the first specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the first special symbol missing super variation, the proportions at which the normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound are output are 95% and 5%, respectively. , and 0%. In other words, the output ratio of the chance sound is further reduced and the output ratio of the normal sound is further increased than in the case where the off-range super variation is being executed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. Further, by outputting the confirmation sound, it is confirmed that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, so that the player can feel great joy. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game paying attention not only to the small winning effect but also to the winning sound output during the small winning game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 307(b). FIG. 307(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22(b)) by changing the number of fluctuation counter 223ja and the first hit flag. The difference is that 223jb is added.

The variation counter 223ja is a counter for counting the number of variations (number of lottery draws) of the special symbol. The initial value of this variation counter 223ja is set to 0, and the value is added by 1 each time a variation display effect is started (that is, each time a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110). (See S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). Also, it is reset to 0 when the jackpot ends (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set (probability variable state, time-saving state), it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough performance can be executed by referring to the value of this fluctuation number counter 223ja (S5132, S5133 in FIG. 315). reference).

The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol time saving state is set after the first hit. If this first hit flag is on, it means that the game is in the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the time saving state after the first hit. In the time saving state of normal symbols, this first hit flag 223jb is referenced every time the variable display performance of the special symbol starts, and whether it is in the time saving state after the first hit or in the time saving state after consecutive hits occur. It is determined whether there is. If the time is shortened after the first hit, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 24th, 49th, and 74th variable display after the end of the jackpot (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, if the time is shortened after the consecutive hits occur, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 9th, 24th, and 39th variable display (S5133 in FIG. 315). As mentioned above, the number of fluctuations (special This is because the number of drawings of the symbols is different.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the first embodiment Similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the set gaming state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing a variable probability counter 203ja in place of the variable probability flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, and S412 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment is determined. The same processes as S401, S403 to S410, and S412 of the determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is finished, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is a value larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S421: Yes), the process moves to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203ja is 0 (S421: No), the process moves to S404.

Although not shown in the drawings, similar changes have been made to the control contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

Next, details of the gaming state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing gaming state update processing 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. This gaming state update process 12 (S322) is a process that is executed in place of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for updating the status of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the status of the pachinko machine 10.

In the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing a probability change counter 203ja in place of the probability change flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in the gaming state update processing 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, each of the processing in S601 to S604, S606, and S607 is the same as the gaming state updating processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). The same processes as those in S601 to S604, S606, and S607 are executed.

In addition, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time saving counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S604: Yes), then the probability change It is determined whether the value of the counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621), and if it is determined that the value of the variable variable counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the process moves to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process moves to S607.

Furthermore, in the gaming state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203ja is a value larger than 0. (S622) If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S622: Yes), then the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 and updated. (S623), and sets a remaining probability variation number command indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update (S624). When the process of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203ja after the update by the process of S623 has become 0 (S625), and if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja has become 0 ( S625: Yes), a state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S622 that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is 0 (S622: No), and if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is not 0 in the process of S625. , this process ends.

Next, details of the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment. This second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process executed in place of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for performing control according to a win in the first specific winning hole 65a detected during execution of a small winning game.

Of the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S2701 to S2707 is different from each process of S2701 to S2707 of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed. In the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S2704 is finished, a sound lamp control is used to notify that a winning to the first specific winning opening 65a has been detected during execution of the small winning game. A small winning prize command is set to notify the device 113 (S2711), and the process moves to S2705.

The small hit winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the small hit winning command, it refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the production counter 223h, and selects a winning sound from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308(b)). Select a sound and set the output of the selected winning sound. Thereby, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of winning sound every time a winning occurs in the first specific winning hole 65a in the small winning game of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316. First, with reference to FIG. 312, the state command processing 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. State command processing 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is a process executed in place of the state command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62). ), this is a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110.

Of the status command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, each of S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411 corresponds to S4401 to S4406 of the status command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62), respectively. The same processes as S4410 and S4411 are executed. Furthermore, in the status command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4401 is completed, it is then determined whether the current status command is a status command for indicating the gaming status after the end of the jackpot. (S4421), and if it is determined that it is a status command to indicate the gaming status after the end of the jackpot (S4421: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

When the process of S4422 is completed, next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (the gaming state determined in the processing of S4401) is the normal state (S4423), and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. If it is determined that this is the case (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process proceeds to S4436. On the other hand, in the process of S4423, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not the normal state (S4423: No), the first win flag 223jb is set to OFF (S4425), and the process moves to S4426. .

In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, a value corresponding to the gaming status notified by the status command is set in the status setting area 223j (S4426), and the process moves to S4402. On the other hand, in the process of S4421, if it is determined that the status command received this time is not a status command for indicating the gaming status after the end of the jackpot (S4421: No), each process of S4422 to S4426 is skipped, The process moves to S4402.

By executing this state command processing 12 (see FIG. 312), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot is a first hit (a jackpot won in a normal state) or a consecutive jackpot (a jackpot won in a gaming state other than the normal state). Accordingly, the first hit flag 223jb can be updated appropriately. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of fluctuations in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol may end).

Next, details of the small win related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing small hit related processing 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment. This small win related process 12 (S4521) is a process that is executed in place of the small win related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65), and is the same as the small win related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65). Similarly, this is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to small winnings.

Of the small win related processes 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S4701 to S4710 is different from each process of S4701 to S4710 of the small win related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65). The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small win related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small win start command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit winning command has been received (S4721), and if it is determined that a small winning winning command has been received (S4721: Yes), then the winning sound selection table 222jb (FIG. 308(b) (see) (S4722), selects the winning sound corresponding to the data of the execution area of the first special symbol and the value of the production counter 223h from the winning information storage area 223b, and sets the output (S4723). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4721, if it is determined that the small hit winning command has not been received (S4721: No), the process moves to S4703.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the variable display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or second special symbol variable pattern command received from the main controller 110. This is a process for setting a variable pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113 is performed in the variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69). ) are executed. In addition, in the variation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on in the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), then the variation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102).

When the process of S5102 is completed, it is then determined whether the current state is a time saving state of normal symbols (S5122). In the process of S5122, it is determined whether the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is data indicating either a variable probability state or a time saving state. In the process of S5122, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S5122: Yes), a time-saving medium performance setting process is executed to set the performance mode (for example, river breakthrough performance) in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. (S5123), and the process moves to S5106. Details of this time-saving effect setting process (S5123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

On the other hand, in the process of S5122, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time-saving state (S5122: No), the first special symbol display mode that shows the variable display mode according to the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command A variation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process moves to S5106.

In addition, in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5107 that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), then the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 is executed (S5126), and the process moves to S5110. Details of this variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (S5126) will be described later with reference to FIG. 316.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, details of the above-mentioned time-saving effect setting process (S5123) will be described. As described above, this time-saving medium performance setting process (S5123) is a process for setting the performance mode in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. When this time-saving medium production setting process (S5123) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131), and if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131). :Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (that is, whether it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit). (S5132). In the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (S5134 ~ Each process of S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is a value different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not the timing to execute the river breakthrough effect. Therefore, the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process moves to S5139.

On the other hand, in the process of S5131, if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is off (S5131: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is one of 9, 24, and 39. (That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive games) (S5133). In the process of S5133, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any one of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive hits) (S5133: (Yes), the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process of S5134 to S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5133, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 9, 24, or 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive hits) (S5133: No), the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process moves to S5139.

In the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process from S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether the remaining time shortening number is 1 (S5134), and if the remaining time shortening number is not 1 (2 (S5134: No), it is determined to execute the river breakthrough effect in the form indicating the continuation of the chance zone (see FIG. 298(b)) (S5135), and the process moves to S5139. do. On the other hand, in the process of S5134, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S5136). In the process of S5136, if it is determined that the gaming state is in a definite variable state (S5136: Yes), it means that it will shift to a definite state at the start of the next fluctuation, so there is no river breakthrough in the form of notifying the rush entry. It is determined to execute the effect (see FIG. 299(a)) (S5137), and the process moves to S5139. On the other hand, in the process of S5136, if it is determined that the variable probability state is not (that is, the time saving state) (S5136: No), it means that the state will shift to the normal state at the start of the next fluctuation. It is determined to execute the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299(b)) in which the breakthrough fails (S5138), and the process moves to S5139. In the process of S5139, a variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command (S5139), and this process ends.

By executing this time-saving medium effect setting process (see Figure 315), while the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the river breakthrough effect will be executed every time the number of fluctuations that may cause the time-saving state to end is reached. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) will be described. This special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and is Similar to the variable display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71), this is a process for setting the variable display mode of the second special symbol.

Of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S5301 to S5303 and S5309 is performed in the special figure 2 variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. The same processes as those in S5301 to S5303 and S5309 (see 71) are executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5303: Yes), then , it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5311). In the process of S5311, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S5311: Yes), the small win effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308(a)) is read out (S5312), and the winning information storage area 223b is The performance mode corresponding to the data corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the performance counter 223h is specified (S5313). Next, a variable pattern command for displaying a second special symbol indicating the specified performance mode is set (S5314), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5311, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S5311: No), the process moves to S5309.

By executing this variable display setting process 12 for special symbol 2 (see FIG. 316), each time a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, the performance mode of the variable display effect that indicates the small win is changed during execution. , or the lottery result of the pending first special symbol can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the probable state when the number of time reductions elapses in the variable probability state. In the potential state, when you win a small hit with a high probability, the first specific prize opening 65a is frequently opened (you can get a chance to win the prize ball frequently), and when you win a jackpot, Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a high rate, a very advantageous gaming state is created for the player. Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the goal is to pass the time saving number of normal symbols and move to the probability state. It can improve your interest. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, it is more likely that winning a probability variable jackpot in a probability variable state or time saving state than in a probability variable state (a probability variable state transitioned to after the first win) based on winning a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is configured such that the average value of the set number of time saving times is smaller in the variable probability state (the variable probability state shifted after the occurrence of consecutive games) based on the above. In other words, the condition for transition to the probability state is more likely to be satisfied in the probability variation state set when consecutive hits occur than in the probability variation state set at the time of the first hit (the condition for transitioning to the probability state is more likely to be satisfied when the probability change state is set at the time of the first hit). It is configured so that it is easy to Therefore, it is easier to pass the time saving number when a consecutive game occurs, so even if you win the jackpot before the time saving number elapses in the variable probability state and end up looping through the variable probability state, Since there is a high possibility that a number of time reductions (a small number of time reductions) that will easily lead to a transition to a certain state is set, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a probability change state or a time-saving state, the river breakthrough effect is performed every time the number of fluctuations in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached. By executing , will the time saving state of the normal symbol continue, will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the potential state, or will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the normal state. is configured to be notified periodically (every 25th or 15th special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, while the chance zone (time saving state of normal symbols) is set, the player can play the game with the pleasure of seeing the next river breakthrough effect being executed. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player wishes to continuously lose in the special symbol lottery at least until the next river breakthrough performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by creating a configuration in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal state if the river breakthrough performance fails, the continuation of the time-saving state is announced during the river breakthrough performance (even though the river has been breached, the state may change to the potential state). Even if the situation was not reported, it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the potential state is not reported, it is possible to prevent players from being disappointed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the production mode during the small winning variation of the second special symbol and the output when a winning to the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the small winning game. Depending on the type of winning sound, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the other special symbol variation (variation display of the first special symbol) will be a jackpot. Conventionally, gaming machines have been widely known that each time a special symbol lottery result is executed, a variable display effect of symbols is performed to indicate the lottery result. In such conventional gaming machines, the player's interest is increased by executing various interesting effects that suggest the lottery results of special symbols during the execution of the variable display effect of symbols. However, in gaming machines with specifications that allow multiple fluctuating displays to be executed at the same time, there is a problem that while paying attention to the performance mode associated with one fluctuating display, the performance mode of the other fluctuating display performance may be overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in gaming machines that display one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variable display effect becomes difficult to confirm. There is a problem in that if a jackpot is started when the player is not paying attention to the game, the player may be confused. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the potential state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being executed at the same time as the first special symbol is displayed (in an easy-to-understand manner), the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery by the small winning performance of the second special symbol (the performance mode accompanying the fluctuating display). The structure is designed to suggest the results. With this configuration, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol by simply paying attention to the production mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a jackpot. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot. good. With this configuration, by simply checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see, thereby realizing an easier-to-understand effect. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In the eleventh embodiment, the number of probability variations is set to 100, but the number of probability variations is not limited to 100, and may be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of probability variations, the degree of advantage for the player becomes lower, so the gambling nature can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of probability variations, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage when the most advantageous potential state is reached, so players can play the game with a stronger expectation of transitioning to the potential state. I can do it. Similarly, the number of time reductions can be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of time savings, it becomes easier to transition from a variable state to a potential state, which can be advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of time savings, it becomes difficult to transition to a potential state. This allows you to suppress your gambling tendencies.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ease of transition to the potential state depends on whether it is the first hit (a jackpot won in a normal state) or after a series of wins (a jackpot won in a state other than the normal state). (The ease with which the end condition of the time-saving state of the normal symbol is satisfied) was configured to be different, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that as the number of consecutive games increases, the number of time reductions set after the end of the jackpot decreases. As a result, even if it is not possible to shift to the potential state, the player can feel as if the player is getting closer to the potential state each time a series of wins occurs, so the player's play will be affected. It can improve your interest. In the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, a "jackpot A11" is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous potential state is set after the jackpot ends. In this sense, even with the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, it can be said that the more the number of consecutive hits increases, the higher the possibility of transitioning to the potential state becomes.

In the 11th embodiment, when a small win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability state, an effect is executed that suggests the degree of expectation that the first special symbol is in the process of changing the jackpot. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the expectation level, which is the type of jackpot that will transition to the probability state. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the advantageous potential state will continue, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the jackpot is not included in the hold at the time of transition to the potential state during the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol. That is, if a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of the first special symbol even though the game has moved to the potential state, the potential state will be ended relatively early, which may disappoint the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player does not want to win the jackpot with the first special symbol in the probability state. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that suggests that the jackpot is not included in the reservation, it is possible to make the player understand that the potential state will not end at least with the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is possible to make the person expect that the latent state will continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, on the contrary, the expectation level (pinch degree) for being on the verge of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability state is changed during the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol (and during the small winning game). It may also be configured to notify (suggest). With this configuration, when a performance with a high degree of pinch is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of tension, so it is possible to add variety to the game. In this case, when a specific type of small winning game is started in the lottery of the second special symbol, it may be possible to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol in the event of a loss. In other words, by converting a normal jackpot into a loss, the potential state may be extended. With this configuration, after a performance with a high degree of pinch is performed, a specific type of small winning game is performed, thereby making the player feel a great sense of relief. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the potential state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed and small winning games are frequently executed. In addition, by making the transition to the potential state most likely when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the variable probability state, we expect that the failure will continue over the set number of time reductions in the variable probability state. The structure was designed to allow for the realization of innovative gameplay.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed. was configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Then, by ending the number of probability variations in the probability state, the system shifts to the most advantageous normal state. In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, it is configured to be able to directly shift from the most disadvantageous gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game in the most disadvantageous probability state with one goal of making the probability variable number of times elapse.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in terms of configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly explained. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, and the potential state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. In addition, the time saving state and the variable probability state are configured as gaming states that are more advantageous than the potential state. Since a special specification is adopted in which the normal state is advantageous, in the explanation of the transition, the advantageous normal state will be referred to as "continuous play mode." Further, the disadvantageous potential state will be referred to as a "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probability variable state and time saving state will be referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B", respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 317, the board structure of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the board structure of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 2). The upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are deleted, and a center first ball entry port 64c is provided instead. Furthermore, a small attacker 4650 is provided below the center first ball entrance 64c, which is opened when a small hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, since this small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first prize opening 64c on the left, right, and upper sides, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball during the small winning opening period of the first special symbol. . In the twelfth embodiment, the small win of the first special symbol is provided because the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive game mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly ending the long fluctuation in the event of a fluctuation, and is not intended to allow you to win a prize ball. In other words, even if the second special symbol fluctuates long, it is configured so that when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (475/480) of winning a small hit. With the start of , the second special symbol that has been fluctuating for a long time can be forcibly stopped with a missed stop symbol. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol starts, you can easily change the long fluctuation by returning to the left-handed game. Fluctuations can be ended.

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a right first ball entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67. A right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the opening 64r and the first right ball entrance opening 64r, and a right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64r while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second ball entry port 640 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through can enter. As shown in FIG. 317, the second ball entrance 640 is designed so that only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed can reach the second ball entrance 640. is set. In other words, even if you hit right in the time saving state of the normal symbol where the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be in an open state, almost all the game balls that passed through the through gate 67 will enter the right first ball entrance 64r. As a result, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640. With this configuration, it is possible to proceed with a right-handed game even in a variable probability state (chance mode A) or a time saving state (chance mode B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, in the game board 13 according to the twelfth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. As a result, in the case of a jackpot or a small win of the second special symbol, the first variable winning device 65 is opened. That is, chance mode A and chance mode B in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the most advantageous consecutive winning mode in which small hits occur frequently by entering the game ball into the second ball entry port 640, and The jackpot state is configured so that it can be progressed entirely by hitting the right hand. In other words, all states (states advantageous to the player in some respect) other than the most disadvantageous gaming state (potential state) for the player are configured to be playable by right-handed play. As a result, it is possible to classify right-handed games as advantageous and left-handed games as disadvantageous, making it possible to realize gaming properties that are easier for players to understand.

In addition, since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the execution of the jackpot game, if you play the right-handed game in an attempt to win the prize ball by letting the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot, almost When four or more game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol almost starts to fluctuate. However, as mentioned above, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a high probability of a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol can be forcibly ended due to a miss, so after the jackpot ends. Even if a game state other than the normal state is set as the game state and variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game can proceed without any problem.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320, various kinds of interesting effects characteristic of the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of the performance mode in the normal mode (potential state) will be described. As described above, the twelfth embodiment is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous continuous winning mode (normal state) by allowing the number of probability changes to pass in the potential state. Therefore, in the normal mode, a performance aiming at a potential state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318(a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing a rocky mountain, the words "Aim for the top!!" are displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the normal mode is displayed. Display contents indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the period ends (the number of reliable fluctuations has elapsed) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 318(a), the characters "50 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display to the top is subtracted by 1m each time the variable display is executed, so the remaining meter (distance) to the top is displayed to the player when entering consecutive game mode. It can be easily understood that this is the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition.

FIG. 318(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when the number of definite variations has elapsed in the normal mode (the result has been consecutively missed over 100 definite variations in the potential state). As shown in FIG. 318(b), when the number of probability changes has elapsed and the mode shifts to the continuous shooting mode, an effect in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed with the message "Top Reached!!” is displayed. Furthermore, the words "0 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the game has shifted to the consecutive game mode.

Figure 319(a) shows the state (preparation) from the transition to consecutive game mode until the state where it is possible to actually win the prize ball (until winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol). FIG. As shown in FIG. 319(a), in the preparation state, the words "Right hit" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the message "Start RUSH by right hit!!" is displayed in the display area HR1. is displayed. In addition, the words "RUSH preparation in progress" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that by hitting the ball to the right, the player enters a RUSH state in which he or she can win a prize ball.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 319(a), when the mode is shifted to consecutive winning mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to a display area for performing a variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying a variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state. In addition, a small area Dm2 for displaying the variable display of the other special symbol is located on the lower right side of the sub display area Ds, and is a display area that is relatively smaller than the small area Dm1 (in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). )Is displayed. Thereby, regardless of the game state, by checking only the small area Dm1, it is possible to visually recognize the fluctuating display of the special symbol to be executed, thereby improving convenience for the player. Further, by displaying the variable display on the side different from the side where the execution is mainly performed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize, attention can be drawn to the small area Dm1. That is, it is possible to easily make the player understand which variable display is mainly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gameplay for players.

FIG. 319(b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the preparation state and a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. FIG. As shown in FIG. 319(b), when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the prepared state and wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, a message saying “RUSH has started!!” appears in the display area HR1. ” are displayed, and the characters “RUSH enters!!” are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, the treasure box 812 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that a state (RUSH) in which prize balls can be won in the consecutive game mode has started. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameplay that is easy for players to understand.

The twelfth embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 1/2. In other words, even if a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, there is a relatively high possibility that it will simply be a miss (it will be a miss with about 1/2 probability). In the twelfth embodiment, the preparation state is configured so that if the second special symbol is out of lottery in the preparation state, the preparation state is continued as it is. In other words, the configuration is such that the start of RUSH is not notified until the player wins the small hit and is in a state where he or she can actually obtain the prize ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the situation where the player continues to be unable to obtain prize balls even though the start of RUSH has been notified.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which when a lottery of one special symbol results in a jackpot, the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot variation is forcibly turned into a loss. ing. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from normal mode to consecutive game mode, and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that started at the same time as the start of consecutive game mode is a jackpot. , while the jackpot variation is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol will always be a loss. In other words, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of transitioning to the preparation state, even if the right-handed game is continued and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed consecutively, it will not be possible to win. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state continues for a long time (until the jackpot fluctuation ends). As mentioned above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/2, so the more successive misses occur in the preparation state, the higher the expectation that the first special symbol will be during the jackpot fluctuation. More specifically, for example, in the preparation state, the possibility that the failure will occur four or more times in a row is about 6%, and the possibility that the failure will occur six or more times in a row is about 1%. Therefore, even if the player loses in the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation state, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game in the preparation state can be further improved. .

In addition, in the present twelfth embodiment, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to 1/2, but the probability of a small win is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. . For example, the small winning probability may be increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning probability is almost (for example, 59/60 probability). Good too. With this configuration, if a miss occurs even once in the preparation state, the expectation that the fluctuating first special symbol will be a jackpot can be improved, so if the second special symbol misses in the preparation state. It is possible to improve the player's interest in such a case. Also, the higher the small winning probability, the shorter the preparation state is likely to be (the average number of drawings from the time you switch to consecutive game mode until you win a small win becomes smaller), so after switching to consecutive game mode , it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by winning the prize ball. In other words, it becomes possible to award the prize ball to the player more quickly, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, the small winning probability may be lowered to make it easier to miss during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to lose consecutively, and therefore, it is possible to more frequently create a feeling of expectation that the first special symbol is in the process of changing into a jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode before and after the preparation state (before and after the start of RUSH) in the twelfth embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 320(a), if the reserved ball of the first special symbol is a miss at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode, and the second special symbol is drawn twice during the preparation mode, A description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode in the case where there are consecutive misses and a small win in the third lottery of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 320(a), in the twelfth embodiment, when the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (the probability state where the number of probability changes is set to 100), the above-mentioned An effect of reaching the top of a rocky mountain (see FIG. 318(b)) is executed. Then, the variable display of the 100th special symbol is started, and at the same time, the display mode is switched to the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)), and a notification is given to play the right-handed game. During this preparation state, when the game ball is hit right into the second ball entrance 640, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. Then, as shown in FIG. 320, the display indicating the preparation state is continued during the two missed fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the third fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started. At the point in time, the display mode is set to indicate RUSH entry (see FIG. 319(b)). Further, at the start of the small winning game, the fluctuation of the first special symbol which was fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the RUSH display continues until the consecutive game mode ends. In addition, in the present twelfth embodiment, since the consecutive winning mode is configured to be in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols), the advantageous consecutive winning mode is not activated unless you win the jackpot. continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative gaming experience in which the player plays the game over as long a number of drawings as possible in the hope that he will not win the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320(b), the performance mode over time when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode is the lottery result corresponding to "Jackpot D12" Explain the changes. Here, "Jackpot D12" is a type of jackpot in which a time-saving state is set in which the number of time-savings is two after the jackpot ends. In other words, after the jackpot ends, it is a type of jackpot that shifts to consecutive winnings mode by winning the special symbol lottery up to two times in a row, and it is relatively easy to transition to consecutive winnings mode (game It is a jackpot of the type that makes people happy. In the twelfth embodiment, the transition to consecutive winnings mode is notified only when the variable display corresponding to "jackpot D12" starts at the time of transition to consecutive winnings mode, and other first special When a jackpot of a symbol (relatively difficult to shift to continuous game mode) is pending, the system is configured to notify the jackpot winning without notifying the transition to continuous game mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed when the consecutive game mode ends without winning a small hit even though the game shifts to the consecutive game mode.

As shown in FIG. 320(b), when the transition to consecutive winning mode is started and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to "Jackpot D12" is started, the second special symbol that was started during the execution of the jackpot variation is All variable displays of special symbols will be missed. Therefore, while the jackpot variation is being executed, there will be successive misses, so the more the misses continue, the higher the player's expectation that the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed. can be done. In the twelfth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the consecutive game mode, a variable time of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is out of the lottery, a one-second fluctuation time is set with a high probability. Therefore, if you take into account the period from when the game enters the consecutive game mode until the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640, and the institution that displays the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., the jackpot will fluctuate. The variable display of the second special symbol can be executed around five times during (10 seconds). The probability of losing 5 times in a row in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol when the 1st special symbol is not changing is low (approximately 3%), so if the 1st special symbol continues to be a jackpot, the 1st special symbol will be a jackpot. It is possible to strengthen the player's confidence that the situation is changing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game in the preparation state.

<Electrical configuration in twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 321(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 14) in the variation pattern scenario. The difference is that a table 202ka is added. The ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is also different in that a part of the first random number table 202a, a part of the small winning random number table 202b, and a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f have been changed. are doing.

The variation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table that is referenced to select a table for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202f. When the special symbol lottery is executed, this variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, one variation pattern table is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. be done. Details of this variation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(b).

First, with reference to FIG. 321(b), the configuration of the first winning random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321(b), in the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment, a random value (counter value) of "0 to 3" is determined as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. Four random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321(b), five random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 4" are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/120 (4/480), while a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol high probability state. If executed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/96 (5/480). Note that the change in the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to prevent the consecutive game mode from becoming too advantageous and the normal mode from becoming too disadvantageous for the player. . That is, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, the case of 1/240, which is the same as in the 11th embodiment), once the game moves to the consecutive game mode, it is difficult to end the consecutive game mode to which it has transitioned. This results in an excessive advantage for the player, which may be disadvantageous to the hole. In addition, if the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60, which is the same as in the 11th embodiment), the number of probability changes is elapsed in the normal mode (over 100 special symbol drawings) Since the possibility of consecutive misses is low, the possibility of transitioning to continuous winning mode is extremely low. This may put the player at an excessive disadvantage, and there is a possibility that the player may avoid playing games at the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the present twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased to prevent an excessive advantage when shifting to the consecutive winning mode, and the high probability state of the special symbol is increased. The jackpot probability is lowered to prevent the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

Next, details of the small winning random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322(a). FIG. 322 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322(a), the random number (counter value) for determining a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is "5 to 479". 475 random numbers are defined. On the other hand, 240 random numbers from "240 to 479" are defined as random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small wins in the second special symbol lottery.

That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small win is won with a high probability (probability of 475/480). As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state other than the consecutive game mode and the second special symbol makes a long change, the long change is This is to force the termination. That is, when the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it almost becomes a small hit, and when the small win starts, the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped due to a miss. It can be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol starts, you can easily change the long fluctuation by returning to the left-handed game. Fluctuations can be ended.

In addition, by setting the small hit probability of the second special symbol to 1/2 (240/480), the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation state has a relatively high rate of winnings. As a result, if there are consecutive misses in the preparation state, the small win will be forcibly set to be a miss because the second special symbol was a miss in the lottery, or the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed. This can make it difficult to understand what is being done. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative game feature in which the more the second special symbol misses continuously in the preparation state, the higher the expectation of a jackpot of the other side's special symbol (that is, the first special symbol) becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 322(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322(b), the variation pattern scenario table 202ka shows the correspondence between the number of special symbol draws after the jackpot ends (or after RAM is cleared) and the selected variation pattern for each type of previous jackpot. is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322(b), when the previous jackpot type is a variable jackpot, the number of drawings for the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99, A definite start table 202f11 is defined in association with the table 202f11. The details of this variable/potential start table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with a range in which the number of lottery draws is 100 or more. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326(b), but when this RUSH table 202f14 is referred to and a fluctuation pattern is selected, a short fluctuation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. (seconds) fluctuation pattern will be selected. Therefore, just by playing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed continuously in a short period of time, creating an advantageous situation in which the player wins a small win with a high probability (1/2).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 322(b), when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the time-saving start table 202f12 are defined in association with each other. Details of this time-saving start table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is defined in association with a range in which the number of lottery draws is 100 or more.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 322(b), in a state where no jackpot has been won even once (so-called state after RAM is cleared), the number of drawings of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99. , a normal start table 202f13 are defined in association with each other. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326(a), the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result when the second special symbol lottery is executed. This is a table in which a long variation (of 60 seconds) is set. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized and put into a normal state by clearing the RAM, it is possible to prevent the state from becoming the same as the consecutive game mode, which is advantageous to the player. In other words, like a general gaming machine, when initialized, it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an advantageous state immediately after initialization and causing the hole to suffer an unexpected disadvantage. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is defined in association with a range in which the number of special symbols drawn is 100 or more. For this reason, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation shifts to consecutive game mode when the special symbol is drawn 100 times consecutively and loses). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing games with the pachinko machine 10 due to the state after initialization becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

In the fourteenth embodiment, whether or not the state is after RAM clearing (initialization) is determined is, for example, whether the RAM 203 has been won a jackpot at least once after RAM clearing. It is configured such that it can be determined by providing a flag (first time winning flag) indicating whether or not the winning result has been won. If the initial winning flag is off, it is determined that the state is normal after initialization, and if the number of fluctuations is within the range of 1 to 99 times, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and the winning state is 100 times. In the above range, a variation pattern scenario in which the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to is set. On the other hand, by winning the jackpot, the first-time winning flag is set to ON, so that from then on, a scenario is set in which the normal start table 202f13 is not referenced.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 323. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types, "jackpot A12" to "jackpot F12", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Furthermore, two jackpot types, "jackpot G12" and "jackpot I12", are defined as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 323, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "Jackpot A12" as the jackpot type for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A12" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and chance mode A (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode A continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a maximum of 100 times after the end of the jackpot, and when the 100 times have passed, the game shifts to the consecutive winning mode. Therefore, "Jackpot A12" is a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 323, a jackpot type "Jackpot B12" is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "5 to 49". This "Jackpot B12" is a type of jackpot where the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is set to normal mode (probable state) or chance mode A (probable variable state) (2 round probability variable jackpot) It is. More specifically, if you win "Jackpot B12" in normal mode or consecutive winning mode, the normal mode is set to be disadvantageous after the jackpot ends, while "Jackpot B12" is won in time saving state or variable probability state. If this happens, chance mode A is set which is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends. Therefore, "Jackpot B12" is relatively advantageous if won in chance mode A or chance mode B, but relatively disadvantageous in normal mode or consecutive winning mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 69", "jackpot C12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with it. This "Jackpot C12" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (potential state) is set after the jackpot ends. That is, "jackpot C12" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of gaming conditions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70", "jackpot D12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "70". This "Jackpot D12" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B ends when the special symbol lottery is executed twice after the end of the jackpot (the number of time saving times is set to 2). In other words, the game shifts to consecutive winnings mode by winning the special symbol lottery twice in a row at most, so it is an advantageous type of jackpot that is extremely easy to shift to consecutive winnings mode.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 323, for the values of the first winning type counter C2 of "71 to 74", "jackpot E12" is defined as the jackpot type in association. This "Jackpot E12" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B is set to 50 times if you win "Jackpot E12" in the normal mode or probability mode, and 25 times if you win "Jackpot E12" in the time saving state or variable probability state. be done. Chance mode B has a lower jackpot probability than chance mode A, and is advantageous to the player because it shifts to consecutive game mode after the number of time reductions has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "jackpot F12" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This "Jackpot F12" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. Note that the number of time reductions in chance mode B that is set after the end of "jackpot F12" is set to be greater than the number of time reductions in chance mode B that is set after the end of "jackpot E12". Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of "Jackpot F12" is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to elapse the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), "jackpot G12" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 69". ing. This "jackpot G12" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the chance mode A (probability variable state) is set to 100 times after the jackpot ends. Further, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99", "jackpot I12" is defined as a jackpot type in correspondence. This "jackpot I12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is over, it is set to two chance mode B (time saving state). As mentioned above, while it is extremely easy to pass two time-saving times, it is relatively difficult to lose continuously over 100 probability changes, so "Jackpot I12" is better. However, it can be said that it is a type of jackpot that is easier to shift to consecutive winning mode (that is, an advantageous type) than "Jackpot G12".

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of time reductions is set at least two times without providing a normal jackpot where the number of time reductions is 0 (a jackpot that directly shifts to the continuous winning mode after the jackpot ends). . By configuring so that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is not directly set to the normal state, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in the same state as when it is initialized. In other words, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes longer, resulting in a disadvantageous state in which the game must be played by left-handed hitting (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal start table 202d13, which will be described later). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors and determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the time-saving start table 202f12. That is, it can be configured to immediately shift to the RUSH state when the time saving number of times has elapsed. Therefore, while suppressing the state at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous to the player, the type of jackpot that is equivalent to a direct transition to the consecutive game mode (a jackpot with a time saving number of 2) type) can be provided. In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game, the probability of the normal symbol is low, so the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to release, and as a result, the game ball frequently enters the second ball entrance 640 during the jackpot game. Enter the ball. That is, at the same time as the jackpot game ends, the second special symbol lottery is executed and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when two times are set as the number of time savings, the first number of time savings is used up at the same time as the jackpot ends. By hitting the game ball right into the right first ball entrance 64r during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, you will have a high probability of hitting a small hit, and you will not be able to miss the long fluctuation of the second special symbol. It can be forcibly terminated. Therefore, in the case where the number of time saving times is set to two, it is possible to shift to the continuous winning mode only by generating one starting winning after the end of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, details of the above-mentioned variable/potential start time table 202f11 will be described in detail. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202f11 for variable probability/potential start. As shown in FIG. 324, the table 202f11 for variable probability/probability start time defines, for each type of special symbol, the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variation patterns that can be selected. has been done. More specifically, a longer variation time is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol in the probability state (normal mode) than in the probability variation state (chance mode A). As a result, in the normal mode in which a left-handed game is played, the variable display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the game efficiency can be increased.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type or gaming state.As a result, if the second special symbol is varied in a gaming state other than consecutive game mode, the game efficiency will be significantly increased. Since this worsens, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive game mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, details of the above-mentioned table 202f12 for time saving start will be explained. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving start table 202f12. As shown in FIG. 325, when the time-saving start table 202f12 is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the time-saving start time table 202f12 is relatively short (1 to 20 seconds) in the time-saving state (chance mode B). ) variable time is selected. Thereby, the gaming efficiency in chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in a normal state (that is, after the number of times of time reduction has elapsed), an extremely short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected. As a result, after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state is set, and after the number of time-savings has elapsed (after transitioning to the continuous winning mode), if there are any remaining balls of the first special symbol, the ball will be held in a very short time. is digested.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, regardless of the type of variation, a long variation of 60 seconds is set while the time saving state continues, and a short variation of 10 seconds or 1 second is set after the time saving state has passed. Set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode. Further, after shifting to the consecutive game mode, an extremely advantageous state can be formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol and the small winning game are repeated in a short time. Therefore, since it is possible to have the player play the game with the goal of completing the number of times saved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the normal start table 202f13 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 326(a). FIG. 326(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving start table 202f13. As shown in FIG. 326(a), when the normal start table 202f13 is referred to to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long variation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) is selected. . Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation display mode in the state where a left-handed game should be played, similar to the potential state.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode.

Next, details of the above-mentioned RUSH table 202f14 will be explained with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326(b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referred to to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, an extremely short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected. . Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. Thereby, the degree of advantage after shifting to the RUSH state (consecutive winning mode) can be further increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment has four modes (gaming states) that can be broadly classified. That is, the normal mode (potential state) shown at the top of FIG. 327, the chance mode A (variable state) shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, and the chance mode B (time saving state) shown on the right side of the center of FIG. and a continuous play mode (normal state) shown in the lower part of FIG. 327 are provided.

As mentioned above, the normal mode indicates the probability-variable state of special symbols and the normal state of normal symbols, and the probability of a jackpot is high, and the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to release (the game ball is in the right (1) It is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry opening 64r), resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming condition for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, chance mode A indicates a variable probability state of special symbols and a short time state of normal symbols, and has a high jackpot probability, and by playing a right-handed game, you can hit the first ball on the right. Since the game ball frequently enters the opening 64r (the electric accessory 64ra is frequently opened), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, chance mode B indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the jackpot probability is low, by playing a right-handed game, the right number Since the game ball frequently enters the first ball entrance 640r, a game state more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode is formed. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the continuous winning mode indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and the variable time set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. , is much shorter than the other three game states (from 60 seconds to 1 second), so by playing the right-handed game, it is possible to efficiently draw the second special symbol. As mentioned above, in the second special symbol lottery, there is a high probability (1/2) of winning a small hit and the first specific prize opening 64a is opened, so just by playing the right-handed game, you can win the small hit. Game balls frequently enter the second ball entry hole 640 and the first specific winning hole 64a to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be won without going through a jackpot. Therefore, the consecutive game mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another state when there is a jackpot or when a predetermined number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of Figure 327, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A12, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance will be given after the jackpot ends. Shift to mode A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots D12 to F12, which are determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the system will switch to relatively advantageous chance mode B. and transition. Further, after the normal mode is set, by allowing a predetermined number of probability changes (100 times) to pass, the game directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode (without going through a jackpot). On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot B12 or jackpot C12, which is determined at a rate of 65% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more likely to be advantageous if the specified number of probability changes elapses than if the player hits the jackpot, so the player can be made to expect successive wins over the specified number of times. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from chance mode A (probability variation state) to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a predetermined number of probability variations has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the center left side of FIG. 327, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of jackpots D12 to F12, which are determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). After the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to chance mode B, which is relatively advantageous. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, by allowing the specified number of drawings (100 times) to pass, the game will directly shift to the most advantageous consecutive winnings mode (the probability change number and the time saving number end at the same timing) ). Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is determined, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and either jackpot A12 or jackpot B12, which is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the game goes back to chance mode A. (loops chance mode A). Therefore, in chance mode A, even if you hit the jackpot, it will be difficult to switch to the disadvantageous normal mode (chance mode A will be set more often), so you will hit the jackpot before the number of probability changes has elapsed. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed even if he or she wins (or is unable to shift to consecutive game mode). Note that in chance mode A, as in the normal mode, the jackpot probability is relatively high (1/96), so it is relatively difficult to make the number of probability changes elapse. Therefore, in chance mode A, it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which both the player expects to win a jackpot and to have successive losses, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from chance mode B (variable probability state) to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a predetermined number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the center right side of FIG. 327, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and either jackpot A12 or B12, which is determined at a 50% ratio as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). In this case, after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to chance mode A, which is relatively advantageous. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, by allowing a predetermined time saving number (any of 2, 25, 50, and 100 times) to pass, the game will directly shift to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode. . Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is determined, a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and either jackpot A12 or jackpot B12, which is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the game will go to chance mode B again after the jackpot ends. (loop chance mode B). Therefore, in chance mode B, as in chance mode A, even if you win a jackpot, it is difficult to switch to the disadvantageous normal mode (chance mode A is set more often), so the number of time reductions has elapsed. Even if the player wins a jackpot before the game ends (the player cannot shift to the consecutive game mode), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed. In addition, in chance mode B, the jackpot probability is relatively low, and the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 or less, so compared to chance mode A and normal mode, it is possible to directly win without going through the jackpot. There is a high possibility that the player will shift to successive home mode. Therefore, at the time of transition to chance mode B, the player can be made to feel that there is a high possibility of transitioning to the consecutive game mode, so that the player's expectations for the consecutive game mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from the consecutive winning mode (normal state) to another state only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot G12, which is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the comparison is made after the jackpot ends. Shift to chance mode A, which has an advantage. In addition, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot I12, which is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is determined, after the jackpot ends, the chance mode is easier to shift to consecutive winning mode than chance mode A. Move to B. In addition, in the case of jackpot I12, 2 times is set as the number of time reductions, so if chance mode B is set after jackpot I12, the number of time reductions will elapse and the game will go to continuous mode again. It can be migrated. Therefore, the jackpot I12 can be said to be a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot G12. As mentioned above, in this consecutive winning mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than in other modes, and the lottery of the second special symbol has a high probability (1/2 probability) of winning a small In order to win, just by playing the right-handed game, the second special symbol will be drawn based on the ball entering the second ball entry hole 640, and during the small winning period (during the opening period of the first specific winning hole 65a). Winnings to the first specific winning hole 65a can occur frequently. Therefore, until you hit the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, you can continue to win prize balls based on the ball entering the first special winning hole 65a (that is, you can continue to win a large amount of prizes just by continuing to hit the ball to the right). This creates an extremely advantageous gaming situation (in which it is possible to acquire balls). In addition, as mentioned above, regarding the normal state to which the pachinko machine 10 is transferred based on initialization, the configuration is such that a long variation (60 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, so it is different from the normal mode. Similarly, creating an unfavorable gaming situation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from giving an excessive advantage to the player and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

In this way, the twelfth embodiment is configured to switch between four modes (gaming states): normal mode, chance mode A, chance mode B, and consecutive game mode. Thereby, the gameplay changes each time the mode is changed, so it is possible to add variety to the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has a winning flag 223ka, a ready state flag 223kb, and a RUSH The difference is that a medium flag 223kc is added.

The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won at least once since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on. If this winning flag 223ka is on, it means that you have won the jackpot at least once after the power was turned on, and if it is off, it means that you have not won the jackpot even once after the power was turned on. means. If the gaming state is the normal state at the start of the variation, the state of this winning flag 223ka is referred to, and if it is off, the state is normal after the power is turned on (i.e., long as the variation pattern of the second special symbol). If the number of special drawings is less than 100, then the effect for the normal mode is executed.If it is on, the effect for the continuous mode is executed. Execute.

The ready state flag 223kb is a flag for indicating whether or not the state is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that the state is in the ready state (see FIG. 319(a)), and if it is off, it means that the state is not in the ready state. It means no. In the normal state, this ready state flag 223kb is referenced to determine whether the ready state has already ended (the display has switched to RUSH), and whether to execute the ready state effect or not. Decide whether to perform the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH flag 223kc is a flag for indicating whether or not the game is in the consecutive games mode, and when it is on, it means that the game is in the consecutive games mode, and when it is off, it means that the game is not in the consecutive games mode. In the normal state, the preparation state flag 223kb and the RUSH state flag 223kc are referred to to determine which state the presentation mode should be set.

The ceiling effect execution flag 223kd indicates whether or not an effect (top reaching effect) in which the character 811 reaches the top of a rocky mountain is being executed, which is executed when the number of variable probability or the number of time reductions is 1 remaining. This is a flag indicating whether If this ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on, it means that the summit reaching effect (see Figure 318(b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the summit reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the symbol stop timing comes while the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on, the game shifts to the consecutive game mode and becomes ready.

<About the control process of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333. First, with reference to FIG. 329, details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309), based on the set gaming state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, each of S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 is the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment. The same processes as S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 of No. 12 (see FIG. 309) are executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S406 that the lottery result of the current first special symbol is not a jackpot, then a small win is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been won, and a special symbol 1 off variation process is executed to execute a process corresponding to the determination result (S431), and this process is ended. This special figure 1 off variation process (S431) will be explained with reference to FIG. 330.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 off variation process (S431). In this special symbol 1 loss fluctuation processing (S431), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit or not (S3111), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S3111: Yes) ), the special symbol 1 small win flag to indicate that the first special symbol is changing in small win is set on (S3112), and then the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a small win (S3113). ). Then, a small winning symbol is set as the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S3114), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S3111: No), the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 A missing symbol is set as a special symbol (S3115), and this process is ended. This special symbol 1 loss variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process added by making it possible to win a small hit when the first special symbol is a loss in the lottery.

Next, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment). Similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35), this is a process in which the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are processed. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, each process of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 is the same as that of the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment). The same processes as S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of the 1 special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322(b)) is then read out, A variable pattern selection table corresponding to the previous jackpot type and the number of special drawing lots is read out (S521). Specifically, if the previous jackpot is a probability variable jackpot and the number of special drawings is 99 or less, read the potential probability/probability variation start time table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) as the variation pattern selection table, If the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the number of special drawing lots is 99 or less, the time-saving start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read out as the variation pattern selection table. In addition, after initializing the pachinko machine 10, if the jackpot has never been won and the number of special drawings is 99 or less, the normal start table 202f13 (Fig. 326 ( a). On the other hand, when the number of special drawing lots is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is read out as the variation pattern selection table, regardless of the type of previous jackpot. When the process of S521 is completed, the process moves to S505.

By executing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331), a fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol drawings. Therefore, variation patterns can be diversified. In addition, the degree of advantage is different between the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state transitioned from another profitable gaming state, and after initialization, it is similar to a general gaming machine. Similarly, while it is possible to set the state to be disadvantageous to the player, it is also possible to form the normal state to which the player has transitioned via another gaming state as the most advantageous gaming state for the player. Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42) also refers to the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (i.e., the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lottery numbers). ) has been modified to read the variation pattern selection table.

Next, details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 332. This first special symbol variation stop process 13 (S221) is a process that is executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment), and Similar to the special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in this twelfth embodiment, each of the processes S801 to S809 is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment). The same processes as those in S801 to S809 (see FIG. 38) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is off in the processing of S801 (S801: No), the A special symbol 1 missing stop process is executed to set a stop symbol for missing 1 special symbol (S821), and this process is ended. The details of this special figure 1 off stop processing (S821) will be explained with reference to FIG. 333.

FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing (S821). In this special figure 1 off stop processing (S821), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is on or not (S3211), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211: Yes), the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to on (S3212), and the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to on (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol is set). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set for (S3213). Next, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S3214), and a small win scenario corresponding to the current small win type is set (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hit flag is set to OFF (S3216), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S3217), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility of forcibly stopping the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and there is no possibility of starting a small win. Therefore, this process ends immediately.

By executing this special symbol 1 out-of-win stop processing (see Fig. 333), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is removed at the same time as the small winning symbol is stopped. You can force the display to stop. Therefore, in a state where the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated simply by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and winning a small hit.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339. First, with reference to FIG. 334, the variable display setting process 13 (S4121) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. ), in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or second special symbol variable pattern command received from the main controller 110. This is a process for setting a display variation pattern command for and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, each process of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 is the variable display setting process in the eleventh embodiment. The same processes as S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 of No. 12 (see FIG. 314) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is completed, the performance mode is then set according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. A presentation mode setting process is executed to perform the process (S5141), and the process moves to S5106. Details of this presentation mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG. 335.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 is finished, the variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 316) is performed. Instead, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 is executed (S5142), and the process moves to S5110. Details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5142) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

Furthermore, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 is completed, the preparation state setting process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)) is then executed. (S5143), and this process ends. Details of this preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

Next, details of the above-mentioned performance mode setting process (S5141) will be explained. As described above, this production mode setting process (S5141) is a process for setting a production mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this performance mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (continuous show mode) (S13101), and if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S13101: No), then the time saving state is entered. (Chance mode B) is determined (S13102). In the process of S13102, if it is determined that the time saving state is not in effect (S1302: No), it means that the state is in a potential state (normal mode) or a probability variable state (chance mode A), and 100 probability variations have passed. Since this means that there is no possibility of transitioning to consecutive game mode unless the game mode is changed, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

In the process of S13103, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), the ceiling effect is used to select the presentation mode of the last variable display effect before shifting to the continuous mode. Setting processing is executed (S13104), and the processing moves to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13102, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (S13102: Yes), then it is determined whether the remaining time saving number is 1 (S13105), and the remaining time saving number is 1. If so, the same process as the above-described ceiling effect setting process (S13104) is executed (S13110), and the process moves to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13105 that the remaining time reduction count is not 1 (S13105: No), and if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223ja is not 99 in the process of S13103 (S13103: No) , since there is no possibility of shifting to consecutive game mode, the performance mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the process moves to S13111.

On the other hand, in the process of S13101, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning flag 223ka is on (S13107), and the winning state is determined to be the normal state (S13101: Yes). If it is determined that the completed flag 223ka is on (S13107), a normal performance setting process for setting a normal state performance mode is executed (S13108), and the process moves to S13111. Details of this normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 337.

On the other hand, in the process of S13107, if it is determined that the winning flag 223ka is off (S13107: No), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), If it is determined that the value of the number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), a ceiling effect setting process (S13110) is executed, and the process moves to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13109, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the process moves to S13108.

In the process of S13111 executed after any one of the processes of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110, a display variation pattern command is set that indicates the performance mode determined in any of the processes of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110. (S13111), and this process ends.

Next, details of the above-mentioned ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 336. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read out of the winning information storage area 223b (S13201), and the data of the read execution area is read out. It is determined whether or not data corresponds to a jackpot (S13202), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S13202: Yes), the performance mode (to notify a jackpot) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined. The presentation mode is determined (S13203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S13202, if it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating a jackpot (S13202: No), then the pending number of the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is The data of one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether the read data of the first pending area is data corresponding to a jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be won immediately after shifting to the consecutive game mode. In the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the first pending area is a jackpot (S13205: Yes), then whether the data indicates a jackpot D12 (that is, after the jackpot ends, the (S13206) If it is determined that it is not a jackpot D12 (S13206: No) , the jackpot effect of the performance mode of the effect time which is the change time of the variable display to be executed this time plus 10 seconds (i.e. the change time of the jackpot change in consecutive game mode) (i.e. the change time of the first special symbol for two times) A straddling jackpot effect) is determined (S13207), and the present process ends. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined by the look-ahead that a jackpot fluctuation of a jackpot type other than the jackpot D12 will start immediately after the start of the consecutive winnings mode, the transition to the consecutive winnings mode (see FIG. 318(b) ) without notifying the player, the player is configured to perform an effect as if he had won a jackpot just before the consecutive game mode. By configuring this way, it is possible to prevent players from feeling disappointed when a jackpot is started without ever enjoying a small winning game even though the game has shifted to consecutive game mode. can do.

On the other hand, in the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the reserved first area of the first special symbol is not data indicating a jackpot (S13205: No), and in the process of S13206, the data in the reserved first area is the jackpot D12 If it is determined that the data indicates (S13206: Yes), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318(b)) is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is turned on. (S13209), and ends this process.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see Fig. 336), the pre-reading result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of transition to consecutive winning mode (normal state) (when the time saving number or variable probability number has ended) Depending on this, it is possible to suitably set whether or not to execute the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 318(b)).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 338, details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) will be explained. As described above, this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the 11th embodiment. When this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401), and if the RUSH flag 223kc is OFF. If it is determined (S13401: No), then the variable display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13402), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S13401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ready state flag 223kb is on (S13403), and the ready state If it is determined that the medium flag 223kb is off (S13403: No), it means that the preparation state has ended in the consecutive game mode, so the The presentation mode is determined (S13404), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S13403, if it is determined that the preparation state flag 223kb is on (that is, the preparation state is in progress) (S13403: Yes), then the small winning variation type is notified by the variation pattern command. (S13405), and if it is determined that the small winning variation type has been notified (S13405: Yes), the preparation state flag 223kb is set to off (S13406), and the current variation display production is performed. As the mode, the effect mode (see FIG. 319(b)) for notifying the rush entry is determined (S13407), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S13405, if it is determined that the type of variation is not a small win (S13405: No), it means that the preparation state will continue at least until the variation ends, so the variation pattern The production mode for the preparation state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this processing ends.

By executing this special symbol 2 variable display setting process 13 (see Fig. 338), the situation when the second special symbol lottery is executed (in the preparation state or in the state where RUSH entry has been notified) It is possible to perform an appropriate mode of performance depending on whether the game is in a state other than the continuous play mode or not.

Next, details of the preparation state setting process (S5144) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 339. As described above, this preparation state setting process (S5144) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)). In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on (S13501), and if it is determined that it is off (S13501: No), the transition is made to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of doing so, this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S13501, if it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on (S13501: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is set to OFF (S13502), and the display mode of RUSH preparation ( (see FIG. 319(a)) is set (S13503). Next, the RUSH flag 223kc and the ready state flag 223kb are both set to ON (S13504), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), the display mode of the preparation state can be set from the time the game shifts to the consecutive game mode.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is defined as an advantageous gaming state (continuous game mode) in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed. The latent state was configured as the most disadvantageous normal mode. Then, by ending the number of probability variations in the normal mode, the system shifts to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to directly shift from the most disadvantageous gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play a game in the most disadvantageous normal mode (potential state) with one goal of making the number of probability changes elapse.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which the potential state is set to the most disadvantageous gaming state, and the number of probability variations is ended in the potential state, thereby transitioning to a relatively advantageous normal state. However, in such conventional gaming machines, an advantageous time-saving state is more likely to be granted after the jackpot is completed when the jackpot is achieved in the normal state than when the jackpot is achieved in the potential state. , it is configured so that the normal state is more advantageous, and while staying in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won), a disadvantageous state is formed in which the number of balls in possession is likely to decrease. It was something. In other words, even if the player moves to the normal state after passing the number of probability changes in the probability state, it is not advantageous for the player at that point. Even if the game is directly transferred to the normal state without going through the process, there is a problem in that it does not give the player a sense of satisfaction and it is difficult to increase the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the number of variable probability in the disadvantageous normal mode (potential state), the system directly shifts to the most advantageous continuous winning mode (normal state). did. In other words, even if the player does not win the jackpot, the player can easily move to an advantageous state where he can continue to win prize balls intermittently just by continuing to play the right-handed game. By configuring in this way, when the number of fixed variations can be completed, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction and sense of accomplishment, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. I can do it.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, there is a normal state that is set by initializing the pachinko machine 10, and a normal state that is transitioned to by ending the variable probability number or the time saving number in other gaming states. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage for the player is varied. In other words, different fluctuation pattern selection tables are referred to for the normal state set by initialization and the normal state transitioned to through other gaming states. (refer to the variation pattern selection table based on this). With this configuration, the normal state that has been transferred through another gaming state is formed as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the normal state that is set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to create a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, like a general gaming machine, when initialized it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player, so immediately after initialization it becomes advantageous to the player, and the hole becomes It is possible to prevent them from suffering unexpected disadvantages. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state to which the transition is made after initialization, if the number of drawings of special symbols reaches 100 or more, the system is configured to form the most advantageous state for the player. ing. For this reason, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation shifts to consecutive game mode when the special symbol is drawn 100 times consecutively and loses). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing games with the pachinko machine 10 due to the state after initialization becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is configured to notify the period from the transition to the consecutive game mode until the first small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol as a preparation state. The system is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been reached when the situation is such that a prize ball can be obtained (that is, when small winning fluctuations have started). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied due to a situation in which prize balls cannot be won for a long time even though the RUSH state has been notified. Furthermore, in the present twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which when a lottery of one special symbol results in a jackpot, the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot variation is forcibly turned into a loss. ing. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from normal mode to consecutive game mode, and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that started at the same time as the start of consecutive game mode is a jackpot. , while the jackpot variation is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol will always be a loss. In other words, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of transitioning to the preparation state, even if the right-handed game is continued and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed consecutively, it will not be possible to win. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state continues for a long time (until the jackpot fluctuation ends). As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the more successive misses occur in the preparation state, the more the anticipation of the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol can be improved.

In addition, in the present twelfth embodiment, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to 1/2, but the probability of a small win is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. . For example, the small winning probability may be increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning probability is almost (for example, 59/60 probability). Good too. With this configuration, if a miss occurs even once in the preparation state, the expectation that the fluctuating first special symbol will be a jackpot can be improved, so if the second special symbol misses in the preparation state. It is possible to improve the player's interest in such a case. Also, the higher the small winning probability, the shorter the preparation state is likely to be (the average number of drawings from the time you switch to consecutive game mode until you win a small win becomes smaller), so after switching to consecutive game mode , it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by winning the prize ball. In other words, it becomes possible to award the prize ball to the player more quickly, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, the small winning probability may be lowered to make it easier to miss during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to lose consecutively, and therefore, it is possible to more frequently create a feeling of expectation that the first special symbol is in the process of changing into a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, the configuration is such that the mode shifts to the consecutive game mode when the variable probability number or the time saving number ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, a jackpot of a type in which the consecutive winning mode is set directly may be provided. In this case, if a jackpot of a type in which the direct consecutive winning mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous after initialization, and to provide a type of jackpot that directly shifts to consecutive game mode after the jackpot ends. The game can be played with attention depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, as a condition for transitioning to consecutive game mode, for example, if the variable probability state continues for a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) and the variable probability jackpot is won again, the gaming state after the jackpot is forcibly changed to the normal state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is set to . That is, a so-called variable probability limit function may be installed. By configuring this way, even if the player wins consecutive jackpots in the unfavorable normal mode, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is approaching the consecutive winnings mode, which will reduce the player's motivation to play. can be increased.

In the twelfth embodiment, in order to prevent the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous, the dedicated variation pattern table is referred to in the initial state. It may be configured to be a mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to start playing on the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall, expecting that it has been initialized, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration is such that the more successive losses occur in the second special symbol lottery during the preparation state, the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. In addition to this, it may be configured to execute an effect that indicates the number of successive misses during the preparation state (that is, indicates the degree of expectation that the first special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot). Specifically, for example, the background color on the display screen in the preparation state may be changed from blue to green to red to rainbow color every time the failure occurs twice in a row. With this configuration, even a player who does not know how to use the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can easily understand that the more consecutive second special symbols are missed, the better. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameplay that is easy for players to understand.

<13th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is an advantageous gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed, while the potential state is The game is configured to be in a gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player. In addition, by assuming that most of the transitions to the normal state occur when the number of definite variations ends in the probable state, it is expected that failures will continue over the set number of definite variations in the disadvantageous probability state. The structure was designed to allow for the realization of innovative gameplay.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the two game states of the potential state and the normal state are configured as advantageous gaming states in which small winning games are frequently executed, while the variable probability state and the time saving state are It is configured as a gaming state that is disadvantageous for players. As a result, in general gaming machines, the period when the advantageous time-saving state is set can be made into a disadvantageous state, and the state where the time-saving state is not set can be made into an advantageous state, so that the time-saving state ends. It is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which players play the game in hopes of achieving the desired result.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). ), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed. be. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the 12th section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the mode in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly explained. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the potential state is also configured as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage is lower than the normal state. On the other hand, the variable probability state and the time saving state are configured as disadvantageous gaming states in which the game should be played by left-handed playing. It should be noted that the time-saving state is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state than the variable-probability state, so it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most disadvantageous probability change state is referred to as the normal mode, the time saving state is referred to as the chance mode, and the potential state that is advantageous to the player is referred to as consecutive win mode A. The normal state that is most advantageous for the player is called continuous play mode B. Note that, similar to the twelfth embodiment described above, in the normal state that is set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, only the long variation is selected when the second special symbol lottery is executed. , creating a disadvantageous situation in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left-handed.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. Here, the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment has the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the specified contents of the second winning random number table 202c, and the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d, compared to the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. The specified contents and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 238(a), the configuration of the first winning random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the present thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(b) explains the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 340(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment, a random number (counter value) of "0 to 3" is determined as a jackpot in a low probability state of a special symbol. Four random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(a), eight random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 7 are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/120 (4/480), while a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol high probability state. If executed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/60 (8/480). Note that the change in the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is made to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. That is, by configuring the system to make it easier to win a jackpot in a potential state, the system is configured to make it difficult for a potential state to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation that the state of frequently winning small wins will shift to the normal state where it is likely to continue for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 340(b). FIG. 340(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340(b), in the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, "0" is used as the random number value (counter value) for determining a win for a normal symbol in a low probability state for a normal symbol. is stipulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(b), two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are used as random numbers (counter values) to determine that the normal symbol is a hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol. stipulated.

In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is configured to hit only with a low probability. As a result, even if a left-handed game is played in a time-saving state or a variable probability state, the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, so a game ball hardly enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Therefore, it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the game ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 in a left-handed game, so in the variable probability state or the short time state, it is disadvantageous that the number of balls you have is likely to decrease. It becomes a gaming state.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types, "jackpot A13" to "jackpot G13", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Furthermore, three jackpot types, "Jackpot H13" to "Jackpot J13", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A13" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is over, the successive winning mode A (potential state) is set. As mentioned above, consecutive game mode A is a game state in which small winning games are frequently executed just by hitting right, so "Jackpot A13" is compared in terms of the playing state after the jackpot ends. This is an advantageous type of jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "Jackpot B13" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 9". This "Jackpot B13" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since the number of time saving times set after the end of "Jackpot B13" is set to 25, it becomes relatively easy to end the number of time saving times. By ending the time saving number, the game will be in consecutive game mode A until the probability variable number (100 times) ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 29", "jackpot C13" is defined as the jackpot type in association. This "jackpot C13" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the normal mode after "Jackpot C13" ends, the number of time reductions is set to 50, so it is more difficult to shift to consecutive winnings mode A than "Jackpot B13". Therefore, "Jackpot C13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot B13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the values of the first winning type counter C2 of "30 to 74", "jackpot D13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with each other. This "Jackpot D13" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the normal mode (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the normal mode after "Jackpot D13" ends, the number of time reductions is set to 75, so it is even more difficult to shift to consecutive winnings mode A than "Jackpot C13". Therefore, the "jackpot D13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot B13" and the "jackpot C13."

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "75", "jackpot E13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "75". This "Jackpot E13" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the chance mode that is set after the end of "Jackpot E13", the number of times of time saving is set to two, so it is extremely easy to end the number of time saving times. When the time saving number ends in the chance mode, the mode shifts to the most advantageous successive winning mode B (normal state), so the "jackpot E13" is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "76 to 80", "jackpot F13" is defined as a jackpot type in correspondence. This "Jackpot F13" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since the time saving number of chance modes set after the end of "Jackpot F13" is set to 50, it is more difficult to shift to consecutive game mode B than "Jackpot E13". Therefore, the "jackpot F13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot E13." In addition, in chance mode, the jackpot probability is low, and by ending the time saving number, you will directly move to the most advantageous continuous winning mode B, so it is better than "Jackpot B13" to "Jackpot D13" which transfer to normal mode. It can be said that this is an advantageous (easy to shift to continuous winning mode B) jackpot type. Also, if we focus only on the lower jackpot probability, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot B13" to "Jackpot D13".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 341, for the values of the first winning type counter C2 of "81 to 99", "jackpot G13" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This "Jackpot G13" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, the number of time reductions in the chance mode that is set after the end of "Jackpot G13" is set to 75 times, so it is more difficult to shift to consecutive game mode B than "Jackpot E13" or "Jackpot F13". . Therefore, "Jackpot G13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot E13" and "Jackpot F13".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot H13" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24". ing. This "jackpot H13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to continuous game mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if "Jackpot H13" is won in consecutive winning mode B (normal state), after the jackpot ends, consecutive winning mode A (potential state) is set; If "Jackpot H13" is won in the normal mode (variable probability state), chance mode (time saving state), and successive winning mode A (potential state), the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, "Jackpot I13" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 74". This "jackpot I13" is a type of jackpot in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to continuous game mode A or normal mode (8 round probability variable jackpot). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if you win "Jackpot H13" in consecutive game mode A (potential state) or consecutive game mode B (normal state), after the jackpot ends, consecutive game mode A (potential state). On the other hand, if the jackpot H13 is won in the normal mode (variable probability state) or chance mode (time saving state), the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

Further, "Jackpot J13" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99". This "jackpot J13" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if "Jackpot J13" is won in consecutive game mode B, the number of times to save time is set to two, creating an advantageous situation in which it is extremely easy to end the number of times to save time. . Furthermore, if you win "Jackpot J13" in consecutive game mode A, 75 times will be set as the number of time savings, and if you win "Jackpot J13" in the normal mode or chance mode, 100 times will be set as the number of time savings.

In addition, in the normal mode or chance mode, if you win the jackpot with the second special symbol lottery, setting 100 times as the time saving number is because the second entry is made by playing the right-handed game in the gaming state where the left-handed game should be performed. This is to prevent irregular gaming methods that aim at the ball mouth 640. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, while the time saving state of normal symbols is set, a disadvantageous gaming state is formed for the player. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode or chance mode, by configuring the time saving state of the unfavorable normal symbol to continue for a long time (100 times), it is possible to create an irregular situation for the player. It can make the player feel like they don't want to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which a right-handed game is played in a gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the table 202f11 for definite variable/potential start in the thirteenth embodiment will be explained. The table 202f11 for probability change/potential start in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the table 202f11 for probability change/potential start in the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 324) to draw the first special symbol in the probability state. As the variation pattern selected when is executed, only variation patterns with a short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) are selected, and the second special symbol lottery was executed in the potential state. The difference is that only a variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern selected in this case. This change is such that, while the potential state in the twelfth embodiment is a normal mode that is disadvantageous for the player, the potential state in the thirteenth embodiment is configured as consecutive winning mode A that is advantageous for the player. This is due to what I did.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment has four modes (gaming states) that can be broadly classified. That is, the normal mode (variable probability state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, the chance mode (time saving state) shown in the center of FIG. , and continuous play mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343 are provided.

As mentioned above, the normal mode indicates the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the regular symbol, and the probability of a jackpot is high, and the electric accessory 64a is more likely to be released than in the normal state of the regular symbol. However, the probability of the game ball being released is low, and the game ball rarely enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by letting the game ball enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1 in a left-handed game, a disadvantageous gaming state is created for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the chance mode indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although it is necessary to proceed with the game by left-handed playing like the normal mode, the normal It is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal mode because it is easier to shift to the most advantageous consecutive game mode A than the normal mode. In addition, consecutive winning mode A indicates a state in which special symbols have a variable probability and a normal symbol in a normal state, and by playing a right-handed game, an advantageous gaming state in which small winning games are frequently executed. Form. In addition, consecutive winning mode A indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and like consecutive winning mode A, it is an extremely advantageous game in which small winning games are frequently executed. form a state;

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another state when there is a jackpot or when a predetermined number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A13, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the series will be repeated after the jackpot ends. Shift to sho mode A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of jackpots E13 to G13, which are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, you will be transferred to a relatively advantageous chance mode. Transition. Further, after the normal mode is set, by allowing a predetermined number of probability changes (100 times) to elapse, the game directly shifts to consecutive game mode A (without going through a jackpot), which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot B13 to C13, which is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more likely to be advantageous if the specified number of probability changes elapses than if the player hits the jackpot, so the player can be made to expect successive wins over the specified number of times. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from the chance mode to another state when there is a jackpot or when a predetermined number of time saving times has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A13, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the series will be repeated after the jackpot ends. Shift to sho mode A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B13 to D13, which are determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the game will shift to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. . Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, by allowing a predetermined number of time reductions (either 2, 25, 50, 75, or 100 times) to pass, the player can switch to consecutive game mode B, which is the most advantageous for the player. and transfer directly (without going through a jackpot). On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot E13 to G13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in chance mode, even if you hit a jackpot, there is a very high chance that you will maintain the status quo or fall into the disadvantageous normal mode, so it is more advantageous to let the specified number of time-savings pass than to hit the jackpot. easy to become Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to continue winning for a prescribed number of time reductions, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from consecutive winning mode A to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a prescribed number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of Fig. 343, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot H13, which is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Shifts to disadvantageous normal mode. Further, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous chance mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the consecutive game mode A is set, by allowing a specified number of probability changes (100 times after the previous jackpot) to go directly to the most advantageous consecutive game mode B for the player (without going through the jackpot). )Transition. On the other hand, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot I13 determined at a rate of 50% is determined as the jackpot type, consecutive winning mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in consecutive game mode A, players can win prize balls while staying in consecutive game mode, and if they hit the jackpot, it is relatively easy to loop through the same mode, which is advantageous for the player. becomes. Furthermore, if the number of guaranteed changes can be made to elapse, the game will move to the most advantageous continuous winning mode B, so even if the player wins the jackpot or misses (small wins) continuously, the player will have an advantageous state that is beneficial to him/her. Form.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from consecutive winning mode B to another state only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot H13, I13, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the jackpot is a jackpot. After the game ends, the game shifts to consecutive game mode A, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, a chance mode is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode that is set after the end of the jackpot J13, the number of time reductions is set to two, so it is possible to almost complete the number of time reductions and shift to consecutive game mode B. Therefore, this is a type of jackpot that is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13, which shift to consecutive game mode A. In this way, in consecutive game mode B, not only can you win prize balls while staying in consecutive game mode, but if you hit the jackpot, there is a possibility that the game will shift to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. This is very advantageous for players.

<Control processing of main controller in 13th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. This normal symbol variation process 14 (S121) is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is Similar to the processing (see FIG. 48), processing for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and processing for accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are performed. This is a process for

Of the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in this 13th embodiment, each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 is performed in the 12th embodiment. The same processes as S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the form (and the first embodiment) are executed. be done.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, 60 seconds is then set as the variation time of the normal symbol (S1831), and the process is started. The process moves to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long variable time is set regardless of the lottery result of the normal symbol or the game state. Therefore, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to reduce the chances of the electric accessory 64a being released.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1821 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S1821: No), the electric accessory 64a is released. The time and number of times are set to "0.1 seconds x 1 time" (S1832), and the process moves to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 64a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". (S1833), the process moves to S1823. In this way, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long (60 seconds) and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is also short, so the lowering occurs in the probability variable state or the time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64b2. Therefore, the gaming state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is set can be set to be disadvantageous for the player.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the two gaming states, the potential state and the normal state, are configured as advantageous gaming states in which small winning games are frequently executed. Here, conventionally, a gaming machine is configured to win a small hit with a high probability by executing a lottery of the second special symbol in a probability state, and the probability state is more advantageous than the probability variable state. is proposed. In other words, a gaming machine has been proposed that is equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small hit RUSH function) that allows players to win prize balls even if they do not win a jackpot. However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the game machine shifts to an advantageous state other than the probability state such as a probability change state, the player does not feel satisfied unless the game shifts to the probability state (small win RUSH state). It was difficult to get him to embrace it. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of states with different advantageous degrees are provided as the so-called small hit RUSH state, and in the small hit RUSH state (consecutive winning mode A) with a relatively low advantageous degree, The configuration is designed to be relatively easy to migrate. With this configuration, it is possible to form the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to experience the small win RUSH state relatively easily, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the thirteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, it is easy to perform the lottery of the second special symbol that has a high probability of winning a small hit in two types of game states, the potential state and the normal state (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is (short) formed as an advantageous state. In other words, just by continuously hitting the ball to the right, small hits with the second special symbol will occur frequently, and the first specific prize opening 65a will be opened frequently, so that even if you do not win the jackpot, you will receive the prize ball. It was designed to create an advantageous state that can be obtained continuously (intermittently).

On the other hand, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, by playing the left-handed game aiming at the first ball entry port 64b1, small hits of the first special symbol frequently occur, and the small hits are By creating an advantageous state (potential state) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened during the game, and by playing the game by aiming at the second ball entering hole 640 with a right-handed game, A structure that provides an advantageous state (normal state) in which small wins of the second special symbol occur frequently and in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened during the small winning game. And so. In other words, by playing a left-handed game, there is an advantageous state (potential state) in which it is possible to intermittently (continuously) win prize balls even if you do not win the jackpot, and by playing a right-handed game, you can obtain prize balls intermittently (continuously). The present invention is configured to provide two types: an advantageous state (normal state) in which it is possible to obtain prize balls intermittently (continuously) even if the jackpot is not won. In addition, by configuring the small hit probability of the first special symbol (for example, 1/5) to be lower than the small hit probability of the second special symbol (for example, 59/60), the normal state This is a more advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball than in a potential state.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the small winning probability has been changed and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64aj has been changed. , and the board structure of the game board 13 has been changed. With reference to FIGS. 345 and 346, the board configuration of the game board 13 of this modification will be described.

As shown in FIG. 345, the game board 13 in this modification is provided with an electric accessory 64aj in place of the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Drink and drink differently. Similar to the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the electric accessory 64aj is normally in a closed state (which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2). An open state (second state) in which the game ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2 more easily than in the closed state when the normal symbol is won in a lottery. form. In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, in this modification, even if it is set to the open state, the game ball will almost never enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. In addition, in this modified example, the first specific winning opening 65a is configured to be opened when there is a big hit or when there is a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the lottery of the first special symbol is The configuration is such that when a small win occurs, the second specific winning hole 650a is opened.

Next, the correspondence between the state of the electric accessory 640aj and the falling path of the game ball will be explained with reference to FIG. 346. First, with reference to FIG. 346(a), the flow path of the game ball in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346(a), when the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the game ball flowing down from above toward the electric accessory 64aj will collide with (interfere with) the electric accessory 64aj and change its path. is changed (varied) and flows down to the right side of the second variable winning device 650 (route Ka1), or collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj and the path is changed, so that the second variable winning device 650 (route Ka2), and directly flows down toward the second variable winning device 650 without colliding with (interfering with) the electric accessory 64aj (route Ka3). That is, in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, although the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, it is relatively easy to make it reach the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in a potential state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released), by playing a left-handed game, the lottery of the first special symbol will be executed with a probability of 1/5. When a small hit occurs and the second specific winning hole 650a is opened, it becomes possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the second specific winning hole 650a. Furthermore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the potential state, a long variation is set regardless of the lottery result, so even if the player continues to hit right, there is little benefit for the player ( Although the player wins the small prize, the interval between small winning games becomes longer, making it difficult to win the prize ball).

Moreover, FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing the downstream path of the game ball when the electric accessory 64aj is opened. As shown in FIG. 346(b), when the electric accessory 64aj is open, the game ball flowing down from above the electric accessory 64aj collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj and the falling path is interrupted. Even if it is changed, there is a lower possibility that it will be reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 (paths Kb1, Kb2). In addition, since the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the area formed between the electric accessory 64aj and the lower first ball entrance hole 64b2 becomes larger, so that the lower first ball may interfere with the nail or the like. Game balls enter the ball entrance 64b2 relatively easily (for example, at a rate of about 1 out of 200 balls). It should be noted that this is just because it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state, and compared to the time saving state of the normal symbol in other embodiments, it is configured as a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter. Therefore, in the probability variable state or the time saving state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first ball entry hole 64b2 and the second specific winning hole 650a, so the first special symbol A disadvantageous state in which a game ball cannot enter the second specific winning hole 650a even though the second specific winning hole 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5 every time a lottery is executed. form. In addition, in this modification, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, every time the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set, and the winning probability is high (for example, 232/233). In the case of a win, the electric accessory 64aj is released for 2.5 seconds. That is, by playing a left-handed game, the player repeats a 0.1-second fluctuation and a 2.5-second release. In other words, the electric accessory 64aj remains open for the most part. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second specific ball entry port 650a in the time saving state or the variable probability state.

In this way, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the electric accessory 64aj that is released when the normal symbol wins, so that the time saving state and the variable probability state The configuration is such that even if you hit left-handed and hit a small hit, it will be difficult to win the prize ball. As a result, only when a left hit is made in the normal state of the normal symbol (a state in which the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released) and a small win is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game is transferred to the second specific winning hole 650a. It is possible to create an advantageous state in which it is easy (possible) for the ball to enter the ball. In other words, the configuration is such that a relatively advantageous state is created by performing a left-handed hit in a potential state. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting left-handed and an advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting right-handed, thereby making it possible to diversify gaming methods. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in this modified example, the degree of advantage is made different between a potential state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting to the left and a normal state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting to the right. It is structured as follows: This makes it possible to add variety to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, by making the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit higher than the probability that the first special symbol will be a small win, the probability state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed is higher than that Although the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed is more advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to varying the small winning probability depending on the type of special symbol, for example, the small winning probability of the first special symbol is higher than the small winning probability of the second special symbol in one small winning game. By configuring the game so that the number of game balls that can win a prize tends to decrease, the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed may be configured to be more advantageous. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened when the first special symbol is a small win, By making the number of prize balls smaller than the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a that is opened when It may be configured as follows. By implementing these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied in a more diverse manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Although the thirteenth embodiment and its modified examples are configured so that the normal state is more advantageous than the potential state, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the potential state is more advantageous than the normal state.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that an advantageous state in which it is easy to obtain prize balls due to a small hit is formed in two types of game states, the normal state and the potential state. In addition, by making the normal state and the potential state different in their advantageousness, and configuring the normal state to be more advantageous than the potential state, a more varied gameplay experience has been achieved.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, only the potential state is configured as an advantageous game state in which it is easy to obtain prize balls due to small hits. Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the degree of advantage (ease of obtaining a prize ball) is configured to be variable depending on the number of special symbol drawings performed in the potential state. More specifically, as a potential state, the most advantageous state (potential state A) in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed has a high probability of winning a small win (for example, a probability of 59/60); There are two types of states: a state where the degree of advantage is lower (potential state B) than a state where the probability of winning the small hit is low (for example, a probability of 1/5) and a state where the degree of advantage is lower than a state where the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed. It is configured so that it can be switched. Thereby, even in an advantageous potential state in which a small winning game is likely to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further varied, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the main controller 110 has been changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed, but the other configurations are the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 347, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment has an upper first ball entry hole, which is different from the configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment (and first embodiment) (see FIG. 2). 64b1, and instead of the lower first ball entrance 64b2, a central first ball entrance 64c with an attached central electric accessory 64ca is provided, and instead of the second ball entrance 640, a sorting device 6400D is provided. is provided, and the arrangement of the second variable prize winning device 650, which is released in the event of a jackpot or a small win of the first special symbol, has been moved to the right side of the board, and the game is launched by left-handed hitting. The change is that the upper left side is blocked by multiple nails to make it difficult for the ball to enter. The reason why the arrangement of the second variable prize winning device 650 was changed is because the first special symbol lottery has a relatively high probability (probability of 1/5) of winning a small win, so the gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played (latest) The purpose is to prevent a game ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 in a gaming state other than a certain state, which would be advantageous to the player.

The electric accessory 64ca attached to the first central ball entrance 64c is opened when the normal symbol hits, like the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment. For this reason, in the time saving state and the variable probability state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game balls are more likely to enter the central first ball entry port 64c, making it difficult to consume the balls. Therefore, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the gaming efficiency is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The sorting device 6400D is configured to be able to sort (let the balls enter) the entered game balls into either the first ball entry port 6400D1 or the second ball entry port 6400D2 provided inside. There is. The first ball entrance 6400D1, like the central first ball entrance 64c, is configured as a ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the second ball entrance 6400D2 is configured as a ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 347, the inside of the sorting device 6400D receives the game balls that have entered, and directs the received game balls to either the first ball entrance 6400D1 or the second ball entrance 6400D2. A distribution member 6400Da is provided to cause the flow to flow downward. This distribution member 6400Da is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides that can receive balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 6400Da is arranged such that the receiving part on the right side is directly below the opening of the distribution device 6400D (position where game balls can enter), and the receiving part on the left side is located at the opening of the distribution device 6400D. There are two possible arrangements: one directly below the . FIG. 347 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the opening.

If a game ball that enters the sorting device 6400D through the opening is caught by the right receiving part in a state where the right receiving part is placed directly below the opening, the game ball will not be played. Due to the weight of the ball, the distribution member 6400a rotates clockwise about the shaft 6400Db, so that the left receiving portion is located directly below the opening. Further, due to the rotation, the right receiving portion becomes inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower right direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, the ball flows down in the direction of the second ball entry port 6400D2 and enters the second ball entry port 6400D2.

On the other hand, if a game ball that enters the distribution device 6400D is caught by the left side receiving part in a state where the left side receiving part is placed directly under the opening, the weight of the game ball is As a result, the distribution member 6400Da rotates counterclockwise about the shaft 6400Db, so that the receiving portion on the right side is located directly below the opening. Further, due to the rotation, the left receiving portion becomes inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower left direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, the ball flows down in the direction of the first ball entry port 6400D1 and enters the first ball entry port 6400D1. Therefore, each time a game ball enters the distribution device 6400D, it can be distributed alternately to the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2.

Details will be described later, but in the fourteenth embodiment, in the potential state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol tends to be shorter (the small hit of the first special symbol starts while the second special symbol is fluctuating). As a result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is likely to be shorter (potential state B) (potential state B) where the event of forced stop due to the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to occur (the first A state (potential state A) in which a small hit of the second special symbol is started during the fluctuation of the special symbol, which tends to cause an event in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to stop due to a miss (potential state A) The configuration is such that the following status is set. That is, in the probability state, there is a state in which the first special symbol is mainly selected to win a small hit with a probability of 1/5, and a second special symbol is mainly drawn in which the second special symbol is selected to be a small win with a probability of 59/60. The configuration is such that there are two types of states: an execution state and an execution state. Along with this, the variable display on the game board 13 is designed so that both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by simply performing a right hit in the potential state. A distribution device 6400D that can alternately distribute game balls to a first ball entrance 6400D1 and a second ball entrance 6400D2 is provided in the right side area of the device unit 80.

<Electrical configuration in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment, the configurations of the jackpot type selection table 202d, fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. The difference is that The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 or jackpot G14, the number of drawings of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99. As a variation pattern selection table, a probability variation A table 202f21 is defined in association with the variation pattern selection table. Details will be described later in FIG. 350, but this A table for probability variation 202f21 is one of the tables that can be referenced while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the probability state. While this forms the most advantageous state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, when this table is referred to in a variable probability state, the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than right-handed players. This creates a relatively advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with a range in which the number of special symbol drawings is 100 or more. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but when this normal table 202f23 is referred to, an extremely disadvantageous situation is formed in which the gaming efficiency is deteriorated by executing a right-hand hit in the normal state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is one of jackpot B14, D14, and F14, the probability variation B table 202f22 are defined in association with each other. This B table 202f22 for probability variation is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the probability variation state, the small winning game of the first special symbol While this creates an advantageous state in which it is easier to execute, when this table is referred to in a variable probability state, a relatively advantageous game state is created in which the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than right-handed players. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, for a range in which the number of drawings for special symbols is 100 or more, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot C14, the probability variation B table 202f22 (see FIG. 351) corresponds to the range of the number of drawings of special symbols from 1 to 24. A table for probability variation 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is defined in association with the range from 25 times to 99 times. This B table 202f22 for probability variation is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the probability variation state, the small winning game of the first special symbol While this creates an advantageous state in which it is easier to execute, when this table is referred to in a variable probability state, a relatively advantageous game state is created in which the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than right-handed players. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, for a range in which the number of drawings for special symbols is 100 or more, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, if the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined in association with it, regardless of the number of special symbols drawn. There is.

In this way, in the fourteenth embodiment, the probability state is changed depending on whether the probability variation A table 202f21 or the probability variation B table 202f22 is referred to (that is, depending on the previous jackpot type). The configuration is such that the degree of advantage in the case of this can be varied. That is, in the potential state, there is a state in which a small winning game based on the drawing of the first special symbol with a relatively low advantage is likely to be executed (probable state B), and a small winning game based on the drawing of the second special symbol. Two types of states can be formed: a state that is likely to be executed (potential state A), and a state that is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to create more states with different degrees of advantage for the player, thereby making it possible to diversify the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 349, in the fourteenth embodiment, five jackpot types, "jackpot A14" to "jackpot E14", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Moreover, three jackpot types, "jackpot F14" to "jackpot H14", are defined as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 349, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A14" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot A14" is a type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds and is set to the most advantageous potential state A (potential state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is likely to be executed) after the jackpot ends. This is a jackpot (8 round guaranteed odd jackpot). Since potential state A is the most advantageous gaming state, "jackpot A14" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "Jackpot B14" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 19". In this "Jackpot B14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the probability state, after the jackpot is over, it will be set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while in the probability state This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which when the jackpot is won, the state after the jackpot is set to a probability state B (an advantageous state in which a small winning game with the first special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, if the variable probability state is set after the end of "Jackpot B14", by allowing the number of time reductions to elapse (end), the probability state B will be maintained until the number of variable probability (100 times) ends. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 29", "jackpot C14" is defined as the jackpot type in association. In this "Jackpot C14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while the probability state is This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which when the jackpot is won, the probability state A (the most advantageous state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is likely to be executed) is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, after the end of "Jackpot C14", the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times, thereby shifting from the probability state A to the probability state B, which is less advantageous (see FIG. 348). In addition, if the variable probability state is set after the end of "Jackpot B14", by allowing the time saving number to elapse (end), it will remain in the potential state B until the number of variable probability (100 times) ends. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 79", "jackpot D14" is defined as the jackpot type in association. In this "Jackpot D14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while the probability state is This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which when the jackpot is won, the state after the jackpot is set to a probability state B (an advantageous state in which a small winning game with the first special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, if the probability variable state is set after the end of "Jackpot D14", by allowing the time saving number to elapse (end), the potential state B will be maintained until the probability variable number (100 times) ends. . Here, if you win "Jackpot D14" in a gaming state other than the probability state, the number of probability variations is set smaller than in "Jackpot B14" or "Jackpot C14", so you will move to a more advantageous probability state. It is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation for the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot E14" is defined as the jackpot type in association. This "jackpot E14" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the time saving state is set to 100 times after the jackpot ends. Since the time saving state in the fourteenth embodiment is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state, "jackpot E14" is the most disadvantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot F14" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". ing. This "Jackpot F14" has 16 rounds of jackpots, and if you win in a gaming state other than the probability state, after the jackpot is over, it will be set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while in the probability state This is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which when a winning is won, the state after the jackpot is set to a probability state B (an advantageous state in which a small winning game with the first special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, since the variable probability state that is set after the end of "Jackpot F14" is set to 100 times as the number of time savings, the variable probability state of the special symbol also ends at the same time as the end of the number of time savings. Therefore, if the "jackpot F14" is won in a gaming state other than the potential state, there is no possibility of shifting to the advantageous potential state. This is intended to suppress irregular gaming methods in which players hit right in game states other than the potential state.

Further, "Jackpot G14" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 79". In this "Jackpot G14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while the probability state is This is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which when a winning is won in , the probability state A (the most advantageous state in which a small winning game with the second special symbol is likely to be executed) is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, in the variable probability state that is set after the end of "Jackpot G14", 100 times is set as the time saving number, so similarly to "Jackpot F14", the irregular state where you hit right in a gaming state other than the potential state It is possible to control the gaming method.

Furthermore, "Jackpot H14" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". In this "Jackpot H14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the most disadvantageous normal state will be set after the end of the jackpot, while in the potential state This is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 16 rounds) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends if the player wins. Furthermore, if you win "Jackpot H14" in a gaming state other than a potential state, setting the most disadvantageous normal state is to suppress the irregular gaming method of hitting right in a gaming state other than a potential state. This is to aim for.

Next, details of the probability variation A table 202f21 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 defines the correspondence between the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the variation patterns that can be selected for each type of special symbol. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. Further, in the probability state, only the long variation of the first special symbol is selected, similar to the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more in the probability variable state.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, in the case of a variable probability state, a long variation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, while in the case of a probability state, a short variation of 0.1 seconds to 1 second is set. Set. As a result, when game balls are consecutively entered into the distribution device 6400D by right-handed batting in a variable probability state, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2. , the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become longer, resulting in an extremely poor gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a state of variable probability. On the other hand, when you hit right in a potential state, the ball enters the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2 alternately, so immediately after you start hitting right, the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating. and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed overlappingly. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the potential state, while the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is less than 1 second, so the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which the second special symbol wins continuously. Therefore, a potential state A that is most advantageous to the player is formed.

Next, details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, the probability variable B table 202f22 is configured such that the variation pattern selected in the probability variable state is exactly the same as the probability variable A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, if the ball is hit to the right and consecutively enters the distribution device 6400D in the variable probability state where the scenario is set in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variable B table 202f22, the probability variable As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, as a result of the game balls being alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become longer, resulting in an extremely poor gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a state of variable probability.

In addition, in the potential state, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set as a long fluctuation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. be done. As a result, if you play right-handed in a potential state, the first special symbol's fluctuation display of 1 second or less and the second special symbol's long fluctuation are executed overlappingly, so you can continue playing the right-handed game. By doing so, the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery for the second special symbol. In other words, an advantageous state (potential state B) in which the first special symbol wins continuously is created. Note that the probability of getting a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 1/5, while the probability of getting a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 59/60, so potential state B is as follows. Small winning games are executed less frequently than in potential state A. In other words, the potential state B forms a state that is less advantageous than the potential state A. Therefore, in the probability state, it is advantageous for the player to refer to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) and determine the variation pattern.

Next, details of the normal table 202f23 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured so that the same variation time as the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is selected. That is, by executing the drawing of the first special symbol by left-handed hitting, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set, while right-handed hitting is continued in the normal state, time saving state, and fixed variable state. By doing this, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2, and as a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol The time and the variation time of the second special symbol become longer, resulting in an extremely poor gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which the player plays right-handed in states other than the potential state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment has five states, which can be roughly divided. That is, the normal state shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, the variable probability state shown in the center of FIG. 341, and the potential state B shown on the lower left side of FIG. , and a potential state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341.

The normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, which is the most disadvantageous game state in which the probability of a jackpot is low (1/240) and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to release. form. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the probability of a jackpot is low (1/240), the electric accessory 64a is likely to be released, so the left By hitting the ball, a relatively advantageous game state is created in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, the variable probability state refers to the variable probability state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols, and the probability of a jackpot is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so it is easier to hit left-handed. By doing this, a game state more advantageous than a time-saving state in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held is formed. In addition, the probability state A and the probability state B indicate the probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a jackpot is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is in a gaming state in which it is difficult to unlock. In addition, in the probability state B, since it becomes easier to execute the small winning game of the first special symbol by hitting right, the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a where it is possible to enter the game ball by hitting right. An advantageous state is formed in which a prize ball can be obtained by letting the game ball enter relatively frequently (every time the first special symbol lottery is executed about five times). On the other hand, in potential state A, as mentioned above, by hitting right, it becomes easier to execute the small winning game of the second special symbol, so the first specific prize that allows the game ball to enter by hitting right A more advantageous state than potential state B is formed in which a prize ball can be won by frequently entering the ball into the opening 65a (almost every time the second special symbol lottery is executed).

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown on the upper left side of Fig. 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A14, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. The state shifts to the most advantageous potential state A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B14 to D14, which are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, a relatively advantageous probability change state will occur. Transition. Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a time saving state after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, winning a jackpot always shifts the player to a more advantageous state compared to the normal state, so it is possible to have the player play the game in hopes of winning the jackpot.

Further, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transition from the time saving state to another state not only when a jackpot is achieved but also when the number of time saving times ends. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of Figure 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A14, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. The state shifts to the most advantageous potential state A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B14 to D14, which are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the state will be changed to a relatively advantageous probability state. Transition. Further, after the time saving state is set, by allowing the prescribed number of time saving times (100 times) to elapse (end), the player is directly transferred to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player (without going through a jackpot). On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is determined as the jackpot type, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, if you win a jackpot, you will either move to a more advantageous gaming state, or at least the current gaming state (time saving state) will be maintained, while the number of time saving times will end. If this happens, the player will enter a disadvantageous normal state, so the player can play the game in the hope of winning a jackpot before the time-saving state ends.

Furthermore, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transitioning from the variable probability state to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a predetermined number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot E14, which is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the probability will change after the jackpot ends. Shifts to a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous than the current state. Further, when the first special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot A14 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state B after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the probability change state is set, by allowing a specified number of time-saving times (10, 25, or 50 times) to pass, the player can directly enter consecutive winning mode A, which is relatively advantageous for the player (without going through a jackpot). to) transition. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of jackpots B14 to D14, which are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is determined, a variable probability state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the variable probability state, while the rate of transition to a more advantageous state when a jackpot is achieved is low (5% rate), when the time saving state ends, the player will definitely move to a more advantageous probability state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative game experience in which the player expects more strongly that the time-saving state will end.

Furthermore, as shown on the lower left side of Fig. 341, the transition from potential state B to other states occurs not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of Fig. 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpots A14 and C14, which are determined at a ratio of 55% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the jackpot will be a jackpot. After the completion, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state B. Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends. Moreover, when the number of probability variations (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpots B14 and D14, which are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the potential state B is set again after the jackpot ends. Ru. Therefore, in the probability state B, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that makes players expect to win the jackpot before the number of probability variations ends and the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

Furthermore, as shown on the lower right side of Figure 341, the transition from potential state A to other states occurs not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of Fig. 341, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot F14, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. The state shifts to potential state A, which is relatively less advantageous. In addition, when the second special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot H14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends. Moreover, when the number of probability variations (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpot G14, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the potential state A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in potential state A, by winning the jackpot before the probability change count ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, the most advantageous potential state A can be changed to the most advantageous state A with a high probability ( This creates an extremely advantageous gaming state that loops at a rate of 75%.

As explained above, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are two types of games, a potential state A and a potential state B, as advantageous states in which it is possible to win a prize ball without going through a jackpot by playing a small winning game. The configuration is such that a state is provided. Both of these states are composed of potential states (probability change states for special symbols and normal states for normal symbols), and by varying the fluctuation pattern scenarios, the lottery will be biased towards the second special symbol with a high probability of winning. The configuration is such that a potential state A is executed (with a biased emphasis) and a potential state B is executed with a bias (biased emphasis) on the lottery of the first special symbol with a low probability of winning a small prize. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize different playability (playability that allows you to win more prize balls and playability that makes it difficult to win prize balls) in one potential state. It can improve people's interest. Furthermore, unlike the thirteenth embodiment described above, the potential state can be set as the most advantageous gaming state, and the normal state can be set as the most disadvantageous gaming state, so that when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the normal There is no need to make any difference in control between this state and the normal state that transitions to via another gaming state. Therefore, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Note that in the fourteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of the advantageous states in which a small winning game is likely to be executed. That is, in addition to the potential state A and the potential state B, the normal state may also be configured to be advantageous to the player. With this configuration, the number of advantageous situations increases, so it is possible to increase the player's interest in playing the game.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the potential state, the long variation is always set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It is not limited to this. For example, when switching from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, such as immediately after the end of a jackpot or when the number of guaranteed variable times has passed in a potential state, the first special symbol will be drawn for a specific number of times (for example, 4 times). It may be configured such that even if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, the long variation is not set (the variation time is set to 20 seconds or less). In other words, as a variation pattern scenario, if the variation display executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot or the 100th time after the end of the jackpot is a variation display of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is set regardless of the status of the reserved balls. It is also possible to set a scenario in which a variable time of 20 seconds or less is selected. In addition, in this case, the structure is configured so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) within 5 times after the end of the jackpot, and within the range of 100 to 105 times after the end of the jackpot. You may. With this configuration, after the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol can be reduced to 0 before the variable display of the first special symbol ends, so that the regular gaming method can be It is possible to suppress a disadvantageous state in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subject to long fluctuations even though they have been changed.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the potential state, by increasing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the state other than the potential state is The structure was designed to reduce the gaming efficiency when a right-handed game is played in a gaming state, and to suppress irregular gaming methods in which a right-handed game is played in a state other than a potential state, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, in a state other than the potential state, the first special symbol may be configured to make a long fluctuation when the total number of reserved balls is 5 or more. When a regular game method (left-handed game) is performed in a state other than the potential state, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated, so the number of reserved balls is at most four. On the other hand, if you play an irregular game method in which you hit right in a game state other than the potential state, the game ball will enter the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2 alternately, as a result, More than 5 balls are held. Therefore, by continuing to hit right, an extremely disadvantageous game state is formed in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have long fluctuations. It is possible to control the method. In addition, at first glance, by the method of stopping right-handed hitting when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts and restarting right-handed hitting when the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, the number of reserved balls is kept at 4 or less. It seems that there is a method of playing games by adjusting the amount. However, when this method is used, as the number of draws for the first special symbol increases, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol that fluctuates long regardless of the lottery result or the number of reserved balls increases. When the lottery is held four times, there are almost four reserved balls. Therefore, from then on, the first special symbol also becomes a long fluctuation, creating a disadvantageous situation in which the gaming efficiency is extremely poor. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a state other than the potential state.

In the 14th embodiment, by making the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol higher than the probability of a small win of the first special symbol, a potential state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Although the configuration is such that the probability state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to varying the small winning probability depending on the type of special symbol, for example, the small winning probability of the first special symbol is higher than the small winning probability of the second special symbol in one small winning game. By configuring the system so that the number of game balls that can win a prize tends to decrease, the potential state A in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed may be configured to be more advantageous. . In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened when the first special symbol is a small win, By making the number of prize balls smaller than the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a that is opened when It may be configured as follows. By implementing these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied in a more diverse manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<15th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, by ending the time saving state, the variable probability state (special symbol is low probability state) is set. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols and the low probability state of normal symbols are set, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to a probability state. (an advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed). Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the time saving number ends earlier than the number of probability variations in the probability variation state, thereby changing from the probability variation state to the potential probability state (an advantageous state in which a small winning game is easily executed). It was configured to transition to

On the other hand, in the present 15th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot variation, thereby reducing the number of time reductions. is subtracted, and the system is configured so that it is possible to shift to a potential state during the execution of jackpot fluctuations. In other words, even during execution of jackpot fluctuations, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed. Furthermore, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is more likely to be advantageous in the probability state than in the probability variable state. As a result, when there is only a small amount of time remaining until the end of the jackpot fluctuation (even if it becomes easier to execute the small winning game, the jackpot game is started without being able to execute the small winning game). Even if there is, the player can be made to want to end the time saving number of times. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the lottery of the second special symbol is actively executed during execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the main controller 110 has been changed. The only difference is that the configuration of the ROM 202 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the eleventh implementation The configuration is the same as the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 354 and 355, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 354 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above, in that the right side area of the game board 13 (right-handed game The difference is that the configuration of the area (the area in which the ball shot by the ball falls) is different. Further, the difference is that a center first ball entrance 64c is provided in place of the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 354, a ball path ZK1 through which game balls can flow down (pass) is formed in the right side area of the game board 13, and in order from the upstream side of the ball path ZK1, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 1650 , a second ball entrance 640 with an electric accessory 640a attached thereto, and a variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings that are opened during the small winning game are arranged. Further, above the second ball entry port 640, a right first ball entry port 64r is provided which becomes an opportunity to draw a first special symbol when a game ball enters the ball. In addition, the right first ball entrance 64r is a position where the game ball that has flown down the ball path ZK1 is difficult to enter (repulsion (interference) with the ball path ZK1 and other game balls). ) where the ball can enter the ball only if Therefore, more than 90% of the game balls hit right enter the second ball entry port 640, or pass through the second ball entry port 640 and enter the small winning variable winning device 2650 or the out port 66. Enter the ball. The ratio of game balls entering the right first ball entrance 64r is about 1 in 20.

The variable winning device 1650 disposed on the ball path ZK1 is a device that opens and closes in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario when a jackpot is won in a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery. A specific winning opening 1650a and an opening/closing door 1650f that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 1650a. It is configured such that 15 balls are paid out as prize balls every time one ball enters during the jackpot game.

The second ball entry port 640 has an opening formed by cutting out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the ball path ZK1, and every time one ball enters, one ball is awarded as a prize ball. It is configured so that the ball is paid out. Further, similar to the first embodiment described above, it is configured to trigger the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. The opening of the second ball entry port 640 is covered with an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is divided into an open state where a ball can enter and a state where it is more difficult (or impossible) to enter the ball than in the open state. The structure is such that the ease with which a ball enters the ball can be varied by variable control to a closed state in which the ball is closed (possible).

In a state where the electric accessory 640a covers the opening of the second ball entry port 640 (closed state), the ball that has flowed down the ball path ZK1 passes over the electric accessory 640a and goes to the downstream side of the ball path ZK1. It is configured so that it flows downward. In other words, the game ball that flows downstream from the second ball entry port 640 in the ball path ZK1 is a game ball that did not (could not) enter the second ball entry port 640.

In the ball path ZK1, the ball flowing downstream from the second ball entry port 640 reaches the small winning variable winning device 2650. This small win variable winning device 2650 is composed of a small win winning hole 2650a and an opening/closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the small winning winning hole 2650a. It has an opening formed by cutting out a part of the lower surface of the ZK1 ball flow, and is configured so that for every ball that enters, 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. .

This small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is opened during a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in a special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the opening/closing door 2650f is opened in a predetermined manner. By opening the ball in an open scenario, it is variably controlled to an open state in which a ball can enter, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) for a ball to enter than in the open state. In addition, in this 15th embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned 11th embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (for example, 59/60). .

In the closed state where the opening/closing door 2650f closes the small winning prize opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 is configured to pass through the top surface of the opening/closing door 2650f and flow down toward the out port 66. . The upper surface (ball passage surface) of this opening/closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball, and is configured so that it takes 1 second for the ball to pass over the opening/closing door 2650f. . By providing this delay means, the necessary ball passage time can be secured in a smaller space. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, as a delay means, the ball path is opened and closed so as to have a high frictional resistance (friction coefficient) (higher frictional resistance than other ball path surfaces of the ball path ZK1). The upper surface of the door 2650f has an uneven portion that the ball can ride over.

As a delay means, a ball delay path can be formed by devising the structure of the ball path surface (for example, a path in which the ball path is serpentine), or a ball delay path can be created by devising the material of the ball path surface. Anything can be used as long as it forms a ball or delays the passage time for the ball to pass through a predetermined section.

Furthermore, the ball fired in the left-handed game (game aiming at the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80) enters each winning hole (ball entry hole) provided in the ball path ZK1 mentioned above. A nail is installed below the game board 13 (below and to the right of the first ball entry opening 64) as a regulating member (limiting means) for regulating the occurrence of the game. With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with different games for right-handed games and left-handed games, so it is possible to provide players with games that they will never get tired of (hard to get bored of). .

Next, details of the ball flow in the right region in the fifteenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball flow in a state where the time saving state or variable probability state is set as the gaming state, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state where

The ball path ZK1 of the game board 13 of the fifteenth embodiment is the ball passage time from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 640 (the time required for the ball to pass through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entrance 640). The configuration is such that the required time) is 0.5 seconds. In addition, the configuration is such that the ball passing time on the electric accessory 640a that covers the second ball entrance 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow down) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) is 1 second. are doing.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of normal symbols is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 0.1 seconds. The configuration is such that the time is set to ~0.4 seconds, that is, shorter than the ball passage time from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port 640. Further, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is executed twice with a closing period of 0.8 seconds in between. In other words, it is configured to perform an opening operation in which a closing period is set shorter than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355(a), if a right-handed game is played when the time saving mode is set as the gaming mode, most of the balls will enter the second ball entrance 640. Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to less than half of the ball passage time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port 640, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is Even if one lottery is held in which the lottery result is a loss, the ball that caused the loss in the lottery can be entered into the second ball entry port 640 by winning the next lottery. can.

On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port. The configuration is such that a time longer than the ball passage time (0.5 seconds) up to 640 is set. Furthermore, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, a 0.04 second opening operation is executed once. In other words, the configuration is such that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 for only 0.04 seconds in a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355(b), when playing a right-handed game when the potential state is set as the game state, most of the balls do not enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball will flow down toward the small winning prize device 2650. In addition, in the present 15th embodiment, the configuration is such that the time for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is 1 second, and the configuration is such that the ball is fired once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously playing the right-handed game, one ball always stays on the electric accessory 640a.

By configuring in this way, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the ball can be reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in a game state (variable probability state, time saving state, potential state) in which a hitting game is executed. As mentioned above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a high probability of winning a small hit, so in the probability state, the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds. While doing so, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the small winning prize device 2650 and win the prize ball. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which small winning games are frequently executed by drawing the second special symbol, and prize balls based on small winnings can be frequently obtained. On the other hand, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, almost all game balls hit to the right enter the second ball entry port 640 (or the right first ball entry port 64r), so small winning games are frequently executed. However, it becomes extremely difficult to make the game ball reach the small winning prize device 2650 during the execution period of the small winning game. Therefore, the variable probability state and the time saving state are states where it is only possible to efficiently enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 (or the first right ball entry port 64r). The degree of advantage is lower than in the accurate state (it becomes difficult to obtain the prize ball).

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, various operations will be described when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable probability state, which is a characteristic operation in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the variable display performance executed in response to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the changing situation of each special symbol in the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly explained. Similarly to the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. (dynamic display) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

As shown in FIG. 356, in the variable probability state, chance zone display (see FIG. 297(b)) is set as the performance mode. In addition, during the variable probability state, as described above, most of the game balls fired by right-handed balls enter the second ball entrance 640, and rarely (for example, at a rate of 1 out of 20) The ball enters the first ball entrance 64r. Therefore, during the probability change state, the number of time saving times is basically subtracted by executing the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, the variable probability state will be looped at a rate of about 75%, and the time saving state will be entered at a rate of 20%, similar to the 11th embodiment described above. It is configured to move (fall) to In other words, even if you hit a jackpot in a variable probability state, there is a low possibility that it will shift to an advantageous probability state. It is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation that the player will do the same. Note that even if the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small win will not be won, but in the variable probability state, as described above, Since it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the small winning prize winning device 2650, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed overlappingly (simultaneously), thereby saving time. The player can be given the impression that they were able to subtract more times. Therefore, in the probability variable state, the more the game ball enters the right first ball entry port 64r, the more the player can be given the impression that the probability state is approaching, and therefore the player's game You can improve your interest in.

Then, in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, when the time saving number ends, as mentioned above, it shifts to a more advantageous probability state, and frequently A very advantageous situation is formed in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is executed and the game ball can be easily won into the small winning winning device 2650. In addition, in the probability state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is no chance of winning a small win, which gives the player the impression that the remaining number of probability variations has been subtracted by one uselessly. can be used. Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes you expect more game balls to enter the right first ball entry port 64r, whereas in the probability state, the right first ball entry port 64r It is possible to realize a gameplay that makes you expect that the game ball will not hit the ball. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which it is possible to switch the role of the first right ball entrance 64r (whether or not it is a ball entrance into which it is preferable to enter the ball) depending on the game state. .

Furthermore, in the present 15th embodiment, by changing the opening control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 depending on the game state, the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed even in the time saving state or the variable probability state. The configuration is mainly for execution. In other words, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, even if the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is not set in the time saving state or the variable probability state and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The configuration is configured so that a relatively short variation time is set even when the change is made. As a result, in the variable probability state, the time-saving number is used up by drawing the second special symbol, thereby realizing the gaming property of aiming at the most advantageous probability state. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the time saving number of the second special symbols is used up while the jackpot variation of the first special symbols is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 356, in a state where the variable probability state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, and a relatively low percentage (for example, the number of shot game balls is A game state is entered in which the first special symbol is also drawn at a rate of 1/20. In other words, in the variable probability state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a is easy to open, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the small hit is possible. A game state is created in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the winning device 2650. In this variable probability state, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 356, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by hitting right during the jackpot variation. In addition, in this 15th embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, a long variation for 600 seconds is executed. During the jackpot fluctuation in this variable probability state, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is also interrupted every time a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol. Due to these, it becomes possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol a plurality of times during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, while the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed, it is possible to display the variation of the second special symbol for the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating (the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), there will be no chance of winning the jackpot twice in the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery result is wrong or It will be a small win). Therefore, while the long variation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a jackpot and a variable probability state or a time saving state will be set. This creates an extremely advantageous situation in which the time saving number can be reliably subtracted every time the second special symbol lottery is executed. Also, since more than 90% of the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, by continuing to hit right during the long variation of the first special symbol, the long variation Regardless of the number of time reductions at the start, the number of time reductions can almost be ended during the long fluctuation. It should be noted that while the jackpot variation (long variation) of the first special symbol is being executed, a super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357) to be described later is executed. That is, by executing a right-handed hit and ending the time-saving number, an effect mode is executed to indicate a transition to an advantageous potential state.

As shown in FIG. 356, during the execution of the super chance zone performance (that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variable probability state), the second special symbol is drawn by lottery until the time saving number elapses (ends). When executed, the gaming state is changed from a variable probability state to a probability state. In other words, the state changes from a state in which it is difficult to make the game ball reach the small winning prize device 2650 to a state in which it is easy to make the game ball reach the small winning prize device 2650. Therefore, until the jackpot starts, the player can enjoy an advantageous game in which he can frequently win small winning games and win prize balls based on winnings in the small winning winning device 2650. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Note that, after transitioning to the potential state, a RUSH effect (see FIG. 7(b)) is executed as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, since the jackpot is started after the jackpot is reached, the gaming state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot is completed can be set with reference to the probability state. In other words, it is possible to treat the jackpot as winning in the probability state where the same state is looped at a high rate (75% of the time, the probability state is set again after the jackpot ends), so the jackpot ends. It is possible to configure the system so that there is a high possibility that the potential state will continue even afterward. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased at the time when the Super Chance Zone performance is started. In addition, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is difficult for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64r even if the ball is hit right, and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is also Since it is short, it becomes difficult to use up the remaining time saving number by drawing the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol, the normal jackpot performance is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the characteristic effects of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, the super chance zone effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 357(a). This super chance zone performance is a performance executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probability change state. When this super chance zone production is executed, a production in which the character 811 discovers carrot images NG1 to NG3 that imitate carrots is executed, and a message saying "Carrot found! Eat it all!!" is executed in the display area HR1. is displayed. In addition, the words "15 remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, the words "Entering the Super Chance Zone!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that it will be more advantageous for the player if the character 811 eats up all the carrots shown in the carrot image. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the super chance zone performance is started, a performance in which the character 811 eats a carrot one by one is performed every time the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. This allows the player to easily understand that the remaining number of time reductions and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, you can easily make them understand that by eating all the carrots, they will move into a latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easy for players to understand.

In the variable probability state, if the character 811 is able to eat the carrot (the number of time-savers ends) before the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, the display area HR1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 357. In response to this, the words "Fully eaten!! RUSH has begun!!" are displayed, and the words "0 pieces left" are displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, the words "RUSH enters!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has entered (transitioned to) the most advantageous potential state (RUSH state).

In addition, in the present 15th embodiment, as a super chance zone effect, the character 811 eats a carrot one by one for each change, so that it is possible to suggest the remaining number of drawings until the potential state is reached. However, it is not limited to this. The mode is not limited to this embodiment as long as it can indicate the remaining number of times; for example, as in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining number of shortened times can be suggested based on the height of climbing a rocky mountain (remaining distance to the top). It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In the present 15th embodiment, as a super chance zone performance, a performance suggesting the remaining number of drawings until the time saving number ends is executed, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol It may also be configured to perform an effect (for example, a countdown display of the remaining time, etc.) that suggests the remaining time until the end of the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the right-handed game more seriously in an attempt to finish the time saving number before the suggested remaining time elapses, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be done.

<Electrical configuration in 15th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. First, with reference to FIG. 358, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second winning random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, a random number (counter value) of "0 to 230" is used to determine a win for a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol. 230 random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 231" are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be hits for normal symbols in the time saving state of normal symbols. There is.

In other words, in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal symbol is almost always hit every time the through gate 67 is passed, both in the time saving state of the normal symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol. As a result, whether a right-handed game is played in the time-saving state or a variable probability state, or a right-handed game is played in the probable state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the second A state can be created in which the ball can enter the ball entry port 640. As mentioned above, in the time saving state and variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter and the opening time becomes longer, while in the potential state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer and the opening time becomes shorter. . Thereby, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, almost all the game balls that have reached the second ball entry port 640 can be made to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, in the potential state, the game ball easily passes through the second ball entrance 640 while the second ball entrance 640 is closed, so the game ball enters the small winning prize device 2650. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it is possible to create a state more advantageous to the player than a time saving state or a variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 359(a), the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 359(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2. As shown in FIG. 359(a), in the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the winning length is 600 seconds regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. While the fluctuation is set, if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a loss, a 10-second loss middle fluctuation is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359(a), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, relatively short variation patterns of 1 second to 20 seconds are defined in association with each other. As a result, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state, it becomes possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol by continuing to hit right. Therefore, by continuously hitting the right hand in the variable probability state, the second special symbol can be drawn at relatively short intervals, and the number of time-saving times can be used up. Therefore, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous potential state during execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

Next, the potential confirmation table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359(b). FIG. 359(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the potential confirmation table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359(b), the potential confirmation table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment sets a long variation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result as the variation time of the first special symbol, while the second A relatively short variation time of 20 seconds or less is defined as the variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, a more advantageous gaming state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the probability state or the probability variable state. In other words, only the small winning game with the second special symbol is executed, and the chances of the ball entering the small winning prize device 2650 increase, so the right To form a game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be continuously won by hitting.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, by performing a right hit in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second game ball is suppressed from reaching the small winning prize device 2650. The board configuration and the control of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state are configured so that the lottery of special symbols can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the potential state, by hitting to the right, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the small winning prize device 2650 in a well-balanced manner, creating an advantageous gaming state. . That is, in a gaming state other than the normal state, the game is configured to proceed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and in a state other than the potential state, the game ball is sent to the small winning prize device 2650. The configuration is such that it prevents the ball from entering the ball. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand gaming property in which the game is proceeded by drawing the second special symbol in all gaming states other than the normal state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed while the jackpot variation is being executed, thereby saving time. The system is configured so that it is possible to subtract the number of times and shift to a potential state during the execution of jackpot fluctuations. In other words, even during execution of jackpot fluctuations, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed. Furthermore, by making it possible to extinguish the time saving state and transition to the potential state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, when the first special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery, the time saving state can be changed to the potential state. It becomes easy to start hitting the jackpot. In other words, since the gaming state after the end of the jackpot can be set by referring to the potential state, it is possible to configure the game so that there is a high possibility that the potential state will continue even after the end of the jackpot. . As a result, a very special and novel gameplay feature is realized in which, regardless of the remaining number of times in the time-saving state, the user continues to hit right even during jackpot fluctuations with the aim of ending the time-saving number during the jackpot fluctuations of the first special symbol. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the common variation pattern selection table (time saving/probability variation table 202f2) in the time saving state and the probability variation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the time saving state, the variation time may be configured to be shortened when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. This is because there is no benefit to the player even if the number of times of time saving is used up in the time saving state.

In the 15th embodiment, only a long variation of 600 seconds is set when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, but this is not limited to this, and any variation time can be set. You may. The shorter the variation time, the higher the possibility that the jackpot will start before the time saving number ends even if the second special symbol lottery is executed continuously during the probability variation state. When a jackpot variation of symbols is executed (when a super chance zone performance is started), the game can be played while creating a sense of tension. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to finish the time saving number during the jackpot fluctuation, so when the super chance zone starts, while giving a sense of security. You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 360. In the above-described eleventh embodiment, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) is executed each time the number of drawings at which the time saving number may pass (end) is reached. In addition to this, in this modified example, the river breakthrough performance is also configured to be performed as a performance suggesting that a jackpot has been won during the chance zone (time saving state of normal symbols). In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough performance, the player is informed in advance of the benefits (rewards) that can be given to the player if the player breaks through the river. This allows players to have more diverse expectations.

First, with reference to FIG. 360(a), the display mode at the start of the river breakthrough effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 360(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in a river breakthrough effect executed in a lottery number in which there is a possibility that the time saving number ends. As shown in FIG. 360(a), in the river breakthrough performance in this modified example, the privilege (reward) that will be given to the player if the player breaks through the river in the current river breakthrough performance is displayed in the display area HR1. It is configured to do this. The example of FIG. 360(a) illustrates a case where it is announced that RUSH will be given as a benefit (transition to a potential state) by successfully breaking through a river. That is, the display area HR1 shows a state in which the words "Reaching the first river!! RUSH by breaking through! Finishing by falling..." are displayed. This display content allows the player to understand that a RUSH is entered by breaking through the river, so that the player can pay more attention to the result of the river breakthrough performance and play the game. In addition to the example shown in Figure 360(a), there are suggestions such as ``Continue with breakthrough! End with fall...'' and ``Break through with jackpot! End with fall...''. There is. In this way, by providing variations in the content of the suggestion, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the river breakthrough performance depending on the content of the suggestion. For example, if the display content is ``Rush when you break through! End when you fall...'', there is a big difference in the degree of advantage depending on whether you break through or fall, so it makes people expect you to break through even more. I can do it. In addition, if the display content is "Breaking through and hitting the jackpot! Falling and ending...", either the time saving number of times has ended, and either you have hit the jackpot by chance, or the time saving number of times has ended. Therefore, it can be made to feel that the possibility of winning the jackpot is low. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends, the shock can be alleviated. Furthermore, by executing the effect of breaking through the river in this display mode, it is possible to give great surprise and joy to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, as described above, the river breakthrough effect can be performed even at a timing where there is no possibility that the time saving state will end. That is, the river breakthrough effect is executed in the case of a jackpot and in some cases of a loss (for example, 1/100 of the case of a loss). The display mode in this case will be explained with reference to FIG. 360(b). FIG. 360(b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the river breakthrough effect that is executed in the case of a jackpot and part of the case of a loss. As shown in FIG. 360(b), if there is no possibility that the time saving number will end, a river image KG that is thinner than the normal river breakthrough effect is displayed. In addition, the words "Ogawa found! If you jump over it, you will win the jackpot or continue!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. These display contents make it easy for the player to recognize that it is certain that the player will break through the river. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot will be announced when the river breaks through, while in the case of a miss, the continuation will be announced.

In this way, in this modification, even if a jackpot occurs during the chance zone, the jackpot is notified by the river breakthrough effect. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the performance in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easier for players to understand. Moreover, in this modification, at the start of the river breakthrough performance, the privilege (reward) that will be given when the river is breached is notified in advance. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the river breakthrough performance depending on the content of the bonus, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough performance that is executed in the case of a jackpot or a miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot and the number of time reductions to be set after the jackpot ends may be suggested. More specifically, for example, there are four font colors for "Jackpot": white, green, and red, where white means there is a high probability of a normal jackpot, and green means a probability of a variable jackpot. If it is high and red, it may be configured so that it is a probability variable jackpot and the possibility of a small number of time savings (0 or 10 times) is increased (that is, it becomes easier to shift to a probability state). With this configuration, when green or red characters are displayed, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation that a jackpot will be announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. be able to.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 423. Note that the same elements as in each embodiment described above will be repeatedly explained for convenience of explanation. Further, for the convenience of explanation, some of the contents explained in each of the embodiments described above are given different reference numerals and explained repeatedly. Specifically, in each of the embodiments described above, each control process has been described with the symbol S, but in this embodiment, it has been described with the symbol C, and the same processing can also be described. , will be given a different number and explained again. Further, to the parts where detailed explanations of the same elements as explained in each of the above-described embodiments are omitted, the contents explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments apply.

In the gaming machine of the 16th embodiment, the player wins a jackpot in a special symbol lottery and executes the jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) as an opportunity to execute a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. A chance (first chance) and a special symbol lottery result in a small win, and during the small win game, the game ball is placed in a specific area (within the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 361) which is opened during the small win game). There are two opportunities (a second opportunity) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in .

With this configuration, it becomes possible to provide jackpot games to players at various opportunities, and therefore it is possible to provide games with improved gameplay. Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the lottery with the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the lottery with the first special symbol (special symbol 1). And, during the time saving state which is a gaming state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, it is configured so that the special drawing 2 lottery is more likely to be executed. Thereby, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game than when the normal state is set. That is, in the normal state, the lottery for special drawing 1 is mainly executed, whereas in the time saving state, the lottery for special drawing 2 is mainly executed, making it easier to establish the second opportunity described above. . Therefore, since the time saving state can be made into a gaming state advantageous to the player, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, the 16th embodiment is configured such that a period during which the lottery of the special drawing 2 is more likely to be executed can be made to appear temporarily in the state where the normal state is set. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 361, but when a specific win (long open win) is won by the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is activated for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to open the ball and set a period during which it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port (winning port) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special drawing 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible for players who are playing games in the normal state to execute the special drawing 2 lottery, so they can play the game without having to execute the special drawing 2 drawing (without shifting to the time-saving state). You can prevent yourself from getting bored with it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a continuation condition (termination condition) of the time saving state that is set after the end of the jackpot game, at least the first condition (for example, executing the special figure 2 variation 5 times during the time saving state, or executing the small winning game end) and a second condition that makes it easier to continue the time-saving state (difficult to end) than the first condition (for example, when the special figure fluctuation (total of special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation) is set to 99% during the time-saving state) It is configured such that it is possible to set the number of executions or the end of the small winning game. Then, in the case where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and the case where the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving condition, the time saving The setting ratios of the state continuation conditions (termination conditions) are different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, it is better to finish the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. The configuration is such that a continuation condition (termination condition) that makes it easy for the time saving state to continue (difficult to end) is easily set.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, as described above, the gaming state (normal state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player than the gaming state (time saving state). The configuration is such that when is set, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is easier to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, whether the normal state is set or the time saving state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, a maximum of four pieces of winning information of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be stored and stored, and the lottery result of the final fluctuation of the special symbol 2 in the time saving state is shown. The player is configured to inform the player of the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special drawing 2 which is stored on hold using a variable performance. In other words, as a performance result of the variable performance executed during the time-saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery that is executed after the gaming state has transitioned from the time-saving state to the normal state The system is configured to notify the result of the lottery (for the winning information of the special drawing 2 that has been stored on hold at the time of transition). By configuring this way, if the performance result of the variable performance is a performance result that indicates a win (for example, a small win), it is possible to check whether the current small win was won in a time-saving state or under the normal state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether he or she has won the prize.

In addition, as described above, in the 16th embodiment, a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed via a small win game in a case where a small win is won in a time saving state and a case where a small win is won in a normal state. ), the ease of continuation of the time-saving state that is set after the end of the time-saving state is different, and specifically, if you win a small win in the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state, it is easier to continue the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is easier to set continuation conditions (termination conditions) that make it easier for the time-saving state to continue (difficult to end) than if you win a small win in the 2nd lottery, and furthermore, after transitioning to the normal state. If the look-ahead result corresponding to the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed is a determination result that a small win will be won in which the time-saving state is likely to continue, in a variation effect that shows the lottery result of the final variation of the special drawing 2 in the time-saving state. , is configured to notify the pre-reading result (pre-reading result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state).

By configuring this way, when it is announced that a small win has been won due to the variable performance executed during the time saving state, the proportion of the won small win that is likely to continue in the time saving state is determined. can be increased. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, Pachinko machine 10), in order to improve the health of the game, the percentage of game states that are advantageous to the player (for example, time saving state and variable probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game. There are some games that suppress the gambling nature of games by setting the so-called continuation rate low (for example, 65% or less). In such gaming machines, for example, even if a player wins a win (for example, a jackpot or a small win) while an advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state may be changed again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem in that it is difficult to create expectations for the winning notification performance during the advantageous gaming state.

On the other hand, in the present 16th embodiment, in the win notification performance (variable performance) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), a win (small win) that is won during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) In addition to the above notification, if you win a small win that makes it easier to continue in a time-saving state based on the pre-read results of the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed after the transition from an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) to a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), you will be notified in advance. The configuration is also configured to notify when it is determined. As a result, when a winning notification performance is executed during an advantageous gaming state (time saving state), it is possible to increase the winning percentage of a small win in which the time saving state is likely to continue, and players' expectations regarding the winning notification performance during an advantageous gaming state. It can enhance the feeling.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) or the special figure 2 variation (residual feature existing at the time of transition to the normal state) executed after the end of the time saving state (after transition to the normal state) It is configured such that a variation performance is executed that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 has won the small hit. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the 16th embodiment, in addition to the lottery result of the fluctuation by the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the final fluctuation period of the time saving state, after the end of the time saving state (after transition to the normal state) It is configured to notify the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 pending that exists at the time of transition to the normal state) that is executed during the transition to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 pending that exists at the time of transition to the normal state) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short-time variation ends. Until then, the display results of the variable effects executed in response to the final variable period of the time saving state are displayed. In this way, the final variation of the time saving state and the special figure 2 variation that is executed after the end of the time saving state (after transitioning to the normal state) (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 reservation that exists at the time of transition to the normal state) By executing a series of effects using the period in which , is executed, and displaying the effect results of that series of effects across multiple variations, it is possible to determine which special figure variation this series of effects corresponds to. It is possible to make it difficult for players to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is being announced.

First, with reference to FIG. 361, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. On the front side of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region in which prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 361) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (top right in FIG. 361) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 361). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of balls on hold is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first prize opening 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the gaming area on the game board 13 into left and right, with the left side of the variable display unit 80 being a left channel where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 being a channel for playing games. A right flow path through which the sphere can flow down is formed. The game balls flowing down the left channel are configured not to flow down the right channel. The first prize opening 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball flowing down the left channel and the game ball flowing down the right channel can enter.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flown down the right side flow path can enter the ball more easily than the game ball that has flowed down the left side flow path. The second prize opening 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a channel through which a game ball can flow down is formed in the opening. A photosensor is provided to detect game balls. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that can close the opening, and the opening/closing plate is driven to open and close in the front side with the change of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and an open port solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning hole 640 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When a normal symbol (second symbol) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the lower front side, temporarily creating an open state in which the ball can easily enter the opening of the second winning opening 640. It is operated to repeat the open state and the normal closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the gaming state.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The jackpot types determined here include 15R time saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AA), 7R time saving, which is set corresponding to the first special symbol that is displayed variably when winning in the first prize opening 64. (5 times) jackpot (jackpot AB), 7R time saving (1 time) jackpot (jackpot AC) are available. In addition, 15R time saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AD), 12R time saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AE) that is set corresponding to the second special symbol that is fluctuated and displayed when winning the second prize opening 640 ), 7R time saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AF) is available. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, "15R time saving (99 times) jackpot (jackpot AA)" means that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 99 times after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds is 99. During the period until the second fluctuation stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to a high probability state, and a time-saving gaming state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the regular symbol (second symbol) is likely to be selected. It's a big hit. "7R time saving (5 times) jackpot (jackpot AB)" means that after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 7 rounds, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 5 times, and the 5th change occurs. A jackpot in which the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) shifts to a high probability state until the symbol stops, and a time-saving gaming state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is likely to be selected. It is. In addition, in "7R time saving (1 time) jackpot (jackpot AC)", after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 7 rounds, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is changed until the 5th fluctuation stops. It is a jackpot in which the game shifts to a high probability state and a time-saving gaming state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is likely to be selected.

During time saving (during time saving game state), not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to during normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving period, it becomes easier for balls to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a can be changed in one hit. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times the game is opened compared to normal times. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one win are at least the same. One of them may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, only the winning probability of the second symbol is calculated without considering the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one hit. , it may be changed to be higher than normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 displays the fluctuation of the third symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") performs display, and a second symbol is variably displayed using the passing of a ball through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays an "O" symbol and an " This is a fluctuating display that lights up alternately for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "○" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time saving mode than in the normal gaming mode. As a result, during the time saving period, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of variable display times of the second symbol) can be performed more than during the normal period. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so it is possible to give the player more opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls to the upper tray 17, so it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. , it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player, and it is possible to suppress the investment for additionally lending out balls, and it is possible to make the lottery of special symbols take place for a short period of time. .

In addition, during the time saving, it is possible to increase the winning probability, increase the open time or number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per winning time, etc., or increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened or the number of times it is opened. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the electric winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

Normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas of the left flow path and right flow path of the variable display unit 80, respectively, and are used to control the left and right sides of the game board among the balls fired at the game board. A part of the ball flowing down can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol is displayed as a stop symbol. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol holding lamp is displayed. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but is set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). You may do so. Further, the number of normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 12), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

Moreover, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, if the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuating display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win into the second winning hole 640.

As mentioned above, during the time saving mode, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during the normal mode, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is displayed during the variable display of the second symbol. becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

In the sixteenth embodiment, a through gate 67 through which a ball can pass is formed in the midstream portion of the left side gaming area (left side of the variable display unit 80). Thereby, even while the player is playing a game (left-handed game) in which the ball flows down into the left side game area, the lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is executed. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, if a specific normal symbol is won while the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, It is configured so that a game with a common symbol that allows a ball to easily enter the second prize opening 640 is executed.

In this way, by providing a period (state) in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second prize opening 640 during the normal state, it is possible to use the special drawing 2 lottery without having to shift the gaming state to the time-saving state. It is possible to provide the player with a game feature, that is, a game feature that allows the player to execute a jackpot game based on a small win win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing a game in the normal state for a long time from getting bored with the game without experiencing the gameplay using the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, there is a game that aims to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is executed based on a ball entering the first prize opening 64, and a game that aims for a jackpot when a ball enters the through gate 67. Since the game aiming at a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the passing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed at the same time, the interest of the game in the normal state can be improved.

Note that the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the type of jackpot that is selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball enters the second prize opening 640 (lottery corresponding to the second special symbol) and becomes a jackpot (jackpot AD, jackpot AE, jackpot AF). In this case, a game state in which the time saving is given 99 times (the high probability state of the normal symbol is set until the special symbol variation is executed 99 times) at a rate of 100% as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. is set. Then, when the ball enters the first prize opening 64 (it becomes a jackpot in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the jackpot that gives the 99 time-saving gaming state is a jackpot AA (a jackpot). The jackpot type is selected such that it is more advantageous for the player if the ball enters the second winning hole 640. With this configuration, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state where time saving is not given), it is easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64 than the second winning opening 640, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 more easily. By placing a game ball in the 1 winning hole 64, a jackpot (jackpot AA) in which 99 special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) fluctuate is given as a condition for ending the time-saving gaming state. If the selection rate is set low and the time saving is given and the ball is easy to enter the second prize opening 640, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the time saving state will easily continue. It can be configured as follows. Therefore, the value of being given time savings can be increased.

In the 16th embodiment, a through gate 67, a second winning opening 640 (electric accessory 640a), a variable winning device 65, and a V winning device 650 are arranged in the right side game area, and a lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is provided. A game in which a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn, and a game in a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) can be executed as a right-handed game. There is. This eliminates the need for the player to change the ball launch direction (left side game area direction, right side game area direction) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small winning game, and the big winning game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the direction in which the ball is launched in a complicated manner, and to play the game comfortably. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when a gaming state (time saving state, small winning gaming state, jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player is set than when the normal state is set as the gaming state. Since the configuration is such that the player is forced to play the right-handed game, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small winning game is executed, and is a V winning device that can be changed between an open state where a ball can be won in the V winning opening 650a and a closed state where it is difficult to win. It has a winning door 650b. This V-winning door 650b is configured such that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and when the V-winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball cannot be fired by a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. In addition, there is a specific area (V area) not shown inside the V winning hole 650a, and the ball that won the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game (including the ball handling period after the small winning game ends). The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed when the player passes through a specific area (V area).

Note that the configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known and common technology in the industry, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. A plurality of channels through which the balls can pass may be provided, and only the balls that have passed through a specific channel can pass through a specific area (V area). A distribution member that distributes the flow direction, for example, a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule from when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10, or a distribution member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a jackpot game. A member or a sorting member that is constantly driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a specific number of rounds of a jackpot game is provided, and the balls sorted by the sorting member pass through a specific area (V area). It may be configured such that a jackpot game is executed when the player wins the game.

Furthermore, there are multiple types of small winning games that are executed when a small winning is won, such as a small winning game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. It may be configured such that the type of small winning to be executed and the type of small winning in which a small winning game is executed in which the ball does not easily pass through a specific area (V area) can be set. In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is changed depending on the type of small winning won, and when playing a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V area), the V winning opening 650a is The configuration is such that an opening pattern of the V winning door 650b that makes it difficult for balls to enter is set, and balls are distributed to areas other than the specific area (V area) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the distribution member at the right timing. In addition, as a small winning game executed based on a small winning winning, a small winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and not the V winning device 650 can be set, and the small winning game is executed. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the ball cannot physically pass through a specific area (V area) in the V winning device 650.

The variable winning device 65 is a winning device that is opened during a jackpot game, and has a winning door 65b that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter a specific winning opening 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter a specific winning opening 65a. have. This winning door 65b is configured such that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is in the closed state, and when the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the ball fired in the right-handed game is The upper surface of the winning door 65b is configured such that it flows down toward the out port 66 direction.

<About the game performance of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the game performance of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be explained. FIG. 362 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 362, the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, The configuration is such that one of the following (high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

Then, when a left-handed game is played during the normal state and a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) in the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game. Here, a description will be given of the setting contents of the time saving state that is set when the special drawing 1 jackpot is won during the normal state. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to Figure 381, but if you win a special drawing jackpot during the normal state, one of the three jackpot types will be set, and the jackpot type will be set for each jackpot type. Different time-saving termination conditions are specified. The time saving end condition is a condition for ending the time saving state, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

If you win the special pattern 1 jackpot in the normal state, as shown in Figure 362, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are 99 times. The jackpot type (jackpot AA) for which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of changes of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 5 is set at a rate of 1%. The jackpot type (jackpot AB) that is established is set at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot type (jackpot AC) that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 1 is set. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if you win the special map 1 jackpot during the normal state, the time-saving state will always be set after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the set jackpot type, the ease of continuation of the time-saving state (time-saving end) conditions) are different.

Although the details will be described later, in the 16th embodiment, the winning information of the special drawing 2 can be stored in a maximum of four pieces, so one time saving is set as the time saving end condition. Even in this case, the time saving state is set while the first special figure 2 variation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 variation stops), and the electric accessory 640a is easy to open. Since it is in the state, it is possible to easily store the winning information of the special drawing 2 on hold. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition for one time saving is set, the winning information of special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 pending) will be held and stored during the period when special drawing 2 variation is executed once during the time saving state. By playing the game that causes the player to move, the special figure 2 variation after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state can be executed up to four times. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won, a large number of special drawing 2 drawings can be executed, making it easier for the player to experience a jackpot game via a small jackpot win.

On the other hand, if you win a special small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery during the normal state (small winning probability 1/500), it will be executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area) during the small winning game. After the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reach 99 times, the small winning type ( The small hit type (AA) is set at a rate of 10%, and the small win type (small win AB) in which the time-saving end condition is met when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 5 times is 40%. The small winning type (small winning AC) in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 1 is set at a ratio of 50%. It is composed of

As mentioned above, in the present 16th embodiment, when a jackpot is won (a symbol jackpot is won) and a small jack is won by the special drawing 1 lottery executed in a state where the normal state is set, When a ball passes through a specific area during a small winning game and a jackpot game is executed (V jackpot), or when a jackpot game is executed due to any trigger, the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 lottery, the ease of continuation of the time saving state is changed depending on the execution trigger of the jackpot game. There is. As mentioned above, among the execution opportunities of the jackpot game, in the case of an execution opportunity that is easy to occur (jackpot winning by special drawing 1 lottery), the average number of times the time saving state that is set after the jackpot game continues is 2.58 times, In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to establish (small winning by special drawing 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is 12.4 times.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of opportunities to execute a jackpot game, by associating the ease of establishing an execution opportunity with the ease of continuation of an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) that can be set after establishment, it is possible to Even if a jackpot game is executed due to an execution opportunity, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player.

In the 16th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 361, the lottery of normal symbols (common symbols) is configured to be executed even while the left-handed game in the normal state is being executed. , the probability is 1/10 that the winning pattern is won. Then, the configuration is such that a game for winning a regular pattern (long opening game) is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 1/100 of winning for a winning pattern for a regular pattern. There is. In other words, a state is set in which the special pattern 2 lottery can be executed with a probability of about 1/1000 of the regular pattern lottery executed while the normal state is set (long open winning game).

When a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 during the long open winning game, the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, the flow of the game when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state will be explained with reference to FIG. 362. In the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) in the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery. If you win a jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery, the time will be shortened if the number of changes of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and the number of changes of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (jackpot AD to AF) for which the end condition is satisfied is set (see FIG. 381). In other words, in the normal state, between the Tokuzu 1 lottery and Tokuzu 2 lottery, which have the same jackpot probability, it is difficult to trigger the execution of the Tokuzu 2 lottery (difficult to place a ball in the corresponding starting prize opening). The configuration is such that it is easier to set a time-saving state in which the time-saving termination condition is difficult to satisfy after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, when a player wins a winning lottery in a general drawing and a long open winning game is executed (1/1000), it is possible to motivate the player to execute the special drawing 2 drawing. can.

Next, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery (approximately 1/7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small winning in the special drawing 1 drawing (1/500). (See Figure 380). Then, after the end of the jackpot game that is executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area) during the small win game, the time saving state is always set. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) reaches 5 times, the small win type (small win AE) in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied is 60%. It is configured so that it is set at a ratio of . In other words, in the normal state, the average number of times the time-saving state that is set via the small winning of the special drawing 2 lottery is continued is 42.6 times, and the jackpot game is executed via the small winning of the special drawing 1 drawing in the normal state. It becomes easier to set a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to satisfy (easier to continue).

In this way, in a game in the normal state, although the probability is low, you win a jackpot in the regular drawing lottery, and when a long open winning game is executed (1/1000), it is more likely than winning a jackpot in the special drawing drawing. By configuring the system so that it is easy to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can play the game aiming for a big hit or a small win in the special drawing 1 lottery, while also being able to Taking the win of the drawing drawing as an opportunity, the player can play a game aiming at a big win or a small winning in the special drawing drawing 2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 361, when a left-handed game is performed to win a ball into the first prize opening 64, the ball fired into the game area (ball flowing down the left side game area) can pass through. Since a through gate 67 is provided in the slot, a game in which a special drawing 1 lottery is performed and a game in which a regular drawing lottery is performed without requiring a player who is playing a normal game to change the direction of ball launch. can be performed in parallel.

In addition, in this embodiment, the more a jackpot game is executed at an opportunity that is difficult to achieve, the more likely a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this; It may be configured so that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set when a jackpot game is executed in ) may be configured so that when a jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is likely to be set.

In addition, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small winning game (small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 drawing) (in the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the small winning game ends (corresponding to the flow shown by the dotted line in FIG. 361). This prevents excessive benefits from being given to players who engage in illegal games in which they intentionally do not let the ball enter a specific area (V area) while a small winning game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be explained. In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a becomes easier to open and it becomes easier to win a ball in the second prize opening 640, so a right-handed game that mainly executes the special drawing 2 lottery is executed. Ru.

This time-saving state continues until a predetermined time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the system is configured to shift to the normal state. This time-saving termination condition is configured so that different conditions are set depending on the jackpot type set for the jackpot won in the special drawing lottery or the small hit type set for the won small win. There is. Specifically, no matter which win type (big win type, small win type) is set, there is a common time-saving end condition that is set as a common condition, and a response where different conditions are set depending on the win type. A time-saving ending condition is defined, and the common time-saving ending conditions include a first ending condition that is met when winning a jackpot (at the start of a jackpot game), a second ending condition that is met when a small winning game ends, and a time-saving ending condition. A third end condition is set that is satisfied when the number of special symbol (special symbol) fluctuations executed during the state (accumulation of the number of special symbol 1 fluctuations and the number of special symbol 2 fluctuations) reaches 99, The corresponding time-saving termination conditions include a short termination condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time-saving state is 1, and a medium-term termination condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time-saving state is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the winning type.

As mentioned above, the corresponding time saving end condition is set based on the number of times the special chart 2 changes that mainly change during the time saving state, so for example, if the corresponding time saving end condition exists at the time the time saving state is set. Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state based on the pending storage of the special figure 1 variation, the corresponding time saving end condition will not be satisfied. Therefore, even though the time-saving state advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending without the special drawing 2 lottery being executed. In addition, since the corresponding time saving end condition is established based on the number of special figure 2 variations, it is possible to easily specify the number of special figure 2 variations to be executed during the time saving state, and the player It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special drawing 2 lottery) to customers.

Note that in the 16th embodiment, the common time saving ending conditions and the corresponding time saving ending conditions can be set as the time saving ending conditions as described above, but the settings are not limited to the settings of this embodiment. For example, in the 16th embodiment, the termination condition regarding the small winning game that is predetermined as the common time saving ending condition is that the ending condition is set when the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches a specific number (for example, 3 times). It may be configured so that the termination condition regarding the small winning game is satisfied, or the termination condition regarding the small winning game may be set as the corresponding time saving termination condition, and the number of executions of the small winning game where the termination condition regarding the small winning game is satisfied is varied depending on the type of win. It may be configured. Further, in this embodiment, the second end condition is established when the small winning game is executed regardless of the small winning type set at the time of winning the small winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the second end condition is satisfied when a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type is executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second ending condition is established when the small winning game ends; however, the second ending condition is not limited to this, and the second ending condition is satisfied when the small winning game starts (when the small winning is won). It may be configured so that the following holds true.

By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time-saving end condition is met based on a small winning win during the time-saving state, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time-saving state will continue. You can play games.

Returning to FIG. 362, the flow of the game during the time saving state will be explained. If you win a jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery during the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are the same as in the normal state. Any of the jackpot types (jackpot AD to AF) for which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 381). In other words, only the common time-saving termination condition is set as the time-saving termination condition.

On the other hand, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the jackpot game executed via the small winning winning ends, in addition to the common time saving ending conditions mentioned above, the A time-saving state is set in which a corresponding time-saving end condition is set. Specifically, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and after the jackpot game that is executed via the small winning winning ends, the special drawing 2 fluctuation will be applied at a rate of 10% as a corresponding time saving end condition. The number of times is set to 5, and the configuration is such that 90% of the time, the corresponding time saving end condition is not set (actually 99 times is set).

As mentioned above, in the present 16th embodiment, the setting ratio of the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the small winning of the special drawing 2 lottery is set to the gaming state at the time of winning the small winning. It is different depending on the situation, and it is more difficult for the time-saving end condition to be satisfied if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state than if you win a small winning in the special drawing 2 drawing during the time-saving state (correspondence The system is configured so that a time-saving state (where no time-saving end condition is set) is easily set.

With this configuration, for example, when the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the state transitions to the normal state, a small hit can be won by the special figure 2 lottery that is held and stored. By doing so, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so that the player can be made to play the game enthusiastically in order to acquire a large number of reserved memories of special symbols 2 until just before the time-saving state ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the fluctuation performance (final fluctuation performance) executed in response to the final fluctuation of the time-saving state (the special figure 2 fluctuation in which the corresponding time-saving end condition is satisfied) In addition to the fluctuating lottery results, the system is configured to notify the pre-reading results of the winning information of the special drawing 2 which is reserved and stored. By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to notify the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery with the performance result of the final variation performance being a maximum of 5 times. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that a win (small win, jackpot win) will be announced as a performance result of the final fluctuation performance to be higher than that of a fluctuation performance in which only the lottery result of one special drawing 2 lottery is announced. This allows the player to watch the performance content with interest.

In addition, since it is configured to notify the lottery results (including the look-ahead results) of the special drawing 2 drawing during the time saving state and the special drawing 2 drawing during the normal state at the same time, this final variation effect will result in winnings. is notified, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is a special figure 2 lottery in a time-saving state or a special figure 2 lottery in a normal state. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving end conditions are set at different rates depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit as in this embodiment, the jackpot that is executed based on the current small win winning To prevent a player from easily understanding what kind of time-saving end conditions a time-saving state with time-saving ending conditions is set after the end of a game, depending on the performance mode (performance timing) of a variable performance.

In addition, the present embodiment is configured to set a short (0.5 second) variation time as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state. It is configured to display the effect of the above-mentioned final variation effect as a short-time variation effect. As a result, even if it is configured to notify the pre-reading result of the winning information of the special drawing 2 which has been reserved and stored in the final variation effect executed in response to the final variation of the time-saving state, the target of the pre-reading result The final variation effect can be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation ends. Then, when the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining reservation after the end of the time saving state (the special figure 2 variation during the normal state) is completed (when the number of special figure 2 pending memories becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery A left-handed game aiming for execution is played.

As explained above, in the 16th embodiment, even if the normal state is set, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long opening in the general lottery), The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured such that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 lottery. As a result, in the normal state, it is possible for the player to play a game in which the general drawing lottery is executed in parallel with a game in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed by aiming at the first winning hole 64, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

<About the flow of production in the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 363 to 377, the characteristic performance contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is configured such that when the normal state is set, a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, during the execution of the special pattern 1 variation, if a long opening win is won in the general lottery, the general pattern variation effect is displayed so as to interrupt the variation effect of the special pattern 1 variation. has been done.

Here, the normal pattern fluctuation performance is from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, through the normal pattern winning game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period, to win a ball to the second prize opening 640, and to correspond to the winning ball. This game is executed as part of a series of performances using the period from when a small hit is won due to the special figure 2 variation and a jackpot game is executed based on the small win.

Here, in recent years, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) per normal pattern (long opening). Some attempts are made to set the lottery contents of the general map lottery so that a player can win, and to temporarily execute an advantageous special map lottery (for example, special map 2 lottery) during a normal state. In such a gaming machine, players who have been playing a game in a normal state for a long period of time can be made to perform an advantageous special drawing lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, in such a gaming machine, a general pattern fluctuation effect is executed to show the general pattern fluctuation lottery result, and the result of the general pattern lottery is executed by the time the winning game for the long opening is executed for the player. A production that can provide the enjoyment of predicting the following is executed using a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (a display area smaller than the display area in which the variation production corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed). There is also.

However, in recent gaming machines that execute only the general pattern variation effect that can notify the player that a winning game for a long opening will be executed, the above-mentioned variable effect of the special pattern 2 lottery obtained by the winning game and the above-mentioned There is no relation to the normal figure fluctuation performance that was performed, and the special figure 2 lottery was executed due to the privilege given to the player by the winning game for the long opening, that is, the winning game for the long opening was executed. There was a problem in that it was not possible to notify the user in an easy-to-understand manner, and it was not possible to enhance the performance effect of the general figure fluctuation performance.

On the other hand, in the 16th embodiment, from the start timing of the normal pattern variation, after the normal pattern winning game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period, a ball is placed in the second prize opening 640, and the winning ball is It is configured to execute a series of performances using a period until a small hit is won by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation and a jackpot game is executed based on the small win. As a result, by executing a series of performances, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game up to the execution of the jackpot game in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery results of the common drawing lottery, thereby increasing the performance effect. can.

Here, when executing the series of performances described above, if a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 during a winning game with a long open pattern, that is, while the electric accessory 640a is left open for a long period of time. Moreover, a problem arises in that the timing at which the special pattern 2 variation based on the winning is started varies greatly depending on the fluctuation status of the special pattern 1 variation. Specifically, for example, when a ball is entered into the second prize opening 640, the special pattern 1 variation is being executed, and the remaining variation time of the special pattern 1 variation is 120 seconds. , the period (standby period) from when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640 until the special map 2 fluctuation starts is 120 seconds. If a series of performances were to be executed continuously in such a situation, there was a problem in that the performance form of the series of performances would be delayed, and the player would become bored with the performances.

To solve this problem, in the 16th embodiment, if the above-mentioned waiting period is 60 seconds or more, the series of performances is artificially ended, and then the series of performances is executed again. The configuration is such that the mode is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the presentation mode of a series of presentations is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363, the flow of the variation performance related to the special symbol variation and the variation production related to the regular symbol variation executed during the normal state will be explained. FIG. 363(a) shows the flow of the production that is executed when the waiting period from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 until the start of special drawing 2 variation is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds) FIG. 363(b) is a timing chart showing the waiting period from when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 to when the special chart 2 variation starts for a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more). 12 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects performed in the case of

As shown in FIG. 363(a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed until the variation corresponding to the normal pattern long opening (long opening variation) is executed in the normal pattern variation. A variation effect (special 1 effect) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is executed using the entire surface of the . Here, with reference to FIG. 365(a), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation will be explained. FIG. 365(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation effect). As shown in FIG. 365(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is vertically divided into a main display area Dm and a sub display area Ds, and the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether it is in the lottery (changing) or not, and the lottery result). Then, the fourth symbol (special symbol 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed. The configuration is such that a fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the following is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to display the lottery status of the special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is displayed variably in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (Fig. 365 (Indicated by a downward arrow in (a)) to indicate the situation where the special symbol is changing, and by displaying the fourth symbol in a stopped state in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 368(a)) ), it is configured to show the lottery results of special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as the fourth symbol or a display mode that shows a plurality of colors can be used to display a figure. It is configured to indicate that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode in which it is transformed or the display mode in which the color is varied, and to show the lottery result of the special symbol by stopping and displaying the display mode showing a specific symbol or color. You may do so.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not it is in the lottery (changing) and the lottery result), but this is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changing). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 365(a), in this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is replaced with the main display area. Although an example is shown in which the fourth symbol display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size where this fourth symbol display area is formed can be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable effect executed in the center part of the main display area Dm. It may be different.

Specifically, in a variable effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, it is possible to know whether the variable effect being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. If a performance mode is set to make it difficult to play, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) so that it is difficult for the player to see. Also, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol or displaying only one display area, the player can change the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may also be configured such that the type of special symbol being executed cannot be easily determined by just using the special symbol. With this configuration, the type of special symbol currently being executed is grasped depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the production effect of the variable production executed in the main display area Dm is reduced. This can prevent such a situation from occurring.

In addition, as mentioned above, although it is announced that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period in which the special symbol (special symbol) is changing, If the type is configured to be displayed in a variable manner that makes it difficult to distinguish, the result of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery) and the special symbol type can be notified by the stop display mode after the variable display ends. For example, when a red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol corresponding to special figure 1 (special 1 fourth symbol) is displayed. If a blue stop display mode is displayed in the symbol), it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special symbol 2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed and reducing the performance effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol is displayed variably using the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is best to configure it to run.

Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed near (on the left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls of the special figure 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area Dm2a is formed near (on the left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 365(a) described later, the number of reserved balls for each special pattern is displayed using numbers in the reserved number display area (small display areas Dm1a, Dm1b). Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow the number of reserved pitches in the acquired drawing to be identified.

A small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (in the upper left direction from the center of the main display area Dm). This small display area Dm4 displays a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be launched (game direction) (see FIG. 366(b)).

In the sixteenth embodiment, the small display area Dm4 is used as a guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily understand which area of the game board 13 he should shoot the ball toward just by visually checking the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm4), there is a display mode of "right-handed play" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for instructing the player to play a left-handed game. A display mode for "left-handed play" and a display mode for "right-handed play" are displayed to guide the player. It is displayed during a time saving state, a jackpot game, and a small win game, and the display mode of "left-hand hit" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-hand hit game ends. ing. In addition, even if it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a normal state, the "left-handed game" is The display mode is configured to be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 365(a), the explanation will be continued. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the above-mentioned small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the result of determining in advance the winning information held and stored (pre-reading result ) is configured to display a display mode that can be suggested to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game that will be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol that has been stored on hold).

Furthermore, a small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) of the normal symbol (common symbol) is displayed, It is configured such that a fourth symbol (a fourth symbol of a common symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the symbol (a common symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed near the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is displayed. In addition to the value indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding normal symbol, the above-mentioned small display area Dm3a can suggest and inform the player of the result of determining in advance the winning information held and stored (pre-reading result). It is configured to display a display mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the normal symbol that is stored on hold).

Furthermore, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 365(b), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments regarding the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. Note that the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information indicating the number of reserved balls for each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a pending display mode (eg, a circular pending symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub display area Ds. Further, it is preferable to configure the game system so that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol based on the displayed number of reserved display modes. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to vary the corresponding hold display mode based on the result of the determination.

With this configuration, the player can play the game with the expectation that he or she will win the jackpot by drawing a special symbol that corresponds to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed among the plurality of reserved symbols that may exist. can be set. Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since the configuration is such that the suspended symbols are displayed corresponding to the individual number of suspended symbols, the display mode is designed to show the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the multiple suspended symbols. A result display that easily displays a variable pending symbol display can be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to this, a game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display being executed in the main display area Dm. A performance explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and a winning related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are in the sub display area Ds. The display area ratio between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to vary depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there is a pending ball, the third symbol will be stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result is a loss. After that, a fixed display is displayed, and then a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved balls is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state remains until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. There is a situation where there is no winning (ball) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 even though the player shoots the ball continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). This is rare, and in many cases where the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the player has quit playing, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games at all. This is due to this.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entering is executed. be done.

Note that in FIG. 365(a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown as being displayed in the main display area Dm; When the display mode to guide is not displayed, the small display area Dm4 itself is configured not to be displayed. In this way, in a state where there is no need to provide guidance on the gaming method (direction), by deleting the display area where the guidance display area is displayed, the area where other display modes (for example, variable effect display mode) are displayed can be created. Since it can be made wider, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 363(a), the explanation will be continued. When a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the special figure 1 variation is being executed and the regular figure long open variation is executed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A normal symbol fluctuation effect is executed to show the normal symbol (common symbol) fluctuation using (see point A in FIG. 363(a)). Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point A in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 365(b).

After that, when the variation time of the regular pattern long open variation passes a predetermined time, the special pattern variation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display area of the general pattern variation effect are displayed. The process of switching the size is executed, the general figure variation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the special figure variation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (FIG. 363(a)) (See point B). Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point B in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366(a).

In this embodiment, the timing for switching the size of the display area between the special pattern variation effect and the normal pattern variation effect is set to 10 seconds after the start of the normal pattern variation effect. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set in some cases where the result of the lottery of common symbols is a loss. It is configured so that the normal pattern variation effect (see FIG. 365(b)) is executed even when the deviation variation is set.

By configuring in this way, when the normal pattern variation effect is executed based on the normal pattern deviation variation (10 seconds), the display area of the special pattern variation effect and the normal pattern variation effect does not switch, and the normal pattern variation effect is executed. A performance is executed in which the variable performance ends. Therefore, after the normal pattern variation effect is executed, the display areas for the special pattern variation effect and the normal pattern variation effect are switched and displayed (see FIG. 366(a)), so that the common pattern variation effect being executed becomes normal. It is possible to increase expectations due to long open fluctuations.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the long open fluctuation of the common figure has elapsed, the game per normal figure (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the game per common figure is displayed (see point C in FIG. 363(a)) . Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 366(b).

Here, the display contents of the normal pattern fluctuation effect executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation will be explained with reference to FIGS. 365(b) to 366(b). FIG. 365(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the general pattern variation effect is started (see point A in FIG. 363(a)). As shown in FIG. 365(b), when the general pattern variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed at the lower right side of the main display area Dm (lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , the general pattern fluctuation performance begins.

In other words, the small display area Dm5 becomes a normal pattern variation effect display area where the normal pattern variation effect is executed. Then, as a general pattern variation effect, a effect is performed in which the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches it. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 365(b), since the special figure 1 fluctuation and the regular figure fluctuation are being executed, the display mode (Fig. 365(b), a "downward arrow") is displayed, and a display mode indicating that the general map is being displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm3 (in FIG. 365(b), a "downward arrow" is displayed). (indicated by an arrow) is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Treasure chest found! If you reach it, you have a chance!!" are displayed to the effect that the general figure fluctuation effect has been executed and as a comment to indicate the content of the general figure change effect. . Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner what type of performance the normal figure fluctuation performance executed in a part of the main display area Dm should progress to in the future.

Thereafter, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the general figure fluctuation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 366(a) is displayed. FIG. 366(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the display area of the normal pattern variation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 363(a)). As shown in FIG. 366(a), when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the normal pattern variation effect, the normal pattern variation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first pattern variation effect is executed. A variable display effect of the special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in a small region Dm6 formed in a portion (lower left portion) of the main display region Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "great chance" indicating that the normal pattern variation performance has progressed (indicating that the result of the general pattern lottery was not a variation out of the normal pattern) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 365(b) and FIG. 366(a), a variable effect (special pattern variable effect, general pattern variable effect) for showing the lottery results of multiple symbol lots (special pattern lottery, general pattern lottery) are executed at the same time, the size of the display area in which each variable effect is executed is varied according to the suggestion situation of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, so that the player can receive multiple symbol lottery draws. It is possible to notify that variable effects for showing the results are being executed at the same time, and also to notify in an easy-to-understand manner which variable effects to watch depending on the size of the display area in which each variable effect is executed. can.

Although illustration is omitted, when the executed normal figure variation effect is a normal figure off variation (10 seconds), from the display screen of FIG. 365(b), the small display area Dm5 gradually becomes smaller and finally A performance in which the small display area Dm5 is no longer displayed is executed, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery corresponding to the current regular symbol variation performance is a loss. In this way, when the normal pattern variation effect is executed based on the normal pattern deviation variation, only the normal pattern variation effect using a smaller display area than the special pattern variation display effect is executed. The figure variation performance does not interfere with the special figure variation performance.

In other words, according to the above-mentioned example, a loss (a deviation from the normal pattern (10 seconds)) is selected as the performance result of the normal pattern fluctuation performance (the result of the general pattern lottery that triggered the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation performance). During the period in which there is a possibility, that is, from the start of the normal pattern variation effect until 10 seconds have passed, the display mode shown in FIG. The player is notified that the fluctuating effects are being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have elapsed since the fluctuating performance has started, the result of the fluctuating performance (the result of the fluctuating performance that triggered the execution of the fluctuating performance) is displayed. Figure 366(a) As shown in , a display mode is executed in which the display area of the regular figure variation effect is large (larger than the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed).

As a result, as the probability of the drawing result being advantageous to the player as a lottery result of the normal figure fluctuation effect, that is, a lottery result in which a winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is released long, increases, Since the display area in which the performance is executed can be enlarged, the player can be made to properly watch the normal pattern variation performance. Also, for example, if a normal pattern variation effect is executed based on a normal pattern deviation variation (10 seconds), the normal pattern variation effect is executed in a smaller display area (see FIG. 365(b)) than the special pattern variation effect. Since the process ends with only the effect, the visibility of the special figure variation effect is not obstructed. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the general drawing lottery, the size of the display area at the time of starting the general drawing fluctuation effect is unified, so the drawing of the general drawing drawing depends on the display format immediately after the general drawing fluctuation effect starts. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting the result.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 365(b) and FIG. 366(a), the display area where the regular figure variation effect is executed is larger than the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 365(b))) and a display area (see FIG. 366(a)) larger than the display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 366(a)) where the special figure variation effect is executed. (See (a)) and 2 types of sizes are provided, but the size is not limited to this, and three or more types of display area sizes for the general figure variation effect may be provided, for example, the special figure variation effect. A display area that is approximately the same size as the display area where the process is performed may be used.

Further, in the present 16th embodiment, the display area in which the general pattern variation effect is executed gradually becomes larger as the general pattern variation effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display area in which the variable effect is performed may be made smaller than the initial range (see FIG. 365(b)), and then changed to the final range (see FIG. 366(a)). . With this configuration, it is possible to continue the normal pattern fluctuation performance while making the player think that the normal pattern fluctuation performance will end, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance. can.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, when the special pattern variation performance and the regular pattern variation performance are executed at the same time, by varying the size of the display area where each variation performance is executed, the player can However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mode of the display area in which each variable effect is executed (for example, the color of the outline of the display area, the color of the background of the display area, etc.) the output mode of the audio corresponding to each variable production (for example, outputting only the audio corresponding to one variation production, or varying the output level (volume) of the audio corresponding to each variation production) By setting the output mode), the player may be made to pay attention to any one of the plurality of variable effects.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the range of the display area in which the general pattern variation effect is executed is configured to be varied according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the general pattern variation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal figure variation effect is executed is configured to be variable based on the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, It may be configured to set a variable range of the display area in which the general pattern fluctuation effect is executed based on the progress of the presentation (elapsed time) and the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) of the general pattern lottery. .

With this configuration, for players who want to quickly grasp the lottery results of the regular lottery during the regular lottery performance, the regular lottery will be displayed based on the range of the display area that changes based on the operation of the operating means. For players who wish to grasp the lottery results based on the performance results of the general pattern fluctuation performance, there is a display area where the general pattern fluctuation performance is executed without having the player operate the operating means. It is possible to perform a general figure variation effect without changing the range of the figure.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the general pattern long opening fluctuation has elapsed and the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is displayed as a long opening winning, the long opening winning is executed after that, as shown in FIG. 366(b). The display screen will appear. FIG. 366(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display contents displayed when the player wins the regular long opening and the long opening winning game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 366(b), when a winning is achieved in the long opening of the general map, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm, and the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 from inside the treasure box 852 to show that the winning is achieved in the opening of the long opening in the general drawing. An effect in which the capsule 853 appears is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (displayed as "three circles" in the figure) to indicate that the result of the common drawing lottery is a long open win is displayed, and in the small display area Dm4 , "Right hit" is displayed in order to play a game in which a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 (right-handed game), and the small display area Dm5 visually indicates the position where the ball is won in the right-handed game. As a guide display mode for notification, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right side gaming area of the game board 13 (near the second winning hole 640) is displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 366(b), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed even while the regular figure long open winning game is being executed, the small display area Dm1 shows that the special figure 1 is changing. The fourth symbol of special figure 1 is displayed in a display mode showing that the special figure fluctuation effect is displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 366(a) (displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, without changing the size of the display area where the regular figure variation effect is executed, by reducing the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed, the display area where the special figure variation effect is executed. Since the display area in which the normal figure variation effect is executed can be made relatively large, the content of the normal figure variation effect can be made more noticeable to the player.

Then, the comment "Challenge GET" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, informing the player that the normal pattern variation performance will further progress. Here, in the present 16th embodiment, in some cases where the lottery result of the Fuzu drawing is a win, the variation time (60 seconds) that is the same as the variation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning the Fuzu long open winning is determined. The configuration is such that a short-circuit release variation (60 seconds) is set. When the general pattern variation effect is executed in response to this general pattern short opening variation, the general pattern variation effect progresses until a display mode similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 366(b) is displayed, and the treasure box An effect is performed in which a winning pattern is displayed to indicate that the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is a winning lottery result from among 852.

In other words, when a winning result is won in the general drawing lottery and a short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be opened to such an extent that the ball cannot enter the second prize opening 640. ing. In this case, even if a right-handed game is executed, it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, so the comment "Right-handed player" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. .

In addition, in this embodiment, a long open winning game in which a ball can be won in the second prize opening 640 is executed as a winning game (a game in which the electric accessory 640a is operated to open) when a winning result is won in the general drawing lottery. The present invention is configured so that two types of winning games can be executed: and a short open winning game in which it is difficult to enter a ball into the second winning opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of winning games can be executed. For example, as a long opening winning game in which a ball can be won in the second prize opening 640, a winning game in which the opening timing and opening time of the electric accessory 640a are different may be executed. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the regular figure long opening game, so the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the winning game. It is possible to prevent a game in which a ball is won into the second prize opening 640 from being played. In addition, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal pattern variation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode notifying the start of the normal pattern winning game) may be configured to be different. . Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning ball firing timing in the second winning opening 640 based on the performance mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 363(a), the flow of the performance will be explained. When a right-handed game is played while a game is being played, and the ball enters the second winning hole 640 (see point C in FIG. 363(a)), the display mode indicating this is displayed in the third It is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81. Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(a).

Here, in the present 16th embodiment, the special figure 1 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel) ), and the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed preferentially over the special figure 1 variation.

Therefore, when a ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during a game with a regular figure, if the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the winning information of the special figure 2 is held and stored, and the winning information of the special figure 1 that is being executed is During the period (waiting period) until the variation ends, execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited. After that, when the running special pattern 1 variation ends, the special pattern 2 variation based on the winning information held and stored is preferentially executed, and the special pattern 2 variation is an advanced version of the above-mentioned general pattern variation performance. A variation effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 363(a)). Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point D in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(b).

After that, when the special figure 2 variation ends and the special figure 2 stops displaying in the display mode indicating a small hit win (see point E in Figure 363 (a)), the special figure 2 to indicate a small hit win. A variable performance is executed. Note that the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point E in FIG. 363(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 368(a). Then, while the small winning game is being executed, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 (see point F in FIG. 363(a)), the small winning game is executed. After the winning game ends, a display mode indicating that the jackpot game will be executed is displayed (see FIG. 368(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 367(a) to FIG. 368(b), the normal pattern long open winning game is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol is reached before the jackpot game is executed based on the winning game. The content of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be explained.

In the 16th embodiment, a series of games (normal pattern variation, normal pattern hit, special pattern 2 variation, special pattern 2 small hit , a game executed in the flow of a jackpot), the system is configured to execute a series of effects with a story. Specifically, the game player is informed that the production contents of the normal pattern fluctuation production described with reference to FIGS. 365(b) to 366(b) will progress, and that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the progress of the production. It becomes possible to suggest.

With this configuration, a series of performances are used to determine whether or not an execution opportunity that is more complex than the execution opportunity established when winning a jackpot in a special symbol (special symbol) lottery is established as an execution opportunity for a jackpot game. This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand games to players.

FIG. 367(a) shows that in the state shown in FIG. 366(b), that is, in the state where the long open win game executed during the special drawing 1 variation is being executed, a ball has won in the second winning hole 640. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen for indicating this. As shown in FIG. 367(a), when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a game of long open winning, the capsule 853 is broken and a suggestion is made from inside the capsule 853 indicating the content of the game to be executed in the future. A ticket 854 with "Challenge Game" written as the mode is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Challenge Game GET" is displayed to notify that a challenge game will be executed from now on.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 367(a), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is immediately executed based on the ball winning in the second winning hole 640. The winning information of the special drawing 2 will be stored on hold without being released. Therefore, "1" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, indicating that one piece of winning information of the special drawing 2 has been acquired. Then, when the special pattern 1 variation that was being executed in the state of FIG. (See Figure 367(b)).

FIG. 367(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the challenge game. As shown in FIG. 367(b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during execution of a series of effects, a challenge game is started. This challenge game is a performance executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 367(a), a plurality of result display modes 861a for showing the performance results - 861e are rotated in order, and a performance is performed in which the result display modes 861a to 861e stopped and displayed within the result display area 860 are the current performance results.

In the 16th embodiment, the result display mode 861a is a result display mode 861a in which a "cross mark" is attached to indicate that the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a "miss", and a "small win". A result display mode 861d with a "V" attached to indicate that it is a "big win", a result display mode 861c with a "777" attached to indicate a "jackpot", and a result display mode 861c that does not notify the lottery result of special drawing 2. It has a result display mode 861b with a "?" mark, and a result display mode 861e with a "NEXT" mark indicating that the challenge game will be executed again.

Here, the result display mode 861b marked with "?" as the performance result of the challenge game is when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". This can be selected in the challenge game, and an effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is not announced. Note that even when this result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "right-handed hitting" is displayed in the small area Dm4.

With this configuration, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as a performance result of the challenge game, a right-handed game is performed without knowing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball fired in the right-handed game will win the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game or the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, Will the player win the second winning hole 640 that is opened during the normal game, or will he not win the special game (big hit, small win) or the regular game, and will not win in any of the winning holes. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is falling while observing the actual falling behavior of the ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that in the sixteenth embodiment, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the performance result of the challenge game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, by changing the display mode of the result display mode 861b, the lottery result of the current special drawing 2 lottery is announced as the performance result of the challenge game. It may be possible to do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in a way that it is difficult to understand which special drawing 2 lottery result the result display mode 861b corresponds to during the execution of the challenge game, and when the challenge game ends. Then, it is possible to notify the player of the performance result of the current challenge game, that is, the lottery result of special drawing 2.

Further, the result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 367(b) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the 16th embodiment, if multiple pieces of winning information for special figure 2 are acquired during a long open winning game, the lottery for special figure 2 continues until a jackpot or small win is won in the lottery for special figure 2. is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special pattern 2 lottery is a loss, the second special pattern 2 lottery will be executed subsequently, so the challenge will be executed in response to the first special pattern 2 variation. The result display mode 861e is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect of the game, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special drawing 2 lottery is a win (big hit, small win), any of the result display modes 861b to 861d for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Ru.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special drawing 2 acquired during the long open winning game without feeling strange. In addition, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the variable time set in the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state is the variable time (10 seconds) corresponding to one challenge game, and the variable time (20 seconds) corresponding to two challenges. ) is configured to be settable, and when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a loss, the variable time of 20 seconds is configured to be less likely to be selected than the variable time of 10 seconds.

As a result, if the challenge game is executed twice with one special pattern 2 fluctuation effect, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning in the special pattern 2 lottery (big hit, small win). . In addition, when the result display mode 861e with "NEXT" added by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is displayed as one special figure 2. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it was executed within the variation time or whether it was executed across two special figure 2 variations.

Since the state shown in FIG. 367 is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the special figure 1 variation that was fluctuating at the time shown in FIG. 367(a) is displayed in the small display area Dm1. The fourth symbol of special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the display mode "451" indicating that the special figure 2 variation is being executed in the small display area Dm2 (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Displayed. In addition, since the special drawing 2 variation was executed using the winning information of the special drawing 2 that had been stored on hold at the time shown in FIG. 367(a), "0" was displayed as the value displayed in the small display area Dm2a. Displayed.

Then, as a series of effects, the special figure 2 variation effect is executed using the display area where the regular figure variation effect was executed, so the special figure variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) is executed in FIG. 367(a). The small display area Dm6 that was previously displayed is erased from the main display area Dm. In addition, in the small display area Dm4, the words "Right-handed game" are continuously displayed to encourage the player to play the right-handed game, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Right-handed game" are continuously displayed to encourage the player to play the game with the right-handed game. A comment asking "What do you think will come out?" will be displayed.

According to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 367(b), the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size to explain the current gaming situation. In reality, the display is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to see. Thereby, the presentation effect of the presentation mode (challenge game) being executed in the continuous main display area Dm can be further enhanced.

In addition, as mentioned above, the state shown in FIG. 367(b) is a state in which the regular pattern long open hit game has ended and the special pattern 2 variation is being executed, so at that timing, the state shown in the right side game area is Each of the winning holes (second winning hole 640, specific winning hole 65a, V winning hole 650a) is in a state where it is not easy to win a ball. However, until just before the state shown in FIG. 367(b), it is easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 due to the regular pattern long open winning game, and for example, the ball can easily be won by the special pattern 2 lottery in progress. If you win a jackpot, or if you win a jackpot, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the V winning hole 650a or the specific winning hole 65a.

In this way, even if performing a right-handed game in which the ball flows down into the right side playing area is not an advantageous gaming method for the player, the player is forced to continue playing the right-handed game. By displaying the words "right-handed game" in the small display area Dm4, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of the player who frequently switches between right-handed game and left-handed game, and also to avoid delay in switching the game method, for example. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a right-handed game cannot be performed while a small winning game is being executed, and a ball cannot be won in the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game.

In this embodiment, for the reason mentioned above, in the case where the right-handed game can be executed after a predetermined interval (period in which the special figure 2 variation is executed), the small display area Dm4 is continuously displayed during the predetermined interval. However, this is not limited to this, and the characters "Right-handed" may be displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when a right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display the state in which right-handed games are actually advantageous to the player (normal pattern long open winning period, small winning game period) and the period between those states (special pattern 2 fluctuation). It is also possible to configure the small display area Dm4 to display the characters "Right-handed" in different display modes depending on the period).

With this configuration, a player who is not accustomed to the game is forced to play right-handed games continuously, and a game situation that is disadvantageous to the player (during a small winning game when a ball is thrown into the V winning hole 650a) is avoided. It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a player cannot win a prize to occur, and to allow a skilled player to select a gaming method according to the display mode of "hitting right" displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game according to his/her skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, FIG. 368 ( This will be explained with reference to a). FIG. 368(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a small win is announced in the challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 368(a), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a small hit, the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed in the display mode "341" indicating a small hit win in the small display area Dm2. is displayed, and the result display mode 861d is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment "Get a small win!!" indicating that you have won a small win is displayed, and in the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm, a comment that the player aims for during a small win game is displayed. As a guide display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V prize opening 650a during the small winning game, it is notified that the right to execute the jackpot game after the small winning game ends is acquired. The display screen shown in FIG. 368(b) is displayed as the display screen. FIG. 368(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the right to play a jackpot game is acquired during a small win game.

As shown in FIG. 368(b), the characters "777" indicating that a jackpot game will be executed are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "Jackpot!! Congratulations!" congratulating the player are displayed in the sub display area Ds. !” comment is displayed.

As explained above, in the 16th embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation effect (see FIG. 365(b)) that is executed when the long open hit variation of the normal pattern (common pattern) is started in the normal state. , A winning game performance executed during a winning game where the electric accessory 640a is released (see FIG. 366(b)), a ball being won in the second prize opening 640 during the playing winning game, Special figure 2 pending acquisition effect that is executed when winning information for special figure 2 is acquired (see Figure 367(a)), special figure 2 variation effect that is executed when special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started (See Figure 367(b)), A small winning effect showing that a small winning was won in the special figure 2 variation (lottery) (See Figure 368(a)), A right to play a jackpot game was acquired during a small winning game. Since the small winning game effect (see Figure 368(b)) that is executed in the event of a small hit game is configured to be executed as a series of effects with a story, a jackpot that is realized when multiple conditions are met. In a pachinko machine 10 that has an opportunity to play a game, it is possible to inform the player of the game performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation will be continued. As mentioned above, according to the flow of the game shown in FIG. Depending on the game state when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640, the performance mode of the series of performances described above may not be able to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Specifically, at the timing of point C in FIG. 363(a), since the special pattern 1 variation is being executed, the start timing of the special pattern 2 variation is within a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special pattern 1 variation being executed). The display screen (see FIG. 367(a)) when the player is on standby is used in a series of effects, but for example, when the special figure 1 variation is not executed and the player is playing a game with a regular figure. When a ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special drawing 2 fluctuation will be started immediately. Therefore, when the above-described production mode of a series of productions is used, the display screen of FIG. 366(b) directly shifts to the display screen of FIG. There was a problem in that the relevance of the performances was weakened.

Therefore, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of performances are being executed, and the determination result is Based on this, the production mode after acquiring the winning information of the special drawing 2 is configured to be varied. Here, with reference to FIG. 369, the presentation contents will be described when the special drawing 1 fluctuation is not being executed at the timing when the winning information of the special drawing 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of presentations are being executed.

FIG. 369(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when winning information of special drawing 2 is obtained while special drawing 1 is not changing, and FIG. 369(b) is , is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 369(a) is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 369(a), when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 while the special pattern 1 variation is not being executed, the special pattern 2 variation starts immediately. According to the effect shown in , an effect is executed in which the character 851 destroys the capsule 853 that appears from the treasure box 852 using the hammer 851aa. Then, when the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation stops is reached, the display screen shown in FIG. 369(b) is displayed. FIG. 369(b) shows an example of the display screen that is displayed when the special pattern 2 variation that is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 while the special pattern 1 variation is not changing is stopped. It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 369(b), when the special figure 2 variation stops, an effect is executed in which a result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation appears from inside the capsule 853. In the example shown in FIG. 369(b), since the lottery result of the special drawing 2 variation is a small win, a result display mode 855 with a "V" indicating a small win is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of special drawing 2 variation, and specifically, the display mode of the challenge game shown in FIG. 367(b) is changed. Since it is the same as the display mode shown in FIG.

As mentioned above, during a series of presentations, if a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the special drawing 1 variation, the presentation in which the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the regular drawing winning period (first stage). The effect of acquiring the ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 pending acquisition period (the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1) (second stage effect), and the challenge game effect is the special figure 2 variation. While the production mode is set to correspond to the period (third stage production), if a ball enters the second prize opening 640 while the special drawing 1 is not changing, the capsule 853 will be released from the treasure box 852. The production mode is set so that the production that appears corresponds to the regular pattern winning period (first stage production), and the production that destroys the capsule 853 corresponds to the special pattern 2 fluctuation period (second stage production) It consists of

In this way, depending on the gaming situation during a series of performances, different performance modes can be set for when the standby period for the special figure 2 variation occurs and when it does not, giving the player a sense of discomfort. A series of easy-to-understand performances can be executed without any trouble.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation of the flow of performance will be continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 365 to 369, the content of effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed while the series of effects is being executed has been explained. Specifically, regarding the performance contents when the ball normally enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game, and the performance contents when the ball enters the V prize opening 650a during the small winning game. I explained.

Here, the content of the performance that is executed when a normal game is not executed while a series of performances is being executed will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 370, the content of the performance when the ball does not enter the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game will be explained. FIG. 370(a) schematically shows an example of the display screen that is displayed when the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 after 1 second has elapsed from the start of the game for the long opening. FIG. 370(b) is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. 370(b) that is displayed when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the regular long open winning game and the regular long open winning game ends. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 370(a), until the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game, an effect in which the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 is displayed in the main display area Dm. At the same time as this is executed, a comment "Hurry! Hurry!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to call attention to winning the ball into the second prize opening 640 quickly. In addition, a possible cause of a situation in which the ball does not enter the second prize opening 640 even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the game with a long open hit is that the player is not playing a right-handed game. The guidance display mode for "Right-handed hitting" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a display mode that is more emphasized than usual (in FIG. 370(a), the outline of the small display area Dm4 is displayed with a double line). be done. In addition, the audio output device 226 also outputs audio to notify that a right-handed game will be played.

In addition, in this 16th embodiment, after the electric accessory 640a opens for 1 second, the electric accessory 640a opens again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds as a game for the long opening of the regular pattern. It is configured so that a winning game (opening action) is executed. Therefore, when one second has elapsed from the start of the game for the long open hit, the alert screen shown in FIG. It is configured such that a ball can be entered into the second winning opening 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). Thereby, it is possible to provide a player who played a right-handed game after viewing the display content of the attention-calling screen with an opportunity to win a ball into the second winning hole 640.

After that, if the playing time (3 seconds) of the regular long open winning game has passed without a ball entering the second prize opening 640, the series of effects ends as shown in FIG. 370(b). A performance indicating this is executed. As shown in FIG. 370(b), a character 851 who is disappointed because he was unable to obtain the capsule 853 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "End" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, indicating that the series of effects has ended. Comments will be displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "left-handed hit" are displayed to cause the normal game to be executed in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed in the normal state. With this configuration, if a normal game (a game in which a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a regular game long opening winning game) is not executed in the middle of a series of performances, the series of performances will be executed. Since the ending performance is executed, for example, it is possible to prevent the series of performances from progressing to the end in a state where winning information for special drawing 2 has not been obtained and giving players excessive expectations. .

Next, as a production content that is executed when a normal game is not executed while a series of productions is being executed, if the ball does not enter the V prize opening 650a during a small winning game, or when a specific The contents of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be explained with reference to FIG. 371. FIG. 371(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the ball has not entered the V winning hole 650a after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game. FIG. 371(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the small winning game ends without the ball entering the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 371(a), if a ball has not entered the V winning hole 650a after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, a small In the display area Dm8, characters "Last 5 seconds!!" are displayed as remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small winning game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases as time passes. Then, in the main display area Dm, a situation is displayed in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small winning game is wrapped in smoke. In addition, similar to FIG. 370(a) described above, the small display area Dm4 displays an highlighted display mode emphasizing the guidance for the right-handed game, and the sub display area Ds shows that the current small winning game is being played. , the comment "Small win!! Hurry!!" is displayed to indicate that the player should hurry up and play the game.

Then, when the small winning game ends without a ball being won in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, a screen is displayed where the same series of effects as shown in FIG. 370(b) described above ends (FIG. 371( b)). In this way, if a situation occurs where the series of performances ends at each point in the series of performances, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data. In addition, since it cannot be displayed during normal gaming, even if the same image data is used, it is difficult for the player to think that the same image data is being reused. It is something.

Returning to FIG. 363, the explanation will be continued. Depending on the fluctuation status of special figure 1 during a series of performances, a state in which the waiting period for special figure 2 variation is set and a state in which it is not set occurs. A new problem also occurred in the state where the waiting period of FIG. 2 fluctuation is set.

In other words, the waiting period for the special figure 2 variation is set in accordance with the remaining variation time of the currently running special figure 1 variation, and the winning timing of the ball into the second winning opening 640 is determined by the special figure 1 variation. This is set regardless of the fluctuation timing of 1. Furthermore, since the length of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation varies, for example, a situation may occur in which the waiting period of the special figure 2 variation during a series of presentations exceeds 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen (see Figure 367(a)) indicating the waiting period for the special figure 2 variation continues to be displayed, the same display mode will continue to be displayed for 100 seconds, This poses a problem in that it gives a sense of discomfort to the player, and the series of performances is extended, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in the present 16th embodiment, at the time when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 during a series of presentations, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 variation and the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. If the remaining variation time of the variation shown in FIG. 1 is longer than a predetermined time (60 seconds), a special series of effects is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363(b), a description will be given of the flow of the game when executing a special series of effects. In FIG. 363(b), the period from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a regular game to when the special pattern 2 fluctuation is executed (current special pattern 1 remaining fluctuation period) is 60 seconds. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the performance (special series of performances) executed in the above case. Note that detailed description of the same elements as in the flow shown in FIG. 363(a) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 363(b), when a series of effects (general pattern fluctuation effects) are executed based on the general pattern long open fluctuation, the special pattern 1 variation (indicated as special 1 variation in the figure) is When a long winning variation (special 1 long variation (missing)) is being executed and the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular pattern long open winning game, the remaining period of the special pattern 1 variation being executed If it is determined that the duration is 60 seconds or more, the series of effects being executed is ended with a pseudo effect (see point G in FIG. 363(b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long miss variation that is being executed reaches 10 seconds, a series of pseudo effects will be executed, and a challenge game will be played according to the start timing of the special figure 2 variation (see Figure 367 (b)) The performance mode in which the is started is set (see point H in FIG. 363(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 372, the contents of the above-mentioned special series of effects will be explained. FIG. 372(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at point G in FIG. 363(b). As shown in FIG. 363(b), if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed is 60 seconds or more at the time the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the small display area Dm2a Despite the fact that "1" is displayed indicating that one piece of winning information for special drawing 2 is being held and stored, the end screen indicating that the series of performances has ended is displayed in the main display area Dm. Ru.

Thereafter, as a special series of performances, once the series of performances is finished, a special figure variation performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation being executed is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds (when the timing when the special figure 2 variation is executed after 10 seconds), the display mode shown in FIG. 372(b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364, the contents of the performance executed during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be explained. FIG. 364 (a) schematically shows the flow of the effect executed when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state and a time saving state (one time) is set after the end of the jackpot game. This is a timing chart, and FIG. 364(b) shows that a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small win. 3 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects performed when

As shown in FIG. 364(a), when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, there is a special figure 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 hold), and a special figure 2 hold (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 hold). ), that is, if you win a jackpot by playing a game that causes the special figure 1 lottery to be executed (left-handed game), the special figure 2 lottery will be executed by playing the right-handed game during the time saving state. The system is configured so that all the special drawing 1 drawings that have been previously held and stored are executed.

Specifically, the normal pattern fluctuation time that is executed when the time saving state is set (the normal pattern fluctuation time that is set during the high probability state of the normal symbol) is executed when the time saving state is set. The structure is such that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than that of special figure 1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the time saving state while the special figure 1 is on hold. Therefore, while various effects are being executed during the time-saving state, the special figure 1 variation, which is more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation, is executed, and the balance of the various effects is disrupted. Can be suppressed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the 16th embodiment, if the special drawing 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, the 0.2 seconds It is configured so that variable time can be set. Then, the jackpot game end screen indicating the end of the jackpot game is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed after the jackpot game has ended, or until the special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the period during which the special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation) based on the special pattern 1 reservations that had already been obtained at the start of the jackpot game is executed (approximately 1 in the case where the number of special pattern 1 reservations is 4) seconds), a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game will be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to finish the special drawing 1 reservation without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game), if you win a jackpot or win a small win that allows you to pass V, you can play the jackpot game again from the jackpot game end screen. The display screen is configured to display game information indicating the content of the jackpot game (for example, round number information indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or information obtained during one jackpot game). The system is configured such that game information indicating a cumulative value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as acquired ball number information indicating the number of balls played, and a display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that multiple jackpot games are one jackpot game. A variation display mode that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation) that corresponds to a newly executed jackpot game (a short-time (0.2 second) variation and a variation in the third symbol) Even if the game is executed without any display, the player will not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as game information for one jackpot game can be increased, it is possible to make the player have stronger expectations for winning the jackpot. Furthermore, the present 16th embodiment is configured so that the right-handed game is an appropriate game for both the jackpot game and the game in the time-saving state, so internally, the jackpot game ends and the time-saving state is set. During the special figure 1 variation period (during the special figure 1 variation period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "Right hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Ru. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the player is currently in a jackpot game or in a time saving state based on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is configured so that the special symbol 2 reservation is given priority over the special symbol 1 reservation. Therefore, in a state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if a player makes a mistake in the game operation and obtains special drawing 1 with special drawing 2 pending, special drawing 1 will continue until special drawing 2 is pending. Special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) based on reservation is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continued during the time saving state, the special figure 2 hold is configured so as not to run out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 1 variation from being executed unnecessarily during the time saving state.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, as the corresponding time saving ending condition which is a part of the time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state, an ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation is set. , Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (up to 4 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming situation until the corresponding time shortening end condition is satisfied is updated based on the number of variations of the special figure 1 variation. There is nothing to do.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the present 16th embodiment, the special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, and the special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the time saving state is set. The configuration is such that the special figure 1 variation is changed for a short time during the period when the special figure 1 variation is not held, so that the special figure 1 variation is no longer held during the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation shown in FIG.

If "Special Figure 2 variation once" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 variation will be changed using the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed during the time saving state. The time-saving final variation performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of special drawing 2 pending acquired during the time-saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 373 to 377, the contents of the effect executed during the time saving state in the 16th embodiment will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, as a performance during the time-saving state, the first time-saving variation performance that is set in response to the special figure 2 variation other than the final variation of the special figure in the time-saving state, and the special It is configured to execute a second time-saving variation effect that is set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation which is the final variation of the figure.

Then, in the first time-saving variation performance, a variation performance is executed to show the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the second time-saving fluctuation performance is to show the lottery result of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of special drawing 2 reservation. A variation effect is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 373(a), the display contents of the first time saving variation effect will be explained. FIG. 373(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in a variable production during a time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 373(a) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is being executed in a time saving state where the number of time saving times is set to "5 times".

As shown in FIG. 373(a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the words "time saving mode" are displayed to indicate that the current time saving state is in effect, and the rabbit is displayed. An effect is executed in which the simulated character 851 runs and obtains one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c indicating the result of the current special drawing lottery. In the 16th embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 386, the character 851 attempts to obtain lottery result modes 871a to 871c according to the variable time set during the time saving state (excluding the final time saving variation). It is configured such that the get effect is executed multiple times during one variation period, and the more the number of get effects executed during one variation period, the more the lottery result of this special symbol variation becomes more attractive to players. The lottery result is configured such that the probability of a lottery result being advantageous is high. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the performance results of each get performance but also to the number of executions of the get performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed to guide the game method during the time saving state, and in the small display area Dm20, the characters "Last 4" are displayed to indicate the period until the end of the time saving state. ” will be displayed. In other words, it is notified that the time saving state will end if the special figure 2 variation is executed four more times. In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, it is configured such that a plurality of time-saving termination conditions that are established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations can be set, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows only one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions. , the remaining period until the time-saving termination condition that is most likely to be met is displayed.

With this configuration, compared to displaying all of the multiple time-saving termination conditions and displaying the period (remaining period) until all of the displayed time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, it is possible to It is possible to inform players of easy time-saving termination conditions in an easy-to-understand manner. Additionally, if the ease of fulfillment of the time-saving termination conditions overlap, the configuration may be configured to display all of the overlapping time-saving termination conditions, or only one of the overlapping time-saving termination conditions may be displayed. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, in FIG. 373(a), as the lottery result formats 871a to 871c, a first lottery result format 871a with "777" indicating a jackpot win and a "V" indicating a small win win are shown. A second lottery result format 871b marked with a "cross mark" indicating a loss is displayed, and a third lottery result format 871c marked with a "cross mark" indicating a loss is displayed, and each time the get effect is executed, the character 851 selects one of the lottery results. It is configured such that an action is performed in which the result aspects 871a to 871c are acquired but not acquired, and an effect is executed in which one of the lottery result aspects 871a to 871c is finally acquired and the lottery result of the variation is announced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a lottery result suggestion mode with a "chance" attached thereto indicating that there is a high expectation of winning lottery result modes 871a and 871b indicating a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in a get effect. The character 851 executes the get performance to acquire the lottery result suggestion mode and the number of performance suggestion mode. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can perform an action to acquire any display mode multiple times during one variable display performance, which prevents the player from getting bored with the performance. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the current special pattern variation in the middle of the special pattern variation period, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 373(a), a display mode for indicating the remaining number of executions of the special symbol 2 variation as the remaining period for which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area Dm20. For example, it is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode may be displayed to indicate the remaining time for which the time-saving state is set based on the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or a get effect that is executed during the current time-saving state. A display mode for indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed. Furthermore, the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 variation at the time when the time saving state was set, that is, the time saving end condition set in the current time saving state (the number of special figure 2 variations), and the special figure executed during the time saving state. It may be configured such that a display mode indicating the number of 2 fluctuations is displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373(b), the display contents of the final time saving variation effect (second time saving variation effect) executed in the final variation of the time saving state will be described. FIG. 373(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the first half period of the time-saving final variation effect. In the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect in the time-saving final variation, a held ball acquisition effect for making the player acquire the special figure 2 held ball, a lottery result of the variation, a pre-read result of the special figure 2 held, The system is configured to be able to execute a second time-saving fluctuating performance for notifying the player, and a held ball acquisition performance is executed during the first half period (for example, 5 seconds) of the final time-saving fluctuating performance, and a second time-saving fluctuating performance is executed during the second half period (for example, , 25 seconds), the second time saving variation effect is executed.

When the reserved ball acquisition performance is executed in the first half of the time-saving final variation performance, as shown in FIG. 373(b), the sub-display area Ds displays the message "Gather the characters!! ” is displayed, and an effect in which allied characters gather around the character 851 is executed in the main display area Dm. In FIG. 373(b), a state in which an ally character 851a shaped like a "turtle" and a ally character 851b shaped like an "elephant" are gathered together is displayed. Then, the characters "Last" are displayed in the small display area Dm20 to notify the player that the current special symbol change is the final change in the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of reserved balls of special map 2 that has been acquired, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. 373(b), Since it shows a state in which two special drawing 2 reservations have been acquired, it means that two ally characters 851 have gathered. In the small display area Dm7, an assembly history display is displayed in which the assembled ally characters 851 are displayed in the order in which they were assembled, with "turtle" being displayed as the first history 872a and "elephant" being displayed as the second history 872b. .

In this small display area Dm7, a collection history display is displayed, and the display order here corresponds to the order in which the special map 2 reservation is consumed. Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, in the case of winning, it is possible to suggest which special drawing 2 reservation has been won.

Then, when the number of special 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (4) during the execution of the reserved ball acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. The performance mode is displayed. Specifically, around the character 851, a new ally character 851c modeled after a "snake" and a ally character 851d modeled after a "lion" are added, for a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d. The collected performances will be displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d, and in the sub-display area Ds, it is displayed that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached the upper limit. A comment saying "Everyone gather!!" is displayed. As mentioned above, while the reserved ball acquisition effect is being executed, the number of grouped ally characters 851 is associated with the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, so the small display area Dm2a shows the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. "4" indicating that the number is the upper limit (4 pieces) is displayed.

Thereafter, when the first half period of the time-saving final variation effect has passed and the second half period has been reached, the second time-saving variation effect shown in FIG. 374(b) is started. FIG. 374(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time-saving variation effect) displayed when the second half period of the final time-saving variation effect is started. As shown in FIG. 374(b), in the second time-saving variation performance, any of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the final time-saving variation performance challenges the mission, and if the mission is successful, the winner is announced, and if the mission fails, the winning result is announced. A performance will be performed to notify you of winning or non-winning. The performance result of this second time-saving variable performance is configured to be set to reflect the look-ahead result of the special map 2 reservation obtained at the time when the first half period of the final time-saving variable performance has passed. .

According to the example shown in FIG. 374(b), a mission performance using an ally character 851a imitating a "turtle" is executed as a mission performance executed as a second time-saving variable performance. Here, the content of the mission performance to be executed (in FIG. 374(b), "withstand falling rocks") is configured such that multiple patterns can be set, and the content of the mission performance and the type of the selected ally character 851 are set. The expectation of mission success differs depending on the situation. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance but also in the performance process until the performance result is displayed.

If the mission performance is successful, the mission success performance is executed as shown in FIG. 375(a). In the example shown in FIG. 375(a), the first special figure 2 hold (the next executed special figure 2 hold), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation of the first rotation after transitioning to the normal state. As shown in Figure 375(a), the mission is successful as a result of the second time-saving variation effect, as shown in Figure 375(a), because it predicts in advance that you will win a small hit. At the fluctuation stop timing of the time saving final fluctuation that is being displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of the current special drawing 2 lottery is a loss is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After this, as shown in FIG. 375(b), while the pseudo pattern "VVV" for notifying the win is displayed in the main display area Dm, the special symbol 2 variation that wins the small hit is displayed. A notification screen for notifying the player of the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance is displayed until the game ends. In addition, at the time of FIG. 375(b), the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the special figure 2 is changing (during a non-big win game, non-small win game), so in reality, a right-handed game is being performed. This is a state in which the player cannot play an advantageous game, but since the small winning game will be executed immediately after, the "right-handed" game that continues to guide the right-handed game from the time-saving state. The display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. This allows the player to play the game smoothly without having to change the direction in which the ball is launched.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 pending is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time-saving variation effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 376(a). As expected, the display mode for displaying the small win to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is "777" to indicate the small win type set for this small win. Displayed in display mode.

On the other hand, if a failure effect is set as the result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. ), the mission failure effect shown in Fig. 376(b) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in Fig. 377 is displayed during the period until the special chart 2 variation corresponding to the special chart 2 hold is finished in the normal state. is displayed.

In addition, details will be described later, but at the timing when the first half period of the final time-saving variable effect ended, the special map 2 hold had not reached the upper limit, and after the second time-saving variable effect started (the second time-saving variable effect After the effect result of the variable effect is set), if you newly acquire special figure 2 pending, the newly acquired special figure will be displayed at the start timing of the first special figure 2 variation in the normal state after the end of the final time saving variation. If the pre-reading process is executed for the Fig. 2 hold (special figure 2 hold that is not reflected in the performance result of the 2nd time-saving variation effect) and the result of the pre-read process is a win, the display in Fig. 377 is executed. An effect is executed in which a small winning winning screen (see FIG. 376(a)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 378, the configuration of the counter buffer in the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 378 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 378, in the present 16th embodiment, a stop type counter C3 is added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, a stop type selection counter storage area for storing the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A storage area is provided, and a second winning type counter storage area for storing the value of the second winning type counter C6 and a value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203lc. The second variation type counter storage area has been provided, and the configuration of the special symbol reserved ball execution area and the normal symbol reserved ball execution area has been changed in accordance with the counter value stored in each reserved ball storage area. , there is a difference. Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, 98, 99), which stops at the reach, and ``reach outside the front and back'' (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected, including a "completely off" (range of 0 to 89, for example) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front/back off reach" becomes narrow to 98, 99, and the "front/back off reach" also narrows to 90-97, making it difficult for "front/back off reach" or "front/back off reach" to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79. ``Completely off'' is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front/back off" is wide, from 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front/back off". Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long production times can be performed, so the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can continue. It becomes easier to perform. Note that in the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "front/back off reach" is set to 98 and 99.

The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process of the main controller in this embodiment), and the normal symbol is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is stored in the ball storage area 203lc. The random number values for winning the normal symbols are defined in the 16 random numbers per normal symbol table 202lc (see FIG. 380(d)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number for a normal symbol win defined in the 16 random number per normal symbol table 202lc, it is determined that the normal symbol is a win.

Here, the table 202lc of 16 random numbers per normal symbol will be explained with reference to FIG. 380(d). The 16 random numbers per normal symbol table 202lc is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state (high probability state for normal symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) in the lottery for normal symbols. It is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 380(d), when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the lottery of normal symbols It is determined whether the number is within the range of "5 to 28", and if it is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a regular hit. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, it is determined whether the obtained value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204" in the lottery of normal symbols. If the number is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a regular hit.

In other words, in the 16th embodiment, in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, there is a probability of 1/10 of winning, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, there is a probability of 5/6. It is configured so that you can win at any time. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the normal state, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 as a game with a normal symbol at a probability of 1/100 of winning a normal symbol (normal symbol winning). It is configured so that an easy long open winning game can be executed. In addition, during the time saving state, the long open winning game is always executed when the regular winning symbol is won.

With this configuration, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game in which the ball can enter the second prize opening 640 with a probability of 1/1000. To allow a player who is playing a game to simultaneously execute a game in which a special drawing 1 drawing is executed and a game in which a special drawing 2 drawing is carried out (a game aiming at a specific winning in a general drawing drawing). I can do it.

The second variation type counter CS2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 999, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). The second variation type counter CS2 determines one normal pattern fluctuation pattern from the set normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set for this common figure fluctuation pattern, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 403) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main processing. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf (see FIG. 384) that stores random numerical values for determining one fluctuation time of normal symbol fluctuation from the value (random numerical value) of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 of.

Returning to FIG. 378, the explanation will be continued. In the 16th embodiment, a variable type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, and the winning information stored in the reserved memory is stored in advance (when the special symbol fluctuates). The system is configured so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that will actually be executed can be read in advance by determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that will actually be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine the timing at which the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information of the special symbol that is held and stored is executed.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, as the winning information of the normal symbol, that is, the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the first winning random number counter used for the winning lottery of the normal symbol is used. C2, a second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and used when setting the type of winning game per common symbol.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 379(a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixteenth embodiment. The ROM 202 includes a first winning random number 16 table 202la, a first winning type selection 16 table 202lb, a normal symbol random number 16 table 202lc, a fluctuation pattern 16 table 202le, a small winning type selection 16 table 202lg, and a jackpot scenario. At least 16 tables 202lh, 16 small winning scenarios tables 202li, 16 winning type selection tables 202ld, and 16 normal winning pattern selection tables 202lf are provided.

The first random number 16 table 202la is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 380, the contents defined in the first random number 16 table 202la will be explained. FIG. 380(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 16 table 202la. As shown in FIG. 380(a), the first random number 16 table 202la is the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1, which is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol It has a special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery (special symbol 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 380(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 will be explained. FIG. 380(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1. As shown in FIG. 380(b), a "big win" is defined in the range of "0 to 3" for the value of the first random number counter C1, and a "small win" is defined in the range of "10, 11". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small jackpot is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 380(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 will be explained. FIG. 380(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2. As shown in FIG. 380(c), a "big win" is defined as the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 3", and a "small win" is defined in the range of "10 to 149". That is, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small jackpot is about 1/7.1.

That is, in the 16th embodiment, the same jackpot probability is set for the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing, and the small winning probability is configured to be higher for the special drawing 2 drawing. As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the structure is such that a small winning win can become an opportunity to execute a jackpot game, so the special drawing 2 lottery is a special feature that makes it easier to execute the jackpot game than the special drawing 1 drawing. It will be a drawing lottery.

In addition, in this 16th embodiment, as mentioned above, the same jackpot probability is set for the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing, but this is not limited to this, and the special drawing 1 drawing and the special drawing 2 drawing A different jackpot probability may be set for the lottery. In addition, although the jackpot probability and the small win probability are set to constant values regardless of the gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a low probability state (high probability state of special symbols) and a low probability state (low probability state of special symbols).

The first winning type selection 16 table 202lb is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the first special symbol, and the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1, which determines the type of jackpot game for the second special symbol. A special drawing 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2, which is a data table for the above, is set respectively.

First, the contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202lb will be explained with reference to FIG. 381(a). FIG. 381(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202lb. As shown in FIG. 381(a), the first winning type selection 16 table 202lb1 includes the special pattern 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1, which is referred to when winning a jackpot in the special pattern 1 drawing, and the special pattern 2 drawing. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 will be explained. FIG. 381(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. The pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, three types from jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is "0", the jackpot type is defined as "jackpot AA (15R time saving 99 jackpots)", and "jackpot AB" is defined in the range of "1 to 15". (7R time-saving 5-time jackpot)" is defined, and a "jackpot AC (7R time-saving 1-time jackpot)" is defined in the range of "16 to 99."

In other words, in a normal state in which a left-handed game is played and the special drawing 1 lottery is executed, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 drawing, the time saving state is always set (granted) after the jackpot game ends. There is. The end conditions of the time saving state are set differently depending on the set type of jackpot.

Specifically, when jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the above-mentioned common time-saving ending conditions are set, so whether you win a hit (big hit or small win) in the special drawing lottery or the special drawing fluctuation The time saving state continues until (the sum of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation) reaches 99 times. In the 16th embodiment, a right-handed game is played in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state, and in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, and the probability of winning the small win is 1/250. 7.1, so for example, if a time-saving state based on jackpot AA is set, the special pattern fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning in the special drawing 2 lottery. The probability of reaching this point is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when jackpot AA is selected, the game state is essentially set in a time saving state until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special drawing fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning in the special drawing 2 lottery (probability that the corresponding time saving end condition will be met and the time saving state will end) is approximately 46%. . In other words, when jackpot AB is set, that is, when 5 times of special chart 2 variation is set as the time-saving end condition, the probability of winning a hit before the time-saving end condition is met (consecutive chance probability) is This is approximately 54%.

In addition, when jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the above-mentioned common time-saving end condition, "the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 fluctuation is 1" is set as the corresponding time-saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special symbol variation reaches the predetermined number of times (one time) without winning in the special symbol drawing 2 lottery (probability that the corresponding time-saving termination condition is met and the time-saving state ends) is 85%. In other words, when a jackpot AC is set, that is, when the number of variations in special chart 2 is set once as a time-saving end condition, the probability of winning a winning prize (consecutive chance probability) before the time-saving end condition is met is It will be about 15%.

As explained above, depending on the type of jackpot that is set when winning a jackpot on special drawing 1, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state (probability of consecutive chances) that is set is configured to differ, and jackpot AA is the most advantageous jackpot type, then jackpot AB is the most advantageous jackpot type, and jackpot AC is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games to be executed as a jackpot game is also defined as a different value depending on the type of jackpot, such that a round game of "15R" is executed for jackpot AA, and "7R" for jackpot AB and AC. stipulated in The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the greater the number of balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls), so in terms of the jackpot games that are executed, jackpot AA is the most popular for players. This is an advantageous type of jackpot.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the jackpot type with the highest consecutive winning probability (jackpot AA) is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but the invention is not limited to this. The jackpot type with the highest consecutive winning probability and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the most advantageous gaming state depending on the gaming situation. For example, if you win a jackpot just before the game hall closes, you should choose a jackpot type that allows you to win more prize balls in one jackpot game than a jackpot type that grants (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of successive winnings. This is a more advantageous type of jackpot, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit on the number of times the time-saving state can be set across jackpot games, one jackpot win will occur just before the limit is reached. The jackpot type that allows you to win a large number of prize balls is the more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, if the number of consecutive games (the number of times a jackpot game has been executed without transitioning to the normal state) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times), the player will receive a bonus (e.g., a valuable In a pachinko machine 10 that can provide bonuses (images), if a player is trying to obtain a benefit, a jackpot type that provides (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of consecutive winnings is a more advantageous jackpot type.

Note that the above-mentioned successive winning probability indicates the probability of winning based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the present 16th embodiment, the special drawing 2 lottery is performed based on a predetermined number of pieces. (4 pieces) can be stored on hold up to an upper limit. Therefore, even after the time-saving termination condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the normal state, it is possible to execute the special drawing 2 lottery as many times as the number of special drawing 2 holdings stored in the holding memory (the number of remaining special drawing 2 holdings). It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small win through the special drawing 2 lottery. As mentioned above, in the 16th embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit by the special drawing 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1/7.1, so the number of remaining special drawing 2 reservations (maximum 4) It becomes possible to sufficiently aim for a small winning prize by drawing the special drawing 2 lottery a corresponding number of times.

Specifically, when the number of Zantoku Chart 2 reserved is 1, the probability of winning a small hit in the Toku Zhu 2 lottery based on the Zantoku Chart 2 reservation (pullback probability) is about 14%, When the number of 2 balls reserved is 2, the pullback probability is about 28.5%, and when the number of remaining pitches 2 is 3, the pullback probability is about 39.6%, and the number of pitches held on the remaining pitch 2 is about 39.6%. If there are 4, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, by configuring the special drawing 2 drawing to be able to be stored and stored, and by configuring it so that the special drawing 2 drawing based on the remaining special drawing 2 holding is executed even after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state, Regardless of the result of the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, it is possible to make the player play the game enthusiastically in order to obtain the special drawing 2 pending until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, once the time-saving state is set, the above-mentioned gaming period during the time-saving state (continuous winning period) and the period during which the special drawing 2 drawing based on the remaining special drawing 2 reservation during the normal state is executed (withdrawal) Because it is possible to aim for a small win in the special drawing 2 lottery during the two periods (period) and It is possible to reduce the probability of transitioning to a normal state in which the player is aiming for one lottery, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time saving state, and a jackpot game (continuous jackpot game) is executed based on the small win win, it is easier to play during the normal state than when a jackpot game (continuous jackpot game) is executed. It is configured so that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set when a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and a jackpot game (pullback jackpot game) is executed based on the small win win. . As a result, even if the consecutive winning period has passed, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting to win a small win during the pullback period, which prevents the player from getting bored with the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 will be explained. FIG. 381(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2. The pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment is set so that when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first winning type counter C2. There is. Specifically, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot type is defined as "jackpot AD (15R time saving 99 jackpots)", and the value is in the range of "20 to 69". ``Jackpot AE (12R time-saving 99 times jackpot)'' is specified, and ``Jackpot AF (7R time-saving 99 times jackpot)'' is specified in the range of ``70 to 99''.

In other words, when a jackpot is won by the special drawing 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set in which the time-saving state continues until the special drawing variation reaches 99 times after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, in the special drawing 2 drawing, which is executed less frequently than the special drawing 1 drawing, if the player wins a jackpot, which has a probability of winning a small hit at least three times lower, A gaming state can be reliably provided. Therefore, for players who had the special experience of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, which does not occur often, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, one time saving setting) is set, and the desire to play is discouraged. It is possible to prevent a significant decrease.

In addition, each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 is also executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, similar to the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1. The number of round games to be played is set to be different, and the round game is specified to be executed with a jackpot AD of "15R", a jackpot AE of "12R", and a jackpot AF of "7R". The greater the number of round games in one jackpot game, the greater the number of balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls), so jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of jackpot games executed. This is a jackpot type.

Next, the contents of the 16 random numbers per normal symbol table 202lc will be explained with reference to FIG. 380(d). FIG. 380(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 16 table 202lc per normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 380(d), the table 202lc of 16 random numbers per normal symbol includes the values that are referenced when performing the random number lottery in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the values that are referred to when performing the random number lottery in the high probability state of the normal symbol. A value that is referred to when executing a drawing per drawing is specified, and specifically, in a low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28". A "win" is defined, and in a high probability state of normal symbols, a "win" is defined when the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204".

The 16 types per ordinary symbol selection table 202ld is a data table for selecting the type per ordinary symbol, and when the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) lottery is executed with reference to the random number 16 table per ordinary symbol 202lc and the lottery is won. This is what is referred to. In the 16th embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is installed so that the ball can enter the second prize opening 640 as a game to win a regular symbol, which is executed when a winning symbol is won in a low probability state of a regular symbol. It is configured to be able to execute a long opening winning game in which an opening operation is performed, and a short opening winning game in which an electric accessory 640a is opened in such a way that it is more difficult for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 than in the long opening winning game. Different winning games are executed depending on the type of winning pattern selected at the time of winning the winning pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents defined in the 16 type selection table 202ld per ordinary figure will be explained. FIG. 382(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 16 type selection table 202ld per ordinary figure. As shown in FIG. 382(a), the 16 types per ordinary symbol selection table 202ld selects two types of ordinary symbols ( It is configured such that A per ordinary figure and B per ordinary figure are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state (ordinary symbol low probability), the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0", "A per ordinary symbol" is defined, and " ``B per ordinary map'' is defined in the range of ``1 to 99''. In addition, the probability state of the normal symbol is a high probability state (common symbol high certainty), and the "ordinary symbol per hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0, 1", "B per ordinary map" is defined in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, with reference to FIG. 382(b), a description will be given of the relationship between the per-regular pattern type selected in the per-regular pattern selection table 202ld and the gaming state at the time when the per-regular pattern game is executed. do. FIG. 382(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the type of common symbol and the gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, a winning lottery is executed according to the gaming state set at the timing of executing a winning lottery for a regular symbol (common symbol) (regular symbol fluctuation start timing), and If the player wins, the content of the game for each common symbol is set according to the gaming state set at the timing of executing the game for the common symbol (the timing for stopping variation of the common symbol). In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the game state is configured to change depending on the lottery situation and fluctuation situation of special symbols (special symbols), so the game state is changed independently from the special symbol lottery game. In the regular lottery game to be executed, different game states are set at the timing of executing the regular lottery and the timing of executing the regular lottery game that is executed when a winning result is won in the regular lottery. There's a case.

For example, if a regular symbol lottery is executed during a special symbol variation (time-saving final variation) in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state (common symbol high probability state of the random number 16 per normal symbol table 202lc) A winning lottery is executed using the determination value specified in (Accuracy). If the player wins, the normal pattern fluctuation stops after a predetermined normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, and then the normal pattern winning game is executed. Here, if the time saving final variation ends during the normal pattern variation and the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the gaming state at the timing when the game per normal pattern is executed. It turns out.

In such a case, if you set the game mode of the game to win a common symbol according to the gaming state set at the time when the common symbol lottery was executed, even though the normal state is set, There is a problem in that a regular map winning game (long open winning game) that is executed during a time-saving state is executed as a regular map winning game, and an excessively advantageous benefit (special map 2 lottery) is provided to the player. there were.

On the other hand, in the present 16th embodiment, the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal figure is determined, and the content of the game per normal figure is set based on the determination result. As in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state shifts to the normal state during the fluctuation of the normal symbols, it is possible to execute a game per common symbol corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (special drawing 2 lottery).

Specifically, when the per-regular pattern A is selected (set) as the per-regular pattern type, the game state set at the execution timing of the per-regular pattern game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). Regardless of this, a game is executed based on the long open winning game. On the other hand, when B is selected (set) as the normal pattern winning type, the game state set at the execution timing of the normal pattern winning game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is the normal pattern. If it is in a low probability state (general pattern low certainty), a game to hit the general pattern short opening will be executed, and if it is in a high probability state (general pattern high certainty) for the normal pattern, a game to hit the general pattern long opening will be executed. It is stipulated as follows.

Here, the content of the winning games of the regular pattern long open winning game and the normal pattern short opening winning game, which are the normal pattern winning games, will be explained. The long open winning game for regular figures is a game for winning ordinary figures in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long period of time (positioned in the open state) so that the ball can easily enter the second prize opening 640, and the winning number is 0.1. After being in a closed state (opening period) for 1 second, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first opening period), and then, after being in a closed state (standby period) for 1.5 seconds, it is opened again for 0.5 seconds. (Second opening period) A game with a common symbol is executed. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the normal pattern winning scenario (not shown), and when executing the normal pattern winning game, the normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the normal pattern winning type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the normal pattern winning scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the normal pattern winning game described above.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, when a game with a long open winning game is executed, two open periods are set that ensure a period during which the ball can enter the second winning hole 640. are doing. Then, when the first opening period of the two opening periods has passed, it is determined whether the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, and the result of the determination is that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640. If it is determined that this is the case, the system is configured to display a warning screen (see FIG. 370(a)) to alert the player to play a game in which a ball is won in the second prize opening 640. There is.

With this configuration, a player who does not realize that a game with a long opening (right-handed game) has been executed in a state where the normal state is set (a state in which a left-handed game is being played) In this case, the player can be notified to play the right-handed game again, and it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a disadvantageous game result. Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed after a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) of waiting period after displaying the caution screen (see FIG. 370(a)). configured to run.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (approximately 0.5 seconds) it takes for the ball fired by the player to play a right-handed game to reach the second winning slot 640. has been done. This makes it easier for a player who plays a right-handed game after seeing the warning screen (see FIG. 370(a)) to win a ball into the second winning hole 640.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the scenario for winning a winning pattern is updated as time passes, and when the scenario indicating the end is reached, the game for winning a winning pattern ends, and the case in which a second prize is won during the game for winning a winning pattern Two types of win-win end conditions are set for ending the win-win game when the number of balls entered into the opening 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, one ball).

Then, if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the first opening period, or if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, the ball enters the second winning hole 640. The system is configured to provide different notification modes to indicate what has happened. Specifically, if the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that a proper game (right-handed game) has not been executed from the start of the regular game. The game is configured to display a game explanation (such as a comment such as ``Be sure to hit right while playing a long open hit game'') so that you can play the game properly the next time you play a game with a long open win. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won a ball in the second prize opening 640 during the first opening period, the game contents that the player has already understood may be repeatedly notified and the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the short opening game for regular symbols, a game for opening the electric accessories 640a for 0.1 seconds is executed after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the normal pattern winning scenario (not shown), and when executing the normal pattern winning game, the normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the normal pattern winning type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the normal pattern winning scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the normal pattern winning game described above.

The above-mentioned short open winning game is a short open winning game in which the electric accessory 640a has a short opening period of 0.1 seconds, so the ball cannot actually enter the second prize opening 640. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 382(b), this normal pattern short open winning game is a normal pattern winning game that is executed only during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal pattern low probability), and is as described above. As expected, since the normal pattern short opening game ends 0.2 seconds after the start of the normal pattern short opening winning game, the general pattern short opening winning game is executed while the player is playing a left-handed game. Even if a right-handed game is played, the regular game will end before the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second prize opening 640 (0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 during the normal pattern short open winning game.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot enter the second prize opening 640 during the game of short opening. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be configured such that the electric accessory 640a When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is configured to allow balls to flow down from one end to the other end, and only the balls that flow out from the other end of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win a prize. It is preferable to arrange the second prize opening 640 at a position such that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is at least 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, when a game with a normal figure short opening is executed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. Since the ball cannot reach the other end side, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the winning game content of the game for winning a regular symbol is set according to the gaming state set at the timing when the game for winning a regular symbol is executed. Therefore, even if you win a common symbol in a time-saving state (high probability state of common symbol) in which you win a common symbol with a high probability, and the game per common symbol based on the winning of that common symbol is in the normal state (low probability state of common symbol). Even if the game is executed in the state), it is possible to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern long opening winning game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 382(a), in the 16th embodiment, the rate at which the type per normal pattern (A per normal pattern) in which the normal pattern long opening game is executed is selected, regardless of the gaming state. is different between the low probability state of normal symbols (low probability of common symbols) and the high probability state of normal symbols (high probability of common symbols). In the probability mode, the selection is made with a probability of 2%. By configuring in this way, when the general pattern is high and the probability is high, it is possible to win the general pattern when the pattern is high, and it is more likely The probability that a game with a common figure long opening is executed when a common figure is low is more likely to be executed when a common figure is low. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game content of the game per regular symbol is set according to the gaming state at the timing when the game per regular symbol is executed, the content of the game per regular symbol is set when the game changes from the time saving state to the normal state. It is possible to increase the probability that a normal figure winning game becomes a common figure long open winning game, and the player can be made to pay close attention to which game content the normal figure winning game will be executed.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le is a data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and includes the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery ( It is configured so that various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected based on the lottery results of the special drawing lottery and the set gaming state. The basic technical idea of the 16th variation pattern table 202le is the same as the above-mentioned embodiments or the various variation patterns used in each embodiment, so a detailed explanation will be omitted and this 16th table 202le will be described in detail. The description will continue focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 16 table 202le used in the embodiment.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 16 table 202le will be explained with reference to FIG. 385(a). FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 16 table 202le. As shown in FIG. 385(a), the variation pattern 16 table 202le is the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 that is referenced when the gaming state is the time saving state. The game has a time-saving variation pattern 16 table 202le2, and the special symbol variation pattern is selected using the data table corresponding to the gaming state set when selecting the special symbol variation pattern.

Next, the contents of the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 included in the variation pattern 16 table 202le will be explained with reference to FIG. 385(b). FIG. 385(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1. As shown in FIG. 385(b), the variation pattern 16 table 202le includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations since the normal state was set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different fluctuation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As mentioned above, in the present 16th embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game is played in which the special symbol 1 lottery is mainly executed, and the second special symbol ( The patterns in which the special drawing 2) lottery is executed include the pattern in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in accordance with the special drawing 2 holding stored at the end of the time saving state, and the pattern in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in accordance with the holding of the special drawing 2 held at the end of the time saving state, and the pattern in which the long opening lottery is executed in the regular drawing lottery. There is a pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on the ball winning in the second prize opening 640 during the long open winning game.

Furthermore, in the present 16th embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, a time saving final variation effect is executed which can notify the pre-read result of special drawing 2 pending stored at the start of the time saving final variation. It is composed of The performance result of the time-saving final variation performance is continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed after the time-saving state ends (into the normal state) ends.

The variation pattern 16 table 202le corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery executed between the number of special symbol variations 1 to 4 as a variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) variation executed during the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, if the first special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special symbol 2 variation, and if the lottery result of the special symbol 2 variation is "lost", the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of , "short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "win (big hit, small win)", "short hit A (2 seconds)" is selected. In addition, if the second special symbol variation after the normal state is set is a special symbol 2 variation, and the lottery result of that special symbol 2 variation is "lost", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and if it is a "win", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, and the special symbol changes after the normal state is set. If the third time is a special figure 2 variation, and the lottery result of that special figure 2 variation is "miss", it will be "short miss A (0.5 seconds)" regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. is selected, and in the case of "win", "short win C (1 second)" is selected. If the fourth special symbol variation after the normal state is set is a special symbol 2 variation, and if the lottery result of that special symbol 2 variation is "lost", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short hit A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Win", "Short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

With this configuration, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is the maximum number (4 pieces) at the end of the time saving state, the special drawing 2 lottery corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding will be won (small win). , jackpot) (the period during which the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the win) and the lottery results of the special symbol 2 lottery corresponding to the special symbol 2 pending. The period until it becomes a miss can be unified to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, whether there is winning information in the special drawing 2 pending or not, simply controlling the results to be displayed for 2 seconds after the end of the time-saving final fluctuation will give the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to execute the special figure 2 variation in the normal state without giving it. In addition, no matter what number of special drawings 2 is reserved, the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning status is stopped and displayed will be unified (2 seconds after the normal state is set). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special symbols 2 were reserved to win.

In addition, as shown in Figure 385(b), if the number of special symbol variations is "5 or more" as the variation time of special symbol 2 variation in the normal state, the number of special symbol 2 reservations at the time the time saving state ends , the regular pattern long opening winning game is executed in the normal state, and the special pattern 2 lottery is executed based on the ball winning in the second prize opening 640, so the series of effects described above are executed. A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode ( performance mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 16 table 222ee2, which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, will be explained. FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern of the special drawing lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In the 16th embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the special drawing 2 lottery, which is likely to have a lottery result advantageous to the player compared to the special drawing 1 drawing, is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, so the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 361, the game board 13 is configured so that when a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for a ball to enter the first prize opening 64, which triggers the execution of the special drawing 1 lottery. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery that is executed during the time-saving state where the right-handed game is executed is the special figure 1 lottery that is executed based on the special figure 1 reservation that has already been obtained at the end timing of the jackpot game when the time-saving state is set. There will be 1 lottery.

Specifically, if the player wins a jackpot while the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving initial setting state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640. If the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained because an easy game is not being played, and there is a special figure 1 reservation at that time, the special figure 1 lottery will be executed.

In this case, as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating time) of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the period until the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long period of fluctuation (for example, 60 seconds) is used. Once set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 variation cannot be executed until the special figure 1 variation ends, and the game cannot be smoothly played during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the present 16th embodiment, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state. Thereby, even if the time saving state is set in a state where the maximum number (4 pieces) of special figure 1 reservations is secured, the special figure 1 variation can be executed without interfering with the special figure 2 variation.

Moreover, in the present 16th embodiment, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed even after the jackpot game ends until the special figure 2 variation is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 1 fluctuation is fluctuating in a short time during the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a jackpot, the continuously displayed jackpot game end screen is configured to be shifted to the jackpot game screen.

The normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202lf is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol variation (common symbol variation), and includes the gaming state at the time of executing the common symbol variation, It is configured such that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the lottery result of the regular figure variation and the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS2.

Here, the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf will be explained with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf. As shown in FIG. 384, in the 16th embodiment, the short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the regular pattern fluctuation, and the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is set longer than the short fluctuation. (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected.

The configuration is such that when a long variation is selected as the variation time of the common figure variation, the common figure variation effect is executed. In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, only during the period when a normal state is set in which it is difficult to win a common pattern long opening, a general pattern fluctuation effect is performed to suggest that a general pattern long opening is won. Because of this configuration, long fluctuations (30 seconds to 60 seconds) are defined only in the data table that is referenced during the normal state.

Specifically, if the gaming state at the time when the ordinary symbol variation is executed is the normal state (low probability state of ordinary symbols) and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol variation is "A per common symbol", the acquisition When the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 499", "Permanent long fluctuation A (30 seconds)" is selected, and when the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "500 to 999", "Public pattern long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" is selected. are respectively stipulated, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "B per common pattern", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999". A (2 seconds)" is specified. In addition, if the lottery result of the regular pattern fluctuation is "lost", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", and the "common pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is " ``997, 998'' defines a ``general figure long variation A (30 seconds)'' and ``999'' defines a ``general figure long variation B (60 seconds).'' On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the normal symbol variation is executed is the short time state (normal symbol high probability state), regardless of the lottery result of the common symbol variation and the value of the second variation type counter CS2, "General figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is defined.

As explained above, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of the general pattern fluctuation is "A general pattern per hit", that is, a general pattern long open win, the general pattern long fluctuation is set as the general pattern fluctuation time. It is designed to be easily selected. Therefore, by executing the normal pattern variation effect, the player can expect to have won the normal pattern long open win. Further, the configuration is such that different variation times (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long variation in which the general figure variation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the general pattern fluctuation effect until the start of the general pattern long opening winning game, so that, for example, when the general pattern fluctuation effect is started, It is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the ball is stopped and the ball is shot again after a specific period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed.

In addition, even if the lottery result of the regular pattern fluctuation is a loss, even if the lottery result of the general pattern fluctuation is a difference, the configuration is such that the general pattern long fluctuation is selected, so even if the general pattern fluctuation effect is executed, You can leave open the possibility that you won't win the long opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the normal pattern variation effect to the end.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the configuration is such that when winning "Public pattern winning A", which is a general pattern long open winning, the long variation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected. , without being limited to this, for example, in some cases when winning "A", "Short fluctuation" or "Middle fluctuation (10 to 15 Seconds) may also be selectable.Then, if a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it may be configured such that the regular pattern variation effect is not executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute the normal pattern long open winning game without executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect, so it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game, It is possible to predict the execution timing of a game with a long opening per game and to make it difficult to play a game in which a ball is fired in accordance with the predicted timing.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, when the lottery result of the general pattern fluctuation is "normal pattern winning B" in which the "normal pattern short winning game" is executed as the normal pattern winning game, the "long variation" is Although the configuration is such that it is not executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small winning type selection 16 table 202lg is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won in the special drawing lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383, the small winning type selection 16 table 202lg will be explained. FIG. 383(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning type selection 16 table 202lg, and FIG. 383(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special drawing 1 small winning type selection 16 table 202lg1. FIG. 383(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special drawing 2 small winning type selection 16 table 202lg2.

As the small winning type of the first special symbol, three types of small winning AA, small winning AB, and small winning AC are set to be selected by the value of the small winning type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is one of "0 to 39", the small win type is "Small win AA (7R time shortened 5 times jackpot when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "40 to 49", the small win type is "small win AB (7R time saving 9 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "40 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. Then, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is any one of "50 to 99", the small win type is "small win AC (no 2R time saving when passing V)". That is, a value of "50 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, the type of the jackpot game to be executed after that when a game ball enters the V winning hole 650 in the small winning game is set for the small winning AA and the small winning AB, respectively. In addition, a small win AC is a small win in which a game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 650 in a small win game. In the case of the small win AA, a 7R time-saving 5-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win AA, a jackpot is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then a 5-time time saving game state is set. It is configured such that a time saving game (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 5 times and stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of a small hit AB, a 7R time-saving 99-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win AB, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and after the jackpot game, , 5 time-saving games (the period from when the special symbol variation is executed 5 times until it is stopped and displayed) are set.

In the case of a small win AC, a 2R time saving no jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win AC, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 2R open state is executed, and after the jackpot game, The time-saving gaming state is not set, but the normal gaming state is set. In this way, small win AB is executed the same number of rounds as small win AA in the jackpot game, but the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is 99 times (99 times), which is the largest number of rounds compared to other small win types. Since the period (period for the special symbol variation to be executed 99 times until it is stopped and displayed) is set, it is set to provide the most advantageous small win for the player. The small hit AA is executed the same number of rounds as the small win AB in the jackpot game, but 5 times (the special symbol fluctuation is executed 5 times) as a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. Since the period until the game is stopped and displayed is set, the small win is disadvantageous for the player when compared with the small win AB. In addition, in small hit AC, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and furthermore, the time saving gaming state is not set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, but the normal gaming state is set, so it is the most disadvantageous for the player. It is a small winning type.

FIG. 383(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small winning type selection 16 table 202lb2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, two types, the above-mentioned small hit AD and small hit AE, are set to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state and the value of the obtained small winning type counter C5 is one of "0 to 9", the small winning type is "small winning AD". (15R time saving 99 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "0 to 9" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. When the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "10 to 99", the small win type is "small win AE (7R time saving 5 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "10 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the small winning type is "small winning AD (V passing 15R time reduction 99 times jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 39" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. Further, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is any one of "140 to 99", the small win type is "small win AE (7R short 5 times jackpot when passing V)". That is, a value of "40 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, the type of the jackpot game to be executed after that when a game ball enters the V winning hole 650 in the small winning game is set in the small winning AD and the small winning AE, respectively. In the case of a small win AD, a 15R time-saving 99-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win AD, a jackpot is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state, and then a 99-time jackpot is set as a time-saving game state. It is configured such that a time saving game (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 99 times and stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of a small win AE, a 7R time-saving 5-time jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win AE, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state is executed, and then a variable winning A jackpot is executed in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then 5 time-saving games (a period until the special symbol variation is performed 5 times and stopped and displayed) are set as a time-saving game state. It is configured.

In this way, the small win type for the second special symbol is a small win in which a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set when a prize is won in the V winning hole 650 than the small win type for the first special symbol. The rate at which the type is selected is set to be high. As a result, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, and the probability of being determined to be a small hit is also set higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. It is determined that the game is a small win, and by entering a prize into the V winning hole 650, it is possible to easily execute a jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set again. As a result, it is possible to provide the jackpot game to the player while continuing the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to further increase the value of the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a small hit and the variable display stops, the LED corresponding to the small win type on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed as lit. It is configured to Therefore, when a player is playing a time-saving game, he or she wants to play the game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a time-saving gaming state is set) can be executed by effectively using the remaining number of time-saving games. . Then, the small winning game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only if it is a small winning type that does not give a time-saving gaming state, the game ball is stopped from being ejected and enters the V ball entrance 650a. There is a possibility that a gaming method that is disadvantageous to the gaming parlor side, such as playing the game so that the game balls do not enter the ball, will be executed. However, in this embodiment, the V winning door 650b is set to be open for 1.6 seconds after the variable display determined to be a small win in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the configuration of this embodiment, in which the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and it takes 2 seconds to reach the V ball entrance 650a, the game balls are fired after checking the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to let the ball enter the V ball entrance 650a, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, and the fluctuation stops, and the right hit notification is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If you do not immediately launch the game ball to the right side area and play the game, it will be difficult to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a in small winning games of all small winning types. It is composed of As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a gaming method that is extremely disadvantageous to the gaming parlor side.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202lh is a data table that defines a jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set, and is used during the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round after the jackpot game starts). jackpot type), round period (maximum period for which one round game is set), and interval period between rounds (period from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game) It is specified accordingly.

The small win scenario 16 table 202li is a data table in which a small win scenario is set in which the operation details during the small win game are set.

The jackpot scenario 16 table 202lh and the small jackpot scenario 16 table 202li are the 16th jackpot scenario table 202li that replaces the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the small jackpot scenario table 202ab of the above-mentioned A1 embodiment with the contents specified in each scenario. The only difference is that it corresponds to the contents of the jackpot game or small win game executed in the embodiment, and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 379(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the sixteenth embodiment will be explained. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the sixteenth embodiment includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203lb. Symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf, time saving medium counter 203lg, jackpot start flag 203lh, jackpot medium flag 203li, small hit start flag 203lj, small hit medium flag 203lk, V passing place jackpot type value 203lm , V flag 203ln, and other memory areas 203lz.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 acquired based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 are stored, respectively. .

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reservation area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203la are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la only in that the counter values obtained for winnings in the second winning opening 640 are stored respectively, and in other respects. Since the configurations are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc has one execution area and four reserved areas (1st reserved area to 4th reserved area). ). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203lc is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld controls the variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the 3-symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. 1 is added (see C304 in FIG. 394). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see C210 in FIG. 390).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (the number of pending times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (C211 in FIG. 390, C211 in FIG. 394). (See C305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203ld is changed. The value of the displayed number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the number of held balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol (reserved symbol) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld in that the number of reserved balls entered into the second winning opening 640 is stored. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is changed, it is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is The value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203lc. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc.

The time saving medium counter 203lg is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state. A counter value corresponding to the number of time reductions is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, and is decremented by 1 at the timing when the variation of the special symbol stops, thereby reducing the time until the number of variation of the special symbol set in the time saving gaming state ends. The gaming state is configured to be set.

The jackpot start flag 203lh is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203lh is set to ON (see C219 in FIG. 390). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203lh is on and it is identified that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to off. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203lh is set to off in the initial state, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power outage is maintained.

The jackpot flag 203li is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot stops and the jackpot game is started (FIG. 404: C1203). On the other hand, it is configured to be set to OFF when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed). This jackpot flag 203li is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. It is configured to

The small winning start flag 203lj is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small winning start flag 203lj is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to off. This small hit start flag 203lj is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is configured to be

The small winning medium flag 203lk is a flag indicating that a small winning game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (when it is determined that the game for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This small hit medium flag 203lk is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. is configured to be

The jackpot type value 203lm when passing V is a memory that stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball enters the V winning hole 650 within the V validity period when a small winning game is being executed. area. The jackpot type value 203lm when passing V is stored as a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type that has been determined when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small win stops. When a ball enters the V winning slot 650 during the V validity period, the V flag 203ln corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203lm when passing the V is configured to be set on. ing. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the large winning type value 203lm when passing V is configured to be cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203lm is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and in the event of a power outage, etc., the state immediately before the power outage, etc. occurs will be backed up. It is configured to be held by

In the V flag 203ln, when a ball enters the V winning hole 650 during the V validity period in a small winning game, a flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the type of small winning game being executed is set to ON. Ru. At the end of the small winning game, by determining whether this V flag 203ln is on, it is identified that there has been a win in the V winning slot 650 during the V validity period, and the flag is set on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203ln is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clearing, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. It is configured as follows.

The special figure 2 variation number counter 203ll is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. That is, the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ll is referred to when determining whether to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving end conditions that are set in plurality.

In the 16th embodiment, the counter value set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is configured to be different depending on the type of jackpot won. Thereby, the ease of ending the time saving state can be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of a jackpot win, but also in the set jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 387(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387(a), the ROM 222 in this embodiment is provided with at least a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la will be explained with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variable pattern selection 16 table 222la, and FIG. 388(b) is the time saving final variable pattern selection 16 table included in the variable pattern selection 16 table 222la. 222la3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in 222la3.

As shown in FIG. 388(a), the variation pattern selection 16 table 222la has three variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the gaming state and variation situation. A normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 that is referenced in a certain case, a time-saving variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 that is referenced when the time-saving state is present, and a time-saving final variation that is referenced when it is the final variation of the time-saving state. It has a variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3.

The normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 and the time-saving variation pattern selection 16 table 222la2 described above have the same technical idea as the variation pattern selection table described in each embodiment or each embodiment. It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (performance mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected. , a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving final variation pattern selection 16 table 222la3 is referred to when selecting the final variation in the time-saving state, that is, when selecting the performance mode of the variation effect for the special symbol variation when the time-saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation. It is a data table that includes the symbol type of the change, the lottery result, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc), and the presence or absence of a hit in the reservation (winning information storage area 223la). The configuration is such that different variation patterns (performance modes) are selected based on the result of determining whether winning information indicating a win is included in the winning information stored in the winning information.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 388(b), when the time-saving final variation is special figure 1, that is, when the time-saving final variation is 99 times, which is one of the common time-saving termination conditions among the time-saving termination conditions. If the special pattern variation when "" is established is the special pattern 1 variation, "time-saving final for special pattern 1" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the lottery result of the variation or the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2. be done.

Next, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, and the lottery result (right/wrong judgment result) of the variation is "win" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final". A" is selected, the number of balls reserved for special drawing 2 is "1, 2", and winning information indicating a win is included in the special drawing 2 holding, then "time-saving final A" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. , If winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, the "time saving final B" is selected as a variable pattern.

Then, if the lottery result (judgment result) of the fluctuation is "win", the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls is "3", and winning information indicating a win is included in the special drawing 2 reservation, the fluctuation "Time-saving final C" is selected as the pattern, and if winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, "time-saving final D" is selected as the variable pattern.

On the other hand, if the time-saving final variation is special chart 2, and the lottery result (right/wrong judgment result) of the variation is "lost" and the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final E". ” is selected, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “1, 2”, and the winning information indicating a win is included in the special figure 2 pending, “time-saving final B” is selected as the fluctuation pattern, If the winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, the "time-saving final F" is selected as a variable pattern.

In addition, if the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) of the change is "lost", the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is "3", and winning information indicating a win is included in the special figure 2 reserve, the change "Time-saving final D" is selected as the pattern, and if winning information indicating a win is not included in the special drawing 2 pending, "time-saving final E" is selected as the variable pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 387(b). FIG. 387(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 387(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223la, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223lb. , special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223lc, fluctuation start flag 223ld, stop type selection flag 223le, production counter 223lf, SW valid time counter 223lg, status storage area 223lh, series production flag 223li, pseudo series production flag 223lj, time saving final variation At least a flag 223lk, a small hit caution flag 223ll, a non-variable winning flag 223lm, a special figure variation time counter 223ln, a regular figure variation time counter 223lo, a continuous series effect flag 223lp, a series effect counter 223lq, and other memory areas 223z are provided. There is.

The winning information storage area 223la has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223la allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203lld of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is a variable performance (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of balls on hold (the number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203ld stored in the RAM 203l of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and uses the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb to count the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of pending balls is When the number of balls is subtracted, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203ld after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203ld of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, Special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223lb. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203lld.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223lb, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223lb. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223lb, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, the display control device 114 displays reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved pitch counter 223lb of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203lld of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203lld of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223lc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223lb based on the reserved balls number command output from the main controller 110. Since the only difference is that the method is performed, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223ld is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation start flag 223ld is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223le is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see C2105 in FIG. 406), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See C4007 in FIG. 415). When the stop type selection flag 223le is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The performance counter 223lf is a counter used for preview performances and various lottery games. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW valid time counter 223lg is a storage area in which the period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

The state storage area 223lh is a storage area for temporarily storing the current gaming state, and stores information included in the state command output from the main controller 110. In this embodiment, the state storage area 223lh contains information indicating the gaming state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating the time saving end condition of the time saving state, and the winning type (jackpot type, The information indicating the small winning type) is stored. Based on the various information stored in this state storage area 223lh, the presentation mode is configured to be variably set.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the state storage area 223lh is configured to temporarily store previously set gaming states in addition to information indicating the current gaming state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute fluctuations based on the transition status of the gaming state (from which gaming state to which gaming state has the transition been made).

The series effect flag 223li is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing a series of effects are satisfied, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing a series of effects are satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as a variation pattern of a winning special symbol lottery, or when a long variation of normal symbols is executed, the execution conditions of a series of effects are set. It is configured so that it holds true.

This series effect flag 223li is set when a series effect is set (C4207 in FIG. 417) in the normal pattern effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 417), or in the winning variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 419). , when a series of effects is set (C4402: Yes in Fig. 419), it is set to on (C4208 in Fig. 417, C4403 in Fig. 419), and in the small win related command processing (see C3504 in Fig. 412(a)). , is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small winning game (C3701 in FIG. 412(a)). It is also referenced when determining whether or not a new series of effects can be executed in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416) and the normal pattern effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417). Then, in the series of effects update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421), if it is determined that the conditions for continuous execution of the series of effects are not satisfied, it is set to OFF (see C4613 in FIG. 421).

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that a series of effects are executed based on a plurality of opportunities (special drawing lottery, regular drawing lottery). Even with this configuration, by using the series effect flag 223li, it is possible to prevent a series of effects from being set (executed) in duplicate.

The pseudo series effect flag 223lj is a flag to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is a loss and the execution conditions for the series effect are satisfied, and the series effect is set as the fluctuation effect of the special figure change fluctuation. This is set to on when the This pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to have a lower priority than the above-mentioned series effect flag 223li, and when the series effect flag 223li is set to on while the same series effect is being executed. , a different effect setting process is executed depending on whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to on.

Specifically, in the normal pattern effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417), if the series effect flag 223li is set to on (for example, if a series effect is executed as a winning variation effect of a special figure variation) case), the configuration is such that a new series of effects will not be executed even if the normal figure fluctuation satisfies the execution conditions for a series of effects, whereas the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to on. (For example, when a series of effects is executed as a variation effect of a special pattern variation), if the normal pattern variation satisfies the execution conditions of a series of effects, and the special conditions are also satisfied. In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 417).

In this way, in a state where the same series of productions is being executed, the process of executing a new series of productions (processing of replacing the production mode of the series of productions that is currently being executed) based on the execution trigger of the series of productions that is currently being executed. Since it is possible to vary whether or not to perform the performance, it is possible to diversify the presentation contents of the series of presentations. In addition, only when it is possible to display a performance result that is more advantageous to the player than the performance result of the series of performances currently being executed, the performance mode of the series of performances is replaced. The player can be made to watch a series of performances while expecting that the number will change.

The time-saving final variation flag 223lk is a flag to indicate that the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time-saving state, and is set to ON when the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time-saving state. . By setting this time-saving final variation flag 223lk to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for the time-saving final variation.

The small hit caution flag 223ll is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through a specific area even after a predetermined period of time has passed during the small win game, and is a flag for a predetermined period (1 second) from the start of the small win game. Set to on if the ball has not passed through a specific area even after . Then, by setting the small hit caution flag 223ll on, a guidance display mode (see FIG. 371(a)) for causing the player to play the right-handed game during the small winning game is displayed. Then, it is set to off at the timing when the small winning game ends.

The non-variation winning flag 223lm is a flag to indicate that the special figure 1 variation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Set to ON when special figure 1 variation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, and to win a ball into the first prize opening 64 and execute a special drawing 1 lottery. Then, a general drawing lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left side gaming area, and when the lottery result of the general drawing lottery is a general drawing long opening win, the electric accessory 640a Since a game with a regular long opening is executed in which the ball is opened long, a right-handed game is executed in order to win a ball in the second winning hole 640.

In other words, when the game is being played normally, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, if the normal state is set and a game is played in which the ball simply passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right side gaming area of the game board 13, the ball passes through the through gate 67. This means that the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing. Here, as for the board configuration of the game board 13 of the sixteenth embodiment, the proportion of balls fired in left-handed games passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left-hand game area is higher than that in right-handed games. The configuration is such that the percentage of balls passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right side game area is higher.

In this way, in a normal state, if you play a right-handed game and try to execute only the general lottery, even if you win the long open winning by the general lottery, It is configured so that variable effects are not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who plays a right-handed game in a normal state to understand the timing at which the regular pattern long open winning game is executed.

The special symbol variation time counter 223ln and the regular symbol variation time counter 223lo are counters for measuring each symbol variation time, and when a symbol variation is executed, a value corresponding to the current variation time is set. Ru. Then, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, that value is periodically subtracted. By using the values of the special symbol variation time counter 223ln and the regular symbol variation time counter 223lo, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each symbol variation time during symbol variation.

The continuous series effect flag 223lp indicates a continuous series effect (see FIG. 363(b) ) is set, and is set on when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series performance counter 223lq is a counter for updating the performance scenario of a series of performances, and when a series of performances is set, a value corresponding to the performance period of the series performance to be executed this time is set, and the value is , is updated in the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) that is periodically executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113. Note that this series performance counter 223lq is set to a value indicating the period until the series performance is completed to the end (the performance in which the jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 368(b))). The performance mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of a series of performances, the performance end condition (for example, the condition that is satisfied when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the regular game winning game and the special pattern 2 reservation cannot be obtained) is satisfied. However, when the series of performances is to be ended, a performance mode for indicating the end of the series of performances is set, and the value of the series of performances counter 223lq is reset to zero.

The re-prereading flag 223lr is a flag for indicating that it is necessary to perform the pre-reading process again on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, and it is necessary to perform the pre-reading process again. Set to on if In the 16th embodiment, as a variable effect corresponding to the final special figure change in the time-saving state, a variable effect (time-saving final change effect) in which the effect mode is set based on the look-ahead result of special figure 2 pending is configured to be executed. It is configured to perform a pre-reading process for the acquired special figure 2 hold at a specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period, and to set a performance mode corresponding to the pre-reading result.

The above-mentioned re-look ahead flag 223lr is set to ON when the final special symbol variation is being executed and a new special symbol 2 reservation is acquired after a specific timing of the final special symbol variation period has elapsed. In this case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 variation of the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the pre-reading process for the special figure 2 pending is executed again, and the variation effect based on the result of the pre-reading process is executed.

The reservation upper limit flag 223ls is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved pitches for special figure 2 has reached the upper limit value (4), and is a flag for determining whether the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has reached the upper limit value (4). Set to on. Then, it is referred to when setting the production mode of the time-saving final variation production. Specifically, in the 16th embodiment, as a variation effect corresponding to the final special symbol fluctuation in the time-saving state, a reserved ball is created to obtain special symbol 2 reservation during the first period of the final special symbol fluctuation period. The acquisition performance can be executed, and during the second period after the first period, the time-saving final fluctuation performance can be executed to show the lottery result of the fluctuation and the pre-read result of special drawing 2 pending. If the suspension upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON at the start of the first period, the time saving final fluctuation effect is executed using the first period and the second period. .

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a player who has already obtained special drawing 2 holding up to the upper limit from performing an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 holding. At the same time, the execution period of the time-saving final variation effect can be extended for players who are playing a game in which they constantly obtain special drawing 2 reservations close to the upper limit, that is, playing a right-handed game. Can be set. Therefore, the player can be made to continue playing the game, and the performance of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223lt is a flag for indicating that the time-saving final variation effect is being executed as a variation effect corresponding to the final special symbol variation, and is usually executed from the second period of the time-saving final variation period. This is set to ON when the time-saving final variation effect is being executed from the first period that is set before the second period. In other words, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of reserved special drawings 2 has reached the upper limit, and during the first period, the time-saving final fluctuation performance (a performance using the first period and the second period) It is set to ON when it is determined that the executed flag 223lt is to be executed, and it is determined whether the executed flag 223lt is set to ON at the start of the second period. Since the presentation mode to be executed during the period has been set, the process for setting a new presentation mode is skipped. Then, when a stop command corresponding to the time saving final variation is received, it is set to OFF.

The special 2 winning flag 223lu is a flag for indicating that a ball has won a prize in the second prize opening 640 during the game with a normal figure (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a), and during the game with a normal figure (while the electric accessory 640a is being opened). This is set to ON when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). This special 2 winning flag 223lu is set when it is determined that a ball has won in the second winning hole 640 (C4701 in FIG. 422(a)) in the regular game in-game update process (see FIG. 422(a)). Yes), is set to on (see C4705 in FIG. 422(a)), and is referenced in the series of effects update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see C4503 in FIG. 421). 421 C4608). In the process of C4608, if it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off) (C4608 in Figure 421: No), the special figure 2 variation will not be executed, and the condition for ending the series of effects is met. Therefore, a process (C4612) for ending the series of effects is executed.

<About the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the 16th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 389 to 405. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing 16 and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup process. Processing and main processing will be explained. In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, for convenience of explanation, some parts of the content explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are given different reference numerals and are explained redundantly. The contents explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments apply to the parts where detailed explanations are omitted for the same elements as described above. Further, the technical ideas explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are naturally applied to this 16th embodiment, and the modified examples and additional examples explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are also applied to this 16th embodiment. This naturally applies to the embodiments.

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing 16 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process 16 is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process 16, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (C101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, the small winning type counter C5, and the second winning type counter C6 are updated (C103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, the small winning type counter C5, and the second winning type counter C6. At the same time, when those counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, 999, 99, 239, 239, 99, and 99, respectively), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process 16 is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (C104). . Thereafter, the starting winning process 16 associated with winning the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (starting winning) is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 16 and the starting winning process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 390 to 395.

After executing the starting winning process 16 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 16, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 396. After executing the normal symbol variation process 16, the through gate passage process 16 accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passing process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398.

After executing the through gate passage process 16, the V entrance passage process 16 is executed (C108), and then the V passage process 16 (C109) is executed. Here, details of the V entrance passing process 16 and the V passing process 16 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400.

After executing the V passing process 16 (C109), the firing control process is executed (C110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 16 is ended. . Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390, the special symbol variation process 16 (C104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 16 (C104). This special symbol variation processing 16 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389), and is used to display the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and the This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the three symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (C201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (C201: Yes), it is in a state where the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (C201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (special symbol changing) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37a, 37b is not changing (special symbol changing) (C202: No), acquire the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) ( C203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is greater than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is subtracted by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. A held ball number command (special figure 2 held ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203le is set (C206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203ld and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203le from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 16 is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b (C213). The special symbol variation start process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 391.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is 0 (C204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is The value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is larger than 0 (C209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is 0 (C209: No), that is, if there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, the main processing is performed as is. end.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is subtracted (C210), and by the process of C210. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the changed (subtracted) value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is set (C211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command through the process of C211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la is shifted (C212). Thereafter, the process of C213 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the 16th embodiment, when executing a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation), the special symbol 2 It is configured to determine the value of the reserved ball number counter (N2), and when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (N2) is greater than 0, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is It is configured to execute a process (special symbol variation start process 16 (see C213)) for starting special symbol variation (special symbol variation). Thereby, the second special symbol can be changed with priority over the first special symbol.

In addition, in the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (C202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been executed (C214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (C214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (C214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is set (C215). . Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 391. When this special symbol fluctuation start process 16 is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb. It will be done. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is determined. Accordingly, one of jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE, and jackpot AF is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, it is a small win according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Either AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small win AE, or small win E is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player is informed of the lottery result of the current special symbol (determined result of each type of counter) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, if it is a small win, the red LED is lit, and if it is a miss. The red LED and green LED are turned on.

Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot AA is determined, the blue LEDs on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are set to show the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "a"). If jackpot AB is determined, it is lit in a manner that shows jackpot AB (for example, in a manner that imitates the letter "b"), and if jackpot AC is determined, it is lit in a manner that represents jackpot AB. Lights up in a manner that indicates AC (for example, in a manner that imitates the letter “c”), and when a jackpot AD is determined, lights in a manner that indicates the jackpot AD (for example, a manner that imitates the letter “d”) let

In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the red LED will be displayed for each small win type (small win AA, small win AB, small win AC, small win AD, small win AE, and small win E). Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops. In addition, in this embodiment, in order for the player to understand each winning type (big winning type and small winning type) determined as described above, the content of each winning type is shown (colors corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols). Although the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to light up in a lighting mode formed from lighting modes corresponding to each winning type, other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by checking the lighting conditions of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the current special symbol and the determined winning type. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the lottery results of the special symbols may be configured to be displayed in a lighting manner that is differentiated to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery results are different. .

After the process of C215 is completed, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( C216). If this lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type determined for this jackpot. Start settings (jackpot settings such as 15 rounds) are executed (C218).

Note that when the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot type is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202lh.

When the process of C218 is finished, next, the jackpot start flag 203lh and jackpot flag 203li are set to ON (C219), the value of the time saving middle counter 203lg is set to 0 (C220), and a stop command is set (C225). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (C216: No), a time saving update process is executed (C221). Details of this time-saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 392, but when the time-saving state is set, various parameters (second special symbol (special pattern 2) A process of updating the number of variations (total number of variations of special symbols) is executed. After executing the process of C221, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (C222), and if it is determined that it is a small win (C222: Yes), execute the small win start setting process 16 (C223). Then, the process of C225 described above is executed, and this process ends. The details of the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (a loss) (C222: No), this process is directly ended.

As described above, the sixteenth embodiment is configured to execute the time saving update process at the timing when the special symbol variation ends (timing when the special symbol variation time elapses). By configuring in this way, for example, when "1 time special figure 2 fluctuation number" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition which is a part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed. Even if it is, the period until the special figure 2 variation stops can be shortened, so it is possible to secure a period for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the 16th embodiment, and the time saving update process may be executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, and in this case, the period for one special symbol 2 fluctuation is secured as the time saving state. In order to do so, it is only necessary to configure the system so that "the number of variations in special figure 2 is twice" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition.

Next, special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 390) of the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and is performed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203la and special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb, a "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small hit", or "special symbol miss" is determined. This is a process for performing a lottery (judgment of validity) and determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance performed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 16, first, the first winning random number counter stored in the common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203la, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb) C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small winning type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are acquired (C231). Next, the special symbol lottery results are determined based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1, special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). It is acquired (C232), and the process moves to C233.

Specifically, if the special symbol fluctuation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is input to the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (figure 1). 380(b))) are compared one by one with the four random numbers set. As mentioned above, four random numbers "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers for the first special symbol that will result in a jackpot, and the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these random numbers that will result in a jackpot are set. When the numbers match, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. Similarly, the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the two random numbers "10, 11" that will be a small win set in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see FIG. 380(b)) are If they match, it is determined that it is a small hit with a special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but they are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the bias of jackpots.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher jackpot probability, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different numbers of determination values for determining a small hit. With this configuration, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied depending on the type of special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make the player play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first random number 16 table 202la is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small win, but only one of the special symbols wins a small win. The first winning random number 16 table 202la may be set so that the first winning random number is won. Specifically, the random number value for the small hit of the special symbol is not set in the special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 corresponding to the first special symbol, but is set in the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is best to set a random value that will result in a small win for the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the benefits (small winning games) that can be given to the player according to the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special symbol jackpot corresponds to a predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first random number counter C1, and a jackpot of a special symbol corresponds to a predetermined range of the value of the first random number counter C1, and However, in other configurations, for example, the first special symbol may be set to a part of the range that results in a jackpot (for example, 0 to 2), and the second special symbol may be set to a small hit. It may be set as a winning range.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, miss) is configured to be performed using the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number 16 table 202la. As another configuration, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. For example, the first random number table may be used to determine whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or not. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a jackpot, the second random number table is used to determine whether the special symbol lottery result is a small win or not. It may be configured. By performing the lottery of special symbols using multiple random number tables in this way, the lottery results of the special symbols can be set more randomly, and fraudulent acts that manipulate the lottery results of the special symbols can be suppressed. .

In this embodiment, when drawing a special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, the values of a plurality of random number counters and the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number 16 table 202la. In this case, for example, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot based on the value of the first random number counter, and whether the special symbol lottery result is a small hit or not is determined based on the value of the second random number counter. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 391, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C233, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained in the process of C232 is a special symbol jackpot (C233). If it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection 16 table 202lb corresponding to the special symbol type corresponding to the current special symbol lottery ( C234), sets the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and jackpot type (C235), determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C236), and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined this time. A corresponding fluctuation pattern command is set (C243), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (C233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (C237), and it is determined that it is a small win. If it is determined that (C237: Yes), the small winning type is acquired based on the small winning type selection 16 table 202lg according to the type of special symbol corresponding to this special symbol lottery (C238), and the special symbol and small winning type are obtained (C238). The display mode at the time of small winning corresponding to the winning type is set (C239), the small winning fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C240), and the fluctuation corresponding to the small winning fluctuation pattern determined this time is determined. A pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of C237, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (C237: No), that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a loss, then the loss corresponding to the type of special symbol is determined. Sets the display mode of the time (C241), determines a variation pattern when missing based on the number of held pitches (C242), sets a variation pattern command corresponding to the currently determined variation pattern when missed (C243), This process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls, whereas the special symbol If the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of reserved pitches. Specifically, it is configured such that the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 16 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a short variation time. As a result, the period until the special symbol lottery result is displayed as a lottery result (losing) that does not give any benefits to the player can be shortened as the number of pending balls increases, so it can be executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of drawings of special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, if it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, the time for each special symbol fluctuation can be increased, which prevents the occurrence of a situation where the special symbol does not change during the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to differ based on the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213) is executed, but there are other variations as well, such as special symbol variation start processing 16 (C213). Even if it is configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern that is being executed, on the condition that the number of balls on hold reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the ball is fluctuating. good. With this configuration, even while the special symbols are fluctuating, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to secure a large number of reserved balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation patterns may be different based on the number of balls, or the structure may be such that the larger the number of balls on hold, the easier it is to determine a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern may be the sum of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Among the 2 special symbols, it may be only the value of the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol for which the special symbol variation start process is executed with priority, or the value of the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol for which the special symbol variation start process is executed this time. Only the value of the number of reserved balls in the symbol may be used.

Next, the time saving update process (C221) will be explained with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203lg in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). The time saving medium counter 203lg is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols. This indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state with normal symbols. In addition, in this 16th embodiment, it is configured so that two gaming states can be set. Specifically, two game states can be set: normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). It is composed of That is, in this embodiment, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, a time saving state is sometimes used as a term indicating a high probability state of normal symbols, and a normal state is sometimes used as a term indicating a low probability state of normal symbols.

If the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 0 (C251: No), the time saving state has not been set, and the process ends as is. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203lg is greater than or equal to 1 (C251: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current time-saving state is in progress, the value of the time-saving counter 203lg is subtracted by 1 (C252); Next, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (C253). If the current special figure change is a change of special figure 2 (C253: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of special figure 2 change number counter 203ll (C254), and set the remaining time short number command that indicates the values of various counters. (C255), and the process moves to C256.

In the process of C255, a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter 203lg and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is set. The remaining time shortening number command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 as part of the status command indicating the gaming status by the external output process (see C1001 in FIG. 403) of the main process (see FIG. 403) described later. Output. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined in the command determination process 16 (see C3113 in FIG. 406) that a status command (short remaining time command) has been received (C3212 in FIG. 406), the command included in the received command The information is extracted and the current gaming state (remaining time shortening number) is stored in the state storage area 223lh. Thereby, it is possible to predict (determine) the remaining period of the time-saving state currently set by the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to set an effect mode according to the remaining period of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to output a remaining time reduction number command to indicate the remaining time reduction number of times each time the time reduction update process (see C221 in FIG. 392) is executed. For example, without being limited to this, a time-saving end condition command to indicate the time-saving end condition set at the time when the time-saving state is set (when the jackpot game ends) is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The time-saving termination condition is extracted from the time-saving termination condition command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and then the number of receptions of a command (variation pattern command) indicating a special figure variation output from the main control device 110 side. may be accumulated, and it may be determined based on the accumulated value whether or not the time saving termination condition is satisfied. With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if the current special figure variation is not the variation of special figure 2 (C253: No), the process of C254 and C255 is not performed and the process moves to C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 0 (C256). If the value of the time-saving counter 203lg is 0 (C256: Yes), this means that the time-saving end conditions (common time-saving end conditions) are met, so it is determined whether the corresponding time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ll for this purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process moves to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the time saving counter 203lg is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is 0 (C258). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is 0 (C258: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (corresponding time-saving end condition) is satisfied, so it is determined whether the common time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the time-saving counter 203lg for determining the time is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process moves to C260. On the other hand, in the process of C258, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll is not 0 (C258: No), this process is ended as is.

In the process of C260, the gaming state is set to the normal state (C260), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then this processing ends.

As explained above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 392) includes a plurality of time saving ending conditions (some of the common time saving ending conditions, and The system is configured to be able to determine whether the corresponding time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, and to reset the values of parameters for establishing other time-saving termination conditions when any of the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. This makes it possible to unify the state after the time saving state ends, regardless of which parameter value the time saving end condition is established based on.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time-saving end condition, a common time-saving end condition that is set in common regardless of the time-saving state set based on which jackpot type (a first end condition that is satisfied when winning a jackpot, a small win) The second ending condition is established after the end of the game, the third ending condition is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations (total of special symbols 1 and 2) reaches 99 times, and the jackpot type is set. Although the system is configured to set corresponding time-saving termination conditions (conditions that are satisfied when the number of special figure 2 fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times), the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are not limited to these. For example, a small win termination condition may be set that is satisfied when the number of small win wins reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times a specific small win type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times. In this case, the small hit termination condition may be set as a common time-saving termination condition, or may be set as a corresponding time-saving termination condition. In addition, an end lottery means is provided to determine whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and when the lottery result of the end lottery means is a lottery result for ending the time saving state. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends, so it is possible to make the player play the game in the time saving state while giving the player a feeling of excitement. . In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a special symbol lottery result indicates a specific failure) is satisfied during the time-saving state, various parameters related to the time-saving end condition are set for a predetermined period of time. It may be configured so that it is not updated. Furthermore, only in the time saving state that is set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period has passed after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 30). It may be configured such that various parameters related to time-saving termination conditions are not updated. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably set a period during which the time-saving state continues, allowing the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, a determining means is provided that can determine that a ball did not enter the V winning hole 650a even though a small winning game was executed, and the determining means determines that a ball did not enter the V winning hole 650a. It may be configured such that a time-saving forced termination condition that is satisfied when it is determined that a common time-saving termination condition is established. With this configuration, the small winning type that is set when a small winning is won is determined, and the determination result is a small winning type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball is placed in a specific area within the V winning hole 650a). If it is determined that the game is a jackpot game that would be disadvantageous to the player if it passes (a jackpot game with a small number of rounds, or a jackpot game where a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is not set after the end), A penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an illegal game such as not firing a ball during a small winning game and aiming to win the next small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the small hit start setting process 16 (C223) will be explained. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process 16 (C223). In this small hit start setting process 16 (C223), a scenario is set for opening and closing the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery. Processing is executed.

In the small win start setting process 16 (C223), first, a scenario (win scenario) corresponding to the set small win type is set based on the small win scenario 16 table 202li (C291). Next, a small win type corresponding to the small win type determined as the jackpot type value when passing V is set (C292), a small win start corresponding to the small win type is set (C293), and a small win medium flag 203lk is set. is set to on (C294), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the startup winning process 16 (C105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 16 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389) in this embodiment. This start-up winning process 16 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389), and the winning process 16 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389). This is a process for determining the presence or absence of a (start-up win), acquiring various random number counters when there is a start-up win, and executing processing for holding the values.

When the starting winning process 16 (see C105 in FIG. 394) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 (C301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C303).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter If the value (N1) of 203ld is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process moves to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is less than 4 (C303: Yes), The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203ld is incremented by 1 (C304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld that has been changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203ld from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223lb of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command by the process of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in C103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389) , the values of the second winning random number counter C4, the small winning type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are set among the empty holding areas (holding 1st area to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203la of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (C306). In addition, in the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203ld is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from C307 to C312, the same processing as the processing from C301 to C306 is performed for the winning of the second ball entry hole (winning hole) 640. The only difference is that the reservation process for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed for the winning of the second ball entry opening (winning opening) 640, and the other processing is the same, so the details are as follows. Further explanation will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of C307 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C307: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le is less than 4. If not (C309: No), prefetch processing 16 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, prefetch processing 16 (C313) will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing 16 (C313). When the prefetch process 16 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a new winning prize (C321). If there is no new prize winning (C321: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or not (C322).

In the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (C322: Yes), then by the process of C306 of the starting winning process 16 (see C105 in FIG. 394) or C312. Using the obtained various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 16 table 202la1 (see Figure 380(b)), special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb1 (see Figure 381(b)), and special symbol 1 small hit type selection 16 table 202lg1 (see FIG. 383(b)), the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small win type are acquired (C323), and the process moves to C325.

On the other hand, in the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (C322: No), the special symbol 2 random number 16 table 202la2 (see FIG. 380(c)), Figure 2. Lottery results, jackpot types, and small win types are obtained based on the jackpot type selection 16 table 202lb2 (see Figure 381(c)) and the special drawing 2 small hit type selection 16 table 202lg2 (see Figure 383(c)). (C324), the process moves to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big win determination result, jackpot type, small win determination result, small win type) obtained in the process of C323 or C324 described above is set ( C325). Then, this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the prefetching process 16 (see C313 in FIG. 395) in the 16th embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned prefetching results, when a special figure variation based on the corresponding winning information is executed, The set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is also configured to be able to be determined in advance. Specifically, the configuration is such that the value of the variation type counter CS1 is also acquired by the process of C306 or C312 of the starting winning process 16 (see C105 of FIG. 394), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired by the process of C323 of the prefetch process 16 (see C313 of FIG. 395). Or, in the process of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 16 table 202le (see FIG. 385), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the process of C325. There is. Thereby, it becomes possible on the audio lamp control device 113 side to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information held and stored will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396, the normal symbol variation process 16 (C106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106). This normal symbol variation processing 16 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389), and is used to display the variation of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a. This is a process for controlling things such as.

In this normal symbol variation process 16, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (C601). When the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning includes when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric accessory 640a is being controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (C601: Yes), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203lf (the number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is larger than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is 0 (C604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203lc are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203lg in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). The time saving medium counter 203lg is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols.

If the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the process of winning a jackpot with a special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a normal symbol, so it is acquired by the process of C607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the 16 random numbers per normal symbol table 202lc for high probability times (see FIG. 380(d)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (C609 ). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number 16 per symbol table 202lc for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 380(d)).

In the process of C608, if the value of the time saving counter 203lg is 0 (C608: No), the process moves to C610. In the process of C610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of C607 and the low Based on the random number table 202lc (see FIG. 380(d)) of 16 random numbers per normal symbol for probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained (C610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal symbol per random number 16 table 202lc for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is outside the normal pattern (see FIG. 380(d)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of C609 or C610 is a normal symbol win (C611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (C611: Yes), Next, the type per ordinary figure (A per ordinary figure, B per ordinary figure) is set using the per ordinary figure type selection 16 table 202ld (C612). Specifically, the value of the second winning type counter C6 is compared with the random value stored in the 16 winning type selection table 202ld. As mentioned above, when the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability state for regular symbols), if the value of the second winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0, 1", it is A per regular symbol. If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that the average score is B (see FIG. 382(a)). Alternatively, if the current gaming state is the normal state (low probability state for regular symbols), if the value of the second winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the winning is A for regular symbols, and " If it is within the range of 1 to 99'', it is determined that the normal figure is B (see FIG. 382(a)).

Next, the display mode at the time of winning is set based on the setting result of C612 (C613), and the process moves to C615. In the process of C613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not a hit (C611: No), the current normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery) is a miss, so the display mode in the case of a miss is set. (C614), the process moves to C615.

In the process of C615, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf is Among them, the regular map fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the specified content corresponding to the time saving state (general map high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is ended. In the process of C615, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is 0 (C615: No), the normal state is performed using the specified contents corresponding to the normal state (normal pattern low certainty) from the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf. The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and after that, various contents set in this process (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf, normal symbol lottery result, normal symbol fluctuation time ) is set (C623), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (C618). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of C616 or the process of C617 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of C618, if the variable time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process moves to C623 and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the process of C619, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of C619, when the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or C614.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 16 is the normal symbol win. (C620). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (C620: Yes), an opening pattern for the electric accessory is set according to the ordinary symbol winning type and the gaming state (C621), and opening/closing control processing for the electric accessory is set. (C622), and then moves to C623, sets a command to indicate the content of the game per common symbol set by the process of C621, and ends this process. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of C621, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 403) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the process of C616 or C617 ends. On the other hand, in the process of C620, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (C620: No), the process of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process moves to the process of C623, and the fluctuation of the out of normal symbol is stopped. Set a command that indicates this, and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 397, the through gate passage process 16 (C107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. This through gate passage processing 16 (C107) judges whether or not a ball passes through this normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and when a ball passes through, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is determined. This is the process for acquiring and holding the information.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203lf (the number of times M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process moves to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf 1 is added to the value (M) (C434), and a command for the number of pitches reserved for regular pitches is set (C435). Then, the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning type counter C6 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt processing 16 mentioned above, and the second winning random number counter C4 updated in the processing C1002 of the main processing (see FIG. 403) described later The value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area of the free holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203lc of the RAM 203 (C436), and the process moves to C437. .

In addition, when storing the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the first area among the empty holding areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203lc, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203lf is referred to, and the value is If it is 0, the first reservation area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of C437, a general map pre-reading process is executed (C437), and then this process ends. Further, details of this ordinary symbol pre-reading process will be described later with reference to FIG. 398, but based on each counter value stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203lc corresponding to the acquired ordinary symbol reserved in the process of C436. Then, before the normal symbol variation (ordinary symbol variation) is executed, processing is executed to determine the lottery result and variation pattern of the common symbol pending in advance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398, the ordinary map pre-reading process (C437) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the ordinary map pre-reading process (C437) executed in the through gate passing process 16 (see FIG. 397).

In the normal symbol pre-reading process (C437), first, the random number table 202lc of 16 per normal symbol (see Figure 380(d)), the 16 type selection table 202ld per ordinary symbol (see Figure 382(a)), and the regular symbol variation pattern are created. The lottery results are acquired based on the selection table (C451), and winning information commands for indicating each lottery result are set (C452), after which this process ends. The winning information command set here (the winning information command indicating the pre-reading result of the common map) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing described below (see FIG. 403). ) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (C1001). When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, it determines whether the received winning information command is a winning information command related to a special pattern variation or a winning information command related to a general pattern variation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223la. . The winning information stored here is used to display the lottery results of the symbol variation at a timing before the symbol variation (special symbol variation or regular symbol variation) corresponding to the winning information command is actually executed. Refer to this when setting up suggestive effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 399, the V entrance passage process 16 (C108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process 16 (C108) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389).

In the V entrance passage process 16 (C108), it is first determined whether or not the current game is a winning game (small winning game) (C501), and if the current game is not a winning game (small winning game) (C501). :No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game is a winning game (small winning game) (C501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening period is in progress, that is, a small winning game is being played. (C502). In the process of C502, if it is determined that it is during the V winning opening opening period (C502: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (C503) and this process ends. If it is determined that a small winning game is not in progress (C502: No), this means that a ball has won in the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (C504), and this process ends.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V-entrance passing. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during a small winning game based on winnings in the V winning device 650.

Next, V passing processing 16 (C109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the V passing process 16 (C109) executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389).

When the V passing process 16 (C109) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether the ball has won in a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning hole 650a (C601). If it is determined that no prize has been won (C601: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a prize has been won (C601: Yes), then it is determined whether the current V validity period is in progress (C602). In the process of C602, if the progress status of the small winning scenario set during the small winning game is within a specific period, it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, and in other cases, the V valid period is not in progress. It is determined that

In the process of C602, if it is determined that the V is in the valid period (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is being played (C603), and if the small winning game is currently being played (C603). :Yes), acquires the V passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small win type of the current small win game (C604), sets the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and sets the time saving medium counter 203lg. It is set to 0 (C606), the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ll is set to 0 (C607), and the process moves to C608.

That is, in the processing from C604 to C607, processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of C603, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (C603: No), there is no need to perform a new process to execute the big winning game, so the processes of C604 to C607 are skipped. , the process moves to C608.

In the process of C608, a V passing command is set (C608), and this process ends. The V passing command set here is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same way as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V passage command, for example, when the V passage command is received during a small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game is successful, and following the small winning game, , executes an effect to indicate that a jackpot game will be executed. Further, when the V pass command is received during the jackpot game, the same effect as when the V pass command is received during the small win game is executed. On the other hand, if the V passage command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a regrettable effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small winning game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning hole 650a is set, but if a game player enters the V winning hole 650a It may be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) to indicate that the ball did not win. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is jammed in the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current time is not within the V validity period (C602: No), an error command is set (C609) and this process ends. By performing the process of C609, if a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a outside the V validity period, that is, a game is played in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 650a illegally, or if a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, or if a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, It is possible to quickly notify the outside of a problem (ball clogging, etc.) occurring in the ball flow path within the port 650a.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (C902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904), and if it is turned on (C904: Yes), it becomes a sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if it is not stored (C905: No). , since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, in this case as well, payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A command is sent (C912).

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (C907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (C912). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets the initial value, and enters a state where it can start controlling the payout of game balls. becomes. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process is executed. Further, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 203 is similarly executed (C914). Thereafter, the process moves to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, the power-off occurrence information is stored, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: Yes), the data is backed up to the RAM 203. Clear the power-off occurrence information while retaining the data (C908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (C909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Then, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (C910), and the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances (C911). Next, interrupts are permitted and the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec, and the counter update process of C1011 and C1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see Fig. 403), first, during the execution of timer interrupt processing 16 (see Fig. 389), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (C1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 16 (see FIG. 389) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of balls won is sent to the payout control device 111. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process 16 (see Figure 390), start winning process 16 (see Figure 394), V entrance passage process 16 (see Figure 399), and V passage process 16 (see Figure 400) It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, ending command set in the jackpot control process 16 (see FIG. 404) and various commands set in the small win control process 16 (see FIG. 405) described later are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, each variation type counter (variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2) is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the various fluctuation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the sixteenth embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of special symbol variation (special symbol variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is used when referring to the variation pattern of special symbol variation (special symbol variation). The value is used when referring to the fluctuation pattern of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol fluctuations). The special pattern variation and the regular pattern variation are configured to be executed by the establishment of separate and independent opportunities. As a result, even if the timing and contents of updating the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation will not be synchronized. None. Therefore, the processing content in the main control device 110 can be simplified without affecting the game.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the values of the various fluctuation type counters may be configured so as not to be synchronized. For example, the value of one of the fluctuation type counters may be updated every time the main processing is executed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured such that only the value of the other variation type counter is updated each time it is executed a specific number of times different from the predetermined number of times described above. By making the update contents of the various fluctuation type counters different in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of the other fluctuation type counter from being determined based on the acquired value of one fluctuation type counter.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, a variation type counter CS1 that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol variation, and a second variation type counter CS2 that is referenced when a variation pattern of a regular symbol variation is selected. Although the configuration is such that each counter value is updated periodically, for example, the variation pattern of special symbol fluctuation and regular symbol fluctuation is based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It may be configured to select.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 have been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, , executes the jackpot control process 16 for executing the jackpot performance and opening or closing the specific winning opening (big opening opening) 65a of the variable winning prize device 65 (C1004). In the jackpot control process 16, the specific winning opening 65a is opened by opening the winning door 65b every round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a. Determine whether a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 16 (see FIG. 389). Further, details of this jackpot control process 16 will be described later with reference to FIG. 404.

Next, small hit control processing 16 (C1005) is executed. This small hit control process 16 (C1005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 405. After that, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C1006). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of C622 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of C616 or the process of C617 in the normal symbol variation process 16 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of C236, C240 or C242 of the special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 391), a variation display according to the variation pattern is performed. , starts on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time has elapsed, the red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of C236, process of C240, or process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 16 (see FIG. 391) ends, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is ended, and the stop symbol (the first 1 symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or C617 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396), the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device. After finishing the fluctuation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of C613 or the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 396). indicate.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (C1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (C1010: Yes), the process moves to C1001, and each process from C1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main process (C1010: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process C1001 to C1008 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, various fluctuation type counters can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the configuration in which the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated as in the sixteenth embodiment, in order to make the update timings of the various fluctuation type counters different, for example, in C1002 of the main process. In the process, update processing is performed for both variation type counters, and only one variation type counter (for example, variation type counter CS1) may be updated in the process of C1012.

In addition, in the process of C1009, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing has been executed, so the processing at power-off after C1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (C1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). (C1014). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (C1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game status performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It is possible to start from the process of C1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of C1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting it to the initial value), it is possible to start from the process of C1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 404, the jackpot control process 16 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 16 (C1004). This jackpot control process 16 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and the variable winning device This is a process for opening or closing 65 specific winning openings 65a.

In the jackpot control process 16 (C1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203lh is on (C1201). This jackpot start flag 203lh is set to ON in the process C219 of the special symbol variation process 16 (see C104 in FIG. 390). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203lh is on (C1201: Yes), an opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot flag 203li is set on, and the jackpot start flag 203lh is set off (C1203). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203lh is off (C1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203li is on (C1204).

In the process of C1204, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203li is off (C1204: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203li is on (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether the current timing is the start of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the process of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (opening/closing of the specific winning opening 65a). The specific winning a prize opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65b is in an open state), and then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this process is ended.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (C1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the 16th embodiment, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed while satisfying a predetermined continuous condition, the number of rounds executed during the plural jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds obtained is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (that the jackpot has been won), it is determined whether the continuous condition is satisfied, and If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative round number counter that accumulates the received round number commands is not cleared, and the value of the cumulative round number counter is updated based on the newly received round number command. Then, the cumulative number of rounds is displayed in a display mode that shows the updated results.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that successive jackpot games are one jackpot game, so it is possible to make the player think that consecutive jackpot games are one jackpot game. It is possible to show the maximum number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of expectation for the size of the benefit (number of prize balls) provided by one jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 side is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not a continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds. A part of the process for displaying the number may be configured to be executed on the main control device 110 side, for example, as a continuous condition for displaying the cumulative round number, it may be executed after the end of the jackpot game. A continuous condition is set that is satisfied when a jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of special figure variations (for example, 5 special figure 2 variations), and the cumulative number of rounds of the jackpot game is measured on the main controller 110 side. A cumulative round number counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round number counter is set as a round number command. Then, when the special figure 2 variation is executed five times after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the cumulative round number counter is cleared.

With this configuration, if a continuous condition is met when a jackpot game is executed, the value of the cumulative round number counter will be set to the cumulative number of rounds of the previous jackpot game. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (cumulative round number) information included in the command. The cumulative number of rounds can be notified to the player simply by

In addition, other conditions may be set as continuous conditions for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games. If the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen is displayed continuously (the period until 10 seconds have passed after the jackpot game ends) For example, conditions that hold true (when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery results of the special drawing 1 lottery), or a jackpot game is executed during a period in which a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) is set as the gaming state. It may also be configured to set a condition that is satisfied when the In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the cumulative round number counter (cumulative round number) and the number of rounds of the current jackpot game (single round number) are displayed. It may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). If it is determined that the closing conditions for the specific winning opening are satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening/closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is in the closed state). ) (C1209), and then ends this process. In the process of C1208, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning hole is not satisfied (C1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the current timing is to start the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: Yes), an ending command is set (C1211), and then this process ends.

Note that if it is determined in the process of C1208 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and the system is configured so that it will not be determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next jackpot control process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212). If it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg and the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll (C1213), and the jackpot is set. A state command corresponding to the subsequent gaming state is set (C1214), an end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is ended.

Here, the values set to the values of each counter in the process of C1213 are different depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see Figures 381 and 383), and the jackpot type AA, jackpot type When the types AD to AF are set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, and "-" indicating that it is not set is set in the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ll. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, the corresponding time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 is not set as the time-saving end condition, and the common time-saving end condition (big hit winning, small winning game end, the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 99 times) will be set.

When jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, "5" is set in the special chart 2 variation counter 203ll, and when jackpot AC is set, the time saving medium counter 203lg is set as "5". "99" is set to 203lg, and "1" is set to special figure 2 variation number counter 203ll.

In addition, when a jackpot game is executed based on a small winning win, the value of the jackpot type corresponding to the set small winning type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. At the end of a jackpot game based on a small win for which types AA and AE are set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, "5" is set in the special figure 2 variation counter 203ll, and small winning types AB and AD are set. At the end of the jackpot game based on the small win set, "99" is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, and "-" indicating that it has not been set is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll. On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot game based on the small win for which the small win type AC is set, "0" is set in the time saving medium counter 203lg, and "0" is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ll.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 405, the small hit control process 16 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process 16 (C1005). This small hit control process 16 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 403), and is used to set commands to cause the audio lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small win, and to set the V winning prize. This is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the opening 650a.

In the small winning control process 16 (C1005), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small winning game (C1301). In the process of C1301, it is determined whether the small win scenario set in the process of C291 of the small win start setting process 16 (see C223 in FIG. 393) indicates the start of a small win game. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (C1302), the small winning medium flag 203lk is set on (C1303), and the small winning operation is performed. The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning medium flag 203lk is on (C1305). If it is determined that the small winning flag 203lk is off (C1305: No), this means that the current small winning game is not in progress, and thus the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined in the process of C1305 that the small winning flag 203lk is on (C1305: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning game (C1306), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306: Yes), the small winning medium flag 203lk is set to off (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is reset to 0. (C1308), and determines whether the V flag 203ln is set to on (C1309). As described above, in the 16th embodiment, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg after the small winning game ends, regardless of whether the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game. It is configured as follows.

Through the process of C1308, one condition of time-saving termination condition (common time-saving termination condition) is set. In other words, if a small winning game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state also ends when the small winning game ends, so for example, during the time saving state, the small winning game being executed is disadvantageous to the player If it is determined that the small winning type is a small winning type (for example, a small winning type where a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player may be executed), the small winning game is It is possible to prevent a game in which the ball is not shot (the ball is not passed through a specific area) from being played.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg is always set (reset) to "0" when the small winning game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, When a small winning game based on a specific small winning type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203lg may be set (reset) to "0" after the small winning game ends.

In the process of C1309, if it is determined that the V flag 203ln is off (C1309: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203ln is on (C1309: Yes), then the jackpot start corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203ln is set to off. (C1311), and then ends this process.

In addition, in this embodiment, all small winning games are set as games of one round, so unlike a jackpot scenario in which operation control of a jackpot game is executed, processing for setting a command related to the number of rounds, and an interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the jackpot scenario used in the above-mentioned jackpot game may be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning scenario is configured to be set for the period in which the small winning game is executed, but for example, after the small winning game ends, the small winning scenario is set until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. A small win scenario may be set for the period between. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V passing valid period until one second has passed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that spans different gaming states using one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning hole 650a in a small winning game, a jackpot game corresponding to a preset jackpot type corresponding to the small winning is executed. Although configured, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 based on the detection of a game ball by the V winning hole 650a.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 16th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 406 to 421. Note that among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, detailed explanations and illustrations of the same processes as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are omitted. do.

Further, regarding the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, various counters are After executing the update process (S4111), the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420), which will be described later, is executed, and the command judgment process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 406) is executed instead of the command judgment process (see S4112 in FIG. 59). The only difference is that a variable display setting process 16 (C3114 in FIG. 415) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59), and illustration thereof is omitted. Note that the other processes within the main process are the same as those executed, so the same reference numerals as in the main process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 59) are given, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. ), it is configured to be able to perform a general figure fluctuation performance according to the following.

The general pattern fluctuation effect is configured to be executed as a series of effects in which a series of effects are performed across the general pattern fluctuation period, the general pattern per game period, the special pattern 2 fluctuation period, and the small winning game period. There is. By configuring in this way, a ball can be entered into the second prize opening 640 during a game when a specific common figure (general figure long open win) is won in the general figure lottery, that is, a general figure long open win game. A game in which a small win is won by the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning prize, and a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area in the V winning hole 650a during the small win game. The flow can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the presentation mode of a series of presentations.

In addition, the execution period of the above-mentioned series of performances varies greatly depending on the gaming situation (presence or absence of special pattern 1 fluctuation) at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the long opening of the general pattern. It is configured to set different production modes depending on the gaming situation (presence or absence of special figure 1 variation) at the time when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the long open winning game. In other words, if the special pattern 1 variation is being executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the regular pattern long opening, the special pattern 2 variation will occur after the current special pattern 1 variation ends. is executed, the performance mode is set according to the length of the remaining fluctuation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than a predetermined period, the production mode corresponding to the normal series of productions is set, and if the waiting period is longer than the predetermined period, the series of productions is pseudo-ended, and the production mode that is currently in progress is set. When the remaining fluctuation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 fluctuation reaches a specific period, a continuous series of performances is set in which the series of performances is executed in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the performance mode of a series of performances to be variably settable depending on the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of performances that do not give players a sense of discomfort. It is possible to prevent the execution period of the performance from becoming unnecessarily long and the player from getting bored with the game.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during a regular game long opening game, if the special pattern 1 variation is not executed, the special pattern 2 immediately after the ball enters the second winning hole 640. Since the variation is executed, a shortened series of performances is set which is shorter than the normal series of performances.

That is, the present 16th embodiment is configured so that when the normal state is set as the gaming state, a game is performed in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the above-mentioned series of effects are as follows. Executed when the lottery result of the Fuzu lottery (lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67) executed during the normal state is a specific lottery result (Fuzu long open win) Because of this configuration, while the series of effects is being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation is being executed. Therefore, a normal series of productions includes a regular pattern variation period, a regular pattern per game period, a waiting period (a period of waiting until the end of the special pattern 1 variation in progress), a special pattern 2 variation period, and a small winning game period. It is configured so that it is executed across periods, and the content of the performance is varied depending on the stage at which each period moves.

Here, if the special pattern 1 variation has not been executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the long opening of the regular pattern, the waiting period is within each period in which the series of effects described above are executed. Since this does not occur, the special symbol 2 fluctuation period is set after the regular symbol per game period has elapsed. While such a situation can occur, the same performance mode is maintained regardless of the gaming situation (presence or absence of special pattern 1 variation) at the time when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a game with a regular pattern long open win. If this is set, there is a risk that unnecessary effects (for example, effects that indicate that the waiting period is in progress even though no waiting period has been set) will be executed, leading to a decrease in the effect of the effect. .

On the other hand, in the present 16th embodiment, if the special pattern 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game with the regular pattern long opening, the above-mentioned waiting period It is configured so that a series of performances with skipped performances is executed. In addition, in order to prevent the effect of the performance from decreasing even if the performance during the standby period is skipped, we have created a performance mode that does not give players a sense of discomfort when skipping from the regular pattern per game period to the special pattern 2 variable period. is configured so that it is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner the general pattern fluctuation effect (series of effects) that is executed based on the lottery result of the general pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the present 16th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 364, as a variable performance indicating the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery during the time saving state, a first suggestion performance that suggests and informs only the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery. and, in addition to the lottery results of the special drawing 2 lottery, a second system that makes a suggestion notification including the results of preliminary determination that determines in advance the lottery results of the special drawing 2 lottery corresponding to the winning information included in the special drawing 2 pending. It is configured to be executable.

Specifically, during the time saving state, it is determined whether the special figure variation to be executed this time (special figure 2 variation) is the final variation during the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation). If it is determined that this is the final variation of the time saving, the first suggestion effect described above (see Figure 373(a)) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined that it is the time saving final variation, that special figure 2 The above-mentioned second suggestion effect (see FIGS. 373(b) to 375(a)) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the variation.

With this configuration, in the variation performance corresponding to the time saving final variation, the special drawing 2 lottery is executed during the time saving state, and the special drawing 2 drawing is executed after the time saving state ends (after transitioning to the normal state). Since the second suggestion performance is executed based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of , the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed after the end of the time-saving state is shown to the player as if it were executed during the time-saving state. Since the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery can be made to appear, the winning probability (big winning probability, small winning probability) during the time saving state can be made to seem higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set a presentation mode that indicates a win (the success presentation mode shown in FIG. 375(a)) in a special presentation executed during the time saving state (for example, the mission presentation shown in FIG. 374(b)). Therefore, the performance effect of the dedicated performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the present 16th embodiment, the variation time (normal state It is configured so that a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during the period, and during the variation period of the special figure 2 variation, it corresponds to the time-saving final variation. The present invention is configured such that the performance result of the second suggestion performance that is executed is displayed. By configuring this way, when a successful performance is executed based on the fact that winning information indicating winning (small hit) is included in the special drawing 2 reservation as the second suggestion performance, the special feature of winning a small hit can be executed. Until the variation shown in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed, the second suggestion effect can be continuously executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, the performance period of the variable performance executed in response to the final change in time reduction is divided into a plurality of performance periods, and each performance period is configured to be used for a different purpose. Specifically, during the first period from when the time-saving final variation is executed until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the player acquires a large number of Tokuzu 2 reservations by the time the variation ends. The system is configured to perform a performance (retention acquisition performance) to make the player obtain a reservation, and to perform the above-described second suggestion performance during a second period that is set after the first period.

Then, the production mode of the second suggestion production executed during the second period of the time saving final variation is the special figure 2 at a specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of reservations and the preliminary determination result.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends (if the final time saving variation lottery result is a failure), the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent games that are disadvantageous to the player from being played.

As described above, the sixteenth embodiment is configured to execute the reservation acquisition performance and the second suggestion performance in the time saving final variation. This is because the hold acquisition effect was executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation that was executed before the time saving final change, and the upper limit number (4) of special figure 2 hold was acquired while the hold acquisition effect was being executed. However, when the special drawing 2 variation is executed as the time-saving final variation, the special drawing 2 pending will be subtracted, so it is necessary to have the player execute the special drawing 2 lottery the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, as the second suggestion performance executed in the time saving final variation, a plurality of special figure 2 drawings (corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery of the time saving final variation and the special figure 2 pending) that are the targets of the effect are Although the configuration is such that a presentation mode is set to indicate to the player whether or not the lottery result of the Special Figure 2 Lottery includes a winning result, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to set a performance mode that suggests to the player the number of winning lottery results included in a plurality of special drawing 2 lottery results. In this case, for example, as a production mode of the second suggestion production, it is indicated that at least one winning prize is included among the plurality of special drawing 2 drawings that are the target of production. A special performance mode that can be notified to the player earlier than that may be set, and a winning number suggesting performance for suggesting and informing the player of the number of winning prizes may be executed in the special performance mode. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by notifying the player that there are winnings as soon as possible, while also allowing the player to enjoy the production that suggests how many winnings there are. can.

First, with reference to FIG. 406, command determination processing 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process 16 (C3113). This command determination process 16 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment, and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59), and is This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the device 110.

In the command determination process 16, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (C3201). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: Yes), winning information command processing 16 is executed (C3202), and this processing ends.

Here, the winning information command processing 16 (C3202) will be explained with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 16 (C3202). This winning information command processing 16 (C3202) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination processing 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, a process is executed to store the information included in the received winning information command in a corresponding area (reservation storage area corresponding to the winning information command) of the winning information storage area 223la provided in the RAM 223.

The information included in the winning information command includes information regarding the judgment result, information regarding the stop type, information regarding the fluctuation pattern, and the symbol type (special pattern 1, special pattern 2, general pattern) to which this winning information corresponds. Although this information targets the winning balls, other information may be included, for example, winning information regarding balls that have already won prizes (for which winning information commands have been received in the past) may be included. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the 16th embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to set a winning information command to indicate the pre-read result of the normal symbol (see FIG. 398). In the winning information storage area 223la, in addition to an area for storing winning information for special symbols, an area for storing winning information for normal symbols is also formed.

When the winning information command processing 16 (C3202) is executed, first, the information of the received winning information command (preread information) is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223la (C3401), and the winning status determination processing (C3402) is executed. Execute. As described above, the winning information storage area 223la stores a maximum of 4 winning information commands for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a maximum of 4 winning information commands for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), It is configured to be able to store up to 4 winning commands for normal symbols, and 12 winning information commands in total, and the winning information commands are stored in the designated storage area according to the order in which the winning information commands are received. .

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be explained with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command process 16 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process that is executed in the winning information command process 16 (C3202) of the ordinary symbol (common symbol). Determine the gaming state at the time the command is received, process to set a different performance mode based on the determination result, and determine whether a proper game (left-handed game) is being played in the normal state. The processing for this is executed.

In the prize winning situation determination process (C3402), first, it is determined whether there is a prize winning of a common symbol (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to a common symbol) (C3451). If it is determined that it is not a common drawing prize (C3451: No), the process moves to C3458, which will be described later. If it is determined that the game has won (C3451: Yes), then the current gaming state is read from the state storage area 223lh provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state. (C3453). If it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, this process is ended and the process returns to the winning information command process 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3453, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is currently changing (C3454). ). Here, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is currently changing by determining whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation is greater than 0. If it is determined that the current state is not during the variation of special map 1 (C3454: No), the normal state is a state in which the special pattern 1 variation has not been executed and the regular pattern variation has been executed, so it is stored in the RAM 223. The provided non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to ON (C3455), and the process moves to C3458.

By setting the non-fluctuation prize winning flag 223lm to ON in the process of C3455, it is possible to remember that the winning information command for the regular map was received during the normal state and during the non-fluctuation of the special map 1. By determining the setting status of the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm when receiving the general pattern fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the winning information command of the general pattern, the special pattern 1 at the time of general pattern winning (passing through gate 67) is determined. It is possible to set different variation performance modes depending on the variation situation.

In the sixteenth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 406, the process executed when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process 16 (C3113) of the audio lamp control device 113 (C3203 in FIG. 406, C3204) is configured to execute the processes (C3201 and C3202 in FIG. 406) that are executed when the winning information command is received.

Here, in the external output processing (C1001 in FIG. 403) of the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 403), a winning information command for the regular symbol winning and a fluctuation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) are sent. Even if and are output in the same process, specifically, if a win occurs in a state where the fluctuation of the general pattern is not executed, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. A winning information command is set in the process of C105 (see Figure 389), and a fluctuation pattern command is set in the process of C104 of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 389) that is executed next (2 milliseconds later). . Then, in the process C1001 (external output process) of the main process (see FIG. 403) of the main control device 110, which is executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is output. Therefore, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt process and the execution timing of the main process, the winning information command for the regular drawing prize and the fluctuation pattern command may be output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same process. There is.

In such a case, in the sixteenth embodiment, in the command determination process (see C3113 in FIG. 406) of the audio lamp control device 113, the winning information command process 16 (C3202 in FIG. 409 and C3204), so even if the main controller 110 outputs the winning information command and the fluctuation pattern command at the same time, when setting the fluctuation pattern of the regular pattern fluctuation, the non-fluctuation time The setting status of the winning flag 223lm can be used for determination without missing anything.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the special map 1 is currently fluctuating (C3454: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special map 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456) . If it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), then the process moves to C3458.

In the process of C3456, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of special drawing 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), a display command indicating a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information is set (C3457), and then C3458 Shift to processing.

When moving to the process of C3458, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (C3458), and it is determined that it is the winning information command of special symbol 1. If (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning flag 223lm at the time of non-variation is set to on (C3459), and if it is determined that it is set to on (C3459: Yes), the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to on. The variable winning flag 223lm is set to OFF (C3460), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of special drawing 1 (C3458: No), check whether information indicating that a left-handed game is being played is received. Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether winning information indicating winning of a ball to each winning hole (general winning hole 63) provided in the left side gaming area of the game board 13 has been received.

In the process of C3461, if it is determined that a left-handed game has been detected (C3461: Yes), the process moves to the above-mentioned process of C3459, and if it is determined that a left-handed game has not been detected (C3461: No), This process ends immediately.

As explained above, in the 16th embodiment, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 variation is being executed at the time when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the special pattern 1 variation is being executed. If it is determined that there is no change, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to ON to indicate that. In addition, when the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to on and information indicating that a special figure 1 prize is won or a left-handed game is received is received, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to off. It is configured to do so.

The details will be described later, but when the non-variation winning flag 223lm is set to ON and the long fluctuation of the general pattern is executed, the fluctuation effect (series of effects) corresponding to the long fluctuation of the general pattern is executed. It is configured not to run.

By configuring in this way, a game situation in which normal pattern fluctuations are executed without performing a left-handed game in a state where the normal state is set (due to a right-handed game, a through gate provided in the right side game area) 67), and in that case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the long variation of the common figure (the effect suggesting that a game that hits the common figure will be executed). .

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, even when the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball in the first winning hole 64, the special drawing 1 Since fluctuation may not be executed, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm, which is set to on at the time of winning a regular figure, is configured to be able to be set to off by a left-handed game. As a result, for example, by executing a left-handed game within a predetermined period from winning a prize to the start of a fluctuation in a general pattern, a fluctuation performance corresponding to a long fluctuation in a general pattern (a game per winning pattern is executed) This makes it possible to normally execute a performance that suggests that a certain event will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a performance mode from being set that is disadvantageous to a player who is playing a proper game.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the sixteenth embodiment described above, as long as it is possible to determine that a proper game (left-handed game in the normal state) is being played. For example, the rotation operation of the operating handle 51 It may be configured such that it can be determined whether a left-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing intensity) of a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotational operation based on a change in electrical resistance. A detection means for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a part of the left side playing area (the upper area where most of the balls flowing down the left side playing area pass), and the left-handed game is executed based on the detection result of the detection means. It may be configured such that it is possible to determine whether the

Further, in the above-described 16th embodiment, a configuration is used that determines whether a left-handed game is being executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that determines whether a right-handed game is being executed is used. When a predetermined normal pattern variation (normal pattern long variation) is executed in a state where it is determined that a right-handed game is being executed, a variation effect corresponding to the normal pattern long variation (normal pattern long variation) is executed. It may also be configured to restrict the execution of (effects that suggest that). In this case, the configuration for determining that a right-handed game is being executed is such that when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the through gate 67) provided in the right side game area, A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 51 or the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance. It may be configured such that it can be determined whether a right-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing strength).

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is playing a proper game during the period from when the player wins a prize to when the player starts changing the player's winning pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period used to determine whether or not a proper game is being played (determination target period) may be set to a longer period. In this case, for example, a game situation storage means that can temporarily store the game situation may be provided, and the game situation storage means may store the game situation (past history) indicating whether or not the player is playing a left-handed game. It is preferable to configure the game system so that, at the timing of winning a common figure, it is determined whether or not a common figure has been won during a proper game based on the gaming situation stored in the gaming situation storage means.

In addition, as a winning information command (Fujitsu winning information command) that is set when a Futou winning a prize, a winning information command (Left Futou winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the left side gaming area. The audio lamp control device 113 side identifies the winning information command (winning information command) and the winning information command (right winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right side gaming area. Based on the type of the received Futou winning information command and the gaming situation, execution restriction of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the Futou long fluctuation (performance suggesting that a game to hit the Futou will be executed) is configured to be possible. It may be configured to set variably.

Returning to FIG. 407, the explanation will be continued. It is determined whether there is special 2 winning information as information (pre-read information) included in the winning information command received this time (C3403). In the process of C3403, if it is determined that there is no special 2 hit information (C3403: No), then the process moves to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is special 2 winning information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3404). If it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is off (C3404: No), the process of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406.

If it is determined in the process of C3404 that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is on (C3404: Yes), information indicating the hit notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223la (C3405), and then the process moves to C3406. do.

In the process of C3406, the production mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set production mode is set (C3407), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the command determination process 16.

In this embodiment, a specific effect that is set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect that is executed 5 seconds after the start of the change (specific effect C)) is set in another period (for example, a specific effect that is executed 5 seconds after the start of the change). It is stipulated that the performance indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the specific performance (which is executed 20 seconds after the start). In other words, it is stipulated that the variation pattern that corresponds to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern that allows the specific effect C to be executed.

Thereby, when the suggestive performance is executed across a plurality of fluctuation displays, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that he will win the jackpot with the next fluctuation. Further, it is possible to encourage the player to actively reserve special symbols so that a suggestive performance that spans a plurality of variations is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the running changing display) are used to straddle multiple variable displays. Although it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, other configurations may be used. For example, the suggestion effect is determined based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the fluctuating display being executed). It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to be executed, a foreshadowing effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and the specific effect is set at the timing of starting the next variable display. , the specific performance is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the period in which the precursor performance is being executed (the specific performance that is the target of the suggestion performance is set from a plurality of specific performances). Also good. With this configuration, the production of the suggestion production is based on the gaming situation (the lottery result of the next variation, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestion production has started. The mode can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom in presentation can be increased compared to a configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, a variable display that is currently being executed and a variable display that will be executed next time based on winning information won during the variable display. Although the suggested effect used is explained, the present invention is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as the suggestive effect is executed across multiple fluctuating displays. For example, winning information won during the fluctuating display is executed one after another. In the case of a fluctuating display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to span the fluctuating display that is currently being executed and the fluctuating display that will be executed one after the other, or it can be executed one after the other starting from the next fluctuating display. Suggestive effects may be performed across the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether the timing to execute the suggestion effect is set to the currently running variable display or the next variable display based on the timing at which the winning information command is received (remaining period of the currently running variable display). It would be good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referred to when selecting the content of various effects set by the audio lamp control device 113, and for example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is stored in the hold display area where the number of held balls of a special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (pending symbol) corresponding to winning information indicating a jackpot, a pending change notice effect that changes the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to winning information indicating a jackpot is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice performance that makes people expect a big hit as a special symbol performance whose fluctuations start earlier than the above.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is referenced at the time of winning a jackpot, during a jackpot game, and at the end of a jackpot, and winning information indicating a jackpot is included in the pending state. It is configured to determine whether there is a consecutive game on hold (presence or absence of consecutive games on hold), and to set effects during a jackpot game or after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the discrimination. In addition, even in the continuous performance executed during the variable probability state, the content of the performance is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this embodiment, when a performance (pre-reading performance) that refers to winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is executed, a flag indicating that effect is displayed. For example, if the pre-read presentation flag is set to on, and the pre-read presentation flag is set to on, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command will be displayed. The configuration is such that new prefetch effects based on information are not executed. This prevents the occurrence of a problem in which a plurality of look-ahead performances are executed consecutively without any gaps, giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Note that controls other than those described above may be used to solve the above-mentioned problems; for example, a priority rank may be assigned to a plurality of pre-read performances that are set based on winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la. The priority rank of the pre-reading effect that has been given and is currently being executed is compared with the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new winning information command, and the pre-reading effect with a higher priority rank is selected. It may also be controlled to execute. In this case, if it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, a look-ahead effect switching notification is executed to notify the player that the currently executed look-ahead effect will end midway. After that, execute a new look-ahead effect, or change the direction of the currently executed look-ahead effect to a shortened look-ahead effect that is earlier than the originally set end timing, and then execute a new look-ahead effect. You may do so.

In addition, the priority rank of the look-ahead performance is such that the priority rank of the look-ahead performance that corresponds to winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest, and the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank. It is recommended to set the value so that the value is high. Thereby, when the pre-read performance being executed ends midway, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the new pre-read performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), then it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3203). If it is determined that a variable pattern command has been received (C3203: Yes), variable pattern command processing 16 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 16 is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to in the variation display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) described later to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern. . It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern. In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for a special symbol (special symbol) and a variation pattern for a regular symbol (common symbol). It is determined whether the received variation pattern command is for special symbols or regular symbols, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, the variable pattern command processing 16 (C3204) will be explained with reference to FIG. 409. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable pattern command processing 16 (C3204). This variation pattern command processing 16 (C3204) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination processing 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. It is.

In the variation pattern command processing 16 (C3204), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), the process of C3302 and C3303 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3304. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223ld provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON ( C3302), a variation pattern is extracted from the received special figure variation pattern command (C3303), and then the process moves to C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern command for regular figures (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a general figure variation pattern command (C3304: No), the process of C3305 and C3306 is skipped and the process returns to command determination process 16.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern command for ordinary figures (C3304: Yes), the variation start flag 223ld for ordinary figures provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3305), a variation pattern is extracted from the received general figure variation pattern command (C3306), and then this process is ended and the process returns to command determination process 16.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3203, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (C3203: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3205). If a stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223le in the RAM 223 is set to on (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when the variable display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415), which will be described later, is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of C3205, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3208). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls command is received (C3208: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is The value included in the reserved ball number command received from the special symbol reserved ball number counter or the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203lf of the normal symbol is stored (C3209), and then the process returns to the main process. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls command received this time is the number of reserved balls command corresponding to special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls counter 203ld of special symbol 1 of main controller 110 is calculated from the received number of reserved balls command. The value (the number of pending times N1 of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223lb provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the currently received held ball number command is the held ball number command corresponding to special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203le of the main controller 110 (special The number N2) of holding the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 223lc provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3208, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received, (C3210: Yes), the win-related command process 16 (C3211) is executed, and after the win-related command process 16 (C3211) ends, this process ends.

Here, the contents of the win-related command processing 16 (C3211) will be explained with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related command processing 16 (C3211). The hit-related command process 16 (C3211) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the winning related command processing 16, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3501). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (C3501: Yes), jackpot-related command processing is executed (C3502), and then the process moves to C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot related command processing (C3502) will be explained with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related command processing (C3502). The jackpot related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the win related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the jackpot related command processing (C3502), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3601). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), opening command processing for display is executed (C3602), and then the process moves to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3601, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (C3603). Here, if the number of rounds command is received (C3603: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received number of rounds command (C3604), and then the number of rounds command for display is set according to the number of rounds extracted this time. (C3605), and then the process moves to C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the present 16th embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game is The number of round games of the jackpot game to be executed this time is cumulatively displayed. Specifically, a period flag is provided that is set to ON during the period in which the time saving state is set and the period from when the time saving state shifts to the normal state until the special symbol 1 variation is executed. Then, when a jackpot game starts, it is determined whether the period flag is set to on, and if it is determined that it is set to on, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game is determined. The number of rounds of the current jackpot game is accumulated and displayed in (number of rounds).

On the other hand, in the process of C3603, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3606). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), an ending command for display is set (C3607), and then the process moves to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, it starts an ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of C3606, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: No), the process moves to C3608. In the process of C3608, processes corresponding to other commands are executed (C3608), this process is ended, and the process returns to the win-related command process 16.

Returning to FIG. 410, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3501, if it is determined that a jackpot related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether a small win related command has been received from the main control device 110. (C3503). If it is determined that a small win related command has been received (C3503: Yes), small win related command processing is executed (C3504), and then the process moves to C3505.

Here, the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504) will be explained with reference to FIG. 412(a). FIG. 412(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the win related command process 16 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the small hit related command processing (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3701). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small win process is executed (C3702), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the win related command process 16. .

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the production mode when the small winning game is executed is configured to be variably set depending on whether the small winning game execution timing is during a series of productions. . In other words, when a small winning game is executed during a series of performances, the small winning game performance (see FIG. 370) is configured to be executed as part of the series of performances. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

Here, the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702) will be explained with reference to FIG. 412(b). FIG. 412(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702). The normal small win process (C3702) is a process executed in the small win related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the normal small winning process (C3702), first, it is determined whether a small winning start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3801). If it is determined that the small win start command has been received (C3801: Yes), a small win start command for display is set (C3802), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

In the process of C3801, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3801: No), then it is determined whether the small winning end command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3803). . If it is determined that the small winning end command has been received (C3803: Yes), a small winning ending command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small winning related command processing.

In the process of C3803, if it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (C3803: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3805). If it is determined that the V passing command has been received (C3805: Yes), a V passing command for display is set (C3806), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation will be continued. If it is determined that the series performance flag 223li is on in the process of C3701 (C3701: Yes), the small winning game for this time is a small winning game that is executed during a series of performances, so the small winning process for series performance is executed. It is executed (C3703), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the winning related command process 16.

Here, the contents of the series performance small winning process (C3703) will be explained with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win process for series performance (C3703). The small win process for series performance (C3703) is a process executed in the small win related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the series performance small win process (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small win start command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3901). Then, if it is determined that the small winning start command has been received (C3901: Yes), a winning start command for a series of effects is set (C3902), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small winning related command processing.

In the process of C3901, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3903). If it is determined that the V passage command has been received (C3903: Yes), then it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223ll provided in the RAM 223 is on (C3904). If it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll is off (C3904: No), a V performance command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

Here, the small hit caution flag 223ll indicates that even though the small winning game is being executed, the ball does not pass through a specific area within the V winning opening 650a even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. This is a flag that is set on if it is not present. In the 16th embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that the period required for the ball fired by playing the right-handed game to reach the V winning device 650 is about 1 second, so it is possible to win a small prize. When playing a right-handed game based on the game being executed, the small hit caution flag 223ll is configured not to be set on.

On the other hand, players may play left-handed games without realizing that a small winning game is being executed, or play inappropriate games where the number of balls fired during a small winning game is intentionally reduced (including 0). In this case, the ball may not have passed through the specific area in the V winning hole 650a after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, so the small winning caution flag 223ll is turned on. Easier to set. By setting this small hit caution flag 223ll on, an emphasized guidance display (see FIG. 371(a)) is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to make the player play a right-handed game. be done. Also, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit warning flag 223ll is set to on or off at the timing when the ball passes through a specific area within the V winning hole 650a. For example, if a V passing command is received with the small hit caution flag 223ll set to on, a guidance effect will be created to prompt the player to play the right-handed game in the next small win game. is executed.

In the process of C3904, if it is determined that the small hit warning flag 223ll is on (C3904: Yes), a special V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3906), and then this process ends and the small hit is executed. Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the special V production command for displaying a series of productions, it displays on the third symbol display device 81, as part of the series production, a message indicating that the timing at which the ball passed through the V in the current small winning game was too late. A V performance including a performance mode shown (for example, a comment such as "Next time, let's hit the right ball earlier") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (C3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907 ). If it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is a V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of productions is performed. A display small winning end command is set (C3909), and then the small winning caution flag 223ll is set to off (C3912), this process is ended, and the process returns to the small winning related command processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, if it is determined that there is no passage of V (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of a series of effects is set (C3910), a series of effects flag 223li is set to off (C3911), The small hit caution flag 223ll is set to OFF (C3912), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

In other words, if the ball does not pass through a specific area in a small winning game during a series of performances, the performance result indicating the occurrence of a jackpot game cannot be displayed as a performance result of the series of performances, so the series of performances ends ( A presentation mode (see FIG. 371(b)) indicating "failure" is set. Also, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received in the process of C3907 (C3907: No), then this process is ended and the process returns to the small win related command process.

Returning to FIG. 410, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that a small hit related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3503: No), then it is determined whether or not a small win related command has been received from the main control device 110. Determine (C3505). If it is determined that a command related to hitting a common map has been received (C3505: Yes), a display command corresponding to the command related to hitting a regular map is set (C3506), and then this process is ended and the command is determined. Return to process 16.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3210, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current gaming status is extracted from the received command, stored in the status storage area 223lh (C3213), and a status command for display is set (C3214). , and then ends this process.

In the process of C3212, if it is determined that a status command has not been received (C3212: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (C3215), and if a stop command has been received (C3215: Yes). ), the stop command processing 16 (C3216) is executed, and after the end of the stop command processing 16, this processing is ended.

Here, the contents of stop command processing 16 (C3216) will be explained with reference to FIG. 414. FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 16 (C3216). The stop command process 16 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 16 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the stop command processing 16, first, it is determined whether a special figure stop command has been received (C3951), and if it is determined that a special figure stop command has been received (C3951: Yes), then the special figure fluctuation time counter is The value of 223ln is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set on (C3953).

In the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to on (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time is a special figure that executed a series of effects as a variation effect of a variation out of the special figure. Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to OFF (C3954), and the process moves to S3955. On the other hand, in the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is not set to ON (C3953: No), the process of C3954 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C3955.

In the process of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is set to on (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to on (C3955: Yes), the re-read ahead flag is set to on (C3956). ), sets the time saving final change flag to OFF (C3957), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is not set to ON (C3955: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 406, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C3215, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3215: No), the process according to the received command is executed (C3217), and this process ends. . For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is used for display control. A command is set to be sent to the device 114.

Through this process, commands for performing various settings on the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 415, the variable display setting process 16 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 16 (C3114). This variable display setting process 16 (C3114) is a substitute for the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 59) in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. This process is executed by generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect.

The variable display setting process 16 (C3114) of the 16th embodiment is different from the variable display setting process used in each of the above-described embodiments in that it is configured to set a variable pattern command for displaying normal symbols. , the content of the set variable effect has been changed, and other elements (technical ideas) are the same. Detailed explanations of the same elements (technical ideas) as those of the variable display setting process used in each of the embodiments described above will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 16 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223ld provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4001). In the processing of C4001, in the processing of C3302 and C3305 of the above-mentioned variation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in FIG. 409), either the variation start flag 223ld for special symbols or the variation start flag 223ld for regular symbols is set. is set to on.

If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223ld for special symbols and the fluctuation start flag 223ld for regular symbols are both off) (C4001: No), the main control Since no variation pattern command has been received from the device 110, the process moves to C4006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223ld is on (C4001: Yes), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223ld is set to off (C4002), and then C3303 of fluctuation pattern command processing 16 (see FIG. 409) In the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 416.

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 416), a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (C4005). Thereafter, the process moves to C4006. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223le provided in the RAM 223 is on (C4006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is not on (that is, off) (C4006: No), this fluctuation display is because the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. Finish the setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223le is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223le is turned off (C4007), and then in the command determination process 16 (C3207 in FIG. 406) , the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process moves to C4010. In the process of C4010, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (C4010). , and then ends this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 416, the variable effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing this variable effect setting process (C4004). This variable effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 16 (see FIG. 415) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and includes the variable effect mode of the special symbol, Alternatively, processing for setting the variation presentation mode of the normal symbol is executed.

In the variation performance setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether the current variation performance setting process is to set a variation performance of special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (C4101). In this process of C4101, in the process of C4001 of the variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415), if it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223ld is set to on, the current variable effect setting process It is determined that this sets the variation performance of the special figure variation. Here, if it is determined that the special pattern variation effect is not set (the general pattern variation effect is set) (C4101: No), the general pattern effect setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process ends. . Details of the production setting process for common symbols will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing for setting the production mode of the variable production based on is executed.

In the process of C4101, if it is determined that a special figure fluctuation effect is to be set (C4101: Yes), the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state storage area 223lh is read out (C4102), and the current gaming state is the normal state. It is determined whether there is one (C4103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (a time-saving state) (C4103: No), a time-saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process moves to C4116. The time-saving performance setting process (C4104) is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the time-saving state. This time-saving effect setting process (C4104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 418.

On the other hand, in the process of C4103, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-read ahead flag 223lr is set to on (C4105), and the re-read ahead flag 223lr is set to on. If it is determined that it has been set (C4105: Yes), that is, the current variation effect is a variation effect corresponding to the first rotation special figure variation after the end of the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is in progress. If there is a special figure 2 hold whose look-ahead result is not reflected in the time-saving final variation performance executed in the time-saving final variation among the special figure 2 holds obtained in the above, the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223la Among the information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2), winning information (winning information corresponding to special drawing 2) for which pre-reading processing has not been executed is extracted (C4106), and the winning information is included in the extracted winning information. It is determined whether there is winning information included (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning winning information (C4107: yes), a display command is set to replace the result display mode of the time-saving variation effect with the revived winning display mode (C4108). , sets the re-prefetch flag 223lr to OFF (C4109), and moves to the process of C4110. On the other hand, in the process of C4105, if it is determined that the re-read ahead flag 223lr is not set to on (C4105: No), the current variable effect setting process is executed at the timing to change the display mode of the result of the time-saving variable effect. Therefore, the process from C4106 to C4109 is skipped and the process moves to C4110. In addition, in the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including winning information among the extracted winning information (C4107: No), the current variable performance setting process changes the result display mode of the time-saving variable performance. However, since the conditions for changing the result display mode (including a new prefetch result being a hit) are not met, the process of C4108 is skipped, the process of C4109 is executed, and the process of C4110 is executed. Move to.

In the process of C4110, it is determined whether the current time is within the extended display period of the time-saving fluctuating performance executed during the time-saving state (C4110), and the game results that are within the extended display period, that is, during the time-saving state are displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 377) is being displayed (C4110: Yes), the process is ended without setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), then based on the fluctuation pattern obtained in the process of C4003 in Figure 415, check whether the current fluctuation pattern is a winning fluctuation pattern. (C4111).

In the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (C4111: Yes), a winning variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process moves to C4116. In this winning fluctuation performance setting process (C4112), there is a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of performances as the current special symbol fluctuation performance, and a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of performances as the current special symbol fluctuation performance, and a process of determining whether or not to execute a series of performances as a regular symbol fluctuation performance. Processing for replacing the performance results is executed. A detailed explanation of this winning variation performance setting process (C4112) will be given later with reference to FIG. 419.

On the other hand, in the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a winning fluctuation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether the series effect flag 223li is on (C4113), If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4113: Yes), then the process moves to C4116.

In the process of C4113, if it is determined that the series production flag 223li is off (C4113: No), it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series production based on the extracted variation pattern ( C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: No), then the process moves to C4116.

On the other hand, in the process of C4114, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is set to ON (C4115), and then the process proceeds to C4116. Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is set (C4116), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the fluctuation display setting process 16.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the ordinary figure effect setting process (C4117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing this ordinary figure effect setting process (C4117). This ordinary figure effect setting process (C4117) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a variable effect based on the ordinary figure variation. (a series of effects) is executed.

In the normal figure production setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223lh provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), then this process ends.

In the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (C4203: No), then this process ends. If it is determined that the variation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), then it is determined whether the series effect flag 223li is on (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4204: Yes), then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the series production flag 223li is off (C4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is on (C4205), the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm If it is determined that the flag 223lj is off (C4205: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206). If it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), a series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223li is set on (C4208), and then this process ends.

In the process of C4206, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4206: Yes), a regular pattern variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special pattern variation time is set (C4209), and then this process end.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, if it is determined that the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is on (C4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C4210 ), if it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln is not larger than 0 (is 0) (C4210: No), if the regular figure variation is executed in a state where the special figure variation is not executed. Therefore, the present process is ended without setting the normal pattern variation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern variation.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, the general pattern variation effect is not set when the special pattern variation is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the general pattern variation effect can be set as the normal pattern variation effect. may be configured to execute a general pattern fluctuation effect that is executed at different timings, and based on the general pattern fluctuation effect to be executed, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time according to the lottery result of the current general pattern lottery. It is only necessary to configure the timing so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the process of C4210, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C4210: Yes), a special series of effects is set (C4211), and a series of effects flag 223li is set to ON (C4212). ), then this process ends.

As explained above, in the present 16th embodiment, when the regular figure variation time is longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), the performance is determined based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special figure variation in progress. It is configured to set a general figure fluctuation effect (a general figure effect). By configuring in this way, when a special pattern variation effect that is easy to notify the player of a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is being executed as a special pattern variation effect for displaying the lottery result of a special pattern variation, the normal pattern effect is It is possible to suppress a situation that obstructs a special figure variation performance, and to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 418, the time-saving effect setting process (C4104) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing this time-saving effect setting process (C4104). This time-saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the time-saving performance setting process (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure variation is a variation of special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the current special figure variation is not the variation of special figure 2 (C4301: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the current special pattern variation is the variation of special pattern 2 (C4301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special pattern variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302). If it is determined that the current special figure variation is not the time saving final variation (C4302: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the current special figure variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: Yes), the time-saving final variation flag 223lk is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read. (C4304), a variation pattern for the final variation is set based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information (C4305), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the winning variation performance setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing this winning variation effect setting process (C4112). This winning variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 416) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223li is on (C4401). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4401: No), then it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: Yes), the series of effects flag 223li is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4401: Yes), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether there is one (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the results can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a display replacement command indicating a variation pattern for replacing the performance results of the series of performances is set (C4406), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 420, the effect update process 16 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the effect update processing 16 (C3112). This effect update process 16 (C3112) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of changes in the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effects.

When the performance update process 16 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various variable time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether the series performance flag 223li is on (C4502). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is off (C4502: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504). If it is determined that the pseudo series performance flag 223lj is off (C4504: No), the process moves to C4505.

In the process of C4502, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223li is on (C4502: Yes), and in the process of C4504, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223lj is on (C4504: Yes), The effect update process is executed (C4503), and then the process moves to C4505. Further, details of the series effect update process will be described later with reference to the process of FIG. 421.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is on (C4505). If it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is on (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process moves to C4507.

On the other hand, in the process of C4505, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is on (C4505: Yes), other effect update processes are executed (C4507), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 421, a series of effects update processing (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing this series of effect update processing (C4503). This series of effect update processing (C4503) is executed in the effect update process 16 (see FIG. 420) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

In the series performance update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series performance counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter is 0 or not. (C4604). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process moves to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series effect flag 223li is set to ON (C4612), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), the value corresponding to the current series of effects is set in the series effect counter (C4602), and the process proceeds to C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the current game is based on a common symbol (C4605). If it is determined that the current game is in a game with a common symbol (C4605: Yes), update processing is executed during a game with a common symbol (C4606), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently being played on a regular basis (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the game on a regular basis has ended (C4607). It is determined whether or not the normal game has ended (C4607). If it is determined that the normal game has not been completed (C4607: No), the process moves to C4609. If it is determined that the normal winning game has ended (C4607: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is on (C4608). If it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series performance flag 223li is set on (C4612), and then this process ends. In the process of C4608, if it is determined that the Special 2 winning flag is on (C4608: Yes), the process moves to C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being played (C4609). If it is determined that the current game is a small winning game (C4609: Yes), a small winning game update process is executed (C4610), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current game is not a small winning game (C4609: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the contents of the regular game in-game update process (C4606) executed in the series performance update process (see C4503 in FIG. 421) will be explained. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-game update process (C4606) per normal figure. In this game-in-progress game update process (C4606), if the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 for a predetermined period of time even though the player is playing a game with a regular card, a warning is given to the player. The processing to be performed is executed.

When the normal map winning game update process (C4606) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won in the second winning hole 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won in the second winning hole 640. If so (C4701: No), then it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the start of the game per common symbol (C4702). Here, if it is determined that one second has elapsed (C4702: Yes), a display alert command is set (C4703), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4702, if it is determined that it is not the timing when one second has passed since the start of the game per common symbol (C4702: No), this process is ended as is.

Here, in the process of C4703, when the display attention command is set, the attention screen (see FIG. 370(a) ) is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game with a long opening per common figure is executed as a game per normal figure, the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, then after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, it is opened again by 0.5 seconds. It is configured such that a game with a common figure is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a second. Then, the attention calling screen shown in FIG. 370(a) is displayed one second after the start of the normal winning game. By configuring in this way, when a player who has seen the alert screen plays a right-handed game, it is possible to make it easier for the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter the second prize opening 640.

On the other hand, in the process of C4701, if it is determined that a ball has won in the second winning hole 640 (there is a special 2 prize) (C4701: Yes), a display command to indicate the special 2 prize is set ( C4704), sets the Special 2 winning flag 223lu on (C4705), and ends this process. Here, when the display command is set in the process of C4704, a display mode notifying special 2 winning is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a special 2 winning prize has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422(b), the contents of the small winning game update process (C4610) will be explained. FIG. 422(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small winning game update process (C4610). In this small winning game update process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the small winning game was started. If the ball has not passed through the specific area within the V winning hole 650a even after the elapse of time, a process is executed to alert the player.

When the small winning game update process (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small winning caution flag 223ll is set to on (C4751), and it is determined that the small winning caution flag 223ll is not set to on. If so (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game (C4752). If it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small winning game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether the ball is currently passing through the specific area within the V prize opening 650a (C4753), and it is determined that it has not passed. If it is determined that (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223ll is set on (C4754), a display alert command is set (C4755), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4751, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ll has already been set to ON (C4751: Yes), in the process of C4752, it is determined that the timing is not 3 seconds after the start of the small win game. (C4752: No), in the process of C4753, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning hole 650a (C4753: Yes), skip the processes of C4754 and C4755 and continue this process. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be explained. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final variation performance update process (C4506), processing for setting a variation performance corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state is executed. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, as a variation production during the time saving state, a first suggestion production that only suggests the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and a special figure in addition to the variation result (lottery result) of the variation. The system is configured to be able to execute a second suggestion performance that suggests a look-ahead result of 2 suspension, and is configured such that the second suggestion performance is executed in the final variation of the time saving state.

Furthermore, in the final change of the time-saving state of this embodiment, there is also a reservation acquisition effect to encourage the player to acquire special drawing 2 reservations up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the period in which the time-saving state is set. It is configured to be executable, and is configured to execute a reservation acquisition performance in the first half of the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation, and perform a second suggestion performance (time-saving final fluctuation performance) in the second half. And, the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 reservation obtained at the end timing of the first half period is configured to be reflected in the performance result of the second suggestion performance.

By configuring this way, after the player acquires a large number of Tokuzu 2 reservations, the second suggestion performance (time-saving final variation performance) that reflects the pre-reading results for the acquired Tokuzu 2 reservations is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a performance mode indicating winning as the performance mode of the time-saving final variation performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the number of acquired special map 2 pending balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (4) at the timing (start timing of the first half period) until the pending acquisition performance is executed, the pending acquisition performance will be executed. The configuration is such that the second suggestion effect is executed from the first half of the period. As a result, an unnecessary performance for the player, that is, a reservation acquisition performance that tries to make the player acquire the special figure 2 reservation even though the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the performance. Furthermore, by executing the second suggestion performance from the first half period, the performance period of the second suggestion performance can be lengthened, so that a more interesting second suggestion performance can be executed. Since the player can be motivated to play the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the interesting second suggestion performance, the performance of the game can be improved.

In the final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 423), which will be explained with reference to FIG. The elapsed period of the final variation effect to be executed (the elapsed period of the special figure 2 variation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final variation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the timing at which the waiting period has elapsed (C4801), and if it is determined that the timing is at the timing at which the waiting period has elapsed, (C4801: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 reserved ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223lc) is the upper limit "4" (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 is "4" (C4802: Yes), the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON (C4803), and this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of special map 2 reserved balls is not "4", that is, it is less than "3" (C4802: No), the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is not set to ON. This process ends.

In the process of C4801, if it is determined that the current time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the first period start timing (C4804), and at the first period start timing. If it is determined that there is (C4804: Yes), it is determined whether the suspension upper limit flag 223ls is set to on (C4805), and if it is determined that it is set to on, that is, at the start timing of the first period. If it is determined that the predetermined number (4) of special figure 2 reserved balls is secured (the upper limit number) (C4805: Yes), a time-saving variation effect using the first period and the second period is performed as a time-saving final variation effect. A display effect command indicating the following is set (C4806), the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF, the executed flag 223lt is set to ON (C4808), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, if it is determined that the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is not set to on (C4805: No), a reservation ball number acquisition effect is executed to obtain the special map 2 reservation up to the upper limit (4). The display command shown in FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the performance executed during the first period according to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls at the timing when the waiting period has elapsed, thereby providing a variety of performances to the player. can do.

In the process of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the first period (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the second period (C4810), and the start timing of the second period is determined. If it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the executed flag 223lt is set on (C4811).

Here, if it is determined that the executed flag 223lt is set to on, that is, if it is determined that the production mode of the production to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period, (C4811: Yes), since there is no need to newly set the performance mode, the executed flag 223lt is set to OFF (C4812), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4811, if it is determined that the executed flag 223lt is not set to on (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out (C4813), and the A display performance command indicating a time-saving variation performance based on the lottery result (win determination result) and the pre-read result (pre-discrimination result) included in the read winning information is set (C4814), and this processing is ended.

In this way, the production mode based on the look-ahead result of special drawing 2 pending is not at the execution timing of the time saving final variation, but at the timing after a predetermined period of time has passed after the time saving final variation is executed (the timing at which the second period is set). By setting, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc) that is subtracted when executing the variation is re-added to the pre-read result of special figure 2 reserved. You can set the presentation mode based on the following. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of pre-read special drawings 2 reservations, so it is possible to easily display the performance result indicating a win in the performance executed during the second period (time-saving final variation performance), The performance effect can be enhanced.

In the process of C4810, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired is determined. If it is determined (C4816: Yes), the re-prefetch flag 223lr is set to on (C4817), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the process executed at C4816, the winning information storage area 223la has a storage area corresponding to each symbol reserved, and in this embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol The number of storage areas for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the storage area for the regular symbol (ordinary symbol) corresponds to the maximum number of stored symbols (4) for each symbol. It is formed. Each storage area stores the prefetch information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the referenced information indicating whether or not the prefetch results were referred to when setting various effects in the audio lamp control device 113. It is configured so that information is stored.

In other words, in the process of C4816, it is checked in each storage area whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223la other than the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referenced by the process of C4806 or C4814. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information that is stored, and if the pre-read information is written in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223la, and the referenced information is When it is determined that there is a storage area in which no information is stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 reservation.

Then, by setting the re-read ahead flag 223lr to ON in the process of C4817, the special figure 2 hold is set again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure variation (the first special figure variation after the end of the time reduction). A variable performance is executed based on the look-ahead results.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4816: No), all the currently acquired special 2 reservations are read ahead, and the second Since this is a case where the final time-saving variation effect during the period is being executed, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time-saving variation effect is directly set (C4818), and this processing is ended. In the process of C4815, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4819), and this process ends. In the process of C4819, setting of the presentation mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, update setting of the remaining period display mode to indicate the remaining period of the final variation, and elapsed period display mode to indicate the elapsed period of the final variation. , and setting of the operation display mode that is executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 424 to 431. In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored at a maximum of four, and when the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the special symbol 2 reserved ball is stored. (up to 4 pieces), the special drawing 2 lottery was executed with the lottery probability in the normal state.

Furthermore, the above-described 16th embodiment is configured such that the special drawing 2 drawing in the normal state is more likely to produce a lottery result that is advantageous to the player than the special drawing 2 drawing in the time saving state. The game was made to be played enthusiastically in order to obtain as many special drawings 2 as possible at the end of the game.

In the 16th embodiment described above, it is possible to easily obtain the maximum number of special drawings 2 hold by simply playing the right-handed game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with confidence. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special drawing 2 drawings that could be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvements were required.

On the other hand, in the present 17th embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set to "1", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state is short. The period during which time is likely to be selected can be set according to the type of time saving state and the number of special symbol fluctuations during the time saving state, and furthermore, a winning game period is set as a game per regular symbol executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that multiple types of long open winning games can be set. In addition, a state in which a short-time variation (0.1 second variation) is likely to be set can be configured as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, the number of times of the special drawing 2 lottery that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after setting the normal state) can be varied depending on how various game conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy seeing what kind of game conditions will be satisfied when the time saving state ends.

First, with reference to FIG. 424, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 424 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is changed. are different, and otherwise are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 424, in the seventeenth embodiment, a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 424) and an open state in which it is easy to win a prize (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 424) A variable electric accessory 640a is provided. This electric accessory 640a is different from the electric accessory 640a of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 361) in such a way that it becomes easier to enter a plurality of balls into the second prize opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state. It is composed of Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the period from when the ball passes through the open electric accessory 640a to when the ball enters the second prize opening 640 is configured to vary depending on the falling state of the ball. For example, a ball that flows down along the structure that has the second winning opening 640 and reaches near the base of the electric accessory 640a (the side of the structure that has the second winning opening 640), and a ball that flows along the structure that has the second winning opening 640 and a ball that reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric accessory 640a (the side of the structure that has the second winning opening 640) and the tip of the electric accessory 640a (the second The ball flowing down period required from the time when the ball reaches the vicinity (the side away from the structure having the winning opening 640) from when it is located at the downstream position where it can win the second winning opening 640 to the time when it enters the second winning opening 640. The configuration is such that the difference between the two times is greater than 0.1 second.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the normal game in which the electric accessory 640a is placed in the open state. can. The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the minimum variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation. There is.

That is, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the special symbol 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the time lag of occurrence of multiple winning balls during one game per regular symbol. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win in the second prize opening 640 during one game per regular symbol, it is possible to easily execute the special symbol 2 lottery a number of times corresponding to the number of prizes won.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 424, with respect to the electric accessory 640a located in the open state, a time lag of the winning ball is generated depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a the ball reaches. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of openings (a first opening, a second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 may be provided, and the ball flowing into each opening may enter the second winning opening 640. It is configured such that the period until reaching the point is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further configured to execute a game per normal pattern in which each opening is opened in one game per normal pattern. Also good.

By configuring in this way, during a game with a common figure, the period until the ball that passes through the first opening and the ball that passes through the second opening at approximately the same timing reach the second prize opening 640 can be reduced. Since the numbers can be made different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special drawing 2 lottery a number of times according to the number of prizes won.

Further, in this case, an electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to move a plurality of openings between an open state and a closed state. .

<Regarding the production contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 425, the display contents of the display screen in the seventeenth embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied at the end timing of the time saving state, a state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special drawing 2 lottery is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time saving state. In addition, in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation effect), the system is configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that a support state will be set after the time saving ends.

FIG. 425(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final variation of the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 425(a), in the present 17th embodiment, unlike the 16th embodiment described above, even in the final variation of the time saving state, a variation effect (first suggestion) is provided to show the lottery result of the variation. Since the effect) is executed, an effect screen similar to the variation effect (see FIG. 373(a)) executed in response to the non-final variation during the time saving state of the above-described 16th embodiment is displayed. Note that the same elements as those in the display screen of the sixteenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 373(a)) are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the present 17th embodiment, in addition to the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the time reduction on the display screen of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 373(a)). The difference is that a status suggestion mode 871d with the word "Support" is displayed. This state suggestion mode 871d is configured to be displayed more easily each time the end of the time saving state approaches, and when the lottery result of the time saving final fluctuation is a loss and the support state is set after the end of the time saving state, A production mode in which the character 851 obtains the state suggestion mode 871d is set. In addition, if the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a win, an effect mode is set in which the lottery result modes 871a to 871b indicating a win are obtained.

When the support state is set after the end of the time saving state, a display screen shown in FIG. 425(b) is displayed. FIG. 425(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed during the support state. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the normal game won during the time saving state is the long opening winning game, and even after the time saving state ends, the long opening winning game continues to be executed, and during the normal state. A support state is set when the ball can win in the second winning hole 640.

During this support state, although it is a normal state, the ball can enter the second winning hole 640, so "hitting right" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4. Then, in the small display area Dm31, a guidance display mode is displayed that visually informs the player that he/she will play a game in which a ball is won in the second winning hole 640, and in the sub display area Ds, a support state is set. A comment saying "Support time has arrived" will be displayed.

In addition, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 variation being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and information indicating the number of special figure 2 variations executed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. is displayed as "Number of Supports". In the example shown in FIG. 425(b), since the first special figure 2 variation is being executed after the support state is set, "support number x 1" is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the character 851 tries to stand up, and a comment "Give it your all" is displayed. During this support state, it is configured such that a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases, a large number of special figure 2 variations are executed. If the special figure 2 variation in the support state is won, an effect in which the character 851 stands up is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429. In this embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, and the upper limit number of special drawing 2 reservations is set to 1. The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203lb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203le of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed due to the change, but other than that, they are the same. It is. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, detailed explanations of differences in the RAM 203 will be omitted.

FIG. 426 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 426, in the above-described 16th embodiment, 6 random number tables 202fd per normal figure are substituted for the 5 random number tables 202ld per normal figure, and 17 variable pattern tables 202me are substituted for the 16 variable pattern tables 202le. The difference is that a regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf is provided in place of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 427(a), the contents of the ordinary figure type selection 17 table 202md will be explained. FIG. 427(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per ordinary figure type selection 17 table 202md. In the present 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 427(a), the above-mentioned types per ordinary figure are provided in that per ordinary figure A, per ordinary figure B1, and per ordinary figure B2 are provided as types per ordinary figure. This is different from the selection 16 table 202ld.

Specifically, the probability state of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state (ordinary symbol low probability), the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0", "A per ordinary symbol" is defined, and " ``B1 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``1 to 50'', and ``B2 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``51 to 99''. In addition, the probability state of the normal symbol is a high probability state (common symbol high certainty), and the "ordinary symbol per hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired second winning type counter C6 is "0, 1", ``B1 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``2 to 50'', and ``B2 per ordinary figure'' is defined in the range of ``51 to 99''.

Next, with reference to FIG. 427(b), the relationship between the type of per-regular symbol selected in the per-regular symbol selection 17 table 202md and the gaming state at the time when the per-regular symbol game is executed will be explained. do. FIG. 427(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the type of common symbol and the gaming state.

This 17th embodiment differs from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment in that it provides "B1 per normal pattern" and "B2 per normal pattern" instead of "B per normal pattern" as the type per normal pattern. Although different, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a for "B1 per normal figure" in this embodiment are the same as the contents of the opening operation for "Per B" in the 16th embodiment described above, A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

If the per-regular pattern type is "B2 per standard pattern" and the game state at the time when the game per standard pattern is released is the short time state (high certainty of general pattern), the game per standard pattern is "long". The opening operation of ``Release B'' is executed. When this "long open B" is set, a game per normal figure is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is stipulated in the normal pattern winning scenario (not shown), and when executing the normal pattern winning game, the normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the normal pattern winning type and the game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the normal pattern winning scenario in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the normal pattern winning game described above.

In other words, in the 17th embodiment, if a regular figure is won during the time saving state, one of the regular figure winning games "Long Opening A" and "Long Opening B" is executed as the regular figure long opening winning game. Ru. No matter which normal figure game is executed, the period during which the electric accessory 640a is open is the same as 1.5 seconds, and if the normal figure game is executed during the time saving state, which one The system is configured so that a state can be provided to the player in which the same privilege can be given even if a game with a winning symbol is executed.

However, in "Long Open A" and "Long Open B", the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (a state in which it is easy to win a ball in the second prize opening 640) after the start of the normal winning game. are different, and if "Long Open A" is set, from 2.6 seconds (including the 0.1 second opening period) to 3.1 seconds after the start of the normal game. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be operated to open in the period of .

Therefore, if you win on a regular pattern where the opening action of "Long Release A" is executed just before the time saving state ends, you will win a winning number on a regular pattern where the opening action of "Long Release B" will be executed at the same timing. It is possible to make it easier for the electric accessory 640a to be in the open state after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set than in the case of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the contents of the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1 included in the variation pattern 17 table 202me will be explained. FIG. 428 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the normal variation pattern 17 table 202me1, and includes the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 385(b)). ), the difference is that the contents selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are different, and other than that they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the present 17th embodiment, the special figure that is executed until the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of times according to the type of time-saving state (time-saver A, time-saver B) set after the end of the jackpot. The two fluctuations are configured to have different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times).

Specifically, if time saving A (1 time saving or 99 time saving) is set as the time saving state, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal state within the range of "1st to 99th". When the special figure 2 variation is executed, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, and the "100th to 151st" variations are set. In the range, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is "miss", "super short miss (0.1 seconds)" is used, and if it is "win (big hit, small win)" "Long hit (20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "152nd and later", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of special drawing 2 lottery. It is specified that

Here, in the seventeenth embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment described above, a plurality of time saving ending conditions (common time saving ending conditions, corresponding time saving ending conditions) are set as the time saving ending conditions for ending the time saving state. For example, even if the time saving state is set to 99 time saving times (the time saving state where the corresponding time saving end condition is set which is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation reaches 99 times). , When a small winning game is executed and the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game and the jackpot game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. It is configured to do so. Therefore, even if the time reduction of 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special pattern 2 lottery in the normal state will be executed when the number of special pattern changes after the end of the jackpot is shifted to the second time.

As shown in Figure 428, when Time Saving A is set, the variation time is 0.1 seconds when the special symbol 2 variation is executed when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot is "100th to 151st". is configured so that it is set. In other words, if you complete 99 times of time saving without winning with the time saving state set, a 0.1 second variable time will be set as the variable time for the special map 2 hold stored at that point. be done. In addition, when a game with a normal figure is executed so as to cross the end timing of the time saving state, the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation occurs in the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. is executed, so even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 during a game with a normal figure, the structure is such that it is easy to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation a number of times according to the number of winnings. .

On the other hand, if a time saving state with one time saving number is set, even if a game per regular pattern is executed across the end timing of the time saving state, the 10 second fluctuation time is the special pattern 2 variation. Since this is set, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 during a game with a regular figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation is configured so that it is executed only the number of times that the number of stored special figure 2 reservations is the upper limit. are doing.

In addition, if time saving B (time saving state in which 5 time saving times are set) is set, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is within the range of "1st to 5th" and the special symbol 2 fluctuation during the normal state. is executed, "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, and in the range of "6th to 20th", the fluctuation type is set. Regardless of the value of counter CS1, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is "miss", "super short miss (0.1 seconds)" will be used, and if the result is "win (big win, small win)", "long win ( 20 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "21st time onwards", "short fluctuation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special drawing 2 lottery. has been done.

As explained above, in this embodiment, among the three time saving states (1 time saving, 5 time saving, and 99 time saving) in which different time saving end conditions are set, the time saving state in which 5 time saving is set is In two types of time saving states: , 99 time saving times are set, and the time saving state is set to 0. It is configured to be able to perform 1 second special figure 2 variations.

As mentioned above, the 0.1 second set as the special figure 2 variation is based on the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the regular figure long opening game. Since the length is also short, it is possible to execute many special pattern 2 fluctuations by winning a plurality of balls into the second prize opening 640 in one regular pattern long open winning game.

Therefore, the ease with which the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed after the end of the time-saving state can be varied depending on the set time-saving state and the established time-saving end condition. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play when the game ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, two special symbol fluctuations are executed within a period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151". In other words, after the time saving state of one time saving ends, and after that, while playing the left-handed game in the normal state, the player wins the regular pattern long opening and the timing when the special pattern 2 lottery is executed is If the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151", it is configured so that a short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is executed if the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery is a loss. Therefore, it is possible to execute the special pattern 2 variation multiple times when the regular pattern long open hit is won during the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period in which the special drawing 2 drawing can be carried out advantageously not only after the end of the time-saving state, but also when winning a regular long open winning pattern in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player play the game in the normal state while being aware of the number of changes in the special figure, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, players who have been playing games for a long time can understand the details of the previous time-saving state (number of time-savings), and also have an advantage in the special drawing 2 lottery by winning the regular state long opening. It is possible to predict the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game), and it is possible to play the game more advantageously than other players, which increases the motivation to continue playing the game. can be made to increase.

In addition, in the present 17th embodiment, when a specific time-saving state is set and the time-saving state ends when the specific time-saving end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set for a short time (0. The structure is configured such that a fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected, but it is not limited to this, and a short time (0.1 second) fluctuation pattern is selected depending on the timing of winning the regular pattern long opening during the normal state. It may be configured to separately provide a range in which a variation pattern is selected. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special drawing 2 lottery can be carried out advantageously in the case of winning the long opening of the common drawing, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation is configured to be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation may be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, no matter which time-saving ending condition the time-saving state ends, it becomes possible to select the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation after the time-saving state ends, and it provides the player with peace of mind. The player can play the game with care.

Further, it may be configured such that different fluctuation patterns are selected when the same type of time saving state is set. For example, a plurality of time saving types in which 5 time saving times are set as the time saving state may be provided, and multiple Among the time saving types, only when a specific time saving type is set, a short time (0.1 second) special figure 2 variation may be executed after the time saving state ends. Thereby, at the time when the time saving state is set (at the time when the remaining time saving number is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content of the game after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set as a state (support state) in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed advantageously. It is sufficient that the variable time is set to be shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a, and multiple types of variable times (for example, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, and 0.3 seconds) are sufficient. It may be configured such that one variation time is selected from among them. With this configuration, depending on the length of the special pattern 2 fluctuation time set in the state where the special pattern 2 lottery is carried out advantageously (support state), the number of times the special pattern 2 lottery can be executed during the support state can be changed. Since this is variable, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the game content during the support state.

Next, the contents of the ordinary pattern variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf will be explained with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general pattern variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf, and FIG. 429(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the fluctuation pattern table 202mf2, and FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 429(a), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 17 table 202mf includes the normal general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the "normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf1" as the type of time saving state. It has a regular pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A that is referenced when "time saving A" is set, and a regular pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. are doing.

The contents stipulated in the normal pattern variation pattern table 202mf1 are the same as the contents referenced in the normal state (low certainty) of the pattern variation selection table 202lf in the 16th embodiment described above. , a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the general pattern fluctuation pattern table referred to in the time saving state (general pattern high accuracy) is based on the type of time saving state set and the jackpot, with respect to the general pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202lf of the above-mentioned 16th embodiment. The difference is that the regular pattern variation pattern selected is different based on the number of special pattern variations after the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 429(b), the contents defined in the regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A will be explained. This regular pattern fluctuation pattern table 202mf2 for time saving A is a data table that is referred to when "time saving A" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is 1 or 99 times, and is As shown in (b), various regular pattern fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) are defined based on the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, if the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98" and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds), but in the range of 630 to 999, ``ultra short fluctuations (0.1 seconds)'' are specified, and the number of special pattern fluctuations is ``99 times'', and the acquired second When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 709", "very short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and when the value is in the range of "710 to 989", "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is specified. In the range of "990 to 999", "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined.

In other words, for the final change in time reduction when one time reduction is set, 63% select 2 seconds and 37% select 0.1 seconds as the normal pattern, and 99 time reductions are set. In the time saving final variation in the case, 71% selects 0.1 seconds, 28% selects 10 seconds, and 1% selects 2 seconds as the regular pattern variation pattern. Here, the shorter the variation time is set as the regular pattern fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the game to be executed per regular symbol to cross the end timing of the time saving state, so compared to the time saving state where one time saving is set, In the time saving state in which 99 time saving times are set, it is possible to more easily set a state (support state) in which it is easier to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special pattern fluctuations is "99 times", the configuration is such that 10 seconds of general pattern fluctuation time is selected with a 28% probability, and this 10 second general pattern fluctuation time is selected. In this case, it becomes difficult to execute a game with a common symbol so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, in the present embodiment, when 99 times of time saving is set as the time saving end condition, other symbols are used as the regular pattern fluctuation time during the execution of the special pattern fluctuation (99th special pattern fluctuation) for which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Since the configuration is such that the 0.1 second regular pattern fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the period of , the 0.1 second regular pattern fluctuation is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation in the time saving state. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which excessive privileges (prize balls paid out by placing a ball in the second prize opening 640) are obtained.

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special symbol variation set as the time-saving final variation and the regular symbol variation are set at different triggers, and either of the triggers for execution can be established by the ball fired in the right-handed game. Since this configuration is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which a normal pattern variation (a variation per common pattern) is executed in accordance with the end timing of a special pattern variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429(c), the contents defined in the regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B will be explained. The normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202mf3 for time saving B is a data table that is referred to when "time saving B" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is 5, and is shown in FIG. 429(c). As mentioned above, various regular symbol fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) are defined based on the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, if the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4" and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds) is in the range of 630 to 999, "ultra short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is specified, and if the number of special pattern fluctuations is 5 times, the acquired number 2. Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS2, "very short variation (0.1 seconds)" is defined. In addition, since the time saving state is set to a maximum of 5 times, a value corresponding to the 6th and subsequent special figure fluctuation times is not set.

As described above, when five time saving states are set, the normal figure variation is always executed with a variation time of 0.1 seconds during the final time saving variation. Therefore, it becomes easier to execute a game with a common symbol so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol can be set differently depending on the type of the set time saving state (time saving A, B). The time saving type (time saving B) in which 5 time saving times are set is the easiest to set the state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special map 2 lottery after the time saving state ends, followed by 99 time saving times and 1 time saving. It is configured in this order.

As a result, if the conditions for executing a jackpot game during a time-saving state are not satisfied, it is possible to grant benefits (support state) to the player, and furthermore, depending on the type of the set time-saving state, benefits can be granted to the player. By varying the grant probabilities, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation or when selecting the variation pattern of the regular figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, each variation pattern may be selected by referring only to the number of variations of the special pattern 2 variation, or may be configured to refer to the number of variations of the regular pattern variation. You may do so. Further, each variation pattern may be selected by referring to the degree to which the set time-saving termination condition is met.

In addition, in this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation or when selecting the variation pattern of the common symbol variation, the structure is configured such that the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game is referred to. However, without being limited to this, for example, the variable pattern table used when selecting each variable pattern may be changed based on the type of small win won during the time saving state, or the variable pattern table used when selecting each variable pattern may be It may be configured such that each variation pattern is selected based on the number of special figure variations or the number of regular figure variations.

<About control processing in the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431, the content of the control process in the seventeenth embodiment will be explained. This embodiment differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the normal symbol variation process 17 (see C136 in FIG. 430) is executed instead of the normal symbol variation process 16 (see C106 in FIG. 396), and the main control The difference is that the contents of the data tables referred to in various discrimination processes in the device 110 (see FIGS. 426 to 429) are different, and other than that, they are the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the changes in the contents of the data table to be referenced, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, it is important to note that the changes in the contents of the data table to be referred to are simply changes in numerical values, and there is a technical philosophy. Since they are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 430, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 17 (C136) will be explained. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 17 (C136). When the normal symbol variation process 17 (C136) is executed, the same processes from C601 to C611 as the normal symbol variation process 16 (see C106 in FIG. 396) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery is a win (C611: Yes), the current normal symbol winning type is set by referring to the common symbol winning type selection 17 table 202md (C641), The display mode (when the figure is correct) is set (C613), and the process moves to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that the current winning lottery of the normal symbol is a loss (C611: No), the display mode when the winning lottery is a loss is set (C614), and the process moves to the process of C642.

In the process of C642, the current common pattern variation pattern is set based on the common pattern variation pattern selection 17 table (C642), and commands corresponding to each setting (judgment of validity of winning lottery, common pattern fluctuation pattern) are set. (C623), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current normal symbol is changing (C602: Yes), C618- The process of C623 is executed and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 431, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. The control processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment is different from the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 of the 16th embodiment described above, by replacing it with a production setting process for ordinary figures (see C4117 in FIG. 417). It is different in that it is configured to execute the production setting process 17 for ordinary figures (see C4167 in FIG. 431). The other control processes are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production setting process 17 for ordinary figures (C4167). As shown in FIG. 431, in the ordinary symbol production setting process 17 (C4167), the ordinary symbol production setting process 17 (C4167) is executed during the special symbol final fluctuation period in the time saving state, in contrast to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol production setting processing (see C4117 in FIG. 417). The difference is that processing for setting the presentation mode is added, but other than that, they are the same, and the same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the ordinary figure effect setting process 17 (C4167) is executed, the same processes from C4201 to C4212 as the ordinary figure effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 417) of the above-mentioned 16th embodiment are executed, and the present process end. In addition, in the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether the current state is in the final change of the time saving state (C4251), and the final change is made. If it is determined that it is not inside (C4251: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C4251, if it is determined that the current time is in the final variation of the time saving state (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln is acquired, and the remaining period of the special figure variation being executed is obtained. Extract (C4252).

Then, it is determined whether the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is during the game when the regular symbol long is hit (C4253), and if it is determined that it is during the game when the regular symbol long is opened (C4253: Yes), the current time saving Since the regular pattern long open winning game is executed to cross the state end timing, a display command is set to suggest that the special pattern 2 fluctuation zone (support state) will be set after the time shortening ends (C4254). , this process ends. When a display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 through the same process as other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 425(a) is displayed as the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

In the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the short time end timing (C4253: No), this process is ended as is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the process of C4253, if it is determined that the long release is not performed at the short time end timing (C4253: No), this process is configured to end as is; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting The time-saving state that was set was a time-saving state in which it was easy to set the support state (for example, time-saving B), but perhaps the execution timing of the special pattern variation and the regular pattern variation was bad, and the support state was not set. It is also possible to provide a means for determining whether a time saving state in which it is difficult to set (for example, time saving A) has been set, and to display a display mode that can notify (suggest) the determination result to the player. . In addition, at the end timing of the current normal pattern variation and the end timing of the normal pattern winning game executed based on the current normal pattern variation, a means for determining whether the final variation of the time saving state has ended or not is provided. If it is determined that the final change in the time saving state has not ended at the end timing of the current normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern winning game executed based on the current general pattern fluctuation, It may be configured to suggest (notify) the determination result.

As explained above, in the 17th embodiment, similar to the 16th embodiment described above, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is more effective than the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. The special drawing 2 lottery is configured to be executed more easily than when a low probability state of normal symbols is set. Then, when a ball is won in the V winning opening 650a that is opened during a small winning game and the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), an opportunity to execute the jackpot game is established. .

Then, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a first end condition (a condition that is satisfied when the number of special figure variations (the number of special figure 2 variations) reaches a specified number of times (for example, 5 times)); A case where there is at least a second termination condition (a condition that is satisfied when a specific small win is won a specified number of times (for example, once) by a special drawing lottery during a time-saving state), and the first termination condition is satisfied. The configuration is such that an advantageous state advantageous to the player can only be given to the player. Specifically, during the special pattern fluctuation where the first end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short (regular symbol fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and a large number of fluctuations are made within one special symbol fluctuation period. It is configured to be able to perform general fluctuations.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the fulfillment of the first ending condition, the fluctuation period of the regular pattern variation to be executed is shortened in the final variation of the time saving state (special pattern final variation). be able to. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a game with a common figure long opening per game during the final variation of the time saving state (final variation of special figures), and by extension, the time saving state ends during the execution of a game with a common figure long opening, and the normal Even after the state is set, it is possible to easily continue the regular pattern long open winning game.

In other words, in this embodiment, in a state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, the special drawing 2 lottery is executed and the first benefit (small winning winning (small winning winning probability is about 1/ 7)) In the case where the player is allowed to play a game that aims to be awarded ``Special Figure 2 Lottery'' a predetermined number of times without winning a small hit in the Special Figure 2 Lottery executed during the time-saving state, It is configured such that a second benefit (a period in which a short fluctuation is executed as a regular fluctuation) different from the first benefit is granted. With this configuration, advantageous benefits can be given to the player regardless of whether the player wins a small hit as a gaming result (special drawing 2 lottery result) during the time saving state or not. It is possible to improve the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period in which the short variation is executed as the regular pattern variation is set during the execution period of the special pattern final variation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 time reductions). When the time-saving state ends, it is possible to easily obtain the number of second special symbols (special symbols 2) to be stored up to the upper limit (four). Furthermore, by shortening the regular figure fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the proportion of the period in which the electric accessory 1640a is open per unit time, so the state in which the game per ordinary figure is being executed (the electric accessory The normal state can be easily set in a state in which the object 1640a is open or a period in which the electric accessory 1640a remains open.

As a result, even after the normal state is set, it is possible to make it easier to win a ball in the second winning hole 1640, so when the second benefit is granted, it is easier to win the ball than when the second benefit is not granted. Many special figure 2 lottery drawings can be executed, and players can be motivated to play games.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment changes from a first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball during a specific game (for example, a small winning game) to a state in which the ball enters the ball from the first state. A specific ball entering means (V winning hole 650a) is provided which can be changed to a second state (open state) that is easy to enter, and a ball that enters the specific ball entering means (V winning hole 650a) is placed in a specific area (V gate). The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed based on passing the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball enters the V winning hole 650a that is opened when a small win game is executed. In this case, the technology described in this embodiment may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. In this case as well, by configuring the special drawing 2 drawing to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the special drawing 1 drawing, it will be advantageous for the player when the second benefit mentioned above is given. A gaming state can be provided.

Furthermore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as explained with reference to FIG. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if 99 times of time saving is set, immediately after the time saving state is set (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 1 to 5 times), or after a predetermined period has passed since the time saving state was set (for example, a period in which the number of special map changes is 45 to 50 times after the time saving state was set), the second benefit is The contents specified in the general pattern variation pattern selection 17 table 202mf may be configured as shown in FIG. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of time saving types for a time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, and to configure the period during which the second benefit is granted to be different depending on the set time saving type. good.

By configuring this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second benefit will be awarded, so it is expected that the second benefit will be awarded. It is possible to have the player play the game while in the time saving state.

<About the modification of the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment described above will be explained. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the time saving state, that is, when the fifth special symbol variation is executed in a state where a specific time saving state (time saving state of five time saving times) is set. , an advantageous game in which a short (0.1 second) variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is configured to be executed, and the game is executed just before the end of the time saving state or immediately after the end of the time saving state. It was configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 424, a second winning hole 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side game area of the game board 13, and when a right-handed game is played, The configuration was such that a ball could enter the second winning hole 640, but a ball could not enter the first winning hole 64.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second prize opening 640 provided in the right side game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game If it is possible to win a prize and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, use the game board 13 in which the first prize opening 64 is arranged in a position where it is difficult for the ball fired in a right-handed game to win a prize. ing. The rest of the configuration of the game board 13 is the same as that of the seventeenth embodiment described above, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in this modification, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) change in the order in which the acquired information was acquired (in the order in which the ball entered the corresponding prize opening). This embodiment differs from the seventeenth embodiment described above in that it is configured so that the (lottery) is executed, and that the configuration that stores the acquisition information of the special drawing 2 on hold is deleted. Since the other contents are the same as those of the seventeenth embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second benefit (playing period in which a short time (0.1 seconds) is likely to be set as the normal pattern fluctuation time) is given during the time saving state, and the When the state is set, it becomes easier for the ball fired in the right-handed game to enter the second winning hole 640, and it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the special figure 2 variation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at a timing other than during the normal winning game, it becomes easier for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win in the first prize opening 64. Since it does not have a configuration for storing the reservation of special drawing 2, even if a ball enters the second prize opening 640 while the special drawing 1 variation is being executed, the special drawing 2 variation will not be executed. It is configured not to run.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as a guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning opening 640 and a restricting means for restricting the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64. configured to function. With this configuration, the second benefit is granted to the player when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, depending on whether the second benefit is granted during the time saving state or not. Benefits can vary widely. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while expecting to be awarded the second benefit.

<18th embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 432 to 443. In the 16th embodiment described above, a series of performances can be executed as a variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of performances are executed. The system was designed to make it difficult to tell whether the execution trigger for the current series of performances was a special lottery or a general lottery, and to provide players with the pleasure of predicting the performance results (lottery results). (See Figure 363).

However, the notification mode (small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the gaming method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game depending on the winning game (normal winning game, small winning game, jackpot game) to be executed. There is a possibility that it may be determined which symbol lottery the current series of effects is based on depending on the timing at which the display mode) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the present 18th embodiment, in the performance (set performance) that is executed in response to the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (general symbol lottery), which symbol lottery is performed. Even when the game is played, it is configured to be able to display a notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the gaming method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game at the same timing. The characteristic configuration and control contents of the 18th embodiment will be explained below. Note that detailed explanations of the same contents as in the sixteenth embodiment described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment differs in the configuration of the right side game area from the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 361). , otherwise the same. Identical components will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 432 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment. In the 18th embodiment, when the player plays a right-handed game, the ball flowing down the right side game area can be used to win prizes in each winning slot in each winning game (normal winning game, small winning game, jackpot winning game). (The second winning hole 640, the V winning hole 650a, and the specific winning hole 65a) are configured to take different times to reach, and specifically, the balls fired by the right-handed game reach the second winning hole 640. It is configured such that the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize hole 650a is about 4 seconds, the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize hole 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time it takes to reach the specific winning a prize hole 65a is about 6 seconds.

Here, the configuration of the right side gaming area of this embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 432 to 434. As shown in FIG. 432, above the right side game area there is provided a sorting means 700 that can sort the balls into a plurality of ball paths, and the balls sorted by the sorting means 700 are sent to the first path 701. and a second route 702.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering ball path, and is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first path 701. The ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the channel unit in which the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessories 640a are provided. The flow channel unit is configured such that its upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 66, and as part of the flow channel formed on the upper surface, an electric accessory 640a and a winning door 65b are installed. It is provided. When the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are both in a closed state, the ball that has flown down the upper surface of the channel unit flows out from the lowest end of the upper surface of the channel unit (the end on the out port 66 side) and is out. It is configured to flow into the port 66 .

The configuration is such that the time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 1 second, and furthermore, the ball flow on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a (the upper surface of the channel unit) A delay member for delaying the flow of the ball is provided on the surface forming the path, and the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is approximately 2 seconds. It consists of Here, in the present 18th embodiment, a meandering channel is formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, which is meandered in the depth direction so that the ball does not flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in a straight line. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, the balls distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flow into the opening 704a of the straight passage passage formed in the depth direction of the first passage, and are placed near the exit of the passage passage. The ball is configured so that it flows down toward the V winning hole 650a, and the ball fired in a right-handed game reaches the V winning hole 650a in about 2 seconds.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the balls fired in the right-handed game can be won in each winning opening (game with a winning pattern, small winning game, jackpot game). The time for reaching the second winning hole 640, the V winning hole 650a, and the specific winning hole 65a) is configured to be different, and specifically, the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the second winning hole 640. The configuration is such that the time it takes to reach the V winning a prize opening 650a is about 2 seconds, and the time it takes to reach the specific winning a prize opening 65a is about 6 seconds.

With this configuration, it is possible to sequentially check in which winning hole the ball fired in the right-handed game enters the prize, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, different special symbol fluctuation times are set depending on whether a small win is won in the special symbol lottery or a big prize is won, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after hitting the ball, in order to win a prize in the prize opening opened by the game, the system is configured to issue a notification for guiding the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. And, regardless of whether a small hit is won or a big hit is won, the set effect is executed after the special symbol fluctuation starts, and at the same timing after a specific time has elapsed, the system is configured to make a notification to guide the right-handed game. ing. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the current lottery result is determined by the player based on the timing at which the notification for guiding the right-handed game is made.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a player wins a long opening win in a general pattern lottery, the execution timing of the set performance is set so that a notification to guide the right-handed game is made at a specific timing of the set performance. It consists of With this configuration, even if a set performance is executed and a notification indicating a right-handed game is made, it is difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current set performance indicates. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 435, a series of performances used as variable performances of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) in the 18th embodiment, and a right-handed game that guides a right-handed game The relationship with the notification display timing will be explained. FIG. 435 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution performance (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 435, in this embodiment, a performance (a series of performances) is executed for a predetermined period (54 seconds) after the start of symbol variation, and then a guidance notification is issued to guide the player to a right-handed game. (Right hit notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes a right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the ball fired by the right-handed game is released according to the lottery result of the symbol variation currently being executed. It is configured so that a prize can be won in the winning opening (second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) are executed based on the special pattern 1 variation (60 seconds) that has won a jackpot, then the right hit will occur 54 seconds after the start of the variation (during the special pattern 1 variation). Notification is executed. Then, the jackpot game is started at the timing when the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the specific winning hole 65a (6 seconds after the right-handed game is played).

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) are executed based on the special figure 1 variation (58 seconds) that has won a small hit, the right hit notification will be issued 54 seconds after the start of the variation (during the special figure 1 variation). is executed. Then, the small winning game is started at the timing when the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the V winning hole 650a (4 seconds after the right-handed game is played). In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game, it is configured so that it always passes through the V gate, and when the ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game. In this case, the jackpot game is started two seconds after the start of the small win game. As a result, the performance mode of the fluctuation performance (series of performances) that is executed from the start of the fluctuation, and the guidance notification that guides the right-handed game, depending on the case where you win the jackpot with the special figure 1 fluctuation and the case where you win the small hit. In addition to the execution timing, it is possible to make the timing from the start of fluctuation to the timing at which the jackpot game starts to be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, and to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, if a series of effects (54 seconds) are executed based on the winning normal pattern fluctuation (54 seconds), a right-handed notification will be executed 54 seconds after the fluctuation starts (when the general pattern fluctuation stops). be done. Then, at the timing when the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning hole 640 (two seconds after the right-handed game is played), the game with a common figure is started. In addition, even when a series of performances are executed based on this fluctuation of the general pattern, the start timing of the jackpot game via the normal pattern winning game will be different from the case where the jackpot is won in the above-mentioned special drawing 1 lottery and the case where the small winning is won. It is configured so that they can be made the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, at multiple timings during the period (right-handed ball flow period) after the guidance notification (right-handed ball notification) for guiding the right-handed game is executed until the jackpot game starts (right-handed ball falling period), this time The game player is configured to be able to perform a failure performance to notify that the performance result is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed). Specifically, the failure notification timing is set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed hit notification is executed.

In other words, although detailed explanations and illustrations are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is a loss, the structure is configured such that a variation pattern of variation times of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds is set. When the variation pattern is selected, the same variation effect as described above is executed, and failure notification is executed at the timing when the variation time has elapsed. The above-mentioned failure notification timing is based on the timing when it is determined that the ball could not be won into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game, and the timing when the ball was won into the second winning hole 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing at which the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation executed by the lottery is announced, or the timing at which a small win is won as a result of the special figure 2 lottery and the small win game ends.

By configuring in this way, there is a performance mode of a series of effects that are executed when the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is a loss, and a series of effects that are executed based on a winning of a normal drawing. In the game process after the game, it is possible to make the performance mode set when the jackpot game is not executed the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, and to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, even if you win a jackpot with the special symbol 1 variation and the 60-second special symbol variation is executed, the above-mentioned failure notification will be executed or not. It is configured to perform an inciting performance. In this case, since the state is that the special figure 1 jackpot has been won internally, a successful performance mode is set and executed as a performance to inform the player that there will be no failure as a result of the promotion performance.

In this way, by executing the inciting performance, it is possible to reduce the difference in performance between a series of performances in which failure notification is actually executed and a series of performances in which failure notification is not executed, and this fluctuating performance (set performance) ) It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand which winning game the performance result indicates, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the performance performed for the player (the performance performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), the current performance is It is possible to make it difficult to determine in advance what the result will be.

<About the electrical configuration in the 18th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 436 to 438. This embodiment is different from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other than that, they are the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 436(a), the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the 18th embodiment will be explained. FIG. 436(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the eighteenth embodiment. In this embodiment, in contrast to the sixteenth embodiment described above, an 18 variation pattern table 202ne is provided in place of the 16 variation pattern table 202le, and an 18 variation pattern selection table 202nf is provided in place of the 18 variation pattern selection table 202lf. They are different in some respects and are otherwise the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern 18 table 202ne will be explained with reference to FIG. 437. FIG. 437(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 18 table 202ne. As shown in FIG. 437(a), the fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne includes a normal fluctuation pattern 18 table 202ne1 and a time saving fluctuation pattern 16 table 202le2. The contents of the variation pattern table that is referenced depending on the state in which the state is set are made different.

Here, the contents of the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 437(b). FIG. 437(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1. As shown in FIG. 437(b), the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 has the first special symbol ( The contents stipulated in the data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special pattern 1) are different, and the data that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is different. The contents specified in the tables are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the regular variation pattern 18 table 202ne1, regardless of whether the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery is "miss", "big hit", or "small win", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time ) is selected, and specifically, when the lottery result of special drawing 1 is "lost", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "short" in the range of "0 to 139". "Out (7 seconds)" is in the range "140-179", "Out (30 seconds)" is in the range "180-189", "Short set production (30 seconds)" is in the range "190-194". "Various types of super reach (60 seconds)" are defined in the range, and "set effects (60 seconds)" are defined in the range "195 to 198."

In addition, if the lottery result of special map 1 is "Jackpot", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the value of "Normal reach various (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39". ``Short set effects (30 seconds)'' are specified in the range ``40-179'', ``Various types of super reach (60 seconds)'' are specified in the range ``180-198'', and ``Set effects (60 seconds)'' are defined in the range ``180-198''. , if the lottery result is a "small win", the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is "super reach various (60 seconds)" in the range "0 to 99", and "small win" is in the range "100 to 198". "Winning set performance (56 seconds)" is stipulated.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the variable pattern for executing the set effect is selected at a predetermined ratio regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1. The variation pattern (variation time) set as a set effect is configured to be different between when a small hit is won and when a jackpot is won. Specifically, when winning a big hit, a variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as a set effect, and when winning a small hit, a variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as a set effect. In other words, the fluctuation time of the set performance when winning a small hit is configured to be 4 seconds shorter than the fluctuation time of the set performance when winning a jackpot.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 432, in the game board 13 of this embodiment, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball does not reach the V winning hole 650a which becomes open during the small winning game. The configuration is such that the time required for the ball to reach the specific prize opening 65a, which is opened during the jackpot game (approximately 6 seconds), is 4 seconds longer than the time required for the ball to reach the specific prize opening 65a (approximately 2 seconds). . As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, regardless of the set variation time (special figure variation time), 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. It is configured to execute a notification (right-handed notification) to guide a right-handed game.

With this configuration, the timing from when the set performance is executed to when the right hit notification is executed can be made the same for both jackpot wins and small win wins, so players can be informed of the performance results of the set performance. It can be difficult to understand. Furthermore, a right-handed game will be notified 54 seconds after the set performance is executed, and if the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed game notification, the special drawing lottery result will be the trigger for executing the current set performance. Regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, the ball fired in the right-handed game can be won in any of the open winning holes.

Next, the contents of the ordinary pattern variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf will be explained with reference to FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 438, the normal pattern variation pattern selection 18 table 202nf has the normal pattern long variation B (60 seconds) defined in the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202lf (see FIG. 384) of the 16th embodiment described above. The difference is that the normal pattern long fluctuation C (58 seconds) is defined in the range specified, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202nf, the gaming state is normal (normal pattern low certainty), the result of the general pattern lottery is A per normal pattern, and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained is "500". ~999'', and when the gaming state is normal (low probability of regular figures) and the result of the regular lottery is a loss, the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates within the range of ``800 to 999''. As a pattern, "regular pattern long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is defined.

When the regular figure long variation C is selected, a set effect can be executed. In other words, even when a set effect is executed based on the long variation C of the regular figure, the right-handed hit notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed game notification, the shot ball is configured to win in the second winning hole 640.

By configuring in this way, the timing from when the set performance is executed to when the right hit notification is executed can be the same for jackpot winnings, small winning wins, and regular winnings, so players can enjoy the set performance. It is possible to make the performance results difficult to understand. Furthermore, a right-handed game will be notified 54 seconds after the set performance is executed, and if the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed game, the symbol lottery result that will trigger the execution of the current set performance will be Regardless of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a regular hit, the ball fired by the right-handed game will be released into any winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening). 640).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special drawing reservation and the general drawing reservation are read in advance, and the start timing of the special drawing fluctuation is a case in which no winning is won in the special drawing lottery for a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds), and If you win a regular lottery after a predetermined period of time (for example, 58 seconds to 62 seconds) from the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and it is determined that it is the timing to execute the winning long open winning game, The set effect is configured to be executed from the start timing of the special figure variation, and 54 seconds after the set effect is started from the start timing of the special figure variation, a right hit notification corresponding to the regular figure long open winning game is issued. is configured to run.

In this way, the contents of the special pattern fluctuation and the contents of the regular pattern fluctuation are read in advance, and if it is determined that the set performance can be executed at the start timing of any symbol fluctuation, the set performance can be executed. It is possible to increase the frequency with which the performance is executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the performance result of the set performance executed at the start timing of the special pattern variation can indicate the winning of the regular pattern long open winning, it is possible to make the player play a unique game.

Note that the relationship between the start timing of the set performance and the execution timing of the right-handed notification should not deviate significantly; for example, the execution timing of the right-handed notification, which is normally executed 54 seconds after the set performance is executed, may be changed. You can shift it back or forth by a few seconds (2 seconds), and in reality, the ball fired by the right-handed game will enter the winning hole 58 seconds after the set performance is executed, but the set performance is The right-handed hit notification may be executed 54 seconds after execution. By allowing a slight deviation in this way and making it possible to execute the set performance, the conditions for executing the set performance are more likely to be established, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, the set effect is executed at the start timing of symbol fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the conditions for executing the set effect described above are satisfied, for example, a special figure It may be configured such that the set effect is executed while the variation is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to display a pseudo-stop display mode to make the player think that the special symbol variation has ended before the set effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible for the player to perform a set performance that is started in the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without feeling any discomfort to the player.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighteenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 436(b). This embodiment is different from the above-described 16th embodiment in that a production prohibition flag 223na is added, and the rest is the same. Identical components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The performance prohibition flag 223na is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new set performance, and is set to ON when the setting of a new set performance is prohibited. In this embodiment, in addition to the period when the set effect is being executed, the set effect is configured so that it is not executed during the period when a specific super reach effect (including a miss) is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation. , the performance prohibition flag 223na is set on even during a period in which a specific super reach performance is executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the performance being executed (particularly a performance with high expectation of winning) being switched to a set performance midway through.

<About control processing in the 18th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 439 to 443, the contents of the control processing in the 18th embodiment will be explained. In the present 18th embodiment, in contrast to the control processing content in the 16th embodiment described above, the main control device 110 performs various discrimination processes (win discrimination processing, etc.) and various selection processes (win type selection processing, variation pattern selection processing, etc.). ), the processing results are different, and the specifics of the various processes executed based on the processing results (processing to set commands, processing to store processing results, etc.) Although the technical content is different, since the technical idea is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, the stop command processing 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) is replaced by the stop command processing 18 (see C3246 in FIG. 439), and the variable display setting processing 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) is executed. ) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440), and the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in FIG. 443) is executed instead of the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420). are doing. Everything else is the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of stop command processing 18 (C3246) will be explained with reference to FIG. 439. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 18 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 439, stop command processing 18 (C3246) is different from stop command processing 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) described above in that a process for setting the production prohibition flag 223na is added, and other than that, are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When stop command processing 18 (C3246) is executed, first, the same processing of C3951 to C3956 as the above-mentioned stop command processing 16 (see C3216 in FIG. 414) is executed, and then the current stop command is set to the production prohibition flag. 223na is set to on (C3971), and if it is determined that it indicates the stop of the target variation (C3971: Yes), turn off the production prohibition flag 223na. settings (C3972), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3971, if it is determined that the change does not indicate the stoppage of the target fluctuation (C3972: No), the process ends.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) will be explained with reference to FIG. 440. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 18 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 440, the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) in that it adds a process for setting the production mode of the set production. The difference is that a process of setting the production prohibition flag 223na on when the obtained variation pattern is a super reach is added, and the other points are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 18 (C3144) is executed, the same processes C4001 to C4004 as the above-mentioned variable display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting process (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, but it is determined whether the current variation display setting process was executed based on the special figure variation or the regular figure variation. Then, based on the determination results, it is determined whether the execution conditions for each set performance are satisfied, and if the execution conditions for the set performance are satisfied, a process for setting the performance mode of the set performance is performed. executed.

Returning to FIG. 440, the explanation will be continued. When the process of C4041 is finished, it is then determined whether the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is a super reach (C4042), and if it is determined that it is a super reach (CS24042: Yes), the performance prohibition flag 223na is set to on. (C4043), sets a display variation pattern command (C4044), executes the same processes C4006 to C4010 as the above-described variation display setting process 16 (see C3114 in FIG. 415), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C4042, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is not a super reach (C4042: No), the process of C4043 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C4044.

Next, with reference to FIG. 441, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be explained. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), a process for setting a set effect is executed at the start timing of special figure variation or regular figure variation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (C4901), and if it is determined that it is not the normal state (time saving state), (C4901) , since the game is not in a gaming state where a set performance is to be executed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (C4901: Yes), then the current variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in Figure 440) sets the variable display of the special figure variation (sets the effect) If it is determined that the process is to set the variable display of the special figure variation (C4902: Yes), the process in C4003 of the variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) It is determined whether the variation pattern obtained in (C4903) is a variation pattern corresponding to the set performance.

In the process of C4903, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to a set performance (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the performance prohibition flag 223na is set to on (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to on. If so (C4904: No), it is determined whether the current long fluctuation per ordinary symbol is in progress (C4905).

In the process of C4905, if it is determined that the current long fluctuation per regular symbol is in progress (C4905: Yes), the value of the regular symbol fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared ( C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of the regular symbol fluctuation is shorter than the current special symbol fluctuation time (C4907). If it is determined that the current special symbol fluctuation time is longer (C4907: No), the winning information of the normal symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out (C4908), and the winning information that has been read out is It is determined whether there is winning information that corresponds to the long fluctuation in the general pattern (C4909), and if it is determined that there is winning information that corresponds to the long fluctuation in the general pattern (C4909: Yes), a set performance according to the current fluctuation pattern is performed. is set (C4910), the production prohibition flag 223na is set on (C4911), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4909, if it is determined that there is no long variation in the winning information read out in the process of C4908 (C4909: No), this process is directly ended. In addition, in the process of C4907, if it is determined that the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), a set effect is set to match the stop timing of the normal figure fluctuation (C4912), and the effect prohibition flag 223na is turned on. (C4920), and ends this process.

In addition, in the process of C4905, it is determined that there is a long fluctuation per ordinary figure, that is, even though it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223na is not set to on in the process of C4904, the long fluctuation per ordinary figure is determined. A case in which this is the case is, for example, when a super reach effect is being executed as a variation effect of a special figure variation at the start timing of the long variation per normal figure being executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the process of C4909 is provided to set a set effect when there is a long fluctuation in the winning information. By configuring this way, if it is determined that there is a long change in the general pattern in the winning information, the long change in the general pattern is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special pattern change, so the set effect cannot be executed. During the normal pattern fluctuations are executed multiple times in a short period of time, for example, by executing a short winning game of the general pattern, it is possible to realize that the current set performance is a set performance executed based on the special pattern fluctuation. It is possible to prevent players from easily grasping the information. In addition, although the process of C4909 is provided in this embodiment, it is not limited to this and may be configured to set a set effect.

In addition, in the set performance set in the process of C4912, the set performance is executed not at the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation, but at the timing that matches the regular pattern fluctuation stop timing, so the general pattern long release is performed as a result of the set performance. It will notify you of the hit. In addition, if the remaining period of the general pattern variation at the start of this special pattern variation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) in which the performance mode of the set effect can be executed, the general pattern long release is performed instead of setting the set effect. It is preferable to configure the game so that a special performance mode indicating a win is set. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he has won the regular long open winning.

On the other hand, in the process of C4904, if it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223na is set to on (C4904: Yes), or in the process of C4905, if it is determined that there is no long fluctuation per normal pattern (C4905: No) obtains the lottery result of the currently executed Fuzu drawing (C4913), determines whether the Fuzu lottery has been won ( Fuzu long open winning) (C4914), and determines whether the Fuzu lottery has been won ( Fuzu long open winning) (C4914). If it is determined that the player has not won (or the regular lottery has not been executed) (C4914: No), the process moves to the process of C4910 described above.

In the process of C4914, if it is determined that the regular symbol has been won (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether the current special symbol fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a winning fluctuation. If so (C4915: Yes), the value of the regular pattern fluctuation time counter 223lo and the value of the special pattern fluctuation time counter 223ln are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the general pattern fluctuation is calculated from the current special pattern fluctuation time. It is determined whether the length is also short (C4917). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the current special pattern fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the current general pattern fluctuation (C4917: Yes), the set effect that is being executed for the general pattern fluctuation will be changed this time. The set effect is set to show the lottery result of the special figure variation (C4918), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4915, if it is determined that the current special symbol fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation (C4915), or in the processing of C4917, the fluctuation of the current special symbol fluctuation is longer than the remaining period of the regular symbol fluctuation that is being executed. If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process is ended without setting a set performance corresponding to the current special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variable display setting process 18 (see C3144 in FIG. 440) is a process for setting the variable display of normal symbols (C4902: No), the normal symbol set effect setting The process is executed (C4919), and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the general map set effect setting process (C4919) will be explained with reference to FIG. 442. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general map set effect setting process (C4919). When the general figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined that it is a set effect (C5001: Yes), the next Then, it is determined whether the performance prohibition flag 223na is set to on (C5002).

If it is determined in the process of C5002 that the performance prohibition flag 223na is not set to ON (C5002: No), a set performance is set according to the current fluctuation pattern (C5003), and the performance prohibition flag 223na is set to ON. (C5004) and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, if it is determined that the performance prohibition flag 223na is set to on (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether the current normal figure fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (long open winning fluctuation). C5005), if it is determined that it is a long open winning fluctuation (C5005: Yes), the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is obtained (C5006), and it is determined whether it is a special drawing winning (C5007). That is, it is determined whether the production prohibition flag 223na is set to on based on the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the process of C5007, if it is determined that it is not a special figure hit (C5007: No), then the value of the regular figure variation time counter 223lo and the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln are compared (C5008), It is determined whether the current general pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special pattern fluctuation that is being executed (C5009), and if it is determined that the current general pattern fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), A replacement performance (set performance) is set to notify the general lottery result (long opening win) by special pattern performance (set performance executed based on special pattern fluctuation) (C5010), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of C5007, if it is determined that the special symbol variation being executed is a winning variation (C5007: Yes), or in the process of C5009, the current regular symbol variation time is the remaining amount of the special symbol variation being executed. If it is determined that the time is longer than the specified time (C5009: No), the process is immediately terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the contents of the effect update processing 18 (C3142) will be explained. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update processing 18 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 443, the effect update process 18 (C3142) is a right-handed notification process when a set effect is executed, in contrast to the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) of the sixteenth embodiment described above. The difference is that . The rest is the same, and detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the effect update process 18 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) of the 16th embodiment described above are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of C4505 that the time saving final variation flag 223lk is not set to on (C4505: No), or if the final variation effect update process (C4506) is finished, the set effect is executed. It is determined whether there is a child (C4541). In the process of C4541, determination is made by referring to the value of a performance time measurement counter (not shown) that is set to measure the performance time when a set performance is executed.

In the process of C4541, if it is determined that the set performance is being executed (the performance time measurement counter is being measured) (C4541: Yes), is it the timing when 54 seconds have passed since the set performance was started? (C4542), and if it is determined that 54 seconds have elapsed (C4542: Yes), a display guide command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), and the process moves to C4507. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4541, if it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or in the process of C4542, if it is determined that 54 seconds have not elapsed (C4542: No) , C4543 is not performed, the process proceeds to C4507, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the performance update process 18 (C3142) shown in FIG. 443, only when it is determined that a set performance is being executed, a right-handed game is shown at a timing of 54 seconds from the start of the performance. However, in reality, the configuration is such that a display guide command to indicate a right-handed game is set at other times as well. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 18 table 202ne1 in FIG. 437(b), when a 30 second set performance is set, the set performance is executed. At the timing when 24 seconds have passed since then, a display guide command for indicating a right-handed game is set. Further, when replacing the performance result of the set performance that is being executed midway through, a display guide command for indicating the right-handed game may be set at a further different timing. As a result, the right-handed game is notified at a timing different from normal, so that it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 to 456. The 19th embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment described above in that the method of setting the presentation mode of the series of presentations is different. First, a method for setting a series of effects in the sixteenth embodiment described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 444. FIG. 444 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of setting a series of effects in the sixteenth embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 444, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, there are two cases in which a winning is achieved by winning a common symbol (a common symbol long open winning) and a case where a jackpot or small winning is won in the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery. It is configured such that a series of performances can be set, and the performance data of the series of performances is stored divided into a plurality of scenario types.

Specifically, scenario 1 corresponds to the performance mode executed during the normal pattern fluctuation (see FIGS. 365(b) and 366(a)), and the performance mode executed during the normal pattern winning game (see FIG. 366(a)). Scenario 2 corresponding to (see (b)); and Scenario 3 corresponding to the performance mode (see FIG. 369(a)) that is executed when a ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal game. It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular game winning game until the special lottery 2 lottery is executed based on the winning ball is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponds to the performance mode (see Figure 367(a)) that is performed during the special figure 2 fluctuation (see Figure 367(b)), and scenario 4 corresponds to the performance mode executed during the special figure 2 variation (see Figure 367(b)). Scenario 5 corresponds to the production mode that is executed when the series of productions ends (see FIG. 368(b)), and the production mode that is executed when the series of productions ends midway (see FIGS. 370(b) and 371(b)). A corresponding scenario 7 is stored.

Then, when a jackpot or small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a series of performances using a plurality of production data is set at once in correspondence with the variation pattern command of the corresponding special symbol 1 variation. There is. Specifically, if you win a big hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, a variable effect (series of effects) is executed in which the effect data from scenario 1 to scenario 5 mentioned above is set all at once, and you win a small hit in the special drawing 1 drawing. If the player wins, the system is configured to execute a variable performance (a series of performances) in which the performance data for Scenario 1 to Scenario 4 described above are set all at once.

On the other hand, for a series of performances that are set based on winning a common map, each scenario that makes up the series is set individually, and the next scenario is set based on the fulfillment of scenario transition conditions for one scenario. It is composed of Specifically, in the case where a player wins the long open win in a general pattern lottery and the conditions for executing a series of effects are met, scenario 1 indicating the start of a series of effects is set, and the player wins the long open player in a general pattern. When the stop command shown in FIG. 2 is received, scenario 2 is then set. In addition, in the 16th embodiment, there is a case where scenario 1 is set in a state where no winning is made in the long opening of the general map (so-called false effect), and in that case, when the elapsed time of scenario 1 ends, , the series of performances ends.

Next, when the performance mode corresponding to scenario 2 is executed during the regular game long open winning game and the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a special map 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that is executed. A notification mode indicating that the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 is outputted from the main control device 110 and displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which the series of effects are executed (sub-display area in FIG. 367(a) (See Ds). Then, when the special drawing 2 winning command is received, scenario 3 is set. In addition, if the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the period in which scenario 2 is set, scenario 7 is set to end the series of effects, and the end screen for a predetermined period (3 seconds) is displayed. Is displayed.

In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, when moving to scenario 3, that is, when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular game, the period (waiting period) until the special lottery 2 is executed. is determined based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and different scenarios are set depending on the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see Figure 369(a)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see Figure 367(a)) is set. reference) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or more, a special series of performances (continuous series of performances) that pseudo ends the series of performances that are being executed (scenario 7 is set) and starts the series of performances again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. is executed (see FIG. 372). Further, when scenario 3-1 is set, the performance mode corresponding to scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Next, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received with scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 set, the conditions for transition to the next scenario are met and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 variation is received, and a production mode of the same length as the variation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 variation is executed. . Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the current special figure 2 fluctuation indicates a win, the process moves to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation indicates a loss, the process moves to scenario 7 and the series of processes ends.

Here, in this embodiment, the same variation time is set whether the special drawing 2 variation being executed in the state where scenario 4 is set is a small hit or a jackpot, and the transition to scenario 5 is made. However, without being limited to this, for example, if you win a jackpot with a special figure 2 fluctuation during the normal state, the fluctuation time is the small winning fluctuation time (15 seconds) and the small winning playing time (10 seconds). ) is configured to set a fluctuation time of 25 seconds that is the sum of The configuration may be such that a game is executed.

When scenario 5 is set when the special figure 2 variation is a small win, the performance mode corresponding to scenario 5 is executed until the V passing command is received during the small win game or until the small win game ends. When the V pass command is received, a notification mode indicating this is displayed on a layer different from the display layer where the series of effects are executed, and the game proceeds to a jackpot game. On the other hand, if the V pass command is not received after the small winning game period (10 seconds) has elapsed, the process moves to scenario 7 to end the series of performances.

As explained above, in the 16th embodiment, when executing a series of effects based on the special figure 1 variation, a series of effects scenario is set all at once in correspondence with the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation. When executing a series of effects based on figure fluctuations, the presentation mode of the series of effects is updated depending on the satisfaction of transition conditions corresponding to each scenario. Therefore, when performing a series of performances in the same performance mode, if the update of the performance mode is confirmed, the processing for setting the series of performances can be simplified, and the updated contents of the performance mode can be changed depending on the game situation. In this case, the performance mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In addition, in the present 16th embodiment, when performing a series of productions based on the general drawing lottery, the scenario of the series of presentations is individually set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, Of the series of performances to be executed based on the lottery, a plurality of scenarios may be set together for a part where the update of the performance mode has been confirmed. This makes it possible to simplify the process of setting a series of effects.

The method for setting a series of effects in the 16th embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 444 is to set a series of effects when the update of the effect mode is confirmed when executing a series of effects in the same effect mode. In addition to simplifying the process, if the update content of the production mode changes depending on the gaming situation, it is possible to flexibly change the production mode according to each gaming situation, but the length of the waiting period Since the only production mode that can be variably set according to the scenario is the production mode corresponding to Scenario 3, players may feel a sense of discomfort when compared to the production mode based on other scenarios in a series of productions that are executed in a predetermined period of time. There was a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the present 19th embodiment, when the normal pattern variation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, Based on the prediction result, the mode of performance of a series of performances corresponding to fluctuations in the general pattern is set. In other words, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to be executed this time, the general pattern lottery result, and the playing time (maximum time) of the game per normal pattern are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the special symbol 1 variation currently being executed during a game with a common symbol will end, and to set the performance mode of a series of effects corresponding to the common symbol variation based on the determination result. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the end timing of the variation of the special figure 1 variation being executed is later than the period in which a ball can win in the second winning hole 640, that is, the playing period (maximum period) per regular figure. In this case, it becomes possible to predict the timing (length of waiting period) at which the special figure 2 variation can be executed at the time when the regular figure variation is executed. As a result, it is possible to set performance modes based on the length of the standby period as various performance modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the sixteenth embodiment described above, it is possible to lengthen the variably settable period of the production mode of the series of productions depending on the length of the waiting period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the performance.

<About the electrical configuration in the nineteenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 445 and 446. The nineteenth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series performance scenario table 222oa is added to the ROM 222, and a medium hit flag 223oa, a performance scenario storage area 223ob, and a constant monitoring flag 223oc are added to the RAM 223. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 445(a). FIG. 445(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 445(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the nineteenth embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment in that a series effect scenario table 222oa is added.

The series performance scenario table 222oa is a data table in which performance modes of a series of performances to be executed in accordance with the progressing game situation are defined. Here, with reference to FIG. 446, the contents of the normal figure scenario table 222oa1, which defines the production scenario of the series of effects set based on the normal figure fluctuation, of the series effect scenario table 222oa, will be explained.

FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the series effect scenario table 222oa. In addition, in FIG. 446, among the contents specified in the series production scenario table 222oa, only the characteristic content of the 19th embodiment (production scenario of a series production set based on fluctuations in common figures) is shown. Therefore, the description and explanation of the same content as the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, that is, the content of the presentation mode of the series of presentations set corresponding to the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation, is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 446, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the performance mode of a series of effects based on the fluctuation of the general pattern, it is possible to set multiple scenarios per normal pattern (scenarios 1 to 4 per normal pattern). Based on the result of the first prediction (prediction about the length of the waiting period that may occur during the execution of a series of effects), which is executed when the general pattern fluctuates, different scenarios for the normal pattern are set. It consists of

Specifically, at the start of the fluctuation of the general pattern won by the long opening of the general pattern, it is determined whether the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is changing, and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 is changing. Next, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is determined. Next, compare the playing period of the regular pattern long opening game to be executed based on the current general pattern variation with the remaining period of the currently running special pattern 1 variation, and determine the end timing of the currently running special pattern 1 variation. It is determined whether or not it is after the end time of the game for the long opening of the regular figure to be executed based on the current fluctuation of the ordinary figure, and if it is determined that it is after the end time of the game for the opening of the ordinary figure long The waiting period until the FIG. 1 variation ends (the period until the special figure 2 variation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a normal pattern winning scenario corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined in the above-described process.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special pattern 2 variation will not be executed at the start of the general pattern variation, so it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special pattern 2 variation will not be executed. It becomes possible to execute a series of performances in a different performance mode.

In addition, in the first prediction described above, if the special pattern 1 variation is not being executed at the start timing of the general pattern variation, or the end timing of the special pattern 1 variation currently being executed is longer than the normal pattern long winning game period. If it is before, the waiting period cannot be predicted in advance, so at the start of the regular pattern variation, only the performance mode of the series of performances corresponding to the regular pattern fluctuation time is set.

As shown in FIG. 446, the series effect scenario table 222oa defines a plurality of scenarios per normal pattern that are set based on the prediction results of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. As a prediction result, if the waiting period (special map 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per regular map" is set, and if it is "more than 2 seconds but less than 30 seconds" It is stipulated that the "normal map hit scenario 2" is set, and when the time is "30 seconds or more", the "regular map hit scenario 3" is set. In addition, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is specified that "scenario 4 for normal map" is set.

Here, the contents of each general map scenario will be explained. When "Scenario 1 per regular map" is set, "Scenario 1" is set for "During regular map fluctuation", "Scenario 2" is set for "Playing per regular map", and "Scenario 2 is changed for special map 2" as a performance mode of a series of effects. The contents of the winning scenario are defined such that the presentation mode corresponding to "Scenario 3" is set to "Medium". In other words, when "scenario 1 for winning a regular map" is set, that is, when the special chart 2 waiting period is short, the performance mode that shows the game for winning a regular map without setting the performance mode exclusively for the special chart 2 waiting period. A series of performances are executed that transitions from to the performance mode showing the special figure 2 variation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance that is difficult for the player to understand due to the performance mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period being set for a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). I can do it. In addition, in this embodiment, when the scenario 1 for a normal pattern is set, the special pattern 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds that occurs when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the normal pattern long open winning game. Inside, the production mode that can be set during a game with a regular figure is configured to be set continuously, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 change during the special figure 2 standby period of less than 2 seconds. It may also be configured to set the presentation mode that can be set inside.

When "Scenario 2 per normal pattern" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During normal pattern fluctuation", "Scenario 2" is set to "Playing per normal pattern", and "Scenario 2 is changed to special pattern 2". The contents of the winning scenario are defined such that the effect mode corresponding to ``Scenario 3'' is set in ``Waiting'' and the performance mode corresponding to ``Scenario 4'' is set in ``Special Figure 2 Changing''. In other words, when the "regular figure winning scenario 2" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 standby period exists for a predetermined period, a performance mode exclusive to the special figure 2 standby period is set.

With this configuration, when the special figure 2 waiting period occurs for a predetermined period, a series of effects can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort (feeling of delay). Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "Scenario 1 per regular map" is set, "Scenario 3" which is set to "Special map 2 changing" is changed to "Scenario 3" which is set to "Special map 2 changing" when "Scenario 2 per regular map" is set. is configured to be set in correspondence with "Special Figure 2 Waiting". By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode that transitions from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of effects, regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 standby period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances that will not give the player a feeling of discomfort.

Next, when "Scenario 3 per normal pattern" is set, "Scenario 1" is set to "During normal pattern fluctuation", "Scenario 2" is set to "During play per normal pattern", and "Special The contents of the winning scenario are defined such that the performance modes corresponding to "Scenario 2", "Scenario 3", and "Scenario 4" are set in "Fig. 2 Waiting for variation" and "Scenario 4" in "Special figure 2 variation". In other words, when the "scenario 3 for winning a regular map" is set, that is, when the waiting period for the special map 2 is longer than the predetermined period, the period in which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the game for winning a regular map is: It is structured so that it is longer than other common map winning scenarios.

By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol 2 waiting period is long, it is possible to make the player think that the regular symbol winning game is being played during that period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to make the user think that the waiting period for the special map 2 is long. In addition, since the corresponding performance mode (scenario 2) is displayed for a long period of time during a game with a common map, the player is not given a special pattern 2 waiting period, and the game with a regular map continues for a long time. It can make you think that it is being done.

In addition, when the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" is set, it is a case where the fluctuation situation of the special pattern 1 fluctuation during the general pattern long open winning game cannot be predicted at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, so the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" is set. Only "scenario 1" corresponding to "Figure changing" is set, and this processing is ended. In addition, when "normal map hit scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, and the scenario is set based on the determination result. It is configured as follows.

Furthermore, even if a different normal pattern winning scenario is set as the normal pattern winning scenario, the same performance mode is set during the small winning game and the jackpot winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 447 and FIG. 448, the flow in the case where scenario 2 for winning a normal figure is set as a series of effects in the nineteenth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 447 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where the normal pattern winning scenario 2 is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 447, the first prediction process for determining the length of the standby period (special figure 2 standby period) is executed at the time when the regular figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period is "20 seconds" as a processing result of the first prediction process, at the time of starting the fluctuation of the regular pattern, the performance data corresponding to the "scenario 2 per standard pattern" specified in the series of performance scenario table 222oa is set and stored in the production scenario storage area 223ob, which will be described later. Then, based on the passage of time, a series of performances are executed in a performance mode corresponding to the performance data stored in the performance scenario storage area 223ob.

In this way, if it is possible to predict the future game content at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, by configuring multiple performance data (scenarios) to be set together, the performance mode of a series of performances can be set. processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, a description will be given of the flow when the normal pattern winning scenario 4 is set as a series of effects. FIG. 448 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where scenario 4 for winning a normal figure is set as a series of effects.

As shown in FIG. 448, the first prediction process for determining the length of the standby period (special figure 2 standby period) is executed at the time when the regular figure fluctuation is executed. If it is determined as a result of the first prediction process that the stop timing of the special symbol 1 variation that is being executed is earlier than the stop timing of the variation per regular symbol, it is possible to predict the length of the waiting period. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined to be "unpredictable", and at the start of the normal pattern variation, the effect data corresponding to the "normal pattern per hit scenario 4" specified in the series effect scenario table 222oa is set.

In other words, according to the example shown in FIG. 448, in the period from when the special symbol 1 variation in execution stops until the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the regular symbol long open winning game, a new Since it is not possible to predict whether the special figure 1 variation will be executed or not, it is not possible to predict the length of the waiting period. In such a case, at the start of the variation of the common pattern, only the performance mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the variation of the common pattern is set as the performance mode of the series of effects, and when the variation of the common pattern stops (when the variation of the common pattern starts) ), the second prediction process is executed.

The second prediction process is to determine the length of the waiting period again when the fluctuation of the regular pattern stops (when the fluctuation of the standard pattern starts), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This is the process that is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 fluctuation is being executed when the fluctuation of the general pattern stops (when the fluctuation of the general pattern starts), and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 fluctuation is in progress, the special pattern that is being executed The length of the waiting period is determined by comparing the remaining period of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 1 with the playing period of the regular pattern long opening game. Then, based on the determination result, the performance mode of the series of performances is set based on the contents specified in the series of performances scenario table 222oa.

As shown in FIG. 448, if the waiting period could not be predicted in the second prediction process (if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at this point, it is not possible to determine the waiting period, so the start of special pattern 1 variation or the start of special pattern 2 variation during a regular pattern winning game (general pattern long open winning game) is constantly monitored. A constant monitoring process is executed for this purpose. Then, if it is determined by the constant monitoring process that the special figure 2 variation will be executed before the new special figure 1 variation is executed, the special figure 2 variation will be executed in response to the start of the special figure 2 variation. A corresponding performance mode (scenario 3) is set during the fluctuation.

As explained above, in the 19th embodiment, when setting the production mode of a series of productions to be executed based on fluctuations in regular symbols, the waiting period is set as an irregular period depending on the gaming situation. It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. With this configuration, even if a long waiting period is set during the period in which a series of performances is performed, it is possible to provide a series of performances that will not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the present 19th embodiment, the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects are executed, so the series of effects to be executed before the actual waiting period is set. It becomes possible to variably set the performance mode depending on the length of the waiting period. Therefore, compared to the case where only the performance mode set corresponding to the waiting period among the production modes of the series of productions is varied according to the length of the waiting period, it is possible to execute a series of productions that does not feel strange. .

Furthermore, in the present 19th embodiment, in a state where the waiting period is set, it is possible to set an effect mode indicating that it is a period other than the waiting period (for example, a playing period for common symbols), It is possible to make it difficult for players to understand that a long waiting period has been set. In addition, in the present 19th embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, since the configuration is such that a right-handed game is performed during a series of performances, it is not possible to determine whether or not the current time is a standby period depending on the gaming method. It can be made difficult for players to identify.

In addition, in the 19th embodiment, if it is difficult (impossible) to predict the length of the waiting period at the start of the fluctuation of the normal pattern, the waiting period is restarted at a different timing (game start timing per normal pattern). It is configured to execute processing for predicting the length of (second prediction processing). In this manner, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the waiting period during the period until the waiting period is set, it is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the length of the waiting period.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, the gaming status during the game per game is constantly monitored, and the waiting period is responded to based on the results of constant monitoring. Since the configuration is configured to set the presentation mode for the series of presentations, the processing for setting the presentation mode for the series of presentations can be simplified.

In addition, in the present 19th embodiment, in the processing for predicting the waiting period (first prediction processing, second prediction processing), the length of the waiting period is calculated using the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 fluctuation that is being executed. Although the configuration is configured to predict (discriminate), the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information of the special drawing 1 pending stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read in advance, and the next prediction is made based on the result of the prereading. The length of the waiting period may also be predicted using the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed in the above.

By configuring in this way, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. If the start condition for the special figure 2 variation (ball winning into the second prize opening 640) cannot be met when the special figure 1 variation ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation to be executed next. It is possible to read ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the result of the read ahead. Therefore, the accuracy of predicting the length of the waiting period can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present 19th embodiment, similar to the 16th embodiment described above, the special figure 2 variation is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special pattern 1 variation and the special pattern 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the order in which the balls enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, or the special pattern 2 variation may be given priority over the special pattern 2 variation. It may also be configured such that the special figure 1 variation is executed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 449 to 456. This embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that a winning information command process 19 (see FIG. 449) is executed instead of the winning information command process 16 (see FIG. 450), executing the winning related command processing 19 (see Fig. 451) instead of the winning related command processing 16 (see Fig. 410), and executing the winning related command processing (see Fig. 452). The following points are executed: The variable effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 453) is executed instead of the variable effect setting process 16 (see FIG. 415), and the constant monitoring effect setting process (see FIG. 454) is executed. , the point of executing the variable effect setting process 19 (see FIG. 455) instead of the general figure effect setting process (see FIG. 417), and the point of executing the series effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 456). They are different and otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the changes in the contents of the data table to be referenced, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, it is important to note that the changes in the contents of the data table to be referred to are simply changes in numerical values, and there is a technical philosophy. are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of winning information command processing 19 (C3242) will be explained with reference to FIG. 449. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 19 (C3242) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this winning information command process 19 (C3242), in contrast to the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) described above, the process (series effect determination process) that is executed when a winning information command is received during the execution of a series of effects. The difference is that C3441)) in FIG.

When winning information command processing 19 (C3242) is executed, after executing the same processing as C3401 to C3405 as winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) of the 16th embodiment described above, in the processing of C3403, a special If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the process of C3441, a series of effects discrimination process is executed (C3441). The details of this series performance determination process (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG. 450.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the contents of the series effect determination process (C3441) will be explained. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series effect determination process (C3441) executed in the winning information command process 19 (FIG. 449) in the nineteenth embodiment. In this series of production determination processing (C3441), it is determined whether a series of productions is currently being executed, and if it is determined that a series of productions is currently being executed, the type of winning command received this time (special figure 1, special figure 2. Processing corresponding to the general figure) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223lq is acquired (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223lq is 0 (C5102). The series performance counter 223lq acquired in the process of C4101 is set to a value corresponding to the performance period when a series of performances is executed, and is subtracted (updated) in the performance update process that is periodically executed, and the counter value is The series of effects is configured to end when the value becomes "0". That is, in the process of C5102, it is determined whether a series of effects is being executed.

In the process of C5102, if it is determined that the value of the series performance counter 223lq is not larger than 0 (0) (C5102: No), the current performance is not in progress, so various display modes during execution of the series performance The process skips steps C5103 to C5110 for setting the value and moves to step C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series production counter 223lq is larger than 0 (C5102: Yes), since the series production is being executed, the winning information command received this time will be used as a special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize). (C5103), and if it is determined that it is a special 2nd prize (C5103: Yes), the information in the production scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223oc is turned on. It is determined whether there is one (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is off (C5105: No), the process moves to C5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C5105: Yes), that is, the waiting period during which the execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited for during the performance period in which the current series of performances is executed is set in advance. If the condition cannot be predicted, a waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the calculation contents executed in the process of C5106 will be explained. Since the process of C5106 is a process that is executed when a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning (special drawing 2 winning) is received, the current moment is the second winning opening 640 (starting winning opening of the special drawing 2 variation). The ball enters the prize, and the condition that is part of the trigger for the execution of the special figure 2 variation is established. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are configured so that they are not executed at the same time (duplicately), and furthermore, the special figure 2 variation has priority over the special figure 1 variation. It is configured so that it is executed.

In other words, if the special figure 1 variation is currently being executed, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed after the currently executed special figure 1 variation is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation currently being executed is extracted using the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln, and the extraction result is calculated as the waiting period. In addition, if the special pattern 1 variation is not executed at the moment, the special pattern 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be executed immediately, so "0" is set as the waiting period. .

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the number of balls that enters the second prize opening 640 during one series of performance execution (during one round long opening per game) is one. Therefore, in the process of C5103, when a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning (special 2 winning) is received, the process for calculating the waiting period is always executed. Without limitation, for example, when configuring so that two or more balls can be won in the second prize opening 640 during the execution of one series of performances (during one round of regular long open winning game) In this case, a flag indicating that the waiting period has been calculated (calculated flag) is set on in the processing of C5106, and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on in the processing of C5105 (C5105: Yes) , is configured to determine whether the above-mentioned calculated flag is set on, and if the calculated flag is set on, skips the processing of C5106 and C5107 and moves to the processing of C5108. It is best to configure it like this.

With this configuration, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 and a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received multiple times while a series of performances is being executed. Since the waiting period can be calculated only based on the winning information command indicating the first received special drawing 2 winning, it is possible to suppress unnecessary processing from being executed. In other words, in this embodiment, the period from the timing when the first special figure 2 prize is won during the execution of a series of effects until the special figure 2 variation is executed is set as the waiting period, and the effect mode is set according to the length of the waiting period. By setting , even if there is a long period (waiting period) in which the special drawing 2 variation is not executed even if the special drawing 2 winning is won, the effect that is executed in the middle of a series of effects (during the waiting period) Since the structure is configured to prevent the performance (performed performance) from being prolonged and the performance effect being degraded, a plurality of balls enter the second prize opening 640 while the series of performances is being performed. However, even if a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received multiple times, there is no need to calculate the length of the waiting period based on the winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning received from the second time onwards. This will be a process.

In addition, as in this embodiment, if the waiting period is calculated every time a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received during a period in which a series of performances are being executed, the waiting period is calculated first. Figure 2: When receiving a winning information command indicating a winning, it is sufficient to determine whether the special drawing 1 variation is being executed, and if it is being executed, the remaining period, and then calculate the waiting period. When a winning information command indicating a special figure 2 winning is received, it is determined whether the special figure variation being executed is the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation, and if the special figure 1 variation is being executed. , the waiting period may be calculated based on the remaining period of the special drawing 1 fluctuation being executed and the winning information command indicating the winning of the special drawing 2 received earlier.

In this case, the lottery result of the special drawing 2 fluctuation corresponding to the winning information command that indicates the previously received special drawing 2 winning is read in advance, and if the prereading result is a loss, the winning information indicating the special drawing 2 winning that was received this time is read in advance. The remaining period until the special pattern 2 variation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the period that is the sum of the remaining period of the special pattern 1 variation being executed and the variation time of the next out-of-order variation to be executed is the waiting period. It is best to configure it so that it is set as . With this configuration, it is possible to set the period during which the winning variation of special drawing 2 is being executed as the waiting period, so it is not difficult for the player to understand that he has won a winning lottery in special drawing 2. can.

Returning to FIG. 450, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C5108, a display command corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process moves to C5109. In the process of C5108, a display command indicating that the special drawing 2 prize has been won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode that directly displays that the special drawing 2 winning has been won, and a display that suggests the remaining period until the special drawing change corresponding to the winning is executed. In other words, an indirect display mode that indirectly indicates that the special drawing 2 prize has been won is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned direct display mode and indirect display mode can be set using the display command corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. The performance mode may be set based on the lottery result of the fluctuation, or may be configured based on the length of the waiting period for a series of performances. In addition, the notification mode that indicates that a ball has won a prize in the second winning hole 640 for the first time during a series of performances is different from the notification mode that indicates that a ball has won a prize in the second winning hole 640 from the second time onward. Also good.

Next, in the process of C5109, it is determined whether the ball that won the V winning hole 650a passed through a specific area (V area) (whether there was a V winning) (C5109). If it is determined that the winning ball in the V winning hole 650a has passed through a specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), a display command corresponding to the V winning is set (C5110), and the process moves to C5111. . If it is determined that the ball won in the V winning hole 650a has not passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: No), then the process moves to C5111.

In the process of C5111, other production modes related to winning information are set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set production mode is set (C5112), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 451, the contents of win-related command processing 19 (C3261) will be explained. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related command processing 19 (C3261) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this win-related command processing 19 (C3261), the production mode for each period of the series of productions is set based on the fact that the normal symbol winning game is executed during the period in which the series of productions is being executed.

When win-related command processing 19 (C3261) is executed, the same processing as C3501 to C3504 as win-related command processing 16 (see FIG. 410) of the 16th embodiment described above is executed, and in the processing of C3505, the main control If it is determined that a command related to a regular map has been received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), a command process related to a regular map is executed (C3551), and then this process ends. The details of this common map related command processing (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG. 452.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the contents of the ordinary figure per-related command processing (C3551) will be explained. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary map related command processing (C3551) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. This normal figure winning related command processing (C3551) is executed when a winning related command related to a common figure winning is received (C3505 in FIG. 451: Yes), and it is executed when the winning related command regarding a common figure winning is received. At the timing, various processes for setting the presentation mode of the series of presentations are executed.

In the common map related command processing (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5201). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223lq is greater than 0, that is, whether a series of effects is currently being executed (C5202). . If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is not greater than 0 (C5202: No), the opening command processing for display is executed (C5203), the medium hit flag 223oa is set to ON, and the C5215 Move to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the 16th embodiment. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5202, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223lq is larger than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223ob is read (C5205), and then the effect scenario is It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223ob is the scenario 4 per common map (C5206).

Here, the production scenario storage area 223ob stores information indicating a scenario for winning a common picture set in a series of production prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 456) that is performed when performing a common picture variation (a common picture lottery). , and in the process of C5206, if it is determined that the scenario is "Public pattern scenario 4 (see FIG. 446)", which is a pattern of normal pattern winning scenario in which the performance mode corresponding to the period during which the normal pattern is played is not set. , a process for setting the presentation mode during the normal symbol winning game in the series of presentations is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223ob is not scenario 4 per general pattern (scenarios 1 to 3 per general pattern) (C5206: No), the information stored in the performance scenario storage area 223ob is already Since the performance mode during the winning game is set, that is, in the series performance prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 456) that is performed when executing the normal pattern variation (normal pattern drawing), the performance mode during the normal pattern winning game is set in advance. Since this is a case where the production mode corresponding to the period of 2018 has been set, in this process, the production mode corresponding to the period during which the normal map is played is not set (skipping the processing of C5207 to C5210). ) The process moves to C5204.

On the other hand, in the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223ob is scenario 4 per regular figure (C5206: Yes), the special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) The value of 223ln and the playing period per normal figure are compared (C5207). To explain in detail the processing contents of C5207, first, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is calculated using the value of the special symbol variation time counter 223ln. For example, when a special figure 1 variation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the variation time of 60 seconds (in this embodiment, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln) is set at the start timing of the special figure 1 variation. , since it is configured to subtract 1 in the effect update process 18 (see C3142 in Fig. 443) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see Fig. 59), so the value corresponding to 60 seconds is "60000") is set. If this process is executed after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure 1 variation, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln indicating the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is "30000". Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. Next, it is calculated based on the type of game per common symbol to be executed this time. In this embodiment, since the opening command outputted from the main control device 110 includes information indicating the type of game per common symbol to be executed this time, the gaming period per common symbol is calculated based on that information. In addition, here, the time stipulated as the end condition that is satisfied based on the passage of time is calculated as the game period per common figure.

Specifically, when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game for a common symbol, or when the number of winning balls in the second prize opening 640 reaches 10, the game for a common symbol ends. If the termination condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time that the game per regular symbol can continue, is set as the gaming period per regular symbol. As a result, in the process of predicting the waiting period (period from the winning of special drawing 2 to the execution of special drawing 2 variation) in advance in order to set the presentation mode of a series of presentations, the per normal drawing used for prediction Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the actual game period per common symbol is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period in which the ball can enter the second prize opening 640. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the second winning hole 640 after the elapse of and the special drawing 2 variation is executed. Therefore, even if the performance mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, it is possible to make it difficult to deviate between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the playing period per ordinary figure is calculated as described above, the game per ordinary figure ends in a period shorter than the calculated playing period per ordinary figure, that is, the predetermined number of pieces ( There is a case where the game for winning a common symbol ends when 10 balls enter the second winning hole 640. In this case, a ball wins in the second prize opening 640 during a game with a common symbol, and at the time the game with a common symbol ends, a production corresponding to the waiting period or a special symbol 2 fluctuation period is performed. Since the performance is executed, it is configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 452, the explanation will be continued. When the process of C5207 is finished, it is then determined whether the special figure 1 remaining period (remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation) is larger (longer) than the playing period per regular figure, based on the comparison result of C5207. It is determined whether the timing at which the fluctuation shown in FIG. In the process of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of the special figure 1 is shorter than the playing period per regular figure (C5208: No), the special figure will be released at the time when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the game per regular figure. Since there is a possibility that the 1 variation has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to ON (C5209), and the process moves to C5210.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the remaining period of special figure 1 is longer than the playing period per regular figure, that is, the running special figure 1 variation will not end during the game per regular figure to be executed this time (C5208 : Yes), the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223oc (C5209) is skipped because it is confirmed that the special pattern 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern winning game. Then, the process moves to C5210.

In the process of C5210, a series of performance scenarios during the game per corresponding normal figure are set (C5210), and then the process moves to C5204. In the process of C5204, the medium hit flag is set to ON (C5204), and then the process moves to C5215. Here, to explain in detail the processing contents of C5210 mentioned above, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 remaining period is longer than the playing period per regular symbol (C5208: Yes), the difference period, that is, , calculate the period from the end of the game per regular symbol until the end of the special symbol 1 remaining fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special pattern 2 waiting period, select the scenario per standard pattern to which the special pattern 2 waiting period corresponds from among the standard pattern per scenario tables defined in the series performance scenario table 222oa, and perform the performance. Set the mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the playing period per regular figure (C5208: No), the production mode (series of production Since the effect mode corresponding to the waiting period in 1) is set, the same effect mode as in the 16th embodiment described above is set.

Next, in the process of C5201, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (C5201: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (C5211). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (C5211: Yes), the normal map hit medium flag 223oa is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to off (C5213), and the display ending A command is set (C5214), and then the process moves to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 during command output processing (S4102) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221. will be sent. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, it starts an ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of C5211, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C5211: No), the process moves to the process of C5215. In the process of C5215, processes corresponding to other commands are executed (C5215), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 453, the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4044) will be explained. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4044) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this variable performance setting process 19 (C4044), if the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to on (the game is being played during a series of performances, and the length of the waiting period is not set) The variation production settings of the 16th embodiment described above include the addition of a process for setting a variation production to be executed in case) and the change in the content of the process for setting a variation production of normal symbols. This is different from Process 5 (see FIG. 416), but otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable effect setting process 19 (C4044) is executed, the process of C4101, which is the same as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the 16th embodiment described above, is executed, and the special figure variable effect is not set (normal). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation effect is set (C4101: No), the change effect setting process 19 is executed (C4167), and then this process ends. Details of this variable effect setting process 19 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG. 455.

On the other hand, in the process of C4101, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation effect is to be set (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to on (C4151). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is on (C4151: Yes), a constant monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process moves to C4102. Details of this constant monitoring performance setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 454. On the other hand, in the process of C4151, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to ON, the process of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the process of C4102 to C4116 which is the same as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 416) of the sixteenth embodiment described above is executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be explained. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. This constantly monitored production setting process (C4152) is executed in the variation production setting process 19 (see C4044 in FIG. 453), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to a special symbol variation is received. It is something.

In the constant monitoring production setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation has been received (whether it is the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301), and the process responds to the special figure 1 variation. If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (this is the start of special 1 fluctuation) (C5301: Yes), the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of C3303 of fluctuation pattern command processing 16 (see C3204 in Figure 409) is Based on this, the variation time of the current special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation time) is extracted (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation time is larger (longer) than the regular figure per period (C5303).

In the process of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the process of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the game per regular figure that is being executed (period per regular figure), and the end timing of the special figure 1 variable time is determined as follows. It is determined whether the timing is later than the end timing of the regular pattern winning period. In this embodiment, since the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constant monitoring flag 223oc is set to on, that is, at least during the normal game, C5303 The process will be executed during a game with a normal figure, but if the process of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where a game with a normal figure is not being executed, a game with a normal figure is not being executed. Assuming that there is no state, it may be configured to compare the special pattern 1 variation time and the period per regular pattern using the period "0" per normal pattern.

In the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 fluctuation time is longer than the playing period per regular symbol (the end timing of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the regular symbol game) (C5303: Yes) , Since the special symbol 1 fluctuation does not end during a game with a common symbol, the production mode (performance scenario of a series of productions) during a game with a common symbol is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304), and is constantly monitored. The flag 223oc is set to OFF (C5305), and the process moves to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be explained in detail. First, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the playing period per regular figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per regular figure) (C5303: Yes), the difference Calculate the period, that is, the period from the end of the game per regular symbol until the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and use the calculated period as the waiting period for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) fluctuation (special symbol 2 waiting period) period), and the performance mode is set based on the scenario per regular pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 standby period calculated this time among the scenarios 1 to 3 per standard pattern specified in the series of performance scenario table 222oa. On the other hand, in the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time is not longer than the regular figure winning period (the end timing of the special figure 1 variation is earlier than the end timing of the normal figure winning game), (C5303 :No), even if the current special pattern 1 variation is executed, it is not possible to predict the special pattern 2 waiting period, that is, if the ball enters the second prize opening 640 during the current special pattern 1 variation. If not, even after the special pattern 1 variation to be executed this time ends, the game per normal pattern is still being executed, so it is difficult to determine whether the special pattern 1 variation will be executed during the remaining normal pattern games. Since it is not possible to predict whether the variation shown in FIG. 2 will be executed, the processing in C5304 and C5305 is skipped and the process moves to processing in C5306. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223oc is not set to OFF, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is subsequently executed.

In the 19th embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 447 and 448, a period performance (a series of When performing a production), the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (regular symbol fluctuation start timing, regular symbol per game start timing), and the production is performed based on the prediction result. It is configured to set the mode. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined that prediction is impossible, the constant monitoring production setting process (C4152) is executed to constantly monitor whether special symbol fluctuations will be executed during the regular symbol winning game. It consists of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the performance mode of a series of performances all at once for a range where the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) can be predicted in advance. The processing for setting the performance mode can be simplified. Further, since the process for predicting the content of the next game can be executed at multiple timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Furthermore, if it is not possible to predict the next game content at multiple prediction timings, the system is configured to execute the performance mode of the series of performances based on the actual game content. The mode can be set reliably.

Returning to FIG. 454, the explanation will be continued. In the process of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation has not been received (not the start of the special pattern 1 variation) (C5301: No), then the variation corresponding to the special pattern 2 variation is determined. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (is this the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 variation has been received (this is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306: Yes), because the special pattern 2 fluctuation was executed during the game per regular pattern, as described above with reference to FIG. Set scenario 3 as the production mode of the corresponding series of productions (C5307), set the constant monitoring flag 223oc to off (C5308), set the display special 2 variation command (C5309), and then move to the process of C5310. do.

In addition, the process of C5307 mentioned above is a case where a series of effects are executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first prediction process is executed at the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, and the first prediction process is executed at the normal pattern game start timing. It is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period in any of the second prediction processes, and the special figure 2 variation is executed during the period when the constant monitoring effect setting process is executed during the regular figure winning game. This is done when there is a problem. That is, this is a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, the production mode corresponding to the special figure 2 variation period is set in the process of C5307. Therefore, even if it is not possible to predict the next game content at multiple prediction timings, the performance mode of the series of performances is executed based on the actual game content. It is possible to reliably set the performance mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5306, if it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: No), the process moves to the process of C5310. In the process of C5310, processes corresponding to other commands are executed (C5310), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4167) will be explained. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 19 (C4167) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. This fluctuating performance setting process 19 (C4167) is a series of performance prediction setting process (C4167) for predicting the subsequent game content and setting a series of performances when the conditions for executing a series of performances of regular pattern variations are established. This process is different from the ordinary figure effect setting process (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above in that it executes the 1 prediction process). Since the other contents are the same as the ordinary figure effect setting process (see FIG. 417) of the 16th embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the variable effect setting process 19 (C4167), first, the processes of C4201 to C4206 which are the same as the normal figure effect setting process of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 417) are executed, and in the process of C4206, a pseudo series effect is executed. If it is determined that the flag 223lj is off (C4206: No), a series of effects prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process moves to C4208. Details of this series performance prediction setting process (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 456. Next, after executing the same process of C4208 to C4212 as the normal pattern effect setting process of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 417), the non-fluctuation winning flag 223lm is set to OFF (C4252), and then the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) will be explained. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the nineteenth embodiment. In this series effect prediction setting process (C4251), the future game content (special figure 2 standby period) is predicted (first prediction) at the start of regular figure fluctuation, and a series of effects are predicted based on the prediction result (first prediction result). A process is executed to set the production mode during the period in which the production is executed, and the length of the special map 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result, and the length of the waiting period for special figure 2 is predicted, and when it cannot be predicted. , processing for setting presentation modes for different periods of the period in which a series of presentations is performed is executed.

In the series performance prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether the current normal pattern fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (C5401). If it is determined that the current normal figure variation is not a winning variation (C5401: No), the conditions for executing the series of effects are not satisfied, and thus the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current regular pattern variation is a winning variation (C5401: Yes), the value of the special pattern variation time counter (special pattern 1 variation time counter) 223ln is read out (C5402), and the special pattern variation time counter It is determined whether the value of 223ln is greater than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223ln is 0, that is, the current time is not in the state of special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: No), this process is ended as it is. In other words, in this embodiment, the conditions for executing a series of effects when the fluctuation per normal symbol is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. , low probability state of normal symbols), the current normal symbol variation time is 30 seconds or more, the series production counter 223ga is set to OFF, the non-variation winning flag 223lm is set to OFF, and the pseudo series Even if the production flag 223lj is set to OFF and the condition that is satisfied when the current normal pattern fluctuation is a normal pattern fluctuation as shown in FIG. 456 is satisfied, If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time this process is executed, the series of effects is not executed (set).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set whether or not to execute a series of effects that can be executed based on the variation per ordinary symbol depending on the execution status of the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation). It is possible to prevent a player who is playing a right-handed game and playing a game in which only normal pattern fluctuations are performed from performing a series of effects.

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln is larger than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223ln The special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is calculated based on (C5404), and the current regular figure fluctuation time and the playing time per regular figure to be executed after the end of the current regular figure variation are extracted and summed (C5405). In the process of C5405, by adding up the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern per game period, the period from the current moment (normal pattern fluctuation start time) until the normal pattern game ends (normal pattern per end period) Processing for calculating is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time calculated in the process of C5404 and the total time (total time per regular figure) calculated in the process of C5405 are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time. It is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is larger (longer) than the total time per regular pattern (C5407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining variation time is larger (longer) than the total time per regular figure (C5407: Yes), the game per common figure ends before the running special figure 1 variation ends. Therefore, it is possible to predict the waiting period for the special symbol 2 when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 during a regular symbol winning game. Therefore, with reference to the series performance scenario table 223ha, a scenario per regular pattern is set based on the difference time (special pattern 2 waiting period) between the remaining fluctuation time of special pattern 1 and the total time per general pattern (C5408), and then the main pattern is set. Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of C5407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the total time per regular figure (C5407: No), the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period and the length are predicted at the present time. Since it is not possible to do so, scenario 4 is set for normal map (C5409), and then this process is ended.

As explained above, in the present 19th embodiment, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, and based on the prediction result. The present invention is configured to set the mode of performance of a series of performances corresponding to fluctuations in the general figure. In other words, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to be executed this time, the general pattern lottery result, and the playing time (maximum time) of the game per normal pattern are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the special symbol 1 variation currently being executed during a game with a common symbol will end, and to set the performance mode of a series of effects corresponding to the common symbol variation based on the determination result. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the end timing of the variation of the special figure 1 variation being executed is later than the period in which a ball can win in the second winning hole 640, that is, the playing period (maximum period) per regular figure. In this case, it becomes possible to predict the timing (length of waiting period) at which the special figure 2 variation can be executed at the time when the regular figure variation is executed. As a result, it is possible to set performance modes based on the length of the standby period as various performance modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the sixteenth embodiment described above, it is possible to lengthen the variably settable period of the production mode of the series of productions depending on the length of the waiting period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the short opening game (the closing period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds and the opening period is 0.1 seconds) is performed as a game per normal pattern. ) and long opening game (closed period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, first opening period is 1 second, closing period (waiting period) is 1.5 seconds, second opening period is 0.5 seconds) Since it is configured to be executable, in the first prediction process (series performance prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 456)) executed when the general pattern changes, it is determined that the winning result is determined by the current general pattern fluctuation. It may be configured to determine the winning type per common symbol and set the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which a ball can enter the second winning hole 640) based on the determination result. In addition, the aspect of the prediction range corresponding to the type of per-regular symbol determined this time (the length and timing of the period in which the ball can be won in the second winning hole 640), that is, the game mode of the game per the regular symbol to be executed. Based on this, the ease with which a ball enters the second winning hole 640 during a game with a normal figure is determined, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball enters the second winning hole 640, If it is not possible to predict the period until the special drawing 2 variation based on the winning is executed, the winning difficulty determining means is used to determine the ease of winning the ball into the second winning opening 640. Based on the determination result, it may be configured to set the performance mode during the regular pattern fluctuation period.

Specifically, the winning difficulty level determining means determines that the winning difficulty level is low (by playing the game normally, it is possible to win the ball into the second winning opening 640). When the type of per-regular pattern (for example, per-private pattern A (see Figure 382(b))) corresponding to the per-private pattern long open per game) is set, as the performance mode set during the variable period of the standard pattern , a performance mode is set that allows easy transition to the next performance mode that is set as a series of productions, and the difficulty level of winning a prize is high (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to land a ball in the second prize opening 640). When a normal pattern winning type (for example, normal pattern winning B (see FIG. 382(b))) corresponding to a normal pattern winning game (for example, a normal pattern short open winning game) that is determined as As the performance mode set during the figure fluctuation period, it is preferable to set a performance mode that suggests the end of a series of performances (a performance mode that makes it difficult to move to the next performance mode set as a series of performances). . In this way, in the case where the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of executing the first prediction process, the performance mode of the performance to be executed during the regular pattern fluctuation period is varied based on the type of the game per regular pattern to be executed. As a result, at the point when the normal pattern fluctuation starts, it is possible to have the player predict whether or not it is likely that a jackpot game will be executed using the current general pattern fluctuation as an opportunity, so the first prediction process is executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance performed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing.

In addition, it supports games that are determined to have a high winning difficulty level (it is difficult to land a ball in the second winning slot 640 even if the game is played normally) (for example, games that hit short open winnings). In the case that the type of per-common symbol (for example, per-common symbol B (see FIG. 382(b))) is set, the production mode corresponding to the series of productions may not be set. With this configuration, it is not possible to win a ball into the second prize opening 640 during a game with a regular figure, and games for a jackpot game (special figure 2 variation, small winning, small winning game) It is possible to prevent a series of performances from being executed when it is difficult to proceed. In this case, when it is determined that a ball has won a prize in the second prize opening 640 during a game with a high winning difficulty level, it is preferable to configure a series of effects to be executed from the winning timing. If the length of the waiting period (the period until the special pattern 2 variation based on the current winning is executed) at the time when the ball enters the 2 winning hole 640 is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or more), It is preferable to use a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 to set the performance mode that is normally set during the regular pattern fluctuation period.

In this way, when a game with a high winning difficulty is executed, the start timing of the series of performances is not the timing when the fluctuation of the general symbols starts, but the timing when the ball wins in the second prize opening 640. It is possible to suppress the frequency that a series of performances ends in the middle of the series of performances even though the series of performances has been executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which one type of winning a common symbol corresponding to a game winning a common symbol with a low difficulty of winning a prize is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of winning a common symbol corresponding to a game winning a common symbol having a low difficulty of winning a prize is provided. It may be configured such that multiple types of winning patterns can be set, and the game mode of the game playing a winning pattern executed corresponding to each type of winning pattern may be different, for example, it corresponds to a game playing a winning pattern with a low difficulty of winning a prize. The system is configured such that at least a per-regular pattern type α and a per-regular pattern type β can be set as the per-regular pattern types to be played, and a game mode of a game per standard pattern (game α per standard pattern) corresponding to the type α per standard pattern. As a result, a game mode with a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an open period of 3 seconds is set, and a closing period of 0.1 seconds is set as a game mode of a game per ordinary figure (game per ordinary figure β) corresponding to the type β per ordinary figure. , a first open period of 0.1 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (2.9 seconds) may be set.

In this case, when a game with a low winning difficulty is executed, the period during which it is easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole 640 differs depending on the set type of winning, so the fluctuation starts. In the first prediction process executed at the timing, a period in which a ball is likely to win in the second winning hole 640 is determined based on the type per normal symbol, and is executed in the first prediction process based on the determination result of the determination means. It is preferable to configure the prediction range to be different. Specifically, when the above-mentioned game α per regular symbol is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is set from 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per regular symbol ( When the game β per normal figure is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is set based on the range of opening period) from 3.3 seconds to 6.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal figure. It is preferable to configure the setting based on the range of seconds (range of the second open period).

In this way, the prediction executed in the first prediction process is performed by associating and setting the range to be predicted based on the game mode (difficulty level of winning, setting timing of winning possible period) of the game per common symbol to be executed. It becomes possible to narrow the range of This makes it easier to predict the waiting period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a series of performances and enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, it is configured to be able to set the per-regular pattern type γ as the per-regular pattern type corresponding to the per-regular pattern game with a low winning difficulty level, and the game of the per-regular pattern game (game per standard pattern γ) corresponding to the per-regular pattern type γ. If the game mode is configured to set a closing period of 0.1 seconds, a first opening period of 1.5 seconds, a closing period (waiting period) of 3 seconds, and a second opening period (1.5 seconds), That is, when a game with a common symbol is executed in which a plurality of open periods in which a ball can be won in the second winning hole 640 are set, in the first prediction process, first, the game corresponding to the second open period that will be set later is executed. Compare the range to be executed and the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special chart 1 fluctuation that is being executed, and determine whether the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) of the special chart 1 fluctuation is after the second opening period. , If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation (remaining variation period) is later than the end timing of the second open period, the special figure that is being executed from the end timing of the second open period The waiting period is configured to be set until the end timing of the 1 variation, and on the other hand, it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period (remaining variation period) of the special drawing 1 variation is before the end timing of the second open period. If so, then the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) and the range corresponding to the first open period are compared.

If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first open period is earlier than the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation (remaining variable period), the special figure that is being executed from the end timing of the first open period The waiting period is configured to be set until the end timing of one fluctuation, and on the other hand, if it is determined that the elapsed timing of the first open period is later than the elapsed timing of the first open period, that is, the waiting period is set as the waiting period. If the running special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed before the 1 release period elapses, it is assumed that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process, and the above-mentioned second prediction process is executed. It is best to configure it like this.

<Twentieth embodiment>
Next, the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 457 to 466. The 20th embodiment differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that the control processing for the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state is different.

In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state, the lottery result of the variation, and the special figure 2 variation executed after the variation (when the time saving state ends, the normal It was configured to suggest the preliminary determination result for the special figure 2 variation executed in the state where the state is set. By configuring in this way, when a winning result (big hit, small win) is won by the special figure 2 variation executed after the time saving state ends, it becomes possible to indicate this in the final variation performance.

The 20th embodiment differs from the 16th embodiment described above in that the processing for setting the performance mode of the final variation performance is explained in detail. Specifically, when executing the final variation in the time saving state, the final variation performance is performed based on the lottery result of the variation and the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc). It is configured to set the mode.

Further, when the final variation in the time saving state is a missed variation, the production period of the final variation production is configured to be set based on the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc). There is. In other words, if the final variation in the time saving state is a missed variation, after the end of the variation, the next special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed during the normal state) that is the target of the final variation effect will be executed. Therefore, if the final variation of the time-saving state is a missed variation, at the start timing of the final variation of the time-saving state, the change period of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 pending is determined in advance. It is configured to set the performance mode (final variation performance).

<About the electrical configuration of the 20th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 20th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 457 to 461. The 20th embodiment is different from the 16th embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and other than that, the 20th embodiment is the same. It is. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 457(a). FIG. 457(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 457(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment has the final variation effect table 222pa and The difference is that a final performance variable setting table 222pb is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The final variation production table 222pa is a data table that is referred to when setting the production mode of the final variation production, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. It is something that will be done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa will be explained with reference to FIGS. 458 and 459.

FIG. 458(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 458(a), the final variation effect table 222pa is the final winning table 222pa1 that is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a win, and the final table for winning 222pa1 that is referenced when the lottery result of the variation is a loss. It has a final table 222ib2 for removal.

Here, the performance period in the final variation performance will be explained. In the 20th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above, a "waiting period", "first period", "second period", and "third period" are formed as the production period of the final variation production. It is configured so that the presentation mode can be set for each period. In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (time-saving final variation), a production mode (standby production) for notifying that the final variation production will start is set in the "waiting period", and " In the 1st period, a performance mode (acquisition performance) for acquiring a large number of special drawings 2 reservations is set, and in the 2nd period, the lottery results of the fluctuation and the pre-reading results of special drawings 2 reservations are suggested. A presentation mode (mission presentation) for showing the presentation result of the mission presentation was set, and a presentation form (result presentation) for showing the presentation result of the mission presentation was set in the "third period".

Furthermore, the configuration is configured to determine whether to perform an acquisition performance or a mission performance as a performance performed during the "first period" based on the number of reserved balls of special map 2 at the time of the lapse of the "waiting period". However, if the number of special map 2 reserved balls at the end of the "waiting period" is a predetermined number or more (if the upper limit number (4)), the mission effect is executed in the "first period". Ta.

On the other hand, in the present 20th embodiment, the performance mode of the final variation performance is configured to be set based on the number of special figure 2 pending balls at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed. This embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that Also, it differs from the 16th embodiment described above in that the production mode of the final variation production that is set at the timing when the time-saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different based on the lottery result of the variation. are doing. Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that a plurality of timings are provided for setting the presentation mode of the final variation presentation.

First, with reference to FIG. 458(b), the contents stipulated in the winning final table 222pa1 included in the final variation effect table 222pa will be explained. FIG. 458(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the winning final table 222pa1. As shown in FIG. 458(b), the winning final table 222pa1 includes the following information according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc (special symbol 2 reserved ball number) and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf. The performance mode set for each performance period of the final variation performance is defined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223lc is "0" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 169", the performance pattern A is used as the performance pattern of the final variation performance. In the range of "170 to 189", production pattern B is defined as the production pattern of the final variation production, and in the range of "190 to 198", production pattern C is defined as the production pattern of the final variation production. ing. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223lc is "1, 2" and the value of the obtained performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 169", the performance pattern A is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance. In the range of "170 to 198", performance pattern B is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance. Furthermore, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc is "3" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 109", performance pattern A is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance, In the range "110 to 198", performance pattern B is defined as the performance pattern of the final variation performance.

Here, detailed contents of various performance patterns defined in the final winning table 222pa1 will be explained. Effect pattern A is one in which the final variation effect similar to the sixteenth embodiment described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. In the waiting period (0th period) to be executed, "standby effect (effect a)", which is a presentation mode to indicate that the final variation effect will be executed, is set, and in the first period after the waiting period has passed, , "Acquisition performance (performance b)" is set, which is a performance mode for guiding the player on a gaming method that allows the player to execute the subsequent game advantageously (to obtain special drawing 2 reservation), and during the first period. In the second period after the period has passed, the lottery results of the symbols that are subject to the final variation effect (the lottery results of the special pattern 2 variation that will be the time-saving final variation, the pre-read results for the special pattern 2 pending that has been obtained at the moment) "Mission production (production c)", which is a production mode for suggesting, is set, and in the third period after the second period has passed, the "mission production (production c)" executed during the second period is set. A "result performance (performance d)" which is a performance mode for indicating the performance result (lottery result) is set.

Performance pattern B is a performance pattern that is set when the time-saving final fluctuation has been won (big hit, small win), and is a performance to notify the player that he or she has won as a final fluctuation performance. The mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

Performance pattern C is a performance mode that is set when the number of reserved special figures 2 when setting the final variation performance is less than or equal to a predetermined number (0), and is a performance mode that is set during the waiting period ( ``Standby effect (a)'' is set in the 0th period). When this performance pattern C is set, after the standby period (0th period) ends, the performance mode of the final variation performance (the performance mode executed in each of the 1st period to the 3rd period) is set again. It is configured such that the process (final effect variable process) is executed.

The details of this final effect variable processing will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of reserved special drawings 2 acquired during the waiting period (0th period), and the number of special drawings 2 held at the end of the waiting period (0th period) Processing is executed to set different production modes in each of the first to third periods according to the number of special figures 2 reserved.

As explained above, in the 20th embodiment, in contrast to the setting method of the final variation effect in the 16th embodiment described above, the final variation effect is set at the time of setting the final variation effect (at the start of the time saving final variation). It is configured to set the performance mode, and the lottery result (pre-reading result) that is the target of the final variation performance is determined by the lottery result of the variation and when the final variation performance is set (at the start of the time-saving final variation). ) is different from the pre-read result of the reserved special drawing 2 that has already been obtained.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, so that the time saving final variation is executed. It becomes possible to add variety to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, which is executed before the game ends (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when changing the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed. It is good to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired at the time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the number of special drawings 2 pending becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. Can be done.

The above-mentioned final table for winning 222pa1 is a data table that is referred to when the variation (time-saving final variation) is a winning result, so the final variation effect that is set by referring to the final table for winning 222pa1 is executed. The period corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the short-term final fluctuation. That is, after the final variation effect set with reference to the final winning table 222pa1 is completed, a winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, if the short time final fluctuation is won, the final fluctuation will be changed in accordance with the fluctuation time of the said fluctuation without considering the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 fluctuation that is executed based on the special drawing 2 reservation. Since the performance mode of the performance can be set all at once, the processing for setting the performance mode can be simplified.

As described above, the winning final table 222pa1 used in the 20th embodiment is designed so that the smaller the special symbol 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc), the easier it is to select the production pattern C. stipulated. In other words, the smaller the number of special drawings 2 on hold at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, the more the number of special drawings 2 holding that can be obtained during the waiting period (0th period) can be increased. ) The performance pattern C is configured to be easily selected in which the performance mode can be variably set according to the number of reserved special drawings 2 obtained during the period. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reserved special figures 2 is small, it becomes possible to execute a different final variation effect.

Further, it is stipulated that the larger the special symbol 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc), the easier it is to select performance pattern B as the final variable performance. With this configuration, when the time-saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of reserved special drawings 2 is large, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special effect 1 indicating that the winning result has been won. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play a game to acquire the number of reserved special drawings 2, and the performance of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the contents of the final table for losing 222ib2 included in the final variation effect table 222pa will be explained. FIG. 459 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table for removal 222ib2. This final table for losing 222ib2 is a data table that is referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation, which is the time-saving final variation, is a loss. This is used to set the production mode of the final variation production whose production period is the period including the variation time of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the hold.

In the 20th embodiment, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, by using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation), the lottery result of the variation and the execution after the variation are determined. It is configured to suggest the preliminary determination result for the special figure 2 variation (the special figure 2 variation executed in a state where the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set). If the lottery result of the time-saving final fluctuation is a winning result (big hit, small win), the winning game will be executed after the end of the fluctuation, so the final fluctuation performance will be held during the period corresponding to the fluctuation period of the fluctuation. configured to run.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a loss, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 pending stored after the end of the variation is executed. In this embodiment, the final variation effect is executed including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation which is stored on hold at the time when the time saving final variation ends.

As shown in FIG. 459, the final table for losing 222ib2 includes the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223lc), the pre-reading result for the special symbol 2 reserved, and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf. The performance mode of the final variation performance is defined according to . In addition, as the performance period in which the final fluctuation performance is executed, the fluctuation period of the time-saving final fluctuation and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) end, and the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) ends. The fluctuation period of the special pattern 2 variation (the special pattern 2 variation corresponding to the special pattern 2 reservation acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state, low probability state of normal symbols) is defined.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the production mode of the final variation effect is also set for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is executed corresponding to the number of reserved special figure 2 variations that have already been obtained. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the performance mode of the performance (final variation performance) that is executed across multiple special figure variations (special figure 2 variation) at once, so each special figure variation Compared to the case where the performance mode of the final variation performance is set every time the process is executed, the processing for setting the performance mode can be simplified.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the case where there is winning information indicating a winning in the special drawing 2 pending that has been acquired at the time of setting the production mode of the final variation production (if the pre-read result is a winning), The content of the execution of the acquisition performance (whether or not it is executed, the period of execution) that is executed during the final variable performance is configured to be different depending on whether there is no winning information indicating a win (the pre-read result is a loss) or not. Therefore, if there is winning information indicating a win in the reserved special drawing 2 that has been won (if the pre-read result is a win), the winning performance is more difficult to execute than in other cases. Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is shortened.

With this configuration, the player can predict the result of pre-reading the special figure 2 pending according to the performance mode of the variable performance executed as the final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, if the time saving state can end, that is, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the time saving final variation is a missed variation, and the pre-reading result of the acquired special figure 2 pending at the time the time saving final variation is executed. In the state of losing, the production mode (acquisition production (production b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state) executed after the time saving state ends, other than that. It is possible to emphasize this more than in the case of . Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the advantageous game is executed after the time saving state ends.

Here, to specifically explain the contents stipulated in the final table 222ib2 for misses with reference to FIG. , when the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 159", "performance a" is set in the standby period, "performance b" is set in the first period, and "performance c" is set in the second period. The performance data is specified. In addition, if the special symbol 2 pending number (the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223lc) is 0 and the obtained value of the production counter 223lf is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period and the Effect data is defined in which “effect b” is set for one period and “effect c” is set for a second period. Further, when the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "180 to 198", performance data is defined in which "performance a" is set in the standby period.

In addition, in the final table for failure 222ib2, the effect mode to be executed in the final effect period of the final variation effect at the present moment is not set (in FIG. 459, "○" is displayed as the display mode indicating that it is not set). It is composed of In other words, if the special drawing lottery results (read-ahead results) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation do not include a hit, the special drawing 2 corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation obtained after the execution timing of the time-saving final variation The variation may be executed after the special figure 2 variation that is the target of the pre-reading process at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation.

In this way, when it is necessary to vary the performance result (performance mode) of the final fluctuation performance based on the lottery result of the special symbol fluctuation that can be executed during the period from the execution of the final fluctuation performance until the end of the final fluctuation performance. The present invention is configured such that the production mode of the final variation production can be variably set even at timings other than the execution timing of the time saving final variation. Therefore, the final variation performance can be executed in various performance modes.

Returning to FIG. 459, the explanation will be continued. If the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223lc) is 1, and the special symbol 2 reserved contains winning information indicating a hit and win, and it is "there is a hit in the reserved", that is, , the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time-saving state) is a missed variation, and the next special figure 2 variation to be executed (the first special figure 2 variation executed after the normal state is set) ) is a winning variation, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "performance a" will be in the waiting period and "performance b" will be in the first period. , in the second period, "effect c" is applied, in the third period, and in the variation period (1) of the first special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 1) after the normal state is set. Performance data in which "performance d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special pattern 2 pending number (the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223lc) is 1, and the special pattern 2 pending does not contain winning information indicating a winning, so it is "no winning in pending". In other words, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time-saving state) is a missed variation, and the next to be executed special figure 2 variation (the first feature to be executed after the normal state is set) If the variation in Figure 2) also becomes an off variation, if the value of the obtained production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "production a" is set during the standby period and "performance b" is set during the first period. , "Continuous performance (effect f)" is set, which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the display of the effect of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The performance data to be used is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continuation performance" is a performance mode that is displayed after the mission performance (see FIG. 374(b)) is executed, and is a performance mode that shows the performance results of the mission performance (see FIG. 375(b)). (see a)), that is, this is the performance mode that is executed when the period until the result performance (performance d) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is extended.

Although detailed descriptions of the display contents will be omitted, for example, when the presentation mode shown in FIG. By reducing the speed, you can extend the period showing the process until the performance result (success or failure) of the mission performance that is being executed is displayed, or the mission performance can continue as the performance result of the mission performance that is currently being executed ( The system is configured so that a display mode (for example, the words "Continue!") is displayed to indicate that the second mission performance will be executed, and multiple mission performances can be performed in one final variation performance. A performance mode is set in which a pseudo-result display performance that temporarily displays a display mode suggesting a performance result different from the actual performance result is executed as a performance result of the mission performance.

In this way, by configuring to execute the "continuation effect" as the final variation effect, for example, after the final variation effect is executed, special drawing 2 hold is obtained, and the execution period of the final variation effect that is currently being executed is To extend the performance period of a final variation performance without giving a player a sense of discomfort when extending the final variation performance.

Next, the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223lc) is 2, and the winning information indicating that the special symbol 2 reserved is a hit is included (win in the reserved is "yes"). If so, that is, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a missed variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the two acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a winning variation, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "performance a" is applied during the waiting period, "performance b" is performed during the first period, and "Production C" is in the 2nd period, and in the 3rd period, and the variation period (1) of the 1st special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 1) after the normal state is set. Production data in which "effect d" is set during the period until the winning variation ends during the variation period (2) of the special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 2) of the second time is specified. ing.

On the other hand, the special pattern 2 pending number (the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223lc) is 2, and the special pattern 2 pending does not contain winning information indicating a winning, so it is "no winning in pending". In other words, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time-saving state) is a missed variation, and the next to be executed special figure 2 variation (the first feature to be executed after the normal state is set) If the variation in Figure 2) also becomes an off variation, if the value of the obtained production counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 189", "production a" is set during the standby period and "performance b" is set during the first period. , "Continuous performance (effect f)" is set, which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the display of the effect of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period. The performance data to be used is specified.

Next, the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223lc) is 3, and the special symbol 2 reserved contains winning information indicating that it won and won (hit "yes" in the reserved). In this case, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a winning variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the three acquired special figure 2 reservations is In the case of a winning variation, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "performance a" is applied during the waiting period, "performance b" is performed during the first period, and A production in which "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period, and during the period until the winning variation ends among the 1st variable period, 2nd variable period, and 3rd variable period. Data is specified.

In addition, when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223lc) is 3, and the special symbol 2 reserved does not contain winning information indicating winning (hit in the reserved "None") In other words, when the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a losing variation, and the special figure 2 variations corresponding to the three acquired special figure 2 reservations are all losing variations. Here, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), performance data is defined in which "performance a" is set in the standby period.

Returning to FIG. 457(a), the explanation will be continued. The final performance variable setting table 222pb is a data table used to select the performance mode of the final variation performance to be executed in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), When setting using the final variation production table 222pa, if there is a production period for which the production mode has not been set (an unset period), the production mode is set for the unset period while the final variation production is being executed. It is used for this purpose. Specifically, in the final variable performance update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), it is determined that the standby period (0th period) has ended (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes), and the performance variable flag 223pc is set to ON. When it is determined that the performance mode is set (C4864: Yes in FIG. 466), that is, when there is a performance period (unset period) in which the performance mode has not been set, it is referenced (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222pb will be explained with reference to FIGS. 460 and 461. FIG. 460(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final performance variable setting table 222pb. As shown in FIG. 460(a), the final production variable setting table 222pb includes the winning setting table 222pb1, which is referred to when the special figure 2 variation (time-saving final variation) being executed is a winning variation, and It has a setting table 222pb2 for failure that is referred to when the special figure 2 variation (time-saving final variation) is a deviation variation, and according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation (time-saving final variation) that is being executed. , so that different presentation modes can be set. In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, the elements that are referenced when setting the production mode are different depending on whether the lottery result of the special drawing 2 variation (time-saving final variation) that is being executed is a win or a loss. It's set.

With this configuration, the performance mode set as the final variable performance can be set in accordance with the actual game content (the special drawing lottery result and the increase in the number of reserved balls), so the player It is possible to arouse interest in the presentation content of the final variation presentation performed on the subject.

Next, with reference to FIG. 460(b), the contents of the winning setting table 222pb1 will be explained. FIG. 460(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning setting table 222pb1. As shown in FIG. 460(b), the winning setting table 222pb1 is based on the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa, that is, during the period from the execution of the final fluctuation performance until the end of the waiting period (0th period). Different production modes are defined based on the obtained number of reserved special figures 2 and the obtained value of the production counter 223lf.

Specifically, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "0, 1" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 198", "performance b", It is specified that "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period. In addition, without setting a new performance mode for the period in which the production mode has already been set when the final variation production is executed, it is possible to set a new production mode for the period in which the production mode has not been set when the final variation production is executed (Fig. The presentation mode is set by referring to this table only for the period indicated by "○" in 458(b).

Next, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "2" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 149", "performance b" is used in the first period, and "performance b" is used in the second period. If it is specified that "effect c" and "effect d" be set in the third period, and the range is from 150 to 198, then the "Special performance 2 (performance g)" is set, which is a high expectation notification mode to indicate that the performance result of the final variation performance is highly likely to be a performance result indicating a winning of the special symbol (special symbol 2). It is stipulated to do so.

The above-mentioned "special performance 2 (performance g)" is a performance mode in which a performance different from the mission performance (see FIG. 374(b)), which is normally performed as a final variation performance, is performed, and a detailed explanation is given below. As will be described later, the selection ratio is defined so that the performance result of the current final variation performance is more likely to be a performance result indicating a win than when the mission performance is executed.

A detailed explanation of the display contents of this "special effect 2" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will become dark, and the effect will indicate a winning result. A certain winning display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a winning display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is the effect of a winning result, are displayed, and are not displayed until the end. A performance is executed in which the display mode is the performance result of the final variation performance. In this way, by notifying players in an easy-to-understand manner that a performance different from normal will be executed immediately after the waiting period ends, the performance that will be executed while making the players expect to win is made easier. You can make them pay close attention.

Note that the production content of "Special Production 2" is not limited to the above-mentioned content; for example, according to the example shown in FIG. , a character that is not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character imitating a whale) may be configured so that a different mission effect than usual is executed, or the same ally character (851a~ 851d) may be used to execute an effect in which a special mission is executed.

With this configuration, the image data used in the normal mission performance can be used as part of the image data for the performance executed as "special performance 2", so the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can be reduced.

Next, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "3" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 119", "performance b" is used in the first period, and "performance b" is used in the second period. It is specified that "effect c" and "effect d" are set in the third period, and if the range is from 120 to 198, "effect g" is set in the first period, second period, and third period. It is specified that the

Finally, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is "4" and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 149", then " If it is specified to set "effect g" and is in the range of "150 to 198", the effect result of the final variation effect being executed will be set as a special symbol ( It is prescribed to set "special performance 3 (performance h)" which is a confirmed notification mode for notifying that the performance result is a winning result of special drawing 2).

The above-mentioned "special performance 3 (performance h)" is a performance that is different from the mission performance (see FIG. 374(b)) which is normally performed as a final variation performance, and is a time-saving final variation ( It is executed only when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation) is a hit. A detailed explanation of the display contents of this "special effect 3" will be omitted, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will become dark, and the effect will indicate a winning result. An effect is executed in which a certain winning display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") is displayed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period for the final variation performance ends, the player can be informed of the winning game, thereby making the player mentally prepare for the winning game. In addition, by making the display mode at the start of special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of special effect 3 the same (a mode in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)), the player On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the current final variation performance is special performance 2 or special performance 3. Thereby, the player watches the final variation effect while expecting that the special effect 3 will be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the 20th embodiment, as a benefit given to the player when the performance corresponding to special performance 3 is executed, the performance result of the final variation performance is notified at a time before the final variation performance ends. Although it is configured to give benefits, it may be configured to give other benefits, for example, based on the pre-read result of acquired special drawing 2 pending at the timing when special effect 3 is set. It may be configured such that a bonus is given to the player to notify him of the number of times he wins. Specifically, if there are two special drawings 2 holdings among the four special drawings 2 holdings in which the pre-reading result is a winning result, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is becomes dark, and a performance is executed in which a plurality of winning display modes (display modes imitating the letter "V"), which are the production results indicating a win, are displayed, and finally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured such that the number of displayed winning display modes indicates the number of winnings. In this way, as a special performance (special performance 3) that is executed when special performance conditions are met, the first benefit (notification of winning) is given to the player based on the execution of the special performance. However, by making it possible to grant a second benefit (notification of the number of wins) that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit, even after the first benefit is granted, It is possible to make the player interested in the content of the special performance (special performance 3) executed for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, refer to FIG. 461. The contents of the setting table 222pb2 for deviation will be explained. FIG. 461 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the removal setting table 222pb2. This setting table for deviation 222pb2 is used when setting the final variation effect to be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state, when the final table for deviation 222ib2 is used (see C4364 in FIG. 465). ) is a data table used to set a presentation mode for an unset period (period indicated by "○" in FIG. 459) in which no presentation mode is set, and is a data table used for setting a presentation mode in the final variation presentation update process 20 (FIG. 466). (see C4566 in FIG. 466), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (0th period) (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes) (see C4865 in FIG. 466).

As shown in FIG. 461, the losing setting table 222pb2 includes the value of the held pitch increase counter 223ia (the number of special chart 2 held balls acquired during the waiting period) and whether or not there is an additional hit (the number of held balls acquired during the waiting period). It is set for each performance period of the final variable performance based on the setting status of the reservation upper limit flag 223ls, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf. The performance mode is specified.

In addition, when setting the final variation performance to be executed in response to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) using the final table for losing 222ib2 (see C4364 in FIG. 465), the production mode has already been set. It is configured such that a new performance mode is not set for the current performance period, and the performance mode is set only for the unset period by referring to the set table for failure 222pb2.

Next, the contents defined in the setting table 222pb2 for deviation will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 461. First, if the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "0", that is, if no new special chart 2 hold is acquired during the waiting period, the presence or absence of additional hits and the setting status of the hold upper limit flag 223ls Regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, various performance modes are set such that "performance b" is set in the first period, "performance c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period to the fourth period. is stipulated. In other words, since there is no change in the number of reserved special drawings 2 from the time when the final fluctuation effect is started, the final result effect (effect d) is an effect that indicates a loss, without setting a special effect mode. The result is set.

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "1", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to on, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of reservations is 3 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 holding (3 pieces) are all wins, if the pre-reading result of the newly acquired special drawing 2 holding during the waiting period is a win. , When the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 169", various performances are set such that "performance c" is set for the first and second periods, and "performance d" is set for the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done. By configuring this way, unnecessary effects are created for the player (an acquisition effect that forces players to perform a game that allows them to acquire special drawings 2 even though the number of special drawings 2 held has reached the upper limit). This can be prevented from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful of the content of the performance being executed, and from reducing the performance effect. Furthermore, when the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "170 to 198", various performance modes are defined such that "performance g" is set in the first period, second period, and third to fourth periods. ing.

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first Various performance modes are defined such that "effect b" is set for the period, "effect c" is set for the second period, and "effect d" is set for the third period to the fourth period. In other words, if one new special figure 2 reservation is acquired with respect to the time when the final variation performance is started, and the look-ahead result of that special figure 2 reservation is incorrect, a special performance mode should be set. Instead, a performance result indicating a loss is set as the final result performance (performance d).

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to on, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number of reservations is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out of order, at least If the look-ahead result of any special figure 2 pending is a hit, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, "effect c" will be applied in the 1st and 2nd periods, and ``effect c'' will be applied in the 3rd to 4th periods. Various performance modes are defined so as to set "d". That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

By configuring this way, unnecessary effects are created for the player (an acquisition effect that forces players to perform a game that allows them to acquire special drawings 2 even though the number of special drawings 2 held has reached the upper limit). This can be prevented from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust in the content of the performance being performed and from reducing the performance effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, special figure 2 hold at the start of the final variation effect. In a state where the number is 2 and the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all wrong, the pre-reading results of the 2 newly acquired special drawing 2 reservations during the waiting period are also wrong. In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, various performance modes are specified such that "performance c" is set for the first period and the second period, and "performance d" is set for the third to fourth periods. There is. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF, that is, if the special value obtained during the standby period of the final variation effect In a state where the pre-reading results of the two reserved (2 pieces) in Figure 2 are all out, the pre-reading results of the two newly acquired special drawings 2 pending during the waiting period are also out, and furthermore, the current special drawing 2 pending results are also out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, "performance b" will be used in the first period, "performance c" will be used in the second period, and in the third to fourth periods. Various performance modes are defined such that "performance d" is set for. That is, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF at the end of the waiting period, an acquisition performance (performance b) is performed to allow the player to newly acquire the special map 2 reservation using the first period. is configured to run.

Next, when the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to on, the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is "0~ In the range of ``109'', various performance modes are defined such that ``effect c'' is set for the first period and second period, and ``effect d'' is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, the configuration is such that when the waiting period ends, the acquisition performance (performance b) is executed even though the suspension upper limit flag 223ls is set to on. In this way, when a performance result indicating a hit is displayed as a performance result of the final variation performance, the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to on, that is, no more new special drawing 2 reservations are acquired. By configuring the system so that the acquisition performance is executed intentionally even in a state where the acquisition performance is not possible, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the performance mode to be executed.

In addition, in the present 20th embodiment, only when the performance result of the final variation performance is a performance result indicating a win, the above-mentioned performance (despite the pending upper limit flag 223ls being set to ON, the acquisition performance ( Since the configuration is such that the performance b) is executed, the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed are different. , it is possible to notify that the performance result of the final variation performance is a performance result indicating a winning. Therefore, the player can pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to on, the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is "110 to 198". ”, various performance modes are defined such that “effect c” is set for the first and second periods, and “effect d” is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

Next, if the value of the hold ball increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the hold upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, Various performance modes are defined such that "effect c" is set for the first period and the second period, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition performance (performance b) is configured not to be executed even though the suspension upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF. In this way, when a performance result indicating a hit is displayed as a performance result of the final variation performance, it is possible to obtain a new special drawing 2 reservation in a state where the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF. Even if it is possible, by configuring the system so that the acquisition performance is not executed intentionally, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the performance mode that is executed.

In this case as well, by performing a performance that has a difference between the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed, the performance result of the final variation performance will be the performance result that indicates the winning. This can be reported. Therefore, the player can pay close attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the value of the reserved ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the reserved upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, that is, the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect is In 2, in a state where the pre-reading results of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all wrong, if the pre-reading results of the 2 newly acquired special drawings 2 reservations during the waiting period are also wrong. Regardless of the value of the obtained performance counter 223lf, various performance modes are defined such that "performance c" is set for the first period and the second period, and "performance d" is set for the third to fourth period. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223ls is set to off, that is, if the special value obtained during the standby period of the final variation effect is In a state where the pre-reading results of the two reserved (2 pieces) in Figure 2 are all out, the pre-reading results of the two newly acquired special drawings 2 pending during the waiting period are also out, and furthermore, the current special drawing 2 pending results are also out of order. If the number has not reached the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, "performance b" will be used in the first period, "performance c" will be used in the second period, and in the third to fourth periods. Various performance modes are defined such that "performance d" is set for. That is, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to OFF at the end of the waiting period, an acquisition performance (performance b) is performed to allow the player to newly acquire the special map 2 reservation using the first period. is configured to run.

Finally, if the value of the number of reserved balls increase counter 223ia is "4", that is, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time when the final variation effect is executed is "0", and four special symbols 2 are reserved during the waiting period. If you newly acquire a hold, if the value of the performance counter 223lf obtained when there is an additional hit is in the range of 0 to 99, the 1st period, 2nd period, 3rd to 4th period will be Various production modes are defined such that "production g" is set, and various production modes are defined in the range "100 to 198" such that "production h" is set for the first period, second period, and third to fourth period. The performance mode is specified. Then, if the additional hit is "none", regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, "performance c" is set for the first period and the second period, and "performance d" is set for the third to fourth periods. Various presentation modes are defined as follows. That is, at the end of the waiting period, since the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to ON, it is specified that the acquisition performance (performance b) for making the player acquire a new special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. has been done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 457(b). The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 16th embodiment described above, with a pending number increase counter 223pa, a variable period storage area 223pb, The difference is that a production variable flag 223pc is added, and the rest is the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pending number increase counter 223pa indicates the number of special drawings 2 acquired within a specific period (the standby period and the first period set as part of the performance period of the final variation performance executed in response to the final variation of the time saving state). This is a counter for measuring the number of reservations, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 every time a new special symbol 2 reservation is acquired within a specific period. This pending number increase counter 223pa receives the winning information command corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning in the final winning process (see C3461 in FIG. 464) executed in the winning information command process 20 (see C3262 in FIG. 463). (C5501: Yes), and when it is determined that the performance variable flag 223pc is set to on (C5502: Yes), in other words, in order to set the performance mode of the final variable performance, the special performance acquired during the standby period is When it is necessary to count the number of pending cases in FIG. 2, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 464).

Then, in the final variable effect update processing 20 (see C4566 in FIG. 466), if it is determined that the standby period has ended (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is changed to the final effect variable setting table 222pb. (See C4865 in FIG. 466). Furthermore, if it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866 in the diagram: Yes), a performance extension process is executed to set the special symbol 2 hold fluctuation period obtained during the final fluctuation performance as the performance period of the final fluctuation performance. Therefore, the counter value is referenced (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration that counts the number of specific pending memories (for example, special map 2 pending) acquired during a specific period (for example, during the waiting period), the specific pending memory at the end of the specific period can be counted. Since it is possible to set the performance mode after the specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of pending memories acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of performance modes. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the player with a new gaming experience in which a large number of reserved memories are acquired within a predetermined period of time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dedicated counter (pending number increase counter 223pa) is configured to count the number of specific pending memories (for example, special map 2 pending) acquired during a specific period (for example, during a waiting period). However, without being limited to this, for example, a storage means for temporarily storing the number of reserved memories at the start of a specific period is provided, and the number of retained memories at the end of the specific period and the number of retained memories stored in the storage means are used. The number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period may be calculated by comparing the number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific period (for example, a waiting period) for measuring the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) is set within one special figure variation period (for example, special figure 2 variation). Since the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, the number of retained memories that have been acquired is simply added up. As the specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, it may be configured to set a period in which the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory can decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special chart 2 fluctuations), In this case, the configuration is such that the number of specific pending memories (for example, special drawing 2 pending) is counted, and each time a specific pending memory (for example, special drawing 2 pending) is acquired, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the specific It may be configured such that the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the pending memory decreases (for example, each time a special figure 2 variation using the special figure 2 reserve is executed). In addition, in this case, the number of specific pending memories may be smaller at the end of the specific period than at the start of the specific period, so the number of specific pending memories (for example, special map 2 pending) As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set the initial value of the counter to a value larger than the upper limit of the number of specific pending memories that can be stored. With this configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased in response to an increase or decrease in a specific suspended memory during a specific period, it is possible to reliably prevent the counter value from becoming smaller than 0.

Also, as a specific period for measuring the number of specific pending memories acquired, a period in which the number of specific pending memories acquired may decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special map 2 fluctuations) is set. In this case, as mentioned above, the configuration does not count the actual increase in the number of specific retained memories within a specific period, but simply adds up the number of specific retained memories newly acquired within a specific period. A configuration may also be used.

Furthermore, in the present 20th embodiment, based on the increase in the number of specific pending memories (special map 2 pending) within a predetermined specific period (within the waiting period), the performance mode after the specific period has elapsed is set. However, without being limited to this, a specific period may be set depending on the game content (lottery results of each symbol, game status, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, the frame button 22). It may be configured to be variable; for example, a plurality of non-consecutive periods may be set as the specific period, or the length of one specific period may be configured to be variable. In this case, by configuring the player not to be notified of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is made difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suspended and memorized value is being counted. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected performance for the player.

In addition, the specific period will not be set based on the fulfillment of a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation using the operating means to indicate that the specific period will not be set). It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the performance in a manner suitable for each player.

The variation period storage area 223pb is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode of the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). This variable period storage area 223pb stores the standby period (0th period), 1st period, 2nd period, and 3rd period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state, and after the end of the time saving state (normal state setting). 1 period (the first special figure 2 variation after the normal state is set) associated with the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the time saving state) executed during the period (after) period), Toru 2 period (the second special chart 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), Toru 3 period (the third special chart 2 fluctuation period after the normal state is set), Toru 4 period (normal In order to store the effect mode set for each period (4th special figure 2 fluctuation period after the state is set), a storage area corresponding to each period is formed.

Then, information indicating the presentation mode of the final variation effect set in the time-saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 465), and the final variation effect update process (See C4566 in Figure 466), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes in Figure 466), or when it is determined that it is the end timing of the set production mode (C4865) or the first period (C4866 in FIG. 466: Yes), the set presentation mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 466). Although not shown, when the final variation performance is completed, information indicating the performance mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the performance mode of a period performance that is executed using a predetermined period can be set at multiple timings (timing to start the period performance, predetermined timing during the execution of the period performance), the period performance By providing a storage area for storing the set performance mode each time a production mode is set, it is possible to set a subsequent production mode based on the contents of the previously set production mode. Become. Therefore, when performing a performance for one period using performance modes set at a plurality of timings, it is possible to set a performance mode that does not feel strange.

The production variable flag 223pc is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the production mode is not set as the production mode of the final variation production executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). This is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the time-saving effect setting process 20 (see C4164 in FIG. 465), the effect mode of the final variation effect is set (see C4362, C4364 in FIG. 465), and the unset period when the effect mode is not set is set. If it is determined that there is one (C4366 in FIG. 465: Yes), it is set to on (see C4367 in FIG. 465).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566 in FIG. 466), this is the timing at which the waiting period ends (C4863 in FIG. 466: Yes) and the timing at which the first period ends (C4866 in FIG. 466: Yes) That is, when it is determined that it is the timing when it is possible to set the production mode of the final variation production, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466), and when it is determined that it is set to on. , a new performance mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 466). Then, after setting the presentation mode for the unset period, it is set to off (see C4871 in FIG. 466).

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 20th embodiment>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 20th embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 462 to 466. This embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above in that command determination processing 20 (see FIG. 462) is executed instead of command determination processing 16 (see FIG. 406), and prize information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) is executed. ), the winning information command process 20 (see FIG. 463) is executed, the final winning process (see FIG. 464) is executed, and the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) is executed instead of the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418). The difference is that the final variation effect setting process 20 (see FIG. 465) is executed, and the final variation effect update process 20 (see FIG. 466) is executed instead of the final variation effect update process (see FIG. 423). , otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the changes in the contents of the data table to be referenced, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, it is important to note that the changes in the contents of the data table to be referred to are simply changes in numerical values, and there is a technical philosophy. Since they are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 20 (C3163) will be explained with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 20 (C3163) executed in the 20th embodiment.

When the command determination process 20 (C3163) is executed, in the process of C3201 described above, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (C3201: Yes), the winning information command processing 20 is executed. (C3262) and ends this process. A detailed explanation of this winning information command processing 20 (C3262) will be described later with reference to FIG. 463. On the other hand, in the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), the process of C3203 to C3209, which is the same as the command determination process 16 of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 406), is performed. After executing the process, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reservations (number of special figures 2 reservations) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223lc is "4" which is the upper limit value.

In the process of C3261, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations (number of special drawings 2 reservations) is the upper limit (C3261: Yes), the reservation upper limit flag 223ls is set to on (C3262), and then this process ends. If it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations (number of special drawings 2 reservations) to be held is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3262 is not executed and this process is ended.

Furthermore, after executing the same processes C3210 to C3217 as the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 406) of the sixteenth embodiment described above, this process ends.

Next, the contents of the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) will be explained with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information command processing 20 (C3262) executed in the 20th embodiment. In this winning information command processing 20 (C3262), in contrast to the above-mentioned winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407), the contents of the processing executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is set to on. The difference is that the .

When the winning information command processing 20 (C3262) is executed, the processing of C3401 to C3402, which is the same as the winning information command processing 16 (see FIG. 407) of the 16th embodiment described above, is executed, and then the processing of C3403 is executed. First, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is on (C3404: Yes), the final winning process is executed (C3461), and the process moves to C3406. Details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 464.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223lk is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C3406. Thereafter, processes C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process ends.

Here, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be explained with reference to FIG. 464. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the 20th embodiment. In this final winning process (C3461), a ball enters the second winning slot 640 while the final change in the time saving state (special drawing 2 variation) is being executed, and a new special drawing 2 reservation (winning information) is entered. Processing is executed to set the presentation mode when a winning information command indicating that the prize has been won is received.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information command received this time is a winning information command indicating that a ball has won in the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special drawing 2 winning). (C5501), if it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 has not been received (not a special drawing 2 winning) (C5501: No), this process is immediately terminated. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning information command indicating that a ball has won in the second winning opening 640 has been received (special map 2 winning) (C5501: Yes), then the production variable flag 223pc is turned on. (C5502). If it is determined that the performance variable flag 223pc is on (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa (C5503), and the process moves to C5504. If it is determined that the performance variable flag 223pc is off (C5502: No), the process of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information in the variable period storage area 223pb is read (C5504), and then it is determined whether the current acquisition performance is being performed (C5505). If it is determined that the acquisition performance is currently in progress (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating pending acquisition during the acquisition performance is set (C5506), and then this processing is ended. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the current acquisition performance is not in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating pending acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the final variation effect can be executed in response to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) of the time saving state, and a new special figure 2 hold is made as part of the final variation effect. It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 373(b)) for making the player acquire the item. Then, if the timing at which a new special drawing 2 reservation is acquired (the timing at which the winning information command indicating the winning of special drawing 2 is received) is when the acquisition presentation is being executed, the dedicated presentation is executed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance being executed related to the actual gaming situation, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when a new special figure 2 hold is acquired (at the timing when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 win is received), it is determined that the special figure 2 hold has been acquired based on the content of the performance being executed. Although the configuration is configured to show different production modes, other configurations may be used. For example, the timing of acquiring a new special drawing 2 reservation and the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining variation time of the final time saving variation) may be used. ) The presentation mode may be set based on the following. In this case, for example, a winning determination means that indicates that a winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning has been received, and a remaining time determining means that determines the remaining time in the time saving state at the time when the winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning is received. means, and determines the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when the winning information command indicating a special drawing 2 winning has been received by the winning determining means (there is a special drawing 2 winning), that is, the special drawing 2 pending. If the remaining period that can be easily won is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), a display format indicating that the number of reserved special drawings 2 has increased due to the winning of special drawings 2 (for example, a comment of "plus 1") ) is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, in addition to the display format indicating that the number of special drawings 2 pending has increased due to the winning of special drawing 2 (for example, a comment of "plus 1"), the number of special drawings 2 pending is displayed. It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of reserved special drawings 2 has increased in a state where the remaining period in which it is possible to easily obtain is short.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the timing at which the new special drawing 2 reservation is acquired is at a time when there is ample margin, so this can be used as a reference for future games. Can be done. Further, in this case, the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the remaining period in which the special drawing 2 reservation can be easily obtained, may be configured not to be notified to the player. As a result, the player will determine the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special drawing 2 reservation is obtained, so the display displayed when the special drawing 2 reservation is obtained. The aspect can be watched carefully. In addition, the display mode displayed when special drawing 2 reservations are acquired may be configured to differ depending on the number of special drawings 2 reservations. For example, if the number of acquired special drawings 2 reservations is number or less (for example, "2" or less), the remaining period of the time saving state when receiving the winning information command indicating the special drawing 2 winning, that is, the remaining period in which the special drawing 2 pending can be easily obtained is predetermined. If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display format (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special drawings 2 pending has increased due to the winning of special drawing 2, the number of special drawings 2 pending will be displayed. It may be configured to display a display mode that suggests that it is difficult to make the number the upper limit (for example, a comment saying "It may be difficult").

In addition, as a method to determine the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is met (for example, the period until the final special symbol fluctuation of the time saving state ends) is set as the remaining period of the time saving state. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the period until the end of the last regular winning game executed in the time saving state is set as the remaining period of the time saving state.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of variations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 1 or 5 times) during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends. It is configured to do so. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the remaining period until the end of the time saving state based on the number of fluctuations and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds. The system is designed to make it easier to win. In addition, the normal symbols are configured so that the gaming mode is set according to the gaming state at the time when the lottery is executed and the gaming state at the time when the normal symbol winning game is executed. If the time saving state is set when the normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) is executed, the common symbol lottery and the regular symbol fluctuation time setting will be executed as the high probability state of the common symbol, and the game per common symbol will be executed. If the time saving state is set when the game is executed, the game is configured such that the normal symbol winning game is executed as a high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, even if you win a winning lottery in the lottery executed during the time saving state, if the normal state is set at the time when the regular winning game based on the winning lottery is executed, it is normal. A game with a common symbol is executed as a low probability state of the symbols.

In this embodiment configured in this way, depending on the variation timing of the special symbol and the variation timing of the normal symbol, it may occur before the last special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) executed during the time saving state ends. In some cases, the state in which it is easy for a ball to win a prize in the second winning hole 640 ends. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time-saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time-saving state, the second winning prize will be won within the remaining period. This results in a period in which the ball is not easily placed in the hole 640, causing a problem in that the player's desire to play is reduced.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time-saving state, the period until the state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 ends, that is, the period during which a normal game can be executed during the time-saving state is determined. It is best to configure it like this. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 is likely to be set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, when performing an effect to notify the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. In addition, when determining the remaining period of the time-saving state in this way, even after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set, there is a period advantageous to the player (when the ball is in the second prize opening 640). If a period in which it is easy to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize continues, it is preferable to configure the system so that the remaining period of the time-saving state is determined until the end of that period. In other words, if a game per normal pattern (game per normal pattern long opening) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the game per normal pattern (game per normal pattern long opening) is executed across the time saving state and the normal state. It is preferable to configure the system so that the period until the end of the game (game) is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. This makes it possible to accurately determine a period that is advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 is likely to be set), so an effect that notifies the remaining period of the time-saving state can be set. When executed, the accuracy of the notification contents can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 465, the contents of the time-saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) will be explained. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) executed in the 20th embodiment. This time-saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is different from the time-saving effect setting process (see FIG. 418) of the 16th embodiment described above, in which the effect mode is set when the special figure 2 variation is executed as the final time-saving variation. The difference is that the process for setting has been changed.

When the time-saving effect setting process 20 (C4164) is executed, after executing the same processes of C4301 and C4302 as the time-saving effect setting process of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 418), in the process of C4302, If it is determined that the current special pattern variation is the time-saving final variation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the current special pattern 2 variation (time-saving final variation) is a winning variation (C4361). If it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a winning variation (C4361: Yes), the production mode is set by referring to the final winning table 222pa1 of the final variation production table 222pa (C4362 ), the process moves to C4365. In addition, in the process of C4301, if it is determined that the current special pattern variation is not the special pattern 2 variation (C4301: No), or in the process of C4302, it is determined that the current special pattern variation is not the final variation of the time saving state. If it is determined (C4302: No), the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is not a winning variation (it is a losing variation) (C4361: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la (second The winning information regarding the special symbol (special symbol 2) is read out (C4363), the performance mode is set with reference to the final table 222ib2 for losing that the final variable performance table 222pa has (C4364), and the process moves to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the performance content (performance mode) set by the process of C4362 and C4364 described above is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223pb (C4365), and then it is determined whether or not there is a period for which the performance has not been set. (C4366). If it is determined that there is a period for which no performance has been set (C4366: Yes), the performance variable flag 223pc is set to ON (C4367), and then this processing is ended. Further, if it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4367 is skipped and the process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 466, the contents of the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) will be explained. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566) executed in the 20th embodiment. In the final variation effect update process 20 (C4566), the final variation is executed in response to the final variation of the time saving state updated in the process of C4501 of the effect update process 16 (see C3112 in FIG. 420) in the 16th embodiment. The elapsed period of the production (the elapsed period of the special figure 2 variation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

When the final variable performance update process 20 (C4566) is executed, first, the information in the variable period storage area 223pb is read out (C4861), and the information (set performance period) and the special feature in the variable period storage area 223pb that have been read out are read out (C4861). The current production situation is extracted based on the value of the variation time counter 223ln (value indicating the variation time of the special figure 2 variation) (C4862), and then it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period end timing or not. (C4863), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the performance variable flag 223pc is on (C4864). If it is determined that the production variable flag 223pc is on (C4864: Yes), the production mode is set using the final production variable setting table corresponding to the judgment result of the appropriateness of the change (C4865), and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance variable flag 223pc is off (C4864: No), the process of C4865 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

In the process of C4863, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the first period (C4866), and at the end timing of the first period. If it is determined that there is (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the performance variable flag 223pc is on (C4867). If it is determined that the performance variable flag 223pc is on (C4867: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is greater than 0 (C4868). If it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is greater than 0 (C4868: Yes), the performance period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223pb (C4869), and the process moves to C4870. In the process of C4868, if it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is 0 (C4868: No), the process of C4869 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the performance mode for the final performance period is set (C4870), the performance variable flag 223pc is set to OFF (C4871), and the process moves to C4872. Also, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223pc is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the pending number increase counter 223pa is cleared (C4872), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4866, if it is determined that the current time is not the end timing of the first period (C4866: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation has been acquired. If so (C4874: Yes), the re-prefetch flag 223lr is set to ON (C4875), and this process ends.

Here, to explain the content of the process executed in C4874, the winning information storage area 223la has a storage area corresponding to each symbol reserved, and in this embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol The number of storage areas for 1), the storage area for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the storage area for the regular symbol (ordinary symbol) corresponds to the maximum number of stored symbols (4) for each symbol. It is formed. Each storage area stores the prefetch information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 and the referenced information indicating whether or not the prefetch results were referred to when setting various effects in the audio lamp control device 113. It is configured so that information is stored.

In other words, in the process of C4874, it is checked in each storage area whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223la in addition to the special drawing 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referenced by the process of C4806 or C4814. It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information that is stored, and if the pre-read information is written in the storage areas (4 pieces) corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending (special 2 pending) of the winning information storage area 223la, and the referenced information is When it is determined that there is a storage area in which no information is stored, it is determined that there is a new special 2 reservation.

Then, by setting the re-read ahead flag 223lr to ON in the process of C4875, the special figure 2 hold is set again as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure variation (the first special figure variation after the end of the time reduction). A variable performance is executed based on the look-ahead results.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4874: No), all of the currently acquired special 2 reservations are pre-read, and the second production mode is performed based on the result of pre-reading. Since this is the case where the time-saving final variable effect during the period is being executed, a display effect result command indicating the result of the time-saving variable effect is directly set (C4876), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C4873, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process ends. In the process of C4877, setting of the performance mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, update setting of the remaining period display mode to indicate the remaining period of the final variation, and elapsed period display mode to indicate the elapsed period of the final variation. , and setting of the operation display mode that is executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

As explained above, the present 20th embodiment is configured to set the production mode of the final variation production at the time of setting the final variation production (at the start of the time saving final variation), and the final variation The lottery results (pre-reading results) that are subject to the production are limited to the lottery results of the relevant variation and the pre-reading results of the special drawing 2 pending that was obtained at the time of setting the final variation production (at the start of the time-saving final variation). They are different in that they do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, so that the time saving final variation is executed. It becomes possible to add variety to the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, which is executed before the game ends (during the time saving state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as in the present embodiment, when changing the production mode of the final variation performance to be executed according to the acquisition status of special drawing 2 pending at the time when the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed. It is good to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired at the time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the number of special drawings 2 pending becomes a specific number (for example, the upper limit number 3) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. Can be done.

In the present 20th embodiment, the above-described final variation effect is started from the timing when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the remaining period of the time saving state is a predetermined period. In this case, for example, the final variation effect may be executed when the number of remaining time reductions becomes two. In addition, in the present 20th embodiment, a configuration will be described in which the final variation effect is executed using a period for one special symbol variation during the time saving state and a period for several special symbol variations during the normal state. As for the increase/decrease in the number of special figures 2 pending while the final variation effect is being executed, the number of special figures 2 pending increases until the special figure variation in the time saving state ends, and the number of special figures 2 pending in the normal state increases. After the start of figure fluctuation, we have only explained the pattern in which the number of reserved special figures 2 decreases, but other patterns include, for example, time reduction during the execution of a regular figure long opening game executed during the time saving state. After the state ends (the final variation in the time-saving state (special pattern 2 variation) stops) and the special pattern variation in the normal state (special pattern 2 variation) starts, a ball enters the second prize opening 640. There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the lottery status of the regular symbol (the winning/failing result of the regular symbol lottery being executed, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the pending memory of the regular symbol lottery) The diagram information (win/fail results, winning game type)) is configured to be able to be determined, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether the ball can enter the second prize opening 640 after transition to the normal state, and the determination is made. The presentation mode of the final variation presentation may be configured to be varied based on the result, for example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win in the second prize opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. is a performance mode that makes it easy to reflect the lottery results of the special drawing 2 lottery based on winnings in the second prize opening 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period in the final fluctuation performance (using a still image that makes it easy to extend the performance period). It may also be configured to set a performance mode in which the performance result can be suddenly changed.

In addition, when executing the final variation effect using multiple special figure 2 variation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions (the number of remaining special figure 2 variations that can be executed during the time saving state) when executing the final variation effect. ), and based on the determination result, calculate the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the final fluctuation performance, and set the performance mode based on the calculation result. . In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation performance will not be greater than the calculated maximum number, but may be less (for example, if you stop the game during the final fluctuation performance) (If the special drawing 2 reservation becomes 0). Therefore, the performance mode based on the above-mentioned calculation result may be configured to set a performance mode in which the performance effect does not deteriorate even if the number of changes in the special figure 2 suddenly decreases.

Furthermore, if the special figure 1 variation is executed while the final variation effect is being executed for the special figure 2 variation, the final variation effect will continue for the variation period of the special figure 1 variation. It may be executed, or it may be configured such that the final variation effect is temporarily interrupted and the effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation is executed during the interruption period.

<21st embodiment>
Next, the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 467 and 468. In the 16th embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIG. ) is configured to be able to execute the Fuzu drawing lottery, and performs a suggestive performance (a series of performances) that suggests that a specific win (Fuzu long opening win) has been won in the Fuzu lottery that was executed during the normal state. It was configured to do so.

Then, a guide display mode (right hit display) for winning a ball into the second prize opening 640 provided in the right side gaming area is displayed (a series of (displayed during performance execution), and the player is configured to be able to easily win a ball into the second prize opening 640 during the regular long open winning game. Furthermore, while the player is playing an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game during the normal state), the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode will be displayed if the player wins a long open hit. First, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to win a ball into the second prize opening 640 during a game with a long opening win.

On the other hand, in the 21st embodiment, while the general pattern long open winning game is being played by the general pattern lottery, the ball fired by the left-handed game (ball flowing down the left side game area) also hits the right ball. The electric accessory 1640a that is opened during the normal game and the second prize opening 1640 are arranged in a position where the ball fired by the hitting game (the ball flowing down the right side game area) can also win a prize. There is a difference.

Furthermore, the proportion of balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a among the balls fired in left-handed games is made different from the proportion of balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a among the balls fired in right-handed games, and The ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate in the hitting game than in the left-handed hitting game.

In addition, in the present 21st embodiment, in some cases where a player wins in a long open game during the normal state, the fact that the player wins in a long player's game is announced before the game is executed. Announcements that can be made to the player before (for example, during the fluctuation of a winning regular symbol, or the period from acquiring the winning information of the winning regular symbol (common symbol) until the relevant symbol fluctuation is executed) It is configured to perform a performance.

By configuring in this way, when a player wins in the long open winning game, the ease with which the ball enters the second prize opening 640 can be varied depending on whether the notification effect is executed or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the performance executed for the player interested, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second winning hole 1640 is arranged at a position where balls fired in left-handed games can also win, even if the notification effect is not executed, the ball can be won in the second winning hole 1640. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is extremely disadvantageous.

<About the configuration of the pachinko machine of the 21st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 467, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 467 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first embodiment. In the 21st embodiment, the positions of each component arranged in the right side game area are different from the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, and specifically, the through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a, and the The arrangement positions of the two winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 467, in the game board 13 of the 21st embodiment, a second winning hole 1640 with an electric accessory 1640a attached is provided below the first winning hole 64, and the left side game is played by a left-handed game. The ball that has flown down the area and the ball that has flown down the right side game area due to the right-handed game are configured so that they can both reach the second winning opening 1640.

Specifically, a regulating member (nail) is installed in the area between the first prize opening 64 and the left end side (left side in front view in FIG. 467) of the electric accessory 1640a in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 467). are planted in such a way that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, among the balls flowing down the left side game area, only the balls that are guided by the nails planted on the game board 13 and pass through the upper area of the first winning hole 64 reach the second winning hole 1640. configured. In the 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is configured so that the proportion of balls that reach the second prize opening 1640 among the balls flowing down the left side game area is about 10%.

On the other hand, the balls fired in the right-handed game and flowing down the right side game area are the ball flow formed on the upper surface of the V winning door 650b located in the closed state and the winning door 65b located in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that most of the water (approximately 100%) reaches the second prize opening 1640.

By configuring in this way, during a normal long open winning game, that is, in a state where the ball can enter the second winning slot 1640, the ball flowing down the right side game area is more likely to be played than the ball flowing down the left side game area. This makes it easier to win a prize in the second prize opening 1640. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to play a left-handed game or a right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 467, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the ball flowing down the right side gaming area is larger than the winning hole that can win a prize (the winning hole that can give a privilege (prize ball) to the player). It is configured so that there are more winning holes (winning holes that can award benefits (prize balls, lottery) to players) into which balls flowing down the left side gaming area can win. Specifically, a ball flowing down the right side game area can win (pass) through the through gate 67 or the second winning hole 1640, whereas a ball flowing down the left side game area can win through the through gate 67. , the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 1640, and the general winning hole 63 are configured so that it is possible to win (pass through).

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, except for the period when the ball can be won in the second winning opening 1640 (the game period for the regular long open hit), it is possible to avoid the right-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the right side game area. However, a left-handed game in which the ball is fired toward the left side game area is a more advantageous game method for the player. Thereby, during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to play right-handed games, and allow the player to play left-handed games. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting when to play a right-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, in the 21st embodiment, the time required for the ball fired in a left-handed game to reach the second prize opening 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is longer than the time required for the ball fired in a right-handed game to reach the second winning hole It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right-handed hitting arrival time). Specifically, the configuration is such that the arrival time for left-handed shots is about 4 seconds, while the arrival time for right-handed shots is about 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the ball fired by a left-handed game and the ball fired by a right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, 1 second after the previously executed left-handed game) It becomes possible for the balls (balls fired by the right-handed game to be executed) to reach the second prize opening 1640 at the same timing.

Therefore, in the case where a game with a common pattern long opening is executed, depending on the timing of switching the game method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game, it is possible to determine whether the ball enters the second prize opening 1640 during the game with a long opening. Since the ease of play can be varied, players can be motivated to play the game.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the present 21st embodiment, the winning game period of the regular figure long opening game is 3 seconds (open period 1 second, closed period 1.5 seconds, and the open period is 0.5 seconds). In other words, when a right-handed game is executed after a game with a long opening per game is executed, it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter the second prize opening 1640. The game is configured such that the game may have ended when the ball reaches .

As a result, players who do not fire the ball until the Futu long open winning game is executed, and play a game where they hit the ball to the right after the Fuzu long opening winning game has started, will receive a benefit (second prize opening). 1640 (prize ball, special drawing 2 lottery))), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to shoot the ball continuously, which improves the game. Operation can be improved.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the present 21st embodiment, even if the winning game period of the normal pattern long open winning game is set to 3 seconds and the right-handed game is executed after the normal pattern long opening winning game is started, Although the configuration is such that it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 1640, the winning game period of the regular long open winning game is set to the right-handed arrival time (the ball fired in the right-handed game). It may be configured to be longer (for example, 5 seconds (open period: 1 second, closed period: 1 second, open period: 3 seconds)) than the time required for the second prize winning port 1640 to arrive. As a result, the player can play the game during the regular game long open winning game with peace of mind.

<About the production content in the 21st embodiment>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effects executed in the twenty-first embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 468. In the present 21st embodiment using the configuration of the game board 13 described with reference to FIG. 467, it is easy to enter the ball into the second prize opening 1640 while the regular long open winning game is being executed. Therefore, the system is configured to be able to execute a guidance notification (for example, a right-handed notification) for guiding the player on the gaming method, and the notification mode of the guidance notification is such that the player can easily identify the gaming method. The first guide notification mode and the second guide notification mode in which it is more difficult for the player to identify the gaming method than the first guide notification mode are configured to be settable.

With this configuration, depending on whether the notification mode of the executed guide notification is the first guide notification mode or the second guide notification mode, the ball is sent to the second prize opening during the game of the regular long open winning game. 1640, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win a prize and a state in which it is difficult to win.

The first guide notification mode is a notification mode that is set as a part of the special pattern variation performance that is executed in response to the special pattern variation, and during the general pattern variation where a winning is won in the long opening of the common pattern, This is set when a special symbol variation is executed in a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When a variation effect corresponding to the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is being executed, a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) is used to display information to the player. A guidance display mode (for example, a comment of "hitting right") for guiding the game method is displayed (see FIG. 366(b)).

Furthermore, in the 21st embodiment, before a game with a long opening of a general pattern is executed (for example, during a period of fluctuation of a general pattern during which a winning of a long opening of a general pattern is won, the fluctuation of the general pattern ends and the game becomes normal). During the period when the symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), or from when the winning information command for winning the regular symbol long opening is received as the winning information command of the normal symbol until the game is executed when the symbol long opening is played. period) so that the first guidance notification mode can be displayed. With this configuration, even if the player recognizes that the first guidance notification mode is being displayed and then executes a game according to the display content of the first guidance notification mode (for example, "Right-hand hit"), The ball can easily reach the second prize opening 1640 which is in an open state where it is easy for the ball to win in the regular figure long open winning game.

On the other hand, the second guide notification mode is always displayed when a game with a long open winning pattern is executed, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guide notification mode described above. It is something that Specifically, at the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a guide display mode (for example, a "right-handed player") for guiding the gaming method is displayed in a smaller size than the first guide notification mode displayed in the small display area Dm4. ” icon) is displayed.

As mentioned above, in the present 21st embodiment, the game board 13 is formed so that the period required for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640 is about 3 seconds. After recognizing the notification content of the second guide notification mode, if you perform a gaming method according to the notification content (for example, a right-handed game), depending on the falling situation of the ball, the ball may be thrown in the first place during a game with a long open hit. A situation occurs in which the player cannot reach the second prize opening 1640.

Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the regular long open hit, with the notification condition of the first guide notification mode being satisfied. In addition, in the present 21st embodiment, when the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is satisfied and the general pattern long opening winning is won, the general drawing long opening winning game is executed based on the winning. The first guide notification mode is displayed three seconds before, and the second guide notification mode is displayed at the time when the regular long open winning game is executed. With this configuration, even if the first guide notification mode is displayed before a game with a long opening per game is actually executed, it is possible to notify that a game with a long opening winning a general pattern is being executed. The player can be notified in the second guidance notification mode.

In addition, in the present 21st embodiment, the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is set that the special symbol fluctuation is executed with a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, the notification condition may be set to the fact that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, or the notification condition may be set to the state of transition of the game state, Specifically, the notification condition may be set that the time saving state has ended and the state has transitioned to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition has been met (notification condition fulfilled flag) is set, and when the notification condition is met, the notification condition fulfilled flag is set to ON, and during the period when the notification condition satisfied flag is set to ON. is configured to be able to display the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition fulfillment flag is set to OFF. Also good. In this case, it is recommended to set a notification termination condition to turn off the notification condition fulfillment flag that is set to on, and to set the notification condition fulfillment flag to OFF when the notification termination condition is met. .

Specifically, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the notification condition fulfillment flag was set to ON (the number of special symbol fluctuations reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), or the elapsed time reached a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes)). It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when the notification end condition has passed, or the lottery is executed when a predetermined trigger for execution (for example, execution of a special drawing lottery, or a ball is placed in each prize opening) is satisfied. It may be configured such that the notification termination condition is satisfied when a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

In addition, multiple types are provided for each long open (for example, A for long and B for long), and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set depending on the type of long open for long. By making them different, it may be configured such that the first guidance notification mode can be set to be easily displayed in the long open hit of the regular map and the long open hit for the regular map that is difficult to be displayed.

In addition, the notification conditions may be varied based on the player's gaming situation, for example, the elapsed period (number of special figure fluctuations, elapsed time) from the previous jackpot game (small win game) satisfies a predetermined condition. In this case (for example, when the number of special pattern changes reaches the number corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), the first guide notification mode may be configured to be displayed whenever the regular pattern long open winning is won. .

In addition, the player may play an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game played when the normal state is set (a predetermined period after transitioning from the gaming state (time saving state) in which the right-handed game is performed to the normal state). )), a warning display for the player to modify the playing method (for example, a warning display for the player to correct the playing method (for example, in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, "Left-handed batting If it is determined that the player continues to play inappropriate games even after the comment "Please return the player" is displayed, the notification condition may be configured so as not to be satisfied.

The techniques for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above are not limited to the present 21st embodiment, and may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, for example, As in the sixteenth embodiment described above, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured so that a ball cannot be won in the second prize opening 640 unless a right-handed game is executed. . In this case, the benefits given to the player will vary greatly depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed, so the player is encouraged to play the game in order to satisfy the notification condition. can be set.

Furthermore, a notification means may be provided to notify the player of the gaming method for establishing the notification condition, for example, in order to satisfy the notification condition in the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is a good idea to configure it to display the necessary information (for example, please show your super reach). Furthermore, the presence or absence of display of this necessary information may be configured to be shared as suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, when a game is executed according to the display content displayed as necessary information, it is possible to check whether the notification conditions for displaying the first guidance notification mode are established or whether the special symbol lottery result is Since it is possible to notify the player whether a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating a jackpot win) has been obtained in a way that is difficult for the player to understand, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, a notification means may be provided that can notify the player that the first guide notification mode is currently available for notification (a condition in which notification conditions are met). This allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the present 21st embodiment, a first guidance notification mode is used as a guidance notification mode that suggests that a game with a long opening per game is to be executed, and the player distinguishes the notification content from the first guidance notification mode. However, when the first guidance notification mode can be set, special execution conditions (for example, a special operation on the operating means (frame button 22)) can be set. A special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set if a condition that is satisfied when the following is performed is satisfied.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode that notifies the player of the timing to execute a gaming method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and is By executing a gaming method according to the notification content at a certain timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which more advantageous benefits are more likely to be awarded. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment is configured such that both balls fired in left-handed games and balls fired in right-handed games can reach the second prize opening 1640. The period required for a ball fired in a left-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640 is approximately 4 seconds, and the period required for a ball fired in a right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640. The configuration is such that the time is approximately 3 seconds. By operating the operating handle 51, it is configured to be able to fire 100 balls per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from a left-handed game to a right-handed game in accordance with the execution timing of the Futu long opening game, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can be changed. It is configured such that both can be made to reach the second winning a prize opening 640 at approximately the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the regular long open winning game is executed, and the game method corresponding to the notification content (for example, The player determines the timing at which multiple balls can arrive at the second prize opening 640 at approximately the same time as the timing to change to a game played with a right-handed player (for example, a game played with a right-handed player) or the timing of firing balls in the currently executed game method (for example, a game played with a left-handed player). The notification mode for notification is set.

With this configuration, the player is motivated to play the game so that a more advantageous guide notification mode is displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the above-mentioned special guidance notification mode can be set when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, but the first guidance notification mode is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that a special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode can be satisfied even if the notification condition for the first guidance notification is not satisfied. The configuration may be such that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is more easily satisfied when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied than the case where the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes, and when a predetermined number (for example, two) of the conditions are met, the corresponding guidance notification mode is set. It may be configured to set. Furthermore, the ease with which notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes may be established based on the operation results of the operation means (frame buttons 22) that can be operated by the player may be varied. Each time a person performs a specific operation on the operating means, each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that the notification condition (execution condition) for setting various guidance notification modes is easily satisfied. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As explained above, in the present 18th embodiment, the game per standard pattern (the game per standard pattern long open) that allows a ball to be won in the second prize opening 1640 is executed. It is configured to execute a guidance notification (for example, a right-handed notification) to notify the player during the execution of the normal pattern variation which is the lottery result to be executed, and the game based on the normal pattern winning game is started. The game method is configured so that the game method executed by the player is changed from a left-handed game to a right-handed game at a point before (before the regular figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed), and a game with a regular figure is started. The game ball launched in the right-handed game is configured to enter the second winning hole 1640 during the regular long open winning game, but the invention is not limited to this, for example, A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance notification (for example, right hit notification) is set during the opening period of the long open winning game (from the start of the open winning game). , until the electric accessory 1640a is opened).

With this configuration, the guide notification (right-handed hit notification) can be executed after the winning common pattern fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display), so the guide notification (right-handed hit notification) can be executed. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game is not executed when a normal figure is won. In this case, as in the 21st embodiment, it is determined whether the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, and only when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied, the first guidance notification mode is set. It is preferable to configure the system so that guidance notification is executed. In addition, if it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, an effect is created to show the lottery result of the general drawing lottery using the general drawing fluctuation period and the opening period of the general drawing winning game. It is preferable to carry out the above process, and display a display mode indicating that the game has won a common symbol as a result of the performance at the end timing of the opening period of the common symbol winning game (timing of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, if the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is not satisfied, it is announced that the winning of the common symbol is won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed as the common symbol winning game. Therefore, even if a player who has identified that he has won a common symbol by the notification plays a right-handed game, it is difficult to enter the second prize opening 1640 with the ball fired by the right-handed game. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is not satisfied, the winning of the common figure is won at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as the normal figure winning game. Although the example is not limited to this, if the remaining period of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the notification is not limited to this. It may be configured to notify that the person has won. In other words, even if a player who recognizes that he has won a normal figure wins a right-handed game, the timing at which it becomes difficult to win a ball into the second prize opening 1640 during the normal figure winning game, for example, due to the right-handed game. The game for winning a common card ends after the notification that the ball has been won is announced, which is longer than the period required for the fired ball to reach the second winning hole 1640 (the ball can be entered into the second winning hole 1640). It is recommended that the configuration be configured so that the period until the end of the period is shortened.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being fluctuated, if the notification condition of the first guide notification mode is satisfied, the period of time until the normal symbol winning game is executed is In the variable performance corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation during the period, perform a performance suggesting that you will win the regular figure winning game, and execute the performance in which the first guidance notification mode is set during the opening period of the regular figure winning game. By merging the production mode of the variation production of the special symbol fluctuation with the production mode of the opening production of the regular symbol winning game, it is possible to inform the player of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is executed by the special drawing performance executed based on the special drawing fluctuation, and the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing drawing is executed based on the general drawing fluctuation. By executing the second notification to indicate the lottery result, and further executing the first notification and the second notification with relevance (continuously or overlappingly), it is possible to It may be configured to perform a third notification for indicating the right-handed timing for the player to execute the right-handed game in response to a winning game.

In addition, the length of the opening period that is set is different depending on the type of game per game to be executed, and the opening period is set to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more. , the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern winning game and the normal pattern winning game in which a period of less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the opening period is made different. Also, when the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per common map to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, it is better than the case where the combination condition is not satisfied. , It may be configured such that a guide notification for making it easier to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 during a game with a common figure is executed. As a result, different benefits (to the second prize opening 640) are provided to the player depending on the type of game per common symbol to be executed, the type of guidance notification mode to be set, and whether or not the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the 17th embodiment, the method of setting the guidance notification mode to make it easier to win a ball to the second winning hole 640 during a game with a winning pattern has been explained, but when playing a specific winning game (for example, a game with a winning pattern) Based on the execution of Any device may be used as long as it makes it easier for the ball to enter a specific winning hole (for example, the second winning hole 640) by changing the game to a game). As a small winning game that is executed in the case of winning, a winning hole (for example, a V winning hole) that becomes open during the small winning game is placed in a position (for example, the right side game area) where the ball fired by the right-handed game can win a prize. 650a), it may be configured to use the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small winning game to set the guidance notification mode with the same concept as this embodiment.

<About the 22nd embodiment>
Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG. 469 is a front view schematically showing the board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second embodiment. The board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is different from the board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side gaming area is changed. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 469, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the velocity of the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 is reduced (the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed). ), delay members 701y and 701z are disposed so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 (ball passage time) is approximately 4 seconds. An operating gate 670 is provided at the downstream end of the first flow path 701.

Here, the operating gate 670 will be explained. In this embodiment, a starting gate 720a is provided which is made up of a photosensor that can detect the passage of a ball. In each of the embodiments described above, when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, the special symbol changes for a predetermined period of time (special symbol fluctuation), and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating jackpot winning, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed through the activation gate 670. It is configured so that That is, the activation gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing a jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating jackpot winning).

Furthermore, this embodiment differs from the above-described 18th embodiment in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. Also, the difference is that the configuration of the second winning hole 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Since the other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that the variation time of the selected special symbols and the variation time of the normal symbols are different from the above-described pachinko machine of the 18th embodiment. Specifically, a special special symbol with a variation time of 50 seconds is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery in the normal state. 1 variation pattern can be selected, and a special special symbol 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery in the normal state. Furthermore, a special regular symbol fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds is selectable as a regular symbol fluctuation pattern that can be selected when a long open winning of a regular symbol is won.

Then, as the end conditions of the small winning game, the first ending condition is satisfied when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period during which the V winning hole 650a is open in the small winning game is 1.5 seconds. A second termination condition that is satisfied when the condition is reached is defined.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, when the special symbol variation for which the special symbol 1 variation pattern is set is stopped, or when the regular symbol variation for which the special symbol/common symbol variation pattern is set is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, a guidance notification (see FIG. 366(b)) is executed to prompt the player to play a right-handed game as a gaming method.

Here, if the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on a jackpot win, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first channel 701 and passes through the activation gate 670, resulting in a jackpot. The game begins. As mentioned above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the activation gate 670, the jackpot game starts about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played. become.

In addition, if the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on a small winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and enters the V winning hole 650a, A jackpot game is started. As mentioned above, the time required for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the V winning hole 650a is approximately 4 seconds, and the small winning game ends when one ball wins during the small winning game. In addition, when a ball wins in the V winning hole 650a, the winning ball always passes through the V gate (V area), so about 5 seconds after playing the right-handed game. A jackpot game will be started.

Furthermore, if the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the winning of a normal figure, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702, passes through the second prize opening 640, If the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small win, the small win game is executed after a variable time of 1 second. Since the second channel 702 is formed so that the time it takes for the ball that passed through the second winning port 640 to reach the V winning port 650a is about 2 seconds, you can win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery. In this case, the ball that passed through the second winning hole 640 will win in the V winning hole 650a. Therefore, the jackpot game will start approximately 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played.

In other words, in this embodiment, the same fluctuation time is set for the case where a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case where a small win is won, and when the fluctuation time has elapsed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed to change the playing method at a certain timing, by having the player perform a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, it is possible to execute a jackpot game at the same timing. It is composed of

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current jackpot game was executed based on a jackpot win or a small win win. can. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiment, a jackpot game executed when a special symbol jackpot is won, and a jackpot game executed via a small jackpot (V jackpot game) are provided to the player. If the size of the benefits given (the number of prize balls during a jackpot game, the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) set after the jackpot ends) is different, it is important to know what triggered the jackpot play. By making it difficult to understand, the player can play the game while having expectations for the gaming state that will be set during or after the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, even if a specific win (normal pattern long open win) is won in the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot game is started after the guidance notification (right hit notification) is executed. The period until the winning is the same as when winning a special symbol jackpot or small jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the trigger for executing the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same variable time (50 seconds) is configured to be selected when the lottery result (special lottery result, general lottery result) is such that a jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variable effect using the same effect mode as a effect using the variable time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special fluctuation performance being executed is a special fluctuation performance based on special pattern fluctuations or a special fluctuation performance based on regular pattern fluctuations, even while the special fluctuation performance is being executed. be able to.

In addition, in the above example, a case was explained in which a special variation effect is set for a special variation pattern in which a variation time of 50 seconds is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, Of the variation effects corresponding to the set variation pattern, the above-mentioned special variation effect may be executed when the remaining variation time of the variation time reaches 50 seconds. Furthermore, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a special loss fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 50 seconds can be set, and a right-handed game will be announced after the fluctuation time has elapsed as a result of the special fluctuation performance. A performance pattern in which notification is not performed (failure performance) may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pattern (false pattern) in which a right-handed game is not guided even when a special variation effect is executed, thereby drawing the player's attention to the content of the special variation effect. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each embodiment, when a specific win (normal pattern long open win) is won in the drawing of normal symbols, a guide notification for guiding the right-handed game is executed, and the ball is won in the second prize by the right-handed game. When winning (passing) the mouth 640, if the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation will not be executed immediately, that is, the special figure 2 variation will not be executed until the special figure 1 variation that is being executed ends. A waiting period will be set during which the 2 fluctuations are not executed. In this case, it is preferable to perform a failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed even though the guidance notification is executed. In addition, in the case where the ball enters (passes) the second prize opening 640 in a right-handed game and the special drawing 2 lottery is immediately executed, the above-mentioned failure effect can also occur if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a loss. It is best to configure it to run.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the same performance mode in the case where the player wins the special drawing 2 lottery and in the case where the standby period for the special drawing 2 drawing is set. Then, if the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the waiting period has passed is a small winning prize, the small winning prize will be won from the above-mentioned failure effect. It is preferable that the configuration is such that an effect (resurrection effect) is executed that switches to an effect mode that indicates what has happened. Thereby, it is possible to execute a performance that can keep the player's expectations high until the end.

Note that the waiting period for the special drawing 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using the various techniques used in each of the embodiments described above, and the various techniques used in each embodiment may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, in the case where a right-handed game is played based on a winning of a common symbol, or when a small winning game is played based on a small winning winning, the ball is placed in a specific winning slot as in each of the above embodiments. (The second winning hole 640, the V winning hole 650a) may not be won (passed). Even in this case, the display mode may be configured to display the presentation mode described in the sixteenth embodiment (for example, see FIG. 370(b)). In addition, even if you win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery, the timing at which the ball fired in a right-handed game can pass near the second prize opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed) The failure effect may be executed in a pseudo manner at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning hole 650a (about 4 seconds after the guide notification mode is displayed).

In the embodiment described above, in the pachinko machine 10 that can execute a jackpot game based on a plurality of opportunities, the player is notified that a condition for executing a jackpot game is satisfied (in this embodiment, "right-handed hit notification"). By making the period from when the jackpot game is actually executed the same regardless of the trigger until the jackpot game is executed, players can be informed in advance that the jackpot game will be executed. Although it is notified, it is configured to make it difficult to understand when the jackpot game will be executed, so it is difficult to know which game mode the jackpot game will actually be executed, or the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which gaming state will be set.

Note that the notification mode for notifying that the conditions for executing the jackpot game have been established is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may include, for example, the production mode of the variable performance that is executed in response to each symbol variation. It is also possible to set a performance mode that indicates that the conditions for executing a jackpot game are satisfied, and to unify the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is executed until when the jackpot game is actually executed. If it is possible, the notification timing and notification mode may be set as appropriate.

In addition, when using an opportunity to execute a jackpot game through a small win game, no matter at what timing during the small win game a ball enters the V winning hole 650a, the predetermined timing is determined in advance after the small win game starts. It is preferable that the jackpot game is executed after a certain amount of time has elapsed. Thereby, the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is executed until when the jackpot game is actually executed can be more unified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that uses a configuration in which the type of jackpot game to be executed later (jackpot type) is set when the ball passes a specific area (V gate) during the small winning game, A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650a where balls can win, and on the upstream side thereof, the balls that have entered the V winning opening 650a are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates). By providing a sorting movable member and configuring the sorting movable member to move according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, after the small winning game is started, the distribution in the V prize opening 650a is The configuration is such that the ball passes through different specific regions (V gates) depending on the time it takes for the ball to reach the movable member. Then, by configuring a jackpot type in which a jackpot game with a different opening period is set when passing through each specific area (V gate), each specific area (V gate) is Even when using a configuration in which a jackpot game is executed based on the passing of the jackpot, the structure may be such that the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 becomes open in the jackpot game is unified.

<Example of performance response in case of power outage in each embodiment>
Next, among the various performances executed in each of the embodiments described above, the main control device 110 performs different game controls (special symbol fluctuation game, regular symbol fluctuation game, small winning game, jackpot game) during multiple periods. The following describes the control processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of a period effect (a series of effects, a final variable effect) that is executed over a period of time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment, the control processing content (various information stored in the RAM 203) of the main controller 110 is maintained even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. While the information is configured to be able to be temporarily retained (backed up), the control processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 (various information stored in the RAM 223) is changed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. It is configured so that it will be deleted if the

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the above-mentioned period effect is being executed based on the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (power cutoff state). ), when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power restoration), it becomes impossible to read out what period of performance was being executed immediately before the power outage state. There was a problem in that it was not possible to restart the period performance.

Therefore, in this example, a return command indicating the gaming status at the time of power restoration is configured to be set in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 402) (set after C910 in FIG. 402), The commands at the time of return include the presence or absence of special pattern fluctuations, the presence or absence of regular pattern fluctuations, the current gaming state, the presence or absence of jackpot games, the presence or absence of small winning games, the presence or absence of right-hand hit notification, and the remaining period until the gaming state changes. It is configured to set a command including each piece of information, and when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned return command, the current state (at the time of power restoration) is changed to a state in which a period effect can be executed (power outage). The present invention is configured to be able to execute a determination process (a pre-power outage performance determination process) for determining whether the current state is a state in which there is a possibility that a period performance may have been executed immediately before.

In the pre-power-out performance determination process, if it is determined that the current period performance cannot be executed (for example, during a jackpot game), the performance according to the command output from the main control device 110 is executed. If it is determined in the pre-power outage performance determination process that the current state is such that a period performance can be executed, a process is performed to restart the period performance based on a command output from the main controller 110 later. The preparation processing state is set so that a comment indicating that the performance is being prepared is displayed to the player indicating that the performance may be resumed.

Then, while the preparation processing state is set, the main controller 110 sends a command including information on the type of small win indicating a small win (a long open winning game) in which a series of effects are executed as a win related command. When it is determined that the small winning game has been output, the period performance is restarted from the start of the small winning game. With this configuration, the main control device 110 can perform period effects that span multiple periods in which different game controls (special figure variable game, regular figure variable game, small winning game, jackpot game) are performed. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the execution of (a series of performances, a final variable performance), it is possible to prevent all performances during that period from being discarded.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the execution conditions for a new effect (period effect) are met while the preparation processing state is set, a restriction means is provided that restricts the execution of the new effect (period effect). are doing. In other words, the process of resuming the performance (period performance) that was being executed before the power outage is configured to be executed with priority over the process of executing a new performance (period performance) after the power is restored. With this configuration, performances that have already been provided (partly provided) to players (period performances) can be executed with priority, so it is possible to provide performances that do not make players feel uncomfortable. . In addition, when the performance mode of the performance that was being executed before the power outage (period performance) is combined with the performance mode of a new performance (period performance) that has been set independently of that performance (period performance), the game It is possible to reliably prevent performance results that are advantageous to the user.

In addition, in the state where the preparation processing state is set, each time various commands are received from the main controller 110, there is a possibility that a performance (period performance) was executed immediately before the power was cut off. The system is configured to repeatedly execute a determination process to determine whether or not there is a power outage, and based on the determination result, if it is determined that the stage immediately before the power outage is a state in which the performance (period performance) cannot be performed, It is configured to erase comments indicating to the player that the performance (period performance) may be resumed during performance preparation, and to execute normal control processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

Furthermore, if the state in which the preparation processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main controller 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after the power is restored), the A display mode that determines that a performance (period performance) that may have been running before the power outage cannot be restarted, and indicates to the player that the performance (period performance) that may have been running before the power outage cannot be restarted (for example, , the comment "All presentation contents before the power outage have become invalid") are displayed, and the normal control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

With this configuration, even if it is not possible to restart the production (period production) that was being executed before the power outage, it is possible to notify the player that the performance could not be restarted, for example. , before the power outage, a mission performance such as ``If 3 reach occurs within 10 rotations, it's a jackpot!'' was executed, and after the power was restored, ``3 reach ” and confuses the player. In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, during a predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which a mission performance can be set (the number of special map fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)), the mission performance may overlap with the performance result. It may be configured such that the presentation mode is not set. Specifically, in games where a mission can be set to achieve a specific reach mode (for example, a reach of "3", "5", or "7") as a mission effect, a predetermined reach after power restoration is performed. During the period, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is configured so that it is not set, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It is better to configure it so that it can be set. With this configuration, the performance can be executed within the limited range even within a predetermined period after the power is restored. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, a specific reach mode can be set, so a mission performance (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power is cut off. Even if a "reach of 3" happens to occur within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the lottery result will be a win, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

As explained above, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the player wins a jackpot in a lottery of special symbols and plays a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) as an opportunity to execute a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. is executed (first opportunity), and a special symbol is drawn to win a small win, and during the small win game, the game ball is moved to a specific area (V winning device 650 which is opened during the small win game (Fig. A gaming machine that has two triggers: a trigger (second trigger) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in the V area (see 361); However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the trigger for executing a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery and execute a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game). The techniques of each of the embodiments described above may be applied to a gaming machine having only a trigger (first trigger).

In addition, in each of the embodiments described above, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that it is possible to set a special symbol high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol is increased after the end of the jackpot game. A probability state, a high probability state of normal symbols) and a potential state (a high probability state of special symbols, a low probability state of normal symbols) may be configured to be settable.

When a specific gaming state (potential state) is set as the gaming state, it is easier to execute a specific special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 drawing) than when other gaming states are set. Figure 2: Make it easier for the ball to enter the starting slot that triggers the lottery. Or shorten the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 lottery), and make small winning games based on small winnings of the special drawing 2 drawing more frequent. The game to be played may be configured to be executable. With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot in the special drawing lottery, it is possible to make the player play a game in which he can win many prize balls, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As explained above, in the 16th to 21st embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 having multiple jackpot execution opportunities for executing the jackpot game is used, and specifically, the first special symbol The first jackpot execution trigger is triggered by winning the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol (special pattern 1), and the small winning is won by the drawing of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), and the trigger is executed based on the small winning winning. A second jackpot execution opportunity is triggered by winning a ball in the V winning hole 650a (see FIG. 361), which is opened to a small winning game. In addition, as a special pattern variation execution trigger for executing the special symbol lottery, there is a first special pattern variation execution trigger that is triggered by placing a ball in the first winning hole 64 and a ball passing through the through gate 67. A ball is drawn into the second prize opening 640 (see Fig. 361), which is opened by the normal pattern winning game that is executed when a winning pattern is won in the normal pattern lottery. It has a second special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning a prize. Then, the jackpot game is executed through various game processes depending on the establishment of each jackpot execution opportunity and each special symbol variation execution opportunity. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play a jackpot game through various gaming processes, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, from one game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (the winning of a ball to the second prize opening 640 that triggers the execution of the special drawing 2 lottery), that one game If a transition condition for transitioning to another gaming state (normal state) in which it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than the current gaming state is met, an acquisition guide notification is executed to allow the player to acquire a specific lottery right during one gaming state. However, by configuring the system to make it easier to execute a specific lottery after transitioning to another gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm until the end of one gaming state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during a jackpot game than in a gaming state that is set after the jackpot game ends, acquisition guidance notification may be provided during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that a specific lottery is more likely to be executed after the jackpot game is completed.

Furthermore, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be varied by varying the ease with which a ball enters the winning hole (starting prize hole) that constitutes a specific lottery right, or the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right may be varied. By varying the length of the set period, the ease with which a particular lottery right can be acquired during the gaming state may be varied.

Furthermore, in the above-described 16th embodiment, the ease of acquiring a specific lottery right is made different between one gaming state and the other gaming states; Any system may be used as long as it can vary the degree of play and change the game content in other game states based on the benefits acquired during one game state. For example, it is possible to store (remain) balls in a predetermined area of the game board 13. A storage member (retention member) is provided, and the configuration is such that balls can be stored in the storage member more easily when one game state is set than when another game state is set. In other game states, playing the game with the balls stored in the storage member is more advantageous for the player than playing the game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Also good.

<23rd embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 541. Note that some of the configurations used in the twenty-third embodiment are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments, but they are given different numerals for easy understanding of the invention of the twenty-third embodiment. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as the corresponding configurations of each of the above embodiments, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the contents explained in each of the above-described embodiments may also be described redundantly with different reference numerals. Specifically, in each of the embodiments described above, each control process has been described with a symbol "S" or "C", but in this embodiment, a symbol "Z" has been assigned to each control process. The same process will be explained with different numbers and will be explained repeatedly.

First, the outline (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment has a first area (V area) into which a game ball can enter, inside a variable prize winning device 65, into which the ball can enter when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. , a second area (non-V area) different from the first area, and a sorting device (V (Yakushu) are provided. During the first jackpot, at least one game ball enters (passes) into the first area, and a special symbol probability change state is given after the jackpot ends. When no game ball enters one area, the time-saving state of normal symbols is given until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at maximum after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the game can be played with the expectation that the game balls will be sorted to the first area (V area) by the sorting device (V accessory).

The sorting device (V accessory) is basically maintained in a position that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (a position that cannot be distributed to the first area), and is used to distribute game balls in a predetermined round in a jackpot (for example, 5 In the second round), the arrangement is changed so that the game balls can be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round). . By allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible to allow the game ball to enter the first area, and the probability of changing the special symbol that is advantageous for the game state after the jackpot is over. can be moved to a state.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the sorting device during a specific period in the 5th round (for example, from 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds) The jackpot type (probable variable jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed with the opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds at the elapsed time, and the distribution during the specific period. A specific winning hole is opened in an opening/closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning hole 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round until 4.5 seconds have elapsed). There is at least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed. In the former type of jackpot (probable jackpot), in the fifth round of the jackpot, simply by continuing to shoot the game ball at the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a, the game ball is easily sent to the first area by the sorting device. Since it is possible to distribute the symbols, after the jackpot ends, the special symbols will almost always be in a variable state. On the other hand, in the latter type of jackpot (normal jackpot), even if you continue to shoot the game balls aiming at the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, all the game balls that reach the sorting device Since it is distributed to the second area, a variable probability state is not given (a time saving state is given).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 23rd embodiment, when the special symbol probability variable state is changed, each time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to fall to the special symbol low probability state. The configuration is such that a lottery is executed. To explain in more detail, when the lottery conditions for the special symbol are established in the probability variable state of the special symbol, a lottery is first performed to determine whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall to the low probability state (fall probability 1/500). If the corresponding lottery result is obtained, a jackpot lottery is executed with the lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol, while if the lottery result does not correspond to a fall, the high probability state of the special symbol is executed. The configuration is such that a jackpot lottery is executed at a lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, regardless of whether it is a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. The structure is such that it is maintained as follows. In other words, if a variable probability jackpot occurs and the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, it depends on whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall occurs before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. First, after the end of the jackpot, the normal state of the normal symbols continues until the lottery conditions for the 100th special symbol are met. For this reason, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the operations other than the jackpot probability are almost the same, so it is difficult to determine whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or the special symbol is in a variable probability state. can be made difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, if the previous jackpot was a normal jackpot and the special symbol was in a low probability state after the jackpot ended, or if the previous jackpot was a high probability jackpot but the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Even if the player falls into a low probability state during the period, the player will continue to have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will be in a variable probability state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. You can continue to let it flow. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for playing the game.

FIG. 471 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 471, the game board A13 includes a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61, 62,
It is constructed by assembling a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit A80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Fixed.

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. General prize opening 6
3. The first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the variable display unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and fixed with tapping screws etc. from the front side of the game board A13. has been done.

The front central part of the game board A13 is connected to the inner frame 1 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1).
It can be visually recognized from the front side of 2. Below, mainly with reference to FIG. 471, game board A13
The configuration of is explained below.

On the front of the game board A13, there is an outer rail 6 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a band-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board A13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61, 6.
2 and the outer edge member A73 made of resin that connects the rails (an area in which a prize opening, etc. is provided and a shot ball flows down).

Note that in this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 includes a metal plate-like member 75 (see FIG. 308).
By incorporating this, the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened, but the details will be described later.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning a prize opening 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, the route passing through the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the first
The ball will be launched with the aim of winning the ball into the winning hole 64, but the first winning hole 64
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning hole 64 without reaching the ball wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general prize winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of influencing the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning hole 63, the more likely it is to generate a winning number in the first winning hole 64 with a small number of balls during normal play.

On the other hand, in a game in which the time is shortened or the probability is changed, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the second prize opening 640 on the route passing on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning hole 640 without reaching the winning hole 640 wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning hole 63 disposed on the right side of the gaming area is disposed with the aim of influencing the game when the probability is changing or when the time is being shortened. For example, the higher the possibility of winning a prize in this general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the decrease in balls during probability change or time saving.

By suppressing the loss of balls, you can win the next jackpot before the balls held in the upper tray 17 run out, even if you do not play the game in a firing mode that stops the ball firing at the right time during the probability change (even if you keep hitting it). Therefore, it is possible to reduce stress (feeling of fatigue) experienced by the player while playing the game. Therefore, the number of revolutions until the next jackpot frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 10
Even in cases where the number of rotations exceeds 0, the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is fired with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning opening 65a on a route that passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning opening 640
A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side flows not to the specific winning hole 65a side (left side) but to the general winning hole 63 side (right side) and enters the general winning hole 63a. The prize balls associated with the winning in the general winning hole 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls in the specific winning hole 65a, so the player can pay out the prize balls due to the winning in the special winning hole 63 by the end of the special gaming state. In addition to the prize balls based on the planned number of winning balls to the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to obtain prize balls based on the number of winning balls to the general winning hole 63.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the gaming area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of payout prize balls that the player can acquire in the special gaming state. Here, as the number of winnings in the general winning hole 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning hole 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, depending on the location and number of general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream flow path, the number of rounds and counts (specified number of winnings for each round) in the special gaming state are the same for control reasons. Also, the time required for the special game state to end (longer or shorter) and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

It should be noted that the display mode when displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the general winning hole 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings to the specific winning hole 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the general winning hole 63 may be displayed, or a combination of them may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during fixed change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal,
Also, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 6 without the electric accessory is closed.
4, the ball is fired so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery, It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during the probability change or time saving period, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second prize opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in the open state and it is easy to win in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes the ball through the through gate 67, and fires the ball at the electric accessory 640a.
It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by opening the second prize opening 640 and winning a prize in the second prize opening 640.

In addition, in the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is asymmetrical, and balls are required to be hit on the left and right sides depending on the game state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be left-right symmetrical (see Figure 471).
. In this case, you can aim for the first winning hole 64 by hitting right, or you can aim for the second winning hole 64 by hitting left.
You can also aim for Therefore, depending on the game status (whether the game is in fixed play, short time play, or regular play), the player can be told how to shoot the ball between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. You can eliminate the need to do so. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include drive motor AMT1, drive motor AM
T2 and a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 471 etc., the second ball entry hole (second winning hole) 640 is a game ball flowing down the channel provided on the right side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter (a position where a game ball flowing down the channel provided on the left side in a front view is unable (difficult) to enter). That is, a variable probability state in which a time-saving state of a normal symbol is set in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entry port 640); In the time saving state, by firing game balls toward the channel on the right side when viewed from the front, game balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, 1 out of 3 balls). Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is difficult to open (that is, the game ball does not enter the second ball entry port 640). Therefore, the position where the game ball flowing down the channel provided on the left side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the position where the game ball flowing down the channel provided on the right side in front view) can enter the ball. The game is played using a game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at a first ball entry hole (first winning hole) 64 provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, firing the game ball toward the channel on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the third symbol display device 81 will be referred to as "left-handed hitting," and firing the game ball toward the channel on the right side when viewed from the front. Shooting a game ball is called "right-handed hitting." In addition, the special symbol lottery executed based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance (first prize opening) 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery). The special symbol lottery that is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance (second prize opening) 640 is called the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). ).

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 472. FIG. 472(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a symbol display device 81. FIG. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 487), so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. A pattern row is displayed.

The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" attached to the rear symbol made of a wooden box, among which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, for the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8), attached symbols imitating characters such as shields, swords, and cloaks are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box; Small even numbers are added in green to the lower right side of the figure, and are displayed in front of the attached symbols.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 487), which will be described later, is a jackpot (jackpot A to E), if the same main symbol The arrangement is such that a fluctuating display of matching is performed, and a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

Furthermore, if the type of jackpot won is a regular jackpot, a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols with even numbers will always be displayed will be displayed, while if it is a probability variable jackpot, the same main symbols with even numbers will be displayed. Either a fluctuating display in which the characters line up or a fluctuating display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned are executed. In other words, by executing a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the jackpot but also the variable probability state after the jackpot is finalized. In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, the rate at which a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are executed in the event of a guaranteed variable jackpot is set to an extremely low probability (for example, a rate of 1%). There is. As a result, it is possible to make it possible to make it rare that when a jackpot is won, it is possible to know that the jackpot is a variable jackpot from the types of symbols that are aligned. As mentioned above, until the 100th special symbol lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained (it can be determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a whether it is in the variable probability state or not. Therefore, by configuring the system so that it is difficult to determine whether or not it is a guaranteed variable jackpot based on the type of main symbols that are aligned when winning a jackpot, it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot is won or not until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. During this period, a situation in which it is unclear whether the state is variable probability state or time saving state can occur more frequently. Therefore, whether it is a jackpot with variable probability or a normal jackpot, the player's responsibility for being in a variable probability state from the end of the jackpot until the end of the 100th special symbol lottery is It can maintain a sense of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 472(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. An area Dm, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small area Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later). It is constituted by a small area Ds3 for displaying the variable effect of the third symbol in a reduced size while executing the continuous hit effect).

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (reserved balls) for which movement has not been performed among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol), The small area Ds2 is an area that displays the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed (the number of held balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that entered the second ball entrance 640, and is a small area Ds2. Ds3 is an area where the variable effect is displayed in a reduced size when a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By displaying the variable effect in a reduced size, it is possible to prevent a display effect different from the variable effect from being obscured by the third symbol and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 472(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display indicating the expectation level of jackpot is displayed in the background of the third symbol. Performances, etc. are performed.

If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while a variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37A, 37B), the number of times the ball enters the ball is up to four times. The number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of 4, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B, and the small area Ds2 It is also shown in In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number of the first special symbol, and in the small region Ds2, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number of the second special symbol. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 or the small region Ds2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved pitch number symbols are displayed, This indicates that the number of pending pitches is 4. Further, if the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed, this indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 balls, that is, there are no reserved balls. In FIG. 472(b), the case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4 and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 is illustrated.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, although the configuration is such that balls entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are held up to a maximum of four times each, the maximum number of balls that may be held is four times. The number of times is not limited to 3, or may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls can be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four can be displayed for the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (eg, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 486, various types of entertainment performances executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 476, in the present 23rd embodiment, the normal symbols are executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) in which the time saving state is set. We will explain the display effects. As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state. It consists of In other words, whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state or the variable probability state, unless a jackpot occurs, the special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times after the previous jackpot ends. Until then, the configuration is such that the time-saving state of normal symbols is maintained. This time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained even if the special symbol's variable probability state changes to the special symbol's low probability state until it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify not only the state but also the timing at which the special symbol falls from a variable probability state to a low probability state.

However, if the state of the special symbols of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is a variable probability state or a low probability state) is configured to be completely indistinguishable, the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set While this continues, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may not be sufficiently increased. Therefore, in the present 23rd embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to allow the player to predict the probability of the probability change state to some extent. More specifically, each time a variable display of special symbols is executed, one back mode is selected from among three types of back modes that suggest the degree of expectation of the probability change state, taking into consideration the gaming state at the time of execution. The configuration is as follows. As a result, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the state of the special symbol is predicted from the aspect of the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 473(a), a display mode (back view mode) in which the current state is a variable probability state and in which the degree of expectation is relatively low will be described. As shown in FIG. 473(a), when the back mode (cave exploration mode), which is in a variable state and has a relatively low expectation level, is set, a character 801 imitating an adventurer carries a sword and a torch. A display mode for exploring inside the cave is displayed. In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front, the remaining number of drawings for special symbols until the number of drawings that may end the time-saving state of the normal symbol (time-saving state of the normal symbol) is displayed. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area 802 for indicating the guaranteed number of times is displayed. In the example of FIG. 473(a), 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times. That is, the state after the special symbol lottery has been executed 10 times after the end of the jackpot is illustrated. Further, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area 803 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. Inside this display area 803, horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical right-handed images with the words "Right-handed" displayed are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, a "cave exploration mode" is displayed. is displayed. Due to these display modes, the time saving state of the normal symbol will continue until at least 90 more special symbol draws are executed (the time saving state may end when the 90 drawings are completed); It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game can be played by playing right-handed. Furthermore, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 473(b)) and the super temple search mode (see FIG. 474), which will be described later, the display content is more modest, allowing players to intuitively understand the It can be made to understand that the possibility that the condition continues is relatively low.

FIG. 473(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a back mode (temple search mode) in which the current state is a variable probability state and has a higher degree of expectation than the cave search mode is set. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which a character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-click images in the display area 803 indicate "temple search mode". will be changed to The display content in the temple search mode looks brighter than in the cave search mode and tends to give the player a flashy impression, so the player has a relatively high expectation that the game will be in a variable state. can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (super-temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation is even higher in a variable probability state than in the temple search mode is set. When this super-temple search mode is set, the word "CHANCE" is displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are installed on the pillars of the temple. Further, on the upper left side of the text "temple search mode" in the display area 803, a substantially circular display area 804 in which the text "super" is displayed is displayed. These display modes can give the player a more flashy impression than the temple search mode (see FIG. 473(b)), and can further improve expectations for the variable probability state. Note that this super temple search mode is a back mode that may be set (transitioned) only when the gaming state is in the variable state and the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state. In other words, when you shift to super temple search mode, not only is the variable state confirmed, but it is also confirmed that the variable state will continue at least until the pending balls at the time of transition are exhausted, so you can shift to super temple search mode. By doing so, it is possible to please the players.

In this way, in the present 23rd embodiment, during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the cave search mode where the expectation level of the probability variable state is relatively low, and the temple search mode where the expectation level of the probability variable state is relatively high. , and 3 of the super temple search mode that not only confirms that the state is in a fixed state but also that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the pending state (at least the fixed state continues until the pending state is exhausted). The configuration is such that one of the types of back modes is set at the time of execution of a variable display performance based on the lottery results of special symbols. With this configuration, while the time saving state of the normal symbols is set, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the gaming state is in a variable state, so if the game state is predicted to be in a variable state and the mode shifts to the super temple mode, the player On the other hand, it can make you feel happy that your predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the super temple mode even though it was predicted that the special symbol will be in a low probability state, the player may feel happy that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super-temple mode, it is guaranteed that the lottery results corresponding to falls will not be included in the hold (at least the lottery results for the number of hold balls can be executed with variable jackpot probability) Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation of hitting the jackpot while the player is on hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, in the present 23rd embodiment, a special symbol is drawn a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) without winning the jackpot in a state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The probability variation continuation suggestion effect that is executed when is executed will be explained. FIG. 475 is a diagram showing the display mode at the start of this probability change continuation suggestion performance. This variable probability continuation suggestion performance is a performance for suggesting whether the gaming state is a variable probability state or not, and is executed from the 96th variable display performance to the 99th variable display performance after the end of the jackpot. That is, this is an effect that is executed until just before the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, which is the guaranteed number of times in the time saving state. In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, in the time saving state, the remaining number of time saving times is subtracted when the special symbol starts changing. That is, in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot, the number of time saving times becomes 0 at the start of the 100th fluctuating display, so while the 100th fluctuating display is being executed, the time saving state has already ended (transition to the normal state). (completed state). Therefore, even if it is a variable probability state or a shortened time state, it is configured to notify whether or not it is in a variable probability state at the 99th variable display performance in which the shortened time state of normal symbols is surely maintained. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the variable probability state continues until the result of the probability variation continuation suggestion performance is confirmed (that is, it is difficult to identify whether the variable probability state continues or not from the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention and play the game by using the probability change continuation suggestion performance.

As shown in FIG. 475, when the probability change continuation suggestion performance is started, a performance in which a door 806 appears in front of a character 801 imitating an adventurer is performed. Further, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the words "Door break-through mode starts!!" and the words "Probability change continues if the door is broken through!?" are displayed. Furthermore, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to "door breakthrough mode." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the character 801 is able to break through the door, it means that the variable probability state continues. In this continuous change suggestion production (door breakthrough mode), the effect of attacking the door 806 is executed every time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can be destroyed (broken through) in the end, the probability change state is reached. An effect is executed that notifies the continuation of.

FIG. 476(a) is a diagram showing a performance mode that suggests that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation performance mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476(a), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by slashing it with a sword, thereby destroying (breaking through) the door 806. ) is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 476(b) is a diagram illustrating a performance mode that suggests that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively high in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this highly anticipated production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 476(b), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by hitting it with a huge hammer. A performance that attempts to destroy (break through) is executed.

It is intuitively obvious to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than cutting with a sword in order to destroy the door 806, so it is better to hit with a hammer. , it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a high expectation of breaking through the door 806. Therefore, while the probability change continuation suggestion performance is being executed, the player can play the game with the expectation that the performance of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, at the start of the probability change continuation suggestion performance, the lottery results from the 96th to the 99th time, which is the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, are read in advance, and the probability variation state is maintained until the 99th special symbol lottery. It is configured to determine whether or not this continues, and if the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol drawing, the selection rate of production scenarios in which highly anticipated attack patterns are likely to occur is increased. . On the other hand, if you fall into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or you were in a time-shortening state after the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern will occur. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-play production scenarios is high. In this way, by configuring the performance mode to be set based on the gaming state at the end of the performance, it is possible to more accurately notify the gaming state after the performance ends.

Here, if the configuration is such that the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the production, the probability variation continuation suggestion production will fall to a low probability state while the probability variation continuation suggestion production is being executed, and the continuation of the probability variation state will not be announced. Despite this, there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end when the 100th special symbol lottery begins. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance and the actual operation are inconsistent, causing the player to distrust the Pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure to this problem, it is possible to construct a performance that suggests a definite change continuation by a performance that can be completed with one change, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient performance period, so it is difficult to ensure a sufficient performance period. It becomes difficult to become

On the other hand, in the present 23rd embodiment, the structure is such that the probability variation continuation suggestion performance is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability variation continuation suggestion production is , is configured to be determined based on the gaming state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the performance, and it is possible to diversify the performance modes. In addition, if the probability is variable at the start of the performance and there are no reserved balls until the end of the performance, the system is configured such that a performance that is likely to generate an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation level is selected. ing. This means that the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare for a symbol to fall to a low probability state of a special symbol within the production period (with a relatively high probability of a probability change state). This is because the performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the transition of various states after the end of the probability variable jackpot in the 23rd embodiment will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 477(a), a description will be given of the state transition in the case where the probability variable jackpot falls to a low probability state within 100 times after the end of the probability variable jackpot. As shown in Figure 477(a), if the player falls within 100 times, the state will shift to the special symbol low probability state at the time of the fall, but in the normal symbol time saving state, the special symbol lottery will be executed 100 times. It will continue until it is done. Then, in the variable continuation suggestion performance executed from the 96th to the 99th variable display performance, a performance that fails to break through the door 806 is performed, and a transition to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 477(b) is a diagram showing the state transition in the case where the lottery falls to the low probability state of the special symbol in the 100th special symbol lottery after the end of the probability-variable jackpot. As shown in FIG. 477(b), if the jackpot falls 100 times or later after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbol and the variable probability state of the special symbol are maintained until it falls. Therefore, in the probability variation continuation suggestion performance that is executed from the 96th to the 99th execution period of the variable display, a production that successfully breaks through the door 806 is executed to notify the continuation of the probability variation state.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, in the same way as when you fall in the special symbol lottery after the 100th time, even if you get a jackpot in the special symbol lottery during the time saving state of the normal symbol, you will receive the regular symbol at the start of the variation. It is configured such that the time saving state of the symbol ends. Therefore, if the time saving state is ended when the number of drawings of the special symbol is less than 100 (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), the winning of the jackpot is confirmed at that point. On the other hand, if the time saving state is terminated after the 100th time (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means either a jackpot or a fall. And, since the probability of winning the jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), even if the time saving state ends at the start of the fluctuation after 100 times, it will still be a jackpot. can be expected. Therefore, since the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving state continues, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the press stop effect in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. This press-stop performance is a performance in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swinging operation member 10310 is pressed. In other words, this is an effect in which the stop timing of each symbol row can be set to any timing desired by the player, depending on the timing of the operation of the PUSH button 10317 by the player.

FIG. 478(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. In this press stop effect, as shown in FIG. 478(a), button images imitating the PUSH button 10317 (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image 807aR) is displayed. Further, below each button image, a validity period gauge (left validity period gauge 807bL, center validity period gauge 807bC, right validity period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid is displayed. . These display contents allow the player to easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 478(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the player performs the first operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the press stop effect. As shown in FIG. 478(b), when the first operation (press) is executed, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the second operation is executed within the operation validity period, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is executed, the center symbol column is stopped and displayed. In this way, by configuring the timing of symbol stopping to be arbitrarily determined by the player, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the structure is such that each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the player's operation, if the player operates too quickly, there may be too much time left after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure against this, in the present 23rd embodiment, if the stop operation is executed three times early (for example, within 1 second after the start of the validity period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. By configuring the central symbol row to be stopped and displayed after a specific performance, the period after the stoppage display is suppressed from being too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 479(a), based on the third operation (press) being performed, a plurality of symbols including a specific symbol (a symbol with the words Chance Charge) are displayed. After the symbols (3) have moved up and down in the central symbol row (i.e., after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as a stop symbol in the central symbol row), a specific symbol It is configured to execute a performance (chance charge promotion performance) in which symbols other than the (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation validity period at the time of performing the stop operation of the center symbol row (the third press of the PUSH button 10317), the center symbol row will be immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge will be applied. By adopting a configuration that switches whether or not to fill the time with an inciting effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed from becoming unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural presentation mode can be realized.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, there is also a separate effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the center symbol column in the press stop effect. In this case, the chance charge symbols are stopped and displayed through the chance charge promotion effect (see FIG. 479(a)), regardless of the timing at which the stop operation for the center symbol row is executed. When this stop display of the chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 479(b)), which will be described later. By setting a performance pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, even if the operation stop performance is selected as a mere missed performance and a chance charge stimulation performance occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge performance. It is possible to make the player think that there is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 479(b) and FIG. 480, the mode of performance of the above-mentioned chance charge performance will be explained. FIG. 479(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the chance charge performance is started. When the chance charge effect is started, a character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the character 801 is set in a manner in which the surroundings are emitted light (in a manner covered with an aura). be done. Further, to the right of the character 801, a vertically elongated substantially rectangular spirit gauge KG is displayed. This spirit gauge KG is for displaying the level of spirit accumulated in the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in 1 to 6 levels. Furthermore, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, the words ``The more spirit you have, the more chances you have in stock'' are displayed. Furthermore, the words "Chance Charge 5 times remaining" are displayed in the display area 803. In the 1st chance charge effect, the character 801 attempts to accumulate spirit five times, and the amount of spirit accumulated is determined by the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of aura it surrounds) and the spirit gauge KG. It is notified by the meter amount. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the more motivated the player is, the better things will be.

FIG. 480(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 480(a), in addition to the size of the light surrounding the character 801 (amount of aura surrounding the character) and the meter amount of the spirit gauge KG, the level of spirit accumulated is also determined by the characters displayed in the display area 805. will be notified. The example in FIG. 480(a) illustrates a state in which the spirit has accumulated to the 5th stage out of 6, and the display area 805 displays the words "Charge level 5!!". These display contents allow the player to easily understand the amount of spirit that has finally been accumulated.

Note that the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge performance is consumed in order to generate some kind of chance-up performance at each timing until the reserved balls are exhausted at the start of the chance charge performance. Chance-up effects are effects that increase the expectation of a jackpot, such as changes in the display format of the number of reserved pitches, the occurrence of so-called pseudo-runs, the occurrence of cut-in effects, and changes in lines written in red. Occurrence, etc. Note that the spirit gauge is configured so that it is always consumed until it reaches 0. In other words, it is configured so that it will not be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined mainly based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance. After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied by taking into consideration the lottery results of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

FIG. 480(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when consuming the spirit gauge. FIG. 480(b) illustrates a case where one gauge of the spirit gauge is consumed and a so-called pending change effect is executed as a chance-up effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 480(b), at the same time as the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases (is consumed) by one gauge, the display mode of the third reserved ball number pattern Hz3 in the small area Ds1 changes from white to blue. A production that changes (increases expectations) is executed. In this way, by configuring a structure in which some kind of effect (chance up effect) that increases the expectation of winning is executed as the amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, it is possible to , the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481, a description will be given of a change over time in the display mode (performance mode) in the variable display performance in which the press stop performance is set. First, referring to FIG. 481(a), in a press stop performance that does not develop into a chance charge performance, if the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed after 1 second from the start of the validity period. We will explain the changes over time in the performance mode. As shown in FIG. 481(a), when a fluctuating display is executed in which only the press stop performance is set (that is, the chance charge performance is not executed), the normal A fluctuating display (a fluctuating display in which each symbol row simply fluctuates at high speed in the vertical direction) is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, a press stop effect (see FIG. 478(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed after 1 second (in the example of Fig. 481(a), 2 seconds have elapsed) after the effective period of the press-down stop effect starts, the left symbol row that has already been stopped , and in addition to the right symbol row, the center symbol row is displayed in a pseudo-stop display. Note that the pseudo stop display means that the display is displayed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, in a manner that vibrates with an extremely small amplitude). This pseudo stop continues until the stop display timing of the original variable display (timing at which a stop command is received from the main controller 110), and each symbol row is completely stopped and displayed when the stop display timing is reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 481(b), in the press stop performance that does not develop into a chance charge performance, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. We will explain how the presentation mode changes over time when the game is played. As shown in FIG. 481(b), when a fluctuating display is executed in which only the press stop performance is set (that is, the chance charge performance is not executed), the normal The variable display is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed within 1 second or less after the effective period of the press stop effect starts (0.5 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 481(b)), the chance charge excitement effect is executed. After (see FIG. 479(a)) is executed, an effect is executed in which a combination of missing symbols is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed 3 times relatively early after the start of the validity period, the period until the stop display can be bridged (filled) by the chance charge inciting effect, so there will be no missed symbols. The transition of the performance mode until the stop display can be made to look natural. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance mode that makes the player feel less uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 481(c), a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode when the chance charge performance develops. As shown in FIG. 481(c), even when the chance charge performance develops, the transition of the performance mode is the same as when the chance charge performance is not performed until the press stop performance is executed. In the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge excitement effect (Figure 479(a) ) occurs, and then, after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge effect.

In this way, in the present 23rd embodiment, even in a variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, the chance charge promotion effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so that the chance charge effect can be executed. It is possible to create a feeling of anticipation for more times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 to 484, an explanation will be given of an interrupt continuous hit performance, which is a type of entertainment performance in the twenty-third embodiment. This interrupting continuous hit performance is a display style performance that appears as if a performance different from the display performance that had been displayed up to that point suddenly interrupts the normal fluctuating display or during the reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482(a), the image of the normal variable display effect is executed by executing the interrupt continuous hit effect during the execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 472(b)). A cut-in area CR is formed (displayed) in which the monster's face is displayed in close-up, superimposed on (on the layer on the near side). That is, as shown in FIG. 482(a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a band shape extending downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 482(a), this cut-in region CR has a display range that occupies about 70% of the display screen area of the third symbol display device 81, and a monster is modeled in the center of the cut-in region CR. The image will be enlarged and displayed. Further, a display area 805 in which the words "Monster group assault!!" is displayed is displayed (formed) above the image imitating a monster in the cut-in area CR. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that a completely different performance has been performed (interrupted) from the performance that was being performed until the cut-in area CR was displayed. can be done. While the cut-in region CR is being formed (that is, while the interrupt continuous hit performance is being executed), the display performance that has been being executed immediately before is interrupted. That is, all the display effects of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are temporarily stopped, and when the interrupt continuous hit effect ends, the effect mode is restarted from the situation at the time of interruption. Note that with regard to audio (music), it is possible to switch between pausing (interrupting) and continuing playback depending on the situation. In the twenty-third embodiment, when an interrupt continuous hit effect is executed during execution of a normal variable display, both the display mode and the audio mode are controlled to be interrupted until the end of the interrupt continuous touch effect, If an interrupt continuous hit effect is executed after a reach has occurred (while the reach is changing), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because a flashier music (BGM) is played after a reach occurs compared to when a normal variable display is being executed, so the interruption of the relatively flashy BGM creates a sense of discomfort for the player. The purpose is to prevent people from harboring children.

After the interrupt continuous press effect is executed and the cut-in area CR in which an image resembling a monster, etc. is displayed is formed, the player is prompted to press the PUSH button 10317 continuously (repeat press). The display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 482(b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and below it, a button image BG indicating that the operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid is displayed. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period in a gauge format is displayed. Furthermore, above the button image BG, the words "Continuous Hit" and images of three arrows pointing toward the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Furthermore, the words "Reduce monsters by hitting them repeatedly!!" are displayed in the display area 805, and a display area 808 is formed on the right side of the button image BG, in which the words "100 monsters remain" are displayed ( Is displayed. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the more the PUSH button 10317 is pressed within the effective period of consecutive hits, the more the number of monsters can be reduced.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as types of interrupt continuous hit effects, which differ in at least the number of monsters that can be reduced during the valid continuous hit period (the lower limit of the remaining number of monsters to be displayed). It is being Basically, the system is configured such that the more monsters are defeated (the fewer the number of remaining monsters), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. More specifically, when an interrupt continuous hit effect is set for the fluctuating display of a jackpot, it is a type of effect that makes it possible to defeat all 100 monsters (reducing the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, the variable display of failures is configured so that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (the number can only be reduced to 3 at most).

In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of monsters to be defeated (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is configured to be varied depending on the length of the remaining validity period. More specifically, the configuration is such that the longer the remaining validity period, the fewer the number of subjugations (number of subtractions) due to one press. With this configuration, even if a player is playing a game with a fast pace of consecutive hits, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being decremented to the lower limit at an early stage after the start of the performance.

Here, conventionally, as a type of entertainment performance, there has been known an operation performance in which the performance mode is changed by continuously operating an operating means such as an operation button for a predetermined period of time. In this operation production, an upper limit value for the number of times the production mode can be varied (development number) is generally set for each production, and by increasing the number of operations to a specific number, the development mode can be varied up to the upper limit. Things were normal. However, in a performance with such specifications, when a player with a fast operation speed is playing the game, the performance reaches the upper limit stage (variable) at an early stage, so that the upper limit stage has a low expectation level. There is a problem in that if the game is at the stage where the game is showing, the player's interest may be lost. Furthermore, if a player with a slow operation speed is playing the game, the player may not be able to perform the operation the specified number of times to develop the upper limit development mode, even though he or she is actively operating the game. There is a possibility that the validity period will end and the player's interest will be lost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 23rd embodiment, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by one press is varied according to the length of the remaining validity period, and the longer the remaining validity period, the more Since the configuration is configured so that the number of monsters to be defeated is small, even if the button is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the monsters from being defeated to the lower limit number at an early stage. That is, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the presses being stopped at the remaining 10 monsters or the remaining 4 monsters, which are likely to be set in the event of a loss, and the player's expectations for a jackpot are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is playing the game with a slow pressing pace, if the player presses the button in the latter half of the effective period, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated will be more likely to be selected, so the player can reach the target number within the lower limit of the number of monsters. possibility can be increased. Therefore, even a player who presses at a slow pace can be entertained by the interrupting continuous hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483(a), in a performance where continuous operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid, such as an interrupt continuous press effect, the operation (pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the valid period of continuous press of the relevant effect. The output mode of the audio that is output every time it is detected will be explained. As shown in FIG. 483(a), each time a press (operation) of the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the valid period of repeated presses, the audio data is played back in the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 501), which will be described later. Audio data corresponding to the press is played back to either CN2 or CN3 among the plurality of channels provided. More specifically, when a press is detected for the first time during the valid continuous press period, first audio data (first continuous press sound) is reproduced for CN2. As shown in FIG. 483(a), the audio data corresponding to the first continuous hit sound is composed of audio data that, when reproduced, outputs the sound "bishii". Further, when a second press is detected during the valid continuous press period, second audio data (second continuous press sound) is played back to CN3. As shown in FIG. 483(a), the audio data corresponding to the second continuous hit sound is composed of audio data that, when reproduced, outputs the sound "Bashii". From then on, every time a press is detected, the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound for CN2 and the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound for CN3 are alternately performed. repeated. In this way, by configuring the configuration to output audio data corresponding to a different audio each time a press is detected, it is possible to diversify audio modes during repeated tapping. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game during the continuous play valid period. In addition, if the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are simply played back alternately on a single channel (in other words, the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is controlled). Compared to the case where the repeating configuration is used), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output in duplicate) ), it is possible to make the sound mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. To be more specific, when a single channel is configured to alternately play the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound, when a player who plays the consecutive hits quickly performs a repeated tapping operation, the first part of each audio data is This results in a monotonous sound pattern in which only the words are repeated alternately. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that multiple channels play multiple pieces of audio data in sequence, the output of one piece of audio data played on one channel will not be interrupted, and other audio data will be played on other channels. can be played. In other words, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on another voice data can be synthesized and output. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the first part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify sound modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that in the present 23rd embodiment, the configuration is such that each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced on two channels, thereby diversifying the audio format. The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially and alternately reproduced on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify audio modes. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the configuration may be such that the audio data is sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played ends) Since the period of time can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify audio modes. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be changed depending on the interval between repeated hits. Specifically, for example, if a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between successive hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of audio modes are sequentially played on three channels. On the other hand, if a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between successive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data may be sent sequentially to two channels. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the data is played back (alternately). With this configuration, the sound output mode can be varied according to the interval between repeated hits, so it is possible to realize a game in which the interval between repeated hits is adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the configuration is such that one of the consecutive tapping sounds is output in conjunction with the multiple tapping operation, but under certain conditions, the configuration may be such that the multiple tapping sound can be output even if the multiple tapping operation is not performed. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated tapping sound output during the valid period of the repeated tapping operation is the first repeated tapping sound, the second consecutive tapping sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first consecutive tapping sound and the second consecutive tapping sound are output as a set in response to the multiple tapping operation, the last sound output is the first consecutive tapping sound. (In other words, the second continuous hit sound that becomes the pair is no longer output), and it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the audio mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last repeated tapping sound is the first repeated tapping sound, the control for outputting the second repeated tapping sound after the end is controlled by the variable display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation). With this configuration, for players who wish to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last repeated hit sound output during an interrupt repeated hit presentation can be made the first repeated hit sound. It is possible to realize the gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a repeated tapping operation is detected in a state where no sound is being played, the first repeated tapping sound may be always output. In other words, if the interval between repeated hits is so long that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the first repeated hit sound has finished playing, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible for players who wish to diversify the audio formats to perform the repeated tapping operation at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated tapping performance. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 483(b), a description will be given of the correspondence between the press timing during the continuous hit valid period of the interrupt continuous hit effect and the subtracted number of monsters. In the example of FIG. 483, explanation will be given by taking as an example the correspondence relationship in the interrupt continuous hit performance of the type that makes it possible to subjugate up to 100 monsters. FIG. 483(b) is a graph showing the correspondence between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the press of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters defeated (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 483(b), the later the timing of the press, the greater the number of monsters to be subtracted (the number of subdued monsters). Thereby, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being defeated quickly to the lower limit number. That is, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the presses being stopped at the remaining 10 monsters or the remaining 4 monsters, which are likely to be set in the event of a loss, and the player's expectations for a jackpot are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is playing the game with a slow pressing pace, if the player presses the button in the latter half of the effective period, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated will be more likely to be selected, so the player can reach the target number within the lower limit of the number of monsters. possibility can be increased. Therefore, even a player who presses at a slow pace can be entertained by the interrupting continuous hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the correspondence between the press timing and the subtracted number of monsters is not limited to that shown in FIG. 483(b), and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, by reducing the slope (for example, by halving) the correspondence shown in FIG. It can be made more difficult to subtract monsters until it becomes. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the repeated hits more seriously, it is possible to further increase the player's desire to participate in the interrupt repeated hitting performance. On the other hand, if the slope is increased, it will be relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the minimum number of monsters is reached by repeated hits, so even players who are not good at continuous hits will be able to reduce the number of monsters to the minimum. This allows easy confirmation. Therefore, even players who are not good at continuous play can be encouraged to actively participate in the interrupt continuous play performance. Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, the correspondence between the press timing and the number of monsters to be subtracted was configured to be a proportional relationship (linear function). A designer can set any correspondence relationship such as a correspondence relationship or an exponential correspondence relationship. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to differ depending on the type of performance of the interrupt continuous hit performance. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to predict the expected jackpot based on the change in the number of subtractions in consecutive hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 484, a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode during execution of the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hit performance is set. First, with reference to FIG. 484(a), a change over time in the performance mode during execution of the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hit performance is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 484(a), when a variable effect for which an interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, a normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variable display is being executed, the variable display BGM (song 1) corresponding to the normal variable display is played in a loop. This song 1 consists of three melody parts: A part, B part, and C part, and by performing loop playback for 10 seconds, the playback position will be exactly at the end when 10 seconds have elapsed. It is composed of

Then, as shown in FIG. 484(a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have elapsed, and the display mode changes to a normal reach variation display mode. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 484(a), the audio is switched to BGM (song 2) corresponding to the normal reach variation. Similarly to song 1, this song 2 is also loop-played, so that the playback time is set so as to end at the same time as the normal reach effect.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupting continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. , the normal fluctuating display performance is interrupted, and an interrupt continuous hit performance is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hit performance is executed, not only the display mode (normal fluctuating display performance) but also the sound (normal fluctuating display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have passed since the start of the variation (7 seconds have passed since the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance), the interrupt continuous hit performance is ended, and the normal variable display performance and variable display BGM are resumed from the interrupted point. Thereafter, at a timing when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display is ended and a normal reach occurs. That is, the normal reach occurs after the normal variable display is executed for a total of 10 seconds. After it develops into normal reach, the transition of the display mode is the same as the transition of the display mode in the variable display in which the interrupting repeated hit effect is not set (see FIG. 484(a)), so the explanation thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in a variable display effect in which an interrupting continuous hit effect occurs after a normal reach effect occurs, as shown in Figure 484(c), after the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, the area develops into a reach effect. The process up to this point is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 484(a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the normal reach effect develops, the normal reach effect is interrupted and an interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the 7-second interrupt continuous hit performance ends, the interrupted normal reach performance is resumed. In addition, when the interrupt continuous hit performance is executed after the occurrence of reach, only the display mode is interrupted, and the audio output mode is maintained as it is. In other words, while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the reach effect, the BGM for the interrupt continuous hit effect is played on other channels (for example, CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the relatively lively BGM for the reach performance from suddenly cutting off and making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the 23rd embodiment, the types of fluctuations in which normal reach occurs are normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (missing normal reach A, winning normal reach A), and normal reach with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds (missing normal reach B, winning normal reach B). ) is provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance. The interrupt continuous hit performance is configured such that whether or not it can be executed is determined by lottery only when the variation type is such that the variation time is 37 seconds. With this configuration, by combining the production mode that can be set for a 30-second variation pattern (30 seconds worth of production modes) and the production mode of the interrupt continuous hit production, a variation time of exactly 37 seconds can be achieved. can be filled. That is, when the interrupt continuous hit performance is set, there is no need to provide a dedicated performance mode, so display data and audio data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, multiple types with different fluctuation times of 7 seconds are set for the variation type that does not cause reach and the variation type that develops to super reach, but the interrupt continuous hit performance is the variation type that is longer by 7 seconds. The configuration is such that it can be set only for . As a result, the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because it is possible to exactly fill the 7 seconds long variation time by simply combining the production mode that can be selected in the variation type that is short for 7 seconds and the production mode of the interrupt continuous hit production. It is possible to suitably perform the performance without any problems.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the present 23rd embodiment, as the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result is determined by the lottery in the main controller 110. The determined variation time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 selects a variable display effect with a performance period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes it with the variable display of the first symbol, and synchronizes the variable display effect of the third symbol with the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is configured to execute. The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an additional time command indicating the additional variation time. The configuration is such that the notification whether or not is made is provided by an additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as an additional variation time. Be notified. On the other hand, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as an additional variation time. . In other words, it is configured such that it is possible to identify whether the variation type is longer by 7 seconds or not based on the notification content of the additional time command. Thereby, by simply checking the contents of the additional time command, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a variation type for the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance. In addition, when it is decided to execute an interrupt continuous hit performance, by setting the performance mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command, it is possible to fill the variation time exactly. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode and the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode exclusively for the interrupt continuous hit performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486, a pending batch change effect, which is a type of entertainment effect in the twenty-third embodiment, will be described. This hold batch change performance is a performance that may be executed when there are multiple held balls, and at least some of the held ball number symbols among the multiple held ball number symbols are This is an effect that changes the display mode to a highly anticipated display based on the operation. In FIGS. 485 to 486, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2 has been changed to a blue display mode, and the third reserved pitch number symbol Hz3 has been changed to a green display format. , a case where a pending batch change effect is executed will be explained as an example. In addition, the display mode of the number of reserved balls symbols is configured such that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. Basically, the display mode of the number of reserved balls symbol is, when a starting winning (ball entering into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entering port 640) is detected, various types of winnings obtained based on the starting winning. Determined based on a random value (counter value). To be more specific, from the various random numbers obtained at the time of starting winnings, the success or failure when the special symbol lottery is executed and the type of fluctuation are predicted (pre-read) in advance, and the prediction result (pre-read result) is Based on the lottery probability, it is determined which display mode the reserved ball number symbol should be set to. In this lottery, control is performed such that the higher the expectation level is for the pre-read result corresponding to the lottery result, the higher the rate of setting the reserved ball number symbol in the form with the higher expectation level. In addition, since the timing of the start winning is variable depending on the player's gaming situation (pace of firing of game balls, etc.), the hold batch change performance is executed independently of the variable display performance. . That is, it is a performance that may be executed across the variable periods of a plurality of variable display effects (or may be executed within one variable period).

FIG. 485(a) is a diagram showing the display mode at the time when the pending batch change effect is executed. This pending batch change performance may be executed when a plurality of pending balls are present at the time when a new starting winning is detected. When the pending batch change effect is executed, first, the pending change character HC indicating the start of the pending batch change effect is displayed within the frame from above the display screen. As shown in FIG. 485(a), this pending change character HC is displayed in a manner in which the portion corresponding to the face resembles the PUSH button 10317. By the display mode of this pending change character HC, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance that an effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 will be executed.

After the pending change character HC appears (enters the frame), as shown in FIG. 485(b), all of the pending ball number patterns Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to a display mode imitating a rock. That is, the expectation level (display color of the pending pitch number symbol) indicated by the pending pitch number symbol is temporarily changed to a hidden state. Moreover, above the reservation change character HC, a speech bubble image FG imitating a speech balloon is displayed, and inside the speech balloon image FG, the words "Place rank UP with button PUSH!?" are displayed. With this display mode, it is possible for the player to easily understand that by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the expectation level (display color) of any one of the reserved ball number symbols will improve. can.

FIG. 486(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the pending batch change performance. As shown in FIG. 486(a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, all the rocks around the number of reserved balls, which had been changed to a rock-like display, burst away, and the normal number of reserved balls are displayed. An effect that returns to the display mode of several symbols is executed. Further, at this time, the expectation level indicated by at least some of the pending ball number symbols increases compared to before the pending batch change performance occurs. In the example of FIG. 486(a), the second pending ball number symbol Hz2, which was set in the blue display mode before the execution of the pending batch change performance, has been changed to the red display format after the pending batch change production. It shows the case.

By executing this pending batch change performance, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol increases, so that the player's expectation for a jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known which pending ball number symbol will change (expectation level will increase) until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pending ball number symbol will change. can be made to do so. Furthermore, since the expectation level is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's preferred timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

FIG. 486(b) shows a state in which the pending change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the pending batch change effect. When the pending change character HC fades out of the screen, even if the operation valid period in the pending batch change performance remains, the valid period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 486(b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the effect (see FIG. 486(a)) in which the expectation level of each pending ball number symbol changes will be executed. There isn't. This effect in which the mini-character is absent is executed, for example, when the pending batch change effect conflicts with another operation effect that involves an operation on the PUSH button 10317. By the absence of the pending change character HC corresponding to the pending batch change performance, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the valid operation period has been temporarily interrupted. Therefore, in the pending batch change production, it is possible to prevent the user from operating the PUSH button 10317 under the misunderstanding that it is valid, and from feeling dissatisfied with the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in 23rd embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 488) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 488, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. used in

For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a fall lottery counter C4 used for a fall lottery from a special symbol probability change state, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern, and a special hit random number counter. An initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of C1 is used. Further, a normal winning random number counter C5 is used for drawing the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 502), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 511). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203qa consisting of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). The values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are respectively stored in accordance with the timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas), and each of these areas has a storage area 203qb for storing balls to the second ball entrance 640. The values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 are respectively stored in accordance with the entry timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area, in which a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a fluctuation lottery target are provided in the RAM 203. Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), and game balls are stored in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry gate (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 511).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is updated. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb.

The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot counter C1 is , it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot when it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa is used for times when the probability of the special symbol is low (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the probability is high that the probability of the special symbol becoming a jackpot is higher than when the probability is low ( It is divided into two types: one for the period in which the probability of the special symbol is variable and the other for the period in which the probability of the special symbol is variable, and the number of random numbers included in each of them that become a jackpot is set to be different (see FIG. 490(a)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is updated. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203 (the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not in progress, the special symbol reserved ball execution area ).

Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a miss of the special symbol, the first symbol will be displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. Become.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol jackpot random number 23 for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 490(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 4 out of a total of 1000 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/250". Note that the random number value (counter value) that results in a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 8 random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values ``4 to 11'' are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table for high probability. (Figure 490(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 8 out of the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 491(b), when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (15 The round is sure to be a jackpot). Also, when the value is "10 to 49", the jackpot type is "Jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "Jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol and the value of the special win type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (15 round probability variable jackpot). Further, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (15 round normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects one jackpot type from among five jackpot types (jackpot A to E) depending on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special win type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Stop types include, for example, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops before or after the reach symbol by one position, or "out-of-front reach," or after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops before or after the reach symbol. ``Reach other than front/back off'' which stops at a point other than ``reach'' or ``complete off'' where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa (the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). In addition, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb of the RAM 203 (or the special symbol reserved ball execution area if the special symbol lottery is not in progress). Stored.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode of so-called normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 511) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492(a)) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is controlled by the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb used when the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 492(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb. As shown in FIG. 492(a), the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the present 23rd embodiment is a symbol variation table for indicating the lottery result of a special symbol when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. The normal table 202qb1 is referred to to determine the variation time of the symbol, and when a special symbol lottery is executed in a gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (probability variable state and time saving state), the symbol variation It is composed of at least a probability change/time saving table 202qb2 that is referred to in order to determine the variation time of .

First, the normal table 202qb1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202qb1. In this normal table 202qb1, various fluctuation patterns are defined in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and for each of the fluctuation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are defined. The value is assigned. In addition, if the result of the judgment is a win, the jackpot type will vary depending on the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd based on the value of the acquired special win type counter C2). A pattern is set. Specifically, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the winning/failure determination result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". If the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", the winning normal reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this winning normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, if this hit normal reach A is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, as described above, the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482) will not be executed. In addition, if the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is normal reach B with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds. is stipulated. When this winning normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when this hit normal reach B is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, as described above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance (see FIG. 482).

Further, as shown in FIG. 492(b), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250" and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150", there is a fluctuation pattern. , a winning super reach A with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined, and a winning super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is defined in a range where the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "151 to 198". In hit super reach A, the additional time is 0 seconds, so there is no possibility that an interrupt continuous hit effect will be executed, while in hit super reach B, the additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the lamp control device 113 is notified, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect can be executed.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the validity judgment result is wrong, as shown in FIG. 492(b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Accordingly, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set is defined. Even in the case of a miss, in a variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to an additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the audio lamp control device 113 randomly determines whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance, while the additional time of 0 seconds is determined. In a variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to the above is defined, the interrupt continuous hit performance will not be executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 492(b), when the symbol type is special figure 2, if the judgment result is a hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, a winning long variation A with a variation time of 150 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 are Regardless of the value, a long variation with a variation time of 150 seconds is specified. This is because, in the normal state, if you hit right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that has an advantage in the distribution of jackpots (that is, the probability of a jackpot is high), the gaming efficiency will be deteriorated. The purpose is to suppress irregular gaming methods that involve playing right-handed during normal play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 493, the stipulated contents of the probability change/time saving table 202qb2 will be explained. Also in the probability variation/time saving table 202qb2, as shown in FIG. 493, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each of the variation patterns. and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are assigned. In addition, in the probability variation/time saving table 202qb2, compared to the normal table 202qb1, a relatively short variation time is likely to be set, and a common variation time is set for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The only difference is that they are configured so that . By configuring the game so that a short variable time is easily set, it is possible to draw special symbols more efficiently than in other gaming states during the probability variable state where a time-saving state for normal symbols is set, and during the time-saving state. can do.

Returning to FIG. 488, the explanation will be continued. The normal winning random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C5 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. In this embodiment, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the value of the normal symbol holding in the RAM 203 is updated. It is stored in the ball storage area 203qc.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is defined in the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is , if it matches the value of the random number that is a win defined in the normal win random number 23 table 202qc, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this normal winning random number 23 table 202qc is used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which the normal symbols are in the normal state), and for times when the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). The number of random numbers included in each type of game is set to be different (see FIG. 490(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

As shown in FIG. 490(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are two random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the values are "5, 6". In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 2 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the win is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), the symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x once". In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for "0.2 seconds x once"; The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in a normal winning random number 23 table for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 , a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "twice for 1 second". be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared to when the probability is low for the normal symbol, the fluctuating display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and furthermore, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is Since the time is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 2 times", but the opening time and The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see Figure 502). , are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 511).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 487, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 488, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I/O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as the following are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 511) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 510). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 509) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be explained with reference to FIG. 489(a). FIG. 489(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 includes, as part of the above fixed value data, a special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa, a fluctuation pattern selection 23 table 202qb, a normal winning random number 23 table 202qc, a jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and a falling lottery. At least a table 202qe and an open pattern selection table 202qf are stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the special win random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the judgment value that is determined to be a jackpot, and in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, the judgment value is determined to be a jackpot. “4 to 11” is defined as the value range (see FIG. 490(a)). When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in this special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)) , it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot.

The jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd (see FIG. 491(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the special hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and the special winning type is determined. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 491(a), the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd is a special feature referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery). Figure 1 23 table for jackpot 202qd1 and 23 table for special pattern 2 jackpot 202qd2 that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of special pattern 2) At least configured. First, with reference to FIG. 491(b), details of the 23 table 202qd1 for special drawing 1 jackpot will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 491(b), the range in which the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9" is associated with and defined as "jackpot A" (see FIG. 491(b)). This "Jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability change state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is distributed to the V area. ) It's a big hit. Out of the 100 counter values that the special winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that will become "Jackpot A", so "Jackpot A" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "Jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the first special symbol jackpots, and is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends, so it is the most advantageous jackpot among the first special symbol jackpots. It is a type.

Furthermore, the value of the special win type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 49" is associated with "Jackpot B" and defined (see FIG. 491(b)). This "Jackpot B" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability change state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is distributed to the V area. ) It's a big hit. Among the 100 counter values that the special winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that will become "Jackpot B", so "Jackpot B" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although this "jackpot B" has fewer rounds than the "jackpot A," it is a relatively advantageous jackpot type because it is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, the value of the special win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is defined in association with "jackpot C" (see FIG. 491(b)). This "Jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time saving state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that makes it impossible for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area). ) It's a jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that will be a "jackpot C", so a "jackpot C" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C" has the least number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state, so it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the first special symbol jackpots. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 491(c), details of the 23 table 202qd2 for special drawing 2 jackpot will be explained. As shown in FIG. 491(c), the range of the value of the special winning type counter C2 from "0 to 79" is associated with "big win D" and defined (see FIG. 491(c)). This "Jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a probability change state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is distributed to the V area. ) It's a big hit. Out of the 100 counter values that the special hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that will be a "jackpot D", so a "jackpot D" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 80% (80/100). This "Jackpot D" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, and is the most advantageous jackpot type because it is given an advantageous probability change state after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 491(c), the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with "Jackpot E" and defined (see FIG. 491(c)). ). This "Jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (an opening/closing pattern is set that makes it impossible for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period when it is allocated to the V area). ) It's a jackpot. Out of the 100 counter values that the special winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 counter values that will be a "jackpot E", so a "jackpot E" will be determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 20% (20/100). Although this "jackpot E" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends because a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the present 23rd embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A, B) is determined at a rate of 50%, while the second It is configured such that when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol lottery, a probability-variable jackpot (jackpot D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect a variable probability state. As described above, the twenty-third embodiment is configured such that the jackpot type is made clear to the player very rarely (1% of the time when it is a variable jackpot). After the jackpot is over, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Therefore, from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the variable probability state or the time saving state has been set. Even if an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the game can be played with the expectation of a variable probability state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Also, if you hit the jackpot within 100 times, even if it was a jackpot in a time-saving state, you can make it seem like you hit the jackpot while in a variable state, so it will be more likely that you will be in a variable state than it was originally. It is possible to make it seem as if the rate and continuation rate are high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The normal winning random number 23 table 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)) is a data table in which the winning judgment values of normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 490(b)). In addition, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see FIG. 490(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 obtained based on the passing of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc. By referring to this, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIG. 492(a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Note that the details of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb are as described above in the explanation of the variation type counter CS1, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

The fall lottery table 202qe is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C4 that is determined to be a fall is defined. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (at the time of starting winning) in the probability change state of the special symbol is stored in the fall lottery table 202qe. It is set so that if it matches any of the determination values stipulated in , it will transition to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall down).

More specifically, two determination values ``0, 1'' are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the special symbol's variable probability state. Here, the fall lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Among the 1000 values that the falling lottery counter C4 can take, there are two judgment values that are determined to be a fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the variable probability state of the special symbol. is 1/500 (2/1000).

In addition, in the falling lottery table 202qe in this embodiment, only the determination value (judgment value for the probability variable state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not a fall occurs in the variable probability state of the special symbol is defined. The decision value for low probability states is not specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

In the present embodiment, this falling lottery table 202qe and a regularly updated falling lottery counter C4 are compared, and it is determined whether to transition from a special symbol probability variable state to a special symbol low probability state (fall). It is determined whether That is, the timing of transition from the variable probability state to the time saving state can be made random. Therefore, when the state shifts to a variable probability state, the game can be played while making the player feel nervous because he does not know when the variable probability state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, it is determined (determined) whether or not to shift (fall) from the variable probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is determined whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured to allow lottery (judgment). For example, it may be determined whether or not to shift from the time-saving state of normal symbols to the normal state of normal symbols by a lottery performed every time there is a change. As a result, the number of times the time-saving state of the normal symbol continues can be made random, so that the game can be played while creating a sense of tension in this case as well. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The opening pattern selection table 202qf is a data table in which data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type as the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern of the specific winning hole 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot is defined. Although the illustration is omitted, in the fifth round of the guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A, B, D), the sorting device (V accessory) is arranged to sort the game balls into the first area (V area). During the open period (from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game balls can reach the sorting device (from 5 seconds to 9.9 seconds from the start of the 5th round). Data for setting the open period (until 5 seconds have elapsed) is read out. On the other hand, in the 5th round of the normal jackpot (jackpot C, E), the period during which the sorting device (V accessory) is arranged to distribute the game balls to the second area (non-V area) (start of the 5th round) Set an open period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round until 4.5 seconds have passed) during which game balls can reach the sorting device The data to do this is read out.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 489(b). FIG. 489(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 486(b), the RAM 203 includes special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc, special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf, time saving medium counter 203qg, probability variable flag 203qh, jackpot start flag 203qi, jackpot medium flag 203qj, probability variable setting flag 203qk, probability variable passing counter 203qm, winning number counter 203qp, Residue It has at least a ball timer flag 203qq, a remaining ball timer 203qr, a variable probability effective flag 203qs, a variable probability effective timer 203qt, a discharge number counter 203qu, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa has four reserved areas (1st reserved area to 4th reserved area), and each of these areas includes a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, The values of a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored, respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C4, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first reservation area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa are changed to the special symbol. The ball is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 488), and a special symbol lottery or the like is determined based on the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area.

Note that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the special symbol holding ball execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In the twenty-third embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb has four reserved areas similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa. In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value and the like is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A normal hit random number counter C5 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203qc is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reservation first area to the execution area, the reservation first area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203qb, Shift processing is performed to shift winning data stored in other holding areas to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. (See Z404 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see Z210 in FIG. 503).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (Z211 in FIG. 503, Z405 in FIG. 505). reference). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203qd is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203qd is changed. The value of the number of pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223qa of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the number of held balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe displays a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending pitches (the number of times of waiting) up to four times (fluctuating display performed on the display device 81). The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. (See Z410 in FIG. 505). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 503). The value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf calculates the number of reserved balls (of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67). This is a counter that counts up to 4 times (the number of wait times). The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See Z704 in Figure 508). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see Z605 in FIG. 507).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc (Z705 in FIG. 508). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc (Z703 in FIG. 508: No).

The time saving medium counter 203qg is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols.If the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols. If the value of the time saving counter 203qg is 0 and the probability change flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with normal symbols. The initial value of this short-time counter 203qg is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110 and a jackpot is achieved, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 514). (See Z1303). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see Z310 in FIG. 504). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the fluctuating display that indicates a jackpot, there is a possibility that the time-saving state is terminated, such as when the normal symbol falls out during the fluctuating display that was executed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. When a certain behavior occurs, expectations for a jackpot can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When a lottery with a winning normal symbol is held, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability variable flag 203qh are referred to, and whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more or the probability variable flag 203qh is on. If so, it is determined that the normal symbol is time-saving. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc for high probability times (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 0 and the probability change flag 203qh is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the normal state is determined based on the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc for low probability times. A lottery of symbols is performed (see Z610 in FIG. 507).

The variable probability flag 203qh is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with a special symbol.If the variable probability flag 203qh is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state with a special symbol. If the flag 203qh is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. Moreover, as mentioned above, during the probability change state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203qh is on, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol is present, as well as the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The initial value of the variable probability flag 203qh is set to OFF, and when the game ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable prize winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, the variable probability flag 203qh is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot. It is set to on (see Z1302 in FIG. 514). In addition, the probability variation flag 203qh is reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to a fall occurs in the probability variation state (see Z305 in Fig. 504) and when the variable display of a jackpot starts (see Z310 in Fig. 504). be done.

This probability variation flag 203qh is referred to in the special symbol variation start process 23 to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (see Z302 in FIG. 504). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process 23 (FIG. 504, Z208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process 23 (FIG. 504, Z208), the probability variation flag 203qh is referred to, and if it is on, first a falling lottery is executed, and if there is no falling, the first winning random number table for high probability times is executed. 202qa (see FIG. 490(a)), a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off or the probability variation flag 203qh is on and it is determined that the player has fallen by the fall lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa for low probability times (FIG. 490(a) (see), a special design lottery will be held.

Further, the probability change flag 203qh is also referred to in the normal symbol change process 23 to determine whether the gaming state is a time saving state (Z608, Z614, Z620 in FIG. 507). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203qh and the above-mentioned time saving medium counter 203qg are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing 23, and if the probability variation flag 203qh is on or the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more. , it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, and the normal symbol is drawn based on the normal winning random number 23 table 202qc for high probability times (see FIG. 490(b)) (see Z609 in FIG. 507). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203qh is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the second winning random number table 202qc for low probability times (Fig. 490 ( A lottery of normal symbols is performed based on (see b)) (see Z610 in FIG. 507). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 23, the probability variation flag 203qh is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the release time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits (Z614 in FIG. 507). , Z620).

The jackpot start flag 203qi is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203qi is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203qi is set to ON when it is the end timing of the fluctuating display indicating a jackpot (see Z217 in FIG. 503). Moreover, the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see Z1103 in FIG. 512).

The jackpot flag 203qj is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special gaming state) is in progress. If this jackpot flag 203qj is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203qj becomes a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) starts (see Z1103 in FIG. 512). Further, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). In the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503), this jackpot flag 203qj is referred to to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (see Z201 in FIG. 503).

The variable probability setting flag 203qk is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to a variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined depending on whether or not a game ball enters the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the game ball enters the first area (passing the probability change switch provided in the first area), the probability change setting flag 203qk is set to ON (Z1415 in FIG. 515). . On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203qk is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see Z1305 in FIG. 514). Note that this probability change setting flag 203qk is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

In addition, if the variable variable setting flag 203qk is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable variable switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable variable switch has passed, the variable variable setting flag 203qk is set to ON. It may be configured to formally turn on and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203qm, which will be described later, has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203qk to on while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203qm is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (entered the V area) in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of jackpot). . In addition, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been ejected by the sum of this variable passing counter 203qm and a discharge number counter 203qu, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203qm is updated by incrementing by 1 when the ball passes through the variable probability switch (the ball entering the V area is detected) (Z1414 in FIG. 515). Further, after the variable winning device 65 executes the process of determining whether the number of winning game balls matches the number of ejected balls, it is reset to the initial value "0" (Z1511 in FIG. 516). Note that this probability variable passage counter 203qm is backed up when the power is cut off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The prize winning number counter 203qp is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in a jackpot game, and when a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected. is added and updated by 1 based on (Z1403 in FIG. 515). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings won by the variable winning device 65 (the value of the number of winnings counter 203qp) and the number of winnings (the total value of the number of winnings counter 203qu and the variable passing counter 203qm) are the same. After it is determined whether the value matches, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see Z1511 in FIG. 516). Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203qp is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203qq is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball period after one round is completed and the specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to on, it means that it is a ball throw period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set on, a remaining ball timer 203qr, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (see Z1505 in FIG. 516). The remaining ball timer 203qr is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. This is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203qr is a timer necessary for ejecting winning game balls from the variable winning device 65 when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer. It is set as the upper limit of 203qr. Based on the fact that the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203qr (0.8 seconds in this embodiment) has been reached, it is determined whether the number of prizes entered into the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of prizes ejected match. (Z1507 in Figure 516). If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, balls are left in the variable winning device 65 illegally, and the game balls are transferred to the sorting device (V accessories) at the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round of jackpot C or jackpot E. It is possible to suppress the spread of fraud.

In addition, if the winning number and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch, the probability variation setting flag 203qk is turned on. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this setting is not set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a probability variable state from being improperly assigned.

The probability variation valid flag 203qs indicates that when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch (enters the V area) after the V accessory has been switched to a position where it cannot be allocated to the first area (V area), its passage ( This flag is used to determine whether or not the input ball is valid. When this probability variation valid flag 203qs is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch.

The probability variation valid timer 203qt is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203qs described above is set to ON. This probability variable effective timer 203qt allows determining the period required for the V accessory to normally pass through the probability variable switch after switching to the non-V side arrangement. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203qt is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it will be determined as fraudulent and will not be determined as passing.

As a result, it is possible to illegally allow a game ball to enter the V area and pass the variable rate switch, push the game ball up with a piano wire, etc. from below the variable rate switch and make it pass, or cause the magnetic sensor to incorrectly detect the ball as passing through due to radio waves, etc. damage caused by fraud can be suppressed.

The discharge number counter 203qu is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203qu is reset to the initial value 0 after it is determined that the number of balls won by the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged (Z1511 in FIG. 516).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 494 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 494, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment is provided with three game states. That is, there are a normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, a variable probability state shown in the middle part of FIG. 494, and a time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 494.

As mentioned above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, in which the probability of a jackpot is low and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. (The electric accessory 640a is difficult to release), resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the variable probability state indicates the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the jackpot probability is high and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the ball to the right. Since the game ball enters the ball frequently, the game state becomes most advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the jackpot probability is low, the game ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the ball to the right. Since the ball is frequently entered, the game state becomes relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On the condition that the ball has been entered, the state will change to a certain state after the jackpot ends. In jackpots A and B, the game ball can be brought into almost the V area by simply hitting the ball to the right in the 5th round. In addition, if no game ball enters the V area in the 5th round due to the player not hitting the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the jackpot ends will be changed to the time-saving state. Set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 494, when jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. ), so after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to the time saving state.

Further, as shown in the interruption in FIG. 494, there is a possibility that the game state changes from the variable probability state to another state not only in the case of a jackpot but also in the case of falling in the falling lottery. Specifically, when a jackpot occurs in the probability variable state and the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state. In addition, if a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained in a fall lottery before the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the variable probability state is set, the state also shifts to the time saving state. Furthermore, after the special symbol lottery has been executed 100 times or more after the probability variable state is set, if the lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained in the falling lottery, the state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs in the probability variable state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variable state again (the most advantageous probability variable state is looped). Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the player will hit the jackpot before falling and that the player will win the jackpot D.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 494, the time saving state can be changed to another gaming state not only when a jackpot is won, but also when a special symbol lottery is executed a specified number of times after the jackpot ends. transition to the state. More specifically, when a jackpot occurs in the time saving state and the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous probability variable state. Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the previous jackpot ends, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state again (time-saving state ). In the time-saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so the possibility of winning the jackpot again within 100 attempts is not very high (approximately 33% of the time you will hit the jackpot again). . Therefore, when the time is shortened, the possibility of transitioning to the normal state increases. As mentioned above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time-saving state and the variable probability state (the operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so the time-saving state with the normal symbol While this is set, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation regarding the variable probability state. In other words, even if a time-saving state is set that is disadvantageous compared to a variable probability state (that is, it is easier to shift to the normal state), it can make the player think that they are playing the game in a variable probability state. It is possible to maintain high motivation for playing games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this manner, in the twenty-third embodiment, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay experience in which the player moves between three types of game states, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 487, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric controller. A solenoid 209 consisting of a solenoid for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 509) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the game ball. be. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 performs display control such as audio output from the audio output device 226, output of turning on and off from the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display performance (fluctuating display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the device 114. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, PUSH button 10317, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 495(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 includes a fluctuation pattern selection table 222qa, a back mode lottery table 222qb, a pending change lottery table 222qc, a change point calculation table 222qd, a batch change lottery table 222qe, a chance charge lottery table 222qf, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. 222qg, and an interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222qa, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

The back mode lottery table 222qb is data for drawing a lottery to change the back mode to show the expectation level that the variable probability state is set in the game state (variable probability state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. This is a data table in which the following is specified. The details of this back mode lottery table 222qb will be explained with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the back mode selection table 222qb.

As shown in FIG. 496, the rear mode lottery table 222qb shows the rear mode lottery table 222qb when it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state and that there is no lottery result corresponding to a fall in the pending state. A fixed change continuation table that is referred to in order to draw a change, and a drawing to change the back mode in a state where the current gaming state is a fixed change state but a lottery result corresponding to a fall is included in the pending state. The table is made up of at least a table for not yet fallen, which is referred to, and a table for fallen, which is referred to in order to select a change of the rear mode in a state where the screen has already fallen to the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 496, the back mode lottery table 222qb defines the value range of the production lottery counter 223qy in association with each combination of the current back mode type and the transition destination (after change) back mode. has been done. Here, the effect lottery counter 223qy is constituted by a random number counter whose value is updated regularly, and is updated to any value within the range of "0 to 99" each time the update timing comes. Using the value of this performance lottery counter 223qy, performance modes of various performances are selected. Note that the performance lottery counter 223qy is provided with a separate random number counter for each type of performance for which a lottery is executed. In other words, the performance lottery counter 223qy is a general term for random number counters used for lottery of various performances.

As shown in FIG. 496, in the probability change continuation table, for the combination where the current back mode is cave exploration mode and the transition destination back mode is temple exploration mode (mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode), A range of values “0 to 19” for the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 20, so the current game state is In the variable probability state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 20% (20/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the value "20, 21" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Out of the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to super temple exploration mode is 2, so the current game state is in a variable state. , and in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from cave search mode to super temple search mode is 2% (2/100). Note that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (ie, in the range of "22 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

In this way, when the cave search mode is set and the table for continuation of definite change is referenced (in case of definite change and no fall lottery results are included in the pending state), the change display will be displayed. Each time it is executed, it shifts from cave exploration mode to other modes at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of times the cave search mode is continued is reduced to about five times on average. In other words, even if cave exploration mode is set, the transition to another mode with higher expectations occurs in a relatively short period of time, so the period of time set in cave exploration mode tends to become shorter (mode with higher expectations). ). Therefore, the longer the player stays in the mode with high expectations, the more the player's expectations regarding the continuation of the variable state can be improved, and the more the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the probability change continuation table, a range of values of the performance lottery counter 223qy of "0" is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from temple search mode to cave search mode is 1, so the current game state is In the variable probability state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 496, the range of values of the performance lottery counter 223qy "1 to 10" is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Among the 100 random numbers that the production lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from temple search mode to super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is in a variable state. , and in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from temple search mode to super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (that is, the range of "11 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the temple search mode is set, if the table for continuation of definite change is referenced (if it is in a definite change state and the lottery results of falling are not included in the pending state), the fluctuation display will be displayed. A super temple that transitions to cave exploration mode at a rate of 1% every time it is executed, and at a rate of 10%, the state of change is confirmed, and it is confirmed that the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state. Shift to mode. In other words, the configuration is such that it is difficult to shift to the cave exploration mode, which has low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode, which has high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the probability change continuation table, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. Furthermore, for mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode, a value range "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the mode transition. Among the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is in a variable state. , and in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the super temple exploration mode is set, only 5% of the time the mode will shift to another mode, and even if the mode is shifted, the temple exploration mode with relatively high expectations mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the probability change state even if the player shifts from the super temple mode, which has the highest level of expectation, to another back mode.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-fall table, the mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. . Among the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 5, so the current gaming state is in a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from cave search mode to temple search mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-fall table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 9" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. . Among the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current gaming state is in a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from temple search mode to cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 496, in the non-fall table, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. That is, when the non-fall table is referenced in a state where the super temple search mode is set, the transition to the temple search mode (fall) is made without fail. When the non-fall table is referenced in the super temple search mode, it means that at the start of the previous variation, there were no falling lottery results in the pending list, and new pending results by the start of the current variation display. This is only the case when the reserved ball is the result of a falling lottery. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the falling lottery result is included, the system is configured to always shift to the temple search mode in this case.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-fall table (that is, with the lottery result corresponding to a fall included in the pending), the probability change continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is lower than when the mode is changed to temple exploration mode, and even if the mode transitions to temple exploration mode, the rate of falling to cave exploration mode is higher. That is, the proportion of stays in the cave exploration mode, which has a low level of expectation, increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it is possible to predict whether or not the current game state is a variable state using the stay ratio in the cave exploration mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fallen table, the mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0, 1" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. . Out of the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2, so the current game state is the time saving state. In this case, the rate of transition (change) from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Note that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (ie, in the range of "2 to 99"), no mode transition is performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 29" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. . Among the 100 random numbers that the performance lottery counter 223qy can take, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is in a variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from temple search mode to cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. It should be noted that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223qy is outside the above range (ie, in the range of "30 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 496, in the fallen table, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. That is, if the fallen table is referenced while the super temple search mode is set, the transition to the temple search mode (fall) is made in the same way as when the unfallen table is referenced. The case where the fallen table is referred to in the super temple search mode is only when the probability change state was at the start of the previous variation, and the lottery result of the current special symbol was a fall. Therefore, in order to prevent the super-temple mode from being maintained even though the falling lottery result is included, the configuration is such that the mode is always shifted to the temple search mode in this case.

In this way, when the table for those who have fallen is referred to (that is, in the time-saving state) and the rear mode transition lottery is executed, the transition from the cave exploration mode to the temple is more likely than when the table for those who have not fallen is referred to. Not only will the mode transition rate to exploration mode become lower, but even if you do transition to temple exploration mode, the rate of falling to cave exploration mode will be significantly higher. That is, the proportion of stays in the cave exploration mode, which has a low level of expectation, increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it is possible to predict whether or not the current game state is a variable state using the stay ratio in the cave exploration mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the explanation will be continued. The pending change lottery table 222qc refers to the look-ahead result that is executed based on the detection of a starting prize for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and selects the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the starting winning. This is a data table that is referred to when executing the lottery of the display mode. The details of this pending change lottery table 222qc will be explained with reference to FIG. 497(a). FIG. 497(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this pending change lottery table 222qc.

As shown in FIG. 497(a), the pending change lottery table 222qc includes the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy for selecting each pending symbol mode (white, blue, green, red) for each look-ahead result (variation type). The ranges are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 497(a), when the variation type is "Long Out", the white pending symbol is displayed for the value of the production lottery counter 223qy in the range of "0 to 98". The modes are defined in association with each other, and the blue pending symbol mode is defined in association with the value "99" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. On the other hand, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is a variation type of out-of-length (the main controller 110 has notified the look-ahead result of out-of-length by the winning information command), the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the starting prize is 99%. A white pending symbol mode is set at a rate of (99/100), and a blue pending symbol mode is set at a rate of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of a long miss, a white pending symbol mode is almost always set, and it is extremely rare that a pending change (a pending symbol mode other than white) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 497(a), for the variation type "Outside Normal Reach", the white pending symbol mode is associated with the value of the production lottery counter 223qy in the range "0 to 94". The value of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined as being in the range of "95 to 99", and a blue pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range. On the other hand, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is off and it becomes a normal reach variation type, the white pending symbol pattern will be set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the starting prize, and 5% ( A blue pending symbol mode is set at a ratio of 5/100). That is, even in the case of a missed normal reach, the white pending symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the rate at which pending change (a pending pattern mode other than white) is set is low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 497(a), for the variation type "Outside Super Reach", the white pending symbol mode corresponds to the value of the production lottery counter 223qy in the range "0 to 74". A blue pending pattern is defined in association with the range "75-89", and a green pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range "90-97". , "98, 99", a red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range. In other words, in the case of a variation type of losing super reach in which the variation time is long and a relatively flashy (lively) performance mode is executed, the percentage of white pending symbol modes is 75% (75/100). This is lower than the variation type of miss, and the percentage of blue pending symbols is as high as 15% (15/100). Furthermore, it can also be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the percentage of green pending symbols is 8% (8/100), and the percentage of red pending symbols is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of green or red pending symbols, at least the variation type below the normal reach (variation type with low expectation level) will be denied, improving the player's expectation of a jackpot. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 497(a), for the variation type "hit normal reach", the white pending symbol mode is associated with the value of the production lottery counter 223qy in the range "0 to 74". A blue pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "75 to 84", a green pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "85 to 94", A red reserved symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the percentage of green and red pending symbols is set higher than in the case of a missed super reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 497(a), when the variation type is "Hit Super Reach", the white pending symbol mode corresponds to the value of the production lottery counter 223qy in the range of "0 to 49". A blue pending pattern is defined in association with the range "50 to 59", and a green pending pattern is defined in association with the range "60 to 84". , and the range of "85 to 99", a red pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range. That is, the occurrence rate of pending changes itself is improved compared to the variation types of missed super reach and winning normal reach, and the rate at which green and red pending symbol patterns are selected also becomes higher. Therefore, when the green or red pending pattern is set, the expectation for a big hit can be further improved.

Returning to FIG. 495, the explanation will be continued. The change point calculation table 222qd is a data table that is referred to when calculating change points that are used as a criterion for determining whether or not to execute the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486). The details will be described later, but this change point is due to a discrepancy between the variation type of each reserved ball and the jackpot expectation level indicated by the reserved symbol pattern at the time of drawing of the reservation batch change performance (lower expectations are announced). The system is configured such that the more points are used (too much), the higher the number of points is set. It is configured such that the more a reservation pattern mode with a relatively lower degree of expectation is set by the reservation change performance, the easier it is to execute a performance that improves the expectation level by the reservation batch change performance. Thereby, it is possible to more appropriately notify the degree of expectation based on the pending symbol mode. The details of this change point calculation table 222qd will be explained with reference to FIG. 497(b).

As shown in FIG. 497(b), in the change point calculation table 222qd, change points are associated with each hold ball change type (preread result) and hold symbol mode set for the hold ball. It is stipulated that In the 23rd embodiment, when a plurality of held balls are held at the time when a starting prize is detected, the change point of each held ball is calculated using this change point calculation table 222qd, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on this, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the pending batch change performance can be executed. That is, it is configured such that the larger the total value of change points, the higher the execution rate of the pending batch change effect. As a result, even if a low level of expectation is once reported in the hold change performance, it is possible to give an opportunity to improve the level of expectation through the hold batch change performance, so that the level of expectation can be notified more appropriately by the hold symbol mode. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 497(b), for the variation types of short miss and long miss, "0" is associated and defined as a change point, regardless of the pending symbol mode. In addition, for the variation type of out normal reach, "1" is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of white pending, and "0" is defined as the change point for other pending symbol modes. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the variation type of missed super reach, "2" is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of white pending, and "2" is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of blue pending. 1" is defined in association with the change point, and "0" is defined in association with other pending symbol modes as a change point. In addition, for the variation types of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the pending symbol mode of white pending, and 3 is defined as a change point for the pending symbol mode of blue pending. 2 is associated and defined, 1 is associated and defined as a change point for the green reserved symbol mode, and 0 is associated and defined as a change point for the red reserved symbol mode.

In this way, in the present 23rd embodiment, it is configured such that the more a reserved symbol mode with a lower expectation is set for a reserved ball of a variation type with a higher expectation, the more change points there will be. That is, it is configured such that the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the pending symbol mode, the more the change points will be, and the easier it will be for the execution of the pending batch change performance to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the pending symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the explanation will be continued. The batch change lottery table 222qe is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery to determine whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed. The details of this batch change lottery table 222qe will be explained with reference to FIG. 498(a). FIG. 498(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this batch change lottery table 222qe. As shown in FIG. 498(a), in the batch change lottery table 222qe, for each total value of change points, the range of the value of the production lottery counter 223qy, in which the execution of the pending batch change production is determined, is defined in association with the total value of the change points. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498(a), the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the total value of change points being 0. Furthermore, when the total value of change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223qy is defined in correspondence, and when the total value of change points is 2, the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy is specified. "0 to 24" are defined in association with each other, and when the total value of change points is 3 or more, a value of "0 to 49" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each other. In other words, if the change point is 1, the pending batch change effect will be selected at a rate of 10%, if the change point is 2, the pending batch change effect will be selected at a rate of 25%, and if the change point is 3, the pending batch change effect will be selected at a rate of 25%. For example, the pending batch change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

In this way, in the present 23rd embodiment, as the total number of change points increases (a holding symbol mode with a low expectation level is set for a holding ball of a variation type with a high expectation degree), the holding batch change effect The system is configured so that the ratio of execution decisions is high. As a result, the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the reserved symbol mode, the more change points there will be, and the more likely it is that execution of the reserved batch change performance will be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation depending on the pending symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the explanation will be continued. The chance charge lottery table 222qf is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the chance charge performance can be executed. The details of this chance charge lottery table 222qf will be explained with reference to FIG. 498(b). FIG. 498(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the chance charge lottery table 222qf. As shown in FIG. 498(b), in the chance charge lottery table 222qf, the number of reserved balls and the range of values of the performance lottery counter 223qy that are determined to execute the chance charge performance are associated for each variation type. stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 498(b), in the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-the-box normal reach and out-of-the-way super reach, when the number of reserved pitches is 0 or 1, the value range of the production lottery counter 223qy is “0 to 1”. 4" are defined in association with each other. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the value range "0 to 14" of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the value range "0 to 14", and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value range of the production lottery counter 223qy is specified. A range “0 to 24” is defined in correspondence. In other words, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, it is decided to execute the chance charge effect at a rate of 5%, and if the number of held balls is 2, it is decided to execute the chance charge effect at a rate of 15%, If the number of pending balls is 3 or more, it is decided to execute the chance charge effect at a rate of 25%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 498(b), in the variation pattern of the normal reach, the range of values of the production lottery counter 223qy "0 to 34" is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 and 1. On the other hand, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 2 or more. In other words, if the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge effect will be determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of held balls is 2 or more, the execution of the chance charge effect will not be decided. do not have. That is, when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, the decision ratio of the chance charge performance is higher than that of the variation pattern of a miss. Furthermore, the reason why the chance charge performance is not performed when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more is to prevent a problem in which the spirit gauge accumulates too much and a jackpot starts before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of a hit normal reach, the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few opportunities to perform a chance-up effect), so there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will accumulate beyond the timing when a chance-up is possible. The number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined only according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, the higher the number of balls on hold, the higher the possibility that a higher number of spirit gauges will be set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the variation results in a win, if the number of reserved balls is large, execution of the chance charge effect is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a jackpot is started before the number of spirit gauges is completely consumed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 498(b), in the fluctuation pattern of the winning super reach, the range of the value of the production lottery counter 223qy "0 to 49" is associated and prescribed for the number of reserved balls from 0 to 2. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the value range "0 to 9" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in correspondence. On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is not associated with the number of reserved balls being 4. In other words, if the number of held balls is 0 to 2, the chance charge effect will be executed at a rate of 50%, and if the number of held balls is 3, the execution of the chance charge effect will be decided at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of pending balls is 4, execution of the chance charge performance is not determined. That is, when the number of balls on hold is 2 or less, the decision ratio of the chance charge effect is higher than the variation pattern of a miss or the variation pattern of a hit normal reach. Further, when the number of balls on hold is 3, the chance charge performance is executed at a low rate, and when the number of balls on hold is 4, the chance charge performance is not performed. Similar to normal reach, this is intended to suppress the problem of a jackpot starting before the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the explanation will be continued. The continuous suggestion performance selection table 222qg is used when selecting the performance scenario of the continuous suggestion performance that is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display performance after the end of the jackpot (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbol). This is the referenced data table. The details of this continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg will be explained with reference to FIG. 499.

FIG. 499 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg. As shown in FIG. 499, the continuation suggestion production selection table 222qg includes a continuation confirmation table that is referred to when the continuation of the variable probability state is confirmed until the end of the continuation suggestion production, and a table for continuation confirmation until the end of the continuation suggestion production. Although the ball is not on hold, it is confirmed that the continuation probability table that is referred to when it is certain that the variable state will be maintained in the hold and the end of the continuation suggestion performance are in the short time state. It consists of at least a table for non-continuations. Each table defines a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of presentation modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 499, in the continuation confirmation table, the range of the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with each of the seven scenarios "01H" to "07H". Specifically, as shown in Figure 499, in the 96th to 98th variation display, a weak attack with a low expectation level (see Figure 476(a)) is executed, and in the 99th variation display, a weak attack with a high expectation level is executed. The value "0-9" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the performance scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through. Also, a weak attack (see FIG. 476(a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th variable display, and a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th variable display to break through the door 806. The value "10 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the performance scenario "02H" in which the game is performed, and a weak attack (see FIG. 476(a)) is executed in the 96th variable display. For the production scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through in the 97th to 99th variable display, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy is "20 to 59". The production lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the production scenario "04H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 476(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through in all the 96th to 99th variation displays. The values "60 to 89" are defined in association with each other. That is, the selection rate is low for production scenarios in which the number of strong attacks is small, and the selection rate is high for production scenarios in which the number of strong attacks is large.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 499, the continuation confirmation table is provided with a special production scenario in which the player breaks through the door 806 with a variation number of less than 99 times. That is, there is a production scenario "05H" (range of the value "90, 91" of the production lottery counter 223qy) in which a weak attack is performed in the 96th variable production and the door 806 is broken through as it is, and a weak attack is made in the 96th variation production, 97 A production scenario "06H" in which a strong attack is made on the 96th and 97th time to break through the door 806 (range of the value "92 to 94" of the production lottery counter 223qy), and a weak attack is made on the 96th and 97th time, and the 98th A production scenario "07H" (value range of "95 to 99" of the production lottery counter 223qy) is set in which the door 806 is broken through by a strong attack. These special scenarios may be set only when the continuation confirmation table is referenced. In other words, the scenario may be executed only in a state where it is certain that the variable state continues until the 99th variation display ends, so by executing the scenario in a special manner, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios from "08H" to "0BH" are defined in the continuation-rich table. The flow of the performance in the performance scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the performance scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, so the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 499, the performance scenario "08H" is associated with the value "0~14" of the performance lottery counter 223qy, and the performance scenario "09H" is defined with the value "15~14" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. 29'' is defined in association with the production scenario "0AH", the value "30-69" of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the production scenario "0BH", and the production scenario "0BH" is defined in association with the value "30-69" of the production lottery counter 223qy. 70 to 99" are defined in association with each other. That is, similar to the continuation confirmation table, it is configured such that the selection rate for production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate for production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if a lottery result corresponding to a fall occurs while the scenario specified in the table for continuation is in progress, the performance specified in the table for non-continuation will be applied from the variable display that corresponds to the lottery result for that fall. You can switch to the production scenario "0CH", which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the balls up to the 99th variation display are not on hold at the start of the continuation suggestion performance, by switching the scenario midway through, the game state at the end of the 99th variation can be accurately determined. Can be notified.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 499, four scenarios from "0CH" to "0FH" are defined in the non-continuation table. The flow of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that they ultimately fail to break through the door 806, so we will explain them here. Details are omitted. As shown in FIG. 499, the performance scenario "0CH" is associated with the value "0~39" of the performance lottery counter 223qy, and the performance scenario "0DH" is defined with the value "40~39" of the performance lottery counter 223qy. 79'' is defined in association with the production scenario "0EH", the value "80-94" of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the production scenario "0FH", and the production scenario "0FH" is defined with the value "80-94" of the production lottery counter 223qy. 95 to 99" are defined in association with each other. In other words, in contrast to the continuation confirmation table and the continuation intensive table, it is configured so that the selection rate for production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate for production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is low. There is. Therefore, the greater the number of strong attacks, the lower the possibility that the non-continuation table will be referenced to determine the production scenario, so while the continuation suggestion production is in progress, pay attention to the content of each attack and play the game. You can make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 495(a), the explanation will be continued. The interrupt multiple hit lottery table 222qh is a data table that is referenced to determine whether or not the interrupt multiple hit performance (see FIG. 482) can be executed and the type of performance. The details of this interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh will be explained with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh. As shown in FIG. 500, for each variation type, the effect type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with each other in the interrupt continuous hit lottery table 222qh.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. The values "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223qy are defined in association with each other. For this reason, in the case of a long miss, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of out normal reach, the performance lottery is executed for the performance type of the performance mode that is executed during the normal fluctuation performance period and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 monsters remaining. The value "0 to 9" of the counter 223qy is defined in association with the production type of the production mode that is executed during reach fluctuation and can reduce the number of remaining monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy. “10 to 14” are defined in correspondence. For this reason, in the variation pattern of the missed normal reach, it is decided to execute the interruption consecutive hit effect with a total rate of 15%. In other words, execution of the interrupting consecutive hit effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of a long miss.

In addition, as shown in Figure 500, in the fluctuation pattern of the missed super reach, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during the normal fluctuation performance period, a performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 remaining monsters is created. The value "0 to 4" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined for the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters remaining. “5 to 9” are defined in correspondence. In addition, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during reach fluctuation, the value "10 to 14" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is associated with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters. The value "15 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of three monsters. That is, since the total execution rate of the interrupt continuous hit performance is higher than that of the missed normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, the player's expectation for a jackpot can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the hit normal reach variation pattern, there is a production type of production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 5 remaining monsters as an interrupt continuous hit production executed during the normal variation production period. , the value "0 to 3" of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the production type, and the value "4" of the production lottery counter 223qy is defined for the production type of the production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. They are defined in correspondence. In addition, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during reach fluctuation, the value "5 to 24" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is associated with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters. The value "25" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the performance type of the performance mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to zero. That is, since the total execution rate of the interrupt continuous hit performance is higher than in the case of a miss, and there is a possibility of defeating all the monsters, it is possible to improve the player's expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 500, in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, as an interrupt continuous hit production that is executed during the normal variation production period, a production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters remains. The value "0, 1" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the type, and the value "2" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined for the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupt continuous hit performance executed during reach fluctuation, the value "3 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is associated with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 4 monsters. The value "20 to 39" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the performance type of the performance mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 3 and is defined, and the production mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. The value "40, 41" of the performance lottery counter 223qy is defined in association with the performance type. In other words, compared to the case of miss or hit normal reach, the total execution rate of the interrupt continuous hit effect is higher, and the possibility of defeating all the monsters is higher, so that the player's expectations for the jackpot are improved. I can do it.

In this way, in the 23rd embodiment, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance and the number of monsters that can be defeated are different for each variation type, and only in the case of a jackpot, the performance in which all the monsters are defeated is performed. It has a configuration that can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player perform the repeated hitting operation more actively during the execution of the interrupting repeated hitting performance, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated hitting performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 495(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 495(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb, a normal reserved ball number counter 223qc, a fluctuation start flag 223qd, a stop type selection flag 223qe, and a game state storage area 223qf. , time saving guarantee number counter 223qg, continuous scenario storage area 223qh, right hit winning flag 223qi, continuous hit type storage area 223qj, chance charge standby flag 223qk, charge number counter 223qm, charge state number counter 223qn. , the batch change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, the pending symbol state storage area 223qr, the variable time timer 223qs, the operation valid period timer 223qt, the stop operation number counter 223qu, and the consecutive hit valid period timer 223qv, all at once. At least a change period timer 223qx, an effect lottery counter 223qy, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110 up to 4 times, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qa The ball number counter 223qb is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and displays the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. It is not possible to obtain the value of . Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command transmitted from the main controller 110, and inputs the number to the special symbol 1 number of reserved balls counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 number of reserved balls counter 223qb. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, or the main control device 110 displays a special symbol. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe after addition or subtraction. The command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qd of the main controller 110 based on the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203qe is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb (see Z3910 in FIG. 528). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved pitch number counter 223qb. , sends a command for the number of reserved balls for display to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223qb after storage. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it displays the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qa of the audio lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223qb are displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved balls symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203qd and the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203qe of the main controller 110. It can be changed while changing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223qc has the same contents as the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223qd is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z3904 in FIG. 528), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display setting on the display device 81 is made (see Z4202 in FIG. 532). When the variation start flag 223qd is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (Z3102) of the main process (see FIG. 518). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 so that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z3907 in FIG. 528), and the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See Z4208 in FIG. 532). When the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The gaming state storage area 223qf is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. This gaming state storage area 223qf is updated every time a state command is received from the main control device 110, which is output every time a change occurs in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (see Z3902 in FIG. 528). Note that the gaming state storage area 223qf is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the symbol is in a time-saving state, and the second lower bit indicates whether or not it is in a probability-changing state of a special symbol. Therefore, in the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols", the lower two bits are "00B", and in the "low probability state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower two bits are "00B". The 2 bits become "01B", and the lower 2 bits become "11B" in the "probability change state of special symbols" and the "time saving state of normal symbols". The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223qf.

The time saving guaranteed number of times counter 223qg is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations for which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of this guaranteed time saving counter 223qg is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see Z4107 in FIG. 531). Furthermore, each time a new variable display is set to be executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see Z4304 in FIG. 533). As described above, in the present 23rd embodiment, the time saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. By counting the number of guaranteed time savings using the guaranteed time counter 223qg, the audio lamp control device 113 can also accurately grasp the guaranteed number of times.

The continuation scenario storage area 223qh is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of performance scenario determined from the continuation suggestion performance selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance. The initial value of this continuation scenario storage area 223qh is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion production selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) at the start timing of the variable continuation suggestion production, Data indicating the performance scenario is stored (see Z4409 in FIG. 534). While the probability change continuation suggestion performance is being executed, the variable display mode at the start of each variable display is determined based on the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh (see Z4415 in FIG. 534).

The winning flag 223qi during right-handed hitting is a flag indicating whether the jackpot being executed is a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state (normal symbol time saving state). If this right-handed winning flag 223qi is on, it indicates a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, it indicates a jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (i.e., the first win). . At the end of the jackpot, the back mode is set according to the state of the winning flag 223qi during right-hand hitting. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see Z4109 and Z4110 in FIG. 531). As mentioned above, if you hit a jackpot in a left-handed game mode (that is, you got a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol), only 50% of the time it will shift to a variable probability state, while if you hit a jackpot in a right-handed game mode. (that is, a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol), the probability changes state at a rate of 80%. The configuration is such that the difference in this ratio is reported based on the degree of expectation indicated by the back mode.

The continuous hit type storage area 223qj is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of interrupt continuous hit effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit value of the number of monsters to be subtracted). Depending on the data in the continuous hit type storage area 223qj, the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance, the number of monsters to be subtracted in response to the press of the PUSH button 10317, etc. are set.

The chance charge standby flag 223qk is a flag indicating whether there is a period (chance charge standby period) after the execution of the chance charge performance is decided until the chance charge performance is actually started, and is turned on. If so, it indicates that it is a chance charge standby period. The initial value of this chance charge standby flag 223qk is set to OFF, and it is set to ON when it is decided to execute the chance charge effect (see Z4564 in FIG. 536), and the execution of the chance charge effect is started. (See Z3313 in FIG. 520). If a new starting prize is detected while this chance charge standby flag 223qk is on, the number of gauges is added to the number of gauges predetermined as the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance that will be executed afterwards. It is determined whether or not.

The charge number counter 223qm is a counter that indicates the number of spirit gauges notified in the chance charge performance. The initial value of this charge number counter 223qm is set to 0, and when it is decided to execute the chance charge effect, the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision is set (see FIG. 536). (See Z4563). Further, by executing the chance-up effect, each time the spirit gauge is consumed, its value is subtracted by 1 and updated (see Z3559 and Z3561 in FIG. 523).

The charge state number counter 223qn is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until consumption of the spirit gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. This charge state number counter 223qn is set to a value according to the current number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance (see Z3314 in FIG. 520), and the value changes every time a new variable display performance is set to be executed. It is subtracted by 1 (see Z4302 in FIG. 533). While the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge every time the chance-up effect can be executed.

The batch change flag 223qp is a flag indicating whether or not a pending batch change effect is being executed. If it is on, it means that a pending batch change effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that a pending batch change effect is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. The initial value of this batch change flag 223qp is set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the pending batch change effect is set (see Z4059 in FIG. 530).

The change point storage area 223qq is a storage area for storing change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222qd described above. This change point storage area 223qq is configured to be able to store the change points of each reserved ball separately.

The pending symbol state storage area 223qr is a storage area for storing data indicating the pending symbol mode of each pending ball number symbol. With the data stored in this pending symbol state storage area 223qr, it is possible to accurately grasp the pending symbol mode of each pending ball number symbol.

The fluctuation time timer 223qs is a timer for measuring fluctuation time. Based on the timer value of the variable time timer 223qs, it is possible to accurately judge the progress of the variable display performance.

The operation valid period timer 223qt is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). This operation valid period timer 223qt determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the press stop effect is treated as valid. In addition, in the press stop effect, separate button images and validity period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid according to a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not to enable the stop operation of each symbol row, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223qu is a counter that indicates the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 478). When the value of this stop operation counter 223qu is 3 and a stop operation is detected during the operation validity period, the left symbol column is displayed in a stopped state, and when the value is 2, the stop operation is detected during the operation validity period. When an operation is detected, the right symbol column is stopped and displayed, and when the value is 1 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the center symbol column is stopped and displayed.

The continuous press valid period timer 223qv is a timer for measuring the period during which the continuous press operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt continuous press effect (see FIG. 482). This continuous press valid period timer 223qv determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous press performance is treated as valid.

The batch change period timer 223qx is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 486 and 487). This batch change period timer 223qx determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the pending batch change production is treated as valid.

As described above, the performance lottery counter 223qy is a random number counter for executing a lottery of performance modes.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The other memory area 223z is provided with, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on winning information commands received from the main control device 110. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning is detected in the main control device 110, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning is used. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (win/fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is The winning information command is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (win/failure, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the RAM 223. The winning information is stored in a winning information storage area (not shown) which is a storage area. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a timer that measures the performance time. are doing. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 23 (see FIG. 528) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process 23 is executed. (See S3114 in FIG. 528), the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This is used to control the performance (performance) and continuous preview performance.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply section 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power outage, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122. have. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 509).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, the audio output device 226 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. FIG. 501 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 501, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A certain RAM 303 is built-in.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizer 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305. Further, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizer 306.

The speech synthesis section 306 is composed of a known speech synthesis LSI that synthesizes the speech data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized speech data to the amplifier section 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier section 307 and input to the speaker section 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds specified by the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, with reference to FIG. 501, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 501, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (audio file) 302a.

The audio file storage area (audio file) 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used to output music, sound effects, etc. in various performances performed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various performances is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the performance is read from the audio file storage area (audio file) 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306. be done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 501, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a continuous hit sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music outputting flag 303c.

The repeated hit sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of the most recently outputted repeated hit sound (whether it is the first repeated hit sound or the second repeated hit sound) during execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect. If the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the most recently outputted repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second repeated hitting sound. By configuring the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a to be able to grasp the type of the most recently outputted repeated tapping sound, it is possible to alternately reproduce different types of repeated hitting sounds for different channels each time a repeated tapping operation is detected. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the sound mode during execution of the continuous hitting operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The playback position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the playback position at the time of interruption when the playback of music is instructed to be interrupted. When reproducing the music, it is possible to accurately restart the reproduction from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The song outputting flag 303c is a flag indicating whether a variable display effect or the like is being executed and a song based on an audio file is being output. If the song output flag 303c is on, it means that the song is being output, and if it is off, it means that the song is not being output.

<About the control process of the main controller in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts shown in FIGS. 502 to 516. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store it in the corresponding buffer area.

Furthermore, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C5 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the falling lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (999, 999, respectively in this embodiment). 99, 250, 999, 198, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process 23 is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (Z104). , the starting winning process 23 associated with winning the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process 23 and the starting winning process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 to 506.

After executing the starting winning process 23, the normal symbol variation process 23, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passage as the ball passes through the normal ball entrance is executed. Process 23 is executed (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation process 23 and the through gate passing process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 507 and 508. After executing the through gate passage process 23, a firing control process is executed (Z108), and then other winning processes are executed (Z109). Further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z110), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 503, the special symbol variation process 23 (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104). This special symbol variation processing 23 (Z104) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502), and is used to display the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37, or to display the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z201: Yes), this process is ended as is.

If there is no special symbol jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number of pending fluctuation displays in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe (the number of pending fluctuation displays in the special symbol) The number of times N2) is obtained (Z203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is larger than 0 (Z204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is 0 ( Z204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe (Z205), and set the number of reserved balls command that indicates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe changed by the calculation. (Z206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203qe from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter 223qb of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is shifted (Z207). In the process of Z207, the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of Z207 is executed, the process moves to the process of Z208.

On the other hand, in the process of Z204, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd acquired in the process of Z203 is It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (Z209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is 0 (Z209: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is not 0 (Z209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (Z210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd that has been changed by the calculation is set (Z211). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203qd from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter 223qa of the RAM 223. Store in.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of Z211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is shifted (Z212). In the process of Z212, the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 23 for setting the start of variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (Z208), and this processing ends. The special symbol variation start process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 504.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (Z213: No), the display on the first symbol display device is updated (Z214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z213, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z213: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z215). Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 23 (Z208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 504. When this special symbol fluctuation start process 23 (Z208) is executed, various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb are A special symbol is drawn based on the value. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In this embodiment, as the stop symbol of the first symbol (special symbol), when the jackpot A occurs, a blue LED is lit in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, a red LED is lit. Light up the LED, if it becomes a jackpot C, turn on the green LED, if it turns out to be a jackpot D, turn on the blue LED and red LED, and if it turns into a jackpot E, turn on the red LED. and lights up the green LED. Further, if the error occurs, the blue LED and the green LED are set to light up. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of Z215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) It is determined whether the result) is a special symbol jackpot (Z216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to ON (Z217). Then, a stop command is set (Z218), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (Z216: No), the process of Z217 is skipped, and after executing the process of Z218, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 504, the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208). This special symbol variation start process 23 (Z208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb, a lottery (judgment of success or failure) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of the variable performance performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 23 (Z208), first, the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type counter C3, falling lottery counter C4, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area are (Z301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently changing in probability (high probability state of special symbols) (Z302). Note that the determination as to whether or not the probability is changing is executed by determining whether the value of the probability changing flag 203qh is 1 or more. Here, the probability change flag 203qh is set to a predetermined value based on the completion of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of Z302, if it is determined that the probability is changing (Z302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability (high probability state of special symbols), so the falling lottery counter C4 obtained in the process of Z301 is By comparing the value with the falling lottery table 202qe (see FIG. 490(c)), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause the special symbol to fall from the variable probability state to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall lottery). Z303). Specifically, the value of the falling lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with two random numbers stored in the falling lottery table 202qe. As mentioned above, the two random numbers "0, 1" corresponding to a fall to a low probability state during probability change (high probability state of special symbols) are set, and the value of the fall lottery counter C4 and , and the random numbers corresponding to these falls match, it is determined that the fall is caused to fall into a low probability state. Once the lottery result of the fall lottery is acquired in the process of Z303, the process moves to the process of Z304.

In the process of Z304, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponds to a fall of the special symbol to a low probability state (Z304), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a fall (Z304: Yes), The probability change flag 203qh is set to OFF (Z305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (Z306), and the process moves to Z307.

On the other hand, in the process of Z302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, it is determined that it is in a low probability state of special symbols (Z302: No), Z303 to Z306 are executed. The process is skipped and the process moves to Z307.

In the process of Z307, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z301 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa for low probability times (see FIG. 490(a)), whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined. The lottery result of "no" is acquired (Z307). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with four random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Four random numbers from 0 to 3 are set as the random numbers for a jackpot for special symbols in a low probability state, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers for a jackpot are set. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to Z309.

On the other hand, in the process of Z304, if it is determined that the lottery result does not correspond to a fall (Z304: No), the process moves to the process of Z308. In the process of Z308, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z301 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa for high probability times (see FIG. 490(a)), whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is determined. The lottery result of "no" is acquired (Z308). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with eight random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa. Eight random numbers from "4 to 11" are set as the random numbers for a jackpot with a special symbol in a high probability state, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers for a jackpot are set. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to Z309.

In the process of Z309, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of Z307 or Z308 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the obtained special win random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa (Z309), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (Z309: Yes), the values of the time saving medium counter 203qg and probability change flag 203qh are initialized. value (Z310), and set the display mode at the time of a jackpot based on the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z301 (Z311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of Z301 is compared with the random value stored in the jackpot type selection 23 table 202qd, and the jackpot types (jackpot A - Jackpot E) It is determined which type of jackpot is this time. As mentioned above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot), and it is determined as "10 to 49". If it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R definite variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see Figure 491(b)) . In addition, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that it is a jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot), and the value is in the range of "80 to 99". If so, it is determined that it is a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 491(c)).

In the process of Z311, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to E) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of Z311 is stopped and displayed by the process of Z215 of the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503).

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (see FIGS. 492(a) and 493), a variation pattern for winning a jackpot is selected. Here, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 492(b) and FIG. 493, in order to facilitate setting of different fluctuation patterns depending on the set gaming state, It is configured such that the variation time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables depending on the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 202qb1 (see FIG. 492(a)) of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb, and the gaming state When is in a probability variable state or a time saving state, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability variation/time saving table 202qb2 (see FIG. 493) of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb (Z312). After the process of Z312 is completed, the process moves to Z318. When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is set. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. .

On the other hand, in the process of Z309, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a loss (Z309: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203qg is larger than 0 or not. (Z313). In the process of Z313, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203qg is larger than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (Z313: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203qg is subtracted by 1 (Z314), A status command indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg after the subtraction is set (Z315), and the process moves to Z316. On the other hand, in the process of Z313, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203qg is 0 (Z313: No), the processes of Z314 and Z315 are skipped and the process moves to the process of Z316.

In the process of Z316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the removed symbol, and the stop type selected is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (Z317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of Z312, the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. .

In process Z318, which is executed after process Z312 or process Z317 is completed, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in process Z312 or process Z317. (Z318). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z312 or the process of Z317 (Z319). When the process of Z319 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 23 (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, the starting winning process 23 (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process 23 (Z105). This starting winning process 23 (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting winning. Second, there is a process for suspending the values indicated by the various random number counters, and a process for pre-reading the lottery results in the special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters.

When the starting winning process 23 (Z105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or not (Z401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (Z401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (the number of times N1 of reservations of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z402). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z403).

Then, in the process of Z401, if it is determined that there is no winning in the first ball entry port 64 (Z401: No), the process moves to Z408, and even if there is a winning in the first ball entering port 64 ( Z401: Yes), in the process of Z403, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit value is 4) (Z403: No), the process of Z407 Move to. On the other hand, in the process of Z401, it is determined that there has been a winning in the first ball entry port 64 (Z401: Yes), and in the process of Z403, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is If it is determined that it is less than 4 (Z403: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd (Z404). Then, the first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd changed by the calculation is set (Z405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 511) to be described later. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203qd from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value as the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203qd in the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223qa.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command by processing Z405, the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, falling lottery counter C4, and fluctuation type updated in Z103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process are set. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203qa of the RAM 203 (Z406). In addition, in the process of Z406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area. When the process of Z406 is finished, next, the prefetch process 23 is executed (Z407), and the process moves to the process of Z408. The detailed contents of this look-ahead processing 23 (Z407) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on the value, a process of pre-determining (pre-reading) each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In addition, regarding each process of Z408 to Z413, each process of Z401 to Z406 described above based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is simply changed to a process based on the ball entering the second starting port 640. , Z401 to Z406, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of Z413, the prefetch process 23 is executed (Z414 (Z407)), and then this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be acquired based on the ball entering, but it may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Alternatively, some of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of variation. With this configuration, the counters related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counters that are not related to the judgment of success or failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 506, the prefetching process 23 (Z407 (Z414)), which is one process in the starting winning process 23 (Z105), executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing this prefetch processing 23 (Z407 (Z414)).

In the prefetch process 23, first, it is determined whether there is a new prize winning (Z501). In the process of Z501, it is determined that a new prize has been won when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203qd or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203qe is added. . In the process of Z501, if it is determined that there is no new prize winning (Z501: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (Z501: Yes), then it is determined whether the current winning is special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (Z502), and if it is special symbol 1. If it is determined (Z502: Yes), the lottery results for each counter value acquired this time are based on the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa and the special symbol jackpot 23 table (special symbol jackpot type selection 23 table) 202qd1. Obtain it in advance (Z503) and move on to the process of Z504. In the process of Z504, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is set as the lottery result obtained in advance (Z504), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z502, if it is determined that the current winning is not special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), that is, it is special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) (Z502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is obtained in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number 23 table 202qa and the special pattern 2 jackpot 23 table (special pattern 2 jackpot type selection 23 table) 202qd2 (Z505), and as the preliminarily obtained lottery result. , a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set (Z504), and this process ends.

In this way, before the fluctuation starts, the result of the validity judgment made in advance is output as a winning information command to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a reserved ball is established, so the audio lamp control device 113 , it is possible to recognize the success/failure determination result and the winning type in advance. Therefore, based on the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a preview effect (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbols to a color that suggests the winning/failing determination result) that notifies the player of the winning/failure judgment result for the held balls in advance. It is also possible to perform effects such as outputting a notification sound to notify the result of determination of the validity of the held balls. Moreover, since one winning information command is output for each held ball every time a held ball is established, the audio lamp control device 113 can also recognize the formation of a held ball. can. In addition, in the prefetching process 23 (see Z407 in FIG. 506) in this embodiment, if it is determined in the process Z501 that there is no new prize winning (Z501: No), this process is directly terminated. However, without being limited to this, for example, the winning information command may be set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203qa or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203qb. It's okay. With this configuration, even if it is determined in response to the winning information command received by the audio lamp control device 113 that the preview performance is not to be executed, the preview performance will be executed again for the same pending symbol. It is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the lottery results are determined in advance based on each counter value acquired by the main control device 110 side, and information for indicating the preliminary determination results is set as a winning information command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information for indicating each acquired counter value may be set as a winning information command, and the lottery result may be determined in advance based on the winning information command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured. In addition, when setting information indicating each acquired counter value as a winning information command, the winning information command may be encrypted so that the currently acquired counter value cannot be identified by the player who illegally acquired the winning information command. It is preferable to configure the system so that the winning information command is output at multiple timings.

Next, with reference to FIG. 507, the normal symbol variation process 23 (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z106). This normal symbol variation processing 23 (Z106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 502), and is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process 23, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (Z601). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (Z601: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203qf (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (Z603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is larger than 0 (Z604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is 0 (Z604: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is not 0 (Z604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is subtracted by 1 (Z605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is shifted (Z606). In the process of Z606, the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203qc is acquired (Z607), and the process moves to Z608.

In the process of Z608, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (normal symbol high probability state) (Z608). In the process of Z608, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg and the state of the probability change flag 203qh are checked, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203qh is on, the time saving medium is set. If the value of the time-saving counter 203qg is 0 and the probability change flag 203qh is off, it is determined that the time-saving period is not in progress. In the process of Z608, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (high probability state of normal symbols) (the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203qh is on) (Z608: Yes) , since the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 obtained in the process of Z603 and the normal winning random number 23 table (normal symbol random number table) 202qc for high probability times (Fig. 490(b)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (Z609), and the process moves to Z611. In the process of Z609, specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 and the normal winning random number 23 table for high probability times (random number table per normal symbol) 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)) are stored. Compare with random value. As mentioned above, if the value of the random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a normal symbol win. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 490(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of Z608, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (the value of the time saving mode counter 203qg is 0 and the probability change flag 203qh is off) (Z608: No) , since the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) with normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 obtained in the process of Z603 and the normal winning random number 23 table for low probability times (normal Based on the per-symbol random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (Z610). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal win random number 23 table (normal per symbol random number table) 202qc (see FIG. 490(b)) for low probability times. . As mentioned above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is determined to be a normal win. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 490(b)).

In this embodiment, it is configured such that during a special symbol jackpot, it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to enter the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entering hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the game ball that is intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640.

After executing the process of Z609 or Z610, the process moves to the process of Z611. In the process of Z611, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z609 or Z610 is a normal symbol win (Z611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (Z611: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (Z612), and the process moves to Z614. In the process of Z612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of Z611, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (Z611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z613), and the process moves to the process of Z614. In the process of Z613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of Z614, it is determined whether the current time is being shortened (or not in a high probability state of normal symbols) (Z614), and if it is in a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (Z614: Yes) , the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z615), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z614, if the time is not being shortened (normal symbol high probability state), that is, the normal symbol is low probability state (Z614: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30. seconds (Z616), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z602: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z617). Note that the variable time here is a time that is preset by the process of Z615 or the process of Z616 before the variable display starts on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of Z617, if the variable time has not elapsed (Z617: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z617, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z618). In the process of Z618, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of Z612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of Z613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of Z618, when the second symbol display update process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 511) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of Z612 or Z613.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 23 is the normal symbol win. (Z619). If the lottery result this time is not a normal symbol hit (Z619: No), the process ends as is. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (Z619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is being shortened (Z620). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (Z620: Yes), set the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to 1 second x 2 times (Z622), and proceed to the process of Z623. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of Z620, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z620: No), the opening time and number of times of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time. (Z622), and the process moves to Z623.

In the process Z623 executed after the process Z621 or Z622, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z623), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of Z623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 511) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of Z621 or Z622 in FIG. 507 are completed.

In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is extremely short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to the low probability state of the regular symbol. Since the release period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of openings per long period are the same in the normal state and the potential state, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and the opening time and number of openings can be set to be different. Good too. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, the validity of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state set at the start of the variation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery), and the game is played at the time when the variation time of the winning normal symbol has elapsed. The opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in this embodiment, since the gaming state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of special symbols, the gaming state may be variably set while the normal symbols are changing. In such a case, if the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state that is set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of drawing), for example, during a jackpot game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a remains open for a long time while the symbol is in a high probability state. In contrast, by configuring to set the opening operation content of the first electric accessory 640a based on the gaming state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has elapsed, the first electric accessory 640a The opening operation can be executed with contents suitable for the set gaming state.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 508, the through gate passage process 23 (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing 23 (Z107). This through gate passage process 23 (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502), and determines whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entry opening (through gate) 67, and determines whether the ball has passed through. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C5 when

In the through gate passage process 23, first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203qf (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (Z702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter If the value (M) of 203qf is not less than 4 (Z703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (Z701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is less than 4 (Z703: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball counter 203qf is incremented by 1 (Z704). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203qc of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (Z705), and then this process ends. In addition, in the process of Z705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203qf is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (in this embodiment, a wait time of 1 second) is performed. setting process) is executed (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process moves to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to Z913 in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also the process moves to Z913. Note that, as described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 511, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. In addition, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup error is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( Z907: Yes), a status command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203qg and the status of the probability change flag 203qh (ie, the gaming status at startup) is transmitted (Z908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (Z909). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (Z910), and the process moves to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it enters a state where it can start payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (Z912), and the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 502) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 503) and the start winning process 23 (see FIG. 505) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing 23 (see FIG. 505) and the prefetching processing 23 (see FIG. 506) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable The jackpot control process 23 for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (Z1004). In the jackpot control process 23, the specific winning hole 65a is opened according to the content of the jackpot game to be executed (jacket type), and the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed, or the specified ball is in the specific winning hole 65a. Determine whether you have won a number of prizes. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Details of this jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 512 to 516. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot game contents (type of opening to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) corresponding to the jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. A jackpot scenario that is stored in advance and corresponds to the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot is read out, and a jackpot game is executed based on the read jackpot scenario.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of Z623 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process Z621 or Z622 of FIG. 507 in the normal symbol variation process 23 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process Z312 or Z317 of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504), the first symbol It starts at the display devices 37A, 37B. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off, the green LED is turned on, and the green LED is turned on until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If the LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process Z312 or the process Z317 of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504) ends, the first symbol display is updated. After finishing the fluctuation display being executed in the device 37, the stop symbol (first symbol) is changed to the first symbol in the display mode set by the process Z311 or the process Z316 of the special symbol variation start process 23 (see FIG. 504). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the display device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z615 or Z616 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z618 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507), the second symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of Z612 or Z613 of the normal symbol variation process 23 (see FIG. 507). Display (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process moves to Z1001, and the processes from Z1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main process (Z1009: No), the first The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process Z1001 to Z1007 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of Z1008, if information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 509 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and send it (Z1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process of Z1008 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game carried out in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of Z1010 and Z1011 carried out within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It can start from the process of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( By setting it to the initial value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of Z1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 512, the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 23 (Z1004). This jackpot control process 23 (Z1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 511), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls specific winning slots. This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening port) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 23 (Z1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203qi is on (Z1101: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (Z1102), the jackpot start flag 203qi is set to OFF, and the jackpot flag 203qj is set to ON (Z1103). , this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z1101, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203qi is off (Z1101: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a special symbol (that is, whether the jackpot flag 203qj is on). ) or not (Z1104). In the process of Z1104, if it is determined that the current situation is not a jackpot (the jackpot flag 203qj is off) (Z1104: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z1104, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203qj is on) (Z1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round ( Z1105).

In the process of Z1105, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 23 is executed to set the opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds ( Z1106), this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 513.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (Z1107). . Here, in this embodiment, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (Z1107: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (Z1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. In the process of Z1109, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (Z1109: Yes), the jackpot end process 23 for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (Z1110), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot ending process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 514. On the other hand, in the process of Z1109, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (Z1109: No), the winning process 23 is executed to perform control according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a (Z1111), Abnormality processing 23 for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a is normally ejected is executed (Z1112), and then this processing is ended. Details of the winning process 23 and the abnormality process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106). This jackpot operation setting process 23 (Z1106) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds. .

When this jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the 5th round (that is, the round in which the V accessory is activated) (Z1201). In the process of Z1201, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the 5th round (Z1201: Yes), the start of the action scenario of the V accessory is set (Z1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning hole 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is set. is set (Z1203), and the process moves to Z1205.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this 23rd embodiment, it is comprised so that the common operation|movement scenario may be set for V accessory regardless of a jackpot type (regardless). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the arrangement changes so that the game balls can be distributed to the V area from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round. On the other hand, as described above, different opening patterns are set for the specific winning hole 65a depending on whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a guaranteed variable jackpot, the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the V accessory (in the 5th round) while the V accessory is changing the arrangement to distribute the game balls to the V area. During a period of 4.5 seconds from 5 seconds after the start to 9.5 seconds, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, while the normal In the case of a jackpot, an opening/closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V accessory while the V accessory is changing its arrangement to distribute game balls to the V area (4.5 seconds have passed from the start of the 5th round) For 4.5 seconds up to the time, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1201, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round (Z1201: No), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a is set (Z1204), and the process moves to Z1205. In the process Z1205 executed after the process Z1203 or Z1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1205), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 511) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process 23 (see FIG. 513), the specific winning hole 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the state is set so that the ball can enter the V area in the 5th round. be able to. As a result, in jackpots A, B, and D, if the player hits right in the fifth round, the game ball will almost certainly enter the V area and pass the probability change switch, so after the jackpot ends, It is possible to shift to a variable probability state (a variable probability state for special symbols and a time saving state for normal symbols). Furthermore, in the case of jackpots C and E, it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the V area even if the ball is hit right, so it is possible to set the time saving state after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery for the first special symbol, in which jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50% rate) in the case of a jackpot, is considered to be disadvantageous for the player, and in the case of a jackpot, The second special symbol lottery in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be made advantageous for the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process 23 (Z1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending process 23 (Z1110). This jackpot end process 23 (Z1110) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above.

In this jackpot end processing 23 (Z1110), first, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203qk is on (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203qk is on (Z1301: Yes), it means that the game ball passed the variable probability switch during the jackpot, so set the variable probability flag 203qh to on. In this step, the state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state (Z1302), and the process moves to Z1303. On the other hand, in the process of Z1301, if the probability change setting flag 203qk is off (Z1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch during the jackpot, so by skipping the process of Z1302 , after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol low probability state, and the process moves to Z1303.

In the process of Z1303, the value of the time saving medium counter 203qg is set to 100 (Z1303), and based on the probability change flag 203qh and the state of the time saving medium counter 203qg, a status command (jackpot end command ) (Z1304). The status command (jackpot end command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see Figure 511) executed by the MPU 201. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the status command, the audio lamp control device 113 updates the gaming status storage area 223qf in accordance with the gaming status notified by the status command. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203qj and the variable probability setting flag 203qk are set to OFF (Z1305), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot ending process 23 (see FIG. 514), the gaming state after the jackpot can be accurately set depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch during the jackpot.

Next, details of the winning process 23 (Z1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 515. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing this winning process 23 (Z1111). This winning process 23 (Z1111) is executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning in the specific winning hole 65a.

In this winning process 23 (Z1111), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (Z1401). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the opening state of the specific winning a prize hole 65a until the end of the interval period. In the process of Z1401, if it is not the round validity period (Z1401: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1401, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (Z1401: Yes), then it is determined whether a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (Z1402), and the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If a winning is detected (Z1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203qp is updated by adding 1 (Z1403), and a winning command is set to indicate that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected. (Z1404), the process moves to Z1405. On the other hand, in the process of Z1402, if the winning to the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not detected (Z1402: No), the process of Z1403 and Z1404 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z1405.

In the process of Z1405, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405), and if the value of the winning prize number counter 203qp is 10 or more (Z1405: Yes), the process moves to the process of Z1407. On the other hand, in the process of Z1405, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter is 9 or less (Z1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (Z1406), and if the round time has elapsed ( Z1406: Yes), the process moves to Z1407. Note that in the process of Z1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of Z1407, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1407), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (Z1408). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific prize opening 65a is based on the completion of 5 rounds (Z1409), and if it is determined that the closure is based on the completion of 5 rounds (Z1409: Yes), the V accessory By setting the flow path solenoid for varying OFF to OFF, the state of the V accessory is set to an arrangement in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area (Z1410), and the process moves to Z1411. On the other hand, in the process of Z1409, if it is determined that the current closure of the specific prize opening 65a is due to the completion of a round other than the 5th round (Z1409: No), the flow path solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of Z1410 is skipped and the process moves to Z1411.

In the process of Z1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq, probability variation valid flag 203qs, and round end flag are set on (Z1411), and the process moves to Z1412. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of Z1405 that the value of the prize winning counter 203qp is 9 or less (Z1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of Z1406 (Z1406: No), The processing in Z1407 to Z1411 is skipped and the processing moves to Z1412.

In the process of Z1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (Z1412), and if the round end flag is off (Z1412: No), the process moves to the process of Z1413. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end flag is on in the process of Z1412 (Z1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203qs is on (Z1416). In the process of Z1416, if the probability variation valid flag 203qs is off (Z1416: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the definite variable valid flag 203qs is on (Z1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the definite variable valid timer 203qt (Z1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the definite variable valid timer 203qt is the upper limit value ( Z1418). If the value of the variable probability valid timer 203qt is not the upper limit value (Z1418: No), the process moves to step Z1413, and executes the process of monitoring the variable probability switch and updating the variable probability setting flag 203qk. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203qt is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, and therefore the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time required to brush the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being improperly passed through the probability change switch and being given a probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the variable variable effective timer 203qt is the upper limit value (Z1418: Yes), the variable variable effective flag 203qs and the round end flag are set to OFF (Z1419), and the value of the variable variable effective timer 203qt is reset (Z1420). , this process ends.

In addition, in the process of Z1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the variable probability switch (Z1413), and if the game ball has not passed the variable probability switch (Z1413: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed the probability variation switch (Z1413: Yes), add 1 to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203qm (Z1414), set the probability variation setting flag 203qk to ON (Z1415), and continue with this process. end.

Next, abnormality processing 23 (Z1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 516. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing 23 (Z1112). This abnormality process 23 (Z1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 23 (see FIG. 512), and as described above, checks whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was normally ejected. This is a process for determining.

In the abnormality processing 23 (Z1112), first, it is determined whether the current time is in the round valid period (Z1501), and if it is not in the round valid period (Z1501: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round validity period (Z1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (or the game ball ejected from the variable winning device 65 has been detected). Determine (Z1502).

In the process of Z1502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball ejection port switch (the game ball has been ejected from the variable winning device 65) (Z1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejected number counter 203qu. (Z1503), the process moves to Z1504. On the other hand, in the process of Z1502, if the game ball has not passed the ball discharge port switch (Z1502: No), the process of Z1503 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z1504.

In the process of Z1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is off (Z1504: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is on (Z1504: Yes), it is during the pitch period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is updated by adding 1 (Z1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit value (Z1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is not the upper limit value (Z1506: No), the process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is the upper limit (Z1506: Yes), then the number of ejected balls (the total value of the value of the variable passing counter 203qm and the value of the number of ejected balls counter 203qu) is awarded. It is determined whether the winning number matches the number (value of winning number counter 203qp) (Z1507).

In the process of Z1507, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of prizes won do not match (Z1507: No), an error command is set (Z1508), and the process moves to the process of Z1509. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity in which a game ball is illegally entered into the V area and passed through the probability change switch during the period when the V area is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1507, if it is determined that the number of ejected pieces and the number of winning pieces match (Z1507: Yes), the process of Z1508 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z1509. In the process of Z1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203qq is set to off (Z1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203qr is reset (Z1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203qp, the number of ejected pieces counter 203qu, and the variable passing counter 203qm are reset (Z1511), and this processing is ended.

By executing this abnormality processing 23 (see FIG. 516), a malfunction may occur in which the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are not ejected normally due to ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65. can be detected early and notified.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 535. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 517, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 517 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Z3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing may be caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), and the Z3119 power-off processing (see Figure 518). ) is started during execution (Z3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 518, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see Z3116 in FIG. 518), it executes the power-off process of Z3119. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z3119 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z3002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the Z3119 was powered off. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z3003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of Z3006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z3003: Yes), the process moves to Z3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z3003: No), the process moves to Z3008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z3003: Yes), and the process moves to Z3004. On the other hand, the current startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the Z3119 power-off process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z3003: No), and the process moves to Z3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z3002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of Z3119, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to Z3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of Z3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (Z3004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (Z3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z3007) and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of Z3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (Z3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z3119 is executed (see Z3118 in FIG. 518). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z3119 is executed, so the reason why the process of Z3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the Z3119 power-off processing has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (Z3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z3010), the interrupt Set permission (Z3011). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110. When the process of Z3011 is completed, it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z3012). Note that this status command is a command set in the process Z908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 510) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the process of Z3012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (Z3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (Z3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see Figure 518). and transition. On the other hand, in the process of Z3012, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z3012: No), the process of Z3013 is skipped and the process moves to the main process (see FIG. 518).

On the other hand, the reason why the process of Z3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process of Z3008 was started from Z3004 to Z3006 via the process of Z3006. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z3008: No), skip Z3009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, move the process to Z3010, execute the processes of Z3010 to Z3013 described above, and start the main process (Fig. 518).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is hitting for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. Can be done.

Note that the reason why the clearing process of Z3009 is skipped is that when the process reaches the process of Z3008 from Z3004 via the process of Z3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z3004, If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing of Z3101 has been executed (Z3101), and if 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z3101: No), the process proceeds to Z3114 without performing the processes of Z3102 to Z3113. In the process of Z3101, determining whether 1 msec has elapsed is mainly a process related to display (direction) in Z3102 to Z3113, and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process 23 of , Z3114, the variable display setting process 23 of Z3115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short period. That is, by executing the process of Z3114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of Z3115 in a short cycle, the command determination process 23 (Fig. Based on the command received in step S3114 of 528), settings regarding the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of Z3101 (Z3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of Z3103 to Z3115 are sent to the display control device 114 (Z3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z3108, which will be described later (Z3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z3104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step Z3105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of Z3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (Z3106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223qa, the special symbol 2 pending ball counter 223qb, and the value of the normal pending ball counter 223qc. will be held.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (Z3107). In this frame button input monitoring/production processing, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (Z3108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (Z3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of Z3109, the liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (Z3110), and the process moves to the process of Z3111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal presentation execution management process. The sound editing/output processing of Z3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of Z3110 is finished, next, a performance update process 23 for updating the performance mode of various performances executed during execution of the variable display performance is executed (Z3111). This effect update processing 23 (Z3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 519 to 446. After executing the effect update process 23 (Z3111), next, the operation status of the PUSH button 10317 (whether it is pressed or not) is monitored, and when a press is detected, control is executed according to the press status. The press detection process is executed (Z3112). Details of this press detection process (Z3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 524 to 450.

When the process of Z3112 is finished, counter update process is executed (Z3113). In this counter update process (Z3113), a process is executed to update the value of a counter (for example, the performance lottery counter 223qy for selecting a performance mode) that is necessary when executing various performances.

When the process of Z3113 is completed, next, command determination process 23 is executed to execute control according to various commands received from the main control device 110 (Z3114). Details of this command determination process 23 (Z3114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 528 to 454. After executing the command determination process 23 (Z3114), the variable display setting process 23 is executed (Z3115). In the variable display setting process 23, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 532 to 459.

When the process of Z3115 is completed, it is determined whether the work RAM 233 stores power-off occurrence information (Z3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of Z3116 (Z3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z3118), and the power-off process is executed (Z3119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z3116 (Z3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z3117: No), the process returns to Z3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 519, the effect update process 23 (Z3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing this effect update processing 23 (Z3111). This effect update process 23 (Z3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, various types of effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect. This is a process for updating the performance mode of the performance.

In the effect update processing 23 (Z3111), first, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223qs is a value greater than 0 (Z3201), and if the value is determined to be 0 (Z3201: No), This means that the variable display is not currently being executed, meaning that there is no possibility that the effect that should be updated is being executed, so the process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223qs is greater than 0 (that is, it is a value of 1 or more) (Z3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer 223qs is subtracted (Z3202), and then, A press stop effect process is executed to update the effect mode during execution of the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3203). Note that details of this press stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

When the process of Z3203 is completed, next, an interrupt continuous hit performance process is executed to update the performance mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit performance (see FIG. 482) (Z3204). Note that details of this interrupt continuous hit production process (Z3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 521. When the process of Z3204 is completed, next, a batch change performance process is executed to update the performance mode during execution of the pending batch change performance (see FIGS. 485 and 486) (Z3205). The details of this batch change effect processing (Z3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 522. When the process of Z3205 is completed, a charge consumption process for setting the consumption of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge performance (see FIG. 480) is executed (Z3206), and this process ends. Details of this charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 523.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520, the press stop effect processing (Z3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing this press stop effect processing (Z3203). This press stop effect processing (Z3203) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) is executed. This is a process for updating the performance mode during execution.

In this press stop effect processing (see FIG. 520), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3301). In the process of Z3301, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) (Z3301: Yes), the start of the press stop effect is set (Z3302), and the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is set to 3. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (Z3303). Next, the value of the stop operation counter 223qu is set to 3 (Z3304), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the press stop effect (Z3301: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3305). In the process of Z3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is updated (Z3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer is It is determined whether the value of 223qt is 0 (Z3307). In the process of Z3307, if it is determined that the value of the updated operation valid period timer 223qt is not 0 (Z3307: No), this process is directly ended. If it is determined that the value of the updated operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3307: Yes), then it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3308). In the process of Z3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (Z3309), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3308: No), only the press stop effect (see FIG. 478) is set for the current variable display effect. This means that the operation validity period (3 seconds) has passed without the player performing a stop operation in a state where the execution of the chance charge effect was not set, so the stop display of the missing symbol is set. (Z3310) and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3305: No), then it is determined whether the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (Z3311) . If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has not elapsed (Z3311: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z3311, if it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has passed (Z3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set (Z3312), The charging standby flag 223qk is set to OFF (Z3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of reserved pitches is set to the value of the charge state number counter 223qn (Z3314), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the interrupt continuous hit production process (Z3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (Z3204). This interrupt continuous hit effect processing (Z3204) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482). This is a process for updating the presentation mode.

When this interrupt repeated hit performance processing (see FIG. 521) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the interrupted repeated hit performance (Z3401). In the process of Z3401, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3401: Yes), then from the value of the variable time timer 223qs, it is determined whether the current variable time is the time indicating before reach. (Z3402). In the process of Z3402, if it is determined that it is a variable time indicating before reach (Z3402: Yes), set a pause for both the display and audio, and set the pause flag to "01H" ( Z3404), the process moves to Z3405. Specifically, in the process of Z3404, a display interrupt command indicating the start of stopping (interrupting) the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and at the same time, a display interrupt command indicating the start of stopping (interrupting) the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and a display interrupt command is set to be output to the display control device 114. A setting is made to output an audio interrupt command indicating this to the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3402, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223qs is not a timer value indicating before reach (Z3402: No), only the display mode is set to pause (interrupted), and the pause flag is set. "02H" is set (Z3403), and the process moves to Z3405. In the process Z3405 executed after the process Z3403 or Z3404 is finished, the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 482) is set (Z3405), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3401, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z3401: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (Z3406). In the process of Z3406, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (Z3406: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv (Z3407), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of Z3406, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous hitting period (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hitting valid period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is subtracted by 1 (Z3409), and then the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv after the subtraction It is determined whether or not is 0 (Z3410). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive hit valid period timer 223qv after the subtraction is 0 (Z3410: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z3410, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv after the subtraction is not 0 (Z3410: No), the display of the end image of the interrupt continuous hit performance is set (Z3411), and then, This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3408, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z3408: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance (Z3412) . In the process of Z3412, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance (Z3412: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413). If it is determined that the value of the pause flag is "01H" (Z3413: Yes), it means that both the display and audio were stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance. Both the aspect and the audio aspect are set to resume from the paused position (Z3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output an audio interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the audio mode. Set the output. When the process of Z3414 is completed, the process moves to Z3415.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3413, if it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is not "01H" (Z3413: No), it means that the value of the temporary stop flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporary. Since this means that the display mode has been stopped (suspended), the display mode is set to restart from the paused position (that is, a display interrupt command is output to the display control device 114 indicating the end of the display mode interruption). setting) (Z3416), and the process moves to Z3415. In the process of Z3415 executed after the process of Z3414 or Z3416, by setting the initial value "00H" to the pause flag (Z3415), it is ensured that neither the audio nor the display is paused (interrupted). is displayed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance (Z3412: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, the batch change effect processing (Z3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing this batch change effect processing (Z3205). This batch change effect processing (Z3205) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is performed during the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 485 and 486). This is a process for updating the performance mode during execution.

In the batch change production process (see FIG. 522), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z3501), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is not on (off), Z3501: No), which means that the pending batch change performance (see FIGS. 485 and 486) is not in execution period, and there is no possibility to perform settings related to the pending batch change performance, so the process ends as is. If it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z3501: Yes), next, in the pending batch change performance, the timing when the valid period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 for batch changing the pending symbol mode starts. It is determined whether or not (Z3502). In the process of Z3502, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 (Z3502: Yes), by setting a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds to the value of the batch change period timer 223qx ( Z3503), the valid period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of 3502, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the valid period (Z3502: No), then check whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (that is, whether the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid). is within the period) (Z3504). In the process of Z3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (Z3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is subtracted by 1 (Z3505), and the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after the subtraction is It is determined whether the value of is 0 (Z3506). In the process of Z3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx after the subtraction is not 0 (Z3506: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z3506, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx after subtraction is 0 (Z3506: Yes), each pending ball number is added to the pending symbol mode indicated by the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r. The symbols are set to be changed and displayed (Z3507), and the values of the batch change flag 223qp, change point storage area 223qq, and batch change period timer 223qx are all reset (Z3508), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3504, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3504: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 523, the charge consumption process (Z3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption process (Z3206). This charge consumption process (Z3206) is executed in the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the charge consumption process (Z3206) is This is a process for setting the consumption of the determined spirit gauge.

In the charge consumption process (Z3206), it is first determined whether the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than 0 (Z3551), and if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is 0 (Z3551: No). , this means that there is no room to generate a chance-up performance by consuming the spirit gauge, so this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of Z3551, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than 0 (Z3551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the executable timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552). In the process of Z3552, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the charge consumption effect can be executed (Z3552: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3552, if it is determined that it is the executable timing of the charge consumption effect (Z3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is 0 ( Z3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state counter 223qn is 0 (Z3553: Yes), it means that this is the last fluctuation display in which it is possible to consume the Kiai gauge, and the Kiai gauge can be consumed within this fluctuation display. Since it is necessary to completely consume the spirit gauge, the process (processes Z3560 and Z3561) for setting a chance-up performance by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3553, if it is determined that the value of the charge state counter 223qn is not 0 (Z3553: No), next, if the currently executed variation display (the variation) has an expectation level of super reach or higher, It is determined whether or not the presentation mode shown is a set variable display (Z3554). If it is determined that the fluctuation is not expected to be higher than the super reach (below the normal reach performance) (Z3354: No), then next, whether or not the charge state includes a hold of the super reach or higher. (Z3555). If it is determined that the range of the charge state includes balls of super reach or higher (Z3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm is the value of the number of balls held within the charge range plus 2. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (Z3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is greater than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of held balls within the charge range (Z3556: Yes), the held balls of super reach performance or higher, which have many opportunities to execute chance-up performances, are Even if you take into account the number of balls that are included, it means that the number of gauges (number of charges) of the Kiai gauge remains large compared to the number of balls held, so in order to reduce the number of Kiai gauges during the fluctuation, Processes (processes Z3558 and Z3559) for setting a chance-up effect by consuming the gauge are executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3556, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is less than or equal to the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of reserved balls within the charge range (Z3556: No), a variable display with a super reach effect set will be displayed. By consuming the spirit gauge at the execution timing of multiple chance-up performances in This process ends without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in .

In addition, in the process of Z3555, if it is determined that the range of the charge state does not include a ball of super reach or higher (Z3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223qm It is determined whether the value is greater than the number (Z3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is less than or equal to the number of reserved balls within the charge range (Z3557: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3557, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223qm is larger than the number of reserved balls within the charge range (Z3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge is This means that a large amount remains, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge during the fluctuation, the process (processes Z3558 and Z3559) for consuming the spirit gauge and setting a chance-up effect is executed.

In the process of Z3558, a charge consumption performance is set in a performance mode according to the execution timing (Z3558), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is subtracted by 1 (Z3559), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z3554, if it is determined that the fluctuation is greater than or equal to the super reach (Z3354: Yes), a charge consumption performance with a performance mode according to the execution timing is set (Z3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set. is subtracted by 1 (Z3561), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 524, the press detection process (Z3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing this press detection process (Z3112). This press detection process (Z3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (whether or not it is pressed) of the PUSH button 10317, This is a process for executing control according to the pressing situation when a pressing is detected.

In the press detection process (Z3112), first, it is determined whether or not a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected (Z3601), and if it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (Z3601: No), the process continues as is. This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (Z3601: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is greater than 0 (Z3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 was pressed (operated) during the valid period of the press stop effect (see Figure 478). Therefore, a stop operation detection process is executed to perform control corresponding to the stop operation during execution of the press stop effect (Z3603), and this process ends. Note that details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 525.

In the process of Z3602, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is 0 (Z3602: No), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (i.e., if the continuous hit in the interrupt continuous hit performance (Z3604). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is greater than 0 (Z3604: Yes), a repeated hit operation detection process is executed to execute control corresponding to the repeated hit operation during execution of the interrupt repeated hit performance (Z3605). , and then ends this process. Note that details of this repeated-hit operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 526.

In the process of Z3604, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z3604: No), then it is determined whether the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (that is, if the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is larger than 0 (i.e., It is determined whether the PUSH button 10317 is valid (Z3606). If it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223qx is greater than 0 (Z3606: Yes), change operation detection processing is executed to perform control for setting batch changes while the pending batch change performance is being executed. (Z3607), then this process ends. Note that details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 527. On the other hand, in the process of Z3606, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223qx is 0 (Z3606: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 525, the stop operation detection process (Z3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing this stop operation detection process (Z3603). This stop operation detection process (Z3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the stop operation detection process (Z3603) is This is a process for performing corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (Z3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is greater than 1 (Z3701), and if it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is greater than 1 (Z3701 :Yes), sets the stop display of the symbol row corresponding to the value of the stop operation counter 223qu (Z3702), and moves to the process of Z3709. In the process of Z3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is 3, the stop operation for the left symbol row is set, while if the value of the stop operation number counter 223qu is 2, the stop operation for the right symbol row is set. Set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3701, if it is determined that the value of the stop operation counter 223qu is 1 or less (Z3701: No), it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3703). In the process of Z3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z3703: Yes), it means that the variable display set to execute the chance charge effect is being executed, so the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol, it is notified that the chance charge effect will start (Z3707), and the process moves to Z3708.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation validity period remains for 2 seconds or more (Z3704). If it is determined that the operation validity period remains for 2 seconds or more (Z3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge stimulation effect (see Figure 479(a)) is set in the remaining period (Z3705), and the process moves to Z3708. do. By executing the process of Z3705, in a variable display where only the press stop effect is set, if three presses are completed early in the valid period (within 1 second after the start), the display will be removed immediately. It is possible to perform a chance charge stimulation performance that has a longer performance period than when the symbols are stopped. Therefore, since the performance period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (press), a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

In the process of Z3704, if it is determined that the operation validity period does not remain for more than 2 seconds (less than 2 seconds) (Z3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so that it becomes a combination of missing symbols. (Z3706), the process moves to Z3708.

In the process Z3708 executed after any one of the processes Z3705 to Z3707 is executed, the value of the operation valid period timer 223qt is reset to 0 (Z3708), and the process moves to the process Z3709. In the process Z3709 executed after the process Z3702 or Z3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation counter 223qu is decremented by 1 and updated (Z3709), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 526, the continuous hit operation detection process (Z3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing this repeated tapping operation detection process (Z3605). This repeated tap operation detection process (Z3605) is executed during the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the repeated tap operation during execution of the interrupt repeated tap effect is executed. This is a process for executing corresponding control.

In the repeated hit operation detection process (Z3605), first, the remaining valid period (T) is identified from the value of the repeated hit valid period timer 223qv (Z3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the production type of the current interrupt continuous hit performance is determined. Calculate the lower limit value (D) (Z3752). Note that the lower limit value of the number of monsters is predefined for each performance type in the interruption consecutive hit lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500) as described above. When the process of Z3752 is completed, next calculate "T/5 seconds x (100 monsters - D)" (Z3753), and subtract the calculated value from the current remaining number of monsters to calculate the value (Z3754) ). Note that in the process of Z3754, values below the decimal point are rounded off. When the process of Z3754 is completed, it is next determined whether the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value for the performance type of the current interrupt continuous hit performance (Z3755).

In the process of Z3755, if it is determined that the number of monsters has been calculated below the lower limit (Z3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (Z3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is greater than or equal to the lower limit (Z3755: No), the specified subtraction number is subtracted from the display of the remaining number of monsters and updated (Z3757), and then , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 527, the change operation detection process (Z3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing this changing operation detection process (Z3607). This change operation detection process (Z3607) is executed during the press detection process (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, during the execution of the pending batch change effect, This is a process for performing control for setting changes.

In the change operation detection process (Z3607), first, the change point corresponding to each held ball is identified from the data in the change point storage area 223qq (Z3801), and the state of the held balls with a change point of 1 or more is uniformly raised by one level. The data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r is updated as follows (Z3802). Next, the variation type of pending 1 is specified (Z3803), and the pending symbol mode is specified according to the specified variation type, the pending variation lottery table 222qc, and the performance lottery counter (Z3804). Then, it is determined whether the specified pending symbol mode has a higher expectation level than the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805). If it is determined that the specified pending symbol mode has a higher expectation level than the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805: Yes), the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r is changed to data indicating the specified pending symbol mode. (Z3806), and the process moves to Z3807.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3805, if it is determined that the specified pending symbol mode is not higher in expectation than the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (Z3805: No), the process of Z3806 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z3807. Transition.

In the process of Z3807, it is determined whether the rank-up lottery of the reserved symbol mode by the processes of Z3804 to Z3806 has been completed for all the reserved balls (Z3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls has not been completed. If it is determined that (Z3807: No), the variation type of the reserved ball whose starting prize detection time is newer than that of the reserved ball targeted for the current lottery is specified (Z3808), and the process returns to Z3804.

In the process of Z3807, if it is determined that the rank up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (Z3807: Yes), the display of the reserved symbol mode indicated by the data in the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r is set (Z3809), and The values of the change flag 223qp, the change point storage area 223qq, and the batch change period timer 223qx are all reset (Z3810), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 528, the command determination process 23 (Z3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 23 (Z3114). This command determination process 23 (Z3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do.

In the command determination process 23 (Z3114), first, the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 is read out. It is determined whether or not a status command is included in (Z3901). In the process of Z3901, if it is determined that a status command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 (Z3901: Yes), the game will be executed according to the gaming status notified by the received command. The data in the status storage area 223qf is updated (Z3902), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3901, if it is determined that no status command has been received (Z3901: No), next, a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (if there is a variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands). pattern command is included) (Z3903). In the process of Z3903, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z3903: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223qd is set on (Z3904), and a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (Z3905). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3903, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Z3903: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (Z3906). In the process of Z3906, if it is determined that a stop type command has been received (Z3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. (Z3908) and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3909, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (Z3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the held pitch count command has been received (Z3909). In the process of Z3909, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (Z3909: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved pitch number counter (special symbol 1 number of reserved balls The values of the counter 223qa and the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223qb are updated (Z3910), and this process is ended. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223qa, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223qb. Stored. Further, when a held ball number command indicating the number of held balls of a normal symbol is received, information indicating the number of held balls is stored in the normal held ball number counter 223qc. In this embodiment, the number of held balls command sent from the main controller 110 includes information indicating the current number of held balls. Even if the value is erased, the value of each held pitch number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the next transmitted held pitch number command. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that each held pitch count command is transmitted in the process of transmitting the status command (see Z908 in FIG. 510) of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 510).

On the other hand, in the process of Z3909, if the number of reserved pitches command is not received (Z3909: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (Z3911). In the process of Z3911, if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (Z3911: Yes), various effects (pre-read effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. The winning information command process 23 is executed (Z3912), and this process ends. Details of this winning information command processing 23 (Z3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 529 and 530.

In the process of Z3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command) (Z3913), and if it is determined that a winning-related command is being received (Z3913: Yes), execute control according to the type of winning-related command. The winning related command process 23 is executed to perform the winning process (Z3914), and this process ends. This hit-related command processing 23 (Z3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. 531. On the other hand, in the process of Z3913, if it is determined that a command related to winning has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z3913: No), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, details of the winning information command process 23 (Z3912), which is one process in the command determination process 23 (Z3114), will be described. FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing this winning information command processing 23 (Z3912). In this winning information command processing 23 (Z3912), first, data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (Z4001), and the process moves to Z4002. In the process Z4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

In the process of Z4002, it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is on (Z4002: No), it means that the variable display performance to which the chance charge performance is set is being executed, and the chance charge performance has not yet started. Therefore, according to the content of the newly detected starting prize, the number of gauges (number of charges) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge performance is added to the value determined in advance at the start of fluctuation. Execute processing. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command that indicates a win (Z4003), and if it is determined that it is a winning information command that indicates a winning (Z4003: Yes). ), the charge number counter 223qm is updated by adding 2 to the value (Z4004), and the process moves to Z4006. On the other hand, in the process of Z4003, if it is determined that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating a win (it is a winning information command indicating a loss) (Z4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is changed. It is updated by adding 1 (Z4005), and the process moves to Z4006.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223qk is off (Z4002: No), there is no possibility of adding the number of gauges (number of charges) of the spirit gauge, so each of Z4003 to Z4005 Skip the process and proceed to process Z4006. In the process of Z4006, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (Z4006). In the process of Z4006, if it is determined that a lottery result corresponding to a fall has been notified (Z4006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a production mode corresponding to a scenario for continuation in the probability change continuation suggestion production is being executed. Determine (Z4007). In the process of Z4007, if the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh is one of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the production mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. It is determined that there is.

In the process of Z4007, if it is determined that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuation rich scenario is being executed (Z4007: Yes), next, the winning information notified by the current winning information command is used as the continuation suggestion effect of the probability change continuation suggestion effect. It is determined whether the winning information is to be consumed during execution (Z4008). That is, based on the new winning information, it is determined whether or not it is certain that the special symbol will fall from the variable probability state to the low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion presentation. (Z4008: Yes), refer to the non-continuation table of the continuation suggestion performance selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499). Then, a continuation suggestion production scenario is determined (Z4009), data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh (Z4010), and the process moves to Z4011. In each process Z4009 and Z4010, the production scenario of "0CH" in the non-continuation table is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, when a new starting prize is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the number of fluctuations within the execution range of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance, the production scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one scenario is determined by lottery from among the four performance scenarios (any of "0CH" to "0FH") defined in the non-continuation table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the performance modes when falling.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (Z4006: No), or if it is determined that the probability change continuation suggestion production of the continuation-rich scenario is not being executed (Z4007: No). ), and if it is determined that the new winning information notified by the current winning information command is not the winning information that will be digested during the execution of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance (Z4008: No), the performance in the definite variable continuation suggestion performance. Since there is no need to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the non-continuation table, the process directly proceeds to Z4011.

By executing each of the processes Z4006 to Z4010, it is possible to perform a certain change in a situation where the start of the certain change continuation suggestion performance is in a certain change state, and the number of reserved balls for the number of fluctuations at which the certain change continuation suggestion performance ends has not been accumulated. If a continuation suggestion performance is executed and a starting prize that corresponds to a fall occurs after that, by switching to the non-continuation performance scenario (the "0CH" performance scenario), the result of the definite change continuation suggestion performance is that a fall has already occurred. It is possible to notify that In other words, since it is possible to prevent the effect from appearing as if the fall has continued even though the fall has already occurred, it is possible to realize a more suitable effect.

In addition, in the process of Z4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a pending notice lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the pending change performance and the pending batch change performance can be executed (Z4011), and this process end. The details of this pending notice lottery process will be explained with reference to FIG. 530.

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing this pending notice lottery process (Z4011). In this pending advance notice lottery process (Z4011), first, data indicating a pending symbol mode of white pending is stored in an empty area of the pending symbol mode storage area 223r (Z4051). More specifically, data indicating the pending symbol mode of white pending is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the pending symbol mode storage area 223r. When the processing of Z4051 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052), and if it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is on (Z4052: Yes), the white reservation is suspended. The symbol mode is set to be displayed as a pending symbol corresponding to the new winning information (Z4053), and this process ends. By executing the process of Z4053, the number of reserved balls symbol changed to resemble a rock by the reservation batch change performance, and the number of reserved balls symbol based on the newly detected starting prize after the start of the reservation batch change production. Since the manner of the reserved symbols can be made different between the two, it is possible to easily make the player understand the range of the reserved ball number symbols that are subject to the collective reservation change performance. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easier for players to understand.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, the configuration is such that the pending ball number symbol based on the starting winnings detected after the start of the pending batch change performance is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but this is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is executed in a pending pattern format using the pending variation lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497(a)) for a new pending ball number symbol. Thereby, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot not only for the reserved ball number symbol that is the object of the reservation collective change performance, but also for the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning prize. Furthermore, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change performance may also be configured to be added to the targets of the pending batch change performance. In this case, it may be configured such that the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning is always added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or it may be configured such that it is added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. Good too. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, if the winning information corresponding to a new starting winning shows a jackpot expectation level that is higher than the super reach failure, it may be configured to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect. For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with higher expectations than the held balls in the range in which the held batch change performance is set is newly notified, it is included in the execution target of the held batch change performance. Good too. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on a new starting winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change performance, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation of a jackpot.

In the process of Z4052, if it is determined that the batch change flag 223qp is off (Z4052: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is greater than 1 (Z4054), and the number of reserved balls is 1 or less. If it is determined that it is (Z4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the pending batch change effect, so proceed to the process of Z4060 to draw the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of Z4054, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is larger than 1 (2 or more) (Z4054: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area and the data in the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r are , change points are calculated according to the change point calculation table 222qd (Z4055), and it is determined whether or not the pending batch change performance can be executed according to the calculated change points, the values of the batch change lottery table 222qe, and the performance lottery counter. (Z4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result from the process of Z4056 corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change production (Z4057), and it is determined that the determination result does not correspond to the execution of the pending batch change production. If (Z4057: No), the process moves to Z4060 for drawing the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, in the process of Z4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change effect (Z4057: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (Z4058), and the batch change flag 223qp is turned on. (Z4059), and ends this process.

In the process of Z4060, the pending change lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497(a)) is read out (Z4060), and according to the read pending change lottery table 222qc, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the production lottery counter. The pending symbol mode is determined (Z4061). Next, in accordance with the pending symbol mode determined in the process of Z4061, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r is updated (Z4062), and the pending symbol mode of the mode indicated by the updated data is updated. The display is set (Z4063), and this process ends.

By executing this pending notice lottery process (see FIG. 530), various performance modes using the pending ball number symbol can be suitably set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 531, the contents of the above-mentioned win-related command processing 23 (Z3914) will be explained. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related command processing 23 (Z3914). This winning-related command processing 23 (Z3914) is executed in the command determination processing 23 (see FIG. 528) of the audio lamp control device 113, and when a winning-related command is received from the main control device 110. Second, it is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the win-related command processing 23 (see FIG. 531), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (Z4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (Z4102), and then this process ends.

In the process of Z4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not an opening command (Z4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a number of rounds command (Z4103), and the command received this time is determined to be a number of rounds command. If it is determined that there is one (Z4103: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (Z4104), and this process ends.

In the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (Z4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (Z4105), and if it is a jackpot end command. If it is determined (Z4105: Yes), the data in the gaming state storage area 223qf is updated according to the information indicating the gaming state after the end of the jackpot included in the received jackpot end command (Z4106), and the time saving guaranteed number of times counter 223qg Set the value to 100 (Z4107). Next, it is determined whether the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108), and if it is determined that the right-handed winning flag 223qi is on (Z4108: Yes), the game is played by right-handed hitting. This means that a jackpot was achieved during the fixed variable state or time saving state (that is, the so-called consecutive winnings occurred), and it means that a jackpot was achieved in the drawing of the second special symbol with a high probability variable jackpot ratio. , sets the back mode for high expectations (see FIG. 473(b)) (Z4110), and ends this process. The reason for uniformly setting the back mode for high expectations is to make it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the variable probability state has been set, thereby improving the gameplay that allows the player to predict the current gaming state. This is to make this happen.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4108, if it is determined that the winning flag 223qi during right-handed hitting is off (Z4108: No), a jackpot was achieved in the normal state of playing the game by left-handed hitting (so-called winning on the first hit). This means that a jackpot was won in the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a low chance of winning a jackpot, so the back mode for low expectations (see Figure 473(a)) is set (Z4109). After that, this process ends. Uniformly setting the background mode for low expectation level makes it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the variable probability state has been set, thereby improving the gameplay that allows the player to predict the current gaming state. This is to make this happen.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of Z4105 that the jackpot end command has not been received (Z4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command (Z4111), and if it is an ending command. If it is determined (Z4111: Yes), an ending command for display is set (Z4112), and this process ends. Further, if it is determined in the process of Z4111 that the ending command has not been received (Z4111: No), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 532, the variable display setting process 23 (Z3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 23 (Z3115). This variable display setting process 23 (Z3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 518) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process 23 (Z3115), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223qd provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z4201). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223qd is not on (that is, off) (Z4201: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of Z4207 is executed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223qd is on (Z4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223qd is turned off (Z4202), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. (Z4203).

Next, a variable effect setting process 23 is executed to set the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variable pattern (variable time) (Z4204). The contents of this variable effect setting process 23 will be described later with reference to FIG. 533. When the process of Z4204 is completed, a display variation pattern command is generated to notify the display control device 114 of the production mode determined in the process of Z4204, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 ( Z4205). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (Z4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process moves to Z4207.

In the process of Z4207, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223qe provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z4207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is not on (that is, off) (Z4207: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223qe is on (Z4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223qe is turned off (Z4208), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. Obtained from (Z4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is directly set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (Z4210), and the process moves to Z4211.

In the process of Z4211, a display stop type command is generated to notify the display control device 114 based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (Z4211). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the variable performance is controlled. After the process of Z4211 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 533, the contents of the variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204). In this variable performance setting process 23 (Z4204), a process for setting the detailed performance mode (notice content) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the variable effect setting process 23 (Z4204), first, it is determined whether the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is greater than 0 (Z4301), and if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223qn is greater than 0, ( Z4301: Yes), the value of the charge state counter 223qn is subtracted by 1 (Z4302), and the process moves to Z4303. On the other hand, in the process of Z4301, if it is determined that the value of the charge state counter 223qn is 0 (Z4301: No), the process of Z4302 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z4303.

In the process of Z4303, it is determined whether the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223qg is greater than 0 (Z4303). If it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time saving counter 223qg is 0 (Z4303: No), the process moves to Z4311. On the other hand, in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is larger than 0 (Z4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is subtracted by 1 (Z4304), and then the value after the subtraction is It is determined whether the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223qg is greater than 0 (Z4305). In the process of Z4305, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223qg after the subtraction is 0 (Z4305: No), the process moves to the process of Z4311. On the other hand, in the process of Z4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is greater than 0 (Z4305: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg after subtraction is greater than 4 or not. It is determined whether or not (Z4306). In the process of Z4306, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time saving count counter 223qg after the subtraction is greater than 4 (Z4306: Yes), the process moves to the process of Z4312.

In the process of Z4311, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4311). Here, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223qf. In the process of Z4311, if it is determined that the current state is in a variable probability state (Z4311: Yes), it means that the variable probability state has continued for more than 100 times after the jackpot ends, so a lottery in the back mode is performed. Therefore, the process moves to Z4312. On the other hand, in the process of Z4311, if it is determined that the current state is not in a variable probability state (Z4311: No), the process of Z4312 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z4313.

In the processing of Z4312, in a gaming state in which the game is played with right-handed players (time saving state, variable probability state), one back mode is drawn from among a plurality of back modes showing the expectation level of the variable probability state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state. A back mode lottery process is executed to perform the process (Z4312), and the process moves to Z4313. Note that details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 535.

In the process of Z4313, a production mode selection process for selecting a production mode in the variable display production is executed (Z4313), and then this process is ended. Note that details of this presentation mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 536.

In addition, in the variable performance setting process 23 in the present 23rd embodiment, if it is determined in the process of Z4306 that the value of the guaranteed time reduction count counter 223qg after subtraction is 4 or less (Z4306: No), the variable continuation suggestion performance is Since this means that it is the execution period (variation period of the 96th to 99th variable display after the end of the jackpot), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (Z4307). In the process of Z4307, if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Z4307: Yes), the jackpot presentation mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestion presentation is set as the current variable display mode (Z4308), and while hitting right The winning flag is set on (Z4309), and this process ends. In addition, as a presentation mode for a jackpot exclusive to the execution period of the continuous suggestion presentation, for example, a presentation is performed in which an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 discovers treasure on the other side of the door 806 by a presentation of breaking through the door 806. , a performance in which a jackpot is announced, etc. is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4307, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a jackpot of the special symbol (Z4307: No), the continuation suggestion performance setting for setting the performance mode during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion performance The process is executed (Z4310), and this process ends. The details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 534.

Next, with reference to FIG. 534, the contents of the continuous suggestion effect setting process (Z4310), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310).

When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (Z4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401), and if the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223qg is not 4 (3 (Z4401: No), the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is read (Z4411), and it is determined whether the read scenario is a scenario for continuation (Z4412). In the process of Z4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is not a scenario for continuous intensive use (Z4412: No), the process moves to the process of Z4415. On the other hand, in the process of Z4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous concentration (Z4412: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a lottery result of falling ( Z4413) If it is determined that the lottery result is not a fall (Z4413: No), the process moves to Z4415. On the other hand, in the process of Z4413, if it is determined that the lottery result is a fall (Z4413: Yes), the production scenario is switched to "0CH" (Z4414), and the process moves to the process of Z4415.

In the process of Z4415, from the scenario read from the continuous scenario storage area 223qh, the performance mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the guaranteed time reduction counter 223qg is read (Z4415), and the read performance mode is used as the display mode of the current fluctuation pattern. Set (Z4416). Next, it is determined whether the last presentation mode of the scenario has been set (Z4417), and if it is determined that the last presentation mode of the scenario has been set (Z4417: Yes), the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223qh is is reset to "00H" (Z4418), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z4417, if it is determined that the final performance mode of the scenario has not been set (Z4417: No), the process of Z4418 is skipped and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4401, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time counter 223qg is 4 (Z4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance (see FIG. 475). Execute processing for determining a production scenario for a continuous suggestion production. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4402). In the process of Z4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read out (Z4403), and if the winning information includes the winning lottery result. It is determined whether or not there is one (Z4404). In the process of Z4404, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (Z4404: No), next, it is determined whether four pieces of winning information are stored (i.e., whether the winning information of the probability change continuation suggestion effect is not included). It is determined whether the balls reserved until the end are already reserved (Z4405).

In the process of Z4405, if it is determined that four pieces of winning information are stored (Z4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion table for continuation confirmation in the continuation suggestion production selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion production scenario is selected. is determined (Z4406), and the process moves to Z4409. On the other hand, in the process of Z4405, if it is determined that the four pieces of winning information are not stored (Z4405: No), the table for continuation richness in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion is The performance scenario is determined (Z4407), and the process moves to Z4409.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a variable probability state (Z4402: No), and in the process of Z4404, the lottery result of falling is included in the winning information. If it is determined that (Z4404: Yes), a production scenario is determined with reference to the non-continuation table in the continuation suggestion production selection table 222qg (see FIG. 499) (Z4408), and the process moves to Z4409.

In the process Z4409 executed after any of the processes Z4406 to Z4408 are executed, data indicating the selected production scenario is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223qh (Z4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario is stored. The presentation mode is set as the presentation mode of the current variation pattern (Z4410), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 535, the contents of the back mode lottery process (Z4312), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (Z4312).

When the back mode lottery process (Z4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern (Z4501). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z4501: Yes), select the fluctuation display mode for jackpot as the fluctuation display mode (Z4502), and set the right-hit winning flag 223qi to on. (Z4503), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4501, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z4501: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4504). . If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a variable probability state (Z4504: No), the back mode is selected by referring to the fallen table in the back mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the value of the production lottery counter 223qy. is drawn (Z4505), and the process moves to Z4510.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (Z4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read out (Z4506), and next, the winning lottery result is included in the winning information. is included (Z4507). In the process of Z4507, if it is determined that the winning information includes a lottery result of falling (Z4507: Yes), the non-falling table in the rear mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the effect lottery counter 223qy The back side mode is randomly selected by referring to the value of (Z4508), and the process moves to Z4510.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4507, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (Z4507: No), the probability change continuation table in the back mode lottery table 222qb (see FIG. 496) and the performance lottery The back mode is randomly selected by referring to the value of the counter 223qy (Z4509), and the process moves to Z4510.

In the process Z4510 executed after any of the processes Z4505, Z4508, and Z4509 are executed, the lottery result of each process is a lottery result indicating a change to a rear mode different from the current rear mode. It is determined whether or not (Z4510). In the process of Z4510, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to changing the back mode (Z4510: Yes), a display back change command indicating the changed back mode is set (Z4511), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of Z4510, if it is determined that the back mode is not to be changed (Z4510: No), the process of Z4511 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the contents of the effect mode selection process (Z4313), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production mode selection process (Z4313).

When the performance mode selection process (Z4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether a variable pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (Z4551). If it is determined that the variable pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (Z4551: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4551, if it is determined that a variable pattern command including an additional time command has been received (Z4551: Yes), the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222qh (see FIG. 500) is read out (Z4552), and the effect lottery counter is In accordance with the value of 223qy, it is determined whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect can be executed and the type thereof (Z4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (Z4554). In the process of Z4554, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect (Z4554: Yes), data corresponding to the type of the interrupt repeated hit effect to be executed is stored in the repeated hit type storage area 223qj (Z4555 ), Next, it is determined whether the type of the interrupt continuous hit performance is a type that is executed before reaching the reach (Z4556). In the process of Z4556, if it is determined that it is an interrupt continuous hit performance of the type that is executed before reach (Z4556: Yes), the audio mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4558), and the Move to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4556, if it is determined that the determined type of interrupt continuous hit performance is not the type that is executed before reach (Z4556: No), the variable time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command are The audio mode corresponding to the sum with the indicated variation time is determined (Z4557), and the process moves to Z4559.

In the process of Z4559, a display mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (Z4559), and this process ends. In this manner, the twenty-third embodiment is configured to be able to easily identify whether or not the variation type is longer by 7 seconds, depending on the presence or absence of the additional time-saving command. Thereby, by simply checking the contents of the additional time command, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a variation type for the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hit performance. In addition, when it is decided to execute an interrupt continuous hit performance, by setting the performance mode corresponding to the variation time (7 seconds shorter variation time) notified by the basic time command, it is possible to fill the variation time exactly. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode and the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode exclusively for the interrupt continuous hit performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4554, if it is determined that the interrupt continuous hit effect is not being executed (Z4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222qf (see FIG. 498(b)) is read out (Z4560), and the current variation type is read out (Z4560). Then, it is determined whether or not the chance charge performance (see FIGS. 479(b) and 480(a)) can be executed according to the number of reserved balls and the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy (Z4561), and then the process of Z4561 It is determined by the determination (lottery) whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance charge effect (Z4562). In the process of Z4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (Z4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (Z4566), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of Z4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has been decided (Z4562: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223qm is set to the value obtained by adding 1 to the number of held balls (Z4563), and the chance charge effect is determined to be executed. The charge standby flag 223qk is set to ON (Z4564), a performance mode including a chance charge performance is determined as the current variable display mode (Z4565), and this processing is ended. In this way, in the 23rd embodiment, when it is decided to perform a chance charge performance, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG (charge number counter 223qm The configuration is such that the value of After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied by taking into consideration the lottery results of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<About the control process of the audio output device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 537 to 541. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 537(a). FIG. 537(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process is executed to perform control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 (20001). Details of this command determination process (Z20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538. After processing Z20001, an audio setting process is executed to reproduce audio data (audio file) according to the performance (Z20002). Details of this audio setting process (Z20002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541.

When the process of Z20002 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (Z20003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of Z20003 (Z20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z20005), and the power-off process is executed (Z20006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z20007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z20003 (Z20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (Z20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (Z20004: No), the process returns to Z20001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (Z20004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 537(b). FIG. 537(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interruption process (see FIG. 537(b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (Z20101), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, the command determination process (Z20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 537(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z20001).

In the command determination process (Z20001), it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z20201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z20201: No), the command determination process ends. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to on (Z20202), and then the unprocessed command flag stored in the command buffer area is The type of command for all processing commands is analyzed (Z20203).

First, it is determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z20204). This audio fluctuation pattern command is used when outputting the display fluctuation pattern command (see Z4205 in FIG. 532) in the fluctuation display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) of the audio lamp control device 113. It is set to notify the type and output timing of the audio to be played according to the display mode.

In the process of Z20204, if it is determined that there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z20204: Yes), the music and sound effects to be used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (Z20205). ), the output channel and output timing of the specified music and sound effects are set (Z20206), and the process returns to Z20201.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20204, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (Z20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the voice continuous command is included in the unprocessed commands ( Z20207), if a continuous tap command for audio is included (Z20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed a repeated tap operation, so the continuous tap sound command processing is performed to set the playback (output) of the repeated tap sound. is executed (Z20208), and the process returns to Z20201. Details of this continuous hit sound command processing (Z20208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20207, if it is determined that a continuous sound command for audio is not included in the unprocessed commands (Z20207: No), then it is determined whether or not an interrupt command for audio is included. (Z20209), and if it is determined that a continuous sound command for audio is included in the unprocessed commands (Z20209: Yes), interrupt command processing is executed to interrupt and resume the BGM being played. Execute (Z20210) and return to the process of Z20201. Note that details of this interrupt command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 540. On the other hand, in the process of Z20209, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (Z20209: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (Z20211), and the process returns to the process of Z20201.

Next, details of the continuous hit sound command processing (Z20208) will be described with reference to FIG. 539. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the continuous hit sound command processing (Z20208). This repeated hitting sound command process (Z20208) is executed during the command determination process (FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting the reproduction (output) of the repeated hitting sound, as described above.

In this repeated hitting sound command processing (Z20208), first, it is determined whether the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (Z20301). In the process of Z20301, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (Z20301: Yes), the repeated hit sound command for the first repeated hit operation in the interrupt repeated hit performance (see Figure 482) is executed. Since this means that the sound has been received, the process moves to Z20305 in order to reproduce the first continuous hit sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set in the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a (Z20301: No), then whether or not "01H" is set in the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is determined. (Z20302). In the process of Z20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is not set to "01H" (that is, the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is "02H"), (Z20302: No), 1 Since this means that the last repeated hit sound output in the interrupt repeated hit performance is the second repeated hit sound, in this case as well, the process moves to Z20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hit sound.

In the process of Z20305, the CN2 of the speech synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 501) is set to play the audio file corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound (Z20305), and the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a is set to correspond to the first continuous tapping sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (Z20306), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (that is, the previously outputted repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound) (Z20302: Yes) , sets CN3 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 501) to play the audio file corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound (Z20303), and sets the continuous tapping sound output flag 303a to "02H" corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound. is updated (set) to (Z20304), and this process ends.

By executing this repeated tap sound command processing, two types of audio data can be played alternately on two channels each time a repeated tap operation is executed, so it is possible to diversify the audio format. . In addition, if the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are simply played back alternately on a single channel (in other words, the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is controlled). Compared to the case where the repeating configuration is used), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output in duplicate) ), it is possible to make the sound mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. To be more specific, when a single channel is configured to alternately play the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound, when a player who plays the consecutive hits quickly performs a repeated tapping operation, the first part of each audio data is This results in a monotonous sound pattern in which only the words are repeated alternately. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that multiple channels play multiple pieces of audio data in sequence, the output of one piece of audio data played on one channel will not be interrupted, and other audio data will be played on other channels. can be played. In other words, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on another voice data can be synthesized and output. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the first part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify sound modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, each time a repeated tapping operation is detected, two types of audio data (repeated tapping sound) are alternately output to two channels, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially and alternately reproduced on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify audio modes. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the configuration may be such that the audio data is sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played ends) Since the period of time can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify audio modes. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be changed depending on the interval between repeated hits. Specifically, for example, if a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between successive hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of audio modes are sequentially played on three channels. On the other hand, if a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between successive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data may be sent sequentially to two channels. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the data is played back (alternately). With this configuration, the sound output mode can be varied according to the interval between repeated hits, so it is possible to realize a game in which the interval between repeated hits is adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the configuration is such that one of the consecutive tapping sounds is output in conjunction with the multiple tapping operation, but under certain conditions, the configuration may be such that the multiple tapping sound can be output even if the multiple tapping operation is not performed. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated tapping sound output during the effective period of the repeated tapping operation is the first repeated tapping sound, the second consecutive tapping sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first continuous tapping sound and the second consecutive tapping sound are output as a set in response to the repeated tapping operation, the last sound output is the first consecutive tapping sound. (In other words, the second continuous hit sound that becomes the pair is no longer output), and it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the audio mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last repeated tapping sound is the first repeated tapping sound, the control for outputting the second repeated tapping sound after the end is controlled by the variable display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation). By configuring this way, for players who wish to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hit sound output during the interrupt continuous hit performance can be made the first continuous hit sound. It is possible to realize the gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound are output alternately regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a repeated tapping operation is detected while no sound is being played, the first repeated tapping sound may be always output. In other words, if the interval between repeated hits is so long that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the first repeated hit sound has finished playing, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible for players who wish to diversify the audio formats to perform repeated tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated tapping performance. be able to.

Next, the suspension command processing (Z20210) will be described with reference to FIG. 540. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this interrupt command processing (Z20210). The interruption command process (Z20210) is executed during the command determination process (see Z20001 in FIG. 538) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting the interruption and restart of the BGM being played.

In the suspension command processing (Z20210), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (Z20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (Z20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the fluctuating BGM being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (Z20402), and in CN1 The reproduction of BGM for the interrupt continuous hit effect is set (Z20403), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20401, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the start of an interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of an interruption) (Z20401: No), the BGM for the interrupt continuous play effect is The playback is ended (Z20404), the data in the playback position storage area 303b is read (Z20405), the playback of the variable BGM from the read playback position is resumed at CN1 (Z20406), and then this process is ended.

Next, details of the audio setting process (Z20002) will be described with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process (Z20002). This audio setting process (Z20002) is executed during the main process (FIG. 537) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226.

In this audio setting process (Z20002), first, it is determined whether or not the current timing is to output the music (Z20501). If it is determined that the current time is not the output timing of the music (Z20501: No), this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z20501, if it is determined that the current timing is to output the music (Z20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (Z20502), and the read audio file is played on the corresponding channel. (Z20503), sets the song outputting flag 303c to ON (Z20504), and ends this process.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 23rd embodiment, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the type of jackpot, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the time reduction of the normal symbol is The configuration is such that the condition continues. That is, the operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) between the end of the jackpot and the execution of the 100th special symbol lottery is configured to be the same for the probability-variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. Then, only when the game state is in the probability variable state at the end of the 100th special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues even after the 100th time. That is, if the time-saving state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, or if the variable probability state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol occurs within 100 times. In this case, the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated at the timing when the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, and the state is shifted to the normal state. With this configuration, even if a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, or if the variable probability state is set and falls to a low probability state within 100 times, However, until the 100 special symbol drawings have been executed, it will be difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state, so at least 100 special symbol drawings have been carried out. Until this happens, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state will be in a variable state.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, if the normal symbol is in the time-saving state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state is set to the normal state at the start of the variable display to indicate the jackpot (the normal symbol is in the time-saving state). ). By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol ends within 100 times after the end of the jackpot to the case where the variable pattern of the jackpot starts. Behavior in which there is a high possibility that the time saving state of the normal symbol has ended during the execution of the variable display effect within the number of times (for example, if the variation time of the normal symbol exceeds 3 seconds, or if the normal symbol is out of lottery) (or when a pattern of 0.2 seconds x 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the game can be played while paying attention to the lottery results of the normal symbols, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, etc.

Moreover, in the present 23rd embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to allow the player to predict the probability of the probability change state to some extent. More specifically, during the game state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, in the cave exploration mode where the expectation level of the definite variable state is relatively low, in the temple exploration mode where the expectation level of the definite variable state is relatively high, and in the definite variable state. There are three types of rear modes in the super temple search mode, which not only confirms that something is true, but also confirms that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the pending status (at least the variable state will continue until the pending status is cleared). Either one is set when executing a variable display effect based on the special symbol lottery result. With this configuration, while the time saving state of the normal symbols is set, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the gaming state is in a variable state, so if the game state is predicted to be in a variable state and the mode shifts to the super temple mode, the player On the other hand, it can make you feel happy that your predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the game transitions to the super temple mode even though it was predicted that the special symbol will be in a low-probability state, the player may feel happy that the game state has been set to be more advantageous than expected. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the super-temple mode, it is guaranteed that lottery results corresponding to falls will not be included in the reservation (at least the lottery results for the number of reserved balls can be executed with variable probability of jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation of hitting the jackpot while the player is on hold.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, over a specific range of variable display that is executed before the end of 100 special symbol drawings that guarantee the time saving state of normal symbols ( In other words, immediately before the end of the 100th special symbol lottery (over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot), the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is performed to inform whether or not the probability variation state continues. It is configured to execute. When starting this probability variation continuation suggestion performance, read in advance the lottery results from the 96th to 99th time, which is the execution range of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, and check whether the probability variation state continues until the 99th special symbol drawing. If the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of a performance scenario in which a highly expected attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if you fall into a time-saving state before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or you were in a time-shortening state after the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern will occur. The configuration is such that the selection rate of easy-to-play production scenarios is high. In this way, by configuring the performance mode to be set based on the gaming state at the end of the performance, it is possible to more accurately notify the gaming state after the performance ends. Here, if the configuration is such that the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is executed based only on the gaming state at the start of the production, the probability variation continuation suggestion production will fall to a low probability state while the probability variation continuation suggestion production is being executed, and the continuation of the probability variation state will not be announced. Despite this, there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end when the 100th special symbol lottery begins. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance and the actual operation are inconsistent, causing the player to distrust the Pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure to this problem, it is possible to construct a performance that suggests a definite change continuation by a performance that can be completed with one change, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient performance period, so it is difficult to ensure a sufficient performance period. It becomes difficult to become On the other hand, in the present 23rd embodiment, the structure is such that the probability variation continuation suggestion performance is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability variation continuation suggestion production is , is configured to be determined based on the gaming state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the performance, and it is possible to diversify the performance modes. In addition, if the probability is variable at the start of the performance and there are no reserved balls until the end of the performance, the system is configured such that a performance that is likely to generate an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation level is selected. ing. This means that the probability of a lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare for a symbol to fall to a low probability state of a special symbol within the production period (with a relatively high probability of a probability change state). This is because the performance ends.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, as a type of entertainment effect, a press stop effect in which a stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the timing of the player's operation on the PUSH button 10317 is configured to be executable. This press stop performance is basically a performance that suggests that it may develop into a chance charge performance. In this press-stop performance, if it does not develop into a chance charge performance, each symbol row will be stopped and displayed as a simple miss combination depending on the player's press timing, but if it develops into a chance charge performance, the The charge symbol is (pseudo) stopped and displayed to notify the development of a chance charge performance. In this way, by configuring the stop timing of each symbol row to be varied according to the player's press timing, the timing at which it is announced whether or not it will develop into a chance charge effect can be adjusted to the player's preferred timing. It can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the press stop performance that does not develop into a chance charge performance, the mode at least when the center symbol row is stopped and displayed is different depending on the timing when the stop operation is performed for all symbol rows. More specifically, if the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (3 times) within a predetermined period (1 second) (in other words, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the valid period of the stop operation, the performance is relatively effective. While the central symbol row is displayed as stopping due to the long chance charge inciting performance, if the specified number of stop operations are completed after a predetermined period (1 second) has passed, the central symbol row will be removed immediately. A performance that is stopped and displayed with a symbol (that is, a relatively short performance) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the period after the stop display from becoming too long or short depending on the completion timing of the player's stop operation. It is possible to make the transition of the performance mode until the stop display of the missing symbol appear natural. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance mode that makes the player feel less uncomfortable. In addition, in the press stop effect in the twenty-third embodiment, separate button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in reality, a single operation valid period is used to display the PUSH button 10317. It is determined whether or not the operation is valid. Then, according to the number of times the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) has been executed during the valid operation period of 1, the symbol row for setting the stop display is varied (it is determined whether the stop operation has been performed for all symbol rows) ) is configured. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not to enable the stop operation of each symbol row, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the twenty-third embodiment is configured to be able to perform a chance charge performance as a type of entertainment performance. This chance charge performance is based on the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific performance mode (chance up performance) will be performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the reserved balls held at the start of the performance are exhausted). This is an effect that is suggested (notified) to the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance up performances (the number of accumulated spirit gauges) announced in this chance charge performance is such that some kind of chance up performance will occur at each timing until the held balls are exhausted at the start of the chance charge performance. consumed for. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect that increases the expectation of a jackpot, such as a change in the display format of the number of reserved pitches, the occurrence of so-called pseudo-runs, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, or the appearance of red letters. Examples include the occurrence of lines such as Note that the spirit gauge is configured so that it is always consumed until it reaches 0. In other words, it is configured so that it will not be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In the twenty-third embodiment, the amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined mainly based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance. After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied by taking into consideration the lottery results of each reserved ball. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load (processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge performance.

Furthermore, the twenty-third embodiment is configured to be able to execute an interrupt continuous hit performance as a type of entertainment performance. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display style effect that appears as if a different type of display effect than the previously displayed display effect suddenly interrupts the normal fluctuating display or reach fluctuation, and the player On the other hand, it is composed of a performance that prompts the user to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a specific operation mode (repeat operation mode). In this interrupt continuous hit performance, as the stage of the presentation progresses (the number of displayed monsters decreases) in response to the player's repeated hit operations, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. be. As a result, the player can be made to actively perform the repeated-hitting operation, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated-hitting performance. This interrupt continuous hit effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (it is a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time command and additional time command that make up the variable pattern command. This is a performance that has the potential to be carried out. Here, the variable time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for a period of the same length as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect) is executed. Regarding the performance mode for a period other than the above period), the configuration is such that a production mode for a period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. With this configuration, even if a variable display effect is executed in which an interrupt continuous hit effect is set, the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, thereby reducing the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10. can do.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit performance in the 23rd embodiment, each time a repeated hit operation is executed, multiple types of audio data (sound data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound, audio data corresponding to the second repeated hit sound), etc. ) is configured to play back one audio data. More specifically, if an odd-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected during the valid period of the repeated tapping operation in the first interrupted repeated hitting performance, audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound is reproduced to CN2 in the audio synthesis unit 306. On the other hand, when an even-numbered consecutive tapping operation is detected, the audio data corresponding to the second consecutive tapping sound is reproduced to CN3 in the audio synthesis unit 306. In this way, each time a repeated tapping operation is executed, one of a plurality of different audio data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output to CN1 and CN2). By adopting a configuration in which the output is output alternately, it is possible to diversify the sound modes while performing the repeated tapping operation. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game during the continuous play valid period. In addition, if the configuration is such that the first continuous hit sound and the second continuous hit sound are simply played back alternately on a single channel (in other words, the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is controlled). Compared to the case where the repeating configuration is used), it is possible to output the other sound while maintaining the state in which one sound is output (the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output in duplicate) ), it is possible to make the sound mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. To be more specific, when a single channel is configured to alternately play the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound, when a player who plays the consecutive hits quickly performs a repeated tapping operation, the first part of each audio data is This results in a monotonous sound pattern in which only the words are repeated alternately. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that multiple channels play multiple pieces of audio data in sequence, the output of one piece of audio data played on one channel will not be interrupted, and other audio data will be played on other channels. can be played. In other words, a voice based on one voice data and a voice based on another voice data can be synthesized and output. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the first part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify sound modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit performance in the 23rd embodiment, during the valid period in which the repeated hit operation is valid, the later the timing of the press (the less time remaining in the valid period), the greater the number of monsters subtracted (the more It is configured such that the performance mode at the stage of high expectation level is more likely to be set. Thereby, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being defeated quickly to the lower limit number. That is, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the presses being stopped at the remaining 10 monsters or the remaining 4 monsters, which are likely to be set in the event of a loss, and the player's expectations for a jackpot are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, even if a player is playing the game with a slow pressing pace, if the player presses the button in the latter half of the effective period, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated will be more likely to be selected, so the player can reach the target number within the lower limit of the number of monsters. possibility can be increased. Therefore, even a player who presses at a slow pace can be entertained by the interrupting continuous hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, as a type of entertainment production, the plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode (a display mode that looks like a rock) that is different from the normal pending symbol mode. The system is configured to be able to execute a pending batch change performance. In this pending batch change performance, after the plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific form, the player performs a specific operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) to change at least one pending ball number symbol. However, an effect is executed in which the pending symbol mode is changed to a mode with higher expectation level than the pending symbol mode before being changed to the specific mode. By executing this pending batch change performance, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol increases, so that the player's expectation for a jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known which pending ball number symbol will change (expectation level will increase) until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pending ball number symbol will change. can be made to do so. Further, since the expectation level is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the timing of notification can be adjusted to the timing desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of audio data are alternately played on two channels, thereby changing the audio mode. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are sequentially and alternately reproduced on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify audio modes. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the configuration may be such that the audio data is sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. With this configuration, from the time one audio data is played for one channel until the next audio data is played for the same channel (the audio data being played ends) Since the period of time can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify audio modes. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be changed depending on the interval between repeated hits. Specifically, for example, if a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between successive hits (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds or less), three types of audio modes are sequentially played on three channels. On the other hand, if a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between successive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data may be sent sequentially to two channels. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the data is played back (alternately). With this configuration, the sound output mode can be varied according to the interval between repeated hits, so it is possible to realize a game in which the interval between repeated hits is adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the present 23rd embodiment, the configuration is such that during the execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect, one of the repeated hit sounds is output in conjunction with the repeated hit operation, but under predetermined conditions, the repeated hit sound is output even if the repeated hit operation is not performed. It may be configured so that it can be output. More specifically, for example, if the last repeated tapping sound output during the effective period of the repeated tapping operation is the first repeated tapping sound, the second consecutive tapping sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, even though the first continuous tapping sound and the second consecutive tapping sound are output as a set in response to the repeated tapping operation, the last sound output is the first consecutive tapping sound. (In other words, the second continuous hit sound that becomes the pair is no longer output), and it is possible to prevent the sound form from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the audio mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the last repeated tapping sound is the first repeated tapping sound, the control for outputting the second repeated tapping sound after the end is controlled by the variable display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during execution of jackpot fluctuation). By configuring this way, for players who wish to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hit sound output during the interrupt continuous hit performance can be made the first continuous hit sound. It is possible to realize the gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the first consecutive hit sound and the second consecutive hit sound are output alternately, regardless of the interval between consecutive hits by the player, during execution of the interrupt multiple hit effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, if a repeated tapping operation is detected while no sound is being played, the first repeated tapping sound may be always output. In other words, if the interval between repeated hits is so long that the next repeated hit operation is executed after the first repeated hit sound has finished playing, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible for players who wish to diversify the audio formats to perform repeated tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the interrupting repeated tapping performance. be able to.

In the twenty-third embodiment, each time a repeated tapping operation is detected, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound and the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound are alternately transmitted to different channels. However, under predetermined conditions, the method for reproducing audio data may be changed (or the audio data may be subjected to predetermined processing). More specifically, for example, the playback speed may be varied (or the audio data may be processed) so that the output period of each continuous hit sound is varied depending on the interval between repeated hit operations by the player. . That is, if the interval between the player's repeated hitting operations is longer than a predetermined interval (eg, 1 second interval), the output period may be configured to be longer (eg, 1.5 seconds or more). With this configuration, even when a player is playing a game with a long interval between consecutive hits, it is relatively easy to overlap the sound of one consecutive hit while outputting the sound of another consecutive hit. Voice modes can be diversified. In addition, in the present 23rd embodiment, the first repeated tapping sound and the second repeated hitting sound are alternately output (played) to different channels based on the execution of the repeated tapping operation, but this control is not limited to the case based on a continuous hit operation. Similar control may be executed when outputting the starting winning sound based on the starting winning or when outputting the winning sound based on detecting a winning to the specific winning opening 65a. With this configuration, the audio can be output more appropriately, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, this control can be employed simply when outputting a sound effect whose output period is set in advance as part of a variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects, etc. are output continuously in a relatively short period of time, the audio can be output more appropriately, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game. can.

In the twenty-third embodiment, if the execution timing of the interrupt multiple hit performance is before the reach, both the display mode and the audio aspect are interrupted and the interrupt multiple hit performance is executed, while the execution timing of the interrupt multiple hit performance is during the reach performance. In this case, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in an interruptive hit performance that is executed before a reach occurs, only the display mode is interrupted, while in an interruptive continuous hit performance that is executed after a reach occurs, both the display mode and the audio mode may be interrupted. good. Since the sound output before reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the interrupt continuous hit performance without interrupting the output. On the other hand, since flashy sounds are likely to be output after reach, by interrupting the sound mode, it is possible to prevent the sound of the interrupt continuous hit performance from becoming difficult to hear. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the audio mode of the interrupt continuous hit performance. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which both the display mode and the audio mode are interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance, or conversely, a configuration may be adopted in which only the display mode is interrupted regardless of the execution timing. . Further, the control is not limited to switching the object to be interrupted (at least one of the audio mode and the display mode) depending on the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit performance, and may be controlled to switch depending on other conditions. . More specifically, for example, it may be configured to determine whether to interrupt both the audio and the display, or only one of them, by lottery at the start of the interrupt continuous hit performance. In this case, the probability of determining whether to interrupt both may be changed depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether both the audio and the display have been interrupted, or whether only one of them has been interrupted. You can improve your interest in. Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, only a performance with a performance time of 7 seconds is provided as the interrupt continuous hit performance, but a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of interrupt continuous hit performances with different performance times are provided. In this case, by providing a command that indicates an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as an additional time command, it is possible to execute an interrupt continuous hit production with a production time corresponding to the additional time notified by the additional time command. It may be configured as follows. This makes it possible to further diversify the performance modes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (i.e., the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command A configuration that determines the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance so that the difference between the variable time (sum of the additional time notified by) and the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance becomes the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command. You can also use it as More specifically, for example, when a variation pattern of a losing super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is notified, 37 seconds is set as the production time of the interrupt continuous hit production so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of a missed normal reach, remains. It is also possible to configure a configuration in which . With this configuration, by simply setting the presentation mode for the basic time of 30 seconds, it is possible to finish the variable display presentation exactly at the end of the variable time, in conjunction with the presentation time of the interrupt continuous hit presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the performance mode of the variable display performance to which the interrupt continuous hit performance has been set, without providing a dedicated variable display mode for the interrupt continuous hit performance. In addition, when adopting this control (control that determines the performance time of the interrupt continuous hit performance so that the variation time equivalent to the basic time is left over), the interrupt continuous hit performance cannot be executed even if the additional time is 0 seconds. can. That is, the invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 whose specifications do not include an additional time command. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the interrupt continuous hit effect, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the 23rd embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, if the number of drawings of the special symbol exceeds 100 and the probability change state continues, the special symbol will be lowered based on the lottery result corresponding to the fall. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated at the same time as falling to the probability state, the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the number of drawings of the special symbol exceeds 100, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for falling into the low probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, it may be configured such that a lottery to determine whether or not to fall from a time-saving state of normal symbols to a normal state of normal symbols is performed at the start of variation, separately from a lottery to determine whether to fall from a time-saving state of normal symbols to a normal state of normal symbols. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a special symbol lottery, only the time saving state may be terminated. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends, it is possible to configure so that the probability change state of the special symbol may continue, so immediately after the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. To prevent a player from quitting the game and to allow the player to continue the game with the expectation that the probability change state of the special symbols continues. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the 23rd embodiment, the configuration is such that the pending ball number symbol based on the starting winnings detected after the start of the pending batch change performance is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but this is not limited to this. . For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is executed in a pending pattern format using the pending variation lottery table 222qc (see FIG. 497(a)) for a new pending ball number symbol. Thereby, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot not only for the reserved ball number symbol that is the object of the reservation collective change performance, but also for the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning prize. Furthermore, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change performance may also be configured to be added to the targets of the pending batch change performance. In this case, it may be configured such that the reserved ball number symbol based on the new starting winning is always added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or it may be configured such that it is added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under predetermined conditions. Good too. In addition, as a predetermined condition, for example, if the winning information corresponding to a new starting winning shows a jackpot expectation level that is higher than the super reach failure, it may be configured to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect. For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with higher expectations than the held balls in the range in which the held batch change performance is set is newly notified, it is included in the execution target of the held batch change performance. Good too. With this configuration, when the reserved ball number symbol based on a new starting winning is added to the execution target of the reserved batch change performance, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation of a jackpot.

<24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 542 to 557, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the above-described twenty-third embodiment, the chance charge performance is configured to be executable as a type of entertainment performance. In other words, the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) a specific performance mode (chance-up performance) will be performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the reserved balls held at the start of the performance are exhausted) is determined during the performance. It is configured to be able to execute a performance that is suggested (informed) to the player in advance based on the number of gauges of the accumulated spirit gauge KG. By using this chance charge performance, the player is configured to know in advance the remaining number of chance up performances, thereby realizing a gameplay in which it is possible to predict what kind of chance up performance will occur next. The aim was to increase people's interest in games.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the number of gauges of the spirit gauge acquired in the chance charge performance (remaining number of chance up performances) is configured to be varied according to the operation details of the PUSH button 10317 by the player. . More specifically, in the chance charge performance, a performance mode that prompts the player to operate (press) the PUSH button 10317 is displayed, and depending on the length of the period in which the player operated (press) the PUSH button 10317, , the configuration is such that an effect is executed in which the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases. Note that the maximum number of spirit gauges KG is determined at the start of the chance charge effect. The maximum gauge number is determined based on the number of reserved balls at the time the performance is started, as in the twenty-third embodiment. By configuring the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG to vary according to the player's operations (presses), it is possible to give the impression that the number of chance-up effects is determined by the player himself. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the chance charge performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the state after the 100th time is changed over the 96th to 99th fluctuating display (the last 4 fluctuating displays where the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed). It was configured to execute a probability variation continuation suggestion performance to indicate whether the state is in a probability variation state or whether it is transitioning to a normal state. This variable continuation suggestion performance is based on the result of the performance (whether the continuation of the chance zone is announced or the end of the chance zone The structure was such that the amount of information (whether or not the information was notified) could be varied.

In addition to this, the twenty-fourth embodiment has a configuration in which BGM is set for each variable display effect while the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is being executed. In other words, instead of setting BGM for the variable display period of the 96th to 99th variable display as the BGM for the probability change continuation suggestion performance, the structure is such that the variable display BGM is set according to the varying time of each variable display. There is. By configuring in this way, even if the fluctuation is stopped in the execution range of the variable continuation suggestion performance, the end timing of the fluctuation display and the end timing of the fluctuation display BGM are suppressed from being misaligned. can do. To be more specific, the probability change continuation suggestion performance is executed over the variable display period of the 96th to 99th variable display (that is, at a fixed timing) after the end of the jackpot, regardless of the status of the reserved balls etc. This is a production, and it is irrelevant whether or not the balls reserved until the production ends (i.e., the 99th variation display) are held at the start of the production (i.e., the start of the 96th variation display after the end of the jackpot). This is a performance performed on Therefore, there is a possibility that there will be no reserved balls during the presentation, so the period from the start to the end of the presentation will be indefinite. Under such circumstances, if a configuration is adopted in which BGM with a fixed playback period is played using the start of a performance suggesting continuous variation, the timing at which the playback of the BGM ends and the timing at which the performance ends will be inconsistent, and the player It may make you feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, by setting the BGM in units of variable display, it is possible to ensure that the end timing of the performance and the end timing of the BGM match, so that the audio mode and the display mode can be suitably executed. can.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the audio lamp control device The configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twenty-third embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 542, a display mode will be described when a long press effect (an effect that prompts the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a predetermined operation mode) is executed in the chance charge effect. FIG. 542(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time when the long press effect is started. As shown in FIG. 542(a), in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the chance charge effect is executed, the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed at approximately the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An image (long press image NG) that encourages you to continue (long press) is displayed. More specifically, a long press image NG is displayed, which is composed of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, an image of an arrow pointing from above to the PUSH button 10317, and the words "Long press!!" be done. In addition, the words "Press and hold to gather up your spirit!!" are displayed in the display area 805. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that by continuing to press (long press) the PUSH button 10317, the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 542(a), the words "10.00 seconds remaining" are displayed on the right side of the display area 803 when viewed from the front. The display of the remaining seconds will count down according to the elapsed time, and when the remaining seconds reach 0.00, the long press effect will end and the number of Kiai Gauge KG at that point will be displayed. is determined as the number of times the chance-up performance will occur after that. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the end timing of the long-press effect, so it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand. Note that the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the chance charge performance in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 479(b)), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 542(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode while the player is long pressing in the long pressing effect. As shown in FIG. 542(b), as the player continues to press the PUSH button 10317 (long press), the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases. The example in FIG. 542(b) illustrates a state in which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG has increased to 2 gauges due to long press. In this way, by configuring the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG to increase according to the length of time that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, it is possible to encourage the player to press the PUSH button 10317 for a longer period of time. It can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the long-press performance. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG increases by one gauge each time the total press period for the PUSH button 10317 exceeds one second in the long press effect. In addition, even if the long press is interrupted, the period of long press until then will be remembered, and when the long press is resumed, the count of the long press will be restarted from the point where the long press was interrupted. are doing. Thereby, it is possible to further improve the convenience for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 543, the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode during execution of the long-press effect in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 543(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship when the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed in the long press effect. As shown in FIG. 543(a), when the player continues to press and hold the PUSH button 10317 during the long-press effect, as the number of gauges increases (synchronized), the sound mode corresponding to the number of gauges changes. is configured so that it is output. Specifically, while the gauge number is 0 (while the long press period is less than 1 second), the sound mode is such that the sound "ta" is output 3 times in 1 second (sound for 0 gauge). . Additionally, as shown in Figure 543(a), while the gauge number is 1 (when the long press period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds), the sound "da" is output three times in 1 second. This is the audio mode (sound for 1 gauge). This 1-gauge sound is louder (louder) than the 0-gauge sound.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 543(a), while the gauge number is 2 (the long press period is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds), the sound "do" is output three times in one second. The sound mode will be (sound for 2 gauge). This 2-gauge sound is louder (louder) than the 0-gauge sound and the 1-gauge sound. Similarly, for the subsequent gauges (3rd gauge to 5th gauge), as the number of gauges increases, the configuration is such that a flashy (loud) sound is output as the sound output during a long press. As a result, the player can easily understand not only the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG but also the gauge number (the number of chance up effects) from the audio mode, thereby improving the convenience for the player. Can be done.

Figure 543(b) shows the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode when the long press is interrupted during the long press (while the number of gauges is 1 gauge) and then the long press is restarted. FIG. As shown in Figure 543(b), if the long press is interrupted in the middle of the long press effect, the output of the audio (sound for 1 gauge) will be interrupted, but the display mode will remain the same as before the interruption. maintained. That is, the output of the sound is stopped when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG is 1. These audio modes and display modes allow the player to easily understand that the increase in the number of gauges has been interrupted by interrupting the long press. Further, as shown in FIG. 543(b), when the long press is resumed, the audio is output from the continuation of the audio mode that was being output at the time of interruption. With this configuration, the timing at which the gauge number increases and the timing at which the audio mode changes can be matched (synchronized) regardless of whether or not there is an interruption, making the presentation mode of the long-press effect more suitable. Can be set to .

Next, with reference to FIG. 544, a description will be given of changes in the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG during the long-press performance for each game method of the player. Figure 544(a) shows the gauge when the PUSH button 10317 is continuously pressed for a long time from 1 second after the start of the performance until the end of the long press performance in a long press performance where the upper limit of the number of gauges is 4 gauges. It is a diagram showing the change in the number.

As shown in Figure 544, if you continue to press and hold during the long press effect, the gauge number will increase by 1 every second, reaching the upper limit of 4 gauges after 5 seconds have passed. do. Thereafter, the gauge number is maintained at 4 until the presentation period ends (until 10 seconds elapse from the start of the long-press presentation).

FIG. 544(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the gauge number when the long press is interrupted in the middle of the long press and then the long press is restarted in the long press effect. In the example of FIG. 544(b), when the long press is interrupted between 2.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds and between 5 seconds and 9.3 seconds after the long press starts. It shows the change in gauge number in . As shown in FIG. 544(b), if the long press is continued from 1 second to 2.5 seconds after the start of the long press effect, the gauge number will change after 2 seconds have passed. As the gauge increases to 1 gauge, a voice for 1 gauge is output, and the state of 1 gauge is maintained until 2.5 seconds have elapsed. Then, if the player interrupts the long press after 2.5 seconds have passed (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the transition to the 1 gauge state), the number of gauges (the display mode of the spirit gauge KG) ) remains at 1 gauge, and audio output is interrupted. That is, in conjunction with the interruption of the long press (pressing the PUSH button 10317), the audio output is also interrupted. This allows the player to easily understand, without changing the display format, that the increase in the gauge number is interrupted by interrupting the long press.

Then, as shown in FIG. 544(b), when the player resumes the long press, the output of the 1 gauge sound is restarted. At this time, the playback position of the audio to be restarted is set to the playback position where the playback was interrupted last time. That is, when the long press is interrupted, the playback position is stored (backed up), and when the long press is restarted, the sound for the long press is resumed from the backed up playback position. With this configuration, even if the long press is interrupted, the audio format can be changed (developed) in synchronization with the change in the display format (the number of gauges on the spirit gauge KG). The display mode can be suitably set. Therefore, the performance mode can be suitably set.

As shown in FIG. 544(b), when the total long press period after the number of gauges increases to 1 gauge reaches 1 second (that is, when 4 seconds have passed after the start of the long press effect), As the number of gauges increases to 2 gauges, the audio mode switches from the 1 gauge audio to the 2 gauge audio. That is, as the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases to 2 gauges, the sound mode is switched to the sound for 2 gauges.

As shown in FIG. 544(b), in a state where the number of gauges is 2 gauges, while the player continues to press and hold, the sound for 2 gauges continues to be output (played). Then, when the player interrupts the long press 4.9 seconds after the start of the long press effect (0.9 seconds after the state of 2 gauge has passed), the output of the sound for the 2 gauge is interrupted. Meanwhile, the spirit gauge KG remains at 2 gauge. This state (a state in which only the output (playback) of the audio mode is interrupted) remains until the player resumes the long press (in the example of FIG. 544(b), 9.3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the long press effect). (up to a point in time). Then, by restarting the long press, the output of the audio mode is restarted again. Although the details will be described later, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the long press is resumed, the length of the remaining period during which the long press can be executed (long press effective period) and the upper limit of the current long press effect are determined. The gauge number is determined and the rate of increase in the gauge number (the reproduction speed of the audio mode and the update speed of the display mode) is made variable. More specifically, each time the long press is resumed, a playback speed (update speed) is set that allows the number of gauges to increase up to the upper limit by the end of the long press valid period, with a limit of double speed. It is structured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to end the chance charge performance with a larger number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG, so it is possible to increase the number of chance up performances that occur after the end of the chance charge performance. . Therefore, the performance effect can be further improved.

In the example of FIG. 544(b), at the time when the long press is restarted (9.3 seconds have elapsed), the remaining long press valid period is 0.7 seconds, and the maximum number of gauges (4 gauges) is reached. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which two gauges remain. Before the long press is interrupted, the long press is executed for 0.9 seconds in the 2 gauge state, so originally the remaining long press period to raise the gauge to 3 is 0. .The total of 1 second and the remaining long press period of 1 second to increase from 3 gauge to 4 gauge is 1. If you do not continue to press and hold for 1 second, it will increase to the upper limit of 4 gauge. It becomes impossible to do so. In other words, if the playback speed is not varied, it is impossible to increase the gauge by 2 in the remaining 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 544(b), by setting the playback speed to double speed after restarting the long press, the gauge number can be increased to the upper limit of 4 gauges in 0.7 seconds. becomes possible. In other words, after restarting, the gauge increases to 3 after 0.05 seconds (9.35 seconds after the start of the long press effect), and after increasing to 3 gauge, 0.5 seconds have passed (the start of the long press effect). Control is performed so that the playback speed increases to 4 gauges after 9.85 seconds (after 9.85 seconds have elapsed). By setting the playback speed to a playback speed that requires .5 seconds (double playback speed), it is possible to increase the number of gauges up to the upper limit of 4 gauges within the long press effective period. As a result, the chance charge effect can be ended with a larger number of gauges, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, even if the playback speed is doubled, if it is impossible to increase the gauge number to the upper limit, the playback speed is set to the normal playback speed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the playback speed from becoming excessively high and causing a feeling of discomfort or discomfort to the player.

Note that in the twenty-fourth embodiment, even if the speed is set to double, if it is impossible to increase the gauge number to the upper limit, playback is executed at the normal playback speed, but this is not the only option. It's not a thing. For example, even if it is impossible to increase the gauge number to the upper limit, it may be configured to set the speed to double speed. With this configuration, even if the upper limit number of gauges is not reached, the chance charge performance can be ended with a larger number of gauges, so the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545 and FIG. 546, the correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode during execution of the continuous suggestion production of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 545(a), all the lottery results of the special symbols within the execution period of the continuous suggestion performance are out, and four fluctuating displays are consecutively displayed (i.e., the hold is cut off midway). FIG. As shown in FIG. 545(a), when the variable display is executed continuously during the continuous suggestion effect, the display mode of the probable continuous suggestion effect ( (see Figure 476) is displayed. Similarly, regarding the audio aspect, the variable BGM is played in synchronization with the variable display period of each of the four variable displays. In addition, in the present 24th embodiment, the variable display period is a fixed period of 4.5 seconds in the case of a loss in the 96th to 99th special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the variable continuous suggestion production. It is configured so that Therefore, it is sufficient to prepare only a 4.5 second mode as the display mode and audio mode corresponding to each variable display during execution of the continuous suggestion performance. Therefore, variations in the display mode and audio mode can be minimized, so the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 545(a), during the fluctuation stop state during the execution period of the definite change continuation suggestion performance, the stop display of the third symbol is displayed as the display mode, and the fluctuation stop sound is output as the audio mode. to be (regenerated). Note that since the fixed display period after the end of the variation is uniformly set to 0.5 seconds, variations in the display mode during the stop display and the variation stop sound can be suppressed to a minimum. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 545(b), a description will be given of the correspondence between the display mode and the audio mode when the number of pending times becomes 0 during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect. FIG. 545(b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls becomes 0 when the 96th special symbol lottery is executed, and the state of 0 reserved balls continues even after the variation ends. As shown in FIG. 545(b), when the 96th variation display ends and the variation stops (the number of pending balls is 0 and the special symbol lottery cannot be executed), the display mode is the demo The display mode changes. As this demonstration display mode, for example, a display mode of the immediately preceding (96th) continuation suggestion performance and a display mode in which the stopped symbols continue to be displayed are set. Furthermore, as for the audio mode, after the 96th stop sound is output, there is no sound. These display and audio modes make it easy for the player to understand that the number of balls on hold is 0, allowing the player to actively shoot the game balls in order to win a new starting prize. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 545(b), if a starting winning occurs during the demonstration display, a variable display of special symbols is executed and the continuation suggestion performance is started from the continuation.

In this way, by configuring the audio format to be output in units of variable display, even if the number of reserved balls becomes 0 during the execution of the variable continuation suggestion performance, the audio format and display format will deviate after that. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the performance effect in the probability change continuation suggestion performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, a description will be given of the correspondence between the display mode and the sound mode when a jackpot is won during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect. Here, in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, one performance corresponding to a preset performance scenario is executed for each one variable display performed in the probability change continuous suggestion performance. It was configured to do this. For this reason, if you hit the jackpot at an early stage (the 96th or 97th special symbol lottery) in the probability change continuation suggestion performance, the jackpot will be announced before you have time to fully enjoy the probability variation continuation suggestion performance, and the game will end. The problem was that it was difficult to increase the interest of people.

On the other hand, in the 24th embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during execution of a variable continuation suggestion performance, a pseudo fluctuation display is performed for the remaining number of continuous suggestion effects of probability change while the jackpot variation is executed. The system is structured so that a jackpot is announced as a result of the continuous change suggestion effect. In other words, the configuration is such that when the door 806 is destroyed (broken through) in the probability change continuation suggestion performance, a jackpot can be announced. With this configuration, even if you hit a jackpot in the middle of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance, you can perform the same number of definite variable continuation suggestion performances, making the definite variable continuation suggestion performance more enjoyable. .

FIG. 546 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display mode and the sound mode when a jackpot is achieved in the 97th special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 546, in the 96th outlier variation, the first suggestion effect is displayed, as in FIGS. 545(a) and (b), and the playback time for one variation (4.5 seconds) The fluctuation BGM is played (output). Then, in synchronization with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds as a display mode, and a fluctuation stop sound is played (output) as an audio mode. After that, when the 97th special symbol variation display (jackpot variation) is executed, as shown in FIG. 546, three suggestion effects are simulated during the variation display period of the first jackpot variation , At the end of each suggestion effect, the third symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 546, the fluctuation display BGM and the fluctuation stop sound are outputted (played) in a pseudo manner in synchronization with the pseudo suggestive performance. Then, in the fourth suggestion presentation, a presentation showing success in destroying the door 806 is displayed, and a jackpot is announced. After the jackpot variation stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the jackpot is announced, and the display mode for the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM for the opening of the jackpot is displayed. Output.

In addition, in the present 24th embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved during the execution of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance, the period is the same as when all the special symbols are drawn out during the production period of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance. The variable time of the jackpot is set so that the continuous variable suggestion effect ends at . For example, if a jackpot is achieved in the 97th special symbol lottery after a jackpot as shown in FIG. A fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds, which is the total of the stop display periods (0.5 seconds x 2), is set. As a result, it is possible to use the same display mode and performance mode as during the winning variation in the pseudo suggestion production and the pseudo third symbol stop display that are executed during the jackpot variation, so the display format and sound Variations in aspects can be minimized. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present 24th embodiment, if a jackpot does not occur during execution of the variable continuation suggestion performance (it is a miss four times in a row), the audio mode (BGM for variation) is output in units of variation display. By doing so, even if the number of reserved balls becomes 0 during the execution of the probability change continuation suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent the audio mode and the display mode from becoming out of sync after that. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the performance effect in the probability change continuation suggestion performance. In addition, when a jackpot occurs during execution of the probability variable continuous suggestion performance, the structure is such that the suggestion performance equal to the number of times that has not been executed at the time of winning the jackpot is executed in a pseudo manner during one jackpot variation. With this configuration, even if the player wins a jackpot, he or she can confirm the probability change continuation suggestion performance to the end, thereby increasing the player's interest. In addition, since the system is configured to notify the jackpot in the same manner as the one that notifies the continuation of the probability change state (the manner in which the door 806 is destroyed), it is possible to make people expect a jackpot when the door 806 is destroyed. can. Therefore, it is possible to further increase expectations for the performance that suggests continuous change.

<Electrical configuration in 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 547, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. Here, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 24th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 23rd embodiment only in that the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 23 table 202qb are partially changed. . Therefore, only the changes in the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb will be described here, and the detailed description of other configurations of the ROM 202 will be omitted.

FIG. 547(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 547(a), the variation pattern selection 24 table 202rb in the twenty-fourth embodiment has suggestions for the structure of the variation pattern selection 23 table 202qb in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 492(a)). The difference is that a presentation table 202r1 is added. This suggestion effect table 202r1 is referred to in order to select a special symbol variation pattern (variation time) to indicate the 96th to 99th special symbol lottery results after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the variable continuous suggestion effect. This is the data table that will be used. In other words, in the 24th embodiment, when the 95th special symbol lottery is executed from the 1st to the 95th time after the end of the jackpot, the probability variation/time saving table 202qb2 is referred to determine the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined from the 96th to 99th time. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the suggestive effect table 202r1 is referred to and the fluctuation pattern is determined. From the 100th time onwards, either the normal table 202qb1 or the probability change/time saving table 202qb2 is referred to to determine the variation pattern, depending on the gaming state.

FIG. 547(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the suggestion effect table 202r1. As shown in FIG. 547(b), the table 202r1 for suggestion effect includes the special symbol lottery results (win/fail judgment results) and the number of special symbol lottery numbers (96 to 99 times) after the jackpot. The corresponding fluctuation patterns are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 547(b), in a situation where the judgment result is a jackpot and the special symbol lottery number is 96, the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of , a winning special variation A with a variation time of 19.5 seconds is associated and defined as a variation pattern. This fluctuation time of 19.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of four outlier fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 4) in the definite change continuation suggestion performance and the stop display period for three times (0.5 seconds x 3). is the time corresponding to . In other words, including the period during which the fluctuation of the actual jackpot fluctuation is stopped, it is made up of a period in which it is possible to execute exactly four (pseudo) losing fluctuations and fluctuation suspension. Therefore, after the start of the definite change continuation suggestion performance, if a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, by performing a pseudo fluctuation display four times in the jackpot fluctuation, it can be compared to the normal definite change continuation suggestion performance. Similarly, the suggestion performance can be performed four times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 547(b), in a situation where the judgment result is a jackpot and the number of drawings of the special symbol is 97, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are changed. However, a winning special variation B with a variation time of 14.5 seconds is associated and defined as a variation pattern. This fluctuation time of 14.5 seconds is the sum of the fluctuation time of three outlier fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 3) in the definite change continuation suggestion performance and the two stop display periods (0.5 seconds x 2). is the time corresponding to . That is, including the period during which fluctuation of the actual jackpot fluctuation is stopped, it is made up of a period in which it is possible to execute exactly three (pseudo) losing fluctuations and fluctuation suspension. For this reason, after the start of the definite change continuation suggestion performance, if the first special symbol lottery is a loss and the second lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo fluctuation display will be executed three times in the jackpot fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times including one out-of-order variation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 547(b), in a situation where the judgment result is a jackpot and the number of drawings of the special symbol is 98, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are changed. However, a winning special variation C with a variation time of 9.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. This fluctuation time of 9.5 seconds corresponds to the sum of the fluctuation time of three outlier fluctuations (4.5 seconds x 2) in the definite change continuation suggestion performance and one stop display period (0.5 seconds). It's time to do it. That is, including the period during which fluctuations of actual jackpot fluctuations are stopped, it is made up of a period in which exactly two (pseudo) winning fluctuations and fluctuations can be stopped. For this reason, after the start of the probability change continuation suggestion performance, if you lose in the first and second special symbol drawings and hit the jackpot in the third drawing, a pseudo fluctuation display will be displayed for the jackpot fluctuation. By executing this twice, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect four times in combination with the two out-of-order fluctuations.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 547(b), in a situation where the judgment result is a jackpot and the number of special symbol drawings is 99, the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are changed. Regardless, a winning special variation D with a variation time of 4.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. This variation time of 4.5 seconds is made up of the same variation time as the variation time of a miss, so by executing the suggestion performance in the same way as when it is a miss, the suggestion production for 4 variations can be executed without any discomfort. be able to.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 547(b), if the result of the judgment is wrong, a special fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 4.5 seconds is associated and specified as a fluctuation pattern, regardless of the number of drawings of the special symbol. has been done. Therefore, a 5-second suggestion performance can be executed every time a special symbol is drawn out 96th to 99th time after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the variable continuous suggestion performance. Therefore, since the probability change continuation suggestion performance can be executed in the same performance time every time, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In this way, in the 24th embodiment, regardless of whether or not a jackpot occurs during execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion performance, the total fluctuation time (and stop display time) until the probability variation continuation suggestion production ends. is configured so that the duration is 20 seconds. With this configuration, the performance period of the probability change continuation suggestion performance can be fixed each time, so it is possible to provide a performance that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in the present 24th embodiment, the production period of the definite variable continuation suggestion production is fixed to 20 seconds, but the production period is not necessarily limited to 20 seconds, and the production period of the suggestion production a specific number of times (4 times) is set. It may be longer or shorter than 20 seconds as long as it is executable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 548, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 548(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 548(a), the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth embodiment has a playback speed selection table 222ra added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 495(a)). There is a difference. The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-third embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The playback speed selection table 222ra shows the remaining long press period (A) necessary to increase the gauge number to the maximum and the start (resume) of the long press while the long press effect (see FIG. 542) is being executed. This is a data table in which data for selecting the playback speed (display mode and audio mode) of the presentation mode (display mode and audio mode) during the long press is defined according to the remaining long press valid period (B) at the time. The stipulated contents of this playback speed selection table 222ra will be explained with reference to FIG. 548(b).

FIG. 548(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the playback speed selection table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 548(b), the playback speed selection table 222ra includes the remaining long-press period (A) required to increase the gauge number to the maximum, and the time when the long-press starts (resume). The reproduction speed (update speed) of the display mode and the audio mode is defined in association with each correspondence relationship with the remaining long press valid period (B). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 548(b), if B is a period longer than A (that is, by continuing to press and hold until the end of the long-press valid period, the gauge number will increase to the maximum number. (when it becomes possible to do so), the configuration is such that 1x speed is selected as the playback speed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 548(b), if B is less than A and has a period that is 2/3 or more of A, 1.5x speed is selected as the playback speed. It is configured as follows. Furthermore, if B is less than ⅔ of A and is a period that is more than half the length of A, double speed is selected as the playback speed. On the other hand, if B is less than half the length of A, 1x speed is selected as the playback speed.

In this way, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, by setting the playback speed with reference to the playback speed selection table 222ra, it is possible to increase the number of gauges to the upper limit within the remaining time of the long press valid period. The speed can be set. Therefore, in the chance charge performance, it is possible to end the performance with the gauge increased to a larger number, so it is possible to ensure a greater number of executions of the chance up performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 549 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 549, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-third embodiment (see FIG. 495(b)) by setting the long-press performance flag 223ra and the long-press period timer. 223rb, long press timer 223rc, long press execution flag 223rd, long press interruption flag 223re, spirit gauge counter 223rf, gauge rise timing storage area 223mg, pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh, pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj. The difference is that .

The long press effect in progress flag 223ra is a flag indicating whether or not the long press effect (see FIG. 542) is being executed. If so, it means that the long press effect is not in progress. This long-press effect flag 223ra is set to ON at the start timing of the long-press effect (see Z5902 in FIG. 551), and is set to OFF when the long-press effective period has elapsed (see Z5908 in FIG. 551).

The long press period timer 223rb is a timer for measuring the long press effective period in the long press effect, and a counter value corresponding to 10 seconds is set at the start of the long press effect (see Z5903 in FIG. 551). During this long-press validity period, the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG is increased by the player's long-press.

The long-press timer 223rc is a timer for measuring the total period (long-press period) during which the player operated the PUSH button 10317 during the 1 long-press performance. Basically, until the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG reaches the upper limit value, the gauge number increases by 1 every time the value of the long press timer 223rc increases by 1 second. Note that when the playback speed is 1.5 times speed or 2 times speed, the gauge number increases at a timing corresponding to the playback speed.

The long press execution flag 223rd is a flag for indicating whether or not the player is executing a long press in the long press effect. If this long press execution flag 223rd is on, it means that the player is executing a long press, and if it is off, it means that the player is not executing a long press. This long press execution flag 223rd is set to ON when a new operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the long press valid period (see Z6101 in FIG. 553), and is set to OFF when the long press is interrupted. Set (see Z6002 in FIG. 552).

The long press interruption flag 223re is a flag for indicating whether or not the long press is interrupted during the valid long press period of 1, and if it is on, it means that the long press is interrupted. , if it is off, it means the long press is not interrupted. This long press interruption flag 223re is set to ON when the long press is interrupted (see Z6002 in FIG. 552), and is set to OFF when the long press is resumed (see Z6105 in FIG. 553).

The spirit gauge counter 223rf is a counter for counting the number of spirit gauges KG that actually increases when the player performs a long press during the long press performance. The initial value of this spirit gauge counter 223rf is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding one each time the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG increases (see Z6007 in FIG. 552). At the end of this long press effect, the value of this spirit gauge counter 223rf is overwritten with the value of charge number counter 223qm (see Z5907 in FIG. 551). Thereby, the gauge number actually increased by the player's operation can be reflected in the number of chance-up effects that will be executed thereafter.

The gauge increase timing storage area 223mg is a storage area in which data indicating the remaining period until the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases during execution of the long press effect is stored. While the player is long-pressing in the long-press effect, it is determined whether or not to increase the gauge number depending on the data stored in this gauge rise timing storage area 223mg and the value of the long-press timer 223rc. (See Z6005 in FIG. 552).

The pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is a counter for counting the number of remaining pseudo fluctuation performances (pseudo suggestion performances) to be executed during the jackpot fluctuation in the definite variable continuous suggestion performance. This pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is the value of the time saving guaranteed number of times counter 223qg at the time of the jackpot (i.e., the remaining amount of the definite variable continuation suggestion performance) when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot during the definite variable continuation suggestion performance. The number of presentations) is set (see Z6202 in FIG. 557), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed (see Z6206 in FIG. 554). By counting the number of pseudo fluctuation effects using the pseudo variation frequency counter 223rh, it is possible to reliably execute the suggestion effect four times in each probable change continuation suggestion effect. Therefore, the probability change continuation suggestion performance can be suitably executed.

The pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is a timer for timing the remaining performance period in the pseudo fluctuation performance. This pseudo variation timer 223rj is set to a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds each time the start of a pseudo variation effect is set (see Z6203 in FIG. 557). By managing the performance period of the pseudo fluctuation performance using the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj, it is possible to execute the pseudo fluctuation performance one or more times that matches the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, the probability change continuation suggestion performance can be suitably executed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 550 to 557. In the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the effect update processing 23 (Fig. 519 In place of Z3111 in Figure 550, there is effect update processing 24 (Z3181 in Figure 550), variable display setting process 24 (Z3182 in Figure 555) in place of variable display setting process 23 (Z3115 in Figure 532), and variable effect setting process 23 (Z3182 in Figure 555). The difference is that the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281 in FIG. 556) is executed instead of Z4204 in FIG. 533. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 550, the effect update process 24 (Z3181) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. This effect update process 24 (Z3181) is executed in place of the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment, and similarly to the effect update process 23 (see FIG. 519) in the 23rd embodiment, the variable display This is a process for updating the production mode of various productions executed while the production is being executed.

Of the effect update processing 24 (see FIG. 550) in the 24th embodiment, each process of Z3201 to Z3206 is the same as each process of Z3201 to Z3206 of the effect update process 23 of the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 519). processing is executed.

In addition, in the effect update process 24 (see FIG. 550) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the process of Z3206 is finished, the long press effect process (Z3261) for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 542) is executed. Then, a pseudo variation setting process (Z3262) for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo variation effect (see FIG. 546) is executed, and this process ends. Details of these long-press effect processing (Z3261) and pseudo fluctuation setting processing (Z3262) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 551 to 553 and FIG. 554, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 551, the long press effect processing (Z3261) described above will be described. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press effect processing (Z3261). As described above, this long press effect processing (Z3261) is a process for updating the effect mode in the long press effect (see FIG. 542).

In this long press effect processing (Z3261), first, it is determined whether or not the current timing is to start the long press effect (Z5901). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the long press effect (Z5901: Yes), the long press effect flag 223ra is set on (Z5902), and the value of the long press period timer 223rb corresponds to 10 seconds. A counter value is set (Z5903), and this processing ends. Thereby, the long press valid period in the long press effect can be set to 10 seconds.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5901, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of the long press effect (Z5901: No), next, it is determined whether the long press effect flag 223ra is on (that is, the execution of the long press effect). (Z5904). If it is determined that the long-press performance flag 223ra is off (that is, the long-press performance is not in progress) (Z5904: No), there is no possibility of updating the performance mode related to the long-press performance, so the process continues as is. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5904, if it is determined that the long press effect flag 223ra is on (that is, the long press effect is being executed) (Z5904: Yes), the value of the long press period timer 223rb is subtracted. (Z5905), Next, it is determined whether the value of the long press period timer 223rb after the subtraction is 0 (Z5906). If it is determined that the value of the long press period timer 223rb after the subtraction is 0 (Z5906: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the long press effect, so the value of the charge number counter 223qm is added to the spirit gauge counter 223rf. By overwriting the value of , the gauge number that actually increases (reaches) in the long-press performance is set as the number of subsequent chance-up performances (Z5907).

When the processing of Z5907 is completed, the values of the long press production flag 223ra, long press timer 223rc, long press execution flag 223rd, spirit gauge counter 223rf, and long press interruption flag 223re are all reset (Z5908), and the chance charge is performed. The end of the performance is set (Z5909), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5906, if it is determined that the timer value of the long press period timer 223rb after the subtraction is not 0 (it is not the end timing of the long press effect) (Z5906: No), the long press execution flag 223rd is turned on. (that is, the player is holding down the PUSH button 10317) (Z5910). If it is determined that the long-press execution flag 223rd is on (Z5910: Yes), a long-press execution process is executed to update the performance mode while the player is long pressing (Z5911). , this process ends. Details of this long-press execution process (Z5911) will be described later with reference to FIG. 552.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5910, if it is determined that the long press execution flag 223rd is off (that is, the player has not long pressed the PUSH button 10317) (Z5910: No), then the It is determined whether a press is detected (Z5912). If it is determined that the press of the PUSH button 10317 has not been detected (Z5912: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z5912, if it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected (Z5912: Yes), a long press start process is executed to set the control for the start of a long press (Z5913). , this process ends. Details of this long press start process (Z5913) will be described later with reference to FIG. 553.

Next, with reference to FIG. 552, the long press execution process (Z5911) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press execution process (Z5911). As described above, this long-press execution process (Z5911) is a process for updating the performance mode while the player is long-pressing.

In this long press execution processing (Z5911), first, it is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001), and if it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not pressed (Z6001: No), the long press is executed. The press execution flag 223rd is set to OFF, and the long press interruption flag 223re is set to ON (Z6002). Then, the display and audio are temporarily stopped (Z6003), and the process ends. More specifically, an interruption command is set for each of the display control device 114 and the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6001, if it is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is pressed (Z6001: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the long press timer 223rc to update it (Z6004), and then the spirit gauge is It is determined whether the timer value corresponds to the rise timing of the KG gauge number (Z6005). In the process of Z6005, if it is determined that the timer value does not correspond to the rise timing of the gauge number (Z6005: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z6005, if it is determined that the timer value corresponds to the rise timing of the gauge number (Z6005: Yes), then the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm. It is determined whether or not (Z6006).

In the process of Z6006, if it is determined that the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is smaller than the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: Yes), the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is updated by adding 1 (Z6007), and the update is performed. The execution of the display mode and voice mode corresponding to the subsequent value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6008), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6006, if it is determined that the value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is greater than or equal to the value of the charge number counter 223qm (Z6006: No), the number of gauges cannot be increased any further in the current long press effect. Therefore, execution of the display mode and voice mode corresponding to the current value of the spirit gauge counter 223rf is set (Z6009), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 553, the long press start process (Z5913) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long press start process (Z5913). As described above, the long press start process (Z5913) is a process for setting control regarding the start of a long press by the player.

In the long press start process (Z5913), the long press execution flag 223rd is first set to on (Z6101), and then it is determined whether the long press interruption flag 223re is on (Z6104). In the process of Z6104, if it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223re is off (Z6104: No), it means that the player operated the PUSH button 10317 for the first time in the long press effect, so the gauge rise timing Data indicating a rise every second is stored in the storage area 223rg (Z6102), the display mode and audio mode for long press are played back at 1x speed (Z6103), and then this process ends. The first long press sets the speed to 1x regardless of the cutting time, but if the display and audio are played at 1.5x or 2x speed from the beginning, it may make the player feel uncomfortable. The aim is to suppress this because of the nature of

On the other hand, in the process of Z6104, if it is determined that the long press interruption flag 223re is on (Z6104: Yes), the long press interruption flag 223re is set to off (Z6105), and the value of the charge number counter 223qm x 1 second is set. A value (A) is calculated by subtracting the value of the long press timer 223rc from the long press timer 223rc (Z6106). Next, a value (B) is calculated by subtracting the value of the long press period counter from the timer value corresponding to 10 seconds (Z6107), and the value of A and B is calculated from the playback speed selection table 222ra (see FIG. 548(b)). A playback speed corresponding to each value is selected (Z6108). Next, data in the gauge rise timing storage area 223rg is updated according to the playback speed selected from the playback speed selection table 222ra (Z6109), and playback of the display mode and audio mode at the selected playback speed is started (Z6110). ), this process ends.

By executing this long press start process (see FIG. 553), a suitable playback speed can be set according to the timing at which the long press is resumed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 554, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z3262) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z3262). As described above, the pseudo variation setting process (Z3262) is a process for updating the display mode during execution of the pseudo variation effect (see FIG. 546).

In the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z3262), first, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is greater than 0 (Z6201). In the process of Z6201, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is 0 (Z6201: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z6201, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is larger than 0 (Z6201: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is subtracted by 1 (Z6202), and then the pseudo fluctuation count after the subtraction is It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation timer 223rj is 0 (Z6203). In the process of Z6203, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj after the subtraction is not 0 (Z6203: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6203, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj after the subtraction is 0 (Z6203: Yes), a pseudo fluctuation effect for 5 seconds corresponding to the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh after the subtraction is performed. (Z6204), and set the playback of the 5-second variation BGM (Z6205). Next, the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is subtracted by 1 (Z6206), and this processing is ended.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 554), if a jackpot is won during execution of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance, the pseudo fluctuation performance can be suitably executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 555, the variable display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 24 (Z3182) is executed in place of the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment, and is similar to the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment. , is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect.

Of this variable display setting process 24 (Z3182), each process of Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, Z4206 to Z4211 is the same as Z4201 to Z4203, Z4205, Z4206 of the variable display setting process 23 (see FIG. 532) in the 23rd embodiment. The same processes as those of Z4211 to Z4211 are executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 24 (Z3182) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the process in Z4203 is finished, the variable display setting process 24 (see FIG. 533) in the twenty-third embodiment is replaced with the variable display setting process (see FIG. 533). 24 (Z4281). Details of this variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) will be described later with reference to FIG. 556.

In the variable display setting process 24 (see FIG. 555) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the process of Z4205 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the pseudo variable timer 223rj is greater than 0 (Z4282). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is 0 (Z4282: No), reproduction of fluctuation BGM according to the fluctuation time is set (Z4283), and the process moves to Z4206. On the other hand, in the process of Z4282, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj is greater than 0 (Z4282: Yes), the process of Z4283 is skipped and the process moves to Z4206.

Next, with reference to FIG. 556, the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. This variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) is executed in place of the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment, and is similar to the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. 533) in the 23rd embodiment. , is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect.

Of this variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281), each process of Z4301 to Z4307, Z4310 to Z4313, each of Z4301 to Z4307, Z4310 to Z4313 of the variable effect setting process 23 (see FIG. The same process as the process is executed. In addition, in the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot in the process of Z4307 (Z4307: Yes), the variable effect setting process 24 (Z4281) Since this means that the jackpot fluctuation is to be started, a winning process during suggestion performance is executed to set the execution of the remaining suggestion performances that have not been executed during the jackpot fluctuation (Z4381), and this processing is ended. The details of this winning process during suggestion performance (Z4381) will be explained with reference to FIG. 557.

FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process during suggestion performance (Z4381). In this suggestion performance winning process (Z4381), first, the winning flag 223qi during right-hand hitting is set to ON (Z6201), and then the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223qg is set to the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh (Z6202). ). When the process of Z6202 is completed, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223rj (Z6203), and the start of the pseudo fluctuation effect for 5 seconds is set (Z6204), By setting BGM playback (Z6205), execution of a 5-second pseudo fluctuation effect is set. Then, the value of the pseudo fluctuation number counter 223rh is subtracted by 1 (Z6206), and this processing is ended.

By executing this winning process during suggestion performance (Z4381), it is possible to complete all unexecuted suggestion performances while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, so it is possible to execute the definite variable continuous suggestion performance more appropriately. .

<About the control process of the audio output device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 558, the control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. The twenty-fourth embodiment differs only in that a suspend command process 24 (Z20221) is executed instead of the suspend command process (see FIG. 540) in the twenty-third embodiment described above. The details of this interruption command processing 24 (Z20221) will be explained with reference to FIG. 558. Note that other control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing the interruption command processing 24 (Z20221). This suspension command processing 24 (Z20221) is a process executed in place of the suspension command processing (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment described above, and is similar to the suspension command processing (see FIG. 540) in the 23rd embodiment. Second, this is a process for performing control according to the interrupt command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the interrupt command processing 24 (see FIG. 558) in the 24th embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the interrupt command corresponds to the variable BGM (Z20601), and if the interrupt command corresponds to the variable BGM. If it is determined (Z20601), a variable BGM interruption process for setting the interruption and restart of the variable BGM is executed (Z20602), and this processing ends. This variation BGM interruption process (Z20602) is the same process as the interruption command process (see FIG. 540) in the twenty-third embodiment. Since the suspension command processing (see FIG. 540) has already been explained in the twenty-third embodiment, a detailed explanation of the variable BGM suspension processing (Z20602), which has the same content as the suspension command processing (see FIG. 540), will be omitted. do.

In addition, in the process of Z20601, if it is determined that the interrupt command does not correspond to the variable BGM (Z20601: No), the audio mode (sound for long press effect) that is played (output) during the long press effect is interrupted. Or, it means that it is an interruption command for restarting, so whether or not the current interruption command is a command indicating the start of interruption (is it a command based on the player interrupting the long press)? Determine. In the process of Z20603, if it is determined that it is a command indicating the start of interruption (Z20603: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the long-press production sound during playback is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (Z20604). , sets the interruption of the reproduction of the sound for long press effect (Z20605), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z20603, if it is determined that it is not an interruption command that indicates the start of interruption (that is, it is an interruption command that indicates the restart of the long-press production sound) (Z20603: No), then the playback position is Reads the data stored in the storage area 302b (Z20606), restarts the playback of the sound for long press effect from the playback position indicated by the read data at the playback speed notified by the interruption command (Z20607), This process ends.

By executing this interrupt command processing 24 (see FIG. 558), the sound for the long press effect can be accurately interrupted and restarted in synchronization with the timing at which the player interrupts and resumes the long press during the execution of the long press effect. Can be set to . Therefore, the long press effect can be executed more suitably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment is configured to be able to execute a long-press effect that prompts the player to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (operate a specific operation content). When this long-press effect is executed, the display is such that the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG increases in stages according to the duration of the long press. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode that affects the gauge number (the number of chance-up performances that are performed afterwards) depending on the player's operation content (the duration of the long press), so the player's interest increases. can be further improved. Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, while the player presses and holds the button for a long time, the audio mode is output in synchronization with the display of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG. In other words, each time the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG increases, a sound mode corresponding to the increased number of gauges is output. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the player interrupts the long press during the long press effect, the playback position of the audio is memorized, and when the player resumes the long press after that, the position is stored. The configuration is such that the audio is output from the playback position that has been set. With this configuration, the timing at which the gauge number increases and the timing at which the audio mode changes can be matched (synchronized) regardless of whether or not the long press is interrupted, so the production mode of the long press effect can be adjusted. can be set more suitably.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the long press is restarted in the long press effect, the long press effective period and the remaining gauge up to the upper limit number of gauges that can be increased in the current long press effect. The number is determined, and the update speed (playback speed) of the audio format and display format during subsequent long presses is varied according to the determination result. In other words, if the remaining long-press validity period is short, the configuration is controlled so that the gauge can be increased to the maximum number as much as possible within the validity period by setting 1.5x speed or 2x speed. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to end each long press effect with a larger number of gauges accumulated. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which more chance-up effects can be executed thereafter, and thus the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the present 24th embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, a series of story-like productions (probable variable continuation suggestion production) are executed over the 96th to 99th variable display period after the end of the jackpot. It is configured to do this. Further, during the execution period of the probability change continuation suggestion performance, the audio mode and the display mode are set for each variable display unit. In other words, instead of setting the display mode and audio mode over the variation time of 4 variations, the configuration is such that the display mode and audio mode are set to end at the variation time set at the start of the variation for each variation. . With this configuration, even if the number of reserved balls becomes 0 during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent the audio mode and the display mode from becoming out of sync after that. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably set the performance effect in the probability change continuation suggestion performance.

In addition, in the present 24th embodiment, when the number of reserved balls becomes 0 while the probability variation continuation suggestion production is being executed, the probability variation continuation suggestion production is interrupted (a demonstration display is displayed), but this is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, even when the number of reservations becomes 0, a variable display effect may be executed in a pseudo manner, and the display mode and audio mode for the suggestive effect may be set accordingly. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the probability change continuation suggestion performance to be difficult to interrupt, and therefore it is possible to realize a performance with a better tempo. Note that the pseudo variable display effect may be executed only when the result of the effect has already been determined. More specifically, only when the gaming state is in the time-saving state and it is certain that the state will change to the normal state after the 100th special symbol lottery is executed, a pseudo variable continuation suggestion performance is performed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a contradiction between the content of the performance and the actual behavior, and therefore it is possible to realize a more suitable performance mode.

<Modification of 24th embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 559. In the above-described twenty-fourth embodiment, the sound mode and display mode are set for each variable display unit in the probability change continuation suggestion performance. On the other hand, in this modified example, at the timing of setting a new performance, the performance modes (display mode and performance mode) up to the range that will be reliably executed continuously according to the status of the held balls are collectively set. The configuration is configured such that the settings are set as follows. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which continuous display modes and effect modes are set over a range of continuous execution. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted in units of variable display, so it is possible to realize a performance mode with a better tempo.

The correspondence between the audio mode and the display mode in this modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the display mode and the audio mode when the number of reservations becomes 0 at the time when the second suggestion performance in the probability-variable continuation suggestion performance is set in this modification. As shown in FIG. 559, in a situation where there is one reserved ball at the start of the first suggestion performance, the display mode and audio format for the variable display and the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball are changed. It is configured to be set all at once. That is, as shown in FIG. 559, the configuration is such that the execution of the suggestive effect 1 and the suggestive effect 2 is set, and the BGM for varying the playback time over the two variable displays is set. By configuring in this way, the story nature of the probability change continuation suggestion performance can be further emphasized, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration display is set, the audio mode is stopped, and the execution of the suggestion effect is resumed in response to a new starting prize, as in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment. Ru.

In this way, by setting the audio mode that covers the range of suggestion performances that are confirmed to be executed, it is possible to make the story quality of the probability change continuous suggestion production more prominent. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment and its modified example, the BGM played during the execution period of the variable continuation suggestion performance is configured to end in units of variable display, but this is not limited to this. do not have. For example, at the start of a certain-variable continuation suggestion performance, loop playback of a predetermined BGM is set (in other words, playback is started without determining the end timing), and it is determined that the number of reserved balls becomes 0 during execution of a certain-variable continuation suggestion production. In this case, a sharp playback position (for example, a playback position where the melody changes) is determined in a predetermined range before and after the end timing of the last variable display (for example, within 1 second before and after the end). Then, the display mode may be set so that the performance is interrupted at the well-discerned playback position, and the interruption of the BGM may also be set. With this configuration, there is no need to set BGM for each variable display, so it is possible to reduce the processing load during execution of the probability change continuation suggestion effect.

<25th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 560 to 579. In the above-described 23rd and 24th embodiments, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by the player is provided, and an operation on the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is determined to be valid within the valid operation period. By operating the operating means (PUSH button 10317) at the same time, it is possible to perform an operation performance that changes the performance mode of the performance being executed. More specifically, by operating the operating means (PUSH button 10317) multiple times within the operation validity period, it was configured to be able to execute a continuous operation performance (so-called continuous hit performance) that changes the performance mode in stages. .

This continuous hit performance is configured to suggest that the more variable the performance mode is, the more likely it is that a benefit that is advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot through a special symbol lottery) will be awarded. Each time the button 22 is pressed, a determination is made as to whether or not to vary the presentation mode, and if it is determined that the presentation mode is to be varied, the repeated press presentation is controlled so as to vary the presentation mode. there were.

However, in the continuous hit effects in each of the embodiments described above, if the player operates (presses) the PUSH button 10317 voluntarily, the number of times the effect mode can be varied quickly reaches the upper limit, and the remaining operations become effective. There was a problem in that no matter how many times the PUSH button 10317 was operated (pressed) within the period, the presentation mode would not change. In other words, in the continuous hit performance executed in each of the embodiments described above, although the performance mode cannot be varied up to the upper limit number of times unless the player presses the PUSH button 10317 multiple times, the player is motivated. When the PUSH button 10317 is operated, there is a problem in that a period in which the performance mode does not change continues, reducing the player's desire to operate the PUSH button 10317.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the range in which the performance mode can be varied (number of times of variation and variable value) is configured to be limited depending on the elapsed status of the valid operation period. With this configuration, even if the same operation is performed on the operating means within the operation validity period, the variable content of the presentation mode based on that operation can be changed according to the progress of the operation validity period. can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 during the operation validity period, in addition to the content of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 executed during the operation performance, and the operation performance to be executed. It is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the scenario is configured to manage the restriction contents for restricting the variable range of the production mode according to the elapsed status of the valid operation period, and the scenario type includes a plurality of scenarios with different contents. The configuration is such that one scenario type is selected from among the scenario types. Specifically, there are scenario types in which the variable range of the production mode can reach the upper limit only during the first operation validity period, which is the first half of the operation validity period, and the variation range of the production mode is limited during the first operation validity period. , the scenario type, etc., in which the variable range of the performance mode can reach the upper limit in the second operation validity period after the first operation validity period, etc., can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the degree of variation of the performance mode based on the number of operations of the operating means during the valid operation period and the operation timing, depending on the scenario type to be set. Variations can be easily diversified.

Therefore, compared to the conventional configuration in which it is determined whether or not to change the performance mode each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, it is possible to provide regularity to the variable pattern of the performance mode within the operation validity period. For example, by changing the type of scenario that is set depending on the determination result of whether or not a benefit will be given, at a stage before the number of times the performance mode can be varied reaches the upper limit, that is, The player can easily predict the performance result of the current operation performance according to the variable situation of the performance mode, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the amount of change in the performance mode that can be changed in accordance with one operation of the PUSH button 10317 is also limited. Specifically, the configuration is such that based on the operation of the PUSH button 10317, an operation performance that can change the performance mode in five stages is executed, and a single operation of the PUSH button 10317 can perform a maximum of three The amount of variation is limited so that the performance mode can only be varied by the number of stages. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to voluntarily operate the PUSH button 10317 multiple times during the continuous hit performance.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The second point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the 24th section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the production content in the 25th embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 560 to 562, the content of characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be explained. As described above, the twenty-fifth embodiment differs from the twenty-fourth embodiment in the content of the continuous hit performance (operation performance), and the contents of the continuous hit performance (operation performance) are different from those of the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, and the content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous hit performance is different from the twenty-fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the display mode is also changed depending on the repeated hit effect being executed. In addition, in explaining the performance contents of the twenty-fifth embodiment, detailed explanations of the same contents as those of the twenty-fourth embodiment described above will be omitted. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the display mode when the continuous hit effect is executed will be explained. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the performance period (repeat performance period) during which the repeated hit performance is performed includes a waiting period for notifying the player that the performance that causes the player to operate the operating means is to be performed, and a waiting period for notifying the player that the performance to operate the operating means An operation validity period is set during which the operation is determined to be valid, an execution period in which the display mode (presentation mode) is varied based on the operation result on the operation means, and an execution period based on the operation result on the operation means during the execution period. A result period and a result period for notifying the performance result of the continuous hit performance are divided, and the standby performance is performed during the standby period, the continuous hit period performance is performed during the execution period, and the result performance is performed during the result period.

FIG. 560(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a standby effect executed during a standby period of the continuous hit effect period in which the above-described continuous hit effect is executed. This standby performance is a performance that is performed before the operation validity period is set, and is a performance to notify the player in advance that the operation validity period will be set. With this configuration, it is easy to prevent situations in which the user does not notice that the operation validity period has been set and forgets to operate the operation means (frame button 22), or is unable to perform the desired operation. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 560(a), in this 25th control example, when the standby effect is executed, the next set during the valid operation period is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The operation means to be operated is the PUSH button 10317, and an image NG is displayed in a display mode indicating that the operation to be performed by the player during the operation validity period is a repeated press operation. More specifically, an image NG consisting of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 and the words "Continuously press" is displayed. Note that during standby performance, the operation validity period is not set and the performance mode will not change even if the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317). On the other hand, modes that prompt the user to operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) (for example, the words "Press" or an image of an arrow pointing from above in an image imitating the PUSH button 10317) should be displayed. There is no

In addition, on the left side of the image NG when viewed from the front, the character 801 is displayed in a state wearing the spirit (aura) of the initial state, and on the right side of the front view, the character 801 is displayed with the button 10317 pressed to the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the valid operation period. A spirit gauge KG is displayed in which the number of gauges is displayed in five levels to indicate the level of spirit accumulated based on the operation. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that by repeatedly pressing the PUSH button 10317, an effect to increase the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG will be executed soon.

Further, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, the words "Waiting for consecutive hits" are displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the current state is before the operation validity period is set. Further, in the display area 803, the words "2 seconds left until button press starts" are displayed.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the continuous hit effect is set as a variation effect pattern that is selected at the timing when the special symbol variation starts, and a standby effect is executed (a standby period is set). The timing, the timing at which the continuous hit period effect is executed (the execution period is set), and the timing at which the result effect is executed (the result period is set) are the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (the elapsed time of the variation effect). It is specified in a corresponding manner.

Therefore, based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (elapsed time of the variation effect), it is possible to determine how many seconds later the consecutive hit period effect will be executed, and the display mode based on the determination result is displayed in the display area 803. can be displayed. Therefore, the player who has grasped the performance contents of the standby performance can be easily made to understand not only that the consecutive hit period performance in which the operational validity period is set will be executed, but also the execution timing. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the remaining time of the standby period displayed in the display area 803 during the standby period (display of the remaining time until the continuous hit period effect is executed) is displayed in units of seconds. The display timing is configured to be updated, and the display timing indicating that there is no remaining time, that is, 0 seconds, is configured to be slightly earlier (0.5 seconds before) than the execution timing of the continuous hit period effect. ing.

With this configuration, when the operation (repeat operation) on the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is started when the remaining time displayed in the display area 803 reaches 0 seconds during standby performance, Immediately after the operation validity period is set, the player can be made to operate the PUSH button 10317. Note that the timing indicated by this remaining period display may be set based on the timing at which the continuous hit period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation effective period is set), for example, the timing at which the continuous hit period effect is executed (the The timing at which the effective period is set) may be configured to be shown as is, or the timing may be slightly delayed (for example, 0.5 seconds later). In addition, it is possible to indicate the end timing of the standby effect or the timing when the elapsed time from the execution timing of the standby effect reaches a predetermined time, without being based on the timing at which the continuous hit period effect is executed (the timing at which the operation effective period is set). It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the timing at which the consecutive hit period effect is executed is configured so that the player can predict it using the number of seconds; however, the timing at which the consecutive hit period effect is executed is not limited to this. For example, a balloon gradually inflates and when it bursts, it indicates that a continuous hit period effect will be executed, or a mode in which a predetermined moving object is in the first position. A mode may be used in which the moving object gradually approaches the second position, and when the moving object reaches the second position, a continuous hit period effect is executed. In other words, any system may be used as long as it allows the player to understand (predict) the timing at which the consecutive hit period performance will be executed according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the standby performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 560(b), the display mode during the continuous hit period effect in which the operation valid period is set will be described among the continuous hit effects. FIG. 560(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode during a continuous hit period effect. This consecutive hit period performance is a performance that is executed when the operation validity period is set, and includes a first performance to inform the player that the operation validity period has been set, and a first performance for notifying the player that the operation validity period has been set. A second effect in which the mode of effect is changed based on the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) by the player, and a second effect to indicate that the player has operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the valid operation period. 3 effects are executed at least.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner through the first effect that the operation validity period is set. Further, since the performance mode of the second performance can be varied according to the operation on the operating means, it is possible to have the player actively operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) multiple times. In addition, by executing the third performance, even if the performance mode of the second performance does not change when the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the valid operation period, the operation means is not changed. The player can easily understand that the operation has been effectively accepted.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is operated during the valid operation period, a predetermined variable lottery is executed, and if the variable lottery is won. It is configured such that a variable condition for varying the performance mode of the second performance is satisfied. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) multiple times during the valid operation period, a situation may occur in which the performance mode of the second performance is not changed.

In this way, the performance mode of the second performance does not necessarily change when the number of operations on the operating means reaches a certain number of times, but when winning the variable lottery that is executed based on the operation on the operating means. If the performance mode of the second performance is configured to be variable, at what timing will the second performance be variable for the player, and to what stage will the performance mode be variable in the current consecutive hit performance? It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the situation, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect. However, if the player does not win the variable lottery for a long time despite operating the operating means multiple times, the performance mode of the second performance will not be changed for a long time, so Due to the failure of the pachinko machine 10, it seems that the operation on the operating means is not being accepted effectively, and there is a problem in that the player's motivation to operate the operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the third effect to indicate that the player has operated the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation validity period is configured to be executable, so that the third effect can be executed for a long time. Even if a situation occurs in which the player does not win the variable lottery, the player can easily understand that the operation on the operation means has been effectively accepted, which reduces the player's desire to operate the operation means. can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 560(b), when the continuous hit period effect is executed, an image NG for prompting the user to repeatedly press the PUSH button 10317 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. . More specifically, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the text "Continuously press", and a plurality of arrow images for prompting the user to press the PUSH button 10317 multiple times are displayed. Then, in the display area 805, the words "Gather up your spirit by hitting repeatedly!!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that the current operation validity period is set. In other words, the display mode described above corresponds to the first performance executed during the continuous hit period performance.

Further, the display area 803 displays the remaining period of the execution period in which the continuous hit period effect is executed (the remaining period of the operation valid period). Thereby, the length of the execution period of the consecutive hit period performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the remaining time is displayed in seconds in order to make the player understand the remaining period of this consecutive hit period effect (the remaining period of the valid operation period). Other configurations may also be used, such as a mode that allows the player to understand that the end of the consecutive hit period effect (operation valid period) is approaching, such as a balloon that gradually inflates and when it bursts, the player can make multiple hits. A mode that indicates that the period effect ends, or indicates that the continuous hit period effect ends when the predetermined moving object gradually approaches the second position from the first position and the moving pair reaches the second position. You may use the aspect etc. In other words, it may be possible to make the player understand (predict) the timing at which the continuous play period effect will end according to the update status of the display mode displayed in the display area 803 during the continuous play period effect.

The twenty-fifth embodiment is configured such that 10 seconds is set as the presentation period (operation valid period) for the continuous hit period effect, and in the example shown in FIG. 560(b), the continuous hit period effect is executed. The display mode at the time when 3.5 seconds have passed (after the operation valid period is set), that is, the display mode at the time when the remaining time of the continuous hit period effect (operation valid period) is 6.5 seconds is displayed. By repeatedly pressing the PUSH button 10317 during the operation validity period (3.5 seconds) that has already elapsed, the spirit gauge KG increases to the second stage gauge number, and the spirit (aura) worn by the character 801 increases. ) is displayed in a manner corresponding to the gauge number (a manner larger than the initial state (see FIG. 560(a))). In other words, the display mode of the character 801 and the variable mode of varying the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG correspond to the second performance executed during the consecutive hit period performance.

Further, the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed in the NG image is configured to be displayed in a variable manner based on the player operating (pressing) the PUSH button 10317. Specifically, if the player has not pressed the PUSH button 10317, the initial display mode shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 560(b), it is configured to be displayed in a pressed display mode in which an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is recessed, rather than the initial display mode (see FIG. 560(a)). In other words, the variable mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed in the image NG corresponds to the third effect executed during the continuous hit period effect. Thereby, even if the period in which the performance mode of the second performance is not varied continues, the player can easily understand that the player's operation on the operating means is effectively accepted.

In addition, in the present 25th embodiment, when it is detected that the player has operated (pressed) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) in a state where the operation validity period is set, the PUSH displayed in the image NG Although the configuration is such that the pressed display mode is displayed as the display mode of the image imitating the button 10317, any configuration that can notify the player that the operation on the operation means is effectively determined is possible. , other configurations may be used; for example, the pressed display mode may continue for at least 0.5 seconds, and the initial display mode displayed after the pressed display mode may also continue for at least 0.5 seconds. The display may be controlled. In this case, the configuration may be such that it is not determined whether or not the variable condition is satisfied for 0.5 seconds after the variable condition of the display mode is satisfied. With this configuration, even if the operating means is operated multiple times in a short period of time, for example, even if the button is pressed at 0.1 second intervals, the display image displayed in the image NG will be changed to the initial image. Since the display mode and the pressed display mode are alternately and variably displayed at intervals that are visible to the player (0.5 second intervals), the player's operations on the operating means are effectively accepted. can be easily understood by the player.

Furthermore, as the third performance executed during the above-mentioned consecutive hit period performance, not only the display performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 but also the display performance that is output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 487) The player may be configured to be able to execute a voice effect that can notify by voice that the operation of the operation means by the player has been effectively accepted. In this case, the execution interval may be different between the display effect and the audio effect. For example, the display effect may be performed at the first interval (0.5 second interval) regardless of the operation interval of the actual operating means. The audio performance may be configured to be executed in accordance with the actual operation interval of the operation means.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the above-mentioned third performance, that is, the performance mode of the performance for notifying that the operation on the operation means by the player is effectively accepted, the remaining period of the operation validity period, Although the configuration is such that the same performance mode is set regardless of the performance mode (variable situation) of the second performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance mode (variable situation) of the second performance For example, the shorter the remaining period of the valid operation period, the easier it is for the player to understand the variable situation of the performance mode of the third performance. The presentation mode may be changed so that it is difficult to understand, or the presentation mode may be varied so that it becomes difficult to understand, and the closer the second presentation mode (variable situation) is to the upper limit, the third production effect The presentation mode may be varied so that the player can easily understand the variable situation, or the presentation mode may be varied so that it is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561, variable contents of the second performance during the continuous hit period performance will be explained. The twenty-fifth embodiment is configured to be able to control the degree of variation of the second performance during the continuous hit period performance. Specifically, the upper limit value that can be reached in the current continuous hit performance is determined in advance, and the internal value can be determined with the predetermined upper limit value as the upper limit depending on the progress of the operation validity period. are doing. When the variable conditions for the second performance are satisfied, the performance mode of the second performance is varied with the internal value at that time being the upper limit. With this configuration, immediately after the continuous hit period effect is executed, the variable condition of the second effect is satisfied multiple times, and the second effect reaches the upper limit while there is still much time left in the operation validity period. Variability can be suppressed.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, one scenario can be set from among a plurality of scenarios in which the internal value transition statuses are different, as a scenario indicating the degree of internal value transition described above. As a result, the degree of variation of the second performance during the consecutive hit period performance can be varied depending on the set scenario, so it is possible to perform a performance that the player will not get tired of.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario indicating the degree of internal value shift can be varied depending on the type of variation pattern in which the continuous hit performance is executed, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the performance. It's set. In other words, when a continuous hit effect is executed as part of a jackpot fluctuation effect where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and when a continuous hit effect is executed as part of a losing fluctuation effect when a winner is lost in a special symbol lottery. The configuration is such that it is easy to set different scenarios for and. With this configuration, the player is made to assume the set scenario type based on the variable situation of the second performance during the continuous hit performance, and based on the assumed result, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is determined. It becomes possible to make predictions. Therefore, it is possible to make players, especially players who want to quickly grasp the results of the special symbol lottery, interested in the performance contents of the continuous hit performance and to have them operate the operating means voluntarily, and to enjoy the game. can improve the interest of

FIG. 561(a) shows the display mode in a state in which the display mode of the second display (the display mode of the spirit gauge KG, the display mode for changing the display mode of the character 801) during the continuous hit period display has reached the internal value. This is a diagram. As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the scenario is managed so that the internal value shifts (increases) as the operation valid period that is set during the continuous hit period effect passes, and the internal value at that point is The display mode of the second effect is configured to be variable at the upper limit. Therefore, if the display mode of the second effect is variable to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, the effect mode of the second effect will remain unchanged for a period until the internal value is updated (increased) as time passes. This is a non-variable period (variable interruption period).

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 561(a), when the variable interruption period begins, the display mode becomes different from the normal execution period (period in which the continuous hit period effect is being executed), and , The current continuous hit period performance is configured to suggest that the performance mode of the second performance may be further varied, that is, the internal value is in a state where it can be shifted (updated). As a result, even if the display mode of the second effect is not changed for a predetermined period (period until the internal value is updated), the player is motivated to change the display mode of the second effect. The user can operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317).

Here, the display mode during the variable interruption period will be described with reference to FIG. 561(a). The display mode during the variable interruption period is different from the display mode during the normal execution period (see FIG. 560(b)) in that the display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 are different. . The other display modes are the same, and detailed explanations of the same display modes will be omitted.

More specifically, in the case of image NG, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in a size that is slightly reduced compared to the display mode during the normal execution period (see FIG. 560(b)). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when a command to indicate that the current variable interruption period is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the PUSH button 10317 is pressed on the display control device 114. The control for displaying the simulated image is configured to execute control to reduce the scale smaller than normal (for example, the scale is 100% during normal times, and 90% during variable interruption). ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a display that is different from the display mode during the normal execution period without using dedicated image data to indicate that the variable interruption period is in progress. The amount of image data can be reduced. In addition, since the display mode of the image NG is varied by changing the scale of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the display mode during the variable interruption period and the display mode during the normal execution period are relatively It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing the game to the extent that it is possible to distinguish between the two players to recognize that the current period is a variable interruption period based on the display mode of the image NG than for other players. It is possible to provide added value to players who have been playing for a long time.

In addition, in the display area 805, the words "Keep hitting again and again!!" are displayed. With this configuration, even if the display mode of the second performance is not changed for a predetermined period (period until the internal value is updated), the performance mode of the second performance can be changed for the player. The user can voluntarily operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) to do so.

The display mode of the image NG and the display mode of the display area 805 described above with reference to FIG. 561(a) cannot change the display mode of the second effect at the present time, This corresponds to a suggestion mode for suggesting to the player that the internal value will be updated during the remaining period, in other words, it will be possible to change the performance mode of the second performance after a while.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is determined whether the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous hit period effect being executed (smaller or not), and when it is determined that the current internal value is not the same (smaller). , it is configured to determine that it is a variable interruption period and display the suggestion mode shown in FIG. 561(a). The above-mentioned suggestion mode may also be displayed in some cases where it is determined that the information is the same as the above. As a result, even when the performance mode of the second performance is varied up to the display mode corresponding to the upper limit value, the player is motivated while making the player expect that the performance mode of the second performance will be further variable. The operating means (PUSH button 10317) can be operated. In this case, if the current internal value is not the same as the upper limit set for the continuous hit period effect that is being executed, it is better to It is preferable to configure the above-mentioned suggestion mode to be displayed more easily than in other cases. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a significant drop in the level of expectation when the suggestion mode is displayed, that is, the level of expectation that the mode of production of the second production will be changed in the future.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, in the present 25th embodiment, the current internal value is determined to be the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous hit period effect that is being executed, and the second effect is When the display mode has been changed to the display mode corresponding to the internal value, it is possible to perform an upper limit suggestion performance to suggest to the player that the performance mode of the second performance will not be changed any further during the current consecutive hit period performance. It is composed of In this upper limit suggestion effect, the words "Maybe you can't build up your spirit any more!?" are displayed in the display area 805, and the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the display mode of the image NG, even more so than the display mode during the variable interruption period. A display mode in which the simulated image is reduced (for example, to a 50% scale) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the PUSH button 10317 needlessly.

Note that the above-mentioned upper limit suggestion performance may be configured to be executable even in a part of the case where it is determined that the current internal value is different from the upper limit value set in the ongoing continuous hit period performance. With this configuration, even when the upper limit suggestion performance is executed, it is possible to leave the possibility that the performance mode of the second performance may be changed based on the operation on the operation means, so that the player can It is possible to perform a surprising performance on the other hand. In this case, if the current internal value is the same as the upper limit value set for the continuous hit period effect that is being executed, it is better to It is preferable to configure the above-mentioned upper limit suggestion effect to be executed more easily than when there is no such effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the reliability when the upper limit suggestion performance is executed, that is, the reliability that the performance mode of the second performance will not be changed from now on, from dropping significantly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561(b), a description will be given of the display contents that are displayed when the player does not operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the continuous hit period performance. FIG. 561(b) schematically shows the display mode when the player has not operated the operating means (PUSH button 10317) even once in a state where 4 seconds have passed since the continuous hit period effect was executed. It is a diagram.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a scenario is set to shift (update) the internal value according to the elapsed time after the operation validity period is set during the continuous hit performance, and the second performance is performed. When the variable condition for changing the mode is satisfied, at that point, the production mode of the second production can be varied within a range with the internal value determined according to the contents of the set scenario as the upper limit. It was composed. In other words, once the operation validity period is set, the internal value is configured to be migrated (updated) regardless of the actual operation status of the operation means.

Then, when the difference between the actually displayed display value (the degree of variation indicated by the production mode of the second production) and the internal value becomes a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment) or more, the continuous hit period production is It is configured to display a specific display mode (press promotion mode) as a presentation mode (display mode). With this configuration, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the production mode (display value) of the second production is in a state where it is easy to change. The user can be made to operate the PUSH button 10317 voluntarily.

Further, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the scenario type set during the operation validity period is configured to be different depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the continuous hit effect is a jackpot or a loss. There is. Therefore, when the continuous press period effect is executed, the type of scenario set for the current continuous press period effect is determined based on the timing at which the above-mentioned press promotion mode is displayed without intentionally operating the PUSH button 10317. It is also possible to provide an innovative game feature in which the result of the special symbol lottery is predicted based on the determination result.

To explain the details of the press promotion mode in detail with reference to FIG. The difference is that the characters ``Do it!'' are displayed, and the characters ``Continuously hit!!'' are displayed on the NG image, but other than that, they are the same. In this way, by setting the press promotion mode to have some differences from the display mode during the normal continuous hit period effect (see FIG. 560(b)), it is possible to play the game for a long time. It is possible to provide added value to the players who are present.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 561(b), since the PUSH button 10317 has not been pressed even once since the operation period effect was executed, the effect mode of the second effect (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) ) is the initial state (0th stage), and the display mode of the character 801 is also displayed in the initial state (the same aura as the initial state).

Next, the contents of the result effect executed after the continuous hit period effect ends will be explained with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode of a result effect in a continuous hit effect. This result performance is a performance that displays the performance result according to the spirit (variable situation of the second performance) acquired during the consecutive hit period performance, and depending on the content of this performance, the player is given a special symbol lottery. This is indicative of the results.

As shown in FIG. 562, when the result effect is executed, the character 801 attacks the target icon 806 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the effect is displayed from the destroyed target icon 806 to show the effect result. An effect in which display 806 is displayed is executed. The example shown in FIG. 562 shows an example in which the result effect is executed when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG has increased to the fourth stage, and on the right side of the display screen, the result effect is displayed during the consecutive hit period effect. The spirit gauge KG that had been displayed continues to be displayed, and the character 801 is also displayed in a display mode (fourth stage aura) corresponding to the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG. The result display 806 displays the words "Great Chance". Further, in the display area 803, the words ``Attack with accumulated energy'' are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the presentation mode of the result presentation.

The above-mentioned display content allows the player to easily understand that the result performance will be executed in a performance manner according to the spirit (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous play period performance. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value set during the consecutive hit period performance is higher for the continuous hit performance corresponding to a special symbol variation that has won a jackpot than for the continuous hit performance that corresponds to a special symbol variation that has not won a jackpot. It is configured so that the variable amount tends to increase (the variable amount tends to increase). In the result performance, the performance mode (the attack pattern of the character 801, the display contents of the result display 806a) is determined not based on the lottery result of the special symbol, but according to the spirit (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) accumulated during the continuous hit period performance. It is configured to make a decision.

With this configuration, the player is motivated to increase the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG during the consecutive hit period performance (in order to make the performance mode of the second performance more variable). The PUSH button 10317 can be made easier to operate, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Note that in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the result presentation is configured to be determined according to the presentation contents of the continuous hit period presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the presentation mode of the result presentation is determined depending on the presentation content of the continuous hit period presentation and the correspondence. The result of the special symbol lottery to be performed may be determined in combination to determine the performance mode of the result performance, or the content of the performance during the continuous hit period performance (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) and the performance during the continuous hit period may be set. The performance mode of the result performance may be determined based on the difference value between the upper limit value and the upper limit value.

In this case, for example, if the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG reaches the 4th stage during the continuous hit period production, it is determined whether the upper limit value is 4 or 5, and if the upper limit value is 4, It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 has been actively operated during the continuous hit period performance, and a performance result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a display of "big chance") is displayed, and if the upper limit is 5, the continuous hit is performed. It is determined that the PUSH button 10317 is not actively operated during the period performance, and the result is a performance that is more disadvantageous to the player than if the upper limit is 4 (for example, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than the "big chance") It may be configured to display the word "chance" (letters "chance") to indicate that the value is low. This allows the player to voluntarily operate the PUSH button 10317 in order to further increase the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG during the consecutive hit period performance (to make the performance mode of the second performance more variable). can be made easier.

Further, a part of the presentation mode of the result presentation (for example, the display mode of the target icon 806) may be varied depending on the number of operations on the operating means during the continuous hit period presentation. In this way, by configuring the performance mode of the result performance to be variable depending on the number of operations on the operating means, regardless of the degree of increase in the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG, the player can enjoy the pure pleasure of operating the operating means. can be provided to In addition, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the result performance is determined according to the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG accumulated during the continuous hit period performance, but the performance of the result performance is determined based on other factors. For example, the presentation mode of the result presentation may be determined based on the timing at which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases or the type of scenario that has been set. With this configuration, even if the number of Kiai Gauges KG accumulated during the consecutive hit period performance is the same, the performance mode of the result performance can be made different, so the performance content of the result performance can be changed. This can make it easier for players to become interested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 563, the flow of the continuous hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 563 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between special symbol fluctuations (special symbol fluctuations) and continuous hit effects. As shown in FIG. 563, in this embodiment, when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is executed, a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined period is executed, and a predetermined After the period of special symbol variation ends, the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be stopped and displayed. By configuring the result of the special symbol lottery to be displayed after the period in which the special symbol variation is executed in this way, it is possible to suppress a large number of special symbol lottery results from being executed in a short period of time.

In addition, in order to prevent players from getting bored with the game while the special figure fluctuations are being executed, the system is configured so that a fluctuating performance that corresponds to the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuations is executed. Based on the performance mode of the variable performance, the player is configured to be able to predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery before the result of the special symbol lottery is actually stopped and displayed. . By configuring the fluctuating performance to be executable in this way, it is possible to keep the player's attention on the performance mode of the fluctuating performance during the special figure fluctuation period, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the period during which the special symbol variation is executed is from 2 seconds to 150 seconds, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery and the set gaming state. It is configured such that a variation period is selected, and FIG. 563 shows an example where a variation time of 60 seconds is set as the special figure variation (see FIG. 563(a)). When the special figure variation time of 60 seconds is set, a variation effect of 60 seconds, which is the same length as the special figure variation time, is executed (see FIG. 563(b)). Note that the contents of various control processes from the execution of the special symbol lottery until the execution of the variable performance are the same as in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, a brief explanation will be given of the flow of determining the performance mode of the variable performance. When a special symbol lottery (discrimination by the discriminator) is executed in the main control device 110, special symbol fluctuations (dynamic display of identification symbols to indicate the determination result of the discriminator) are performed to indicate the results of the special symbol lottery. ) fluctuation pattern (dynamic display period) is selected. Then, a variation pattern command containing at least information for indicating the selected variation pattern (dynamic display period) and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (discrimination result of the discrimination means) is sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control. It is output to the device 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, based on receiving the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is used as a variation production pattern of the third symbol (identification information) to be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81. A variable performance pattern for a period corresponding to the dynamic display period included in is determined, and the variable performance is executed. In other words, the production mode of the various variation productions executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the special symbol variation is started. The variable performance is executed at the timing.

Then, based on the elapsed time of the special symbol variation (variable performance), the variable performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the predetermined performance mode of the variable performance. Further, during execution of the variable performance, if a variable condition for the performance mode (for example, an operation on the operating means by the player or a winning information command is received from the main control device 110) is satisfied, a process for changing the performance mode is performed. is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 563 shows the flow when a variable effect pattern is determined in which a continuous hit effect for 20 seconds is executed from the elapse of 10 seconds as a 60 second variable effect. In this continuous hit effect, the effects of each display mode described above with reference to FIG. 560 to FIG. This is a performance that can be varied.

The 20-second performance period during which this continuous hit performance is executed includes a standby period (5 seconds) during which the continuous hit performance (see Figure 560(a)) is executed, a continuous hit period performance (see Figures 560(b) to 561(b)) ) is executed (10 seconds), and a standby period (5 seconds) during which a standby effect (see Fig. 562) is executed.During the continuous hit period effect, the player operates the operation means. The configuration is such that an operation valid period (10 seconds) is set during which the operation is determined to be valid.

Next, a flow of determining the performance mode of each performance executed in the continuous hit performance will be explained. First, at the timing of determining the entire variable effect pattern, that is, at the start timing of the variable effect, the execution timing of the continuous hit effect and the effect period are determined. Furthermore, the performance mode of the standby performance (see FIG. 560(a)) and the performance mode during execution of the consecutive hit period performance are also determined. In other words, the above-mentioned performance mode becomes a performance mode that is predetermined before the continuous hit performance is executed.

Then, when the PUSH button 10317 is operated during the continuous hit period performance (during the valid operation period) and the variable condition of the performance mode is satisfied, the performance mode after the variable is determined as the performance mode of the continuous hit period performance. The effect mode is displayed (see FIG. 560(b) and FIG. 561(a)). Also, if the variable condition for the performance mode is satisfied based on the elapsed time of the continuous hit period performance, the performance mode after the variable is determined as the performance mode for the continuous hit period performance, and the determined performance mode is displayed (Fig. 561 (see (b)). In other words, the above-mentioned performance mode is a performance mode determined according to the variable conditions established during the consecutive hit period performance.

Finally, the flow of determining the performance mode of the standby performance will be explained. The performance mode of the standby performance is configured to be determined when the execution period ends and a standby period is set. Specifically, a performance mode is determined according to the performance mode (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) at the end of the execution period, and a performance according to the determined performance mode is executed for a certain period of time (5 seconds). . In other words, the performance mode of the standby performance is a performance mode that is determined at a predetermined timing in the continuous hit performance, and depends on the performance content (the performance content of the continuous hit period performance) of the continuous hit performance until the standby performance is executed. This is a performance mode in which different contents are determined depending on the situation.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 563, the period during which the continuous hit effect is executed is composed of three periods: a waiting period, an execution period, and a result period, but the period is not limited to this. It may be composed of two or more periods. In this case, for example, the standby period and the execution period may be set repeatedly, and the effective operation period may be set a plurality of times in one continuous hit performance. In addition, it is possible to set an interval period in which a predetermined performance mode is set before the continuous hit performance is executed as part of the period that constitutes the continuous hit performance, for example, between the execution period and the result period. It may be configured. By providing the interval period in this way, for example, as a result presentation, not only a display presentation using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 but also a movable accessory presentation using the decorative accessories possessed by the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. In the case of execution, the preparation process for the result performance can be executed during the interval period, and the result performance can be executed smoothly.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance mode of the result performance is determined at the timing when the execution period ends. Therefore, for example, when the execution period length (operation effective period Even if the process of shortening or extending the length of the resultant effect is executed, the effect mode of the result effect can be appropriately set.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 563, in this embodiment, the length of the execution period and the valid operation period are configured to be the same, but it is sufficient if the valid period of operation is included in the execution period. For example, the operation validity period may be configured to be set 0.2 seconds after the execution period is set, or the operation validity period may be configured to end before the execution period ends. You may do so. Further, the operation validity period may be set multiple times during the execution period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564 to 566, the operation contents of the operating means during the continuous hit period performance in the present 25th embodiment and the variable situation of the performance mode of the second performance (variable number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) Explain the relationship between

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the operation validity period is set during the continuous hit period presentation, and if the player operates the PUSH button 10317 during the operation validity period, the operation is determined to be valid. , a variable lottery will be held to determine whether or not to vary the performance mode of the second performance (display value indicating the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG), and if a winner is won in the variable lottery, a display value indicating the number of gauges in the spirit gauge KG. It is configured to raise the

Further, the upper limit value in the continuous hit period performance is set based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the display value is configured not to rise to a value larger than the upper limit value during the continuous hit period performance. In addition, the internal value that can be updated (increased) is configured to be able to be determined as the maximum value becomes the upper limit as the operation validity period elapses, and when the display value variable conditions are met, the internal value at that point The display value is updated (increased) with the internal value at the upper limit.

The twenty-fifth embodiment is configured to manage the transition status (transition status) of internal values that are updated (increased) during the operation validity period using a scenario, and multiple By setting one scenario type among the scenario types, the internal value is updated in accordance with the elapse of the operational validity period according to the set scenario type.

Here, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the present twenty-fifth embodiment, as the types of scenarios for updating the internal value, there is an equal type "scenario 1" in which the internal value increases in proportion to the passage of time; The second half type "Scenario 2" in which the internal value is more likely to increase in the second half period (6 to 10 seconds) of the operation effective period (10 seconds) than the first half period (1 to 5 seconds), and the second half of the operation effective period (10 seconds) ), the internal value rises more easily in the first half period (1 to 5 seconds) than in the second half period (6 to 10 seconds), and the internal value rises regardless of the passage of time. A random descending "scenario 4" can be set. In this way, by configuring one scenario to be set from among multiple scenario types (scenarios 1 to 4) that have different tendencies to migrate (update) internal values, the display value during the continuous hit period effect can be changed. It is possible to have various variations in the degree of increase (variable degree) of (the performance mode of the second performance), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, internal value transition data (transition line) is created based on the determined scenario type, the upper limit of the display value, and the length of the valid operation period. It is configured to migrate (update) internal values based on migration data. Therefore, even when setting different lengths of operation validity periods or determining various upper limit values based on the results of special symbol drawings, transition data corresponding to each pattern must be prepared in advance. The amount of data used to execute the performance can be reduced compared to the case where the performance is performed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the configuration is such that internal value migration data is created every time the operation validity period is set, additional conditions can be easily set for the internal value migration content (update content). For example, additional conditions can be added to make the start timing for migrating (updating) internal values different from the timing for setting the operation validity period, additional conditions can be added to change the scenario type in the middle of the process, ), even if an additional condition such as suspending the process for a predetermined period is provided, it is possible to easily create internal value migration data that includes the additional condition.

FIG. 564 is a diagram schematically showing a performance pattern during a continuous hit period performance when "scenario 1" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit. As shown in FIG. 564, during the continuous hit period effect (10 seconds) as the continuous hit effect (see FIG. 564(a)), the operation valid period is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 564(b)). Then, at the same time as the operation validity period is set, internal migration data is set, and migration (update) of internal values is started (see FIG. 564(c)).

FIG. 564(d) is a diagram showing the pressing status of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) by the player. When the player presses the PUSH button 10317, it turns on, and when the PUSH button 10317 is released, it turns off. becomes. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is determined that the player has performed an operation on the operating means at the timing when the player releases the PUSH button 10317 (the timing when it transitions from ON to OFF), and the determination timing is If the operation is within the valid period, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the display value.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 564(d), even if the player operates the operation means in a situation where the operation validity period is not set, for example, during the standby period (5 seconds) during which the standby effect is being executed, (First operation timing in FIG. 564(d)), the operation is not determined to be valid, and no lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the display value.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, at the timing of setting the production pattern of the variation production, that is, at the timing when the corresponding special symbol variation is executed, the length of the operation valid period used for the current consecutive hit production and the upper limit of the display value are determined. and a scenario type indicating the internal value migration status, and a process of creating internal value migration data based on the determined various contents is executed.

In the example shown in Figure 564, the scenario type "Scenario 1" in which the internal value increases evenly over time is set, the upper limit is set to "4", and the operation validity period is set to "10 seconds". Based on these settings, internal value transition data that increases the internal value to "4" within 9 seconds from the start is created. As a result, the internal value will rise evenly from immediately after the operation validity period is set, and the internal value will reach "1" after 2.25 seconds, and the internal value will rise to "2" after 4.5 seconds. ”, the internal value reaches “3” when 6.75 seconds have elapsed, and the internal value is updated to reach “4” when 9 seconds have elapsed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the internal value migration data is created so that the internal value reaches the upper limit value with at least a predetermined period (1 second) remaining in the operation validity period. . With this configuration, the operation validity period after the internal value reaches the upper limit is short, and the displayed value is increased to the upper limit for a player who is actively operating the operation means. It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring where it is impossible to do so.

The length of the remaining period from the time when this internal value is raised to the upper limit until the operation validity period ends may be determined by using a predetermined fixed value (for example, 1 second) or by using a set scenario. A value that corresponds to the type, a randomly set value, or a value that corresponds to the length of the valid operation period may be used. If the configuration is such that one length is selected from multiple lengths as the length of the remaining period, one of the additional conditions when creating internal value migration data is the length of the remaining period. All you have to do is configure it to set the .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 564(c) to 564(e), a description will be given of the relationship between the internal value during the continuous hit period effect, the operation status of the PUSH button 10317, and the variable status of the display value. Since the internal value does not reach "1" until 2.25 seconds have passed after the operation validity period is set (after the continuous press period effect is executed), the second and third button operations The displayed value does not change. Then, the fourth button operation performed after 2.25 seconds has passed, that is, the button operation in a state where the internal value has reached "1" (a state in which the displayed value can be varied), changes the displayed value. The displayed value does not change in this fourth button operation because the winner was defeated (indicated by a cross in the diagram) in the variable lottery for determining whether or not the winner was selected.

Next, the fifth button operation is performed after 2.25 seconds have passed and before 4.5 seconds have elapsed, that is, at a timing when the internal value is "1", and a winner is won in the variable lottery ( In the figure, the displayed value is changed from "0" to "1". Here, when the display value is changed from "0" to "1", the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG shown in FIG. ) to a state where the gauge number is 1 (a state where only the bottom frame of the spirit gauge KG is displayed in white), and the display mode of the character 801 is changed to the initial state (shown in FIG. 560(a)). The aura mode is displayed variably from the aura mode (aspect of the aura) to an aura mode that is one step larger.

Here, by the fifth button operation, the internal value "1" and the displayed value "1" became the same value, so even if the button operation is performed, until the internal value is updated (increased), Since this is a period in which the displayed value cannot increase, the display mode shown in FIG. 561(a) is displayed. When the sixth button operation is performed, the internal value remains "1", so it is assumed that the button operation was performed while the display mode shown in FIG. 561(a) is being displayed. Therefore, the displayed value will not be changed. Also, for the 7th button operation, the internal value is set to a larger value than the displayed value, similar to the 4th button operation described above, but because the variable lottery was won and the displayed value is higher than the displayed value. It cannot be changed.

Next, the eighth button operation, like the fifth button operation, results in a win in the variable lottery, and the displayed value changes from "1" to "2". Thereafter, based on the transition of the internal value over time, the button operation timing, and the lottery result of the variable lottery, the displayed value changes from "2" to "3" by the 10th button operation, and the 11th time changes the displayed value from "2" to "3". The displayed value changes from "3" to "4" by operating the button.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the internal value is updated (increased) based on the internal transfer data, and the degree of variation (increase) of the displayed value within the operation valid period is limited by the internal value. Because of this configuration, it is possible to easily change the display value over the entire operation effective period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display value from reaching the upper limit value during the first half of the valid operation period, causing the player to perform unnecessary operations during the remaining period of the valid operation period, and reducing the player's desire to play. can do. In addition, in order to prevent the displayed value from reaching the upper limit only during the first half of the valid operation period, the variable condition that changes the displayed value is difficult to satisfy for operations on the operating means during the valid operation period. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display value does not reach the upper limit value during the valid operation period.

Next, referring to FIG. 565, description will be given of the performance contents when the button operations by the player are different from the example shown in FIG. 564 under the same conditions as the example shown in FIG. 564 described above. do. FIG. 565 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the flow of the performance when the player does not operate the operating means voluntarily during the continuous hit performance. Fig. 565 differs from Fig. 564 described above in that the content of button operations (see Fig. 565(d)) and the variable status of display values (see Fig. 565(e)) are different, but otherwise the same. It is. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 565(d), if the player does not perform a button operation until 6.75 seconds have passed after the continuous hit period effect is executed, the displayed value remains "0" and the internal The value will change to "3". In this case, since the difference between the display value and the internal value is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (3 or more), the display mode of the push promotion mode shown in FIG. 561(b) is displayed. In this way, by displaying the display mode of the push promotion mode, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the display value can easily be changed (increased) by pressing the PUSH button 10317. can.

Then, in the second button operation (button operation performed between 6.75 seconds and 9 seconds after the operation validity period was set), the player wins the variable lottery and the displayed value changes from "0" to "2". It changes to. Here, in this embodiment, the display value is configured so that the upper limit is two levels as the amount of change in the display value that can be changed with one button operation. Therefore, when the display value is changed based on the second button operation when the internal value is "3", the display value is only changed from "0" to "2", which is two steps higher. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to voluntarily operate the PUSH button 10317 multiple times during the continuous hit period performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable condition for changing the displayed value is satisfied (when a winning is won in the variable lottery), and there is a difference of multiple levels between the displayed value and the internal value, the above-mentioned Although the display value is configured to be varied up to the upper limit of the variable amount, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable amount of the display value to be varied by one button operation may be determined by lottery. . With this configuration, even if there is a difference of multiple levels between the displayed value and the internal value, it is possible to change the display mode by one level with a single button operation. It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience many events in which the displayed value changes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 566, a description will be given of a performance pattern during the continuous hit period performance when the scenario type "scenario 2" in which the internal value shift tendency is the latter half type is set. FIG. 566 is a diagram schematically showing a performance pattern during a continuous hit period performance when "scenario 2" is set as the scenario type and "4" is set as the upper limit. Note that, among the contents shown in FIG. 566, detailed explanations of the same parts as those described above with reference to FIG. 564 will be omitted.

When the scenario type "Scenario 2" is set, internal value transition data is created in which the internal value rises more rapidly in the second half of the period than when the scenario type "Scenario 1" is set (see Figure 564). Ru. Note that the present embodiment is configured such that the period until the internal value shifts to 1 is 2.25 seconds regardless of the set scenario type. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the scenario type set this time immediately after the consecutive hit period effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 566, when the degree of transition of the internal value indicated by the scenario internal value transition data increases exponentially, specifically, while the player operates the operating means multiple times, While winning the variable lottery executed based on the operation on the means, the internal value may increase by a plurality of values. In this embodiment, when winning the variable lottery, an upper limit is set on the display value that can be increased once. FIG. 566 shows an example in which "2" is set as the upper limit for increasing the display value. In other words, even if there is a discrepancy between the displayed value and the internal value, the display value is configured such that the displayed value can only be increased by two steps at most with one variable display. Therefore, if you win the variable lottery with the 11th button operation (PUSH button 10317 operation), the internal value at that time has increased to "4", but the displayed value is "1". , the displayed value becomes "3".

With this configuration, if the player does not operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317) multiple times during the consecutive hit period, it becomes difficult to increase the display value to the upper limit, so the player , it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 567 to 571, the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment described above in part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113. They differ in that they are different, but are otherwise the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be explained with reference to FIG. 567. FIG. 567 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 567, in the present twenty-fifth embodiment, the ROM 222 of the twenty-third embodiment described above (see FIG. 495(a)) includes an internal scenario table 222sa, a push lottery table 222sb, and an upper limit selection table. 222sc and a difference upper limit value selection table 222sd are added, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

The internal scenario table 222sa is a data table that is referred to when selecting the internal value transition tendency during the continuous hit period performance, and is configured to allow selection of a plurality of scenario types with different internal value transition trends. There is. This internal scenario table 222sa is set in the basic performance mode selection process 25 (see Z4581 in FIG. 579) that is executed in the production mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) that is executed to set the variable effect. When it is determined that the variation pattern includes a continuous hit effect (Z6701: Yes in FIG. 579), it is referred to to set the effect mode of the continuous hit effect (see Z6702 in FIG. 579). Then, using the scenario type selected with reference to the internal scenario table 222sa, internal transfer data indicating the transfer status of the internal value during the operation valid period set during the current continuous hit performance is created.

Here, the contents defined in the internal scenario table 222sa will be explained with reference to FIG. 568(a). FIG. 568(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the internal scenario table 222sa. As shown in FIG. 568(a), the internal scenario table 222sa has four scenario types (scenario 1 to scenario 4), the results of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current variation pattern, and the acquired scenario performance counter. It is defined in association with the value of H.223sa.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, "scenario 1" is set in the range of "0 to 39" and "scenario 1" is set in the range of "40 to 69", and "scenario 1" is set in the range of "40 to 69". "2" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", "scenario 3" is defined in the range of "90 to 98", and "scenario 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure, "scenario 1" is in the range of "0 to 59" and "scenario 2" is in the range of "60 to 79" of the scenario production counter 223sa. , "Scenario 3" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and "Scenario 4" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Here, the contents of each scenario type defined in the internal scenario table 222sa will be explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 564, "Scenario 1" shows a transition tendency in which the internal value increases (varies) evenly as the operation validity period passes. That is, when this "scenario 1" is selected, a continuous hit period effect that can evenly increase (variable) the display value over the entire range of the valid operation period will be executed. Therefore, the displayed value reaches the upper limit during the first half of the valid operation period, and even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated multiple times, the displayed value does not increase (variable) for a long time. , it is possible to suppress the player's desire to operate the operating means from decreasing.

Next, "Scenario 2", as described above with reference to FIG. 566, shows a transition tendency in which the internal value increases (varies) more easily in the latter half of the operation effective period than in the first half. That is, when this "scenario 2" is selected, a continuous hit period effect is executed in which the display value is more easily increased (variable) in the latter half of the effective operation period than in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to operate the operating means while maintaining a sense of expectation until the end of the valid operation period. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the scenario type is selected to determine the transition tendency of the internal value, so as described above with reference to FIG. is configured to follow the same process as "Scenario 1", and the update status of internal values thereafter is configured to follow the trend of "Scenario 2". Therefore, even if "scenario 2" is selected, it is possible to prevent the display value from remaining unchanged for a long period of time during the first half of the valid operation period.

In addition, by configuring the process until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") to be the same as for other scenario types, it is possible to immediately It is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for the current consecutive hit period performance from being identified immediately after execution).

"Scenario 3" shows the opposite trend to the above-mentioned "Scenario 2", and shows a transitional tendency in which the internal value increases (varies) more easily in the first half of the operation effective period than in the second half. . That is, when this "scenario 3" is selected, a continuous hit period effect is executed in which the display value is more easily increased (variable) in the first half of the effective operation period than in the second half. Therefore, the display value tends to increase immediately after the consecutive hit period effect is executed, and the upper limit value set in the current consecutive hit period effect may be set to a large value (for example, "5"). You can make it easier for people to think.

In addition, when creating internal migration data based on this "Scenario 3", the structure is configured so that the same process as "Scenario 1" is followed until the internal value reaches "1", and then the internal migration data is It may be configured such that the value update status is created in accordance with the tendency of "scenario 3". With this configuration, the progress until the internal value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "1") is the same as for other scenario types, and immediately after the operation validity period is set (the continuous hit period effect is executed) It is possible to prevent the scenario type adopted for the current consecutive hit period performance from being identified immediately after the current consecutive hit period performance.

Finally, unlike the other scenarios, "scenario 4" shows a transitional tendency in which the internal value repeats increases and decreases as the operation validity period passes. In other words, while "Scenario 1" to "Scenario 3" described above show only a tendency for the internal value to increase as the operation validity period passes, "Scenario 4" shows that the internal value increases as the operation validity period passes. The major difference is that the internal value may decrease over time.

In other words, when this "scenario 4" is selected, from the first timing (for example, 3 seconds elapsed) of the operation validity period, the second timing (for example, 3.5 seconds) after the first timing (for example, 3.5 seconds has elapsed) The internal value will be smaller at the elapsed time point). Therefore, since the degree of increase in the displayed value can be greatly varied depending on the timing of operating the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous hit period performance, it is difficult for the player to predict the upper limit value that will be set in the current continuous hit period performance. I can do it.

Note that when the above-mentioned "scenario 4" is selected, a situation may occur in which the internal value is smaller (lower) than the displayed value. That is, in a state where the internal value is changing to "3", the condition for changing the display value (winning of variable lottery) is satisfied, and after the display value is changed to "3", the internal value changes to "2". ” may change. In this case, the continuous hit period effect may be executed in a special manner that suggests that the internal value is smaller than the displayed value. This allows the player to predict that internal transfer data based on "scenario 4" will be set in the current continuous play period performance. Further, even if the internal value is smaller than the displayed value, the display may be configured in the same manner as when the displayed value and the internal value are the same (see FIG. 561(a)). Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that internal migration data based on "scenario 4" will be set in the current continuous play period performance.

As shown in FIG. 568(a), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the selection ratio of each scenario type is changed depending on the result of the special symbol lottery (jackpot, miss) corresponding to the fluctuating effect in which the continuous hit effect is executed. If you win the jackpot, the selection rate for "Scenario 1" is about 40%, the selection percentage for "Scenario 2" is about 30%, the selection percentage for "Scenario 3" is about 20%, and the selection percentage for "Scenario 3" is about 20%. 4" selection ratio is set to be approximately 10%, and if the jackpot is not won (or if the jackpot is won), the selection ratio of "Scenario 1" is approximately 60%, and the selection ratio of "Scenario 2" is set to be approximately 10%. The ratio is set to be approximately 20%, the selection ratio of "Scenario 3" to be approximately 10%, and the selection ratio of "Scenario 4" to be approximately 10%.

In other words, it is configured so that "scenario 2" and "scenario 3" are more likely to be selected when there is a jackpot win than when there is no jackpot win (or when there is a miss). '' is configured so that it is difficult to select. With this configuration, the selected scenario type is determined by predicting the transition status of the internal value based on the internal transfer data set during the continuous hit period performance, and based on the determination result, the continuous hit performance is It is possible to provide the user with the pleasure of predicting the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery before the game ends.

In addition, when winning a jackpot, the selection ratio of "Scenario 1" is specified to be lower than when winning a jackpot, but the selection ratio of "Scenario 1", which is stipulated to be low, is the highest among each scenario type. Because it is stipulated to be the selection ratio, each time a continuous hit effect is executed, a situation may occur where the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is easily grasped before the continuous hit effect ends. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same scenario type is configured to be selectable whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a miss, and the result of the special symbol lottery is determined only by the selected scenario type. Although it is configured so that it is difficult to be identified, the selection rate is not limited to this, and the result of the special symbol lottery is the lowest selection rate (for example, 0.5%) of each scenario type, and the result of the special symbol lottery is It is preferable to define a scenario type (for example, "Scenario V") that can be selected only in the case of a winning scenario (such as a jackpot win).

With this configuration, when it is determined that "Scenario V" has been selected, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery can be grasped before the continuous hit effect ends, so the continuous hit period In production, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which scenario type will be selected. In addition, when providing "Scenario V" that can be selected only in the case of a specific lottery result, the internal value of the scenario is created so that internal migration data that is clearly different from other scenario types is created. For example, it is preferable to specify a transition tendency for the internal value to rise only up to a predetermined value (for example, "2") regardless of the upper limit value that is set, an invalid tendency in which the internal value does not rise at all, or a tendency for the operation to be valid. It is preferable to configure the internal value to always show a transitional tendency such as an upper limit tendency in which the internal value indicates the upper limit value, regardless of the passage of time. This allows the player to easily predict the selected scenario type when the internal value changes based on the internal transfer data created based on "Scenario V".

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 568(a), the selection ratio of scenario types is configured to vary based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, that is, whether or not a jackpot has been won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the selection ratio of scenario types may be configured to vary based on the length of the effective operation period, or the length of the presentation period set for the corresponding variable presentation may be configured. The selection ratio of the scenario type may be configured to be different based on the length of time (length of variation time of the special symbol), or based on the result of winning information (pre-reading information) possessed by the acquired special symbol reservation. The selection ratio of scenario types may be configured to be different. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a probability setting function (so-called pachinko machine 10 with a setting function) that can set one value from a plurality of values with different probabilities as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the setting The selection ratio of the scenario type may be configured to be different depending on the value (set value) indicating the jackpot probability. In other words, by understanding the selected scenario type, benefits that are advantageous to the player can be provided.

The press lottery table 222sb is a variable lottery table for determining whether or not to change the display value (display mode) when the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) within the valid operation period during the continuous hit performance. This is a data table used for executing the lottery, which corresponds to the results of the special symbol lottery (jackpot, miss) corresponding to the continuous hit performance being executed, and the value of the acquired lottery performance counter 223sb. The results (winning, losing) are stipulated for each. If the result of the variable lottery executed using this push lottery table 222sb is a win, the condition for changing the display value is satisfied, the display value can be changed, and the result of the variable lottery is a win. In some cases, the condition for changing the display value is not satisfied and the display value cannot be varied.

In this way, during the operation validity period, if it is determined that the player's operation on the operation means is valid, a variable lottery will be executed based on the operation, and the display mode (display value) will be changed based on the variable lottery result. ) is configured to satisfy the variable conditions, it is possible to set the state in which the displayed value can be varied irregularly, so the display value can be displayed at a timing that is surprising to the player. The mode can be easily varied, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, the contents specified in the press lottery table 222sb will be explained with reference to FIG. 568(b). FIG. 568(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the press lottery table 222sb. As shown in FIG. 568(b), the press lottery table 222sb shows "winning" and "losing" as the lottery results, and the results of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current variation pattern and the obtained lottery performance counter 223sb. It is defined in association with the value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the value of the lottery performance counter 223sb is "winning" if it is in the range of "0 to 29", and "lost" if the value is in the range of "30 to 98". are specified respectively. In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the value of the lottery performance counter 223sb is defined as "winning" in the range of "0 to 19", and "losing" in the range of "20 to 98". has been done.

In other words, the configuration is such that when the corresponding special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, it is easier to win in the press lottery than when it is a miss. With this configuration, it is possible to easily predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery based on the variable frequency of the display value during the continuous hit period performance, and to increase the player's interest in the content of the performance during the continuous hit period performance. It can be made easier to hold.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the operation on the operating means is determined to be valid during the operation valid period during the continuous hit period presentation, the press lottery table 222sb is always referred to to determine whether or not the variable condition is satisfied. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of consecutive winnings in the variable lottery executed with reference to the push lottery table 222sb is provided, and the measuring means It may be configured such that when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), it becomes easier to win in the variable lottery. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the performance effect of the consecutive hit period performance is reduced without successive wins in the variable lottery.

Further, the winning probability of the variable lottery may be configured to be varied based on the number of wins of the variable lottery within one valid operation period and the length of the remaining period of the valid operation period, for example, the valid period of operation. If the remaining period of time is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) and the number of winnings in the variable lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), the winning probability of the variable lottery may be configured to decrease. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the displayed value reaches the upper limit value in a state where there is a large amount of time remaining in the operation validity period. In addition, if the remaining period of the valid operation period is less than a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) and the number of wins in the variable lottery is a specific number of times (e.g., 0 times), the probability of winning the variable lottery increases. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the performance effect of the consecutive hit period performance is reduced without successive wins in the variable lottery.

The upper limit value selection table 222sc is a data table that is referred to when setting the upper limit of the display value that can be displayed during the continuous hit period performance, and includes the results of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the obtained upper limit value performance counter 223sc. The upper limit value is set in the range of "2" to "5" in correspondence with the value of .

This upper limit value is the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous hit period production, specifically, the upper limit of the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801 (see FIG. 560). This shows that. The configuration is such that when a jackpot is won in the corresponding special symbol lottery, a larger value (for example, "5") is more likely to be selected as the upper limit than when a jackpot is not won. With this configuration, the higher the display value is varied during the consecutive hit period performance, the higher the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a jackpot, so it is possible for the player to It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the displayed value increases.

Here, the contents defined in the upper limit selection table 222sc will be explained with reference to FIG. 569(a). FIG. 569(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper limit selection table 222sc. As shown in FIG. 569(a), in the upper limit selection table 222sc, the upper limit values "2" to "5" are the results of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern (results of judgment) and the obtained results. It is defined in association with the value of the upper limit performance counter 223sc.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment of success or failure) is a jackpot, the value of the upper limit production counter 223sc is in the range of “0 to 39” and the upper limit value “5” is in the range of “40 to The upper limit value "4" is defined in the range of "89", and the upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "90 to 98". In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment of success or failure) is a failure, the value of the upper limit production counter 223sc is in the range of “0 to 9” and the upper limit value “5” is in the range of “10 to 69”. The upper limit value "4" is defined in the range, "3" is defined in the range "70-89", and "2" is defined in the range "90-98".

In other words, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (win/fail judgment result) is a jackpot, the upper limit value "5" is set at about 40% of the jackpots, whereas when the winning judgment result is a miss. The upper limit value "5" is only set in about 10% of the cases. Therefore, if the display value rises to "5" (variable) during the consecutive hit period performance, it is possible to increase the expectation that the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a jackpot, so the display value will be displayed to the player. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the value increases.

Furthermore, as described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the degree of increase in the display value during the continuous hit period effect is regulated not only by the set upper limit value but also by an internal value that changes according to internal transfer data. are doing. Therefore, even if the upper limit value "5" is set during the continuous hit period, the displayed value will not change to "5" until the internal value reaches "5", so the player cannot Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game while making the player expect the displayed value to rise to "5" during the entire period of the continuous play period effect.

The difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is a data table that is referred to when selecting a specified value (difference upper limit value) for the difference between the internal value and the displayed value. This difference upper limit value is used when determining whether to display the press promotion mode (see FIG. 561(b)) and when determining the amount of increase (variable amount) when increasing (variable) the display value. used for.

Here, the contents defined in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd will be explained with reference to FIG. 569(b). FIG. 569(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. In this difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, the difference upper limit values "2" to "4" are the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern (result of judgment) and the obtained difference value performance counter 223sd. It is defined in association with the value.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment of success or failure) is a jackpot, the value of the difference value production counter 223sd is in the range of "0 to 4" and the difference upper limit value "4" is "5". A difference upper limit value "3" is defined in the range of "64" to "64", and a difference upper limit value "2" is defined in the range "65 to 98". In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment of success or failure) is a failure, the value of the difference value performance counter 223sd is in the range of "0 to 59" and the difference upper limit value is "3", and is "60 to 98". "2" is defined in each range.

In other words, "4" can be selected as the upper limit difference value only when the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is a jackpot, and the upper limit difference value "3" is the same ratio regardless of the result of judgment (approximately 60%), and the difference upper limit value "2" is configured so that it is less likely to be selected when the result of the judgment is a jackpot than when it is a miss.

By configuring this way, for example, when the display value is displayed variably during the continuous hit period, the display value will increase by 4 levels (for example, the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG will increase from "0" to "4"). ), the effect is equivalent to announcing that a jackpot has been won in the corresponding special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the value of the display value displayed during the consecutive hit period performance, but also in the degree of variation of the displayed value, so that the performance effect of the consecutive hit period performance can be further enhanced. can be increased.

In addition, in the present 25th embodiment, the value used to determine whether or not to display the press promotion mode (the difference value between the internal value and the display value) and the display value are varied in one variable display. The variable amount (range) that can be changed is the difference upper limit value selected in the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to refer to separate values. In this case, there is a selection table that allows you to select the value (difference value between the internal value and the displayed value) used when determining whether or not to display the press promotion mode, and the display value is varied in one variable display. What is necessary is to provide a selection table from which a variable amount (range) that can be changed can be selected.

Further, in this embodiment, the difference upper limit value determined with reference to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd is configured to be used during the entire period of the continuous hit period performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, The difference upper limit value may be configured to be varied depending on the degree of progress, for example, the elapse of time of the continuous hit period performance, the display content of the display value, or the transition status of the internal value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 570, the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 570 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-third embodiment described above (see FIG. 495(b)). , lottery performance counter 223sb, upper limit value performance counter 223sc, difference value performance counter 223sd, upper limit value storage area 223e, difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, upper limit value storage area 223se, difference upper limit value storage The difference is that an area 223sf, an internal transfer data storage area 223sg, a display value storage area 223sh, and a continuous hit performance setting flag 223si are added, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The scenario performance counter 223sa, the lottery performance counter 223sb, the upper limit value performance counter 223sc, and the difference value performance counter 223sd are counters for updating random numbers that are referred to when selecting the performance mode of the corresponding performance. It consists of a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The values of these various counters are updated in the counter update process (see Z3113 in FIG. 518) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 518). Furthermore, the information is configured to be updated using the remaining period that occurs when the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the process of selecting various production modes is performed before the main process (see FIG. 518) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed multiple times (before the counter update process is repeatedly executed). configured to run. In other words, if there is only one counter for updating the random number referenced when selecting a production mode, the same random number will be used when selecting various production modes. However, there was a problem in that the combinations of presentation modes to be selected were monotonous. In addition, in order to solve this problem, if a configuration is used in which the process of selecting a presentation mode can be executed only once each time the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, multiple presentation modes can be selected. A new problem arises in that it takes a long time to select the desired item, making it impossible to perform a smooth performance.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when selecting a production mode in accordance with the number of production mode selection processes that can be executed when the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed one time. A counter is provided that can update the referenced random value. As a result, different random values can be used in the process of selecting a presentation mode that can be executed when the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed once, so variations can be created in the combination of presentation modes that are selected. It can be used to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, since a plurality of presentation modes can be selected in one main process of the audio lamp control device 113, presentation can be smoothly executed (set).

The upper limit storage area 223se is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit of display values that can be displayed during the continuous hit period performance, and the upper limit value selected with reference to the upper limit selection table 222sc is stored. be done. Then, internal transfer data is created using the stored upper limit value. In addition, when the conditions for changing the displayed value are met and it is determined that the displayed value and the internal value at that point are the same, the difference between the stored upper limit value and the internal value at that point is determined. This will be referred to when selecting an aspect. Thereafter, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit performance.

The difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is a storage area for temporarily storing the difference upper limit value, which is a specified value for the difference between the internal value and the displayed value, and is a storage area for temporarily storing the difference upper limit value, which is a specified value for the difference between the internal value and the display value, and is The selected upper limit difference value is temporarily stored. Then, when the display value variable condition is satisfied and the display value is to be varied (increased), the stored difference upper limit value is read out to determine the amount by which the display value is to be varied. Furthermore, when determining whether or not to display the display mode of the press promotion mode, the upper limit difference value is read out as a determination criterion. Thereafter, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit performance.

The internal migration data storage area 223sg is a storage area for temporarily storing internal migration data to indicate the content of internal value migration during the continuous hit period performance, and is a storage area for temporarily storing internal migration data in order to indicate the content of internal value migration during the continuous hit period performance. , the created internal migration data is stored. Then, it is read out at the start timing (the setting timing of the operation valid period), and the internal value is migrated (updated) with the content shown in the internal migration data. Thereafter, the stored data is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit performance.

The display value storage area 223sh is a storage area where the display value during the continuous hit period production, that is, the value corresponding to the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stored. This is a storage area for storing values that have already been notified to players. Then, when the display value variable condition is satisfied, the display value is read out, and a display mode is determined according to the difference value from the internal value or the upper limit value. Thereafter, the stored value is cleared at the end timing of the continuous hit performance.

The continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is a flag for managing the execution status of the continuous hit effect, and is configured such that the execution status of the continuous hit effect can be determined based on the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si.

Here, the contents of the continuous hit performance setting flag 223si will be explained with reference to FIG. 571. FIG. 571 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous hit performance setting flag 223si. As shown in FIG. 571, the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is configured to have six types of states from 00H to 05H. As described above with reference to FIG. 563, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as the execution status of the continuous hit performance, it is determined that the continuous hit performance will be executed as a variable performance, and "before the start" where the continuous hit performance is not executed. That is, in the performance mode selection process 25 (see Z4353 in FIG. 578) executed at the start timing of special symbol fluctuation, there are two situations in which a fluctuating performance in which a continuous hit performance is set and a standby performance The internal values are ``Waiting'', which is the situation where the effect is being executed, ``Running'', which is the situation where the continuous hit period effect is being executed, and ``Result'', which is the situation where the result effect is being executed. , is configured to be able to distinguish between "special", which is a situation where the difference is larger than the sum of the upper limit value and the display value, and "-", which is a situation where it is not certain that the continuous hit effect will be executed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 571, the value "00H" of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si high corresponds to the "-" situation, "01H" corresponds to the "before start" situation, and "02H" corresponds to the "before start" situation. ” corresponds to the “waiting” status, “03H” corresponds to the “running” status, “04H” corresponds to the “result” status, and “05H” corresponds to the “result” status. ” corresponds to “special” situations. By configuring the system to be able to distinguish the situations related to the continuous hit performance in this way, it is possible to easily change the performance mode (display mode) in each situation at various timings according to the performance results and game results in other situations. can.

<About the control contents of the audio lamp control device in the 25th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 572 to 579, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, compared to the production update process. 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550), the effect update process 25 (Z3191 in FIG. 572), the press detection process 25 (Z3192 in FIG. 576) in place of the press detection process (Z3112 in FIG. 524), the effect mode The difference is that the production mode selection process 25 (Z4353 in FIG. 578) is executed instead of the selection process (Z4313 in FIG. 536), but otherwise the process is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted. The content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the above-described 24th embodiment is based on the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 23rd embodiment described above. Therefore, when explaining the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is necessary to refer to the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-third embodiment described above. The control processing contents to be used are used.

First, the contents of the effect update process 25 (Z3191) will be explained with reference to FIG. 572. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 25 (Z3191). This effect update process 25 (Z3191) is configured to execute a process (Z3271) for updating various timers regarding the elapse of time of the effect, in contrast to the above-described effect update process 24 (see Z3181 in FIG. 550). The difference lies in the addition of a continuous hit effect process (Z3272), and the other points are the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 573, the contents of the continuous hit effect processing (Z3272) will be explained. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit effect processing (Z3272). In this continuous hit effect processing (Z3272), various controls in the continuous hit effect are executed.

When the repeated hit performance processing (Z3272) is executed, it is first determined whether the setting status of the repeated hit performance setting flag 223si is "00H", that is, no settings regarding the repeated hit performance have been made (Z6501). In the process of Z6501, if it is determined that the value is "00H" (Z6501), the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "00H", that is, some information regarding the continuous hit effect is set (Z6501: No), then whether the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is "01H" or not, In other words, it is determined whether a variable effect for which a continuous hit effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the continuous hit effect has not yet arrived (Z6502), and if it is determined that it is "01H", then (Z6502: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous hit effect (Z6503).

In the process of Z6503, the elapsed time of the variable effect is set based on the value of the timer that updates the elapsed time of the variable effect among the various timers updated in the effect update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), and the elapsed time of the variable effect is set to the start of the continuous hit effect. It is determined whether the timing is right. If it is determined in the process of Z6503 that it is the start timing (Z6503: Yes), the setting status of the continuous hit performance setting flag 223si is set to "02H", that is, the setting status indicating the waiting period for the continuous hit performance (Z6504), The start of the continuous hit performance is set (Z6505), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z6503, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous hit effect (Z6503: Yes), this process is directly ended.

In the process of Z6502, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is not "01H" (Z6502: No), then it is determined whether the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is "02H". (Z6506), and if it is determined that it is "02H" (Z6506: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (Z6507), and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous hit period (Z6507). :Yes), set the timer value corresponding to the operation valid period to the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv (Z6508), and set the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si to "03H", that is, the continuous hit period (during execution period). (Z6509), reads the internal migration data stored in the internal value migration data storage area 223sg (Z6510), and migrates the internal value based on the read data (internal value migration data). (Z6511).

In addition, in the process of Z6506, if it is determined that the setting status of the consecutive hit effect setting flag 223si is not "02H" (Z6506: No), then the second consecutive hit effect process is executed (Z6512), and then the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 574, the contents of the second continuous hit effect processing (Z6512) will be explained. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second continuous hit production process (Z6512). In this second continuous hit effect processing (Z6512), various processes are executed when the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is "03H".

When the second consecutive hit effect processing (Z6512) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting status of the consecutive hit effect setting flag 223si is "03H" (Z6531), and if it is determined that it is "03H", (Z6531 :Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6532).

In the process of Z6532, if it is determined that the value of the continuous press valid period timer 223qv is not 0, that is, the operation is still valid (Z6532: No), the data in the internal migration data storage area 223sg and the continuous press valid period are determined. Based on the value of the timer 223qv, the current internal value (A) is calculated (Z6533), the display value (B) stored in the display value storage area 233sh is read (Z6534), and the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read. The difference upper limit value (C) stored in is read out (Z6535).

Then, it is determined whether the internal value (A) is larger than the sum of the displayed value (B) and the upper limit difference value (C) (Z6536), and if it is determined to be larger (Z6536: Yes), the button is pressed. A display command for prompting is set (Z6537), the setting status of the continuous hit performance setting flag 223si is set to "05H", and this processing is ended.

Here, the display command set by the process of Z6537 executes an effect that prompts the player to press the PUSH button 10317, as shown in FIG. 561(b).

On the other hand, in the process of Z6532, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6532: Yes), the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "04H" (Z6539), and the display value The display value stored in the storage area 223sh is read out (Z6540), a display command is set to indicate the performance mode of the result performance corresponding to the read display value (Z6541), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of Z6531, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is not "03H" (Z6531: No), then the third continuous hit effect process is executed (Z6542), and this process is executed. finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 575, the contents of the third continuous hit effect processing (Z6542) will be explained. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third consecutive hit production process (Z6542). In this third continuous hit performance (Z6542), the setting status of the continuous hit performance setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, various processes are executed when ending the continuous hit performance.

When the third consecutive hit effect processing (Z6542) is executed, first, it is determined whether the setting status of the consecutive hit effect setting flag 223si is "05H", that is, a special situation (Z6571), and it is determined that it is "05H". If so (Z6571: Yes), then it is determined whether the current internal value (A) is larger than the sum of the display value (B) and the upper limit difference value (C) (Z6572).

In the process of Z6572, if it is determined that the internal value (A) is larger (Z6572: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (Z6573), and if it is determined to be 0. (Z6573: Yes), set the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si to "04H" (Z6574), read the display value stored in the display value storage area 233sh (Z6575), and read the read display value. A display command is set to show the presentation mode of the resultant presentation for the value subtracted by 1 (Z6576), and this processing is ended.

In other words, if the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "05H", that is, if the player does not operate the PUSH button 10317 voluntarily during the repeated hit period, the value of the internal value and the value of the displayed value If there is a large deviation between the results and the resulting performance, a performance mode corresponding to a display value smaller than the display value actually displayed is set as a penalty. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. In addition, for players who are not interested in the continuous hit performance (players who only lightly operate the operating means during the continuous hit period), it is difficult to predict the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot based on the content of the result performance of the continuous hit performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from being informed of unnecessary information and reducing their desire to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, as a method for determining a player who is not willingly participating in the continuous hitting effect, the setting status of the continuous hitting effect setting flag 223si is used to determine the value of the part value and the display value. Although this method uses a method of determining the degree of deviation from the value, the method is not limited to this, and for example, the method can be used to determine the continuous hit performance based on the length of time during which the player did not operate the operation means within the operation validity period. A method of identifying players who are not willing to participate may be used.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6572, if it is determined that the internal value (A) is not larger (Z6572: No), the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is changed from "05H" indicating a special situation to "05H" indicating under execution. 03H" (Z6577), and ends this process. With this configuration, even if a player is in a special situation due to a discrepancy between the internal value and the displayed value, he or she will be able to return to normal status by actively operating the operating means. can return to the situation. Therefore, players who did not notice that a continuous hit effect was being performed, and internal transfer data based on scenario trends in which the internal value increases significantly in a short period of time (for example, scenario types ``2'' and ``3'') In cases where migration data has been created, appropriate measures may be taken for players who have been unsuccessful in variable lottery draws in a row and who are in special circumstances despite operating the operating means with great enthusiasm. It is possible to provide a continuous hit performance.

In addition, in the process of Z6571, if it is determined that the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is not "05H" (Z6571: No), then the setting status of the repeated hit effect setting flag 223si is "04H", that is, It is determined whether the value of the continuous hit valid period timer 223qv is 0 (or the operation valid period has ended) (Z6578), and if it is determined that it is "04H" (Z6578: Yes), at the end timing of the continuous hit effect. Determine whether there is one (Z6579).

In the process of Z6579, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hit effect, that is, the end timing of the result effect (Z6579: Yes), the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set to "00H" (Z6580), The values stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se, the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, the internal transfer data storage area 223sg, and the display value storage area 233sh are cleared (Z6581), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6578, if it is determined that the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is not "04H" (Z6578: No), or in the process of Z6579, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous hit effect ( Z6579: No), this process ends as is.

Next, the contents of the press detection process 25 (Z3192) will be explained with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the contents of press detection processing 25 (Z3192). This press detection process 25 (Z3192) is executed when it is determined that the value of the continuous press valid period timer 223qv is larger than 0 (Z3604: Yes) in response to the press detection process described above (see Z3112 in FIG. 524). The difference is that the process to be performed is changed from the repeated-hit operation detection process (Z3605) to the repeated-hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651), and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 577, the contents of the repeated-hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651) will be explained. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of the repeated-hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651). In this repeated hit operation detection process 25 (Z3651), various effects are executed based on the operation of the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during the repeated hit period (while the repeated hit valid period timer 223qv is measuring).

When the repeated press operation detection process 25 (Z3651) is executed, first, the press lottery table 222sb is referred to, a press lottery is executed (Z6601), and a notification command for indicating a button press is set (Z6602). In other words, the notification command is configured to be set regardless of the result of the press lottery. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has been properly determined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the press lottery has been won (Z6603), and if the selection has not been won (Z6603: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winner has been won (Z6603: Yes), then the current internal value is extracted based on the data stored in the internal transfer data storage area 223sg (Z6604), and the display value is stored. The display value stored in the area 233sh is read (Z6605), and it is determined whether the internal value and the display value are the same (Z6606).

In the process of Z6606, if it is determined that they are not the same (Z6606: No), the difference upper limit value stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf is read (Z6607), and the difference between the internal value and the displayed value is determined as the difference upper limit value. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (Z6608), and if it is determined that it is not larger (Z6608: No), the value of the difference value is added to the display value (Z6609), and the display value is used to show the display value after the addition. A command is set (Z6610), a value indicating the display value after addition is set in the display value storage area 223sh (Z6611), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6608, if it is determined that the difference between the internal value and the display value is larger than the difference upper limit value (Z6608: Yes), the value of the difference upper limit value is added to the display value (Z6612), and then, Moving on to Z6610 mentioned above.

In the processing of Z6606, if it is determined that the internal value and the displayed value are the same (Z6606: Yes), the upper limit value stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se is read and the displayed value and the upper limit value are determined to be the same. If it is determined that they are not the same (Z6614: No), the displayed value cannot be updated at present, but the displayed value can be changed by updating the internal value. Since this is a possible situation, a suggestion command is set to suggest that the display value will increase with continued repeated hits (Z6615), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of Z6614, if it is determined that the displayed value and the upper limit value are the same (Z6614), a suggestion command is set to suggest that it is difficult for the displayed value to increase further ( Z6616), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 578, the contents of the production mode selection process 25 (Z4353) will be explained. FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of production mode selection processing 25 (Z4353). This production mode selection process 25 (Z4353) is performed when it is determined that a variable pattern command including an additional time command has not been received (Z4551: No) in response to the production mode selection process described above (see Z4313 in FIG. 536). The difference is that the basic performance mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is configured to be executed, and since the rest is the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the basic performance mode selection process 25 (Z4581) will be explained with reference to FIG. 579. FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the contents of the basic presentation mode selection process 25 (Z4581). In this basic performance mode selection process 25 (Z4581), initial setting processing regarding the continuous hit performance is executed when a variable pattern (variable performance pattern) including the continuous hit performance is extracted.

When the basic performance mode selection process 25 (Z4581) is executed, it is first determined whether the extracted variation pattern includes a continuous hit performance (Z6701), and if it is determined that it is included (Z6701: Yes) , the internal scenario is determined by referring to the internal scenario table 222sa (Z6702). Then, the operation valid period set for the current continuous hit effect is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (Z6703), and internal migration data is created based on the determined internal scenario and the extracted operation valid period (Z6704). The transferred data (internal transfer data) is stored in the internal transfer data storage area 223sg (Z6705).

After that, the upper limit value is determined by referring to the upper limit value selection table 222sc (S6706), the determined upper limit value is stored in the upper limit value storage area 223se (Z6707), and then the difference upper limit value is determined by referring to the difference upper limit value selection table 222sd. The upper limit value is determined (Z6708), the determined difference upper limit value is stored in the difference upper limit value storage area 223sf (Z6709), the setting status of the continuous hit performance setting flag 223si is set to "01H", and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z6701, if it is determined that there is no continuous hit effect (Z6701: No), the effect mode corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is determined (Z6711), and this process ends.

<About the 26th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 594. In the above-described 25th embodiment, internal migration data for migrating the internal value over time is created for one operation validity period, and the operation on the operation means by the player during the operation validity period is By configuring the display value to be updated based on the content, the internal value indicated by the internal transfer data, and the display value already displayed, the production effect of the operation performance in which the operation validity period is set is improved. It was something that could be done.

In contrast, the twenty-sixth embodiment is configured so that the internal value can be migrated over the operation validity period that is set multiple times. Specifically, as a jackpot performance executed during a jackpot game, a jackpot performance in which the operation validity period is set multiple times can be executed, and multiple operation validity periods set in one jackpot performance can be executed. It is configured so that internal values are migrated (updated) across periods.

With this configuration, when multiple operation valid periods are set within one performance period, the degree of variation in the performance mode (display value) within each operation valid period executed within one performance can be controlled. , 1 can be set according to the entire performance, so the operation performance can be executed multiple times without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, if the operation valid period is set multiple times within one effect period, the display value will reach the upper limit during the operation valid period that is set first, and after that, the effect of the effect will not be realized. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from being degraded due to an invalid operation validity period being set. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that one piece of internal transfer data is created for the entire period of multiple operation validity periods, the production mode (display value) did not increase during the operation validity period that was set first. Even so, the operation means (PUSH button 10317) must be operated voluntarily during the remaining operation validity period, while expecting that the internal migration data based on "Scenario 2", which is the scenario type of the latter half, is set. can be done.

Although details will be described later, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, in order to migrate (update) the internal value so as to span the effective period of multiple operations, the transition period during which the internal value is migrated (updated) is set using a dedicated measuring means ( This embodiment differs from the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that it is configured to perform measurement using a transition timer 223ta). That is, in the above-described twenty-fifth embodiment, the internal value is configured to be migrated (updated) using a measuring means (sequential hit valid period timer 223qv) for measuring the elapse of the set operation valid period. Therefore, there was no need to provide a dedicated measurement means to transfer (update) the internal values, which made it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and simplify the control process related to operation performance. , since the period during which the internal value is transferred (updated) and the operation validity period are the same period, variations in the operation performance (especially variable patterns of the performance mode executed based on the operation of the operation means) are possible. There was a problem of scarcity.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, as described above, since the transition period during which the internal value is migrated (updated) is measured by a dedicated measuring means (transition timer 223ta), the effective operation period It becomes possible to migrate (update) the internal value in a period different from the period in which the internal value is set. As a result, the internal value at the timing when the operation validity period is set can be changed, so it is possible to easily change the variable situation of the performance mode in response to the operation of the operation means by the player, and it is possible to create a rich variety. It is possible to make it easier to perform the operation performance.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that it has a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223. A part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed, and the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the above-mentioned changes have been changed. The difference is that the presentation mode has been changed, but other than that they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted. Furthermore, among the points that require changes when the above-mentioned differences are used in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, detailed explanations of those points that can be easily figured out by those skilled in the art will be omitted. .

<About the production content in the 26th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 580 and FIG. Explain the contents of the performance.

FIG. 580(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the first operation validity period is set as a jackpot effect, and FIG. It is a figure showing typically an example of a display mode when a period ends. FIG. 581(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode suggesting that the second operation validity period is set as a jackpot effect, and FIG. 581(b) is FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode when a second operation validity period is set.

Here, in this embodiment, a variable probability jackpot is set in which a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a time saving jackpot is set in which a time saving state is set that is more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state after the jackpot game is completed. The system is configured to be able to execute the following, and to inform the player whether the won jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot or a time-saving jackpot in a static display mode of the third symbol indicating jackpot winning. . Specifically, if a stop display mode in which the same odd number symbol is displayed as the third symbol indicating a jackpot win (for example, "777") is displayed, the winning jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot. Notify players of certain things.

With this configuration, before the jackpot game is executed, it is possible for the player to understand that the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot, so the player can play the jackpot game while feeling secure. can be done.

On the other hand, if it is announced whether the winning jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot or a time-saving jackpot before the jackpot game is executed, the player who won the time-saving jackpot will be less motivated to play. , In the case of winning a part of the probability variable jackpot and the time-saving jackpot, a stop display mode (for example, "666") in which the same even number symbol is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the jackpot win is displayed. The player is configured to perform an operation round effect executed during a jackpot game to perform an effect that incites whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a time-saving jackpot (so-called fixed variable promotion effect). There is.

By configuring this way, until the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to leave the possibility that the current jackpot is a certain-probability jackpot, making it easier for the player to play the game while maintaining his or her desire to play. I can do it.

The twenty-sixth embodiment is configured to execute an operation round effect in which an operation validity period is set in a specific round game as a jackpot effect executed during a jackpot game. Further, the number of operation round performances to be executed within the performance period of one jackpot performance is selected from 1 to 3 times. Further, the system is configured to create internal transfer data based on the cumulative operation validity period that is the sum of the performance periods of one jackpot performance.

By using these configurations, the operation validity period set for one operation round performance can vary in proportion to the cumulative operation validity period, depending on the number of operation round performances executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the performance result of the current jackpot performance only based on the variable status of the display value during one operation round performance.

Further, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of operation round effects executed in one jackpot effect is not informed to the player (it is difficult to make him/her aware of it). Therefore, even if the display mode is not greatly varied (increased) in one operation round performance, it is possible to make the player play a jackpot game while expecting that the operation round performance will be executed again.

First, when the operation round effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 580(a), near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a message is displayed to prompt the player to repeatedly press the PUSH button 10317. An image KG is displayed, and a display area 826b is formed above it to indicate the number of operation round effects executed in the current jackpot effect, indicating that the first operation round effect is in progress. As a display mode indicating this, the words "First time!!" are displayed in the display area 826b.

In the display area Ds10, "2nd round" is displayed to indicate that the current number of rounds is the 2nd round, and in the display area Ds3, the third symbol that was stopped and displayed when winning the jackpot is displayed. "666" is displayed to indicate the stop display mode. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 580(a) is the second round of the jackpot game in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of "666", and the first operation round performance is performed as a variable promotion performance. This is a diagram showing the state in which it is being executed.

On the right side of the display screen, a continuous hit gauge RG whose performance mode is varied during the operation round performance, and an icon 826a for indicating the performance result of the variable promotion performance are displayed. In the display area 803, the words ``Press the button repeatedly to fill up the gauge and explode!!'' are displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the production contents of the fixed promotion production. In addition, the words "Right-hand hit" are displayed as a game guide display mode 803a for guiding the player on the game method during the jackpot game.

That is, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a game in which the player repeatedly presses the PUSH button 10317 to increase the number of gauges in the consecutive hit gauge RG is executed as a variable promotion effect, and the number of gauges in the consecutive hit gauge RG is the upper limit value. 5'', the icon 826a explodes and an effect is executed to change the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3.

By executing a performance that increases the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the progress of the fixed-variable promotion performance in an easy-to-understand manner. It is possible to make it easier to continuously press the button 10317 repeatedly.

Here, to specifically explain the contents of the image NG displayed during the operation round effect, it is similar to the image NG displayed during the continuous hit period effect in the 25th embodiment described above (see FIG. 560(b)). , an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the words "Continuously press" to encourage repeated presses, and multiple arrow images are displayed, and in addition, the length of the operation validity period set for the current operation round effect is displayed. A remaining period gauge is displayed as a remaining period display mode to indicate the remaining period.

The state shown in FIG. 580(a) is immediately after the operation round effect has been executed, so the remaining period gauge is displayed in a state where it is not decreasing (displayed in black in the figure), and the operation valid period is not decreasing. The remaining period is displayed in a manner that gradually decreases from the left side as time passes. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, a 10-second operation validity period is set during the operation round performance, and at the timing when the round game that is the target of the operation round performance is executed. The operation validity period is set and the operation round performance is configured to end when 10 seconds have elapsed since the round game was executed. In addition, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the round game termination condition is satisfied when 30 seconds have elapsed, and when 10 game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a (see FIG. 470). For example, if the end condition of the round game is satisfied before 10 seconds have passed (before the operation round effect ends), then the end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the operation round performance ends with .

Note that the production mode and control content for displaying an increased gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG used in the twenty-sixth embodiment are similar to those for displaying an increased gauge number of the spirit gauge KG in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. The presentation mode and control contents are the same, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the first operation round effect is completed, the display mode shown in FIG. 580(b) is displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 580(b) is the display mode at the time when the effective operation period (10 seconds) has elapsed in the first operation round performance, and the image NG indicates the remaining time of the effective operation period. The remaining period gauge (displayed in white in the figure) indicating that the remaining period is 0 seconds is displayed together with the word "END" indicating that the operation valid period has ended, and the player is prompted to press the PUSH button 10317. In order to show that the PUSH button 10317 is in a state that cannot be effectively determined even if the button is pressed, the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is deleted, and instead, in the first operation round production, the number of consecutive presses RG is set to the upper limit. The word "unfortunate" is displayed, indicating that the value (5) was not reached.

In addition, the continuous hit gauge RG is displayed in a display mode (displayed in black in the figure) indicating that the gauge number has increased to the second stage in the first operation round performance, and the display area 803 shows that the number of gauges has increased to the second stage. During the jackpot performance, the characters "There may be a second time!!" are displayed as a suggestion mode to suggest that the operation round performance will be executed again.

Note that the continuous hit gauge RG and the icon 826a are configured to continue to be displayed even after the first operation round performance ends. Then, when the second operation round performance is executed, the performance result of the first operation round performance, that is, the operation round that inherits the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG that was increased in the first operation round performance. It is configured so that the performance is executed. Therefore, for a player who is playing a jackpot game while expecting the second operation round effect to be executed, even if the operation round effect is not being executed, the current continuous hit gauge RG The number of gauges can be easily understood.

In the jackpot performance described above with reference to FIG. 580, the first operation round performance is executed in the second round (see FIG. 580(a)), and the second operation round performance is executed in the fourth round. It is a medium performance, and the second operation round performance is executed at a timing before the start of the fourth round round game, specifically, at a timing when the third round round game is started, and the second operation round performance will be executed soon. A preview display is performed to notify the player that the operation round effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 581(a), the characters "3rd round" are displayed in the display area Ds10 as a display mode indicating that the third round is being played, and as a preview display, "next round" is displayed near the center of the display screen. The second consecutive hit chance begins in the round!!'' is displayed. As mentioned above, the continuous hit gauge RG and the icon 826a are continuously displayed even during the period when the operation round effect is not being executed, and the effect result of the first operation round effect executed in the second round (Fig. 580 ( b) is displayed as is.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, a notice that the operation round effect will be executed soon is displayed at the timing when the round (third round) immediately before the round (fourth round) in which the operation round effect is executed. Although the configuration is configured to notify the player using the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that a preview display is displayed at the timing when the third round game ends, or the notification display is The preview display may be displayed using an interval period set between the first round and the fourth round.

In addition, if there are consecutive rounds in which the operation round effect is executed, an interval period is set between the round in which the first operation round effect is executed and the round in which the second operation round effect is executed. Alternatively, a preview display may be displayed during the period in which the first operation round effect is being executed. In this way, by notifying the player that the operation round effect will be executed before the operation round effect is actually executed, the operation means can be used during the operation validity period set during the operation round effect. can be made easier to operate.

When the jackpot game progresses to the fourth round, a second operation round performance that takes over the performance result of the first operation round performance is executed, and the display mode shown in FIG. 581(b) is displayed. In FIG. 581(b), "4th round" is displayed in the display area Ds10 to indicate that the current round is the 4th round, and in the display area 826b, it is displayed that the second operation round effect is being executed. "Second time" is displayed. Then, during the second operation round performance, the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG reaches the upper limit value "5", the icon 826a explodes, and the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds3 stops displaying. However, the display mode has been changed (promoted) to "777" indicating a guaranteed jackpot.

In other words, in FIG. 581, a performance that increases the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG (progressive promotion performance) is executed across two operation round performances, and a performance result indicating success in promotion is displayed as a performance result. There is. In this way, by configuring the performance result of the variable promotion performance to be displayed across multiple operation round performances, if the performance result of one operation round performance is bad (for example, if the performance result of the continuous hit gauge RG Even if the gauge number increases by only one stage, the player can look forward to the next operation round performance.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, internal transfer data that updates (increases) the internal value that can increase the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG is set so as to span multiple operation round effects. In the probability-variable promotion performance executed during a jackpot game in which a jackpot is won, it is possible to intentionally create a performance mode in which the number of the continuous hit gauge RG is difficult to increase during the first operation round performance. Therefore, even if the performance result of one operation round performance is bad (for example, when the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG increases by only one level), expectations for the next operation round performance will be high. can have.

In addition, internal transfer data that updates (increases) the internal value that can increase the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG is set so as to span multiple operation round performances, so the jackpot game that has won the time-saving jackpot It is possible to intentionally create a performance mode in which the gauge number of the continuous hit gauge RG is likely to increase during the first operation round performance in the variable promotion performance that is executed during the performance. Therefore, even if it is a fixed-variable promotion performance that does not result in a fixed-variable promotion, it is possible to provide a good state (for example, a state in which the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG increases by four levels) as a performance result of one operation round production. This allows the player to play the game while expecting to be promoted until the final operation round performance in the jackpot performance is completed.

In addition, the twenty-sixth embodiment is configured so that even if the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG does not reach the upper limit (5), there remains a possibility of being promoted to a variable probability. In this case, the icon 826a does not explode in the guaranteed promotion performance, and the performance of the promotion failure is executed, and the player is notified of the probability change jackpot during the ending period of the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game. It is composed of By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the player expecting a guaranteed variable jackpot until the gaming state is actually set after the end of the jackpot game, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game early. be able to.

In this case, the best timing to notify whether the type of jackpot that won a jackpot is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a time-saving jackpot is to be notified by a guaranteed variable promotion performance, that is, at the timing when a jackpot game is being executed. It is preferable to configure the system so that it is easy to be selected, and then the timing is such that the notification is made before the start of the jackpot game, that is, the stop display of the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the timing near the end of the jackpot game. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the ratio of variable promotion in the variable promotion performance that is executed to encourage players to decide whether or not to be promoted over a long period of time, thereby increasing the performance effect. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the flow of effects executed during the jackpot game in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 582 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game. As shown in Figure 582, if you win a jackpot as a result of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation), the round game from the first round to the final round will be played as a jackpot game after the OP (opening) period. After that, the jackpot game is configured to end after an ED (ending) period. An interval period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set between each round game (see FIG. 582(a)).

During the special symbol variation, a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. During the jackpot game, a jackpot performance is executed. This jackpot performance consists of an OP performance performed during the OP period, a round performance performed during the round game, an ED performance performed during the ED period, and an interval performance performed during the interval period ( (See FIG. 52(b)).

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, among the above-mentioned jackpot performances, in the round performance executed for each round game, a probability-variable promotion production is used to inform whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot. It is configured to be executable, and in the variable promotion performance, the continuous hit performance is executed across a plurality of round games. Furthermore, the system is configured to execute a continuous hit preview performance that foretells that the continuous hit performance will be executed before the continuous hit performance is executed.

Similar to the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that an operation valid period is set during the continuous hit performance (see FIG. 582(c)), and all operations set during the jackpot performance are valid. In the example of FIG. 582, the degree of movement of the internal value is calculated for the total operation validity period that is the sum of the operation validity periods set for the two consecutive hit effects executed in the second and fourth rounds. Internal value migration data shown in the figure is created, and the internal value is configured to vary (increase) based on the created internal value migration data. Note that the method for creating internal value migration data in the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, except for the calculation method of the operation validity period. The explanation will be omitted.

Then, the internal value migration data is configured not to be updated from the end of the first continuous hit effect (operation valid period) until the start of the next continuous hit effect (operation valid period) (Fig. 582(d)). By configuring in this way, even if the continuous hit performance is executed at intervals during the jackpot performance, the internal value migration data can be continuously updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the update period of the internal value transfer data is the period in which the operation valid period is set, but it is not limited to this, and for example, it can also be an interval period after the end of a round game in which a continuous hit effect is executed. It may be configured to update the internal value migration data. In this way, by configuring the internal value to be updated based on the internal value migration data during a period different from the operation validity period, it is possible to update the display value that may surprise the player in the next consecutive hit performance. Variable aspects can be easily provided.

Further, in this embodiment, the internal value is updated (variable) by referring to the internal value migration data based on the passage of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, if a continuous hit effect is executed. When the end timing of the round game is early, that is, when the round game end condition (winning 10 game balls) is satisfied early, the internal value update condition is satisfied and the internal value is set earlier than the actual time elapsed. It may be configured to advance value migration data. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a round game in which a continuous hit effect is executed ends early and the internal value cannot reach the upper limit value during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, if the cumulative total of the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a (over winning number) is greater than the number of winnings (10 balls) required to satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, the end condition), a specific number (for example, 10) is satisfied, a forced update process for updating the internal value up to the upper limit value may be executed, regardless of the contents of the internal value migration data. Thereby, the internal value can be updated according to the game content of the jackpot game during the period when the continuous hit effect is not being executed, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform a notification effect that notifies that the above-mentioned predetermined condition has been satisfied, and a notification effect that notifies information until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 583, a description will be given of the differences between the contents of the continuous hit effect in the twenty-sixth embodiment and the contents of the continuous hit effect in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. In the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, the created internal transfer data is set in accordance with the setting timing of the operation valid period, and the internal value is updated (increased) during the operation valid period based on the set internal transfer data. It was configured to do so. In contrast, the twenty-sixth embodiment is different in that the timing for setting the created internal migration data can be made different from the timing for setting the operation validity period. Specifically, the internal migration data can be set at a timing 2 seconds earlier or 10 seconds later than the reference timing, which is the setting timing of the operation valid period. It is configured so that it can be done.

By varying the set timing of internal migration data in this way, even if the same internal migration data is created, it is possible to vary the update status of internal values as the operation validity period elapses. . Therefore, even if the same internal transfer data is created and the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) with the same operation content during the valid operation period, the degree of variation of the displayed value cannot be changed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

FIG. 583 is a diagram schematically showing a performance pattern during a continuous hit period performance when “scenario 1” is selected as the scenario type indicating the tendency of transition of internal values, and is a diagram of the above-mentioned 25th embodiment. The difference from the diagram shown in 564 is that the timing at which the internal transfer data is set is advanced by 2 seconds, but other than that, the diagram is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 583(c), since the internal migration data is set 2 seconds before the timing when the operation validity period is set (the execution timing of the continuous hit period effect), 0 seconds after the operation validity period is set. After .25 seconds, the internal value reaches "1", after 2.5 seconds it reaches "2", after 4.75 seconds it reaches "3", and after 7 seconds it reaches "4". That is, the earlier the internal transfer data is set, the earlier it is possible to update (increase) the internal value within the valid operation period.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 583, the internal transfer data is set 2 seconds before the operation valid period is set, so the timing at which the internal value reaches the upper limit is also the same as the timing shown in FIG. 564. Although the configuration is configured to be 2 seconds earlier than the 25th embodiment, the timing is not limited to this, and for example, the timing at which the internal value reaches the upper limit value is fixed relative to the remaining period of the operation validity period, and the timing is It may be configured such that the period between the fixed timing and the set timing of the internal transfer data is calculated as the internal value update period, and the internal transfer data is created according to the length of the update period.

Further, as described above, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the timing at which the internal transfer data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the timing at which the operation validity period is set. Here, if the set timing of the internal migration data is delayed by 10 seconds, the valid operation period is 10 seconds, so the configuration is such that the internal value is not updated based on the internal migration data during the valid operation period. ing. Therefore, in this case, even if the operating means is operated during the continuous hit period (during the valid operation period), the internal value remains "0" and the displayed value is not varied (updated).

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, only when the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the timing at which the internal transfer data is set can be delayed by 10 seconds from the timing at which the operation validity period is set. Furthermore, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a value of at least "2" or more is selected as the upper limit value in the consecutive hit period performance.

Therefore, if you actively operate the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous hit period production, it is possible to update (increase) the display value to at least "2" regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, but as mentioned above, If the timing at which the internal migration data is set is delayed by 10 seconds from the timing at which the operation valid period is set, the displayed value will change from "0" no matter how you operate the PUSH button 10317 during the continuous hit period. It is possible to set a state that will not be changed (updated).

By configuring in this way, in the continuous hit period production where the more the displayed value is changed (updated), the more advantageous it is to the player, the displayed value is changed (updated) even though the operating means is operated voluntarily. In order to make it possible to obtain an advantageous performance result for the player even in the case where the operation is not performed, it is possible to provide an advantageous performance result to the player. It is possible to make players interested.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 26th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 of the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 584 to 586. First, with reference to FIG. 584, the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 584 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 584, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment has a transition timer start timing selection table 222ta, which is different from the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 567). The difference is that a performance number selection table 222tb is added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The transition timer start timing selection table 222ta is a data table that is referred to when selecting the timing to set the internal transition data, and when setting the fluctuation pattern (variation effect), the set timing of the internal transition data is selected, The internal migration data is updated and varied based on the selected set timing.

The contents of the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta will be explained with reference to FIG. 585. FIG. 585(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta. In the transition timer start timing selection table 222ta, the start timing of the transition timer (time measurement by the transition timer is started) in correspondence with the lottery result (judgment result) of the corresponding special symbol and the acquired performance lottery counter 223y. "-5 seconds", "origin", and "+10 seconds" are defined as timing), respectively.

Specifically, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (judgment result) is a jackpot (win), the value of the acquired performance lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 19", and the start timing is "-5". The "origin" is defined in the range of "20 to 94", and the "+10 seconds" is defined in the range of "95 to 98". On the other hand, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery (judgment result) is a failure, the value of the acquired performance lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 9", and the start timing is "-5 seconds" and "10 The "origin" is defined in the range of "98" to "98".

In other words, when the target special symbol lottery result is a "win," "-5 seconds" is more likely to be selected as the start timing of the transition timer than when it is a "miss." ”, “+10 b seconds” is likely to be selected as the start timing of the transition timer. With this configuration, the timing at which the internal transfer data is set is predicted based on the transition (variable) status of the display value during the continuous hit period performance, and the judgment result of the validity judgment means is used in the game based on the prediction result. It is possible to provide people with the pleasure of making predictions.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 585(a), a timing different from the origin (timing for setting the operational validity period) can be selected as the timing for setting the internal transfer data. Specifically, a timing earlier than the origin (-2 seconds) and a timing later than the origin (+10 seconds) are configured to be selectable, but other timings may also be configured to be selectable, for example. , two or more different timings may be selectable as the timing earlier than the origin. Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, when a timing later than the origin is selected, the start timing is delayed to such an extent that the internal value is not updated according to the internal migration data until the operation validity period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the transition timer may be configured to be selectable (for example, +5 seconds) delayed within the range until the end of the valid operation period.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the timing at which the operation validity period is set is set as the origin, and the start timing of the transition timer is configured to be selectable by changing the start timing from the origin. Regardless of the set timing, for example, the start timing of the transition timer can be selected from multiple timings based on the elapsed time since the fluctuation effect was executed (the elapsed time since the special symbol fluctuation was started). Alternatively, a predetermined start condition (for example, a start condition that is established based on the player's operation on the operating means, or a start condition that is established based on the execution of a specific performance as a variable performance) is satisfied. It may also be configured to set internal migration data based on this. With this configuration, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a performance pattern in which there are multiple timings at which the operation validity period is set, or a performance pattern in which different lengths can be selected as the length of one operation validity period, the internal Since the relationship between the update status of the internal value based on the migration data and the elapsed status of the valid operation period can be made more diverse, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The performance number selection table 222tb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the number of performances for the operation round performance to be executed during the jackpot performance, and is a data table that is referred to when selecting the number of performances for the operation round performance to be executed during the jackpot performance. ) and the value of the obtained performance counter 223qy, a different number of performances (1 to 3) is selected. This performance number selection table 222tb is used to select the number of effects when it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z4101 in FIG. 590: Yes) in the win-related command processing 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591) that is executed when a win-related command is received. ) In the winning effect setting process (see Z4151 in Figure 592) that is executed, if it is determined that the current jackpot symbol (the third symbol that is stopped and displayed) is not a variable probability symbol (for example, "777") (Z6801 in FIG. 592: No) is referred to in order to determine the number of continuous hit effects that are operation round effects (see Z6805 in FIG. 592).

Here, with reference to FIG. 585(b), the contents specified in the performance number selection table 222tb will be explained. FIG. 585(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the performance number selection table 222tb. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the performance number selection table 222tb includes different performance numbers based on the type of target jackpot (probable variable jackpot, normal (time-saving) jackpot) and the value of the obtained performance counter 223qy. (1 to 3) are stipulated, and it is stipulated that when the target jackpot type is a variable jackpot, the number of performances selected is likely to be higher than when it is a normal (time-saving) jackpot. There is.

Specifically, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, and the value of the obtained performance lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 29", the number of performances is "1", and the number of performances is in the range of "30 to 89". In the range of "90 to 98", "2" is defined as the number of effects "3". On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a normal (time-saving) jackpot and the value of the obtained performance lottery counter 223qy is in the range of "0 to 39", the number of performances is "1", and in the range of "40 to 98", the number of performances is "2" is specified.

In other words, the configuration is such that the number of performances "3" can be selected only when it is a guaranteed variable jackpot, and the number of performances "2" is also configured so that the probability variable jackpot is more likely to be selected than the normal (time-saving) jackpot. stipulated. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of operation round effects executed during one jackpot performance, that is, one jackpot game, is determined by referring to the performance number selection table 222tb, and Throughout the entire operation round performance, it is configured to execute a probability-variable promotion performance to excite whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot based not only on the performance result of the probability-variable promotion performance, but also based only on the number of operation round productions performed during the probability-variable promotion production. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the performance result of the probability-variable promotion performance but also in the content of the performance of the probability-variable promotion performance, so that the performance effect of the jackpot performance can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the operation valid periods of the operation round effects executed in one jackpot effect are added up, and one internal transfer data is created for the combined operation valid period. Because of this configuration, the value of the internal value that is varied during the first operation round performance executed in the jackpot performance based on the probability variable jackpot can be made different depending on the number of performances of the operation round performance. Therefore, even though the display value does not reach the upper limit in a variable promotion performance in which only one operation round effect is executed, a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or multiple operation round effects are executed. Even though it is a variable promotion effect, the display value reaches the upper limit in the first operation round effect, and the remaining operation round effects become meaningless, resulting in the effect of the effect being reduced. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the power decreases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 586, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 586 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 586, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). , a transition timer 223ta, a performance counter 223tb, a round performance storage area 223tc, a promoted flag 223td, and a transition timer interruption flag 223te are added, and other than that they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The transition timer 223ta is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the internal transition data is set, and the current internal value is determined based on the contents of the internal transition data and the elapsed time indicated by the transition timer 223ta. be done. This transition timer 223ta is activated when it is determined in the continuous hit production process 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588) that it is the internal value transition start timing, that is, the timing to set the internal transition data (Z6521 in FIG. 588: Yes). ), a value of 1 is set (Z6524 in FIG. 588), and when it is determined in the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587) that the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275 in FIG. 587: Yes), its value is updated (Z3277 in Figure 587). Then, in the repeated tapping operation detection process 26 (see Z3671 in FIG. 590), if the press lottery is won (Z6603 in FIG. 590: Yes), it is referenced to specify the internal value based on the internal migration data. Then, when the jackpot performance ends (when the jackpot game ends), the value of the transition timer 223ta is cleared to 0.

In this embodiment, as described above, the internal value is updated based on the internal transfer data over multiple operation valid periods, and after one operation valid period ends, the next operation is performed. The configuration is such that the value of the transition timer 223ta is not updated until the operation validity period is set. Therefore, when the continuous hit performance (operation round performance) for which the operation validity period is set ends, the measurement of elapsed time by the transition timer 223ta is interrupted, and when the next continuous hit performance (operation round performance) is started, The configuration is such that measurement of the elapsed time is restarted by the suspended transition timer 223ta. With this configuration, internal values can be updated using internal migration data to span multiple operation valid periods, regardless of the length of the non-operation valid period set between multiple operation valid periods. can do.

The performance number counter 223tb is a counter for measuring the number of consecutive hits (operation round performance) executed during the jackpot performance, and the value corresponding to the number of performances selected in the performance number selection table 222tb is It is set, and is subtracted every time a continuous hit performance (operation round performance) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the number of consecutive hits (operation round performance) performed during the jackpot performance and the performance mode corresponding to the remaining number of times, providing an easy-to-understand performance for the player. can do.

The round performance storage area 223tc is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of round performance executed for each round game in the jackpot game, and is used when the jackpot game is started (after winning the jackpot). The contents of the round effect executed in each round game set in any period before the first round game is executed are temporarily stored. Then, each time a new round game is started, the contents of the stored round performance are read out, and the round performance is executed based on the contents.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, three types of round effects are determined for each round game: a normal round effect, an operation round effect, and a preview round effect.

The promoted flag 223td is a flag to indicate that the promotion has been successful as a result of the promotion performance executed during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the promotion has been successful and is not successful. is set to off when Then, in the round effect setting process (see Z4152 in FIG. 593) executed at the start timing of a new round game, the setting status is determined (Z6901 in FIG. 593), and if it is determined that it is on (FIG. 593) (Z6901: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the display mode indicating a successful promotion (see FIG. 581(b)) has already been displayed as a result of the promotion performance, the congratulations for the promotion. If the round effect with the display mode is executed and it is determined that it is off (Z6901 in FIG. 593: No), that is, the display mode indicating the success of the variable promotion is not displayed as the performance result of the variable promotion effect. If it is determined, a predetermined round effect corresponding to each round game is executed.

In addition, the promoted flag 223td is also referred to when setting the performance mode in the ending period of the jackpot game, and is executed during the winning performance end process (FIG. 594) when a command indicating the ending period of the jackpot game is received. If it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is set to ON (see Z4153), (Z4153 in FIG. 594: Yes), the performance mode to indicate that the probability change state will be set after the end of the jackpot game is set. is set (see Z7002 in Figure 594), and it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is set to off (Z4153 in Figure 594: No), and if the current jackpot type is a probability-variable jackpot (see Figure 594). Z7004 of 594: Yes), during the ending period, a performance mode indicating a fixed promotion is set (Z7005 of Fig. 594), and if it is not a fixed variable jackpot, that is, a normal (time-saving) jackpot (Z7004 of Fig. 594) : No), a presentation mode is set to indicate that a non-probability variable state (time saving state) is set (see Z7006 in FIG. 594).

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, depending on the degree of operation of the PUSH button 10317 (operation means) by the player during the probability promotion performance or the degree of transfer of internal transfer data, even if the player has won the probability variation jackpot, During the performance of variable promotion (during the operation round effect), the display mode indicating promotion of variable probability may not be displayed. Therefore, by making it possible to determine whether or not the display mode indicating a fixed promotion is displayed based on the setting status of the promoted flag 223td, it is possible to set a round performance that corresponds to the content of the fixed promotion performance, and the game To perform a jackpot performance without giving a person a sense of discomfort.

The transition timer interruption flag 223te is a flag for interrupting the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta, and is set to ON when the measurement of the passage of time by the transition timer 223ta is to be interrupted. This transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON when the continuous hit performance (operation round performance) for which the operation validity period is set ends, and is set to OFF when the next continuous hit performance (operation round performance) is started. be done. This allows the transition timer 223ta to measure the passage of time across multiple valid operation periods.

<About the control contents of the audio lamp control device in the 26th embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 587 to 594. The content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is different from the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, such as the production update process. 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572), the effect update process 26 (see Z3198 in FIG. 587), and the continuous hit effect process 26 (see Z3282 in FIG. 588) instead of the continuous hit effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) , instead of the third consecutive hit effect process (see Z6542 in FIG. 575), third consecutive hit effect process 26 (see Z6592 in FIG. 589), and repeated hit operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). The difference is that the detection process 26 (see Z3671 in FIG. 590) is replaced by the win-related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and the rest is the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the effect update process 26 (Z3198) will be explained with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 26 (Z3198). This effect update process 26 (Z3198) is different from the above-described effect update process 25 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572) in that a process when the variable time timer value is 0 is added, and other than that are the same.

When the effect update process 26 (Z3198) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer is larger than 0 (Z3201), and if it is determined that it is larger (Z3201: Yes), the above-mentioned effect update process 25 ( The same processes as Z3271 to Z3262 (see Z3191 in FIG. 572) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3201, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer is 0 (Z3201: No), it is determined whether the current situation is a jackpot (jackpot game) (Z3274), If it is determined that the game is in the middle of a jackpot game (Z3274: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the transition timer 223ta is 1 or more (Z3275).

In the process of Z3275, if it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z3275: Yes), it is determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to on (Z3276), and if it is determined that it is not set to on, (Z3276: No), updates the value of the transition timer 223ta (Z3277), and ends this process. In addition, in the processing of Z3274, if it is determined that there is no jackpot (Z3274: No), or if it is determined that the value of the transition timer 223ta is not greater than or equal to 1 (Z3275: No), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to on. If so (Z3276: Yes), this process ends without executing the process of Z3277. Thereby, the value of the transfer timer 223ta for updating internal transfer data can be appropriately updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 588, the contents of the continuous hit effect processing 28 (Z3282) will be explained. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit effect processing 28 (Z3282). This continuous hit effect processing 28 (Z3282) differs from the above-mentioned continuous hit effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573) in that processing for setting a transition timer 223ta and a transition timer interruption flag 223te is added. , otherwise the same.

When the continuous hit production process 28 (Z3282) is executed, it is first determined whether it is the internal value transition start timing (Z6521), and if it is determined that it is the transition start timing (Z6521: Yes), then, Reads the data (internal migration data) stored in the internal migration data storage area 223sg (Z6522), starts migration of internal values based on the read data (internal migration data) (Z6523), and changes the internal value to the value of the migration timer 223ta. 1 (Z6524), and then executes the same processes Z6501 to 6509 and Z6512 as the above-described continuous hit effect process (see Z3272 in FIG. 573).

When the process of Z6509 is finished, it is next determined whether the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to on (Z6525), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z6525: Yes), the transition timer interrupt flag 223te is set to on. The interruption flag 223te is set to OFF (Z6526), and this processing ends. Further, in the process of Z6525, if it is determined that it is not set to on (Z6525: No), the process of Z6526 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 589, the contents of the third consecutive hit effect processing 26 (Z6592) will be explained. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third consecutive hit effect processing 26 (Z6592). This third consecutive hit performance process 26 (Z6592) is different from the third consecutive hit performance process described above (see Z6542 in FIG. 575) in that a process for setting a transition timer interruption flag 223te is added.

Specifically, in the process of Z6579, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hit effect (Z6579: Yes), the transition timer interruption flag 223te is set to ON (Z6594), and the setting status of the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si is set. is set to "01H" (Z6580), and then it is determined whether the value of the performance counter tb is 1 or more (Z6595). That is, in the process of Z6595, it is determined whether the currently executed consecutive hit performance is the last consecutive hit performance in the jackpot performance.

In the process of Z6595, if it is determined that the value of the performance number counter tb is not 1 or more (0) (Z6595: No), since this is the last consecutive hit performance, the above-mentioned third consecutive hit performance (Fig. 575 (see Z6542), and the process of Z6581 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z6595, if it is determined that the value of the performance number counter tb is 1 or more, that is, the next consecutive hit performance is to be executed within the jackpot performance (Z6595: Yes), the number of performances is The counter value of the counter tb is subtracted by 1 (Z6596), and it is determined whether the value of the performance number counter tb after the subtraction is 0 (Z6597). If it is determined that it is 0 (Z6597: Yes), the display value is The production mode corresponding to the above is set (Z6598), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of Z6597, if it is determined that the value of the performance number counter tb is not 0 (Z6597: No), a performance mode that suggests that the continuous hit performance continues (see FIG. 580(b)) is set. , this process ends. In this way, when configured to execute one overall effect across multiple consecutive hit effects, when one continuous hit effect ends, it is determined whether there are any remaining continuous hit effects, and the determination is made. By configuring to set the display mode (performance mode) to be displayed at the end of the continuous hit performance based on the result, the first overall performance can be smoothly executed as a series of performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 589, only the end timing of the last consecutive hit performance is set in a performance mode according to the display value (the number of gauges in the consecutive hit gauge RG), and the end timing of other consecutive hit performances is set. Although the structure is configured to suggest that the next consecutive hit performance will be executed, the display value (the gauge of the continuous hit gauge RG) is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the performance mode is set according to the number). As a result, the player who is enjoying the jackpot performance is made to think that the continuous hit performance that is executed as the jackpot performance has ended, and then a surprising performance is created in which another continuous hit performance is executed. can be provided.

Further, at the end timing of the last consecutive hit performance, a performance mode indicating that the next consecutive hit performance will be executed may be set. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game while making the player expect that a new consecutive hit performance will be executed until the end when the jackpot performance ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period in which the continuous hit performance is executed during the jackpot performance is the round game period, but the round game period is not limited to this, and the continuous hit performance may be executed during the jackpot interval period or ending period. It's okay. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the continuous hit effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 590, the contents of the repeated-hit operation detection process 26 (Z3671) will be explained. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of the repeated-hit operation detection process 26 (Z3671). In this repeated hitting operation detection process 26 (Z3671), processing related to repeated hitting performance (promotion performance) that is executed during a jackpot (during a jackpot game) is added to the above-mentioned repeated hitting operation detection processing 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577). They are different in that they are the same, but otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the repeated hit operation detection process 26 (Z3671) is executed, the same processes Z6601 to Z6616 as the repeated hit operation detection process 25 (see Z3651 in FIG. 577) are executed. Then, when the process of Z6611 is finished, it is determined whether the displayed value after addition is 5 (Z6651), and if it is determined that it is 5 (Z6651: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot. (Z6652).

In the process of Z6652, if it is determined that there is a jackpot, that is, if the display value reaches 5 in the jackpot effect (promotion effect) and the promotion screen shown in FIG. 581(b) is displayed. (Z6652: Yes), sets the promoted flag 223td to ON (Z6653), and ends this process. In the present embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td is set to ON, the round effect is executed in a manner to indicate promotion success (indicating a probability-variable jackpot) in subsequent round games. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that even though the promotion screen (see FIG. 581(b)) has been executed, the continuous hit effect (promotion effect) is executed again in subsequent round effects.

Next, the contents of the win-related command processing 26 (Z3974) will be explained with reference to FIG. 591. FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related command processing 26 (Z3974). This win-related command processing 26 (Z3974) is a partial modification of the win-related command processing 23 (see Z3914 in FIG. 531) in the above-described 23rd embodiment, which is executed when each command is received. They are different in that they have been changed. Processes that are not the same will be given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

When the winning related command processing 26 (Z3974) is executed, if it is determined in the processing of Z4101 that the opening command has been received (Z4101: Yes), the winning effect setting processing is executed (Z4151), and the processing of Z4102 is executed. Then, this process ends. The details of the winning effect setting process (Z4151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 592.

In the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (Z4103: Yes), the process of Z4104 is executed, and then the round effect setting process is executed (Z4152), and this process ends. The detailed contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 593.

In addition, in the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z4103: No), Z4105 to Execute the process of Z4111. Then, if it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of Z4111 (Z4111: Yes), the winning effect end process is executed (Z4153), the process of Z4112 is executed, and this process ends. In addition, the detailed content of the winning performance end process (Z4153) will be described later with reference to FIG. 594.

Next, the contents of the winning effect setting process (Z4151) executed in the above-mentioned winning related command process 26 (Z3974) will be explained with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning effect setting process (Z4151). In this winning performance setting process (Z4151), the jackpot performance to be executed during the current jackpot game is set according to the type of jackpot game and the type of the third symbol indicating jackpot winning (probability variable symbol or normal symbol). Processing for setting the presentation mode is executed.

When the winning effect setting process (Z4151) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol (third symbol) is a variable probability symbol (Z6801). Here, in this embodiment, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period in which the special symbol variation is being executed. Then, in accordance with the timing at which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win, the third symbol is also stopped and displayed in a combination that shows a jackpot win (for example, a combination of the same numbers (666, etc.)). As a combination indicating a jackpot win of the third symbol, a combination that can also notify the jackpot type of the winning jackpot (probable variable jackpot, normal (time-saving) jackpot, etc.) (for example, a variable probability symbol "777" indicating a variable probability jackpot, etc.); It has a combination that does not notify the type of jackpot (for example, a normal symbol "666" etc. that can be displayed for both a probability variable jackpot and a normal jackpot). If the third symbol combination that does not notify the jackpot type is stopped and displayed, the current jackpot type (probable variable jackpot, normal (time-saving) jackpot) will be announced in the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute promotion performance.

With this configuration, the jackpot type is notified at the stop display timing of the third symbol (before the start of the jackpot game), and the jackpot type is notified during the jackpot game (while the jackpot performance is being executed). Since this can be provided, it is possible to make the player play the game for a long period of time while making the player expect that he or she has won a more advantageous jackpot (probable jackpot), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the process of Z6801, it is determined whether or not the player has already been informed that it is a variable probability jackpot before the start of the jackpot game, and if it is determined that the jackpot symbol is not a variable probability symbol, that is, it is a normal symbol. (Z6801: No), next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (Z6802), and if it is determined that it is a probability variable jackpot (Z6802: Yes), 5 is stored in the upper limit storage area 223se. (Z6803), and if it is determined that it is not a guaranteed variable jackpot, that is, if it is a normal (time-saving) jackpot (Z6802: No), set 4 in the upper limit storage area 223se (Z6804), and Z6805 respectively. Shift to processing.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 580 and 581, this embodiment is configured so that a plurality of consecutive hit effects are executed during the jackpot game, and in the multiple consecutive hit effects, the continuous hit gauge RG The gauge number is increased, and when the gauge number rises to 5, a promotion effect indicating a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Therefore, as explained in the processing of Z6803 and Z6804, by setting 5 in the upper limit storage area 223se only when the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, it is possible to , it is possible to prevent a problem in which the number of gauges in the continuous hit gauge RG increases to 5.

Returning to FIG. 592, the explanation will be continued. In Z6805, with reference to the number of effects selection table 222tb, the number of continuous hit effects to be executed in the current winning effect is determined (Z6805), and the determined number of times is set to the value of the number of effects counter tb (Z6806). . Then, the number of rounds in which the continuous hit effect is executed is determined, information indicating the round effect corresponding to each round is stored in the round effect storage area 223tc (Z6807), and the internal scenario is determined by referring to the internal scenario table 222sa. (Z6808), creates internal value migration data (internal value migration data) based on the number of consecutive hits and the internal scenario (Z6809), stores the created internal value migration data in the internal migration data storage area 223sg ( Z6810), 5 is set in the difference upper limit storage area (Z6811), and this process ends.

As shown in the process of Z6811, unlike the above-described 25th embodiment, the twenty-sixth embodiment is configured so that 5, which is the upper limit of the number of gauges of the continuous stroke gauge RG, is set as the upper limit value of the difference. There is. In other words, if it is a guaranteed variable jackpot and the internal value has increased to 5, for example, even if the current display value is 0, it will be a guaranteed variable jackpot based on one operation on the operating means. It becomes possible to display the display value 5 shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

Note that the technical concept in which the displayed value can rise to the upper limit based on one operation on the operating means as in this embodiment may be used in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, or in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment. The technical idea used in the twenty-fifth embodiment, that is, the technical idea that the display value cannot be raised to the upper limit by one operation on the operating means, may be used in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as in this embodiment, for example, by simply configuring so that the effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means is not executed until the internal value rises to 5, the continuous hit effect can be realized. , it can be changed to a one-time press effect. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 580(a), instead of the words "Consecutive press", the words "One hit PUSH" are displayed as a display mode to prompt the user to press the operating means once in case of image failure. A guidance display indicating that the performance result of the promotion performance will be displayed can be displayed in the display area 803 by one PUSH button 10317 operation.

In addition, in this way, when making it possible to perform a continuous hit performance and a one-time press performance as a performance during a jackpot game, the configuration is such that the player can select the type of performance to be performed during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the probability variable jackpot expectation level may be varied depending on the performance type, and the performance type to be executed may be determined by a predetermined lottery based on the actual jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 592, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z6801, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol is a probability-variable symbol (Z6801: Yes), next, the performance mode of the winning performance to indicate a probability-variable jackpot is set (Z6812), and this processing ends. . In other words, if the player is already notified of the probability-variable jackpot before the jackpot game starts, there is no need to perform the promotion effect during the jackpot effect (mid-win effect). , different effects are performed.

By configuring this way, when winning a guaranteed variable jackpot, the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game will not change depending on the notification timing of the guaranteed variable jackpot, but the presentation mode of the jackpot performance will be different. be able to. In this case, before the jackpot game starts, the jackpot type is determined in the jackpot performance that is executed when the player is already informed that it is a guaranteed variable jackpot (when the jackpot is hit with a variable probability symbol). A performance that can give special benefits to different players (for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has specifications that allow the jackpot probability to be set in multiple stages, the high probability state of the special symbol will be set between the setting value and the jackpot game) If the pachinko machine 10 has specifications that set an upper limit on the number of times that can be consecutively set (a so-called limit machine), it will notify you of the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached, the gaming status at the time of winning a jackpot, etc. It is best to configure it so that it executes possible effects). As a result, when winning the same jackpot type (probable jackpot), the benefits that the player can acquire (advantageous information that can be obtained from the performance) can be varied depending on the timing when the jackpot type is announced. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when using the above-mentioned technical concept, for example, during the remaining round game period after the probability variable jackpot is announced in the promotion production, it is possible to execute the performance mode of the jackpot performance when the variable probability symbol is stopped and displayed. As a performance mode of the jackpot performance when the variable probability symbols are stopped and displayed, it is preferable to provide a performance mode in which the bonus is more likely to be given as the game progresses to the latter half. As a result, even if a promotion effect is executed, it is possible to create an advantageous situation for the player by notifying the player of the probability of hitting the jackpot as soon as possible, so that the player is encouraged to use the operating means. It can be operated.

Next, the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152) will be explained with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (Z4152). This round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed when a round number command is received in the above-mentioned hit related command process 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is stored in the round effect storage area 223tc. Based on the current round performance information, a process for setting a performance mode for a newly started round game is executed.

When the round effect setting process (Z4152) is executed, it is first determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to on (Z6901), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z6901: Yes), The performance mode of the winning performance to indicate a probability-variable jackpot is set (S6902), and this processing is ended. In other words, as in the present embodiment, the promotion performance is executed across multiple round games, and the performance result of the promotion performance (timing of notifying the probability-variable jackpot) is determined by the player's operation on the operating means. When configured to be based on the results, it becomes unclear at what timing the probability-variable jackpot notification will be executed.

In other words, even if the internal value transfer data that increases the internal value to 5 is set, even if the internal value transfer data that increases the internal value to 5 is set during the continuous hit performance that is executed in the second round as a promotion performance, If the player does not operate the operating means in the consecutive hit performance, the round game ends without the probability-variable jackpot notification being executed, and the next consecutive hit performance (for example, the fourth round) is executed. On the other hand, if the player operates the operating means voluntarily in the second round, a probability-variable jackpot may be announced during the second round.

Therefore, in this embodiment, each time a new round starts, it is determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to on, and if it is set to on, the predetermined presentation mode ( It is configured such that a dedicated performance mode different from the performance mode (based on the information stored in the round performance storage area 223tc) is set. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the content of each round performance in the jackpot performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the promoted flag 223td indicating that the probability-variable jackpot notification has been executed is set to on, the predetermined performance mode (information stored in the round performance storage area 223tc) Although the configuration is such that a special performance mode that is different from the production mode based on the game is set, the present invention is not limited to this, but it is possible to prevent the promotion performance (repeat performance) from being forced to be performed during the jackpot performance. Even when it is determined that the restriction flag is set to ON, a predetermined performance mode (performance mode based on the information stored in the round performance storage area 223tc) is provided. ) may be configured so that it is not executed; in this case, for example, during the opening period of a jackpot game, a selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the promotion effect, and the player The restriction flag may be configured to be set on when it is selected not to perform the effect.

In the process of Z6901, if it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is not set to on (Z6901: No), then the information stored in the round effect storage area 223tc is read and the information corresponding to the current round number is read. (Z6903), determines whether the specified round effect is a continuous hit effect (Z6904), and if it is determined that it is a continuous hit effect (Z6904: Yes), sets “02H” to the continuous hit effect setting flag 223si. ” (Z6905), the start of the continuous hit effect is set (Z6906), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of Z6904, if it is determined that the round effect is not a continuous hit effect (Z6904: No), then it is determined whether the round effect is a continuous hit preview effect (Z6907), and it is determined that it is a continuous hit preview effect. If so (Z6907: Yes), the start of the continuous hit preview performance is set (Z6908), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a continuous hit preview effect (Z6907: No), the start of a normal round effect is set (Z6909), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 594, the contents of the winning performance end process (Z4153) will be explained. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the winning performance end process (Z4153). This winning performance end processing (Z4153) is executed when an ending command is received in the above-mentioned winning related command processing 26 (see Z3974 in FIG. 591), and is executed according to the setting status of the promoted flag 223td. Processing for setting different performance modes and processing for terminating the jackpot performance are executed.

When the winning performance end process (Z4153) is executed, it is first determined whether the promoted flag 223td is set to on (Z7001), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z7001; Yes) , determines the performance mode indicating entry into the variable probability state (Z7002), sets the promoted flag 223td to OFF (Z7003), moves to the process of Z7007 described later, and then ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z7001, if it is determined that the promoted flag 223td is not set to ON (Z7001: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (Z7004), and the probability-variable jackpot is determined. If it is determined that this is the case (Z7004: Yes), a performance mode indicating a probability-variable promotion is determined (Z7005), the process moves to the process of Z7007 described later, and then this process ends.

In addition, in the process of Z7004, if it is determined that it is not a variable probability jackpot (Z7004: No), a performance mode indicating entry into a non-probability variable state is determined (Z7006), upper limit value storage area 223se, difference upper limit value storage area 223sf, The values of the internal transfer data storage area 223sg, the display value storage area 233sh, the round effect storage area 223tc, and the transfer timer are cleared (reset) (Z7007), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment described above, in the operation performance that can execute the variable display that changes the display mode based on the player's operation of the operation means, the target value (upper limit value) is set in advance, and the range of values that can be variably displayed (internal value) is defined based on the elapsed time. Since the variable display can be continuously executed over the entire period), the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the degree of transition of the value (internal quantity) defined based on the elapsed time, it is possible to create various degrees of transition based on different trends (formulas), as shown in FIG. 568(a). It is possible to increase variations in performance in operation performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 25th embodiment and 26th embodiment, a specific transition degree is created for one performance period (total period of operation valid periods set during one performance period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that transition degrees are created preferentially for some periods, and then transition degrees are created for other periods.

Specifically, when creating a transition degree (internal transition data) for an operation performance with an operation validity period of 10 seconds and an upper limit of 10, first create the priority internal transition data for the latter 5 seconds. create. In this case, the priority internal transfer data will be created under conditions that allow internal values to increase by a maximum of 10 in 5 seconds. If priority internal migration data that increases the internal value by 8 in 5 seconds is created as priority internal migration data, then internal migration data that increases the internal value by 2 seconds for the first 5 seconds is created. will be created.

In this way, one production period is divided into multiple sub-periods, and internal migration data is created individually for each sub-period while setting priorities, and finally, the upper limit for one production period is determined. By configuring to be able to create overall internal transfer data that matches the value, for example, among the operation performances executed within one performance period, the period that the player pays the most attention to (for example, the final stage of the operation performance) It is possible to create internal transfer data such that the internal value increases significantly for a certain period or a period in which an operation effect in a manner different from normal is performed.

Therefore, by operating the operating means during the period when the player is watching, the display mode can be easily varied (easily raised), and the presentation effect can be further enhanced. In addition, in each of the embodiments described above, a pattern in which the display mode (the number of gauges of the continuous hit gauge RG) is increased is described as an operation effect (repeat effect). For example, it may be configured to reduce the value indicated by the display mode, or a display mode that does not have the concept of value (for example, multiple display modes that individually indicate multiple reach modes) may be used. , may be configured to be variable.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment described above, the internal migration data is created when the operation performance is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elapsed time of the operation performance is Depending on the situation, the internal transfer data may be created after an elapsed time. In this case, for example, it is possible to provide a determining means capable of determining the player's operation result in the first half period of the operation performance, and create internal transfer data for the second half period of the operation performance based on the result of the determination means. More specifically, it determines whether or not the upper limit of variable display (internal value at the end of the first half period) has been reached in the first half period (whether or not the player is actively operating the operating means). If it is determined that the upper limit that can be displayed variably has been reached, the internal value will easily reach the upper limit (the upper limit that can be variably displayed during the current operation performance period) in the second half of the period. It is preferable to configure the system so that data (internal migration data whose internal value tends to increase at the beginning of the second half period) is created or to increase the upper limit value.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player actively play the game throughout the entire operation performance period.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 568, in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment described above, one internal scenario is selected from four types of internal scenarios as a scenario indicating the trend of the degree of migration of internal migration data. The configuration includes, but is not limited to, enabling multiple internal scenarios to be selected and creating internal migration data based on trends exhibited by the selected internal scenarios. It may be configured such that a fused scenario is created by merging scenarios, and then internal migration data is created based on the fused scenario.

Furthermore, by providing a processing means for processing the above-mentioned internal scenarios, for example, by performing processing to expand, contract, or increase the curves (see FIG. 568(a)) that indicate the trends of each internal scenario, the same internal scenario can be It may be configured to increase the variations of internal migration data created when is selected.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment described above, the internal scenario is read when creating the internal transfer data, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The elapsed time since the is inserted, the variation time since the special symbol variation was executed with a specific variation pattern, the elapsed time since the jackpot game started, and the elapsed time since the jackpot game ended. Also, the waveform representing the internal scenario is configured to progress based on the timing results etc. measured by the timing means (for example, RTC) of the pachinko machine 10, and when it is determined that internal transfer data is created, the progress is It may also be configured to create internal transfer data based on the waveform inside. With this configuration, it is possible to bias the internal transfer data that is likely to be created depending on the timing when the operation performance is executed, so that the display in the operation performance is It is possible to easily predict the relationship between the degree of variation of the mode and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the operation performance.

<27th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 595 to 603. Conventionally, as in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, an operation means (PUSH button 10317) that can be operated by a player is provided, and an operation on the operation means (PUSH button 10317) is determined to be valid within the valid operation period. There is an operation performance that changes the performance mode of the current performance by operating the operation means (PUSH button 10317). As part of the operation effect, there is a continuous operation effect (so-called continuous press effect) in which the effect mode is changed step by step by operating the operating means (PUSH button 10317) multiple times within the valid operation period. .

This continuous hit performance is configured to suggest that the more variable the performance mode is, the more likely it is that a bonus advantageous to the player (for example, winning a jackpot through a special symbol lottery) will be awarded. Every time the means (PUSH button 10317) is operated (pressed), it is determined whether or not to change the presentation mode, and if it is determined that the presentation mode is to be varied, it is pressed repeatedly to change the presentation mode. The production was controlled. Then, each time the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317), an operation notification (for example, outputting a pressing sound) is executed to notify the player that the operating means (PUSH button 10317) has been operated. By doing so, when the production mode is not changed even though the PUSH button 10317 is operated, the player is reliably notified that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed), and the operating means is prevented from malfunctioning. There is something that makes it easy to understand what you are not doing.

However, when executing the above-mentioned conventional type of continuous hit effect, each time the PUSH button 10317 is operated, it is configured to determine whether or not to change the effect mode. In the case where the PUSH button 10317 is operated multiple times during the operation, if the determination result is to change the production mode, before the variable production for changing the production mode ends, There is a problem in that the next variable performance is executed, resulting in an operation performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated within the valid operation period and a variable performance is executed that changes the presentation mode based on the operation on the operating means. is configured so that the next variable performance is not executed until the performance period of the variable performance has elapsed. With this configuration, the variable effects executed based on the operation on the operating means are executed in duplicate, or the variable effect being executed is stopped and a new variable effect is executed. , it is possible to suppress the performance effect of the operation performance from decreasing.

Further, even during the performance period of the variable performance, the operation notification that is executed when the player operates the operation means is configured to be able to be performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the operation performed by the player on the operating means within the valid operation period has been correctly recognized, so that a new variable performance is executed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the player operates the operating means during the performance period of the variable performance, the variable performance is not executed, but instead an internal lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed. Based on the result of the internal lottery, the performance mode after the variable performance ends can be changed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means even while the variable performance is being executed. Further, with this configuration, even if the performance period of the variable performance is set to be long, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to operate the operation means from decreasing.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that it has a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, a part of the configuration of the RAM 223, and a part of the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. The difference is that a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the device 113 has been changed, and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the production content of the 27th embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 595 and 596, characteristic presentation contents among the various presentation contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. Specifically, the content of the performance executed based on the player operating the operating means with the operation validity period set will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 595(a), a description will be given of a case where the performance mode is changed during the continuous hit performance. FIG. 595(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display mode when the effect is variable in the continuous hit effect. The content shown in FIG. 595(a) is a diagram showing the same variable content as the display mode explained with reference to FIG. 560(b) in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above. The display state immediately after operating the operating means (0.1 seconds later) is shown. In FIG. 595(a), only the differences from FIG. 560(b) described above will be explained, and the explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

When the player operates the operation means (PUSH button 10317) with the operation validity period set, a press sound (displayed as "dah" in the figure) is output from the audio output device 226 for 0.1 seconds, and the spirit gauge is displayed. A performance display that varies (increases) the gauge number of KG and a performance display that varies (increases) the display mode of the aura worn by the character 801 are executed for 0.5 seconds. The diagram shown in FIG. 595(a) is immediately after the player operates the PUSH button 10317 (approximately 0.1 seconds later), so the second gauge of the spirit gauge KG is in the middle of being displayed, and the character 801 is This shows a display mode in the middle of a display in which the aura is increased by one level. In the display area 803, characters "6.50 seconds remaining" indicating the remaining period of the valid operation period are displayed.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a variable effect display that varies (increases) the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a variable effect display that varies (increases) the display mode of the aura worn by the character 801. During the period (0.5 seconds) until the end of the variable effect display, even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317, only a pressing sound is output, and a new variable effect is not executed. It consists of Therefore, it is possible to prohibit the start of a new variable performance until the variable performance display in progress is finished, so that the player cannot see the performance display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Can be made easy to understand.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, this embodiment is configured so that it takes at least 0.15 seconds to determine that the player has operated the PUSH button 10317. In other words, even if the player repeatedly presses the PUSH button 10317 at an interval shorter than 0.15 seconds, the operation will be determined if the PUSH button 10317 is pressed at an interval of 0.15 seconds or more. It is composed of With this configuration, the press interval of the PUSH button 10317 can be made longer than the press sound output period (0.1 seconds), which prevents the situation where multiple press sounds may be outputted overlappingly. This can be physically prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, if the operating means is operated during a period (0.5 seconds) during which a variable effect display is being executed, that is, during a period when a new variable effect is not being executed. When the operating means is operated, instead of the above-mentioned lottery for changing the variable effect display mode, a button display for changing the display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen. A variable lottery is configured to be executable, and if you win the button display variable lottery, an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen is displayed after the variable effect display that is being executed ends. It is configured so that an effect display that changes the aspect is executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, one display mode (for example, a character display mode) is configured to be variable based on the player's operation of the operating means, and the period during which the one display mode is varied. (variable period) is an invalid period in which the display mode of 1 is not changed even if the player operates the operation means, so that the situation where the display mode of 1 is changed repeatedly is prevented. are doing. If the operating means is operated during the invalid period, the processing for varying the display mode in 1 (variable) is different from the process for varying the display mode in 1. It is configured to perform the following processing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the display mode of 1 is changed repeatedly, and even during the period in which the display mode of 1 is varied (variable period), The player can be made to operate the operating means voluntarily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595(b), the display mode when the variable effect display ends while the button display variable lottery is won will be described. FIG. 595(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 is changed, and it takes 0.4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 595(a) described above. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display mode that will be displayed later.

As shown in FIG. 595(b), when the variable effect display (the effect display that changes the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG and the display mode of the character 801) ends, the button display change that was executed during the variable effect display period Based on the result of the lottery, the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed in the NG image is displayed in a mode different from the normal display mode (in the figure, the edges are painted black). In the display area 803, the words "6.10 seconds remaining" are displayed.

Details will be described later, but in the button display variable lottery, it is decided whether or not to change the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317, and if you win in the button display variable lottery, you will be asked to change the display mode. A display mode lottery for determining the type is executed. If a winner is won in the button variable lottery, the variable condition for the display value is established based on the first operation of the operating means performed after the end of the variable effect display (without executing the variable lottery) The system is configured so that the player is given the benefit that the variable condition is always met.

Furthermore, in the display mode lottery, different display modes are available based on the type (jackpot, miss) of the target special symbol lottery result (win/fail judgment result) and the upper limit value set for the consecutive hit effect. It is configured to be selected. In other words, when the display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 changes, it is possible to give the player the benefit of being able to predict the result of the target special symbol lottery depending on the type of display mode. It consists of

Therefore, even while the variable effect display is being executed, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. In addition, as the effect period of the variable effect display becomes longer, there is a problem that the opportunity to newly change the display value decreases within the limited operation validity period, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. However, by configuring the button variable lottery to be executable using the performance period of the variable performance display, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from decreasing during the valid operation period.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the player operates the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during a period in which a new variable performance is not executed (additional variable invalid period), the player is made to predict the result of the special symbol lottery. Although the configuration is configured to perform an effect that can be performed by changing the display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when an additional variable invalidation period is set. , a new display mode (for example, a rock icon imitating a rock) may be displayed on the image NG to perform an effect mode indicating that the operation on the operating means is restricted by the rock icon. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the additional variable invalidation period has been set.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned rock icon is configured to change based on the operation on the operating means during the additional variable invalidation period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the variable lottery is won), the rock icon is destroyed, It may be configured such that a display icon that can provide advantageous benefits to the player is displayed. In this case, as a benefit advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a benefit that is different from the benefit provided based on the result of the variable performance (the result of varying the spirit gauge KG) (the jackpot winning expectation level). For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, there are benefits that suggest the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, benefits that suggest the number of round games to be executed in the event of winning a jackpot, and the currently set gaming state. It is best to configure the system to provide benefits that suggest the following.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent performances that are difficult for the player to understand (overlapping variable performances) to be executed during the execution period of the continuous hit performance, and also to provide advantageous effects to the player through multiple performances. Since it is possible to provide a plurality of benefits such as , the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, the contents of various effects executed in response to an operation on the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during a continuous hit effect in which an operation validity period is set will be explained. FIG. 596 is a timing chart showing the contents of various effects executed in response to operations on the operating means (PUSH button 10317) during continuous hit effects in which the operation validity period is set.

As shown in FIG. 596, when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, a 0.1 second press sound (displayed as "da" in the figure) is output from the audio output device 226, and if the player wins the variable lottery. , on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a variable performance for 0.5 seconds (a performance that increases the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG, a performance that changes the display mode of the character 801) is executed. While this variable performance is being executed, there is an additional variable invalidation period in which a new variable performance is not executed even if the player operates the PUSH button 10317.

Even during this additional variable invalidation period, a pressing sound is output every time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the pressing operation has been properly recognized. Furthermore, even during the additional variable invalidation period, the variable lottery is configured to be executed based on the pressing operation of the PUSH button 10317, and if the variable lottery is won, the variable lottery is internally executed. A state in which it is easy to win the lottery is set (corresponding to pressing the PUSH button 10317 for the fourth time in FIG. 592(a)).

Then, when a state in which it is easy to win the variable lottery is set internally, when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed after the additional variable invalidation period ends, the variable effect is executed without executing the variable lottery. (See the black circle in Figure 596(a)). With this configuration, even during the additional variable invalidation period, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means (PUSH button 10317).

Although the example shown in FIG. 596(a) shows an example in which 0.5 seconds is set as the execution period of the variable performance, the execution period of the variable performance can be changed depending on the type of the variable performance. ing. Specifically, when the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG changes from the first stage to the second stage and from the second stage to the third stage, the execution period of the variable effect is 0.5 seconds, and from the third stage to the third stage. The execution period of the variable performance at the fourth stage and when transitioning from the fourth stage to the fifth stage is configured to be 1 second. In other words, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot due to the variable performance, the longer the execution period of the variable performance becomes, so that the performance with more impact on the player is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot in the variable performance in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, as the variable performance progresses (as the gauge number increases), the execution period of the variable performance becomes longer, and therefore the additional variable invalidation period becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the operation period for performing a performance different from the variable performance executed during the continuous hit performance (performance for varying the display mode of the PUSH button 10317).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable effect is executed and the period during which the additional variable invalidation period is set are the same period, but the period during which the variable effect is executed is not limited to this. The additional variable invalidation period may be configured to be longer than the above. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the next variable performance from being executed immediately after the variable performance ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a presentation mode of the continuous hit presentation, as shown in FIG. 595, a presentation mode in which the gauge number of the spirit gauge KG increases is used. Any performance mode may be used as long as the mode is variable and the expected degree of award of a benefit (for example, winning a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is varied depending on the variable situation, for example, based on the player's operation on the operating means. It is also possible to use a production mode in which a specific value decreases, and the expected degree of awarding of the benefit varies depending on the amount of decrease, or a mode in which the display mode changes based on the number of times the display mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. It is also possible to use presentation modes that differ in the expected degree of provision of . In addition, as a concept opposite to this embodiment, an effect mode may be used in which the expectation of awarding a benefit is higher when the display mode is not changed based on the operation of the operating means by the operating means.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode is changed multiple times by having the player operate the operating means multiple times, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display that changes the display mode multiple times depending on the length of time the player continues to press the operating means (long-press effect), and An effect may be used in which the display mode is varied multiple times based on the strength and direction of the pressure (impact).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 596, in this embodiment, one type of sound, "da", is used to indicate that the PUSH button 10317 has been operated (pressed) during the valid operation period. For example, without being limited to this, different voices may be output when operating the operating means during a period in which the display mode can be changed and when operating the operating means during a period in which the display mode cannot be varied (additional variable invalid period). It may be configured as possible. With this configuration, the type of sound that is output when the operating means (PUSH button 10317) is operated can be used to effectively recognize that the operating means has been operated, and to determine the current display mode. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the period is variable.

Further, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, as a continuous hit performance, a performance is executed in which the display mode (the number of gauges of the spirit gauge KG) can be varied (increased) in multiple stages, but this is not limited to this. The mode of variation may change in an analog manner, or the degree of variation may be displayed as a percentage. Further, it may be configured such that the smaller the display mode is, the more advantageous it is to the player, or the larger the number of times the display mode is varied, the more advantageous it is to the player.

<About the electrical configuration in the 27th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 597 and 598. The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that it has a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. , except that the electrical configuration is the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be explained with reference to FIG. 597(a). FIG. 597(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 597(a), the twenty-seventh embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the twenty-fifth embodiment described above in that a button display mode selection table 222ua is added, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

The button display mode selection table 222ua is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of an image imitating the PUSH button 10317 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that a plurality of types of display modes (display colors) can be selected. In this button display mode selection table 222ua, in the production timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 601), the value of the production timer 223ua, which will be described later, is determined to be 0 (Z7102 in FIG. 601: Yes), and the confirmation flag 223ub, which will be described later, is turned on. (Z7103 in FIG. 601: Yes), that is, in a state where the variable effect display has ended, it has been decided to change the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 while the variable effect display is being displayed. In this case, it is referred to to select the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 (Z7104 in FIG. 601).

Here, the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua will be explained with reference to FIG. 597(b). FIG. 597(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua. This button display mode selection table 222ua includes the lottery results (judgment results) of the target special symbols, the upper limit set for the continuous hit performance being executed, and the value of the acquired performance lottery counter 223qy. Four types of display modes (blue, yellow, red, and rainbow) are defined correspondingly. Note that the upper limit value is specified by reading information stored in the upper limit value storage area 223sf.

Specifically, if the winning/failure judgment result is a hit (jackpot) and "5" is set as the upper limit, "yellow" and " If "red" is defined in the range "60-89" and "rainbow" is defined in the range "90-98", and "-4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, "Yellow" is defined when the value of the performance lottery counter 223qy is in the range "0-59", "blue" is defined in the range "60-89", and "red" is defined in the range "90-98".

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is incorrect and "5" is set as the upper limit, "yellow" is set in the range of "0 to 59" and "yellow" is set in the range of "60 to 89" of the production lottery counter 223qy. If "blue" is defined in the range "90-98" and "red" is defined in the range "90-98", and "~4" (other than "5") is set as the upper limit, the value of the production lottery counter 223qy "Blue" is defined in the range "0 to 59," "yellow" is defined in the range "60 to 89," and "red" is defined in the range "90 to 98."

In other words, four types of display modes that can be selected in the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined with different degrees of advantage to the player, and the display mode that is most disadvantageous to the player is "blue", followed by "blue". The contents of the button display mode selection table 222ua are defined so that "yellow" and "red" gradually become more advantageous, and "rainbow" becomes the display mode that is most advantageous to the player.

To explain in detail, the display mode "Rainbow" is a display mode that can only be selected when the win/fail judgment result is "Win (Jackpot)", so the display mode of the image imitating the PUSH button 10317 is "Rainbow". '' is displayed, the player can be made to understand that the result of the success/failure determination is a hit (big win) before the performance result of the continuous hit performance being executed is displayed. Therefore, this is the most advantageous display mode for players who want to quickly understand that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, only when the target special symbol lottery result (win/fail judgment result) is a jackpot and the set upper limit is "5", "Rainbow" is displayed as the display mode. Since it is configured so that it can be selected, if the display mode "Rainbow" is selected, it will be notified in advance that the display value will be varied (increased) to the maximum "5" in the ongoing continuous hit production. I will do it. Therefore, it is possible to notify a player who wants to vary (increase) the displayed value to the maximum value during the continuous hit performance that the displayed value can be varied (increased) to the maximum value during the continuous hit performance. This provides a display mode that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the selection ratio of the other display modes ("blue", "yellow", "red") is specified to be different depending on the result of the judgment and the set upper limit value. When the judgment result is unfavorable to the player (missing) and the upper limit value is unfavorable to the player (other than "5"), the display mode "blue" is most likely to be selected, followed by "yellow" and "red". '' are configured so that they are less likely to be selected. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the selection ratio in the most disadvantageous situation to the player, the display mode "blue" is the display mode most disadvantageous to the player. The "yellow" display mode is more advantageous to the player than the "blue" display mode, but is more disadvantageous than the "red" display mode.

In addition, even when comparing the selection ratio of each display mode when the result of the judgment is a hit (jackpot) and the selection ratio of each display form when the result of the judgment is a loss, the display form "Blue" is the display format that is most likely to be selected when the result of the win/fail judgment is a loss, and is the display format that is the least likely to be selected when the result of the win/fail determination is a hit (jackpot), followed by the "yellow" display format and the "red" display format. '' in order to be more likely to be selected in the event of winning. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the selection ratio when the result of the judgment is a result that is advantageous to the player (a win), the selection ratio when the result of the judgment is a result that is disadvantageous to the player (miss). From a viewpoint as well, the display mode "blue" is the display mode that is most disadvantageous to the player. The "yellow" display mode is more advantageous to the player than the "blue" display mode, but is more disadvantageous than the "red" display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 598, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 598 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 598, the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 570). The difference is that a flag 223ub is added, and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The performance timer 223ua is a timer for measuring the performance period of the variable performance display that is executed during the effective operation period (during the continuous hit period performance), and is used in the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). When a variable performance is executed in the normal operation process (see Z7206 in FIG. 602), a value corresponding to the performance period (0.5 seconds) of the variable performance is set. The timer is updated each time the process Z3271 of the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599) is executed. If the value of the performance timer 223ua is greater than 0, that is, if the variable performance display is being executed, the press lottery table 222sb is referred to in the repeated hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601). The process of executing a variable lottery and the process of executing a variable effect display (effect display that varies the display value) (processes Z7203 to Z7207 in FIG. 601) are skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a new variable performance display from being executed during the variable performance display.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the repeated press operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) that the value of the production timer 223ua is 1 or more (Z7202 in FIG. 601: Yes), the above-mentioned PUSH button 10317 is displayed. An operation process during performance (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) is executed to execute a button variable lottery for changing the mode.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the in-performance timer 223ua has been updated to 0 in the in-effect timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 600) executed in the effect update process 27 (see Z3188 in FIG. 599), and the value is updated to 0. In other words, when it is determined that the variable effect display has ended (Z7102 in FIG. 600: Yes), processing for determining the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is executed.

The confirmation flag 223ub is a flag for indicating that it is confirmed that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 will be varied, and is set to ON when it is confirmed that the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 will be varied. This confirmation flag 223ub is set when the continuous hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) determines that the value of the production timer 223ua is 1 or more (Z7202 in FIG. 601: Yes), that is, the current value is variable. It is set to ON when the press lottery is won in the performance operation process (see Z7208 in FIG. 603) that is executed when it is determined that the performance is being displayed (see Z7354 in FIG. 603).

Then, in the performance timer process (see Z3281 in FIG. 600), the setting status is determined when the value of the performance timer 223ua becomes 0 (Z7102 in FIG. 600). Based on this determination result, the display mode of the PUSH button 10317 after the end of the variable effect display is determined. In addition, when the player operates the operating means after the end of the variable effect display, it is referenced in the repeated hit operation detection process 27 (see Z3681 in FIG. 601) (see Z7203 in FIG. 601), and if it is set to on. If it is determined, normal operation processing (see Z7206 in FIG. 602) is executed without executing the press lottery.

That is, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is determined based on the setting status of the confirmation flag 223ub, and the display mode after the end of the variable effect display is determined based on the operation on the operating means by the player executed after the end of the variable effect display. It is configured to vary the ease with which display values can be displayed variably. With this configuration, even during a period in which a new variable effect display is not executed, the operating means can be operated voluntarily.

<28th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 629. Similar to the twelfth embodiment described above, in the 28th embodiment, even when one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is being executed, the other special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is executed. , second special symbol variation) is configured to be executable. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the most advantageous gaming state for players who frequently play small winning games. On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) as in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that it is set so that

In addition, a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player will be more likely to be selected if the player wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery than if he wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability state. It is composed of

Furthermore, at the time when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the first special symbol to indicate the lottery result (small win win) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the second special symbol lottery that is being executed ( When the variation) has won a jackpot, the second special symbol variation that has won a jackpot is forcibly stopped and displayed with a lottery result indicating a loss.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation time that is set when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery is set when the special symbol fluctuation is set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that it is shorter than the fluctuation time of .

By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the potential state, the period until the first special symbol variation that has won the small win is stopped and displayed is changed to the second Even if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, you can invalidate the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to set a period during which the player can play the game with peace of mind without worrying that the potential state will end based on winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the present 28th embodiment, as the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a disadvantageous jackpot type in which a gaming state other than the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot game. The advantageous jackpot type for which a potential state is set after the end of the game can be set, and a different variable time can be set depending on the set jackpot type. Specifically, when an unfavorable jackpot type is set, it is configured so that a long fluctuation time is more likely to be set than when an advantageous jackpot type is set, and especially when an advantageous jackpot type is set. In this case, the variable time period (for example, 1 second) can be set shorter than the variable time period that is set when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery.

As a result, based on winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, which has a jackpot type (advantageous jackpot type) that is advantageous to the player, is changed to be disadvantageous to the player. This can be made more difficult to discard than the jackpot variation of the second special symbol for which a jackpot type (disadvantageous jackpot type) is set.

More specifically, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the unfavorable jackpot type is set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. The variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be approximately the same length (approximately 30 seconds). In other words, if you win an unfavorable jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, and after the second special symbol variation is executed in a 30-second variation time, you win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol will be small. It is configured such that the jackpot of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed earlier than the hit.

Therefore, after the disadvantageous jackpot variation of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to suppress an irregular game in which a left-handed game is performed in order to discard the disadvantageous jackpot variation being executed.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above in that it has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 that the main controller 110 has, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 203 that the audio lamp control device 113 has. A part of the configuration of the RAM 223, a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Different, otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be briefly explained. As mentioned above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, there are three game states, specifically, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). A probability state, a high probability state of normal symbols) and a potential state (a high probability state of special symbols, a low probability state of normal symbols) are configured to be settable.

The potential state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Further, the variable probability state is configured as a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state. In the following description, the advantageous potential state will be referred to as "RUSH mode". Further, the disadvantageous normal state will be referred to as the "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous variable probability state will be referred to as the "chance mode".

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 604. FIG. 604 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 604, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment described above (see FIG. 317). There is.

That is, the first central ball entry opening 64c is provided below the variable display unit 80. Furthermore, a small attacker 4650 is provided below the center first ball entrance 64c, which is opened when a small hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, since this small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first prize opening 64c on the left, right, and upper sides, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball during the small winning opening period of the first special symbol. . In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the small win of the first special symbol is provided because the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a chance mode in which a variable probability state is set). In the event that the second special symbol makes a long fluctuation due to a ball, the purpose is to forcibly end the long fluctuation, and during the RUSH mode, the player will be disadvantaged in the second special symbol lottery. If the result is a lottery result and the second special symbol variation (disadvantageous special symbol 2 variation) is executed to indicate the unfavorable lottery result, the disadvantageous special symbol 2 variation is forcibly terminated (with a stop display mode indicating a loss). This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly stopping the ball, and not for the purpose of winning prize balls.

In other words, even if the second special symbol fluctuates long, it is configured so that when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (120/480) of winning a small hit. Triggered by the start of the game (triggered by the final display of the stop symbol indicating a small win), the second special symbol, which had been fluctuating for a long time in a game state other than RUSH mode, is forcibly stopped with a missed stop symbol. can be done. In addition, during the RUSH mode, the second special symbol which is in the process of changing the disadvantageous special symbol 2 can be forcibly stopped with a stop symbol that is a miss. Therefore, if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the RUSH mode (for example, a variable probability state where a right-handed game is executed), and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. Also, the long fluctuation of the second special symbol can be ended without waiting for the long fluctuation of the second special symbol to end.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning a jackpot with the variable probability state set (if the time-saving end condition is met), the state changes to the probability state. It is configured to migrate to Therefore, in a right-handed game executed in a state where the variable probability state is set, the game ball flows down the right side area (the game area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80), and the right electric accessory 64ra There is a risk that the ball will jump over the area and enter the second ball entrance 640, causing the long variation of the second special symbol to be executed.

Since the configuration is such that the first special symbol lottery is executed even while the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol lottery may be executed multiple times. As a result, the above-mentioned time-saving termination condition is satisfied, and the system is configured to be able to shift from the variable probability state to the potential state. In this case, even if the potential state (RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is set, game balls cannot be won in the RUSH mode unless a new lottery for the second special symbol is executed. There was a problem in that it was difficult to provide a RUSH mode that was advantageous to the player (because it was not possible to obtain game balls by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery).

On the other hand, in the present 28th embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned 12th embodiment, the game ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 64r by a right-handed game during the probability change state, and the first special symbol lottery is performed. Since a game is played in which the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed during the variable probability state, the long variation of the second special symbol currently being executed is caused by the first special symbol lottery mainly executed during the variable probability state. It becomes possible to forcefully terminate the fluctuation. Therefore, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied in a state where a variable probability state is set and a RUSH mode (potential state) which is advantageous to the player is set, a situation may occur in which the second special symbol is fluctuating for a long time. can be restrained from doing so.

In addition, in the present 28th embodiment, even if a specific jackpot (potential jackpot) is won in the special symbol lottery, the RUSH mode (potential probability state) is configured to be executed (set) after the jackpot game ends. However, if a jackpot is won for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) (the jackpot game is executed), Since the special symbol variation is configured to be forcibly terminated, if the RUSH mode (potential state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, a new second special symbol variation will be started, and the second special symbol variation will be started. 2. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special symbol fluctuates for a long time.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the 12th embodiment described above, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and prize balls can be obtained by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The first special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed during a game state (RUSH mode). Specifically, the configuration is such that even in the RUSH mode (potential state) in which a low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is easy to win the normal symbol.

Then, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the RUSH mode and a small hit is won, the first special symbol variation is executed in a specific variation time (30 seconds), and the If the 2nd special symbol variation that is changing at the time when the 1st special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is a small hit variation, that small win variation is interrupted, and if it is a jackpot variation or a missed variation, a lottery is performed. The system is configured to forcibly stop the test in a display format that indicates that the result is an error.

With this configuration, even if you win a jackpot (unfavorable jackpot) that can trigger the end of RUSH mode in the second special symbol lottery executed during RUSH mode, the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation The unfavorable jackpot can be discarded by displaying the first special symbol as a symbol indicating a small hit win (determined display).

In addition, in the 28th embodiment, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, there is an advantageous jackpot in which the RUSH mode (potential state) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and a normal jackpot after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that you can win the unfavorable jackpot where the mode (normal state) is set, and the variation time of the second special symbol variation (advantageous special symbol 2 variation) that is set when winning the advantageous jackpot. Also, the variation time of the second special symbol variation (disadvantageous special symbol 2 variation) set when a disadvantageous jackpot is won is configured to be longer.

As a result, if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during RUSH mode, the fluctuation time can be longer if you win an unfavorable jackpot than if you win an advantageous jackpot, so the first special It is possible to make the symbols more likely to be discarded based on the result of the symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the discarding of the advantageous jackpot that would be advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode, a variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 small winning variation). In addition, the above-mentioned disadvantageous special symbol 2 variation (the second special symbol variation set when winning a disadvantageous jackpot) is also configured so that a variation time of 30 seconds is easily selected. As a result, during the special pattern 1 small hit fluctuation period, even if you win an unfavorable jackpot in the newly executed second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol will not be stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating an unfavorable jackpot. Before this, the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small win. Therefore, the period during which the special figure 1 small hit fluctuates can be set as a period (invincible period) in which the RUSH mode does not end.

In addition, as mentioned above, since it is configured so that the same length of variation time (30 seconds variation) is easily executed for the special pattern 1 small winning variation and the disadvantageous special pattern 2 variation during the RUSH mode, For example, even if you win a small hit with the first special symbol after winning an unfavorable jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during RUSH mode, the disadvantageous special symbol 2 fluctuation will end before the special symbol 1 small win fluctuation. It turns out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an irregular game in which, after determining that the disadvantageous special symbol 2 variation has been executed, a left-handed game is executed and the player aims to win a small win in the first special symbol lottery. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604, on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a right first ball entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67. A right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the opening 64r and the first right ball entrance opening 64r, and a right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64r while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second ball entry port 640 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through can enter. As shown in FIG. 604, the falling path of the game ball is set so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed can reach the second ball entrance 640. is set. In other words, even if you hit right in a high probability state (variable probability state) with a normal symbol where the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be in an open state, almost all the game balls that passed through the through gate 67 will enter the right first ball. Since the ball enters the opening 64r, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry opening 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the game so that it is possible to proceed with a right-handed game even in a variable probability state (chance mode).

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, it is possible to perform a left-handed game in a low-probability state of normal symbols than the number of first special symbol drawings that can be executed when a right-handed game is performed in a low-probability state of normal symbols. The configuration is such that the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed is likely to increase when the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed. Thereby, in a state where the normal mode (normal state) is set, it is possible to suppress the act of executing a right-handed game and executing the first special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, the period during which the special symbol 1 small win is fluctuating is a period during which the RUSH mode cannot end. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect (invincible mode) to indicate this to the player. As a result, during the period when the invincible mode is displayed, the second special symbol can be actively changed and prize balls can be won through the small winning game without worrying about the unfavorable jackpot game being executed. I can do it.

On the other hand, in the RUSH mode, if you have won an advantageous jackpot that is different from the disadvantageous jackpot, the fluctuation time of the advantageous special figure 2 fluctuation is shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot (for example, 1 second). is configured so that it is easy to select. In this way, by varying the fluctuation situation (fluctuation time) of the special symbol according to the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to display the variable manner of the second special symbol fluctuation based on the special symbol 1 small hit winning. can.

Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the RUSH mode is set, the RUSH mode is configured to continue until a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Then, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during RUSH mode without winning a jackpot, the system will shift to a special state (invincible mode high probability state) in which the above-mentioned invincible mode is easy to be executed. It consists of

Specifically, as a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the RUSH mode (potential state), the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode. It has a first potential confirmation table that is referenced until it is executed, and a second potential confirmation table that is referenced after the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode. The first potential probability table is configured so that a long (30 seconds) variable time is more likely to be selected when the first special symbol lottery is won. In other words, by executing the first special symbol fluctuation for a long time even though there is no small win, the number of first special symbol drawings executed per unit time decreases, and as a result, the unit It is configured so that the expectation level of winning a small hit by the first special symbol lottery per time is low.

Therefore, if the RUSH mode continues for a long time, it is possible to make the player perform a game that is more advantageous to the player, so it is possible to prevent the game in the RUSH mode from becoming monotonous, and it is possible for the player to start playing the game early. You can prevent yourself from getting bored with it.

<About the production content in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, among the various presentation contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, characteristic presentation contents will be executed. In the present 27th embodiment, in contrast to the above-mentioned 12th embodiment, part of the production content during the RUSH mode that is executed when the gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player is set. The difference is that , but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 605(a), the display mode when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery during the RUSH mode will be described. Figure 605(a) is a display that is displayed when a special symbol variation (special symbol 1 small winning variation) indicating that a small winning has been won in the first special symbol lottery is executed during the potential state (RUSH mode). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 605(a), when the special figure 1 small hit variation is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit wrapped in flames is displayed near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the character 811 is displayed downward. The text "Entering invincible mode!!" is displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot game based on a disadvantageous jackpot will not be executed. In other words, the above-described display mode is a guide notification mode for notifying that the current period is an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player.

Further, on the lower right side of the screen, a remaining period display for indicating the period during which the above-mentioned invincible mode continues, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 small winning fluctuation is displayed in the display area Dm28a. In FIG. 605(a), since it is immediately after the start of the special pattern 1 small winning variation, the words "30:00 seconds left" indicating the fluctuation time of the special pattern 1 small winning variation are displayed. The value of this remaining period display decreases as time passes, and when 30 seconds have passed and "0:00 seconds remaining" is displayed, the first special symbol will be displayed in a display mode indicating a small hit. A stop display (confirmation display) is displayed.

By displaying the remaining period in the display area Dm28a, the player can easily determine the remaining period of the invincible mode, so the player can play the game with enthusiasm in order to execute the second special symbol lottery more often during the invincible period. You can make it happen. In addition, in the present 28th embodiment, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the special pattern 1 small winning fluctuation (special pattern 2 small winning winning), and the special pattern 1 small winning fluctuation is stopped and displayed. When the second special symbol fluctuation (special pattern 2 small winning fluctuation) indicating the special drawing 2 small winning is stopped and displayed before the special drawing 2 small winning winning, the small winning game corresponding to the special drawing 2 small winning winning is executed. During the small winning game period, the remaining period of the special pattern 1 small winning fluctuation does not decrease, and after the small winning game ends, the remaining period of the special pattern 1 small winning fluctuation is reduced again. Therefore, even if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode, the remaining period of the invincible mode will not be reduced during the small win game, and the player will not be able to play the game during the invincible mode period. can be enjoyed to the fullest.

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the invincible mode period, if the player wins a disadvantageous jackpot, that is, a disadvantageous jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player will be notified to that effect. An exclusion effect is executed to notify the player.

Here, the contents of the exclusion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 605(b). FIG. 605(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of an elimination performance that is executed when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the invincible mode period.

As mentioned above, in the present 28th embodiment, the variation time of 30 seconds is easily set as the special symbol 1 small winning variation that is executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode. Similarly, when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the RUSH mode, a variable time of 30 seconds is easily set as a disadvantageous jackpot variation. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time set for the special pattern 1 small hit fluctuation and the fluctuation time set for the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation to be the same, the second special If you win an unfavorable jackpot in the symbol lottery, you can discard the unfavorable jackpot by winning a 1-small hit on a special drawing, so it is possible to make the period during which the 1-small winning on a special drawing is an advantageous period for the player (invincible mode). can.

However, if you win an unfavorable jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed immediately after the invincible mode is set, the special symbol 1 small hit fluctuation will be the first special symbol fluctuation, and the second special symbol fluctuation will be unfavorable. Each jackpot variation is executed for about 30 seconds, and even though the RUSH mode is in progress, a period continues in which no small winning games are executed, which may reduce the player's desire to play.

Therefore, if an unfavorable jackpot variation is executed during the invincible mode, as shown in FIG. It is configured to perform a performance. By providing a dedicated performance in this way, the player's attention can be drawn to the content of the performance performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a period in which a small winning game is not performed continues. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the above.

When the elimination effect is executed, a effect is executed in which a rabbit-shaped character 811 chases a turtle-shaped enemy character 860 at the bottom center of the display screen, and above it a message ``XX seconds left until the enemy is eliminated.'' ' will be displayed. Then, the value "10:00" displayed in the display area Dm28a indicating the remaining time of the special figure 1 small winning variation is inserted and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining period until the unfavorable jackpot is discarded is 10 seconds due to the special drawing 1 small win.

Furthermore, the display area Dm3 in which the guidance display mode "Right-hand hit" for guiding the gaming method in the RUSH mode is displayed is displayed smaller than the display in the normal RUSH mode (see FIG. 605(a)). . As a result, it is possible to detect a state in which it is difficult for a new second special symbol lottery to be executed during the RUSH mode, that is, a state where even if a right-handed game is performed, the player is at a disadvantage compared to during the normal RUSH mode. can be suggested to the person concerned. In other words, the size of the display area Dm3 is configured to suggest to the player the degree of advantage when playing the game using the gaming method according to the guidance display mode.

In addition, in the present 28th embodiment, the exclusion performance is configured to be executed only when the special symbol 1 small hit is fluctuating during the RUSH mode and when a disadvantageous jackpot is won with the second special symbol. , without being limited to this, for example, in some cases where a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 30 second variation time is selected, and this 30 second small winning variation is executed. In this case, the elimination effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol variation, or in some cases where an advantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variation time of 30 seconds may be used. It may be configured so that it is selected, and when this 30-second advantageous jackpot variation is executed, the exclusion performance may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol variation.

With this configuration, the effects of the exclusion performance include a special figure 1 small winning game (a small winning game that opens the small attacker 4650) and a special figure 2 small winning game (a small winning game that opens the first variable winning device 65). Since it is possible to provide a special figure 2 jackpot game (a jackpot game that opens the first variable prize winning device 65), even during the performance period of the exclusion performance to the player, It is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that a more advantageous game result will be provided.

In addition, it is configured so that a 30-second losing variation can be executed in a part of the case where a winning result is lost in the second special symbol lottery, and when this 30-second losing variation is executed, regardless of the presence or absence of the first special symbol variation. However, it may be configured to execute an exclusion effect, or the special pattern 1 small winning variation may be changed during the variation (for example, the special pattern 1 small winning variation) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery. It may also be possible to set a variable effect pattern in which the exclusion effect is executed from the timing when the remaining period of time becomes 20 seconds.

By configuring this way, even if the second special symbol lottery does not actually result in an unfavorable jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that he won an unfavorable jackpot during the invincible mode and that the unfavorable jackpot has been discarded. This allows the production effect to be enhanced. In addition, in the RUSH mode, in order to prevent players from being given too many prize balls in a short period of time, in a case where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol's deviation fluctuation is set to be long, Since the elimination performance can be executed using the fluctuation period of the losing fluctuation, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing due to the execution of the losing fluctuation for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 606, the contents of the performance during the invincible mode high probability state, which is set after the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode, will be described. FIG. 606 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the invincible mode high probability state.

In the 28th embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode, the type of variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the variation time of the special symbol variation is switched. It consists of Specifically, the small hit variation is selected from the variation pattern table (first potential confirmation table) in which 30 seconds variation is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol variation during small hit variation and part of the missing variation. The structure is such that the variation pattern table referred to is switched to the variation pattern table (second potential confirmation table) in which the 30 second variation is selected only at the time.

Therefore, in a state where the second potential confirmation table is referred to (in a state where the special symbol lottery is executed more than a predetermined number of times (50 times) during the RUSH mode), the first special symbol fluctuation other than the small winning fluctuation Since it ends early, it is possible to increase the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery per unit time, and as a result, the ratio of fluctuations in the special symbol 1 small winning per unit time can be increased. (Invincible mode high probability state).

When the invincible mode high probability state is set, the words "in high probability state" are displayed in the display area Dm28b at the bottom of the display screen, and a guidance mode for guiding the current game content is displayed below the display area Dm28b. ``It's easy to enter invincible mode!!'' is displayed. With these displays, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the RUSH mode is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player.

<About the electrical configuration in the 28th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 607 to 613. The 28th embodiment differs from the above-described 12th embodiment in that it includes a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the RAM 203, and a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. and a partial configuration of the RAM 223, but otherwise are the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 607(a), the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 607(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 607(a), the ROM 202 of the twenty-eighth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the twelfth embodiment described above (see FIG. 321(a)) in that the ROM 202 uses the first random number table 202a instead of the first random number table 202a. The winning random number 28 table 202va is replaced with the small winning random number table 202b, the small winning random number table 202vb is replaced with the small winning random number table 202vb, the jackpot type selection table 28 table 202vd is replaced with the small winning type selection table 202d, and the small winning type is replaced with the small winning type selection table 202e. The difference is that a variable pattern selection 28 table 202vf is provided in place of the type selection 28 table 202ve, a variable pattern selection 28 table 202vf is provided in place of the variable pattern selection table 202f, and a variable pattern scenario 28 table 202vg is provided in place of the variable pattern scenario table 202ka. be.

First, the contents of the first random number 28 table 202va will be explained with reference to FIG. 607(b). FIG. 607(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 28 table 202va. The first random number 28 table 202va is different from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 321(b)) in the twelfth embodiment described above for the state of special symbols (low probability state, high probability state). The difference is that the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is determined to be a jackpot, is defined differently, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 607(b), regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the acquired first win is the value that is determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The value of the random number counter C1 is defined as "7, 8", and the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 5" is defined as the value that is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol. . Since the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 479", the jackpot probability is 2/480 (1/240) in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the high probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability is 6/480 (1/80).

Next, the contents of the small winning random number 28 table 202vb will be explained with reference to FIG. 607(c). FIG. 607(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number 28 table 202vb. As shown in FIG. 607(c), the small winning random number table 202vb is different from the small winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 322(a)) in the above-described twelfth embodiment. The difference is that the range of the value of the first winning random number counter that is determined to be a win has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, for the first special symbol of the symbol type, the small hit determination value is defined in a range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "360 to 479" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol, For the second special symbol of the symbol type, the small hit determination value is defined in the range of "240 to 479" for the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1, regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

In other words, in the 28th embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/4 of the probability when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the probability of winning a small hit is about 1/2 of the probability when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that you can win a small prize. In addition, in this embodiment, when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small winning game is executed in which a small attacker 4650 in which a ball cannot (is difficult to) win during the small winning game is released. When a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the first variable winning device 65, which is released during the jackpot game, is released. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to have a high probability of winning a small hit, it is possible to prevent specific (prize balls) from being awarded excessively to the player. In addition, the second special symbol lottery is set to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery. In the probability state, small winning games can be executed frequently, making it easier to increase (or less likely to decrease) the number of balls held by the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd will be explained with reference to FIG. 608. FIG. 608 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 608, this jackpot type selection 28 table 202vd differs from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 323) in the twelfth embodiment described above in that the types of jackpot types that can be selected are changed. There is a difference. In addition, in conjunction with changing the types of jackpot types that can be selected, the setting values of the time saving counter 203f and the setting contents of the probability change flag 203g specified for each jackpot type are also different, and each jackpot type is different. The selection ratios for each type are also different. It should be noted that other elements, such as the type of variable prize winning device to be opened in the jackpot game and the details of the opening operation thereof, are the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 608, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, three jackpot types, "jackpot A28" to "jackpot C28", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Furthermore, two jackpot types, "jackpot D28" and "jackpot E28", are defined as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 608, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "jackpot A28" corresponds to the jackpot type for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 34". It is specified as follows. This "Jackpot A28" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and a normal mode (normal state) is set after the jackpot ends.

In this embodiment, similarly to the twelfth embodiment described above, the value of the time saving counter 203f set at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game ends) is configured to vary depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. However, if you win this "Jackpot A28", no matter which gaming state (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) you are in at the time of winning the jackpot, the value of the time saving counter 203f will change. 0 is set. Further, the probability change flag 203g is configured not to be set on (set off) at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished). In other words, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type is always set to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). Therefore, from the viewpoint of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game, this is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "jackpot B28" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79" as the jackpot type. ing. This "jackpot B28" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

When this "Jackpot B28" is won, the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value set depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. In some cases, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0; in the case of a variable probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100; and in the case of a definite state, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 50. It is stipulated that Further, it is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished). In other words, in the normal state, if you win "Jackpot B28", after the end of the jackpot game, a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, a probability variable state, and a probability state. In the case where "Jackpot B28" is won, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the time saving counter 203f is configured to be set to a larger value when "Jackpot B28" is won in the variable probability state than when "Jackpot B28" is won in the probability state. As explained in the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment, this time saving counter 203f is a counter for indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, and the counter value is increased based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. is subtracted and the counter value becomes 0, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

In other words, if you win "Jackpot B28" in the variable probability state, a gaming state in which it is difficult to set the low probability state of the normal symbol will be set than if you win "Jackpot B28" in the probability state. . In the twenty-eighth embodiment, since the probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, it is better to win "Jackpot B28" in the variable probability state. Also, if the player wins "Jackpot B28" in the probability state, it will be a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player.

Next, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), "jackpot C28" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" as the jackpot type. ing. This "jackpot C28" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

If this "Jackpot C28" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 10000, regardless of the gaming state (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) at the time of winning the jackpot. . Furthermore, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished). In other words, after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type is always set to a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).

As explained above, in the 28th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, "jackpot A28" is selected at a rate of 35%, and "jackpot B28" is selected at a rate of 45%. ``Jackpot C28'' is selected at a rate of 20%. No matter which jackpot type is selected, the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is the same (8 rounds), so from the perspective of the prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. , a jackpot game with no advantages or disadvantages is executed. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of the degree of advantage of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game, "jackpot A28" is the most disadvantageous to the player, and "jackpot B28" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Moreover, "Jackpot C28" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A28" and disadvantageous to the player than "Jackpot B28".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot D28" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 34". ing. This "Jackpot D28" has the same content as "Jackpot A28" which is one of the jackpot types of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) described above. In other words, if this "jackpot D28" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f will be set to 0, regardless of the gaming state (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) at the time of winning the jackpot. be done. Further, the probability change flag 203g is configured not to be set on (set off) at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished). In other words, after the end of the jackpot game, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is always set as the jackpot type. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game, this is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, "Jackpot E28" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". This "jackpot E28" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends.

If this "Jackpot E28" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100, regardless of the gaming state (normal state, variable probability state, potential state) at the time of winning the jackpot. . Furthermore, it is stipulated that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot game is finished). In other words, after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot type is always set to a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).

Next, with reference to FIG. 609, the contents of the small winning type selection 28 table 202ve in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 609 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 28 table 202ve. This small winning type selection table 202ve is different from the above mentioned small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) in that the small winning type is also defined for the first special symbol, and the small winning game The difference is that the opening target for the opening operation has been changed, the symbol confirmation time has been changed, and the control content for the special symbol fluctuation during execution has been changed, but other than that, it is the same. . The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the small hit type selection 28 table 202ve, for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the entire possible range of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 99". "Small win A28" is associated with this. Since the range of values that the small winning type counter C5 can take is 100 from "0 to 99", the percentage of "small winning A28" being selected when winning the small winning of the first special symbol lottery is 100% ( 100/100).

When "Small win A28" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the second attacker (small attacker) 4650 is opened for 0.1 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 604, the small attacker 4650 is arranged in a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win even if the opening operation is performed, and the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds. In the small winning game based on "small winning A28", the player hardly gets any prize balls.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the third symbol display device will not be displayed until the small win game (0.1 seconds) ends. On the display screen 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (for example, "341") indicating that the first special symbol lottery did not result in a jackpot. In other words, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, a display mode is displayed to inform the player that the small win has been won and that the small win game is being executed. It is configured so that it does not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a small winning game in which it is impossible (difficult to) win a prize ball is being executed (is being done), so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a small winning game is being executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to win the prize ball even though the player is playing the game, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

In addition, if you win "Small win A28", the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol, that is, the period in which the static display mode indicating the lottery result is continuously displayed is "0.1 seconds". A short period of time is specified. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode showing "Small win A28" until the small win game ends. Even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a while, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, when "Small hit A28" is selected, the process of interrupting or discarding the second special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) being executed is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the present 28th embodiment, when a small winning game is executed based on the result of one special symbol lottery (when a special symbol indicating a small winning is confirmed and displayed), The result of the special symbol lottery for the other special symbol fluctuation is determined, and the content of the control process to be executed for the other special symbol that is changing is changed based on the determination result.

More specifically, if the other special symbol is in a jackpot fluctuation or a loss fluctuation, the other special symbol fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation or loss fluctuation) is discarded (forced by a display mode that indicates a loss). If the other special symbol is a small winning variation, execute control to interrupt the small winning variation (stop the subtraction of the variation time until the small winning game ends). It is configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the RUSH mode where the potential state is set, if a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol is fluctuating, the jackpot will be won. It is possible to discard the variation and, if a small winning variation is in progress, not to discard the small winning variation. This makes it difficult to stop displaying the lottery result (big hit winning) of the second special symbol whose potential state can end, making it easier for players to enjoy the RUSH mode for a long time.

In addition, in the present 28th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, an advantageous jackpot in which the RUSH mode (potential state) is set again after the end of the jackpot game, and a normal mode ( It is configured so that different lengths of fluctuation time are set for unfavorable jackpots (normal state) and unfavorable jackpots, and specifically, winning an advantageous jackpot is better than winning an unfavorable jackpot. Also, the configuration is such that a short variation time (1 second) is easily selected.

Thereby, the first special symbol can be more easily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a small winning win during a special symbol variation for an unfavorable jackpot than during a special symbol variation for an advantageous jackpot. In other words, an unfavorable jackpot can be discarded more easily than an advantageous jackpot. Therefore, in the potential state, a situation is created in which a player wins a small hit in the second special symbol drawing, wins a small prize in the first special symbol drawing while winning a prize ball through the small winning game, and the unfavorable jackpot is likely to be discarded. It is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes the player look forward to being played.

Here, a brief explanation will be given of the control contents when interrupting the second special symbol variation in progress based on the fact that the first special symbol has won a small hit. When the control process for interrupting the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) being executed is executed, the process for interrupting the process for measuring the elapse of the variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed is executed. executed. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, and while the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, the second special pattern (special pattern 2 ) is executed to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n indicating the variation time (remaining variation time). Then, with the end of the small winning game as a trigger, the restart condition is established (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203n is restarted. With this configuration, while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small winning game is being executed, for example, the second special symbol variation that has been won may be stopped and displayed, and the winning games (big winning game, small winning game) may be executed repeatedly. may be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol fluctuation that is currently being executed is simply interrupted (skip), the second special symbol fluctuation that was being executed before the small winning game is executed after the restart condition is met. can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the results of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied in response to winning a small hit, a process is executed to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol variation in progress may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the second special symbol variation may be interrupted when the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed. In other words, even if the interruption condition is met, the update process that updates the variation time of the special symbol variation will continue to be executed, and if the update process is executed until the preset variation time has passed, it will be interrupted. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the conditions are met, and when it is determined that the suspension conditions are met, the stop display of the special symbol variation is not executed until the restart conditions are met. Thereby, there is no need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so the processing load can be reduced.

Next, returning to FIG. 609, among the contents stipulated in the small winning type selection 28 table 202ve, the small winning type that can be selected when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery ("small winning C28", small winning The contents of winning E28) will be explained. The value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of “0 to 89” is associated with “small win C28”, and the value of “90 to 99” is associated with “small win E28”. . Since the range of values that the small win type counter C5 can take is 100 values from "0 to 99", when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of "small win C28" being selected is 90%. (90/100), and the percentage of "Small win E28" being selected is 10% (10/100).

When "small win C28" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Also, when "Small win E28" is selected, the same small win game as the above-mentioned "Small win C28" is executed. In other words, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the first attacker 65, which is placed in a position where it is easy to win the game ball, is released for 1.5 seconds. A small winning game in which a player can easily win a prize ball is executed.

In other words, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the first small winning game allows the first attacker 65 to be opened and the game ball to win easily, and the second attacker 4650 is opened to allow the game ball to win. The second small winning game, which is difficult to play, is configured to be executable. The first small winning game and the second small winning game are different from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small winning game, the first small winning game is more advantageous than the second small winning game. It becomes a winning game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 609, the above-mentioned small win type (small win C28, small win E28) for executing the above-mentioned first small win game (small win game in which the first attacker 65 is opened) includes the above-mentioned small win type (small win C28, small win E28). A longer symbol determination time (0.5 seconds) is specified than the small win type (small win A28) that allows the execution of a 2-small win game (a small win game in which the second attacker 4650 is opened). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a period during which an effect can be executed that makes the player aware that he has won a small win and that a small win game will be executed, and the game is easy to understand for the player. can be provided. As mentioned above, since the second small winning game is a small winning game in which it is impossible (difficult) to obtain a prize ball, the symbol confirmation time is made shorter than the small winning type in which the first small winning game is executed. This can make it difficult for the player to recognize that he or she has won a small win and that a small win game will be executed.

Furthermore, even when "Small hit C28" and "Small hit E28" are selected, similar to the above-mentioned "Small hit A28", control is executed to interrupt or discard the other special symbol variation being executed. be done. In addition, the control content in this case differs from the above-mentioned "small hit A28" only in that the type of the other special symbol has been switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and other than that. are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when "Small hit E28" is selected, the time saving end condition for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is established. By configuring in this way, for example, the second special symbol lottery is executed during the chance mode, which is the variable probability state, and based on the fact that a small win in which "small win E28" is selected is won, from the "chance mode" It will shift to "RUSH mode".

In this way, by providing a time-saving termination condition that can be satisfied even when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number of times, players who are playing the "chance mode" are always given the "RUSH mode". Since the player can play the game while anticipating the transition to ``, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, in the present 28th embodiment, the small winning type (small winning E28) in which the time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on the small winning winning is specified only when the small winning winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. The present invention is not limited to this, and even when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win type for which the time-saving end condition can be satisfied may be selected. With this configuration, in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the "chance mode", it is possible to satisfy the time-saving end condition regardless of the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to make it easier for players who are playing the "RUSH mode" to expect a shift to the "RUSH mode".

Furthermore, in the present 28th embodiment, the time-saving end condition is established based on winning the small win E28 once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple times ( For example, a time-saving termination condition may be set that is satisfied when the winner is won (for example, 5 times). By providing such a time-saving termination condition, when the probability that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on a small winning win is set constant, it is possible to increase the rate at which a specific small winning type is selected. Therefore, it is possible to easily vary the period required until the time-saving termination condition is satisfied depending on the player's game results, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this way, if the pachinko machine 10 has a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when a specific small winning type is won multiple times (for example, five times), It is preferable to perform a number-of-times notification effect so that the player can grasp the remaining number of winnings necessary until the end condition is met.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, one type of time-saving termination condition that can be established based on a small winning is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of time-saving termination conditions may be provided. For example, if a specific The first time-saving ending condition is satisfied when the first small winning type, which is one of the small winning types, is won five times, and the second short winning type, which is one of the specific small winning types and different from the first small winning type. A second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a small winning type is won twice may be provided. The first small winning type may be configured to be more easily selected than the second small winning type. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that a different small winning type will be selected while allowing the player to grasp which time-saving termination clause is likely to be established.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, one type of time-saving termination condition that can be established based on a small winning win is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a jackpot type in which a variable probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, there is a jackpot type in which the time-saving termination condition is likely to be satisfied during the variable probability state, and a state in which the condition is difficult to satisfy. It may also be possible to select a jackpot type in which the end condition is difficult to satisfy.

More specifically, the first jackpot type can set a variable probability state in which the short-time termination condition is satisfied if a specific first small win type is won five times, and the first jackpot type is won three times in a specific first small win type. A second jackpot type that can set a variable probability state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied may be selectable. By configuring in this way, even for jackpot types in which the same probability variable state is set, the ease with which the time-saving termination condition is satisfied can be made different. In addition, in this case, it is good to perform an effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which jackpot type has been selected when a variable probability state is set, such as a time-saving ending condition that is most advantageous to the player. It is preferable that the configuration is such that an effect is executed to notify the remaining number of times until the condition is satisfied. Then, when the remaining number of times becomes 0, an effect is executed to incite whether or not the time-saving ending condition is satisfied, and if a jackpot type that has the time-saving ending condition that is most advantageous to the player is selected, executes the effect of directly transitioning to the RUSH mode, and if a time-saving ending condition other than the time-saving ending condition that is most advantageous to the player is set, then executes the effect of continuing the game in a variable probability state. It is best to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to enjoy knowing when to shift to the probability state, which is the "RUSH mode," in the variable probability state, which is the "chance mode."

In addition, a time-saving ending condition that can be established based on a small hit win (small-hit time-saving ending condition) and a time-saving ending condition that can be established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variable number of time-saving ending conditions) are set respectively. In the possible pachinko machine 10, the same time saving ending condition (for example, 50 times) is set as the varying number of time saving ending conditions, and only the small winning time saving ending condition is changed according to the jackpot type selected as described above. Alternatively, the same time saving ending condition (for example, winning a specific small winning type 5 times) may be set as the small winning time saving ending condition, and only the varying number of time saving ending conditions can be set as the jackpot type selected as described above. It may be different depending on the situation. By configuring in this way, the types of time-saving ending conditions that are likely to be established (small winning time-saving ending conditions, varying number of times shortening ending conditions) can be varied depending on the selected jackpot type, thereby further increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of variations time reduction condition is based on the total number of variations that is the sum of the number of variations of the first special symbol (number of drawings) and the number of variations (number of drawings) of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set a variation number time saving end condition that counts only the variation number (lottery number) of one special symbol.

In the 28th embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a specific lottery result, it is possible to discard or interrupt the other special symbol variation in progress. are doing. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which it is possible to discard or interrupt the special symbol variation in progress, the number of special symbol drawings (the number of variation starts) and the number of special symbol variations (the number of drawing results) are displayed. (number of times it was stopped and displayed) may not match. In this case, the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed may be used as the element for establishing the time-saving termination condition, or the number of times the special symbol variation has been executed (the number of times the special symbol variation has been executed (the number of times the lottery result is displayed in a stopped manner) may be used. (number of times) may be used. In particular, when using the latter number of times, for example, if the other special symbol variation that is being executed is discarded, the number of times will not be counted, and if the other special symbol variation that is being executed is interrupted. The number of times the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed after restarting (for example, restarted after the end of the jackpot) is counted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the time-saving termination condition is satisfied, and it is possible to keep the player interested while playing the game.

In the present 28th embodiment, when a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control to be executed for the other special symbol fluctuation is changed to the other special symbol fluctuation lottery result. Although it is configured so that it can be switched based on the variation status (remaining variation time) of the other special symbol variation, it is not limited to this. If the fluctuation pattern set for the special symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol fluctuation will be forcibly stopped (discarded) and the fluctuation time will be less than 30 seconds. In the case of a fluctuation pattern, the control contents may be configured to be switchable so as to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to discard the lottery results of the special symbol lottery that is being executed depending on the fluctuation status of the special symbol fluctuations that are being executed. The timing of the stop display can also make the player interested.

Furthermore, in this case, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time, is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation being executed, for example, the variation corresponding to a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player By simply defining the variation pattern table so that the pattern variation time becomes longer, it is possible to make it easier to forcibly stop (discard) special symbol variations corresponding to lottery results disadvantageous to the player. Note that the conditions used to determine the control content are not limited to these, and for example, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed, and the determination result of whether or not the lottery result satisfies specific conditions. The result of the control content may be determined based on the following. Further, the control content to be executed for the first special symbol variation in progress may be determined based on the combination of the first special symbol variation in progress and the lottery result of the second special symbol that won the small hit. .

Next, referring to FIG. 610, among the variation pattern selection 28 tables 202vf in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the first potential table 202vf1 and the second potential table 202vf2 that are referred to during the potential state are I will explain about it. First, FIG. 610(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf. As shown in FIG. 610(a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf is referred to during the potential state with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 17) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the fluctuation pattern table has been changed, and since the time saving state is not set as the gaming state, the name of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 17) has been changed to the probability variation table 202f2. are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610(a), the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf includes a normal table 202f1 that is referenced during the normal state, a variable probability table 202f2 that is referenced during the variable probability state, and a table 202f2 for variable variation that is referenced during the variable probability state. A first potential certainty table 202vf1 and a second potential certainty table 202vf2 to be referenced are defined.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, immediately after the potential state is set, the first potential table 202vf1 is referenced, and after that, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the second potential table 202vf2 is referenced. It is configured so that The content defined as the variation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is different between the first potential probability table 202vf1 and the second potential probability table 202vf2.

Here, the contents of the first potential confirmation table 202vf1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 610(a). FIG. 610(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first potential confirmation table 202vf1. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, during the potential state (RUSH mode), the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed in which a lottery opportunity is established by entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game. In order to be executed, a short variation time is selected for the second special symbol variation.

In addition, if you win a common symbol in the common symbol lottery, which is executed by the game ball passing through the through gate 67, by right-handed game in the rush mode (RUSH mode), the electric accessory 64r will be released. The game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64ra, and the first special lottery is executed. When a small win is won in this first special symbol lottery (when "small win A28" is selected), the second special symbol variation in progress is interrupted or discarded.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the first potential confirmation table 202vf1, if the type of special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the acquired A short jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined for the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (0 to 198), and if the judgment result is a small hit, the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is A small winning variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range of values obtained (0 to 198), and if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 149". On the other hand, a short variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, and a variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined for the range "150 to 198".

In addition, if the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the jackpot type is "Jackpot D28" which is a disadvantageous jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player among the jackpots, the acquired A jackpot variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the jackpot is an advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player among the jackpots whose judgment result is a jackpot. In the case of the type "Jackpot E28", a short jackpot fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and the judgment result is a small hit. In this case, a small winning variation with a variation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the obtained variation type counter CS1 can take, and if the result of the judgment is negative, the obtained variation type For the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the counter CS1 can take, a deviation of 1 second is specified.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 609, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a small hit win, the other special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation. In such a case, the structure is such that the jackpot fluctuation is discarded (forcibly stopped). The above-described first potential probability table 202vf1 is configured such that when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a variable time of 30 seconds is selected, and a small win is selected in the first special symbol lottery. The configuration is such that the variable time of 30 seconds is selected even if the player wins.

In other words, during the period when you win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery and the small win fluctuation is executed for 30 seconds, even if you win an unfavorable jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation is guaranteed. It is configured to be discarded. Therefore, during the period in which the first special symbol fluctuation is executing the small winning fluctuation, it becomes an advantageous period in which there is no chance of winning an unfavorable jackpot in which the RUSH mode (potential state) ends. The twenty-eighth embodiment is configured to be able to execute an "invincible mode" (see FIG. 605) as an effect to indicate that this advantageous period has arrived. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a period during which he or she can play the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the variable time of 30 seconds is selected both when a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, for example, even if you win an unfavorable hit in the second special symbol lottery and win a small win in the first special symbol lottery during the 30-second second special symbol fluctuation period (disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation period), you will be unfavorable first. Since jackpots are stopped and displayed, the configuration is such that disadvantageous jackpot fluctuations are not discarded. With this configuration, for example, after realizing that the second special symbol variation has been executed for a long time (30 seconds) due to a right-handed game, you can execute a left-handed game and perform the first special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the execution of irregular games such as aiming for a small winning prize.

Furthermore, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a longer variable time is selected than the variable time selected when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (approximately 50%), so during the RUSH mode, by continuously executing the second special symbol lottery. , most of the jackpot fluctuations of the first special symbol lottery can be discarded. On the other hand, if you win an advantageous jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, that is, a jackpot E28 which is a jackpot type in which the RUSH mode is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol variation with a variation time of 1 second (advantageous Since the jackpot variation) is executed, it can be made more difficult to be discarded due to the small win of the first special symbol lottery than the disadvantageous jackpot variation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 610(b), in the first potential confirmation table 202vf1, when the first special symbol lottery is a winning result, a variable time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of about 1/4. It is configured as follows. In this way, by making it possible to select a long variation time even in the case of a lottery result other than a small hit winning, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be changed to the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed. It is possible to prevent discrimination based on the Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of the first special symbol lottery that is executed during the probability state, it is possible to suppress excessively setting the "invincible mode" and providing an excessively advantageous game to the player. be able to.

Next, the contents of the second potential confirmation table 202vf2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 610(c). FIG. 610(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second potential confirmation table 202vf2. In this embodiment, when a specific transition condition is satisfied during the RUSH mode (potential state), the type of the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be switched. Until a specific transition condition is met, the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation is selected with reference to the first potential probability table 202vf1 described above, and after a specific transition condition is met, the second potential probability is selected. It is configured such that the variation time of the special symbol variation is selected with reference to the table 202vf2.

The second potential probability table 202vf2 is different from the first potential probability table 202vf1 described above in that the length of the variable time that can be selected when the first special symbol lottery is won is different. However, everything else is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 610(c), in the second potential confirmation table 202vf2, if the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the result of the judgment is incorrect, the acquired variation A short variation with a variation time of 1 second is defined for the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the type counter CS1 can take. In other words, in the case of winning in the first special symbol lottery, the winning variation with a variation time of 1 second is always executed.

With this configuration, the first special symbol variation executed during the RUSH mode will not be varied for a long time except for the small hit variation (invincible mode), so the first special symbol lottery per unit time It is possible to increase the number of times of execution of , compared to the state where the variable time is selected with reference to the first potential confirmation table 202vf1, and also to make it easier to increase the length of the invincible mode period that occupies the game period. can.

That is, during the RUSH mode, it is possible to set a second period that is more advantageous to the player than the first period in which the first potential table 202vf1 is referred to. Therefore, a player playing a game in the RUSH mode can be made to play the game while expecting that a specific transition condition will be met.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a special The number of times the symbol variation is executed is specified, and specifically, when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the second period is configured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the player in the RUSH mode is allowed to play the game while expecting not to win the jackpot. Further, when the second period is set, it becomes more difficult to win a jackpot (a state in which jackpot fluctuations are more likely to be discarded), making it easier to continue the RUSH mode for a long period of time.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg will be explained with reference to FIG. 611. FIG. 611 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg. As shown in FIG. 611, in the 28th embodiment, when the potential state is set, the variation time is selected by referring to different variation patterns depending on the number of special symbol variations (number of special symbol variations). It is configured to do so.

Specifically, the first potential probability table 202vf1 is referred to from the time the potential state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, and after that, the second potential probability table 202vf2 is referenced. It is configured so that In other words, when the period of the potential state (RUSH mode) becomes longer, the second potential probability table 202vf2, which is more advantageous to the player than the first potential probability table 202vf1, is referred to. Thereby, the player in the RUSH mode can be motivated to continue playing the game in the RUSH mode for a long period of time.

Note that in the present 28th embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg are defined so that the longer the RUSH mode continues, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. Based on the technical idea of configuring the system so that the degree of advantage to the player is varied, another configuration may be used. For example, immediately after the RUSH mode is set, the state is most advantageous to the player. The contents of the variation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg may be defined as follows. With this configuration, the players who have entered the RUSH mode can be made to equally play games with advantageous conditions.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the degree of advantage to the player is varied by varying the variation pattern (variation time) that is selected when the first special symbol lottery results in a winning result; however, this is not limited to this. For example, the degree of advantage to the player may be varied by varying the variation pattern (variation time) selected when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, that is, the length of the invincible mode period. 2 By changing the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is selected when winning an advantageous jackpot by special symbol lottery, or by changing the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is selected when winning an unfavorable jackpot, the game It may also be configured such that the degree of advantage over the person is varied.

In this case, for example, 30 seconds and 2 seconds can be selected as the variable time that can be selected when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a disadvantageous jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. As the variation time selected in this case, it is preferable that a variation time longer than 30 seconds and a variation time shorter than 30 seconds be selectable. With this configuration, if an unfavorable jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the small winning fluctuation of the first special symbol, the unfavorable jackpot may or may not be discarded depending on the selected fluctuation time. It is possible to create cases. In an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the 30-second special symbol variation is more likely to be selected when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery than in an unfavorable state, and when the second special symbol variation is an unfavorable jackpot. It is preferable to configure the system so that a variable time longer than 30 seconds is likely to be selected in the event of winning.

Furthermore, according to the above example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a variable time of 2 seconds can be selected, so for example, if an unfavorable jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the unfavorable jackpot fluctuation Even after this is executed, it is possible to cancel the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation by winning a small win in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to have the possibility of discarding the disadvantageous jackpot variation until the second special symbol indicating the disadvantageous jackpot win is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, there are two types of variation pattern tables that are referred to during the probability state, and the degree of advantage to the player is different depending on the type of variation pattern table that is referred to. Three or more types of variation pattern tables may be provided to be referenced during a state. Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, an example is shown in which one switching timing is provided for switching the referenced fluctuation pattern table in the fluctuation pattern scenario 28 table 202vg, but the present invention is not limited to this, and fluctuations occur at multiple timings. The scenario contents may be defined so that the pattern table changes.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation is set as the transition condition for switching the fluctuation pattern table, but the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation is not limited to this, and for example, it is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, switching the variable pattern table based on winning a specific small win, or changing the variable pattern table based on the number of times the RUSH mode is set consecutively with a jackpot game in between (number of consecutive games) You may also switch. Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of transition conditions as described above, the referenced variation patterns may be configured to differ depending on the order in which each transition condition is satisfied, for example, each transition condition is A special variation pattern table is provided that can be referenced only when a transition condition is met, and the state in which the special variation pattern table is referenced is the most advantageous state or the most disadvantageous state for the player. It is preferable to specify the contents of the special fluctuation pattern table.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the transition conditions are met, but also in the order in which the transition conditions are met.

Next, with reference to FIG. 612, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 612 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 612, the RAM 203 of the twenty-eighth embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 21) by deleting the second special symbol execution area 203b and Added storage area 203va, second special symbol holding ball counter 203vb, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203vc, special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd, special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve, time-saving end standby flag 203vf. They are different in that they are the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203vb is a storage area for temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery right of the first special symbol was configured to be memorizable up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), but the lottery right of the second special symbol was not configured to be memorizable. , at the time when the lottery right for the second special symbol is acquired, if the state allows the execution of the second special symbol lottery, each acquired value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b, and the second special symbol is immediately drawn. It was configured to execute a symbol lottery.

On the other hand, the twenty-eighth embodiment is different in that the second special symbol is also configured to store lottery rights up to a predetermined number (four). The contents of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203vb differ from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a described above in the first embodiment by simply changing the type of special symbol stored. Other contents are the same. That is, in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, each of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1. Each value is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203va are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , special symbol variations based on the various stored values are started.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Each of the reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203va) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting conditions for each special symbol are satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be executed promptly.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is a counter for measuring the number of lottery rights (reserved balls) of the second special symbol, and is a counter for counting with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. The difference is that the number of balls is changed from the first special symbol reserved ball number to the second special symbol reserved ball number, and other than that, they are the same.

This second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is detected during a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts the number of held balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performance performed on the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display performance performed on the third symbol display device 81) up to a maximum of four times. The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203vb (that is, the number of reserved balls) is determined based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203va, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203vb is incremented by 1. It is.

The special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203vd is a flag indicating whether or not the variation of the first special symbol is such that the value of the time saving counter 203f should be subtracted when the variation is stopped. This special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203vd is set when the value of the time saving counter 203f is determined to be larger than 0 in the first special symbol variation start processing 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614) (S10301 in FIG. 614: Yes ), is set to on (S10302 in FIG. 614), and when it is determined that the special map 1 subtraction flag 203vd is on in the time saving update process (in the time saving update process), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted and then set to off. be done.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see S10221 in FIG. 620). Similarly, in the second special symbol lottery, if a jackpot is won, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 28 (not shown) is set to off. In addition, by setting the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203vd to OFF when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, if the variation of the first special symbol has temporarily stopped after the jackpot game, the variation will be stopped. After restarting and when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203vd is off, the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted. Skip the process and execute the process to stop the fluctuation.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203ve is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f should be subtracted when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped. The detailed content differs from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 subtraction flag 103vd only in that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other than that, the detailed content is the same. The explanation will be omitted.

The time-saving end standby flag 203vf is a flag indicating that a special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the end conditions of the time-saving state has been started. This time-saving end standby flag 203vf determines whether the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 (that is, the final variation of the prescribed number of times in the time-saving state) in the first special symbol variation start process 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614). (S10303), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), it is set to ON (S10304 in FIG. 614).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S10908 in FIG. 621), which is the special symbol fluctuation stop timing, is executed, it is set to OFF. With this configuration, when the time saving end standby flag 203vf is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any of the time saving end timings arrives, the time saving end standby flag 203vf is reliably set according to each timing. can perform time-saving termination processing.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the 28th embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 614 to 622. The twenty-eighth embodiment differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment described above by adding the control process to update the time-saving counter 203f and the control process executed when a small win is won. The contents and the control processing contents corresponding to the above-mentioned differences are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Note that in the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control processing of the main control device 110 is explained with reference to the first embodiment described above, so the content of the control processing of the main control device 110 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is explained below. In the description, the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be cited as appropriate.

First, the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208) will be explained with reference to FIG. 614. FIG. 614 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208). This first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208) is a game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that instead of , processing is executed according to the value of the time saving counter 203f, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation start process 28 (S10208) is executed, first, the same processes of S301 to S307 as the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above are executed. do. Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S10301). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S10301: Yes), the special map 1 subtraction flag 203vd is set to ON (S10302), and the process moves to S10303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10301 that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not a value greater than 0 (S10301: No), the gaming state is the normal state, so the process is immediately ended. In this way, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0, that is, when the time is being shortened, by setting the special chart 1 subtraction flag 203vd to ON, the time saving is started when the fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to determine whether the fluctuation has occurred, and to update the time saving end condition (subtract the value of the time saving counter 203f) when the fluctuation is stopped.

After executing the process of S10302 described above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303). That is, it is determined whether the final fluctuation is the condition for ending the time saving state. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203f is 1 (S10303: Yes), the time-saving end standby flag 203vf is set to ON (S10304), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 1, this process is ended as it is because it is not the final change in the time saving gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) will be explained. FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331) is a process based on the setting status of the time saving end standby flag 203vf, in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above. They are different in that they have been added and in that they have changed the process that is executed when the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, but other than that they are the same.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (S10331), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether the time saving end condition has been met and the state is on standby, that is, whether the final variation of the time saving is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end is determined. It is determined whether the standby flag 203vf is set to on (S10401). If it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203vf is on (S10401: Yes), the currently set time saving state period has ended, so the game state storage area ( (not shown) is set to the normal state (S10402), and the time saving end standby flag 203vf and the special map 2 subtraction flag 203ve are set to OFF (S10403). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S10404), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S10405), and the process moves to S10406. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203vf is not on (S10401: No), the final variation of the time saving state is not being executed, so the processes of S10402 to S10405 are skipped, The process moves to S10406.

In this way, if you are waiting for the end of the time saving state (the final variation of the time saving state has started with the other special symbol), the game By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state will continue with the other special symbol until the change of the special symbol that is undergoing the final change in the time-saving state ends. It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on. Therefore, appropriate games can be provided to the players.

Next, in the process of S10406, the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number 28 table 202va (S10406), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S406), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot, (S406: Yes), the process of S407 to S410, which is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above, is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S406, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot (a miss or a small win) (S406: No), the special figure 1 miss variation process 28 is executed (S10407), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 616, the contents of the special figure 1 off variation processing 28 (S10407) will be explained. FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off variation process 28 (S10407). In this special symbol 1 winning variation process 28, when a big hit has not been won in the first special symbol lottery (when a winning has been lost), a process for determining whether or not a small winning has been won is executed. In addition, regarding the detailed contents, the only difference is that the processing target has been switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol from the above-mentioned special symbol 2 off fluctuation processing (see S1011 in FIG. 41). and are otherwise the same.

In the special symbol 1 off variation process 28 (S10407), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result (the lottery result in S406 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 28 (see FIG. 615)) is a small win (S3111) .

If it is determined that the small win has been won in the process of S3111 (S3111: Yes), information indicating a special symbol 1 small win is set for the small win flag 203k (S3112), and the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The result is set to a small win (S3113), and then the small win symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3113), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is a miss (S3111: No), the miss symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is is set (S3115), and this processing ends.

As explained above, the special symbol 1 off variation process 28 (S10407 in FIG. 616), which is executed as one process of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (see S10208 in FIG. 614), that is, the variation of the special symbol ( By setting the small win flag 203k on when it is determined that a small win has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting the lottery (lottery), the small win flag 203k is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops. Processing corresponding to a small winning win can be easily executed based on the setting situation.

The small hit flag 203k used in this embodiment includes a special pattern 1 area indicating that a small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special pattern 2 area indicating that a small win was won in the second special symbol lottery. If a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the flag of the special symbol 1 area is set to ON, and if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the flag is set to on. , the flag of the special figure 2 area is set to ON. Thereby, even if a small hit is won twice in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily memorized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 617, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) will be explained. FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning, compared to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) executed in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that processing for selecting is added, but other than that, they are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (S10332) is executed, the same processes from S501 to S505 as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 35) are executed, and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S501: No), the special drawing 1 out of stock variation pattern selection process 28 is executed (S10501), and then the process moves to the process of S503 described above. do. The contents of the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) will be described later with reference to FIG. 618.

Here, with reference to FIG. 618, the contents of the special figure 1 off fluctuation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) will be explained. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501). In the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501), the same processing content as the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) of the seventh embodiment described above is carried out by changing the target from the second special symbol. The process of switching to the first special symbol is executed.

When the special pattern 1 off variation pattern selection process 28 (S10501) is executed, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the first special symbol (special pattern 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S10591: No), The same process as S1307 to S1309 of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S10597 to S10599), and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a small win in the process of S10591 (S10591: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is acquired (S10592), and the small win type is determined based on the value of the acquired small win type counter C5. Selection 28 The small winning type is selected with reference to the table 202ve (S10593). Next, the same process as the process of S1304 to S1306 of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1207 in FIG. 43) is executed with the processing target changed to the first special symbol (S10594 to S10596), and the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 619, the first special symbol variation execution process (S10205) will be explained. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the same processes S701 to S705 as the first special symbol variation execution process (see S205 in FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above are executed. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 620, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221) will be explained. FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221). This first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (S10221) determines that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38). (S801: No), that is, when the first special symbol variation to be stopped this time is a missing variation, the special figure 1 missing stop process 28 (S10801) is executed. The difference is that the processing content that is executed when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203h is set on (S801: Yes) is changed. For convenience of explanation, the number (S number) assigned to each process and the wording of the process contents are different, but the first special symbol fluctuation stop process in the first embodiment described above (Fig. 38 Detailed explanation of the same processing contents as in step S207) will be omitted.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 28 (S10221) is executed and it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on (S801: Yes), next, when the special symbol 2 is fluctuating, i.e. It is determined whether the second special symbol variation is being executed (S10802), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation is in progress (S10802: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop indicating the stop of the special symbol variation. A command is set (S10803), the second special symbol on the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed at the removed symbol (S10804), the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is set to 0 (S10805), and the process proceeds to S10806. Transition.

In other words, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lottery result indicating a jackpot, the processing for forcibly stopping the special symbol fluctuation in progress due to a miss is executed in the above-mentioned processing of S10803 to S10805. . In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2 variation that is being executed, the special symbol variation that is being executed is forcibly stopped when it misses. With this configuration, after the end of the jackpot game, when both the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are held, both special symbol fluctuations can be executed at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lottery result indicating a jackpot, it is configured to be forcibly stopped due to a loss regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 2 variation that is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control contents may be varied according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, if it is determined that the second special symbol variation is not executed (S10802: No), the processes of S10803 to S10808 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S10809.

In the process of S10806, in order to determine whether the special pattern 2 fluctuation that was determined to be changing in the process of S10802 is a jackpot fluctuation, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S10806), and the flag 203i is turned on. If it is determined that it is (S10806: Yes), the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off (S10807), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S10808), and the process moves to S10809. Moreover, in the process of S10806, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S10806: No), the process of S10807 and S10808 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S10809. That is, the processing of S10807 to S10808 is a processing for discarding the result of the special symbol lottery in which the jackpot has been won. Thereby, it is possible to prevent information regarding the jackpot from remaining after the special figure 2 variation in progress is forced to stop.

In the process of S10809, a jackpot scenario is set based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (S10809), and the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203h, the special chart 1 subtraction flag 203vd, the special chart 2 subtraction flag 203ve, and the time saving end standby are set. The flag 203vf and the probability change flag 203g are set to OFF, and the value of the time saving counter 203g is reset to 0 (S10810). After that, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S10811), the special symbol 1 confirmation command is set (S10812), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot. (S10813), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing 28 (S10801) will be explained. FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing 28 (S10801). In this special figure 1 missing stop processing 28 (S10801), the same process as the special figure 2 missed stop process (see S1508 in FIG. 46) of the first embodiment described above is performed, and the processing target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. They are different in that they are executed by switching to the symbol and executing the small hit process 28 (S10902) and the time saving update process (Fig. 10908), but other than that they are the same, so detailed explanation will be given. omitted.

Here, the small winning process 28 (S10902) executed in the special figure 1 missing stop process 28 (see S10801 in FIG. 621) will be explained with reference to FIG. 622. FIG. 622 is a flowchart showing the details of the small winning process 28 (S10902). In this small win process 28 (S10902), various control processes corresponding to the winning small win type are executed. Specifically, when a specific small winning type (small winning A, B, C) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. configured to run.

When the small hit process 28 (S10902) is executed, first, the small win type set for this special symbol change is read out (S11001), and the read small win type is "Small win A or Small win C". ” (S11002). If it is determined that it is "Small hit A" or "Small hit C" (S11002: Yes), it is determined whether the current special symbol is changing (the other special symbol is changing) (S11003), If it is determined that the figure is changing (S11003: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure change is a small winning change (S11004).

If it is determined in the process of S11004 that the small hit is fluctuating, the temporary stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation in progress is interrupted (temporary stop), that is, the current process is set when the first special symbol is If it is small hit processing 28 when the small hit stops, the temporary stop flag (special pattern 2 temporary stop flag) corresponding to the second special symbol, and the current process is the small hit when the second special symbol stops. If it is the winning process 28, the temporary stop flag (special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v) corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON (S11005), and a temporary stop command indicating ON of the temporary stop flag is set (S11006). ), this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S11004, if it is determined that the small hit fluctuation is not in progress, that is, if it is determined that it is a jackpot fluctuation or a losing fluctuation (S11004: No), it indicates that the special symbol fluctuation in progress is stopped. A special symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S11007), the first special symbol display device 37 stops and displays the corresponding special symbol as a missing symbol (S11008), and the fluctuation time counter ( The value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is set to 0 (S11009).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h or special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to on based on the forced stop special drawing fluctuation (S11010), and whether or not it is set to on is determined. If it is determined that there is a jackpot (S11010: Yes), the corresponding jackpot flag (special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h or special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i) is set to off (S11011), and the stored information regarding the jackpot is deleted (S11012). ), this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S11003, if it is determined that the special figure is not changing (S11003: No), the processes of S11004 to S11006 are skipped and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, if it is determined that it is not a "small win A" or "small win C" (S11002: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a "small win B", the value of the time saving counter 203f It is determined whether is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S11013). If it is determined that the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S11013: Yes), then it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203vf is set to on (S11014), and the time-saving end standby flag 203vf is set to ON. When it is determined that it is not on (S11014: No), that is, when it is determined that it is not the final change of the variable probability state, the time saving end standby flag 203vf is set on (S11015), and the process moves to the process of S11003 described above. .

As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the processing content is determined in accordance with the content of the special symbol variation being executed. More specifically, at the time when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol drawing (at the time when the special symbol indicating a small winning winning is stopped and displayed), the lottery result of the other special symbol variation that is being executed If the lottery result is a specific lottery result (for example, a loss, a jackpot), the other special symbol variation that is being executed is discarded (forced stop of a loss), and if it is other than a specific lottery result is configured so that the other special symbol variation in progress can be interrupted. In other words, when a specific condition for executing special processing is established for the special symbol variation being executed, the content of the special processing is determined by referring to the lottery result of the special symbol being executed. .

With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the lottery result of the other special symbol variation that is being executed at the time when one special symbol wins a small winning (the time when the small winning stops).

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the content of the special process determined when a specific condition is satisfied may be varied depending on the set gaming state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, only "suspension" is determined as a special process even if the specific condition is met, and when the variable state is set, "suspension" or "suspension" is determined as the special process. The configuration may be such that "discard" is set. By making the determination of the special process different depending on the game state set in this way, it is possible to provide diversity in the gameplay in each game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned small winning process 28 is executed both when a small winning is won with the first special symbol and when a small winning is won with the second special symbol. Without limitation, the content of the special process determined may be different depending on the type of special symbol for which the specific condition is met. It may be configured such that "discard" is more easily determined when a specific condition is satisfied with a special symbol. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is more difficult to satisfy than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is more difficult to win a small hit), or the specific condition is established. In this case, the conditions under which "discard" is determined are such that it is more difficult to satisfy the specific condition for the first special symbol than it is for the second special symbol. As a result, the content of the special processing can be varied depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is met, so the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the present 28th embodiment is different from the above-described 12th embodiment in that it is configured so that a small win can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. There is. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot can be canceled due to the small win in the other, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the proportion of the probability-variable jackpot at the time of jackpot winning can be surely varied.

In the above-described 28th embodiment, the condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of special processing (interruption or discard) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is based on the other special symbol variation. This shows the conditions that will be met when a specific small win is won with a variation (for example, the second special symbol variation), but other than this, there may also be an opportunity to establish a specific condition. For example, if the ball is in a specific It may be configured such that a specific condition is satisfied when a ball enters the entrance of the pachinko machine 10, or a state in which the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise occurs and the power supply is temporarily turned off). The configuration may also be such that the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the system is in a state where the system is disconnected. In addition, the gaming method executed by the player may be an illegal gaming method (for example, a gaming method in which a magnetic sensor is provided to detect magnetic force and the magnetic sensor detects magnetic force, or an impact detection method that detects an impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided and the specific condition may be established when the shock detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of shock.

In addition, in each of the embodiments described above, when the special symbol variation that is executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (when the probability variable state or time saving state is set) is discarded (forced stop), , It is configured so that the time saving number (probability variation number) is not added according to the discarded special symbol variation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured such that a potential state is set when the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) in a state where a probability change state is set, If the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state is discarded (forcibly stopped), the time saving number (probability variation number) is configured not to be added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (probability variation number) until the probability variation state ends on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the time reduction number. The configuration is such that the display mode is not updated. Therefore, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special symbol variation has been discarded without updating the time saving number. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (probability change number) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of special symbol fluctuations. If it is machine 10, the display mode will be restored based on the special symbol change being discarded (for example, if the remaining time reduction number is displayed, it will be added, if the elapsed time reduction number is displayed, it will be added). If so, you just need to execute the effect to make it subtract).

In addition, as a transition condition for transitioning from a variable probability state to a potential state (a termination condition (time-saving termination condition) for ending a high-probability state of normal symbols), multiple time-saving termination conditions (for example, the first special symbol A first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times, and a second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed 5 times). In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a termination condition that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving termination conditions (for example, a condition corresponding to the second special symbol variation five times). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the player of the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only "5"), the first special symbol variation is executed immediately after the probability variation state is set. Even if it is, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to be updated. Then, in a state where the first special symbol variation has been executed 95 times after the probability variation state is set, if the first special symbol variation is further executed (when the first special symbol variation is executed for the 96th time), , is configured to execute display control to update the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4". In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the time saving number display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, depending on the special symbol type in which special symbol variation is executed during the probability change (time saving) state. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the end of the variable probability state in an easy-to-understand manner.

<About the control contents of the audio lamp control device in the 28th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 623 to 629, the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. The control content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is different from the control content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment described above. (see S4121 in FIG. 334), the variable display setting process 28 (see S14121 in FIG. 623), and the various counter update processes 28 (see S14111 in FIG. 628) in place of the various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72). ) is different from the small win related process (see S4504 in FIG. 65) in that the small win related process 28 (see S14504 in FIG. 629) is executed, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted. Note that in the twelfth embodiment described above, the content of the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 is explained with reference to the first embodiment described above, so the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is In explaining the contents, the control processing contents of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be cited as appropriate.

First, the contents of the variable display setting process 28 (S14121) will be explained with reference to FIG. 623. This fluctuation display setting process 28 (S14121) is different from the above-mentioned fluctuation display setting process 13 (see S4121 in FIG. 334) in that the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) fluctuation during the potential state ( Variable display setting process 28 (S15102) for special figure 1 for setting the variable display content) and special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102) for setting the production mode (fluctuating display content) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation The difference is that the variable display setting process 28 for 2 (S15104) and the production mode setting process 28 (S15105), which is executed regardless of the special symbol type, are executed, and the other contents are the same.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102) will be explained with reference to FIG. 624. FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102). In this special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102), in contrast to the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display setting process (see S5104 in FIG. 70), a process for setting the performance mode during small winning fluctuation is executed. They differ in some respects.

When the special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (S15102) is executed, first, the same processes of S5201 and S5202 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display setting process (see S5104 in FIG. 70) are executed. Then, it is determined whether the current special drawing 1 fluctuation is a small winning fluctuation (S15201), and if it is determined that it is a small winning fluctuation (S15201: Yes), a display command is set to indicate an invincible state. (S15202), sets the invincible flag 223va on (S15203), sets a potential variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol based on the extracted variation pattern (S5206), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S15201, if it is determined that it is not a small winning variation (S15201: No), the process moves to the process of S5206, and then this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, when a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery during a potential state, a display command is always set to indicate an invincible state. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to set a display command to indicate the invincibility state, or the lottery result of the currently running Tokuzu 2 variation or the pre-read result for the acquired Tokuzu 2 pending. It may be configured to determine whether or not to set a display command to indicate an invincible state based on the (prior determination result).

Specifically, before the special drawing 1 variation (small winning variation) to be executed this time is stopped and displayed, the results of the special drawing 2 lottery that can be stopped and displayed are determined (preliminary determination), and the results of the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed this time are determined. If it is determined that the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a big hit before the 1 variation (small winning variation) is stopped and displayed, the display command for indicating the invincibility state may not be set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an unfavorable jackpot game is executed even though the display mode based on the display command for indicating an invincible state (see FIG. 605(a)) is displayed.

In the above-mentioned 28th embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result of one special symbol lottery is a small win, the variation of the other special symbol that is being executed is It was configured to determine the lottery result and determine the processing content for the other special symbol variation according to the determination result. Then, by making the length of the fluctuation time different between the case where the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player and the case where the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special symbol lottery, the length of the fluctuation time that is set is different. By making unfavorable jackpots more likely to be discarded based on small winnings than jackpots, it was possible to set a specific period during which unfavorable jackpots are more likely to be discarded before winning an unfavorable jackpot. The configuration for setting the specific period is not limited to this, and for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result of one special symbol lottery is a small win. , determines the lottery result of the other special symbol variation that is being executed, and discards the other special symbol variation that is being executed only if it is determined that the lottery result is a disadvantageous jackpot (a lottery that indicates a loss) The result may be a forced stop).

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the invalid lottery process used during the jackpot variation of special symbols, that is, during the special symbol variation where one special symbol has won a jackpot, the other special symbol may have won a jackpot in the other special symbol lottery. It may be configured such that the control process to prevent the winning from occurring is executed during the special symbol fluctuation when a small hit is won. Even in this case, during a specific period when one of the special symbols is fluctuating in the small winnings, the player can rest assured that there is no fear that the potential state will end based on the winning of the jackpot. It is possible to set a period during which the game can be played with care. In this case, during the specific period, it is not possible to win a jackpot in which a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set in the special symbol lottery, but it is possible to win a small jackpot as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, a game in which prize balls are won through a small winning game can be played with peace of mind without worrying about winning a jackpot.

In the above-mentioned embodiment A, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the special symbol fluctuation period corresponding to the small win is a specific period during which it is difficult to win a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. It was configured so that The configuration is such that when a small hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, that is, when a jackpot or a miss is won, a short (1 second) variable time is set. Therefore, for example, after the potential state is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to establish only the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol without establishing the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, and the first special symbol If the fluctuation lasts for more than one second, there is a risk that an irregular game of playing a right-handed game may be played. In other words, by executing the second special symbol lottery through a right-handed game only while the first special symbol is fluctuating in small winnings, a game is performed that makes it difficult for disadvantageous jackpot games to be executed during a potential state. There was a problem.

In order to solve this problem, in the present A embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the potential state, the lottery opportunity is established by the left-handed game in the first special symbol odd lottery. If it is determined that the lottery opportunity was established by a right-handed game, it is determined whether the lottery opportunity was established by a right-handed game or a right-handed game. The configuration is such that it is easier to notify the player that a specific period has been set than when it is determined that a specific period has been set.

As a result, a player who executes the first special symbol lottery in a left-handed game during a potential state is asked whether or not the first special symbol variation being executed has won a small hit (during a specific period). Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the player is playing a certain game or not, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to play an irregular game (left-handed game) during a potential state.

In addition, as a method for determining whether the first special symbol odd lottery to be executed is one in which the lottery opportunity is established by a left-handed game or a lottery opportunity is established by a right-handed game, for example, the main control In the winning command output from the device 110, the entry type is included to indicate whether the game ball has entered the center first ball entry port 64c or whether the game ball has entered the right first ball entry port 64r. By configuring the information to be settable, the audio lamp control device 113 side can determine which ball entry port (center first ball entry port 64c or right first ball entry port 64r) a game ball enters. It may be configured such that it is possible to determine whether it is a winning command that has been set based on the above, or the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 may be configured such that it can be determined whether the winning command is a winning command that has been set based on It may also be configured to set pitch type information.

Also, based on various commands output from the main controller 110, the audio lamp control device 113 side selects which ball entrance (center first ball entrance 64c or right first ball entrance 64r). Rather than being configured to be able to determine whether a game ball has entered the ball, for example, a left-handed game detection means is provided to detect that the player is playing a left-handed game, and a device that detects whether the player is playing a right-handed game. By providing a right-handed game detecting means for detecting a right-handed game and configuring the audio lamp control device 113 to receive the detection results of each detection means, the player's gaming situation (right-handed game, left-handed game) is provided. It may be configured such that the audio lamp control device 113 can directly determine the information without going through the main control device 110. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing that the main control device 110 should execute, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, making it easier to provide smooth games. can.

Furthermore, unlike the present twenty-eighth embodiment, for at least a part of the case where the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability state is lost or a jackpot is won, the variation time ( For example, it is preferable to set the time period to 30 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is difficult for a player who is playing a left-handed game while in a potential state to grasp the lottery result based on the variation time of the first special symbol variation that is being executed. This makes it more difficult to determine whether or not the current time is within a specific period.

In addition, in another example using the variable time setting method described above, it would be better to notify the player that the specific period is in effect if the player wins a small win in the first special symbol lottery than if the player wins a small win. It is preferable to configure the system so that the notification effect for the purpose of the event is easily executed. This allows the player to actively play the right-handed game even though no specific period is internally set.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the game board 13 has a plurality of ball entry means (center first ball entry hole 64c, right first ball entry hole 64c, right first ball entry hole A slot 64r) is provided, and the production mode of the variation performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is set by the entrance ball that has established the lottery trigger. Although it is configured to vary depending on the type of means, it is also possible to change the presentation mode depending on the type of ball entry means that established the lottery opportunity. Three or more ball entry means may be provided to establish a lottery opportunity.

Further, even if a lottery opportunity is established based on the entry of game balls into the same ball entry means, the performance mode of the variable performance may be made different depending on the timing at which the lottery opportunity is established. , the performance mode of the variable performance may be varied depending on the frequency at which the lottery opportunity is established. Further, it is also possible to provide a means that can determine the process (for example, the falling path) of the game ball until it enters the ball entering means, and to vary the performance mode of the variable performance based on the determination result. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine is constructed in which a plurality of channels are formed in the game area of the game board 13, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter one ball entering means in various falling patterns. In the case of the machine 10, a detection means capable of detecting the type of channel through which the game ball flows down is provided, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the process until the game ball enters the ball entry means (for example, It is preferable to configure the system so that the flow path (flow route) is determined.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the ball entry means (center first ball entry port 64c or right first ball entry port 64r) for establishing a special symbol lottery opportunity, We have explained the configuration in which the performance mode of the variable performance executed based on the ball entry method is different depending on the type of ball entry means, but if there are multiple ball entry means provided for the same purpose, the special symbol lottery The target may be other than the ball entry means for establishing the opportunity. For example, if the game board 13 is provided with a plurality of ball entry means (through gates 67) for establishing the normal symbol lottery opportunity, for example, the right The left side area where game balls fired during left-handed games tend to flow down more easily than game balls fired during left-handed games, and the game balls fired during right-handed games than those fired from left-handed games. If a through gate 67 is provided in the right side area where it is easier for the ball to flow down, and the through gate 67 is provided in the right side area where it is easier to flow down, the presentation mode of the variable performance to show the lottery result of the normal symbol can be changed to the entrance means that establishes the lottery trigger of the normal symbol. (through gate 67) may be configured to be different depending on the type, or the general ball entry port 63 may be configured to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls by entering a game ball. If there are more than one on the game board 13, the appearance of the ball entering effect to indicate that a game ball has entered the general ball entrance 63 can be changed to the direction of the general ball entrance 63 where the game ball entered. It may be different depending on the type.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine which ball entry means the game ball has entered by understanding the production mode of various performances that are executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. Since it can be determined, it is possible for the player to easily understand the contents of the past games that he/she has played.

<29th embodiment>
Next, the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 630 to 635. The twenty-ninth embodiment is different from the twenty-eighth embodiment described above in that the fluctuation pattern selected during the potential state (RUSH mode) is changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 changes the first special symbol. The type of ball entrance where the lottery opportunity was established (center first ball entrance 64c or right first ball entrance 64r) is configured to be distinguishable, and the ball entrance where the first special symbol lottery opportunity was established. The major difference is that the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation is configured to be different depending on the type.

In the above-mentioned 28th embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the potential state (RUSH mode) and a small winning is won (small winning A28 winning), the first special symbol lottery is executed during the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol 1 small). Even if the player wins a jackpot (jackpot D28) which is disadvantageous to the player in the second special symbol lottery during the winning variation), the jackpot is discarded. By providing a first ball entry port (right first ball entry port 64r) that is the trigger for the lottery of the first special symbol in the game area (right side area) where the game ball fired in a right-handed game can flow down. The first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed periodically even during the right-handed game executed during the probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to set a special period (invincible mode period) in which a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is not performed in the second special symbol lottery that is mainly performed during the probability state, It is possible to provide a period during which a player who is playing a game in a potential state can play the game with peace of mind.

However, in the above-described 28th embodiment, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the rush mode, the player is given a special period during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 small win. (Invincible mode period) Since it is configured so that a performance is executed to notify that it is the invincible mode period, for example, a left-handed game, that is, a second special symbol lottery will not be executed during the potential state. , an irregular game in which a game in which only the first special symbol lottery can be executed is executed, and only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a right-handed game is executed and a second special symbol lottery is executed. There was a risk that it would be carried out.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 28th embodiment, if the first special symbol lottery is won during the potential state, a short (1 second) variable time is easily selected, so that the special period (invincible mode period) ) will not be set, shortening the variation time of the first special symbol variation, making it easier to set a special period (invincible mode period) during the potential state (making it easier to execute a new first special symbol lottery) However, when configured in this way, the small hit will be won when the first special symbol variation with a variation time longer than 1 second is executed in a state where the probability state is set. In order to make it easier for the player to understand that this is a special symbol change, the player may not perform a notification effect to notify the player that a special period (invincible mode period) has been set. However, there was a problem in that it was easily determined whether or not a special period (invincible mode period) was set for the player.

On the other hand, in the present 29th embodiment, compared to the above-mentioned 28th embodiment, the variable time of 30 seconds is more likely to be selected when the first special symbol lottery executed during the potential state is won. are doing. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability state is a small hit or a miss based on the variation time of the first special symbol. .

Furthermore, in the present 29th embodiment, in the case where a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established by a left-handed game (when a game ball is entered into the center first ball entry hole 64c), and when the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established by a left-handed game (when a game ball is entered into the center first ball entrance 64c), and when the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established by a left-handed game 1. When the lottery trigger for the 1st special symbol is established (when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r), and when the variation performance is executed in response to the 1st special symbol variation. During the potential state, when the first special symbol lottery is executed by a right-handed game, it is more likely to win a small hit than when the first special symbol lottery is executed by a left-handed game. It is configured to make it easy for the player to understand that the first special symbol variation is being executed, that is, that a special period (invincible mode period) is being set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a left-handed game is executed in a state where the probability state is set.

In addition, in the present 29th embodiment, when a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established by a left-handed game during a potential state (when a game ball is entered into the central first ball entrance 64c), , Even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, a variable effect that suggests that a special period (invincible mode period) is set is configured to be possible, and on the other hand, the lottery result of the first special symbol is Even if it is a small hit, it is configured not to perform a variable performance that suggests that a special period (invincibility period) is set.

As a result, when a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol is established by a left-handed game during a potential state (when a game ball enters the central first ball entrance 64c), a special period (invincibility period) occurs. Since it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not the probability state is set, it is possible to further suppress a situation in which a left-handed game is executed in a state where the probability state is set.

First, with reference to FIG. 630, the structure of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be explained. In the present 29th embodiment, for the game board 13 (see FIG. 604) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 28th embodiment, a system for detecting that a game ball enters the central first ball entrance 64c is provided. The difference is that a first detection sensor 64s1 and a second detection sensor 64s2 for detecting that a game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r are provided, and other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the detection results of each detection sensor (64s1, 64s2) are configured so that the audio lamp control device 113 receives them without going through the main control device 110. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine on the audio lamp control device 113 side which ball entrance the game ball enters and the lottery trigger for the first special symbol is established. It is possible to set a variation performance corresponding to the first special symbol variation in a performance mode according to the type of the ball entry opening that established the symbol lottery opportunity.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, without going through the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 side can tell which ball entry hole the game ball enters and the lottery trigger for the first special symbol is established. Since the determination can be made, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in the 29th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 631 and 632. The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment described above in that part of the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 are The difference is that some parts of the . Specifically, the configuration of the ROM 202 is different in that a variable pattern selection 29 table 202wf is provided in place of the variable pattern selection 28 table 202vf, and the configuration of the RAM 223 is that an irregular winning flag 223wa is added. ing. The other elements are the same as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf will be explained with reference to FIG. 631. FIG. 631(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf. As shown in FIG. 631(a), the variation pattern selection 29 table 202wf includes a first potential confirmation table 202wf1 in place of the first potential confirmation table 202vf1 for the variation pattern selection 28 table 202vf described above. They are different in that respect and are otherwise the same.

Here, the contents of the first potential confirmation 29 table 202wf1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 631(b). FIG. 631(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first potential confirmation 29 table 202wf1. The 29 first potential confirmation table 202wf1 is specified so that the 30 second variable time is more likely to be selected when the first special symbol is incorrect than the first potential confirmation table 202vf1 described above. They are different in that they are the same, but otherwise they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, if the validity judgment result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is incorrect, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the variation time is 30 seconds. However, a variation with a variation time of 1 second is specified in the range of "150 to 198". In other words, when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state where the probability state is set, the lottery result (win/fail determination result) will take the same variation time whether it is a small hit or a miss. (30 seconds) can be easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the result of the first special symbol lottery due to the variation time of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 632, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 632 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 632, the twenty-ninth embodiment differs from the above-described twenty-eighth embodiment in that an irregular winning flag 223wa is added to the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 613); are the same.

The irregular winning flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that a special symbol lottery opportunity has been established due to a game that is not appropriate for the set game state, and is a flag that indicates that a special symbol lottery opportunity has been established due to an inappropriate game. Set to on if established. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a left-handed game (a game in which a game ball is fired toward a game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is used as a ball entrance for establishing a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. The game ball fired by the central first ball entrance 64c can win a prize, and the game fired by a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is fired aiming at the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80). It has a right first ball entrance 64r through which a ball can enter a prize.

When the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left-handed game is an advantageous gaming method for the player, and when the variable probability state and the probability state are set, the right-handed game is advantageous to the player. It is designed to be an advantageous gaming method.

This irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON when it is detected that a game ball enters the central first ball entry opening 64c in a state where the probability state is set. Specifically, when the first detection sensor 64s1 capable of detecting a game ball entering the central first ball entrance 64c detects a game ball, it is set to ON. Then, it is referred to in the special symbol 1 variation display setting process 29 (see S15172 in FIG. 634) for determining the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. If it is determined that there is, it is set to off (see S15174 in FIG. 634), and an invincible state is set for the 30 second fluctuation regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery (see S15202 in FIG. 634).

In other words, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the game method executed by the player in the potential state is configured to be able to be determined, and based on the result of the determination, the variation performance that is set for the same special symbol variation. It is configured to have different presentation modes. Specifically, in the potential state, if the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to ON, the invincible state is set only when the small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the irregular winning flag 223wa is ON. If set to , if the fluctuation pattern to show the result of the first special symbol lottery is a 30 second fluctuation, that is, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a small hit win or a loss, you will be invincible. It is configured so that the state can be set.

With this configuration, if a proper game (right-handed game) is not performed in the potential state, the invincible state will be set even when the special drawing 1 small winning is fluctuating, so the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the small winning is changing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a game in which a left-handed game is executed during the probability state, and a right-handed game is performed when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (when an invincible state is set).

<About the control processing content of the audio lamp control device in the 29th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 633 and 634, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. The content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is different from the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth embodiment described above. 59), the main processing 29 (see Fig. 633) is replaced with the special drawing 1 variable display setting processing 28 (see S15102 in Fig. 624), and the special drawing 1 variable display setting processing 29 (see Fig. 634). The difference is that the process (see S15172) is executed, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Note that the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 28th embodiment has been explained with reference to the above-mentioned first embodiment and 12th embodiment, so it is not applicable to this embodiment. When explaining the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the explanation will be made with reference to the first embodiment and the twelfth embodiment described above as appropriate.

First, the contents of the main processing 29 will be explained with reference to FIG. 633. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 29. This main process 29 is different from the main process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 59) in that a winning opening determination process (S14101) is added, and other than that is the same. The details of this winning opening determination process (S14101) will be described later with reference to FIG. 635.

Next, with reference to FIG. 634, the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172) will be explained. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172). This special symbol 1 variation display setting process 29 (S15172) is different from the above-described variation display setting process 28 for special symbol 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) in that the production mode in the first special symbol variation during the potential state is The difference is that the setting method (invincibility setting method) is different, but other than that, they are the same.

When the special figure 1 variable display setting process 29 (S15172) is executed, the same processes of S5201 and S5202 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display setting process 28 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) are executed. After that, it is determined whether the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on (S15173), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S15173: Yes), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to off (S15174), It is determined whether the current special figure 1 fluctuation is a 30 second fluctuation (S15175).

In the 29th embodiment, as shown in the 29 table 202wf1 (see FIG. 631(b)) for the first potential, the result of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is all the cases where the small hit is won. The configuration is such that the 30-second variation is selected in about 75% of cases where the winner is a loser. Therefore, in the process of S15175, it is determined whether it is a small hit variation or a miss variation (30 seconds). In the process of S15175, if it is determined that the fluctuation is 30 seconds (S15175: Yes), a display command to indicate the invincible state is set (S15202) and the invincible medium flag 223va is set, regardless of whether there is a small hit or not. is set to ON (S15203), and the process moves to S5206. On the other hand, in the process of S15173, if it is determined that the irregular winning flag 223wa is not set to ON (S15173: No), the same process as the above-mentioned variable display setting process 28 for special map 1 (see S15102 in FIG. 624) is performed. The processes in S15201 to S15203 are executed, and then the process in S5206 is executed, and this process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON, that is, when the left-handed game is executed during the probability state, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed. The configuration is such that even if the result is not a small hit, an effect indicating an invincible state (see FIG. 605(a)) is executed. Therefore, after the potential state is set, only the special drawing 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the right-handed game is performed only during the period when the special symbol 1 lottery is fluctuating in small wins (invincible period). It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game in which it is impossible to win a disadvantageous jackpot in the drawing shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 635, the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101) will be explained. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning opening determination process (S14101). In this winning opening determination process (S14101), a process for determining whether an irregular game is being executed during the potential state is executed.

When the winning opening determination process (S14101) is executed, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (S14151), and if it is determined to be a potential state (S14151: Yes), then the It is determined whether the first ball entering sensor 64s1 (see FIG. 630) is on (S14152). If it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on (S14152: Yes), that is, if a game ball enters the central first ball entry port 64c during the potential state, the irregular winning flag 223wa is turned on. (S14153), and ends this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14151 that the potential state is not set (S14151: No), or if it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is not on in the process of S14152 (S14152: No) ), the process ends immediately.

In addition, in this embodiment, the irregular winning flag 223wa is configured to be set to OFF every time the first special symbol lottery is executed while the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the irregular winning flag 223wa may be configured to be set to OFF when the 30 second variation is executed in a state where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to ON. With this configuration, when playing an irregular game, it is possible to always set an invincible state based on the variable time (an invincible state that is executed regardless of a small hit win), so special drawing 2 It is possible to make it difficult to execute an irregular game in which it is impossible to win an unfavorable jackpot in a lottery.

In addition, as a condition for turning off the irregular winning flag 223wa, the second ball entering sensor 64s2 (see FIG. 630) detects a predetermined number of game balls (10) in a situation where the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. In this case, a condition may be provided to set the irregular winning flag 223wa to OFF. With this configuration, it is possible to set an invincibility state (an invincibility state that is executed regardless of a small win) for a player who has once executed an irregular game for a predetermined period based on a variable time. , it is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game in which it is impossible to win a disadvantageous jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery.

Furthermore, in the present 29th embodiment, when it is determined that the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is on during the potential state, the process of setting the irregular winning flag 223wa on is executed. Without being limited to this, if the number of times the first ball entry sensor 64s1 is determined to be on during the potential state reaches a predetermined number (for example, five times), the irregular winning flag 223wa is set to on. It may be configured. In this way, by providing a permissible range before turning on the irregular winning flag 223wa, even though a right-handed game is played, the game ball flows down the left side area and the first ball entering sensor 64s1 is activated. When turned on, it is possible to make it difficult for the irregular winning flag 223wa to be set on. Therefore, it is possible to set an invincibility state (an invincibility state that is executed regardless of small winnings) based on a variable time for a predetermined period only for players who intentionally execute irregular games. It is possible to make it more difficult to execute an irregular game in which it is impossible to win a disadvantageous jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery trigger for the first special symbol lottery is configured to be established based on a plurality of requirements, and the first special symbol lottery is determined according to the type of requirements for establishing the lottery trigger. The presentation mode for showing the lottery results is configured to be different. That is, by varying the requirements for establishing a lottery opportunity, different effects can be executed.

In the twenty-ninth embodiment, depending on the type of requirements for establishing a lottery opportunity, an advantageous performance mode that is advantageous to the player (an invincible state based on a small winning win) and a disadvantageous performance mode that is disadvantageous to the player ( (invincibility state based on variable time) can be set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and additional modes set for the same performance mode may be varied.

In addition, based on the technical idea of improving the production effect, rather than the technical idea of changing the degree of advantage of the player, the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery are shown according to the type of requirements for establishing the lottery opportunity. It is also possible to configure the presentation mode to be different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the performance mode (variable performance) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to vary depending on the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity, but this is not limited to this. For example, the performance mode (variable performance) for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol may be configured to be different depending on the type of requirement for establishing the lottery opportunity.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, an example is shown in which two elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are provided for the same lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and elements for establishing a lottery opportunity are provided. You may provide three or more.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, only when a specific gaming state (potential state) is set, a method for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery according to the type of requirement for establishing a lottery opportunity is provided. If the production mode is configured to be different and a game state other than a specific game state (potential state) is set, the first special symbol lottery is performed according to the type of requirement for establishing a lottery opportunity. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the set gaming state, depending on the type of requirements for establishing a lottery opportunity, The presentation mode for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery may be different. Furthermore, the types of performance modes to be varied may be further varied depending on the set gaming state.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
Next, the 30th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 636 to 647. The 30th embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above in that the performance mode of the variable performance that is executed is different.

In the above-described 16th embodiment, the jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery as an opportunity for executing a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. (first opportunity), and when a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, and during the small win game, the game ball is moved to a specific area (V winning device 650 that is opened during the small win game (see FIG. 361) There are two opportunities (second opportunity) for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on passing through a V area (not shown) provided in the The lottery for the second special symbol (special pattern 2) was designed so that it was easier to win a small prize than the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1). And, during the time saving state which is a gaming state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the special drawing 2 is easily executed.

As a result, in the time-saving state where the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly executed, the above-mentioned second opportunity can be made easier to establish, and the jackpot game can be executed more easily than in the normal state. The time-saving state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time-saving state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, a maximum of four pieces of winning information of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be held and stored, and the lottery result of the final fluctuation of the special symbol 2 in the time saving state is stored. The system is configured to inform the player of the result of pre-reading the special drawing 2 winning information that is held and stored using the variable performance shown in FIG. More specifically, as performances corresponding to the special figure 2 final fluctuation in the time saving state, a first performance (final fluctuation performance), a second performance (result notification performance) executed after the first performance, was configured to be executable, and the performance mode of the final variation was configured to be set based on the pre-read result of the special drawing 2 winning information that is stored on hold. In other words, as a performance result of the variable performance executed during the time-saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery that is executed after the gaming state has transitioned from the time-saving state to the normal state It was configured to notify the result of the lottery (for the winning information of the special drawing 2 which was stored on hold at the time of transition).

However, due to the final variation effect showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time-saving state, the special figure 2 lottery is executed after the gaming state has transitioned from the time-saving state to the normal state. Because it was configured to notify (advance notification) all the results of the lottery (for the winning information of special drawing 2) to the players, the fluctuation performance for the final fluctuation of special drawing 2 in the time-saving state (final fluctuation performance) However, if the final variation effect is executed in a manner that indicates that the player has not won, the player's desire to play will suddenly decrease. was there.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is determined at the execution timing of the final fluctuation performance, and the performance mode of the final fluctuation performance is set based on the determination result. Therefore, for example, play the game so as to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit just before the end of the special figure 2 final fluctuation period in the time saving state, that is, near the timing when the final fluctuation effect ends and the result notification effect is executed. Therefore, as a production mode of the final variation performance, the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed after the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state (the winning information of the special drawing 2 that is stored and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state) However, in order to prevent the results of all special drawing 2 drawings from being reflected in the production mode of the final variation effect, it is possible to prevent the results of all special drawing 2 drawings from being reflected. Because it is necessary to delay the acquisition timing, in the worst case, the time saving state will transition to the normal state without acquiring the maximum number of special drawings 2 pending, providing a disadvantageous game to the player. There was a problem with putting it away.

On the other hand, the present 30th embodiment is configured to be able to perform the final variation effect with different pre-read ranges. Specifically, there are cases in which the production content of the final variation effect shows the lottery results of the variation in question, cases in which it shows the lottery results including a part of the acquired special drawing 2 reservations, and cases in which the final variation presentation shows the lottery results including a part of the acquired special drawing 2. It is configured to either show the lottery results including pending results. Then, the special drawing 2 pending lottery results that were not included in the production content of the final variation production will be executed across the special pattern 2 final variation period and the special pattern 2 variation period that is executed during the normal state. The player is informed using a result notification effect (time-saving result display effect).

By configuring in this way, even if the performance content of the final variation performance is a performance content that indicates a failure, it is possible to know in what range of pre-reading results of special drawing 2 pending the performance content is targeted. Since it can be made difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for winning even during the period when the time-saving result display screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the present 30th embodiment, the range of special figure 2 suspension to be reflected in the performance content of the final variation performance is configured to be determined based on the operation content of the operation means by the player. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to decide all or a part of the special figure 2 reservation range to be reflected in the performance content of the final variation performance, so the game content desired by the player It is possible to easily set the performance mode of various performances (final variation performance, result notification performance) executed in the special figure 2 final variation in a performance mode according to the following.

In addition, in the present 30th embodiment, it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to grasp the range of special figure 2 reservation that is reflected in the performance content of the final variation performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many lottery results (pre-reading results) of the second special symbol lottery are used to set the production content of the final variation production. Even if the performance content of the performance is such that it indicates a loss, the performance can be enjoyed until the end while expecting that there will be a large number of special drawings 2 pending which will be the target of the result notification performance.

In addition, in the present 30th embodiment, when the result notification performance is executed, the number of special drawings 2 pending that were not subject to the final variation performance can be notified to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification performance while making the player predict the degree of expectation that the performance indicating a win will be executed during the result notification performance.

<About the production content in the 30th embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 636 to 639, the characteristic presentation contents among the various presentations executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment will be explained. Specifically, among the effects executed during the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), we will focus on the points that are different from the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above. Give an explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 639, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment, the content of the effect executed during the special figure 2 final variation in the special figure 2 final variation in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences from the performance contents executed during the fluctuation (see FIG. 364). FIG. 639 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the special figure 2 final variation during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 639, in the present 30th embodiment, as in the 16th embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 364, 30 A variable period of seconds is set, and the first 5 seconds is a standby period, which is a standby performance that is a performance mode to encourage the player to obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). configured to run.

After that, a first period in which the operation validity period is set is set for 5 seconds. The contents of the effect (press effect) executed during this first period will be described later with reference to FIG. 636(a). Then, after the first period has elapsed, a second period of 15 seconds is set. During this second period, a mission presentation (ready-to-reach presentation) is executed in a display mode based on the presentation result of the press presentation executed during the first period. The content of the mission performance (reach performance) is the same as the performance shown in FIG. 374(b) and FIG. 375(a) of the above-described 16th embodiment, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the second period ends, the remaining period of the special map 2 final fluctuation (5 seconds) and the fluctuation time (2 seconds) to exhaust the special map 2 reservation (maximum 4 pieces) at the end of the time reduction. A third period is set, and during the third period, a result notification effect for displaying the game results during the time saving state is executed. The content of this result notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 638. In addition, in the present 30th embodiment, as well as the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the fluctuation time required when all the special drawing 2 lottery results included in the special drawing 2 holding at the end of the time reduction are losers is also The variation time required when any of the special drawing 2 lottery results included in the hold is a win is also configured to be the same variation time (2 seconds).

Specifically, in the 16th embodiment described above, four patterns are determined by the normal variation pattern 16 table 202le1 (see FIG. 385) that is referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the normal state. The total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds x 4 times = 2 seconds) when all special drawing 2 reservations are lost and the fluctuation time when the first special drawing 2 reservation is a win (2 seconds), 1 The total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 2 seconds) when the first special drawing 2 reservation is a loss and the second special drawing 2 reservation is a win, and the first and second It is configured so that the total fluctuation time (0.5 seconds x 2 times + 1 second = 2 seconds) is the same when the special drawing 2 reservation is a loss and the third special drawing 2 reservation is a win. .

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set a certain period as the third period, regardless of the lottery result corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation (4 pieces) obtained at the end of the time saving.

In addition, although FIG. 639 shows an example where the number of reserved special drawings 2 acquired at the end of the time reduction is the upper limit value (4 pieces), this is not limited to this; Figure 2 By changing the variable time selected when the lottery result is a loss according to the number of reservations, all the special It may be configured such that the fluctuation time (total fluctuation time) required until the hold is exhausted is 2 seconds.

For example, if there is only one special figure 2 reservation acquired at the time of the time-saving end, if the special figure 2 reservation is missed, the configuration is configured such that a variable time of 2 seconds is selected, and the time-saving end is achieved. If the number of special drawing 2 reserved at the time is 2 and both of the lottery results are wrong, the fluctuation time of the special drawing 2 fluctuation corresponding to the first special drawing 2 reserved is 0.5. It may be configured such that the variation time of 1.5 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure 2 reservation. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation executed after the time reduction ends, regardless of the number of special figure 2 reservations acquired at the end of the time reduction and the result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to each special figure 2 reservation. It can be unified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636(a), the contents of the effect (press effect) executed in the first period of the special figure 2 final variation (see FIG. 639) will be explained. FIG. 636(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during a press effect. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, the same content as the display mode displayed during the final variation of the special drawing 2 is given the same reference numeral, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the press effect will be explained. In this embodiment, an operation valid period during which the player can operate the frame button 22 (operation means) is set during the first period of the final variation of the special drawing 2, and the operation to the frame button 22 during the operation valid period is set. It is configured to be able to execute a press-down performance whose performance mode can be changed based on the content.

As shown in FIG. 636(a), when the press effect is executed, a button icon appears near the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the operation means (frame button 22) to be operated by the player. 829a is displayed, and the words "Release stock with button PUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode for explaining the content of the performance being pressed. Further, in the display area Dm21, a number of push-down icons (872a to 872d) corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 that have been acquired are displayed. In FIG. 636(a), "4" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a for indicating the number of special drawing 2 reservations, that is, a state in which four special drawings 2 reservations have been acquired, so the display Four push-down icons are displayed in area Dm21.

When the player presses the frame button 22 during this press effect period, the display mode of the press icons is variably displayed in the order of the first press icon 872a, the second press icon 872b, the third press icon 872c, and the fourth press icon 872d. Ru. In the 30th embodiment, based on the fact that the player presses the frame button 22 during the press effect, a special figure 2 reserve to be pre-read is determined by lottery from among the acquired special figure 2 reserves, and the determined The display mode after the change is configured to be set based on the pre-read result of the reserved special figure 2. Moreover, in the present 30th embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each pressed icon, the special figure 2 reservation to be pre-read is determined redundantly.

In other words, the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 that have been acquired is displayed, and each time the player presses the frame button 22, each pending icon is displayed in a variable manner to show the pre-read result. , while each reservation icon appears to be displayed in a variable manner to show the pre-reading result of the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation, in reality, it is actually a randomly selected (including duplicate selection) special drawing 2 reservation. The pending icon can be variably displayed in a display mode that indicates the pre-read result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a press effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of special figure 2 reservations that have actually been pre-read, so that the various effects executed at the final variation of special figure 2 can be In addition to the fluctuation lottery result, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp the range in which the pre-read result of special drawing 2 pending is included.

Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the push-down icons 872a to 872d are configured to be pushed in order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can select the order in which the push-down icons 872a to 872d are pressed. In this case, the image 829a imitating the operating means includes an image corresponding to the first pressed icon 872a, an image corresponding to the second pressed icon 872b, an image corresponding to the third pressed icon 872c, and a fourth pressed icon 872a. The configuration is such that an image corresponding to the pressed icon 872d is displayed, the displayed images are sequentially selected, and the pressed icons 872a to 872a correspond to the image that was selected at the time the operating means was operated. It is preferable that 872d be configured to be variable to a display icon.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to specify that the distribution of special figure 2 reservations that can be targeted is varied for each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d. Thereby, the selection ratio of the target special figure 2 reservation can be varied by the operation of the player selecting a desired pressed icon from among the pressed icons 872a to 872d. In addition, when using a configuration in which the player can arbitrarily select and operate the push icons 872a to 872d, it is possible to configure each push icon 872a to 872d to completely correspond to each special drawing 2 reservation. good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636(b), the content of the effect when the display mode of all (four) pressed icons is variably displayed during the press effect will be explained. FIG. 636(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed when the display mode of all (four) pressed icons is variably displayed during the press effect.

As shown in FIG. 636(b), the display mode of the character 851 is varied in accordance with the display mode of the variably displayed pressed icon. In FIG. 636(b), the first pressed icon 872a is changed to a display mode showing "chance", the second pressed icon 872b is changed to a display mode showing "sword", and the third pressed icon 872c is changed to a display mode showing "aura large". ”, and the fourth pressed icon 872d is changed to a display mode showing “chance”.

Then, the display mode of the character 851 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display mode of each pressed icon that is variably displayed, and the display mode of the character 851 wearing "Aura Dai" and equipped with a sword is displayed. has been done. Then, the word "chance" is displayed below the character 851. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Clear the mission with emitted power" are displayed as a guide display to indicate the contents of the mission performance (performance mode during the second period) that will be executed after the press performance. be done.

In this case, the mission performance is executed in a performance mode including the pre-read result of special figure 2 pending determined for each pressed icon. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, since the configuration is such that the special figure 2 reservations to be read in advance are randomly determined for each pressed icon, the number of special figure 2 reservations to be determined in advance is determined. The level of expectation for the mission performance can be changed depending on the situation.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 636(b), the display icon type for each pressed icon is configured to overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same display icon may not be selected. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the more the push icon is pressed, the more various display icons can be displayed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 636(a), if the first period (press effect period) elapses without the player pressing the frame button 22 even once, the display mode shown in FIG. 637(a) is displayed. . FIG. 637(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode when the frame button 22 is not pressed once during the press effect (when the stock is not used). As shown in FIG. 637(a), if the frame button 22 is not pressed during the press effect, the special figure 2 hold that is to be pre-fetched has not been determined for each press icon (872a to 872d). Therefore, it is not possible to variably display each of the pressed icons (872a to 872d) in a display mode for showing the pre-read result (lottery result) of the special drawing 2 pending that is the pre-read target. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 637(a), the display mode of each pressed icon (872a to 872d) is variably displayed to a display mode showing "?".

In this case, since there is no special figure 2 reservation to be read ahead, the mission performance executed after the press performance is performed in a performance mode corresponding to the lottery result of the variation. In other words, even if you have acquired 4 special drawings 2 pending, by not pressing the frame button 22 during the pressing effect, you can change the presentation mode of the final variation presentation (mission presentation) by pre-reading the special drawing 2 pending. It can be set without using the result.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the type of the character 851 whose display mode is changed during the press effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change (special figure 2 final change). It consists of Specifically, the character (advantageous character) that is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the variation (special map 2 final variation) is a hit (small win or jackpot) than when it is a loss, and the variation (Special Figure 2 Final Variation) Characters that are more likely to be selected when the lottery result is a loss than when it is a win (small win or big win) (disadvantageous character) The character is configured to be able to be determined (selected).

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to select whether or not to press the frame button 22 during the press effect, depending on the type of the character 851 displayed as the press effect. For example, if an advantageous character is displayed in the press-down effect, even if you execute the mission effect only for the lottery result of the change, the result of that effect is likely to be a hit, so during the press-down effect, If you select a game in which you do not operate the frame button 22, or conversely, when an advantageous character is displayed in the press-down effect, the press-down effect is used to increase the probability that the mission performance result will be a win. A game can be selected by operating the frame button 22 inside.

Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the display mode of the character 851 displayed during the press-down effect is configured to be different as a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. , a specific character 851 may be determined without being concerned with the lottery result of the variation. In this case, the performance mode of the mission performance executed after the press performance may be changed depending on the performance result of the variation. In other words, in this embodiment, after predicting the lottery result of the fluctuation, the pre-read target of special drawing 2 pending is different in the press effect, whereas the lottery result of the fluctuation is predicted. Instead, it may be configured such that the pre-read target of the special figure 2 reservation is different in the press effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 637(b), the display mode of the special pattern executed during the press effect will be explained. FIG. 637(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed when the special drawing 2 reservation includes winning information indicating a plurality of winnings.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present 30th embodiment, in some cases when the player operates the frame button 22 in order to change the display mode of the fourth pressed icon 872d, the special figure 2 to be read ahead is It is configured so that there is not one reservation but a plurality (all special drawings 2 reservations). In the case where multiple special drawing 2 reservations are targeted, if it is determined that there are multiple special drawing 2 reservations that have winning information indicating winning as a result of pre-reading for the plurality of special drawing 2 reservations. , the display mode of each pressed icon is configured to be displayed in a special pattern to show the player that there are a plurality of winnings in the special drawing 2 pending.

When the display mode of the special pattern is displayed, as shown in FIG. 637(b), a display mode showing "V" is displayed in the display area Dm21 as a special display mode that combines the pressed icons, and the character 851 is also displayed in a display mode with a "V" mark attached. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Premier Item GET" are displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the performance result of the current press performance is a special performance result that is advantageous to the player. These displays allow the player to easily understand that a special benefit (a plurality of small winnings) will be awarded.

As described above, in the present 30th embodiment, the conditions for displaying the display mode of the special pattern are that the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is the upper limit (4 pieces), and the display mode of the fourth press icon 872d In order to vary this, conditions are set that will be met when the player operates the frame button 22. Therefore, with the aim of displaying the display mode of the special pattern, the player is made to play the game enthusiastically so that the number of reserved special drawings 2 reaches the upper limit, and furthermore, the frame button 22 is actively operated during the pressing effect. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 638, a description will be given of the presentation contents that are executed during the third period (see FIG. 639) when the presentation contents indicating a failure are executed in the mission presentation.

Here, the contents of the performance executed during the third period will be briefly explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 639, this third period is a performance period set after the second period in which the mission performance is executed. Then, at the timing when the third period starts, the content of the performance is set according to the performance results up to the second period.

Specifically, if the result of the mission performance is a performance result that indicates a win, the performance mode that indicates a win (see FIG. 375(b)) is set as is, and the result of the mission performance is a performance that indicates a loss. If it is a result, a result notification effect is executed in which a display screen (time saving end screen) indicating that the time saving state ends is displayed. Then, in the press effect executed during the first period, if the pre-read result of the special drawing 2 pending that was not included in the pre-read target includes a win, the effect indicating the win during this result notification effect ( The system is configured so that a revival effect) is executed. By configuring in this way, the pre-reading results for the reserved special drawings 2 that have already been acquired at the time the first period is set are notified during the second period or during the third period, depending on the result of the press-down effect. Since it is determined whether or not to notify the player during the game, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation of winning until the end of the special figure 2 final variation performance.

FIG. 638(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed during the result notification effect executed during the third period. As shown in FIG. 638(a), when the result notification effect is executed, the same time saving end screen as described above with reference to FIG. 377 of the 16th embodiment is displayed. Furthermore, in the present 30th embodiment, the number of treasure chest icons corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 that are not subject to pre-reading in the press effect is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the words "Hmm? There's a treasure chest" are displayed to inform the player that there is a special drawing 2 pending that has not yet been read ahead.

The example shown in FIG. 638(a) shows the result notification effect when only the prefetching result of one special figure 2 pending is set as the prefetching target as a result of the press effect. Three treasure box icons 829b1 to 829b3 are displayed to show that the number of reserved special drawings 2 that did not occur is three.

In this way, in the result notification performance, by configuring the player to be informed of the number of reserved special drawings 2 whose look-ahead results have not yet been reflected in the execution performance, a performance indicating a winning result can be executed during the result notification performance. The player can predict the level of expectation. Therefore, when many treasure chest icons are displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification performance with the expectation of winning, and when the number of treasure chest icons displayed is small, it is possible to draw attention to the result notification performance with expectations of winning. It is possible to have the player play the game without having to play the game.

In the result notification performance, a performance is performed in which the displayed treasure box icons (in the figure, three treasure chest icons 829b1 to 829b3) are opened in order, and prize information indicating that the winning result is shown in the special drawing 2 pending that is the target of the result notification performance. If there is a special figure 2 reservation including , the display mode shown in FIG. 638(b) is displayed. FIG. 638(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when indicating a win in the result notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 638(b), if there is a special drawing 2 holding that includes winning information indicating winning among the special drawing 2 holding that is the target of the result notification performance, the target treasure box icon (in the figure, the treasure box icon 829b1) is opened, and pseudo symbols 881a to 881c indicating winning are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Congratulations on the revival jackpot" are displayed as a guide display mode for notifying you of a win (small win).

Note that the timing at which the display mode shown in FIG. 638 is displayed is during the special figure 2 final fluctuation period, as shown in the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a. In other words, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c do not indicate the lottery result of the variation concerned, but notify in advance the result of the special symbol 2 lottery to be executed later. Therefore, in the 30th embodiment, similarly to the 16th embodiment described above, the period from when the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are displayed in the result notification performance until the special symbol 2 fluctuation that actually wins is stopped and displayed is During this period, the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are displayed in an oscillating manner (indicated by curved arrows in the figure), and the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are displayed in a oscillating manner (indicated by curved arrows in the figure), and the pseudo symbols 881a to 881c are is configured to be displayed while being switched to a third symbol (for example, 777) indicating a win.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the second special symbol variation that is actually being executed from being mistakenly recognized as a winning result. In other words, in this embodiment, a symbol (pseudo symbol) for notifying in advance the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later, and a symbol for informing the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. By displaying the (third symbol) in different display modes, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Although not shown in the diagram, if the special drawing 2 pending that corresponds to the result notification performance does not include winning information indicating a winning, all the treasure chest icons will not open (in the diagram, they will be marked with a cross). display), and the time saving mode ends.

In the 30th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 638(a), in the result notification performance, the number of reserved special drawings 2 whose pre-read results have not yet been reflected in the execution performance can be notified to the player. , without being limited to this, for example, one treasure box icon may be displayed regardless of the number of reserved special drawings 2 whose pre-reading results have not yet been reflected in the execution performance, and the display mode of the treasure box icon may be changed to: It may be configured to differ based on the pre-read result of the target special figure 2 reservation.

In this case, for example, it is better to have a special figure 2 reserve (winning special figure 2 reserve) that has winning information indicating winning in the special figure 2 reserve that is subject to pre-reading of the result notification effect than a case where there is no winning special figure 2 reserve. It is preferable to select an advantageous display mode that is more likely to be selected than the above, and a disadvantageous display mode that is easier to select when there is no winning special figure 2 reservation than when there is a winning special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which performance and how much of the special figure 2 reservation was used as a pre-read result in the special figure 2 final variation effect. Further, as a result of pre-reading of the special drawing 2 reservation, the display mode of the treasure box icon may be changed according to the number of reservations indicating winning (big hit, small hit).

<About the electrical configuration in the 30th embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 640 to 642. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment described above, with a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, The difference is that a part of the configuration has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 640(a). FIG. 640(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640(a), in this embodiment, a variable pattern selection 30 table 222xa is provided in place of the variable pattern selection 16 table 222la in the ROM 222 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment described above. The difference is that a character selection table 222xb, a target pending selection table 222xc, and a display icon selection table 222xd are added.

The variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa has two variation pattern selection tables associated with the gaming state, specifically, the normal variation pattern selection 16 table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. 222la1, and a time-saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 that is referred to when in the time-saving state. The normal variation pattern selection 16 table 222la1 is the same as that in the sixteenth embodiment described above, so its description will be omitted. Further, the time-saving variation pattern selection 30 table 222xa2 is based on the same technical concept as the variation pattern selection table explained in each embodiment described above, and is included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. This is a data table in which a display variation pattern (performance mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) is selected, and a variation time of 30 seconds is specified as the final variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state. This embodiment differs from the above-described 16th embodiment in that it is configured such that the variation pattern that is selected is always selected, but otherwise is the same, so illustration and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The 30th embodiment is configured such that the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation) is always a 30 second variation. Therefore, the production pattern of the variation production executed in response to the final variation of the special figure 2 can be unified, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, when the first special symbol variation is executed as the final variation of the time saving state, a short variation of 0.2 seconds is executed similarly to the above-mentioned 16th embodiment (see FIG. 386), and the short variation The time saving end screen is configured to be displayed as a variable effect corresponding to the above. In other words, if you play an irregular game during the time saving state and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol variation, you will obtain special symbol 2 pending during the final variation period in the time saving state. A sufficient period of time is not set for this to occur, and furthermore, the system is configured so that a performance (standby performance) that urges the player to obtain the special drawing 2 reservation is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally playing an irregular game during the time saving state.

The character selection table 222xb is a data table that is referred to when selecting the type of character 851 (see FIG. 636) to be displayed in the press effect executed during the first period of the effect period of the final variation of the special figure 2. It is. This character selection table 222xb is executed when it is determined that it is the first period start timing in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) that is executed to determine the effect mode of the final variation in the time saving state. This is referred to when selecting the type of character 851 in the first period effect setting process (see C4882 in FIG. 644) (see C8001 in FIG. 644). In this character selection table 222xb, it is specified that the rate of type selection of the character 851 is different depending on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the final change of the special symbol 2 (result of judgment).

Here, the contents defined in the character selection table 222xb will be explained with reference to FIG. 641. FIG. 641 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the character selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 641, the character selection table 222xb has three types of selected characters ( Character type) is defined.

Specifically, if the winning/failure judgment result corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation) is a jackpot, the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 49" and the "rabbit" is " ``Heroes'' are defined in the range of ``50 to 98'', and if the winning/failure judgment result corresponding to the variation (special map 2 final variation) is a small hit, the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is `` "Rabbit" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Turtle" is defined in the range of "50 to 79", and "Hero" is defined in the range of "80 to 98". If the result of the validity judgment corresponding to the change (variation) is incorrect, the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf is "turtle" in the range of "0 to 39", "rabbit" in the range of "40 to 89", "Heroes" are defined in the range of "90 to 98."

In other words, among the three types of characters that can be selected by referring to the character selection table 222xb, "Hero" is the character type that is most advantageous to the player, "Turtle" is the character type that is most disadvantageous to the player, and "Rabbit" is the character type that is most disadvantageous to the player. ” is a character type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the “hero” and more advantageous to the player than the “turtle.”

In this way, by changing the selected character type based on the validity determination result corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation), the variation can be changed based on the type of the character 851 displayed as the press effect. It becomes possible for the player to predict the validity determination result corresponding to (Special Figure 2 Final Variation). Therefore, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the press effect according to the predicted result of the judgment result corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation), so the special figure 2. It is possible to easily increase the variations of effects executed during the final variation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents of the character selection table 222xb are set so that no matter which character type is selected, there remains a possibility of "missing" as the result of the judgment corresponding to the variation (special figure 2 final variation). However, without being limited to this, for example, a special character ( For example, a character imitating an angel) may be selectable. By configuring this way, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 during the press-down effect after understanding that the fluctuation will be a winning result. As a result, for example, if a player does not want to unnecessarily grasp the look-ahead results in advance, it is possible to select a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated during the press-down effect. By actively operating , and changing the display mode of the pressed icon, it is also possible to select a game that predicts the number of outliers included in the special drawing 2 hold.

The target pending selection table 222xc is a special figure 2 pending selection table that is referred to in order to change the display mode of each pressed icon when the player presses the frame button 22 for the pressed icons 872a to 872d during the pressed effect. This is a data table for selecting the type of. This target pending selection table 222xc is used for the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 30 (see C3157 in FIG. 647) for periodically monitoring the player's operation of the frame button 22. 1 period (C8201: Yes in Figure 647), and when it is determined that there is a pressed icon whose display mode has not been changed (C8202: Yes in Figure 647), the target special figure 2 pending selection (see C8203 in FIG. 647). Then, the display mode after variable is selected by the display icon selection table 222xd, which will be described later, according to the validity determination result (pre-reading result) of the selected special figure 2 reservation (target reservation).

Here, the contents defined in the target pending selection table 222xc will be explained with reference to FIG. 642(a). FIG. 642(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the target pending selection table 222xc. As shown in FIG. 642(a), the target reservation selection table 222xc includes the type of the pressed icon to be selected this time, the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, and the value of the acquired production counter 223lf. Correspondingly, target reservation (target special figure 2 reservation) is defined.

In addition, the values "1" to "4" specified as target reservations indicate the order in which they are stored in the winning information storage area 223la. For example, target reservation "1" is next to the second special It shows the special pattern 2 reservation (first special pattern 2 reservation) where the symbol lottery is executed, and the target reservation "2" is the special symbol 2 reservation (second special symbol lottery) where the second special symbol lottery is executed next. Hereinafter, the target reservation "3" means the third special symbol 2 reservation, and the target reservation "4" means the second special symbol lottery will be executed at the end of the acquired special symbol 2 reservations. This shows the special figure 2 reservation (fourth special figure 2 reservation).

Specifically, if the first press icon 872a (the press icon whose display mode is first changed in the press effect) is the target and the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired is 1, the acquisition is When the value of the performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 79", the target is suspended as "1", and when the value is in the range of "80 to 98", the target is suspended as "-", that is, there is no target suspended. In addition, if the number of acquired special drawing 2 reservations is 2, the target reservation is "1" when the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the target reservation is in the range of "40 to 79". "2" is defined as "-" for object reservation in the range of "80 to 98", that is, there is no object reservation. If the number of acquired special drawing 2 reservations is 3, the target reservation is "1" when the value of the obtained performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the target reservation is "2" when the value is in the range of "40 to 79". ” is defined as “3” in the range of “80 to 89”, and “-” in the range of “90 to 98”, that is, there is no target pending. If the number of special drawing 2 reservations that have been acquired is 4, the target reservation is "1" when the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", and the target reservation is "2" when the value is in the range of "40 to 79". ” is defined as a target hold “3” in the range “80 to 89” and a target hold “4” in the range “90 to 98”.

Next, if the second pressed icon 872b (the pressed icon whose display mode is changed second in the pressed effect) is the target and the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired is 2, the acquired effect is When the value of the counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target reservation is "2", when the value is in the range of "40 to 79", the target reservation is "-", and when the value is in the range of "80 to 89", the target reservation is "1". Object reservation "-" is defined in the range "90 to 98". If the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired is 3, if the value of the obtained performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target reservation is "2", and if the value is in the range of "40 to 79", the target reservation is "3". ”, the target reservation “1” is defined in the range of “80 to 89”, and the target reservation “-” is defined in the range “90 to 98”. If the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired is 4, if the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target reservation is "2", and if the value is in the range of "40 to 79", the target reservation is "3". ” is defined as a target hold “1” in the range “80 to 89” and a target hold “4” in the range “90 to 98”.

If the third press icon 872c (the press icon whose display mode is changed thirdly in the press effect) is the target and the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is 3, the acquired effect counter 223lf If the value is in the range of 0 to 39, the target hold is ``3'', if the value is in the range of 40 to 79, the target hold is ``2'', if the value is in the range of 80 to 89, the target hold is ``1'', and if the value is in the range of 80 to 89, the target hold is ``90''. Target reservation "-" is specified in the range of "-98". If the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired is 4, if the value of the obtained performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target reservation is "3", and if the value is in the range of "40 to 79", the target reservation is "4". ” is defined as a target hold “2” in the range “80 to 89” and a target hold “1” in the range “90 to 98”.

Finally, if the fourth press icon 872d (the press icon whose display mode is changed last (fourth) in the press effect) is the target, and the number of reserved special drawings 2 that has been acquired is 4, , when the value of the obtained performance counter 223lf is in the range of "0 to 39", the target is suspended "2", when the value is in the range of "40 to 79", the target is suspended "3", and when the value is in the range of "80 to 89", the target is suspended "2". 4", and the target reservation "all" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Note that the target reservation "all" that can be selected as the target reservation for the fourth pressed icon 872d indicates that all the special figure 2 reservations are to be set as target reservations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the display mode after changing by referring to the judgment result of whether or not multiple special figures 2 are reserved for one pressed icon. This is a display mode that is advantageous to the player as the display mode after variation, since it is possible to increase the probability that a winning result will be included in the decision result, compared to the case where the display mode after the change is determined by referring to the result of the decision on the right or wrong. can be made easier to select.

Furthermore, since it can be determined that multiple winnings are included in the judgment results of multiple special drawings 2 reservations, a special display mode (Fig. 637 (b)) can be displayed.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the number of pressed icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 is used as a pressing effect that is executed during a partial period (first period) of the final variation of special drawings 2. The game player presses the operating means (frame button 22) during the first period to sequentially change the display mode of the pressed icons 872a to 872d. Then, when displaying the display mode of the pressed icons 872a to 872d in a variable manner, the target special figure 2 reservation is randomly selected for each pressed icon, and based on the pre-read result of the selected special figure 2 reservation. It is configured to determine the performance mode after variable display. Furthermore, it is configured so that the special figure 2 reservations targeted by each pressed icon can overlap, and it is also possible to change the display mode of the pressed icons without providing target reservations.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special drawings 2 pending look-ahead results are indicated by the display mode of the pressed icon that is variably displayed during the pressed effect. Even if the performance result of the mission performance executed after the press performance is a performance result that indicates a failure, there is a possibility that the mission performance is being executed without the pre-reading result of special map 2 pending being executed. It is possible to have the user play the game while expecting to be notified of a winning result in the notification performance.

In addition, when multiple display formats that are likely to be selected at the time of winning are selected as the display format of each pressed icon, whether the multiple display formats are selected for a specific winning special drawing 2 reservation, or , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether there are a plurality of winning special drawings 2 pending, and therefore it is possible to make the player interested in the game content to be executed in the future.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that either one special figure 2 reservation or all special figure 2 reservations can be selected as the target reservation of the pressed icon, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that two special figures 2 reservations or three special figures 2 reservations can be selected as target reservations. Further, in this embodiment, depending on the selection result with reference to the target reservation selection table 222xc, three or more pressed icons for which the same special drawing 2 reservation becomes the target reservation may occur. Without limitation, an upper limit may be set on the number of pressed icons for which the same special drawing 2 reservation is subject to reservation, or the icons may be configured so as not to overlap. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily match the number of times the player operated the operating means during the press-down effect with the number of special drawings 2 pending that refer to the pre-read results, so the final variation effect (press-down It is possible to easily set the number of special drawings 2 reserved for use in presentations and mission presentations and the number of special drawings 2 holding for use in result notification presentations to the contents desired by the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the more the player operates the operating means during the press performance, the more the number of special symbols 2 reserved used for the final variation performance (press performance and mission performance) increases. For example, without being limited to this, the more the player operates the operating means during the press performance, the more the number of reserved special drawings 2 used for the final variation performance (press performance and mission performance) is reduced. Also good. In this case, on the start screen of the press effect shown in FIG. 636(a), "Discard stock with button PUSH!!" is displayed, and by operating the frame button 22 during the press effect, the display area Dm21 is displayed. The effect of sequentially erasing the displayed pressed icons 872a to 872d is executed, and at the end timing of the pressed effect, target reservation is performed for the pressed icons 872a to 872d displayed in the display area Dm21, as in the present embodiment. The display mode may be configured to be determined and varied to a display mode according to the result of determination as to whether or not the object is on hold.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for a player who does not want to reflect the pre-reading result of special drawing 2 reservation in the final variation performance (press performance and mission performance) to operate the frame button 22 voluntarily. Become. Further, as the press effect, a first press effect and a second press effect are configured to be executable, and as the first press effect, as in this embodiment, the more the player operates the operating means, the more the final change A press effect is executed in which the number of special figures 2 reserved used for the effect (press effect and mission effect) increases, and as the second press effect, the more the player operates the operating means, the final variable effect (press effect and mission effect) is executed. It may also be configured to execute a press-down effect that reduces the number of reserved special figures 2 used for the effect. As a result, even for players who do not want to have the special figure 2 hold in the final variation effect (press effect and mission effect) reflect the pre-read result, special figure 2 hold in the final change effect (press effect and mission effect). It becomes possible for players who want to reflect the pre-reading results to operate the frame button 22 while pressing the effect, increasing the effect of the effect, and for players who do not want to operate the frame button 22. Also, it becomes possible to execute the final variation effect in different manners, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The display icon selection table 222xd is a data table for selecting the variable display mode of each pressed icon. Here, the contents defined in the display icon selection table 222xd will be explained with reference to FIG. 642(b). FIG. 642(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the display icon selection table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 642(b), the display icon selection table 222xd includes the judgment result (pre-reading result) of whether or not to hold the target of each of the pressed icons 872a to 872d selected with reference to the target hold selection table 222xc, and the effect. Different display modes (display icons) are defined based on the value of the counter 223lf.

Specifically, when the result of the judgment is "win", the display icon "large aura" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and the value of the obtained effect counter 223lf is in the range of "50 to 89". The display icon "sword" is defined in the range "90 to 98", and the display icon "chance" is defined in the range "90 to 98". In addition, if the result of the judgment is "miss", the display icon "?" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf, and the display icon "?" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". The display icon "Sword" is defined, the display icon "Chance" is defined in the range of "80 to 89", and the display icon "Large Aura" is defined in the range of "90 to 98".

Furthermore, if the validity judgment result is "-", that is, if no target reservation is set, the display icon "chance" is defined for the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf in the range of "0 to 49", and "50 The display icon "?" is defined in the range "98". In addition, if the winning/failure determination result is "multiple wins", that is, the target reservation "all" is selected in the target reservation selection table 222xc, and multiple small winnings are selected among all the special drawings 2 reservations. If there is a validity determination result (pre-reading result), a display icon "Special V" is defined in the range "0 to 98", which is the entire range that the acquired performance counter 223lf can take.

In this way, by varying the selection ratio of the selected display icon (display mode after variable) depending on the judgment result (pre-reading result) of whether the target is pending, the display mode displayed in the press effect can be changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to predict the pre-reading result of special drawing 2 reservation. Therefore, for example, if the operation means is operated for the first pressed icon 872a during the pressed presentation, and the display mode of the pressed icon 872a is "large aura", that is, the target reservation is won and the selected item is selected. When the display is changed to an easier display mode, either stop operating the operating means that is being pressed at that point, or operate the operating means further, and a second "large aura" is displayed. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of choosing which one to aim for.

Next, with reference to FIG. 640(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment will be described. FIG. 640(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 640(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the 30th embodiment has the same configuration as the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the 16th embodiment described above (see FIG. 387(b)). On the other hand, it is different in that a press counter 223xa, a used pending information storage area 223xb, an unused pending information storage area 223xc, and a completed flag 223xd are added, but other than that, it is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The press counter 223xa is a counter for counting the number of press icons 872a to 872d displayed during the press effect. This press counter 223xa is set to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223lc when it is determined in the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) that the waiting period has elapsed (C4801 in FIG. 643: Yes). A value corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings 2 is set based on (see C4881 in FIG. 643). Then, if it is determined that it is valid that the frame button 22 was operated during the first period (during the press effect), it is subtracted (C8207 in FIG. 647). In addition, the value of the press counter 223xa is determined at the end timing of the first period in which the press effect is executed (C4885 in FIG. 643), and if the value is greater than 0, that is, the display mode is changed when the press effect ends. If it is determined that there is a pressed icon that does not exist (C4885 in FIG. 643: Yes), the display mode of the pressed icon corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa is variably displayed to "?", and then the value is cleared to 0. (See C4887 in Figure 643).

The used reservation information storage area 223xb and the unused reservation information storage area 223xc are storage areas for storing information for managing the special figure 2 reservation in which the pre-read result is used in the press effect.

The completed flag 223xd is a flag for indicating that a performance indicating that a winning result has been performed in the final variation performance (press performance and mission performance), and when a performance indicating that a winning result has been performed. is set to on. Then, in the third period performance setting process (see C4891 in FIG. 646), the setting situation is determined, and the performance mode is set based on the determination result. In other words, if a performance indicating a win is executed in the first period and the second period (final variation performance), a performance congratulating the winning will be performed in the third period. (see C8111 in FIG. 646), and then set to off (C8112 in FIG. 646).

On the other hand, if the performance that indicates winning is not performed in the performance executed in the first period and the second period (final variation performance), the time saving end screen will be displayed in the third period performance. A result notification effect is executed to perform the result notification effect, and furthermore, it is determined whether or not to execute a revival effect during the result notification effect, and a performance mode is determined according to the result of the determination. Thereby, a plurality of performances performed during the special figure 2 final variation period can be performed as a series of performances without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The first period flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that the final variation effect is in the first period, and is set to ON when the first period is set. Then, it is set to off at the end timing of the first period.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 30th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 643 to 647, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment is different from the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment. Instead of the update process (see C4506 in FIG. 423), the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) is executed, and instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (C3107), the frame button input monitoring/effect processing ( (See C3157 in FIG. 647), but otherwise are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the sixteenth embodiment described above, the control processing content of the audio lamp control device 113 is explained with reference to the first embodiment. Therefore, in a part of explaining the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be explained as appropriate. This will be explained using the contents (specifically, the contents in which the S number is changed to the C number).

First, the contents of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596) will be explained with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596). In this final variation effect update processing 30 (see C4596), during the execution of the final variation effect (special figure 2 final variation effect), the start or end timing of each effect is determined, and control processing according to the determination result is performed. executed.

When the final variation effect update process 30 (see C4596) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined that it is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: Yes), the special A value corresponding to the number of reservations shown in FIG. 2 is set in the press counter 223xa (C4881), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of C4801, if it is determined that it is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C4804), and if it is the first period start timing. If it is determined (C4804: Yes), the first period effect setting process is executed (C4882), and this process ends. Note that the first period effect setting process (C4882) will be described later with reference to FIG. 644.

In the process of C4804, if it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C4804: No), then it is determined whether it is the first period end timing (C4883), and it is determined that it is the first period end timing. If so (C4883: Yes), the flag 223xe is set to off during the first period (C4884), it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223xa is greater than 0 (C4885), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0. (C4885: Yes), sets a display command to change the pressed icon corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa to a display mode showing "?" (C4886), and clears the value of the pressed counter 223xa to 0 ( C4887), this process ends. Further, in the process of C4885, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is 0 (C4885: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, in the process of C4883, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first period (C4883: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second period (C4888), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the second period. If it is determined (C4888: Yes), a second period effect setting process is executed (C4889), and this process ends. The second period effect setting process (C4889) will be described later with reference to FIG. 645. On the other hand, in the process of C4888, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the second period (C4888: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the third period (C4890), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the third period. If it is determined (C4890: Yes), the third period effect setting process is executed (C4891), and this process ends. Note that the third period effect setting process (C4891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 646. Further, in the process of C4890, if it is determined that it is not the third period start timing (C4890: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, the contents of the first period effect setting process (C4882) will be explained with reference to FIG. 644. FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first period effect setting process (C4882). In this first period effect setting process (C4882), a process for setting the effect mode for the first period, that is, the effect mode of the press effect is executed.

When the first period performance setting process (C4882) is executed, first, a character is selected by referring to the character selection table 222xb based on the result of determining whether the final change is appropriate (C8001). Then, a display command indicating the selected character is set (C8002), a display command indicating the pressed icons 872a to 872d corresponding to the value of the press counter 223xa is set (C8003), and a first period flag is set. 223xe is set to on (C8004), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the second period effect setting process (C4889) will be explained with reference to FIG. 645. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second period effect setting process (C4889). In this second period performance setting process (C4889), processing for setting the performance mode corresponding to the second period, that is, the performance mode of the mission performance is executed.

When the second period effect setting process (C4889) is executed, first, the information in the reserved use information storage area 223xb is read out (C8051), and it is determined whether there is winning information (C8052). If it is determined that there is winning information (C8052: Yes), it determines the performance mode that indicates the winning as a result of the mission performance (C8053), sets the completion flag 223xd to on (C8054), and A display command indicating the presentation mode is set (C8055), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of C8052, if it is determined that there is no winning information (C8052: No), the number of reservations for winning information that has not yet been used among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223la, and the determination of the winning information. Information indicating the result (prereading result) is stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc (C8056), the production mode of the second period production (mission production) indicating the failure is determined (C8057), and the process moves to the process of C8055. , and then ends this process.

Next, the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891) will be explained with reference to FIG. 646. FIG. 646 is a flowchart showing the contents of the third period effect setting process (C4891). In this third period performance setting process (C4891), processing for setting the performance mode corresponding to the third period, that is, the performance mode of the result notification performance is executed.

When the third period effect setting process (C4891) is executed, it is first determined whether the completed flag 223xd is set to on (C8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to on, that is, the mission effect is If it is determined that the performance indicating winning is not being executed (C8101: No), the information stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is read (C8102), and the treasure box icon corresponding to the read pending number is displayed. 829b is determined (C8103), and it is determined whether there is any hit information in the information read in the process of C8102 (C8104).

In the process of C8104, if it is determined that there is winning information (C8104: Yes), a presentation mode indicating a win using the corresponding treasure box icon 829b is determined (C8105), and a display command indicating the determined presentation mode is issued. settings (C8106), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C8104, if it is determined that there is no winning information (C8104: No), the information stored in the winning information storage area 223la is read out (C8107), and it is determined whether winning information is stored in the read information. Determine (C8108).

Here, the processing contents of C8108 will be explained. In this embodiment, at the start of the result notification performance, a treasure box icon 829b corresponding to the number of information stored in the unused pending information storage area 223xc is displayed, and a win notification performance can be executed during the result notification performance. are doing. However, the timing at which information is stored in this unused pending information storage area 223xc is the start timing of the second period. Therefore, for example, at the start of the second period, if the upper limit number (4) of special map 2 reservations has not been acquired, after storing the information in the unused reservation information storage area 223xc, a new special Figure 2: A case may occur where a hold is acquired.

Therefore, by the process of C8108, by pre-determining the winning information corresponding to the special drawing 2 hold that is not stored in the unused hold information storage area 223xc and is stored in the win information storage area 223la, when the time saving ends. It becomes possible to perform winning notification during the result notification performance for all the acquired special drawing 2 reservations.

In the process of C8108, if it is determined that there is winning information (C8108: Yes), after displaying the missing treasure box, a presentation mode indicating a win is determined (C8109), and the process moves to the process of C8106. Further, if it is determined that there is no winning information (C8108: No), a mode indicating a missed win is determined (C8110), and the process moves to C8106.

On the other hand, in the process of C8101, if it is determined that the completed flag 223xd is set to on (C8101: Yes), the performance mode to celebrate the win is determined (C8111), and the completed flag 223xd is set to off ( C8112), the process moves to C8106.

Next, with reference to FIG. 647, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 30 (C3157) will be explained. FIG. 647 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 30 (C3157). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing 30 (C3157), processing for setting various performances to be executed based on the player's operation of the operating means (frame button 22) is executed.

When frame button input monitoring/production processing 30 (C3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag 223xe is set to on during the first period (C8201), and if it is determined that it is set to on, (C8201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223xa is greater than 0, that is, whether the press icons 872a to 872d are displayed (C8202).

In the process of C8202, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is larger than 0 (C8202: Yes), the target reservation is determined by referring to the target reservation selection table 222xc (C8203), and the determined target reservation is won. Based on the information, a display icon is determined by referring to the display icon selection table 222xd (C8204), the display mode of the pressed icon 872 corresponding to the value of the pressed counter 223xa is determined to be the determined display icon (C8205), and the display icon is determined (C8205). Determine the display mode of the character that corresponds to the contents of the icon (C8206), subtract 1 from the value of the press counter 223xa (C8207), set a display command corresponding to the determined contents (C8208), and execute this process. finish.

In addition, in the process of C8202, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223xa is 0, that is, if it is determined that all the displayed press icons 872 are variably displayed during the press effect, (C8202 :No), the production mode for liveliness is determined (C8209), and the process moves to C8208. On the other hand, in the process of C8201, if it is determined that the flag 223xe is not set to ON during the first period (C8201: No), the process related to other frame button input is executed (C8210), and the process moves to the process of C8208. .

In addition, in the present 30th embodiment, in a plurality of performances (final variation performance, result notification performance) executed in the final variation (special figure 2 final variation) during the time saving state, the pre-reading of special figure 2 pending is referred to. Although it is configured so that the result is selected, it is not limited to this, and as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation executed during the time saving state, it can correspond to special figure 2 variations other than the final variation of special figure 2. Even in the variable performance (non-final variable performance), the performance mode may be configured to be variable based on the preliminary determination result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed after the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state. And, based on the presentation mode of the non-final variation presentation and the presentation mode of the final variation presentation, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of winnings included in the special drawing 2 reservation that has already been obtained. good. Specifically, in the case where a special variation performance is executed as a non-final variation performance, if the performance result of the special variation performance is a performance result indicating a winning win, the special figure corresponding to the non-final variation performance 2 variation is a winning variation, and if the performance result of the special variation performance is a performance result indicating a loss, multiple special figures executed after the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the non-final variation performance. It may be configured to indicate that a plurality of winnings are included in the two lottery drawings.

With this configuration, when a special fluctuation performance is executed, it is possible to provide a novel performance that makes the player expect that the fluctuation is a negative fluctuation, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

<31st embodiment>
Next, the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 651. The 31st embodiment differs from the 30th embodiment described above in that the method for determining the effect mode of the time-saving final variation is different, and the rest is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned 30th embodiment, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final change of the time saving state (special figure 2 final change), depending on the number of special figure 2 reservations acquired, If display modes (press icons 872a to 872d) that can be operated (pressed) are displayed during the press effect, and if the operating means is operated during the press effect, any special figure 2 out of the reserved special figure 2 that has been obtained will be displayed. It was configured to notify the player of information indicating the prefetch result for the hold.

On the other hand, in the present 31st embodiment, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), the pre-reading of the acquired special figure 2 pending is performed. When it is determined that there is a special drawing 2 reservation that will win a winning prize, the timing of notifying that there is a special drawing 2 reservation that will win a winning prize (win special map 2 reservation) is determined by lottery. There is a big difference in that.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the performance (winning performance) that notifies the existence of the winning special drawing 2 hold, which is the performance content most desired by the player as the performance content of the time-saving final variation, is randomly set. Therefore, the player can enjoy the time-saving final variation performance to the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 648, the content of the time-saving final variation effect executed in the 31st embodiment will be explained, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment. FIG. 648 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the time saving final variation (special figure 2 final variation). As shown in FIG. 648, the time-saving final variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st embodiment is the same as the time-saving final variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment described above (see FIG. 639). ), the difference is that the period in which the operation validity period for validly determining the operation on the operation means by the player is set, that is, the period in which the press effect is executed, is removed, but other than that, it is the same. be. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

More specifically, in the time-saving final variation (special symbol 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation for 30 seconds is executed, and the player is asked to acquire the special symbol 2 hold in the first 5 seconds. A standby period during which a prompting standby effect is executed is set, and then a first period of 20 seconds is set. During this first period, the mission effect (final variation effect) in the above-mentioned 30th embodiment is executed, and after that, the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the time-saving final variation effect, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed, similar to the above-mentioned 30th embodiment.

If there is a winning special figure 2 reserve (winning special figure 2 reserve) among the acquired special figure 2 reserves, whether to notify that in the final variation effect or in the result notification effect. is determined by a lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the waiting period elapses, you have acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces) of Tokuzu 2 reservations, and there is a hit Tokuzu 2 reservation within the acquired Tokuzu 2 reservations. However, it is possible to notify that fact through the result notification performance instead of the final variation performance. Therefore, until all of the multiple effects executed in the time-saving final variation (effects that can inform the player of the pre-read results of the special drawing 2 pending) are completed, the expectation of winning will be kept in the player's hands. This makes it easier to maintain the feeling.

<About the electrical configuration of the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st embodiment will be described. The 31st embodiment is different from the 30th embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device is partially changed and the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially deleted, and other than that, the 31st embodiment is the same. be. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. First, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 649. FIG. 649 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 649, in the present 31st embodiment, the character selection table 222xb, the target pending selection table 222xc, and the display icon selection table 222xd are deleted from the 30th embodiment described above, and the notification period selection 31 table 222ya The difference is that ``is added, otherwise they are the same.

The configuration of the RAM 223 differs from the above-described 30th embodiment in that the push counter 223xa, pending use information storage area 223xb, unused pending information storage area 223xc, and completed flag 223xd are deleted, that is, the configuration of the ROM 222 is changed. The difference is that flags and counters that are no longer needed are deleted, but since the only difference is the deletion of the configuration, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The notification period selection 31 table 222ya selects the effect (period) for notifying when there is a special pattern 2 pending (winning special pattern 2 pending) that indicates winning within the special pattern 2 pending in the short time final variation. This is a data table used for This notification period selection 31 table 222ya stores winning information when it is determined that it is the start timing of the first period (C8301 in FIG. 651: Yes) in the final variation effect update process 31 (see FIG. 651 in FIG. 651). If the winning information corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending is read from the area 223la, and it is determined that there is winning information (special drawing 2 pending winning) as a preliminary determination result (pre-reading result) based on the read winning information (Fig. 651 (C8303: Yes) is referred to to select the notification period of the winning notification.

Here, the contents of the notification period selection 31 table 222ya will be explained with reference to FIG. 650. FIG. 650 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the notification period selection 31 table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 650, the notification period selection 31 table 222ya includes the judgment result of the running variation (time-saving final variation), the special figure 2 reservation type that includes winning information, and the value of the obtained production counter 223lf. The notification period is defined in accordance with .

Specifically, when the judgment result of the running variation is "win" and the winning information exists in the hold 1 (first special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is "0". A "first period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of 29 to 29, and a second period is defined as a period to be notified in the range from 30 to 98. In addition, if the winning information exists in Hold 2 (Second Special Figure 2 Hold), the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of 0 to 39, and the ``1st period'' is set as the period to be notified. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "40 to 98". In addition, if the winning information exists in Hold 3 (Third Special Figure 2 Hold), the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of 0 to 49, and the ``1st period'' is set as the period to be notified. A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "50 to 98". In addition, if the winning information exists in the hold 4 (4th special map 2 hold), the ``1st period'' is set as the period to be notified when the value of the acquired production counter 223lf is in the range of 0 to 69. A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "70 to 98".

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the running variation is "miss" and the winning information exists in the hold 1 (first special figure 2 pending), the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is "0 to 69". A "first period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of , and a "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range from 70 to 98. In addition, if the winning information exists in Hold 2 (Second Special Figure 2 Hold), the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of 0 to 59, and the ``1st period'' is set as the period to be notified. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "60 to 98". In addition, if the winning information exists in Hold 3 (Third Special Figure 2 Hold), the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of 0 to 49, and the ``1st period'' is set as the period to be notified. A "second period" is defined as a period to be notified in the range of "50 to 98". In addition, if the winning information exists in the hold 4 (4th special figure 2 hold), the ``1st period'' is set as the notification target period when the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf is in the range of 0 to 39. A "second period" is defined as a notification target period in the range of "40 to 98". In addition, if the running variation is "missing", it is configured to determine whether there is more than one piece of winning information, and if it is determined that there is more than one piece of winning information (if there is more than one piece of winning information), A "first period" is defined as a period to be notified for the entire range "0 to 98" that the value of the acquired performance counter 223lf can take.

In the 31st embodiment, as described above, when there is winning information (hit special figure 2 pending) in the special figure 2 pending, the notification target period is selected by lottery, and the notification is If the first period is selected as the target period, the winning will be announced in the mission performance (see Figure 375(a)), which is the final variable performance, and if the second period is selected, the result will be announced. It is configured so that winnings are notified through presentation (see FIG. 638(b)). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the performance indicating a win will be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, the notification target period is selected according to the storage location of the winning special drawing 2 holdings, that is, the order in which the winning special drawing 2 holdings are stored among the acquired special drawing 2 holdings. The proportions are different. Therefore, when a winning prize is actually announced, by determining whether it was announced during the first period or during the second period, it is possible to predict how many special drawings 2 were reserved to win the winning prize. can be made easier.

In addition, in the present 31st embodiment, as a general rule, for the special drawing 2 holding that has already been acquired, the pre-reading process (winning special drawing 2) is executed, and if it is determined that the winning special drawing 2 is pending, the system is configured so that the pre-reading process is not executed for subsequent special drawing 2 pending. There is.

In other words, when the winning special figure 2 reservation is the first special figure 2 reservation, the pre-reading process of the 2nd special figure 2 reservation to the 4th special figure 2 reservation is not executed, and the winning special figure 2 If the hold is the 4th special figure 2 hold, this indicates a case where the 1st special figure 2 hold to the 3rd special figure 2 hold were "missed". Therefore, by predicting the type of winning special map 2 reservation (1st special map 2 reservation to 4th special map 2 reservation) based on the period during which the performance indicating winning is executed, the remaining special map 2 reservation Since expectations for winning can be made different for each player, it is possible to make the player more interested in the effects executed during the time-saving final variation.

Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, the notification period is different depending on the lottery result of the special pattern 2 variation (special pattern 2 final variation) in progress, and the lottery result of the special pattern 2 variation in progress is The notification target period that is likely to be selected is different depending on whether the game is a hit or a loss. Specifically, if the special figure 2 variation that is being executed is a winning result, the pre-reading result that is advantageous to the player as the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 reservation (the special figure 2 reservation that is executed early is the winning special). 2), the second period is more likely to be selected. However, if the current special figure 2 variation is out of order, the game It is stipulated that the more advantageous the pre-reading result is to the player (the earlier executed special figure 2 reservation is the winning special figure 2 reservation), the more likely the first period will be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the pre-read result of the special drawing 2 pending but also in the lottery result of the variation (time saving final variation).

In addition, in the present 31st embodiment, only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, when the special pattern 2 variation being executed is out of order, the pre-reading process is executed for all special pattern 2 reservations. If it is determined by the pre-reading process that there are multiple winning special drawing 2 reservations within the special drawing 2 reservation, the first period will always be selected as the notification target period. It consists of By configuring this way, when the mission performance executed in the first period has a performance result that indicates a win, if the lottery result of the fluctuation is a loss, the winning special drawing 2 reservation will be held. The possibility that more than one exists can be increased.

In this case, when the mission performance results in a performance that indicates a win, it is possible to carry out a suggestion performance that can suggest to the player which special drawing 2 lottery result the performance result targets. It is preferable to configure it, and at least make it possible to execute a suggestion effect that allows the player to understand whether it is the lottery result of the special drawing 2 variation that is being executed or the lottery result of the special drawing 2 that has been acquired and held. .

In addition, without using the above-mentioned suggestion effect, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. By displaying the small display area Dm2 and the small display area Dm2a for indicating the number of reservations of the second special symbol (the number of special symbols 2 reservations) on the display screen, the current performance result can be changed to the lottery result of the time-saving final variation. A mode may be used in which the player can determine after the fact whether the lottery result is shown or the lottery result of special drawing 2 pending is shown.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 31st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 651, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 31st embodiment will be described. The control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 31st embodiment is different from the final variation in the control processing content executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 30th embodiment described above. The difference is that the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599 in FIG. 651) is executed instead of the effect update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643), and the rest is the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599). This final variation performance update process 31 (see C4599) differs from the above-described final variation performance update process 30 (see C4596 in FIG. 643) in that the processing content executed at the start timing of each period is different. They are different.

When the final variation effect update process 31 (see C4599) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the first period start timing (C8301), and if it is determined that it is the first period start timing (C8301: Yes) , reads winning information from the winning information storage area 223la (C8302), and determines whether winning information is included in the read winning information (C8303).

In the process of C8303, if it is determined that winning information is included (C8303), the first The period and presentation mode of the second period are determined (C8304), and the process moves to C8311. In addition, in the process of C8303, if it is determined that winning information is not included (C8303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation is a winning fluctuation (C8305), and if it is a winning fluctuation (C8305: Yes). ), determines the performance mode indicating winning in the first period (C8306), and moves to the process of C8311.

On the other hand, in the process of C8305, if it is determined that there is no winning variation (C8305), a presentation mode indicating a loss in the first period and the second period is determined (C8307), and the process moves to the process of C8311.

In addition, in the process of C8301, if it is determined that it is not the first period start timing (C8301: No), then it is determined whether it is the second period start timing (C8308), and the second period start timing is determined. If it is determined that (C8308: Yes), it is determined whether a new special 2 reservation, that is, a new special 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) has been acquired after the first period start timing (C8309), If it is determined that it has been newly acquired (C8309: Yes), the re-prefetch flag lr is set on (C8310), and the process moves to S8311. Note that the contents of the re-re-reading flag lr and the contents of various processes executed based on being set to on are the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the process of C8308, if it is determined that it is not the second period start timing (C8308: No), or in the process of C8309, it is determined that a new special 2 reservation (special map 2 reservation) has not been acquired. In the case (C8309: No), the process of C8310 is skipped and the process moves to the process of C8311.

In the process of C8311, a display command is set to indicate the performance mode determined in the various processes described above (C8311), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the 31st embodiment, at the end timing of the waiting period (start timing of the first period) in the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 final variation), the acquired special figure 2 pending When pre-reading is performed and it is determined that there is a special map 2 reservation that will win a winning prize, the timing to notify that there is a special map 2 reservation that will win a winning prize (win special map 2 reservation) will be determined by lottery. They differ greatly in their composition.

With this configuration, the execution timing of the performance (winning performance) that notifies the existence of the winning special drawing 2 hold, which is the performance content most desired by the player as the performance content of the time-saving final variation, is randomly set. Therefore, the player can enjoy the time-saving final variation performance to the end.

In addition, in the time-saving final variation (special pattern 2 final variation), the second special symbol variation is executed for 30 seconds, and during the first 5 seconds, a standby effect that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 hold is shown. A waiting period is set to be executed, followed by a first period of 20 seconds. During this first period, the mission effect (final variation effect) in the above-mentioned 30th embodiment is executed, and after that, the result notification effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the time-saving final variation effect, the final variation effect and the result notification effect are executed, similar to the above-mentioned 30th embodiment.

If there is a winning special figure 2 reserve (winning special figure 2 reserve) among the acquired special figure 2 reserves, whether to notify that in the final variation effect or in the result notification effect. is determined by a lottery.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the waiting period elapses, you have acquired up to the upper limit (4 pieces) of Tokuzu 2 reservations, and there is a hit Tokuzu 2 reservation within the acquired Tokuzu 2 reservations. However, it is possible to notify that fact through the result notification performance instead of the final variation performance. Therefore, until all of the multiple effects executed in the time-saving final variation (effects that can inform the player of the pre-read results of the special drawing 2 pending) are completed, the expectation of winning will be kept in the player's hands. This makes it easier to maintain the feeling.

As explained above, in the 30th embodiment and the 31st embodiment described above, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 final variation) which is the time-saving final variation is fixed to 30 seconds (Fig. 639 , and Fig. 648), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to select different lengths of variation time as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 final variation) which is the time-saving final variation. It's okay. In this case, for example, it is possible to select 5 seconds or 25 seconds as the variation time of the special figure 2 final variation, and if the variation time of 5 seconds is selected, the result notification effect will be displayed when the special figure 2 final variation starts. If a variation time of 25 seconds is selected, the standby effect (5 seconds) is omitted when the special figure 2 final variation is started, and the final variation effect is executed. That's good. As a result, even if the fluctuation times of the special figure 2 final fluctuation are different, the performance can be executed using the same performance data, so the amount of performance data can be reduced.

In addition, if a variable time of 25 seconds to 30 seconds can be set as the variable time of the final variation of special figure 2, a variable effect will be executed in which the length of the period during which the above-mentioned standby effect is executed is varied. You can configure it to do so. In other words, as in the above-mentioned 30th and 31st embodiments, at least the production period including the special figure 2 final fluctuation period is divided into multiple periods (first period, second period, etc.), and each period is divided into multiple periods (first period, second period, etc.). If the configuration is such that different effects can be executed, priority is given to the effects to be executed for each period, and if different lengths of effect periods are set, the effects with higher priority will be given priority. It is preferable to preferentially secure the length of the execution period, and to vary the length of the execution period for lower-priority effects.

With this configuration, even if performance periods of different lengths are set, it is possible to easily execute high-priority performances using the same performance period. In addition, by making it possible to execute performances with high priority using the same performance period, it is possible to easily execute performances with high priority using the same performance mode, so that the performance is easy to understand for players. can be provided.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 30th embodiment and 31st embodiment, the variable time of the second special symbol lottery executed after the normal state is set (the variation time corresponding to the special symbol 2 hold that has been acquired at the end of the time reduction) 2), a fixed time (see FIG. 385(b)) is set as the variable time of the special symbol lottery, as in the 16th embodiment described above. It may be configured such that the variation time of the height is selected.

In this case, by varying the length of the specific period (for example, the waiting period) among the variable performances executed in the special pattern 2 final variation, the variable time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special pattern 2 pending For example, the variation time of the special pattern 2 final variation is 30 seconds, and the total time of the variation time of the 2nd special symbol variation corresponding to the acquired special pattern 2 pending. If it is 10 seconds, the performance period of the fluctuation performance executed based on the start of the final fluctuation of special figure 2 is set to 40 seconds, the standby performance period of 13 seconds, the final fluctuation performance period of 20 seconds, and the final fluctuation performance period of 7 seconds. What is necessary is to configure the result notification performance period to be in seconds.

With this configuration, the production period of the variation performance executed based on the start of the special pattern 2 final variation can be made into a period that includes the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol 2 suspension. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is set for a long time. In addition, since the length of periods (final variable performance period, result notification performance period) other than the specific period (standby performance period) can be fixed, it is possible to use the same performance data for different performance periods. can be made easier to execute.

Furthermore, among the variable performances executed based on the start of the special figure 2 final variation, by varying the length of the production period of the production executed first (standby production), the second variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension is 2 In the case where the variation time of the special symbol lottery is made different, the timing at which the later performance (final variation performance, result notification performance) is executed is the timing when the time saving state ends and the transition to the normal state occurs. It can be done.

With this configuration, for example, if the time saving state ends before the result notification effect is executed, that is, if the time saving effect is executed after the result notification effect transitions to the normal state, the result In order to make it difficult to obtain a new special figure 2 reservation during the notification performance, we use a performance control that changes the performance mode of the result notification performance midway through, that is, after the result notification performance has started in a performance mode that indicates a loss. , a performance that changes the performance mode of the result notification performance to a performance mode that indicates a hit and win when a new special symbol 2 reservation is acquired and the pre-read result of the newly acquired special symbol 2 reservation is a winning win. Control can be made difficult to execute. Therefore, the processing load of performance control can be reduced.

In the above example, the execution timing (start timing) of the result notification effect is in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution timing (start timing) of the final variation effect is in the normal state. The variation time of the special symbol 2 final variation and the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol 2 suspension may be configured to be selectable so that the variation time can be changed after the transition to the special symbol 2 final variation. In addition, instead of varying the length of the fluctuation time, the length of the production period can be changed by varying the final time of each special symbol fluctuation (the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed to indicate the lottery result). It may be configured to be different.

In addition, the total period of the variation time of the special pattern 2 final variation and the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special pattern 2 hold, that is, the production of the variation effect that is executed at the same time as the start of the special pattern 2 final variation. A period determining means is provided for determining whether the length of the period is longer than a specific period (for example, 50 seconds), and when the period determining means determines that the period is longer than the specific period, a special effect is executed. It may be configured to set a possible special period. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent various periods (standby performance period, final variable performance period, result notification performance period) set in the performance period from becoming unnecessarily long and reducing the performance effect. I can do it. In addition, in this case, the variation time of the final variation of special pattern 2, or the variation time of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to special pattern 2 pending, is better when there is a winning result than when there is no winning. , it is preferable to configure it so that a long fluctuation time is set. As a result, in the case of winning (winning), a long performance period is set, making it easier for the specific performance to be executed, so the expectation of winning when the specific performance is executed. You can increase the degree. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the special period to be set only when there is a plurality of winnings in the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2 pending. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the added value of the special performance.

In each of the embodiments described above, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command Although a case has been described in which the information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, entering the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the embodiments described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a normal gaming state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. It is also possible to have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as operating means that can be operated by the player, and the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated when the player presses the button. A lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated the lever by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or a lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated it by touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be identified, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the embodiments described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. You can. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine that has a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and in which the variable probability state has a high probability of winning a small win, the advantage of high settings can be realized. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are many chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as the plurality of special symbol types, but the number of types of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more types of special symbols are used. The special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game feature in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules, and a game feature in which a lottery (variation) is carried out independently of each other are explained. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

All or part of the embodiments and control examples described above may be combined.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (Advanced control in meter control)
an operation means that can be operated by a player; a validity period setting means that can set a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid; and a valid period setting means that is based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period In a gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, the final performance among the performances that can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the valid period. Information determining means capable of determining information corresponding to the aspect, and execution based on the timing at which the operating means is operated within the validity period based on the information determined by the information determining means. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it has a setting means capable of setting setting information for determining a performance mode that enables a game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it is proposed that a notice performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, information corresponding to the final performance mode to be executed when the operating means is operated within the validity period is determined, and based on the determined information, the information is determined at the timing when the operating means is operated. Since the performance mode that can be executed is determined based on the final performance mode, it is possible to change the performance mode executed up to the final performance mode depending on the operation timing of the player, and the final performance mode and It becomes possible for a player to perform a plurality of performances in a variety of ways by combining the frequency and timing of operating the operating means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A1 has an updating means capable of adding or subtracting numerical information based on the operation of the operating means, and the effect execution means updates the numerical information in the updating means. Based on this, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the updated numerical information, and the information determining means determines a maximum value or a minimum value of the numerical information as the information. A gaming machine A2, wherein the setting means sets a value that can be updated by the updating means as the setting information in response to a timing when the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, setting information includes a value that can be updated at the timing when the operating means is operated, corresponding to a maximum value or a minimum value determined in advance by the information determining means. Since it is set, it becomes possible to update the numerical information to the maximum or minimum value by effectively using the validity period, and it becomes possible to execute a performance that effectively utilizes the validity period, increasing the interest of the performance using the operation means. It has the effect of improving the

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting means is configured to be able to set a formula for the updating means to update the numerical information based on time information corresponding to a timing when the operating means is operated. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting means sets a mathematical formula, so that the updating means can easily determine the numerical information to be updated. .

<Feature B group> (Continuous press detection control in repeated button presses)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation means, the performance is executed by the performance execution means. a production mode selection means capable of selecting a production mode; and a production mode selecting means capable of selecting a production mode; and when the production execution means executes the production, the production mode is configured to perform a predetermined period of time based on the operation of the operation means. , and a regulating means capable of regulating.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it is proposed that a notice performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, patent document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, when a performance is executed, execution of the performance is restricted for a predetermined period of time, so that if the operation means is operated while the performance is being performed, This has the effect of suppressing the problem of starting a new performance and reducing the interest of the performance, and improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a period setting means capable of setting period information corresponding to the performance to be executed as the predetermined period when the performance is executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, period information corresponding to the performance to be performed is set as a predetermined period, so the execution of the performance is regulated in the period corresponding to the performance to be performed. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the performance interval becomes longer and the interest in the game decreases.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a notification means capable of notifying a notification mode each time the operation means is operated, and a lottery means capable of executing a predetermined lottery when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine B3, wherein the performance executing means is configured to be able to execute the performance when a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a notification mode is notified each time the operating means is operated, and a predetermined lottery is executed every time the operating means is operated, and a specific lottery is performed each time the operating means is operated. Since the system is configured so that the effect is executed when the lottery result is , even if the lottery result is not a specific lottery result, the player can confirm that the operating means has been operated. This has the effect of suppressing problems that reduce the interest in gaming.

<Characteristics Group C> (Makes it difficult for unfavorable jackpot games to be executed during a partial period during an advantageous gaming state)
A first benefit game in which a first game state is set after the end of the bonus game based on a determining means capable of performing the determination and the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result; a second bonus game in which a second game state is set that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the game ends, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing the second bonus game; The gaming machine includes a setting means capable of setting a first setting when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where the state is set, and the gaming machine is configured such that the first setting is set by setting the first setting. The first bonus game is made more difficult to execute based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is the specific determination result than when it is not set. Characteristic game machine C1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that can set an advantageous gaming state (variable state) that is advantageous to the player or a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player after the bonus game ends, depending on the lottery result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, a prize is won when a bonus game (disadvantageous bonus game) in which an unfavorable gaming status is set after the bonus game ends is executed by a lottery executed in a state where an advantageous gaming status is set. If this happens, there is a problem in that a disadvantageous bonus game will definitely be executed and the player's desire to play will decrease. In particular, if the advantageous gaming state is set for a short period and you win when a disadvantageous bonus game is executed, the advantageous gaming state will end without receiving much of the benefit of the advantageous gaming state. However, there was a problem in that the player's desire to play further decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which suppresses a decrease in the player's desire to play and improves the interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming feature (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of drawings are executed at the same time. In gaming machines with such gameplay, if the first lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games that are currently being executed are forced to be played as a loss. It has been proposed to terminate the process automatically (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). By the way, regardless of the type of bonus game, the gaming machine described above forcibly stops and displays other lottery results as a loss based on the stop display of the lottery result in which the bonus game is executed. There was a problem in that it made people feel uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine C1, by setting the first setting, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first bonus game. To allow players to play games with enthusiasm without fear of being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing and to improve the interest in the game.

A gaming machine C2, which is the gaming machine C1, further comprising a notification means capable of executing a notification effect to notify that the first setting is set.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the setting status of the first setting can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the notification effect executed by the notification means, so that the player can easily understand the setting status of the first setting. There is an effect that the determination by the determining means during the second gaming state can be executed with enthusiasm.

The gaming machine C2 includes a notification condition determining means capable of determining whether or not a notification condition is satisfied when the first setting is set by the setting means, A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the notification effect can be executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the notification effect is executed when it is determined that the notification condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to perform an appropriate notification effect for the player. effective.

Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3 has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the bonus game execution means , the bonus game is executed when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the identification information is the specific determination result, and the gaming machine executes the bonus game. The apparatus further includes a stop control means capable of causing the dynamic display being executed at the timing when the first setting is ended to be stopped and displayed using the identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine C4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the dynamic display that is executed at the timing when the first setting ends is performed using previous identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result. Since the display can be stopped at , there is an effect that it is difficult to execute the first bonus game.

In the gaming machine C4, as a dynamic display period of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period; The determining means includes a first determination result and a first determination result as the specific determination result. and a second determination result different from the result, and the bonus game execution means executes the first bonus game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result. and the second bonus game can be executed based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, and the dynamic display period setting means indicates the first discrimination result. The first dynamic display period is configured to be easier to set as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the second determination result than the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the second determination result. A gaming machine C5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result that the first bonus game is executed is more effective in determining the determination result that the second bonus game is executed. Since it is possible to easily set a dynamic display period that is longer than the dynamic display of the identification information for displaying, the stop control means can make it more difficult to execute the first bonus game than the second bonus game. There is an effect.

<Feature D group> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery result is the same, the performance mode is different depending on the type of winning opening)
a first control means capable of executing main control regarding the game; a second control means capable of executing control of the game based on information output from the first control means; and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first control means controls when the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. A determining means capable of performing determination based on the ball being entered, a gaming information determining means capable of determining gaming information based on the result of the determination, and gaming information determined by the gaming information determining means a control signal output means capable of outputting a control signal for indicating the determination result, and the second control means has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance for displaying the discrimination result based on the control signal. In the machine, the first control means determines whether the control signal is based on the ball entering the first ball entering means or the control signal based on the ball entering the second ball entering means. The player is configured to be able to output identifiable identification information to the second control means, and the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that is advantageous to the player during a period in which the performance is executed based on the identification information. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. In addition, there have been games in which the player can play a game while having the expectation that the lottery result will be a win by executing an effect to show the lottery result. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766). Furthermore, there has been a system that improves the gameplay by providing a plurality of starting slots as lottery triggers for executing one lottery, and making it possible to execute the lottery by various games. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, no matter which opening the game ball is placed in, the same presentation is executed, which causes the problem that the presentation becomes monotonous and the player's desire to play decreases. there were. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which suppresses a decrease in the player's desire to play and improves the interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, there is an identification that can identify whether the control signal is based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the control signal is based on the ball entering the second ball entering means. Since performances can be executed based on information, variations in performances can be increased, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the performance information execution means can vary the execution frequency of the specific performance based on the identification information.

According to the gaming machine D2, the specific effect can be executed at different frequencies depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which a game ball is entered into any of the ball entry means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the main control means includes a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, and the effect execution means A gaming machine D3 characterized in that the specific performance can be executed when the discrimination result based on the control signal is the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, a specific performance can be executed when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result in which a bonus game is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a specific performance will be executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D3, when receiving the control signal based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, the performance execution means executes the specific performance only when the determination result is the specific determination result. and when the control signal based on the ball entering the second ball entering means is received, the specific effect is executed when the discrimination result is a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being executable.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the conditions for executing the specific performance are different depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entering means or the case where the ball enters the second ball entering means. This has the effect that the player can predict the determination result of the determining means based on the type of ball entering means into which the game ball is entered.

<Feature E group> (SG time-saving final fluctuation control)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. dynamically displaying on a display means a possible storage means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display means capable of performing the above-mentioned determination results; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific determination result. In the gaming machine having the following, a privilege granting means capable of awarding a privilege to a player by a game ball passing through a specific area during a period in which the privilege game is executed; a variable means that can be varied between a first state where it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball and a second state where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; a first game state; a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the variable means is more easily varied from the second state to the first state than the gaming state; and a second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. If the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the performance is executed in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the execution of which is started before the end condition set by the game state setting means is satisfied. and a performance execution means capable of performing the performance, and the performance execution means is configured to store the identification information corresponding to a predetermined number of the information among the information stored in the storage means when executing the performance. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the game machine E1 is configured to be able to execute the performance over a period until the dynamic display ends.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, there is a system that is configured to be able to execute a plurality of bonus games with different degrees of advantage, to be configured to be able to set a plurality of gaming states, and to vary the selection ratio of bonus games depending on the set gaming state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in such a gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving state) is set, it becomes easier to enter a ball than when another gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set. If a specific starting port (for example, a starting port with an electric accessory) is provided and a lottery is executed based on a game ball entering that specific starting port, and a game ball enters another starting port. The system is configured so that a bonus game with a high degree of advantage (for example, a small win) is more likely to be executed, and furthermore, the lottery right to be executed based on a game ball entering a specific starting hole is Some devices are configured so that they can be stored on hold up to an upper limit. In a gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, it is possible for a player to efficiently execute a lottery that is executed based on a game ball entering a specific starting slot. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, once the end conditions of a specific gaming state are met, it becomes difficult to draw a lottery based on the game ball entering the specific starting slot. There was a problem in that players' motivation to play decreased. In the gaming machine described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making the period during which a specific game state is set appear longer to the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the performance is executed over the dynamic display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means that is executed after the termination condition is satisfied, the performance is executed over the dynamic display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means, so that the performance is executed even after transitioning to the first gaming state. It is said that the game can be made more interesting by making the player think that the second gaming state is being set continuously, and making the player think that the second gaming state is being set for a long time. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the predetermined number is the number of all pieces of information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the dynamic display of more identification information can be made to appear as if it were the dynamic display of 1, and the second gaming state is set. It can make your stay feel longer.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a preliminary discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the information is performed, and the effect execution means a production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of the production executed by the production method, and the production mode setting means is configured to set the production mode of the production performed by the production method, and the production mode setting means is configured to set the production mode of the production performed by the production method, and the production mode setting device is configured to set the production mode of the production performed by the production method, and the production mode setting device is configured to set the production mode of the production executed by A gaming machine E3 characterized in that a performance mode can be set based on the result of the previous determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the performance mode of the performance executed during the second gaming state is determined in advance based on information that is determined after the transition to the first gaming state. Since it can be set based on the result, it can be made to think that the result of the determination executed during the second gaming state is a specific determination result with a higher probability than the set value. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game during the second game.

In the gaming machine E3, the performance executing means is capable of executing at least a first performance and a second performance executed after the first performance is finished, and the performance mode setting means allows the performance execution means to execute the performance as the performance. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it has a selection means that can select the number of pieces of information used to set the performance mode of the first performance.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, by varying the number of information used to set the performance mode of the first performance, the result of the determination by the determining means becomes a specific determination result. It is possible to set a case where the player is notified by the first performance and a case where the player is not notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making the player expect that the bonus game will be executed until the performance executed by the performance execution means ends.

The gaming machine E4 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation validity period setting means that can set an operation validity period during which an operation on the operation means is effectively determined, and the effect execution means includes: As the performance, an operation performance in which the operation validity period is set can be executed before the first performance is executed, and the selection means selects the content of the operation on the operation means during the operation performance. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the number of pieces of information used for setting the performance mode of the first performance can be selected based on the following.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, it is possible to select the number of pieces of information used when setting the performance mode of the first performance based on the operation of the operating means by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set the performance mode desired by the player.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the performance mode setting means is capable of setting the performance mode of the second performance based on the result of the preliminary determination for the information not selected by the selection means. A gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4 or E5, the performance mode of the second performance is set based on the preliminary determination result for information that was not used when setting the performance mode of the first performance. Therefore, even if the first production mode is a production mode that indicates an error, it will be expected that the amount of information used when setting the first production mode was small, and the second production will be changed. It can draw attention. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the bonus game will be executed until the performance executed by the performance execution means ends.

Any of the gaming machines E4 to E6, which has a notification means capable of notifying the number of pieces of information that have not been used to set the performance mode of the first performance before the second performance is started. A gaming machine E7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E3 to E6, the number of pieces of information that is not used to set the performance mode of the first performance is notified before the second performance is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the rest of the performance can be appropriately enjoyed based on the number of notified information.

<Features Group F> (Right-handed detection version: Even if the lottery result is the same, the performance mode differs depending on the gaming situation)
A first control means capable of executing main control regarding the game, a second control means capable of executing control of the game based on information output from the first control means, and a first control means capable of controlling the game ball. A game in which a flow path, a second flow path configured to make it difficult for game balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and game balls that have flown down the first flow path flow down the second flow path. a first ball entering means configured to allow the ball to enter the ball more easily than the ball; and a second ball entry device configured to allow the game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the ball more easily than the game ball flowing down the second flow path. ball means, and a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the second flow path, and the first control means is configured to detect when a game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. a determining means capable of determining information based on the result of said determination; and a control signal for indicating information determined by said information determining means. and a control signal output means capable of outputting a control signal, and the second control means includes a performance execution means capable of executing a performance for notifying the determination result indicated by the control signal, The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect that is advantageous to the player based on the detection result by the detection means during the period when the effect is being executed. F1.

<G group> (Modification 1 of SG time-saving final fluctuation control (unused look-ahead number notification))
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means. a storage means capable of storing data at an upper limit; a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a display means dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. A dynamic display means capable of displaying a dynamic display means, and a privilege capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine comprising: a game execution means; a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus to a player by a game ball passing through a specific area during a period in which the bonus game is executed; A variable means that can be varied between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state, and a first game state; a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the variable means is more easily varied from the second state to the first state than the first gaming state; and a second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. is set, the first gaming state performs an effect in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, which starts execution before the end condition set by the gaming state setting means is satisfied. a production execution means capable of executing the production; production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of the production executed by the production execution means; and a prior determination means capable of performing prior determination before the determination by the determination means is performed, and the production mode setting means is configured to perform the prior determination on the information stored in the storage means. A performance mode can be set based on at least a part of the result, and the gaming machine provides a suggestion performance that allows the performance mode setting means to suggest the number of pieces of information that are not used to set the performance mode. A gaming machine G1 characterized by being executable.

According to the gaming machine G1, it is possible to suggest the number of pieces of information that are not used to set the performance mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means by the suggestion performance, so even after the performance ends, the bonus game This has the effect of making the player look forward to the game being executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group H> (Variation 2 of SG time-saving final fluctuation control (hit hold position suggestion))
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means. a storage means capable of storing data at an upper limit; a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a display means dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. A dynamic display means capable of displaying a dynamic display means, and a privilege capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine comprising: a game execution means; a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus to a player by a game ball passing through a specific area during a period in which the bonus game is executed; A variable means that can be varied between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state, and a first game state; a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the variable means is more easily varied from the second state to the first state than the first gaming state; and a second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. is set, the first gaming state performs an effect in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, which starts execution before the end condition set by the gaming state setting means is satisfied. a production execution means capable of executing the production; production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of the production executed by the production execution means; and a prior determination means capable of performing prior determination before the determination by the determination means is performed, and the production mode setting means is configured to perform the prior determination on the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is possible to set a performance mode that allows identification of the information whose result is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to predict information that will be a specific determination result from among the information stored in the storage means based on the performance mode of the performance. As a result, by understanding whether other information stored in the storage means is determined before the bonus game is executed or after the bonus game ends, it is possible to determine whether the other information stored in the storage means is executed after the bonus game ends. This has the effect that the content of the game to be played can be predicted in advance and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics Group I> (SG2)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. dynamically displaying on a display means a possible storage means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific determination result; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific determination result. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine has: a pre-discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminator; and a discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. The player has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result, and a selection means that allows the player to select information corresponding to the performance to be executed by the performance execution means from among the information stored in the storage means. A game machine I1 characterized in that it is a game machine.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to perform effects such as displaying the result of a lottery in a varying combination of symbols, etc., and then stopping and displaying the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which a lottery result can be determined in advance before the variable display starts, and the preliminary determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine I1, since the player can select the information used in the performance, the range in which the player can intervene in the game is expanded, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature J group> (SG3)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. dynamically displaying on a display means a possible storage means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific determination result; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific determination result. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine has: a pre-discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminator; and a discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. Out of the information stored in the performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result and the storage means, the information other than the information determined by the preliminary determination means corresponding to the performance executed by the performance execution means A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it has a suggestion means capable of suggesting suggestion information for indicating number information.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to perform effects such as displaying the result of a lottery in a varying combination of symbols, etc., and then stopping and displaying the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which a lottery result can be determined in advance before the variable display starts, and the preliminary determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine J1, after the performance is executed, the number of information on which the performance has not been executed based on the prior determination is notified, so even after the performance has been executed, the information on which the performance has not been executed is notified. This has the effect of increasing expectations for the game and increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature K group> (SG4)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. dynamically displaying on a display means a possible storage means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific determination result; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific determination result. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine has: a pre-discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminator; and a discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result, the performance execution means being capable of executing a performance based on a determination result by the preliminary determination means based on a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to perform effects such as displaying the result of a lottery in a varying combination of symbols, etc., and then stopping and displaying the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which a lottery result can be determined in advance before the variable display starts, and the preliminary determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the performance is executed based on the determination result of the advance determination means based on a plurality of pieces of information, the performance can be varied and the effect of improving the interest of the game is achieved.

<Feature L group> (SG5)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. dynamically displaying on a display means a possible storage means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific determination result; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific determination result. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine has: a pre-discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminator; and a discrimination by the pre-discrimination means. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result, the performance being varied based on information corresponding to the order in which the information determined by the preliminary determination means was stored. Gaming machine L1 is characterized by certain things.

Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured to perform effects such as displaying the result of a lottery in a varying combination of symbols, etc., and then stopping and displaying the combination corresponding to the lottery result. A configuration has been proposed in which a lottery result can be determined in advance before the variable display starts, and the preliminary determination result can be notified (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the effects are varied depending on the order in which the information is stored, the effects can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics A group> (Small hits possible during certain special figure fluctuations)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a dynamic display period setting means capable of executing the second determination. a second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the first identification information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second bonus game is executed. a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first determination; and a first game state in which the first determination is performed more easily than the second determination. a second gaming state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed; A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during a target display period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there has been a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine A1, since the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed can be set as the first gaming state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set is can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A1, the second determining means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determining means determines the specific first determination result. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second bonus game, which is executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, is more likely to be executed than the first bonus game, which is executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game desiring that the first gaming state is set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. a third ball entering means different from the second ball entering means; a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second ball entering means; and a third ball entering means in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than in the first state. and a variable means that is variable between two states, and the first determining means determines whether the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second determining means is configured to be able to perform the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and in the second gaming state, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be more easily varied to the first state than to the first gaming state.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first determination can be made more difficult to execute in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to easily perform a game in which the third ball entering means enters a ball, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. .

In the gaming machine A3, after the first bonus game is executed, the probability that the first determination is determined to be the specific first determination result is set to a high probability higher than that in normal times. and a setting means, wherein the gaming state setting means displays the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is to be displayed as the first identification information for indicating a specific first judgment result by the first judgment. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second bonus game is a game in which fewer bonuses can be given to the player than the first bonus game. Machine A5.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, in the second privilege game, the number of benefits that can be given to the player is smaller than in the first privilege game, so it is not possible to give excessive benefits to the player during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of being able to suppress the possibility of being added.

<Feature B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 set at once)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means on which second identification information is displayed to show the determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. a second dynamic display means for displaying the second identification information; a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result is displayed, the second identification information for executing a first bonus game and indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. is displayed, in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game, the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed. a period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed; and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means. A game machine B1 characterized in that it has a performance determining means for determining a performance corresponding to the performance, and a performance executing means for executing the performance determined by the performance determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there has been a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the performance that corresponds to the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means is determined by the performance determination means, the performance that corresponds to the dynamic display of the second identification information is determined by the performance determination means. Since the performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information can be executed in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting future games based on the performance executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the performance determining means determines the performance based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first bonus game. Characteristic game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, by understanding the performance executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to determine the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first bonus game. It becomes possible to predict the contents. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination. It has a settable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is executed during a dynamic display period in which the game is displayed.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first bonus game will be executed, the period until the first bonus game is executed is Using this, you can play a game aiming at the second bonus game. Furthermore, by understanding the performance executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to predict the period during which the first gaming state will be set, so it is possible to motivate players to play games during the first gaming state. effective.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, the first bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means includes a normal first bonus game and a small first bonus game that provides fewer benefits to the player than the normal first bonus game. and, the first dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. , the performance determining means is configured to perform a case in which the small first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit and the second period is determined by the period determining unit, and a case in which the bonus game execution unit executes the normal The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the same type of performance is determined when one bonus game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect of the two elements for determining the content of the performance are different combinations, the performance determining means performs the same mode. Since the performance is determined, by understanding the content of the performance executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to allow the player to predict a plurality of patterns of future gaming situations. Then, depending on the progress of the first game state, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of prediction. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of prediction for the player, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the performance determining means determines the specific performance when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, by executing the specific performance, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristics Group C> (Intrusion notification)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means on which second identification information is displayed to show the determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. a second dynamic display means for displaying the second identification information; a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result is displayed, the second identification information for executing a first bonus game and indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. is displayed, a first game state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination; a second gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination; and a notification timing determining means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, depending on the lottery results, an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set for the period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot, and the player is notified that the gaming state has changed. A gaming machine that performs a performance has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to execute an effect to notify the player based on the setting of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The problem is that even if a new lottery cannot be executed, the player is notified that the game status has been set, causing discomfort to the player. was there. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is likely to be performed can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable at the notification timing of notifying that the first gaming state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine C2, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set based on the determination result of the first determining means that is executed separately from the second determining means, the notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. The timing is determined. Therefore, it is possible to combine the first identification information and the second identification information, which can be dynamically displayed at the same time, to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

The gaming machine C2 includes dynamic display determining means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is configured to determine whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed. If the second identification information is determined not to be dynamically displayed by the digital display determining means, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. Game machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the second determination can be performed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determining means terminates the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the notification.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, the setting of the first gaming state is not notified, and the second determination becomes executable. In this case, it is announced that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of not being able to execute the second determination even though it is reported that the first gaming state has been set, and it is also possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine C4 includes a remaining period determining means for determining a period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends until the first gaming state ends, based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine C5, further comprising a notification determining means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determining means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed during the first gaming state. If the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible not to notify the player that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, even though the player is notified that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time, causing discomfort to the player. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristic Group D> (Long win discarded due to simultaneous fluctuations, small hit interrupted)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a predetermined period of time, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a first dynamic display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. 2 display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and a first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second bonus game is executed. In the gaming machine, the second dynamic display means includes a bonus game execution means for executing the second bonus game, and a second bonus game type setting means for setting the content of the second bonus game from a plurality of bonus contents. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed based on the benefit content set by the second benefit game type setting means. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it has a stop control means for executing stop control.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming feature (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of drawings are executed simultaneously. In gaming machines with such gameplay, if the first lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games that are currently being executed are forced to be played as a loss. It has been proposed to terminate the process automatically (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). By the way, regardless of the type of bonus game, the gaming machine described above forcibly stops and displays other lottery results as a loss based on the stop display of the lottery result in which the bonus game is executed. There was a problem in that it made people feel uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set the stop control content for the first dynamic display according to the content of the second bonus game to be executed, thereby suppressing a situation that would cause discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means performs forced stop control for stopping and displaying the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means using the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is possible to perform a temporary stop control for stopping measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, depending on the content of the second bonus game to be executed, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means or to temporarily stop it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player, and by executing a bonus game that gives a small amount of benefits, a bonus game that gives a large amount of benefits is discarded. It has the effect of being able to suppress things.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second benefit game type setting means is capable of setting a first benefit type and a second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type, and is capable of setting a second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type. A gaming machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second bonus game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second benefit type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that excessive benefits are not given to the player. This has the effect of suppressing the

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means is completed, and the specific first determination is completed. The player further comprises an invalidating means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means. Gaming machine D4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second benefit type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first benefit game and the second benefit game for which the second benefit type is set from being executed consecutively, and to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second benefit game type setting means sets the first benefit type and the second benefit type based on the determination result of the second determination means, and A gaming machine D5 characterized in that the first benefit type is easier to set than the second benefit type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the first benefit type is more likely to be set than the second benefit type, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player even if a large number of second benefit games are executed. There is.

<Other ideas 1> (Possibility state can be set before and after jackpot game)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a second determination means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. , when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first bonus game is executed, and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying the second identification information is displayed, the second determination is made easier to execute than the first determination. It has a game state setting means that can set a first game state and a second game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination, and the game state setting means is configured to set a predetermined first game state. If a condition is met, the first gaming state is set during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and if a predetermined second condition is met, the first bonus game ends. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period during which the is set becomes longer. As described above, there has been a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first bonus game, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature G group> (Small hit RUSH during the pattern confirmation period)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first stop display means for stopping and displaying the first identification information, a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the first stop display means stops displaying the first identification information, and a second judgment capable of executing a second judgment. means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and said first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on said first display means. is displayed, a first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a second bonus game is executed. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a first game state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a first game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. 2 gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is configured to set the first identification information in the stopped display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period for which the In other words, there is a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set varies depending on the result of a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be properly managed. . In addition, since the first gaming state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the judgment result of the first judgment is stopped and displayed, the player is informed in advance of the game content after the first gaming state ends. You can make them understand. With this configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set with a specific judgment result being displayed as the judgment result of the first judgment, after the first gaming state ends, It is possible to know in advance that the first bonus game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine G2 in the gaming machine G1, wherein the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Whether or not to execute the above and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, the stop display period setting means sets the stop display to be longer when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that a period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determining means is a specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. Since it becomes easier to set, it is possible to execute the first gaming state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means is capable of setting stop display periods of different lengths when the judgment result of the first judgment means is the specific first judgment result. A gaming machine G4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be varied even in the case of a specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period for which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is encouraged to actively play the game so that the first gaming state is set for a longer time. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determining means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determining means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second bonus game, which is executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, is more likely to be executed than the first bonus game, which is executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game desiring that the first gaming state is set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics H group> (Small win RUSH with big win when time saving ends fluctuates)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege for executing a first privilege game when displayed, and executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine comprising: a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination; and a second game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is capable of executing the second determination when both a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during a first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is determined based on only one lottery result, so the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is explained to the player. There was a problem in that it was not possible to have the players play games while having fun. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination can be made during the first gaming state. can be carried out reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming state ends without executing the second determination even though the first gaming state is set, which may cause dissatisfaction to the player. It is possible to provide games that are not available.

The gaming machine H1 includes a first judgment number measuring means that can measure the number of times the first judgment has been executed by the first judgment means, and the number of the first judgments measured by the first judgment number measuring means. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the first determination by the first determination means is executed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably advance the game content toward the fulfillment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when playing a game for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine H3 characterized in that in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the judgment result of the first judgment means is a specific first judgment result, so that the player can understand. This has the effect of providing easy games.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means , when the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during a second period during which it is difficult to execute the second determination; A gaming machine H4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, if only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only during the second period in which it is difficult to perform the second determination. Thereby, the first gaming state that is set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be made into a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state to be shorter than the first period and A gaming machine H5 characterized in that the first gaming state is set during a third period that is longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, if only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the game condition is lower than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristics Group I> (Small hit RUSH entry expectation level variable by time saving number)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege for executing a first privilege game when displayed, and executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period of time. and a third gaming state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third gaming state is set; A gaming machine I1 characterized in that setting the first period by a period setting means makes setting the first gaming state easier than setting the second period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows players to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player by playing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages according to lottery results (for example, JP 2015-058267A). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the ease of setting an advantageous gaming state in a gaming state in which an advantageous gaming state is easy to be set (semi-advantageous gaming state) is single, so the aim is to set an advantageous gaming state. There was a problem in that the contents of the game played were monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine I1, by varying the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is likely to be set, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state will be set in the state where the third gaming state is set is increased. can be made different. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the setting contents of the third gaming state, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even in the gaming process up to the setting of the first gaming state. The effect is that it can be done.

The gaming machine I1 includes a progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means determines whether the predetermined period has passed by the progress determining means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on a first setting condition that is satisfied when it is determined that.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming state setting means determines that when the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determining means is the specific first determination result, A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on a second setting condition being met.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when a third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to satisfy, that is, a long-term third gaming state is set, During the third gaming state, a first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, depending on the period of the third gaming state that is set, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions in order to set the first gaming state, so the desire to play can be reduced depending on the length of the period of the third gaming state that is set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third gaming state period setting means is capable of setting a third period that is longer than the second period, and the passage determining means determines the passage of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized in that it has a condition limiting means that prevents the first setting condition from being satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when it is determined that the third period has elapsed, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so the first gaming state is set. It is possible to reliably limit the Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous situation from being provided to the player.

Any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4 has a first gaming state period setting means for setting a period in which the first gaming state is set, and the first gaming state period setting means is configured to: The gaming machine is characterized in that the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when it is determined that the second period has elapsed, the first period is longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. The gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay close attention to the determination result of the progress determining means.

<Feature J group> (Small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and a second determination means capable of executing said second determination. means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and said first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on said first display means. is displayed, a first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a second bonus game is executed. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a first game state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a first game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state; an advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first gaming state can be continuously set by the gaming state setting means; and an advantageous period setting means by the advantageous period setting means. a termination means that terminates the first gaming state when a first termination condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has passed or a second termination condition that is different from the first termination condition is satisfied; A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the gaming machine J1 has a termination restriction means for restricting the satisfaction of the second termination condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows players to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player by playing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages according to lottery results (for example, JP 2015-058267A). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set is variable based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem in that even though the player has taken pains to set an advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state ends in a short period of time, resulting in a decrease in the player's desire to play. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the termination restriction means can restrict the fulfillment of the second termination condition. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set continuously during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A game machine J2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state and a disadvantageous first gaming state. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first game state is set.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so that the first determination means This has the effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the determination result becomes the specific first determination result.

A gaming machine J4, which is the gaming machine J2 or J3, further comprising a notification means for notifying that the first advantageous gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the first advantageous gaming state is set, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

Any of the gaming machines J2 to J4 has a determining means for determining that the second termination condition is met during the period in which the first advantageous gaming state is set, and the determining means A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it has a second notification means for notifying that the second termination condition has been met based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means indicates that the second end condition is met during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first gaming state currently set is not an advantageous first gaming state but a disadvantageous first gaming state, it is possible to determine whether the first gaming state has ended or not. The player can make the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the currently set advantageous first gaming state.

<Characteristics Group K> (During the time saving state, provide a period in which the number of working hours is not subtracted)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first determination result for a predetermined first period; and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier to execute; a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means; terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when a period has been measured; measurement limiting means for limiting measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied; A gaming machine K1 having the following features.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to set the period until the number of drawings reaches a predetermined number as the period in which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set. The problem is that it is easy to predict the period in which the It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement of the predetermined period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be limited by the measurement restriction means, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means is displayed, and the second display means a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means; , a bonus game execution means that executes a second bonus game when a first bonus game is executed and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display unit; and configured to allow the second dynamic display means to dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the predetermined limiting condition is satisfied when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, in a configuration in which the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the second determination means When the determination result is a specific second determination result, a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed while the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement restriction means controls the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the second dynamic display means is performing a dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it limits the measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the second dynamic display means is executing a dynamic display corresponding to a specific second determination result. is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed while the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized in that it has a notification unit for notifying that the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measurement unit is restricted by the measurement restriction unit. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement restriction means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. The effect is that it can be provided.

<Feature L group> (Small hit RUSH with different ending conditions)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege for executing a first privilege game when displayed, and executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine comprising: a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination; and a second game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. The gaming state setting means is configured to set a gaming state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, rather than the first gaming state being established based on the fulfillment of the second condition. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that when a gaming state is set, the first gaming state is made easier to continue.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows players to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player by playing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages according to lottery results (for example, JP 2015-058267A). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, since the end condition for the advantageous gaming state is single, it is not possible to vary the ease with which the set advantageous gaming state can be continued, and it is difficult for the player in the advantageous gaming state to There was a problem in that the games provided by the players became monotonous and the desire to play decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the gaming state setting means can set the first gaming state that is easy to set continuously and the first gaming state that is difficult to set continuously, the first gaming state is set. Even after the game is played, the game can be played with the expectation that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set; When the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second condition, the predetermined end is more effective than when the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that a condition is difficult to satisfy.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, rather than the case where the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the first condition. When a gaming state is set, it can be made more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set the first gaming state that is easy to end and the first gaming state that is difficult to end for the player, even after the first gaming state is set, the first gaming state that is difficult to end can be set for the player. This has the effect that the game can be played while the game state is desired to be set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 includes a termination condition setting means capable of setting a first termination condition and a second termination condition different from the first termination condition as the predetermined termination condition, and the second condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that when the first gaming state is set based on this, the first ending condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, if the first gaming state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so it is difficult to end the game. A first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to satisfy the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the termination condition setting means sets the second termination condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, a second termination condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. Thereby, when the first gaming state ends based on the fulfillment of the second ending condition, a bonus game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first gaming state ends, the player can be given a benefit, so there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

A gaming machine L5, which is characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has a notification means for notifying that the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Feature M group> (Set the invalid period of falling of special map high accuracy)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and a first determination specific to the first display means. a bonus game execution means that executes a first bonus game when the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed; and a bonus game execution means that executes the first bonus game when a predetermined setting condition is met; a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to result in the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state; is set, a gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and restricting the establishment of the predetermined transition condition. A gaming machine M1 comprising: transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, it is configured to set an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot according to the lottery result, and in addition, a predetermined lottery ( A gaming machine has been proposed that terminates the advantageous gaming state when a player wins a winning lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-152). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that a fall lottery is executed based on the execution of a winning lottery, so the game machine always gives the player a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state will end. There was a problem in that the players could not play the game with peace of mind because they were forced to do so. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which allows players to play games with peace of mind and improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition condition limiting means can restrict the gaming state from shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. You can set a gaming period in which the game will not be played. Therefore, it is possible to provide a period in which the players can play games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied; 1, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the judgment result by the special judgment means is a specific special judgment result. Features gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, a special judgment is executed when the first judgment condition is satisfied, and when the judgment result is a specific special judgment result, a predetermined transition condition is executed. holds true. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second bonus game different from the first bonus game is executed. a second bonus game execution means; and a variable ball entrance means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the inside when the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means. , a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the game machine passes through.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it can be determined whether the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots the game ball, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control that makes it easier for the ball that enters the variable ball entry means to pass through the specific area, and a second variable control that makes it more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific area, and a second variable control in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area. Since the game can be set, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it can be determined whether the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots the game ball, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be increased.

A gaming machine M5, in the gaming machine M4, further comprising a notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, since the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. be.

<Characteristics Group N> (Game selection for small winning games)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means is displayed; and a first determination specific to the first display means. A bonus game execution means that executes a first bonus game when the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed, and identification that the determination result of the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result. If the second determination result is a second bonus game, the second bonus game is executed by a second bonus game execution means that executes a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, and the second bonus game execution means. In this case, the game ball has a variable ball entry means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the ball, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and has a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine N1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. A gaming machine has been proposed in which it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when an advantageous bonus game is executed and a game ball passes through a specific area during the bonus game. 2013-152). In the gaming machine described above, an advantageous gaming state is set when the game ball passes through a specific area, so the player is forced to pay close attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine N1, a disadvantageous gaming state is set when a gaming ball passes through a specific area, so there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control that makes it easier for the ball that enters the variable ball entry means to pass through the specific area, and a second variable control that makes it more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it is capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific area, and a control function that is faster than the first variable control. Since either the second variable control that makes it difficult to pass through a specific area is set, it is possible for the fired game ball to pass through the specific area when the game ball is fired, depending on the variable control content to be executed. You can have different genders. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether to shoot the game ball or not.

In the gaming machine N2, the second bonus game executed by the second bonus game execution unit has a notification unit that can notify that the second variable control is set by the variable control unit. The gaming machine N3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that when the player is made to decide whether or not to shoot the game ball, can provide reference information. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether to shoot the game ball or not.

Any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3 includes a detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and an invalidation means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means, and the invalidation means A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the judgment result of the first judgment means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detection means can be nullified by the nullifying means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, a measuring means for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detecting means during a period in which the detecting result by the detecting means is invalidated by the disabling means, and a measurement result of the measuring means. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that it has a measurement result notifying means for notifying information based on the measurement result.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, during the period when the detection result by the detection means is invalidated, the measurement result reporting means reports information based on the measurement result of the measuring means, so that the detection result is invalidated. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel superiority.

<Characteristics Group O> (Time saving ends based on the condition that is met first among multiple conditions)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first determination result; and a privilege for executing a first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means. a game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed, a second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to be performed than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. The gaming machine has a termination means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first termination condition is satisfied, or when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied. , wherein the ending means ends the first gaming state based on the ending condition that is satisfied first among the first ending condition and the second ending condition. O1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the subtraction of the period during which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player is set is the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the advantageous gaming state cannot be set to the maximum. There was a problem in that the players were unable to do so and felt uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and when either ending condition ends, the first gaming state ends. , there is an effect that the first gaming state can be ended reliably.

In the gaming machine O1, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means is displayed, and the second display means a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the bonus game execution means is configured to display a specific second determination result on the second display means. A second bonus game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second bonus game is executed. The second identification information is dynamically displayed by a digital display means, and when the first determination means is executed, the first termination condition is satisfied, and the second determination means is executed. A gaming machine O2 characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is satisfied based on the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the gaming machine is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means. However, the first gaming state can be ended appropriately.

In the gaming machine O2, a first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determining means, a second execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the second determining means, and the first execution number measuring means a summing means for summing up the measurement results of the second execution frequency measurement means and the measurement results of the second execution frequency measurement means; , a first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times that is the sum of the number of times of execution of the second determination means; and during execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times. execution determination means for determining that the dynamic display is being executed, and the second determination means executes the second determination while the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second termination condition is established before the second determination is executed when the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during dynamic display where the first end condition can be satisfied, so that the first game state can be appropriately changed. This has the effect of being able to terminate the

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is such that after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times, the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine O4, characterized in that the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of determinations is greater than a predetermined number of times is satisfied at any time until the first determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3, the first end condition is that the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches a predetermined number of times. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means becomes greater than the predetermined number of times is established until the first determination is executed, the predetermined first period can be set long. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, a third determination means capable of executing a third determination, a third display means on which third identification information for indicating a determination result by the third determination means is displayed, and the third display means a third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information; and a third benefit when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result is stopped and displayed on the third display means. a third bonus game execution means for executing a game, and the third determination means determines whether the second game state is set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than when it is executed.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has a third determination means that is more likely to be executed when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the period during which the third determination means is executed, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the third determination means is easily executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic P group> (Special figures fluctuate during the opening period of jackpot games)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A first bonus game is executed based on the display, and a second bonus game is executed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing the second determination means, wherein the second determination means executes the second determination during a specific first period out of the period in which the first bonus game is being executed. The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that the second determination is not performed during a second period that is different from the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but if one special symbol wins, the other special symbol changes. Since the system is configured in such a way that fluctuations in the numbers are not carried out, there is a problem in that if the lottery efficiency decreases, the motivation to play decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which suppresses a decrease in the desire to play and improves the interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be performed while the first bonus game is being performed, the player can be made to perform more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming efficiency can be increased.

In the game machine P1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the first state; and the first benefit. and variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball entry means between the first state and the second state when a game is executed, and the variable control means causes the variable ball entry means to be in the second state. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that the first period is a period that is variable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination is executed using the period during which the first bonus game is being executed, during which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means, the game result of the first bonus game cannot be known. The second determination can be executed without making it difficult. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means provides a second advantageous determination result, as the second determination result, and a second advantageous bonus game that is more attractive to the player than an advantageous second bonus game executed based on the advantageous second determination result. It is possible to distinguish between the unfavorable second determination result in which an unfavorable second bonus game is executed, and the determination result of the second determination means executed during the first bonus game is the advantageous second determination result. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it has a determination restriction means for restricting the results.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second determination performed during the first benefit game is limited by the determination restriction means so that the determination result does not become an advantageous second determination result, so that excessive benefits are not granted to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the device is closed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having variable restriction means for restricting the variable means from changing from the second state to the first state by the variable control means during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Game machine P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable restriction means can restrict the first bonus game from being changed to the first state while the unfavorable second bonus game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination unit. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of difficult-to-understand games due to multiple bonus games being executed overlappingly.

In the gaming machine P4, when the variable restriction means restricts the first bonus game from changing to the first state, the first bonus game changes to the first state. Characteristic game machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, even if the variable restriction means restricts the first bonus game from being changed to the first state, the first bonus game can be changed to the first state. Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, while the second period of the first bonus game is set, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game to perform the second determination until the end.

In any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means performs variable control so that the variable ball entry means is in the second state when the first bonus game is executed, and at least A gaming machine P6, characterized in that the first period is a period from when the first bonus game is executed until the variable ball entry means enters the first state.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first bonus game is executed, the second determination can be executed continuously from the period before the first bonus game is executed. This has the effect that the second determination can be performed during the first bonus game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine P6, a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the determination result of the second determination means and the first period are different for the first bonus game. a first bonus game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first bonus games, and the bonus game granting means grants the first bonus game set by the first bonus game setting means. and the first bonus game setting means is configured to set the first bonus game setting means at least for a period longer than the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the judgment result of the second judgment means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A normal first privilege game in which a first period is set, and a shortened first privilege game in which the first period is set, which is shorter than the period for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the second judgment means. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it is possible to set and.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first bonus game is normally set by the first bonus game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the shortened first bonus game is set by the first bonus game setting means. When a bonus game is set, it can be configured such that it is difficult to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determining means during the first period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the first period during the bonus game, which is difficult to get the player interested in, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. effective.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7 includes a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the determination result of the second determination means, and the first bonus game is executed. The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that it has a forced stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed to indicate the judgment result of the second judgment means when the judgment result of the second judgment means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first bonus game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is not performed during the first period. This can make it easier to start. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the bonus game providing means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The first bonus game is given when the game ball passes through the specific area while the identification information for the purpose is stopped and displayed, and the second determining means is configured to perform the determination by the first determining means. The period from when the identification information indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific area is also considered to be the second period. A gaming machine P9 is characterized in that it executes determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special electric starting port)
A determination means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a predetermined identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Based on this, the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game, and based on the bonus game being executed by the bonus game execution means, the game ball changes from the first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to the first state. a variable ball entry means that is changed to a second state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball; and after the predetermined identification information is displayed, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the bonus game execution means. A gaming machine Pa1 characterized in that it has a special game execution means capable of executing a special game that changes the variable ball entry means to a second state until the change is made.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but in any game, unless the player wins a lottery, the Since bonus games cannot be given, there is a problem in that the interest in the game decreases. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable ball entry means can be changed to the second state by the special game execution means before the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the bonus game execution means. , it is possible to provide players with unexpected games. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Pa1, the game ball changes from a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter based on the ball entering means that allows the ball to enter the ball entering means and the ball entering the ball entering means, to a state where the game ball is lower than the first state. has a second variable ball entry means that is variable to a second state in which the ball enters easily, and the special game execution means is configured to control the game ball based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine Pa2 characterized in that it executes a special game.

According to the gaming machine Pa2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the special game is executed by letting the game ball enter the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

The gaming machine Pa2 includes a special game setting means for setting the content of the special game to be executed by the special game execution means, and the special game setting means is configured to control when a game ball enters the second variable ball entry means. The game machine is characterized in that one special game is set from among a plurality of special games that have different preparation periods until the variable entry means changes the state to the second state. Pa3.

According to the gaming machine Pa3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the preparation period from when a game ball enters the second variable ball entry means to when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state can be varied depending on the special game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to play a special game that requires a short preparation period while playing the game.

The gaming machine Pa3 has a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the special game setting means is configured to set the special game state by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine Pa4 characterized in that when a first gaming state is set, it is easier to set a bonus game in which the preparation period is shorter than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the first gaming state is set, a short preparation period is likely to be set, so it is possible to execute concentrated special games during the period when the first gaming state is set, and the game progress is improved. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the determination result by the determining means being the specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine Pa5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the presence or absence of a bonus game and the setting of the gaming state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. .

The gaming machine Pa5 includes a waiting period setting means for setting a waiting period from when the predetermined determination result is displayed on the display means until the bonus game is executed, and the special game setting means includes: A gaming machine Pa6, characterized in that when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period is set shorter than the waiting period is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, a special game with a preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Q group> (P group derivative)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A first bonus game is executed based on the display, and a second bonus game is executed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. In the gaming machine, the second determination means performs the second determination during a specific first period of the period in which the first bonus game is being executed. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the second determination is executed and the second determination is not executed during a second period that is different from the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but in any game, unless the player wins a lottery, the Since bonus games cannot be given, there is a problem in that the interest in the game decreases. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

<Characteristic R group> (V winning rate varies depending on the variation time of the special drawing.)
A discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays identification information for a predetermined period on a display means to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information; and providing a bonus game based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means. The game ball enters the ball based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of determination by the bonus game granting means and the determination means. It has a variable ball entry means that can change from a first state where it is difficult to enter a second state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game is provided. The means gives the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. A second period that is longer than the second period can be set, and setting the second period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area than setting the first period. Gaming machine R1 is characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a specific game when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and also executes a bonus game when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, the gaming machine described above can improve the interest of the game because it allows bonus games to be executed at multiple opportunities; however, depending on the type of specific game being executed, Since the passing rate of the balls was varied, there was a problem in that the lottery result greatly influenced the subsequent game content, reducing the interest in the game. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine R1, the ease with which a game ball passes through a specific area can be varied depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, so that the determination result of the determination means alone is not sufficient. Therefore, the player can keep his/her eyes on the display until the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine R1 includes a period group storage means having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting means are defined, and a plurality of period group storage means stored in the period group storage means. a period group selection means for selecting one period group from the period group, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selection means. One dynamic display period is set from among a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the period group storage means includes a first period group and a second period corresponding to the first period group. A gaming machine R2 having at least a second period group including many of the dynamic display periods.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a second period group is set in which the second period is easy to set, the second period can be set more easily than when the first period group is set. While the group is being set, there is an effect that the player can play an advantageous game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine R2 has a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state as the gaming state, and the period group selection means is configured to set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by means.

According to gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine R2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the period groups are set according to the gaming state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second period group is not set until a different gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The two period groups will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting means determines that the first determination result and the second determination result are different from each other as a result of the determination by the determination means in a state in which the second period group is set. A gaming machine R4 characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on identification information indicating a different third determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period that is set when the determination result of the determining means is the third determination result allows the player to understand that the currently set period group is the second period group that is advantageous to the player. can be done. Therefore, even if the determination result of the determination means is such that the bonus game cannot be executed, the player can be interested and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group> (R derivative)
A discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays identification information for a predetermined period on a display means to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information; and providing a bonus game based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means. The game ball enters the ball based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of determination by the bonus game granting means and the determination means. It has a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a first state where it is difficult to enter a second state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can pass, and provides the bonus game. The means gives the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. and a second period that is longer than the second period, and the game ball is made easier to pass through the specific area when the second period is set than when the first period is set. A game machine S1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a specific game when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and also executes a bonus game when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, the gaming machine described above can improve the interest of the game because it allows bonus games to be executed at multiple opportunities; however, depending on the type of specific game being executed, Since the passing rate of the balls was varied, there was a problem in that the lottery result greatly influenced the subsequent game content, reducing the interest in the game. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

<Characteristic T group> (3 loops of 1 type and 2 types)
a discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied; a display means that displays identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and the above-mentioned identification for displaying the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means. a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, and a first game state after the bonus game awarded by the bonus game granting means is completed; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the bonus game is more easily granted than in the first game state; and a third game state in which the bonus game is less likely to be awarded than in the first game state; Based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result as a result of the determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means, a period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is set. and a period setting means for setting a period of time, and the bonus game giving means gives the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine is configured to set the bonus game in the second game state. If a bonus game is awarded in a state where the bonus game is set, either the first game state or the second game state is set by the game state setting means rather than the third game state after the end of the bonus game. A gaming machine T1 characterized in that it is easy to set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a special game is executed, and the ball passes through a specific area during the specific game, a bonus game is also executed, and if the ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine that can set an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, the gaming machine described above can improve the interest of the game because it allows bonus games to be executed at multiple opportunities. There is a problem that the game ends immediately, which reduces the interest in the game. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine T1, once the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next bonus game is awarded, making it easier to receive bonus games one after another. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in a state where the bonus game is easily awarded.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting means is configured to provide a bonus game with the first gaming state set than when the bonus game is awarded with the second gaming state set. A gaming machine T2 characterized in that when the bonus game is granted, it is easier to set the third gaming state after the bonus game ends.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the third gaming state is more likely to be set based on the bonus game being awarded, so a gaming state advantageous to the player is set for a long period of time. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the game state setting means selects, among the bonus games, a first bonus game that is awarded based on the determination result of the determination unit being a specific determination result, and the specific area. The game state is set differently depending on the type of the bonus game awarded by the bonus game granting means, from the second bonus game awarded based on the passing of the game ball. A gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the game state to be set can be different depending on whether the first bonus game is awarded or the second bonus game is awarded, it is possible to determine which type of bonus game the player will perform. It can make people interested in what happened. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3, the gaming state setting means determines that in the state where the second gaming state is set, it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded the second bonus game than to be awarded the first bonus game. A gaming machine T4 is characterized in that it makes it easy to set a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the second bonus game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the gaming state setting means determines that in a state where the first gaming state is set, it is more likely that the player will be awarded the first bonus game than the second bonus game. A gaming machine T5 is characterized in that it facilitates setting of advantageous gaming conditions.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first bonus game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics U group> (T group derivative)
a discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is met; a display means that displays identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a stop display of the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means. In this case, after the bonus game granting means that grants a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, and the bonus game awarded by the bonus game granting means is finished, the first game state and the first game state are changed to the first game state. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the bonus game is more likely to be awarded, and a third gaming state in which the bonus game is less likely to be awarded than the first gaming state, and a result of the determination by the determining unit. Based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball changes from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. and a variable ball entry means that can be changed; and a specific area through which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game granting means is configured to provide a bonus game when a game ball passes through the specific area. When the bonus game is awarded with the second game status set, the game status setting means is configured to grant the bonus game to the bonus game after the bonus game ends. A game machine U1 characterized in that either the state or the second game state is easily set.

<Characteristic Group V> (Small hit RUSH that does not require simultaneous fluctuations)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and a determination result by the first determining means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information on the display means; a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter; and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the above information, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a second determination means for indicating the determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second determination means is performed; a second bonus game granting unit that grants execution of a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit; a restriction means for restricting entry of game balls; and a restriction means capable of canceling at least the restriction means when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A gaming machine V1 characterized in that it has a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) in which a ball is likely to enter a specific ball opening after a bonus game ends according to a lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 Public bulletin). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the player gets tired of playing the game quickly because it is possible to easily enter a ball into a specific ball entry hole at any time during an advantageous gaming state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to enter a ball into the ball entry means only while a bonus game or special bonus game is being awarded, so that the bonus game or special bonus game is not awarded. This has the effect of restricting storage in the storage means when the data is not stored.

In the game machine V1, there is a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position which allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a position where the game ball enters the second ball entry means. a second position that regulates the ball; and a variable member that is variable in position, the variable member being variably controlled when the bonus game or the special bonus game is executed; The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the restriction means positions the variable member at the first position, and the restriction release means positions the variable member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied depending on the variable status of the variable member executed in the bonus game or the special bonus game. The ball can be entered into the ball entry means in synchronization with the special bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the gameplay during the bonus game or the special bonus game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the special bonus game is executed, it is easier for the restriction canceling means to cancel the restriction by the restriction means when the special bonus game is executed than when the bonus game is executed. Game machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entry means can be varied depending on the type of game for which the variable member is varied, thereby improving gameplay during bonus games or special bonus games. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine V3, the gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the bonus game is more difficult to execute than the special bonus game.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V3, the following effects are achieved. That is, although the bonus game is more difficult to execute than the special bonus game, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means during the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively aim to execute the bonus game, and there is an effect that the performance of the game can be increased.

<Feature W group> (Variable ease of establishing multiple game conditions with accessory movement patterns)
Setting a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a variable means that changes from a first state to a second state when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result, and variable operation contents of the variable means. and a variable control means that controls the variable means based on the variable operation content set by the variable operation setting means, and the variable control means is configured to control the variable operation setting means. When one variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that a first benefit is more easily granted than a second benefit different from the first benefit, and the variable operation setting means When a second variable action content that is different from the first variable action content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second benefit is more easily granted than the first benefit. A gaming machine W1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) in which it is easy to variably operate a specific electric accessory after the end of a bonus game depending on the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the privilege that can be given to the player by variable operation of the electric accessory is always the same, and furthermore, by changing the variable operation content of the electric accessory, the same benefit can be granted to the player. Since it is only possible to set states that are easy to play and states that are difficult to play, there is a problem that the game becomes boring quickly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine W1, it is possible to vary the award given based on the movable motion content set by the movable motion setting means, so that the player can be made to pay close attention to the variable status of the variable means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine W1, a termination condition setting means for setting a plurality of termination conditions, a condition determination means for determining whether the plurality of termination conditions set by the termination condition setting means are satisfied, and a condition determination means for determining the termination conditions by the condition determination means. and variable control termination means for terminating the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that a specific termination condition among the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied. A gaming machine W2 characterized in that when the variable control termination means terminates the variable control, a special state is set in which the first benefit and the second benefit are likely to be granted.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since a special state is set when the specific end condition is met, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the specific end condition is met. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W2 includes a ball entering means, a second determining means capable of performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and a second determining means that determines whether the result of the determination by the second determining means is a specific one. A gaming machine W3 comprising: a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the second determination result is obtained, and the first benefit is one for which the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the second determination that allows the player to execute the bonus game is given as the first benefit, the player is made to expect that the first variable action content that makes it easier to receive the first benefit will be set. You can play games while playing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W3, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the game ball changes from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state in which it is easier to enter the ball than in the first state. A gaming machine W4 having an operable variable ball entry means, wherein the second benefit is a game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a bonus game is being executed, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the second variable action content will be set so that the second bonus is more likely to be awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the gaming machine W5 is characterized in that the ending condition setting means sets the provision of the first benefit as the specific ending condition.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special state can be set so that the player can play the game enthusiastically while expecting to be awarded the first benefit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics X Group> (Can pass through during winning games)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining condition establishing means that establishes a determining condition based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the determining condition establishing means performs the discrimination. A determining means capable of performing determination when a condition is satisfied; a bonus game granting means granting a bonus game based on a determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result; A passing means through which a game ball can pass while a bonus game is given, a determining means capable of making a determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a determination result that is a specific determination result. and a variable means that is variably controlled from a first position to a second position based on the fact that when the variable means is in the second position, the game ball enters the ball more than when it is in the first position. a second ball entering means that makes it easier to hit the ball, and the determining condition establishing means is characterized in that the determining condition is satisfied even when a game ball enters the second ball entering means. A gaming machine X1.

A gaming machine X2 in the gaming machine X1, wherein the second ball entry means is provided at a position where the ball that has passed through the passage means can enter.

In the gaming machine X2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. and a setting means, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period in which a ball passing through the passing means can enter the second ball entering means, and a period in which the ball enters the second ball entering means after the first period. A gaming machine X3 is characterized in that it is possible to set at least a second period in which the difficulty occurs.

In gaming machine X3, gaming machine X4 is characterized in that the first period is longer than the second period.

<Characteristics Y group> (Advantageous general ending)
The method includes a determining means for executing a determination, and a period determining means for determining a period for notifying a determination result by the determining means, and a notification result for indicating a specific determination result is notified. A gaming machine that is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the above-described advantageous state, further comprising a setting means for setting a set period after the end of the advantageous state until the next determination by the determination means can be executed, The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the period includes at least a first setting period and a second setting period that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem in that the period until a winning game or the like that is advantageous to the player is executed becomes long, making the game monotonous and causing the player to get tired of the game early. There is a need for a player to be able to enjoy the game even during the period until the winning game is executed, and to suppress the problem of early boredom with the game. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing early boredom with games.

According to the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to make the player expect that the second setting period will be set when an advantageous state is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. effective.

The game machine Y1 has a first flow path through which the game ball can pass when the game ball is in the advantageous state, and when the second setting period is set, the game ball flows into the first flow path. A game machine Y2 characterized in that the game ball is configured to flow down more easily than when one set period is set.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1, when the second set period is set, the game ball can be made easier to flow down into the first channel, and the second set period is This has the effect of increasing expectations that the setting will be made.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second setting period, the determination result by the determining means after the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result, and the advantageous state is reached, so that the flow path is transferred to the first flow path. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that the period is set such that the bonus is more likely to be awarded when the game ball passes through the gaming machine Y3.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, by setting the second setting period, it is possible to increase the value of the next advantageous state being set, and the advantageous state is This has the effect of increasing expectations for what will be set.

In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, a specific ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first channel can be received, and at least a part of the benefit is granted when the game ball enters the ball. and a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball can enter the specific ball entering means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state, The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second set period is comprised of a period during which the game ball can reach the specific ball entering means during the period in which the first state is set.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the setting of the second setting period makes it easier for the gaming ball to reach the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of increasing expectations for the second setting period to be set.

In the gaming machine Y4, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the ball in the advantageous state, and a specific determination means that performs a specific determination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. , a period determining means for determining a variable period for varying the period until the specific ball entry means is set to the first state, based on the execution of the specific determination by the specific determining means; A gaming machine Y5, wherein the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second set period is not set.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y4, even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, a period that is advantageous to the player is determined, so that it is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of increasing the number of situations in which this occurs, and suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

<Feature β group derivation> (Advantageous for hitting normal figures at regular intervals)
a determining means for executing a determination; a period determining means for determining a period for notifying a determination result by the determining means; an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; a first channel through which a game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means; and the first flow path is set to have a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Game machine β1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further improves the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the interval at which an advantageous state is set is the first interval, the probability of passing through the first flow path is set high, so that after the advantageous state is executed, the next This has the effect of making the game more interesting by making the players more interested in the intervals at which the games are played.

In the game machine β1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position that guides the game ball to the ball entry means, and a second position that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. A gaming machine β2 comprising a variable means that is variable, and wherein the advantageous state setting means changes the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine β2, an advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, so there is an effect that the advantageous state can be easily understood. .

In the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the ball entering means when the advantageous state is set. A game characterized in that, when the setting of the advantageous state is canceled, the game ball rolling on a predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine β2, it is possible to make the player interested in the game ball on the variable means even when the advantageous state is canceled, and the user can also expect the cancellation of the advantageous condition. It has the effect of being able to hold it.

In any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific area is arranged in which the game ball guided to the first channel can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the specific area. and a state variable means for changing the state to a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the ball entering state; a first variable control for changing the state changing means to the first state and then changing the state to the second state; and changing the state changing means to be in the first state during the period during which the flow period elapses. A gaming machine β4 characterized in that it has variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control and the second variable control.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it is possible to make the player expect that the second variable control will be executed by the variable control means, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

<Characteristic Z group> (Attacker below general electricity)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining means which can perform a determination based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a display means for displaying identification information to show the determination result of the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , a variable means that is variable between a first state that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and specific conditions. and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the variable means, wherein the variable means is in the first state. a specific flow path into which a game ball that has flown down is guided by the variable means and is changed to the second state before the ball enters the first ball entry means, and the specific flow path; a specific area into which the game ball that has flown down the road can enter, and the bonus game execution means sets an entry state in which the game ball can enter the specific area until an end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that it executes the bonus game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further improves the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine Z1, even if the game ball cannot be caused to enter the ball entering means by the variable means, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the ball will enter the specific channel, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving the

The gaming machine Z1 includes a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period when starting dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The period is such that at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area and an unfavorable dynamic display period in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area are set. Characteristic gaming machine Z2.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Z1, it is possible to make the player interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the bonus game execution means starts executing the setting of the ball landing state in the specific area according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the bonus game. Game machine Z3.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, a specific area is set to a ball entering state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of a bonus game, so it is fair to the players. It has the effect of keeping sex constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (Production based on special figure 2 variation)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining means capable of making a determination based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a display means for displaying identification information to show the determination result of the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information; dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; In a gaming machine having a specific ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter the ball until an end condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating the ball is stopped and displayed, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a flow path, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during the dynamic display period, and the performance execution means includes a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a flow path. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized in that it executes at least a part of the performance based on a detection result obtained by the game machine AA1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, when notifying the lottery results, the players can have high expectations for the lottery results by configuring the system so that the lottery results are notified to the players after a predetermined period of execution of an effect suggesting the lottery results. A gaming machine has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the performance is executed based on the predetermined lottery results, the performance tends to be constant, making the game monotonous, and there is a problem that the player quickly gets bored with the game. To provide a game machine that can prevent players from getting bored with games early.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the detection means detects a game ball flowing down the channel that allows the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and at least a part of the performance that is being executed is executed based on the detection result. Therefore, in addition to the dynamic display of the identification information, the performance being executed can be varied depending on the flow of the game ball, which improves the interest of the game and prevents players from getting bored with the game early. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means includes at least a first dynamic display period in which a game ball is set to easily enter the specific ball entering means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the performance executing means executes the specific performance on at least one condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1, the specific performance is executed with at least one condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined. By executing this, there is an effect that the user can expect that the first dynamic display period has been determined.

In the gaming machine AA2, the effect execution means executes the specific effect even if the first dynamic display period is determined, if the detection means does not detect a game ball in the specific detection period. A gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that it executes different effects.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the gaming ball is not detected by the detection means during the specific detection period, the specific performance is Since this is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem in which the specific effect is executed in vain and the level of expectation for the specific effect is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific ball entering means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and the bonus game is played based on passing through the specific area. A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that settings for execution are executed.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AA1 to AA3, when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the game ball passes through a specific area and a bonus game is executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA4, a variable means that is variable between a first state that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the flow path is controlled by the variable means. is guided by the variable means when the ball is in the first state, and is changed to the second state before the ball enters the first ball entering means, thereby allowing the flowing game ball to flow in. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized by:

According to the game machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AA4, by changing the variable means, it is expected that game balls that have not entered the ball entering means will also flow into the channel. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine AA5, gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the specific ball entering means is configured such that a gaming ball that flows down the channel and enters easily passes into the specific area. .

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA5, the expectation level for passing through a specific area by flowing down the flow path can be increased, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics Group AB> (Non-prize balls can win prizes in special trains)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter; a first determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; and a first determining means. a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result on a display means for a predetermined period; a first state in which a game ball can be entered; a first variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which ball entry is difficult; and when the determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result, the first variable ball entry means is changed to a second state in which the ball entry is difficult; a first variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state; a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the first variable ball entry means; and a second guide path capable of guiding a game ball into the first state. A ball entering means, a second determining means capable of performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second identification for indicating a determination result by the second determining means. a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying information for a predetermined period of time on the display means; a first state provided on the first guiding path and in which a game ball can enter; a second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which ball entry is difficult; and when the determination result by the second determination means is a specific determination result, a second variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state, wherein the first variable ball entry means controls the first guidance without the ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A game machine AB1 is characterized in that a game ball flowing down a path can enter the game ball.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is performed for a predetermined period of time based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting winning hole, and the first symbol is displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning hole. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time. In such a gaming machine, if a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small win) is obtained as a lottery result for the second symbol, a small bonus game (for example, a small win game) that can give a small bonus to the player is provided. There are some games that are configured to be executed, and configured to be able to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is likely to be executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-39398).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by varying the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute. , because it is configured to set a game state in which it is easy to execute the small bonus game and a game state in which it is difficult to execute, for example, in a state in which it is easy to perform the lottery of the second symbol, the player is given a small bonus game. There was a problem in that it was not possible to make detailed settings such as varying the amount of benefits given to players, which resulted in a loss of interest in the game. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AB, the number of game balls that reach the first variable ball entry means can be varied depending on the situation of the second variable means, so the number of balls that reach the first variable ball entry means can be varied depending on the situation of the second variable ball entry means. 2. Adjustment can be made by controlling the control contents of the variable means. Therefore, since it is possible to adjust the amount of benefits given to the player in a game in which the first variable ball entry means is operated to open, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period from a different period, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to set a dynamic display period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that it makes it easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set.

According to gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be varied depending on the gaming state that is set. Furthermore, when the first gaming state is set, a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be set than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, since it is possible to lengthen the period during which a ball cannot enter the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the first variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable ball entry means has at least an opening into which a game ball can enter, and an opening/closing lid member that opens and closes the opening, and the opening/closing lid member is configured to open and close the opening. When the section is closed, the top surface of the opening/closing lid member forms a part of the first guiding path, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to control the first guiding path by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, when a gaming state is set, a dynamic display period that is longer than a passing time for a game ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening/closing lid member can be easily set.

According to gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set, it is possible to ensure that the ball reaches the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 includes variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is configured to set a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means, and the variable pattern setting means A variable pattern is set in which when the first gaming state is set by the setting means, the period during which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB4 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AB2 or AB3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second game state is set. One game state can be made into a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Suggests the special pattern 1 lottery result based on the special pattern 2 lottery during special pattern 1 fluctuation)
a first discrimination means capable of performing a first discrimination; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate a discrimination result by the first discrimination means; A second dynamic display that dynamically displays a first display means to be displayed, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination, and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means for a predetermined period of time. a second display means on which the second identification information is displayed; and a second display means on which the second identification information is displayed, and a a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game based on the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result being stopped and displayed on the second display means; , suggesting the determination result of the first determining means based on the fact that the second determining means has performed the determination while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic displaying means; A gaming machine AC1 characterized in that it has a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance for.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-12907). By the way, the gaming machine described above executes a variable performance dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and executes a variable performance dedicated to the second special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable performance, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are executed enthusiastically. There was a problem in that the motivation to try was reduced. Furthermore, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem in that the lottery result of each special symbol is notified to the player in a way that is difficult to understand. Furthermore, since an independent variable performance is performed for each special symbol, there is a problem in that the performance is performed without a sense of unity. In the above-mentioned game machine, an object is to provide a game machine that further improves the interest of the game by providing the player with an easy-to-understand suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the determination result of the first determination means is suggested based on the determination of the second determination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to understand the discrimination result of the first discrimination means in advance and to execute the discrimination of the second discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. .

According to gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the specific first discrimination result, there is an effect that the effect of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC2, the period from when the first determining means determines that the specific first determination result is the first determination result until the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. , a gaming machine AC3 comprising a restriction means for restricting the determination result of the second determination means from being the specific second determination result.

According to gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AC2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, the restriction means restricts the discrimination by the second discrimination means from becoming a specific second discrimination result, It is possible to prevent a bonus game different from the content of the suggested performance from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the suggestive performance can be increased and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AC4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance using a display mode of the second identification information.

According to gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the discrimination result of the second discrimination means and select the first one by simply looking at the display mode of the second identification information. It becomes possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the second identification information, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, a totalizing means for totalizing the determination results of the second determining means, and a condition satisfaction determining means for determining whether an execution condition is satisfied based on the determination results totaled by the second determining means. A gaming machine AC5, characterized in that the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance when the condition satisfaction determining means determines that the execution condition is satisfied.

According to gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination results of the second discrimination means are aggregated, and when the aggregate result satisfies the execution condition, the suggestive effect is executed, which prompts the player to play the game with enthusiasm in order to satisfy the execution condition. can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5 has a production mode setting means for setting a production mode of the suggestion production executed by the suggestion production execution means, and the production mode setting means is configured to set a production mode of the suggestion production executed by the suggestion production execution means, and the production mode setting means selects the first suggestion mode and its first suggestion mode. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that it is possible to set a second suggestion mode that suggests the discrimination result of the first discrimination means more easily than the first suggestion mode.

According to gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects are achieved. That is, depending on the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, an easy-to-understand suggestion presentation and a difficult-to-understand suggestion presentation are executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the discrimination result of the first discrimination means from being easily grasped by a single suggestion performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to have the suggested effect executed a plurality of times.

The gaming machine AC6 includes a number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, and the performance mode setting means is configured to perform execution of the suggestion performance measured by the number of times measurement means. A gaming machine AC7 characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times than when the number of times is a predetermined number of times.

According to gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AC6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the more times the suggestion effect is executed, the easier the suggestion effect to be understood by the player will be executed, so there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game by having the suggestion effect executed a plurality of times.

<Characteristic BA group> (The more times the first advantageous state occurs consecutively, the more advantageous the second advantageous state is likely to be set)
a discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; The gaming states after the bonus game ends are a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. a first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state; a second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state based on the first gaming state, and the specific condition is set based on the fact that the bonus game was executed during the first gaming state. The second gaming state, which is set based on the bonus game being executed during the second gaming state, is more likely to be established than the second gaming state in which the bonus game is executed during the second gaming state. A game machine BA1 is characterized in that it is a game machine.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, in some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after a winning state ends, and in that relatively advantageous gaming state, a player consecutively loses in a specific number of drawings. In some cases, there are cases where the situation shifts to a more advantageous state.

However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the conditions for transitioning from a relatively advantageous gaming state to a more advantageous gaming state are fixed regardless of the situation at the time the relatively advantageous gaming state is reached. There has been a problem in that it is difficult to improve the player's expectations when the game state is set to be advantageous, and it is difficult to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, there is a discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of discriminating conditions, and based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result, the game machine A bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game, a first game state as a game state after the end of the bonus game, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state; a second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition; The second gaming state, which is set based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the second gaming state, is better than the second gaming state, which is set based on the execution of the bonus game. The structure is such that it is easy for the following to hold true.

As a result, when the second gaming state is entered, it is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and it becomes easier to transition to the third gaming state, so that the player's expectations for the third gaming state are improved. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is such that the game after the end of the bonus game is more effective than when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The gaming machine BA2 is characterized in that the gaming machine BA2 is configured such that the second gaming state is more likely to be established when the second gaming state is set continuously a specific number of times or more.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The configuration is such that it is easier to establish the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set consecutively for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. Even if the bonus game is executed without the specific conditions being satisfied in the third game state, the expectation for the third game state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means has become a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined first number of consecutive times in the gaming state. The second gaming state setting means is configured to set the second gaming state in the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game consecutively for a specific number of times or more. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a different determination result from the specific determination result for a second number of times that is smaller than the first number of times. A game machine BA3 is characterized in that it is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on the fact that the bonus game was executed during the first gaming state. When the state is set, the discrimination result of the discrimination means has become a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined first number of consecutive times in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the second gaming state, and the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. , the determination result of the determination means has become a different determination result from the specific determination result continuously for a second number of times less than the first number of times in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the above.

As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the expectation is to see a series of incorrect judgment results rather than a specific judgment result, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and a front A variable means that is variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a determination result of the determination means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from a specific determination result; A gaming machine BA4, characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the variable game is easier to execute than the second gaming state.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BA1 to BA3, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means; and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. and the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from a specific discrimination result. and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game, and the third gaming state is configured such that the variable game is easier to execute than the second gaming state.

As a result, in the third game state, there are more opportunities for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating means, such that the discrimination by the second discriminating means has a higher probability of obtaining the second discriminating result than the discriminating by the first discriminating means. A gaming machine BA5, characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the second discrimination condition is more easily met than in other gaming states.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition, and the discrimination by the second discriminating means is better than the discrimination by the first discriminating means. The game is configured so that the probability of obtaining a 2 discrimination result is high, and the third gaming state is configured so that the second discrimination condition is more easily satisfied than other gaming states. It is.

Thereby, in the third gaming state, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result of the second determining means.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the third position, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that it is realized by:

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means; , the first determining condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determining condition is established based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. This is established based on the game ball entering the ball.

This makes it possible to draw attention to the variable position of the second variable means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state is configured such that the second variable means is more easily varied to the third position than in the first gaming state and the third gaming state. The gaming machine BA7 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state has the second variable means variable to the third position more than the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Since the configuration is such that it is easy to play, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, there is a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a passage determining means that performs a determination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, and a third determination result of the passage determining means. variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result; , when the third determination result is obtained with a first probability and the determination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the third determination is made with a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized in that it is a gaming machine that produces a result.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, there is a passage means through which the game ball can pass, and a passage determination means that performs a determination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage means. variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result of the passage determination means being a third determination result; If the discrimination is executed in the second gaming state, the third discrimination result will be obtained with the first probability, and if the discrimination is carried out in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the first probability will be higher than the first probability. Also, the third discrimination result is obtained with a low second probability.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the determination result of the passage determining means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BB group> (Suggesting the result of the dynamic display in a presentation to notify at least different content from the result)
A first determining means executes a determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the first determining means being a specific determination result. a bonus game execution means that executes a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance for indicating the determination result of the second discrimination unit, overlappingly with the first performance, When the first performance and the second performance are overlapped by executing the second performance, the second performance execution means includes, in the second performance, the second performance shown by the first performance. A gaming machine BB1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determining means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a winning result, the player is advantageous. There are games that run winning games. Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine that can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the gaming machine described above executes a variable performance dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and executes a variable performance dedicated to the second special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable performance, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are executed enthusiastically. There was a problem in that the motivation to try was reduced. Furthermore, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem in that the lottery result of each special symbol is notified to the player in a way that is difficult to understand. Furthermore, since an independent variable performance is performed for each special symbol, there is a problem in that the performance cannot be suitably executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, there is a first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a discriminating result of the first discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and the first determination condition. A second discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a different second discriminating condition, and a second effect for showing the discrimination result of the second discriminating means can be executed in overlap with the first effect. a second performance execution means, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the second performance when the first performance and the second performance are overlapped by executing the second performance. In the performance, the present invention is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determining means indicated by the first performance.

Thereby, the second effect can suggest not only the discrimination result of the second discrimination means but also the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, so there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine BB1, the second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance mode in the second performance before the first performance indicates the determination result of the first discrimination means. The game machine BB2 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1, the second performance execution means performs an operation in the second performance before the first performance indicates the determination result of the first discrimination means. Since the specific performance mode is configured to be executable, the determination result of the first determination means can be confirmed by checking the second performance without checking the first performance to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination condition is the first ball entering means. The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Game machine BB3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BB1 or BB2, it includes a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. , the first determining condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and the second determining condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. This is established based on the ball entering the ball.

This allows the player to play the game by paying attention to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result, and the second performance The execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific performance mode in the second performance that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination unit being the second determination result. Game machine BB4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, there is a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. a variable ball entry means that is variable in state, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, and a determination result of the second determination means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Execution means, the second performance execution means is configured to execute the specific performance in the second performance that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is configured to be able to suggest aspects.

This has the effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the determination result of the second determination means will be the second determination result.

In the gaming machine BB4, the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is more likely to be performed, and a first gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is more likely to be performed than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state; and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state; A gaming machine BB5 comprising: gaming state changing means for changing the state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB4, the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is more likely to be executed, and a first gaming state that is easier to perform than the first gaming state. a second gaming state in which the discrimination by the second determining means is likely to be executed; A gaming state changing means is provided for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Thereby, in the first gaming state, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the specific condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, a variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state; and a benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, wherein the second determining means determines whether the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means or not. The second performance is characterized in that the second performance is comprised of a performance that outputs a predetermined sound based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine BB6.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, there is a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball, and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. The second determining means includes a variable ball entry means that can be changed, and a privilege granting means that provides a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the second determining means is configured to It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the ball means, and the second performance is a performance that outputs a predetermined sound based on the game ball entering the variable ball entrance means. It is made up of.

As a result, it is possible to perform an auditory presentation using audio, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific performance mode includes a first performance mode, and when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is executed rather than the first performance mode. A gaming machine BB7 characterized in that it includes at least a second performance mode in which the rate of execution by the second performance execution means is increased.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific performance mode includes a first performance mode, and the first performance for indicating the specific determination result rather than the first performance mode. Since it includes at least a second performance mode in which the rate of execution by the second performance execution means is high when the second performance is being executed, it is assumed that the second performance mode will be executed in the second performance. It can give you stronger expectations. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB7, the specific performance mode includes a third performance mode that can be executed by the second performance execution means only when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is being executed. A gaming machine BB8 characterized in that it includes at least.

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB7, the specific performance mode includes the second performance only when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is executed. Since at least the third performance mode that can be executed by the execution means is included, when the third performance mode is executed, it is possible to make the player feel greater joy. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of gaming machines BB1 to BB8, wherein the second performance is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first performance, at least for a predetermined period of time. BB9.

According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second performance is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first performance, at least during a predetermined period. Therefore, by checking the easily visible second effect, it is possible to check both the determination result of the second determination means and the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (Direct transition to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from a jackpot in an unfavorable state)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and a game. a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the bonus game during the first gaming state disadvantageous to the player; , an acquisition game execution means for executing an acquisition game in which the player can acquire a predetermined benefit each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state; BC1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, in some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after a winning state ends, and in that relatively advantageous gaming state, a player consecutively loses in a specific number of drawings. In some cases, there are cases where the situation shifts to a more advantageous state.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous gaming state unless the gaming state is shifted to a relatively advantageous gaming state. The problem was that it was difficult to do so.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, there is a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and benefits that are advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. A second game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game between the bonus game execution means that executes the game and the first game state disadvantageous to the player. a second game state setting means for setting a state; and an acquisition game execution means for executing an acquisition game in which a player can acquire a predetermined benefit each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state. and.

Thereby, in the disadvantageous first gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the specific setting condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position, a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entering means; , when the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means moves from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period as the winning game. A gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be variable to one position.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC1, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the position; and a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, and a benefit granting means that grants the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball hitting means. and the acquisition game execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable means executes the acquisition game as the acquisition game. is controlled to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time.

As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In the gaming machine BC2, when the winning game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the winning game ends. Game machine BC3.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC2, when the winning game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state remains the same even after the execution of the winning game ends. Since this is maintained, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC2 or BC3 is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the discrimination condition is such that the first ball entering means is different from the first ball entering means. Consisting of at least a first determination condition that is established based on the game ball entering the means, and a second determination condition that is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition has a higher probability of obtaining the second determination result than the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The first game state is configured such that when a determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, it is more difficult to obtain a determination result than in the second game state. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by the following configuration.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, it includes a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. , the discrimination condition is a first discrimination condition that is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. and a second determination condition that is satisfied, and the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more effective than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The first game state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the second determination result is high, and the first game state is the second game state when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. It is configured so that the determination result is more difficult to obtain than the state.

As a result, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further improved, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is maintained in the same gaming state at least until the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result. A gaming machine BC5.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is a state in which the same game is played at least until the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. Since the state is maintained in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which it is expected that a specific determination result will not be obtained in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of achieving the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC5, the second gaming state has a lower probability of obtaining the specific determination result than the first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage in the second gaming state is This has the effect of further increasing the

The gaming machine BC5 or BC6 is provided with an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is constituted by a gaming state that is set when the initialization by the initialization means is performed. A gaming machine BC7 is characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, it is provided with an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is set when the initialization by the initialization means is performed. It consists of gaming states that are set when the game is played.

This has the effect that it is possible to provide a very special gaming experience different from that of general gaming machines, in which the gaming state set upon initialization becomes advantageous.

In the gaming machine BC7, the winning game is executed from when the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initializing means until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The game machine BC8 is characterized in that it is provided with a restriction means for restricting the game so that it is difficult to be played.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC7, after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initializing means, a predetermined specific condition is set. Since a restriction means is provided for restricting the acquisition game so that it is difficult to execute until it is established, it is possible to prevent the acquisition game from becoming too advantageous at the time of initialization. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively advantageous to the player after the initialization and from causing a disadvantage to the hole.

In the gaming machine BC8, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position, a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entering means; , when the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means moves from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period as the winning game. 1 position, and the limiting means is configured such that the period from when the determination result of the determining means becomes the second determining result until the start of the winning game is within the range of the first position. A gaming machine BC9 is characterized in that the game machine BC9 is controlled to be longer than when no restriction is performed by the restriction means.

According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC8, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the position; and a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, and a benefit granting means that grants the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball hitting means. and the acquisition game execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable means executes the acquisition game as the acquisition game. is controlled to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the limiting means controls the acquisition after the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result. The period until the game starts is controlled to be longer than when the restriction by the restriction means is not performed.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage of the second gaming state after initialization can be lowered.

<Characteristic BD group> (The degree of advantage is different between the normal state at the time of RBAM clearing and the normal state transferred at other opportunities)
a first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the settings of the gaming machine; a second state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on establishment of a setting condition; and a second state setting means for setting the first gaming state to the first gaming state. Based on the setting, a specific element regarding the advantageous degree is set to be below a predetermined specific advantageous degree, and based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means, the specific A gaming machine BD1 characterized by comprising: a specific element setting means for setting an element to be higher than the specific advantage degree.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, some of the conventional gaming machines have a novel game structure in which a gaming state is provided that is less advantageous than the gaming state (so-called normal state) that is set when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized. There are also sexual ones.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, if the degree of advantage of the gaming state after initialization is increased in an attempt to realize innovative gaming features, the initialization may become excessively advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the gaming machine becomes difficult for the hall to initialize.

On the other hand, the gaming machine BD1 includes a first state setting means that can set the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and a power source for the gaming machine. a second state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition that is at least different from input; Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means, a specific element regarding the degree of advantage is set to a predetermined specific degree of advantage or less, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. and a specific element setting means for setting the specific element to be higher than the specific advantage level based on the fact that the specific element is set.

With this, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the first gaming state will be set by the second state setting means rather than the first state setting means, so that the player's interest in the game can be verbally expressed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets the specific element based on a predetermined specific setting condition being satisfied during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. The gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the degree of advantage is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets a predetermined specific setting condition during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the fact that the specific setting condition is satisfied, the game can be played with the expectation that the specific setting condition will be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD1 or BD2, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position that is variable, a variable means that is variable, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition. and a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. A gaming machine BD3 comprising: variable game execution means, wherein the specific element setting means is for varying the ease with which the variable game is executed as the specific element.

According to the game machine BD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BD1 or BD2, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than in the first position; and a variable means that is variable to the second position, and a privilege grant that provides a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. means, a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and the variable means changes the position from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied to one position, and the specific element setting means is for varying the ease with which the variable game is executed as the specific element.

Thereby, in the first game state, the ease with which the variable game can be executed can be varied, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, and a display means capable of displaying the discrimination information by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of identification information, and the specific element setting means determines when the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. Based on the dynamic display period determining means, the dynamic display period determining means controls to easily set a period having a length equal to or longer than the predetermined first period, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. Based on this, the gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that control is performed so that a period shorter than the first period is likely to be set.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD3, there is also a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display device that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means. display means; and dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the specific element setting means is configured to Based on the setting of the first gaming state, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period longer than a predetermined first period is likely to be set, and the second state is set. Based on the first gaming state being set by the means, control is performed so that a period shorter than the first period is likely to be set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be more reliably varied in the first gaming state.

The gaming machine BD4 includes a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the above-mentioned discrimination condition is set such that the game ball enters the first ball entering means. and a second determination condition that is established based on the fact that the ball enters the second ball entry means, and The determining means provides the specific determination result when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition than when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The specific element setting means determines whether the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the first gaming state being set by the first state setting means. control so that a period longer than the first period is likely to be set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the second state setting means, and the second state setting means controls the first game. Based on the state being set, a period shorter than the first period is set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. A gaming machine BD5 is characterized in that it is controlled so that it is easily played.

According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BD4, it is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and The determining conditions include a first determining condition that is established based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and a second determining condition that is established based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; The determining means is configured to perform at least the following when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition than when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher, and the specific element setting means determines that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. control so that a period having a length equal to or longer than the first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, Based on the first gaming state being set by the second state setting means, the first gaming state is set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. This control is performed so that a period shorter than one period is easily set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be varied by varying the execution interval of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

In the gaming machine BD5, a bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a predetermined second determination result, and an end of the bonus game. The subsequent gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the specific element is set below the specific advantage degree, and the specific element is set higher than the specific advantage degree. a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state; and the second state setting means includes the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set by determining that the specific setting condition is satisfied when a predetermined change condition is satisfied in a state where the gaming state is set.

According to the game machine BD6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BD5, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means has become a predetermined second determination result. a bonus game execution means, the game state after the end of the bonus game is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in which the specific element is set below the specific advantageous degree, and the specific element is gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state that is set higher than the specific advantageous degree; The second state setting means sets the first gaming state by determining that the specific setting condition is satisfied when a predetermined change condition is established in the second gaming state.

Thereby, in the second gaming state, the player can play the game with the expectation that the predetermined change condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured such that the probability that the determination result of the determining means becomes the second determination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. A gaming machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state has a lower probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the first gaming state becomes advantageous when set by the second state setting means, even though the determination result of the determining means is low. effective.

In the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means sets an action in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the second gaming state being set. A gaming machine BD8 characterized in that control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is easily set as the target display period.

According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means executes the execution based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. Since the control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is likely to be set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, the second discrimination condition is difficult to satisfy in the second gaming state. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristic BE group> (Specific performance is executed between the transition to small hit RUSH and the start of small win fluctuation)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position. a variable means that can be changed; a discriminator that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to execute based on establishment of a specific setting condition in a gaming machine comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game variable from the second position to the first position; and a second game state in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the first game state. a first performance execution means for executing a first performance based on the second gaming state being set by the means; and after the first performance is executed by the first performance execution means, the first performance is executed by the first performance execution means; A gaming machine BE1 comprising: second performance execution means for executing a second performance in a performance mode different from the first performance based on the determination result being the specific determination result.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing an advantageous jackpot game to the player. Furthermore, in addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of interesting effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 Public bulletin).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have a performance mode (preparation performance mode) that indicates that an advantageous situation for the player is near in a predetermined gaming state, and a performance mode that indicates that an advantageous situation for the player is near, and a performance mode that indicates that an advantageous situation for the player is near. There are also systems that can perform an advantageous situation presentation to show that the situation is advantageous when the situation becomes advantageous to the user.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the preparatory presentation mode is executed, the player only wants the advantageous situation presentation to be executed quickly, and if the execution period of the preparatory presentation mode becomes long. However, there is a problem in that there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BE1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a game ball which is lower than the first position. a second position at which it is difficult to enter the ball; a variable means that is variable; a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and based on establishment of a specific setting condition, Setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to execute, and a second game state in which the variable game is easier to execute than in the first game state. a first performance execution means that executes a first performance based on the second game state being set by the game state setting means; is executed, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect in a different effect mode from the first effect based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result; Equipped with

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BE1, a bonus game advantageous to the player is provided based on the display means capable of displaying identification information and the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the determination condition includes a first determination condition and a first determination thereof. and a second discrimination condition different from the condition, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and the second discrimination condition. The gaming machine is configured to be able to perform the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition. When the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of one of the discrimination conditions, at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the second discrimination result, the other discrimination A game characterized by comprising a determination result control means for controlling the determination performed based on the satisfaction of a condition to result in an out-of-order determination result that is different from both the specific determination result and the second determination result. Machine BE2.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1, the display means capable of displaying identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means have become a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the determination condition being , at least a first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the dynamic display means displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The gaming machine is configured to be able to perform the dynamic display of the identification information and the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition in duplicate, and the gaming machine dynamically displaying the identification information to at least indicate the second discrimination result when the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of one of the discrimination conditions of the condition and the second discrimination condition; During the dynamic display period, the determination is performed based on the fulfillment of the other determination condition, and the determination is controlled so that the result is an out-of-order determination result that is different from either the specific determination result or the second determination result. Equipped with result control means.

This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the bonus game from being executed redundantly based on the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

In the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determining condition is more easily executed than in the first gaming state, and the second determining condition is The determination performed based on the establishment of is configured to result in one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the out-of-order determination result. Game machine BE3.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more easily executed than in the first gaming state. The determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the out-of-order determination result. It is configured as follows.

This has the effect of making the player expect a specific determination result in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine BE3 is provided with a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BE4 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE3, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game in the first gaming state. Since it is provided with a game state changing means for changing the state, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means determines whether the bonus game is not executed between when the first gaming state is set and when the determining means executes a predetermined specific number of determinations. The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state when the game occurs.

According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means executes the determination by the determining means a predetermined specific number of times after the first gaming state is set. If the bonus game is not executed during this period, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming status, so it is a novel idea to play the game in the first gaming state with the expectation that the bonus game will not be executed. This has the effect of realizing playability.

In the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a first probability, and the second gaming state is , when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability, and the gaming state changing means is configured to If the bonus game is not executed after the gaming state is set until the determination by the determination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times, the second determination result is determined by the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by varying the probability that , from the first probability to the second probability.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a first probability. and the second gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. , when the bonus game is not executed between the time when the first game state is set and the time when the determination means executes the determination a predetermined number of times, The gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by varying the probability that the second discrimination result will be obtained in the discrimination by the discrimination means from the first probability to the second probability.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the lower the probability of the second determination result being, the more advantageous it is, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, an initializing means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and setting the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the initialization being executed by the initializing means. and an initialization time setting means, and the variable game is made more difficult to execute in the second game state set by the initialization time setting means than in the second game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine BE7, comprising: a limiting means for limiting.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, there is an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and based on the fact that the initialization is executed by the initialization means. , initialization setting means for setting the gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means, from the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means; The game machine also includes a restriction means for restricting the variable game so that it is difficult to execute the variable game.

This has the effect that it is possible to realize a very special and innovative gaming experience in which it is possible to make the same gaming state as the state after initialization advantageous while suppressing that the state after initialization becomes too advantageous.

<Characteristic BF group> (Multiple small hit RUSH states with different degrees of advantage)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position. a variable means that can be changed; a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means; a determining means that performs a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a first determination result; and a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination unit, and the determination result of the determination unit is different from the first determination result. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result, and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; Among a plurality of states including a first state, a second state in which the variable game is easier to execute than the first state, and a third state more advantageous to the player than the second state. A gaming machine BF1 comprising: a state setting means capable of setting a state from 1 to 1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are equipped with an advantageous state in which so-called small winning games are easily executed, and it is possible to acquire gaming value even without a winning state. There are also some that are trying to further increase interest.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, once the game enters an advantageous state where it is easy to execute a small winning game, the subsequent games become monotonous in that they simply continue to acquire gaming value, and the game becomes difficult. There was a problem in that it became difficult to increase the interest of people.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a game ball that is lower than the first position. a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball hitting means, and a determination condition is satisfied. a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the discrimination result, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a first discrimination result, and a discriminating means for the discriminating means. The variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from the first determination result. Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the game execution means determines a first state, a second state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first state, and a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the second state. 3 states, and state setting means capable of setting one state from among a plurality of states including three states.

This allows the player to play the game in anticipation of the second or third state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained at least even after the end of the variable game executed based on the second determination result. Game machine BF2 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1, the variable game is executed based on the fact that the state at the time when the second determination result is reached is the second determination result. Since it is maintained at least after the end of the variable game, the variable game can be executed multiple times in the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second state can be improved.

In gaming machine BF1 or BF2, gaming machine BF3 is characterized in that the third state is a state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the second state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the degree of advantage of the third state can be further improved because the variable game is more easily executed than the second state. effective.

In the gaming machine BF3, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating condition, wherein the second discriminating condition is more likely to satisfy the first discriminating condition than the second discriminating condition; In the third state, the second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition, and the second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition. The gaming machine BF4 is characterized in that the gaming machine BF4 is configured such that there is a high probability that the second determination result will be obtained.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF3, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition, and the second state is set to be higher than the second discriminating condition than the first discriminating condition. The second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition, and the third state is more easily satisfied than the first discriminating condition. Also, the determination made by the second determining means is configured such that the probability of obtaining the second determination result is higher.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with a stronger expectation that the second determination condition will be met.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets one state from the plurality of states as a gaming state after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. is possible, and the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result in the second state is higher than the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result in the third state. Features of gaming machine BF5.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets the plurality of gaming states as the gaming state after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. It is possible to set one state from among the states, and the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the second state is higher than the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the third state. It is structured as follows.

As a result, since the third state has a lower probability of obtaining a specific determination result, it is possible to configure the third state, which is advantageous, to continue more easily for a longer period of time. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the gaming machine BF5, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball into which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means. and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the third position, and the determining means includes the first ball entering means, Alternatively, the determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are different from the second variable state than the first state. A gaming machine BF6, characterized in that the means is configured such that it is difficult to change to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BF5, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter the ball means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball means than the third position; The determining means executes the determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are , the second variable means is configured to be more difficult to change to the third position than in the first state.

This has the effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the state in which the second variable means is difficult to be varied to the third position is more advantageous than the state in which it is easily varied.

In the gaming machine BF4, the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is selected from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. a gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state, the state setting means setting the first state based on the first gaming state being set, and the second gaming state being set. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that one of the second state and the third state is set based on this.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF4, the gaming states after the execution of the bonus game are completed include a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. , and the state setting means sets the first state based on the first gaming state being set. Then, one of the second state and the third state is set based on the second gaming state being set.

Thereby, it is possible to provide a second gaming state in which the second state is set and a second gaming state in which the third state is set as the second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage is variable even though the gaming state is the same.

<Characteristic BG group> (The degree of advantage can be varied by subtracting the number of time savings during the execution of jackpot fluctuations)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; Bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discrimination means being a specific determination result; A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, wherein a predetermined first a first gaming state setting means that sets a first gaming state based on the establishment of a setting condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state, and the second setting condition is a motion of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine BG1 is characterized in that the game machine BG1 can at least be satisfied during the execution of the target display.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in.

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, even if the gaming state is set to be advantageous, there is a possibility that the advantageous state will be shifted to a disadvantageous state due to a winning. There has been a problem in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the case of a winning situation.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine BG1, there is a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of discriminating conditions, and benefits that are advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the determination result of the discrimination means on the display means. a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the satisfaction of a first predetermined setting condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state based on the establishment of the setting condition; This can be established at least during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result.

As a result, even while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is in progress, it is possible to allow the player to play in the expectation that the second setting condition will be met, so that the player's It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discriminating means. and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the second setting condition The discrimination by the second discrimination means is performed while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that it is configured with conditions that can be established based on the following.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition, and the dynamic display means is configured with a second discriminating means for displaying the discrimination result of the first discriminating means. the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; and the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. The second setting condition is that while dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is being performed by the first dynamic display means in the first gaming state, , which is constituted by conditions that can be established based on the execution of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is being executed, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the second determination means actively performs the determination. This has the effect of increasing interest in games.

In the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is that after the first gaming state is set and before the bonus game is executed, the determination by the determining means is performed a predetermined specific number of times. The game machine BG3 is characterized in that the game is established based on what has been done.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is determined in advance after the first gaming state is set and before the bonus game is executed. This is true based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has been performed a specific number of times. This has the effect of realizing a novel gameplay in which the goal is to complete the game.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for a period longer than a predetermined specific period to indicate the specific determination result in the first gaming state. The second dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period as the dynamic display of the identification information in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that it dynamically displays the identification information in a dynamic display period of length.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. , dynamically displaying the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length longer than a predetermined specific period, and the second dynamic displaying means dynamically displaying the identification information in the first gaming state. As the dynamic display, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period.

As a result, when the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a specific determination result in the first gaming state, the second dynamic display means is able to display more dynamic display. Since the game can be executed many times, it is possible to easily set the second game state.

In any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a state where a game ball can enter the ball from the first position. a second position at which it is difficult for the ball to enter; a variable means that is variable; a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; execution of a variable game in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result that is different from the specific determination result; A gaming machine BG5 comprising means, wherein the variable game is more easily executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than in the first position; and a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a privilege grant that provides a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. a variable game execution means for executing a variable game, and the second gaming state is such that the variable game is easier to execute than the first gaming state.

As a result, it is possible to create a state in which variable games are likely to be executed while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is being executed, so that variable games cannot be played until the bonus game is executed. It has the effect of being entertaining.

A privilege that sets any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game in any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5. The post-game setting means includes a post-game setting means, and the post-privilege setting means allows the post-privilege game setting means to perform the post-privilege game more easily when the privilege game is executed in the second gaming state than when the privilege game is executed in the first gaming state. A gaming machine BG6 characterized in that the second gaming state is configured to be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state after the end of the bonus game are provided. a post-privilege game setting means for setting any one of the game states, and the system is configured to provide a post-privilege game setting means for setting one of the following game states; The configuration is such that the second gaming state is more easily set by the post-privilege game setting means.

As a result, by shifting to the second gaming state before the bonus game is executed, it becomes easier to set the second gaming status even after the bonus game ends, so identification information for indicating a specific determination result is used. During the execution of the dynamic display, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the second determining means more actively performs the determination.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflective portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end face of the light transmitting member, the light transmitting member being made of a light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In the gaming machine, the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is set to a high proportion of the light emitted from the light irradiation means, in which the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. A gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the output increasing means is provided outside the display area.

Here, the light transmitting member is formed into a plate shape from a light transmitting material and has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, A gaming machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing a light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the gaming area, under normal conditions, the display on the liquid crystal display device can be viewed by the player through the light transmitting member. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection part. Then, the light is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflective section is provided with a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflective surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, patterns and designs can be made to appear (display) on the front of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the light reflected by the reflective portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, causing problems in that the heat affects other members and equipment.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the output increasing means increases the proportion of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member among the light emitted from the light emitting means, so that the light is reflected by the reflecting part. The light emitted from the front of the transparent member can be strengthened. As a result, patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it is difficult to be seen by the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of a light transmission member may be sufficient as the back surface of a light transmission member, or the inside of a light transmission member may be sufficient as it, for example.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, wherein the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along an outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A2, the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means is emitted onto the side end face of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected on the outer edge member can be made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member is accordingly reduced. Light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light irradiation means that reaches the reflective part of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , it is possible to clearly highlight (display) patterns and designs. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the output increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member, so that when another device in the gaming area emits light, In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from such other devices, thereby preventing the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front and back sides of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is disposed on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, so that part of the light emitted from the light irradiation means is absorbed by the light transmitting member. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and deviates to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that deviates to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted by other devices in the gaming area reaches the light-transmitting member from either the front or back side, Since the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (no light is allowed to enter the light-transmitting member, and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the light-transmitting member), light from other devices may not enter the light-transmitting member. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress patterns and designs from being displayed on the front side of the light-transmitting member.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that in gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is The light can be reflected by the protruding portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member), thereby making it easier for the light to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

A gaming machine A5 in any one of gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A5, in the effect produced by any of gaming machines A2 to A4, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed from materials having the same refractive index, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, as in game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material with a smaller refractive index than the light-transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can be transferred between the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or it can be totally reflected) at the boundary with the reflective part, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflective part.

A gaming machine A6, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, wherein the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A6, in the effect produced by any of gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, the light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface of the outer edge part (boundary with air) and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light that returns from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting section is reduced. On the other hand, as in gaming machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, the light is not incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light-transmitting member, it is possible to ensure that the light reaches the reflecting portion.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A6 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and , a curved rack gear is carved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotates a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and the pinion gear. A gaming machine A7 characterized by comprising a driving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and extends along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. The rotating mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby allowing the light transmitting member to rotate together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both the role of condensing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmission member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the light transmission member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A7 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and A gaming machine A8, characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface thereof, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and a guide groove is provided along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotation mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed due to the action of these guide grooves and the support ring. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can enter from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of focusing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing product cost and improving reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

Note that the support ring may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed in a non-rotatable manner. In this case, the supporting wheel may be guided along the guide groove in a manner in which the rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove, or in a manner in which it is non-rotatably supported. An example is illustrated in which a fixed support ring slides along a guide groove.

In addition, in gaming machine A8 subordinate to gaming machine A7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is placed on one of the front or back side of the light-transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is recessed is placed on the light-transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange them on the other side of the front side or the back side. That is, by disposing the outer edge members on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the light emitted from the light transmitting member does not directly enter the side end face of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and can be made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In addition, by disposing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light-transmitting member, light emitted by other devices in the gaming area can reach from either the front or back side of the light-transmitting member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress the light from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

In gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in such a shape that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the opposing gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape such that its outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member Since the opposing gap between the two is used as a guide groove, the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be downsized. That is, by having one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back side of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the above-mentioned structure can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transferred to the front side of the light transmitting member. Or it can be made easier to reflect on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

In any one of gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in such a manner that the direction of light irradiation from the surface is perpendicular to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated with light from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member can more easily reach the reflective part, which intensifies the light reflected by the reflective part and emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member, making patterns and designs clearer. It can be highlighted (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention using the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture with each irradiation surface facing the target member, the plurality of light emitting means The present invention includes one or more substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic game machine B1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged with their irradiation surfaces facing the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -29735). According to this gaming machine, by emitting light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer circumferential surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting part. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant forms the target member into a disk shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflective part, and at the same time, attaches a plurality of light emitting means to the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member) on the irradiation surface. A structure was devised (unknown at the time of filing of this application) in which the light emitting means is arranged so as to surround the target member in a posture facing toward the target member, and the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer circumferential surface of the target member.

However, it has been newly discovered that in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that a plurality of light emitting means must be arranged around the target member, which increases the time and effort of the arrangement work. In particular, it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light emitting means with their respective irradiation surfaces facing the outer circumferential surface of the target member (that is, in different directions), which also increases the labor and effort of the arrangement work. .

On the other hand, according to gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or more board members are formed to be elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Since the base member is provided with a base member, the work of disposing at least two or more light emitting means can be completed by disposing one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the effort required to arrange the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to individually arrange a plurality of light emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing toward the outer circumferential surface of the target member, it is also possible to reduce the labor involved in disposing the light emitting means.

A gaming machine B2, which is a gaming machine B1, includes a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, it is provided with a block body formed to have higher rigidity than the base member and disposed on the base member, and the block body is held by the base member. By suppressing warping and bending of the substrate member, it is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, the attitude of the light emitting means is suppressed from being affected by warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the substrate member where the block body is disposed.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in the region of the substrate member where the block body is disposed, so that the posture of the light emitting means is adjusted to prevent warping of the substrate member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the effects of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be maintained even more easily.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged at predetermined intervals on the base member, and the base member is held in a posture in which the base member located between the block bodies is elastically deformed. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is held on the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the base plate member at predetermined intervals, and the base member located between the block bodies is made elastic. Since it is held on the base body in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture (orientation of the irradiation surface) of the light emitting means is stabilized compared to the case where the base member directly holds the substrate member in an elastically deformed posture. be able to.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the front side of the substrate member opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged on the back.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front side of the base plate member, and the head of the screw is protruded from the front face of the base plate member.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed from the front of the board member by screws, and the head of the screw is projected to the front of the board member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, thereby suppressing damage caused by contact with the light emitting means.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two of the screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

Note that the two screws are preferably disposed along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws disposed in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the heads of the screws, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, one of the base body or the block body is provided with a protrusion, and the other of the base body or the block body is provided with a fitting hole that receives and fits the protrusion. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is recessed.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting is provided in which the protrusion is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and the labor of the installation work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture between the block bodies, one block body is positioned by fitting (temporarily fixed). ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bended) and the other block body can be fitted into the base member, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recessed portion on the side that is disposed on the substrate member, and the electronic component disposed on the substrate member is housed in the recessed portion of the block body. A gaming machine B9 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine B9, in any of gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recessed portion on the surface on the side to be disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member in the recessed portion of the block body. Since the electronic components are housed, the electronic components can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid damage caused by the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component.

<About the concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member. The machine includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position due to the action of gravity. disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction, and in a state where the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A game machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member are provided. A gaming machine is known that provides an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position (e.g., one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area; When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member being displaced toward the overhanging position is performed as a game. A performance is performed for people to see. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to make the displacement member perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. The displacement member is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position, and when the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately, a simple harmonic) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, centering on this balance position (predetermined position). ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be made into an orthogonal projection of a uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can be caused to perform an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member can be displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (orthogonal projection movement of uniform circular motion). Therefore, the variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. In other words, simply by switching whether or not to apply driving force from the drive means to the displacement member, variations in displacement can be increased, and there is no need to complicate the structure or control, which reduces product cost and improves reliability. It is possible to improve the results.

In the game machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported on the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. , when the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled and the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only linear movement in the vertical direction but also rotational movement about the one end side as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

The gaming machine C2 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member, one end of which is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the other end of which is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. Since the connecting member is connected at one end to the position where the displacement member is connected and the other end is connected to the displacement member, application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are prevented. When a displacement member is caused to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximately simple harmonic motion) due to a force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member of the force in the push and pull directions. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. Such a displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotational center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member are The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connection position between the rotating member and the connecting member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and displacement member is approximately perpendicular to the direction connecting the The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be decreased in either direction of push or pull from the balance position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed approximately symmetrically about the balance position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced through the central range including the central range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the position is closer to the first position or the second position than the central range. A game machine C5 characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the protruding portion faces the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member is provided with a protruding part that protrudes toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range that includes a predetermined position within the movable range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other rotating member or the connecting member, and When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range near the second position, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so the application of driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displaceable member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displaceable member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion in the central range. On the other hand, in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the protruding portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and the rotation of the member is prevented. Shakiness between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the position of the displacement member is set within the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member is adjusted by using the protrusion to suppress rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protrusion, which acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted toward the outer edge of the gaming area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is extended toward the center of the gaming area, In the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and the performance of other members can be suppressed from being inhibited. When displacing from the first position to the second position (extended position), it can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the production effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that in the second position, the center of rotation of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are located substantially in a straight line. A gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is located on a line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the direction of the push and pull will be toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member will be It is possible to create a state in which this does not occur (ie, a dead center). Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to sliding of the protruding portion and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After the displacement member is placed in position, the above-mentioned dead center action suppresses rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and durability.

In any one of gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contacting portion formed to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the contacting portion is configured to adjust the connection position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is disposed substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member, with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Game machine C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member is provided with an abutting part that is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the base member, and the abutting part is connected to the displacement member and the base. It is located substantially on a straight line connecting the connecting position of the members and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and on the opposite side from the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member in between. , when the displacement member shakes with respect to the base member, the abutting part of the connecting member comes into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting part of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate) It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft (with respect to the shaft support hole of the part connected to the shaft). As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<About the concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means includes a first drive means and a first drive means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs effects by displacing the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge of the gaming area, but when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the displacement member An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player is made to visually recognize the movement of the displacement member that is displaced toward the extended position.

However, conventional gaming machines have had a problem in that the effect of the performance produced by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in conventional gaming machines, the displacement mode of the displaceable member (trajectory when the displaceable member displaces with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the performance due to the displacement of the displaceable member is limited to one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to perform a performance that would surprise the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed by increasing or decreasing the strength, the displacement speed of the displacement member will only increase or decrease, and the displacement mode (trajectory) will remain constant, so it will not be possible to create an effect that surprises the player. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes a first driving means and a second driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in different manners depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the performance by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. In other words, unlike conventional products in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced relative to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the effect does not follow one pattern, and one displacement member can be moved in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in a normal displacement manner, by switching the displacement manner, it is possible to perform a performance that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and a first member is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the base member and is driven by the second driving means. a second member driven by a player, and a first portion and a second portion of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, there is a first member that is slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first driving means, and a first member that is slidably disposed on the base member. and a second member driven by the second drive means, the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member being at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode can be formed in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same center of rotation and different directions of rotation, but by having different directions of rotation and different centers of rotation. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

In the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protrudes from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member. A game machine D3 is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, or the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case where the first member and the second member are slidable on a curved trajectory. If so, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine D4 in the gaming machine D3, wherein the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are approximately parallel, so that the first driving means or the second driving means In addition to a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated by driving only one of the drive means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is linearly displaced (for example, transversely) by driving both the first drive means and the second drive means. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a surprise effect for the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as for the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different, and the type of displacement itself is different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is easier for the player to perform surprise effects.

In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, a displacement in which the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being a speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is different from that of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can not only be displaced (linear movement) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also can be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform performances that surprise the player.

Note that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines rotational motion and linear motion with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , as in the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

Any of the game machines D1 to D5 includes a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the second displacement member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D5, the second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , it is possible to increase the device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform a performance that surprises the player.

<About the concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member or the light irradiation means is formed to be displaceable. A gaming machine E1, wherein the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of the light irradiation means.

Here, a game includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for displacing the displacement member by applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a transparent part made of a light-transmissive material is provided on the front side of the displacement member (the surface facing the player). By irradiating the light section from the back side with the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize that a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting section) is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light irradiation means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is a problem in that there is little change in the aspect visually recognized by the player, making it difficult to provide interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the manner in which the target member is irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed by displacement of one or both of them. It is possible to change the manner in which the player views the game. As a result, it is possible to easily keep players interested.

Examples of forms in which the light irradiation mode is changed include changes in the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means, and changes in the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member. For example, a form in which a combination of these forms is used, a form in which these are combined, etc.

A game machine E2 comprising a base member in the game machine E1, wherein the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed movably on the base member, so that the electricity of the light irradiation means is This allows the wires to be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnections can be suppressed to that extent.

The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and allowing the target member to be exposed to light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transparent material and is provided with a reflecting part, and the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 featuring the following.

Here, in the reflecting section, a plurality of groups each consisting of a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group forms a shape of a pattern or a design. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member as a pattern or design.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, it includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, and allows the player to see a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, different parts of the target member can be made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position where a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective section is visible through the opening, and a second position where the second group, which is a different group from the first group, is visible through the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position and the second position where the target member is visible through the opening of the shielding member, by placing the target member in the first position, the first group can displace the target member through the opening of the shielding member. While making the first pattern or pattern formed visible to the player, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. , the second pattern or pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

In this case, the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, so when displacing the target member in order to change the pattern or design that the player visually recognizes, the light from the light irradiation means must not be irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the target member is formed in a circular or annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular or annular shape. Game machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatable to the base member around the center of the circular or annular shape. Compared to the case where the target member can be slid and displaced, the target member can be arranged while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols that the player can see through the opening of the shielding member. The space required can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and is provided with a reflective portion, and is configured to reflect light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the target member. A game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material into a circular plate shape and is provided with a reflective portion, and is irradiated by the light irradiation means and is illuminated from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by a reflecting part and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end face of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member visible to the player in the rotated state. can.

In the gaming machine E5, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in a circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotational position ( It is possible to easily keep the light emitted from the front of the target member constant regardless of the phase). That is, patterns and designs displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member can be stably formed.

A gaming machine E7, which is the gaming machine E1, includes a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, since the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed movably on the base member, the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to affect the target member. It is possible to increase variations in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the visual appearance of the player, and it is possible to make the game more interesting to the player.

The gaming machine E7 includes a drive means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force thereto, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the drive force applied from the drive means. A gaming machine E8, characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 is provided with a driving means for displacing the target member by applying a driving force to the target member, and the light irradiation means is configured to displace the target member by applying a driving force to the target member. Since the member is displaced together with the target member by being brought into contact with the member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. can.

<Features Group F> (Free setting of countdown notice)
A performance period setting means for setting one performance period among different performance periods, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance in a specific period set within said one performance period, and said specific performance execution means by said specific performance execution means. a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that notifies in advance that a specific effect will be executed; A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it has a notification effect setting means for setting an opportunity for ending the notification effect based on information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a prize. The game is configured to be able to execute a pre-notification performance (countdown performance) that notifies the player in advance of the timing at which a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance) will be performed among the performances executed for a predetermined period of time. There is a chance. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-198568).

In such conventional gaming machines, by notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific performance will be executed, it is possible to execute a variable performance while increasing the player's expectations for a jackpot. However, when it is determined that a pre-notification performance is to be performed, the period for performing the pre-notification performance (i.e., the start timing and end timing) is set, so the content of the performance becomes monotonous. There has been a problem in that players quickly become bored with the presentation. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, while the advance notification performance is being executed, the performance mode of the advance notification performance is varied (for example, a specific performance targeted for the advance notification performance is changed). ), and the production effect could not be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, the start opportunity is set by the notification effect setting means based on the first information as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect will be executed, and the start opportunity is set based on the second information. A termination trigger is set. As a result, the period for performing the notification effect is set based on a plurality of different pieces of information, so the period for performing the notification effect can be freely set, and the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 includes an execution information determining means for determining execution information of the specific performance, and the notification performance setting means sets the execution information of the specific performance determined by the execution information determining means as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that a specific performance is to be executed is used as second information to set the trigger for ending the notification performance. It is possible to set notification effects that correspond to the following. Therefore, while it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification performance is executed, it is possible to execute the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be performed, so there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the execution information determining means determines at least a timing at which the specific performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that a specific performance is to be executed is used as second information to set the end timing of the notification performance, so that the execution timing of the specific performance is set. It is possible to set notification effects that correspond to the following. Therefore, while making it possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific effect is executed, which has the effect of increasing the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 has a specific effect setting means for setting one specific effect among a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. The gaming machine F4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, for a plurality of specific performances having different execution timings, it is possible to easily set a notification performance that matches the timing at which the specific performance is executed. can. Therefore, while making it possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, it is possible to accurately notify the period during which the specific effect is executed, which has the effect of increasing the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the timing for ending the notification effect based on the second information, different from the timing for setting the start opportunity for the notification effect based on the first information. A gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it sets.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so the period in which the notification effect is executed can be freely set. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification performance period setting means is configured to set a trigger for ending the notification performance based on the second information while the notification performance is being executed by the notification performance execution means. Features gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, after the notification effect is executed, it is possible to set an end timing for the notification effect, so that after the notification effect is executed, the end timing of the notification effect can be set. The execution period will be set. Therefore, the period during which the notification effect is performed can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, at the time the notification effect is executed, it is not set at what timing the notification effect targets a specific effect to be executed, so it is possible for the player to predict the content of the notification effect in advance. This can be reliably prevented.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation executed by the operation performance execution means an operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated during the performance, and the notification effect setting means sets a presentation mode of the notification effect based on a determination result of the operation judgment means. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the performance period of the notification performance is set based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation performance, so that the player's participation in the performance is reduced. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period that is set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. A gaming machine F8, wherein at least the second notification performance period is set based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification performance period can be set based on the second information among the periods in which the notification performance is executed, so the notification performance period can be set freely. In a gaming machine that can be set to 1, it is possible to secure a period for performing a performance based on the second information, and there is an effect that a performance that is easy to understand for a player can be executed.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification performance execution means executes a time-lapse performance that indicates over time a period until the specific performance is executed during the second notification performance period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8, it is possible to execute a timing effect during the second notification effect period, so that it is possible to notify the player of the timing at which a specific effect will be executed in an easy-to-understand manner. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine F9, based on the notification performance period determining means for determining the performance period of the notification performance set by the notification performance setting means, and the length of the performance period determined by the notification performance period determination means, A gaming machine F10 comprising: a time-lapse effect period setting means for setting a period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the temporal effect is executed for a certain period of time by the elapsed effect period setting means based on the length of the effect period during which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing for executing the temporal effect is determined by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect, even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means, the start timing of the specific effect can be accurately determined. This has the effect of being able to suggest this to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the notification performance setting means sets a performance mode of a first performance to be executed during the first notification performance period based on the first information, and A gaming machine F11 characterized in that it has a first performance mode variable means that changes the first performance mode when a predetermined performance variable condition is satisfied during one notification performance period.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F8 to F10, the performance mode of the first performance executed during the first notification performance period is established while the first performance is being executed. It is variable when possible performance variable conditions are met. Thereby, after the notification performance is executed, the performance mode of the notification performance can be changed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine F12 in the gaming machine F11, wherein the performance variable condition is established when the notification performance setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification performance.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the termination trigger of the notification performance is set and the performance period of the notification performance is determined, the performance mode of the first performance can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first performance corresponding to the set termination trigger, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation performance executed during the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means. and an operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. A gaming machine F13, wherein the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on a determination result by the operation determining means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the trigger for ending the notification performance is set based on the content of the operation performed during the notification performance. Therefore, the performance period of the notification performance can be varied by the player's operation, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on a determination result by the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine F14 is characterized in that the second information is information for the game.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F13, a specific period in which a specific performance is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation performance performed during the notification performance, and the specified period is set during the set specific period. Since the performance period of the notification performance can be varied based on this, there is an effect that the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period from among a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific performance execution means sets the specific period setting means A gaming machine F15 that executes the specific performance corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F14, a specific performance corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that different specific effects can be executed depending on the operation content of the operating means. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the gaming machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period that is set after the first notification effect period as the period during which the notification effect is executed. The operation performance execution means executes the operation performance during the first notification performance period, and sets the length of the second notification performance period to correspond to the specific period set by the specific period setting unit. It has a performance period variable means for changing the performance period. The gaming machine F16 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F15, an operation performance is executed during the first notification performance period in the notification performance set from the first notification performance period and the second notification performance period, The length of the notification performance is varied by varying the length of the second notification performance period based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation performance. Therefore, when the length of the notification performance is varied, it is possible to secure a period during which the operation performance is performed, so that it is possible to perform a performance that makes it easy for the player to operate the operation means.

<Characteristics Group G> (Variation of HP display)
A determining means for executing a determination based on performance information, a variable performance executing means for executing a variable performance that varies a performance value based on a determination result by the determining means, and the variable performance is executed by the performance executing means. a first performance value determining means for determining a first performance value for varying the performance value; and when the first performance value is determined by the first performance value determining means, the performance value A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it has a second performance value determining means for determining a second performance value different from the first performance value that can vary.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. Then, as a variable performance, a game machine executes a performance (battle performance) in which the own character and the enemy character compete against each other, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the performance. be. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-9075).

In such conventional gaming machines, a performance that reduces the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during a battle performance, and the decreased physical strength points are used to incite and identify the player as to whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. By notifying the player in advance of the timing at which the performance will be executed, the fluctuating performance can be executed while increasing the player's expectations for a jackpot. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that will be reduced during the battle performance, the number of performance patterns for the battle performance is increased and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the battle performance. However, conventional gaming machines are configured to manage detailed physical fitness points displayed on the display screen and set the next physical fitness point based on the managed physical fitness points, so physical fitness points decrease. There is a problem in that the amount of processing required for management becomes enormous. Note that it is possible to simplify the management of physical strength point reduction by reducing the patterns that reduce physical strength points during battle performances, but in this case, the performance patterns of battle performances will be reduced, and players will be forced to The problem was that people got tired of it.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the performance value is determined based on values determined by a plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase variations in the performance value than when the performance value is determined by one determination means. The effect is that it can be done.

In the gaming machine G1, there is provided a performance state setting means capable of setting a specific performance state in which the variable performance is continuously executed, and when the specific performance state is set by the performance state setting means, the performance value is set. It has a performance value updating means that continuously and variably updates the performance value, and a first performance value storage means that can store the first performance value determined by the first performance value determining means, the performance value updating means , a gaming machine G2 characterized in that the performance value is variably updated based on the first performance value stored in the first performance value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, when the performance value determined based on the first performance value and the second performance value is variably updated, the performance value is not the summed performance value, but the first performance value. Since only one performance value is stored and the performance value is variably updated based on the first performance value, the performance value that is actually displayed (the performance value that is the sum of the first performance value and the second performance value) With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of values (first effect values) that are variably updated by the effect value updating means, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G2, a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode based on a variable amount of the performance value variably updated by the performance value updating means, and a performance for displaying the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it has a mode display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine G2, a performance mode based on the variable amount of the performance value variably updated by the performance update means is displayed, so that by looking at the performance mode to be executed, This has the effect of being able to inform the player of the variable amount of performance value in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first performance value is a part of the performance value, and the second performance value is composed of a value different from the first performance value, and the first performance value and the A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it has a performance value summing means for calculating the performance value by adding it up with a second performance value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the first performance value, which is a part of the performance value, and the second performance value, which is different from the first performance value, are added up by the performance value summing means. Since the performance value is determined, there is an effect that the performance value can be made more diverse.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a benefit is granted based on a determination means that performs determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and that the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine G5 comprising: a privilege granting means, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the discrimination by the discriminating means is performed, and the effect value is variable, so the change situation of the effect value and the It is possible to perform the performance so that there is a correlation with the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the changing situation of the performance value, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5, the second performance value determining means determines the second performance value based on the first performance value determining means determining the first performance value. Game machine G6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second performance value is determined when the first performance value is determined, so that the first performance value and the second performance value are determined. The performance value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the performance value that has been changed due to the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of prediction.

A gaming machine G7 in gaming machine G5 or G6, characterized in that the first performance value determining means causes the first performance value to vary by a variable amount based on a result of determination by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the performance value can be varied based on the determination result of the determining means, so the variable amount of the performance value can be changed for the player. This has the effect of making it possible to draw attention to the viewer's attention, thereby increasing the production effect.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means facilitates determining the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. Game machine G8 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the performance value, the easier it is to give a benefit, so it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the variable amount of the performance value. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G8, the second performance value determined by the second performance value determining means is selected as a first range or a second range different from the first range. and determined value determining means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, The means determines the second effect value by selecting one selection range from among the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means. Game machine G9 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the selection range in which the second performance value is selected can be varied based on whether the first performance value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that variations in performance values can be easily increased.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores a first selection range in which a range in which the first performance value can be increased or decreased is stored as the second performance value, and a range in which the first performance value can be decreased. and a second selection range in which is stored, and the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a result of determination by the determined value determining means. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the second selection range is selected and the second performance value is set.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G9, when the first performance value is less than a predetermined value, a second performance value that decreases the first performance value is selected, so that the first performance value is reduced. It is possible to suppress the effect value obtained by adding up the value and the second effect value from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to prevent a value larger than the lower limit value from being determined as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress execution of effects that would otherwise cause the user to lose control.

<Characteristics H group> (Notification of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
A first determining means that performs a determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a bonus game execution that executes a bonus game when a first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a high probability state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is more likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result; and a state in which the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is more likely to be the predetermined first discrimination result than the high probability state. When the predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied in a state in which the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the probability setting means that can set a low probability state that is unlikely to result in the first discrimination result, It has a second discrimination means for performing discrimination, and the probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first gaming state; and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for notifying the period in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means comprises: In a state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is set when a first condition is satisfied, and the period effect execution means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect is repeatedly executed, which is composed of a first effect to show the performance and a second effect to determine the mode of effect of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low probability game is set and the second requirement that the first determination means performs a predetermined number of determinations in the state where the first gaming state is set are satisfied. A gaming machine H1, characterized in that the gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it has a period performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the period performance in response to information on the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a variable probability state where the probability of winning a winning is high) based on the fact that the player has won a winning. 2. Description of the Related Art There is a gaming machine that indicates to a player whether or not a period in which a gaming state continues ends based on the result of a performance (for example, a battle performance). (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-143197).

In such conventional gaming machines, if a win is won in which the advantageous gaming state continues, the result of a winning pattern in which the own character wins is displayed, and if the winning pattern is won in which the advantageous gaming state ends, the result of the winning pattern is displayed. The battle performance is now displayed so that the performance result of a defeat pattern in which the player loses is displayed, and if there is no winning (if the advantageous gaming state is still set), the performance result of a draw pattern with no win or loss is displayed. Since this is executed, it is possible to make the players pay close attention to the content of the battle performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect. However, if a game is played for a long period of time without winning in an advantageous gaming state, a battle effect in which the result of a draw pattern is displayed becomes more likely to be executed, and the player's response to the battle effect becomes more likely to be executed. There was a problem that the level of expectations for Furthermore, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that if a specific variable pattern is drawn as a result of the lottery without winning, a battle effect of a draw pattern is executed. When specific variable patterns are drawn consecutively, there is a problem in that battle effects of draw patterns are executed continuously, further lowering the player's expectations for the battle effects.

According to the gaming machine H1, of the period effects executed in the state in which the first gaming state is set, the performance mode of the second performance is set in accordance with the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Based on the performance mode of the second performance, it is possible to predict whether the first requirement and the second requirement are met. As a result, even if the period performance is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the performance mode of the newly executed second performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with period effects.

A gaming machine H2 characterized in that in the gaming machine H1, the period performance mode setting means includes a first performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the first performance.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the performance mode of the first performance for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the effect of the first requirement or the performance mode of the first performance, in addition to the performance result of the second performance. Since it is set based on whether or not the second condition is met, it is possible to predict whether the first condition is met or not and the situation until the first condition is met, depending on the performance mode of the first performance. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the performance mode of the first performance, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H1 or H2, wherein the period performance mode setting means has a second performance mode setting means for setting the performance mode of the second performance.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the performance mode of the second performance for determining the performance mode of the first performance is based on whether or not the first requirement or the second requirement is met. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the performance mode of the second performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode of the second performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period performance mode setting means sets a different performance mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Characteristic game machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the production mode of the period production is changed due to the fulfillment of any one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. Variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied depending on the performance mode of the period performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode of the period performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period performance mode setting means is configured to determine the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. A gaming machine H5, characterized in that a presentation mode of the period presentation corresponding to the determination result is set.

According to the gaming machine H5, the performance mode of the period performance is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied can be suggested depending on the performance mode of the period performance. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the players to play the game while giving them a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period performance execution means switches the period performance being executed from the second performance to the first performance when a predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied; It is characterized in that the ease with which the performance switching condition is satisfied is made different between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a high probability state is set by the probability setting means and a low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Since the frequency at which one effect is executed can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

A gaming machine H7 characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has a condition setting means that makes it easier to satisfy the production switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the probability setting means sets the low probability state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first performance is executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result. The gaming machine H8 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a discrimination result that a bonus game is executed. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, the player watches the performance while being aware of both whether or not he has won the bonus game and whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance being executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 has a number measuring means for measuring the number of times the period effect is executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the second performance mode setting means sets the second performance mode based on the number of executions of the period performance measured by the number of times measurement means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times the period effect is repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same performance mode from being repeatedly set as the second performance mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

In any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, there is provided a performance period determining means for determining a performance period after the first performance is executed by the period performance execution means, and in a state where the predetermined performance switching condition is satisfied, the If the performance period determined by the performance period determining means is within a predetermined period, the first performance is restricted from being executed by the period performance execution means. Characteristic gaming machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the performance switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the performance period after the first performance is executed is within the predetermined period. If so, execution of the first performance is regulated by the performance regulation means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first performance from being performed frequently, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the execution of the first performance.

In the gaming machine H10, the first performance executed when the first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is the predetermined first discrimination result is not regulated by the performance regulation means. Features gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H10, the first performance executed when the bonus game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the performance period determining means, so that the bonus game is There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the production effect when executed. Further, when the first performance is performed again within a predetermined performance period after the previous first performance was performed, the expectation level that the bonus game will be executed can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. There is an effect.

<Characteristic Group J> (Target performance varies depending on the notification timing of the expectation level increase performance)
Expectation level display control means capable of displaying on a display means a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of suggesting expectation levels step by step to indicate that a predetermined condition is satisfied; display mode changing means for changing the expectation level display mode in stages; variable information setting means for setting variable information to be varied by the display mode changing means; and at least one expectation level display mode among the plurality of expectation level display modes. variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable; A gaming machine J1, characterized in that the display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and has an execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the variable suggestion performance.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the performance that is executed for a predetermined period, there are multiple display modes corresponding to the expectation level of the jackpot, and the level of jackpot expectation of the current variable performance is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player based on the display mode of the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-248305).

In such conventional gaming machines, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be shown to the player by the display mode of the characters displayed during the variable performance, so it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the variable performance that is executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, multiple types of expectation display modes are provided in which display modes corresponding to the expectation level of a jackpot are displayed, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation level to the player by making a judgment based on the It was possible to make the player pay attention to the content, and it was possible to enhance the presentation effect. In addition, the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode, and to suggest which display mode will be displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a gaming machine that is configured to perform an expectation level display mode advance suggestion effect that allows the player to predict in which display mode the expectation level display mode will be displayed as a variable effect. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine that changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode from the display mode that is once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine that has multiple types of expectation level display modes, if an expectation level display mode advance suggestion performance corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, expectations that are not subject to the expectation level display mode advance suggestion performance. This implicitly negates the fact that the degree display mode is variable, which poses a problem in that the presentation effect is reduced.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect that suggests that one of the expectation level display modes is to be changed among the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is executed by the variable suggestion effect execution means. executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion performance is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion performance can be made different. This has the effect that even if the same presentation mode is used as the variable suggestion presentation, the expectation display mode to be suggested by the variable suggestion presentation can be made different.

In the gaming machine J1, a discriminating means that performs discrimination when a predetermined discriminating condition is satisfied; and a privilege granting means that awards a privilege based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result; A gaming machine J2, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation level display mode can be made easier to indicate a high expectation level, so that the player can easily display the expectation level display mode. I'll have to keep an eye on the content. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the variable suggestion performance notifies variable information of an expectation display mode that is varied in stages.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, it is possible to notify the variable information of the target expectation level display mode by the variable suggestion performance, so that the variable suggestion performance can be provided to the player. This has the effect of attracting attention and enhancing the production effect.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is one in which a plurality of variable amounts are displayed, including at least a variable amount for indicating the extent to which the expectation level display mode is actually varied. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as variable suggestion effects, so that among the plurality of variable amounts displayed to the player, the larger variable amount is displayed. It is possible to make the player play the game with expectations that the amount will be the actual variable amount, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any of the gaming machines J1 to J4 has a target notification means for notifying an expectation display mode that is a target of the variable suggestion performance executed by the variable suggestion performance execution means before the variable suggestion performance ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion performance that will be executed this time, the variable suggestion effect that is executed for the player is This has the effect of making it possible to enjoy the suggestive presentation with peace of mind.

In any of gaming machines J2 to J5, an expectation type setting means for setting an expectation type based on the determination result of the determination means; and an expectation type setting means for setting an expectation type based on the expectation type setting means. , an expectation level setting means for setting an expectation level for each of the plurality of expectation level display modes, and the expectation level display control means includes the plurality of expectation level display modes set by the expectation level setting means. An expectation level display mode for indicating at least a part of the expectation level of the expectation level is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the expectation level setting means that is already displayed. The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the variable amount indicates a difference between the expected level and the expected level.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect is performed that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation level and the preset expectation level as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the amount of variable displayed as a variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for an expectation display mode in which a high expectation level is already displayed, a benefit will not be granted. It is possible to increase the possibility that Therefore, not only the performance contents of the variable suggestion performance but also the display mode of the current expectation level display mode are selected by lottery, which has the effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J2, there is an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance execution means that executes an operation performance for causing the operation means to be operated, and an operation performance execution means that executes the operation performance during the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means. operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the display mode changing means varies the expectation level display mode in response to a determination result by the operation determining means. Characteristic game machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the display mode of the expectation level is changed in response to the operation on the operating means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine J8, a determining means that performs a determination when a predetermined determination condition is met; a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game when the result of the determination by the determining means is a predetermined determination result; an acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met, and a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means that are stored up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is met. a possible storage means, a preliminary determination means for performing preliminary determination based on the ball entering information stored in the storage means, and a number of ball entering information indicating the number of the ball entering information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having a means for displaying the number of ball entering information to be displayed, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the number of entering ball information displayed by the number displaying means for ball entering information corresponding to the determination result by the operation determining means. A game machine J9 characterized in that it has an additional effect execution means for executing an additional effect that changes a display mode for indicating the number of ball input information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information can also be varied by additional effects performed in response to operations on the operating means. This has the effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The gaming machine J9 has performance condition determining means for determining whether the expectation level display mode displayed by the expectation level display control means satisfies a predetermined performance condition, and the performance condition determining means satisfies the performance condition. The gaming machine J10 is characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the game is not played.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J9, an additional performance is executed when the expectation level display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined performance condition. This has the effect of creating relevance and enhancing the production effect.

In the gaming machine J10, the performance condition determining means determines that the performance condition is not satisfied when the expectation level display mode is not displayed a predetermined number of times by the expectation level display control means. Game machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J10, by executing additional performances, the number of performances to be executed can be supplemented, so that the desire to play is reduced due to the small number of performances to be executed. This has the effect of suppressing the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Jackpot performance with consecutive holds)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination when a predetermined discriminating condition is met, a privilege game executing means that executes a privilege game when a result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a predetermined acquisition condition. an acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information when the determination condition is satisfied; and a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. , and a pre-determination means for performing a pre-determination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, wherein the pre-determination means satisfies at least a pre-determination condition during the bonus game. The above-mentioned preliminary determination is carried out when the above-mentioned preliminary determination means performs the above-mentioned preliminary determination, and the present invention is characterized by comprising a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during the bonus game in accordance with the determination result of the preliminary discrimination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is provided a holding means that can acquire ball entry information based on a ball entering a starting slot and hold the ball entry information until a lottery condition is met, and a holding means that can hold the ball entry information until a lottery condition is satisfied. a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entry information when the lottery result is a winning result of the lottery means, and an execution means for executing a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning result. There are gaming machines. The system has an advance determination means for determining in advance the entry information held in the reservation means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the advance determination means determines that there is a hit in the reservation at the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that, when it is determined, continues to display the display mode (number of rounds) during the winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-30737).

In such a conventional gaming machine, if the player wins again while on hold, a special effect can be executed during the second-time game, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. However, the configuration is such that the winning information that is withheld at the end of the jackpot is determined, and during the first-time game, the effect set at the time of winning is only executed, so for example, if you win during the first-time game, There is a problem in that even if winning information is withheld, it is not possible to change the performance for the first-time game, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In addition, although the configuration is configured so that the effects are continuous for multiple winning games, only the effect that allows the player to easily identify the break between the first-seen game and the second-seen game is executed. There was a problem in that it was easy to predict how many winning games would be executed during performances that were performed continuously during winning games.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the performance mode during the bonus game is set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means executed during the bonus game, compared to the case where the performance mode during the bonus game is set in advance. This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting the performance mode corresponding to the preliminary determination result.

In the gaming machine K1, the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is one in which a plurality of small bonus games are executed, and the prior determination condition is satisfied when the small bonus game is executed. Game machine K2 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when a small bonus game is executed, and the performance mode during the bonus game is set, so that the execution status of the small bonus game It is possible to set the performance mode of the bonus game according to the player. Therefore, even if the performance mode of the bonus game is set during the bonus game, there is an effect that the bonus game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine K2 includes a bonus game selection means for selecting one bonus game among the plurality of bonus games in which a different number of small bonus games are executed as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution unit. Game machine K3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, one bonus game is selected from a plurality of bonus games in which a different number of small bonus games are executed, so that the content of the bonus game does not change. It has the effect of being able to provide variety and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3, the advance determination means includes, when the result of the advance determination is a predetermined advance determination result, the storage means includes the ball landing information for executing the bonus game. The performance mode setting means sets the performance mode during the bonus game in accordance with the number of small bonus games to be executed in the bonus game that is determined in advance by the advance determination means. A game machine K4 is characterized in that it is a gaming machine that

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the performance mode during the bonus game is set according to the number of small bonus games determined by the advance determination means, so that the player is not distracted during the bonus game. This has the effect of making it possible to draw attention to the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of minor bonus games of the bonus games selected by the bonus game selection means, and a number of the minor bonus games stored in the execution number storage means. the number of minor bonus games notifying means for notifying at least a part of them, the number of minor bonus games stored in the execution number storage means, and the minor bonus being reported by the number of minor bonus games notifying means. a first difference determining means for determining the difference between the number of games and a notification for setting the number of the minor bonus games to be notified by the minor bonus game number notification device based on the determination result of the first difference determining device; A gaming machine K5 characterized by having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, by partially reporting the number of small bonus games (round games) to be executed during the bonus game (big win), one bonus game can be played. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small bonus games to be executed during a game, and even while the bonus games are being executed, the player can play the game while expecting more small bonus games to be executed. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine K5, characterized in that it has an adding means for adding the number of the small bonus games to be executed in the bonus game pre-determined by the pre-determination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, if the advance determination means determines in advance that a bonus game will be executed during a bonus game (jackpot), in the bonus game determined in advance. The number of small bonus games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the addition means. As a result, when bonus games are executed multiple times at short intervals, the number of small bonus games that are announced while the previous bonus game is being executed is reduced to the number of small bonus games that will be executed in the subsequent bonus game. It can be set by taking into account the number of Therefore, by looking at the number of small bonus games notified during the bonus game by the small bonus game number notification means, it is possible to predict whether the next bonus game will be executed or not, and one bonus game is completed. This has the effect of creating a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game.

The gaming machine K5 or K6 has an update determining means for determining whether to update the number of minor bonus games notified by the minor bonus game number reporting device when the minor bonus game is executed. Game machine K7 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determining means determines whether to update the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number reporting means, so that the number of notifications is Even if the number of small bonus games is set by the setting means, the number of small bonus games may not be updated. Therefore, even if the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means is not updated when a new small bonus game is executed, the next time a small bonus game is executed, It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number reporting means will be updated, and it is possible to have the player play games while expecting that more small bonus games will be executed. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, if the determination result by the first difference determining means satisfies the first condition, forced updating means updates the number of minor bonus games notified by the minor bonus game number reporting device. A gaming machine K8 characterized in that it has.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determining means satisfies the first condition, the forced update means notifies the small bonus game number reporting means. By forcibly updating the number of small bonus games available, it is possible to set a period during which the player can play the bonus games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, a number of executed small bonus games notifying means for notifying the number of the small bonus games that have already been executed, and a number of the small bonus games being notified by the number of small bonus games notifying means; a second difference determining means for determining the difference between the number of minor bonus games reported by the number of executed minor bonus games reporting means, and a case where the determination result by the second difference determining device satisfies the second condition; A gaming machine K9 characterized in that it has a forced updating means for updating the number of the small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, if the determination result by the second difference determining means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means notifies the small bonus game number reporting means. To prevent the number of executed small bonus games from becoming larger than the number of small bonus games notified by a small bonus game number reporting means, in order to forcibly update the number of small bonus games that have been played. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small bonus game number notification means performs the preliminary determination of the ball landing information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period out of the period in which the bonus game is being executed. The gaming machine K10 is characterized in that, when the result is the predetermined predetermined result, notification of a specific number of small bonus games is executed.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, ball entry information acquired within a specific period during the period during which the bonus game is being executed is used as a result of advance determination to determine whether the bonus game is being played. If the player has won, a specific number of small bonus games is notified by the small bonus game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the fun of acquiring ball entry information during the bonus game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of small bonus games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of small bonus games notified by the executed small bonus games number reporting means. a third difference discriminating means for discriminating the difference; and when the determination result of the third difference discriminating means satisfies a third condition in a state where the first privilege game has ended, the first privilege game has ended; The gaming machine K11 is characterized in that it has a performance continuation means that continues the performance executed during the bonus game until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, if the determination result by the third difference determining means satisfies the third condition, the performance continuation means executes the bonus game during the bonus game. The effect will continue to be displayed. This has the effect that when the advance determination means determines that the bonus game will be executed, the effect that will be executed during the bonus game can be continuously displayed after the first bonus game ends. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next bonus game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K11, the performance continuation means executes during the bonus game during the period from the end of the first bonus game until the second bonus game is executed. It is possible to reliably execute the performance. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a series of performances for multiple bonus games, it is possible to have the player play the games while expecting that more small bonus games will be executed while the performance is being executed. effective.

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, a storage number determining means for determining the number of ball hitting information stored in the storage means when the determination result by the determining means is a predetermined determination result; performance mode storage means for storing a plurality of performance modes executed during a bonus game, and the performance mode storage means stores performance mode storage means based on the number of the ball entry means determined by the memory number determination means. A gaming machine K13 characterized in that it has a bonus game performance mode selection means for selecting one performance mode from the plurality of performance modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, if a predetermined determination result is obtained, the performance mode during the bonus game is determined based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means. is selected, it is possible to provide various effects to the player during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the performance mode storage means stores information about the plurality of performance modes at the time when the bonus game is started, indicating that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result. The gaming machine K14 is characterized in that it stores at least a first performance mode that can be notified to the player and a second performance mode that can be notified to the player after the bonus game ends.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determining means is a predetermined preliminary determination result, based on the performance mode selected by the bonus game performance mode selection means. Since the timing of the display can be varied, the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics L group> (Change performance frequency based on game history)
A determination means that executes a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a performance execution means that performs a performance to show the determination result of the determination means, and a performance to show the specific determination result by the performance execution means. a benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when executed; a storage means for storing corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is met; A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it has a determining means for determining whether to execute a specific performance among the performances based on the history information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable performance for a predetermined period of time to indicate to the player whether or not he or she has won a prize. As a variable performance that is executed for a predetermined period of time, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation performance in which the performance mode is variable based on the operation result of an operation means that can be operated by a player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the performance mode is varied based on the content of the player's operation on the operating means, the player can be motivated to participate in the game. However, there has been a problem in that if the operation performance is frequently performed for a player who does not operate the operating means voluntarily, the player's desire to play decreases.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific performance is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific performance can be varied depending on the progress of the game, etc., and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L1 includes an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables are set such that selection rates of the specific effects are set to be different, and the determining means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 is characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of a specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so the selection rate of a specific effect can be varied with easy control. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 or L2 includes an operating means operated by a player and an operation determining means capable of determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and as one of the effects, the above-mentioned An operation performance that changes the performance mode when the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determination means is set, and the specific condition is that at least one of the predetermined operations is determined by the operation determination means. A gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is set to the following conditions.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, operating the operating means in the operation production not only changes the performance mode but also makes it easier to satisfy a specific condition, so history information This has the effect of being able to vary the execution rate of a specific performance.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least a storage means capable of storing the history information, a setting means capable of setting an accumulated value up to a predetermined value based on the accumulation result by the storage means, and the setting means. a selection means for selecting an accumulation benefit system corresponding to the accumulated value to be set from among a plurality of accumulation privilege systems; and an accumulation benefit granting means for imparting an accumulation benefit corresponding to the accumulation benefit system selected by the selection means. and, when the new accumulation value is set by the setting means, the accumulation benefit granting means grants a new accumulation benefit corresponding to the accumulation value privilege selected by the selection means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the selection means selects one accumulated benefit system from a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is provided. Thereby, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific performance is performed and the granting of accumulated benefits are performed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the accumulated privileges awarded by the accumulated privilege granting means are different for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selection means.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L4, the accumulated benefits granted depending on the accumulated benefit system can be varied, so it is fun to acquire various accumulated benefits while changing the operation contents of the operating means. can be provided to players. Furthermore, by varying the operation contents of the operating means, it is possible to vary the frequency of presentations, which has the effect of providing players with new enjoyment in the presentations that are performed.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized by having a history information erasing means for erasing the history information stored in the storage means to a state where the selection means can select a different accumulation privilege system. Game machine L6.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, history information can be deleted to the point where different accumulated reward systems can be selected, so compared to the case where all history information is deleted, the following It is possible to make it easier to select the accumulated benefit system. Therefore, there is an effect that the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits can be increased.

In addition, based on the history information being partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means will also be varied (decreased). This has the effect of being able to suppress a situation in which the production effect deteriorates due to reaching the specified value.

A gaming machine L7, which is any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, and includes a guide means for guiding the game content to cause the selection means to select a specific accumulated benefit system.

According to the gaming machine L7, a specific accumulated benefit system can be selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guide means in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L6. Therefore, various accumulated benefits can be given to the players, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the guidance means guides game content for selecting a specific accumulation benefit system by varying the performance mode of the operation performance.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L7, the performance mode of the operation performance is varied by the guide means, so that different accumulation benefit systems can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the performance mode of the operation performance. will be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide various benefits to the players, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, the guide means selects one of the following as a presentation mode of the operation presentation: a notification presentation mode that notifies the operation device to perform the predetermined operation, and a non-information presentation mode that does not notify. A gaming machine L9 is characterized in that it guides the game content using a button.

According to the game machine L9, as the operation performance, it is possible to execute a performance mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operating means and a performance mode in which it is difficult to perform a predetermined operation on the operating means. Just by operating it, you will be able to select different accumulation benefit systems. Therefore, it is possible to provide various benefits to the players, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9 has a system selection means that allows the player to select the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guide means from among the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized in that it is a gaming machine L10.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the game content so that the accumulated bonus system desired by the player is selected, thereby further enhancing the production effect. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics M group> (Measures for determining when a small hit is confirmed)
A firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means into which a game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. a determining means capable of executing a determination in the case of a case, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a stop of the identification information for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, a game ball is entered during a period in which the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. A specific ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a specific area where a game ball that enters the specific ball entry means can enter, and a benefit advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. a benefit granting means to grant, a benefit type determining means to determine the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means, and the benefit determined by the benefit type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. a notification means for notifying notification information that allows the player to identify the type of the notification; A gaming machine M1 comprising: means for making it difficult for a ball to enter the ball means.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols etc., the lottery result is notified in a predetermined notification mode so as to maintain the fairness of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during a winning game, a winning game is further executed, and the game that is set after that is executed. In a configuration in which the state is determined by the type of winning game that has been executed first, it is determined whether the winning type gives a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and If a game method is used in which the game is played in such a way that the game ball does not enter the game, there is a risk that the disadvantage to the game parlor side will increase.

This gaming machine M1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine M1, if a player attempts to avoid being granted a specific benefit type by checking the notification information indicating the benefit type determined by the benefit type determining means, the player may avoid being granted a specific benefit type. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the specific ball entry means, so there is an effect that disadvantages on the gaming parlor side can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode from among different dynamic display modes that are a combination of pseudo-stop modes in which the identification information is displayed dynamically and then temporarily stopped. A game machine M2 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the game machine M2, the temporary stop due to the pseudo-stop mode makes it difficult to know the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific bonus game is executed, the game ball is transferred to the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of suppressing the execution of a gaming method that avoids letting a ball enter the ball.

A gaming machine M3, which is the gaming machine M1 or M2, further comprising variable control means for varying the rate of balls entering the specific area depending on the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the probability of a ball entering a specific area can be varied depending on the type of bonus game to be executed, so the probability of a ball entering a specific area can be varied. This has the effect that it can be easily controlled.

<Characteristics N group> (Direct performance part 2)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance spanning a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result until the ball enters the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having the following.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, only performances including winning games are performed, and there is a problem that the games become monotonous and the players quickly get bored with the games.

This gaming machine N1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only can the identification information indicate a specific determination result, but also the presentation can make players expect whether the ball will land in a specific area, which has the effect of suppressing the problem of the player getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine N1, the gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes one performance based on the type of bonus game given from a plurality of performances.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the performance execution means switches to and executes a specific performance when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, if the ball does not enter a specific area, it can be switched to a specific effect, so it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. This has the effect of informing the public.

<Characteristics P group> (A delay device is installed on the top of the V attacker to prevent slow hitting)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and a bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. In the game, a specific ball entering means into which a game ball can enter during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specification into which the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter. an area, a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a benefit type determining means for determining the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means; , notification means for notifying information regarding the type of benefit determined by the benefit type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that it has an adjusting means for reducing the amount of falling game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols etc., the lottery result is notified in a predetermined notification mode so as to maintain the fairness of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during a winning game, a winning game is further executed, and the game that is set after that is executed. In a configuration in which the state is determined by the type of winning game that has been executed first, it is determined whether the winning type gives a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and If a game method is used in which the game is played in such a way that the game ball does not enter the game, there is a risk that the disadvantage to the game parlor side will increase.

This gaming machine P1 has been developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of falling balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is introduced into the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of making it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine P1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third part capable of allowing a game ball to flow down. a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down; A gaming machine P2, characterized in that the game machine P2 divides the ball into a specific channel in which it is possible for the ball to enter the means and a channel in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific entering means at a predetermined ratio.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls that are guided to the specific ball entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third part capable of allowing a game ball to flow down. and a second flow path in which it is difficult for the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjustment means is configured to move the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it has a rolling means that can be moved to discharge a game ball into a channel that guides the game ball to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the adjusting means causes the gaming balls that have flowed down the second channel for a predetermined period of time or longer to roll, so that even if the player stops shooting the gaming balls, This also has the effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, during the period from when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means becomes able to enter the ball, the second flow path is A gaming machine P4 characterized in that the period is shorter than the period from when a game ball is launched to when it passes through the adjusting means and reaches the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, in order to cause the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball, This has the effect of regulating a game method that does not allow balls to enter the specified ball entry means in the bonus game.

<Characteristics Q Group> (Countermeasures against Choro Hit 2)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and a bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit. In the game, a specific ball entering means into which a game ball can enter during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, and a specification into which the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter. an area, a benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a benefit type determining means for determining the type of the benefit to be granted by the benefit granting means; , an adjusting means for reducing the amount of falling game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period to a position where the game balls can be guided to the specific ball entering means. Game machine Q1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the game is played in such a way that the game ball does not enter a specific ball entrance or a specific area, which may increase the disadvantage to the gaming parlor side. was there.

This gaming machine Q1 has been developed to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of falling balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated and the game ball is introduced into the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of making it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine Q1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third base unit capable of allowing a game ball to flow downward. a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down; A gaming machine Q2, characterized in that the game machine Q2 is characterized in that it distributes at a predetermined ratio into a specific channel through which the ball can enter the means and a channel through which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls that are guided to the specific ball entry means among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a gaming area, a firing intensity variable means capable of varying the firing intensity emitted by the firing means by a player's operation, and a third base unit capable of allowing a game ball to flow downward. and a second flow path in which it is difficult for the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, and the adjustment means is configured to move the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3, characterized in that it has a rolling means that can be moved to discharge a game ball into a channel that guides the game ball to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the adjusting means causes the gaming balls that have flowed down the second channel for a predetermined period of time or more to roll, so that even if the player stops shooting the gaming balls, This also has the effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, during the period from when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means becomes able to enter the ball, the second flow path is A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the period is shorter than the period from when a game ball is launched to when it passes through the adjusting means and reaches the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, in order to cause the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball, This has the effect of regulating a game method that does not allow balls to enter the specified ball entry means in the bonus game.

<Characteristics R group> (Production until passing V in small hits and direct hits)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance spanning a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result until the ball enters the specific ball entry means. , and the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect that suggests changing the game ball launching method in stages before the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A game machine R1 characterized in that it is a game machine.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed and the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-147965).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, only performances including winning games are performed, and there is a problem that the games become monotonous and the players quickly get bored with the games.

This gaming machine N1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only can the identification information indicate a specific determination result, but also the presentation can make players expect whether the ball will land in a specific area, which has the effect of suppressing the problem of the player getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine R1, the gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes one performance based on the type of bonus game given from a plurality of performances.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that a variety of performances can be performed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the performance execution means switches to and executes a specific performance when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a preset period has elapsed. A gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, if the ball does not enter a specific area, it can be switched to a specific effect, so it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. This has the effect of informing the public.

<Characteristic S group> (2 types of control switching between small hit and symbol hit)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a guide path for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area, a first state in which it is possible to guide the game ball to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. a switching means for switching, and when the first bonus game is executed, the switching means sets first switching information for switching the guide route; when the second bonus game is executed, the first switching information is set; A gaming machine S1 characterized in that it has a setting means for setting second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. When a game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game can be set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, and during the winning game, a specific ball entrance or a specific It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, a bonus such as a winning game is given. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-9795).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games.

This gaming machine P1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guiding route can be switched between the first bonus game and the second bonus game, it is possible to show the player how to guide the player to a different specific area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is an effect.

A gaming machine S2 characterized in that the gaming machine S1 is switched to the first state by switching the guiding path based on the second switching information.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine S1, the guide path is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so in the second bonus game, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into a specific area, Even if it is a second privilege game, the player can be made to think that the second privilege is awarded by entering the specific area.

A gaming machine S3 in the gaming machine S1 or S2, wherein a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be varied, and the guidance state of the guideway can be changed in a variety of ways.

<Characteristic T group> (Switch between 2 types with small hit and pattern hit 2)
A ball entrance means into which a game ball can enter, a determination means which can perform a determination when a game ball enters the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. A display means for displaying, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player and a second bonus game that is different from the first bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the mode determining means and the display means; and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, in which a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means. a specific ball entering means, a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means can enter, and when the first bonus game is executed and a game ball enters the specific area, a game a first benefit that is advantageous to the player; and when the second benefit game is being executed, a benefit granting means that grants a second benefit that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether the ball enters the specific area; and a guide path for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area, a first state in which it is possible to guide the game ball to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. a switching means for switching, and when the first bonus game is executed, the switching means sets first switching information for switching the guide route; when the second bonus game is executed, the first switching information is set; A gaming machine T1 comprising: setting means for setting second switching information for switching the guideway to a first state.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is executed when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is a win that is advantageous to the player. When a game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game can be set to be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, and during the winning game, a specific ball entrance or a specific It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, a bonus such as a winning game is given. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-9795).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games.

This gaming machine P1 was created to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guiding route can be switched between the first bonus game and the second bonus game, it is possible to show the player how to guide the player to a different specific area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In the game machine T1, the game ball is guided to the specific area by different guide paths in a case where the game machine T1 is switched to the first state based on the second switching information and a case where it is switched to the first state based on the first switch information. A gaming machine T2 characterized in that the following is induced.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, since the player is guided to a specific area by different guidance, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the first switching information is set with a plurality of different pieces of information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be varied, and the guiding state of the guiding route can be switched in various ways.

<Feature group U> (Set the performance mode based on the length of the period from special 2 winning to special 2 change)
A first determination means that performs the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; an acquisition means that acquires the acquired information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to an upper limit of the number of determinations; a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when a second determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination means for performing the first determination. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the means or second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time. In the gaming machine, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is not started, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect based on the period effect, and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. and a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode in the period performance executed by the period performance execution means based on the determination result of the period determination means. Gaming machine U1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, there is a device that has a plurality of starting ports and is configured to perform a different lottery depending on the starting port into which the game ball enters. Then, there is a system that executes a suggestive effect that suggests the result of a winning lottery that is executed based on the entry of game balls into each starting hole (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball enters the starting port of the other while a winning lottery is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into one starting port, By preventing a new lottery from being executed until the lottery ends, it is possible to prevent players from excessively performing the lottery.

However, during the period from the time a game ball enters one of the starting ports until the lottery (suggestive performance) based on the entered ball is executed, the game ball enters the other starting port. Since it differs depending on the situation of the winning lottery to be executed, for example, after a game ball enters the starting slot, a suggestive effect to show the lottery result of the winning lottery to be executed based on the ball entering is executed. If it takes a long time to reach the player, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestion effect is being executed based on which ball entry, which reduces the effect of the suggestion effect and reduces the player's desire to play. there were. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by providing an effect that can suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine U1, the performance of the period effect is executed by the period effect execution means based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information is different, it is possible to execute a period effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts is long.

The gaming machine U1 includes a remaining period determining means for determining a residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means determines the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the period is determined based on.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1, the period determining means displays the second identification information after a predetermined start condition is established based on the residual display period of the first identification information being executed. Since it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of is started, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period performance in accordance with the actual game content, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, and the period determination means determines whether the predetermined start condition is satisfied after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts based on the acquired information for which a start condition is met is determined.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the period is determined by the period from when the acquired information is acquired until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts based on the acquired information. Since the discrimination is made by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period performance in accordance with the actual game content, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect execution means includes at least a period from when the acquisition means acquires the acquired information until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information starts. A game machine U4 characterized in that the period performance is executed during a performance period.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U3, as a performance period in which the period performance is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the dynamic performance of the second identification information based on the acquired information is Since the period until the display starts can be set, it is possible to set a performance mode that corresponds to the actual gaming situation in a period that corresponds to the actual gaming situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine U1 or U2 has a specific game execution means that can execute a specific game in which the acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is met, and the period determination means is configured to perform The period from when the specific game is executed until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is determined, and the period effect execution means is configured to determine the period from when the specific game is executed until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started, and the period effect execution means is configured to determine the period after the predetermined execution condition is established. A gaming machine U5, characterized in that the period performance is executed during a performance period including a period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set a performance mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of the period performance can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution unit, dynamic display determining means capable of determining whether the first identification information is dynamically displayed; and the dynamic display determining unit. a second period determining means for determining a second period different from the period determining means when it is determined that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed; The means determines a period from when the acquired information is acquired to when dynamic display of the second identification information starts based on the acquired information in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine U6 characterized by:

According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at a timing when the period determination means can perform the determination, the second identification information is displayed at a timing different from that timing. It is possible to cause the period determination means to perform the determination. Therefore, since the period from when the predetermined start condition is met to when the dynamic display of the second identification information starts can be determined at multiple timings, it is possible to execute a period effect that matches the actual game content. This has the effect of making it easier.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period performance execution means executes, as the period performance, a first period performance executed in a predetermined first period, and a second period performance executed after the first period. A gaming machine U7 that executes at least a second period performance executed in the period performance, and wherein the performance mode setting means sets a performance mode of the second period performance.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines U1 to U6, a common first period performance can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determination means, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. This has the effect that a period effect can be executed without giving any additional time.

In the gaming machine U7, the performance mode setting means sets a part of the performance mode of the first period performance as the performance mode of the second period performance when the determination result by the period determination means is a specific determination result. A game machine U8 characterized in that it sets the following.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U7, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the performance mode of the first period performance can be set as the performance mode of the second period performance, it is possible to determine whether the first period performance is being performed for the player or whether the second period performance is being performed. It can make it difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the second period is determined to be long by the period determining means, the period effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

<Characteristic group V> (When the predetermined conditions are met, execute the general figure long opening suggestion effect)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state, and a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. A determining means that performs a determination when a determining condition is satisfied based on the fact that the ball has been hit, and a privilege granting means that can award a benefit to a player when the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a determining means for executing a determination when a determining condition is satisfied, and a dynamic displaying means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the determination based on the determining condition, effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time in which the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the performance execution means is configured to satisfy a predetermined performance condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, an effect is executed to indicate that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There were bonus games that were advantageous to players. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when a player wins in the second lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting port. There are things that make it easier. In addition, some games are configured to perform a suggestion effect to suggest the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, since the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that it will be easier to enter the game ball into the starting hole. This made it possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, a presentation mode in which the player stops firing the game ball by executing the suggestion presentation and restarts the game based on the presentation result of the suggestion presentation is a presentation mode in which there is a high possibility of winning. In this case, the game is stopped until the suggested effect is finished, and the game is restarted in accordance with the timing when the movable member moves, or when the suggested effect is in a presentation mode that is likely to be incorrect. , the game will be played until the suggestion effect ends, and from the time the game ball enters one starting hole until the winning/losing lottery (suggestion effect) based on that ball entry is executed, the game will be played to the other starting hole. For example, after a game ball enters the starting hole, the lottery result of a win/fail lottery that is performed based on the ball entering the starting hole differs depending on the situation. If it takes a long time to execute the suggestion effect to indicate the pitch, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which pitch the suggestion effect is based on, and the effect of the suggestion effect decreases. , there was a problem that the desire to play decreased. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by providing an effect that can suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined performance condition is established, it is possible to notify that a specific game will be executed by the specific game execution means in the performance executed by the performance execution means. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to satisfy the performance conditions, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, the types of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means include a first type corresponding to a first specific game that is advantageous to the player, and a second type that is disadvantageous than the first specific game. 2, the game type setting means is capable of setting a second type corresponding to a specific game, and the effect execution means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. Game machine V2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the performance execution means executes the performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the performance condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying specific identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the determination executed by the determining means. display means, and the condition determination means determines that the performance condition is satisfied when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Game machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the effect condition can be established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine V3, an information holding means capable of holding execution information indicating that the judgment has been performed by the judgment means, and determining whether the execution information held by the information holding means satisfies a validity condition. and a valid condition determining means, wherein the condition determining means determines that the performance condition is satisfied even when the valid condition determining means determines that the valid condition is satisfied. Game machine V4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be satisfied as long as the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if a game in which the specific identification information is displayed dynamically is played, but a timing occurs where the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, it is possible to cause the performance execution means to execute the performance. . Therefore, it is possible to stably perform performances for players who are actively playing the game, and there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In either the gaming machine V3 or V4, an acquisition means capable of acquiring acquired information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means; , the determining means is configured to make the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determining condition is satisfied, and the condition determining means is configured to perform the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means. executes a first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and executes a second condition determination based on the determination performed by the determination means, and the effect execution means: A gaming machine that executes the performance when it is determined that the performance condition is satisfied as a result of the first condition determination or as a result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3 or V4, the condition discriminating means can determine whether or not the performance condition is met at multiple timings, so that it can be used by players who are actively playing the game. This has the effect of making it possible to stably execute performances and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1 or V5, the performance execution means is capable of executing a timing notification performance that notifies the timing at which the variable ball entry means enters the first state as the performance. Machine V6.

According to the game machine V6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine V1 or V5, the performance executed by the performance execution means determines not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing when the variable ball entry means enters the first state. Since the player is informed, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the performance by the performance execution means is executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the performance execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-timing notification performance of notifying a timing different from a timing at which the variable ball entry means enters the first state when the performance condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V6, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the performance condition is not satisfied, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball entry means becomes the first state is notified, so a game in which only the determination condition is satisfied without establishing the performance condition is played. This has the effect of allowing players to play games that are disadvantageous to them.

A gaming machine V8, which is any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, wherein the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the production condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V7, the judgment condition is easier to satisfy than the performance condition, so the player plays the game more enthusiastically in order to satisfy the performance condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics Group W> (Information of winning a small win during time saving with a higher probability than the allocation ratio during time saving)
an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means; a determining means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in a storage means; and executing a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determining means is a first determining result; A gaming machine comprising a bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when the second determination result is different from the first determination result, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state after the end of the first privilege game or the second privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means; and the acquired information stored in the storage means. a preliminary determination means that performs preliminary determination before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and a suggestive effect for indicating that the first bonus game or the second bonus game is to be executed during the first game state. and a performance execution means that can be executed in the first game state, and the game state setting means sets the first game state to is to set a different second game state, and the effect execution means is configured to perform the above-mentioned performance execution means based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information, in which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine W1 is characterized in that it is capable of performing suggestive effects.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There were bonus games that were advantageous to players. Furthermore, there is a system that is configured to be able to execute a plurality of bonus games with different degrees of advantage, to be configured to be able to set a plurality of gaming states, and to vary the selection ratio of bonus games depending on the set gaming state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of gaming, the percentage of game states that are advantageous to the player (for example, time-saving states and variable probability states) that are set after the end of a jackpot game (the so-called continuation rate) has been reduced. (For example, 65% or less) is set to suppress the gambling nature of the game.

In such gaming machines, for example, even if a player wins a win (for example, a jackpot or a small win) while an advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state may be changed again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem in that it is difficult to create expectations for the winning notification performance during an advantageous gaming state, and the desire to play is reduced. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine W1, the first bonus game or the second bonus game that is more advantageous than the first bonus game is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination by the suggestive performance executed during the first gaming state. This suggests that. Then, since the suggestive performance can be executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set, the bonus game is performed during the first game state. This can make it easier to suggest things. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player for the suggestion performance to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W1, the performance execution means is configured to determine whether the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the obtained information in which the determination is performed after the predetermined termination condition is satisfied is a predetermined result of the second determination. A gaming machine W1 characterized in that it is easier to execute the suggestion effect when the pre-article discrimination result is obtained than when the pre-discrimination result for indicating the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the preliminary determination result corresponding to the acquired information, which is determined after the second gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the termination condition of the first gaming state, indicates the second determination result. In this case, the suggestion performance by the performance execution means is more likely to be executed than in the case where the first determination result is indicated. As a result, when a suggestive effect is executed during the first gaming state, in addition to the determination result of the discriminating means executed during the first gaming state, the discriminating means executed after the second gaming state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestion performance is executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second bonus game is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player for the suggestion performance to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W2 includes a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio at which the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result and a ratio at which the result is the second determination result, the ratio setting means , the ratio of the second determination result is set to be higher when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1, it is possible to make the second determination result more likely to occur during the second gaming state than during the first gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second bonus game is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player for the suggestion performance to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the performance execution means sets the performance period to be a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information on which the preliminary determination has been performed by the preliminary determination means is performed. A gaming machine W4 is characterized in that it is capable of executing suggestive effects.

According to W4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestive effect is executed using the period until the judgment corresponding to the obtained information determined in advance is executed as the effect period. It has the effect of increasing the

<Characteristics
an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means; A discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the obtained information stored in a storage means, and a privilege game that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. A game comprising an execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquired information, a second game state in which it is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state at least when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and stores information in the storage means. A storage number determining means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored; and a notification mode setting capable of setting a notification mode based on a determination result of the storage number determining means in a state where the first gaming state is set. and a notification execution device capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting device, and the notification mode setting device includes at least the memory at a specific timing of the first gaming state. A gaming machine X1 characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Furthermore, there is a system that is configured to be able to execute a plurality of bonus games with different degrees of advantage, to be configured to be able to set a plurality of gaming states, and to vary the selection ratio of bonus games depending on the set gaming state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in such a gaming machine, a specific starting opening is provided that makes it easier for the ball to enter when a specific gaming state is set than when other gaming states are set, and the gaming machine is inserted into the specific starting opening. When a lottery is executed based on a ball entering the ball, a bonus game with a higher degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another starting hole, and furthermore, There is a system in which a predetermined number of lottery rights, which are executed based on the entry of game balls into the starting slot, can be reserved and stored. In a gaming machine configured in this way, when a specific gaming state is set, it is possible for a player to efficiently execute a lottery that is executed based on a game ball entering a specific starting slot. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, once the end conditions of a specific gaming state are met, it becomes difficult to draw a lottery based on the game ball entering the specific starting slot. There was a problem in that players' motivation to play decreased. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine X1, the mode of notification executed by the notification execution means can be set according to the number of pieces of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period of the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game for varying the number of stored pieces of acquired information so that various types of notification operations are executed by the notification execution means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine X1, the notification execution means executes an acquisition suggestion notification suggesting that the acquisition information be acquired during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is configured to execute an acquisition suggestion notification that suggests acquiring the acquisition information during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means is configured to execute the acquisition suggestion notification that suggests acquiring the acquisition information during the first gaming state, and the notification mode setting means A gaming machine X2, wherein a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set when it is determined that the number of acquired information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed when the number of acquired information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number during a specific period in the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide games that are easy to understand for players. Further, if the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during a specific period in the first gaming state is greater than a predetermined number, for example, if the upper limit number of acquired information is stored in the storage means, acquisition is suggested. Since the system can be configured so that the notification is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the notification executed by the notification execution means.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a determination number measuring means for measuring the number of determinations performed by the determining means in a state where the first gaming state is set, and a determination result based on the measurement result by the determination number measuring means. , a transition condition determining means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification execution means is configured to perform a notification execution from the time when the transition condition determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine X3 characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specific period of time.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine X2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the player is forced to play a game to obtain the acquired information within a limited period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game until the last period in which the first gaming state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification execution means is configured to set at least a first period and a second period set after the first period. , the notification effect is executed during the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the memory number determination means at the end timing of the first period. and a second period performance execution means for executing the second period performance in the performance mode set by the period performance mode setting means. Features gaming machine X4.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X3, the performance mode of the second period performance is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification performance is executed. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine X4, the number of acquired information stored in the storage means at the time when the first period is set, and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the time the first period ends. and an increase number determining means capable of determining the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period, based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period, and the period presentation mode setting means is configured to determine the increase number. A gaming machine X5 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine By adjusting the number of acquired information stored during the first period by the player, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the second period performance by varying the number of acquired information stored during the first period. . Therefore, since different effects can be executed depending on the game content played by the player, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine X4 or X5 includes a preliminary determination means for determining the acquired information stored in the storage means before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period performance mode setting means A gaming machine X6 is characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to make the viewers more interested in the second period.

In the gaming machine If the determination result is the specific determination result, the second period effect is executed until the determination result of the determination means is notified based on the acquired information that is the specific determination result. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine The performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance executed during the second period.

In the gaming machine A game machine X8 characterized in that it is a machine for setting.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which determination resulted in a particular determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics Group Y> (Set multiple time-saving termination conditions and grant different benefits depending on the established time-saving termination conditions)
a discriminating means that performs discrimination when a predetermined discriminating condition is met; and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. , a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the determination by the determination means is easy to be performed, and a second game state in which the determination is more difficult to be performed than the first game state. In the machine, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on at least a predetermined transition condition being satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set, and A transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as conditions, and the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means being satisfied. and a benefit granting means capable of granting a predetermined benefit that is advantageous to the player based on the first transition condition. A gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second benefit different from the first benefit is provided when a transition condition is met.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There were bonus games that were advantageous to players. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when a player wins in the second lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting port. There are things that make it easier. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-13075). In addition, in the above gaming machine, when a specific gaming state is set, the fluctuation period of the second lottery is set shorter than when another gaming state is set. The second lottery is configured to be executed more often during the set period.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set during a specific gaming state is constant, there is a problem that the game during the specific gaming state becomes monotonous and the player's desire to play decreases. there were. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first gaming state in which it is easy to obtain acquisition information is set, the timing varies depending on the transition condition that is satisfied among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Benefits can be given. Therefore, even though the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the first gaming state to end without receiving any benefits, so it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from occurring for the player. This has the effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game for setting the settings, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Y1, the transition condition setting means sets a condition to be satisfied based on the number of determinations performed by the determining means reaching a predetermined number of times when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the gaming machine Y2 is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit on the number of determinations performed by the determining means during the period in which the first gaming state is set, so that the player is not subjected to excessive stress. This has the effect of suppressing the granting of benefits.

In the game machine Y1 or Y2, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the first state, and a predetermined execution. and a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period when a condition is satisfied, and the determining means is configured to cause the variable ball entry means to The determination is performed based on the entry of a game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is easier to execute than the second game state. A gaming machine Y3 characterized by being in the state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the benefit granting means grants, as the first benefit granted when the first transition condition is satisfied, a gaming state in which the specific game is easier to execute than the first gaming state. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by:

In the gaming machine Y4, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a determining condition is satisfied, and a dynamic display means dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the determination executed by the determining means. , dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the predetermined execution condition is such that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner. The dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period to be shorter when the first benefit is provided than when the first benefit is not provided. A gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that it makes it easy to set a target display period.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means determines that the determination result of the determination means executed when the first gaming state is set is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine Y6 characterized in that a condition that is satisfied based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number of times is set as the second transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state in accordance with the determination result of the determining means executed during the period in which the first gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the first gaming state continues can be made indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the first gaming state will continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AA group> (Make it difficult for players to understand the triggers until a jackpot game is executed)
a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fulfillment of a predetermined execution condition; a first determination means that executes a first determination when a first determination condition is satisfied; a second determination means that performs a second determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied; a determination means that performs a determination when the determination condition is satisfied; variable ball entry means that is variable from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball to a second state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball than in the first state; In the gaming machine, the second determination condition includes a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state for a predetermined period. can be established based on the ball being entered, and the bonus game execution means sets a first execution condition that is satisfied when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, or , the bonus game is executed based on the establishment of a second execution condition that can be established based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first execution condition. Execute a performance using the same performance mode to notify first information indicating that the determination result is the determination result or second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. and the performance execution means includes a period from when the performance is executed until the bonus game is executed based on the fulfillment of the first execution condition, and a period from when the performance is executed to the period when the bonus game is executed based on the fulfillment of the first execution condition. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized in that the performance is executed so that the period until the bonus game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the same.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a first lottery is executed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and the lottery result is a win. In some cases, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when a player wins in the second lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the starting gate, by moving the movable member, the game ball enters the starting port. There are things that make it easier. and configured to be able to execute a first suggestion performance for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the first lottery, and a second suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-115411). In such a gaming machine, by executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the player can play the game while having a sense of anticipation for both the first lottery and the second lottery. This made the game more interesting.

However, since the presentation modes of the presentations executed in the first suggestion presentation and the second suggestion presentation are different, there is a problem in that it becomes easy for the player to distinguish between the gaming situations, which reduces the player's desire to play. . In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that improves the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine AA1, no matter which execution condition is met, the period from when the performance is executed by the performance execution means until the bonus game is executed can be the same, so that the player can It is possible to make it difficult to understand which execution condition the bonus game to be executed is based on. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, the second execution condition is satisfied after the performance executing means executes a performance for notifying second information indicating that the determination result of the determining means is the specific determination result. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that it has a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance when the special performance cannot be performed.

According to the gaming machine Z2, a special performance can be executed when the bonus game cannot be executed after the performance has been executed by the performance execution means, so that it provides an easy-to-understand performance to the player. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

The gaming machines AA1 to AA2 each have a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, and a firing means that can vary the firing intensity and can cause the gaming ball to reach the gaming area, The gaming area includes at least a first gaming area in which game balls fired at one firing intensity by the firing means can flow down, and a gaming area where game balls fired at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity can flow down. a second game area different from the first game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a first ball entering means in which the first determination condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the first game area; and a specific ball entry means that satisfies the determination condition when a game ball enters the ball, and in the second game area, the variable ball entry means and the bonus game execution means execute the bonus game. is carried out, the specific variable ball entry means is arranged to be variable from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter into a second state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball. The game machine AA3 is characterized in that the performance execution means executes the performance in a performance mode including variable firing notification for firing the game ball at the predetermined firing intensity.

According to the gaming machine AA3, since the notification for varying the firing intensity is executed based on the performance executed by the performance execution means, the timing at which the firing intensity is varied can also be made the same. Therefore, there is an effect that the trigger for executing a specific game can be made more difficult to understand.

In the gaming machine AA3, a first period required for a game ball flowing down the second game area to reach the variable ball entry means, and a game ball flowing down the second game area reach the specific variable ball entry means. The gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that the second period required to reach the goal is different from that of the second period.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA3, the timing at which the ball flowing down the second gaming area enters the variable ball entry means is different from the timing at which the ball enters the specific variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to sequentially check whether the game ball flowing down the second game area enters the variable ball entry means or the specific variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the falling situation of the game ball can be more enjoyed.

Any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4 includes a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the bonus game execution means is configured to display the dynamic display means. The bonus game is executed when the identification information that is dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating the specific determination result, and the effect execution means is the dynamic displaying means. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that the performance is executed during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

<Characteristics AB group> (Establish a period to increase the number of special symbol variations that can be executed by opening the electric chew once)
A variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state, and when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied; A specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means is variable for a predetermined period of time to the first state; and a determination condition that can be satisfied based on a game ball entering the variable ball entry means. If the determination is established, a determination means capable of executing the determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed; and when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means is such that the variable input is set by the specific game. A game machine AB1 characterized in that it has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period in which a short dynamic display period shorter than the predetermined period during which the ball means is changed to the first state is likely to be set.

According to gaming machine AB1, when a specific period is set by the specific period setting means, a dynamic display period that is shorter than the period in which one specific game is executed is likely to be set. Thereby, it becomes possible to cause the determination means to perform the determination multiple times during one specific game period. This has the effect that it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a specific period will be set, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, a second determination means capable of executing a predetermined second determination and second identification information for indicating the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time. A second dynamic display means and any one of a plurality of dynamic display periods can be set as the dynamic display period of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. a second dynamic display period setting means, and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. A first gaming state in which a dynamic display period of the first period can be set by the second dynamic display period setting means, and a second period that is longer than the first period in the first gaming state. A gaming machine AB2 characterized in that it has a second gaming state in which it is easy to set, and a state setting means in which at least can be set.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AB1, there is an effect that the number of determinations made by the determining means per unit time can be increased in the first gaming state compared to the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the gaming state setting means sets, as the first gaming state, an advantageous first gaming state that can be set during a first period, and a second period that is shorter than the advantageous first gaming state. A possible unfavorable first gaming state can be set, and the execution condition is satisfied more when the advantageous first gaming state is set than when the unfavorable first gaming state is set. Gaming machine AB3 is characterized by being easy to use.

According to gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, it is easier to execute special games when the first gaming state is set for a long period of time. This has the effect of suppressing a decline in the desire of players who do not play the game.

Any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3 has transition condition determining means capable of determining whether a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means is configured to: in a state where the first gaming state is set; The second gaming state is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the execution condition is established when the transition condition determining means determines that a specific transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AB4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, when a specific transition condition is satisfied and the first gaming state ends, a special game can be executed. This has the effect that the player can be motivated to play the game until the end.

The gaming machine AB4 is characterized by having a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set. Game machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, a suggestive effect that suggests that a specific transition condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set is executed. When this is executed, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic BA group> (Resets BGM when power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of issuing a notification indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. , a gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance, and an audio output means capable of outputting a sound based on audio data for a predetermined period of time, wherein the sound output means is configured to cause the notification to be performed by the notification means. The audio is output from a starting position of the audio data during the notification period to be executed, and the audio is output from a predetermined position of the audio data when the performance is executed by the performance execution means. Features of gaming machine BA1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined variable time, if the lottery result is a win, In this case, a bonus game advantageous to the player was being executed. Furthermore, if the power is turned off during a predetermined fluctuation time, there are devices that stop subtracting the fluctuation time, display a recovery screen after the power is turned on, and restart the stopped fluctuation time subtraction (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -005505). In such gaming machines, it was possible to notify the player that the power has been turned on in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying a return screen, but the system emphasizes that the power has been restored. There is a problem in that it is not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the variable time has been restarted. In the above gaming machine, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can more easily inform players of the gaming situation when the power is restored.

According to the gaming machine BA1, even while a notification indicating that power has been supplied is being executed, the sound that is output during a period when a predetermined effect is being executed can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that power has been supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification to indicate that power has been supplied ends and the predetermined performance starts, the sound based on the audio data for a predetermined period will be output from a specific position of the audio data. Because of this configuration, it is possible to output audio with content corresponding to the performance performed after the period when the notification to indicate that power has been supplied ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, when using the above-mentioned gaming machine BA1, there is a determination means for determining whether or not a special symbol change is being executed at the time the power is turned off, and the determination result is transmitted for a predetermined period when the power is turned off. A memorizable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied and it is determined that the power has been cut off during the special figure fluctuation, the special memory is stored during the notification period to notify that the power has been supplied. It is preferable to configure the system to output BGM that is output during the figure fluctuation. Thereby, while the notification for indicating that power is supplied is being executed, it is possible to notify the player using voice that the special symbol variation is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Further, it is preferable that the period for notifying that power has been supplied is set continuously until the start-up process for various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. In addition, if the power is cut off during the special map change, or if the special map change starts during the period to notify that power has been supplied, the period to notify that power has been supplied will end. , there is a possibility that special figure fluctuations may cross the timing of the normal display screen. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special symbol variation in progress is determined, and the variation effect (effect corresponding to the remaining variation time) is set based on the determination result. It is good to configure. As a result, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests the lottery result of special symbol variation in a way that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, if the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to configure the system so that the end timing of the performance that notifies that power has been supplied is delayed by a predetermined time (1 second). . As a result, it is possible to suppress the performance corresponding to the remaining variable time only for a short period of time that is difficult for the player to identify, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a performance that is easy to understand.

<Characteristic BB group> (Background change timing varies depending on the pattern fluctuation speed when button is pressed)
a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; a benefit granting means that grants a benefit based on the identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means; an operation determining means capable of determining a performance, a performance mode changing means for varying a performance mode based on a determination result of the operation determination means, and a performance corresponding to the performance mode varied by the performance mode variable means. variable timing setting for setting the timing for varying the performance mode based on a dynamic display speed of the identification information when the predetermined operation is determined by the performance execution means and the operation determination means; A gaming machine BB1 characterized in that it has the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined variable time, if the lottery result is a win, In this case, a bonus game advantageous to the player was being executed. Furthermore, some games provide an operation means that can be operated by the player and set various effects based on the contents of the player's operation on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation performance, the performance mode can be changed depending on the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. It was possible to motivate the player to operate the game, that is, increase the player's desire to participate in the game, but when the player participates in the game (when the player operates the operation means in the operation performance) Since the number of presentation modes that can be executed is limited, it has been desired to be able to set a wider variety of presentation modes and to enhance the presentation effect.

According to the gaming machine BB, the performance mode can be varied according to the rate of change of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, so that it is possible to provide a variety of performances. In the above-mentioned gaming machine BB, the performance mode variable by the performance mode variable means may be, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the timing at which the background mode is variably set can be varied according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, in a state immediately before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the current dynamic display speed of the identification information. Thereby, when operating the operating means to change the performance mode, the player can immediately determine whether or not the performance mode will be changed. Furthermore, if the period from when the player operates the operating means to change the performance mode until the performance mode is changed is longer than a predetermined period, the player may It is best to configure it so that the comments shown in the following are displayed. Thereby, when an operation for changing the performance mode is executed, the gaming company can easily know whether or not the gaming machine accepts the operation.

Furthermore, if an interval longer than a predetermined period is provided between operating the operating means and changing the performance mode, for example, the structure is configured such that the above-mentioned predetermined period is until the timing at which the next special symbol variation is executed. That's good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the production mode in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not being executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (Switches the development effect depending on the button operation timing and number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. an operation timing determining means capable of determining the number of times the predetermined operation has been performed by the operation determining means, a determination result of the operation timing determining means, and the number of times the operation is performed. A performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance according to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. Features of gaming machine BC1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined variable time, if the lottery result is a win, In this case, a bonus game advantageous to the player was being executed. Furthermore, some games provide an operation means that can be operated by the player and set various effects based on the contents of the player's operation on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). Such gaming machines are configured to set performance modes based on the operation content or the number of operations performed on the operating means. In a game machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set a variety of performance modes depending on the operation content of the operating means, so it is possible to enhance the performance effect, but it is difficult to set a variety of performance modes. There was a need for a gaming machine that could be configured in various ways.

According to the gaming machine BC1, since the performance mode can be varied based on both the operation timing and the number of operations on the operating means, a more diverse range of performances can be set, and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

In addition, in a gaming machine having the configuration of gaming machine BC1, it is configured to be able to execute a continuous operation performance in which the performance mode is changed in response to multiple operations on the operating means, and the period during which the continuous operation performance is executed is Among them, it is preferable to configure the production mode variable timing of subsequent continuous operation production to be set according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the timing of the first operation on the operation means during the period in which the continuous operation performance is being performed, the ease with which the performance mode is varied for the second and subsequent operations on the operation means is varied. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to set various performance modes without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to set the effect mode set for the first operation of the operating means to be the same regardless of the timing of the first operation of the operating means. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the timing of the first operation on the operation means.

In addition, the performance mode executed after the continuous operation performance may be changed depending on the performance mode of the continuous operation performance that is displayed in the state where the continuous operation performance has ended. Thereby, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous operation performance. In addition, the continuous operation effect can be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect can be set based on the effect of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure change. Alternatively, the performance mode variable conditions (operation The number of times the device is operated, the method of operation, etc.) may be set.

<Characteristic BD group> (There is a state where the number of balls on hold displayed on the LCD is synchronized with the actual number of balls on hold, and a state where it is not synchronized)
an acquisition means that acquires information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a determination means that executes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means and triggered by the establishment of a discrimination condition; a storage means capable of storing information up to a first predetermined number at least until the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied; a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance a plurality of times; mode display means for displaying the display mode on the display means, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied. A first aspect of the performance is displayed on the display means as the display aspect, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect of the effect executed by the effect execution means is A gaming machine BD1 characterized in that a second mode for indicating the number of times is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. A bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, the system is configured such that a plurality of rights to execute a lottery can be stored, so that games can be played efficiently. Among gaming machines configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (reservations) for executing a lottery, some machines display a reservation symbol to show the player the stored number of reservations. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the player can easily grasp the current number of reservations, so the game content can be determined based on the number of reservations, and the game can be played efficiently. In addition, a function is provided to determine the lottery results in advance for the stored reservations before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of reservations stored is set to a specific number. In some cases, a series of effects (continuous effects) are executed using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holdings is executed. In such continuous performances, the results of preliminary determination for multiple reservations can be executed using a series of performances, so the winnings are included in the target lottery rather than performances based on the results of a single lottery. It is possible to increase the probability of playing the game and to make the players pay close attention to the performance. However, in the gaming machine described above, when a new hold is obtained during a period in which a continuous performance is being performed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbols that indicate the hold that is subject to the continuous performance. Therefore, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to determine which pending symbols are the targets of continuous performance, and the performance effect is reduced. An object of the above gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that can inform players of reserved symbols to be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the display mode indicating the number of memories displayed on the display means may display the number of memories stored in the storage means depending on the conditions that are met, or display information indicating the number of performances. Since the game can be set variably depending on the case, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the configuration of gaming machine BD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means different from the display means, which can constantly display the number of memories stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the number of memories stored in the storage means, which affects the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to provide notification based on the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Also good.

Further, the second display means may be configured to display the number of times stored in the storage means during a period in which information indicating the number of performances is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, it is preferable that the second display means is configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of performances, it may be configured to display the number of determinations stored in the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations performed during the performance period, or the number of determinations performed during the performance period may be displayed. The display may be configured to be displayed based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). Further, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol stops (including temporary stops) during the performance period may be used.

<Characteristic BE group> (Preview effects that are executed only when the background is changed)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a performance mode that changes the performance mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means. a variable means, a performance execution means for executing a performance according to the performance mode varied by the performance mode variable means, and a variable timing at which the performance mode is varied by the performance mode variable means when a specific condition is satisfied; A gaming machine BE1 characterized in that it has a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. A bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, there have been games that perform suggestive effects to make the player play the game while making him/her expect that the lottery result will be a win. In order to increase variations in the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation, there are some devices in which the mode in which the suggestion presentation is executed is variable (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-213999). Furthermore, there are some games that vary the mode (background) in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the player's operation of the operating means. In such a gaming machine, the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a variety of performances to the player by executing special suggestive performances according to the set mode. However, there was a problem in that after seeing the special effects corresponding to each mode, the player would be motivated to operate the operating means, and the player would be less motivated to change the mode. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to change modes voluntarily in the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine BE1, since it is configured so that a dedicated performance can be executed when the performance mode is changed, it is possible to experience the game even if the game is played for a long period of time during the period in which each mode is set. It becomes possible to perform performances that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, players who wish to experience various effects can be motivated to operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BF group> (There is a period in which the current mode is notified and a period in which it is not notified, and even during the period in which it is not notified, the current mode can be grasped by button operation)
a mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes; a production execution means capable of executing a production corresponding to the production mode set by the mode setting means; and a production mode set by the mode setting means. The player has a performance mode notification means that can notify the performance mode that has been performed, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The production mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine BF1 is characterized in that, when the performance mode is selected, information for indicating the production mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the game machine BF1, a period in which the performance mode is notified and a period in which it is not notified are set, and even during the period in which the performance mode is not notified, the performance mode can be notified based on the operation on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to have the player operate the operating means voluntarily in order to understand the performance mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify other information regarding the game, such as dynamic display of identification information. It is preferable that the configuration is such that suggestive information indicating the speed and the determination result of the determining means is notified. Thereby, during the second period, the player can select desired game information based on the player's operation on the operating means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Step up button vibe)
An operating means that can be operated by a player, an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, a vibrating means that can vibrate the operating means, and the vibrating means a vibration amount variable means capable of varying the amount of vibration that vibrates the operating means to a different vibration amount; and a vibration amount variable means capable of varying the amount of vibration based on a determination result of the operation determining means. The present invention is characterized by comprising a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine BG1. According to the gaming machine BG1, since a suggestion effect suggesting that the amount of vibration of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BH group> (The color of the button indicates the speed of pattern fluctuation)
a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege based on the identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means operable by a player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means; an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating, an operation production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means, The mode changing means changes the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means changes from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. A game machine BH1 is characterized in that the game machine BH1 is a game machine that is capable of varying the following. According to the gaming machine BH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic BI group> (The background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
a determining means for executing a predetermined determination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating the determination result by the determining means; If so, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display format, and if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined display format different from the specific display format. A gaming machine having a stop display means for stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific display mode, and a privilege granting means for giving a privilege based on the stop display means stopping and displaying the identification information in the specific display mode. The stop display means is capable of stopping and displaying a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and is an effect mode that changes the effect mode based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. A gaming machine BI1 characterized in that it has a variable means and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode changed by the performance mode variable means. According to the gaming machine B11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed as a predetermined identification information, the user can pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player wants to stop and display the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, it is preferable to configure the player to be able to select the stop display mode. Specifically, it may be configured such that one stop display mode can be selected from among a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operating means that the player can operate.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Preventing getting ahead of yourself when preparing for role-playing movements)
a display means for executing a predetermined effect display; a effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario; a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation; a performance operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the performance operation based on a performance scenario; and a performance scenario setting means capable of setting one performance scenario from a plurality of performance scenarios as the performance scenario, The movable means is configured to be movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position, and the movable means is movable in preparation for moving the movable means to the initial position of the performance operation. It has an executable preparation movement control means, and the preparation movement control means executes the preparation movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. The gaming machine BJ1 is characterized by the following. According to the gaming machine BJ1, by performing the preparation movement in advance, it is possible to reliably execute the performance based on the performance scenario. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that preparation movement control is performed separately from the performance action based on the performance scenario, the preparation movement can be performed regardless of whether the performance action is executed or not. Even if the movable means moves in preparation, it can be made difficult for the player to understand whether the performance operation will be executed or not.

<Characteristic BK group> (Replace the pre-read results according to the operational state of the accessory)
an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a determination means for performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine in which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the display means and the display means is capable of displaying the information, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least A storage means that can store up to a first predetermined number of information until the determination is executed, and the information stored in the storage means until dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-determining the performance, a production mode setting means capable of setting a production mode of a specific production based on the result of the preliminary discrimination by the pre-discrimination means, and the production mode set by the production mode setting means. a specific performance execution means capable of executing the specific performance corresponding to the mode at a predetermined timing, and a specific performance execution unit that is capable of executing the specific performance at a predetermined timing when a specific condition is satisfied at the timing at which the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance. and a performance mode changing means for setting a replacement performance mode different from the performance mode set by the production mode setting means as the production mode of the specific production executed by the production mode setting means. Game machine BK1. According to the game machine BK1, since the performance mode set based on the determination result of the advance determination means can be replaced with the replacement performance mode, the performance can be performed according to the situation, and the performance effect can be enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the performance mode that can be set by the performance mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move within a predetermined range is used, and the performance mode is changed by the production mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is better to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means indicates a position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the production mode changing means changes the movable means. It is preferable that a presentation mode that is never used, for example, a presentation mode using only the display means, is set as a replacement presentation mode. In addition, by providing a movable control means that moves the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea in a gaming machine that enhances the performance effect, the performance mode can be replaced. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic BL group> (The setting timing of the operation validity period during the demo is different depending on the gaming state)
a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means; A first gaming state in which a first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed; and a second gaming state in which a second period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period shorter than the first period. , and a standby mode for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied while the dynamic display execution means is not executing the dynamic display of the identification information. a state setting means, an operation means operable by the player, an operation determination means capable of determining whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation means based on the determination result of the operation determination means. The apparatus includes an operation performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period during which the operation determination means can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , the validity period setting means sets the validity period after the standby state is set more when the second period is set by the gaming state setting means than when the first period is set. A gaming machine BL1 characterized in that the start timing of the validity period is set so that the period until setting becomes longer. According to the game machine BL1, the setting timing of the operation validity period for effectively determining the operation on the operation means can be changed depending on the set gaming state, so that the operation is not performed inadvertently. can be suppressed. Further, in the case where a notification means is provided to notify the player that the operation validity period has been set, it is possible to prevent the notification means from frequently making notifications. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, the configuration may be such that the determination by the determining means is facilitated. Thereby, the second gaming state can be made more advantageous than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be ended in a short period of time.

<Characteristic BM group>
a power supply means capable of supplying power to a gaming machine; a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means; and a notification means executed by the notification means. performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the completion of the notification; and reproduction capable of reproducing predetermined audio data based on the start of supply of power by the power supply means. and a sound output means capable of outputting sound corresponding to the sound data played by the playback means, wherein the notification is set as a playback start position of the sound data played by the playback means. A gaming machine BM1 comprising a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen to inform the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). In such gaming machines, it has been required to make the gaming situation easier to understand when the power is turned on. The purpose of the above gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

According to the gaming machine BM1, the gaming machine includes a power supply means capable of supplying power to the gaming machine, and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means. , a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the completion of the notification executed by the notification means, and a predetermined performance execution means based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means. The apparatus includes a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and the reproduction means is capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. A playback start position setting means is provided for setting a playback start position according to the mode of notification by the notification means as the playback start position. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In the gaming machine BM1, the playback start position setting means sets the playback start position so that the playback position at the end of the audio data is played in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine BM2.

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BM1, there is an effect that audio can be output more suitably.

A gaming machine BM3 in the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, wherein the reproducing means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined performance ends.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined performance is finished, so that the audio can be output more suitably. The effect is that it can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3 includes an execution determination means for determining whether or not an execution condition for the predetermined performance is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. A gaming machine BM4, wherein the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the execution condition being determined by the execution determination means to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM3, the execution condition for the predetermined performance is satisfied based on the fact that the power supply means has started supplying the power. the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the execution determination means determining that the execution condition is satisfied; This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

<Characteristic BN group>
a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operating means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. and an operation determining means capable of determining, as the dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed. speed setting means capable of setting a speed; and period shortening means for shortening a first period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed at the first speed when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine BN1 characterized in that it has the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BN1, a determining means for performing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and the dynamic display. a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operating means operable by the player; and a predetermined method for the operating means an operation determining means capable of determining that an operation has been performed; a performance mode variable means for varying a performance mode based on a determination result of the operation determination means; The performance mode is varied based on a performance execution means capable of executing a corresponding performance and a dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. and variable timing setting means for setting timing. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine BN1 has a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance by the speed setting means. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that it executes different effects depending on the dynamic display speed of the identification information that is set.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN1, different performances are performed depending on the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be made to actively operate the operating means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine BN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period. A gaming machine BN3 characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means that can execute a specific performance when the second operation is performed in a state where the above is set.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN2, the player can select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, and the player's gaming can increase motivation to participate. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BO group>
an operation means that can be operated by a player; an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; an operation timing discriminator capable of discriminating an operation timing determined to have been performed, and a presentation mode during a second period set after the first period based on the discrimination result of the operation timing discriminator. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance according to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, and the performance execution means is configured to perform a performance according to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. The gaming machine BO1 is characterized in that a suggestive performance that suggests a performance mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BO1, there is an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an operation means that can determine whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means within a predetermined first period. an operation timing determining means capable of determining the operation timing at which the predetermined operation was determined by the determining means; and a second period set after the first period based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means. It has a production mode setting means for setting a production mode during the period, and a production execution means capable of executing a production according to the production mode set by the production mode setting means, and the production execution means A suggestive performance that suggests the performance mode during the second period set by the performance mode setting means is executed during the first period. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine BO1 includes a measuring means for measuring the number of times it has been determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the performance mode setting means is configured to measure the number of times it has been determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period. The gaming machine BO2 is characterized in that a performance mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing at which the number of times is a certain number.

According to the gaming machine BO2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BO1, different effects are executed depending on the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be made to actively operate the operating means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine BO2, the performance execution means executes the performance during the second period set by the performance mode setting means when the number of determinations measured by the measurement means is a predetermined number of times that is smaller than the specific number of times. A game machine BO3 is characterized in that it executes a unified performance that does not suggest a performance mode.

According to the gaming machine BO3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BO2, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the performance mode set in the second period early. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BP group>
an acquisition means that acquires information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a determination means that performs a determination upon establishment of a determination condition based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; and a determination result of the determination means that is specified. a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means, a specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance to indicate the determination result of the determination means, and the acquisition means a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the method up to a first predetermined number at least until the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied; a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode; and a display means thereof. As the display mode to be displayed, a specific display mode is displayed based on the fact that the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means has reached a second predetermined number that is less than or equal to the first predetermined number. a third predetermined number, which is less than or equal to the second predetermined number, of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode was displayed by the display control means; A game BP1 characterized in that the game BP1 further comprises: a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least that the information has been used for the discrimination by the discrimination means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BP1, an acquisition means that acquires information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a determination means that executes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means and triggered by the establishment of a determination condition; A bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, and a specific performance that executes a specific performance to show the determination result of the determination means. an execution means, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number at least until the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied, and a storage means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode. A display means and a display mode to be displayed on the display means are specified based on the fact that the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means has reached a second predetermined number that is less than or equal to the first predetermined number. display control means capable of displaying the display mode; and the second predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the display control means displayed the specific display mode. The display apparatus further includes a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least the following third predetermined number of the information being used for the discrimination by the discrimination means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine BP1 is provided with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a number suggestion mode indicating the remaining number of discriminations of the discrimination means to be executed until the end of the specific display mode. Gaming machine BP2 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BP2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BP1, a number-of-times suggestion mode is provided to the display means to suggest the remaining number of determinations by the determination means to be executed until the end of the specific display mode. Since the second display control means for displaying the information is provided, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, an information number suggestion mode that suggests the number of information stored in the storage means is in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number of times suggestion mode. A gaming machine BP3 characterized in that it is equipped with a third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BP2, an information number suggestion mode that suggests the number of information stored in the storage means when the specific display mode is not displayed is provided. Since the present invention is provided with a third display control means for displaying the display in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the number-of-times suggestion mode, there is an effect that the meaning of the number-of-times suggestion mode can be easily understood by the player.

In the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, when the new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed, the second display control means executes a predetermined specific condition when the new information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine BP4 is characterized in that, if the above-mentioned number of times suggestion mode holds true, the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion mode is increased.

According to the gaming machine BP4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means stores new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. In this case, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion mode is increased, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BQ group>
A bonus game that includes a determining means that executes a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a bonus game that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being a predetermined specific determination result. an execution means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means; A gaming machine BQ1 characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestion performance execution means for executing a suggestion performance capable of suggesting a type.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BQ1, there is a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discriminating result, a discriminating means that is advantageous to the player is provided. a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game; a specific performance execution unit that executes a specific performance for indicating the determination result of the determination unit; and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect based on the specific effect. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BQ1, the types of specific performances executed by the specific performance execution means include a first specific performance in which a first performance mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific performance; determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second specific performance in which a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the production; A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect based on the establishment of the specific condition before the specific period elapses. BQ2.

According to the gaming machine BQ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BQ1, as the type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means, the first performance mode is set after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific performance. A plurality of at least at least a first specific performance to be performed and a second specific performance in which a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific performance. type determining means for determining one type from among the types, and the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect based on the specific condition being satisfied before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine BQ3, which is the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2, is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is established based on an operation performed on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BQ1 or BQ2, it is provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on the operation on the operating means. , a player who desires to execute a suggestive performance can be made to actively operate an operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a performance mode according to the player's preference.

<Characteristic BR group>
a mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of production modes; a production execution means capable of executing a production corresponding to the production mode set by the mode setting means; and a production mode set by the mode setting means. a production mode notifying means capable of notifying the production mode that has been set; and a suppression period during which notification of the production mode by the production mode notifying means is suppressed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition. It comprises a suppression period setting means, and a notification control means for causing the production mode notification means to notify the production mode based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. Gaming machine BR1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BR1, a mode setting means that can set any one of a plurality of performance modes, and a performance execution means that can execute a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means. , production mode notification means capable of notifying the production mode set by the mode setting means; and based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition, notification of the production mode by the production mode notification means is suppressed. a suppression period setting means for setting a suppression period during which the suppression period is to be suppressed; and notification control for causing the production mode notification means to notify the production mode based on a predetermined second condition being satisfied during the suppression period. means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BR1, a first operation on the operation means is detected during a specific period included in the performance period as a type of performance executed by the operation means operable by the player and the performance execution means. performance type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific performance in which a predetermined performance mode is executed based on the suppression period setting means, , the suppression period is set, and the presentation mode notification means notifies the presentation mode based on the detection of the first operation on the operation device during a period different from the suppression period. The game machine BR2 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine BR2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type of performance executed by the performance execution means include the following during a specific period included in the performance period. performance type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific performance in which a predetermined performance mode is executed based on detection of a first operation on the operating means; The period setting means sets the suppression period at least during the specific period, and the production mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The production mode is notified based on what has been done. This has the effect of improving convenience for players.

In gaming machine BQ2, gaming machine BQ3 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine BQ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operating means. This has the effect of further improving convenience for players.

<Characteristic BS group>
an operating means that can be operated by a player; a specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance in which a valid period for treating operations on the operating means as valid is set during one performance period; A specific control execution unit that executes a specific control based on the operation performed on the operation unit, and types of specific control executed by the specific control execution unit, a first control and a second control. and control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least the following, and a control type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the following: , a plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is more likely to be executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the specific number of operations is performed than the first type. A gaming machine BS1 characterized in that it is equipped with a specific performance type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are games in which advantageous bonus games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In such gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BS1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance in which a validity period is set during which operations on the operation means are considered valid during one performance period; A specific control execution means that executes a specific control based on an operation performed on the operation means during the validity period, and a first type of specific control executed by the specific control execution means. control type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control; and a control type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control; and a control type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second control; a first type in which the first control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed; and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the specific number of operations is performed than the first type. , specific performance type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least . This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BS1, the specific performance is such that a correspondence relationship between the number of operations on the operating means during the validity period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determining means is determined in advance for each type of the specific performance. A game machine BS2 characterized in that it is a game machine BS2.

According to the gaming machine BS2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BS1, the specific performance is a correspondence between the number of operations on the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determining means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of specific performance, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for causing the operating means to vibrate at a first vibration intensity, and the second control is for causing the operating means to vibrate at a vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity. A game machine BS3 characterized in that it is controlled to vibrate at a second vibration intensity.

According to the gaming machine BS3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means at a first vibration intensity, and the second control is a control for vibrating the operating means at a first vibration intensity. Since the control is to vibrate the means at a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, the type of specific performance can be easily understood by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines BS1 to BS3, the specific performance is based on the correspondence between the number of operations on the operating means during the validity period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determining means. The gaming machine BS4 is characterized in that it is predetermined for each type.

According to the gaming machine BS4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of BS1 to BS3, the specific control is executed for the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the display means during the execution period of one specific effect. Display control means for displaying a history of control executed by the means. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the type of specific performance that has been executed, which has the effect of improving convenience for the player.

<Characteristic BT group>
An operating means that can be operated by a player, an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and a predetermined operation performance can be executed based on the determination result of the operation determining means. an operation performance execution means, an operation performance setting means for setting one of the plurality of operation performances as the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means; a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation mode, the mode variable section changing the mode of the operating means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. A gaming machine BT1 characterized by the following.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, There are bonus games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BT1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. and an operation performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation performance, and an operation performance that sets one of the plurality of operation performances as the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means. It has a setting means, and a mode changing means that can change the mode of the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the mode of the operating means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. This is subject to change in the manner indicated. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine BT1 is characterized in that it has a light-emitting means for emitting light in an area of the operating means that is visible to the player, and the mode changing means changes the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means. BT2.

According to gaming machine BT2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BT1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game machine has a light emitting means that causes an area of the operating means that is visible to the player to emit light, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. This has the effect that the current situation can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who is attempting to operate the operating means.

In the gaming machine BT1 or BT2, a determining means for performing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means to indicate a determination result by the determining means, and the dynamic display. a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; A gaming machine BT3 is characterized in that different operation effects can be set during a displayed period.

According to gaming machine BT3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BT1 or BT2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a discriminating means executes a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means dynamically displays identification information for a predetermined period of time on a display means, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the displayed identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the operation effect setting means is configured to provide a benefit during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects.

As a result, different operation effects are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BU group>
A display means that can display identification information, a determining means that performs a predetermined determination, and a privilege that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result. a game execution means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and a type of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means; A first dynamic display type in which a first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of display, and a second aspect different from the first aspect is displayed after the specific period has elapsed. a second dynamic display type, and mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type; a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect, and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first mode is displayed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means; , a second specific performance that can suggest that the second mode is displayed, and specific performance type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least the following: .

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, There are bonus games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BU1, there is a display means capable of displaying identification information, a determination means that performs a predetermined determination, and a determination result advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the determination result of the determination means; and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. As the types, a first dynamic display type in which a first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display, and a first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after the specific period has elapsed. a second dynamic display type in which a different second aspect is displayed; aspect selection means for selecting one aspect from among a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type; Suggesting that the first aspect is displayed as a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses, and the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. A specific performance type determining means is provided for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a possible first specific performance and a second specific performance capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BU1, the specific performance execution means is configured to be able to display a failure performance mode indicating a failure determination result different from the specific determination result multiple times during an execution period of one specific performance. The first specific effect is one in which a combination of the missed effect modes displayed during the execution period of one of the specific effects is a first combination, and the second specific effect is The gaming machine BU2 is characterized in that the combination of the losing performance modes displayed during the execution period of one of the specific performances is a second combination different from the first combination.

According to the gaming machine BU2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BU1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific performance execution means is configured to be able to display a failure performance mode indicating a failure determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of one specific performance. The first specific production is such that a combination of the missed production modes displayed during the execution period of one specific production is a first combination, and the second specific production is a The combination of the losing performance modes displayed during the execution period of the specific performance is a second combination different from the first combination. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BV group>
In a gaming machine having a performance control means capable of performing performance control for executing a predetermined performance, the performance control means includes a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the performance, and a performance mode setting means for the performance mode setting means. and an output means capable of outputting performance information indicating the performance mode set by the output means, and based on the performance information outputted by the output means, a predetermined first A first performance control means for causing a performance operation to be executed, and a second performance means different from the first performance means to perform a predetermined second performance operation based on the performance information outputted by the output means. a second performance control means, wherein the first performance control means is a specific information output means capable of outputting specific information included in the performance information outputted by the output means to the second performance control means. A gaming machine BV1 characterized in that it has the following.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, There are bonus games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BV1, in the gaming machine having a performance control means capable of executing performance control for executing a predetermined performance, the performance control means includes a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of the performance. and an output means capable of outputting performance information indicating the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, and based on the performance information outputted by the output means, the first performance means a first performance control means for causing a predetermined first performance operation to be executed for a second performance means, which is different from the first performance means, based on the performance information outputted by the output means; a second performance control means for executing a second performance operation, the first performance control means transmitting specific information included in the performance information outputted by the output means to the second performance control means. It has specific information output means that can output it. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BV1, the production mode setting means is capable of setting a duplicate production mode using at least the first production operation and the second production operation, and the output means indicates the duplicate production mode. The performance information is output to the first performance control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second performance operation among the overlapping performance modes to the second performance control means as the specific information. Game machine BV2 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine BV2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BV1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance mode setting means is capable of setting an overlapping performance mode using at least the first performance operation and the second performance operation, and the output means is configured to output the performance information indicating the overlapping performance mode. to the first performance control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second performance operation among the overlapping performance modes to the second performance control means as the specific information. . This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine BV2 is characterized in that the performance mode setting means sets the overlapping performance mode so that the start timing of the first performance operation is earlier than the start timing of the second performance operation. Game machine BV3.

According to the gaming machine BV3, the performance mode setting means sets the overlapping performance mode so that the start timing of the first performance operation is earlier than the start timing of the second performance operation. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BW group>
A performance period setting means capable of setting a predetermined performance period, and when the first performance condition is established while the first performance period is being set by the performance period setting means, the performance period is set from at least the first position. a first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance using a performance member movable to a second position different from the first position; a gaming machine comprising: second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance using a display means when a second performance condition different from the performance condition is satisfied; a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance using the performance member and the display means during a specific performance period within the performance period; a movable status determining unit that determines a movable status of the performance member; It is characterized by having a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance different from the specific performance during the specific performance period when the determination result of the movable status determination means is a specific determination result. Game machine BW1.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, There are bonus games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BW1, when the first performance condition is established while the first performance period is being set by the performance period setting means that can set a predetermined performance period, A first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance using a performance member movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position, and a first performance period are set. and a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using a display means when a second effect condition different from the first effect condition is satisfied during the performance. In the gaming machine, in a specific performance period within the first performance period, a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance using the performance member and the display means, and a movable status of the performance member are determined. It has a movable status determining means, and a special performance executing means capable of executing a special performance different from the specific performance during the specific performance period when the determination result of the movable status determining unit is a specific determination result. It is something. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine BW2 in the gaming machine BW1, wherein the movable status determining means determines the specific determination result when the presentation member is not located at the first position.

According to the gaming machine BW2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BW1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movable state determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained when the presentation member is not located at the first position. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine BW3 characterized in that in the gaming machine BW1 or BW2, the special performance execution means executes the special performance using the display means.

According to the gaming machine BW3, the special effect execution means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Any of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and the first The performance condition is established when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine BW4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and the first performance condition is determined by the operation determining means. This is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine BW4 includes: a validity period setting means capable of setting an operation validity period during which the operation determination means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; and the validity period setting means. and a period display means for displaying on the display means that the operation validity period has been set.

According to the gaming machine BW5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BW4, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and the first performance condition is determined by the operation determining means. This is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine BW4 includes: a validity period setting means capable of setting an operation validity period during which the operation determination means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; and the validity period setting means. and a period display means for displaying on the display means that the operation validity period has been set. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature BX group>
a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period on a display means for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means; A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period can be set as a dynamic display period shorter than the first period. , a standby state setting means that sets the standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined setting for the operating means. operation determination means capable of determining that the operation has been performed; and operation performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and the operation determination means When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and based on the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the A gaming machine BX1 characterized in that it has a standby condition variable setting means that can variably set a standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, There are bonus games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine BX1, a determining means executes a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means dynamically displays identification information for a predetermined period on a display means to show the result of the determination by the determining means, and the dynamic display execution means performs a predetermined determination. A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the digital display execution means, and a second period that is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period. a possible second gaming state; a gaming state setting means that sets the waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied; an operating means that can be operated by the player; It has an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an operation performance execution means that can execute a predetermined performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means, The operation determination means is for effectively determining that the predetermined operation has been performed when the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, and is set by the gaming state setting means. The game apparatus includes standby condition variable setting means that can variably set the standby condition based on the gaming state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting The means variably sets the standby condition so that the standby condition is more difficult to satisfy when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. Game machine BX2 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BX2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BX1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the standby condition is established when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting means is configured to: The standby condition is variably set so that the standby condition is more difficult to satisfy when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine BX3 in the gaming machine BX1 or BX2, wherein the second gaming state is more easily determined by the determining means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BX3, the second gaming state is more easily determined by the determining means than the first gaming state. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Point for setting the player's pushing direction from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means that is pressed and operated by a player, the operating device has two states: a first state in a normal state, and a second state in which the operating means is placed in a position where the operating means is more protruding from the player than in the first state. 2 states, and includes an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the near side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being oriented toward the side.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the effect is performed in a manner that increases the expectation of a jackpot for the player at the advance position, it becomes easier for the player to operate the operating means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operation means to be highly strong. In this case, there are problems in that the operating means becomes heavier as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes larger.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when a push operation is performed in the second state, the push direction of the operating means is from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player can easily perform vertical linear motion. By creating a slippage between the player's hand and the operating means that cannot be fully operated, the force of the push can be released.

Also, considering the player's playing posture, if the player presses the operating means mainly with his shoulder or elbow,
Since it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the force that the player applies to the operating means can be naturally weakened.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft located at a back side relative to the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the shaft, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is arranged in a rotary manner, and the operating means is arranged to face the direction opposite to the player in the second state. It is possible to prevent the person from performing an operation of slamming the operating means.

In addition, by placing your hand near the shaft and tilting your hand using that position as a fulcrum, you can easily push the operating means, so you can provide a new method of push-in operation that is less prone to acceleration. , it is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

The new push-in operation method is, for example, by placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operating means with the palm facing up and down, and then pointing the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating the device by tilting it down, and a method of operating the device by placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft with the palm of the hand facing the operating device, then dropping the palm toward the operating device. be done.

A gaming machine A3, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, characterized in that in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is an up-down direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the second state is maintained while ensuring operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent damage caused by a pushing operation in such a state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is capable of automatic operation, and includes a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is generated when the player performs a push operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine acts in a direction in which the game occurs, but does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is generated in the direction opposite to the player's operating direction. can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operations.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when retracting the button.

The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, and the drive means operates the operation device through the eccentric portion. It has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means can change the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state, In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operation means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintaining means is in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to cancel the maintained state is rotated. By using the biasing means, the movement width of the operating device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operating modes by the urging means.

In gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , A gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force was caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since the operating means can be added with a movement mode in which it moves by following the maintenance means, the types of movement modes of the operating means can be increased. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and emits light toward the player, and the second state is better than the first state. However, from a player's viewpoint, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the light emitting means emits more light from the player's viewpoint in the second state than in the first state. The irradiation range of the light is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the light, improving the performance effect, and making it difficult to press the operating means without aiming. By adopting this aspect, it is possible to reduce the force required by the player during operation.

In gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes. Features gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves towards and away from the display means, thereby creating a light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The key point is to keep the repulsion force small during normal times while being able to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the operating device has a first state and a second state in which the range of movement for the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state.
and a first driving means that generates a driving force to move from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means that generates a biasing force to move from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a second driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation by a player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the force to return the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by the drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means will be delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means will not be able to follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated hitting operations. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the biasing force weakly, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operating means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, allowing the player to enjoy the repeated hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous stroke determination means for determining whether or not a continuous stroke operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is activated based on the detection value of the continuous stroke determination means. A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive the game machine.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive means based on the detection value of the repeated hit determination means, so that the player is not performing a repeated hitting operation (for example, a single press operation or a long press). The second driving means operates even when the player is performing an operation, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

The gaming machine B2 includes an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is placed at the end position, and an end detecting means for detecting whether the operating means is placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A moving direction determining means, comprising a positional difference detecting means for detecting a positional difference, and a moving direction determining means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detected value of the terminal end detecting means and the detected value of the positional difference detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of pushing back to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing when the player moves in the away direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being applied to the player's hand.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively utilized to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Any one of gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame that supports the operating means, and the second drive means includes a drive motor that rotates the eccentric weight, and the drive motor is elastically supported by the support frame. and a supporting means, the supporting means having a driving force that increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the terminal position. A gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts the support frame when the operating means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating the drive force separately from the drive force, it is possible to adjust the drive force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. Game machine B6 is characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is utilized. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means supporting the drive motor is moved in a direction away from the support frame (in a direction toward the operating means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration production device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near a terminal position of the operating means, the detection sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means a threshold value determination means for determining whether a measured value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, the threshold value determination means The driving force generated by the repulsive means increases when the measured threshold is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold than when the threshold determined by the threshold determining means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold. Characteristic game machine C1.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on the ability of the player to operate the device lightly, the operating resistance will be low and there is a risk that the operating device will be damaged by the player's operation, while if it is supported firmly, the movement of the operating device itself will be reduced. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility of damage to the operating means, there is a problem in that the force required for operation by the player increases, making operating the operating means a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is less than the threshold value can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repelling means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

A gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, wherein after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. While suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact between the voice coil motor and the voice coil motor, the degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means using spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation using spring elasticity, so even when the operating speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is generated without time delay. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means determines that when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value, the value measured by the threshold value determination means is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that a movable region of an end of the repulsion means opposite to the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means that is opposite to the side that contacts the operating means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Damage to the drive means is prevented by cutting off the transmission of driving force with the clutch>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, and the release means is configured to release the driving force when a load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured in such a way that an operating means that can be operated by a player moves forward and backward between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
(See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being placed on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected) and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and while driving in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether it is being driven in the second direction.

Here, if it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by a player when driving the driving means in an operating direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance when operating the operating means to create a performance is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction, or the locking member that locks the button is moved in the releasing direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement of the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

An example of a method for releasing the transmission is to move the clutch in a direction that intersects the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. and engagement teeth that transmit driving force when they are in mesh with each other. A game machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that tapers with respect to the abutment surface in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force on the pressed contact surface in the engaged state. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engagement teeth that taper in a manner that tapers away from the contact surface, the engagement between the engagement teeth causes the transmission means to be separated from the drive means. They can be separated from each other, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the biasing force is applied in the operating direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not completely disappear by separation, but is periodically restored. Thereby, when the player releases his/her hand, the button can begin to operate within a short period of time.

In other words, when the button is activated "as an effect", if the player is holding the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. If the player releases his/her hand in the middle, if the button moves from the end of that one phase, the period during which the button is stopped will be longer.
This eliminates the feeling that the player's burden has been lifted and they are ready to move on.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to create the feeling that the player's load has been lifted and the player has started to move.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is
A game machine D4 characterized in that it is formed of sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the distal end of the engagement surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on that plane, and the transmitting means of the releasing means It is possible to suppress movement in the direction toward and away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means is different depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, a plurality of operating modes of the operating means are provided, and the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is as follows. Similarly, gaming machine D6 is characterized in that its operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is the same. Since the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the level of jackpot expectation, the player can be told how to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be watched over.

In addition, this difference in operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the driving means, so if the operating direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation level etc. without having to watch the operation of the operating means. I can do it. However, the driving means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., so it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction of the driving means in advance. can be made to monitor the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, a first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; , a biasing device that biases the operating device in a direction from the first position toward the second position, and an operating device that moves from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing device. terminating means for changeably forming a movement end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; a release load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the operating means, the release load means releasing the engagement, and the termination means at the end of the movement of the operating means; A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixation is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the operation means. There is a gaming machine in which the amount of displacement of the extending operation can be changed by a terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the amount of displacement of the extending operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when the lock is released, so the phase of the cam when the lock is released is varied. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation were operated by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. Thereby, the terminating means can serve both as a driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means and as a driving means for moving the release load means, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the position of the release load means can be caused to change based on the operation of the transmission means, so by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means, the release load means can be changed by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a method for switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there are two methods: a method of shifting the rotation period of the cam and the protrusion; , a method of de-synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion in other phases, etc.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the load release means is configured to:
A gaming machine E3, which is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means, and whether or not the load release means and the transmission means operate synchronously is switched by the operation of the load release means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronous operation of the load release means and the transmission means is performed, the synchronous state of the load release means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any members.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotational axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is provided with a rotating second rotating member. A game machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but the rotation periods are different, so that the second rotating member is operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means at a phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation means is maintained at the first position, the action of the first means is released, and the operation means moves toward the second position. ,
You can expand the scope of your performance. For example, it is possible to realize an effect in which the end position is gradually moved away from the first position or an effect in which the end position is gradually brought closer to the first position using the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position and a second position which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. In the gaming machine, the operating means is arranged at the first position, and the gaming machine includes a vibrating means having a vibrating part that vibrates, and a receiving means arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the vibrating part. When the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, whereas when the operating means is placed in the second position, the vibrating section is in a state where it can come into contact with the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is in a contact state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
(Refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, if the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, then the vibration is transmitted immediately after the player operates the operating means.
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means. In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases his or her hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player and placed in the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating section is made to vibrate continuously, the player can only feel the vibration when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating part is generated before the player presses the button, the vibrating part can be vibrated even before the player releases his/her hand, regardless of the manner of the player's operation. vibrations can be transmitted to people.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is disposed in the separated state so as to overhang an area occupied by the operating means when it is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means changes to the abutting state by being moved out of the occupied area.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed,
The intensity of the transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration in response to the player's operation intensity can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same way without any particular change in the driving mode.

A gaming machine F3, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, positioning with respect to the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, thereby preventing the transmission of vibrations, and also suppressing the displacement that occurs in the vibrating means during vibration.

A gaming machine F4 in the gaming machine F3, wherein in the contact state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means come into contact. That is, by expanding and contracting the support means, momentum can be gained when the vibrating section moves in a direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A game machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, it is possible to finely set the direction in which the supporting means deforms when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating section and the receiving means can be made different. .

In addition, methods for varying the deformation resistance include a method in which rubber legs are extended along the operating direction of the operating means when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, and a method in which the supporting means surrounds the vibrating means. In the case of a rubber member, the rubber member is manufactured by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance in each direction, and the supporting means is a rail that guides the operating means to move along the operating direction. , a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

A gaming machine F6 in the gaming machine F3, wherein the portion that the vibrating section comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, vibrations are not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but through a receiving means that is a separate means from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore it is possible to suppress a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Furthermore, since vibrations can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation due to being surprised by the vibrations during the operation.

The receiving means may be, for example, the part of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the game balls are supplied, or the edge of the glass frame, etc. Examples include parts that may be touched by hands, and housing parts that partially enclose operating means.

<One-touch installation between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the attachment part>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; It is characterized by comprising: a driving means that generates a driving force for driving; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the transmission means includes a deformation part that elastically deforms due to overload. Game machine G1.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There are gaming machines equipped with (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player and the driving means generates a driving force to drive the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There is a problem in that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and there is a risk that these connecting portions will be damaged.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, and the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the driving means and the transmission means, etc. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting part.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a rotatably supported cam member, the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member to the rotation shaft, and the elasticity of the deformation portion allows the transmission device to rotate to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of .

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion serves as a portion that elastically deforms the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and as a portion that generates a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
Equipped with. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified due to the dual use of the functions. For example, separate fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a protruding portion that is protruded parallel to the rotation axis, the protruding portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and there is a possibility that the number of members will increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is such that the rotating shaft is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is attached to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is higher than that of the rotational shaft in comparison with a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational shaft and the convex portion. A game machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which the rotation is made about a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotating shaft. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformable part different for each direction, the state after the deformable part is elastically deformed is better when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. This allows the protruding part of the cam member to be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is intended to move, thereby alleviating the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable part. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion, A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformable portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Since they come into contact with each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A game machine G6, which is any one of the game machines G3 to G5, and further includes a detection means for detecting that at least a portion of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating even though the driving means is in operation, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the two, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the interval between the detection means for detecting the displacement becomes smaller, but the smaller the interval between the detection means, the more complicated and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether at least a part of the cam member is tilted relative to the shaft. In this way, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a portion of the cam member, without requiring the drive means to be driven for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Ball with thread anti-rattle structure. Game machine H>
In a gaming machine equipped with a foul ball passageway through which foul balls flowing back toward the firing device among the game balls fired into the gaming area can pass, the foul ball passageway not only allows passing of the falling game balls, but also allows the foul balls to pass through. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is equipped with a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutting blade is installed inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the firing device, and the game ball connected with the thread is driven into the gaming area. There are game machines that have a function to prevent (cut the thread)
(See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the thread is fired, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth, and the tension generated at that time cuts the thread. However, if the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball may not cut the thread completely. The ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, by preparing a fraudulent tool with game balls connected to both ends of a string and firing one game ball connected to one end of the string at a low firing intensity, it will flow into the foul ball path and be returned to the player. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the playing area while grasping the one game ball that has been played, the string can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball path to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball and the other game ball are connected by a thread, an external load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the gaming area is connected to the other game ball. There was a problem that there was a risk that the government could manipulate the government and obtain fraudulent profits.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball path, the one-way obstruction means However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backward direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein the foul ball passage includes a bending part that bends a falling path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can rub against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending section is provided with a loading means on the inner corner side of the bend, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down, but applies a load to the object flowing backward.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the load means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. This can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5, which is the gaming machine H3 or H4, further comprising a regulating means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball path.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the outward movement of the foul ball path of the loading means, so that the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball path is prevented. When a load is applied, the load applied to the member on the thread can be prevented from weakening due to the load means being deformed outward of the foul ball path.

Any of the gaming machines H1 to H5 is equipped with a receiving tray, which is a tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door, and a payout, which is a part that discharges game balls paid out from a payout device, to the receiving tray. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge section is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. If a fraudulent act is carried out in which the thread guided into the gaming area is used to apply a load to the other game ball, the player intentionally hits the game ball that is being paid out, applies a load, and reduces the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball ejection part, which is the part that ejects the game balls paid out from the pay-out device, is placed in the receiving tray, which is the tray where foul balls first arrive at the front side of the front door. , a gaming machine H7 characterized in that the foul ball passage is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act was carried out in which the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball path was used to apply a load to the other gaming ball. In this case, the threads can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of holding the board surface. Game machine I>
It comprises a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to accept the gaming means from the one side. The state changing means is capable of changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, the state changing means changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it comprises an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the one side.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the game board can rotate in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine that is equipped with a fixing means to do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the game board is pushed into the operating position, so if the game board is not pushed in halfway, it is necessary to push it in again. There is a problem in that it becomes necessary to perform this repetitive work, which may reduce work efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the proximity means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is brought into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is only half-hearted, by the proximity means coming into contact with the game board and applying a pushing force,
This has the effect that the game board can be pushed into the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side in response to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, since the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, it is difficult to remove the gaming means. This has the effect of improving work efficiency.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means in response to setting the gaming means in an unusable state. Game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means retreats to the outside of the gaming means, it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and it is possible to Since this is carried out in conjunction with making the means unusable, work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 is provided with abutting means that receives a load from the gaming device when the state changing means changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so the operation of pressing the gaming means against the state changing means changes the state to the usable state as a series of steps. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means when the other side is approached, and the state changing means is A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means,
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the game means.

Any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5 is provided with a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the closing means is such that the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is provided with a closing regulating part that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means changes the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains in an unusable state.

<An inverted cup and harness band prevents piano wire from getting rattled. Game machine J＞
It is equipped with a gaming means used during a game, and a receiving means that is open on one side opposite to the gaming means and capable of receiving the gaming means from the one side, and the receiving means is configured to be connected to the gaming means. A gaming machine J1 comprising a placement means disposed on a path communicating with the outside, the placement means being configured to be able to suppress entry of objects from the outside at a plurality of locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention part to prevent fraudulent activities such as inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-
(See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the fraud prevention section is located only at one location, and the effectiveness of fraud prevention is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path where there is a possibility that the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at multiple locations, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effectiveness of

In gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a first location, and a second means for suppressing entry of a member from the outside at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing the entry of members from the outside using a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means has a different method for suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Compared to the case where the number of members is increased, entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

Note that the method of suppressing intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used to prevent entry by blocking a route, or a method may be used to prevent fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

A gaming machine J3 in the gaming machine J1 or J2, wherein the arrangement means includes an intrusion regulating part formed in the shape of a cup that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, thereby making it possible to prevent the intruding member from further invading.

In the gaming machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry restriction part in the path from the outside to the gaming means. Features of gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, when an unauthorized person penetrates the access control part due to high heat, it is possible to detect changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (such as disconnection due to heat), thereby preventing external damage. The effect of suppressing the entry of members can be easily produced.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means removes the member that has entered from the outside.
A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is provided with a dissolving means that guides the player to a dissolving area that is far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means guides the member entering from the outside to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree of damage increases, it is possible to prevent members entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Structure of a 5-layer decorative board. It also involves fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means that are arranged opposite to each other along a first direction and connected at least one side; and a first means and a second means arranged along the first direction between the first means and the second means. A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by the following.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means are arranged opposite to each other and connected by at least one side, and the first means and the second means are disposed along the first direction between the first means and the second means. There is a gaming machine that includes a third means (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by existing methods such as adhesion or screw fixing, but when the first means and second means are connected, the load along the first direction is There is a problem in that the third means may be damaged because it is applied to three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set in the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the third means is set in the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a connected means that is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in an adjacent third direction and connected by fitting into each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means that are connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to disassembly of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside in the gaming machine K3.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since one side of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed to the outside, it is easy to check the state of the mating parts. be able to.
As a result, even if a fraudulent act occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the fraudulent act can be discovered more quickly.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same direction as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fastening The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

In any of gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means, and one of the first means or the second means. A gaming machine K6, characterized in that it is provided with a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from being misaligned.

The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with abutting means that makes surface contact with the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means in a region where they face each other.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, a distance equal to the dimension of the abutting means can be maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means. I can do it.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by a load in the opposite direction. I can do it.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction when an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L of utilizing the curved light guiding means. As for points, not achieved>
comprising a light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed from the irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projection means disposed opposite to the light guiding means and onto which the light passing through the light guiding means is projected; A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed opposite to the concave surface portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed facing the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a light guide plate that uniformly emits light entering from an end face (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, so in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitted light, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the projection target means has the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion. With the department,
The light emission intensity of the projection target means can be changed.

In the game machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is more difficult to transmit light than the concave facing portion. A gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light that passes through the convex opposing part, the light emitted from the light guiding means is focused on the concave opposing part. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light production.

The gaming machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is disposed on the opposite side of the projection means with the light-guiding means in between and projects the light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion facing the convex surface of the light guiding means are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means Since they are made of materials with substantially the same transparency, by allowing the same light to enter the light guiding means, it is possible to produce a light effect that is visually recognized through the projection means and a light effect that is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. can be made different.

<Bass reflex speaker arrangement structure. Game machine M>
a first means and a second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to each other and forming an internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means arranged so as to enter at least a part of the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: a bending means that forms a bending path in an internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of the front frame, and performances are performed using sounds output from the speakers (for example, JP 2016-1
(See Publication No. 6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration waves traveling toward the back side of the speaker body are made to travel to the left and right center position of the gaming machine, and then are sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
Although it is easy to create an effect that allows the player to hear bass sounds, there is a problem in that the path length of the vibration wave is determined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the playing machine By canceling the left and right width restrictions, the vibration waves can travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape extending from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, comprising a protruding portion that protrudes from the top, and a tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means By bringing these into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening that connects the interior space to the outside, and the opening is a passage member that is passed between the interior space and the exterior through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, and, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

A gaming machine M4 in the gaming machine M3, wherein the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protrusion and disconnected. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, there is a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means arranged below the support fastening means and performing a performance accompanying the game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the presentation means supports the support and fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that the support and fastening means can be supported by weight without compressing the space used for presentation. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop midway. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacement means switchable between a non-following state and a non-following state in which displacement occurs in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
and a third displacement means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means when at least the second displacement means is in the follow-up state. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means is displaced in the direction of the expansion and contraction movement of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the direction of expansion and contraction of the first displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so the performance is slow and the performance effect is insufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-follow-up state. Game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, there is a following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means due to the action of the resistance means, and a non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means can be increased. Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means can also be used. be able to.

A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player as having the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that it includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially. Gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, When the attitude of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means changes accordingly, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from increasing excessively. I can do it.

<Use of shell buttons and punch holes. As for points, not achieved>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and an accommodating means configured to be able to accommodate the first means, the accommodating means is an opening that receives the first means when accommodating the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause malfunction. .

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 is provided with a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. Means can be easily removed to the outside. This can prevent foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the storage means includes a support section that supports the first means, and the second opening section is arranged on the opposite side of the support section with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support section.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the accommodation means includes a low water resistant part having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant part.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance part. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings have a shape based on a shape projected in a different direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening has a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the solid object partially blocks the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is visible to the player. can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that a solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object continues to remain. .

<Points regarding devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A game machine comprising a first means and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means includes a protrusion-shaped portion protruding from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the glass frame (front frame) in which the operating handle is disposed is removable from the outer frame in which the gaming board is disposed (for example, (See Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the bottom of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, so there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom with your fingers, so there is room for improvement from the perspective of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shaped portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which the finger is hung, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the first support means slips from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

Note that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and may be any arrangement that protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may be provided so as to protrude in the vertical direction, or it may be provided so as to protrude toward the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means that removably supports the first support means, and the protruding shaped portion is arranged so that the first support means is separated from a support position where the second support means is supported. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged as follows.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shaped portion is provided to protrude downward from the lower bottom surface at a supporting position away from a position where the weight of the first supporting means is mainly applied. This makes it easier to hold the first support means. Thereby, the work of attaching and detaching the first support means to the second support means can be facilitated.

Note that the position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, the first
In the case where the supporting means is supported on the front side of the second supporting means, the position may be closer to the front side, or in the case where the first supporting means is pivotally supported by the second supporting means at one end, the position closer to the other end. It may be at any position, or it may be at a position on the opposite side of the pivot position with respect to the tray that stores the game balls.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed part recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means supports the recessed part with a gap between it and the recessed part. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it is disposed facing the recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first supporting means is a gap formed by the recessed shape, so that the first means Powder that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to misalignment (shavings powder, dust)
It is possible to reduce the amount of . That is, it is possible to prevent powder from accumulating and clogging the movable parts, causing malfunctions, and from accumulating powder at the detection location of the detection device, causing erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed portion is useful not only when not in operation (for example, when opening the glass frame to clear an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). This is effective even when the player is in the middle of the game or in a game waiting state (demonstration screen display state).

A gaming machine P4 in the gaming machine P3, wherein the recessed shape portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is protruded.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the part where the recessed shape part is formed from becoming extremely thin compared to other parts and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, by forming the recessed portion on the back side of the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent and deformed in the inner and outer directions, so even if a large load is applied to the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

Note that the load applied to the protruding shaped portion includes, for example, the own weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary storage, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when moving the first support means.
An example is a load that is applied when something moved by a player or store clerk (such as a senryo box) collides with the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion, and is supported in a manner that it abuts an overlapping portion that overlaps the protrusion shape portion in the inner and outer directions. A gaming machine P5 comprising: a contact means; and an operating section positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P4, it is possible to maintain the effect of the recessed portion while ensuring sufficient support thickness at the overlapping position that supports the abutment means, so that the operation portion can be It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the game machine P5, the contact means includes an impact damping means that is formed continuously between the contact means and the operating section and is configured to be able to damp an impact, and the impact damping means is arranged in the recessed shape section. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operation section to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping part is increased. In this way, the impact can also be attenuated by deformation (bending) of the contact means.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a block member made of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the recessed portion includes a second portion extending from the first portion. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed with a greater degree of recess than the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, sufficient space is provided in the first part where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared to the first part. By forming the space of the second portion where the load applied by the recess is expected to be small to be small, the degree of freedom in designing the recessed portion can be improved while maintaining high durability.

In addition, examples of the degree of recess include the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper the recess) and the width of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider the recess).

In addition, if the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the part facing the first means is smaller than that of other parts, the concave shape corresponding to the other parts is The portion may be formed with a large degree of recess.

Further, the concave shape portion may be designed based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, for example, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a gaming state such as a predetermined performance state or a specific gaming state). It is also possible to use the size of .

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding shaped part is formed below the bottom part of the first supporting means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider as it goes forward. A gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load capacity of the front part where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is stood alone. Even in a storage method in which the first support means is placed alone on the floor, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without falling down.

Note that what is considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the own weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, a gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward in a direction away from the second supporting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily independent on its own, and furthermore, the contact portion with the floor is limited to a protruding shaped portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid soiling of parts other than the protruding shaped part.

<Points regarding deformation based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
A gaming machine comprising an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first support means that supports the operation means, and a second support means that supports at least one of the first support means or the operation means, A gaming machine Q1, wherein the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as performance buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, countermeasures against positional deviations occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load when operating the operating means are insufficient. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from this point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in descending distance, on the front side,
A gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means is lowered excessively, the first support means is deformed, thereby suppressing the generation of a gap between the operating means and the second support means. can do. In other words, since the operating means can be allowed to descend (sink) excessively,
The manner in which the operating means is supported can be simplified.

Note that the operating direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a downward direction, a rising direction, a pushing direction along the front or back, a rotating (rotating) direction, or a combination thereof.

Moreover, as the mode of contact from the operating direction, various modes are illustrated in addition to the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operating direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that expands in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operating direction. In this case, the operating direction can be moved closer to the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force becomes larger as it moves closer to the center of the bottom, making it possible to effectively support the operating means. It can be done in a specific manner.

Further, a common support means that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material and is configured to be able to hold a support part that supports the operation means and a game ball, and the first support means is configured to support the operation means through the first support means. A game machine Q2 characterized in that it comprises a game ball holding section connected to the game ball holding section.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the operating means and the gaming ball holding section.

In addition, if the first support means is made of a flexible member or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding part in a floating structure, the vibrations generated when the operating means is operated will directly hold the game ball. Since it is possible to prevent the game balls held in the game ball holding part from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, it is possible to prevent abnormal sounds from being generated.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
It may be configured such that vibration transmission is prevented in the direction, while vibration transmission is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to perform a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player,
The first support means is configured such that the farther the connection position with the game ball holding section is from the operation section,
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being placed on the front side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the gaming machine Q3 has the ability to reduce the absolute amount of positional deviation by moving the connection position closer to the back side around the operation unit, which is a position that is prone to misalignment due to operation. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, by arranging the connection position at the front side (closer to the player) at the far end of the operation part, which is a position where the position is difficult to shift due to operation. , it is possible to improve the design.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means includes an operating section configured to be operable by a player, a main body supported by the first supporting means, and an operating section and the main body. a connecting portion that connects, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed from a plurality of divided bodies and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the game machine is configured in such a manner that the connecting portion is surrounded by the connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the first support means can be easily assembled while ensuring a sufficient size of the operating section.

Note that various methods of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body are exemplified.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may each be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified as the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, this may be done by fitting or by fastening.

In addition, in the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at multiple positions along the operating direction of the operating section, the impact generated when the operating section is operated can be distributed and received at multiple fixed positions, Since the durability of fixing the divided bodies can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional shift of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction in a direction that intersects (for example, perpendicularly) with the operating direction of the operating section, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating section and the direction of tightening of the fastening screw can be made different. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A gaming machine Q5 in the gaming machine Q4, wherein the fastening direction of the fastening means for fastening the divided bodies intersects with the operating direction of the operating section.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when operating the operation section, so that the fastening by the fastening means becomes loose during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the split body from being unlocked.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as the direction intersecting the operating direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is the direction that intersects a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (e.g. (direction along the rotation axis) is exemplified.

Also, for example, if the operating direction is along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction that intersects with the operating direction is along a plane that intersects with the predetermined straight line. The following directions are exemplified.

In this case, if a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or may be set in a direction intersecting a plurality of planes, that is, a direction intersecting any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the split body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including another fastening point are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is applied to the other fastening points at the same time. Since it is possible to prevent the split bodies from being dislocated at the same time at both fastening locations, it is possible to prevent the fastening from loosening.

Note that the fastening locations of the divided bodies may be arranged at locations where the load is concentrated when the operating section is operated. In this case as well, another fastening point will be placed on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, so it is possible to prevent the division body from shifting its position or the fastening from loosening due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any of gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect a predetermined operation of the operating section, and the detecting means is arranged at a position away from the dividing position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient in the divided position, and when the operating part moves in accordance with the operation of the operating part in the divided position, the operating part Where there is a risk of dust (dust, etc.) being generated due to friction between the dividing body and the dividing body, the detection means is placed away from the division position, which prevents powder (dust, etc.) from being detected by the detection means. can do. Thereby, the occurrence of false detection can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means that interferes with the divided body in the dividing direction when the game is possible, on the side of the divided body that is moving away from the divided body in the dividing direction (proximity and separation direction). A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the positional shift of the operating means with respect to the dividing body in the dividing direction.

The interference means may be formed so that it interferes with the operating means in the assembled state, but does not interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the divided body is made of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during assembly, making it easier to avoid interference with the interference means and maintaining ease of assembly. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be configured so that it does not interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere with each other when viewed in the direction of assembly before fastening (for example, when viewed in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly). In this case, while ensuring ease of assembly, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the divided body when play is possible.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means includes a receiving recessed part that is recessed so as to be able to receive the first supporting means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first supporting means is received in the receiving recessed part, the first supporting means is Even if the operating means and the first supporting means are displaced, the repulsive force from the receiving recess allows the operating means and the first supporting means to quickly return to their original positions.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle with a center of a radius of curvature disposed on the operating section side of the operating means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be placed, and in addition, when the player grasps the operating section, it does not feel cramped. It can prevent you from feeling like. Thereby, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and the operability of the operating section.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a striped portion processed into a striped shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the striped portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, since the extending direction of the striped portion is different for each region, the first support means has anisotropy in rigidity. can be configured.

Note that the design criteria for the extending direction of the striped portions are not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be used to design an extension direction with a high yield, or when the load generated when operating the operating means acts in a different manner in each area, the best way to deal with the load may be determined. The direction may be the direction in which the striped portion extends.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the board>
a vibration means; a light emitting means disposed at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be able to emit light;
In the game machine R1, the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibration means.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emitting effects.

To be more specific, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is placed behind the speaker in order to prevent the board from receiving vibrations from the speaker. In the areas where the light is displayed, the light emitting effect cannot be produced and it becomes dark. in this case,
In the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area where a gorgeous presentation can be made is narrowed. In the first place, the approximate size of gaming machines such as pachinko machines is determined by standards.
Securing a light emitting area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a range in which it can be displaced with respect to the vibration means, the light emitting means can receive the vibrations of the vibration device, and the light emitting means can be arranged at the vibration generation point of the vibration means. can be approached. As a result, the front area can be brightly viewed regardless of the location where the vibration of the vibration means is generated, so it is possible to improve the light emission performance.

Note that the form of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. Further, the device is not limited to a means that can vibrate actively, but may be a means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) in response to an external force load.

Various aspects are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the vibrating membrane included in a speaker,
For example, examples include an exhaust port from which the back pressure of speaker vibrations found in a bass reflex type speaker is discharged, and a path connected from a vibrating part to the exhaust port.

The vibration device may be a rotationally driven vibration device (for example, a vibrator),
A vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear drive may also be used.

Note that the mode of close arrangement is not limited in any way, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means,
In this case, the stacking direction may be a front-back direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or a direction inclined inward from the left and right ends to the left and right.

A gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, and the light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine R1, the light emitting board tends to be displaced (vibration, positional shift, etc.) due to the influence of vibrations generated when the vibration means outputs sound. While it is possible to change the display mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibration means that outputs sound. ) can be increased.

Note that the number of light emitting substrates may be one or more. When there are a plurality of substrates, it is sufficient that at least one light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of a light-emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibrations generated by the vibration means and a light-emitting substrate that is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the display mode of the light-emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes a holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the lamination direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means holds the light emitting substrate in the lamination direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of a gaming board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the holding means from being displaced along with the displacement of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if no fastening force is applied (for example, the holding means is simply prevented from coming off), it can be said that the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not fixed.

Furthermore, the expression "non-fixed" does not mean that large displacements are allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting board to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting board can be determined (stable front and back position, allowing small vibrations), and the shape of the light emitting board can be By surrounding the direction orthogonal to the front and back with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, displacement in directions other than the front and rear directions (up, down, left and right) can be suppressed.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of vibrations generated from the vibration means on the light emitting board compared to when the light emitting board is fixed to the holding means in the same way as the vibration means, thereby improving the positional stability of the light emitting board. can be increased.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means; regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, the fixing means moving toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction; Gaming machine R4 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the advancing direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the advancing direction is restricted, even if the fixation by the fixing means becomes loose (even if some of the fixing means become loose), the displacement of the fixing means will be less than the displacement of the fixing means. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the mode of progress. For example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region. The gaming machine R5 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R2 to R4, a change in the light emitting mode when the light emitting board is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emitting board. can be done.

Thereby, by designing the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in different ways, it is possible to produce an excellent effect. For example, a surface emitting means that produces uniform light emission by surface emitting is arranged as the first refracting means that receives and refracts the light irradiated from the first displacement region, while receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region. As the second refraction means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show high brightness light to the player by totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge). By doing so, it is possible to perform an innovative light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, brightness) differs from region to region.

Note that the manner in which displacement is suppressed is not limited at all. For example, the mode of suppression may be determined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or the mode of suppression may be determined by the manner in which the light emitting substrate is held.

For example, in terms of the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emitting substrate, the areas located at the same position from each vibration means are such that the influence from one vibration means is canceled out by the influence from the other vibration means. , displacement may be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5 includes a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing part arranged to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the opposing portion are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing part, the fastening relationship deteriorates further when the fastening screw becomes loose. This can be prevented.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as to what to do after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, if a tightening screw becomes loose, it may be configured to be able to detect the loosening electrically, or an opposing portion may be formed on the surface of the vibrating device to detect the loosening of the tightening screw. It may be configured so that if the device is vibrated when the device is loosened, an abnormal noise is generated and the user notices the loosening, or the device may be configured so that the loosened portion is repaired through regular maintenance without providing any special notification.

Any one of gaming machines R1 to R6 includes a first member and a second member disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member,
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deforming in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Characteristic gaming machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is configured in such a manner that it is easily deformed in the connecting direction, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as expanding and contracting, and the favorable and unfavorable effects will change periodically. This is not desirable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that is reduced. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other only in situations where the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the direction in which the member and the second member face each other is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is likely to shake due to vibration by the vibration means, and the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed together can be increased. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the printed circuit board.

Note that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed such that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load generated on the connecting means may be configured to vary in each direction.

Further, the manner in which the load is switched in the direction of pressing against each other is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the drive device.

In any of gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Features gaming machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical philosophy of the side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the component>
A light emitting means configured to be able to emit light; and a light guiding means configured to be able to guide light; A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide means; and a second light guide means that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that LED light enters from the end of a plate-shaped member and is emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015
(See Publication No. 159875). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, wherein the light guide means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, even if the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. When
It is possible to perform an effect in which the curved surface emits light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine S1 or S2 includes an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, the accommodating means supporting the light emitting board and the light guiding means. a supporting means fixed at least at a first position, and a shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is located at a position outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is placed on the side.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the gaming machine S3 can loosen the fixation at the first position while the shielding means is assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guide means, and maintenance efficiency can be improved.

Note that the mode of shielding of the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the light guiding means may be shielded so that the player cannot touch it but still be able to see it, or it may be constructed so that the player cannot touch or see the light guiding means. You may do so.

In addition, when the first positions are formed at multiple locations, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the multiple first positions may be located outside the outer shape of the shielding means. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the game machine S3, the light emitting board is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means is in the shape of a long plate, and the first position is located at the position of the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized in that it is arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3, the light guiding means is shaped like a long plate,
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, the positional deviation of the light guiding means can be easily corrected by loosening the fixation of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guiding means. .

To be more specific, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guiding means is compensated for by deforming the light guiding means in the lateral direction,
By compensating for slippage caused by applying a strong load, the position of the light guiding means can be changed even if the fixation is loosened at one end in the longitudinal direction and the fixation is maintained at the other end. Misalignment can be easily repaired.

Furthermore, in the case of a support mode in which the light-emitting substrate is pressed against the support means by the light-guiding means, the degree to which the light-emitting substrate is supported by the support means can be weakened as the light-guiding means bends and deforms.
Therefore, even without removing the light guiding means from the supporting means, by loosening the fixation at the first position and flexing the light guiding means, the degree of support for the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and in this state, a load is applied to the light emitting substrate. By giving , it is possible to correct the positional shift of the light emitting substrate.

Note that the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, there is a design basis in which the external shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not shift to the extent that it completely deviates from the irradiation direction. The adjustment range may be just enough to correct the positional deviation in the area (small adjustment range), or based on a design that secures a large adjustment range in advance, the part to be irradiated by the light guide means can be adjusted in the irradiation direction based on the external shape of the light emitting means. The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means can remain in the same structure, and the mode of the light emitting effect that is visually recognized during the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when preparing gaming machines with the same configuration so that they can be played with different gameplay features (for example, when configuring gaming machines with different specifications),
Since the mode of light emission can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide means without greatly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, the burden (for example, cost) related to manufacturing the game machine can be reduced.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited at all. For example, any aspect other than the case where it is fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Moreover, the term "edge" is an expression of the intention to avoid being limited to an edge. That is, the first position may be placed at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce the relative positional deviation as the distance between them is reduced. A gaming machine S5, characterized in that the displacement prevention part includes a fixing part to the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect wiring that conducts electricity to the light emitting board, and misalignment or chipping of the wiring will directly affect the malfunction of the light emitting means. Preferably, the structure is such that misalignment between the substrate and the support means does not easily occur.

Considering the performance effect, it is preferable that the light guiding means should be able to be easily aligned in case of misalignment with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that misalignment with the light emitting substrate should not occur easily. , it may be better to hold it on the supporting means side. On the other hand, if a positional shift occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, there is a risk that the light guiding means and the shielding means will collide with each other, resulting in poor appearance, so it may be better to hold the light guide means on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a part that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the support means serving as the base in consideration of strength. As described above, various support modes were expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S3 or S4, due to the action of the positional shift prevention section, the mutual positioning of the light guide means and the shielding means can be easily performed during assembly without directly fixing them. Not only this, but also the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily maintained during the game.

Note that the form of the positional displacement prevention section is not limited at all. For example, the recesses and recesses may have the same shape and can be fitted, the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a shape that remains unchanged along the assembly direction, or the recesses and recesses that can be fitted may have a convexity that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guiding means includes a main body, a separating extending portion extending from the main body toward a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extending portion. an opposing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means and having a cross-sectional shape of A game machine S6 characterized in that it is provided with a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total internal reflection light emitting section from entering the parts other than the opposing extension part, so that the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting part can be suppressed from entering the part other than the opposing extension part and the part other than the separating extension part and the opposing extension part. It is possible to make a clear boundary between the two and to make it possible to perform an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) with a short boundary.

Note that the manner in which total reflection is performed is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guide means and the light emitting means, the direction of the emitted light, the width of the emitted light, the material and shape of the light guide means,
and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guiding means is formed from a frame shape that forms a covering part covered by the light emitting board and an outer shape of the covering part, and has a similar shape to the outer shape of the light emitting board. A gaming machine S7 comprising: a frame portion provided with a frame portion, wherein the opposing extending portion extends from the covered portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S6, since light can be made to enter the frame from the connection point, the effect of the light emitting production of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension part is By functioning as reinforcing ribs, it is possible to improve the strength of the light guiding means.

According to this, if the frame extends to the rear of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the light emitting direction is illuminated.

In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extending portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, is coupled to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized in that it is spaced apart.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension part,
Since it is possible to configure an end portion that allows light to enter the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion that restricts the incidence of light, the degree of freedom in designing a light emitting effect using the frame portion can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at a projected position of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separating extending portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposing extending portion and the separating extending portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separation extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is reduced. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving a sense of discomfort to a player while keeping the values uniform. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension portion can emit light to the same extent.

<Technical philosophy of top light emitting means. Points for changing the way the light is emitted depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light; and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, the light-receiving means having a first light-receiving means configured to receive light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first manner; A gaming machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving means that receives light emitted from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is incident from the edge of a planar member,
There are game machines that are configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015
(Refer to Publication No.-159875). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the lighting effects.

To explain in more detail, when creating a light-emitting effect using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the price of the board can be reduced, which helps in reducing costs, but it is not possible to create a three-dimensional light-emitting effect as is. It was difficult to achieve both.

In other words, differences in light emission (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) occur between near and far positions with respect to the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be dark (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the performance will increase relative to the area of the LED board, which will hinder cost reduction. It turns out. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving production effects and reducing costs.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different ways, so even if the distance from the light emitting means is different, the performance effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the light emission performance from the perspective of producing effects while reducing costs.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent material, it may be a member that emits light almost uniformly from a surface such as frosted glass, or it may be formed by curing a milky white material such as resin. It may be a white material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen, it may be a material that allows display to be projected onto the material itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or it may be a material that allows light to pass through the gap similar to a screen door or shoji screen. It is also possible to use a member according to the above aspect.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is configured so that the way it illuminates changes in stages in response to a difference in distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine T1, even if the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. To,
It is possible to perform an effect in which the curved surface emits light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes an accommodation means for accommodating the light emitting means, and a light emitting board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the accommodation means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting board. The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that the gaming machine T3 comprises a dividing means for dividing an area into which the light receiving means is divided, and the light receiving means is configured so that the way the light is illuminated changes depending on the area divided by the dividing means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is placed at the boundary where the way the light receiving means illuminates changes, so the way the light receiving means illuminates can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the game is played. Thereby, even if the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of the light-emitting production using the light-emitting substrates.

A game machine T4, in the game machine T3, wherein the light emitting board is aligned by the partitioning means supporting the light emitting board from a direction opposing the biasing force applied to the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, assembly work can be facilitated by making it easier to align the light-emitting substrate and the partitioning means, and in addition, the light-emitting substrate can be easily aligned during use. It is possible to suppress misalignment between the partitioning means and the partitioning means.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed in correspondence with the shape of the light emitting section disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means includes a through hole that is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting part and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partitioning means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion part can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light emitting part disposed on the light emitting board and does not receive the insertion part, and the non-insertion through hole is ,
A gaming machine T6, characterized in that an opening is formed in such a manner that the further away from the light emitting board it is, the opening becomes larger, and the surface thereof is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting board.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion part is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting part at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the two.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means has a cross-sectional shape larger on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is made larger compared to the area where the light emitting means is formed. I can do it.

In gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface that intersects with the light-conducting portion, and the cut-out boundary surface is a part of the light-conducting portion. A gaming machine T8 characterized in that the gaming machine T8 is arranged at a position where the front-rear surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger as it moves forward, the punched boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained over the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting section extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting section is formed in a line shape including the base end of the insertion section. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means is made easier to see as line-shaped light (light mixed with light from point light sources). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Point consisting of two directions where the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine comprising a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means that generates a fixing force in a first direction, and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by comprising: second fixing means that generates a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the second direction.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is constructed by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front and rear directions (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the shape of the structure is determined by the arrangement of the fixing means, resulting in a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when inserting a fastening screw that is inserted into the fixing means in the front-rear direction, a light emitting member such as an LED cannot be placed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. In other words, the area where the fixing means can be placed actually coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, so the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be placed.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light emitting board from the back side needs to be made larger than the light emitting board to accommodate the fixing means. This limits the size of the light emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screw that fixes the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, so that all the fixing means are inserted along the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the player is inserted, it is possible to secure a wider performance area on the side that is visible to the player.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that its outer surface includes a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2
.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine 1, since the external surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the external surface is about to deform due to external force, there is sufficient resistance. A force can be generated, and deformation of the external surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force is provided at at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means.

Here, if the first means and the second means are composed of resin molded products and the cutting direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the cutting direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

Note that the structure of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the fixing from loosening, or a loosening regulating means that restricts further loosening when the fixing becomes loose.

The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means includes a reporting means capable of reporting a fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means, so that loosening of the fastening screw can be detected at an early stage.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically reporting such as a detection means such as a sensor, or it may be a structural means that causes a change in appearance.
Structural means include, for example, a transmission change means that changes the transmission intensity of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, a light production change means that blocks light emission from the inside and generates a shadow that can be seen from the outside, An example of this is a vibration notification means that makes contact with a vibrating part of a vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or intensify the vibration to alert the player.

Any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4 includes a third means disposed between the first means and the second means, and the third means is arranged between the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means can generate resistance force in a plurality of directions as component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may have a configuration in which the first means side is made visible to the player, while the second means side is not made visible to the player. In this case, by setting the side where the gap between the first surface and the second surface is wider as the first means side and the side where the distance is narrower as the second means side, while ensuring a wide area that the player can see, the side that is not visible can be The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A gaming machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means can interfere with each other when viewed from the front, so that the third means and the fourth means can interfere with each other. It is possible to secure a large area in which the images can be placed.

A gaming machine U7, in any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, wherein the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged in pairs with predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, since the first fixing means and the second fixing means are each arranged as a pair with a predetermined interval, the effect of one of the fixing means Deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be prevented from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since deformation in the direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, loosening of the fixing means can be avoided.

<The rigidity of the game board compensates for the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and a facing means whose edges are arranged opposite to the game board, the facing means has proximal parts arranged close to the game board at the left and right edges. , a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area, and a back case in which a movable unit and the like are disposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, making it difficult to secure enough space for the arrangement of movable units, etc. The problem was that it was difficult.

In particular, in right-handed machines where the game is played with the right hand in a variable probability state (high probability state) or jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the gaming area, so It was required to secure an internal space in the back case on the back side of the flow path (flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine ZA1, since the formation of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be made asymmetrical, instead of sacrificing the internal area of either the left or right facing means, the internal area of either the left or right facing means can be secured. It can be made easier. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the means facing the game board can be improved, and sufficient space can be secured for the arrangement of movable units, etc., and the degree of freedom in presentation that can be seen by players through the game board can be improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-handed play channel) can be illuminated by a light emitting means of a moving character, or by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

Note that the manner in which the proximal portion is formed is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, it may be placed away from the game board, or it may be a combination thereof.

Note that the form of the proximal portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to secure a wide area where the connection part (contact part) used for connection with the game board is not formed.
The connecting portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connecting portion (contact portion).

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction in which the proximal part is formed may be asymmetrical, or the functional part (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened) disposed in the proximal part may be asymmetrical. The formation position, formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, left-right direction, or other direction), or the number of formed fastening parts may be left-right asymmetrical.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement part in which the proximal part is formed at an end on the game board side and is disposed opposite to each other in the left-right direction, and the proximal part is formed in a direction in which the proximal part is formed in a left-right direction with respect to the arrangement part. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by having an asymmetrical configuration.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement parts can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. Note that the form in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction on both the left and right sides), or may be formed in a direction that intersects the left and right sides (for example, a perpendicular direction).

Examples of the forming direction include the extending direction (installing direction) in which the plate-like portion is extended, the recessing direction (shaving direction) in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximal portion includes an opposing surface that is a surface that faces the gaming board, and an opposing side that is a side that faces the gaming board, and is compared to a portion on the left side of the gaming board. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that a portion of the right side of the gaming board has a larger proportion of the opposing sides than the opposing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the horizontal width occupied by the adjacent portion can be made narrower on the right side of the game board than on the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4, which is any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, and includes a suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. Note that the arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position away from the game board (including a position where it abuts the opposing means), or it may be arranged at a position away from the opposing means (including a position where it abuts the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position where it comes into contact with at least one of the game board or the facing means).

In gaming machine ZA4, gaming machine ZA5 is characterized in that the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (secure rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member to the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping part that overlaps the outermost surface of the opposing means in front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in designing the interior of the gaming board, so while securing the space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength (ensuring rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the opposing means may include a non-contacting portion that does not contact the gaming board at an edge of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the gaming board side. Characteristic gaming machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contacting part is used as the location for the drive device of the variable winning opening, and the drive device It can be effectively used as a path for wiring connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or as a location for a light emitting device.

In any of gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed from a resin material,
A gaming machine characterized in that the facing means includes a presentation means disposed between the game board, and a front end of the presentation means can be placed in front of a front end of the facing means. ZA8
.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the space for arranging the presentation means can also be expanded to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
a light emitting device that irradiates light to a predetermined light emitting region; a displacement device configured such that at least a portion of the displacement section includes a first position that at least partially overlaps the light emitting region when viewed in a predetermined direction;
A game machine ZB1 characterized in that the light emitting area includes a possible area that is configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacing means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that a light emitting device and a displacement device overlap when viewed from the front (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem in that the light emitting means and the displacement means were only visible individually, and the presentation effect using the overlapping was insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means,
There was a problem that the production effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting means is configured to be visible in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, so that it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, the arrangement mode of the displacement means, the displacement mode of the displacement means, the direction (attitude) of the displacement means, the light emission mode of the light emitting means disposed on the displacement means, etc. Illustrated. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and the like. The displacement mode of the displacement means is as follows:
Examples include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means, and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. Examples of the orientation (attitude) of the displacement means include cases where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, cases where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, and cases where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side. Illustrated.

Examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means include a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the displacement means side, and a mode in which the light emitting means emits light toward the side away from the displacement means, lights up, blinks, or turns off. is exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible region includes a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case in which the light emission mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player can be improved while the light emission mode of the displacement means alone remains the same. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting section is disposed, and a refracting means arranged to be able to refract light emitted from the light emitting section, and the substrate A gaming machine ZB3, characterized in that the refraction means includes a first refraction section that is arranged outside the possible area when viewed from the direction, and the refraction means overlaps the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light that is visually recognized through the first refracting section is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting section and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. It can be expressed by

In addition, by narrowing the area in which the substrate is formed, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components, such as a drive device that generates a driving force for the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

In gaming machine ZB3, gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction than at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the light emitting means occupies a small space. Therefore, the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacing means can be suppressed, and the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacing means can be secured to the maximum extent.

Note that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be compared. The comparison may include the number of members that are configured in the displacement means and that are displaced.

In any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner that is visible from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. A gaming machine ZB5, characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means that is visually recognized through the possible area is determined by determining at which position in the displacement section the displacement means is arranged. It can be changed by

In any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the gaming machine ZB6 is characterized in that the possible area is arranged at the center of a window portion that is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be viewed.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner in which the possible areas are arranged is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is in one place), or
A circular (arc) shape surrounding the window may also be used.

Any of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed,
The gaming machine ZB7 is characterized in that the board is not provided with fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side.

According to the game machine ZB7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space for the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and also to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from appearing in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, in the gaming machine ZB7, further comprising a covering means that is covered in such a manner as to cover the space between the possible area and the board when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZB7, since the boundary position between the possible area and the board is hidden by the covering means, there is no possibility that the visibility of light may deteriorate near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 includes a board holding means for holding the board, and the board holding means includes a gap forming part for forming a gap to facilitate assembly of the board,
The gaming machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part facilitates the assembly of the board, and it is possible to avoid problems such as light leaking from the gap forming part. . Further, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with other members and for positioning the other members.

In any of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment can be generated starting from the end on the possible area side. Therefore, the substrate can be easily taken out even in a situation where the board cannot be taken out directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and cutoff>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means in a predetermined state. A gaming machine comprising a transmission means, wherein the transmission means includes a transmission part that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the drive means, the transmission part transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means. A game machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to suppress displacement when the displacement means is not brought into contact with the portion.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained through support by the columnar section, there is a problem in that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar section while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission section is not in contact with the transmission section, so the transmission section can be used for other effects while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

Note that the mode of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears disposed between the displacement means and the drive means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other may be used.

Note that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or the elastic force of a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) with a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member that functions as a stopper. It may also be in a form where it is done. Furthermore, examples of the suppression possible include a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (regulating) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmitting means includes a forming part formed along a movement locus of the transmitting part, and the forming part is configured such that the transmitting part is non-aligned with respect to the displacing means in the moving direction of the displacing means. A game machine ZC2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to come into contact with the displacement means in a state of contact.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacing means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming part and the displacing means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacing means against external forces is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming part extends from the transmitting part along the displacement direction of the transmitting means, and the distance between the forming part and the displacing means is longer than the distance between the transmitting part and the displacing means. A gaming machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC2, in the opposing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means, a part where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a part where a load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially separated. You can shift the target.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional section formed on one side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part, and a function part formed on the other side in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the transmitted part. the other side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the formation part, and the other side functional part is formed on the outside of the movement locus of the formation part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC3, the movement direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming part can be set to one side.

In any of gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to move the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the mode of transmission to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the driving force may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. An embodiment may also be adopted in which the ratio of the applied driving force is changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a plurality of displacement means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

A gaming machine ZC6, characterized in that the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Note that the combination of displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced, or it may be configured such that the transmission or cutoff of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means is reversed. It is also possible to use one that does not displace.

Furthermore, in the case where the timing includes synchronized displacement, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7 characterized in that the direction of displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of displacement of the second displacement means are set to be opposite to each other in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually visible in a common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means Even if the performance area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective performance can be performed.

Note that the form of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means laminated in the front and back may be extended to a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be such that the plurality of movable members are laminated in the front and back but pass through a common area during movement of the plurality of movable members. It's okay.

<The load generating part catches up and makes contact, preventing the stop position from shifting>
In a gaming machine comprising a first displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacing means configured to displace the first displacing means by displacing in a predetermined direction, the second displacing means comprises:
The first displacement means includes a load generation section that applies a load along the predetermined direction in order to displace the first displacement means, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section, and the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives a load from the load generation section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the part is configured to be able to separate from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction and come into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. ZD1
.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which a cylindrical part used for driving force transmission is guided to a recessed part of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical part corresponds to the attitude of the displacement member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2010-234152). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a defect in drive transmission, the position of the displacement member may deviate from the end of movement, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement and comes into contact with a predetermined part different from the loaded part, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. Even if the first displacement means is disposed at an unintended position, this can prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side to the one side in the predetermined direction to the predetermined portion with the first displacement means disposed at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to give money to players.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generation part moves toward the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the one end in the predetermined direction by the load.

The gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means, and the load generating section is located on the other side in the predetermined direction relative to the loaded section.
A game machine ZD3 characterized in that it comes into contact with a displacement means.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generation section and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if timing accuracy is low, it is possible to easily maintain the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from their terminal positions while abruptly setting the first displacement means and the second displacement means to stop.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing it at a location different from the loaded part that receives the load each time the driving force is transmitted, the fail-safe function can be achieved without any problem even if the loaded part is deformed.

A gaming machine ZD4, which is one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, further comprising a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in a predetermined direction by the restriction means, the second displacement means is It can be independently displaced with respect to one displacement means.

Note that the mode of the regulating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that moves in and out and engages in a direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement means, it may be restricted by gravity or an urging force of an elastic member, or it may be a part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

Any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4 includes a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, and the first displacement means:
A gaming machine ZD5 comprising a detected part whose position is detected by the detection means, and wherein the load generating part comes into contact with the detected part.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load upon contact to the detected portion.

In addition, by linking the life span that can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of drives) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, detection failure based on damage to the detection piece can be determined. It is possible to know when to replace the displacement means (maintenance time).

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the loaded section. The gaming machine ZD6 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
The displacement means can be operated in a plurality of directions.

In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at a predetermined distance apart from each other in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded part and the predetermined part are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
The area required for arranging the loaded portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical idea to maintain by utilizing the flexibility of tracking means>
In a game machine comprising a displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined area, and a follow-up means that follows the displacement of the displacement means, a prevention that prevents a predetermined portion of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side. A gaming machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the length of the wiring is set in comparison with the displacement means, which has the advantage that the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form temporary fixing parts in various parts of the displacement means to temporarily fix the wiring to prevent relative displacement, and in addition, it is necessary to place the displacement means in a predetermined position while running the wiring through the temporary fixation parts. It usually takes a long time to assemble because it has to be assembled one by one.
This poses a problem in that it may lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in design and a decrease in assembly efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZE1, the following means, such as wiring, is prevented from being displaced toward the predetermined area by the prevention means, so that the following means is not damaged by rubbing against the displacement means. Can be suppressed. This eliminates the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing parts on the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improve the assembly efficiency.

In the game machine ZE1, the game machine ZE2 is characterized in that the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance from the displacement means occurs as the displacement means is displaced.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in such a manner that it can be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the preventing means and the displacing means changes as the displacing means is displaced. Compared to the case where the position of the following means is fixed with a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the following means can be reduced.

Note that the form of the prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part around which the following means can be wrapped, or a claw-like part which can hold the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar part, for example, the columnar part may be formed as a fastening part used for fastening and fixing members together, or used for positioning when assembling members. It may also be formed as a positioning part.

Further, the form of the following means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or it may be a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-shaped performance member that assists in the performance, or it may be an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates a biasing force to assist the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be supplied to the displacement means in a good manner.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means largely protrudes to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be placed on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is not necessary to construct an escape portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 is characterized in that it includes a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visible to the player. Note that the term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is the edge in a front view.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the gaming machine ZE6 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at the outer edge of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the external shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is ensured while keeping the following means out of the player's field of view. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides a rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is disposed on a straight line passing through the first axis. The gaming machine ZE7 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, the gaming machine ZE8 is characterized in that the displacement means includes a guide section that guides the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent friction with the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the durability of the following means.

Gaming machine ZE9 is characterized in that the guide section extends in a direction perpendicular to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to the case where the gap is large.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following means is directed toward both ends. The gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in a pulling direction from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the following means. Thereby, the entire following means can balance the load applied from the guide section.

In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a direction in which it loosens when the displacement means is displaced from a pre-displacement position to a post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the follow-up means, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being applied to the follow-up means.

Any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11 is provided with a positioning means in which the following means is arranged between the displacement means and a positioning section for positioning the positioning means, the positioning section being A game machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement locus of the following means.
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since the positioning portion can be prevented from encroaching on the displacement space of the following means, the load applied to the following means as the displacement means is displaced can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement part (weak displacement part) and a displacement set larger than that of the first displacement part. a second displacement part (strong displacement part), and the first displacement part is arranged between the second displacement part and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the following means. Therefore, since it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

Note that the manner of comparing the magnitudes of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in multiple directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

A gaming machine ZE14 in the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, wherein the preventing means includes a protruding part that protrudes from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled from above to the arranging means while the arranging means supports the following means which sag due to its own weight, so that the following means and the arranging means can be assembled from above to the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical philosophy that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) with forward and reverse rotation>
A gaming machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the drive means, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the drive means to the displacement means, The drive means has a first drive mode that generates a drive force in a first direction, and a drive mode that generates a drive force in a first direction.
and a second drive mode that generates a driving force in a second direction different from the direction, and the displacement means is configured to be operable in a first displacement mode driven in the first drive mode and in the second drive mode. A game machine ZF1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to be displaced in a second displacement mode when driven.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in forward and reverse directions. There are gaming machines configured as follows (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146413).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first
Only the displacement mode of the displacement means and the second displacement means changes, and even if the drive direction of the drive device is switched between forward and reverse, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. Therefore, there has been a problem in that the degree of improvement in performance effect achieved by employing a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as a drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. It is possible to sufficiently improve the performance effect used.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized in that it includes a light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in a manner that passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. The gaming machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects with the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so that the illuminated position of the displacement means can be changed. It is possible to create a glittering performance that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes a displacement suppressing means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmitting means, and the transmitting means is configured to suppress the displacement of the driving means in at least one of the first driving mode or the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, and wherein the displacement suppressing means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the transmission means is unintentionally displaced when the transmission of driving force is suppressed by the displacement suppressing means, so that the transmission means is displaced in an unintended manner. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained higher than when the displacement means is stopped by bringing the displacement means into direct contact with another member. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means with an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easily visible to the player.

Note that the form of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, an engagement device that generates viscous resistance, such as a damper device, or a resistance device that generates resistance due to its own weight may be used, or in cases where the resistance due to its own weight is likely to be insufficient (for example, when the displacement of the displacement means In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), it is not possible to suppress the idling motion by the force of gravity. Therefore, for example, a device such as a torque limiter whose resistance is variable depending on the displacement mode may be used.

The gaming machine ZF3 includes a detecting means configured to be able to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing means, and the displacement suppressing means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppressing area is lower than a predetermined speed. , the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 is arranged such that it can be detected.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZF3, the detection means is functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppressing means. It can be used for both detection.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotationally displaces the first displacement means centering on the first axis, and a second displacement means rotationally displaces the outside of the first displacement means centering on the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising a displacement means, and configured to be able to suppress displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed, so in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is disposed between the player and the first displacement means and the field of view is It is possible to configure two performance modes: one in which the second displacement means is placed outside between the player and the first displacement means and does not block the player's field of view; Since the displacement is possible even in a drive mode that does not suppress the displacement of , it is possible to configure performances by the displacement means in a total of three displacement modes.

In any one of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, gaming machine ZF6 is characterized in that the transmission means is provided with a light transmission means formed from a light-transmitting material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.
.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the light transmission means facilitates the assembly of the displacement means, and the light emission effect is achieved by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of making it possible.

In any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotates and displaces about a first axis, and a transmission means of the first displacement means that rotates and displaces about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outward from a connection position of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. The featured gaming machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, a second
The first displacement means can prevent the displacement means from coming off. This makes it unnecessary to provide a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
a first operating means configured to be operable by a player; a second operating means disposed at a different position from the first operating means and configured to be operable by a player; The second
A gaming machine ZG1 characterized in that it includes a load generating means disposed on the operating means side and configured to be able to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-159
(See Publication No. 178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, which increases the space required to arrange each operating device and tends to limit the number of operating devices that can be arranged. In addition, there are problems in that the cost increases due to the increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, so the load generating means is connected to the first operating means and the second operating means (i.e. , a plurality of operating means). Thereby, the space necessary for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operating means that can be arranged can be increased. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

Note that the form of the load generation means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means that is capable of vibration (high-speed repetitive displacement), a means that generates a load at a predetermined period like a pump, or a means that is composed of an arm member whose posture changes according to the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the aspect of the load is not limited at all. For example, the load may be mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or the load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) may be transmitted in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine ZG2 characterized in that the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means in the gaming machine ZG1.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG1, it is possible to transmit the load to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a game ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means includes a cover that at least partially covers the first operating means from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3 characterized in that it is disposed in an installation means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the hand and fingers of the player who operates the first operating means are sandwiched between the first operating means and the first operating means. In this way, the load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's fingers.

For example, the covering means may be placed in a position where the player's fingers can easily pass during the process of movement of the player's fingers, such as bringing the player's finger close to the first operating means and then removing the finger from the first operating means after the operation is completed. (By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from a direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers), it is possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player while the fingers are moving.

Further, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the player's fingers come into contact with a high probability when operating the first operating means, the load on the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

Note that this idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generation means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a different position from the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means is interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and is configured to be able to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means. A gaming machine ZG, characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the intensity of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the intensity of vibration transmission to the second operating means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine ZG3, it is possible to concentrate load transmission to the first operating means side.

A gaming machine ZG5 in the gaming machine ZG4, characterized in that the intervening means is configured to be able to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means operate (vibrate) in conjunction with each other due to the load applied to the pachinko machine by a player, etc., when the load generating means is driven, the first operating means
It is possible to perform an effect in which the operating means and the second operating means are strongly moved (vibrated).

A gaming machine ZG6, which is any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, and is equipped with a holding means that holds the load generating means so as to be displaceable, and the holding means is equipped with a guide section that guides the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by specifying the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent problems such as the displaced member being displaced by the vibration of the load generating means unintentionally colliding with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generation means itself, if the load generation means is guided in the desired direction, the load generation means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

A gaming machine ZG6, wherein the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction crossing the direction in which it is guided by the guide section.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. It is possible to displace the load generating means in different manners. Thereby, the performance effect of the load generation means can be improved.

Note that various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may be configured to intersect with the guiding direction of the guide section, or the load generating means may be provided between the holding means and the second holding means. It may also be configured such that a flexible member is interposed therebetween, and the displacement occurs due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibrating means as covering means (P9 policy 2)>
The covering device comprises a frame means having a frame shape, a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be able to vibrate, The means are
A game machine ZH1 characterized in that it is provided with an allowance part in which displacement is allowed, and is configured to be able to transmit vibrations of the vibration means via the allowance part.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include a front frame and a vibration means disposed in front of the front frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159837). but,
In the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means to an extent that vibrations exceeding a predetermined intensity are not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the perspective of vibration production. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed on the covering means and displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that vibrations can be transmitted to the player side via the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing vibrations by displacement of the covering means, transmission of vibrations to the frame means side can be suppressed.
This makes it possible to increase the permissible vibration intensity of the vibration means.

Note that the form of the permissive portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode that assumes displacement of slides, links, gears, etc., and displacement occurs due to the movement of slides, links, gears, etc., or it may be made of a material or structure that is different from other parts. It may be of a flexible configuration and may be displaced when overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the permissible amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowing part is maintained by horizontal displacement, while the player places a hand on the covering means, etc. in the direction of gravity. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being excessively displaced and causing the player's posture to be disturbed. That is, by keeping the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

A gaming machine ZH3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is constructed in the shape of a bag with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in the shape of an open bag, the edge of the bag and the frame means are disposed opposite to each other.
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means, which contact each other and transmit vibrations. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the main board, ball passage, and main electrical components arranged on the frame means side.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement section disposed on the frame means side, the frame means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section, and the vibration means includes a support section that supports the arrangement section; The department is
A gaming machine ZH4 characterized in that the support part has a lower deformation resistance than the support part.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing vibration transmission to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement part is Compared to a case where the vibration means is hard, it is possible to cause biting by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and it is possible to secure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibration means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to largely displace the covering means on which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering part and a second covering part having lower deformation resistance than the first covering part, and the vibrating means A gaming machine ZH5, characterized in that the game machine ZH5 includes an abutting part that is connected to the first covering part and the second covering part and can locally come into contact with the first covering part.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally abutting the first covered part with high deformation resistance and the abutting part, the abutting position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) for vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covered part with respect to the contact position.

Any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5 is provided with a ball firing operating means operated to fire a game ball toward a gaming area, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball firing operating means and the ball firing operating means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by using a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress vibration transmission to the ball firing operation means.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by displacing objects>
In a game machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZI1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a light-emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and is configured to perform a light-emitting effect (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no disposed member that can be displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emitting effect because the data capacity was compressed and the board became large for the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement of the displacement means prevents interference with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring this to be possible, the mode of the light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, the mode of light emission can be changed without controlling the light emitting means, and the size of the board can be reduced by eliminating the need for data for control and the need for a circuit for control. can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method of realizing the light emission effect.

Note that the mode of displacement is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, rotation, linear sliding, or displacement along a predetermined curve may be used. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide coincides with a predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide crosses the predetermined direction. The outer shape can be easily maintained.

Note that the form of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around a rotation axis that intersects with the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, or it may be configured such that the member protrudes from the inside and is scaled up or down even if the posture does not change. The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

The form of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate around the irradiation target means, or it may be configured to slide on a plane and enter the side of the irradiation target means (between the light emitting means).

Further, the manner in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. It may also be the form.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed in position or may be configured to be movable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacing means, or the light emitting means and the displacing means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The mode of displacement of the light emitting means may be such that it slides toward and away from the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means, or it moves around the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means. It may also be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or it may be one that can be switched between lighting and extinguishing.

In the gaming machine ZI1, the gaming machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiated means reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the irradiated means after the light emitting means irradiates the light, so that attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . According to this, even if the irradiated means is a displaceable means,
A means that cannot be displaced may be used.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve attention to the irradiated means.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. Further, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be a slow displacement (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4, which is any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, wherein the irradiation means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to make different parts illuminated and highlighted by light reflected through the irradiated means while maintaining the external shape of the irradiated means.

In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, a gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that, while the direction in which the irradiated means reflects light is the same, at least one of the amount of light or the color of the light is different. .

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, attention to the light emitting mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, a non-radiator configured to be able to irradiate the irradiated means with light in an irradiation manner such that the optical axis does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the irradiated means can be irradiated with light regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to avoid the irradiated means being visually recognized unnecessarily darkly.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiation means includes a first irradiation means;
and a second irradiation means configured to be arranged at a shielding position capable of blocking light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means, and the first irradiation means The area of the second irradiated means as viewed in the optical axis direction is smaller when the second irradiated means is disposed at the shielding position than when the second irradiated means is not disposed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the irradiated means. That is, the effect of blocking light can be improved. Note that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light onto the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect with the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

According to gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs). can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8 is provided with a driving means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiation target means and a displacement means disposed around the irradiation target means, and the irradiation target means A game machine ZI9 is configured such that a predetermined first surface thereof faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emitting mode of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means ( For example, the switching timing between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

Note that the displacement mode of the irradiation target means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement caused by a rotation axis perpendicular to the display surface of the display area.

In any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiation means or the irradiation means has a surface facing the light emitting means, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that the direction of travel of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed toward the player.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light depending on whether the displacement means is placed in the first position or the second position. The difference in the extent to which light travels toward the player can be increased.

<Features AA group> (Lever UP control)
The game player includes an operation means that can be operated by at least a player in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and a performance execution means that can execute a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. In the gaming machine, the notification means is capable of notifying an operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction, and in a state where a release condition is satisfied after the operation means is operated in the first direction, the A gaming machine AA1 characterized in that it has a specific effect setting means that can set a specific effect when the operating means is not located at a specific position.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. In addition, among the above-mentioned gaming machines, some machines allow the player to operate the operating means in a state where it is moved from the initial position in order to further enhance the performance effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, if the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means has been moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is reset to the initial position regardless of the player's operation. Since it is necessary to perform control to return the player to the original position, there is a problem in that the presentation effect is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operating means is not located at a specific position in a state where the release condition is met, the specific performance setting means sets a specific performance. It becomes possible to provide the player with a performance that would otherwise not be possible. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after the operating means has been moved, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to include a biasing device that always biases the operating device toward the specific position, and a biasing device that can move the operating device from the specific position to the first position that is different from the specific position. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that it has a movement control means, and the operation means is located at the specific position by operating from the first position in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by the player operating the operating means located at the first position, the operating means can be moved to a specific position. , and the act of moving the operating means to a specific position can be performed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation performance can be performed smoothly and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AA2 has a second operating means that can be operated by a player different from the operating means, and the specific performance includes at least a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operating means. A game machine AA3 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2, a specific performance is executed that includes a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operating means, thereby making it easier to operate the second operating means. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible for the player to release his/her hand from the operating means and move the operating means to a specific position using the biasing means, thereby making it easier to position the operating means at a predetermined position, thereby improving the operation effect. This has the effect of making it easier to execute.

A gaming machine AA4, which is any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, and includes a fixing means for fixing the operating means in the specific position so as to make it difficult to operate.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the operating means is located at a specific position, the movement of the operating means is restricted by the fixing means, so that the operation performance and It is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated without regard to the above. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operating means from being operated unnecessarily and causing a malfunction.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has a firing means capable of firing a game ball based on a player's operation, and the specific performance includes an aspect for prompting the player to fire the game ball. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a mode for encouraging the player to shoot the game ball as a specific effect is included, so when the specific effect is executed, It is possible to encourage the player to actively shoot the game ball. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it easier for the player to take his/her hand off the operating means, thereby making it easier to move the operating means to a specific position, thereby making it easier to position the operating means at a predetermined position. This has the effect of making it easier to perform operation effects.

<Feature AB group> (Combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a presentation execution means, an identification pattern presentation execution means capable of executing an identification pattern presentation that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation device, the operation presentation and the identification pattern presentation; A gaming machine AB1 characterized in that it has a regulating means for regulating execution in an overlapping period with an identification symbol production.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). Furthermore, in some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, a plurality of conditions are provided for executing the operation performance in order to further enhance the performance effect. In this case, there is a problem in that a plurality of operation performances are executed overlappingly, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AB1, since the regulating means can restrict that the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in an overlapping period, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation performances from being executed overlappingly. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means is configured to set a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, for regulating execution of the operation presentation mode, and to execute the identification symbol presentation within that period. A game machine AB2 is characterized in that it is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, a period is set by the regulating means to regulate the execution of the operation performance mode, and within that period, the identification Since the symbol presentation is executed, it becomes possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation presentations. Therefore, it is possible to perform a plurality of operation performances in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AB1 or AB2 is configured to be able to perform a mode variable presentation in which the mode of the identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner without the operation means being operated during the period when the operation presentation is executed. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, since the aspect variable performance is configured to be executable during the period in which the operation performance is executed, it is difficult to identify whether the aspect variable performance is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol presentation is being executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Electric support termination control due to fall)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball input means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a display means for displaying the particular determination result of the display means. a first probability as a probability of being determined as the specific determination result; and a second probability higher than the first probability. a probability setting means capable of setting a probability; a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means; and a determination result determined by the determination means as a specific determination result. a probability control means for setting the first probability based on the above; a setting means capable of setting a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than a normal gaming state; In the gaming machine, the setting means is configured to determine whether the second probability is satisfied or not when the special gaming state is set by the setting means. The special gaming state is configured to be able to be set when the special gaming state is set, and the end condition determining means determines the second probability when a predetermined period has elapsed after the special gaming state is set. The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that it is determined that the termination condition is met based on the fact that the probability is set to the first probability.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a high probability state in which it is easy to win a winning state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a winning state as a gaming state, and to shift the gaming state to a low probability state when the high probability state is set. There was one that ran a lottery (the so-called falling lottery). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be able to set a specific gaming state in which a winning lottery for a game is likely to be executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-269007). However, in the gaming machine described above, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state and the timing of transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, and the player cannot understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem in that the game became difficult and the interest in the game decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the normal gaming state is set when the first probability is set by the probability control means, the setting situation of the probability setting means and the setting situation of the setting means can be varied in association with each other. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the transition status of the game state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination means to execute the determination is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC2, since the determination means can be caused to perform the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the determination means from performing excessive determination in a state where the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AC2, the determination means executes the determination before dynamic display of the identification information starts based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC2, the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. It becomes possible to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the result of the determination made based on the determination result of the determining means. Thereby, when the determination means determines a specific determination result, the determination performed by the determination means can be performed with the first probability based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means determines the first probability before the start of the dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines the specific determination result. A game machine AC4 is characterized in that it is a game machine that allows setting.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AC1 to AC3, if the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the probability control means starts dynamic display of the identification information. The first probability is set before. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after a specific determination result has been determined, and thus it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special gaming state is determined to be the specific determination result. The gaming machine AC5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state even when the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result. When the normal gaming state is set by the means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result or whether the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result. It is possible to provide the fun of making predictions. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (Burst interruption effect)
A period during which the performance is executed by the performance execution means in a gaming machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a performance period determining means that determines an execution period of the performance executed by the performance execution means. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect by interrupting at least a part of the effect being executed by the effect executing means; A gaming machine AD1 characterized in that it has a setting means capable of changing and setting the performance to be interrupted in accordance with the state of the performance.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, there is a system that makes it possible to perform a suggestive performance to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, thereby allowing players to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced. Further, there is a gaming machine that further enhances the effect of the suggestion performance by executing various performances at various timings as the suggestion performance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestion effect is being executed, other suggestion effects can be executed, which has the effect of increasing the types of effects that can be executed and increasing the effect of the effect. be. However, since the gaming machine described above is configured to execute other suggestion effects without being concerned with the production status of the one suggestion effect currently being executed, the player may There is a problem in that the player's desire to play is reduced. Furthermore, if the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), switching the suggestive effect may cause the predetermined process change mode to end midway. Therefore, there was a problem in that the player was further confused. To provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing a variety of suggestive effects without confusing the player in the above-mentioned game machine.

According to the gaming machine AD1, since it is possible to change the mode of the effect that is interrupted by the execution of a specific effect using the setting means, it is possible to prevent the effect from being interrupted in the middle of execution and to confuse the player. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can execute a plurality of performances in an overlapping manner, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

In the gaming machine AD1, the performance executed by the performance execution means includes a sound performance, and the setting means is configured to interrupt the sound performance depending on the state of the performance, A game machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case in which a sound performance is not interrupted.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1, when the production is interrupted, it is configured such that it is possible to set whether only the audio continues or when the audio is also interrupted. It becomes possible to change the manner in which the performance is interrupted depending on the content of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to vary the interest level of the players in the interrupted performance, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the audio output based on the performance mode of the specific performance and the performance mode of the interrupted performance, and the audio set as the performance mode of the specific performance may be determined. If the type and the audio type set as the performance mode of the performance to be interrupted are the same audio type, the configuration may be such that the output of the audio is interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the audio of the interrupted performance from being output and being confused with the audio set as the performance mode of the specific performance, thereby preventing an incomprehensible performance from being provided.

Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not to interrupt the output of the audio depending on the timing of interrupting the performance. In this case, if the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is less than a predetermined period (for example, one second or less), only the audio can be output until the end even if the effect is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the performance has been interrupted.

In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, a display means dynamically displays a plurality of identification symbols as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player, and the setting means is configured to dynamically display one of the plurality of identifying symbols while the other identifying symbols are dynamically displayed. The game machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect to be interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the reach display mode displayed in the combination that can become the specific combination has been displayed. .

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the effect to be interrupted is before or after the ready-to-reach display. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of the performance set by the setting means based on the timing of interrupting the performance executed by the performance execution means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the interruption of the performance.

In the gaming machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the audio performance when the performance executed by the performance item means is interrupted before the ready-to-reach display mode is displayed; The gaming machine AD4 is characterized in that when the audio performance is interrupted after being displayed, the performance is set so as not to interrupt the audio performance.

According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD3, when the production is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the audio is interrupted, and when the production is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted. You can prevent audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the production is interrupted after the reach display mode has been displayed, the audio can continue to be output, which prevents players from being confused as to whether the reach display mode has been discarded midway through. This has the effect of being able to prevent this from happening.

<Characteristic AE group> (Button press sound control)
In a gaming machine that has an operation means that can be operated by a player and a performance execution means that changes the performance based on the operation of the operation means, each time the operation means is operated, a first operation is performed. A gaming machine AE1 characterized in that it has a voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There were things that entertained players (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, among the gaming machines described above, when a player operates an operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such gaming machines, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means based on the operation sound output, but it was There has been a problem in that when the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when a continuous hitting operation is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sounds output in response to each operation. Further, there was a problem in that the game became monotonous if only one operation sound was output. To provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for a player to hear the operation sound outputted in the above-mentioned game machine and further outputting a variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operation means multiple times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are output alternately, so that when only one type of operation sound is output, This has the effect of being able to output operation sounds with a greater variety of variations. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even if the operation means is operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), it is possible for the player to operate the operation means. can be easily identified by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AE1, the audio control means causes the first operation sound to be output during a first period, and before the first period elapses, an operation that causes the first operation sound to be output is performed next. In the gaming machine AE2, the first operation sound that is being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1, if the next first operating sound is output within the first period in which the first operating sound is output, the first operating sound that is currently being output is Since the first operation sound is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify the player that a new operation has been executed.

In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the voice control means outputs the second operation sound during a second period, and before the second period elapses, the next operation for which the second operation sound is output is performed. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the second operation sound is outputted, the second operation sound that is being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the game machine AE3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AE1 or AE2, if the next second operation sound is output within the second period in which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound that is being output is Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, it is possible to clearly notify the player that a new operation has been executed.

In any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a continuous operation performance in which the mode of the performance is varied in response to continuous operation of the operating means a plurality of times. The gaming machine AE4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the game machine AE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the variable situation of the performance mode can be changed by executing a continuous operation performance in response to a plurality of consecutive operations of the operating means. It is possible to notify the player that the operating means has been operated. This makes it possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation on the operation means has been accepted. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

<Characteristic AF group> (Pending notice)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. and an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification design displayed by operating the operation means, A game machine AF1 characterized in that the identification symbol performance execution means executes the identification symbol performance for two or more of the identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. .

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and notify players of the lottery results after the variable display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning hole can be stored multiple times, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved symbols are displayed, and the currently displayed reserved symbols are There are some devices that are configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can be used to notify information regarding the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the gaming machine described above, by changing the color and shape of the pending symbols, the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending symbol indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, there is a problem in that when a reservation notice performance occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the reservation symbols that are not subject to the reservation notice, and this reduces the player's desire to play. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since it is configured to execute the identification symbol presentation for two or more identification symbols as one identification pattern presentation, the target range of the identification pattern presentation can be expanded, and the identification pattern presentation can be expanded. It is possible to reduce the number of identification patterns that are not subject to pattern presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AF1 has a prior discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discrimination means, and the identification symbol performance execution means is configured to perform the discrimination according to the previous article. A game machine AF2 characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is varied based on the determination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF1, the mode of the identification symbol can be varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the player is not interested in the performance result of the identification symbol performance. can have. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol performance execution means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by operating the operating means. Features of gaming machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the mode of two or more identification symbols can be varied based on the operation on the operating means, so that the effects performed for the player are This has the effect of increasing people's desire to participate.

In any of gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol performance execution means executes the identification symbol performance over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and The gaming machine AF4 is characterized in that it has a restriction period setting means for setting a restriction period in which the operation of the operating means is not valid during a period in which the game machine AF4 is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol presentation is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and furthermore, the identification pattern presentation is During the execution period, a regulation period is provided in which no operation on the operating means is determined to be valid. This has the effect of making it possible for the player to enjoy deciding at what timing to operate the operating means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF4, a specific presentation is executed in a period other than the regulation period among the periods in which the identification symbol presentation is executed.

According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AF4, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to determine whether or not the current period is a regulation period in which the operation of the operating means is not valid during the identification symbol performance. This has the effect that it is possible to carry out performances that are easy for players to understand.

<Characteristics AG group> (Probable fall due to small winning)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball input means, a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a display means for displaying the particular determination result of the display means. a benefit granting means capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when the identification information of 2 probabilities, and a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal gaming state. In the gaming machine, the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is satisfied in a state where the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal gaming state when a second transition condition is established in a state where the specific gaming state is set, and the setting means sets the normal gaming state. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. The gaming machine AG1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a high probability state in which it is easy to win a winning state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a winning state as a gaming state, and to shift the gaming state to a low probability state when the high probability state is set. There was one that ran a lottery (the so-called falling lottery). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be able to set a specific gaming state in which a winning lottery for a game is likely to be executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-269007). However, in the gaming machine described above, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state and the timing of transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, and the player cannot understand the transition status of each gaming state. There was a problem in that the game became difficult and the interest in the game decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AG1, since performances are performed in different performance modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, the current gaming situation is predicted based on the content of the performance to be executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine AG1, the discrimination means is capable of discriminating the special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and the second transition condition is that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the special discrimination result. The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that it is established based on the following.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the determination by the determining means may result in a determination result that is more advantageous to the player. , it becomes possible to provide cases where the determination result is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the determination result of the determining means, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG2 includes a counting means capable of counting the number of times that the determination result of the determining means becomes the special determination result in the state where the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is the count The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is satisfied when the counting result by the means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is satisfied when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the discrimination of the discrimination means By determining that the result is a special determination result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the period until the second transition condition is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the gaming state set by the setting means. A gaming machine AG4 is characterized in that it sets the following.

According to the gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the performance mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the gaming state, so based on the performance to be executed, It is possible to provide the fun of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AG4, the performance mode setting means is configured to set a first gaming state in which the first probability is set by the probability setting means and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means; A gaming machine AG5 characterized in that a second probability is set, and the same performance mode is set in a second gaming state in which the normal gaming state is set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG4, there is a first gaming state in which a first probability is set and a normal gaming state is set, and a second probability is set and a normal gaming state is set. Since the same performance mode is set in the second gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AG5 has a determining means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determining means is configured to perform a determination for the determining means to execute the determination. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when a condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG5, it is possible to cause the determining means to make a determination when the discriminating condition is satisfied, so that the determining means may perform an excessive determination when the second probability is set. It is possible to suppress the determination from being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the production mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period of time has passed after the benefit is given by the benefit giving means. A gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that it sets a suggestive performance mode for the game.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the suggestive performance mode is set when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means, so that the first gaming state is set. Alternatively, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be made to understand the current gaming state based on the content of the suggested presentation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and there is an effect that the performance of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics AH group> (Complex control development of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, in a gaming machine, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a presentation execution means, an identification pattern presentation execution means capable of executing an identification pattern presentation that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation device, the operation presentation and the identification pattern presentation; A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation of the operating means during the overlapping period when the identification symbol effect is executed in an overlapping period. The gaming machine AH1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). Furthermore, in some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, a plurality of conditions are provided for executing the operation performance in order to further enhance the performance effect. In this case, there is a problem in that a plurality of operation performances are executed overlappingly, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance overlap, the specific performance is executed, so even if the operation performance and the identification symbol performance overlap, the player It is possible to perform an easy-to-understand presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 includes a setting means for setting the operation performance or the identification symbol performance that is to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific performance includes the operation AH2 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion mode indicating the operation performance or the identification symbol performance that is to be varied by operating the means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the effects to be varied when the operating means is operated by the effect specific effects produced by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute effects that are easy to understand for players.

In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, in the overlapping period, the number of operations by which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means. The gaming machine AH3 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of operations to be varied is different depending on whether the operation presentation or the variable operation presentation is executed alone or when they are executed overlappingly. It becomes possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of a specific performance can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in an overlapping period, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means multiple times. A gaming machine AH4 characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, if the operation presentation and the identification symbol presentation are executed in an overlapping period, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation presentations is increased. can be increased, making it easy to understand that a specific performance is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a specific performance from being completed in a short period of time and a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

The gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that the specific performance includes one in which the execution period of the operation performance mode after being changed is set to be longer than normal.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH4, during the specific performance, the execution period of the operation performance mode is set longer than in normal times, so that the specific performance is executed for the player. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect because the information can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic AI group> (Pending notice development)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. An identification symbol display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation that can perform an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. A presentation execution means, an identification pattern presentation execution means capable of executing an identification pattern presentation that makes it possible to change the mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation means, and an identification pattern presentation execution means. A presentation mode changing means for changing the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation that is being executed based on a predetermined change condition being satisfied during the period in which the identification symbol presentation is being executed. Gaming machine AI1 is characterized by certain things.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, and notify players of the lottery results after the variable display ends. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning hole can be stored multiple times, and the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved symbols are displayed, and the currently displayed reserved symbols are There are some devices that are configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can be used to notify information regarding the corresponding lottery in advance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the gaming machine described above, by changing the color and shape of the pending symbols, the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending symbol indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, since it is not possible to make the content of the pending notice performance correspond to changes in the gaming situation after the pending notice performance has occurred, players may not have high expectations for the content of the pending notice performance. This poses a problem in that it becomes difficult and reduces the desire to play. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AI1, if the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the identification symbol performance, the performance mode of the identification symbol performance that is being executed can be changed, so that the performance effect of the identification symbol performance can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AI1, the changing condition is satisfied based on the new information being stored in the storage means during the period when the identification symbol presentation is being executed. AI2.

According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation can be varied based on new information being stored in the storage means, so that the presentation mode of the identification pattern presentation can be changed during the execution of the identification pattern presentation. Even in this case, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to store new information in the storage means, and there is an effect that the performance of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AI2 has a prior discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination before the information stored in the storage means is discriminated by the discrimination means, and the identification symbol performance execution means A gaming machine AI3 characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is varied based on the determination result by the pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AI3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AI2, the mode of the identification symbol is varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that it is possible to create interest in the identification symbol performance that is performed. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

In the gaming machine AI3, the performance mode variable means is configured to vary the performance mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AI3, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation based on the result of preliminary determination on newly stored information, so that the presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation can be changed at the time of execution. It is possible to target identification symbols in a wider range than the range of identification symbols indicated by the identification symbol presentation in . Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player have a sense of expectation regarding the identification symbol performance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol performance execution means executes the identification symbol performance over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and A gaming machine AI5 characterized in that it has a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid during a period in which the game machine AI5 is executed.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol presentation is executed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and furthermore, the identification pattern presentation is performed over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times. During the execution period, a regulation period is provided in which no operation on the operating means is determined to be valid. This has the effect of making it possible for the player to enjoy deciding at what timing to operate the operating means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AI5, a specific presentation is executed during a period in which the identification symbol presentation is executed, except for the regulation period.

According to the game machine AI6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AI5, by executing a specific performance, it is possible to determine whether or not the current period is a regulation period in which the operation of the operating means is not valid during the identification symbol performance. This has the effect that it is possible to carry out performances that are easy for players to understand.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Button continuous press sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player and a performance execution means that changes a performance based on the operation of the operation means, each time the operation means is operated, an operation sound is generated. , a voice control means capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound, and a type of the operation sound outputted by the voice control means can be set. The sound setting means includes a sound setting means and a sound discrimination means capable of determining the type of the operation sound outputted by the sound control means, and the sound setting means is configured to determine the type of the operation sound outputted by the sound control means based on the discrimination result of the sound discrimination means. A gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that the type of operation sound is set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery results are announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that causes the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery results, and the period until the lottery results are announced is made possible. There were things that entertained players (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, among the gaming machines described above, when a player operates an operating means, there is one that outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such gaming machines, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player was able to operate the operating means based on the operation sound output, but it was There has been a problem in that when the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when a continuous hitting operation is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sounds output in response to each operation. Further, there was a problem in that the game became monotonous if only one operation sound was output. To provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easier for a player to hear the operation sound outputted in the above-mentioned game machine and further outputting a variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set a new operation sound type based on the type of operation sound that is actually output, so it is possible to output an operation sound that is easy for the player to understand, and the game is improved. It has the effect of increasing interest.

A game machine AJ2 in the game machine AJ1, wherein the sound setting means sets the operation sound of a different type from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound discrimination means.

According to the game machine AJ2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AJ1, it is possible to set a different type of operation sound from the type of operation sound that is actually output, so that various operation sounds can be output. This has the effect of making it possible to perform performances with a wide variety of variations and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound determining means determines that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, when no operation sound is output, the first operation sound is set by the audio setting means. Therefore, it is possible to output the operation sound with a predetermined regularity for the operation of the operation means, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3 has an operation status determination means capable of determining the interval between the operations performed on the operation means, and the audio setting means is configured to determine whether the determination result of the operation status determination means is A gaming machine AJ4 characterized in that, when a specific situation determination result is obtained, a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound can be set.

According to the game machine AJ4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the determination result of the operation status determination means, so that the player cannot perform the operation. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of operating the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that the operation status determination means determines that the operation status determination result is the specific status determination result when the interval between the operations performed on the operation unit is shorter than a predetermined period. Game machine AJ5.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ4, when the interval between the operations performed on the operating means is shorter than a predetermined period, the third operation sound is output. This has the effect of further increasing the player's desire to participate in the game.

In any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the performance execution means executes the performance during a predetermined performance period, and based on the determination result of the audio discrimination means at the time when the performance period has elapsed. , having a pseudo sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo sound after the elapse of the production period, and the sound control means being capable of outputting the pseudo sound set by the pseudo sound setting means. The AJ6 gaming machine is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, it is possible to output a pseudo sound based on the type of operation sound output at the end of the production period. No matter what type of operation sound is being output at the time, the effect is that the audio output control can be ended without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo sound setting means sets a pseudo sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound discrimination means determines a type of the operation sound that is different from the second operation sound. A game machine AJ7 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ6, if the type of operation sound outputted at the end of the production period is other than the second operation sound, a pseudo sound is used to correspond to the second operation sound. Since the sound is output, it is possible to unify the end sound of the sounds output by the sound control means. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine AJ7 includes a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a predetermined display means for displaying the identification information. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a period of time; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the present invention, wherein the presentation period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo-audio setting means is configured to set the pseudo-audio setting means to be configured such that when the identification information that is dynamically displayed while the performance is being performed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the pseudo-sound setting means is configured to set the pseudo-audio setting means to be configured such that when the identification information that is dynamically displayed while the performance is being executed is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the pseudo-sound setting means is set to A gaming machine AJ8, characterized in that the pseudo voice is easily set.

According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ7, a pseudo sound is produced during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Since it is made easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the ending content of the voice outputted by the voice control means.

<Features AK group> (Picture voice)
In a gaming machine that has a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a benefit granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to a player when the particular performance is executed by the performance execution means, the performance is executed. an audio control means capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a first performance executed by the means; an audio information determining means for determining the audio information to be output by the audio output means from a plurality of audio information; A gaming machine AK1 characterized by having a regulating means capable of regulating the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. When announcing the lottery results, a system has been proposed in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery results are announced based on the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013 -090780). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to add sharpness to the presentation of lottery results by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of fluctuating symbol rows are stopped and displayed. . However, there was a problem in that the repetition of monotonous sound effects made the game monotonous, and the player got bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can prevent a player from getting tired of the game early by suppressing repeated output of a monotonous sound effect in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AK1, by regulating the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means, it is possible to easily determine the type of audio information as intended at the time of design, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine AK1 has a storage means capable of storing the audio information determined by the audio information determining means as historical information, and the regulating means is configured to store the audio information determined by the audio information determining means as historical information. A gaming machine AK2 characterized in that the type of the audio information determined by the audio information determining means is regulated.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means in accordance with the stored history information. By regulating the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined in accordance with the history information, and there is an effect that the type of audio information to be determined can be made suitable.

In the gaming machine AK2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the audio information stored a predetermined number of times ago is determined.
According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AK2, it is possible to prevent the same type of audio information from being determined consecutively, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

A gaming machine AK4 in the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, wherein the regulating means regulates that the type of the audio information determined a specific number of times or more in a predetermined period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to suppress the problem that the type of the same audio information is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the performance executed by the performance execution means includes a symbol performance in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first performance is the performance executed by the performance execution means. A game machine AK5 characterized in that one of the identification symbols among the symbols is a display that is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the performance when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is varied. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, a determining means capable of making a determination, and a benefit granting means capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result. A gaming machine AK6, characterized in that the audio information determining means is capable of determining the audio information based on a determination result by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine AK6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK5, it is possible to identify the determination result based on the sound output corresponding to the first effect, so the output sound This has the effect of making the players interested in the types and allowing them to play the game.

The gaming machine AK6 includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, and an information storage means in which information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the determination means is configured to read the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a preliminary determination means that executes a preliminary determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine AK7, wherein the audio information determining means is configured to be able to determine the audio information based on a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means.

According to the gaming machine AK7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AK6, it is possible to identify the result of the preliminary determination based on the type of outputted audio, so it is possible to create interest in the type of outputted audio. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristic AL group> (Image quality control)
Display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information, and the amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determined by the display information determining means. It has a data amount determining means for determining the corresponding information, and a variable control means for varying and controlling the display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the determination result determined by the data amount determining means. Gaming machine AL1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As an effect for notifying lottery results, a display device configured to display various images and videos has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the preview display mode is displayed randomly, there is a problem in that the amount of image data to be displayed becomes excessive, and the burden on display control and the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the control load can be reduced in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AL1, the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so display control can be performed in accordance with the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce

In the gaming machine AL1, the data amount determining means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. A game machine AL2 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AL1, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the total amount of data of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The problem of increased control load can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, a determination means capable of making a determination, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination result of the determination means, and when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, a benefit granting means for granting benefits advantageous to the player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the performance executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine AL3.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AL1 or AL2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance notified by the determination result cannot be executed stably due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is one in which status information corresponding to the data amount is set as information corresponding to the data amount, and The gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether the total value obtained by adding the status information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the status information corresponding to the amount of data is set, so that the amount of data can be easily determined. be.

In any of the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total amount of data of the display mode displayed on the display means decreases. A gaming machine AL5 is characterized in that the display mode of the gaming machine AL5 is variable.

According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines AL1 to AL4, the amount of data is suppressed, so there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. The gaming machine AL5 is characterized in that the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one of the display information determined by the display information determining means is reduced. Game machine AL6.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AL5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem of excessive display data can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic AM group> (Multiple press effects)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the display means displaying the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result. In the gaming machine, the game machine has a benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when An operation dynamic display mode is set in which the display mode is changed by operating the means, and when the operation dynamic display mode is set, a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid is set. a valid period setting means to be set; and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period of the set valid period when the operating means is operated within the valid period. A gaming machine AM1 characterized in that it has the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the timing and period of operation of the operating means are not constant depending on the player, there is a problem in that the interest in performing the performance is reduced. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AM1, when the operating means is operated, a specific performance can be executed based on the remaining period of the validity period, so that a wide range of games can be played by setting the validity period long. Even if the player is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific performance is performed based on the remaining period of the validity period, making it possible to perform a variety of performances and increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving.

In the gaming machine AM1, a suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means be operated a plurality of times within the validity period set by the validity period setting means; and a suggestion mode setting means set by the suggestion mode setting means. a performance period setting means for setting a predetermined performance period within the validity period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation in step 1, and a remaining period of the performance period set by the performance period setting means; A gaming machine AM2 characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a remaining period mode indicating a remaining period.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AM1, it is possible to make the player think that a validity period is set for each of the multiple operations, so that the player can avoid the multiple operations. This has the effect of being able to notify you of what will be done in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays each of the plurality of identification symbols to show the determination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific manner by operating the operating means on at least some of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect after the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine AM3 is characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to information reflected during the dynamic display of the identification information when the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effect will also be reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display in the relevant one. By executing the presentation, there is an effect that the user can be motivated to operate the operating means in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AN group> (Cosmo Up)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored by the storage means; and a determination means thereof. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a benefit granting means for granting benefits, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific performance executed by the performance execution means. a specific information storage means in which specific information based on is stored; and the effect executed by the effect execution means at the start of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means. A gaming machine AN1 comprising: special performance determining means for determining a special performance as at least a part of the game machine AN1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AN1, the special performance is determined based on the specific information stored when a specific performance is executed, so that the performance to be performed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific performance. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by providing different games to each player.

In the gaming machine AN1, based on the suggestion means for suggesting a suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and the special effect determined by the special effect determining means being executed. and a suggestion mode changing means for changing the suggestion mode, and configured such that when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, a residual display period of the identification information is a predetermined period or more. A game machine AN2 is characterized in that it is a gaming machine AN2.

According to the gaming machine AN2, it can be determined based on the suggestion mode that it is not the timing to display the identification information in a mode for indicating the determination result, and there is an effect that the problem of overlooking the determination result can be suppressed.

The gaming machine AN1 or AN2 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the performance determined by the special performance determining means is an operation performance whose performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. A gaming machine AN3 characterized in that the number of times the operation performance is executed is set in accordance with the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, the number of times the operation performance is executed is set based on the stored specific information, so the number of times the player can operate the operating means is set. This has the effect of suppressing problems that result in misunderstandings.

<Characteristic AO group> (operated 3 times)
The player has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation performance setting means that can set an operation performance that is executed based on the operation of the operation means, and the operation performance setting means can set the operation performance. A multiple operation performance in which a specific operation performance is executed in response to a plurality of operations is set in the operation performance that can be performed, and when the multiple operation performance is set, A gaming machine AO1 characterized in that a number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation performance are displayed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem in that the interest is reduced when performing the performance based on the operation of the operating means. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when a multi-operation performance is set, the number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine AO1, when the multi-operation performance is set, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid; and a valid period within the valid period set by the valid period setting means. A gaming machine AO2 characterized in that it has variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed for each of the suggestion modes in response to a decrease in the validity period.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AO1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if each suggestion mode has a validity period, and the timing for each operation can be displayed variably. This has the effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effects are displayed can be made appropriate.

A gaming machine AO3 in the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, wherein the multiple operation presentation is a preset operation presentation that is executed according to the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AO1 or AO2, there is an effect that it is not necessary to individually set the multiple operation effects, and the control that is operated multiple times can be easily performed.

<Characteristic AP group> (Burst Challenge)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a validity period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and an operation performance can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period. An information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation performance that can be executed within a predetermined period of the valid period; A gaming machine AP1 characterized in that it has an operation mode determining means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the predetermined period when the game machine is played.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the information corresponding to the operation performance that can be executed during a predetermined period within the validity period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation performance is determined based on the remaining period, so the operation means is operated. Even if there are differences in frequency and interval between players, the effect is that by executing operation presentations that match the operations of the players and reporting information, it is possible to make effective use of the validity period and improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine AP1, the operation performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the operation performance each time the operation means operates within the predetermined period, and the information determination means is configured to execute the operation performance within the predetermined period. A gaming machine AP2 characterized in that information corresponding to the final mode of the operation performance that can be performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AP1, the final operation effect is determined in advance, so that the player can enjoy the process until the final operation effect is executed every time the operating means is operated. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, when the specific operation performance is executed, it is shown that a benefit that is advantageous to the player will be given, and the operation performance executed in the predetermined period includes: , a process operation effect corresponding to the process until the specific operation effect is displayed is set, and the operation mode determining means determines whether the specific operation effect is selected when the remaining period of the predetermined period is less than or equal to the predetermined period. A gaming machine AP3 characterized in that an operation performance is determined, and when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the process operation performance corresponding to the remaining period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the process operation presentation can make the player gradually recognize that the final operation presentation will be made, thereby increasing the player's interest. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine AP3 has an updating means for updating the performance value based on the operation of the operation means, and the updating means updates the value for updating the performance value based on the remaining period of the predetermined period and the current setting. and the operation mode determining means determines the mode of the operation effect corresponding to the effect numerical value updated by the updating means. A gaming machine AP4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine AP3, the mode of operation performance can be easily determined based on the performance numerical value, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic AQ group> (Derived from Cosmo Up)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored by the storage means; and a determination means thereof. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine, the gaming machine has a benefit granting means for granting benefits, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, and a specific performance executed by the performance execution means. a specific information storage means in which specific information based on is stored, and a special performance is determined as at least a part of the performance executed by the performance execution means based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means. A gaming machine AQ1 characterized in that it has a special performance determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, the special effect is determined based on the specific information stored when a specific effect is executed, so that the effect to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific effect. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by providing different games to each player.

<Characteristic AR group> (Derived from Burst Challenge)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a validity period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, and an operation performance can be executed based on the operation of the operation means within the validity period. an information determining means for determining information corresponding to the operation performance executable within the validity period; and when the operation means is operated within the predetermined period, A gaming machine AR1 comprising: operation mode determining means for determining the mode of the operation performance to be executed based on the remaining period of the validity period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine AR1, the information corresponding to the operation performances that can be executed within the valid period is determined in advance, and the mode of the operation performances is determined based on the remaining period, so the frequency and interval of operating the operation means are determined in advance. Even if there are differences among players, the effect is that the validity period can be effectively utilized and the interest in the game can be improved by executing operation performances that match the operations of the players and notifying the information.

<Characteristics BA group> (Game performance where it is advantageous if no pending series occurs)
A first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter the ball, and first discrimination information is provided based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means. The first discrimination information acquisition means to acquire, the first discrimination means to perform the first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction are different from each other. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter, and second discrimination information is determined based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. a second discrimination information acquisition means to acquire, a second discrimination means to perform a second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, and a second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information from the time the second discrimination information is acquired until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed. a first state in which the game ball enters easily, and a first state in which the ball enters the ball more easily than in the first state; a variable ball entrance means that can be changed to a second state, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on a game ball entering the variable ball entrance means, and the first determining means, or Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to a first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determination means; As a game state after the execution of the variable game by the means is completed, one game state is selected from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, the gaming state setting means is configured to set the specific discrimination result by the second discrimination means rather than the specific discrimination result by the first discrimination means. The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in that the higher the rate of setting the first gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the more the variable game is finished.

According to the game machine BA1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. After the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means until the second discrimination based on the acquired second discrimination information is executed, the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means. A predetermined number of pieces of information are stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than in the first state is configured to allow a game ball launched in a second direction to enter the ball. It is located in a convenient location. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. A variable game in which the variable entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific judgment result obtained by the first judgment means or the second judgment means. . The game state after the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A gaming state from 1 to 1 is set by the gaming state setting means. It is better to obtain a specific determination result by the second determination means than to obtain a specific determination result by the first determination means, so that the first game state is set as the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished by the game state setting means. The proportion of people who set this will be higher.

As a result, when a game ball is launched in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit during execution of a variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the second discrimination information is stored. . If a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, there is a high probability that the first game state, which is less advantageous than the second game state, will be set, so it will not be stored during execution of the variable game. The second determination based on the second determination information allows the player to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that novel gameplay can be realized.

In the gaming machine BA1, the variable patterns of the variable ball entry means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is configured to set one of the variable patterns more than the second variable pattern when the first discrimination means obtains the specific discrimination result. The proportion of setting the first variable pattern becomes high, and when the discrimination by the second discrimination means yields the specific discrimination result, the proportion of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than the first variable pattern. A game machine BA2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BA1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. is set by the variable pattern setting means. When a specific discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination by the first discrimination means, the rate at which the first variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when the determination by the second determining means yields a specific determination result, the rate at which the second variable pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means is higher than that of the first variable pattern.

As a result, when the second determination means reaches a specific determination result, it becomes easier to set the second variable pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, so during execution of the variable game This has the effect of making it more likely that the second determination based on the second determination information stored in the second determination result will not result in a specific determination result.

In the game machine BA1 or BA2, based on the start of the variable game, a first variable pattern is set as a variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, and a game ball is sent to the variable ball entry means more than the first variable pattern. A variable pattern setting means is provided for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the game ball. The period is at least longer than the period until the predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means when the fire continues in the second direction. The gaming machine BA3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the start of the variable game, the variable patterns of the variable ball entry means include a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball entry means than the first variable pattern. Any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least the above pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, if the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction, a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. It consists of a period that is at least longer than the period until the end of the period.

As a result, if the player continues to fire the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit during execution of a variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, the second Discrimination information is obtained. Therefore, after the end of the variable game, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed every time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that all the second determinations of the upper limit number of times will not result in a specific determination result.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second determination by the second determination means is performed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Game machine BA4.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is performed with priority over the first discrimination by the first discrimination means. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entry means with the second discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can attract more attention.

In any of the game machines BA1 to BA4, a game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position that can be reached, and the reached game ball is transferred to a first channel provided with the second ball entering means. and a second channel provided with the variable entry means.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA4, the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second channel provided with the variable ball entry means are provided. Since the distribution means for distributing the game balls to the second direction is arranged at a position where the game balls fired in the second direction can reach, it is possible to prevent the flowing direction of the game balls fired in the second direction from being biased. It has the effect of being able to prevent this.

In the gaming machine BA5, the gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first channel and the second channel.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA5, since the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path, so that the game balls are distributed alternately to the first flow path and the second flow path. The ball can be caused to enter the second ball entry means and the variable ball entry means alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game balls launched in the second direction from biasingly entering the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, there is a first position where a game ball enters the first ball entry means more easily, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means more easily than the first position. The first gaming state includes a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it becomes difficult to play the ball, and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means. The second gaming state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily varied to the first position by the variable control means than the first gaming state. Game machine BA7.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA6, there is a first position where it is easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entering means, and a first position compared to the first position. The variable means is variable to a second position where it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, it is difficult for the variable control means to change the variable means to the first position, and in the second game state, it is easier for the variable control means to change the variable means to the first position compared to the first game state. .

Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball can easily enter the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the game can be played more efficiently, so there is an effect that the player can play the game with greater expectation that the first gaming state will be reached.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the first gaming state is such that the probability of the specific determination result being determined by the first determining means and the second determining means is set to a first probability. and the second gaming state is such that the probability of the specific determination result being determined by the first determining means and the second determining means is set to a second probability that is lower than the first probability. The gaming machine BA8 is characterized by certain things.

According to gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BA1 to BA7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result being determined by the first determining means and the second determining means is set as the first probability. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the probability that the determination by the first determining means and the second determining means will result in a specific determination result is set to a second probability that is lower than the first probability.

Thereby, in the first game state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game ends, the variable game is likely to be executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first gaming state, it can be expected that more predetermined benefits will be obtained in a relatively short period of time, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BB group> (Execute a specific performance using the jackpot ending period and the pending consumption period)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and the privilege. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the game execution means is finished. a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the states; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determining means; Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a period until the bonus game ends, and a period until the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the bonus game ends. and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance, the specific performance being a performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific performance ends is the second gaming state. The gaming machine BB1 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BB1, a determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. carried out by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after the end of the bonus game execution by the bonus game execution means. One gaming state from among the states is set by the gaming state setting means. The identification information indicating the determination result by the determining means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of a bonus game, dynamic display of the period until the bonus game ends and one or more pieces of identification information executed after the bonus game ends. The specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means during the period until the end of the specific performance. The specific performance is composed of a performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the gaming state after the specific performance ends is the second gaming state.

As a result, the specific performance can be executed over the period from when the specific condition is established until the dynamic display of one or more pieces of identification information ends. Or, compared to the case where the specific effect is executed in the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB1, the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance based on the fulfillment of the specific condition when the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the second gaming state. A gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that it executes the following.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1, when the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is set to the second gaming state, a specific performance is performed based on the fulfillment of a specific condition. Since this is executed by the specific performance execution means, the second game state is suggested in the specific performance unless a specific determination result is obtained during the execution of the specific performance and the game state is shifted to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the specific determination result will not be obtained during the execution of the specific performance.

In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, based on a predetermined specific opportunity, a discrimination information acquisition means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is Discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied; determining means for determining whether or not the discriminating information corresponding to the specific discriminating result is included in the discriminating information that is present; and determining a performance mode of the specific performance based on a determination result by the determining means. A gaming machine BB3 comprising: performance mode determining means, wherein the specific performance execution means executes a specific performance in the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means.

According to gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on a predetermined specific trigger, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for the discrimination with respect to the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of pieces of information is stored as an upper limit by the discrimination information storage means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determining means determines whether or not the determining information stored in the determining information storage means includes the determining information corresponding to the specific determining result. Based on the determination result by the determining means, the performance mode of the specific performance is determined by the performance mode determining means. The specific performance of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determining means is executed by the specific performance execution means.

Thereby, since the determination result by the determining means can be determined in advance, it is possible to set the presentation mode in accordance with the result of the determination actually performed by the determining means.

In gaming machine BB3, the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a second bonus game in which the game state after completion of execution is set to the second game state; is to determine whether the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means includes discrimination information corresponding to the first bonus game; Based on the fact that the means determines that the discrimination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included, a production mode that suggests that the gaming state after the specific production is the first gaming state is determined. Game machine BB4 is characterized in that it is a game machine that makes decisions.

According to gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BB3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and a first bonus game in which the game state after the execution is finished is set to the first game state by the game state setting means. One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a second bonus game in which the gaming state is set to the second gaming state. The determination means determines whether the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes determination information corresponding to the first bonus game. Based on the fact that the determination means has determined that the discrimination information corresponding to the first bonus game is included, the performance mode that suggests that the gaming state after the specific performance is the first gaming state is performed. It is determined by the mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the player is forced to play the game in the expectation that the first bonus game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Gaming machine BB5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines BB1 to BB4, the specific performance is such that a predetermined specific period is set as a performance period regardless of the performance mode.

According to the game machine BB5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BB1 to BB4, a predetermined specific period is set as the performance period of the specific performance regardless of the performance mode, so the length of the performance period is This makes it difficult to predict the results of a specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific performance until the end.

In the gaming machine BB5, a display means for displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the above-mentioned display executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determining means, and the specific period is such that the bonus game is not executed after the specific condition is satisfied. The period until the end of the period and the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means when all the determinations made by the determining means a predetermined number of times result in different determination results from the specific determination results. The gaming machine BB6 is characterized in that the dynamic display period is the sum of a specified number of times of the dynamic display period.

According to gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BB5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. The dynamic display period is determined during the period from when the specific condition is established until the end of the bonus game, and when all the determinations made by the determination means a predetermined number of times result in different determination results from the specific determination results. The sum of the dynamic display period for the specific number of times determined by the means is set as the specific period.

Thereby, the specific performance can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for a specific number of times ends, so there is an effect that the specific performance can be ended neatly.

In the gaming machine BB6, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to, after the end of the bonus game, if the determination by the determining means within the specific number of times yields a specific determination result, the dynamic display period determination means displays a display period at least until the specific period ends. The gaming machine BB7 is characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of 2 is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB6, if a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination means within a specific number of times after the end of the bonus game, at least the remainder until the end of the specific period. A period longer than the specified period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, so if a specific determination result is obtained within a specific number of times, the bonus game will be played before the specific period ends. can be prevented from starting. Therefore, by starting the bonus game before the end of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific performance from being known in advance, which has the effect of attracting more attention to the specific performance.

Any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB7 is provided with an expectation level suggestion performance execution means for executing a performance indicating the degree of expectation that the second gaming state is suggested by the specific performance during execution of the bonus game. The gaming machine BB8 is characterized by

According to the game machine BB8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BB1 to BB7, the expectation level suggestion performance execution means includes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation for the second game state to be suggested by a specific performance during execution of the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the performance mode during execution of the bonus game and the specific performance are a series of performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved while the bonus game is being executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (makes it difficult to determine from the attacker's actions whether or not a suspended sequence occurs)
a bonus ball entry means that provides a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball; a first position where a game ball can enter the bonus ball entry means; a variable means for changing the position to a second position where it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball; a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and a first discriminating result based on the discrimination by the discriminating means and a first variable control means that controls the variable means to vary in a first variable manner, and a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state different from the gaming state at the time when the determination was executed, and a specific number of times based on the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means A second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode executed the specific number of times when all discriminations by the discrimination means result in the first discrimination result; A gaming machine BC1 comprising: second variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary.

According to the gaming machine BC1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege ball entry means; The variable means is variable to a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. The first variable control means causes the variable means to vary in the first variable manner based on the discrimination performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result. controlled by Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in the second discrimination result, it is distinguished from the first variable mode of the specific number of times that is executed when all the discriminations by the discrimination means of the specific number of times have resulted in the first discrimination result. The variable means is controlled to vary by the second variable control means in a second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that gives a difficult appearance.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result has been obtained from the variable mode of the variable means, so it is difficult to distinguish whether a different gaming state has been set or not. This has the effect of making it difficult for people to distinguish the information.

In the gaming machine BC1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. and the proportion of setting the second gaming state is set higher than the proportion of setting the first gaming state when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Gaming machine BC2 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. When the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result, the rate at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means is set higher than the rate at which the first game state is set.

This has the effect that when the second determination result is obtained, a disadvantageous second gaming state is likely to be set, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the first determination result.

A gaming machine BC3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the proportion of the first discrimination result determined by the discrimination means is set higher than the proportion of other discrimination results.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the proportion of the first discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than the proportion of other discrimination results. There is a high possibility that the first determination result will be obtained continuously over a number of times. Therefore, even when the second determination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable manner, it can be made to think that the first determination result may have continued a specific number of times. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different gaming state has been set.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the determining means executes the determination when either a first determining condition or a second determining condition different from the first determining condition is satisfied. , the gaming state setting means sets a high ratio of setting the first gaming state when the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition; The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the game, a higher ratio is set for setting a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. BC4.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the rate at which the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is set to be high. On the other hand, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the rate at which the second gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, is set is set to be high.

As a result, when the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, the first gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state is likely to be set, so the first discrimination condition is It is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the game will be successful. Therefore, when a determination is made by the determining means, it is possible to draw attention to the type of determination condition that triggered the execution of the determination.

In the gaming machine BC4, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the second discrimination result and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the benefit entry means is set to the second variable mode rather than the second variable mode. A game machine BC5 characterized by comprising a third variable control means that controls the variable means to vary in a third variable mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC4, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the second discrimination result and the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the result is lower than the second variable mode. Since the variable means is controlled by the third variable control means to be variable in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball entering means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage when the result is achieved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the first determination condition will be satisfied.

In the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, a first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter the ball, and a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction is provided. a second ball entry means arranged at a position where the ball can easily enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, The second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the bonus ball entering means is established based on the fact that the game ball launched in the second direction enters the game ball. A gaming machine BC6 is provided in a position where it is easy to play the ball.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC4 or BC5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter, while the second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter. A ball entry means and a bonus ball entry means are provided. While the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. holds true.

Thereby, when the bonus ball entry means is changed to the first position, when a game ball is fired in the second direction in an attempt to obtain a predetermined award, the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is likely to be performed after the bonus ball entry means is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BC6, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means; A gaming machine BC7, characterized in that the gaming machine BC7 is provided with a discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means.

According to gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BC6, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is Up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, the information is stored at least by the discrimination information storage means until the discrimination means executes the discrimination.

Thereby, when a ball entering the second ball entering means is detected in a situation where the judgment by the judging means cannot start, the judgment information used for the judgment can be stored in the judgment information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball entering the second ball entering means from being wasted.

In any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is performed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The gaming machine BC8 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BC4 to BC7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is better than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. Since the second determination condition is also executed with priority, there is an effect that when a determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, attention can be drawn to the result of the determination.

<Characteristic BD group> (Configuration where special 2 starting winnings are likely to occur during jackpots, and difficult to occur during normal times)
a first discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition; a second discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition; or a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determining means, and the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means. Type determination for determining one type of bonus game from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. A first state in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied is set based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means and the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. a state setting means for setting a second state in which the second discriminating condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first state, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition; The percentage of determining the second bonus game is higher when the determination by the first determining means yields the specific determination result than when the determination by the determining means yields the specific determination result. Features of gaming machine BD1.

According to the gaming machine BD1, the first determination means performs the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. be done. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the point game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. The type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. The type of one bonus game is determined by the determining means. Based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means, a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied is set by the state setting means. On the other hand, based on the satisfaction of the bonus game termination condition, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied compared to the first state. The type determining means is configured such that the rate of determining the second bonus game is higher when the determination by the first determining means yields a specific determination result than when the determination by the second determining means yields a specific determination result. It is configured.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the second determination condition from being satisfied in a state other than when the bonus game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the opportunities for executing the first bonus game with a low degree of advantage.

In the gaming machine BD1, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A gaming machine BD2, characterized in that it is provided with a discrimination information storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BD1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, the discrimination information for use in the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

Thereby, when the second discrimination condition is satisfied multiple times before the discrimination by the second discrimination means is performed, a plurality of discrimination information obtained in response to the fulfillment of the second discrimination condition for the plurality of times. is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem in which the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine BD2, the second discriminating means determines, based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during execution of the award game and stored in the discriminating information storage means, after the end of the award game. A gaming machine BD3 is characterized in that it executes discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD2, the second discriminating means determines the privilege based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means during the execution of the privilege game and stored in the discriminating information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the end of the game, the opportunities for the determination by the second determining means to be performed can be concentrated after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the determination by the second determining means will not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means for which the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a variable means that can be changed from the first position to a second position where it is easier for game balls to enter the ball; a specific determining means for determining whether the variable position is to be changed to the second position; and the variable means is configured to change to the second position based on the fact that the specific determining means determines that the variable position is to be changed from the first position to the second position. and variable control means for controlling the specific discriminating means in the second state, the variable controlling means controlling the specific discriminating means in the second state more than when the specific discriminating means determines that the variable means is to be varied in the second state. The gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that when it is determined that the variable means is to be varied, the period during which the variable means is varied to the second position is controlled to be longer.

According to gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and a first position where the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific discrimination condition, the specific discrimination means determines whether the variable means is to be varied from the first position to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determining means determines that the position should be changed from the first position to the second position, the variable control means controls the variable means to change the position to the second position. When the specific discrimination means determines that the variable means should be varied in the second state than when the specific discrimination means determines that the variable means should be varied in the second state, the variable means is in the second position. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes longer.

Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second discrimination condition can be satisfied more easily than in the second state.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD4, a ball entry means for which the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a variable means that can be changed from the first position to a second position where it is easier for game balls to enter the ball; a specific determining means for determining whether the variable position is to be changed to the second position; and the variable means is configured to change to the second position based on the fact that the specific determining means determines that the variable position is to be changed from the first position to the second position. and variable control means for controlling such that the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. The gaming machine BD5 is characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BD1 to BD4, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means where the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and a first position where the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific discrimination condition, the specific discrimination means determines whether the variable means is to be varied from the first position to the second position. Based on the fact that the specific determining means determines that the position should be changed from the first position to the second position, the variable control means controls the variable means to change the position to the second position. The configuration is such that the period from the start of the first discrimination by the specific discrimination means to the end is more likely to be shorter in the first state than in the second state.

As a result, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations is shorter in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, since it is possible to obtain an opportunity to change the variable means to the second position more times, there is an effect that it is possible to easily cause the game ball to enter the ball in the first state.

In any of the game machines BD1 to BD3, a ball entry means is provided in a specific flow path and the second determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball, and a ball entry means is provided in which the game ball is difficult to flow down the specific flow path. an opening/closing means that is variable between a closed state in which the game ball is closed and an open state in which the game ball can flow down; and the opening and closing means is set to the open state based on the first state. , an opening/closing control means for setting the closed state based on the fact that the second state has been reached.

According to gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines BD1 to BD3, the following effects are achieved. That is, a ball entering means is provided in the specific flow path, which satisfies the second determination condition based on the game ball entering the ball. The opening/closing means is variable between a closed state in which the specific channel is closed so that the game ball is difficult to flow down, and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. Based on the first state, the opening/closing means is set to the open state by the opening/closing control means, and based on the second state, the opening/closing means is set to the closed state by the opening/closing control means. .

This has the effect of more reliably preventing the second discrimination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

In the game machine BD6, the opening/closing means is configured to be able to park a specific number of game balls on the upstream side of the opening/closing means when the opening/closing means is set to the closed state. Machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BD6, when the opening/closing means is set to the closed state, it is configured such that a specific number of game balls can be parked on the upstream side of the opening/closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the parked game balls can be allowed to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the first state in which the open state is set, there is an effect that the second discrimination condition can be more easily satisfied.

<Characteristic BE group> (Include information according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific performance in the fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub)
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying performance modes, a main control means for performing main control regarding the game, and a slave control means for performing control regarding the game based on commands output from the main control means. , the main control means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a discrimination result by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. a bonus game execution means; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means; and an operation in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time; information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means; and information corresponding to the dynamic display time that is different from the specific information. command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the slave control means, the slave control means receiving the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. a dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Based on this, specific effect execution means executes a specific effect that can be executed over one or more of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command. a specific performance end determination means that determines whether or not to end the specific performance based on the specific performance; It is characterized by comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command ends. Gaming machine BE1.

According to the gaming machine BE1, in the main control means, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, the determination is made that is advantageous to the player. A bonus game is executed by a bonus game execution means. The dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. The dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command that includes at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is outputted by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command outputted by the command output means is received by the command reception means, and the dynamic display time is dynamically adjusted based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command reception means. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or more dynamic display times is executed on the display means by the specific effect executing means. Based on specific information included in the dynamic display time command, a specific performance end determining means determines whether or not to end the specific performance. When the specific performance end determining means determines that the specific performance should be ended, the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means ends based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination. Until then, the specific effect is ended by the specific effect main hot water quantity means.

This has the effect that the specific performance can be suitably ended.

In the gaming machine BE1, when it is determined by the specific performance end determination means to end the specific performance, the specified performance is determined based on information according to the determination result by the determination means included in the dynamic display time command. A gaming machine BE2 characterized by comprising performance mode determining means for determining a performance mode until the specific performance is ended by the performance ending means.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1, when the specific performance end determining means determines that the specific performance should be ended, the game machine BE2 performs an operation according to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the performance mode determining means determines the performance mode until the specific performance is ended by the specific performance ending means, so the performance mode can be determined by taking into account the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the performance mode of the specific performance can be suitably set.

In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, the slave control means includes a power-on determining means for determining whether power is turned on to the gaming machine, and a power-on determining means that is included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on determining means determines that the power is turned on. a cut-off time determining means for determining whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power to the gaming machine was cut off, based on the specific information obtained; and execution of the specific performance by the cut-off time determining means. The gaming machine BE3 is characterized in that it comprises a post-input performance execution means for executing the specific performance based on the fact that it is determined that the game is in progress.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, in the slave control means, when the application of power to the gaming machine is determined by the application determination means, and the application of power is determined by the application determination means. Next, based on specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the cut-off time determining means determines whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power to the gaming machine was cut off. The specific performance is executed by the post-input performance execution means based on the fact that the interruption time determination means determines that the specific performance is being executed.

As a result, even if the power is cut off while the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect can be restarted, which prevents the player from being confused by the effect being different before and after the power is cut off. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine BE3 is characterized in that the specific performance ending means ends the specific performance executed by the post-input performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE3, the specific performance executed by the performance executing means after input is terminated by the specific performance ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned off during execution of the specific performance. Even in the case of being cut off, there is an effect that the specific performance can be suitably ended.

The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the specific performance execution means sets a predetermined specific period as a performance period of the specific performance.

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE5, a specific period predetermined by the specific performance execution means is set as the performance period of the specific performance, so that a simple process is performed when setting the specific performance. This has the effect of being able to be set.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the main control means includes a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means. a discrimination information storage means capable of storing at least the determined discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the command output means stores the discrimination information in the discrimination information storage means. The number of information command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information being displayed is output to the slave control means, and the specific effect execution means is configured to output the number of information command including information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information included in the number of information command. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines BE1 to BE5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored at least in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is outputted to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times less than or equal to the number of information of the discrimination information included in the information number command.

As a result, the specific performance can be executed within the range of the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so even though the dynamic display of the discrimination information is not executed, the specific This has the effect of suppressing the continuation of the performance.

In the gaming machine BE6, the information corresponding to the number of pieces of the discrimination information is stored during the period from when the specific condition is met until all the discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means are completed. A gaming machine BE7, characterized in that the gaming machine BE7 is constituted by information corresponding to the number of remaining pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE6, information corresponding to the number of pieces of discrimination information is used to perform all discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after a specific condition is established. Until the end of the process, the information is composed of information corresponding to the number of remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, so that the specific performance can be more reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means. This has the advantage that it can be executed within the range of the number of pieces of discrimination information or less.

<Characteristic BF group> (Depending on the winning pattern, the ease with which special drawing drawings are executed on the disadvantageous side is varied)
A first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter the ball, and first discrimination information is provided based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means. A first discrimination information acquisition means to acquire, a first discrimination means to execute a first discrimination using the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and the first direction. A second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a different second direction can easily enter the ball, and second discrimination information based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the second discrimination information and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means are used to make a second discrimination that is more likely to result in a discrimination result that is more unfavorable than the first discrimination. a second discriminating means to be executed; a discriminating information storage means capable of storing the second discriminating information acquired by the second discriminating information acquiring means up to a predetermined number of information; and the first discriminating means; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determination means, and a type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. , a first bonus game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to fire a game ball in the first direction than in the second direction during at least a predetermined period; and a first bonus game in which firing a game ball in the second direction rather than in the first direction during the predetermined period. A gaming machine BF1 characterized in that it is equipped with a type determining means for determining one type of the bonus game from among a plurality of types including a second bonus game that is more likely to be advantageous when fired.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines have advantages, such as by varying the gaming status given after a win or by varying the number of prize balls that can be won in each round, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees of intensity. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the type of hit.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball input means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquisition means is used. , the first determination is performed by the first determination means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Using the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, the second discrimination means performs a second discrimination that is more likely to result in a discrimination result that is more unfavorable than the first discrimination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means. The types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include a first bonus game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to fire the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction for at least a predetermined period of time; One type of bonus game is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including a second bonus game in which it is more likely to be advantageous to fire the game ball in the second direction.

As a result, the first bonus game, which is advantageous by firing the game ball in the first direction, is less likely to perform the second determination, which is likely to have an unfavorable determination result, so the first bonus game and the second bonus game It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage compared to games. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player expect that the first bonus game will be determined by the type determining means, the effect is that when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of bonus game and play the game. There is.

In the game machine BF1, the first game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter the ball and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. a variable ball entry means; a variable ball entrance means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter the ball; 2 variable ball entry means, and a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, The first bonus game is one in which the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means, and the second award game is the one in which the first variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state where the ball can be entered. A gaming machine BF2 characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is more easily changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than in a game.

According to gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BF1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first variable ball entrance means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter the ball. There is. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. In the first bonus game, the first variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed into a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means. In the second bonus game, the second variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed to a state where the ball can be entered than in the first bonus game.

This has the effect that during the execution of a bonus game, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the fired game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. be.

In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the gaming state after the bonus game ends is one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, and the first gaming state is set after the bonus game executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determining means. A gaming machine BF3 characterized in that a ratio set as a subsequent gaming state is higher than that of the second gaming state.

According to gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a gaming state after the bonus game ends, one gaming state is selected from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It is set by the setting means. The first gaming state has a higher rate than the second gaming state of being set as the gaming state after the bonus game executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determining means. It is configured to be.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player is allowed to play the game with the expectation that a specific determination result will not be obtained when the second determination means performs the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BF3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state at a rate where the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game ends. The game machine BF4 is characterized in that the rate is higher than that of the gaming machine BF4.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF3, the rate at which the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game ends is that the first gaming status is Since the ratio is configured to be higher than the set rate, the second determination performed based on the firing of the game ball in the second direction during the predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first game state It is possible to make the player think that he/she wants to avoid the setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the end of the second bonus game.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting the determination result by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means, and the suggestion executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the performance, when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means, either a first suggestion performance or a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance is determined, and the type determination means A gaming machine BF5 characterized by comprising: suggestion performance determining means for determining the first suggestion performance when the second bonus game is determined.

According to gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect that suggests the determination result by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means. As the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means, either the first suggestion performance or a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance is suggested. It is determined by the performance determining means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means, the first suggestion performance is determined by the suggestion performance determination means.

As a result, when the second suggestion performance is executed, it is confirmed that it is the first bonus game, so it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the second suggestion performance will be executed as the suggestion performance. There is an effect. Furthermore, since the first suggestion effect may also be executed in the first bonus game, when the first suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that it is the first bonus game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BF5, when the first suggestion performance is executed based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determining means, the suggestion performance execution means executes the first suggestion performance after the end of the first suggestion performance. A gaming machine BF6 is characterized in that it executes a second suggestion effect.

According to the game machine BF6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BF5, when the first suggestion performance is executed based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determining means, after the first suggestion performance ends. Since the second suggestion performance is executed by the suggestion performance execution means, when the first suggestion performance is executed, the player plays the game with the expectation that the second suggestion performance will be executed after the first suggestion performance ends. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines BF1 to BF6, when the game ball continues to be launched in the second direction for the predetermined period, the second determination information acquisition means determines that the second information is at least the predetermined number of pieces of information. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that the length of the period is such that the discrimination information is obtained.

According to the game machine BF7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BF1 to BF6, when the game becomes the second bonus game and continues to fire the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information, which is the upper limit, is stored, the second discrimination information can be executed a number of times corresponding to the upper limit after the second bonus game is finished.

In the game machine BF7, the game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position where the ball can easily enter, and is variable between a first state where the game ball can enter and a second state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. possible second variable ball entry means; variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state during the predetermined period; and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. a benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit based on the fact that the ball has been hit; and a second ball entering means that is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and receives the game ball that has reached the ball. A gaming machine BF8 characterized in that it is provided with a distributing means for distributing the ball to either a first flow path in which the ball is provided, and a second flow path in which the second variable entry means is provided.

According to gaming machine BF8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BF7, the following effects are achieved. A second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state where a game ball can enter a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can easily enter and a second state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter a position. is located. The state of the second variable ball entry means is varied to the first state for a predetermined period of time by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A first flow path in which a second ball entry means is provided, and a second flow path in which a second variable ball entry means is provided, for transporting the game ball to a position that can be reached by the game ball launched in the second direction. A sorting means is arranged for sorting to one of the two.

This has the effect of suppressing the downward direction of the game balls launched in the second direction from becoming biased.

Gaming machine BF9 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes game balls to the first channel and the second channel.

According to the game machine BF9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BF8, the game ball launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second bonus game is sent to the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. You can alternate pitches. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game balls launched in the second direction from biasingly entering the second ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Notification of jackpot type based on V winning)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and a game ball. A ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means, a first position that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a second position that makes entry of the game ball into the ball entry means more difficult than the first position. means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during execution of the bonus game, and when the bonus game is finished. As a subsequent game state, a first game state is set that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the bonus game, and a game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball does not enter the means; and a bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. Type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game; When at least the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the determined bonus game is provided when a game ball enters the ball input means. A gaming machine BG1 characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestive performance execution means that can be executed based on the suggested performance.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines are known that are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby awarding an advantageous winning game to the player. In addition, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes in addition to the symbols, and attempts to improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of interesting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines do not notify the gaming state after winning at the time of winning, but perform a performance that suggests the gaming state after winning during the winning state. Are known. However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that after a performance suggesting a gaming state after a winning is completed, the remaining winning games become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, the bonus game execution means allows the player to A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed. The variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time by the variable control means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game. As the game state after the end of the bonus game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the bonus game. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during execution of the bonus game, the game state setting means sets a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. Determined by type determining means. When at least the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball enters the ball entering means by the suggesting performance execution means that suggests the type of the determined bonus game. It is carried out on the basis of

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball entering means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is confirmed, attention is paid to the type of bonus game suggested by the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means. You can play the game using Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball enters the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition as the discrimination condition, and a second discrimination that is different from the first discrimination condition. a second discrimination means for performing a second discrimination based on the establishment of a condition, and the type determining means is configured to determine that the first discrimination by the first discrimination means has resulted in the specific discrimination result. As the type of the bonus game to be executed based on, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game, and the second As the type of the bonus game that is executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination, the ball landing means is used during execution of the bonus game than the first bonus game and the second bonus game. One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a third bonus game in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball, and the first bonus game is more popular than the second bonus game. The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the second determination is more likely to be executed during a predetermined period after the completion of the second determination.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG1, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The type determination means selects a plurality of types of bonus games, including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game, as the type of bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result obtained in the first determination by the first determination unit. One type is determined from among the types. On the other hand, as the type of bonus game that is executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means, during the execution of the bonus game than the first bonus game and the second bonus game. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types including at least the third bonus game in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entering means. In the first bonus game, the second determination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the bonus game ends than in the second bonus game.

As a result, once the first bonus game ends, it becomes more likely that an unfavorable second determination will be made within a predetermined period of time, so there is a strong expectation that the second bonus game will be decided when a specific determination result is obtained. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay more attention to the type of bonus game and play the game.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a specific performance is executed during a period from when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is started until at least a game ball enters the ball entry means. A gaming machine BG3 comprising means, wherein the suggesting performance execution means executes a performance suggesting the type of the bonus game as a result of the specific performance.

According to gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are achieved. A specific performance is executed by a specific performance executing means during a period from when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means. As a result of the specific performance, the suggestive performance execution means executes a performance that suggests the type of bonus game.

Thereby, the specific performance and the performance suggesting the type of bonus game can be presented as a series of performances, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for displaying a dynamic display of identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means in the display means, and the dynamic display means. The identification information that is dynamically displayed is identification information that allows one identification information to be determined from among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. and a determination means, wherein the identification information determination means determines the first identification information when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result, and the type determination means determines the first bonus game. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second bonus game is determined.

According to gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is the identification information from among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. Determined by the determining means. When the determination by the determination means yields a specific determination result and the type determination means determines the first bonus game, the first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means. On the other hand, when the second bonus game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information can be confirmed with the expectation that the second identification information determined only in the advantageous second bonus game will be displayed by the dynamic display. Furthermore, by configuring the first identification information to be displayed even in the case of the second bonus game, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation for the second bonus game when the first identification information is displayed. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine BG4, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is maintained as the second identification information. The gaming machine BG5 is characterized in that it is provided with at least a second suggestion effect that is variable to identification information.

According to gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is changed to second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

This has the effect that when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, the player can play the game with the expectation that the second suggestion effect will be executed.

The gaming machine BG5 includes a suggestion effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be performed, and the suggestive performance executing means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is executed. The first bonus game is determined by, and when the suggestion performance execution determining means determines that the suggestion performance should be executed, the first suggestion performance is executed, and the second bonus game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine BG6, characterized in that the second suggestion performance is executed when the suggestion performance execution determining means determines that the suggestion performance should be executed.

According to gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the type determining means determines the first bonus game or the second bonus game, the suggestion performance execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the fact that the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be executed. The first identification information is determined by the type determining means, and when the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be executed, the first suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means. On the other hand, when the type determining means determines the second bonus game and the suggestive performance execution determining means determines that the suggestive performance is to be executed, the second suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means.

Thereby, since the second suggestion performance is executed only when the second bonus game is determined, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the second suggestion performance will be executed.

In the gaming machine BG6, the suggested performance execution determining means executes the suggested performance more when the second bonus game is determined than when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine BG7 characterized in that the discrimination ratio is high.

According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG6, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the suggestion effect execution means has a higher effect than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the percentage of determination increases when the suggestion effect is executed, there is an effect that expectations for the second bonus game can be improved at the time when the suggestion effect is started.

In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination means in the display means, and the dynamic display. spanning a period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means and a period from the start of the bonus game until at least the variable means is varied to the first position. and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance based on the specific performance, and the suggestive performance execution means executes a suggestive performance that suggests the type of the bonus game as a result of the specific performance. Game machine BG8.

According to gaming machine BG8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BG1 or BG2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the display means capable of displaying identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from the start of the bonus game until at least the variable means is shifted to the first position. The specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means over the period. As a result of the specific performance, a suggestion performance that suggests the type of bonus game is executed by the suggestion performance execution means.

Thereby, the specific performance and the performance suggesting the type of bonus game can be presented as a series of performances, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BH group> (Depending on the type of jackpot, the ease of predicting the presence or absence of a pending series is varied)
A discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means; Type determination for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game as the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means. a first variable mode and a variable means that is variable in a predetermined variable manner; a first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the second variable mode; Based on this, a second variable control means that varies the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that has an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode; The first variable control means sets a first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be varied in the first variable mode, and the second bonus game variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than in the first variable state during the period from when the specific condition is satisfied; A game machine BH1 comprising:

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines enter a winning state when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on a game ball entering a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the winning type is notified as well as the winning type at the time of the winning, so after the notification is made, it is not just the notification. In some cases, the game becomes a monotonous task because the only task is to win the winnings. In addition, with some conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a win has occurred or a small win, which is a type of loss, from the presentation mode or the opening/closing operation of a specific prize opening. Gaming machines with this configuration are also known, and gaming machines that can make you expect to win even after the winning game ends are also known. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to determine whether a win or a small win has occurred, and there is a risk that the player's interest in playing the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type is selected by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game. It is determined. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in an out-of-order discrimination result that is different from a specific discrimination result, a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode are determined. In any one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. Based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, the second variable control means controls the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that has an appearance that is difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode. Variable. During the period from the end of the first bonus game until a predetermined specific condition is established, the first variable control means changes the first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be changed in the first variable mode to the variable state setting means. Set. On the other hand, a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state is set by the variable state setting means between the end of the second bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition. be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between a case where an incorrect judgment result is obtained after the end of the first bonus game and a case where a specific judgment result is obtained, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it may be difficult to identify whether or not a bonus game will be executed based on the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, if the result of determination is a failure after the end of the second bonus game, the second variable aspect is set, so the player can relatively identify whether or not the determination result is a failure from the variable aspect of the variable means. It becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to vary the ease of identifying the result of the out-of-play determination until the specific condition is met depending on the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The game machine BH1 is provided with a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the variable means has a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is lower than the first position. and a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the first variable aspect is such that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the passage of a first period. The second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine BH2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BH2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first position. The first variable mode includes a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode includes a second variable mode that is different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable manner in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the passage of time.

This has the effect that the player can easily identify whether the mode is the first variable mode or the second variable mode by checking the interval until the variable means is varied to the first position. There is.

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination condition that is different from the first discrimination condition. a second discriminating means for performing a second discriminating based on whether the first discriminating means holds true, and the first variable control means is configured to perform a second discriminating operation based on the determination by the first discriminating means that the first determining means The variable means is made to vary in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least one variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means is configured to vary the variable means in one of a plurality of variable modes including at least one variable mode and the second variable mode. The gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination.

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one variable mode among a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode based on the result of the discrimination by the first discrimination means being incorrect. The variable means is varied by the means. The second variable control means varies the variable means in a third variable manner based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the first discrimination means.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in accordance with the type of bonus game in the case where the judgment by the first judgment means results in an incorrect judgment result, so that the first judgment means Each time the determination is performed, the game can be played while paying attention to the variable aspect of the variable means.

In the gaming machine BH3, the type determining means determines the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determining means. A game machine BH4 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine BH4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BH3, the type of the bonus game to be executed is determined by the type determining means based on a specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determining means. Therefore, when the second determination by the second determination means is performed, it is possible to have the player play the game by paying attention to whether the first bonus game or the second bonus game is determined. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second discrimination condition from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BH5.

According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BH3 or BH4, the first discrimination condition is satisfied more than the second discrimination condition from the end of the bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect that the game can be played with more attention paid to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the game machines BH3 to BH5, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter the ball, and a first ball entry means provided in a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can be entered. a second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter; a second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can easily enter; Based on the start of the bonus game, the state of the bonus ball entry means to which the bonus is given is changed from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, to the state of the bonus ball entry means, from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. a variable control means for varying the game ball to a possible second state a predetermined number of times, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means; A gaming machine BH6, wherein the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BH3 to BH5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and the first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. Two ball entry means are provided. A bonus entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter the ball, and a predetermined award is given based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the bonus ball entry means is varied a predetermined number of times by the variable control means from a first state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball to a second state in which a game ball can enter the ball, based on the start of the award game. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. It holds true.

Thereby, by firing the game ball aiming at the bonus ball entering means during execution of the bonus game, it is possible to cause the game ball to also enter the first ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily satisfied when a bonus game is executed.

In the gaming machine BH6, a first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means; 1 discrimination information storage means capable of storing the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of information, and the specific condition is that the discrimination information is stored at the end of the bonus game. A gaming machine BH7, characterized in that the game machine BH7 is established based on the fact that the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means has been executed.

According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH6, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first discrimination information used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the end of the bonus game is executed.

Thereby, the first discrimination information acquired during the execution of the bonus game is stored in the discrimination information storage means, so there is an effect that the first discrimination can be executed efficiently.

In the gaming machine BH7, the gaming state after the bonus game ends is selected from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state determining means determines the game state as the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination. a first type determining means in which the rate of determining the third bonus game for which the first gaming state is determined by the determining unit is higher than the rate of determining the types of other bonus games; A second type of determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first bonus game and the second bonus game as the type of bonus game to be executed based on the determination result of determining means, and the game state determining means determines the second game state as the game state after the end of the bonus game when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached. A game machine BH8 characterized in that it is a game machine that makes decisions.

According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BH7, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a game state after the bonus game ends, one game state is selected from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. is determined by the game state determining means. As the type of the bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the first determination, the first type determination means determines a third bonus game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means. The rate at which the types of other bonus games are determined is higher than the rate at which the types of other bonus games are determined. As the type of bonus game to be executed based on a specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game. It is determined by a two-type determining means. When the first bonus game or the second bonus game is reached, the second game status is determined by the game status determining means as the gaming status after the bonus game ends.

As a result, if the first determination results in a specific determination result, there is a high probability that the first game state will be determined after the bonus game ends. Based on the information, the player can play the game in the hope that all the first determinations performed after the end of the bonus game result in wrong determinations. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that makes the player want to avoid a specific determination result, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BI group> (The ease of occurrence of pending series varies depending on the type of jackpot)
a first discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition; a second discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination means or the second determination means; and the bonus game execution means; The type of the bonus game to be executed is a first bonus game, and the first bonus game is determined by the second determining means between the end of the bonus game and the establishment of the specific condition. a second bonus game that is likely to result in a specific discrimination result; and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, the first bonus game and the second bonus game. The gaming machine BI1 is characterized in that the first gaming state has a higher setting ratio than the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game ends.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines have advantages, such as by varying the gaming status given after a win or by varying the number of prize balls that can be won in each round, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees of intensity. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the type of hit.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, the first determination means performs the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the determination is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2. Discrimination is performed by the discriminating means. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on a specific determination result obtained by the first determination unit or the second determination unit. The type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is a first bonus game, and the second determination unit determines the type of bonus game between the end of the bonus game and the establishment of a specific condition than the first bonus game. The type determination means determines one type of bonus game from among a plurality of types including at least a second bonus game that is likely to have a specific determination result. As the gaming state after the bonus game ends, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. . In both the first bonus game and the second bonus game, the setting ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the bonus game ends.

As a result, depending on whether it is the first bonus game or the second bonus game, the possibility that the determination by the second determining means will reach a specific determination result before the specific condition is satisfied is different. There is an effect that the player can pay more attention to the type of bonus game determined by the type determining means and play the game.

In game BI1, the type determining means selects one of the plurality of bonus games including at least the first bonus game, the second bonus game, and a third bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other types of bonus games. The type of the bonus game of 1 is determined from 1, and the third bonus game is determined when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the second discrimination means rather than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. A gaming machine BI2 characterized in that the rate determined by the type determining means is high.

According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BI1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the type determining means selects one bonus game type from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game, a second bonus game, and a third bonus game that is more disadvantageous to the player than other bonus game types. Determined by When the determination by the second determining means yields a specific determination result, the third bonus game is determined by the type determining means at a higher rate than the determination by the first determining means.

As a result, if the determination by the second determination means reaches a specific determination result, the probability that an unfavorable third bonus game will be determined increases, so it is hoped that the determination by the second determination means will not result in a specific determination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation of the first bonus game, rather than the second bonus game, which is likely to result in a specific determination result in the determination by the second determining means.

In the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the first gaming state is the second gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is determined when the first determining means or the second determining means executes the determination. , and the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition from the end of the second bonus game until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BI3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BI1 or BI2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the first gaming state is configured such that when the first determining means or the second determining means performs the determination, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state. . From the end of the second bonus game until the specific condition is met, the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discrimination condition.

As a result, in the first gaming state, the probability of a specific determination result is higher than in the second gaming state, so it becomes easier to play the bonus games consecutively at relatively short intervals. Therefore, when the first gaming state is entered, there is an effect that the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines BI1 to BI3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; A discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and one piece of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. , and erasing means for erasing said one discrimination information from said discrimination information storage means, said specific condition being that the number of pieces of said discrimination information stored in said discrimination information storage means has become zero. A gaming machine BI4 characterized in that it is established based on the following.

According to gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. Based on the fact that one piece of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, the one piece of discrimination information is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The specific condition is established based on the fact that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero.

Thereby, until the number of information in the discrimination information becomes 0, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is likely to result in a specific discrimination result, so the game is played while paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines BI1 to BI4, a first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a second ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second bonus game is determined based on the fact that the bonus game is started. A game machine BI5 characterized in that, at least for a subsequent predetermined period, it is more likely to be advantageous for a player to fire a game ball in the second direction than in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, while the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. Established based on. In the second bonus game, at least for a predetermined period after the bonus game is started, it is more likely to be advantageous for the player to fire the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction.

Thereby, in the case of the second bonus game, by firing the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period of time, the game ball can also be caused to enter the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a state can be created in which the second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied after the end of the bonus game.

In the game machine BI5, the first switch is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. a variable ball entry means; a variable ball entrance means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball; 2 variable ball entry means, and a benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, The gaming machine BI6 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which a game ball can be entered at least during the predetermined period during execution of the second bonus game.

According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BI5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first variable ball entrance means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball, and is variable between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. has been done. A second variable ball entry means that can be varied between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball. There is. A predetermined privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The second variable ball entry means is variable so that the game ball can enter the ball for at least a predetermined period during execution of the second scoring game.

Thereby, during a predetermined period during execution of the second benefit game, a game ball can be caused to be launched in the second direction for a player who wants to obtain a predetermined benefit. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second ball entry means during a predetermined period of time.

In the gaming machine BI6, the first variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which the game ball can enter at least during the predetermined period during execution of the first bonus game. Game machine BI7.

According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BI6, during the execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball entry means is variable to a state in which a game ball can enter, at least for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, during a predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game, a player who wants to obtain a predetermined privilege can be caused to shoot a game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering means during a predetermined period during execution of the first bonus game.

In any of the game machines BI5 to BI7, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means; Discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, the game ball being continuously launched in the second direction for the predetermined period. In the gaming machine BI8, the period is such that the second discrimination information of at least the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BI5 to BI7, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is stored by the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. The predetermined period is configured to have a length such that at least a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information storage means when the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction.

Thereby, when the second bonus game is played, there is an effect that the discrimination information can be reliably stored in the discrimination information storage means up to the upper limit of the number of pieces of information.

In the game machine BI8, the game ball launched in the second direction is transferred to a first flow path in which the second ball entry means is provided and a second flow path in which the second variable ball entry means is provided. A gaming machine BI9 is characterized in that it is equipped with an allocating means capable of allocating to either of the following.

According to the game machine BI9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BI8, the game ball launched in the second direction passes through the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. Since the distributing means distributes the game balls to either one of the second flow paths provided, the game balls launched in the second direction may biasly enter the second ball entering means, or vice versa. This has the effect of suppressing the ball entering the variable ball entry means biasedly.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Special 1 provides a state in which the game is played, a state in which it is easy to be given a time saver and a state in which it is difficult to be given a time saver)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. a variable control means for making the variable pattern variable by one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern; a determining means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means; and a determining means by the determining means. A bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based at least on a specific determination result in the determination, and a game state after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. , a first gaming state, a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and a third gaming state different from either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, wherein the first gaming state and the second gaming state are set by the variable means in the first variable pattern by the variable control means than in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BJ1 is characterized in that the rate at which the changes are made is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if an advantageous gaming state is not set after the end of a winning state, the player's motivation for playing decreases and it becomes easy for him or her to quit playing. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability variation function and has only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the player may be satisfied with the game by being able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to make the player want to continue playing the game in the normal game state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BJ1, there is a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and a first position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than at the first position. The variable means is configured to be variable at the second position. The variable means controls, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern. It is varied by one variable pattern among the plurality of patterns including at least one variable pattern. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means at least based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. be done. The gaming state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is a first gaming status, a second gaming status different from the first gaming status, and both the first gaming status and the second gaming status. One of the plurality of gaming states including at least a different third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The first gaming state and the second gaming state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than in the third gaming state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are characterized in that the probability of the specific determination result being determined by the determining means is a common specific probability. Machine BJ2.

According to the gaming machine BJ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ1, the probability that the first gaming state and the second gaming state will have a specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means is a common specific probability. This has the effect of making it more difficult for players to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, a second ball entering means different from the ball entering means, a second determining means that performs a determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game based on the specific determination result obtained by the second determination means, and the first game state is determined by the second determination means. When the determination results in the specific determination result, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, and the second gaming state is determined by the second determining means. The gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that when the specific determination result is obtained, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. .

According to gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the second determining means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means different from the ball entering means. A bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the second determination means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the second determining means in the first gaming state, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, while the second gaming state is set in the second gaming state. When the determination by the determining means yields a specific determination result, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

As a result, the third gaming state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations that the game will turn out to be true.

In the gaming machine BJ3, the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a third ratio higher than the first ratio when the bonus game is executed. The game machine BJ4 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine BJ4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ3, when a bonus game is executed in the third gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets a third ratio higher than the first ratio in the third gaming state. Therefore, when the third gaming state is entered, the bonus game and the third gaming state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third gaming state is reached.

In the gaming machine BJ4, a game in which the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result in the second gaming state. A state transition means is provided, and the third game state is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means when the bonus game is executed. The gaming machine BJ5 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BJ4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from a specific determination result. When the bonus game is executed in the third gaming state, either the second gaming state or the third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

As a result, the first gaming state is not set when a specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, so even after the third gaming state ends, at least the gaming state transition means It is possible to make the player think of continuing the game until the second gaming state is transferred to the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ5, the gaming state transition means is based on, as the specific condition, that the discrimination by the discrimination means has consecutively resulted in an out-of-order discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine BJ6 characterized in that the gaming machine BJ6 is configured to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ5, the specific condition is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has repeatedly resulted in an incorrect discrimination result different from a specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times. Since the second gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the gaming state transition means, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of successive failure determination results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is shifted based on the fact that the discriminating result has been obtained over the first number of determinations by the determining means. The first type of game state to be transferred to the first game state by the means and the second number of times which is greater than the first number of times are determined, and the game state transition means causes the first type of game state to be transferred to the first game state based on the fact that the result is the out-of-order determination result. A gaming machine BJ7 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type to be transferred to one gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BJ6, as the type of the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the discriminating result of the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means was obtained. The first type is transferred to the first gaming state by the gaming state transferring means based on the first type, and the second number of times which is greater than the first number of times is determined to be an incorrect result. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type that is transferred to the first gaming state, it is possible to ensure that the second gaming state continues for more determinations. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BJ7 includes a display means capable of displaying a performance mode, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display the first performance mode. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, it is possible to cause the display means to display a second performance mode different from the first performance mode. The first performance mode is displayed from the time when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means until the result of the out-of-order determination is reached for the second number of times. A gaming machine BJ8, comprising: a limiting means for limiting.

According to gaming machine BJ8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BJ7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first performance mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The restriction means restricts the display of the first performance mode from the time the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the second result of determination of failure is reached.

As a result, even if an incorrect determination result is obtained for the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first production mode will not be displayed until the second time, so it will be easier for the player to It becomes difficult to identify whether the game is in the second game state of one type or the second game state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second gaming state, it is possible to at least make the player want to continue playing the game until the second determination is made, which has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine. be.

In the gaming machine BJ8, a third display mode for displaying the first production mode based on the fact that the second gaming state has been determined a second number of times since the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BJ9 characterized by comprising a display control means.

According to the gaming machine BJ9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BJ8, the third display is displayed based on the fact that the second gaming state has been determined to be out of order for the second number of times since the second gaming state was set by the gaming state setting means. Since the first performance presentation mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a period in which it is unclear whether the game is in the first game state or the second game state from becoming too long.

A gaming machine BJ10, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BJ10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BJ4 to BJ9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that a specific determination result is achieved in the second gaming state. This has the effect of making you more excited about what will happen.

<Characteristic BK group> (Configuration that makes special 2 difficult to turn while saving time)
Based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state a game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least; a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter; and a first ball into which a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a variable means that is variable between a position and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position; and a variable operation of the variable means to the ball entering means in the first gaming state. controlling with a first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, in the second gaming state, controlling with a second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and in the third gaming state, A game machine BK1 characterized by comprising: variable control means that controls with a third control that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if an advantageous gaming state is not set after the end of a winning state, the player's motivation for playing decreases and it becomes easy for him or her to quit playing. There was a problem.

In particular, in a type of gaming machine that is not equipped with a so-called probability variation function and has only two types of gaming states, a time-saving gaming state and a normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the player may be satisfied with the game by being able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to make the player want to continue playing the game in the normal game state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state The game state setting means sets one game state from among a plurality of at least a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the third game state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than at the first position. There is. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means with the first control in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first gaming state, and the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means in the second gaming state. In the third game state, the game ball is controlled by the variable control means in the second control in which it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the ball, and in the third game state it is controlled by the variable control means in the third control to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball into the ball entering means.

As a result, the degree of advantage is made different between the first game state, in which control is executed to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering means, and the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that it can be done.

Gaming machine BK2, wherein the second control makes it easier for the variable means to be placed in the first position than the first control.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BK1, the second control is configured such that the variable means is more easily placed in the first position than the first control, so the second control has the following effects: Even though the variable means is easier to be placed in the first position than in the first control, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entering means, as in the first control.

The gaming machine BK2 includes a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a determining means that performs a determination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, and the variable control means is configured to perform the determination by the determining means. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result, and the first gaming state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is determined with a probability of 1, and the second gaming state and the third gaming state are determined by the determining means with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that it has a specific determination result.

According to gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BK2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means varies the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means. In the first gaming state, the determination by the determining means yields a specific determination result with a first probability, while in the second and third gaming states, the determination by the determining means yields a specific determination result with a higher probability than the first probability. A specific discrimination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the second game state and the third game state have different easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means, even though the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is common. There is an effect.

The game machine BK3 is provided with a firing means capable of firing game balls at a firing interval equal to or more than a predetermined interval, and the second game state is determined by the variable means when the determining means reaches the specific determination result. A period from when the variable means is varied to the first position is set as a first period, and a period from when the variable means is varied to the first position until it is varied to the second position is set as a second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is likely to be shorter than the first period, and 1. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the firing means at the predetermined interval after the passing game ball reaches the variable means is A gaming machine BK4 characterized in that the gaming machine BK4 is likely to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BK3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game balls are fired by the firing means at firing intervals of a predetermined interval or more. In the second game state, the period from when the determination means reaches a specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and the variable means is changed to the first position. The period from when the position is changed to when the position is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game balls fired by the firing means at predetermined intervals after the passing game ball reaches the variable means is the first period and the second period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

As a result, even if the game balls are continuously fired toward the passing means in the second gaming state, the game balls can reach the ball entering means while the variable means is being varied to the first position. can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be made into a special state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means even though the variable means is easily changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BK4, the third gaming state is such that the period from when the determination means reaches the specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is longer than the first period. and a period from when the variable means is varied to the first position until it is varied to the second position is set to the second period, and the passing The period from when the game ball passes through the means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entry means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine BK5 is characterized in that it is likely to be shorter than the sum of.

According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BK4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the third gaming state, the period from when the determination means reaches a specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a third period that is longer than the first period, The period from when the variable means is varied to the first position until it is varied to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and is equal to the sum of the third period and the second period. It becomes easier to shorten the length.

As a result, in the third game state, if a specific determination result is obtained in the determination performed based on passing through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be progressed efficiently.

In any of gaming machines BK1 to BK5, a second ball entering means that is different from the ball entering means and into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering the ball entering means; a first determination means that performs a first determination; a second determination means that performs a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the determination by the second determination means that the determination result is a predetermined first determination result; The setting means is configured to set the first game state at a first rate as a game state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the fact that the first determination result is obtained in the second determination in the first game state. 3 gaming states are set, and the gaming state after the end of the bonus game that is executed based on the fact that the second determination in the second gaming state is the first determination result, the first The gaming machine BK6 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on the determination by the first determination unit or the determination by the second determination unit that results in a predetermined first determination result. As the game state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state, the third game state is set at the first rate by the game state setting means. Set. The gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the second determination resulting in the first determination result in the second gaming state. A third gaming state is set by the means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with strong expectations for a specific determination result during the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BK6, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the third gaming state. A gaming machine BK7, characterized in that the third gaming state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

According to the gaming machine BK7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK6, as a gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed based on the first determination result in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is determined by the gaming state setting means at the third ratio higher than the first ratio, in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is likely to be returned after the bonus game ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third gaming state is reached.

In gaming machine BK7, gaming machine BK8 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BK8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BK7, the second ratio is configured at a higher ratio than the third ratio, so that the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations.

<Characteristic BL group> (mechanism that allows games to be played using a gaming method that makes it easier to be alternately assigned to two routes by the assigning means and a gaming method that makes it easier to be assigned to one route)
An operating means that can be operated by a player, a firing means that can fire a game ball according to the operation content of the operating means, a first flow path through which a game ball fired by the firing means can pass, and While the first condition that can be established by operating the first operation content on the second flow path different from the first flow path and the operation means is satisfied, the game ball that has reached the second flow path is A second condition is established that can be satisfied when a state is established in which it is easy to alternately distribute the fluid into the first flow path and the second flow path, and an operation with a second operation content that is different from the operation with the first operation content is performed. A game machine BL1 characterized in that it is provided with a sorting means that is in a state where it is easier to sort the arriving game balls to the first flow path than while the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes game balls to one of two types of channels provided on the board surface. In such a conventional game machine, the game balls that have reached the distribution member are distributed one by one into two types of channels, making it possible to flow the game balls down the two types of channels in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-231902).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the game balls that reach the distribution member are alternately distributed into two types of channels regardless of the player's playing method, so there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There was a risk that the player's interest in playing the game would be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BL1, the game ball is fired by the firing means in accordance with the operation details of the operation means that can be operated by the player. A first flow path through which a game ball fired by the firing means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operation means is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is such that the arriving game ball is placed in the first flow path and the second condition is satisfied. This makes it easy to alternately distribute the liquid to the flow path. While the second condition, which can be satisfied by performing an operation with a second operation content different from the first operation content, is satisfied, the state of the distribution means is changed from that while the first condition is satisfied. The game ball that has also reached the state is likely to be sorted into the first flow path.

As a result, the way in which game balls are distributed by the distribution means can be changed depending on the content of the player's operation, so there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be improved.

In the gaming machine BL1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at a first firing interval, and the operation of the second operation content is executed. The gaming machine BL2 is characterized in that the firing means fires game balls at a second firing interval that is longer than the first firing interval.

According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at the first firing interval. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is fired by the firing means at a second firing interval that is longer than the first firing interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change the way the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by simply changing the firing interval, which has the effect of increasing convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine BL2, the sorting means at least defines a first movable range in which arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the first channel, and a second movable range in which the arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the second channel. The distributing means is configured to be movable in a specific movable range including the first movable range, and the distributing means distributes the game balls to the first flow path while being arranged in the first movable range. The game ball is configured to be easily movable in the movable range, and to be easily movable in the first movable range by distributing the game ball to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range. Game machine BL3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine BL3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the distributing means is movable within a specific movable range that includes at least a first movable range in which arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the first flow path, and a second movable range in which the arriving game balls are more likely to be sorted into the second flow path. do. By distributing the game balls to the first channel in a state arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can easily move to the first movable range.

This has the effect of realizing an operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first channel and the second channel by causing the game balls to reach the distributing means in succession.

In the game machine BL3, when the distribution means distributes the game balls to the first flow path and moves them to the second movable range, the distribution means is arranged such that when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and moved to the second movable range, the distribution means is configured to distribute the game balls to the first flow path, and to The gaming machine BL4 is characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval.

According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL3, when the distributing means moves to the second movable range after distributing the game balls to the first channel, the length of the second firing interval is shorter than the second firing interval. , and since the distributing means moves to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first firing interval, if the game balls are continued to be fired at a firing interval equal to or longer than the second firing interval, the distributing means There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set to the first movable range.

In the game machine BL4, the distributing means is configured to easily move from the first movable range to the second movable range depending on the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path, and distribute the game balls to the second flow path. The game machine BL5 is characterized in that the game ball can easily move from the second movable range to the first movable range depending on the mass of the game ball.

According to the game machine BL5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BL4, the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range. The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the second movable range to the first movable range, so a power source for moving the distribution means can be eliminated. There is an effect.

In the game machine BL4 or BL5, the distribution means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and is configured to return to the predetermined position when the game ball does not reach the predetermined period. A gaming machine BL6 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BL4 or BL5, the distributing means is configured such that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and the distributing means is arranged such that the game ball is placed in the distributing means. On the other hand, since the distributing means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the predetermined period of time has not been reached, the distributing means is maintained in the first movable range unless the game balls are distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game balls that first reach the distribution means can be reliably distributed to the first channel.

In any of the gaming machines BL1 to BL6, a passage means provided at a position through which game balls sorted into the second flow path can pass, a passage means through which the game balls that have flown down the first flow path, A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down a channel can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position. a second position in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the entry ball means; a variable means that is variable; a determining means that performs determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means; and the determining means. A gaming machine BL7 characterized in that it comprises variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination.

According to gaming machine BL7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BL1 to BL6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the passage means is provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second channel can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the first channel and the game balls flowing down the second channel can enter. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. has been done. The determination by the determining means is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means. The variable control means varies the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determining means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BL7, based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state are established. a third gaming state; and gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state, and the variable control means controls the ball entering means to play the game in the first gaming state. The variable means is controlled to be variable in a first variable mode in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball, and in a second variable mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means in the second gaming state. In a third variable mode, the variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third gaming state, the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode. A gaming machine BL8 characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable.

According to the gaming machine BL8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL7, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions, a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from a plurality of gaming states including at least the gaming state. In the first game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a first variable mode in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. In the second game state, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is varied in a second variable manner in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. In the third game state, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

Thereby, a plurality of game states are provided in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entering means is different, so there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine BL8, the first gaming state is one in which the specific discrimination result is determined by the discriminating means with a first probability, and the second gaming state is one in which the discriminating means determines that the specific discrimination result is higher than the first probability. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific discrimination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three gaming states are those in which the specific discrimination result is obtained with the second probability by the discrimination means. BL9.

According to the gaming machine BL9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BL8, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first gaming state, the determining means yields a specific determination result with a first probability. In the second gaming state, the determining means yields a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. In the third gaming state, the determining means produces a specific determination result with a second probability.

As a result, a novel operation is realized in which the ease of entering the ball into the ball entering means is different between the second and third gaming states, even though the probability of a specific determination result is the same. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristic BM group> (It will be advantageous to pass through the time savings)
a discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based at least on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discrimination result; As a game state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is completed, one of a plurality of game states includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state. a gaming state setting means for setting a gaming state, and a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of execution of the bonus game is satisfied in a state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine BM1 comprising: gaming state transition means for shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the above.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are set to either a normal gaming state or an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the normal gaming state is set upon the end of a winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state occurs. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines have a structure in which, in addition to the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, a third gaming state is provided which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. By configuring the system so that either the advantageous gaming state or the third gaming state is set after the winning state ends, it is possible for players to continue playing the game at least until the third gaming state ends. There are things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of drawings are completed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state normally shifts to the normal gaming state; There is a problem in that it becomes difficult to improve the player's interest after the player has played the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BM1, the bonus game execution means provides a benefit advantageous to the player based at least on the fact that the determination by the determination means that is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition yields a specific determination result. The game is executed. As the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is finished, one of the plurality of gaming states includes at least a first gaming status and a second gaming status that is more advantageous than the first gaming status. A gaming state is set by a gaming state setting means. In a state where the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of the execution of the bonus game. The game state is transferred by the game state transfer means.

This allows the player to play the game in the expectation that a specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first gaming state, which has the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game in the first gaming state.

In the gaming machine BM1, the specific transition condition is a determination performed by the determining means after the first gaming state is set, a predetermined specific number of times, and a different determination result from the specific determination result. The gaming machine BM2 is characterized in that it is established when .

According to the gaming machine BM2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM1, the determination by the determining means executed after being set to the first gaming state is performed for a predetermined specific number of times, and an out-of-order determination that is different from a specific determination result. Since a specific transition condition is satisfied when the result is a negative result, in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which each time the determination by the determination means is performed, the expectation is that the result will be a negative determination result. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means from the first position. a variable means capable of being changed to a second position in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball; and a first variable control in which the variable means is easily changed to the first position in the first gaming state; variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the first position in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state, and the discrimination condition is set for the ball entering means. The gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that this is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first position. In the first game state, the first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be varied to the first position is executed by the variable control execution means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more variable to the first position than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control execution means. The determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

This has the effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the variable means will be changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine BM3, the gaming state setting means selects one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. In the third gaming state, the variable control executing means makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than under the first variable control and the second variable control. The game machine BM4 is characterized in that it executes a third variable control.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BM3, the following effects are achieved. That is, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state. . In the third game state, the third variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control is executed by the variable control execution means.

Thereby, in the third gaming state, it becomes easier for the determining means to perform the determination, so that the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation of entering the third gaming state.

In the gaming machine BM4, when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a first rate as the gaming state after the bonus game ends. is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the third gaming state is set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Game machine BM5.

According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the first ratio as the gaming state after the bonus game ends. The third gaming state is set in If a specific determination result is obtained in the gaming state, the third gaming state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, in the first gaming state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the game is played in the expectation that a specific transition condition will be satisfied rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state at a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. The game machine BM6 is characterized in that it is a game machine that allows settings to be made.

According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BM5, the gaming state setting means sets a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game executed in the third gaming state. Since the third gaming state is set, in the third gaming state, it becomes easy to enter the third gaming state again after the end of the bonus game. Therefore, by entering the third gaming state, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction.

In any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, a second bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on an entry area into which a game ball can enter and a game ball that enters the entry area. A gaming machine BM7 characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to the gaming machine BM7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM6, the bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area. , the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BN group> (Small winnings that are likely to be disadvantageous after the small winning ends if you win during the time saving)
a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; and a first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on a first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. and one type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means from among a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. a type determining means for determining the type of the game; and a type determination means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on a second determination result different from the first determination result determined by the determination means. A second advantageous game execution means for executing a second advantageous game, and a first game state as a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed. is a different second gaming state; and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a different second gaming state; and a gaming state terminating means for terminating the first gaming state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the case of the determination result, and the specific condition is determined by the determining means. The first discrimination result is the first discrimination result, and the type determination means determines the first type, and the type determination means determines the first type. The gaming machine BN1 is characterized in that it is configured to be more easily established when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or moved), and the game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device that is released during a specific game (such as a small winning game) that is executed based on the game ball enters a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that can award bonus games (jackpot games, etc.) that are advantageous to the player by passing (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if a small winning game is executed, if the game ball cannot enter the inside of the V winning device, the bonus game will not be executed. If the player is unable to let the ball enter the ball, there is a risk that the player's interest in playing the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BN1, the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player is the first advantageous game based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The advantageous game is executed by the advantageous game execution means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, the type determination means selects one from among a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. The type is determined. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means has resulted in a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the second advantageous game execution means executes a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game. Ru. As a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One gaming state is set by the state setting means. When the determination by the determination means executed in the first gaming state results in a determination result other than the second determination result, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is the gaming state ending means. is terminated by If the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result and the type determination means determines the first type, the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result, and the type determination means determines the second type. The configuration is such that the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when .

This has the effect that when the first determination result is obtained, the player can play the game in anticipation that the first type will be determined.

In the gaming machine BN1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means terminates the first gaming state if the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that the gaming machine BN2 is configured to cause a transition from the game state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BN1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. If the specific conditions are met, the game state ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state.

This allows the player to play the game in the first gaming state with the expectation that the specific condition will be met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine BN1 or BN2 is provided with a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means executes a game into the ball entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the ball entering the ball, and the game state ending means executes the first advantageous game of the first type a first number of times in one of the first game states. The first gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the second type has been executed a second number of times less than the first number of times in the first gaming state of one. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the timing.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BN1 or BN2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game execution means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area where the ball can enter based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . The first gaming state is ended by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the first type has been executed the first number of times in the first gaming state of No. 1. The first gaming state is ended by the gaming state ending means based on the fact that the two types of first advantageous games have been executed a second number of times smaller than the first number of times.

As a result, during execution of the first advantageous game, it is possible to execute the second advantageous game by letting the game ball enter the ball entry area, or to satisfy a specific condition without making the ball enter the ball entry area. This has the effect of realizing a gameplay that allows you to choose what you want.

In the game machine BN3, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on a game ball entering the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. The gaming machine BN4 is characterized in that, when the second advantageous game ends, the first gaming state is determined as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game, so it is difficult to determine whether the first advantageous game is of the first type or the second type. Choose whether to make more serious predictions and execute the second advantageous game by letting the game ball enter the ball entry area, or to expect a specific condition to be met without letting the ball enter the ball entry area. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BN4, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on a game ball entering the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. The gaming machine BN5 is characterized in that, when the second advantageous game ends, the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game.

According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first type of first advantageous game. In this case, the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the end of the second advantageous game, so if the first advantageous game is of the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entering area. While there is a possibility that a specific condition is satisfied and the transition to the second game state occurs, if it is the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by letting the ball enter the ball entry area, and then the second advantageous game is executed. 2. Transition to gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine BN5, based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, a common specific performance is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine BN6 characterized in that it is equipped with a specific performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine BN6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN5, the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means is based on the first determination result obtained by the determining means. Since a common specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the first type and the second type based on the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more seriously predict whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The game state setting means sets one game state from a plurality of at least three game states, and the game state setting means sets a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As a state, the third gaming state is set at a first rate, and as a gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state ends, a second gaming state higher than the first rate is set. The gaming machine BN7 is characterized in that the third gaming state is set at a ratio of .

According to gaming machine BN7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines BN1 to BN6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state setting means selects one out of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The gaming state is set. As the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the first gaming state ends, the third gaming state is set at the first rate by the gaming state setting means, while the third gaming state is set at the first rate, while the second advantageous game executed in the second gaming state As a gaming state after the second advantageous game ends, a third gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

This has the effect that the player can play the game with stronger expectations that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state at a third ratio higher than the first ratio as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state ends. A gaming machine BN8 characterized in that three gaming states are set.

According to the gaming machine BN8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN7, the gaming state setting means sets a higher percentage than the first as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state ends. Since the third gaming state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third gaming state is reached, the second advantageous game and the third gaming state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction when the third gaming state is entered.

In gaming machine BN8, gaming machine BN9 is characterized in that the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine BN9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BN8, since the second ratio is higher than the third ratio, when the second gaming state is entered, the second advantageous game This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations that the game will be executed.

<Characteristic CA group> (Invincible zone against falling lottery)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a determination means therefor. a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the display means; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; a state setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; and the storing means before the determination is performed by the determining means. A gaming machine has a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination based on the information stored in the gaming machine, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. The performance execution means is configured to be capable of executing a period performance corresponding to a specific period in which the second gaming state is continuously set in accordance with the result of the determination by the advance determination means. The gaming machine CA1 is characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. By setting a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a higher lottery probability, the player becomes interested in being able to switch to a more advantageous gaming state and continues to be set in an advantageous gaming state. A structure has been proposed in which the interest in the game is improved by the sense of anticipation (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, by utilizing a configuration in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the player can continuously set a gaming state advantageous to the player at a more accurate and early timing, or set an unfavorable gaming state to the player. There has been a need for a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming by suggesting information related to whether to switch to a gaming state. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention first determines the period in which a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, and then executes a performance based on information regarding the determination result, thereby improving the game. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine CA1, a period performance corresponding to a specific period is executed according to the determination result of the advance determination means, so that a period in which a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set due to the period performance to be executed is set. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CA1, the gaming machine CA2 is characterized in that the period effect is executed corresponding to a period in which one piece of the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA1, the period effect is executed corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information 1, so the period in which the identification information 1 is dynamically displayed is as follows. The content of the period effect is valid (for example, when a period effect that suggests that the setting of the second gaming state is continued is executed, the identification information of 1 being executed is dynamically displayed until the end of the period) , it is possible to quickly recognize that the second gaming state is continuously set).

In the gaming machine CA1 or CA2, when the second gaming state is set, the state setting means determines whether the second gaming state is set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, based on the determination result of the determining means. A gaming machine CA3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to set the first gaming state.

In the gaming machine CA3, the second gaming state is set before the dynamic display of the identification information starts, so each time the identification information is dynamically displayed, the player has to check whether the gaming state has changed or not. It has the effect of creating interest in

<Characteristic CB group> (New game play with the number of normal maps)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and first information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the information; a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance means; a storage means in which the first information and the second information are respectively stored; a first determination is performed based on the first information stored in the storage means; and a second determination is performed based on the second information. A first benefit can be granted based on a determination means capable of performing the determination and a result of the first determination by the determination means being a specific first determination result, and a first benefit can be granted based on the fact that the result of the second determination is a specific first determination result. A gaming machine comprising: a benefit granting means capable of granting the second benefit that is different from the first benefit based on the second determination result; and a flow path switching means capable of switching the flow path through which the game balls flow according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entering means, and the flow path switching means includes: A first guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the first ball entering means and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided to the second ball entering means can be set by switching the flow path. A game machine CB1 characterized in that it is a gaming machine CB1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. A gaming machine is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter on the surface of the game board, and the entertainment of the game is improved by changing the ball entrance into which the game balls enter depending on the flow path through which the game balls flow. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In such a gaming machine, the flow path through which the game ball flows tends to be constant, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by changing the flow path through which the game balls flow down depending on the conditions, the ball entrance into which the game balls enter can be changed. To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with the game early by preventing the game from becoming monotonous by letting the ball enter the ball mouth.

According to the game machine CB1, the first guiding state and the second guiding state are switched depending on the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entering means, so the guiding state changes depending on the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entering means. By arbitrarily switching the ball entering means to control the ball entering means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine CB1 includes a variable means that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the specific ball entering means and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and the variable means. variable control means for varying the state from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; A first opening in which the means is varied to the open state, and a second opening in which the variable means is varied to the open state during a period in which it is difficult for the first number of balls to enter the ball. A game machine CB2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine CB2.

According to the game machine CB2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine CB1, it is possible to switch between a state in which it is possible to enter the first number or more balls and a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, so that the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entry means can be changed. The effect is that the number can be controlled.

A gaming machine CB3 in the gaming machine CB2, wherein the variable control means executes the first opening when the second guiding state is set.

According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CB2, when the second guiding state is set, it is possible to cause more than the first number of balls to enter the specific ball entering means, and the player can This has the effect of making it easier to intentionally switch the guidance state.

<Characteristic CC group> (General figure count control)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and first information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the information; a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring the second information based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance means; a storage means in which the first information and the second information are respectively stored; a first determination is performed based on the first information stored in the storage means; and a second determination is performed based on the second information. A first benefit can be granted based on a determination means capable of performing the determination and a result of the first determination by the determination means being a specific first determination result, and a first benefit can be granted based on the fact that the result of the second determination is a specific first determination result. A gaming machine comprising: a benefit granting means capable of granting the second benefit that is different from the first benefit based on the second determination result; and an acquisition ratio variable means for varying the acquisition ratio of the first information and the second information according to the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine CC1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. A gaming machine is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter on the surface of the game board, and the entertainment of the game is improved by changing the ball entrance into which the game balls enter depending on the flow path through which the game balls flow. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233181). In such a gaming machine, the flow path through which the game ball flows tends to be constant, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, by changing the flow path through which the game balls flow down depending on the conditions, the ball entrance into which the game balls enter can be changed. To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with the game early by preventing the game from becoming monotonous by letting the ball enter the ball mouth.

According to the gaming machine CC1, since the acquisition ratio of the first information and the second information can be varied depending on the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entry means, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine CC1 includes a variable means that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the specific ball entering means and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and the variable means. variable control means for varying the state from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; A first opening in which the means is varied to the open state, and a second opening in which the variable means is varied to the open state during a period in which it is difficult for the first number of balls to enter the ball. A gaming machine CC2 characterized in that it is a gaming machine CC2.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CC1, it is possible to switch between a state in which it is possible to enter the first number or more balls and a state in which it is difficult to enter, so that the number of game balls that enter the specific ball entering means can be changed. The effect is that the number can be controlled.

The gaming machine CC2 is characterized in that the variable means also controls entry of game balls into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means when the variable means is in the open state. Game machine CC3.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CC2, when the variable means is in the open state, the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means is regulated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is difficult to understand because the game ball entering the specific ball entering means and the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means occur at the same time. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristic CD group> (Advanced development control when the pattern stops)
A discriminating means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination; a display control means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means and then stopping display; and a display control means for indicating a specific discrimination result by the display control means. In the gaming machine, the display control means dynamically displays a plurality of display modes as the identification information. a plurality of display modes are stopped and displayed at different timings, and an audio control means is capable of outputting a sound based on the display mode being stopped and displayed by the display control means; A voice information determining means that determines the voice information outputted by the voice output means from a plurality of voice information, and a regulating means capable of regulating the type of voice information determined by the voice information determining means. A gaming machine CD1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. When announcing the lottery results, a system has been proposed in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery results are announced based on the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013 -090780). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to add sharpness to the presentation of lottery results by outputting a sound effect when a plurality of fluctuating symbol rows are stopped and displayed. . However, there was a problem in that the repetition of monotonous sound effects made the game monotonous, leading to players getting bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which a player can prevent a player from getting tired of the game early by suppressing repeated output of monotonous sound effects in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine CD1, by regulating the type of audio information determined by the audio information determining means, it is possible to easily determine the type of audio information as intended at the time of design, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

The gaming machine CD1 has a storage means capable of storing the audio information determined by the audio information determining means as historical information, and the regulating means stores the audio information determined by the audio information determining means in accordance with the historical information stored in the storage means. A game machine CD2 characterized in that the type of the audio information determined by the audio information determining means is regulated.

According to the gaming machine CD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CD1, the determined voice information is stored in the storage means as history information, and the voice determined by the voice information determining means in accordance with the stored history information. By regulating the type of information, it is possible to control the audio information determined in accordance with the history information, and there is an effect that the type of audio information to be determined can be made suitable.

In the gaming machine CD2, the regulating means regulates that the same type as the type of the audio information stored a predetermined number of times ago is determined.

According to the gaming machine CD3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CD2, it is possible to prevent the same type of audio information from being determined in succession, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous.

A gaming machine CD4, characterized in that in the gaming machine CD1 or CD2, the regulating means regulates that the type of the audio information determined a specified number of times or more in a predetermined period is determined.

According to the game machine CD4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine CD1 or CD2, it is possible to suppress the problem that the type of the same audio information is excessively determined in a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, the performance executed by the performance execution means includes a symbol performance in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed, and the first performance is the performance executed by the performance execution means. A game machine CD5 characterized in that one of the identification symbols among the symbols is a display that is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine CD5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4, various sounds are output when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the performance when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is varied. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game early.

In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD5, a determining means capable of making a determination, and a benefit granting means capable of granting an advantageous benefit to a player based on the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result. , wherein the audio information determining means is capable of determining the audio information based on a determination result by the determining means.

According to the game machine CD6, in addition to the effects played by any of the game machines CD1 to CD5, it is possible to identify the determination result by the sound output corresponding to the first effect, so the output sound This has the effect of making the players interested in the types and allowing them to play the game.

The gaming machine CD6 includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, and an information storage means in which information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the determination means is configured to read the information stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine has a preliminary determination means that executes a preliminary determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means; A gaming machine CD7, wherein the audio information determining means is configured to be able to determine the audio information based on a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means.

According to the gaming machine CD7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CD6, the result of the preliminary determination can be identified based on the type of outputted audio, so it is possible to create interest in the type of outputted audio. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristic CE group> (pixel number switching control depending on display content)
Display information determining means for determining the display information of the display mode to be displayed by the display means from a plurality of display information, and the amount of data in at least two or more of the display information determined by the display information determining means. comprising: a data amount determining means for determining corresponding information; and a variable control means for varying and controlling a display mode displayed on the display means based on a determination result determined by the data amount determining means; The gaming machine CE1 is characterized in that the display information determining means determines the display information at at least two or more timings.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As an effect for notifying lottery results, a display device configured to display various images and videos has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the preview display mode is displayed randomly, there is a problem in that the amount of image data to be displayed becomes excessive, and the burden on display control and the like increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the control load can be reduced in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine CE1, the display mode displayed is variably controlled based on the result determined by the data amount determining means, so display control can be performed in accordance with the data amount, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to reduce

In the gaming machine CE1, the data amount determining means determines whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the total value of the information corresponding to the data amount of the display mode displayed in a predetermined first period. The gaming machine CE2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine CE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CE1, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the total amount of data of the display mode displayed in the predetermined first period. The problem of increased control load can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, a determination means capable of making a determination, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination result of the determination means, and when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, a benefit granting means for granting benefits advantageous to the player, and the display information determining means determines a display mode displayed in the performance executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine CE3.

According to the gaming machine CE3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance notified by the determination result cannot be executed stably due to an increase in the amount of data.

In any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the display mode displayed by the display mode determining means is one in which status information corresponding to the data amount is set as information corresponding to the data amount, and The gaming machine CE4 is characterized in that the data amount determining means determines whether the total value obtained by adding the status information is greater than or equal to a predetermined value.

According to the gaming machine CE4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the status information corresponding to the amount of data is set, so that the amount of data can be easily determined. be.

In any of gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the variable control means corresponds to the display information determined by the display information determining means so that the total amount of data of the display mode displayed on the display means decreases. A gaming machine CE5 is characterized in that the display mode of the gaming machine CE5 is variable.

According to the gaming machine CE5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, the amount of data is suppressed, so there is an effect that the control load can be reduced. In the gaming machine CE5, the variable control means sets a display mode in which the number of pixels of the display mode corresponding to at least one of the display information determined by the display information determination means is reduced. Game machine CE6.

According to the gaming machine CE6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine CE5, the amount of data can be suppressed by setting a small number of pixels in the existing display mode, and the problem of excessive display data can be suppressed. There is.

<Characteristic CF group> (Production variable depending on button press timing)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. , dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the display means displaying the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result. In the gaming machine, the game machine has a benefit granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when An operation dynamic display mode is set in which a display mode is changed by operating the operation means, and a valid period setting means sets a valid period during which an operation on the operating means is valid; A gaming machine CF1 characterized in that it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the remaining period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, since the timing and period of operation of the operating means are not constant depending on the player, there is a problem in that the interest in performing the performance is reduced. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine CF1, when the operation means is operated, a specific effect can be executed based on the remaining period of the validity period, so that a wide range of games can be played by setting the validity period long. Even if the player is configured to be able to operate the operating means, a specific performance is performed based on the remaining period of the validity period, making it possible to perform a variety of performances and increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving.

In the gaming machine CF1, a suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode suggesting that the operating means be operated a plurality of times within the validity period set by the validity period setting means; and a suggestion mode setting means set by the suggestion mode setting means. a performance period setting means for setting a predetermined performance period within the validity period for the suggestion mode corresponding to the operation in step 1, and a remaining period of the performance period set by the performance period setting means; A gaming machine CF2 characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a remaining period mode indicating a remaining period.

According to the gaming machine CF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CF1, it is possible to make the player think that a validity period is set for each of multiple operations, so it is possible to This has the effect of being able to notify you of what will be done in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, the identification information is configured by combining a plurality of identification symbols, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays each of the plurality of identification symbols to show the determination result. The plurality of identification symbols are stopped in combination, and the operation dynamic display mode is displayed in a specific manner by operating the operating means on at least some of the plurality of identification symbols. When the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect after the dynamically displayed identification information. The gaming machine CF3 is characterized in that it executes an effect corresponding to information reflected during the dynamic display of the identification information when the dynamic display is started.

According to the gaming machine CF3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CF1 or CF2, by operating the operating means so that the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the effect will also be reflected during the dynamic display after the dynamic display in the relevant one. By executing the presentation, there is an effect that the user can be motivated to operate the operating means in a short period of time.

<Characteristic CG group> (operated 3 times)
It has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation performance setting means that can set an operation performance whose performance mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means, and the operation performance setting means can set the operation performance. A plurality of operation effects are set in the operation effects that can be performed, in which the performance mode is varied in accordance with the number of operations of the operation means, and when the plurality of operation effects are set, the plurality of operation effects are set. A gaming machine CG1 characterized in that a number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations set in the operation performance are displayed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for notifying lottery results, a system has been proposed in which the player can directly participate in the game by changing the performance by operating an operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there is a problem in that the interest is reduced when performing the performance based on the operation of the operating means. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the game machine CG1, when a multi-operation performance is set, the number of suggestion modes corresponding to the number of operations is displayed, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game and improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine CG1, when the multi-operation performance is set, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid; and a valid period within the valid period set by the valid period setting means. , a variable display means for setting a variable display mode that is variably displayed for each of the suggestion modes in response to a decrease in the validity period.

According to the gaming machine CG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CG1, the variable display mode makes it seem as if each suggestion mode has a valid period, and the timing for each operation can be displayed variably. This has the effect that the operation can be performed according to the mode, and the timing at which the operation effects are displayed can be made appropriate.

A gaming machine CG3 in the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, wherein the multiple operation presentation is a preset operation presentation that is executed according to the number of times the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine CG3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, there is no need to individually set multiple operation effects, and there is an effect that control for multiple operations can be easily performed.

<Characteristic CH group> (Cosmo Up)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored by the storage means; and a determination means thereof. a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the display means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and specific information based on the specific performance executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine CH1 characterized in that it has a specific information storage means to be stored, and a special performance determining means for determining a special performance based on the specific information stored in the specific storage means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. As a performance for announcing the lottery results, it has been proposed that a preview performance that hints at the lottery results in advance is executed before the lottery results are announced (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780 ). However, there was a need for further improvement in interest. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine CH1, the special performance is determined based on the specific information stored when a specific performance is executed, so that the performance to be executed thereafter can be changed by executing the specific performance. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by providing different games to each player.

In the gaming machine CH1, based on the suggestion means for suggesting a suggestion mode corresponding to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and the special effect determined by the special effect determining means being executed. and a suggestion mode changing means for changing the suggestion mode, and configured such that when the suggestion mode is a predetermined mode, a residual display period of the identification information is a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine CH2 is characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine CH2, it can be determined based on the suggestion mode that it is not the timing to display the identification information in a mode for indicating the determination result, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the determination result.

The gaming machine CH1 or CH2 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the performance determined by the special performance determining means is composed of an operation performance whose performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. A gaming machine CH3 characterized in that the number of times the operation performance is executed is set in accordance with the specific information stored in the specific information storage means.

According to the gaming machine CH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CH1 or CH2, the number of times the operation performance is executed is set based on the stored specific information, so the number of times the player can operate the operating means is set. This has the effect of suppressing problems that result in misunderstandings.

<Characteristic CI group> (pseudo light guide plate effect)
In a gaming machine having a display means and a display control means capable of displaying a second display mode different from the first display mode from a first display mode, the second display mode is different from the first display mode. In contrast, the display mode is configured such that the focal position is varied, and the display control means is configured to be able to display the first display mode and the second display mode in an overlapping manner. The gaming machine CI1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. After the symbols for indicating the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner on the display means, the combination of symbols indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and during the variable display, a preview effect indicating the lottery result, etc. is performed. Some methods have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such game machines, a game machine has been proposed in which driving objects and light emitting devices such as LEDs are placed on the game board and operated in conjunction with the display mode to further improve the interest of the game. With such a configuration, the cost of the gaming machine becomes excessive, and there is a need for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game while reducing the cost. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine CI1, the display mode in which the focal position is variable is displayed in an overlapping manner, so that it can be seen to the player as a display mode with a sense of perspective, and this has the effect of improving the interest of the game. .

In the gaming machine CI1, the second display mode includes a mode in which the display object displayed in the first display mode is out of focus.

According to the gaming machine CI2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CI1, it also includes a mode in which the displayed object is out of focus, so that by overlapping the first display mode and the second display mode, the This has the effect of providing a sense of perspective.

In the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the display control means sets a first state in which, after displaying the first display mode for a first period, the second display mode is displayed a plurality of times in front of the first display mode. A gaming machine CI3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to repeatedly display a second state in which it is hidden and a second state in which it is hidden.

According to the gaming machine CI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CI1 or CI2, the second display mode is repeatedly displayed and non-displayed in front of the first display mode, so that afterimages and the first display mode are reduced. This combination has the effect of making it seem as if the first display mode is protruding more toward the front side.

<Characteristic CJ group> (control of production using pending information and internal information)
an acquisition means capable of acquiring information; a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a determination means therefor. a display means for displaying identification information to show the discrimination result by the display means; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; a state setting means capable of setting at least one of a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state; and the storing means before the determination is performed by the determining means. In a gaming machine, the game machine has a prior determination means capable of performing a prior determination based on the information stored in the game machine, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and a performance mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means. and a group switching means for switching the performance mode group selected by the performance selection means. A game machine CJ1, wherein the group switching means determines the type of the performance mode group based on the determination result of the advance determination means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win and a game state in which it is difficult to win in the lottery, and games with different expectations of winning are provided to the player according to the set game state. something is proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). In such gaming machines, by executing effects that make it difficult for players to understand the currently set gaming state, it is possible to play the game while making the player expect that an advantageous gaming state has been set. In this case, even if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the player may think that a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and the player may not be able to play the game. There was a problem of decreased motivation. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing a performance that can appropriately suggest the set game state in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine CJ1, the performance mode group is switched based on the determination result of the advance discrimination means, and the performance is executed by the performance execution means based on the switched performance mode group. This makes it possible to predict future gaming situations. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CJ1, the performance executed by the performance execution means includes a suggestive performance suggesting that the two game states are set, and the group switching means The system determines whether the second gaming state can be switched to the first gaming state through the preliminary determination, and determines the performance mode group from which the suggested performance corresponding to the determination result can be selected. The gaming machine CJ2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine CJ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CJ1, based on a group of production modes corresponding to the fact that the advance determination means has determined that the gaming state is switched from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. Since the performance can be executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to predict the currently set game state or the game state that may be set later based on the performance mode of the performance to be executed. . Furthermore, since the performance mode group is switched based on the advance determination information that the gaming state will actually shift, highly reliable performance can be performed for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance being performed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means switches to and sets the first gaming state when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific determination result is started. Machine CJ3.

According to the gaming machine CJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CJ1 or CJ2, the state setting means sets switching from the second gaming state to the first gaming state at the start of dynamic display of the identification information. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand the state switching timing.

a period of time until at least a predetermined number of determination results are displayed based on the identification information for indicating the determination results based on the second gaming state being set in any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3; An advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player, and the suggestion mode is a gaming state set by the state setting means at the time when the period until the predetermined number of determinations is displayed has elapsed. A gaming machine CJ4 characterized in that it suggests.

According to the gaming machine CJ4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ3, the suggestion form is displayed based on the elapsed status of the set advantageous period, so the suggestion is displayed immediately after the advantageous period is set. Display of the aspect can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from quickly decreasing and to improve the interest in the game.

<Characteristic CK group> (meter sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation performance execution means that can execute an operation performance based on operating the operation means, the operation performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a specific operation effect when the operating means is operated, and the specific operation effect corresponds to a period during which the operation means was operated when the operation means was operated during the specific period. A gaming machine CK1 is characterized in that it is configured to execute different aspects.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is announced, it is possible to execute an operation performance that allows the player to operate the operation means as a suggestion performance to suggest the lottery result, and the period until the lottery result is announced is made possible. There was something to entertain the players. Moreover, among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there are machines that allow the player to operate the operating means in order to further enhance the performance effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a gaming machine, the same operation effect is executed no matter what timing the operating means is operated, so there is a problem in that the effect of the effect is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game with improved interest in the game machine described above.

According to the gaming machine CK1, when the operating means is operated, a specific operation performance can be executed in a different manner corresponding to the period of operation, so that the specific operation performed when the operating means is operated. This has the effect of increasing the variety of presentations and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CK1, the specific operation performance includes at least a display performance whose display mode is changed in stages according to the period in which the operating means is operated, and a sound performance corresponding to the changed display performance. A gaming machine CK2 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine CK2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine CK1, a display performance in which the display mode is changed in stages as a specific operation performance and an audio performance corresponding to the changed display performance are executed. This has the effect of increasing the performance effect.

In the gaming machine CK2, the audio performance is such that when the operating means is operated, a playback process is executed in which playback of the corresponding audio data is started, and the audio performance is a playback process in which playback of the corresponding audio data is started when the operation means is operated. The reproduction is continued for a predetermined reproduction period, or the reproduction of the audio data is stopped or the audio is stopped if the operation means performs a predetermined operation before the reproduction period is continued. The gaming machine CK3 is characterized in that a process is executed in which the output of the game machine CK3 is stopped.

According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CK2, the audio performance in which audio data is played is stopped when the operating means is operated in a predetermined manner. This has the effect that it is possible to execute a performance that gives a sense of unity, and that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CK3, after the process of stopping the reproduction of the audio data or the output of the audio is executed, the reproduction is stopped or the output of the audio is stopped based on the operation of the operating means. The gaming machine CK4 is characterized in that the playback is started or the audio output is executed from the position where the sound was previously played.

According to the gaming machine CK4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CK3, it is possible to restart the playback of audio data that has been stopped based on the operation of the operating means, so that the display effect and the audio effect create a sense of unity. This has the effect that it is possible to execute a performance with a certain level of character, and that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic CL group> (Variable straddle voice control)
A discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and A dynamic display period determining means that is dynamically displayed by a dynamic display means, and a privilege that allows a player to execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine comprising: a display effect executing means capable of executing a display effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and a display effect executing means capable of executing a display effect during a period in which the display effect is executed by the display effect executing means. audio performance execution means capable of executing an audio performance; The audio performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a specific display performance to be executed, and the audio performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a specific audio performance corresponding to a period in which the specific display performance is executed. When executed, the reproduction of the specific audio effect is stopped based on the identification information being stopped and displayed, and the reproduction is restarted in response to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine CL1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given an advantage. There was a bonus game that was executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be able to execute a specific performance during a specific period until a predetermined number of winning lots are executed, and the performances differ depending on the period in which the winning lottery is executed. There are some that enhance the performance effect by providing players with the following information: However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, there are cases where the winning lottery is executed without interruption during a specific period, and cases where the winning lottery is interrupted during the specific period. There has been a problem in that it is not possible to create a sense of unity with the performance that is performed, and it is not possible to enhance the performance effect. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which can improve interest by enhancing presentation effects.

According to the gaming machine CL1, the specific audio performance executed during the period in which the specific display performance is executed is stopped based on the identification information being stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Since the performance is restarted based on the specific display performance and the specific audio performance, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the specific display performance and the specific audio performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine CL2 in the gaming machine CL1, wherein the audio performance execution means is configured to output a special audio when stopping the reproduction of the specific audio performance. According to the game machine CL2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine CL1, a special sound is output when stopping a specific sound effect, so that after the identification information is stopped and displayed, the next dynamic display of the identification information is started. When the period until the start is short, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the specific audio performance is interrupted, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

It is preferable that the special sound output by the sound effect execution means is a sound that continues to be output at least until a predetermined period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily make the player think that the specific audio performance is being continuously executed across multiple dynamic displays of the identification information.

In the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, the gaming machine CL3 is characterized in that the specific display performance is a performance set in advance that corresponds to the end of a dynamic display period of one identification information.

According to the gaming machine CL3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CL1 or CL2, an effect corresponding to the end of the dynamic display period of identification information 1 is preset as a specific display effect. This has the effect that a performance corresponding to the end can be reliably executed and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display performance execution means displays the specific display performance based on the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped during the period in which the specific display performance is executed. A gaming machine CL4 characterized in that it is an interrupting machine.

According to the gaming machine CL4, in addition to any of the effects produced by the gaming machines CL1 to CL3, the display of the specific display effect can be interrupted based on the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped. It is possible to perform a performance with a sense of unity between the performance and the specific sound performance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in playing by making it possible for the player to play a plurality of games that have different degrees of advantage, and by having the player play games with the aim of winning in various games. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical concept 1 includes a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and an acquisition means which can obtain information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means. a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a determination made by the determination means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result on a display means; and when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of making a determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means. and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means, and the performance execution means is configured to perform a performance based on a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. The present invention is configured to be able to perform an effect based on the determination result by the article pre-discrimination means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means which can acquire information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquisition means. a storage means capable of storing information acquired by the means; a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means; and a display of a discrimination result by the discrimination means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information on the display means, and when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner to indicate the specific determination result, it is advantageous to the player. a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game where and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means, and the performance execution means is configured to perform a performance based on a plurality of pieces of information stored in the storage means. The system is configured to be able to perform effects based on the determination results obtained by the above.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)

Claims (1)

a firing means capable of firing a game ball into a game area;
a first ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising: a determining means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied;
Means capable of generating a specific gaming state based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result;
a second ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means is different from the first ball entry means;
A first position where it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means than at the first position. and a displacement means capable of displacing the
a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position. displacement control; and displacement control means capable of at least
The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on a first condition that can be satisfied in the specific gaming state, and the first displacement control positions the displacement means at the first position. configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where
The gaming machine is
It is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entry means,
A first mode based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that at least the following can occur.

Images